[Title 29 CFR 1910]
[Code of Federal Regulations (annual edition) - July 1, 2002 Edition]
[Title 29 - LABOR]
[Subtitle B - Regulations Relating to Labor (Continued)]
[Chapter Xvii - OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION, DEPARTMENT]
[Part 1910 - OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS]
[From the U.S. Government Printing Office]
29LABOR52002-07-012002-07-01falseOCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS1910PART 1910LABORRegulations Relating to Labor (Continued)OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION, DEPARTMENT
PART 1910--OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS--Table of Contents
Subpart A--General
Sec.
1910.1 Purpose and scope.
1910.2 Definitions.
1910.3 Petitions for the issuance, amendment, or repeal of a standard.
1910.4 Amendments to this part.
1910.5 Applicability of standards.
1910.6 Incorporation by reference.
1910.7 Definition and requirements for a nationally recognized testing
laboratory.
1910.8 OMB control numbers under the Paperwork Reduction Act.
Subpart B--Adoption and Extension of Established Federal Standards
1910.11 Scope and purpose.
[[Page 89]]
1910.12 Construction work.
1910.15 Shipyard employment.
1910.16 Longshoring and marine terminals.
1910.17 Effective dates.
1910.18 Changes in established Federal standards.
1910.19 Special provisions for air contaminants.
Subpart C [Reserved]
Subpart D--Walking-Working Surfaces
1910.21 Definitions.
1910.22 General requirements.
1910.23 Guarding floor and wall openings and holes.
1910.24 Fixed industrial stairs.
1910.25 Portable wood ladders.
1910.26 Portable metal ladders.
1910.27 Fixed ladders.
1910.28 Safety requirements for scaffolding.
1910.29 Manually propelled mobile ladder stands and scaffolds (towers).
1910.30 Other working surfaces.
Subpart E--Means of Egress
1910.35 Definitions.
1910.36 General requirements.
1910.37 Means of egress, general.
1910.38 Employee emergency plans and fire prevention plans.
Appendix to Subpart E to Part 1910--Means of Egress
Subpart F--Powered Platforms, Manlifts, and Vehicle-Mounted Work
Platforms
1910.66 Powered platforms for building maintenance.
1910.67 Vehicle-mounted elevating and rotating work platforms.
1910.68 Manlifts.
Subpart G--Occupational Health and Environmental Control
1910.94 Ventilation.
1910.95 Occupational noise exposure.
1910.97 Nonionizing radiation.
1910.98 Effective dates.
Subpart H--Hazardous Materials
1910.101 Compressed gases (general requirements).
1910.102 Acetylene.
1910.103 Hydrogen.
1910.104 Oxygen.
1910.105 Nitrous oxide.
1910.106 Flammable and combustible liquids.
1910.107 Spray finishing using flammable and combustible materials.
1910.108 [Reserved]
1910.109 Explosives and blasting agents.
1910.110 Storage and handling of liquified petroleum gases.
1910.111 Storage and handling of anhydrous ammonia.
1910.112-1910.113 [Reserved]
1910.119 Process safety management of highly hazardous chemicals.
1910.120 Hazardous waste operations and emergency response.
1910.121 [Reserved]
Dipping and Coating Operations
1910.122 Table of contents.
1910.123 Dipping and coating operations: Coverage and definitions.
1910.124 General requirements for dipping and coating operations.
1910.125 Additional requirements for dipping and coating operations
that use flammable or combustible liquids.
1910.126 Additional requirements for special dipping and coating
operations.
Subpart I--Personal Protective Equipment
1910.132 General requirements.
1910.133 Eye and face protection.
1910.134 Respiratory protection.
1910.135 Head protection.
1910.136 Foot protection.
1910.137 Electrical protective equipment.
1910.138 Hand protection.
1910.139 Respiratory protection for M. tuberculosis.
Appendix A to Subpart I to Part 1910--References for Further Information
(Non-mandatory)
Appendix B to Subpart I to Part 1910--Non-mandatory Compliance
Guidelines for Hazard Assessment and Personal Protective
Equipment Selection
Subpart J--General Environmental Controls
1910.141 Sanitation.
1910.142 Temporary labor camps.
1910.143 Nonwater carriage disposal systems. [Reserved]
1910.144 Safety color code for marking physical hazards.
1910.145 Specifications for accident prevention signs and tags.
1910.146 Permit-required confined spaces.
1910.147 The control of hazardous energy (lockout/tagout).
Subpart K--Medical and First Aid
1910.151 Medical services and first aid.
1910.152 [Reserved]
Subpart L--Fire Protection
1910.155 Scope, application and definitions applicable to this subpart.
1910.156 Fire brigades.
[[Page 90]]
Portable Fire Suppression Equipment
1910.157 Portable fire extinguishers.
1910.158 Standpipe and hose systems.
Fixed Fire Suppression Equipment
1910.159 Automatic sprinkler systems.
1910.160 Fixed extinguishing systems, general.
1910.161 Fixed extinguishing systems, dry chemical.
1910.162 Fixed extinguishing systems, gaseous agent.
1910.163 Fixed extinguishing systems, water spray and foam.
Other Fire Protection Systems
1910.164 Fire detection systems.
1910.165 Employee alarm systems.
Appendix A to Subpart L to Part 1910--Fire Protection
Appendix B to Subpart L to Part 1910--National Consensus Standards
Appendix C to Subpart L to Part 1910--Fire Protection References For
Further Information
Appendix D to Subpart L to Part 1910--Availability of Publications
Incorporated by Reference in Section 1910.156 Fire Brigades
Appendix E to Subpart L to Part 1910--Test Methods for Protective
Clothing
Subpart M--Compressed Gas and Compressed Air Equipment
1910.166-1910.168 [Reserved]
1910.169 Air receivers.
Subpart N--Materials Handling and Storage
1910.176 Handling materials--general.
1910.177 Servicing multi-piece and single piece rim wheels.
1910.178 Powered industrial trucks.
1910.179 Overhead and gantry cranes.
1910.180 Crawler locomotive and truck cranes.
1910.181 Derricks.
1910.183 Helicopters.
1910.184 Slings.
Subpart O--Machinery and Machine Guarding
1910.211 Definitions.
1910.212 General requirements for all machines.
1910.213 Woodworking machinery requirements.
1910.214 Cooperage machinery. [Reserved]
1910.215 Abrasive wheel machinery.
1910.216 Mills and calenders in the rubber and plastics industries.
1910.217 Mechanical power presses.
1910.218 Forging machines.
1910.219 Mechanical power-transmission apparatus.
Subpart P--Hand and Portable Powered Tools and Other Hand-Held Equipment
1910.241 Definitions.
1910.242 Hand and portable powered tools and equipment, general.
1910.243 Guarding of portable powered tools.
1910.244 Other portable tools and equipment.
Subpart Q--Welding, Cutting and Brazing
1910.251 Definitions.
1910.252 General requirements.
1910.253 Oxygen-fuel gas welding and cutting.
1910.254 Arc welding and cutting.
1910.255 Resistance welding.
Subpart R--Special Industries
1910.261 Pulp, paper, and paperboard mills.
1910.262 Textiles.
1910.263 Bakery equipment.
1910.264 Laundry machinery and operations.
1910.265 Sawmills.
1910.266 Logging operations.
1910.268 Telecommunications.
1910.269 Electric power generation, transmission, and distribution.
1910.272 Grain handling facilities.
Subpart S--Electrical
General
1910.301 Introduction.
Design Safety Standards for Electrical Systems
1910.302 Electric utilization systems.
1910.303 General requirements.
1910.304 Wiring design and protection.
1910.305 Wiring methods, components, and equipment for general use.
1910.306 Specific purpose equipment and installations.
1910.307 Hazardous (classified) locations.
1910.308 Special systems.
1910.309-1910.330 [Reserved]
Safety-Related Work Practices
1910.331 Scope.
1910.332 Training.
1910.333 Selection and use of work practices.
1910.334 Use of equipment.
1910.335 Safeguards for personnel protection.
1910.336-1910.360 [Reserved]
Safety-Related Maintenance Requirements
1910.361-1910.380 [Reserved]
[[Page 91]]
Safety Requirements for Special Equipment
1910.381-1910.398 [Reserved]
Definitions
1910.399 Definitions applicable to this subpart.
Appendix A to Subpart S to Part 1910--Reference Documents
Appendix B to Subpart S to Part 1910--Explanatory Data [Reserved]
Appendix C to Subpart S to Part 1910--Tables, Notes, and Charts
[Reserved]
Subpart T--Commercial Diving Operations
General
1910.401 Scope and application.
1910.402 Definitions.
Personnel Requirements
1910.410 Qualifications of dive team.
General Operations Procedures
1910.420 Safe practices manual.
1910.421 Pre-dive procedures.
1910.422 Procedures during dive.
1910.423 Post-dive procedures.
Specific Operations Procedures
1910.424 SCUBA diving.
1910.425 Surface-supplied air diving.
1910.426 Mixed-gas diving.
1910.427 Liveboating.
Equipment Procedures and Requirements
1910.430 Equipment.
Recordkeeping
1910.440 Recordkeeping requirements.
1910.441 Effective date.
Appendix A to Subpart T to Part 1910--Examples of Conditions Which May
Restrict or Limit Exposure to Hyperbaric Conditions
Appendix B to Subpart T to Part 1910--Guidelines for Scientific Diving
Subparts U-Y [Reserved]
1910.901-1910.999 [Reserved]
Source: 39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, unless otherwise noted.
Subpart A--General
Authority: Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order Numbers 12-71 (36
FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), or
6-96 (62 FR 111), as applicable.
Sections 1910.7 and 1910.8 also issued under 29 CFR Part 1911.
Section 1910.7(f) also issued under 31 U.S.C. 9701, 29 U.S.C. 9a, 5
U.S.C. 553; Pub. L. 106-113 (113 Stat. 1501A-222); and OMB Circular A-25
(dated July 8, 1993) (58 FR 38142, July 15, 1993).
Sec. 1910.1 Purpose and scope.
(a) Section 6(a) of the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970 (84 Stat. 1593) provides that ``without regard to
chapter 5 of title 5, United States Code, or to the other subsections of
this section, the Secretary shall, as soon as practicable during the
period beginning with the effective date of this Act and ending 2 years
after such date, by rule promulgate as an occupational safety or health
standard any national consensus standard, and any established Federal
standard, unless he determines that the promulgation of such a standard
would not result in improved safety or health for specifically
designated employees.'' The legislative purpose of this provision is to
establish, as rapidly as possible and without regard to the rule-making
provisions of the Administrative Procedure Act, standards with which
industries are generally familiar, and on whose adoption interested and
affected persons have already had an opportunity to express their views.
Such standards are either (1) national concensus standards on whose
adoption affected persons have reached substantial agreement, or (2)
Federal standards already established by Federal statutes or
regulations.
(b) This part carries out the directive to the Secretary of Labor
under section 6(a) of the Act. It contains occupational safety and
health standards which have been found to be national consensus
standards or established Federal standards.
Sec. 1910.2 Definitions.
As used in this part, unless the context clearly requires otherwise:
(a) Act means the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health
Act of 1970 (84 Stat. 1590).
(b) Assistant Secretary of Labor means the Assistant Secretary of
Labor for Occupational Safety and Health;
(c) Employer means a person engaged in a business affecting commerce
who has employees, but does not include
[[Page 92]]
the United States or any State or political subdivision of a State;
(d) Employee means an employee of an employer who is employed in a
business of his employer which affects commerce;
(e) Commerce means trade, traffic, commerce, transportation, or
communication among the several States, or between a State and any place
outside thereof, or within the District of Columbia, or a possession of
the United States (other than the Trust Territory of the Pacific
Islands), or between points in the same State but through a point
outside thereof;
(f) Standard means a standard which requires conditions, or the
adoption or use of one or more practices, means, methods, operations, or
processes, reasonably necessary or appropriate to provide safe or
healthful employment and places of employment;
(g) National consensus standard means any standard or modification
thereof which (1) has been adopted and promulgated by a nationally
recognized standards-producing organization under procedures whereby it
can be determined by the Secretary of Labor or by the Assistant
Secretary of Labor that persons interested and affected by the scope or
provisions of the standard have reached substantial agreement on its
adoption, (2) was formulated in a manner which afforded an opportunity
for diverse views to be considered, and (3) has been designated as such
a standard by the Secretary or the Assistant Secretary, after
consultation with other appropriate Federal agencies; and
(h) Established Federal standard means any operative standard
established by any agency of the United States and in effect on April
28, 1971, or contained in any Act of Congress in force on the date of
enactment of the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act.
Sec. 1910.3 Petitions for the issuance, amendment, or repeal of a standard.
(a) Any interested person may petition in writing the Assistant
Secretary of Labor to promulgate, modify, or revoke a standard. The
petition should set forth the terms or the substance of the rule
desired, the effects thereof if promulgated, and the reasons therefor.
(b)(1) The relevant legislative history of the Act indicates
congressional recognition of the American National Standards Institute
and the National Fire Protection Association as the major sources of
national consensus standards. National consensus standards adopted on
May 29, 1971, pursuant to section 6(a) of the Act are from those two
sources. However, any organization which deems itself a producer of
national consensus standards, within the meaning of section 3(9) of the
Act, is invited to submit in writing to the Assistant Secretary of Labor
at any time prior to February 1, 1973, all relevant information which
may enable the Assistant Secretary to determine whether any of its
standards satisfy the requirements of the definition of ``national
consensus standard'' in section 3(9) of the Act.
(2) Within a reasonable time after the receipt of a submission
pursuant to paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the Assistant Secretary of
Labor shall publish or cause to be published in the Federal Register a
notice of such submission, and shall afford interested persons a
reasonable opportunity to present written data, views, or arguments with
regard to the question whether any standards of the organization making
the submission are national consensus standards.
Sec. 1910.4 Amendments to this part.
(a) The Assistant Secretary of Labor shall have all of the authority
of the Secretary of Labor under sections 3(9) and 6(a) of the Act.
(b) The Assistant Secretary of Labor may at any time before April
28, 1973, on his own motion or upon the written petition of any person,
by rule promulgate as a standard any national consensus standard and any
established Federal standard, pursuant to and in accordance with section
6(a) of the Act, and, in addition, may modify or revoke any standard in
this part 1910. In the event of conflict among any such standards, the
Assistant Secretary of Labor shall take the action necessary to
eliminate the conflict, including the revocation or modification of a
standard in this part, so as to assure the
[[Page 93]]
greatest protection of the safety or health of the affected employees.
Sec. 1910.5 Applicability of standards.
(a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, the
standards contained in this part shall apply with respect to employments
performed in a workplace in a State, the District of Columbia, the
Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, Guam,
Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, Wake Island, Outer Continental
Shelf lands defined in the Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act, Johnston
Island, and the Canal Zone.
(b) None of the standards in this part shall apply to working
conditions of employees with respect to which Federal agencies other
than the Department of Labor, or State agencies acting under section 274
of the Atomic Energy Act of 1954, as amended (42 U.S.C. 2021), exercise
statutory authority to prescribe or enforce standards or regulations
affecting occupational safety or health.
(c)(1) If a particular standard is specifically applicable to a
condition, practice, means, method, operation, or process, it shall
prevail over any different general standard which might otherwise be
applicable to the same condition, practice, means, method, operation, or
process. For example, Sec. 1915.23(c)(3) of this title prescribes
personal protective equipment for certain ship repairmen working in
specified areas. Such a standard shall apply, and shall not be deemed
modified nor superseded by any different general standard whose
provisions might otherwise be applicable, to the ship repairmen working
in the areas specified in Sec. 1915.23(c)(3).
(2) On the other hand, any standard shall apply according to its
terms to any employment and place of employment in any industry, even
though particular standards are also prescribed for the industry, as in
subpart B or subpart R of this part, to the extent that none of such
particular standards applies. To illustrate, the general standard
regarding noise exposure in Sec. 1910.95 applies to employments and
places of employment in pulp, paper, and paperboard mills covered by
Sec. 1910.261.
(d) In the event a standard protects on its face a class of persons
larger than employees, the standard shall be applicable under this part
only to employees and their employment and places of employment.
(e) [Reserved]
(f) An employer who is in compliance with any standard in this part
shall be deemed to be in compliance with the requirement of section
5(a)(1) of the Act, but only to the extent of the condition, practice,
means, method, operation, or process covered by the standard.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 58 FR 35308, June 30, 1993]
Sec. 1910.6 Incorporation by reference.
(a)(1) The standards of agencies of the U.S. Government, and
organizations which are not agencies of the U.S. Government which are
incorporated by reference in this part, have the same force and effect
as other standards in this part. Only the mandatory provisions (i.e.,
provisions containing the word ``shall'' or other mandatory language) of
standards incorporated by reference are adopted as standards under the
Occupational Safety and Health Act.
(2) Any changes in the standards incorporated by reference in this
part and an official historic file of such changes are available for
inspection at the national office of the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210.
(3) The materials listed in paragraphs (b) through (w) of this
section are incorporated by reference in the corresponding sections
noted as they exist on the date of the approval, and a notice of any
change in these materials will be published in the Federal Register.
These incorporations by reference were approved by the Director of the
Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51.
(4) Copies of the following standards that are issued by the
respective private standards organizations may be obtained from the
issuing organizations. The materials are available for purchase at the
corresponding addresses of the private standards organizations noted
below. In addition, all are
[[Page 94]]
available for inspection at the Office of the Federal Register, 800
North Capitol Street, NW., suite 700, Washington DC, and through the
OSHA Docket Office, room N2625, U.S. Department of Labor, 200
Constitution Ave., Washington, DC 20210, or any of its regional offices.
(b) The following material is available for purchase from the
American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), 1014
Broadway, Cincinnati OH 45202:
(1) ``Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended Practice''
(22nd ed., 1995), incorporation by reference (IBR) approved for
Sec. 1910.124(b)(4)(iii).
(2) Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices for 1986-
87 (1986), IBR approved for Sec. 1910.120, PEL definition.
(c) The following material is available for purchase from the
American Society of Agricultural Engineers (ASAE), 2950 Niles Road, Post
Office Box 229, St. Joseph, MI 49085:
(1) ASAE Emblem for Identifying Slow Moving Vehicles, ASAE S276.2
(1968), IBR approved for Sec. 1910.145(d)(10).
(2) [Reserved]
(d) The following material is available for purchase from the
Agriculture Ammonia Institute-Rubber Manufacturers (AAI-RMA)
Association, 1400 K St. NW, Washington DC 20005:
(1) AAI-RMA Specifications for Anhydrous Ammonia Hose, IBR approved
for Sec. 1910.111(b)(8)(i).
(2) [Reserved]
(e) The following material is available for purchase from the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 11 West 42nd St., New
York, NY 10036:
(1) ANSI A10.2-44 Safety Code for Building Construction, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.144(a)(1)(ii).
(2) ANSI A10.3-70 Safety Requirements for Explosive-Actuated
Fastening Tools, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.243(d)(1)(i).
(3) ANSI A11.1-65 (R 70) Practice for Industrial Lighting, IBR
approved for Secs. 1910.219(c)(5)(iii); 1910.261 (a)(3)(i), (c)(10), and
(k)(21); and 1910.265(c)(2).
(4) ANSI A11.1-65 Practice for Industrial Lighting, IBR approved for
Secs. 1910.262(c)(6) and 1910.265(d)(2)(i)(a).
(5) ANSI A12.1-67 Safety Requirements for Floor and Wall Openings,
Railings, and Toe Boards, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.66 appendix D,
(c)(4); 1910.68 (b)(4) and (b)(8)(ii); 1910.261 (a)(3)(ii), (b)(3),
(c)(3)(i), (c)(15)(ii), (e)(4), (g)(13), (h)(1), (h)(3)(vi), (j)(4) (ii)
and (iv), (j)(5)(i), (k)(6), (k)(13)(i), and (k)(15).
(6) ANSI A13.1-56 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems,
IBR approved for Secs. 1910.253(d)(4)(ii); 1910.261(a)(3)(iii);
1910.262(c)(7).
(7) ANSI A14.1-68 Safety Code for Portable Wood Ladders,
Supplemented by ANSI A14.1a-77, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.261
(a)(3)(iv) and (c)(3)(i).
(8) ANSI A14.2-56 Safety Code for Portable Metal Ladders,
Supplemented by ANSI A14.2a-77, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.261 (a)(3)(v)
and (c)(3)(i).
(9) ANSI A14.3-56 Safety Code for Fixed Ladders, IBR approved for
Secs. 1910.68(b) (4) and (12); 1910.179(c)(2); and 1910.261 (a)(3)(vi)
and (c)(3)(i).
(10) ANSI A17.1-65 Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters and Moving
Walks, Including Supplements, A17.1a (1967); A17.1b (1968); A17.1c
(1969); A17.1d (1970), IBR approved for Sec. 1910.261 (a)(3)(vii),
(g)(11)(i), and (l)(4).
(11) ANSI A17.2-60 Practice for the Inspection of Elevators,
Including Supplements, A17.2a (1965), A17.2b (1967), IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.261(a)(3)(viii).
(12) ANSI A90.1-69 Safety Standard for Manlifts, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.68(b)(3).
(13) ANSI A92.2-69 Standard for Vehicle Mounted Elevating and
Rotating Work Platforms, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.67 (b)(1), (2),
(c)(3), and (4) and 1910.268(s)(1)(v).
(14) ANSI A120.1-70 Safety Code for Powered Platforms for Exterior
Building Maintenance, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.66 app. D (b) through
(d).
(15) ANSI B7.1-70 Safety Code for the Use, Care and Protection of
Abrasive Wheels, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.94(b)(5)(i)(a);
1910.215(b)(12); and 1910.218(j)(5).
(16) ANSI B15.1-53 (R 58) Safety Code for Mechanical Power
Transmission Apparatus, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.68(b)(4) and
1910.261 (a)(3)(ix), (b)(1), (e)(3), (e)(9), (f)(4), (j)(5)(iv),
(k)(12), and (l)(3).
(17) ANSI B20.1-57 Safety Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and Related
Equipment, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.218(j)(3); 1910.261 (a)(3)(x),
(b)(1),
[[Page 95]]
(c)(15)(iv), (f)(4), and (j)(2); 1910.265(c)(18)(i).
(18) ANSI B30.2-43 (R 52) Safety Code for Cranes, Derricks, and
Hoists, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.261 (a)(3)(xi), (c)(2)(vi), and
(c)(8) (i) and (iv).
(19) ANSI B30.2.0-67 Safety Code for Overhead and Gantry Cranes, IBR
approved for Secs. 1910.179(b)(2); 1910.261 (a)(3)(xii), (c)(2)(v), and
(c)(8) (i) and (iv).
(20) ANSI B30.5-68 Safety Code for Crawler, Locomotive, and Truck
Cranes, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.180(b)(2) and 1910.261(a)(3)(xiii).
(21) ANSI B30.6-69 Safety Code for Derricks, IBR approved for
Secs. 1910.181(b)(2) and 1910.268(j)(4)(iv) (E) and (H).
(22) ANSI B31.1-55 Code for Pressure Piping, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.261(g)(18)(iii).
(23) ANSI B31.1-67, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.253(d)(1)(i)(A)
(24) ANSI B31.1a-63 Addenda to ANSI B31.1 (1955), IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.261(g)(18)(iii).
(25) ANSI B31.1-67 and Addenda B31.1 (1969) Code for Pressure
Piping, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.103(b)(1)(iii)(b);
1910.104(b)(5)(ii); 1910.218 (d)(4) and (e)(1)(iv); and 1910.261
(a)(3)(xiv) and (g)(18)(iii).
(26) ANSI B31.2-68 Fuel Gas Piping, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.261(g)(18)(iii).
(27) ANSI B31.3-66 Petroleum Refinery Piping, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.103(b)(3)(v)(b).
(28) ANSI B31.5-66 Addenda B31.5a (1968) Refrigeration Piping, IB
approved for Secs. 1910.103(b)(3)(v)(b) and 1910.111(b)(7)(iii).
(29) ANSI B56.1-69 Safety Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks,
IBR approved for Secs. 1910.178(a) (2) and (3) and 1910.261 (a)(3)(xv),
(b)(6), (m)(2), and (m)(5)(iii).
(30) ANSI B57.1-65 Compressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and Inlet
Connections, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.253(b)(1)(iii).
(31) ANSI B71.1-68 Safety Specifications for Power Lawn Mowers, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.243(e)(1)(i).
(32) ANSI B175.1-1991, Safety Requirements for Gasoline-Powered
Chain Saws 1910.266(e)(2)(i).
(33) ANSI C1-71 National Electrical Code, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.66 appendix D (c)(22) (i) and (vii).
(34) ANSI C33.2-56 Safety Standard for Transformer-Type Arc Welding
Machines, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.254(b)(1).
(35) ANSI D8.1-67 Practices for Railroad Highway Grade Crossing
Protection, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.265(c)(31)(i).
(36) ANSI H23.1-70 Seamless Copper Water Tube Specification, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.110(b) (8)(ii) and (13)(ii)(b)(1).
(37) ANSI H38.7-69 Specification for Aluminum Alloy Seamless Pipe
and Seamless Extruded Tube, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.110(b)(8)(i).
(38) ANSI J6.4-71 Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating
Blankets, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.268 (f)(1) and (n)(11)(v).
(39) ANSI J6.6-71 Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating
Gloves, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.268 (f)(1) and (n)(11)(iv).
(40) ANSI K13.1-67 Identification of Gas Mask Canisters, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.261 (a)(3)(xvi) and (h)(2)(iii).
(41) ANSI K61.1-60 Safety Requirements for the Storage and Handling
of Anhydrous Ammonia, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.111(b)(11)(i).
(42) ANSI K61.1-66 Safety Requirements for the Storage and Handling
of Anhydrous Ammonia, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.111(b)(11)(i).
(43) ANSI O1.1-54 (R 61) Safety Code for Woodworking Machinery, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.261 (a)(3)(xvii), (e)(7), and (i)(2).
(44) ANSI S1.4-71 (R 76) Specification for Sound Level Meters, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.95 appendixes D and I.
(45) ANSI S1.11-71 (R 76) Specification for Octave, Half-Octave and
Third-Octave Band Filter Sets, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.95 appendix D.
(46) ANSI S3.6-69 Specifications for Audiometers, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.95(h)(2) and (5)(ii) and appendix D.
(47) ANSI Z4.1-68 Requirements for Sanitation in Places of
Employment, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.261 (a)(3)(xviii) and
(g)(15)(vi).
(48) ANSI Z4.2-42 Standard Specifications for Drinking Fountains,
IBR approved for Sec. 1910.142(c)(4).
[[Page 96]]
(49) ANSI Z9.1-51 Safety Code for Ventilation and Operation of Open
Surface Tanks, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.94(c)(5)(iii)(e) and 1910.261
(a)(3)(xix), (g)(18)(v), and (h)(2)(i).
(50) ANSI Z9.1-71 Practices for Ventilation and Operation of Open-
Surface Tanks, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.124(b)(4)(iv).
(51) ANSI Z9.2-60 Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of
Local Exhaust Systems, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.94(a)(4)(i)
introductory text, (a)(6) introductory text, (b)(3)(ix), (b)(4)(i) and
(ii), (c)(3)(i) introductory text, (c)(5)(iii)(b), and (c)(7)(iv)(a);
1910.261(a)(3)(xx), (g)(1)(i) and (iii), and (h)(2)(ii).
(52) ANSI Z9.2-79 Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of
Local Exhaust Systems, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.124(b)(4)(i).
(53) ANSI Z12.12-68 Standard for the Prevention of Sulfur Fires and
Explosions, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.261 (a)(3)(xxi), (d)(1)(i),
(f)(2)(iv), and (g)(1)(i).
(54) ANSI Z12.20-62 (R 69) Code for the Prevention of Dust
Explosions in Woodworking and Wood Flour Manufacturing Plants, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.265(c)(20)(i).
(55) ANSI Z21.30-64 Requirements for Gas Appliances and Gas Piping
Installations, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.265(c)(15).
(56) ANSI Z24.22-57 Method of Measurement of Real-Ear Attenuation of
Ear Protectors at Threshold, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.261(a)(3)(xxii).
(57) ANSI Z33.1-61 Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for
Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying, IBR approved for
Secs. 1910.94(a)(4)(i); 1910.261 (a)(3)(xxiii) and (f)(5); and
1910.265(c)(20)(i).
(58) ANSI Z33.1-66 Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for
Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.94(a)(2)(ii).
(59) ANSI Z35.1-68 Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.261 (a)(3)(xxiv) and (c)(16).
(60) ANSI Z41.1-67 Men's Safety Toe Footwear, IBR approved for
Secs. 1910.94(a)(5)(v); 1910.136(b)(2) and 1910.261(i)(4).
(61) ANSI Z41-91, Personal Protection-Protective Footwear, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.136(b)(1).
(62) ANSI Z48.1-54 Method for Marking Portable Compressed Gas
Containers to Identify the Material Contained, IBR approved for
Secs. 1910.103(b)(1)(i)(c); 1910.110(b)(5)(iii); and 1910.253(b)(1)(ii).
(63) ANSI Z48.1-54 (R 70) Method for Marking Portable Compressed Gas
Containers To Identify the Material Contained, IBR approved for
Secs. 1910.111(e)(1) and 1910.134(d)(4).
(64) ANSI Z49.1-67 Safety in Welding and Cutting, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.252(c)(1)(iv) (A) and (B).
(65) ANSI Z53.1-67 Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards
and the Identification of Certain Equipment, IBR approved for
Secs. 1910.97(a)(3)(ii); 1910.145(d) (2), (4), and (6).
(66) ANSI Z54.1-63 Safety Standard for Non-Medical X-Ray and Sealed
Gamma Ray Sources, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.252(d) (1)(vii) and
(2)(ii).
(67) ANSI Z87.1-68 Practice of Occupational and Educational Eye and
Face Protection, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.133(b)(2);
1910.252(b)(2)(ii)(I); and 1910.261 (a)(3)(xxv), (d)(1)(ii), (f)(5),
(g)(10), (g)(15)(v), (g)(18)(ii), and (i)(4).
(68) ANSI Z87.1-89, Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye
and Face Protection, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.133(b)(1).
(69) ANSI Z88.2-69 Practices for Respiratory Protection, IBR
approved for Secs. 1910.94(c)(6)(iii)(a); 1910.134(c); and 1910.261
(a)(3)(xxvi), (b)(2), (f)(5), (g)(15)(v), (h)(2) (iii) and (iv), and
(i)(4).
(70) ANSI Z89.1-69 Safety Requirements for Industrial Head
Protection, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.135(b)(2); and 1910.261
(a)(3)(xxvii), (b)(2), (g)(15)(v), and (i)(4).
(71) ANSI Z89.1-86, Protective Headwear for Industrial Workers
Requirements, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.135(b)(1).
(72) ANSI Z89.2-71 Safety Requirements for Industrial Protective
Helmets for Electrical Workers, Class B, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.268(i)(1).
(f) The following material is available for purchase from the
American Petroleum Institute (API), 1220 L Street NW, Washington DC
20005:
[[Page 97]]
(1) API 12A (Sept. 1951) Specification for Oil Storage Tanks With
Riveted Shells, 7th Ed., IBR approved for Sec. 1910.106(b)(1)(i)(a)(2).
(2) API 12B (May 1958) Specification for Bolted Production Tanks,
11th Ed., With Supplement No. 1, Mar. 1962, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.106(b)(1)(i)(a)(3).
(3) API 12D (Aug. 1957) Specification for Large Welded Production
Tanks, 7th Ed., IBR approved for Sec. 1910.106(b)(1)(i)(a)(3).
(4) API 12F (Mar. 1961) Specification for Small Welded Production
Tanks, 5th Ed., IBR approved for Sec. 1910.106(b)(1)(i)(a)(3).
(5) API 620, Fourth Ed. (1970) Including appendix R, Recommended
Rules for Design and Construction of Large Welded Low Pressure Storage
Tanks, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.103(c)(1)(i)(a);
1910.106(b)(1)(iv)(b)(1); and 1910.111(d)(1) (ii) and (iii).
(6) API 650 (1966) Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage, 3rd Ed., IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)(a)(2).
(7) API 1104 (1968) Standard for Welding Pipelines and Related
Facilities, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.252(d)(1)(v).
(8) API 2000 (1968) Venting Atmospheric and Low Pressure Storage
Tanks, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.106(b)(2)(iv)(b)(1).
(9) API 2201 (1963) Welding or Hot Tapping on Equipment Containing
Flammables, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.252(d)(1)(vi).
(g) The following material is available for purchase from the
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), United Engineering
Center, 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017:
(1) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sec. VIII, 1949, 1950,
1952, 1956, 1959, and 1962 Ed., IBR approved for Secs. 1910.110
(b)(10)(iii) (Table H-26), (d)(2) (Table H-31); (e)(3)(i) (Table H-32),
(h)(2) (Table H-34); and 1910.111(b)(2)(vi);
(2) ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, 1968 Ed., IBR approved for
Secs. 1910.106(i)(3)(i); 1910.110(g)(2)(iii)(b)(2); and 1910.217(b)(12);
(3) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sec. VIII, 1968, IBR
approved for Secs. 1910.103; 1910.104(b)(4)(ii); 1910.106
(b)(1)(iv)(b)(2) and (i)(3)(ii); 1910.107; 1910.110(b)(11) (i)(b) and
(iii)(a)(1); 1910.111(b)(2) (i), (ii), and (iv); and 1910.169(a)(2) (i)
and (ii);
(4) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sec. VIII, Paragraph UG-
84, 1968, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.104 (b)(4)(ii) and (b)(5)(iii);
(5) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sec. VIII, Unfired
Pressure Vessels, Including Addenda (1969), IBR approved for
Secs. 1910.261; 1910.262; 1910.263(i)(24)(ii);
(6) Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels for Petroleum Liquids and
Gases of the API and the ASME, 1951 Ed., IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.110(b)(3)(iii); and
(7) ASME B56.6-1992 (with addenda), Safety Standard for Rough
Terrain Forklift Trucks, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.266(f)(4).
(h) The following material is available for purchase from the
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 1916 Race Street,
Philadelphia, PA 19103:
(1) ASTM A 47-68 Malleable Iron Castings, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.111(b)(7)(vi).
(2) ASTM A 53-69 Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe, IBR approved for
Secs. 1910.110(b)(8)(i) (a) and (b) and 1910.111(b)(7)(iv).
(3) ASTM A 126-66 Gray Iron Casting for Valves, Flanges and Pipe
Fitting, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.111(b)(7)(vi).
(4) ASTM A 391-65 (ANSI G61.1-1968) Alloy Steel Chain, IBR approved
for Sec. 1910.184(e)(4).
(5) ASTM A 395-68 Ductile Iron for Use at Elevated Temperatures, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.111(b)(7)(vi).
(6) ASTM B 88-69 Seamless Copper Water Tube, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.110(b) (8)(i)(a) and (13)(ii)(b)(1).
(7) ASTM B 88-66A Seamless Copper Water Tube, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.252(d)(1)(i)(A)(2).
(8) ASTM B 117-64 Salt Spray (Fog) Test, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.268(g)(2)(i)(A).
(9) ASTM B 210-68 Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes, IBR approved
for Sec. 1910.110(b)(8)(ii).
(10) ASTM B 241-69, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.110(b)(8)(i)
introductory text.
(11) ASTM D 5-65 Test for Penetration by Bituminous Materials, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.106(a)(17).
[[Page 98]]
(12) ASTM D 56-70 Test for Flash Point by Tag Closed Tester, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.106(a)(14)(i).
(13) ASTM D 86-62 Test for Distillation of Petroleum Products, IBR
approved for Secs. 1910.106(a)(5) and 1910.119(b) ``Boiling point.''
(14) ASTM D 88-56 Test for Saybolt Viscosity, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.106(a)(37).
(15) ASTM D 93-71 Test for Flash Point by Pensky Martens, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.106(a)(14)(ii).
(16) ASTM D 323-68, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.106(a)(30)
(17) ASTM D 445-65 Test for Viscosity of Transparent and Opaque
Liquids, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.106(a)(37).
(18) ASTM D 1692-68 Test for Flammability of Plastic Sheeting and
Cellular Plastics, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.103(c)(1)(v)(d).
(19) ASTM D 2161-66 Conversion Tables For SUS, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.106(a)(37).
(i) The following material is available for purchase from the
American Welding Society (AWS), 550 NW, LeJeune Road, P.O. Box 351040,
Miami FL 33135:
(1) AWS A3.0 (1969) Terms and Definitions, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.251(c).
(2) AWS A6.1 (1966) Recommended Safe Practices for Gas Shielded Arc
Welding, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.254(d)(1).
(3) AWS B3.0-41 Standard Qualification Procedure, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.67(c)(5)(i).
(4) AWS D1.0-1966 Code for Welding in Building Construction, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.27(b)(6).
(5) AWS D2.0-69 Specifications for Welding Highway and Railway
Bridges, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.67(c)(5)(iv).
(6) AWS D8.4-61 Recommended Practices for Automotive Welding Design,
IBR approved for Sec. 1910.67(c)(5)(ii).
(7) AWS D10.9-69 Standard Qualification of Welding Procedures and
Welders for Piping and Tubing, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.67(c)(5)(iii).
(j) The following material is available for purchase from the
Department of Commerce:
(1) Commercial Standard, CS 202-56 (1961) ``Industrial Lifts and
Hinged Loading Ramps,'' IBR approved for Sec. 1910.30(a)(3).
(2) Publication ``Model Performance Criteria for Structural Fire
Fighters' Helmets,'' IBR approved for Sec. 1910.156(e)(5)(i).
(k) The following material is available for purchase from the
Compressed Gas Association (CGA), 1235 Jefferson Davis Highway,
Arlington, VA 22202:
(1) CGA C-6 (1968) Standards for Visual Inspection of Compressed Gas
Cylinders, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.101(a).
(2) CGA C-8 (1962) Standard for Requalification of ICC-3HT
Cylinders, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.101(a).
(3) CGA G-1 (1966) Acetylene, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.102(a).
(4) CGA G-1.3 (1959) Acetylene Transmission for Chemical Synthesis,
IBR approved for Sec. 1910.102(b).
(5) CGA G-1.4 (1966) Standard for Acetylene Cylinder Charging
Plants, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.102(b).
(6) CGA G-7.1 (1966) Commodity Specification, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.134(d)(1).
(7) CGA G-8.1 (1964) Standard for the Installation of Nitrous Oxide
Systems at Consumer Sites, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.105.
(8) CGA P-1 (1965) Safe Handling of Compressed Gases, IBR approved
for Sec. 1910.101(b).
(9) CGA P-3 (1963) Specifications, Properties, and Recommendations
for Packaging, Transportation, Storage and Use of Ammonium Nitrate, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.109(i)(1)(ii)(b).
(10) CGA S-1.1 (1963) and 1965 Addenda. Safety Release Device
Standards--Cylinders for Compressed Gases, IBR approved for
Secs. 1910.101(c); 1910.103(c)(1)(iv)(a)(2).
(11) CGA S-1.2 (1963) Safety Release Device Standards, Cargo and
Portable Tanks for Compressed Gases, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.101(c);
1910.103(c)(1)(iv)(a)(2).
(12) CGA S-1.3 (1959) Safety Release Device Standards-Compressed Gas
Storage Containers, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.103(c)(1)(iv)(a)(2);
1910.104(b)(6)(iii); and 1910.111(d)(4)(ii)(b).
(13) CGA 1957 Standard Hose Connection Standard, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.253(e) (4)(v) and (5)(iii).
(14) CGA and RMA (Rubber Manufacturer's Association) Specification
for
[[Page 99]]
Rubber Welding Hose (1958), IBR approved for Sec. 1910.253(e)(5)(i).
(15) CGA 1958 Regulator Connection Standard, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.253(e) (4)(iv) and (6).
(l) The following material is available for purchase from the Crane
Manufacturer's Association of America, Inc. (CMAA), 1 Thomas Circle NW,
Washington DC 20005:
(1) CMAA Specification 1B61, Specifications for Electric Overhead
Traveling Cranes, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.179(b)(6)(i).
(2) [Reserved]
(m) The following material is available for purchase from the
General Services Administration:
(1) GSA Pub. GG-B-0067b, Air Compressed for Breathing Purposes, or
Interim Federal Specifications, Apr. 1965, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.134(d)(4).
(2) [Reserved]
(n) The following material is available for purchase from the
Department of Health and Human Services:
(1) Publication No. 76-120 (1975), List of Personal Hearing
Protectors and Attenuation Data, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.95 App. B.
(2) [Reserved]
(o) The following material is available for purchase from the
Institute of Makers of Explosives (IME), 420 Lexington Avenue, New York,
NY 10017:
(1) IME Pamphlet No. 17, 1960, Safety in the Handling and Use of
Explosives, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.261 (a)(4)(iii) and (c)(14)(ii).
(2) [Reserved]
(p) The following material is available for purchase from the
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):
(1) NEMA EW-1 (1962) Requirements for Electric Arc Welding
Apparatus, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.254(b)(1).
(2) [Reserved]
(q) The following material is available for purchase from the
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 11 Tracy Drive, Avon, MA
02322:
(1) NFPA 30 (1969) Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.178(f)(1).
(2) NFPA 32-1970 Standard for Dry Cleaning Plants, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.106(j)(6)(i).
(3) NFPA 33-1969 Standard for Spray Finishing Using Flammable and
Combustible Material, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.94(c) (1)(ii), (2),
(3) (i) and (iii), and (5).
(4) NFPA 34-1966 Standard for Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or
Combustible Liquids, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.124(b)(4)(iv).
(5) NFPA 34-1995 Standard for Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or
Combustible Liquids, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.124(b)(4)(ii).
(6) NFPA 35-1970 Standard for the Manufacture of Organic Coatings,
IBR approved for Sec. 1910.106(j)(6)(ii).
(7) NFPA 36-1967 Standard for Solvent Extraction Plants, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.106(j)(6)(iii).
(8) NFPA 37-1970 Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary
Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines, IBR approved for
Secs. 1910.106(j)(6)(iv) and 1910.110 (b)(20)(iv)(c) and (e)(11).
(9) NFPA 51B-1962 Standard for Fire Protection in Use of Cutting and
Welding Processes, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.252(a)(1) introductory
text.
(10) NFPA 54-1969 Standard for the Installation of Gas Appliances
and Gas Piping, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(a).
(11) NFPA 54A-1969 Standard for the Installation of Gas Piping and
Gas Equipment on Industrial Premises and Certain Other Premises, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(b).
(12) NFPA 58-1969 Standard for the Storage and Handling of Liquefied
Petroleum Gases (ANSI Z106.1-1970), IBR approved for Secs. 1910.110
(b)(3)(iv) and (i)(3) (i) and (ii); and 1910.178(f)(2).
(13) NFPA 59-1968 Standard for the Storage and Handling of Liquefied
Petroleum Gases at Utility Gas Plants, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.110
(b)(3)(iv) and (i)(2)(iv).
(14) NFPA 62-1967 Standard for the Prevention of Dust Explosions in
the Production, Packaging, and Handling of Pulverized Sugar and Cocoa,
IBR approved for Sec. 1910.263(k)(2)(i).
(15) NFPA 68-1954 Guide for Explosion Venting, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.94(a)(2)(iii).
(16) NFPA 70-1971 National Electrical Code, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.66 App. D(c)(2).
[[Page 100]]
(17) NFPA 78-1968 Lightning Protection Code, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.109(i)(6)(ii).
(18) NFPA 80-1968 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, IBR approved
for Sec. 1910.106(d)(4)(i).
(19) NFPA 80-1970 Standard for the Installation of Fire Doors and
Windows, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.253(f)(6)(i)(I).
(20) NFPA 86A-1969 Standard for Oven and Furnaces Design, Location
and Equipment, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.107 (j)(1) and (l)(3) and
1910.108 (b)(2) and (d)(2).
(21) NFPA 91-1961 Standard for the Installation of Blower and
Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying (ANSI
Z33.1-61), IBR approved for Sec. 1910.107(d)(1).
(22) NFPA 91-1969 Standards for Blower and Exhaust Systems, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.108(b)(1).
(23) NFPA 96-1970 Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the
Removal of Smoke and Grease Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking
Equipment, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(d).
(24) NFPA 101-1970 Code for Life Safety From Fire in Buildings and
Structures, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.261(a)(4)(ii).
(25) NFPA 203M-1970 Manual on Roof Coverings, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.109(i)(1)(iii)(c).
(26) NFPA 251-1969 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Building
Construction and Materials, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.106 (d)(3)(ii)
introductory text and (d)(4)(i).
(27) NFPA 302-1968 Fire Protection Standard for Motor-Craft
(Pleasure and Commercial), IBR approved for Sec. 1910.265(d)(2)(iv)
introductory text.
(28) NFPA 385-1966 Recommended Regulatory Standard for Tank Vehicles
for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.106(g)(1)(i)(e)(1).
(29) NFPA 496-1967 Standard for Purged Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment in Hazardous Locations, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.103(c)(1)(ix)(e)(1).
(30) NFPA 505-1969 Standard for Type Designations, Areas of Use,
Maintenence, and Operation of Powered Industrial Trucks, IBR approved
for Sec. 1910.110(e)(2)(iv).
(31) NFPA 566-1965 Standard for the Installation of Bulk Oxygen
Systems at Consumer Sites, IBR approved for Secs. 1910.253 (b)(4)(iv)
and (c)(2)(v).
(32) NFPA 656-1959 Code for the Prevention of Dust Ignition in Spice
Grinding Plants, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.263(k)(2)(i).
(33) NFPA 1971-1975 Protective Clothing for Structural Fire
Fighting, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.156(e)(3)(ii) introductory text.
(r) The following material is available for purchase from the
National Food Plant Institute, 1700 K St. NW., Washington, DC 20006:
(1) Definition and Test Procedures for Ammonium Nitrate Fertilizer
(Nov. 1964), IBR approved for Sec. 1910.109 Table H-22, ftn. 3.
(2) [Reserved]
(s) The following material is available for purchase from the
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):
(1) Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances, 1978, IBR
approved for Sec. 1910.20(c)(13)(i) and appendix B.
(2) Development of Criteria for Fire Fighters Gloves; Vol. II, Part
II; Test Methods, 1976, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.156(e)(4)(i)
introductory text.
(3) NIOSH Recommendations for Occupational Safety and Health
Standards (Sept. 1987), IBR approved for Sec. 1910.120 PEL definition.
(t) The following material is available for purchase from the Public
Health Service:
(1) U.S. Pharmacopeia, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.134(d)(1).
(2) Publication No. 934 (1962), Food Service Sanitation Ordinance
and Code, Part V of the Food Service Sanitation Manual, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.142(i)(1).
(u) The following material is available for purchase from the
Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), 485 Lexington Avenue, New York,
NY 10017:
(1) SAE J185, June 1988, Recommended Practice for Access Systems for
Off-Road Machines, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.266(f)(5)(i).
[[Page 101]]
(2) SAE J231, January 1981, Minimum Performance Criteria for Falling
Object Protective Structure (FOPS), IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.266(f)(3)(ii).
(3) SAE J386, June 1985, Operator Restraint Systems for Off-Road
Work Machines, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.266(d)(3)(iv).
(4) SAE J397, April 1988, Deflection Limiting Volume-ROPS/FOPS
Laboratory Evaluation, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.266(f)(3)(iv).
(5) SAE 765 (1961) SAE Recommended Practice: Crane Loading Stability
Test Code, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.180 (c)(1)(iii) and
(e)(2)(iii)(a).
(6) SAE J1040, April 1988, Performance Criteria for Rollover
Protective Structures (ROPS) for Construction, Earthmoving, Forestry and
Mining Machines, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.266(f)(3)(ii).
(v) The following material is available for purchase from the
Fertilizer Institute, 1015 18th Street NW, Washington, DC 20036:
(1) Standard M-1 (1953, 1955, 1957, 1960, 1961, 1963, 1965, 1966,
1967, 1968), Superseded by ANSI K61.1-1972, IBR approved for
Sec. 1910.111(b)(1) (i) and (iii).
(2) [Reserved]
(w) The following material is available for purchase from
Underwriters Laboratories (UL), 207 East Ohio Street, Chicago, IL 60611:
(1) UL 58-61 Steel Underground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible
Liquids, 5th Ed., IBR approved for Sec. 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)(a)(1).
(2) UL 80-63 Steel Inside Tanks for Oil-Burner Fuel, IBR approved
for Sec. 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)(a)(1).
(3) UL 142-68 Steel Above Ground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible
Liquids, IBR approved for Sec. 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)(a)(1).
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5321, Feb. 10, 1984; 61
FR 9231, Mar. 7, 1996; 64 FR 13908, Mar. 23, 1999]
Sec. 1910.7 Definition and requirements for a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
(a) Application. This section shall apply only when the term
nationally recognized testing laboratory is used in other sections of
this part.
(b) Laboratory requirements. The term nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) means an organization which is recognized by OSHA in
accordance with appendix A of this section and which tests for safety,
and lists or labels or accepts, equipment or materials and which meets
all of the following criteria:
(1) For each specified item of equipment or material to be listed,
labeled or accepted, the NRTL has the capability (including proper
testing equipment and facilities, trained staff, written testing
procedures, and calibration and quality control programs) to perform:
(i) Testing and examining of equipment and materials for workplace
safety purposes to determine conformance with appropriate test
standards; or
(ii) Experimental testing and examining of equipment and materials
for workplace safety purposes to determine conformance with appropriate
test standards or performance in a specified manner.
(2) The NRTL shall provide, to the extent needed for the particular
equipment or materials listed, labeled, or accepted, the following
controls or services:
(i) Implements control procedures for identifying the listed and
labeled equipment or materials;
(ii) Inspects the run of production of such items at factories for
product evaluation purposes to assure conformance with the test
standards; and
(iii) Conducts field inspections to monitor and to assure the proper
use of its identifying mark or labels on products;
(3) The NRTL is completely independent of employers subject to the
tested equipment requirements, and of any manufacturers or vendors of
equipment or materials being tested for these purposes; and,
(4) The NRTL maintains effective procedures for:
(i) Producing creditable findings or reports that are objective and
without bias; and
(ii) Handling complaints and disputes under a fair and reasonable
system.
(c) Test standards. An appropriate test standard referred to in
Sec. 1910.7(b)(1) (i) and (ii) is a document which specifies the safety
requirements for specific equipment or class of equipment and is:
[[Page 102]]
(1) Recognized in the United States as a safety standard providing
an adequate level of safety, and
(2) Compatible with and maintained current with periodic revisions
of applicable national codes and installation standards, and
(3) Developed by a standards developing organization under a method
providing for input and consideration of views of industry groups,
experts, users, consumers, governmental authorities, and others having
broad experience in the safety field involved, or
(4) In lieu of paragraphs (c) (1), (2), and (3), the standard is
currently designated as an American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
safety-designated product standard or an American Society for Testing
and Materials (ASTM) test standard used for evaluation of products or
materials.
(d) Alternative test standard. If a testing laboratory desires to
use a test standard other than one allowed under paragraph (c) of this
section, then the Assistant Secretary of Labor shall evaluate the
proposed standard to determine that it provides an adequate level of
safety before it is used.
(e) Implementation. A testing organization desiring recognition by
OSHA as an NRTL shall request that OSHA evaluate its testing and control
programs against the requirements in this section for any equipment or
material it may specify. The recognition procedure shall be conducted in
accordance with appendix A to this section.
(f) Fees. (1) Each applicant for NRTL recognition and each NRTL must
pay fees for services provided by OSHA. OSHA will assess fees for the
following services:
(i) Processing of applications for initial recognition, expansion of
recognition, or renewal of recognition, including on-site reviews;
review and evaluation of the applications; and preparation of reports,
evaluations and Federal Register notices; and
(ii) Audits of sites.
(2) The fee schedule established by OSHA reflects the cost of
performing the activities for each service listed in paragraph (f)(1) of
this section. OSHA calculates the fees based on either the average or
actual time required to perform the work necessary; the staff costs per
hour (which include wages, fringe benefits, and expenses other than
travel for personnel that perform or administer the activities covered
by the fees); and the average or actual costs for travel when on-site
reviews are involved. The formula for the fee calculation is as follows:
Activity Fee = [Average (or Actual) Hours to Complete the Activity x
Staff Costs per Hour] + Average (or Actual) Travel Costs
(3) (i) OSHA will review costs annually and will propose a revised
fee schedule, if warranted. In its review, OSHA will apply the formula
established in paragraph (f)(2) of this section to the current estimated
costs for the NRTL Program. If a change is warranted, OSHA will follow
the implementation table in paragraph (f)(4) of this section.
(ii) OSHA will publish all fee schedules in the Federal Register.
Once published, a fee schedule remains in effect until it is superseded
by a new fee schedule. Any member of the public may request a change to
the fees included in the current fee schedule. Such a request must
include appropriate documentation in support of the suggested change.
OSHA will consider such requests during its annual review of the fee
schedule.
(4) OSHA will implement fee assessment, collection, and payment as
follows:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Approximate dates Action required
------------------------------------------------------------------------
I. Annual Review of Fee Schedule
------------------------------------------------------------------------
November 1........................ OSHA will publish any proposed new
Fee Schedule in the Federal
Register, if OSHA determines
changes in the schedule are
warranted.
November 16....................... Comments due on the proposed new Fee
Schedule.
December 15....................... OSHA will publish the final Fee
Schedule in the Federal Register,
making it effective.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 103]]
II. Application Processing Fees
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time of application............... Applicant must pay the applicable
fees shown in the Fee Schedule when
submitting the application; OSHA
will not begin processing until
fees are received.
Publication of preliminary notice. Applicant must pay remainder of
fees; OSHA cancels application if
fees are not paid when due.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
III. Audit Fees
After audit performed............. OSHA will bill each existing NRTL
for the audit fees in effect at the
time of audit, but will reflect
actual travel costs and staff time
in the bill.
30 days after bill date........... NRTLs must pay audit fees; OSHA will
assess late fee if audit fees are
not paid.
45 days after bill date........... OSHA will send a letter to the NRTL
requesting immediate payment of the
audit fees and late fee
60 days after bill date........... OSHA will publish a notice in the
Federal Register announcing its
intent to revoke recognition for
NRTLs that have not paid these
audit fees.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(5) OSHA will provide details about how to pay the fees through
appropriate OSHA Program Directives, which will be available on the OSHA
web site.
Appendix A to Sec. 1910.7--OSHA Recognition Process for Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratories
Introduction
This appendix provides requirements and criteria which OSHA will use
to evaluate and recognize a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory
(NRTL). This process will include the the evaluation of the product
evaluation and control programs being operated by the NRTL, as well as
the NRTL's testing facilities being used in its program. In the
evaluation of the NRTLs, OSHA will use either consensus-based standards
currently in use nationally, or other standards or criteria which may be
considered appropriate. This appendix implements the definition of NRTL
in 29 CFR 1910.7 which sets out the criteria that a laboratory must meet
to be recognized by OSHA (initially and on a continuing basis). The
appendix is broader in scope, providing procedures for renewal,
expansion and revocation of OSHA recognition. Except as otherwise
provided, the burden is on the applicant to establish by a preponderance
of the evidence that it is entitled to recognition as an NRTL. If
further detailing of these requirements and criteria will assist the
NRTLs or OSHA in this activity, this detailing will be done through
appropriate OSHA Program Directives.
I. Procedures for Initial OSHA Recognition
A. Applications.
1. Eligibility. a. Any testing agency or organization considering
itself to meet the definition of nationally recognized testing
laboratory as specified in Sec. 1910.7 may apply for OSHA recognition as
an NRTL.
b. However, in determining eligibility for a foreign-based testing
agency or organization, OSHA shall take into consideration the policy of
the foreign government regarding both the acceptance in that country of
testing data, equipment acceptances, and listings, and labeling, which
are provided through nationally recognized testing laboratories
recognized by the Assistant Secretary, and the accessibility to
government recognition or a similar system in that country by U.S.-based
safety-related testing agencies, whether recognized by the Assistant
Secretary or not, if such recognition or a similar system is required by
that country.
2. Content of application. a. The applicant shall provide sufficient
information and detail demonstrating that it meets the requirements set
forth in Sec. 1910.7, in order for an informed decision concerning
recognition to be made by the Assistant Secretary.
b. The applicant also shall identify the scope of the NRTL-related
activity for which the applicant wishes to be recognized. This will
include identifying the testing methods it will use to test or judge the
specific equipment and materials for which recognition is being
requested, unless such test methods are already specified in the test
standard. If requested to do so by OSHA, the applicant shall provide
documentation of the efficacy of these testing methods.
c. The applicant may include whatever enclosures, attachments, or
exhibits the applicant deems appropriate. The application need not be
submitted on a Federal form.
3. Filing office location. The application shall be filed with: NRTL
Recognition Program, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S.
Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210.
4. Amendments and withdrawals. a. An application may be revised by
an applicant at any time prior to the completion of activity under
paragraph I.B.4. of this appendix.
b. An application may be withdrawn by an applicant, without
prejudice, at any time prior to the final decision by the Assistant
[[Page 104]]
Secretary in paragraph I.B.7.c. of this appendix.
B. Review and Decision Process; Issuance or Renewal.
1. Acceptance and on-site review. a. Applications submitted by
eligible testing agencies will be accepted by OSHA, and their receipt
acknowledged in writing. After receipt of an application, OSHA may
request additional information if it believes information relevant to
the requirements for recognition has been omitted.
b. OSHA shall, as necessary, conduct an on-site review of the
testing facilities of the applicant, as well as the applicant's
administrative and technical practices, and, if necessary, review any
additional documentation underlying the application.
c. These on-site reviews will be conducted by qualified individuals
technically expert in these matters, including, as appropriate, non-
Federal consultants/contractors acceptable to OSHA. The protocol for
each review will be based on appropriate national consensus standards or
international guides, with such additions, changes, or deletions as may
be considered necessary and appropriate in each case by OSHA. A written
report shall be made of each on-site review and a copy shall be provided
to the applicant.
2. Positive finding by staff. If, after review of the application,
and additional information, and the on-site review report, the applicant
appears to have met the requirements for recognition, a written
recommendation shall be submitted by the responsible OSHA personnel to
the Assistant Secretary that the application be approved, accompanied by
a supporting explanation.
3. Negative finding by staff.--a. Notification to applicant. If,
after review of the application, any additional information and the on-
site review report, the applicant does not appear to have met the
requirements for recognition, the responsible OSHA personnel shall
notify the applicant in writing, listing the specific requirements of
Sec. 1910.7 and this appendix which the applicant has not met, and allow
a reasonable period for response.
b. Revision of application. (i) After receipt of a notification of
negative finding (i.e., for intended disapproval of the application),
and within the response period provided, the applicant may:
(a) Submit a revised application for further review, which could
result in a positive finding by the responsible OSHA personnel pursuant
to subsection I.B.2. of this appendix; or
(b) Request that the original application be submitted to the
Assistant Secretary with an attached statement of reasons, supplied by
the applicant of why the application should be approved.
(ii) This procedure for applicant notification and potential
revision shall be used only once during each recognition process.
4. Preliminary finding by Assistant Secretary. a. The Assistant
Secretary, or a special designee for this purpose, will make a
preliminary finding as to whether the applicant has or has not met the
requirements for recognition, based on the completed application file,
the written staff recommendation, and the statement of reasons supplied
by the applicant if there remains a staff recommendation of disapproval.
b. Notification of this preliminary finding will be sent to the
applicant and subsequently published in the Federal Register.
c. This preliminary finding shall not be considered an official
decision by the Assistant Secretary or OSHA, and does not confer any
change in status or any interim or temporary recognition for the
applicant.
5. Public review and comment period--a. The Federal Register notice
of preliminary finding will provide a period of not less than 30
calendar days for written comments on the applicant's fulfillment of the
requirements for recognition. The application, supporting documents,
staff recommendation, statement of applicant's reasons, and any comments
received, will be available for public inspection in the OSHA Docket
Office.
b. Any member of the public, including the applicant, may supply
detailed reasons and evidence supporting or challenging the sufficiency
of the applicant's having met the requirements of the definition in 29
CFR Sec. 1910.7 and this appendix. Submission of pertinent documents and
exhibits shall be made in writing by the close of the comment period.
6. Action after public comment.-- a. Final decision by Assistant
Secretary. Where the public review and comment record supports the
Assistant Secretary's preliminary finding concerning the application,
i.e., absent any serious objections or substantive claims contrary to
the preliminary finding having been received in writing from the public
during the comment period, the Assistant Secretary will proceed to final
written decision on the application. The reasons supporting this
decision shall be derived from the evidence available as a result of the
full application, the supporting documentation, the staff finding, and
the written comments and evidence presented during the public review and
comment period.
b. Public announcement. A copy of the Assistant Secretary's final
decision will be provided to the applicant. Subsequently, a notification
of the final decision shall be published in the Federal Register. The
publication date will be the effective date of the recognition.
c. Review of final decision. There will be no further review
activity available within the Department of Labor from the final
decision of the Assistant Secretary.
7. Action after public objection.-- a. Review of negative
information. At the discretion of the
[[Page 105]]
Assistant Secretary or his designee, OSHA may authorize Federal or
contract personnel to initiate a special review of any information
provided in the public comment record which appears to require
resolution, before a final decision can be made.
b. Supplementation of record. The contents and results of special
reviews will be made part of this record by the Assistant Secretary by
either:
(i) Reopening the written comment period for public comments on
these reviews; or
(ii) Convening an informal hearing to accept public comments on
these reviews, conducted under applicable OSHA procedures for similar
hearings.
c. Final decision by the Assistant Secretary. The Assistant
Secretary shall issue a decision as to whether it has been demonstrated,
based on a preponderance of the evidence, that the applicant meets the
requirements for recognition. The reasons supporting this decision shall
be derived from the evidence available as a result of the full
application, the supporting documentation, the staff finding, the
comments and evidence presented during the public review and comment
period, and written to transcribed evidence received during any
subsequent reopening of the written comment period or informal public
hearing held.
d. Public announcement. A copy of the Assistant Secretary's final
decision will be provided to the applicant, and a notification will be
published in the Federal Register subsequently announcing the decision.
e. Review of final decision. There will be no further review
activity available within the Department of Labor from the final
decision of the Assistant Secretary.
c. Terms and conditions of recognition. The following terms and
conditions shall be part of every recognition:
1. Letter of recognition. The recognition by OSHA of any NRTL will
be evidenced by a letter of recognition from OSHA. The letter will
provide the specific details of the scope of the OSHA recognition,
including the specific equipment or materials for which OSHA recognition
has been granted, as well as any specific conditions imposed by OSHA.
2. Period of recognition. The recognition by OSHA of each NRTL will
be valid for five years, unless terminated before the expiration of the
period. The dates of the period of recognition will be stated in the
recognition letter.
3. Constancy in operations. The recognized NRTL shall continue to
satisfy all the requirements or limitations in the letter of recognition
during the period of recognition.
4. Accurate publicity. The OSHA-recognized NRTL shall not engage in
or permit others to engage in misrepresentation of the scope or
conditions of its recognition.
5. Temporary Recognition of Certain NRTLs. a. Notwithstanding all
other requirements and provisions of Sec. 1910.7 and this appendix, the
following two organizations are recognized temporarily as nationally
recognized testing laboratories by the Assistant Secretary for a period
of five years beginning June 13, 1988 and ending on July 13, 1993:
(i) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 333 Pfingsten Road, Northbrook,
Illinois 60062.
(ii) Factory Mutual Research Corporation, 1151 Boston-Providence
Turnpike, Norwood, Massachusetts 02062.
b. At the end of the five-year period, the two temporarily
recognized laboratories shall apply for renewal of OSHA recognition
utilizing the following procedures established for renewal of OSHA
recognition.
II. Supplementary Procedures.
A. Test standard changes.
A recognized NRTL may change a testing standard or elements
incorporated in the standard such as testing methods or pass-fail
criteria by notifying the Assistant Secretary of the change, certifying
that the revised standard will be at least as effective as the prior
standard, and providing the supporting data upon which its conclusions
are based. The NRTL need not inform the Assistant Secretary of minor
deviations from a test standard such as the use of new instrumentation
that is more accurate or sensitive than originally called for in the
standard. The NRTL also need not inform the Assistant Secretary of its
adoption of revisions to third-party testing standards meeting the
requirements of Sec. 1910.7(c)(4), if such revisions have been developed
by the standards developing organization, or of its adoption of
revisions to other third-party test standards which the developing
organization has submitted to OSHA. If, upon review, the Assistant
Secretary or his designee determines that the proposed revised standard
is not ``substantially equivalent'' to the previous version with regard
to the level of safety obtained, OSHA will not accept the proposed
testing standard by the recognized NRTL, and will initiate
discontinuance of that aspect of OSHA-recognized activity by the NRTL by
modification of the official letter of recognition. OSHA will publicly
announce this action and the NRTL will be required to communicate this
OSHA decision directly to affected manufacturers.
B. Expansion of current recognition
1. Eligibility. A recognized NRTL may apply to OSHA for an expansion
of its current recognition to cover other categories of NRTL testing in
addition to those included in the current recognition.
[[Page 106]]
2. Procedure. a. OSHA will act upon and process the application for
expansion in accordance with subsection I.B. of this appendix, except
that the period for written comments, specified in paragraph 5.a of
subsection I.B. of this appendix, will be not less than 15 calendar
days.
b. In that process, OSHA may decide not to conduct an on-site
review, where the substantive scope of the request to expand recognition
is closely related to the current area of recognition.
c. The expiration date for each expansion of recognition shall
coincide with the expiration date of the current basic recognition
period.
C. Renewal of OSHA recognition
1. Eligibility. A recognized NRTL may renew its recognition by
filing a renewal request at the address in paragraph I.A.3. of this
appendix not less than nine months, nor more than one year, before the
expiration date of its current recognition.
2. Procedure. a. OSHA will process the renewal request in accordance
with subsection I.B. of this appendix, except that the period for
written comments, specified in paragraph 5.a of subsection I.B. of this
appendix, will be not less than 15 calendar days.
b. In that process, OSHA may determine not to conduct the on-site
reviews in I.B.1.a. where appropriate.
c. When a recognized NRTL has filed a timely and sufficient renewal
request, its current recognition will not expire until a final decision
has been made by OSHA on the request.
d. After the first renewal has been granted to the NRTL, the NRTL
shall apply for a continuation of its recognition status every five
years by submitting a renewal request. In lieu of submitting a renewal
request after the initial renewal, the NRTL may certify its continuing
compliance with the terms of its letter of recognition and 29 CFR
1910.7.
3. Alternative procedure. After the initial recognition and before
the expiration thereof, OSHA may (for good cause) determine that there
is a sufficient basis to dispense with the renewal requirement for a
given laboratory and will so notify the laboratory of such a
determination in writing. In lieu of submitting a renewal request, any
laboratory so notified shall certify its continuing compliance with the
terms of its letter of recognition and 29 CFR 1910.7.
D. Voluntary termination of recognition.
At any time, a recognized NRTL may voluntarily terminate its
recognition, either in its entirety or with respect to any area covered
in its recognition, by giving written notice to OSHA. The written notice
shall state the date as of which the termination is to take effect. The
Assistant Secretary shall inform the public of any voluntary termination
by Federal Register notice.
E. Revocation of recognition by OSHA.
1. Potential causes. If an NRTL either has failed to continue to
substantially satisfy the requirements of Sec. 1910.7 or this appendix,
or has not been reasonably performing the NRTL testing requirements
encompassed within its letter of recognition, or has materially
misrepresented itself in its applications or misrepresented the scope or
conditions of its recognition, the Assistant Secretary may revoke the
recognition of a recognized NRTL, in whole or in part. OSHA may initiate
revocation procedures on the basis of information provided by any
interested person.
2. Procedure. a. Before proposing to revoke recognition, the Agency
will notify the recognized NRTL in writing, giving it the opportunity to
rebut or correct the alleged deficiencies which would form the basis of
the proposed revocation, within a reasonable period.
b. If the alleged deficiencies are not corrected or reconciled
within a reasonable period, OSHA will propose, in writing to the
recognized NRTL, to revoke recognition. If deemed appropriate, no other
announcement need be made by OSHA.
c. The revocation shall be effective in 60 days unless within that
period the recognized NRTL corrects the deficiencies or requests a
hearing in writing.
d. If a hearing is requested, it shall be held before an
administrative law judge of the Department of Labor pursuant to the
rules specified in 29 CFR part 1905, subpart C.
e. The parties shall be OSHA and the recognized NRTL. The Assistant
Secretary may allow other interested persons to participate in these
hearings if such participation would contribute to the resolution of
issues germane to the proceeding and not cause undue delay.
f. The burden of proof shall be on OSHA to demonstrate by a
preponderance of the evidence that the recognition should be revoked
because the NRTL is not meeting the requirements for recognition, has
not been reasonably performing the product testing functions as required
by Sec. 1910.7, this appendix A, or the letter of recognition, or has
materially misrepresented itself in its applications or publicity.
3. Final decision. a. After the hearing, the Administrative Law
Judge shall issue a decision stating the reasons based on the record as
to whether it has been demonstrated, based on a preponderance of
evidence, that the applicant does not continue to meet the requirements
for its current recognition.
b. Upon issuance of the decision, any party to the hearing may file
exceptions within 20
[[Page 107]]
days pursuant to 29 CFR 1905.28. If no exceptions are filed, this
decision is the final decision of the Assistant Secretary. If objections
are filed, the Administrative Law Judge shall forward the decision,
exceptions and record to the Assistant Secretary for the final decision
on the proposed revocation.
c. The Assistant Secretary will review the record, the decision by
the Administrative Law Judge, and the exceptions filed. Based on this,
the Assistant Secretary shall issue the final decision as to whether it
has been demonstrated, by a preponderance of evidence, that the
recognized NRTL has not continued to meet the requirements for OSHA
recognition. If the Assistant Secretary finds that the NRTL does not
meet the NRTL recognition requirements, the recognition will be revoked.
4. Public announcement. A copy of the Assistant Secretary's final
decision will be provided to the applicant, and a notification will be
published in the Federal Register announcing the decision, and the
availability of the complete record of this proceeding at OSHA. The
effective date of any revocation will be the date the final decision
copy is sent to the NRTL.
5. Review of final decision. There will be no further review
activity available within the Department of Labor from the final
decision of the Assistant Secretary.
[53 FR 12120, Apr. 12, 1988; 53 FR 16838, May 11, 1988, as amended at 54
FR 24333, June 7, 1989; 65 FR 46818, 46819, July 31, 2000]
Sec. 1910.8 OMB control numbers under the Paperwork Reduction Act.
The following sections or paragraphs each contain a collection of
information requirement which has been approved by the Office of
Management and Budget under the control number listed.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
OMB
29 CFR citation control
No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1910.7...................................................... 1218-0147
1910.23..................................................... 1218-0199
1910.66..................................................... 1218-0121
1910.67(b).................................................. 1218-0230
1910.68..................................................... 1218-0226
1910.95..................................................... 1218-0048
1910.111.................................................... 1218-0208
1910.119.................................................... 1218-0200
1910.120.................................................... 1218-0202
1910.132.................................................... 1218-0205
1910.134.................................................... 1218-0099
1910.137.................................................... 1218-0190
1910.142.................................................... 1218-0096
1910.145.................................................... 1218-0132
1910.146.................................................... 1218-0203
1910.147.................................................... 1218-0150
1910.156.................................................... 1218-0075
1910.157(e)(3).............................................. 1218-0210
1910.157(f)(16)............................................. 1218-0218
1910.177(d)(3)(iv).......................................... 1218-0219
1910.179(j)(2)(iii) and (iv)................................ 1218-0224
1910.179(m)(1) and (m)(2)................................... 1218-0224
1910.180(d)(6).............................................. 1218-0221
1910.180(g)(1) and (g)(2)(ii)............................... 1218-0221
1910.181(g)(1) and (g)(3)................................... 1218-0222
1910.184(e)(4), (f)(4) and (i)(8)(ii)....................... 1218-0223
1910.217(e)(1)(i) and (ii).................................. 1218-0229
1910.217(g)................................................. 1218-0070
1910.217(h)................................................. 1218-0143
1910.218(a)(2)(i) and (ii).................................. 1218-0228
1910.252(a)(2)(xiii)(c)..................................... 1218-0207
1910.255(e)................................................. 1218-0207
1910.266.................................................... 1218-0198
1910.268.................................................... 1218-0225
1910.269.................................................... 1218-0190
1910.272.................................................... 1218-0206
1910.420.................................................... 1218-0069
1910.421.................................................... 1218-0069
1910.423.................................................... 1218-0069
1910.430.................................................... 1218-0069
1910.440.................................................... 1218-0069
1910.1001................................................... 1218-0133
1910.1003................................................... 1218-0085
1910.1004................................................... 1218-0084
1910.1006................................................... 1218-0086
1910.1007................................................... 1218-0083
1910.1008................................................... 1218-0087
1910.1009................................................... 1218-0089
1910.1010................................................... 1218-0082
1910.1011................................................... 1218-0090
1910.1012................................................... 1218-0080
1910.1013................................................... 1218-0079
1910.1014................................................... 1218-0088
1910.1015................................................... 1218-0044
1910.1016................................................... 1218-0081
1910.1017................................................... 1218-0010
1910.1018................................................... 1218-0104
1910.1020................................................... 1218-0065
1910.1025................................................... 1218-0092
1910.1027................................................... 1218-0185
1910.1028................................................... 1218-0129
1910.1029................................................... 1218-0128
1910.1030................................................... 1218-0180
1910.1043................................................... 1218-0061
1910.1044................................................... 1218-0101
1910.1045................................................... 1218-0126
1910.1047................................................... 1218-0108
1910.1048................................................... 1218-0145
1910.1050................................................... 1218-0184
1910.1051................................................... 1218-0170
1910.1052................................................... 1218-0179
1910.1096................................................... 1218-0103
1910.1200................................................... 1218-0072
1910.1450................................................... 1218-0131
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996, as amended at 62 FR 29668, June 2, 1997; 62
FR 42666, Aug. 8, 1997; 62 FR 43581, Aug. 14, 1997; 62 FR 65203, Dec.
11, 1997; 63 FR 13340, Mar. 19, 1998; 63 FR 17093, Apr. 8, 1998]
Subpart B--Adoption and Extension of Established Federal Standards
Authority: Secs. 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health
Act, 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Walsh-Healey Act, 41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.;
Service Contract Act of 1965, 41 U.S.C.
[[Page 108]]
351 et seq.; Sec.107, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act
(Construction Safety Act), 40 U.S.C. 333; Sec. 41, Longshore and Harbor
Workers' Compensation Act, 33 U.S.C. 941; National Foundation of Arts
and Humanities Act, 20 U.S.C. 951 et seq.; Secretary of Labor's Order
No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 1911), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55
FR 9033), or 6-96 (62 FR 111), as applicable.
Sec. 1910.11 Scope and purpose.
(a) The provisions of this subpart B adopt and extend the
applicability of, established Federal standards in effect on April 28,
1971, with respect to every employer, employee, and employment covered
by the Act.
(b) It bears emphasis that only standards (i.e., substantive rules)
relating to safety or health are adopted by any incorporations by
reference of standards prescribed elsewhere in this chapter or this
title. Other materials contained in the referenced parties are not
adopted. Illustrations of the types of materials which are not adopted
are these. The incorporations by reference of parts 1915, 1916, 1917,
1918 in Secs. 1910.13, 1910.14, 1910.15, and 1910.16 are not intended to
include the discussion in those parts of the coverage of the
Longshoremen's and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act or the penalty
provisions of the Act. Similarly, the incorporation by reference of part
1926 in Sec. 1910.12 is not intended to include references to
interpretative rules having relevance to the application of the
Construction Safety Act, but having no relevance to the application to
the Occupational Safety and Health Act.
Sec. 1910.12 Construction work.
(a) Standards. The standards prescribed in part 1926 of this chapter
are adopted as occupational safety and health standards under section 6
of the Act and shall apply, according to the provisions thereof, to
every employment and place of employment of every employee engaged in
construction work. Each employer shall protect the employment and places
of employment of each of his employees engaged in construction work by
complying with the appropriate standards prescribed in this paragraph.
(b) Definition. For purposes of this section, Construction work
means work for construction, alteration, and/or repair, including
painting and decorating. See discussion of these terms in Sec. 1926.13
of this title.
(c) Construction Safety Act distinguished. This section adopts as
occupational safety and health standards under section 6 of the Act the
standards which are prescribed in part 1926 of this chapter. Thus, the
standards (substantive rules) published in subpart C and the following
subparts of part 1926 of this chapter are applied. This section does not
incorporate subparts A and B of part 1926 of this chapter. Subparts A
and B have pertinence only to the application of section 107 of the
Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (the Construction Safety
Act). For example, the interpretation of the term ``subcontractor'' in
paragraph (c) of Sec. 1926.13 of this chapter is significant in
discerning the coverage of the Construction Safety Act and duties
thereunder. However, the term ``subcontractor'' has no significance in
the application of the Act, which was enacted under the Commerce Clause
and which establishes duties for ``employers'' which are not dependent
for their application upon any contractual relationship with the Federal
Government or upon any form of Federal financial assistance.
(d) For the purposes of this part, to the extent that it may not
already be included in paragraph (b) of this section, ``construction
work'' includes the erection of new electric transmission and
distribution lines and equipment, and the alteration, conversion, and
improvement of the existing transmission and distribution lines and
equipment.
Sec. 1910.15 Shipyard employment.
(a) Adoption and extension of established safety and health
standards for shipyard employment. The standards prescribed by part 1915
(formerly parts 1501-1503) of this title and in effect on April 28, 1971
(as revised), are adopted as occupational safety or health standards
under section 6(a) of the Act and shall apply, according to the
provisions thereof, to every employment and place of employment of every
employee engaged in ship repair, shipbreaking, and shipbuilding, or a
related employment. Each employer shall protect the employment and
places of employment
[[Page 109]]
of each of his employees engaged in ship repair, shipbreaking, and
shipbuilding, or a related employment, by complying with the appropriate
standards prescribed by this paragraph.
(b) Definitions. For purposes of this section:
(1) Ship repair means any repair of a vessel, including, but not
restricted to, alterations, conversions, installations, cleaning,
painting, and maintenance work;
(2) Shipbreaking means any breaking down of a vessel's structure for
the purpose of scrapping the vessel, including the removal of gear,
equipment, or any component of a vessel;
(3) Shipbuilding means the construction of a vessel, including the
installation of machinery and equipment;
(4) Related employment means any employment performed as an incident
to, or in conjunction with, ship repair, shipbreaking, and shipbuilding
work, including, but not restricted to, inspection, testing, and
employment as a watchman; and
(5) Vessel includes every description of watercraft or other
artificial contrivance used, or capable of being used, as a means of
transportation on water, including special purpose floating structures
not primarily designed for, or used as a means of, transportation on
water.
[58 FR 35308, June 30, 1993]
Sec. 1910.16 Longshoring and marine terminals.
(a) Safety and health standards for longshoring. (1) Part 1918 of
this chapter shall apply exclusively, according to the provisions
thereof, to all employment of every employee engaged in longshoring
operations or related employment aboard any vessel. All cargo transfer
accomplished with the use of shore-based material handling devices shall
be governed by part 1917 of this chapter.
(2) Part 1910 does not apply to longshoring operations except for
the following provisions:
(i) Access to employee exposure and medical records. Subpart Z,
Sec. 1910.1020;
(ii) Commercial diving operations. Subpart T;
(iii) Electrical. Subpart S when shore-based electrical
installations provide power for use aboard vessels;
(iv) Hazard communication. Subpart Z, Sec. 1910.1200;
(v) Ionizing radiation. Subpart Z, Sec. 1910.1096;
(vi) Noise. Subpart G, Sec. 1910.95;
(vii) Nonionizing radiation. Subpart G, Sec. 1910.97;
Note to paragraph (a)(2)(vii): Exposures to nonionizing radiation
emissions from commercial vessel transmitters are considered hazardous
under the following conditions: (1) where the radar is transmitting, the
scanner is stationary, and the exposure distance is 18.7 feet (6 m.) or
less; or (2) where the radar is transmitting, the scanner is rotating,
and the exposure distance is 5.2 feet (1.8 m.) or less.
(viii) Respiratory protection. Subpart I, Sec. 1910.134;
(ix) Toxic and hazardous substances. Subpart Z applies to marine
cargo handling activities except for the following:
(A) When a substance or cargo is contained within a sealed, intact
means of packaging or containment complying with Department of
Transportation or International Maritime Organization requirements;\1\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The International Maritime Organization publishes the
International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code to aid compliance with the
international legal requirements of the International Convention for the
Safety of Life at Sea, 1960.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
(B) Bloodborne pathogens, Sec. 1910.1030;
(C) Carbon monoxide, Sec. 1910.1000 (See Sec. 1918.94 (a)); and
(D) Hydrogen sulfide, Sec. 1910.1000 (See Sec. 1918.94 (f)).
(x) Powered industrial truck operator training, Subpart N,
Sec. 1910.178(l).
(b) Safety and health standards for marine terminals. Part 1917 of
this chapter shall apply exclusively, according to the provisions
thereof, to employment within a marine terminal, except as follows:
(1) The provisions of part 1917 of this chapter do not apply to the
following:
(i) Facilities used solely for the bulk storage, handling, and
transfer of flammable and combustible liquids and gases.
(ii) Facilities subject to the regulations of the Office of Pipeline
Safety of
[[Page 110]]
the Research and Special Programs Administration, Department of
Transportation (49 CFR chapter I, subchapter D), to the extent such
regulations apply to specific working conditions.
(iii) Fully automated bulk coal handling facilities contiguous to
electrical power generating plants.
(2) Part 1910 does not apply to marine terminals except for the
following:
(i) Abrasive blasting. Subpart G, Sec. 1910.94(a);
(ii) Access to employee exposure and medical records. Subpart Z,
Sec. 1910.1020;
(iii) Commercial diving operations. Subpart T;
(iv) Electrical. Subpart S;
(v) Grain handling facilities. Subpart R, Sec. 1910.272;
(vi) Hazard communication. Subpart Z, Sec. 1910.1200;
(vii) Ionizing radiation. Subpart Z, Sec. 1910.1096;
(viii) Noise. Subpart G, Sec. 1910.95;
(ix) Nonionizing radiation. Subpart G, Sec. 1910.97.
(x) Respiratory protection. Subpart I, Sec. 1910.134.
(xi) Safety requirements for scaffolding. Subpart D, Sec. 1910.28;
(xii) Servicing multi-piece and single piece rim wheels. Subpart N,
Sec. 1910.177;
(xiii) Toxic and hazardous substances. Subpart Z applies to marine
cargo handling activities except for the following:
(A) When a substance or cargo is contained within a sealed, intact
means of packaging or containment complying with Department of
Transportation or International Maritime Organization requirements; \2\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\2\ The International Maritime Organization publishes the
International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code to aid compliance with the
international legal requirements of the International Convention for the
Safety of Life at Sea, 1960.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
(B) Bloodborne pathogens, Sec. 1910.1030;
(C) Carbon monoxide, Sec. 1910.1000 (See Sec. 1917.24(a)); and
(D) Hydrogen sulfide, Sec. 1910.1000 (See Sec. 1917.73(a)(2)); and
(xiv) Powered industrial truck operator training, Subpart N,
Sec. 1910.178(l).
(c) Definitions. For purposes of this section:
(1) Longshoring operation means the loading, unloading, moving, or
handling of, cargo, ship's stores, gear, etc., into, in, on, or out of
any vessel;
(2) Related employment means any employment performed as an incident
to or in conjunction with, longshoring operations including, but not
restricted to, securing cargo, rigging, and employment as a porter,
checker, or watchman; and
(3) Vessel includes every description of watercraft or other
artificial contrivance used, or capable of being used, as a means of
transportation on water, including special purpose floating structures
not primarily designed for, or used as a means of, transportation on
water.
(4) Marine terminal means wharves, bulkheads, quays, piers, docks
and other berthing locations and adjacent storage or adjacent areas and
structures associated with the primary movement of cargo or materials
from vessel to shore or shore to vessel including structures which are
devoted to receiving, handling, holding, consolidation and loading or
delivery of waterborne shipments or passengers, including areas devoted
to the maintenance of the terminal or equipment. The term does not
include production or manufacturing areas having their own docking
facilities and located at a marine terminal nor does the term include
storage facilities directly associated with those production or
manufacturing areas.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 48 FR 30908, July 5, 1983; 52
FR 36026, Sept. 25, 1987; 62 FR 40195, July 25, 1997; 63 FR 66270, Dec.
1, 1998]
Sec. 1910.17 Effective dates.
(a)-(b) [Reserved]
(c) Except whenever any employment or place of employment is, or
becomes, subject to any safety and health standard prescribed in part
1915, 1916, 1917, 1918, or 1926 of this title on a date before August
27, 1971, by virtue of the Construction Safety Act or the Longshoremen's
and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act, that occupational safety and
health standard as incorporated by reference in this subpart shall also
become effective under the Williams-
[[Page 111]]
Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 on that date.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.18 Changes in established Federal standards.
Whenever an occupational safety and health standard adopted and
incorporated by reference in this subpart B is changed pursuant to
section 6(b) of the Act and the statute under which the standard was
originally promulgated, and in accordance with part 1911 of this
chapter, the standard shall be deemed changed for purposes of that
statute and this subpart B, and shall apply under this subpart B. For
the purposes of this section, a change in a standard includes any
amendment, addition, or repeal, in whole or in part, of any standard.
Sec. 1910.19 Special provisions for air contaminants.
(a) Asbestos, tremolite, anthophyllite, and actinolite dust. Section
1910.1001 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to asbestos,
tremolite, anthophyllite, and actinolite dust in every employment and
place of employment covered by Sec. 1910.16, in lieu of any different
standard on exposure to asbestos, tremolite, anthophyllite, and
actinolite dust which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of any of
those sections.
(b) Vinyl chloride. Section 1910.1017 shall apply to the exposure of
every employee to vinyl chloride in every employment and place of
employment covered by Secs. 1910.12, 1910.13, 1910.14, 1910.15, or
1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to vinyl chloride
which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of any of those sections.
(c) Acrylonitrile. Section 1910.1045 shall apply to the exposure of
every employee to acrylonitrile in every employment and place of
employment covered by Secs. 1910.12, 1910.13, 1910.14, 1910.15, or
Sec. 1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to
acrylonitrile which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of any of
those sections.
(d) [Reserved]
(e) Inorganic arsenic. Section 1910.1018 shall apply to the exposure
of every employee to inorganic arsenic in every employment covered by
Secs. 1910.12, 1910.13, 1910.14, 1910.15, or Sec. 1910.16, in lieu of
any different standard on exposure to inorganic arsenic which would
otherwise be applicable by virtue of any of those sections.
(f) [Reserved]
(g) Lead. Section 1910.1025 shall apply to the exposure of every
employee to lead in every employment and place of employment covered by
Secs. 1910.13, 1910.14, 1910.15, and 1910.16, in lieu of any different
standard on exposure to lead which would otherwise be applicable by
virtue of those sections.
(h) Ethylene oxide. Section 1910.1047 shall apply to the exposure of
every employee to ethylene oxide in every employment and place of
employment covered by Secs. 1910.12, 1910.13, 1910.14, 1910.15, or
1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to ethylene oxide
which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of those sections.
(i) 4,4'-Methylenedianiline (MDA). Section 1910.1050 shall apply to
the exposure of every employee to MDA in every employment and place of
employment covered by Secs. 1910.13, 1910.14, 1910.15, or 1910.16, in
lieu of any different standard on exposure to MDA which would otherwise
be applicable by virtue of those sections.
(j) Formaldehyde. Section 1910.1048 shall apply to the exposure of
every employee to formaldehyde in every employment and place of
employment covered by Sec. 1910.12, 1910.13, 1910.14, 1910.15 or 1910.16
in lieu of any different standard on exposure to formaldehyde which
would otherwise be applicable by virtue of those sections.
(k) Cadmium. Section 1910.1027 shall apply to the exposure of every
employee to cadmium in every employment and place of employment covered
by 1910.16 in lieu of any different standard on exposures to cadmium
that would otherwise be applicable by virtue of those sections.
(l) 1,3-Butadiene (BD). Section 1910.1051 shall apply to the
exposure of every employee to BD in every employment and place of
employment covered by Secs. 1910.12, 1910.13, 1910.14, 1910.15, or
1910.16, in lieu of any different standard
[[Page 112]]
on exposure to BD which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of those
sections.
(m) Methylene chloride (MC). Section 1910.1052 shall apply to the
exposure of every employee to MC in every employment and place of
employment covered by Sec. 1910.16 in lieu of any different standard on
exposure to MC which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of that
section when it is not present in sealed, intact containers.
[43 FR 28473, June 30, 1978, as amended at 43 FR 45809, Oct. 3, 1978; 43
FR 53007, Nov. 14, 1978; 44 FR 5447, Jan. 26, 1979; 46 FR 32022, June
19, 1981; 49 FR 25796, June 22, 1984; 50 FR 51173, Dec. 13, 1985; 52 FR
46291, Dec. 4, 1987; 57 FR 35666, Aug. 10, 1992; 57 FR 42388, Sept. 14,
1992; 59 FR 41057, Aug. 10, 1994; 61 FR 56831, Nov. 4, 1996; 62 FR 1600,
Jan. 10, 1997]
Subpart C [Reserved]
Subpart D--Walking-Working Surfaces
Authority: Secs. 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health
Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of Labor's Order
No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), or 1-90
(55 FR 9033), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
Sec. 1910.21 Definitions.
(a) As used in Sec. 1910.23, unless the context requires otherwise,
floor and wall opening, railing and toe board terms shall have the
meanings ascribed in this paragraph.
(1) Floor hole. An opening measuring less than 12 inches but more
than 1 inch in its least dimension, in any floor, platform, pavement, or
yard, through which materials but not persons may fall; such as a belt
hole, pipe opening, or slot opening.
(2) Floor opening. An opening measuring 12 inches or more in its
least dimension, in any floor, platform, pavement, or yard through which
persons may fall; such as a hatchway, stair or ladder opening, pit, or
large manhole. Floor openings occupied by elevators, dumb waiters,
conveyors, machinery, or containers are excluded from this subpart.
(3) Handrail. A single bar or pipe supported on brackets from a wall
or partition, as on a stairway or ramp, to furnish persons with a
handhold in case of tripping.
(4) Platform. A working space for persons, elevated above the
surrounding floor or ground; such as a balcony or platform for the
operation of machinery and equipment.
(5) Runway. A passageway for persons, elevated above the surrounding
floor or ground level, such as a footwalk along shafting or a walkway
between buildings.
(6) Standard railing. A vertical barrier erected along exposed edges
of a floor opening, wall opening, ramp, platform, or runway to prevent
falls of persons.
(7) Standard strength and construction. Any construction of
railings, covers, or other guards that meets the requirements of
Sec. 1910.23.
(8) Stair railing. A vertical barrier erected along exposed sides of
a stairway to prevent falls of persons.
(9) Toeboard. A vertical barrier at floor level erected along
exposed edges of a floor opening, wall opening, platform, runway, or
ramp to prevent falls of materials.
(10) Wall hole. An opening less than 30 inches but more than 1 inch
high, of unrestricted width, in any wall or partition; such as a
ventilation hole or drainage scupper.
(11) Wall opening. An opening at least 30 inches high and 18 inches
wide, in any wall or partition, through which persons may fall; such as
a yard-arm doorway or chute opening.
(b) As used in Sec. 1910.24, unless the context requires otherwise,
fixed industrial stair terms shall have the meaning ascribed in this
paragraph.
(1) Handrail. A single bar or pipe supported on brackets from a wall
or partition to provide a continuous handhold for persons using a stair.
(2) Nose, nosing. That portion of a tread projecting beyond the face
of the riser immediately below.
(3) Open riser. The air space between the treads of stairways
without upright members (risers).
(4) Platform. An extended step or landing breaking a continuous run
of stairs.
(5) Railing. A vertical barrier erected along exposed sides of
stairways and platforms to prevent falls of persons.
[[Page 113]]
The top member of railing usually serves as a handrail.
(6) Rise. The vertical distance from the top of a tread to the top
of the next higher tread.
(7) Riser. The upright member of a step situated at the back of a
lower tread and near the leading edge of the next higher tread.
(8) Stairs, stairway. A series of steps leading from one level or
floor to another, or leading to platforms, pits, boiler rooms,
crossovers, or around machinery, tanks, and other equipment that are
used more or less continuously or routinely by employees, or only
occasionally by specific individuals. A series of steps and landings
having three or more risers constitutes stairs or stairway.
(9) Tread. The horizontal member of a step.
(10) Tread run. The horizontal distance from the leading edge of a
tread to the leading edge of an adjacent tread.
(11) Tread width. The horizontal distance from front to back of
tread including nosing when used.
(c) As used in Sec. 1910.25, unless the context requires otherwise,
portable wood ladders terms shall have the meanings ascribed in this
paragraph.
(1) Ladders. A ladder is an appliance usually consisting of two side
rails joined at regular intervals by cross- pieces called steps, rungs,
or cleats, on which a person may step in ascending or descending.
(2) Stepladder. A stepladder is a selfsupporting portable ladder,
nonadjustable in length, having flat steps and a hinged back. Its size
is designated by the overall length of the ladder measured along the
front edge of the side rails.
(3) Single ladder. A single ladder is a non-self-supporting portable
ladder, nonadjustable in length, consisting of but one section. Its size
is designated by the overall length of the side rail.
(4) Extension ladder. An extension ladder is a non-self-supporting
portable ladder adjustable in length. It consists of two or more
sections traveling in guides or brackets so arranged as to permit length
adjustment. Its size is designated by the sum of the lengths of the
sections measured along the side rails.
(5) Sectional ladder. A sectional ladder is a non-self-supporting
portable ladder, nonadjustable in length, consisting of two or more
sections of ladder so constructed that the sections may be combined to
function as a single ladder. Its size is designated by the overall
length of the assembled sections.
(6) Trestle ladder. A trestle ladder is a self-supporting portable
ladder, nonadjustable in length, consisting of two sections hinged at
the top to form equal angles with the base. The size is designated by
the length of the side rails measured along the front edge.
(7) Extension trestle ladder. An extension trestle ladder is a self-
supporting portable ladder, adjustable in length, consisting of a
trestle ladder base and a vertically adjustable single ladder, with
suitable means for locking the ladders together. The size is designated
by the length of the trestle ladder base.
(8) Special-purpose ladder. A special-purpose ladder is a portable
ladder which represents either a modification or a combination of design
or construction features in one of the general-purpose types of ladders
previously defined, in order to adapt the ladder to special or specific
uses.
(9) Trolley ladder. A trolley ladder is a semifixed ladder,
nonadjustable in length, supported by attachments to an overhead track,
the plane of the ladder being at right angles to the plane of motion.
(10) Side-rolling ladder. A side-rolling ladder is a semifixed
ladder, nonadjustable in length, supported by attachments to a guide
rail, which is generally fastened to shelving, the plane of the ladder
being also its plane of motion.
(11) Wood characteristics. Wood characteristics are distinguishing
features which by their extent and number determine the quality of a
piece of wood.
(12) Wood irregularities. Wood irregularities are natural
characteristics in or on wood that may lower its durability, strength,
or utility.
(13) Cross grain. Cross grain (slope of grain) is a deviation of the
fiber direction from a line parallel to the sides of the piece.
[[Page 114]]
(14) Knot. A knot is a branch or limb, imbedded in the tree and cut
through in the process of lumber manufacture, classified according to
size, quality, and occurrence. The size of the knot is determined as the
average diameter on the surface of the piece.
(15) Pitch and bark pockets. A pitch pocket is an opening extending
parallel to the annual growth rings containing, or that has contained,
pitch, either solid or liquid. A bark pocket is an opening between
annual growth rings that contains bark.
(16) Shake. A shake is a separation along the grain, most of which
occurs between the rings of annual growth.
(17) Check. A check is a lengthwise separation of the wood, most of
which occurs across the rings of annual growth.
(18) Wane. Wane is bark, or the lack of wood from any cause, on the
corner of a piece.
(19) Decay. Decay is disintegration of wood substance due to action
of wood-destroying fungi. It is also known as dote and rot.
(20) Compression failure. A compression failure is a deformation
(buckling) of the fibers due to excessive compression along the grain.
(21) Compression wood. Compression wood is an aberrant (abnormal)
and highly variable type of wood structure occurring in softwood
species. The wood commonly has density somewhat higher than does normal
wood, but somewhat lower stiffness and tensile strength for its weight
in addition to high longitudinal shrinkage.
(22) Low density. Low-density wood is that which is exceptionally
light in weight and usually deficient in strength properties for the
species.
(d) As used in Sec. 1910.26, unless the context requires otherwise,
portable metal ladder terms shall have the meanings ascribed in this
paragraph.
(1) Ladder. A ladder is an appliance usually consisting of two side
rails joined at regular intervals by cross- pieces called steps, rungs,
or cleats, on which a person may step in ascending or descending.
(2) Step ladder. A step ladder is a self-supporting portable ladder,
nonadjustable in length, having flat steps and a hinged back. Its size
is designated by the overall length of the ladder measured along the
front edge of the side rails.
(3) Single ladder. A single ladder is a non-self-supporting portable
ladder, nonadjustable in length, consisting of but one section. Its size
is designated by the overall length of the side rail.
(4) Extension ladder. An extension ladder is a non-self-supporting
portable ladder adjustable in length. It consists of two or more
sections traveling in guides or brackets so arranged as to permit length
adjustment. Its size is designated by the sum of the lengths of the
sections measured along the side rails.
(5) Platform ladder. A self-supporting ladder of fixed size with a
platform provided at the working level. The size is determined by the
distance along the front rail from the platform to the base of the
ladder.
(6) Sectional ladder. A sectional ladder is a non-self-supporting
portable ladder, non-adjustable in length, consisting of two or more
sections so constructed that the sections may be combined to function as
a single ladder. Its size is designated by the overall length of the
assembled sections.
(7) Trestle ladder. A trestle ladder is a self-supporting portable
ladder, non-adjustable in length, consisting of two sections, hinged at
the top to form equal angles with the base. The size is designated by
the length of the side rails measured along the front edge.
(8) Extension trestle ladder. An extension trestle ladder is a self-
supporting portable ladder, adjustable in length, consisting of a
trestle ladder base and a vertically adjustable single ladder, with
suitable means for locking the ladders together. The size is designated
by the length of the trestle ladder base.
(9) Special-purpose ladder. A special-purpose ladder is a portable
ladder which represents either a modification or a combination of design
or construction features in one of the general-purpose types of ladders
previously defined, in order to adapt the ladder to special or specific
uses.
(e) As used in Sec. 1910.27, unless the context requires otherwise,
fixed ladder terms shall have the meanings ascribed in this paragraph.
[[Page 115]]
(1) Ladder. A ladder is an appliance usually consisting of two side
rails joined at regular intervals by cross- pieces called steps, rungs,
or cleats, on which a person may step in ascending or descending.
(2) Fixed ladder. A fixed ladder is a ladder permanently attached to
a structure, building, or equipment.
(3) Individual-rung ladder. An individual-rung ladder is a fixed
ladder each rung of which is individually attached to a structure,
building, or equipment.
(4) Rail ladder. A rail ladder is a fixed ladder consisting of side
rails joined at regular intervals by rungs or cleats and fastened in
full length or in sections to a building, structure, or equipment.
(5) Railings. A railing is any one or a combination of those
railings constructed in accordance with Sec. 1910.23. A standard railing
is a vertical barrier erected along exposed edges of floor openings,
wall openings, ramps, platforms, and runways to prevent falls of
persons.
(6) Pitch. Pitch is the included angle between the horizontal and
the ladder, measured on the opposite side of the ladder from the
climbing side.
(7) Fastenings. A fastening is a device to attach a ladder to a
structure, building, or equipment.
(8) Rungs. Rungs are ladder cross- pieces of circular or oval cross-
section on which a person may step in ascending or descending.
(9) Cleats. Cleats are ladder cross- pieces of rectangular cross-
section placed on edge on which a person may step in ascending or
descending.
(10) Steps. Steps are the flat cross- pieces of a ladder on which a
person may step in ascending or descending.
(11) Cage. A cage is a guard that may be referred to as a cage or
basket guard which is an enclosure that is fastened to the side rails of
the fixed ladder or to the structure to encircle the climbing space of
the ladder for the safety of the person who must climb the ladder.
(12) Well. A well is a permanent complete enclosure around a fixed
ladder, which is attached to the walls of the well. Proper clearances
for a well will give the person who must climb the ladder the same
protection as a cage.
(13) Ladder safety device. A ladder safety device is any device,
other than a cage or well, designed to eliminate or reduce the
possibility of accidental falls and which may incorporate such features
as life belts, friction brakes, and sliding attachments.
(14) Grab bars. Grab bars are individual handholds placed adjacent
to or as an extension above ladders for the purpose of providing access
beyond the limits of the ladder.
(15) Through ladder. A through ladder is one from which a man
getting off at the top must step through the ladder in order to reach
the landing.
(16) Side-step ladder. A side-step ladder is one from which a man
getting off at the top must step sideways from the ladder in order to
reach the landing.
(f) As used in Sec. 1910.28, unless the context requires otherwise,
scaffolding terms shall have the meaning ascribed in this paragraph.
(1) Bearer. A horizontal member of a scaffold upon which the
platform rests and which may be supported by ledgers.
(2) Boatswain's chair. A seat supported by slings attached to a
suspended rope, designed to accommodate one workman in a sitting
position.
(3) Brace. A tie that holds one scaffold member in a fixed position
with respect to another member.
(4) Bricklayers' square scaffold. A scaffold composed of framed wood
squares which support a platform limited to light and medium duty.
(5) Carpenters' bracket scaffold. A scaffold consisting of wood or
metal brackets supporting a platform.
(6) Coupler. A device for locking together the component parts of a
tubular metal scaffold. The material used for the couplers shall be of a
structural type, such as a drop-forged steel, malleable iron, or
structural grade aluminum. The use of gray cast iron is prohibited.
(7) Crawling board or chicken ladder. A plank with cleats spaced and
secured at equal intervals, for use by a worker on roofs, not designed
to carry any material.
(8) Double pole or independent pole scaffold. A scaffold supported
from the base by a double row of uprights, independent of support from
the walls and
[[Page 116]]
constructed of uprights, ledgers, horizontal platform bearers, and
diagonal bracing.
(9) Float or ship scaffold. A scaffold hung from overhead supports
by means of ropes and consisting of a substantial platform having
diagonal bracing underneath, resting upon and securely fastened to two
parallel plank bearers at right angles to the span.
(10) Guardrail. A rail secured to uprights and erected along the
exposed sides and ends of platforms.
(11) Heavy duty scaffold. A scaffold designed and constructed to
carry a working load not to exceed 75 pounds per square foot.
(12) Horse scaffold. A scaffold for light or medium duty, composed
of horses supporting a work platform.
(13) Interior hung scaffold. A scaffold suspended from the ceiling
or roof structure.
(14) Ladder jack scaffold. A light duty scaffold supported by
brackets attached to ladders.
(15) Ledger (stringer). A horizontal scaffold member which extends
from post to post and which supports the putlogs or bearer forming a tie
between the posts.
(16) Light duty scaffold. A scaffold designed and constructed to
carry a working load not to exceed 25 pounds per square foot.
(17) Manually propelled mobile scaffold. A portable rolling scaffold
supported by casters.
(18) Masons' adjustable multiple-point suspension scaffold. A
scaffold having a continuous platform supported by bearers suspended by
wire rope from overhead supports, so arranged and operated as to permit
the raising or lowering of the platform to desired working positions.
(19) Maximum intended load. The total of all loads including the
working load, the weight of the scaffold, and such other loads as may be
reasonably anticipated.
(20) Medium duty scaffold. A scaffold designed and constructed to
carry a working load not to exceed 50 pounds per square foot.
(21) Mid-rail. A rail approximately midway between the guardrail and
platform, used when required, and secured to the uprights erected along
the exposed sides and ends of platforms.
(22) Needle beam scaffold. A light duty scaffold consisting of
needle beams supporting a platform.
(23) Outrigger scaffold. A scaffold supported by outriggers or
thrustouts projecting beyond the wall or face of the building or
structure, the inboard ends of which are secured inside of such a
building or structure.
(24) Putlog. A scaffold member upon which the platform rests.
(25) Roofing bracket. A bracket used in sloped roof construction,
having provisions for fastening to the roof or supported by ropes
fastened over the ridge and secured to some suitable object.
(26) Runner. The lengthwise horizontal bracing or bearing members or
both.
(27) Scaffold. Any temporary elevated platform and its supporting
structure used for supporting workmen or materials or both.
(28) Single-point adjustable suspension scaffold. A manually or
power-operated unit designed for light duty use, supported by a single
wire rope from an overhead support so arranged and operated as to permit
the raising or lowering of the platform to desired working positions.
(29) Single pole scaffold. Platforms resting on putlogs or
crossbeams, the outside ends of which are supported on ledgers secured
to a single row of posts or uprights and the inner ends of which are
supported on or in a wall.
(30) Stone setters' adjustable multiple-point suspension scaffold. A
swinging-type scaffold having a platform supported by hangers suspended
at four points so as to permit the raising or lowering of the platform
to the desired working position by the use of hoisting machines.
(31) Toeboard. A barrier secured along the sides and ends of a
platform, to guard against the falling of material.
(32) Tube and coupler scaffold. An assembly consisting of tubing
which serves as posts, bearers, braces, ties, and runners, a base
supporting the posts, and special couplers which serve to connect the
uprights and to join the various members.
[[Page 117]]
(33) Tubular welded frame scaffold. A sectional, panel, or frame
metal scaffold substantially built up of prefabricated welded sections
which consist of posts and horizontal bearer with intermediate members.
Panels or frames shall be braced with diagonal or cross braces.
(34) Two-point suspension scaffold (swinging scaffold). A scaffold,
the platform of which is supported by hangers (stirrups) at two points,
suspended from overhead supports so as to permit the raising or lowering
of the platform to the desired working position by tackle or hoisting
machines.
(35) Window jack scaffold. A scaffold, the platform of which is
supported by a bracket or jack which projects through a window opening.
(36) Working load. Load imposed by men, materials, and equipment.
(g) As used in Sec. 1910.29, unless the context requires otherwise,
manually propelled mobile ladder stand and scaffold (tower) terms shall
have the meaning ascribed in this paragraph.
(1) Bearer. A horizontal member of a scaffold upon which the
platform rests and which may be supported by ledgers.
(2) Brace. A tie that holds one scaffold member in a fixed position
with respect to another member.
(3) Climbing ladder. A separate ladder with equally spaced rungs
usually attached to the scaffold structure for climbing and descending.
(4) Coupler. A device for locking together the components of a
tubular metal scaffold which shall be designed and used to safely
support the maximum intended loads.
(5) Design working load. The maximum intended load, being the total
of all loads including the weight of the men, materials, equipment, and
platform.
(6) Equivalent. Alternative design or features, which will provide
an equal degree or factor of safety.
(7) Guardrail. A barrier secured to uprights and erected along the
exposed sides and ends of platforms to prevent falls of persons.
(8) Handrail. A rail connected to a ladder stand running parallel to
the slope and/or top step.
(9) Ladder stand. A mobile fixed size self-supporting ladder
consisting of a wide flat tread ladder in the form of stairs. The
assembly may include handrails.
(10) Ledger (stringer). A horizontal scaffold member which extends
from post to post and which supports the bearer forming a tie between
the posts.
(11) Mobile scaffold (tower). A light, medium, or heavy duty
scaffold mounted on casters or wheels.
(12) Mobile. ``Manually propelled.''
(13) Mobile work platform. Generally a fixed work level one frame
high on casters or wheels, with bracing diagonally from platform to
vertical frame.
(14) Runner. The lengthwise horizontal bracing and/or bearing
members.
(15) Scaffold. Any temporary elevated platform and its necessary
vertical, diagonal, and horizontal members used for supporting workmen
and materials. (Also known as a scaffold tower.)
(16) Toeboard. A barrier at platform level erected along the exposed
sides and ends of a scaffold platform to prevent falls of materials.
(17) Tube and coupler scaffold. An assembly consisting of tubing
which serves as posts, bearers, braces, ties, and runners, a base
supporting the posts, and uprights, and serves to join the various
members, usually used in fixed locations.
(18) Tubular welded frame scaffold. A sectional, panel, or frame
metal scaffold substantially built up of prefabricated welded sections,
which consist of posts and bearers with intermediate connecting members
and braced with diagonal or cross braces.
(19) Tubular welded sectional folding scaffold. A sectional, folding
metal scaffold either of ladder frame or inside stairway design,
substantially built of prefabricated welded sections, which consist of
end frames, platform frame, inside inclined stairway frame and braces,
or hinged connected diagonal and horizontal braces, capable of being
folded into a flat package when the scaffold is not in use.
(20) Work level. The elevated platform, used for supporting workmen
and their materials, comprising the necessary vertical, horizontal, and
diagonal braces, guardrails, and ladder for access to the work platform.
[[Page 118]]
Sec. 1910.22 General requirements.
This section applies to all permanent places of employment, except
where domestic, mining, or agricultural work only is performed. Measures
for the control of toxic materials are considered to be outside the
scope of this section.
(a) Housekeeping. (1) All places of employment, passageways,
storerooms, and service rooms shall be kept clean and orderly and in a
sanitary condition.
(2) The floor of every workroom shall be maintained in a clean and,
so far as possible, a dry condition. Where wet processes are used,
drainage shall be maintained, and false floors, platforms, mats, or
other dry standing places should be provided where practicable.
(3) To facilitate cleaning, every floor, working place, and
passageway shall be kept free from protruding nails, splinters, holes,
or loose boards.
(b) Aisles and passageways. (1) Where mechanical handling equipment
is used, sufficient safe clearances shall be allowed for aisles, at
loading docks, through doorways and wherever turns or passage must be
made. Aisles and passageways shall be kept clear and in good repairs,
with no obstruction across or in aisles that could create a hazard.
(2) Permanent aisles and passageways shall be appropriately marked.
(c) Covers and guardrails. Covers and/or guardrails shall be
provided to protect personnel from the hazards of open pits, tanks,
vats, ditches, etc.
(d) Floor loading protection. (1) In every building or other
structure, or part thereof, used for mercantile, business, industrial,
or storage purposes, the loads approved by the building official shall
be marked on plates of approved design which shall be supplied and
securely affixed by the owner of the building, or his duly authorized
agent, in a conspicuous place in each space to which they relate. Such
plates shall not be removed or defaced but, if lost, removed, or
defaced, shall be replaced by the owner or his agent.
(2) It shall be unlawful to place, or cause, or permit to be placed,
on any floor or roof of a building or other structure a load greater
than that for which such floor or roof is approved by the building
official.
Sec. 1910.23 Guarding floor and wall openings and holes.
(a) Protection for floor openings. (1) Every stairway floor opening
shall be guarded by a standard railing constructed in accordance with
paragraph (e) of this section. The railing shall be provided on all
exposed sides (except at entrance to stairway). For infrequently used
stairways where traffic across the opening prevents the use of fixed
standard railing (as when located in aisle spaces, etc.), the guard
shall consist of a hinged floor opening cover of standard strength and
construction and removable standard railings on all exposed sides
(except at entrance to stairway).
(2) Every ladderway floor opening or platform shall be guarded by a
standard railing with standard toeboard on all exposed sides (except at
entrance to opening), with the passage through the railing either
provided with a swinging gate or so offset that a person cannot walk
directly into the opening.
(3) Every hatchway and chute floor opening shall be guarded by one
of the following:
(i) Hinged floor opening cover of standard strength and construction
equipped with standard railings or permanently attached thereto so as to
leave only one exposed side. When the opening is not in use, the cover
shall be closed or the exposed side shall be guarded at both top and
intermediate positions by removable standard railings.
(ii) A removable railing with toeboard on not more than two sides of
the opening and fixed standard railings with toeboards on all other
exposed sides. The removable railings shall be kept in place when the
opening is not in use.
Where operating conditions necessitate the feeding of material into any
hatchway or chute opening, protection shall be provided to prevent a
person from falling through the opening.
(4) Every skylight floor opening and hole shall be guarded by a
standard skylight screen or a fixed standard railing on all exposed
sides.
[[Page 119]]
(5) Every pit and trapdoor floor opening, infrequently used, shall
be guarded by a floor opening cover of standard strength and
construction. While the cover is not in place, the pit or trap opening
shall be constantly attended by someone or shall be protected on all
exposed sides by removable standard railings.
(6) Every manhole floor opening shall be guarded by a standard
manhole cover which need not be hinged in place. While the cover is not
in place, the manhole opening shall be constantly attended by someone or
shall be protected by removable standard railings.
(7) Every temporary floor opening shall have standard railings, or
shall be constantly attended by someone.
(8) Every floor hole into which persons can accidentally walk shall
be guarded by either:
(i) A standard railing with standard toeboard on all exposed sides,
or
(ii) A floor hole cover of standard strength and construction. While
the cover is not in place, the floor hole shall be constantly attended
by someone or shall be protected by a removable standard railing.
(9) Every floor hole into which persons cannot accidentally walk (on
account of fixed machinery, equipment, or walls) shall be protected by a
cover that leaves no openings more than 1 inch wide. The cover shall be
securely held in place to prevent tools or materials from falling
through.
(10) Where doors or gates open directly on a stairway, a platform
shall be provided, and the swing of the door shall not reduce the
effective width to less than 20 inches.
(b) Protection for wall openings and holes. (1) Every wall opening
from which there is a drop of more than 4 feet shall be guarded by one
of the following:
(i) Rail, roller, picket fence, half door, or equivalent barrier.
Where there is exposure below to falling materials, a removable toe
board or the equivalent shall also be provided. When the opening is not
in use for handling materials, the guard shall be kept in position
regardless of a door on the opening. In addition, a grab handle shall be
provided on each side of the opening with its center approximately 4
feet above floor level and of standard strength and mounting.
(ii) Extension platform onto which materials can be hoisted for
handling, and which shall have side rails or equivalent guards of
standard specifications.
(2) Every chute wall opening from which there is a drop of more than
4 feet shall be guarded by one or more of the barriers specified in
paragraph (b)(1) of this section or as required by the conditions.
(3) Every window wall opening at a stairway landing, floor,
platform, or balcony, from which there is a drop of more than 4 feet,
and where the bottom of the opening is less than 3 feet above the
platform or landing, shall be guarded by standard slats, standard grill
work (as specified in paragraph (e)(11) of this section), or standard
railing.
Where the window opening is below the landing, or platform, a standard
toe board shall be provided.
(4) Every temporary wall opening shall have adequate guards but
these need not be of standard construction.
(5) Where there is a hazard of materials falling through a wall
hole, and the lower edge of the near side of the hole is less than 4
inches above the floor, and the far side of the hole more than 5 feet
above the next lower level, the hole shall be protected by a standard
toeboard, or an enclosing screen either of solid construction, or as
specified in paragraph (e)(11) of this section.
(c) Protection of open-sided floors, platforms, and runways. (1)
Every open-sided floor or platform 4 feet or more above adjacent floor
or ground level shall be guarded by a standard railing (or the
equivalent as specified in paragraph (e)(3) of this section) on all open
sides except where there is entrance to a ramp, stairway, or fixed
ladder. The railing shall be provided with a toeboard wherever, beneath
the open sides,
(i) Persons can pass,
(ii) There is moving machinery, or
(iii) There is equipment with which falling materials could create a
hazard.
(2) Every runway shall be guarded by a standard railing (or the
equivalent as specified in paragraph (e)(3) of this section) on all open
sides 4 feet or more
[[Page 120]]
above floor or ground level. Wherever tools, machine parts, or materials
are likely to be used on the runway, a toeboard shall also be provided
on each exposed side.
Runways used exclusively for special purposes (such as oiling, shafting,
or filling tank cars) may have the railing on one side omitted where
operating conditions necessitate such omission, providing the falling
hazard is minimized by using a runway of not less than 18 inches wide.
Where persons entering upon runways become thereby exposed to machinery,
electrical equipment, or other danger not a falling hazard, additional
guarding than is here specified may be essential for protection.
(3) Regardless of height, open-sided floors, walkways, platforms, or
runways above or adjacent to dangerous equipment, pickling or
galvanizing tanks, degreasing units, and similar hazards shall be
guarded with a standard railing and toe board.
(d) Stairway railings and guards. (1) Every flight of stairs having
four or more risers shall be equipped with standard stair railings or
standard handrails as specified in paragraphs (d)(1) (i) through (v) of
this section, the width of the stair to be measured clear of all
obstructions except handrails:
(i) On stairways less than 44 inches wide having both sides
enclosed, at least one handrail, preferably on the right side
descending.
(ii) On stairways less than 44 inches wide having one side open, at
least one stair railing on open side.
(iii) On stairways less than 44 inches wide having both sides open,
one stair railing on each side.
(iv) On stairways more than 44 inches wide but less than 88 inches
wide, one handrail on each enclosed side and one stair railing on each
open side.
(v) On stairways 88 or more inches wide, one handrail on each
enclosed side, one stair railing on each open side, and one intermediate
stair railing located approximately midway of the width.
(2) Winding stairs shall be equipped with a handrail offset to
prevent walking on all portions of the treads having width less than 6
inches.
(e) Railing, toe boards, and cover specifications. (1) A standard
railing shall consist of top rail, intermediate rail, and posts, and
shall have a vertical height of 42 inches nominal from upper surface of
top rail to floor, platform, runway, or ramp level. The top rail shall
be smooth-surfaced throughout the length of the railing. The
intermediate rail shall be approximately halfway between the top rail
and the floor, platform, runway, or ramp. The ends of the rails shall
not overhang the terminal posts except where such overhang does not
constitute a projection hazard.
(2) A stair railing shall be of construction similar to a standard
railing but the vertical height shall be not more than 34 inches nor
less than 30 inches from upper surface of top rail to surface of tread
in line with face of riser at forward edge of tread.
(3) [Reserved]
(i) For wood railings, the posts shall be of at least 2-inch by 4-
inch stock spaced not to exceed 6 feet; the top and intermediate rails
shall be of at least 2-inch by 4-inch stock. If top rail is made of two
right-angle pieces of 1-inch by 4-inch stock, posts may be spaced on 8-
foot centers, with 2-inch by 4-inch intermediate rail.
(ii) For pipe railings, posts and top and intermediate railings
shall be at least 1\1/2\ inches nominal diameter with posts spaced not
more than 8 feet on centers.
(iii) For structural steel railings, posts and top and intermediate
rails shall be of 2-inch by 2-inch by \3/8\-inch angles or other metal
shapes of equivalent bending strength with posts spaced not more than 8
feet on centers.
(iv) The anchoring of posts and framing of members for railings of
all types shall be of such construction that the completed structure
shall be capable of withstanding a load of at least 200 pounds applied
in any direction at any point on the top rail.
(v) Other types, sizes, and arrangements of railing construction are
acceptable provided they meet the following conditions:
(a) A smooth-surfaced top rail at a height above floor, platform,
runway, or ramp level of 42 inches nominal;
[[Page 121]]
(b) A strength to withstand at least the minimum requirement of 200
pounds top rail pressure;
(c) Protection between top rail and floor, platform, runway, ramp,
or stair treads, equivalent at least to that afforded by a standard
intermediate rail;
(4) A standard toeboard shall be 4 inches nominal in vertical height
from its top edge to the level of the floor, platform, runway, or ramp.
It shall be securely fastened in place and with not more than \1/4\-inch
clearance above floor level. It may be made of any substantial material
either solid or with openings not over 1 inch in greatest dimension.
Where material is piled to such height that a standard toeboard does not
provide protection, paneling from floor to intermediate rail, or to top
rail shall be provided.
(5)(i) A handrail shall consist of a lengthwise member mounted
directly on a wall or partition by means of brackets attached to the
lower side of the handrail so as to offer no obstruction to a smooth
surface along the top and both sides of the handrail. The handrail shall
be of rounded or other section that will furnish an adequate handhold
for anyone grasping it to avoid falling. The ends of the handrail should
be turned in to the supporting wall or otherwise arranged so as not to
constitute a projection hazard.
(ii) The height of handrails shall be not more than 34 inches nor
less than 30 inches from upper surface of handrail to surface of tread
in line with face of riser or to surface of ramp.
(iii) The size of handrails shall be: When of hardwood, at least 2
inches in diameter; when of metal pipe, at least 1\1/2\ inches in
diameter. The length of brackets shall be such as will give a clearance
between handrail and wall or any projection thereon of at least 3
inches. The spacing of brackets shall not exceed 8 feet.
(iv) The mounting of handrails shall be such that the completed
structure is capable of withstanding a load of at least 200 pounds
applied in any direction at any point on the rail.
(6) All handrails and railings shall be provided with a clearance of
not less than 3 inches between the handrail or railing and any other
object.
(7) Floor opening covers may be of any material that meets the
following strength requirements:
(i) Trench or conduit covers and their supports, when located in
plant roadways, shall be designed to carry a truck rear-axle load of at
least 20,000 pounds.
(ii) Manhole covers and their supports, when located in plant
roadways, shall comply with local standard highway requirements if any;
otherwise, they shall be designed to carry a truck rear-axle load of at
least 20,000 pounds.
(iii) The construction of floor opening covers may be of any
material that meets the strength requirements. Covers projecting not
more than 1 inch above the floor level may be used providing all edges
are chamfered to an angle with the horizontal of not over 30 degrees.
All hinges, handles, bolts, or other parts shall set flush with the
floor or cover surface.
(8) Skylight screens shall be of such construction and mounting that
they are capable of withstanding a load of at least 200 pounds applied
perpendicularly at any one area on the screen. They shall also be of
such construction and mounting that under ordinary loads or impacts,
they will not deflect downward sufficiently to break the glass below
them. The construction shall be of grillwork with openings not more than
4 inches long or of slatwork with openings not more than 2 inches wide
with length unrestricted.
(9) Wall opening barriers (rails, rollers, picket fences, and half
doors) shall be of such construction and mounting that, when in place at
the opening, the barrier is capable of withstanding a load of at least
200 pounds applied in any direction (except upward) at any point on the
top rail or corresponding member.
(10) Wall opening grab handles shall be not less than 12 inches in
length and shall be so mounted as to give 3 inches clearance from the
side framing of the wall opening. The size, material, and anchoring of
the grab handle shall be such that the completed structure is capable of
withstanding a load of at least 200 pounds applied in any direction at
any point of the handle.
(11) Wall opening screens shall be of such construction and mounting
that
[[Page 122]]
they are capable of withstanding a load of at least 200 pounds applied
horizontally at any point on the near side of the screen. They may be of
solid construction, of grillwork with openings not more than 8 inches
long, or of slatwork with openings not more than 4 inches wide with
length unrestricted.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49744, Oct. 24, 1978;
49 FR 5321, Feb. 10, 1984]
Sec. 1910.24 Fixed industrial stairs.
(a) Application of requirements. This section contains
specifications for the safe design and construction of fixed general
industrial stairs. This classification includes interior and exterior
stairs around machinery, tanks, and other equipment, and stairs leading
to or from floors, platforms, or pits. This section does not apply to
stairs used for fire exit purposes, to construction operations to
private residences, or to articulated stairs, such as may be installed
on floating roof tanks or on dock facilities, the angle of which changes
with the rise and fall of the base support.
(b) Where fixed stairs are required. Fixed stairs shall be provided
for access from one structure level to another where operations
necessitate regular travel between levels, and for access to operating
platforms at any equipment which requires attention routinely during
operations. Fixed stairs shall also be provided where access to
elevations is daily or at each shift for such purposes as gauging,
inspection, regular maintenance, etc., where such work may expose
employees to acids, caustics, gases, or other harmful substances, or for
which purposes the carrying of tools or equipment by hand is normally
required. (It is not the intent of this section to preclude the use of
fixed ladders for access to elevated tanks, towers, and similar
structures, overhead traveling cranes, etc., where the use of fixed
ladders is common practice.) Spiral stairways shall not be permitted
except for special limited usage and secondary access situations where
it is not practical to provide a conventional stairway. Winding
stairways may be installed on tanks and similar round structures where
the diameter of the structure is not less than five (5) feet.
(c) Stair strength. Fixed stairways shall be designed and
constructed to carry a load of five times the normal live load
anticipated but never of less strength than to carry safely a moving
concentrated load of 1,000 pounds.
(d) Stair width. Fixed stairways shall have a minimum width of 22
inches.
(e) Angle of stairway rise. Fixed stairs shall be installed at
angles to the horizontal of between 30 deg. and 50 deg.. Any uniform
combination of rise/tread dimensions may be used that will result in a
stairway at an angle to the horizontal within the permissible range.
Table D-1 gives rise/tread dimensions which will produce a stairway
within the permissible range, stating the angle to the horizontal
produced by each combination. However, the rise/tread combinations are
not limited to those given in Table D-1.
Table D-1
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tread
Angle to horizontal Rise (in run (in
inches) inches)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
30 deg.35[min]...................................... 6\1/2\ 11
32 deg.08[min]...................................... 6\3/4\ 10\3/4\
33 deg.41[min]...................................... 7 10\1/2\
35 deg.16[min]...................................... 7\1/4\ 10\1/4\
36 deg.52[min]...................................... 7\1/2\ 10
38 deg.29[min]...................................... 7\3/4\ 9\3/4\
40 deg.08[min]...................................... 8 9\1/2\
41 deg.44[min]...................................... 8\1/4\ 9\1/4\
43 deg.22[min]...................................... 8\1/2\ 9
45 deg.00[min]...................................... 8\3/4\ 8\3/4\
46 deg.38[min]...................................... 9 8\1/2\
48 deg.16[min]...................................... 9\1/4\ 8\1/4\
49 deg.54[min]...................................... 9\1/2\ 8
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(f) Stair treads. All treads shall be reasonably slip-resistant and
the nosings shall be of nonslip finish. Welded bar grating treads
without nosings are acceptable providing the leading edge can be readily
identified by personnel descending the stairway and provided the tread
is serrated or is of definite nonslip design. Rise height and tread
width shall be uniform throughout any flight of stairs including any
foundation structure used as one or more treads of the stairs.
(g) Stairway platforms. Stairway platforms shall be no less than the
width of a stairway and a minimum of 30 inches in length measured in the
direction of travel.
[[Page 123]]
(h) Railings and handrails. Standard railings shall be provided on
the open sides of all exposed stairways and stair platforms. Handrails
shall be provided on at least one side of closed stairways preferably on
the right side descending. Stair railings and handrails shall be
installed in accordance with the provisions of Sec. 1910.23.
(i) Vertical clearance. Vertical clearance above any stair tread to
an overhead obstruction shall be at least 7 feet measured from the
leading edge of the tread.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49744, Oct. 24, 1978;
49 FR 5321, Feb. 10, 1984]
Sec. 1910.25 Portable wood ladders.
(a) Application of requirements. This section is intended to
prescribe rules and establish minimum requirements for the construction,
care, and use of the common types of portable wood ladders, in order to
insure safety under normal conditions of usage. Other types of special
ladders, fruitpicker's ladders, combination step and extension ladders,
stockroom step ladders, aisle-way step ladders, shelf ladders, and
library ladders are not specifically covered by this section.
(b) Materials--(1) Requirements applicable to all wood parts. (i)
All wood parts shall be free from sharp edges and splinters; sound and
free from accepted visual inspection from shake, wane, compression
failures, decay, or other irregularities. Low density wood shall not be
used.
(ii) [Reserved]
(2) [Reserved]
(c) Construction requirements.
(1) [Reserved]
(2) Portable stepladders. Stepladders longer than 20 feet shall not
be supplied. Stepladders as hereinafter specified shall be of three
types:
Type I--Industrial stepladder, 3 to 20 feet for heavy duty, such as
utilities, contractors, and industrial use.
Type II--Commercial stepladder, 3 to 12 feet for medium duty, such
as painters, offices, and light industrial use.
Type III--Household stepladder, 3 to 6 feet for light duty, such as
light household use.
(i) General requirements.
(a) [Reserved]
(b) A uniform step spacing shall be employed which shall be not more
than 12 inches. Steps shall be parallel and level when the ladder is in
position for use.
(c) The minimum width between side rails at the top, inside to
inside, shall be not less than 11\1/2\ inches. From top to bottom, the
side rails shall spread at least 1 inch for each foot of length of
stepladder.
(d)-(e) [Reserved]
(f) A metal spreader or locking device of sufficient size and
strength to securely hold the front and back sections in open positions
shall be a component of each stepladder. The spreader shall have all
sharp points covered or removed to protect the user. For Type III
ladder, the pail shelf and spreader may be combined in one unit (the so-
called shelf-lock ladder).
(3) Portable rung ladders.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) Single ladder. (a) Single ladders longer than 30 feet shall not
be supplied.
(b) [Reserved]
(iii) Two-section ladder. (a) Two-section extension ladders longer
than 60 feet shall not be supplied. All ladders of this type shall
consist of two sections, one to fit within the side rails of the other,
and arranged in such a manner that the upper section can be raised and
lowered.
(b) [Reserved]
(iv) Sectional ladder. (a) Assembled combinations of sectional
ladders longer than lengths specified in this subdivision shall not be
used.
(b) [Reserved]
(v) Trestle and extension trestle ladder. (a) Trestle ladders, or
extension sections or base sections of extension trestle ladders longer
than 20 feet shall not be supplied.
(b) [Reserved]
(4) Special-purpose ladders.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) Painter's stepladder. (a) Painter's stepladders longer than 12
feet shall not be supplied.
(b) [Reserved]
(iii) Mason's ladder. A mason's ladder is a special type of single
ladder intended for use in heavy construction work.
[[Page 124]]
(a) Mason's ladders longer than 40 feet shall not be supplied.
(b) [Reserved]
(5) Trolley and side-rolling ladders--(i) Length. Trolley ladders
and side-rolling ladders longer than 20 feet should not be supplied.
(ii) [Reserved]
(d) Care and use of ladders--(1) Care. To insure safety and
serviceability the following precautions on the care of ladders shall be
observed:
(i) Ladders shall be maintained in good condition at all times, the
joint between the steps and side rails shall be tight, all hardware and
fittings securely attached, and the movable parts shall operate freely
without binding or undue play.
(ii) Metal bearings of locks, wheels, pulleys, etc., shall be
frequently lubricated.
(iii) Frayed or badly worn rope shall be replaced.
(iv) Safety feet and other auxiliary equipment shall be kept in good
condition to insure proper performance.
(v)-(ix) [Reserved]
(x) Ladders shall be inspected frequently and those which have
developed defects shall be withdrawn from service for repair or
destruction and tagged or marked as ``Dangerous, Do Not Use.''
(xi) Rungs should be kept free of grease and oil.
(2) Use. The following safety precautions shall be observed in
connection with the use of ladders:
(i) Portable rung and cleat ladders shall, where possible, be used
at such a pitch that the horizontal distance from the top support to the
foot of the ladder is one-quarter of the working length of the ladder
(the length along the ladder between the foot and the top support). The
ladder shall be so placed as to prevent slipping, or it shall be lashed,
or held in position. Ladders shall not be used in a horizontal position
as platforms, runways, or scaffolds;
(ii) Ladders for which dimensions are specified should not be used
by more than one man at a time nor with ladder jacks and scaffold planks
where use by more than one man is anticipated. In such cases, specially
designed ladders with larger dimensions of the parts should be procured;
(iii) Portable ladders shall be so placed that the side rails have a
secure footing. The top rest for portable rung and cleat ladders shall
be reasonably rigid and shall have ample strength to support the applied
load;
(iv) Ladders shall not be placed in front of doors opening toward
the ladder unless the door is blocked upon, locked, or guarded;
(v) Ladders shall not be placed on boxes, barrels, or other unstable
bases to obtain additional height;
(vi)-(vii) [Reserved]
(viii) Ladders with broken or missing steps, rungs, or cleats,
broken side rails, or other faulty equipment shall not be used;
improvised repairs shall not be made;
(ix) Short ladders shall not be spliced together to provide long
sections;
(x) Ladders made by fastening cleats across a single rail shall not
be used;
(xi) Ladders shall not be used as guys, braces, or skids, or for
other than their intended purposes;
(xii) Tops of the ordinary types of stepladders shall not be used as
steps;
(xiii) On two-section extension ladders the minimum overlap for the
two sections in use shall be as follows:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Overlap
Size of ladder (feet) (feet)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Up to and including 36...................................... 3
Over 36 up to and including 48.............................. 4
Over 48 up to and including 60.............................. 5
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(xiv) Portable rung ladders with reinforced rails (see paragraphs
(c)(3) (ii)(c) and (iii)(d) this section) shall be used only with the
metal reinforcement on the under side;
(xv) No ladder should be used to gain access to a roof unless the
top of the ladder shall extend at least 3 feet above the point of
support, at eave, gutter, or roofline;
(xvi) [Reserved]
(xvii) Middle and top sections of sectional or window cleaner's
ladders should not be used for bottom section unless the user equips
them with safety shoes;
(xviii) [Reserved]
(xix) The user should equip all portable rung ladders with nonslip
bases
[[Page 125]]
when there is a hazard of slipping. Nonslip bases are not intended as a
substitute for care in safely placing, lashing, or holding a ladder that
is being used upon oily, metal, concrete, or slippery surfaces;
(xx) The bracing on the back legs of step ladders is designed solely
for increasing stability and not for climbing.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49744, Oct. 24, 1978;
49 FR 5321, Feb. 10, 1984]
Sec. 1910.26 Portable metal ladders.
(a) Requirements--(1) General. Specific design and construction
requirements are not part of this section because of the wide variety of
metals and design possibilities. However, the design shall be such as to
produce a ladder without structural defects or accident hazards such as
sharp edges, burrs, etc. The metal selected shall be of sufficient
strength to meet the test requirements, and shall be protected against
corrosion unless inherently corrosion-resistant.
(i)-(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) The spacing of rungs or steps shall be on 12-inch centers.
(iv) [Reserved]
(v) Rungs and steps shall be corrugated, knurled, dimpled, coated
with skid-resistant material, or otherwise treated to minimize the
possibility of slipping.
(2) General specifications--straight and extension ladders. (i) The
minimum width between side rails of a straight ladder or any section of
an extension ladder shall be 12 inches.
(ii) The length of single ladders or individual sections of ladders
shall not exceed 30 feet. Two-section ladders shall not exceed 48 feet
in length and over two-section ladders shall not exceed 60 feet in
length.
(iii) Based on the nominal length of the ladder, each section of a
multisection ladder shall overlap the adjacent section by at least the
number of feet stated in the following:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Overlap
Normal length of ladder (feet) (feet)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Up to and including 36...................................... 3
Over 36, up to and including 48............................. 4
Over 48, up to 60........................................... 5
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(iv) Extension ladders shall be equipped with positive stops which
will insure the overlap specified in the table above.
(3) General specifications--step ladders.
(i)-(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) The length of a stepladder is measured by the length of the
front rail. To be classified as a standard length ladder, the measured
length shall be within plus or minus one-half inch of the specified
length. Stepladders shall not exceed 20 feet in length.
(iv)-(vi) [Reserved]
(vii) The bottoms of the four rails are to be supplied with
insulating nonslip material for the safety of the user.
(viii) A metal spreader or locking device of sufficient size and
strength to securely hold the front and back sections in the open
position shall be a component of each stepladder. The spreader shall
have all sharp points or edges covered or removed to protect the user.
(4) General specifications--trestles and extension trestle ladders.
(i) Trestle ladders or extension sections or base sections of extension
trestle ladders shall be not more than 20 feet in length.
(ii) [Reserved]
(5) General specifications--platform ladders. (i) The length of a
platform ladder shall not exceed 20 feet. The length of a platform
ladder shall be measured along the front rail from the floor to the
platform.
(ii) [Reserved]
(b) [Reserved]
(c) Care and maintenance of ladders--(1) General. To get maximum
serviceability, safety, and to eliminate unnecessary damage of
equipment, good safe practices in the use and care of ladder equipment
must be employed by the users.
The following rules and regulations are essential to the life of the
equipment and the safety of the user.
(2) Care of ladders.
(i)-(iii) [Reserved]
(iv) Ladders must be maintained in good usable condition at all
times.
(v) [Reserved]
(vi) If a ladder is involved in any of the following, immediate
inspection is necessary:
[[Page 126]]
(a) If ladders tip over, inspect ladder for side rails dents or
bends, or excessively dented rungs; check all rung-to- side-rail
connections; check hardware connections; check rivets for shear.
(b)-(c) [Reserved]
(d) If ladders are exposed to oil and grease, equipment should be
cleaned of oil, grease, or slippery materials. This can easily be done
with a solvent or steam cleaning.
(vii) Ladders having defects are to be marked and taken out of
service until repaired by either maintenance department or the
manufacturer.
(3) Use of ladders. (i). A simple rule for setting up a ladder at
the proper angle is to place the base a distance from the vertical wall
equal to one-fourth the working length of the ladder.
(ii) Portable ladders are designed as a one-man working ladder based
on a 200-pound load.
(iii) The ladder base section must be placed with a secure footing.
(iv) The top of the ladder must be placed with the two rails
supported, unless equipped with a single support attachment.
(v) When ascending or descending, the climber must face the ladder.
(vi) Ladders must not be tied or fastened together to provide longer
sections. They must be equipped with the hardware fittings necessary if
the manufacturer endorses extended uses.
(vii) Ladders should not be used as a brace, skid, guy or gin pole,
gangway, or for other uses than that for which they were intended,
unless specifically recommended for use by the manufacturer.
(viii) See Sec. 1910.333(c) for work practices to be used when work
is performed on or near electric circuits.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49745, Oct. 24, 1978;
49 FR 5321, Feb. 10, 1984; 55 FR 32014, Aug. 6, 1990]
Sec. 1910.27 Fixed ladders.
(a) Design requirements--(1) Design considerations. All ladders,
appurtenances, and fastenings shall be designed to meet the following
load requirements:
(i) The minimum design live load shall be a single concentrated load
of 200 pounds.
(ii) The number and position of additional concentrated live-load
units of 200 pounds each as determined from anticipated usage of the
ladder shall be considered in the design.
(iii) The live loads imposed by persons occupying the ladder shall
be considered to be concentrated at such points as will cause the
maximum stress in the structural member being considered.
(iv) The weight of the ladder and attached appurtenances together
with the live load shall be considered in the design of rails and
fastenings.
(2) Design stresses. Design stresses for wood components of ladders
shall not exceed those specified in Sec. 1910.25. All wood parts of
fixed ladders shall meet the requirements of Sec. 1910.25(b).
For fixed ladders consisting of wood side rails and wood rungs or
cleats, used at a pitch in the range 75 degrees to 90 degrees, and
intended for use by no more than one person per section, single ladders
as described in Sec. 1910.25(c)(3)(ii) are acceptable.
(b) Specific features--(1) Rungs and cleats. (i) All rungs shall
have a minimum diameter of three-fourths inch for metal ladders, except
as covered in paragraph (b)(7)(i) of this section and a minimum diameter
of 1\1/8\ inches for wood ladders.
(ii) The distance between rungs, cleats, and steps shall not exceed
12 inches and shall be uniform throughout the length of the ladder.
(iii) The minimum clear length of rungs or cleats shall be 16
inches.
(iv) Rungs, cleats, and steps shall be free of splinters, sharp
edges, burrs, or projections which may be a hazard.
(v) The rungs of an individual-rung ladder shall be so designed that
the foot cannot slide off the end. A suggested design is shown in figure
D-1.
[[Page 127]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.001
Figure D-1.--Suggested Design for Rungs on Individual-rung Ladders.
(2) Side rails. Side rails which might be used as a climbing aid
shall be of such cross sections as to afford adequate gripping surface
without sharp edges, splinters, or burrs.
(3) Fastenings. Fastenings shall be an integral part of fixed ladder
design.
(4) Splices. All splices made by whatever means shall meet design
requirements as noted in paragraph (a) of this section. All splices and
connections shall have smooth transition with original members and with
no sharp or extensive projections.
(5) Electrolytic action. Adequate means shall be employed to protect
dissimilar metals from electrolytic action when such metals are joined.
(6) Welding. All welding shall be in accordance with the ``Code for
Welding in Building Construction'' (AWSD1.0-1966).
(7) Protection from deterioration. (i) Metal ladders and
appurtenances shall be painted or otherwise treated to resist corrosion
and rusting when location demands. Ladders formed by individual metal
rungs imbedded in concrete, which serve as access to pits and to other
areas under floors, are frequently located in an atmosphere that causes
corrosion and rusting. To increase rung life in such atmosphere,
individual metal rungs shall have a minimum diameter of 1 inch or shall
be painted or otherwise treated to resist corrosion and rusting.
(ii) Wood ladders, when used under conditions where decay may occur,
shall be treated with a nonirritating preservative, and the details
shall be such as to prevent or minimize the accumulation of water on
wood parts.
(iii) When different types of materials are used in the construction
of a ladder, the materials used shall be so treated as to have no
deleterious effect one upon the other.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.002
Figure D-2.--Rail Ladder With Bar Steel Rails and Round Steel Rungs
(c) Clearance--(1) Climbing side. On fixed ladders, the
perpendicular distance from the centerline of the rungs to the nearest
permanent object on the climbing side of the ladder shall be 36 inches
for a pitch of 76 degrees, and 30 inches for a pitch of 90 degrees (fig.
D-2 of this section), with minimum clearances for intermediate pitches
varying between these two limits in proportion to the slope, except as
provided in subparagraphs (3) and (5) of this paragraph.
(2) Ladders without cages or wells. A clear width of at least 15
inches shall be provided each way from the centerline of the ladder in
the climbing space, except when cages or wells are necessary.
(3) Ladders with cages or baskets. Ladders equipped with cage or
basket are
[[Page 128]]
excepted from the provisions of subparagraphs (1) and (2) of this
paragraph, but shall conform to the provisions of paragraph (d)(1)(v) of
this section. Fixed ladders in smooth-walled wells are excepted from the
provisions of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, but shall conform to
the provisions of paragraph (d)(1)(vi) of this section.
(4) Clearance in back of ladder. The distance from the centerline of
rungs, cleats, or steps to the nearest permanent object in back of the
ladder shall be not less than 7 inches, except that when unavoidable
obstructions are encountered, minimum clearances as shown in figure D-3
shall be provided.
Minimum Ladder Clearances
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.003
Figure D-3.--Clearance for Unavoidable Obstruction at Rear of Fixed
Ladder
(5) Clearance in back of grab bar. The distance from the centerline
of the grab bar to the nearest permanent object in back of the grab bars
shall be not less than 4 inches. Grab bars shall not protrude on the
climbing side beyond the rungs of the ladder which they serve.
(6) Step-across distance. The step-across distance from the nearest
edge of ladder to the nearest edge of equipment or structure shall be
not more than 12 inches, or less than 2\1/2\ inches (fig. D-4).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.004
Figure D-4.--Ladder Far from Wall
(7) Hatch cover. Counterweighted hatch covers shall open a minimum
of 60 degrees from the horizontal. The distance from the centerline of
rungs or cleats to the edge of the hatch opening on the climbing side
shall be not less than 24 inches for offset wells or 30 inches for
straight wells. There shall be not protruding potential hazards within
24 inches of the centerline of rungs or cleats; any such hazards within
30 inches of the centerline of the rungs or cleats shall be fitted with
deflector plates placed at an angle of 60 degrees from the horizontal as
indicated in figure D-5. The relationship of a fixed ladder to an
acceptable counterweighted hatch cover is illustrated in figure D-6.
(d) Special requirements--(1) Cages or wells. (i) Cages or wells
(except on chimney ladders) shall be built, as shown on the applicable
drawings, covered in detail in figures D-7, D-8, and D-9, or of
equivalent construction.
(ii) Cages or wells (except as provided in subparagraph (5) of this
paragraph) conforming to the dimensions shown in figures D-7, D-8, and
D-9 shall be provided on ladders of more than 20 feet to a maximum
unbroken length of 30 feet.
[[Page 129]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.005
Figure D-5.--Deflector Plates for Head Hazards
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.006
Figure D-6.--Relationship of Fixed Ladder to a Safe Access Hatch
(iii) Cages shall extend a minimum of 42 inches above the top of
landing, unless other acceptable protection is provided.
(iv) Cages shall extend down the ladder to a point not less than 7
feet nor more than 8 feet above the base of the ladder, with bottom
flared not less than 4 inches, or portion of cage opposite ladder shall
be carried to the base.
(v) Cages shall not extend less than 27 nor more than 28 inches from
the centerline of the rungs of the ladder. Cage shall not be less than
27 inches in width. The inside shall be clear of projections. Vertical
bars shall be located at a maximum spacing of 40 degrees around the
circumference of the cage; this will give a maximum spacing of
approximately 9\1/2\ inches, center to center.
(vi) Ladder wells shall have a clear width of at least 15 inches
measured each way from the centerline of the ladder. Smooth-walled wells
shall be a minimum of 27 inches from the centerline of rungs to the well
wall on the climbing side of the ladder. Where other obstructions on the
climbing side of the ladder exist, there shall be a minimum of 30 inches
from the centerline of the rungs.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.007
Figure D-7.--Cages for Ladders More Than 20 Feet High
[[Page 130]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.008
Figure D-8.--Clearance Diagram for Fixed Ladder in Well
[[Page 131]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.009
Figure D-9.--Cages--Special applications.
(2) Landing platforms. When ladders are used to ascend to heights
exceeding 20 feet (except on chimneys), landing platforms shall be
provided for each 30 feet of height or fraction thereof, except that,
where no cage, well, or ladder safety device is provided, landing
platforms shall be provided for each 20 feet of height or fraction
thereof. Each ladder section shall be offset from adjacent sections.
Where installation conditions (even for a short, unbroken length)
require that adjacent sections be offset, landing platforms shall be
provided at each offset.
(i) Where a man has to step a distance greater than 12 inches from
the centerline of the rung of a ladder to the nearest edge of structure
or equipment, a landing platform shall be provided. The minimum step-
across distance shall be 2\1/2\ inches.
(ii) All landing platforms shall be equipped with standard railings
and toeboards, so arranged as to give safe access to the ladder.
Platforms shall be not less than 24 inches in width and 30 inches in
length.
(iii) One rung of any section of ladder shall be located at the
level of the landing laterally served by the ladder. Where access to the
landing is through the ladder, the same rung spacing as used on the
ladder shall be used from the landing platform to the first rung below
the landing.
(3) Ladder extensions. The side rails of through or side-step ladder
extensions shall extend 3\1/2\ feet above parapets and landings. For
through ladder extensions, the rungs shall be omitted from the extension
and shall have not less than 18 nor more than 24 inches clearance
between rails. For side-step or offset fixed ladder sections, at
landings, the side rails and rungs shall be carried to the next regular
rung beyond or above the 3\1/2\ feet minimum (fig. D-10).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.010
Figure D-10.--Offset Fixed Ladder Sections
(4) Grab bars. Grab bars shall be spaced by a continuation of the
rung spacing when they are located in the horizontal position. Vertical
grab bars shall have the same spacing as the ladder side rails. Grab-bar
diameters shall be the equivalent of the round-rung diameters.
(5) Ladder safety devices. Ladder safety devices may be used on
tower, water tank, and chimney ladders over 20 feet in unbroken length
in lieu of cage protection. No landing platform is required in these
cases. All ladder safety devices such as those that incorporate
[[Page 132]]
lifebelts, friction brakes, and sliding attachments shall meet the
design requirements of the ladders which they serve.
(e) Pitch--(1) Preferred pitch. The preferred pitch of fixed ladders
shall be considered to come in the range of 75 degrees and 90 degrees
with the horizontal (fig. D-11).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.011
Figure D-11.--Pitch of Fixed Ladders
(2) Substandard pitch. Fixed ladders shall be considered as
substandard if they are installed within the substandard pitch range of
60 and 75 degrees with the horizontal. Substandard fixed ladders are
permitted only where it is found necessary to meet conditions of
installation. This substandard pitch range shall be considered as a
critical range to be avoided, if possible.
(3) Scope of coverage in this section. This section covers only
fixed ladders within the pitch range of 60 degrees and 90 degrees with
the horizontal.
(4) Pitch greater than 90 degrees. Ladders having a pitch in excess
of 90 degrees with the horizontal are prohibited.
(f) Maintenance. All ladders shall be maintained in a safe
condition. All ladders shall be inspected regularly, with the intervals
between inspections being determined by use and exposure.
Sec. 1910.28 Safety requirements for scaffolding.
(a) General requirements for all scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds shall be
furnished and erected in accordance with this standard for persons
engaged in work that cannot be done safely from the ground or from solid
construction, except that ladders used for such work shall conform to
Sec. 1910.25 and Sec. 1910.26.
(2) The footing or anchorage for scaffolds shall be sound, rigid,
and capable of carrying the maximum intended load without settling or
displacement. Unstable objects such as barrels, boxes, loose brick, or
concrete blocks shall not be used to support scaffolds or planks.
(3) [Reserved]
(4) Scaffolds and their components shall be capable of supporting
without failure at least four times the maximum intended load.
(5) Scaffolds and other devices mentioned or described in this
section shall be maintained in safe condition. Scaffolds shall not be
altered or moved horizontally while they are in use or occupied.
(6) Any scaffold damaged or weakened from any cause shall be
immediately repaired and shall not be used until repairs have been
completed.
(7) Scaffolds shall not be loaded in excess of the working load for
which they are intended.
(8) All load-carrying timber members of scaffold framing shall be a
minimum of 1,500 f. (Stress Grade) construction grade lumber. All
dimensions are nominal sizes as provided in the American Lumber
Standards, except that where rough sizes are noted, only rough or
undressed lumber of the size specified will satisfy minimum
requirements. (Note: Where nominal sizes of lumber are used in place of
rough sizes, the nominal size lumber shall be such as to provide
equivalent strength to that specified in tables D-7 through D-12 and D-
16.)
(9) All planking shall be Scaffold Grade as recognized by grading
rules for the species of wood used. The maximum permissible spans for 2-
x 9-inch or wider planks are shown in the following table:
[[Page 133]]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Material
---------------------------------------
Full thickness Nominal
undressed lumber thickness
------------------------ lumber
---------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Working load (p.s.f.)........... 25 50 75 25 50
Permissible span (ft.).......... 10 8 6 8 9
------------------------------------------------------------------------
The maximum permissible span for 1\1/4\ x 9-inch or wider plank of full
thickness is 4 feet with medium loading of 50 p.s.f.
(10) Nails or bolts used in the construction of scaffolds shall be
of adequate size and in sufficient numbers at each connection to develop
the designed strength of the scaffold. Nails shall not be subjected to a
straight pull and shall be driven full length.
(11) All planking or platforms shall be overlapped (minimum 12
inches) or secured from movement.
(12) An access ladder or equivalent safe access shall be provided.
(13) Scaffold planks shall extend over their end supports not less
than 6 inches nor more than 18 inches.
(14) The poles, legs, or uprights of scaffolds shall be plumb, and
securely and rigidly braced to prevent swaying and displacement.
(15) Materials being hoisted onto a scaffold shall have a tag line.
(16) Overhead protection shall be provided for men on a scaffold
exposed to overhead hazards.
(17) Scaffolds shall be provided with a screen between the toeboard
and the guardrail, extending along the entire opening, consisting of No.
18 gauge U.S. Standard Wire one-half-inch mesh or the equivalent, where
persons are required to work or pass under the scaffolds.
(18) Employees shall not work on scaffolds during storms or high
winds.
(19) Employees shall not work on scaffolds which are covered with
ice or snow, unless all ice or snow is removed and planking sanded to
prevent slipping.
(20) Tools, materials, and debris shall not be allowed to accumulate
in quantities to cause a hazard.
(21) Only treated or protected fiber rope shall be used for or near
any work involving the use of corrosive substances or chemicals.
(22) Wire or fiber rope used for scaffold suspension shall be
capable of supporting at least six times the intended load.
(23) When acid solutions are used for cleaning buildings over 50
feet in height, wire rope supported scaffolds shall be used.
(24) The use of shore scaffolds or lean-to scaffolds is prohibited.
(25) Lumber sizes, when used in this section, refer to nominal sizes
except where otherwise stated.
(26) Scaffolds shall be secured to permanent structures, through use
of anchor bolts, reveal bolts, or other equivalent means. Window
cleaners' anchor bolts shall not be used.
(27) Special precautions shall be taken to protect scaffold members,
including any wire or fiber ropes, when using a heat-producing process.
(b) General requirements for wood pole scaffolds. (1) Scaffold poles
shall bear on a foundation of sufficient size and strength to spread the
load from the poles over a sufficient area to prevent settlement. All
poles shall be set plumb.
(2) Where wood poles are spliced, the ends shall be squared and the
upper section shall rest squarely on the lower section. Wood splice
plates shall be provided on at least two adjacent sides and shall not be
less than 4 feet 0 inches in length, overlapping the abutted ends
equally, and have the same width and not less than the cross-sectional
area of the pole. Splice plates of other materials of equivalent
strength may be used.
(3) Independent pole scaffolds shall be set as near to the wall of
the building as practicable.
(4) All pole scaffolds shall be securely guyed or tied to the
building or structure. Where the height or length exceeds 25 feet, the
scaffold shall be secured at intervals not greater than 25 feet
vertically and horizontally.
(5) Putlogs or bearers shall be set with their greater dimensions
vertical, long enough to project over the ledgers of the inner and outer
rows of poles at least 3 inches for proper support.
(6) Every wooden putlog on single pole scaffolds shall be reinforced
with a
[[Page 134]]
\3/16\ x 2-inch steel strip or equivalent secured to its lower edge
throughout its entire length.
(7) Ledgers shall be long enough to extend over two pole spaces.
Ledgers shall not be spliced between the poles. Ledgers shall be
reinforced by bearing blocks securely nailed to the side of the pole to
form a support for the ledger.
(8) Diagonal bracing shall be provided to prevent the poles from
moving in a direction parallel with the wall of the building, or from
buckling.
(9) Cross bracing shall be provided between the inner and outer sets
of poles in independent pole scaffolds. The free ends of pole scaffolds
shall be cross braced.
(10) Full diagonal face bracing shall be erected across the entire
face of pole scaffolds in both directions. The braces shall be spliced
at the poles.
(11) Platform planks shall be laid with their edges close together
so the platform will be tight with no spaces through which tools or
fragments of material can fall.
(12) Where planking is lapped, each plank shall lap its end supports
at least 12 inches. Where the ends of planks abut each other to form a
flush floor, the butt joint shall be at the centerline of a pole. The
abutted ends shall rest on separate bearers. Intermediate beams shall be
provided where necessary to prevent dislodgment of planks due to
deflection, and the ends shall be nailed or cleated to prevent their
dislodgment.
(13) When a scaffold turns a corner, the platform planks shall be
laid to prevent tipping. The planks that meet the corner putlog at an
angle shall be laid first, extending over the diagonally placed putlog
far enough to have a good safe bearing, but not far enough to involve
any danger from tipping. The planking running in the opposite direction
at right angles shall be laid so as to extend over and rest on the first
layer of planking.
(14) When moving platforms to the next level, the old platform shall
be left undisturbed until the new putlogs or bearers have been set in
place, ready to receive the platform planks.
(15) Guardrails not less than 2 x 4 inches or the equivalent and not
less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high, with a mid-rail, when
required, of 1 x 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and toeboards, shall be
installed at all open sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the
ground or floor. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches in height.
Wire mesh shall be installed in accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
this section.
(16) All wood pole scaffolds 60 feet or less in height shall be
constructed and erected in accordance with tables D-7 through D-12 of
this section. If they are over 60 feet in height they shall be designed
by a registered professional engineer and constructed and erected in
accordance with such design. A copy of the typical drawings and
specifications shall be made available to the employer and for
inspection purposes.
(17) Wood-pole scaffolds shall not be erected beyond the reach of
effective firefighting apparatus.
Table D-7--Minimum Nominal Size and Maximum Spacing of Members of Single
Pole Scaffolds--Light Duty
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum height of scaffold
----------------------------------------
20 feet 60 feet
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Uniformly distributed load..... Not to exceed 25
pounds per square
foot..
Poles or uprights.............. 2 by 4 in.......... 4 by 4 in.
Pole spacing (longitudinal).... 6 ft. 0 in......... 10 ft. 0 in.
Maximum width of scaffold...... 5 ft. 0 in......... 5 ft. 0 in.
Bearers or putlogs to 3 ft. 0 2 by 4 in.......... 2 by 4 in.
in. width.
Bearers or putlogs to 5 ft. 0 2 by 6 in. or 3 by 2 by 6 in. or 3 by
in. width. 4 in. 4 in.(rough).
Ledgers........................ 1 by 4 in.......... 1\1/4\ by 9 in.
Planking....................... 1\1/4\ by 9 in. 2 by 9 in.
(rough).
Vertical spacing of horizontal 7 ft. 0 in......... 7 ft. 0 in.
members.
Bracing, horizontal and 1 by 4 in.......... 1 by 4 in.
diagonal.
Tie-ins........................ 1 by 4 in.......... 1 by 4 in.
Toeboards...................... 4 in. high 4 in. high
(minimum). (minimum).
[[Page 135]]
Guardrail...................... 2 by 4 in.......... 2 by 4 in.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
All members except planking are used on edge.
Table D-8--Minimum Nominal Size and Maximum Spacing of Members of Single
Pole Scaffolds--Medium Duty
Uniformly distributed load................ Not to exceed 50 pounds per
square foot.
Maximum height of scaffold................ 60 ft.
Poles or uprights......................... 4 by 4 in.
Pole spacing (longitudinal)............... 8 ft. 0 in.
Maximum width of scaffold................. 5 ft. 0 in.
Bearers or putlogs........................ 2 by 9 in. or 3 by 4 in.
Spacing of bearers or putlogs............. 8 ft. 0 in.
Ledgers................................... 2 by 9 in.
Vertical spacing of horizontal members.... 9 ft. 0 in.
Bracing, horizontal....................... 1 by 6 in. or 1\1/4\ by 4
in.
Bracing, diagonal......................... 1 by 4 in.
Tie-ins................................... 1 by 4 in.
Planking.................................. 2 by 9 in.
Toeboards................................. 4 in. high (minimum).
Guardrail................................. 2 by 4 in.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
All members except planking are used on edge.
Table D-9--Minimum Nominal Size and Maximum Spacing of Members of Single
Pole Scaffolds--Heavy Duty
Uniformly distributed load................ Not to exceed 75 pounds per
square foot.
Maximum height of scaffold................ 60 ft.
Poles or uprights......................... 4 by 4 in.
Pole spacing (longitudinal)............... 6 ft. 0 in.
Maximum width of scaffold................. 5 ft. 0 in.
Bearers or putlogs........................ 2 by 9 in. or 3 by 5 in.
(rough).
Spacing of bearers or putlogs............. 6 ft. 0 in.
Ledgers................................... 2 by 9 in.
Vertical spacing of horizontal members.... 6 ft. 6 in.
Bracing, horizontal and diagonal.......... 2 by 4 in.
Tie-ins................................... 1 by 4 in.
Planking.................................. 2 by 9 in.
Toeboards................................. 4 in. high (minimum).
Guardrail................................. 2 by 4 in.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
All members except planking are used on edge.
Table D-10--Minimum Nominal Size and Maximum Spacing of Members of
Independent Pole Scaffolds--Light Duty
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum height of scaffold
----------------------------------------
20 feet 60 feet
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Uniformly distributed load..... Not to exceed 25
pounds per square
foot..
Poles or uprights.............. 2 by 4 in.......... 4 by 4 in.
Pole spacing (longitudinal).... 6 ft. 0 in......... 10 ft. 0 in.
Pole spacing (transverse)...... 6 ft. 0 in......... 10 ft. 0 in.
Ledgers........................ 1\1/4\ by 4 in..... 1\1/4\ by 9 in.
Bearers to 3 ft. 0 in. span.... 2 by 4 in.......... 2 by 4 in.
Bearers to 10 ft. 0 in. span... 2 by 6 in. or 3 by 2 by 9 (rough) or
4 in. 3 by 8 in.
Planking....................... 1\1/4\ by 9 in..... 2 by 9 in.
Vertical spacing of horizontal 7 ft. 0 in......... 7 ft. 0 in.
members.
Bracing, horizontal and 1 by 4 in.......... 1 by 4 in.
diagonal.
Tie-ins........................ 1 by 4 in.......... 1 by 4 in.
Toeboards...................... 4 in. high......... 4 in. high
(minimum).
Guardrail...................... 2 by 4 in.......... 2 by 4 in.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
All members except planking are used on edge.
Table D-11--Minimum Nominal Size and Maximum Spacing of Members of
Independent Pole Scaffolds--Medium Duty
Uniformly distributed load................ Not to exceed 50 pounds per
square foot.
Maximum height of scaffold................ 60 ft.
Poles or uprights......................... 4 by 4 in.
Pole spacing (longitudinal)............... 8 ft. 0 in.
Pole spacing (transverse)................. 8 ft. 0 in.
Ledgers................................... 2 by 9 in.
Vertical spacing of horizontal members.... 6 ft. 0 in.
Spacing of bearers........................ 8 ft. 0 in.
Bearers................................... 2 by 9 in. (rough) or 2 by
10 in.
Bracing, horizontal....................... 1 by 6 in. or 1\1/4\ by 4
in.
Bracing, diagonal......................... 1 by 4 in.
Tie-ins................................... 1 by 4 in.
Planking.................................. 2 by 9 in.
Toeboards................................. 4 in. high (minimum).
Guardrail................................. 2 by 4 in.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
All members except planking are used on edge.
[[Page 136]]
Table D-12--Minimum Nominal Size and Maximum Spacing of Members of
Independent Pole Scaffolds--Heavy Duty
Uniformly distributed load................ Not to exceed 75 pounds per
square foot.
Maximum height of scaffold................ 60 ft.
Poles or uprights......................... 4 by 4 in.
Pole spacing (longitudinal)............... 6 ft. 0 in.
Pole spacing (transverse)................. 8 ft. 0 in.
Ledgers................................... 2 by 9 in.
Vertical spacing of horizontal members.... 4 ft. 6 in.
Bearers................................... 2 by 9 in. (rough).
Bracing, horizontal and diagonal.......... 2 by 4 in.
Tie-ins................................... 1 by 4 in.
Planking.................................. 2 by 9 in.
Toeboards................................. 4 in. high (minimum).
Guardrail................................. 2 by 4 in.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
All members except planking are used on edge.
Table D-13--Tube and Coupler Scaffolds--Light Duty
Uniformly distributed load................ Not to exceed 25 p.s.f.
post spacing (longitudinal)............... 10 ft. 0 in.
Post spacing (transverse)................. 6 ft. 0 in.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Additional planked
Working levels levels Maximum height
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 8 125 ft.
2 4 125 ft.
3 0 91 ft. 0 in.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table D-14--Tube and Coupler Scaffolds--Medium Duty
Uniformly distributed load................ Not to exceed 50 p.s.f.
Post spacing (longitudinal)............... 8 ft. 0 in.
Post spacing (transverse)................. 6 ft. 0 in.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Additional planked
Working levels levels Maximum height
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 6 125 ft.
2 0 78 ft. 0 in.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table D-15--Tube and Coupler Scaffolds--Heavy Duty
Uniformly distributed load................ Not to exceed 75 p.s.f.
Post spacing (longitudinal)............... 6 ft. 6 in.
Post spacing (transverse)................. 6 ft. 0 in.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Additional planked
Working levels levels Maximum height
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 6 125 ft.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) Tube and coupler scaffolds. (1) A light-duty tube and coupler
scaffold shall have all posts, bearers, runners, and bracing of nominal
2-inch O.D. steel tubing. The posts shall be spaced no more than 6 feet
apart by 10 feet along the length of the scaffold. Other structural
metals when used must be designed to carry an equivalent load.
(2) A medium-duty tube and coupler scaffold shall have all posts,
runners, and bracing of nominal 2-inch O.D. steel tubing. Posts spaced
not more than 6 feet apart by 8 feet along the length of the scaffold
shall have bearers of nominal 2\1/2\-inch O.D. steel tubing. Posts
spaced not more than 5 feet apart by 8 feet along the length of the
scaffold shall have bearers of nominal 2-inch O.D. steel tubing. Other
structural metals when used must be designed to carry an equivalent
load.
(3) A heavy-duty tube and coupler scaffold shall have all posts,
runners, and bracing of nominal 2-inch O.D. steel tubing, with the posts
spaced not more than 6 feet apart by 6 feet 6 inches along the length of
the scaffold. Other structural metals when used must be designed to
carry an equivalent load.
(4) Tube and coupler scaffolds shall be limited in heights and
working levels to those permitted in tables D-13, 14, and 15, of this
section. Drawings and specifications of all tube and coupler scaffolds
above the limitations in tables D-13, 14, and 15 of this section shall
be designed by a registered professional engineer and copies made
available to the employer and for inspection purposes.
(5) All tube and coupler scaffolds shall be constructed and erected
to support four times the maximum intended loads as set forth in tables
D-13, 14, and 15 of this section, or as set forth in the specifications
by a registered professional engineer, copies which shall be made
available to the employer and for inspection purposes.
(6) All tube and coupler scaffolds shall be erected by competent and
experienced personnel.
(7) Posts shall be accurately spaced, erected on suitable bases, and
maintained plumb.
(8) Runners shall be erected along the length of the scaffold
located on both the inside and the outside posts at even height. Runners
shall be interlocked to form continuous lengths and coupled to each
post. The bottom runners shall be located as close to the base as
possible. Runners shall be placed not more than 6 feet 6 inches on
centers.
[[Page 137]]
(9) Bearers shall be installed transversely between posts and shall
be securely coupled to the posts bearing on the runner coupler. When
coupled directly to the runners, the coupler must be kept as close to
the posts as possible.
(10) Bearers shall be at least 4 inches but not more than 12 inches
longer than the post spacing or runner spacing. Bearers may be
cantilevered for use as brackets to carry not more than two planks.
(11) Cross bracing shall be installed across the width of the
scaffold at least every third set of posts horizontally and every fourth
runner vertically. Such bracing shall extend diagonally from the inner
and outer runners upward to the next outer and inner runners.
(12) Longitudinal diagonal bracing shall be installed at
approximately a 45-degree angle from near the base of the first outer
post upward to the extreme top of the scaffold. Where the longitudinal
length of the scaffold permits, such bracing shall be duplicated
beginning at every fifth post. In a similar manner, longitudinal
diagonal bracing shall also be installed from the last post extending
back and upward toward the first post. Where conditions preclude the
attachment of this bracing to the posts, it may be attached to the
runners.
(13) The entire scaffold shall be tied to and securely braced
against the building at intervals not to exceed 30 feet horizontally and
26 feet vertically.
(14) Guardrails not less than 2x4 inches or the equivalent and not
less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high, with a mid-rail, when
required, of 1x4-inch lumber or equivalent, and toeboards, shall be
installed at all open sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the
ground or floor. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches in height.
Wire mesh shall be installed in accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
this section.
(d) Tubular welded frame scaffolds. (1) Metal tubular frame
scaffolds, including accessories such as braces, brackets, trusses,
screw legs, ladders, etc., shall be designed and proved to safely
support four times the maximum intended load.
(2) Spacing of panels or frames shall be consistent with the loads
imposed.
(3) Scaffolds shall be properly braced by cross bracing or diagonal
braces, or both, for securing vertical members together laterally, and
the cross braces shall be of such length as will automatically square
and aline vertical members so that the erected scaffold is always plumb,
square, and rigid. All brace connections shall be made secure.
(4) Scaffold legs shall be set on adjustable bases or plain bases
placed on mud sills or other foundations adequate to support the maximum
intended load.
(5) The frames shall be placed one on top of the other with coupling
or stacking pins to provide proper vertical alinement of the legs.
(6) Where uplift may occur, panels shall be locked together
vertically by pins or other equivalent suitable means.
(7) Guardrails not less than 2 x 4 inches or the equivalent and not
less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high, with a mid-rail, when
required, of 1- x 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and toeboards, shall be
installed at all open sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the
ground or floor. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches in height.
Wire mesh shall be installed in accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
this section.
(8) All tubular metal scaffolds shall be constructed and erected to
support four times the maximum intended loads.
(9) To prevent movement, the scaffold shall be secured to the
building or structure at intervals not to exceed 30 feet horizontally
and 26 feet vertically.
(10) Maximum permissible spans of planking shall be in conformity
with paragraph (a)(9) of this section.
(11) Drawings and specifications for all frame scaffolds over 125
feet in height above the base plates shall be designed by a registered
professional engineer and copies made available to the employer and for
inspection purposes.
(12) All tubular welded frame scaffolds shall be erected by
competent and experienced personnel.
[[Page 138]]
(13) Frames and accessories for scaffolds shall be maintained in
good repair and every defect, unsafe condition, or noncompliance with
this section shall be immediately corrected before further use of the
scaffold. Any broken, bent, excessively rusted, altered, or otherwise
structurally damaged frames or accessories shall not be used.
(14) Periodic inspections shall be made of all welded frames and
accessories, and any maintenance, including painting, or minor
corrections authorized by the manufacturer, shall be made before further
use.
(e) Outrigger scaffolds. (1) Outrigger beams shall extend not more
than 6 feet beyond the face of the building. The inboard end of
outrigger beams, measured from the fulcrum point to the extreme point of
support, shall be not less than one and one-half times the outboard end
in length. The beams shall rest on edge, the sides shall be plumb, and
the edges shall be horizontal. The fulcrum point of the beam shall rest
on a secure bearing at least 6 inches in each horizontal dimension. The
beam shall be secured in place against movement and shall be securely
braced at the fulcrum point against tipping.
(2) The inboard ends of outrigger beams shall be securely supported
either by means of struts bearing against sills in contact with the
overhead beams or ceiling, or by means of tension members secured to the
floor joists underfoot, or by both if necessary. The inboard ends of
outrigger beams shall be secured against tipping and the entire
supporting structure shall be securely braced in both directions to
prevent any horizontal movement.
(3) Unless outrigger scaffolds are designed by a licensed
professional engineer, they shall be constructed and erected in
accordance with table D-16. Outrigger scaffolds designed by a registered
professional engineer shall be constructed and erected in accordance
with such design. A copy of the detailed drawings and specifications
showing the sizes and spacing of members shall be kept on the job.
(4) Planking shall be laid tight and shall extend to within 3 inches
of the building wall. Planking shall be nailed or bolted to outriggers.
(5) Where there is danger of material falling from the scaffold, a
wire mesh or other enclosure shall be provided between the guardrail and
the toeboard.
(6) Where additional working levels are required to be supported by
the outrigger method, the plans and specifications of the outrigger and
scaffolding structure shall be designed by a registered professional
engineer.
(f) Masons' adjustable multiple-point suspension scaffolds. (1) The
scaffold shall be capable of sustaining a working load of 50 pounds per
square foot and shall not be loaded in excess of that figure.
(2) The scaffold shall be provided with hoisting machines that meet
the requirements of a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Refer to
Sec. 1910.7 for definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory.
Table D-16--Minimum Nominal Size and Maximum Spacing of Members of
Outrigger Scaffolds
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Light duty Medium duty
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum scaffold load........... 25 p.s.f.......... 50 p.s.f.
Outrigger size.................. 2 x 10 in......... 3 x 10 in.
Maximum outrigger spacing....... 10 ft 0 in........ 6 ft 0 in.
Planking........................ 2 x 9 in.......... 2 x 9 in.
Guardrail....................... 2 x 4 in.......... 2 x 4 in.
Guardrail uprights.............. 2 x 4 in.......... 2 x 4 in.
Toeboards (minimum)............. 4 in.............. 4 in.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(3) The platform shall be supported by wire ropes in conformity with
paragraph (a)(22) of this section, suspended from overhead outrigger
beams.
(4) The scaffold outrigger beams shall consist of structural metal
securely fastened or anchored to the frame or floor system of the
building or structure.
(5) Each outrigger beam shall be equivalent in strength to at least
a standard 7-inch, 15.3-pound steel I-beam, be at least 15 feet long,
and shall not project more than 6 feet 6 inches beyond the bearing
point.
(6) Where the overhang exceeds 6 feet 6 inches, outrigger beams
shall be composed of stronger beams or multiple beams and be installed
in accordance with approved designs and instructions.
[[Page 139]]
(7) If channel iron outrigger beams are used in place of I-beams,
they shall be securely fastened together with the flanges turned out.
(8) All outrigger beams shall be set and maintained with their webs
into vertical position.
(9) A stop bolt shall be placed at each end of every outrigger beam.
(10) The outrigger beam shall rest on suitable wood-bearing blocks.
(11) All parts of the scaffold such as bolts, nuts, fittings,
clamps, wire rope, and outrigger beams and their fastenings, shall be
maintained in sound and good working condition and shall be inspected
before each installation and periodically thereafter.
(12) The free end of the suspension wire ropes shall be equipped
with proper size thimbles and be secured by splicing or other equivalent
means. The running ends shall be securely attached to the hoisting drum
and at least four turns of rope shall at all times remain on the drum.
(13) Where a single outrigger beam is used, the steel shackles or
clevises with which the wire ropes are attached to the outrigger beams
shall be placed directly over the hoisting drums.
(14) The scaffold platform shall be equivalent in strength to at
least 2-inch planking. (For maximum planking spans see paragraph (a)(9)
of this section.)
(15) Guardrails not less than 2 x 4 inches or the equivalent and not
less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high, with a mid-rail, when
required, of 1 x 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and toeboards, shall be
installed at all open sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the
ground or floor. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches in height.
Wire mesh shall be installed in accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
this section.
(16) Overhead protection shall be provided on the scaffold, not more
than 9 feet above the platform, consisting of 2-inch planking or
material of equivalent strength laid tight, when men are at work on the
scaffold and an overhead hazard exists.
(17) Each scaffold shall be installed or relocated in accordance
with designs and instructions, of a registered professional engineer,
and supervised by a competent, designated person.
(g) Two-point suspension scaffolds (swinging scaffolds). (1) Two-
point suspension scaffold platforms shall be not less than 20 inches no
more than 36 inches wide overall. The platform shall be securely
fastened to the hangers by U-bolts or by other equivalent means.
(2) The hangers of two-point suspension scaffolds shall be made of
wrought iron, mild steel, or other equivalent material having a cross-
sectional area capable of sustaining four times the maximum intended
load, and shall be designed with a support for guardrail, intermediate
rail, and toeboard.
(3) When hoisting machines are used on two-point suspension
scaffolds, such machines shall be of a design tested and approved by a
nationally recognized testing laboratory. Refer to Sec. 1910.7 for
definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory.
(4) The roof irons or hooks shall be of wrought iron, mild steel, or
other equivalent material of proper size and design, securely installed
and anchored. Tie-backs of three-fourth inch manila rope or the
equivalent shall serve as a secondary means of anchorage, installed at
right angles to the face of the building whenever possible and secured
to a structurally sound portion of the building.
(5) Guardrails not less than 2 x 4 inches or the equivalent and not
less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high, with a mid-rail, when
required, of 1- x 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and toeboards, shall be
installed at all open sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the
ground or floor. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches in height.
Wire mesh shall be installed in accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
this section.
(6) Two-point suspension scaffolds shall be suspended by wire or
fiber ropes. Wire and fiber ropes shall conform to paragraph (a)(22) of
this section.
(7) The blocks for fiber ropes shall be of standard 6-inch size,
consisting of at least one double and one single block. The sheaves of
all blocks shall fit the size of rope used.
[[Page 140]]
(8) All wire ropes, fiber ropes, slings, hangers, platforms, and
other supporting parts shall be inspected before every installation.
Periodic inspections shall be made while the scaffold is in use.
(9) On suspension scaffolds designed for a working load of 500
pounds no more than two men shall be permitted to work at one time. On
suspension scaffolds with a working load of 750 pounds, no more than
three men shall be permitted to work at one time. Each workman shall be
protected by a safety lifebelt attached to a lifeline. The lifeline
shall be securely attached to substantial members of the structure (not
scaffold), or to securely rigged lines, which will safely suspend the
workman in case of a fall.
(10) Where acid solutions are used, fiber ropes are not permitted
unless acid-proof.
(11) Two-point suspension scaffolds shall be securely lashed to the
building or structure to prevent them from swaying. Window cleaners'
anchors shall not be used for this purpose.
(12) The platform of every two-point suspension scaffold shall be
one of the following types:
(i) The side stringer of ladder-type platforms shall be clear
straight-grained spruce or materials of equivalent strength and
durability. The rungs shall be of straight-grained oak, ash, or hickory,
at least 1\1/8\ inch in diameter, with seven-eighth inch tenons mortised
into the side stringers at least seven-eighth inch. The stringers shall
be tied together with the tie rods not less than one-quarter inch in
diameter, passing through the stringers and riveted up tight against
washers on both ends. The flooring strips shall be spaced not more than
five-eighth inch apart except at the side rails where the space may be 1
inch. Ladder-type platforms shall be constructed in accordance with
table D-17.
(ii) Plank-type platforms shall be composed of not less than nominal
2- x 8-inch unspliced planks, properly cleated together on the underside
starting 6 inches from each end; intervals in between shall not exceed 4
feet. The plank-type platform shall not extend beyond the hangers more
than 18 inches. A bar or other effective means shall be securely
fastened to the platform at each end to prevent its slipping off the
hanger. The span between hangers for plank-type platforms shall not
exceed 10 feet.
(iii) Beam platforms shall have side stringers of lumber not less
than 2 x 6 inches set on edge. The span between hangers shall not exceed
12 feet when beam platforms are used. The flooring shall be supported on
2- and 6-inch crossbeams, laid flat and set into the upper edge of the
stringers with a snug fit, at intervals of not more than 4 feet,
securely nailed in place. The flooring shall be of 1- x 6-inch material
properly nailed. Floorboards shall not be spaced more than one-half inch
apart.
Table D-17--Schedule for Ladder-Type Platforms
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Length of platform (feet)
-----------------------------------------------------------
12 14 & 16 18 & 20 22 & 24 28 & 30
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Side stringers, minimum cross section (finished
sizes):
At ends (in.)..................................... 1\3/4\ x 1\3/4\ x 1\3/4\ x 3 1\3/4\ x 3 1\3/4\ x
2\3/4\ 2\3/4\ 3\1/2\
At middle (in.)................................... 1\3/4\ x 1\3/4\ x 1\3/4\ x 4 1\3/4\ x 1\3/4\ x 5
3\3/4\ 3\3/4\ 4\1/4\
Reinforcing strip (minimum) \1\..................... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..........
Rungs \2\........................................... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..........
Tie rods:
Number (minimum).................................. 3 4 4 5 6
Diameter (minimum)................................ \1/4\ in \1/4\ in \1/4\ in \1/4\ in \1/4\ in.
Flooring, minimum finished size (in.)............... \1/2\ x \1/2\ x \1/2\ x \1/2\ x \3/ \1/2\ x
2\3/4\ 2\3/4\ 2\3/4\ 4\ 2\3/4\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ A \1/8\x\7/8\-in. steel reinforcing strip or its equivalent shall be attached to the side or underside full
length.
\2\ Rungs shall be 1\1/8\-in. minimum, diameter with at least \7/8\-in. diameter tenons, and the maximum spacing
shall be 12 in. center to center.
(h) Stone setters' adjustable multiple-point suspension scaffolds.
(1) The scaffold shall be capable of sustaining a working load of 25
pounds per square
[[Page 141]]
foot and shall not be overloaded. Scaffolds shall not be used for
storage of stone or other heavy materials.
(2) The hoisting machine and its supports shall be of a type tested
and listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Refer to
Sec. 1910.399(a)(77) for definition of listed, and Sec. 1910.7 for
nationally recognized testing laboratory.
(3) The platform shall be securely fastened to the hangers by U-
bolts or other equivalent means.
(4) The scaffold unit shall be suspended from metal outriggers, iron
brackets, wire rope slings, or iron hooks which will safely support the
maximum intended load.
(5) Outriggers when used shall be set with their webs in a vertical
position, securely anchored to the building or structure and provided
with stop bolts at each end.
(6) The scaffold shall be supported by wire rope conforming with
paragraph (a)(22) of this section, suspended from overhead supports.
(7) The free ends of the suspension wire ropes shall be equipped
with proper size thimbles, secured by splicing or other equivalent
means. The running ends shall be securely attached to the hoisting drum
and at least four turns of rope shall remain on the drum at all times.
(8) Guardrails not less than 2 by 4 inches or the equivalent and not
less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high, with a mid-rail, when
required, of 1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and toeboards, shall be
installed at all open sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the
ground or floor. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches in height.
Wire mesh shall be installed in accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
this section.
(9) When two or more scaffolds are used on a building or structure
they shall not be bridged one to the other but shall be maintained at
even height with platforms butting closely.
(10) Each scaffold shall be installed or relocated in accordance
with designs and instructions of a registered professional engineer, and
such installation or relocation shall be supervised by a competent
designated person.
(i) Single-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. (1) The
scaffolding, including power units or manually operated winches, shall
be a type tested and listed by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory. Refer to Sec. 1910.399(a)(77) for definition of listed, and
Sec. 1910.7 for nationally recognized testing laboratory.
(2) [Reserved]
(3) All power-operated gears and brakes shall be enclosed.
(4) In addition to the normal operating brake, all-power driven
units must have an emergency brake which engages automatically when the
normal speed of descent is exceeded.
(5) Guards, mid-rails, and toeboards shall completely enclose the
cage or basket. Guardrails shall be no less than 2 by 4 inches or the
equivalent installed no less than 36 inches nor more than 42 inches
above the platform. Mid-rails shall be 1 by 6 inches or the equivalent,
installed equidistant between the guardrail and the platform. Toeboards
shall be a minimum of 4 inches in height.
(6) The hoisting machines, cables, and equipment shall be regularly
serviced and inspected after each installation and every 30 days
thereafter.
(7) The units may be combined to form a two-point suspension
scaffold. Such scaffold shall comply with paragraph (g) of this section.
(8) The supporting cable shall be straight for its entire length,
and the operator shall not sway the basket and fix the cable to any
intermediate points to change his original path of travel.
(9) Equipment shall be maintained and used in accordance with the
manufacturers' instructions.
(10) Suspension methods shall conform to applicable provisions of
paragraphs (f) and (g) of this section.
(j) Boatswain's chairs. (1) The chair seat shall be not less than 12
by 24 inches, and of 1-inch thickness. The seat shall be reinforced on
the underside to prevent the board from splitting.
(2) The two fiber rope seat slings shall be of \5/8\-inch diameter,
reeved through the four seat holes so as to cross each other on the
underside of the seat.
[[Page 142]]
(3) Seat slings shall be of at least \3/8\-inch wire rope when a
workman is conducting a heat producing process such as gas or arc
welding.
(4) The workman shall be protected by a safety life belt attached to
a lifeline. The lifeline shall be securely attached to substantial
members of the structure (not scaffold), or to securely rigged lines,
which will safely suspend the worker in case of a fall.
(5) The tackle shall consist of correct size ball bearing or bushed
blocks and properly spliced \5/8\-inch diameter first-grade manila rope.
(6) The roof irons, hooks, or the object to which the tackle is
anchored shall be securely installed. Tiebacks when used shall be
installed at right angles to the face of the building and securely
fastened to a chimney.
(k) Carpenters' bracket scaffolds. (1) The brackets shall consist of
a triangular wood frame not less than 2 by 3 inches in cross section, or
of metal of equivalent strength. Each member shall be properly fitted
and securely joined.
(2) Each bracket shall be attached to the structure by means of one
of the following:
(i) A bolt no less than five-eighths inch in diameter which shall
extend through the inside of the building wall.
(ii) A metal stud attachment device.
(iii) Welding to steel tanks.
(iv) Hooking over a well-secured and adequately strong supporting
member.
The brackets shall be spaced no more than 10 feet apart.
(3) No more than two persons shall occupy any given 10 feet of a
bracket scaffold at any one time. Tools and materials shall not exceed
75 pounds in addition to the occupancy.
(4) The platform shall consist of not less than two 2- by 9-inch
nominal size planks extending not more than 18 inches or less than 6
inches beyond each end support.
(5) Guardrails not less than 2 by 4 inches or the equivalent and not
less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high, with a mid-rail, when
required, of 1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and toeboards, shall be
installed at all open sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the
ground or floor. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches in height.
Wire mesh shall be installed in accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
this section.
(l) Bricklayers' square scaffolds. (1) The squares shall not exceed
5 feet in width and 5 feet in height.
(2) Members shall be not less than those specified in Table D-18.
(3) The squares shall be reinforced on both sides of each corner
with 1- by 6-inch gusset pieces. They shall also have braces 1 by 8
inches on both sides running from center to center of each member, or
other means to secure equivalent strength and rigidity.
(4) The squares shall be set not more than 5 feet apart for medium
duty scaffolds, and not more than 8 feet apart for light duty scaffolds.
Bracing 1 x 8 inches, extending from the bottom of each square to the
top of the next square, shall be provided on both front and rear sides
of the scaffold.
Table D-18--Minimum Dimensions for Bricklayers' Square Scaffold Members
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Members Dimensions (inches)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bearers or horizontal members.............. 2 by 6.
Legs....................................... 2 by 6.
Braces at corners.......................... 1 by 6.
Braces diagonally from center frame........ 1 by 8.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(5) Platform planks shall be at least 2- by 9-inch nominal size. The
ends of the planks shall overlap the bearers of the squares and each
plank shall be supported by not less than three squares.
(6) Bricklayers' square scaffolds shall not exceed three tiers in
height and shall be so constructed and arranged that one square shall
rest directly above the other. The upper tiers shall stand on a
continuous row of planks laid across the next lower tier and be nailed
down or otherwise secured to prevent displacement.
(7) Scaffolds shall be level and set upon a firm foundation.
(m) Horse scaffolds. (1) Horse scaffolds shall not be constructed or
arranged more than two tiers or 10 feet in height.
(2) The members of the horses shall be not less than those specified
in Table D-19.
(3) Horses shall be spaced not more than 5 feet for medium duty and
not more than 8 feet for light duty.
[[Page 143]]
(4) When arranged in tiers, each horse shall be placed directly over
the horse in the tier below.
(5) On all scaffolds arranged in tiers, the legs shall be nailed
down to the planks to prevent displacement or thrust and each tier shall
be substantially cross braced.
Table D-19--Minimum Dimensions for Horse Scaffold Members
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Members Dimensions (inches)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Horizontal members or bearers.............. 3 by 4.
Legs....................................... 1\1/4\ by 4\1/2\.
Longitudinal brace between legs............ 1 by 6.
Gusset brace at top of legs................ 1 by 8.
Half diagonal braces....................... 1\1/4\ by 4\1/2\.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(6) Horses or parts which have become weak or defective shall not be
used.
(7) Guardrails not less than 2 by 4 inches or the equivalent and not
less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high with a mid-rail, when
required, of 1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent and toeboards, shall be
installed at all open sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the
ground or floor. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches in height.
Wire mesh shall be installed in accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
this section.
(n) Needle beam scaffold. (1) Wood needle beams shall be in
accordance with paragraph (a) (5) and (9) of this section, and shall be
not less than 4 by 6 inches in size, with the greater dimension placed
in a vertical direction. Metal beams or the equivalent conforming to
paragraph (a) (4) and (8) of this section may be used.
(2) Ropes or hangers shall be provided for supports. The span
between supports on the needle beam shall not exceed 10 feet for 4- by
6-inch timbers. Rope supports shall be equivalent in strength to 1-inch
diameter first-grade manila rope.
(3) The ropes shall be attached to the needle beams by a scaffold
hitch or a properly made eye splice. The loose end of the rope shall be
tied by a bowline knot or by a round turn and one-half hitch.
(4) The platform span between the needle beams shall not exceed 8
feet when using 2-inch scaffold plank. For spans greater than 8 feet,
platforms shall be designed based on design requirements for the special
span. The overhang of each end of the platform planks shall be not less
than 1 foot and not more than 18 inches.
(5) When one needle beam is higher than the other or when the
platform is not level the platform shall be secured against slipping.
(6) All unattached tools, bolts, and nuts used on needle beam
scaffolds shall be kept in suitable containers.
(7) One end of a needle beam scaffold may be supported by a
permanent structural member conforming to paragraphs (a) (4) and (8) of
this section.
(8) Each man working on a needle beam scaffold 20 feet or more above
the ground or floor and working with both hands, shall be protected by a
safety life belt attached to a lifeline. The lifeline shall be securely
attached to substantial members of the structure (not scaffold), or to
securely rigged lines, which will safely suspend the workman in case of
a fall.
(o) Plasterers', decorators', and large area scaffolds. (1)
Plasterers', decorators', lathers', and ceiling workers' inside
scaffolds shall be constructed in accordance with the general
requirements set forth for independent wood pole scaffolds.
(2) Guardrails not less than 2 by 4 inches or the equivalent and not
less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high, with a mid-rail, when
required, of 1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and toeboards, shall be
installed at all open sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the
ground or floor. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches in height.
Wire mesh shall be installed in accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
this section.
(3) All platform planks shall be laid with the edges close together.
(4) When independent pole scaffold platforms are erected in
sections, such sections shall be provided with connecting runways
equipped with substantial guardrails.
(p) Interior hung scaffolds.
(1) [Reserved]
(2) The suspended steel wire rope shall conform to paragraph (a)(22)
of this section. Wire may be used providing the strength requirements of
[[Page 144]]
paragraph (a)(22) of this section are met.
(3) For hanging wood scaffolds, the following minimum nominal size
material is recommended:
(i) Supporting bearers 2 by 9 inches on edge.
(ii) Planking 2 by 9 inches or 2 by 10 inches, with maximum span 7
feet for heavy duty and 10 feet for light duty or medium duty.
(4) Steel tube and coupler members may be used for hanging scaffolds
with both types of scaffold designed to sustain a uniform distributed
working load up to heavy duty scaffold loads with a safety factor of
four.
(5) When a hanging scaffold is supported by means of wire rope, such
wire rope shall be wrapped at least twice around the supporting members
and twice around the bearers of the scaffold, with each end of the wire
rope secured by at least three standard wire-rope clips.
(6) All overhead supporting members shall be inspected and checked
for strength before the scaffold is erected.
(7) Guardrails not less than 2 by 4 inches or the equivalent and not
less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high, with a mid-rail, when
required, of 1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and toeboards, shall be
installed at all open sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet above the
ground or floor. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches in height.
Wire mesh shall be installed in accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
this section.
(q) Ladder-jack scaffolds. (1) All ladder-jack scaffolds shall be
limited to light duty and shall not exceed a height of 20 feet above the
floor or ground.
(2) All ladders used in connection with ladder-jack scaffolds shall
be heavy-duty ladders and shall be designed and constructed in
accordance with Sec. 1910.25 and Sec. 1910.26.
(3) The ladder jack shall be so designed and constructed that it
will bear on the side rails in addition to the ladder rungs, or if
bearing on rungs only, the bearing area shall be at least 10 inches on
each rung.
(4) Ladders used in conjunction with ladder jacks shall be so
placed, fastened, held, or equipped with devices so as to prevent
slipping.
(5) The wood platform planks shall be not less than 2 inches nominal
in thickness. Both metal and wood platform planks shall overlap the
bearing surface not less than 12 inches. The span between supports for
wood shall not exceed 8 feet. Platform width shall be not less than 18
inches.
(6) Not more than two persons shall occupy any given 8 feet of any
ladder-jack scaffold at any one time.
(r) Window-jack scaffolds. (1) Window-jack scaffolds shall be used
only for the purpose of working at the window opening through which the
jack is placed.
(2) Window jacks shall not be used to support planks placed between
one window jack and another or for other elements of scaffolding.
(3) Window-jack scaffolds shall be provided with suitable guardrails
unless safety belts with lifelines are attached and provided for the
workman. Window-jack scaffolds shall be used by one man only.
(s) Roofing brackets. (1) Roofing brackets shall be constructed to
fit the pitch of the roof.
(2) Brackets shall be secured in place by nailing in addition to the
pointed metal projections. The nails shall be driven full length into
the roof. When rope supports are used, they shall consist of first-grade
manila of at least three-quarter-inch diameter, or equivalent.
(3) A substantial catch platform shall be installed below the
working area of roofs more than 20 feet from the ground to eaves with a
slope greater than 3 inches in 12 inches without a parapet. In width the
platform shall extend 2 feet beyond the projection of the eaves and
shall be provided with a safety rail, mid-rail, and toeboard. This
provision shall not apply where employees engaged in work upon such
roofs are protected by a safety belt attached to a lifeline.
(t) Crawling boards or chicken ladders. (1) Crawling boards shall be
not less than 10 inches wide and 1 inch thick, having cleats 1 x 1\1/2\
inches. The cleats shall be equal in length to the width of the board
and spaced at equal intervals not to exceed 24 inches. Nails shall be
[[Page 145]]
driven through and clinched on the underside. The crawling board shall
extend from the ridge pole to the eaves when used in connection with
roof construction, repair, or maintenance.
(2) A firmly fastened lifeline of at least three-quarter-inch rope
shall be strung beside each crawling board for a handhold.
(3) Crawling boards shall be secured to the roof by means of
adequate ridge hooks or equivalent effective means.
(u) Float or ship scaffolds. (1) Float or ship scaffolds shall
support not more than three men and a few light tools, such as those
needed for riveting, bolting, and welding. They shall be constructed in
accordance with paragraphs (u) (2) through (6) of this section, unless
substitute designs and materials provide equivalent strength, stability,
and safety.
(2) The platform shall be not less than 3 feet wide and 6 feet long,
made of three-quarter-inch plywood, equivalent to American Plywood
Association Grade B-B, Group I, Exterior.
(3) Under the platform, there shall be two supporting bearers made
from 2- x 4-inch, or 1- x 10-inch rough, selected lumber, or better.
They shall be free of knots or other flaws and project 6 inches beyond
the platform on both sides. The ends of the platform shall extend about
6 inches beyond the outer edges of the bearers. Each bearer shall be
securely fastened to the platform.
(4) An edging of wood not less than \3/4\ x 1\1/2\ inches, or
equivalent, shall be placed around all sides of the platform to prevent
tools from rolling off.
(5) Supporting ropes shall be 1-inch diameter manila rope or
equivalent, free from deterioration, chemical damage, flaws, or other
imperfections. Rope connections shall be such that the platform cannot
shift or slip. If two ropes are used with each float, each of the two
supporting ropes shall be hitched around one end of a bearer and pass
under the platforms to the other end of the bearer where it is hitched
again, leaving sufficient rope at each end for the supporting ties.
(6) Each workman shall be protected by a safety lifebelt attached to
a lifeline. The lifeline shall be securely attached to substantial
members of the structure (not scaffold), or to securely rigged lines,
which will safely suspend the workman in case of a fall.
(v) Scope. This section establishes safety requirements for the
construction, operation, maintenance, and use of scaffolds used in the
maintenance of buildings and structures.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978;
49 FR 5321, Feb. 10, 1984; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, 1988]
Sec. 1910.29 Manually propelled mobile ladder stands and scaffolds (towers).
(a) General requirements--(1) Application. This section is intended
to prescribe rules and requirements for the design, construction, and
use of mobile work platforms (including ladder stands but not including
aerial ladders) and rolling (mobile) scaffolds (towers). This standard
is promulgated to aid in providing for the safety of life, limb, and
property, by establishing minimum standards for structural design
requirements and for the use of mobile work platforms and towers.
(2) Working loads. (i) Work platforms and scaffolds shall be capable
of carrying the design load under varying circumstances depending upon
the conditions of use. Therefore, all parts and appurtenances necessary
for their safe and efficient utilization must be integral parts of the
design.
(ii) Specific design and construction requirements are not a part of
this section because of the wide variety of materials and design
possibilities. However, the design shall be such as to produce a mobile
ladder stand or scaffold that will safely sustain the specified loads.
The material selected shall be of sufficient strength to meet the test
requirements and shall be protected against corrosion or deterioration.
(a) The design working load of ladder stands shall be calculated on
the basis of one or more 200-pound persons together with 50 pounds of
equipment each.
(b) The design load of all scaffolds shall be calculated on the
basis of:
Light-- Designed and constructed to carry a working load of 25
pounds per square foot.
Medium-- Designed and constructed to carry a working load of 50
pounds per square foot.
[[Page 146]]
Heavy-- Designed and constructed to carry a working load of 75
pounds per square foot.
All ladder stands and scaffolds shall be capable of supporting at least
four times the design working load.
(iii) The materials used in mobile ladder stands and scaffolds shall
be of standard manufacture and conform to standard specifications of
strength, dimensions, and weights, and shall be selected to safely
support the design working load.
(iv) Nails, bolts, or other fasteners used in the construction of
ladders, scaffolds, and towers shall be of adequate size and in
sufficient numbers at each connection to develop the designed strength
of the unit. Nails shall be driven full length. (All nails should be
immediately withdrawn from dismantled lumber.)
(v) All exposed surfaces shall be free from sharp edges, burrs or
other safety hazards.
(3) Work levels. (i) The maximum work level height shall not exceed
four (4) times the minimum or least base dimensions of any mobile ladder
stand or scaffold. Where the basic mobile unit does not meet this
requirement, suitable outrigger frames shall be employed to achieve this
least base dimension, or provisions shall be made to guy or brace the
unit against tipping.
(ii) The minimum platform width for any work level shall not be less
than 20 inches for mobile scaffolds (towers). Ladder stands shall have a
minimum step width of 16 inches.
(iii) The supporting structure for the work level shall be rigidly
braced, using adequate cross bracing or diagonal bracing with rigid
platforms at each work level.
(iv) The steps of ladder stands shall be fabricated from slip
resistant treads.
(v) The work level platform of scaffolds (towers) shall be of wood,
aluminum, or plywood planking, steel or expanded metal, for the full
width of the scaffold, except for necessary openings. Work platforms
shall be secured in place. All planking shall be 2-inch (nominal)
scaffold grade minimum 1,500 f. (stress grade) construction grade lumber
or equivalent.
(vi) All scaffold work levels 10 feet or higher above the ground or
floor shall have a standard (4-inch nominal) toeboard.
(vii) All work levels 10 feet or higher above the ground or floor
shall have a guardrail of 2- by 4-inch nominal or the equivalent
installed no less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high, with a
mid-rail, when required, of 1- by 4-inch nominal lumber or equivalent.
(viii) A climbing ladder or stairway shall be provided for proper
access and egress, and shall be affixed or built into the scaffold and
so located that its use will not have a tendency to tip the scaffold. A
landing platform shall be provided at intervals not to exceed 30 feet.
(4) Wheels or casters. (i) Wheels or casters shall be properly
designed for strength and dimensions to support four (4) times the
design working load.
(ii) All scaffold casters shall be provided with a positive wheel
and/or swivel lock to prevent movement. Ladder stands shall have at
least two (2) of the four (4) casters and shall be of the swivel type.
(iii) Where leveling of the elevated work platform is required,
screw jacks or other suitable means for adjusting the height shall be
provided in the base section of each mobile unit.
(b) Mobile tubular welded frame scaffolds--(1) General. Units shall
be designed to comply with the requirements of paragraph (a) of this
section.
(2) Bracing. Scaffolds shall be properly braced by cross braces and/
or diagonal braces for securing vertical members together laterally. The
cross braces shall be of a length that will automatically square and
align vertical members so the erected scaffold is always plumb, square,
and rigid.
(3) Spacing. Spacing of panels or frames shall be consistent with
the loads imposed. The frames shall be placed one on top of the other
with coupling or stacking pins to provide proper vertical alignment of
the legs.
(4) Locking. Where uplift may occur, panels shall be locked together
vertically by pins or other equivalent means.
(5) Erection. Only the manufacturer of a scaffold or his qualified
designated
[[Page 147]]
agent shall be permitted to erect or supervise the erection of scaffolds
exceeding 50 feet in height above the base, unless such structure is
approved in writing by a registered professional engineer, or erected in
accordance with instructions furnished by the manufacturer.
(c) Mobile tubular welded sectional folding scaffolds--(1) General.
Units including sectional stairway and sectional ladder scaffolds shall
be designed to comply with the requirements of paragraph (a) of this
section.
(2) Stairway. An integral stairway and work platform shall be
incorporated into the structure of each sectional folding stairway
scaffold.
(3) Bracing. An integral set of pivoting and hinged folding diagonal
and horizontal braces and a detachable work platform shall be
incorporated into the structure of each sectional folding ladder
scaffold.
(4) Sectional folding stairway scaffolds. Sectional folding stairway
scaffolds shall be designed as medium duty scaffolds except for high
clearance. These special base sections shall be designed as light duty
scaffolds. When upper sectional folding stairway scaffolds are used with
a special high clearance base, the load capacity of the entire scaffold
shall be reduced accordingly. The width of a sectional folding stairway
scaffold shall not exceed 4\1/2\ feet. The maximum length of a sectional
folding stairway scaffold shall not exceed 6 feet.
(5) Sectional folding ladder scaffolds. Sectional folding ladder
scaffolds shall be designed as light duty scaffolds including special
base (open end) sections which are designed for high clearance. For
certain special applications the six-foot (6[min]) folding ladder
scaffolds, except for special high clearance base sections, shall be
designed for use as medium duty scaffolds. The width of a sectional
folding ladder scaffold shall not exceed 4\1/2\ feet. The maximum length
of a sectional folding ladder scaffold shall not exceed 6 feet 6 inches
for a six-foot (6[foot]) long unit, 8 feet 6 inches for an eight-foot
(8[foot]) unit or 10 feet 6 inches for a ten-foot (10[foot]) long unit.
(6) End frames. The end frames of sectional ladder and stairway
scaffolds shall be designed so that the horizontal bearers provide
supports for multiple planking levels.
(7) Erection. Only the manufacturer of the scaffold or his qualified
designated agent shall be permitted to erect or supervise the erection
of scaffolds exceeding 50 feet in height above the base, unless such
structure is approved in writing by a licensed professional engineer, or
erected in accordance with instructions furnished by the manufacturer.
(d) Mobile tube and coupler scaffolds--(1) Design. Units shall be
designed to comply with the applicable requirements of paragraph (a) of
this section.
(2) Material. The material used for the couplers shall be of a
structural type, such as a drop-forged steel, malleable iron or
structural grade aluminum. The use of gray cast iron is prohibited.
(3) Erection. Only the manufacturer of the scaffold or his qualified
designated agent shall be permitted to erect or supervise the erection
of scaffolds exceeding 50 feet in height above the base, unless such
structure is approved in writing by a licensed professional engineer, or
erected in accordance with instructions furnished by the manufacturer.
(e) Mobile work platforms--(1) Design. Units shall be designed for
the use intended and shall comply with the requirements of paragraph (a)
of this section.
(2) Base width. The minimum width of the base of mobile work
platforms shall not be less than 20 inches.
(3) Bracing. Adequate rigid diagonal bracing to vertical members
shall be provided.
(f) Mobile ladder stands--(1) Design. Units shall comply with
applicable requirements of paragraph (a) of this section.
(2) Base width. The minimum base width shall conform to paragraph
(a)(3)(i) of this section. The maximum length of the base section shall
be the total length of combined steps and top assembly, measured
horizontally, plus five-eighths inch per step of rise.
(3) Steps. Steps shall be uniformly spaced, and sloped, with a rise
of not less than nine (9) inches, nor more than ten (10) inches, and a
depth of not less seven (7) inches. The slope of the steps section shall
be a minimum of fifty-
[[Page 148]]
five (55) degrees and a maximum of sixty (60) degrees measured from the
horizontal.
(4) Handrails. (i) Units having more than five (5) steps or 60
inches vertical height to the top step shall be equipped with handrails.
(ii) Handrails shall be a minimum of 29 inches high. Measurements
shall be taken vertically from the center of the step.
(5) Loading. The load (see paragraph (a)(2)(ii)(a) of this section)
shall be applied uniformly to a 3\1/2\ inches wide area front to back at
the center of the width span with a safety factor of four (4).
Sec. 1910.30 Other working surfaces.
(a) Dockboards (bridge plates). (1) Portable and powered dockboards
shall be strong enough to carry the load imposed on them.
(2) Portable dockboards shall be secured in position, either by
being anchored or equipped with devices which will prevent their
slipping.
(3) Powered dockboards shall be designed and constructed in
accordance with Commercial Standard CS202-56 (1961) ``Industrial Lifts
and Hinged Loading Ramps published by the U.S. Department of Commerce,
which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(4) Handholds, or other effective means, shall be provided on
portable dockboards to permit safe handling.
(5) Positive protection shall be provided to prevent railroad cars
from being moved while dockboards or bridge plates are in position.
(b) Forging machine area. (1) Machines shall be so located as to
give (i) enough clearance between machines so that the movement of one
operator will not interfere with the work of another, (ii) ample room
for cleaning machines and handling the work, including material and
scrap. The arrangement of machines shall be such that operators will not
stand in aisles.
(2) Aisles shall be provided of sufficient width to permit the free
movement of employees bringing and removing material. This aisle space
is to be independent of working and storage space.
(3) Wood platforms used on the floor in front of machines shall be
substantially constructed.
(c) Veneer machinery. (1) Sides of steam vats shall extend to a
height of not less than 36 inches above the floor, working platform, or
ground.
(2) Large steam vats divided into sections shall be provided with
substantial walkways between sections. Each walkway shall be provided
with a standard handrail on each exposed side. These handrails may be
removable, if necessary.
(3) Covers shall be removed only from that portion of steaming vats
on which men are working and a portable railing shall be placed at this
point to protect the operators.
(4) Workmen shall not ride or step on logs in steam vats.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 61
FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996]
Subpart E--Means of Egress
Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order
No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), or 1-90
(55 FR 9033), as applicable.
Sec. 1910.35 Definitions.
As used in this subpart.
(a) Means of egress. A means of egress is a continuous and
unobstructed way of exit travel from any point in a building or
structure to a public way and consists of three separate and distinct
parts: the way of exit access, the exit, and the way of exit discharge.
A means of egress comprises the vertical and horizontal ways of travel
and shall include intervening room spaces, doorways, hallways,
corridors, passageways, balconies, ramps, stairs, enclosures, lobbies,
escalators, horizontal exits, courts, and yards.
(b) Exit access. Exit access is that portion of a means of egress
which leads to an entrance to an exit.
(c) Exit. Exit is that portion of a means of egress which is
separated from all other spaces of the building or structure by
construction or equipment as required in this subpart to provide a
protected way of travel to the exit discharge.
[[Page 149]]
(d) Exit discharge. Exit discharge is that portion of a means of
egress between the termination of an exit and a public way.
(e) Low hazard contents. Low hazard contents shall be classified as
those of such low combustibility that no self- propagating fire therein
can occur and that consequently the only probable danger requiring the
use of emergency exits will be from panic, fumes, or smoke, or fire from
some external source.
(f) High-hazard contents. High-hazard contents shall be classified
as those which are liable to burn with extreme rapidity or from which
poisonous fumes or explosions are to be feared in the event of fire.
(g) Ordinary hazard contents. Ordinary hazard contents shall be
classified as those which are liable to burn with moderate rapidity and
to give off a considerable volume of smoke but from which neither
poisonous fumes nor explosions are to be feared in case of fire.
(h) Approved. For the purpose of this subpart approved shall mean
listed or approved equipment by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory. Refer to Sec. 1910.155(c)(3)(iv)(A) for definition of
listed, and Sec. 1910.7 for nationally recognized testing laboratory.
(i) Emergency action plan means a plan for a workplace, or parts
thereof, describing what procedures the employer and employees must take
to ensure employee safety from fire or other emergencies.
(j) Emergency escape route means the route that employees are
directed to follow in the event they are required to evacuate the
workplace or seek a designated refuge area.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 45 FR 60703, Sept. 12, 1980;
53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, 1988]
Sec. 1910.36 General requirements.
(a) Application. This subpart contains general fundamental
requirements essential to providing a safe means of egress from fire and
like emergencies. Nothing in this subpart shall be construed to prohibit
a better type of building construction, more exits, or otherwise safer
conditions than the minimum requirements specified in this subpart.
Exits from vehicles, vessels, or other mobile structures are not covered
by this subpart.
(b) Fundamental requirements. (1) Every building or structure, new
or old, designed for human occupancy shall be provided with exits
sufficient to permit the prompt escape of occupants in case of fire or
other emergency. The design of exits and other safeguards shall be such
that reliance for safety to life in case of fire or other emergency will
not depend solely on any single safeguard; additional safeguards shall
be provided for life safety in case any single safeguard is ineffective
due to some human or mechanical failure.
(2) Every building or structure shall be so constructed, arranged,
equipped, maintained, and operated as to avoid undue danger to the lives
and safety of its occupants from fire, smoke, fumes, or resulting panic
during the period of time reasonably necessary for escape from the
building or structure in case of fire or other emergency.
(3) Every building or structure shall be provided with exits of
kinds, numbers, location, and capacity appropriate to the individual
building or structure, with due regard to the character of the
occupancy, the number of persons exposed, the fire protection available,
and the height and type of construction of the building or structure, to
afford all occupants convenient facilities for escape.
(4) In every building or structure exits shall be so arranged and
maintained as to provide free and unobstructed egress from all parts of
the building or structure at all times when it is occupied. No lock or
fastening to prevent free escape from the inside of any building shall
be installed except in mental, penal, or corrective institutions where
supervisory personnel is continually on duty and effective provisions
are made to remove occupants in case of fire or other emergency.
(5) Every exit shall be clearly visible or the route to reach it
shall be conspicuously indicated in such a manner that every occupant of
every building or structure who is physically and mentally capable will
readily know the direction of escape from any point, and each path of
escape, in its entirety, shall be so arranged or marked that
[[Page 150]]
the way to a place of safety outside is unmistakable. Any doorway or
passageway not constituting an exit or way to reach an exit, but of such
a character as to be subject to being mistaken for an exit, shall be so
arranged or marked as to minimize its possible confusion with an exit
and the resultant danger of persons endeavoring to escape from fire
finding themselves trapped in a dead-end space, such as a cellar or
storeroom, from which there is no other way out.
(6) In every building or structure equipped for artificial
illumination, adequate and reliable illumination shall be provided for
all exit facilities.
(7) In every building or structure of such size, arrangement, or
occupancy that a fire may not itself provide adequate warning to
occupants, fire alarm facilities shall be provided where necessary to
warn occupants of the existence of fire so that they may escape, or to
facilitate the orderly conduct of fire exit drills.
(8) Every building or structure, section, or area thereof of such
size, occupancy, and arrangement that the reasonable safety of numbers
of occupants may be endangered by the blocking of any single means of
egress due to fire or smoke, shall have at least two means of egress
remote from each other, so arranged as to minimize any possibility that
both may be blocked by any one fire or other emergency conditions.
(9) Compliance with this subpart shall not be construed as
eliminating or reducing the necessity for other provisions for safety of
persons using a structure under normal occupancy conditions, nor shall
any provision of the subpart be construed as requiring or permitting any
condition that may be hazardous under normal occupancy conditions.
(c) Protection of employees exposed by construction and repair
operations. (1) No building or structure under construction shall be
occupied in whole or in part until all exit facilities required for the
part occupied are completed and ready for use.
(2) No existing building shall be occupied during repairs or
alterations unless all existing exits and any existing fire protection
are continuously maintained, or in lieu thereof other measures are taken
which provide equivalent safety.
(3) No flammable or explosive substances or equipment for repairs or
alterations shall be introduced in a building of normally low or
ordinary hazard classification while the building is occupied, unless
the condition of use and safeguards provided are such as not to create
any additional danger or handicap to egress beyond the normally
permissible conditions in the building.
(d) Maintenance. (1) Every required exit, way of approach thereto,
and way of travel from the exit into the street or open space, shall be
continuously maintained free of all obstructions or impediments to full
instant use in the case of fire or other emergency.
(2) Every automatic sprinkler system, fire detection and alarm
system, exit lighting, fire door, and other item of equipment, where
provided, shall be continuously in proper operating condition.
Sec. 1910.37 Means of egress, general.
(a) Permissible exit components. An exit shall consist only of the
approved components. Exit components shall be constructed as an integral
part of the building or shall be permanently affixed thereto.
(b) Protective enclosure of exits. When an exit is protected by
separation from other parts of the building the separating construction
shall meet the following requirements.
(1) The separation shall have at least a 1-hour fire resistance
rating when the exit connects three stories or less. This applies
whether the stories connected are above or below the story at which exit
discharge begins.
(2) The separation shall have at least a 2-hour fire resistance
rating when the exit connects four or more stories, whether above or
below the floor of discharge. It shall be constructed of noncombustible
materials, and shall be supported by construction having at least a 2-
hour fire resistance rating.
(3) Any opening therein shall be protected by an approved self-
closing fire door.
[[Page 151]]
(4) Openings in exit enclosures shall be confined to those necessary
for access to the enclosure from normally occupied spaces and for egress
from the enclosure.
(c) Width and capacity of means of egress. (1) The capacity in
number of persons per unit of exit width for approved components of
means of egress shall be as follows:
(i) Level Egress Components (including Class A Ramps) 100 persons.
(ii) Inclined Egress Components (including Class B Ramps) 60
persons.
(iii) A ramp shall be designated as Class A or Class B in accordance
with the following Table E-1:
Table E-1
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Class A Class B
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Width........................... 44 inches and 30 to 44 inches.
greater.
Slope........................... 1 to 1\3/16\ 1\3/16\ to 2
inches in 12 inches in 12
inches. inches.
Maximum height between landings. No limit.......... 12 feet.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) Means of egress shall be measured in units of exit width of 22
inches. Fractions of a unit shall not be counted, except that 12 inches
added to one or more full units shall be counted as one-half a unit of
exit width.
(3) Units of exit width shall be measured in the clear at the
narrowest point of the means of egress except that a handrail may
project inside the measured width on each side not more than 5 inches
and a stringer may project inside the measured width not more than 1\1/
2\ inches. An exit or exit access door swinging into an aisle or
passageway shall not restrict the effective width thereof at any point
during its swing to less than the minimum widths hereafter specified.
(d) Egress capacity and occupant load. (1) The capacity of means of
egress for any floor, balcony, tier, or other occupied space shall be
sufficient for the occupant load thereof. The occupant load shall be the
maximum number of persons that may be in the space at any time.
(2) Where exits serve more than one floor, only the occupant load of
each floor considered individually need be used in computing the
capacity of the exits at that floor, provided that exit capacity shall
not be decreased in the direction of exit travel.
(e) Arrangement of exits. When more than one exit is required from a
story, at least two of the exits shall be remote from each other and so
arranged as to minimize any possibility that both may be blocked by any
one fire or other emergency condition.
(f) Access to exits. (1) Exits shall be so located and exit access
shall be so arranged that exits are readily accessible at all times.
Where exits are not immediately accessible from an open floor area, safe
and continuous passageways, aisles, or corridors leading directly to
every exit and so arranged as to provide convenient access for each
occupant to at least two exits by separate ways of travel, except as a
single exit or limited dead ends are permitted by other provisions of
this subpart, shall be maintained.
(2) A door from a room to an exit or to a way of exit access shall
be of the side-hinged, swinging type. It shall swing with exit travel
when the room is occupied by more than 50 persons or used for a high
hazard occupancy.
(3) In no case shall access to an exit be through a bathroom, or
other room subject to locking, except where the exit is required to
serve only the room subject to locking.
(4) Ways of exit access and the doors to exits to which they lead
shall be so designed and arranged as to be clearly recognizable as such.
Hangings or draperies shall not be placed over exit doors or otherwise
so located as to conceal or obscure any exit. Mirrors shall not be
placed on exit doors. Mirrors shall not be placed in or adjacent to any
exit in such a manner as to confuse the direction of exit.
(5) Exit access shall be so arranged that it will not be necessary
to travel toward any area of high hazard occupancy in order to reach the
nearest exit, unless the path of travel is effectively shielded from the
high hazard location by suitable partitions or other physical barriers.
(6) The minimum width of any way of exit access shall in no case be
less than 28 inches. Where a single way of exit access leads to an exit,
its capacity in terms of width shall be at least equal to the required
capacity of the exit to
[[Page 152]]
which it leads. Where more than one way of exit access leads to an exit,
each shall have a width adequate for the number of persons it must
accommodate.
(g) Exterior ways of exit access. (1) Access to an exit may be by
means of any exterior balcony, porch, gallery, or roof that conforms to
the requirements of this section.
(2) Exterior ways of exit access shall have smooth, solid floors,
substantially level, and shall have guards on the unenclosed sides.
(3) Where accumulation of snow or ice is likely because of the
climate, the exterior way of exit access shall be protected by a roof,
unless it serves as the sole normal means of access to the rooms or
spaces served, in which case it may be assumed that snow and ice will be
regularly removed in the course of normal occupancy.
(4) A permanent, reasonably straight path of travel shall be
maintained over the required exterior way of exit access. There shall be
no obstruction by railings, barriers, or gates that divide the open
space into sections appurtenant to individual rooms, apartments, or
other uses. Where the Assistant Secretary of Labor or his duly
authorized representative finds the required path of travel to be
obstructed by furniture or other movable objects, he may require that
they be fastened out of the way or he may require that railings or other
permanent barriers be installed to protect the path of travel against
encroachment.
(5) An exterior way of exit access shall be so arranged that there
are no dead ends in excess of 20 feet. Any unenclosed exit served by an
exterior way of exit access shall be so located that no part of the exit
extends past a vertical plane 20 feet and one-half the required width of
the exit from the end of and at right angles to the way of exit access.
(6) Any gallery, balcony, bridge, porch, or other exterior exit
access that projects beyond the outside wall of the building shall
comply with the requirements of this section as to width and
arrangement.
(h) Discharge from exits. (1) All exits shall discharge directly to
the street, or to a yard, court, or other open space that gives safe
access to a public way. The streets to which the exits discharge shall
be of width adequate to accommodate all persons leaving the building.
Yards, courts, or other open spaces to which exits discharge shall also
be of adequate width and size to provide all persons leaving the
building with ready access to the street.
(2) Stairs and other exits shall be so arranged as to make clear the
direction of egress to the street. Exit stairs that continue beyond the
floor of discharge shall be interrupted at the floor of discharge by
partitions, doors, or other effective means.
(i) Headroom. Means of egress shall be so designed and maintained as
to provide adequate headroom, but in no case shall the ceiling height be
less than 7 feet 6 inches nor any projection from the ceiling be less
than 6 feet 8 inches from the floor.
(j) Changes in elevation. Where a means of egress is not
substantially level, such differences in elevation shall be negotiated
by stairs or ramps.
(k) Maintenance and workmanship. (1) Doors, stairs, ramps, passages,
signs, and all other components of means of egress shall be of
substantial, reliable construction and shall be built or installed in a
workmanlike manner.
(2) Means of egress shall be continuously maintained free of all
obstructions or impediments to full instant use in the case of fire or
other emergency.
(3) Any device or alarm installed to restrict the improper use of an
exit shall be so designed and installed that it cannot, even in cases of
failure, impede or prevent emergency use of such exit.
(l) Furnishings and decorations. (1) No furnishings, decorations, or
other objects shall be so placed as to obstruct exits, access thereto,
egress therefrom, or visibility thereof.
(2) No furnishings or decorations of an explosive or highly
flammable character shall be used in any occupancy.
(m) Automatic sprinkler systems. All automatic sprinkler systems
shall be continuously maintained in reliable operating condition at all
times, and such periodic inspections and tests shall be made as are
necessary to assure proper maintenance.
[[Page 153]]
(n) Fire alarm signaling systems. The employer shall assure that
fire alarm signaling systems are maintained and tested in accordance
with the requirements of Sec. 1910.165(d).
(o) Fire retardant paints. Fire retardant paints or solutions shall
be renewed at such intervals as necessary to maintain the necessary
flame retardant properties.
(p) [Reserved]
(q) Exit marking. (1) Exits shall be marked by a readily visible
sign. Access to exits shall be marked by readily visible signs in all
cases where the exit or way to reach it is not immediately visible to
the occupants.
(2) Any door, passage, or stairway which is neither an exit nor a
way of exit access, and which is so located or arranged as to be likely
to be mistaken for an exit, shall be identified by a sign reading ``Not
an Exit'' or similar designation, or shall be identified by a sign
indicating its actual character, such as ``To Basement,'' ``Storeroom,''
``Linen Closet,'' or the like.
(3) Every required sign designating an exit or way of exit access
shall be so located and of such size, color, and design as to be readily
visible. No decorations, furnishings, or equipment which impair
visibility of an exit sign shall be permitted, nor shall there be any
brightly illuminated sign (for other than exit purposes), display, or
object in or near the line of vision to the required exit sign of such a
character as to so detract attention from the exit sign that it may not
be noticed.
(4) Every exit sign shall be distinctive in color and shall provide
contrast with decorations, interior finish, or other signs.
(5) A sign reading ``Exit'', or similar designation, with an arrow
indicating the directions, shall be placed in every location where the
direction of travel to reach the nearest exit is not immediately
apparent.
(6) Every exit sign shall be suitably illuminated by a reliable
light source giving a value of not less than 5 foot-candles on the
illuminated surface. Artificial lights giving illumination to exit signs
other than the internally illuminated types shall have screens, discs,
or lenses of not less than 25 square inches area made of translucent
material to show red or other specified designating color on the side of
the approach.
(7) Each internally illuminated exit sign shall be provided in all
occupancies where reduction of normal illumination is permitted.
(8) Every exit sign shall have the word ``Exit'' in plainly legible
letters not less than 6 inches high, with the principal strokes of
letters not less than three-fourths-inch wide.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 45 FR 60703, Sept. 12, 1980]
Sec. 1910.38 Employee emergency plans and fire prevention plans.
(a) Emergency action plan--(1) Scope and application. This paragraph
(a) applies to all emergency action plans required by a particular OSHA
standard. The emergency action plan shall be in writing (except as
provided in the last sentence of paragraph (a)(5)(iii) of this section)
and shall cover those designated actions employers and employees must
take to ensure employee safety from fire and other emergencies.
(2) Elements. The following elements, at a minimum, shall be
included in the plan:
(i) Emergency escape procedures and emergency escape route
assignments;
(ii) Procedures to be followed by employees who remain to operate
critical plant operations before they evacuate;
(iii) Procedures to account for all employees after emergency
evacuation has been completed;
(iv) Rescue and medical duties for those employees who are to
perform them;
(v) The preferred means of reporting fires and other emergencies;
and
(vi) Names or regular job titles of persons or departments who can
be contacted for further information or explanation of duties under the
plan.
(3) Alarm system. (i) The employer shall establish an employee alarm
system which complies with Sec. 1910.165.
(ii) If the employee alarm system is used for alerting fire brigade
members, or for other purposes, a distinctive signal for each purpose
shall be used.
(4) Evacuation. The employer shall establish in the emergency action
plan the types of evacuation to be used in emergency circumstances.
[[Page 154]]
(5) Training. (i) Before implementing the emergency action plan, the
employer shall designate and train a sufficient number of persons to
assist in the safe and orderly emergency evacuation of employees.
(ii) The employer shall review the plan with each employee covered
by the plan at the following times:
(A) Initially when the plan is developed,
(B) Whenever the employee's responsibilities or designated actions
under the plan change, and
(C) Whenever the plan is changed.
(iii) The employer shall review with each employee upon initial
assignment those parts of the plan which the employee must know to
protect the employee in the event of an emergency. The written plan
shall be kept at the workplace and made available for employee review.
For those employers with 10 or fewer employees the plan may be
communicated orally to employees and the employer need not maintain a
written plan.
(b) Fire prevention plan--(1) Scope and application. This paragraph
(b) applies to all fire prevention plans required by a particular OSHA
standard. The fire prevention plan shall be in writing, except as
provided in the last sentence of paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section.
(2) Elements. The following elements, at a minimum, shall be
included in the fire prevention plan:
(i) A list of the major workplace fire hazards and their proper
handling and storage procedures, potential ignition sources (such as
welding, smoking and others) and their control procedures, and the type
of fire protection equipment or systems which can control a fire
involving them;
(ii) Names or regular job titles of those personnel responsible for
maintenance of equipment and systems installed to prevent or control
ignitions or fires; and
(iii) Names or regular job titles of those personnel responsible for
control of fuel source hazards.
(3) Housekeeping. The employer shall control accumulations of
flammable and combustible waste materials and residues so that they do
not contribute to a fire emergency. The housekeeping procedures shall be
included in the written fire prevention plan.
(4) Training. (i) The employer shall apprise employees of the fire
hazards of the materials and processes to which they are exposed.
(ii) The employer shall review with each employee upon initial
assignment those parts of the fire prevention plan which the employee
must know to protect the employee in the event of an emergency. The
written plan shall be kept in the workplace and made available for
employee review. For those employers with 10 or fewer employees, the
plan may be communicated orally to employees and the employer need not
maintain a written plan.
(5) Maintenance. The employer shall regularly and properly maintain,
according to established procedures, equipment and systems installed on
heat producing equipment to prevent accidental ignition of combustible
materials. The maintenance procedures shall be included in the written
fire prevention plan.
[45 FR 60703, Sept. 12, 1980]
Appendix to Subpart E of Part 1910--Means of Egress
This appendix serves as a nonmandatory guideline to assist employers
in complying with the appropriate requirements of subpart E.
Sec. 1910.38 Employee emergency plans.
1. Emergency action plan elements. The emergency action plan should
address emergencies that the employer may reasonably expect in the
workplace. Examples are: fire; toxic chemical releases; hurricanes;
tornadoes; blizzards; floods; and others. The elements of the emergency
action plan presented in paragraph 1910.38(a)(2) can be supplemented by
the following to more effectively achieve employee safety and health in
an emergency. The employer should list in detail the procedures to be
taken by those employees who have been selected to remain behind to care
for essential plant operations until their evacuation becomes absolutely
necessary. Essential plant operations may include the monitoring of
plant power supplies, water supplies, and other essential services which
cannot be shut down for every emergency alarm. Essential plant
operations may also include chemical or manufacturing processes which
must be shut down in stages or steps where certain employees must be
present to assure that safe shut down procedures are completed.
[[Page 155]]
The use of floor plans or workplace maps which clearly show the
emergency escape routes should be included in the emergency action plan.
Color coding will aid employees in determining their route assignments.
The employer should also develop and explain in detail what rescue
and medical first aid duties are to be performed and by whom. All
employees are to be told what actions they are to take in these
emergency situations that the employer anticipates may occur in the
workplace.
2. Emergency evacuation. At the time of an emergency, employees
should know what type of evacuation is necessary and what their role is
in carrying out the plan. In some cases where the emergency is very
grave, total and immediate evacuation of all employees is necessary. In
other emergencies, a partial evacuation of nonessential employees with a
delayed evacuation of others may be necessary for continued plant
operation. In some cases, only those employees in the immediate area of
the fire may be expected to evacuate or move to a safe area such as when
a local application fire suppression system discharge employee alarm is
sounded. Employees must be sure that they know what is expected of them
in all such emergency possibilities which have been planned in order to
provide assurance of their safety from fire or other emergency.
The designation of refuge or safe areas for evacuation should be
determined and identified in the plan. In a building divided into fire
zones by fire walls, the refuge area may still be within the same
building but in a different zone from where the emergency occurs.
Exterior refuge or safe areas may include parking lots, open fields
or streets which are located away from the site of the emergency and
which provide sufficient space to accommodate the employees. Employees
should be instructed to move away from the exit discharge doors of the
building, and to avoid congregating close to the building where they may
hamper emergency operations.
3. Emergency action plan training. The employer should assure that
an adequate number of employees are available at all times during
working hours to act as evacuation wardens so that employees can be
swiftly moved from the danger location to the safe areas. Generally, one
warden for each twenty employees in the workplace should be able to
provide adequate guidance and instruction at the time of a fire
emergency. The employees selected or who volunteer to serve as wardens
should be trained in the complete workplace layout and the various
alternative escape routes from the workplace. All wardens and fellow
employees should be made aware of handicapped employees who may need
extra assistance, such as using the buddy system, and of hazardous areas
to be avoided during emergencies. Before leaving, wardens should check
rooms and other enclosed spaces in the workplace for employees who may
be trapped or otherwise unable to evacuate the area.
After the desired degree of evacuation is completed, the wardens
should be able to account for or otherwise verify that all employees are
in the safe areas.
In buildings with several places of employment, employers are
encouraged to coordinate their plans with the other employers in the
building. A building-wide or standardized plan for the whole building is
acceptable provided that the employers inform their respective employees
of their duties and responsibilities under the plan. The standardized
plan need not be kept by each employer in the multi-employer building,
provided there is an accessible location within the building where the
plan can be reviewed by affected employees. When multi-employer
building-wide plans are not feasible, employers should coordinate their
plans with the other employers within the building to assure that
conflicts and confusion are avoided during times of emergencies. In
multi-story buildings where more than one employer is on a single floor,
it is essential that these employers coordinate their plans with each
other to avoid conflicts and confusion.
4. Fire prevention housekeeping. The standard calls for the control
of accumulations of flammable and combustible waste materials.
It is the intent of this standard to assure that hazardous
accumulations of combustible waste materials are controlled so that a
fast developing fire, rapid spread of toxic smoke, or an explosion will
not occur. This does not necessarily mean that each room has to be swept
each day. Employers and employees should be aware of the hazardous
properties of materials in their workplaces, and the degree of hazard
each poses. Certainly oil soaked rags have to be treated differently
than general paper trash in office areas. However, large accumulations
of waste paper or corrugated boxes, etc., can pose a significant fire
hazard. Accumulations of materials which can cause large fires or
generate dense smoke that are easily ignited or may start from
spontaneous combustion, are the types of materials with which this
standard is concerned. Such combustible materials may be easily ignited
by matches, welder's sparks, cigarettes and similar low level energy
ignition sources.
5. Maintenance of equipment under the fire prevention plan. Certain
equipment is often installed in workplaces to control heat sources or to
detect fuel leaks. An example is a temperature limit switch often found
on deep-fat food fryers found in restaurants. There may be similar
switches for high temperature dip tanks, or flame failure and flashback
arrester devices on furnaces and similar heat producing equipment. If
these devices are not properly maintained or if
[[Page 156]]
they become inoperative, a definite fire hazard exists. Again employees
and supervisors should be aware of the specific type of control devices
on equipment involved with combustible materials in the workplace and
should make sure, through periodic inspection or testing, that these
controls are operable. Manufacturers' recommendations should be followed
to assure proper maintenance procedures.
[45 FR 60714, Sept. 12, 1980]
Subpart F--Powered Platforms, Manlifts, and Vehicle-Mounted Work
Platforms
Authority: Secs. 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health
Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of Labor's Order
No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), or 1-90
(55 FR 9033), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
Sec. 1910.66 Powered platforms for building maintenance.
(a) Scope. This section covers powered platform installations
permanently dedicated to interior or exterior building maintenance of a
specific structure or group of structures. This section does not apply
to suspended scaffolds (swinging scaffolds) used to service buildings on
a temporary basis and covered under subpart D of this part, nor to
suspended scaffolds used for construction work and covered under subpart
L of 29 CFR part 1926. Building maintenance includes, but is not limited
to, such tasks as window cleaning, caulking, metal polishing and
reglazing.
(b) Application--(1) New installations. This section applies to all
permanent installations completed after July 23, 1990. Major
modifications to existing installations completed after that date are
also considered new installations under this section.
(2) Existing installations. (i) Permanent installations in existence
and/or completed before July 23, 1990 shall comply with paragraphs (g),
(h), (i), (j) and appendix C of this section.
(ii) In addition, permanent installations completed after August 27,
1971, and in existence and/or completed before July 23, 1990, shall
comply with appendix D of this section.
(c) Assurance. (1) Building owners of new installations shall inform
the employer before each use in writing that the installation meets the
requirements of paragraphs (e)(1) and (f)(1) of this section and the
additional design criteria contained in other provisions of paragraphs
(e) and (f) of this section relating to: required load sustaining
capabilities of platforms, building components, hoisting and supporting
equipment; stability factors for carriages, platforms and supporting
equipment; maximum horizontal force for movement of carriages and
davits; design of carriages, hoisting machines, wire rope and
stabilization systems; and design criteria for electrical wiring and
equipment.
(2) Building owners shall base the information required in paragraph
(c)(1) of this section on the results of a field test of the
installation before being placed into service and following any major
alteration to an existing installation, as required in paragraph (g)(1)
of this section. The assurance shall also be based on all other relevant
available information, including, but not limited to, test data,
equipment specifications and verification by a registered professional
engineer.
(3) Building owners of all installations, new and existing, shall
inform the employer in writing that the installation has been inspected,
tested and maintained in compliance with the requirements of paragraphs
(g) and (h) of this section and that all protection anchorages meet the
requirements of paragraph (I)(c)(10) of appendix C.
(4) The employer shall not permit employees to use the installation
prior to receiving assurance from the building owner that the
installation meets the requirements contained in paragraphs (c)(1) and
(c)(3) of this section.
(d) Definitions.
Anemometer means an instrument for measuring wind velocity.
Angulated roping means a suspension method where the upper point of
suspension is inboard from the attachments on the suspended unit, thus
causing the suspended unit to bear against the face of the building.
Building face roller means a rotating cylindrical member designed to
ride on the face of the building wall to prevent the platform from
abrading the face of
[[Page 157]]
the building and to assist in stabilizing the platform.
Building maintenance means operations such as window cleaning,
caulking, metal polishing, reglazing, and general maintenance on
building surfaces.
Cable means a conductor, or group of conductors, enclosed in a
weatherproof sheath, that may be used to supply electrical power and/or
control current for equipment or to provide voice communication
circuits.
Carriage means a wheeled vehicle used for the horizontal movement
and support of other equipment.
Certification means a written, signed and dated statement confirming
the performance of a requirement of this section.
Combination cable means a cable having both steel structural members
capable of supporting the platform, and copper or other electrical
conductors insulated from each other and the structural members by
nonconductive barriers.
Competent person means a person who, because of training and
experience, is capable of identifying hazardous or dangerous conditions
in powered platform installations and of training employees to identify
such conditions.
Continuous pressure means the need for constant manual actuation for
a control to function.
Control means a mechanism used to regulate or guide the operation of
the equipment.
Davit means a device, used singly or in pairs, for suspending a
powered platform from work, storage and rigging locations on the
building being serviced. Unlike outriggers, a davit reacts its operating
load into a single roof socket or carriage attachment.
Equivalent means alternative designs, materials or methods which the
employer can demonstrate will provide an equal or greater degree of
safety for employees than the methods, materials or designs specified in
the standard.
Ground rigging means a method of suspending a working platform
starting from a safe surface to a point of suspension above the safe
surface.
Ground rigged davit means a davit which cannot be used to raise a
suspended working platform above the building face being serviced.
Guide button means a building face anchor designed to engage a guide
track mounted on a platform.
Guide roller means a rotating cylindrical member, operating
separately or as part of a guide assembly, designed to provide
continuous engagement between the platform and the building guides or
guideways.
Guide shoe means a device attached to the platform designed to
provide a sliding contact between the platform and the building guides.
Hoisting machine means a device intended to raise and lower a
suspended or supported unit.
Hoist rated load means the hoist manufacturer's maximum allowable
operating load.
Installation means all the equipment and all affected parts of a
building which are associated with the performance of building
maintenance using powered platforms.
Interlock means a device designed to ensure that operations or
motions occur in proper sequence.
Intermittent stabilization means a method of platform stabilization
in which the angulated suspension wire rope(s) are secured to regularly
spaced building anchors.
Lanyard means a flexible line of rope, wire rope or strap which is
used to secure the body belt or body harness to a deceleration device,
lifeline or anchorage.
Lifeline means a component consisting of a flexible line for
connection to an anchorage at one end to hang vertically (vertical
lifeline), or for connection to anchorages at both ends to stretch
horizontally (horizontal lifeline), and which serves as a means for
connecting other components of a personal fall arrest system to the
anchorage.
Live load means the total static weight of workers, tools, parts,
and supplies that the equipment is designed to support.
Obstruction detector means a control that will stop the suspended or
supported unit in the direction of travel if an obstruction is
encountered, and will allow the unit to move only in a direction away
from the obstruction.
[[Page 158]]
Operating control means a mechanism regulating or guiding the
operation of equipment that ensures a specific operating mode.
Operating device means a device actuated manually to activate a
control.
Outrigger means a device, used singly or in pairs, for suspending a
working platform from work, storage, and rigging locations on the
building being serviced. Unlike davits, an outrigger reacts its
operating moment load as at least two opposing vertical components
acting into two or more distinct roof points and/or attachments.
Platform rated load means the combined weight of workers, tools,
equipment and other material which is permitted to be carried by the
working platform at the installation, as stated on the load rating
plate.
Poured socket means the method of providing wire rope terminations
in which the ends of the rope are held in a tapered socket by means of
poured spelter or resins.
Primary brake means a brake designed to be applied automatically
whenever power to the prime mover is interrupted or discontinued.
Prime mover means the source of mechanical power for a machine.
Rated load means the manufacturer's recommended maximum load.
Rated strength means the strength of wire rope, as designated by its
manufacturer or vendor, based on standard testing procedures or
acceptable engineering design practices.
Rated working load means the combined static weight of men,
materials, and suspended or supported equipment.
Registered professional engineer means a person who has been duly
and currently registered and licensed by an authority within the United
States or its territories to practice the profession of engineering.
Roof powered platform means a working platform where the hoist(s)
used to raise or lower the platform is located on the roof.
Roof rigged davit means a davit used to raise the suspended working
platform above the building face being serviced. This type of davit can
also be used to raise a suspended working platform which has been
ground-rigged.
Rope means the equipment used to suspend a component of an equipment
installation, i.e., wire rope.
Safe surface means a horizontal surface intended to be occupied by
personnel, which is so protected by a fall protection system that it can
be reasonably assured that said occupants will be protected against
falls.
Secondary brake means a brake designed to arrest the descent of the
suspended or supported equipment in the event of an overspeed condition.
Self powered platform means a working platform where the hoist(s)
used to raise or lower the platform is mounted on the platform.
Speed reducer means a positive type speed reducing machine.
Stability factor means the ratio of the stabilizing moment to the
overturning moment.
Stabilizer tie means a flexible line connecting the building anchor
and the suspension wire rope supporting the platform.
Supported equipment means building maintenance equipment that is
held or moved to its working position by means of attachment directly to
the building or extensions of the building being maintained.
Suspended equipment means building maintenance equipment that is
suspended and raised or lowered to its working position by means of
ropes or combination cables attached to some anchorage above the
equipment.
Suspended scaffold (swinging scaffold) means a scaffold supported on
wire or other ropes, used for work on, or for providing access to,
vertical sides of structures on a temporary basis. Such scaffold is not
designed for use on a specific structure or group of structures.
Tail line means the nonsupporting end of the wire rope used to
suspend the platform.
Tie-in guides means the portion of a building that provides
continuous positive engagement between the building and a suspended or
supported unit during its vertical travel on the face of the building.
Traction hoist means a type of hoisting machine that does not
accumulate the suspension wire rope on the hoisting drum or sheave, and
is designed to
[[Page 159]]
raise and lower a suspended load by the application of friction forces
between the suspension wire rope and the drum or sheave.
Transportable outriggers means outriggers designed to be moved from
one work location to another.
Trolley carriage means a carriage suspended from an overhead track
structure.
Verified means accepted by design, evaluation, or inspection by a
registered professional engineer.
Weatherproof means so constructed that exposure to adverse weather
conditions will not affect or interfere with the proper use or functions
of the equipment or component.
Winding drum hoist means a type of hoisting machine that accumulates
the suspension wire rope on the hoisting drum.
Working platform means suspended or supported equipment intended to
provide access to the face of a building and manned by persons engaged
in building maintenance.
Wrap means one complete turn of the suspension wire rope around the
surface of a hoist drum.
(e) Powered platform installations--Affected parts of buildings--(1)
General requirements. The following requirements apply to affected parts
of buildings which utilize working platforms for building maintenance.
(i) Structural supports, tie-downs, tie-in guides, anchoring devices
and any affected parts of the building included in the installation
shall be designed by or under the direction of a registered professional
engineer experienced in such design;
(ii) Exterior installations shall be capable of withstanding
prevailing climatic conditions;
(iii) The building installation shall provide safe access to, and
egress from, the equipment and sufficient space to conduct necessary
maintenance of the equipment;
(iv) The affected parts of the building shall have the capability of
sustaining all the loads imposed by the equipment; and,
(v) The affected parts of the building shall be designed so as to
allow the equipment to be used without exposing employees to a hazardous
condition.
(2) Tie-in guides. (i) The exterior of each building shall be
provided with tie-in guides unless the conditions in paragraph
(e)(2)(ii) or (e)(2)(iii) of this section are met.
Note: See Figure 1 in appendix B of this section for a description
of a typical continuous stabilization system utilizing tie-in guides.
(ii) If angulated roping is employed, tie-in guides required in
paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section may be eliminated for not more than
75 feet (22.9 m) of the uppermost elevation of the building, if
infeasible due to exterior building design, provided an angulation force
of at least 10 pounds (44.4 n) is maintained under all conditions of
loading.
(iii) Tie-in guides required in paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section
may be eliminated if one of the guide systems in paragraph
(e)(2)(iii)(A), (e)(2)(iii)(B) or (e)(2)(iii)(C) of this section is
provided, or an equivalent.
(A) Intermittent stabilization system. The system shall keep the
equipment in continuous contact with the building facade, and shall
prevent sudden horizontal movement of the platform. The system may be
used together with continuous positive building guide systems using tie-
in guides on the same building, provided the requirements for each
system are met.
(1) The maximum vertical interval between building anchors shall be
three floors or 50 feet (15.3 m), whichever is less.
(2) Building anchors shall be located vertically so that attachment
of the stabilizer ties will not cause the platform suspension ropes to
angulate the platform horizontally across the face of the building. The
anchors shall be positioned horizontally on the building face so as to
be symmetrical about the platform suspension ropes.
(3) Building anchors shall be easily visible to employees and shall
allow a stabilizer tie attachment for each of the platform suspension
ropes at each vertical interval. If more than two suspension ropes are
used on a platform, only the two building-side suspension ropes at the
platform ends shall require a stabilizer attachment.
(4) Building anchors which extend beyond the face of the building
shall be
[[Page 160]]
free of sharp edges or points. Where cables, suspension wire ropes and
lifelines may be in contact with the building face, external building
anchors shall not interfere with their handling or operation.
(5) The intermittent stabilization system building anchors and
components shall be capable of sustaining without failure at least four
times the maximum anticipated load applied or transmitted to the
components and anchors. The minimum design wind load for each anchor
shall be 300 (1334 n) pounds, if two anchors share the wind load.
(6) The building anchors and stabilizer ties shall be capable of
sustaining anticipated horizontal and vertical loads from winds
specified for roof storage design which may act on the platform and wire
ropes if the platform is stranded on a building face. If the building
anchors have different spacing than the suspension wire rope or if the
building requires different suspension spacings on one platform, one
building anchor and stabilizer tie shall be capable of sustaining the
wind loads.
Note: See Figure 2 in appendix B of this section for a description
of a typical intermittent stabilization system.
(B) Button guide stabilization system.
(1) Guide buttons shall be coordinated with platform mounted
equipment of paragraph (f)(5)(vi) of this section.
(2) Guide buttons shall be located horizontally on the building face
so as to allow engagement of each of the guide tracks mounted on the
platform.
(3) Guide buttons shall be located in vertical rows on the building
face for proper engagement of the guide tracks mounted on the platform.
(4) Two guide buttons shall engage each guide track at all times
except for the initial engagement.
(5) Guide buttons which extend beyond the face of the building shall
be free of sharp edges or points. Where cables, ropes and lifelines may
be in contact with the building face, guide buttons shall not interfere
with their handling or operation.
(6) Guide buttons, connections and seals shall be capable of
sustaining without damage at least the weight of the platform, or
provision shall be made in the guide tracks or guide track connectors to
prevent the platform and its attachments from transmitting the weight of
the platform to the guide buttons, connections and seals. In either
case, the minimum design load shall be 300 pounds (1334 n) per building
anchor.
Note: See paragraph (f)(5)(vi) of this section for relevant
equipment provisions.
Note: See Figure 3 in appendix B of this section for a a description
of a typical button guide stabilization system.
(C) System utilizing angulated roping and building face rollers. The
system shall keep the equipment in continuous contact with the building
facade, and shall prevent sudden horizontal movement of the platform.
This system is acceptable only where the suspended portion of the
equipment in use does not exceed 130 feet (39.6 m) above a safe surface
or ground level, and where the platform maintains no less than 10 pounds
(44.4 n) angulation force on the building facade.
(iv) Tie-in guides for building interiors (atriums) may be
eliminated when a registered professional engineer determines that an
alternative stabilization system, including systems in paragraphs
(e)(2)(iii) (A), (B) and (C), or a platform tie-off at each work station
will provide equivalent safety.
(3) Roof guarding. (i) Employees working on roofs while performing
building maintenance shall be protected by a perimeter guarding system
which meets the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of Sec. 1910.23 of this
part.
(ii) The perimeter guard shall not be more than six inches (152 mm)
inboard of the inside face of a barrier, i.e. the parapet wall, or roof
edge curb of the building being serviced; however, the perimeter guard
location shall not exceed an 18 inch (457 mm) setback from the exterior
building face.
(4) Equipment stops. Operational areas for trackless type equipment
shall be provided with structural stops, such as curbs, to prevent
equipment from traveling outside its intended travel areas and to
prevent a crushing or shearing hazard.
(5) Maintenance access. Means shall be provided to traverse all
carriages and
[[Page 161]]
their suspended equipment to a safe area for maintenance and storage.
(6) Elevated track. (i) An elevated track system which is located
four feet (1.2 m) or more above a safe surface, and traversed by
carriage supported equipment, shall be provided with a walkway and
guardrail system; or
(ii) The working platform shall be capable of being lowered, as part
of its normal operation, to the lower safe surface for access and egress
of the personnel and shall be provided with a safe means of access and
egress to the lower safe surface.
(7) Tie-down anchors. Imbedded tie-down anchors, fasteners, and
affected structures shall be resistant to corrosion.
(8) Cable stabilization. (i) Hanging lifelines and all cables not in
tension shall be stabilized at each 200 foot (61 m) interval of vertical
travel of the working platform beyond an initial 200 foot (61 m)
distance.
(ii) Hanging cables, other than suspended wire ropes, which are in
constant tension shall be stabilized when the vertical travel exceeds an
initial 600 foot (183 m) distance, and at further intervals of 600 feet
(183 m) or less.
(9) Emergency planning. A written emergency action plan shall be
developed and implemented for each kind of working platform operation.
This plan shall explain the emergency procedures which are to be
followed in the event of a power failure, equipment failure or other
emergencies which may be encountered. The plan shall also explain that
employees inform themselves about the building emergency escape routes,
procedures and alarm systems before operating a platform. Upon initial
assignment and whenever the plan is changed the employer shall review
with each employee those parts of the plan which the employee must know
to protect himself or herself in the event of an emergency.
(10) Building maintenance. Repairs or major maintenance of those
building portions that provide primary support for the suspended
equipment shall not affect the capability of the building to meet the
requirements of this standard.
(11) Electrical requirements. The following electrical requirements
apply to buildings which utilize working platforms for building
maintenance.
(i) General building electrical installations shall comply with
Secs. 1910.302 through 1910.308 of this part, unless otherwise specified
in this section;
(ii) Building electrical wiring shall be of such capacity that when
full load is applied to the equipment power circuit not more than a five
percent drop from building service-vault voltage shall occur at any
power circuit outlet used by equipment regulated by this section;
(iii) The equipment power circuit shall be an independent electrical
circuit that shall remain separate from all other equipment within or on
the building, other than power circuits used for hand tools that will be
used in conjunction with the equipment. If the building is provided with
an emergency power system, the equipment power circuit may also be
connected to this system;
(iv) The power circuit shall be provided with a disconnect switch
that can be locked in the ``OFF'' and ``ON'' positions. The switch shall
be conveniently located with respect to the primary operating area of
the equipment to allow the operators of the equipment access to the
switch;
(v) The disconnect switch for the power circuit shall be locked in
the ``ON'' position when the equipment is in use; and
(vi) An effective two-way voice communication system shall be
provided between the equipment operators and persons stationed within
the building being serviced. The communications facility shall be
operable and shall be manned at all times by persons stationed within
the building whenever the platform is being used.
(f) Powered platform installations--Equipment--(1) General
requirements. The following requirements apply to equipment which are
part of a powered platform installation, such as platforms, stabilizing
components, carriages, outriggers, davits, hoisting machines, wire ropes
and electrical components.
(i) Equipment installations shall be designed by or under the
direction of a registered professional engineer experienced in such
design;
[[Page 162]]
(ii) The design shall provide for a minimum live load of 250 pounds
(113.6 kg) for each occupant of a suspended or supported platform;
(iii) Equipment that is exposed to wind when not in service shall be
designed to withstand forces generated by winds of at least 100 miles
per hour (44.7 m/s) at 30 feet (9.2 m) above grade; and
(iv) Equipment that is exposed to wind when in service shall be
designed to withstand forces generated by winds of at least 50 miles per
hour (22.4 m/s) for all elevations.
(2) Construction requirements. Bolted connections shall be self-
locking or shall otherwise be secured to prevent loss of the connections
by vibration.
(3) Suspension methods. Elevated building maintenance equipment
shall be suspended by a carriage, outriggers, davits or an equivalent
method.
(i) Carriages. Carriages used for suspension of elevated building
maintenance equipment shall comply with the following:
(A) The horizontal movement of a carriage shall be controlled so as
to ensure its safe movement and allow accurate positioning of the
platform for vertical travel or storage;
(B) Powered carriages shall not exceed a traversing speed of 50 feet
per minute (0.3 m/s);
(C) The initiation of a traversing movement for a manually propelled
carriage on a smooth level surface shall not require a person to exert a
horizontal force greater than 40 pounds (444.8 n);
(D) Structural stops and curbs shall be provided to prevent the
traversing of the carriage beyond its designed limits of travel;
(E) Traversing controls for a powered carriage shall be of a
continuous pressure weatherproof type. Multiple controls when provided
shall be arranged to permit operation from only one control station at a
time. An emergency stop device shall be provided on each end of a
powered carriage for interrupting power to the carriage drive motors;
(F) The operating controls(s) shall be so connected that in the case
of suspended equipment, traversing of a carriage is not possible until
the suspended portion of the equipment is located at its uppermost
designed position for traversing; and is free of contact with the face
of the building or building guides. In addition, all protective devices
and interlocks are to be in the proper position to allow traversing of
the carriage;
(G) Stability for underfoot supported carriages shall be obtained by
gravity, by an attachment to a structural support, or by a combination
of gravity and a structural support. The use of flowing counterweights
to achieve stability is prohibited.
(1) The stability factor against overturning shall not be less than
two for horizontal traversing of the carriage, including the effects of
impact and wind.
(2) The carriages and their anchorages shall be capable of resisting
accidental over-tensioning of the wire ropes suspending the working
platform, and this calculated value shall include the effect of one and
one-half times the stall capacity of the hoist motor. All parts of the
installation shall be capable of withstanding without damage to any part
of the installation the forces resulting from the stall load of the
hoist and one half the wind load.
(3) Roof carriages which rely on having tie-down devices secured to
the building to develop the required stability against overturning shall
be provided with an interlock which will prevent vertical platform
movement unless the tie-down is engaged;
(H) An automatically applied braking or locking system, or
equivalent, shall be provided that will prevent unintentional traversing
of power traversed or power assisted carriages;
(I) A manual or automatic braking or locking system or equivalent,
shall be provided that will prevent unintentional traversing of manually
propelled carriages;
(J) A means to lock out the power supply for the carriage shall be
provided;
(K) Safe access to and egress from the carriage shall be provided
from a safe surface. If the carriage traverses an elevated area, any
operating area on the carriage shall be protected by a guardrail system
in compliance with the provisions of paragraph (f)(5)(i)(F)
[[Page 163]]
of this section. Any access gate shall be self-closing and self-
latching, or provided with an interlock;
(L) Each carriage work station position shall be identified by
location markings and/or position indicators; and
(M) The motors shall stall if the load on the hoist motors is at any
time in excess of three times that necessary for lifting the working
platform with its rated load.
(ii) Transportable outriggers. (A) Transportable outriggers may be
used as a method of suspension for ground rigged working platforms where
the point of suspension does not exceed 300 feet (91.5 m) above a safe
surface. Tie-in guide system(s) shall be provided which meet the
requirements of paragraph (e)(2) of this section.
(B) Transportable outriggers shall be used only with self-powered,
ground rigged working platforms.
(C) Each transportable outrigger shall be secured with a tie-down to
a verified anchorage on the building during the entire period of its
use. The anchorage shall be designed to have a stability factor of not
less than four against overturning or upsetting of the outrigger.
(D) Access to and egress from the working platform shall be from and
to a safe surface below the point of suspension.
(E) Each transportable outrigger shall be designed for lateral
stability to prevent roll-over in the event an accidental lateral load
is applied to the outrigger. The accidental lateral load to be
considered in this design shall be not less than 70 percent of the rated
load of the hoist.
(F) Each transportable outrigger shall be designed to support an
ultimate load of not less than four times the rated load of the hoist.
(G) Each transportable outrigger shall be so located that the
suspension wire ropes for two point suspended working platforms are hung
parallel.
(H) A transportable outrigger shall be tied-back to a verified
anchorage on the building with a rope equivalent in strength to the
suspension rope.
(I) The tie-back rope shall be installed parallel to the centerline
of the outrigger.
(iii) Davits. (A) Every davit installation, fixed or transportable,
rotatable or non-rotatable shall be designed and installed to insure
that it has a stability factor against overturning of not less than
four.
(B) The following requirements apply to roof rigged davit systems:
(1) Access to and egress from the working platform shall be from a
safe surface. Access or egress shall not require persons to climb over a
building's parapet or guard railing; and
(2) The working platform shall be provided with wheels, casters or a
carriage for traversing horizontally.
(C) The following requirements apply to ground rigged davit systems:
(1) The point of suspension shall not exceed 300 feet (91.5 m) above
a safe surface. Guide system(s) shall be provided which meet the
requirements of paragraph (e)(2) of this section;
(2) Access and egress to and from the working platform shall only be
from a safe surface below the point of suspension.
(D) A rotating davit shall not require a horizontal force in excess
of 40 pounds (177.9 n) per person to initiate a rotating movement.
(E) The following requirements shall apply to transportable davits:
(1) A davit or part of a davit weighing more than 80 pounds (36 kg)
shall be provided with a means for its transport, which shall keep the
center of gravity of the davit at or below 36 inches (914 mm) above the
safe surface during transport;
(2) A davit shall be provided with a pivoting socket or with a base
that will allow the insertion or removal of a davit at a position of not
more than 35 degrees above the horizontal, with the complete davit
inboard of the building face being serviced; and
(3) Means shall be provided to lock the davit to its socket or base
before it is used to suspend the platform.
(4) Hoisting machines. (i) Raising and lowering of suspended or
supported equipment shall be performed only by a hoisting machine.
(ii) Each hoisting machine shall be capable of arresting any
overspeed descent of the load.
[[Page 164]]
(iii) Each hoisting machine shall be powered only by air, electric
or hydraulic sources.
(iv) Flammable liquids shall not be carried on the working platform.
(v) Each hoisting machine shall be capable of raising or lowering
125 percent of the rated load of the hoist.
(vi) Moving parts of a hoisting machine shall be enclosed or guarded
in compliance with paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of Sec. 1910.212 of this
part.
(vii) Winding drums, traction drums and sheaves and directional
sheaves used in conjunction with hoisting machines shall be compatible
with, and sized for, the wire rope used.
(viii) Each winding drum shall be provided with a positive means of
attaching the wire rope to the drum. The attachment shall be capable of
developing at least four times the rated load of the hoist.
(ix) Each hoisting machine shall be provided with a primary brake
and at least one independent secondary brake, each capable of stopping
and holding not less than 125 percent of the lifting capacity of the
hoist.
(A) The primary brake shall be directly connected to the drive train
of the hoisting machine, and shall not be connected through belts,
chains, clutches, or set screw type devices. The brake shall
automatically set when power to the prime mover is interrupted.
(B)(1) The secondary brake shall be an automatic emergency type of
brake that, if actuated during each stopping cycle, shall not engage
before the hoist is stopped by the primary brake.
(2) When a secondary brake is actuated, it shall stop and hold the
platform within a vertical distance of 24 inches (609.6 mm).
(x) Any component of a hoisting machine which requires lubrication
for its protection and proper functioning shall be provided with a means
for that lubrication to be applied.
(5) Suspended equipment--(i) General requirements. (A) Each
suspended unit component, except suspension ropes and guardrail systems,
shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least four times the
maximum intended live load applied or transmitted to that component.
(B) Each suspended unit component shall be constructed of materials
that will withstand anticipated weather conditions.
(C) Each suspended unit shall be provided with a load rating plate,
conspicuously located, stating the unit weight and rated load of the
suspended unit.
(D) When the suspension points on a suspended unit are not at the
unit ends, the unit shall be capable of remaining continuously stable
under all conditions of use and position of the live load, and shall
maintain at least a 1.5 to 1 stability factor against unit upset.
(E) Guide rollers, guide shoes or building face rollers shall be
provided, and shall compensate for variations in building dimensions and
for minor horizontal out-of-level variations of each suspended unit.
(F) Each working platform of a suspended unit shall be secured to
the building facade by one or more of the following methods, or by an
equivalent method:
(1) Continuous engagement to building anchors as provided in
paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section;
(2) Intermittent engagement to building anchors as provided in
paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A) of this section;
(3) Button guide engagement as provided in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(B)
of this section; or
(4) Angulated roping and building face rollers as provided in
paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(C) of this section.
(G) Each working platform of a suspended unit shall be provided with
a guardrail system on all sides which shall meet the following
requirements:
(1) The system shall consist of a top guardrail, midrail, and a
toeboard;
(2) The top guardrail shall not be less than 36 inches (914 mm) high
and shall be able to withstand at least a 100-pound (444 n) force in any
downward or outward direction;
(3) The midrail shall be able to withstand at least a 75-pound (333
n) force in any downward or outward direction; and
(4) The areas between the guardrail and toeboard on the ends and
outboard side, and the area between the midrail and toeboard on the
inboard side, shall
[[Page 165]]
be closed with a material that is capable of withstanding a load of 100
pounds (45.4 KG.) applied horizontally over any area of one square foot
(.09 m\2\). The material shall have all openings small enough to reject
passage of life lines and potential falling objects which may be
hazardous to persons below.
(5) Toeboards shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a
force of at least 50 pounds (222 n) applied in any downward or
horizontal direction at any point along the toeboard.
(6) Toeboards shall be three and one-half inches (9 cm) minimum in
length from their top edge to the level of the platform floor.
(7) Toeboards shall be securely fastened in place at the outermost
edge of the platform and have no more than one-half inch (1.3 cm)
clearance above the platform floor.
(8) Toeboards shall be solid or with an opening not over one inch
(2.5 cm) in the greatest dimension.
(ii) Two and four-point suspended working platforms. (A) The working
platform shall be not less than 24 inches (610 mm) wide and shall be
provided with a minimum of a 12 inch (305 mm) wide passage at or past
any obstruction on the platform.
(B) The flooring shall be of a slip-resistant type and shall contain
no opening that would allow the passage of life lines, cables and other
potential falling objects. If a larger opening is provided, it shall be
protected by placing a material under the opening which shall prevent
the passage of life lines, cables and potential falling objects.
(C) The working platfrom shall be provided with a means of
suspension that will restrict the platform's inboard to outboard roll
about its longitudinal axis to a maximum of 15 degrees from a horizontal
plane when moving the live load from the inboard to the outboard side of
the platform.
(D) Any cable suspended from above the platform shall be provided
with a means for storage to prevent accumulation of the cable on the
floor of the platform.
(E) All operating controls for the vertical travel of the platform
shall be of the continuous-pressure type, and shall be located on the
platform.
(F) Each operating station of every working platform shall be
provided with a means of interrupting the power supply to all hoist
motors to stop any further powered ascent or descent of the platform.
(G) The maximum rated speed of the platform shall not exceed 50 feet
per minute (0.3 ms) with single speed hoists, nor 75 feet per minute
(0.4 ms) with multi-speed hoists.
(H) Provisions shall be made for securing all tools, water tanks,
and other accessories to prevent their movement or accumulation on the
floor of the platform.
(I) Portable fire extinguishers conforming to the provisions of
Sec. 1910.155 and Sec. 1910.157 of this part shall be provided and
securely attached on all working platforms.
(J) Access to and egress from a working platfrom, except for those
that land directly on a safe surface, shall be provided by stairs,
ladders, platforms and runways conforming to the provisions of subpart D
of this part. Access gates shall be self-closing and self-latching.
(K) Means of access to or egress from a working platform which is 48
inches (1.2 m) or more above a safe surface shall be provided with a
guardrail system or ladder handrails that conform to the provisions of
subpart D of this part.
(L) The platform shall be provided with a secondary wire rope
suspension system if the platform contains overhead structures which
restrict the emergency egress of employees. A horizontal lifeline or a
direct connection anchorage shall be provided, as part of a fall arrest
system which meets the requirements of appendix C, for each employee on
such a platform.
(M) A vertical lifeline shall be provided as part of a fall arrest
system which meets the requirements of appendix C, for each employee on
a working platform suspended by two or more wire ropes, if the failure
of one wire rope or suspension attachment will cause the platform to
upset. If a secondary wire rope suspension is used, vertical lifelines
are not required for the fall arrest system, provided that each employee
is attached to a horizontal lifeline anchored to the platform.
[[Page 166]]
(N) An emergency electric operating device shall be provided on roof
powered platforms near the hoisting machine for use in the event of
failure of the normal operating device located on the working platform,
or failure of the cable connected to the platform. The emergency
electric operating device shall be mounted in a secured compartment, and
the compartment shall be labeled with instructions for use. A means for
opening the compartment shall be mounted in a break-glass receptable
located near the emergency electric operating device or in an equivalent
secure and accessible location.
(iii) Single point suspended working platforms. (A) The requirements
of paragraphs (f)(5)(ii) (A) through (K) of this section shall also
apply to a single point working platform.
(B) Each single point suspended working platform shall be provided
with a secondary wire rope suspension system, which will prevent the
working platform from falling should there be a failure of the primary
means of support, or if the platform contains overhead structures which
restrict the egress of the employees. A horizontal life line or a direct
connection anchorage shall be provided, as part of a fall arrest system
which meets the requirements of appendix C, for each employee on the
platform.
(iv) Ground-rigged working platforms. (A) Groundrigged working
platforms shall comply with all the requirements of paragraphs
(f)(5)(ii) (A) through (M) of this section.
(B) After each day's use, the power supply within the building shall
be disconnected from a ground-rigged working platform, and the platform
shall be either disengaged from its suspension points or secured and
stored at grade.
(v) Intermittently stabilized platforms. (A) The platform shall
comply with paragraphs (F)(5)(ii) (A) through (M) of this section.
(B) Each stabilizer tie shall be equipped with a ``quick connect-
quick disconnect'' device which cannot be accidently disengaged, for
attachment to the building anchor, and shall be resistant to adverse
environmental conditions.
(C) The platform shall be provided with a stopping device that will
interrupt the hoist power supply in the event the platform contacts a
stabilizer tie during its ascent.
(D) Building face rollers shall not be placed at the anchor setting
if exterior anchors are used on the building face.
(E) Stabilizer ties used on intermittently stabilized platforms
shall allow for the specific attachment length needed to effect the
predetermined angulation of the suspended wire rope. The specific
attachment length shall be maintained at all building anchor locations.
(F) The platform shall be in continuous contact with the face of the
building during ascent and descent.
(G) The attachment and removal of stabilizer ties shall not require
the horizontal movement of the platform.
(H) The platform-mounted equipment and its suspension wire ropes
shall not be physically damaged by the loads from the stabilizer tie or
its building anchor. The platform, platform mounted equipment and wire
ropes shall be able to withstand a load that is at least twice the
ultimate strength of the stabilizer tie.
Note: See Figure II in appendix B of this section for a description
of a typical intermittent stabilization system.
(vi) Button-guide stabilized platforms. (A) The platform shall
comply with paragraphs (f)(5)(ii) (A) through (M) of this section.
(B) Each guide track on the platform shall engage a minimum of two
guide buttons during any vertical travel of the platform following the
initial button engagement.
(C) Each guide track on a platform that is part of a roof rigged
system shall be provided with a storage position on the platform.
(D) Each guide track on the platform shall be sufficiently
maneuverable by platform occupants to permit easy engagement of the
guide buttons, and easy movement into and out of its storage position on
the platform.
(E) Two guide tracks shall be mounted on the platform and shall
provide continuous contact with the building face.
(F) The load carrying components of the button guide stabilization
system
[[Page 167]]
which transmit the load into the platform shall be capable of supporting
the weight of the platform, or provision shall be made in the guide
track connectors or platform attachments to prevent the weight of the
platform from being transmitted to the platform attachments.
Note: See Figure III in appendix B of this section for a description
of a typical button guide stabilization system.
(6) Supported equipment. (i) Supported equipment shall maintain a
vertical position in respect to the face of the building by means other
than friction.
(ii) Cog wheels or equivalent means shall be incorporated to provide
climbing traction between the supported equipment and the building
guides. Additional guide wheels or shoes shall be incorporated as may be
necessary to ensure that the drive wheels are continuously held in
positive engagement with the building guides.
(iii) Launch guide mullions indexed to the building guides and
retained in alignment with the building guides shall be used to align
drive wheels entering the building guides.
(iv) Manned platforms used on supported equipment shall comply with
the requirements of paragraphs (f)(5)(ii)(A), (f)(5)(ii)(B), and
(f)(5)(ii) (D) through (K) of this section covering suspended equipment.
(7) Suspension wire ropes and rope connections. (i) Each specific
installation shall use suspension wire ropes or combination cable and
connections meeting the specification recommended by the manufacturer of
the hoisting machine used. Connections shall be capable of developing at
least 80 percent of the rated breaking strength of the wire rope.
(ii) Each suspension rope shall have a ``Design Factor'' of at least
10. The ``Design Factor'' is the ratio of the rated strength of the
suspension wire rope to the rated working load, and shall be calculated
using the following formula:
S(N)
F = --------
W
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Where:
F = Design factor
S = Manufacturer's rated strength of one suspension rope
N = Number of suspension ropes under load
W = Rated working load on all ropes at any point of travel
(iii) Suspension wire rope grade shall be at least improved plow
steel or equivalent.
(iv) Suspension wire ropes shall be sized to conform with the
required design factor, but shall not be less than 5/16 inch (7.94 mm)
in diameter.
(v) No more than one reverse bend in six wire rope lays shall be
permitted.
(vi) A corrosion-resistant tag shall be securely attached to one of
the wire rope fastenings when a suspension wire rope is to be used at a
specific location and will remain in that location. This tag shall bear
the following wire rope data:
(A) The diameter (inches and/or mm);
(B) Construction classification;
(C) Whether non-preformed or preformed;
(D) The grade of material;
(E) The manufacturer's rated strength;
(F) The manufacturer's name;
(G) The month and year the ropes were installed; and
(H) The name of the person or company which installed the ropes.
(vii) A new tag shall be installed at each rope renewal.
(viii) The original tag shall be stamped with the date of the
resocketing, or the original tag shall be retained and a supplemental
tag shall be provided when ropes are resocketed. The supplemental tag
shall show the date of resocketing and the name of the person or company
that resocketed the rope.
(ix) Winding drum type hoists shall contain at least three wraps of
the suspension wire rope on the drum when the suspended unit has reached
the lowest possible point of its vertical travel.
(x) Traction drum and sheave type hoists shall be provided with a
wire rope of sufficient length to reach the lowest possible point of
vertical travel of the suspended unit, and an additional length of the
wire rope of at least four feet (1.2 m).
(xi) The lengthening or repairing of suspension wire ropes is
prohibited.
[[Page 168]]
(xii) Babbitted fastenings for suspension wire rope are prohibited.
(8) Control circuits, power circuits and their components. (i)
Electrical wiring and equipment shall comply with subpart S of this
part, except as otherwise required by this section.
(ii) Electrical runway conductor systems shall be of a type designed
for use in exterior locations, and shall be located so that they do not
come into contact with accumulated snow or water.
(iii) Cables shall be protected against damage resulting from
overtensioning or from other causes.
(iv) Devices shall be included in the control system for the
equipment which will provide protection against electrical overloads,
three phase reversal and phase failure. The control system shall have a
separate method, independent of the direction control circuit, for
breaking the power circuit in case of an emergency or malfunction.
(v) Suspended or supported equipment shall have a control system
which will require the operator of the equipment to follow predetermined
procedures.
(vi) The following requirements shall apply to electrical protection
devices:
(A) On installations where the carriage does not have a stability
factor of at least four against overturning, electrical contact(s) shall
be provided and so connected that the operating devices for the
suspended or supported equipment shall be operative only when the
carriage is located and mechanically retained at an established
operating point.
(B) Overload protection shall be provided in the hoisting or
suspension system to protect against the equipment operating in the
``up'' direction with a load in excess of 125 percent of the rated load
of the platform; and
(C) An automatic detector shall be provided for each suspension
point that will interrupt power to all hoisting motors for travel in the
``down'' direction, and apply the primary brakes if any suspension wire
rope becomes slack. A continuous-pressure rigging-bypass switch designed
for use during rigging is permitted. This switch shall only be used
during rigging.
(vii) Upper and lower directional switches designed to prevent the
travel of suspended units beyond safe upward and downward levels shall
be provided.
(viii) Emergency stop switches shall be provided on remote
controlled, roof-powered manned platforms adjacent to each control
station on the platform.
(ix) Cables which are in constant tension shall have overload
devices which will prevent the tension in the cable from interfering
with the load limiting device required in paragraph (f)(8)(vi)(B) of
this section, or with the platform roll limiting device required in
paragraph (f)(5)(ii)(C) of this section. The setting of these devices
shall be coordinated with other overload settings at the time of design
of the system, and shall be clearly indicated on or near the device. The
device shall interrupt the equipment travel in the ``down'' direction.
(g) Inspection and tests--(1) Installations and alterations. All
completed building maintenance equipment installations shall be
inspected and tested in the field before being placed in initial service
to determine that all parts of the installation conform to applicable
requirements of this standard, and that all safety and operating
equipment is functioning as required. A similar inspection and test
shall be made following any major alteration to an existing
installation. No hoist in an installation shall be subjected to a load
in excess of 125 percent of its rated load.
(2) Periodic inspections and tests. (i) Related building supporting
structures shall undergo periodic inspection by a competent person at
intervals not exceeding 12 months.
(ii) All parts of the equipment including control systems shall be
inspected, and, where necessary, tested by a competent person at
intervals specified by the manufacturer/supplier, but not to exceed 12
months, to determine that they are in safe operating condition. Parts
subject to wear, such as wire ropes, bearings, gears, and governors
shall be inspected and/or tested to determine that they have not worn to
such an extent as to affect the safe operation of the installation.
(iii) The building owner shall keep a certification record of each
inspection
[[Page 169]]
and test required under paragraphs (g)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section.
The certification record shall include the date of the inspection, the
signature of the person who performed the inspection, and the number, or
other identifier, of the building support structure and equipment which
was inspected. This certification record shall be kept readily available
for review by the Assistant Secretary of Labor or the Assistant
Secretary's representative and by the employer.
(iv) Working platforms and their components shall be inspected by
the employer for visible defects before every use and after each
occurrence which could affect the platform's structural integrity.
(3) Maintenance inspections and tests. (i) A maintenance inspection
and, where necessary, a test shall be made of each platform installation
every 30 days, or where the work cycle is less than 30 days such
inspection and/or test shall be made prior to each work cycle. This
inspection and test shall follow procedures recommended by the
manufacturer, and shall be made by a competent person.
(ii) The building owner shall keep a certification record of each
inspection and test performed under paragraph (g)(3)(i) of this section.
The certification record shall include the date of the inspection and
test, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and/or
test, and an identifier for the platform installation which was
inspected. The certification record shall be kept readily available for
review by the Assistant Secretary of Labor or the Assistant Secretary's
representative and by the employer.
(4) Special inspection of governors and secondary brakes. (i)
Governors and secondary brakes shall be inspected and tested at
intervals specified by the manufacturer/supplier but not to exceed every
12 months.
(ii) The results of the inspection and test shall confirm that the
initiating device for the secondary braking system operates at the
proper overspeed.
(iii) The results of the inspection and test shall confirm that the
secondary brake is functioning properly.
(iv) If any hoisting machine or initiating device for the secondary
brake system is removed from the equipment for testing, all reinstalled
and directly related components shall be reinspected prior to returning
the equipment installation to service.
(v) Inspection of governors and secondary brakes shall be performed
by a competent person.
(vi) The secondary brake governor and actuation device shall be
tested before each day's use. Where testing is not feasible, a visual
inspection of the brake shall be made instead to ensure that it is free
to operate.
(5) Suspension wire rope maintenance, inspection and replacement.
(i) Suspension wire rope shall be maintained and used in accordance with
procedures recommended by the wire rope manufacturer.
(ii) Suspension wire rope shall be inspected by a competent person
for visible defects and gross damage to the rope before every use and
after each occurrence which might affect the wire rope's integrity.
(iii) A thorough inspection of suspension wire ropes in service
shall be made once a month. Suspension wire ropes that have been
inactive for 30 days or longer shall have a thorough inspection before
they are placed into service. These thorough inspections of suspension
wire ropes shall be performed by a competent person.
(iv) The need for replacement of a suspension wire rope shall be
determined by inspection and shall be based on the condition of the wire
rope. Any of the following conditions or combination of conditions will
be cause for removal of the wire rope:
(A) Broken wires exceeding three wires in one strand or six wires in
one rope lay;
(B) Distortion of rope structure such as would result from crushing
or kinking;
(C) Evidence of heat damage;
(D) Evidence of rope deterioration from corrosion;
(E) A broken wire within 18 inches (460.8 mm) of the end
attachments;
(F) Noticeable rusting and pitting;
(G) Evidence of core failure (a lengthening of rope lay, protrusion
of the rope core and a reduction in rope diameter suggests core
failure); or
[[Page 170]]
(H) More than one valley break (broken wire).
(I) Outer wire wear exceeds one-third of the original outer wire
diameter.
(J) Any other condition which the competent person determines has
significantly affected the integrity of the rope.
(v) The building owner shall keep a certification record of each
monthly inspection of a suspension wire rope as required in paragraph
(g)(5)(iii) of this section. The record shall include the date of the
inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection,
and a number, or other identifier, of the wire rope which was inspected.
This record of inspection shall be made available for review by the
Assistant Secretary of Labor or the Assistant Secretary's representative
and by the employer.
(6) Hoist inspection. Before lowering personnel below the top
elevation of the building, the hoist shall be tested each day in the
lifting direction with the intended load to make certain it has
sufficient capacity to raise the personnel back to the boarding level.
(h) Maintenance--(1) General maintenance. All parts of the equipment
affecting safe operation shall be maintained in proper working order so
that they may perform the functions for which they were intended. The
equipment shall be taken out of service when it is not in proper working
order.
(2) Cleaning. (i) Control or power contactors and relays shall be
kept clean.
(ii) All other parts shall be kept clean if their proper functioning
would be affected by the presence of dirt or other contaminants.
(3) Periodic resocketing of wire rope fastenings. (i) Hoisting ropes
utilizing poured socket fastenings shall be resocketed at the non-drum
ends at intervals not exceeding 24 months. In resocketing the ropes, a
sufficient length shall be cut from the end of the rope to remove
damaged or fatigued portions.
(ii) Resocketed ropes shall conform to the requirements of paragraph
(f)(7) of this section.
(iii) Limit switches affected by the resocketed ropes shall be
reset, if necessary.
(4) Periodic reshackling of suspension wire ropes. The hoisting
ropes shall be reshackled at the nondrum ends at intervals not exceeding
24 months. When reshackling the ropes, a sufficient length shall be cut
from the end of the rope to remove damaged or fatigued portions.
(5) Roof systems. Roof track systems, tie-downs, or similar
equipment shall be maintained in proper working order so that they
perform the function for which they were intended.
(6) Building face guiding members. T-rails, indented mullions, or
equivalent guides located in the face of a building shall be maintained
in proper working order so that they perform the functions for which
they were intended. Brackets for cable stabilizers shall similarly be
maintained in proper working order.
(7) Inoperative safety devices. No person shall render a required
safety device or electrical protective device inoperative, except as
necessary for tests, inspections, and maintenance. Immediately upon
completion of such tests, inspections and maintenance, the device shall
be restored to its normal operating condition.
(i) Operations--(1) Training. (i) Working platforms shall be
operated only by persons who are proficient in the operation, safe use
and inspection of the particular working platform to be operated.
(ii) All employees who operate working platforms shall be trained in
the following:
(A) Recognition of, and preventive measures for, the safety hazards
associated with their individual work tasks.
(B) General recognition and prevention of safety hazards associated
with the use of working platforms, including the provisions in the
section relating to the particular working platform to be operated.
(C) Emergency action plan procedures required in paragraph (e)(9) of
this section.
(D) Work procedures required in paragraph (i)(1)(iv) of this
section.
(E) Personal fall arrest system inspection, care, use and system
performance.
[[Page 171]]
(iii) Training of employees in the operation and inspection of
working platforms shall be done by a competent person.
(iv) Written work procedures for the operation, safe use and
inspection of working platforms shall be provided for employee training.
Pictorial methods of instruction, may be used, in lieu of written work
procedures, if employee communication is improved using this method. The
operating manuals supplied by manufacturers for platform system
components can serve as the basis for these procedures.
(v) The employer shall certify that employees have been trained in
operating and inspecting a working platform by preparing a certification
record which includes the identity of the person trained, the signature
of the employer or the person who conducted the training and the date
that training was completed. The certification record shall be prepared
at the completion of the training required in paragraph (i)(1)(ii) of
this section, and shall be maintained in a file for the duration of the
employee's employment. The certification record shall be kept readily
available for review by the Assistant Secretary of Labor or the
Assistant Secretary's representative.
(2) Use. (i) Working platforms shall not be loaded in excess of the
rated load, as stated on the platform load rating plate.
(ii) Employees shall be prohibited from working on snow, ice, or
other slippery material covering platforms, except for the removal of
such materials.
(iii) Adequate precautions shall be taken to protect the platform,
wire ropes and life lines from damage due to acids or other corrosive
substances, in accordance with the recommendations of the corrosive
substance producer, supplier, platform manufacturer or other equivalent
information sources. Platform members which have been exposed to acids
or other corrosive substances shall be washed down with a neutralizing
solution, at a frequency recommended by the corrosive substance producer
or supplier.
(iv) Platform members, wire ropes and life lines shall be protected
when using a heat producing process. Wire ropes and life lines which
have been contacted by the heat producing process shall be considered to
be permanently damaged and shall not be used.
(v) The platform shall not be operated in winds in excess of 25
miles per hour (40.2 km/hr) except to move it from an operating to a
storage position. Wind speed shall be determined based on the best
available information, which includes on-site anemometer readings and
local weather forecasts which predict wind velocities for the area.
(vi) On exterior installations, an anemometer shall be mounted on
the platform to provide information of on-site wind velocities prior to
and during the use of the platform. The anemometer may be a portable
(hand held) unit which is temporarily mounted during platform use.
(vii) Tools, materials and debris not related to the work in
progress shall not be allowed to accumulate on platforms. Stabilizer
ties shall be located so as to allow unencumbered passage along the full
length of the platform and shall be of such length so as not to become
entangled in rollers, hoists or other machinery.
(j) Personal fall protection. Employees on working platforms shall
be protected by a personal fall arrest system meeting the requirements
of appendix C, section I, of this standard, and as otherwise provided by
this standard.
Appendix A to Sec. 1910.66, Guidelines (Advisory)
1. Use of the Appendix. Appendix A provides examples of equipment
and methods to assist the employer in meeting the requirements of the
indicated provision of the standard. Employers may use other equipment
or procedures which conform to the requirements of the standard. This
appendix neither adds to nor detracts from the mandatory requirements
set forth in Sec. 1910.66.
2. Assurance. Paragraph (c) of the standard requires the building
owner to inform the employer in writing that the powered platform
installation complies with certain requirements of the standard, since
the employer may not have the necessary information to make these
determinations. The employer, however, remains responsible for meeting
these requirements which have not been set off in paragraph (c)(1).
3. Design Requirements. The design requirements for each
installation should be based
[[Page 172]]
on the limitations (stresses, deflections, etc.), established by
nationally recognized standards as promulgated by the following
organizations, or to equivalent standards:
AA--The Aluminum Association, 818 Connecticut Avenue, NW., Washington,
DC, 20006
Aluminum Construction Manual
Specifications For Aluminum Structures
Aluminum Standards and Data
AGMA--American Gear Manufacturers Association, 101 North Fort Meyer Dr.,
Suite 1000, Arlington, VA 22209
AISC--American Institute of Steel Construction, 400 North Michigan
Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611
ANSI--American National Standards Institute, Inc., 1430 Broadway, New
York, NY 10018
ASCE--American Society of Civil Engineers, 345 East 47th Street, New
York, NY 10017
ASME--American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 345 East 47th Street,
New York, NY 10017
ASTM--American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street,
Philadelphia, PA 19103
AWS--American Welding Society, Inc., Box 351040, 550 NW. LeJeunne Road,
Miami, FL 33126
JIC--Joint Industrial Council, 2139 Wisconsin Avenue NW., Washington, DC
20007
NEMA--National Electric Manufacturers Association, 2101 L Street, NW.,
Washington, DC 20037
4. Tie-in-guides. Indented mullions, T-rails or other equivalent
guides are acceptable as tie-in guides in a building face for a
continuous stabilization system. Internal guides are embedded in other
building members with only the opening exposed (see Figure 1 of appendix
B). External guides, however, are installed external to the other
building members and so are fully exposed. The minimum opening for tie-
in guides is three-quarters of an inch (19 mm), and the minimum inside
dimensions are one-inch (25 mm) deep and two inches (50 mm) wide.
Employers should be aware of the hazards associated with tie-in
guides in a continuous stabilization system which was not designed
properly. For example, joints in these track systems may become extended
or discontinuous due to installation or building settlement. If this
alignment problem is not corrected, the system could jam when a guide
roller or guide shoe strikes a joint and this would cause a hazardous
situation for employees. In another instance, faulty design will result
in guide rollers being mounted in a line so they will jam in the track
at the slightest misalignment.
5. Building anchors (intermittent stabilization system). In the
selection of the vertical distance between building anchors, certain
factors should be given consideration. These factors include building
height and architectural design, platform length and weight, wire rope
angulation, and the wind velocities in the building area. Another factor
to consider is the material of the building face, since this material
may be adversely affected by the building rollers.
External or indented type building anchors are acceptable.
Receptacles in the building facade used for the indented type should be
kept clear of extraneous materials which will hinder their use. During
the inspection of the platform installation, evidence of a failure or
abuse of the anchors should be brought to the attention of the employer.
6. Stabilizer tie length. A stabilizer tie should be long enough to
provide for the planned angulation of the suspension cables. However,
the length of the tie should not be excessive and become a problem by
possibly becoming entangled in the building face rollers or parts of the
platform machinery.
The attachment length may vary due to material elongation and this
should be considered when selecting the material to be used.
Consideration should also be given to the use of ties which are easily
installed by employees, since this will encourage their use.
7. Intermittent stabilization system. Intermittent stabilization
systems may use different equipment, tie-in devices and methods to
restrict the horizontal movement of a powered platform with respect to
the face of the building. One acceptable method employs corrosion-
resistant building anchors secured in the face of the building in
vertical rows every third floor or 50 feet (15.3 m), whichever is less.
The anchors are spaced horizontally to allow a stabilization attachment
(stabilizer tie) for each of the two platform suspension wire ropes. The
stabilizer tie consists of two parts. One part is a quick connect-quick
disconnect device which utilizes a corrosion-resistant yoke and retainer
spring that is designed to fit over the building anchors. The second
part of the stabilizer tie is a lanyard which is used to maintain a
fixed distance between the suspension wire rope and the face of the
building.
In this method, as the suspended powered platform descends past the
elevation of each anchor, the descent is halted and each of the platform
occupants secures a stabilizer tie between a suspension wire rope and a
building anchor. The procedure is repeated as each elevation of a
building anchor is reached during the descent of the powered platform.
As the platform ascends, the procedure is reversed; that is, the
stabilizer ties are removed as each elevation of a building anchor is
reached. The removal of each stabilizer tie is assured since the
platform is provided with stopping devices which will interrupt
[[Page 173]]
power to its hoist(s) in the event either stopping device contacts a
stabilizer during the ascent of the platform.
Figure 2 of appendix B illustrates another type of acceptable
intermittent stabilization system which utilizes retaining pins as the
quick connect-quick disconnect device in the stabilizer tie.
8. Wire Rope Inspection. The inspection of the suspension wire rope
is important since the rope gradually loses strength during its useful
life. The purpose of the inspection is to determine whether the wire
rope has sufficient integrity to support a platform with the required
design factor.
If there is any doubt concerning the condition of a wire rope or its
ability to perform the required work, the rope should be replaced. The
cost of wire rope replacement is quite small if compared to the cost in
terms of human injuries, equipment down time and replacement.
No listing of critical inspection factors, which serve as a basis
for wire rope replacement in the standard, can be a substitute for an
experienced inspector of wire rope. The listing serves as a user's guide
to the accepted standards by which ropes must be judged.
Rope life can be prolonged if preventive maintenance is performed
regularly. Cutting off an appropriate length of rope at the end
termination before the core degrades and valley breaks appear minimizes
degradation at these sections.
9. General Maintenance. In meeting the general maintenance
requirement in paragraph (h)(1) of the standard, the employer should
undertake the prompt replacement of broken, worn and damaged parts,
switch contacts, brushes, and short flexible conductors of electrical
devices. The components of the electrical service system and traveling
cables should be replaced when damaged or significantly abraded. In
addition, gears, shafts, bearings, brakes and hoisting drums should be
kept in proper alignment.
10. Training. In meeting the training requirement of paragraph
(i)(1) of the standard, employers should use both on the job training
and formal classroom training. The written work procedures used for this
training should be obtained from the manufacturer, if possible, or
prepared as necessary for the employee's information and use.
Employees who will operate powered platforms with intermittent
stabilization systems should receive instruction in the specific ascent
and descent procedures involving the assembly and disassembly of the
stabilizer ties.
An acceptable training program should also include employee
instruction in basic inspection procedures for the purpose of
determining the need for repair and replacement of platform equipment.
In addition, the program should cover the inspection, care and use of
the personal fall protection equipment required in paragraph (j)(1) of
the standard.
In addition, the training program should also include emergency
action plan elements. OSHA brochure 1B3088 (Rev.) 1985, ``How
to Prepare for Workplace Emergencies,'' details the basic steps needed
to prepare to handle emergencies in the workplace.
Following the completion of a training program, the employee should
be required to demonstrate competency in operating the equipment safely.
Supplemental training of the employee should be provided by the
employer, as necessary, if the equipment used or other working
conditions should change.
An employee who is required to work with chemical products on a
platform should receive training in proper cleaning procedures, and in
the hazards, care and handling of these products. In addition, the
employee should be supplied with the appropriate personal protective
equipment, such as gloves and eye and face protection.
11. Suspension and Securing of Powered Platforms (Equivalency). One
acceptable method of demonstrating the equivalency of a method of
suspending or securing a powered platform, as required in paragraphs
(e)(2)(iii), (f)(3) and (f)(5)(i)(F), is to provide an engineering
analysis by a registered professional engineer. The analysis should
demonstrate that the proposed method will provide an equal or greater
degree of safety for employees than any one of the methods specified in
the standard.
Appendix B to Sec. 1910.66--Exhibits (Advisory)
The three drawings in appendix B illustrate typical platform
stabilization systems which are addressed in the standard. The drawings
are to be used for reference purposes only, and do not illustrate all
the mandatory requirements for each system.
[[Page 174]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.012
[[Page 175]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.013
[[Page 176]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.014
[[Page 177]]
Appendix C to Sec. 1910.66--Personal Fall Arrest System (Section I--
Mandatory; Sections II and III--Non-Mandatory)
Use of the Appendix
Section I of appendix C sets out the mandatory criteria for personal
fall arrest systems used by all employees using powered platforms, as
required by paragraph (j)(1) of this standard. Section II sets out
nonmandatory test procedures which may be used to determine compliance
with applicable requirements contained in section I of this appendix.
Section III provides nonmandatory guidelines which are intended to
assist employers in complying with these provisions.
I. Personal fall arrest systems--(a) Scope and application. This
section establishes the application of and performance criteria for
personal fall arrest systems which are required for use by all employees
using powered platforms under paragraph 1910.66(j).
(b) Definitions. Anchorage means a secure point of attachment for
lifelines, lanyards or deceleration devices, and which is independent of
the means of supporting or suspending the employee.
Body belt means a strap with means both for securing it about the
waist and for attaching it to a lanyard, lifeline, or deceleration
device.
Body harness means a design of straps which may be secured about the
employee in a manner to distribute the fall arrest forces over at least
the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with means for attaching
it to other components of a personal fall arrest system.
Buckle means any device for holding the body belt or body harness
closed around the employee's body.
Competent person means a person who is capable of identifying
hazardous or dangerous conditions in the personal fall arrest system or
any component thereof, as well as in their application and use with
related equipment.
Connector means a device which is used to couple (connect) parts of
the system together. It may be an independent component of the system
(such as a carabiner), or an integral component of part of the system
(such as a buckle or dee-ring sewn into a body belt or body harness, or
a snap-hook spliced or sewn to a lanyard or self-retracting lanyard).
Deceleration device means any mechanism, such as a rope grab,
ripstitch lanyard, specially woven lanyard, tearing or deforming
lanyard, or automatic self retracting-lifeline/lanyard, which serves to
dissipate a substantial amount of energy during a fall arrest, or
otherwise limits the energy imposed on an employee during fall arrest.
Deceleration distance means the additional vertical distance a
falling employee travels, excluding lifeline elongation and free fall
distance, before stopping, from the point at which the deceleration
device begins to operate. It is measured as the distance between the
location of an employee's body belt or body harness attachment point at
the moment of activation (at the onset of fall arrest forces) of the
deceleration device during a fall, and the location of that attachment
point after the employee comes to a full stop.
Equivalent means alternative designs, materials or methods which the
employer can demonstrate will provide an equal or greater degree of
safety for employees than the methods, materials or designs specified in
the standard.
Free fall means the act of falling before the personal fall arrest
system begins to apply force to arrest the fall.
Free fall distance means the vertical displacement of the fall
arrest attachment point on the employee's body belt or body harness
between onset of the fall and just before the system begins to apply
force to arrest the fall. This distance excludes deceleration distance,
lifeline and lanyard elongation but includes any deceleration device
slide distance or self-retracting lifeline/lanyard extension before they
operate and fall arrest forces occur.
Lanyard means a flexible line of rope, wire rope, or strap which is
used to secure the body belt or body harness to a deceleration device,
lifeline, or anchorage.
Lifeline means a component consisting of a flexible line for
connection to an anchorage at one end to hang vertically (vertical
lifeline), or for connection to anchorages at both ends to stretch
horizontally (horizontal lifeline), and which serves as a means for
connecting other components of a personal fall arrest system to the
anchorage.
Personal fall arrest system means a system used to arrest an
employee in a fall from a working level. It consists of an anchorage,
connectors, a body belt or body harness and may include a lanyard,
deceleration device, lifeline, or suitable combinations of these.
Qualified person means one with a recognized degree or professional
certificate and extensive knowledge and experience in the subject field
who is capable of design, analysis, evaluation and specifications in the
subject work, project, or product.
Rope grab means a deceleration device which travels on a lifeline
and automatically frictionally engages the lifeline and locks so as to
arrest the fall of an employee. A rope grab usually employs the
principle of inertial locking, cam/lever locking, or both.
Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard means a deceleration device which
contains a drum-wound line which may be slowly extracted from, or
retracted onto, the drum under slight tension during normal employee
movement, and which, after onset of a fall, automatically locks the drum
and arrests the fall.
[[Page 178]]
Snap-hook means a connector comprised of a hookshaped member with a
normally closed keeper, or similar arrangement, which may be opened to
permit the hook to receive an object and, when released, automatically
closes to retain the object. Snap-hooks are generally one of two types:
1. The locking type with a self-closing, self-locking keeper which
remains closed and locked until unlocked and pressed open for connection
or disconnection, or
2. The non-locking type with a self-closing keeper which remains
closed until pressed open for connection or disconnection.
Tie-off means the act of an employee, wearing personal fall
protection equipment, connecting directly or indirectly to an anchorage.
It also means the condition of an employee being connected to an
anchorage.
(c) Design for system components. (1) Connectors shall be drop
forged, pressed or formed steel, or made of equivalent materials.
(2) Connectors shall have a corrosion-resistant finish, and all
surfaces and edges shall be smooth to prevent damage to interfacing
parts of the system.
(3) Lanyards and vertical lifelines which tie-off one employee shall
have a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).
(4) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards which automatically limit
free fall distance to two feet (0.61 m) or less shall have components
capable of sustaining a minimum static tensile load of 3,000 pounds
(13.3 kN) applied to the device with the lifeline or lanyard in the
fully extended position.
(5) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards which do not limit free
fall distance to two feet (0.61 m) or less, ripstitch lanyards, and
tearing and deforming lanyards shall be capable of sustaining a minimum
tensile load of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) applied to the device with the
lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended position.
(6) Dee-rings and snap-hooks shall be capable of sustaining a
minimum tensile load of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).
(7) Dee-rings and snap-hooks shall be 100 percent proof-tested to a
minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking,
or taking permanent deformation.
(8) Snap-hooks shall be sized to be compatible with the member to
which they are connected so as to prevent unintentional disengagement of
the snap-hook by depression of the snap-hook keeper by the connected
member, or shall be a locking type snap-hook designed and used to
prevent disengagement of the snap-hook by the contact of the snaphook
keeper by the connected member.
(9) Horizontal lifelines, where used, shall be designed, and
installed as part of a complete personal fall arrest system, which
maintains a safety factor of at least two, under the supervision of a
qualified person.
(10) Anchorages to which personal fall arrest equipment is attached
shall be capable of supporting at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) per
employee attached, or shall be designed, installed, and used as part of
a complete personal fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor
of at least two, under the supervision of a qualified person.
(11) Ropes and straps (webbing) used in lanyards, lifelines, and
strength components of body belts and body harnesses, shall be made from
synthetic fibers or wire rope.
(d) System performance criteria. (1) Personal fall arrest systems
shall, when stopping a fall:
(i) Limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 900 pounds (4
kN) when used with a body belt;
(ii) Limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 1,800 pounds (8
kN) when used with a body harness;
(iii) Bring an employee to a complete stop and limit maximum
deceleration distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 m); and
(iv) Shall have sufficient strength to withstand twice the potential
impact energy of an employee free falling a distance of six feet (1.8
m), or the free fall distance permitted by the system, whichever is
less.
(2)(i) When used by employees having a combined person and tool
weight of less than 310 pounds (140 kg), personal fall arrest systems
which meet the criteria and protocols contained in paragraphs (b), (c)
and (d) in section II of this appendix shall be considered as complying
with the provisions of paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through (d)(1)(iv) above.
(ii) When used by employees having a combined tool and body weight
of 310 pounds (140 kg) or more, personal fall arrest systems which meet
the criteria and protocols contained in paragraphs (b), (c) and (d) in
section II may be considered as complying with the provisions of
paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through (d)(1)(iv) provided that the criteria and
protocols are modified appropriately to provide proper protection for
such heavier weights.
(e) Care and use. (1) Snap-hooks, unless of a locking type designed
and used to prevent disengagement from the following connections, shall
not be engaged:
(i) Directly to webbing, rope or wire rope;
(ii) To each other;
(iii) To a dee-ring to which another snap-hook or other connector is
attached;
(iv) To a horizontal lifeline; or
(v) To any object which is incompatibly shaped or dimensioned in
relation to the snap-hook such that the connected object could depress
the snap-hook keeper a sufficient amount to release itself.
(2) Devices used to connect to a horizontal lifeline which may
become a vertical lifeline shall be capable of locking in either
direction on the lifeline.
(3) Personal fall arrest systems shall be rigged such that an
employee can neither
[[Page 179]]
free fall more than six feet (1.8 m), nor contact any lower level.
(4) The attachment point of the body belt shall be located in the
center of the wearer's back. The attachment point of the body harness
shall be located in the center of the wearer's back near shoulder level,
or above the wearer's head.
(5) When vertical lifelines are used, each employee shall be
provided with a separate lifeline.
(6) Personal fall arrest systems or components shall be used only
for employee fall protection.
(7) Personal fall arrest systems or components subjected to impact
loading shall be immediately removed from service and shall not be used
again for employee protection unless inspected and determined by a
competent person to be undamaged and suitable for reuse.
(8) The employer shall provide for prompt rescue of employees in the
event of a fall or shall assure the self-rescue capability of employees.
(9) Before using a personal fall arrest system, and after any
component or system is changed, employees shall be trained in accordance
with the requirements of paragraph 1910.66(i)(1), in the safe use of the
system.
(f) Inspections. Personal fall arrest systems shall be inspected
prior to each use for mildew, wear, damage and other deterioration, and
defective components shall be removed from service if their strength or
function may be adversely affected.
II. Test methods for personal fall arrest systems (non-mandatory)--
(a) General. Paragraphs (b), (c), (d) and (e), of this section II set
forth test procedures which may be used to determine compliance with the
requirements in paragraph (d)(1)(i) through (d)(1)(iv) of section I of
this appendix.
(b) General conditions for all tests in section II. (1) Lifelines,
lanyards and deceleration devices should be attached to an anchorage and
connected to the body-belt or body harness in the same manner as they
would be when used to protect employees.
(2) The anchorage should be rigid, and should not have a deflection
greater than .04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds (10 kN) is
applied.
(3) The frequency response of the load measuring instrumentation
should be 120 Hz.
(4) The test weight used in the strength and force tests should be a
rigid, metal, cylindrical or torso-shaped object with a girth of 38
inches plus or minus four inches (96 cm plus or minus 10 cm).
(5) The lanyard or lifeline used to create the free fall distance
should be supplied with the system, or in its absence, the least elastic
lanyard or lifeline available to be used with the system.
(6) The test weight for each test should be hoisted to the required
level and should be quickly released without having any appreciable
motion imparted to it.
(7) The system's performance should be evaluated taking into account
the range of environmental conditions for which it is designed to be
used.
(8) Following the test, the system need not be capable of further
operation.
(c) Strength test. (1) During the testing of all systems, a test
weight of 300 pounds plus or minus five pounds (135 kg plus or minus 2.5
kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4), above.)
(2) The test consists of dropping the test weight once. A new unused
system should be used for each test.
(3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard length should be six feet plus
or minus two inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from the
fixed anchorage to the attachment on the body belt or body harness.
(4) For rope-grab-type deceleration systems, the length of the
lifeline above the centerline of the grabbing mechanism to the
lifeline's anchorage point should not exceed two feet (0.61 m).
(5) For lanyard systems, for systems with deceleration devices which
do not automatically limit free fall distance to two feet (0.61 m) or
less, and for systems with deceleration devices which have a connection
distance in excess of one foot (0.3 m) (measured between the centerline
of the lifeline and the attachment point to the body belt or harness),
the test weight should be rigged to free fall a distance of 7.5 feet
(2.3 m) from a point that is 1.5 feet (46 cm) above the anchorage point,
to its hanging location (six feet below the anchorage). The test weight
should fall without interference, obstruction, or hitting the floor or
ground during the test. In some cases a non-elastic wire lanyard of
sufficient length may need to be added to the system (for test purposes)
to create the necessary free fall distance.
(6) For deceleration device systems with integral lifelines or
lanyards which automatically limit free fall distance to two feet (0.61
m) or less, the test weight should be rigged to free fall a distance of
four feet (1.22 m).
(7) Any weight which detaches from the belt or harness should
constitute failure for the strength test.
(d) Force test--(1) General. The test consists of dropping the
respective test weight specified in (d)(2)(i) or (d)(3)(i) once. A new,
unused system should be used for each test.
(2) For lanyard systems. (i) A test weight of 220 pounds plus or
minus three pounds (100 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See
paragraph (b)(4), above.)
(ii) Lanyard length should be six feet plus or minus two inches
(1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from the fixed anchorage to the
attachment on the body belt or body harness.
[[Page 180]]
(iii) The test weight should fall free from the anchorage level to
its hanging location (a total of six feet (1.83 m) free fall distance)
without interference, obstruction, or hitting the floor or ground during
the test.
(3) For all other systems. (i) A test weight of 220 pounds plus or
minus three pounds (100 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See
paragraph (b)(4), above.)
(ii) The free fall distance to be used in the test should be the
maximum fall distance physically permitted by the system during normal
use conditions, up to a maximum free fall distance for the test weight
of six feet (1.83 m), except as follows:
(A) For deceleration systems which have a connection link or
lanyard, the test weight should free fall a distance equal to the
connection distance (measured between the centerline of the lifeline and
the attachment point to the body belt or harness).
(B) For deceleration device systems with integral lifelines or
lanyards which automatically limit free fall distance to two feet (0.61
m) or less, the test weight should free fall a distance equal to that
permitted by the system in normal use. (For example, to test a system
with a self-retracting lifeline or lanyard, the test weight should be
supported and the system allowed to retract the lifeline or lanyard as
it would in normal use. The test weight would then be released and the
force and deceleration distance measured).
(4) A system fails the force test if the recorded maximum arresting
force exceeds 1,260 pounds (15.6 kN) when using a body belt, and/or
exceeds 2,520 pounds (11.2 kN) when using a body harness.
(5) The maximum elongation and deceleration distance should be
recorded during the force test.
(e) Deceleration device tests--(1) General. The device should be
evaluated or tested under the environmental conditions, (such as rain,
ice, grease, dirt, type of lifeline, etc.), for which the device is
designed.
(2) Rope-grab-type deceleration devices. (i) Devices should be moved
on a lifeline 1,000 times over the same length of line a distance of not
less than one foot (30.5 cm), and the mechanism should lock each time.
(ii) Unless the device is permanently marked to indicate the type(s)
of lifeline which must be used, several types (different diameters and
different materials), of lifelines should be used to test the device.
(3) Other self-activatinq-type deceleration devices. The locking
mechanisms of other self-activating-type deceleration devices designed
for more than one arrest should lock each of 1,000 times as they would
in normal service.
III. Additional non-mandatory guidelines for personal fall arrest
systems. The following information constitutes additional guidelines for
use in complying with requirements for a personal fall arrest system.
(a) Selection and use considerations. The kind of personal fall
arrest system selected should match the particular work situation, and
any possible free fall distance should be kept to a minimum.
Consideration should be given to the particular work environment. For
example, the presence of acids, dirt, moisture, oil, grease, etc., and
their effect on the system, should be evaluated. Hot or cold
environments may also have an adverse affect on the system. Wire rope
should not be used where an electrical hazard is anticipated. As
required by the standard, the employer must plan to have means available
to promptly rescue an employee should a fall occur, since the suspended
employee may not be able to reach a work level independently.
Where lanyards, connectors, and lifelines are subject to damage by
work operations such as welding, chemical cleaning, and sandblasting,
the component should be protected, or other securing systems should be
used. The employer should fully evaluate the work conditions and
environment (including seasonal weather changes) before selecting the
appropriate personal fall protection system. Once in use, the system's
effectiveness should be monitored. In some cases, a program for cleaning
and maintenance of the system may be necessary.
(b) Testing considerations. Before purchasing or putting into use a
personal fall arrest system, an employer should obtain from the supplier
information about the system based on its performance during testing so
that the employer can know if the system meets this standard. Testing
should be done using recognized test methods. Section II of this
appendix C contains test methods recognized for evaluating the
performance of fall arrest systems. Not all systems may need to be
individually tested; the performance of some systems may be based on
data and calculations derived from testing of similar systems, provided
that enough information is available to demonstrate similarity of
function and design.
(c) Component compatibility considerations. Ideally, a personal fall
arrest system is designed, tested, and supplied as a complete system.
However, it is common practice for lanyards, connectors, lifelines,
deceleration devices, body belts and body harnesses to be interchanged
since some components wear out before others. The employer and employee
should realize that not all components are interchangeable. For
instance, a lanyard should not be connected between a body belt (or
harness) and a deceleration device of the self-retracting type since
this can result in additional free fall for which the system was not
designed. Any substitution or change to a personal fall arrest system
should be fully evaluated or tested by a competent person to determine
that it meets the
[[Page 181]]
standard, before the modified system is put in use.
(d) Employee training considerations. Thorough employee training in
the selection and use of personal fall arrest systems is imperative. As
stated in the standard, before the equipment is used, employees must be
trained in the safe use of the system. This should include the
following: Application limits; proper anchoring and tie-off techniques;
estimation of free fall distance, including determination of
deceleration distance, and total fall distance to prevent striking a
lower level; methods of use; and inspection and storage of the system.
Careless or improper use of the equipment can result in serious injury
or death. Employers and employees should become familiar with the
material in this appendix, as well as manufacturer's recommendations,
before a system is used. Of uppermost importance is the reduction in
strength caused by certain tie-offs (such as using knots, tying around
sharp edges, etc.) and maximum permitted free fall distance. Also, to be
stressed are the importance of inspections prior to use, the limitations
of the equipment, and unique conditions at the worksite which may be
important in determining the type of system to use.
(e) Instruction considerations. Employers should obtain
comprehensive instructions from the supplier as to the system's proper
use and application, including, where applicable:
(1) The force measured during the sample force test;
(2) The maximum elongation measured for lanyards during the force
test;
(3) The deceleration distance measured for deceleration devices
during the force test;
(4) Caution statements on critical use limitations;
(5) Application limits;
(6) Proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off techniques, including the
proper dee-ring or other attachment point to use on the body belt and
harness for fall arrest;
(7) Proper climbing techniques;
(8) Methods of inspection, use, cleaning, and storage; and
(9) Specific lifelines which may be used. This information should be
provided to employees during training.
(f) Inspection considerations. As stated in the standard (section I,
Paragraph (f)), personal fall arrest systems must be regularly
inspected. Any component with any significant defect, such as cuts,
tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching; alterations or additions
which might affect its efficiency; damage due to deterioration; contact
with fire, acids, or other corrosives; distorted hooks or faulty hook
springs; tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckles; loose or damaged
mountings; non-functioning parts; or wearing or internal deterioration
in the ropes must be withdrawn from service immediately, and should be
tagged or marked as unusable, or destroyed.
(g) Rescue considerations. As required by the standard (section I,
Paragraph (e)(8)), when personal fall arrest systems are used, the
employer must assure that employees can be promptly rescued or can
rescue themselves should a fall occur. The availability of rescue
personnel, ladders or other rescue equipment should be evaluated. In
some situations, equipment which allows employees to rescue themselves
after the fall has been arrested may be desirable, such as devices which
have descent capability.
(h) Tie-off considerations. (1) One of the most important aspects of
personal fall protection systems is fully planning the system before it
is put into use. Probably the most overlooked component is planning for
suitable anchorage points. Such planning should ideally be done before
the structure or building is constructed so that anchorage points can be
incorporated during construction for use later for window cleaning or
other building maintenance. If properly planned, these anchorage points
may be used during construction, as well as afterwards.
(2) Employers and employees should at all times be aware that the
strength of a personal fall arrest system is based on its being attached
to an anchoring system which does not significantly reduce the strength
of the system (such as a properly dimensioned eye-bolt/snap-hook
anchorage). Therefore, if a means of attachment is used that will reduce
the strength of the system, that component should be replaced by a
stronger one, but one that will also maintain the appropriate maximum
arrest force characteristics.
(3) Tie-off using a knot in a rope lanyard or lifeline (at any
location) can reduce the lifeline or lanyard strength by 50 percent or
more. Therefore, a stronger lanyard or lifeline should be used to
compensate for the weakening effect of the knot, or the lanyard length
should be reduced (or the tie-off location raised) to minimize free fall
distance, or the lanyard or lifeline should be replaced by one which has
an appropriately incorporated connector to eliminate the need for a
knot.
(4) Tie-off of a rope lanyard or lifeline around an ``H'' or ``I''
beam or similar support can reduce its strength as much as 70 percent
due to the cutting action of the beam edges. Therefore, use should be
made of a webbing lanyard or wire core lifeline around the beam; or the
lanyard or lifeline should be protected from the edge; or free fall
distance should be greatly minimized.
(5) Tie-off where the line passes over or around rough or sharp
surfaces reduces strength drastically. Such a tie-off should be avoided
or an alternative tie-off rigging should be used. Such alternatives may
include use of a snap-hook/dee ring connection, wire rope tie-off, an
effective padding of the
[[Page 182]]
surfaces, or an abrasion-resistance strap around or over the problem
surface.
(6) Horizontal lifelines may, depending on their geometry and angle
of sag, be subjected to greater loads than the impact load imposed by an
attached component. When the angle of horizontal lifeline sag is less
than 30 degrees, the impact force imparted to the lifeline by an
attached lanyard is greatly amplified. For example, with a sag angle of
15 degrees, the force amplification is about 2:1 and at 5 degrees sag,
it is about 6:1. Depending on the angle of sag, and the line's
elasticity, the strength of the horizontal lifeline and the anchorages
to which it is attached should be increased a number of times over that
of the lanyard. Extreme care should be taken in considering a horizontal
lifeline for multiple tie-offs. The reason for this is that in multiple
tie-offs to a horizontal lifeline, if one employee falls, the movement
of the falling employee and the horizontal lifeline during arrest of the
fall may cause other employees to also fall. Horizontal lifeline and
anchorage strength should be increased for each additional employee to
be tied-off. For these and other reasons, the design of systems using
horizontal lifelines must only be done by qualified persons. Testing of
installed lifelines and anchors prior to use is recommended.
(7) The strength of an eye-bolt is rated along the axis of the bolt
and its strength is greatly reduced if the force is applied at an angle
to this axis (in the direction of shear). Also, care should be exercised
in selecting the proper diameter of the eye to avoid accidental
disengagement of snap-hooks not designed to be compatible for the
connection.
(8) Due to the significant reduction in the strength of the
lifeline/lanyard (in some cases, as much as a 70 percent reduction), the
sliding hitch knot should not be used for lifeline/lanyard connections
except in emergency situations where no other available system is
practical. The ``one-and-one'' sliding hitch knot should never be used
because it is unreliable in stopping a fall. The ``two-and-two,'' or
``three-and-three'' knot (preferable), may be used in emergency situa-
tions; however, care should be taken to limit free fall distance to a
minimum because of reduced lifeline/lanyard strength.
(i) Vertical lifeline considerations. As required by the standard,
each employee must have a separate lifeline when the lifeline is
vertical. The reason for this is that in multiple tie-offs to a single
lifeline, if one employee falls, the movement of the lifeline during the
arrest of the fall may pull other employees' lanyards, causing them to
fall as well.
(j) Snap-hook considerations. Although not required by this standard
for all connections, locking snap-hooks designed for connection to
suitable objects (of sufficient strength) are highly recommended in lieu
of the non-locking type. Locking snap-hooks incorporate a positive
locking mechanism in addition to the spring loaded keeper, which will
not allow the keeper to open under moderate pressure without someone
first releasing the mechanism. Such a feature, properly designed,
effectively prevents roll-out from occurring.
As required by the standard (section I, paragraph (e)(1)) the
following connections must be avoided (unless properly designed locking
snap-hooks are used) because they are conditions which can result in
roll-out when a nonlocking snap-hook is used:
Direct connection of a snap-hook to a horizontal lifeline.
Two (or more) snap-hooks connected to one dee-ring.
Two snap-hooks connected to each other.
A snap-hook connected back on its integral lanyard.
A snap-hook connected to a webbing loop or webbing lanyard.
Improper dimensions of the dee-ring, rebar, or other
connection point in relation to the snap-hook dimensions which would
allow the snap-hook keeper to be depressed by a turning motion of the
snap-hook.
(k) Free fall considerations. The employer and employee should at
all times be aware that a system's maximum arresting force is evaluated
under normal use conditions established by the manufacturer, and in no
case using a free fall distance in excess of six feet (1.8 m). A few
extra feet of free fall can significantly increase the arresting force
on the employee, possibly to the point of causing injury. Because of
this, the free fall distance should be kept at a minimum, and, as
required by the standard, in no case greater than six feet (1.8 m). To
help assure this, the tie-off attachment point to the lifeline or anchor
should be located at or above the connection point of the fall arrest
equipment to belt or harness. (Since otherwise additional free fall
distance is added to the length of the connecting means (i.e. lanyard)).
Attaching to the working surface will often result in a free fall
greater than six feet (1.8 m). For instance, if a six foot (1.8 m)
lanyard is used, the total free fall distance will be the distance from
the working level to the body belt (or harness) attachment point plus
the six feet (1.8 m) of lanyard length. Another important consideration
is that the arresting force which the fall system must withstand also
goes up with greater distances of free fall, possibly exceeding the
strength of the system.
(l) Elongation and deceleration distance considerations. Other
factors involved in a proper tie-off are elongation and deceleration
distance. During the arresting of a fall, a lanyard will experience a
length of stretching or elongation, whereas activation of a deceleration
device will result in a certain stopping distance. These distances
should be available
[[Page 183]]
with the lanyard or device's instructions and must be added to the free
fall distance to arrive at the total fall distance before an employee is
fully stopped. The additional stopping distance may be very significant
if the lanyard or deceleration device is attached near or at the end of
a long lifeline, which may itself add considerable distance due to its
own elongation. As required by the standard, sufficient distance to
allow for all of these factors must also be maintained between the
employee and obstructions below, to prevent an injury due to impact
before the system fully arrests the fall. In addition, a minimum of 12
feet (3.7 m) of lifeline should be allowed below the securing point of a
rope grab type deceleration device, and the end terminated to prevent
the device from sliding off the lifeline. Alternatively, the lifeline
should extend to the ground or the next working level below. These
measures are suggested to prevent the worker from inadvertently moving
past the end of the lifeline and having the rope grab become disengaged
from the lifeline.
(m) Obstruction considerations. The location of the tie-off should
also consider the hazard of obstructions in the potential fall path of
the employee. Tie-offs which minimize the possibilities of exaggerated
swinging should be considered. In addition, when a body belt is used,
the employee's body will go through a horizontal position to a jack-
knifed position during the arrest of all falls. Thus, obstructions which
might interfere with this motion should be avoided or a severe injury
could occur.
(n) Other considerations. Because of the design of some personal
fall arrest systems, additional considerations may be required for
proper tie-off. For example, heavy deceleration devices of the self-
retracting type should be secured overhead in order to avoid the weight
of the device having to be supported by the employee. Also, if
selfretracting equipment is connected to a horizontal lifeline, the sag
in the lifeline should be minimized to prevent the device from sliding
down the lifeline to a position which creates a swing hazard during fall
arrest. In all cases, manufacturer's instructions should be followed.
Appendix D to Sec. 1910.66--Existing Installations (Mandatory)
Use of the Appendix
Appendix D sets out the mandatory building and equipment
requirements for applicable permanent installations completed after
August 27, 1971, and no later than July 23, 1990 which are exempt from
the paragraphs (a), (b)(1), (b)(2), (c), (d), (e), and (f) of this
standard. The requirements in appendix D are essentially the same as
unrevised building and equipment provisions which previously were
designated as 29 CFR 1910.66 (a), (b), (c) and (d) and which were
effective on August 27, 1971.
Note: All existing installations subject to this appendix shall also
comply with paragraphs (g), (h), (i), (j) and appendix C of the standard
29 CFR 1910.66.
(a) Definitions applicable to this appendix--(1) Angulated roping. A
system of platform suspension in which the upper wire rope sheaves or
suspension points are closer to the plane of the building face than the
corresponding attachment points on the platform, thus causing the
platform to press against the face of the building during its vertical
travel.
(2) ANSI. American National Standards Institute.
(3) Babbitted fastenings. The method of providing wire rope
attachments in which the ends of the wire strands are bent back and are
held in a tapered socket by means of poured molten babbitt metal.
(4) Brake--disc type. A brake in which the holding effect is
obtained by frictional resistance between one or more faces of discs
keyed to the rotating member to be held and fixed discs keyed to the
stationary or housing member (pressure between the discs being applied
axially).
(5) Brake--self-energizing band type. An essentially undirectional
brake in which the holding effect is obtained by the snubbing action of
a flexible band wrapped about a cylindrical wheel or drum affixed to the
rotating member to be held, the connections and linkages being so
arranged that the motion of the brake wheel or drum will act to increase
the tension or holding force of the band.
(6) Brake--shoe type. A brake in which the holding effect is
obtained by applying the direct pressure of two or more segmental
friction elements held to a stationary member against a cylindrical
wheel or drum affixed to the rotating member to be held.
(7) Building face rollers. A specialized form of guide roller
designed to contact a portion of the outer face or wall structure of the
building, and to assist in stabilizing the operators' platform during
vertical travel.
(8) Continuous pressure. Operation by means of buttons or switches,
any one of which may be used to control the movement of the working
platform or roof car, only as long as the button or switch is manually
maintained in the actuating position.
(9) Control. A system governing starting, stopping, direction,
acceleration, speed, and retardation of moving members.
(10) Controller. A device or group of devices, usually contained in
a single enclosure, which serves to control in some predetermined manner
the apparatus to which it is connected.
[[Page 184]]
(11) Electrical ground. A conducting connection between an
electrical circuit or equipment and the earth, or some conducting body
which serves in place of the earth.
(12) Guide roller. A rotating, bearing-mounted, generally
cylindrical member, operating separately or as part of a guide shoe
assembly, attached to the platform, and providing rolling contact with
building guideways, or other building contact members.
(13) Guide shoe. An assembly of rollers, slide members, or the
equivalent, attached as a unit to the operators' platform, and designed
to engage with the building members provided for the vertical guidance
of the operators' platform.
(14) Interlock. A device actuated by the operation of some other
device with which it is directly associated, to govern succeeding
operations of the same or allied devices.
(15) Operating device. A pushbutton, lever, or other manual device
used to actuate a control.
(16) Powered platform. Equipment to provide access to the exterior
of a building for maintenance, consisting of a suspended power-operated
working platform, a roof car, or other suspension means, and the
requisite operating and control devices.
(17) Rated load. The combined weight of employees, tools, equipment,
and other material which the working platform is designed and installed
to lift.
(18) Relay, direction. An electrically energized contactor
responsive to an initiating control circuit, which in turn causes a
moving member to travel in a particular direction.
(19) Relay, potential for vertical travel. An electrically energized
contactor responsive to initiating control circuit, which in turn
controls the operation of a moving member in both directions. This relay
usually operates in conjunction with direction relays, as covered under
the definition, ``relay, direction.''
(20) Roof car. A structure for the suspension of a working platform,
providing for its horizontal movement to working positions.
(21) Roof-powered platform. A powered platform having the raising
and lowering mechanism located on a roof car.
(22) Self-powered platform. A powered platform having the raising
and lowering mechanism located on the working platform.
(23) Traveling cable. A cable made up of electrical or communication
conductors or both, and providing electrical connection between the
working platform and the roof car or other fixed point.
(24) Weatherproof. Equipment so constructed or protected that
exposure to the weather will not interfere with its proper operation.
(25) Working platform. The suspended structure arranged for vertical
travel which provides access to the exterior of the building or
structure.
(26) Yield point. The stress at which the material exhibits a
permanent set of 0.2 percent.
(27) Zinced fastenings. The method of providing wire rope
attachments in which the splayed or fanned wire ends are held in a
tapered socket by means of poured molten zinc.
(b) General requirements. (1) Design requirements. All powered
platform installations for exterior building maintenance completed as of
August 27, 1971, but no later than [insert date, 180 days after the
effective date], shall meet all of the design, construction and
installation requirements of Part II and III of the ``American National
Standard Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building
Maintenance ANSI A120.1-1970'' and of this appendix. References shall be
made to appropriate parts of ANSI A120.1-1970 for detail specifications
for equipment and special installations.
(2) Limitation. The requirements of this appendix apply only to
electric powered platforms. It is not the intent of this appendix to
prohibit the use of other types of power. Installation of powered
platforms using other types of power is permitted, provided such
platforms have adequate protective devices for the type of power used,
and otherwise provide for reasonable safety of life and limb to users of
equipment and to others who may be exposed.
(3) Types of powered platforms. (i) For the purpose of applying this
appendix, powered platforms are divided into two basic types, Type F and
Type T.
(ii) Powered platforms designated as Type F shall meet all the
requirements in Part II of ANSI A 120.1-1970, American National Standard
Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building
Maintenance. A basic requirement of Type F equipment is that the work
platform is suspended by at least four wire ropes and designed so that
failure of any one wire rope will not substantially alter the normal
position of the working platform. Another basic requirement of Type F
equipment is that only one layer of hoisting rope is permitted on
winding drums. Type F powered platforms may be either roof-powered or
self-powered.
(iii) Powered platforms designated as Type T shall meet all the
requirements in Part III of ANSI A120.1-1970 American National Standard
Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building
Maintenance, except for section 28, Safety Belts and Life Lines. A basic
requirement of Type T equipment is that the working platform is
suspended by at least two wire ropes. Failure of one wire rope would not
permit the working platform to fall to the ground, but would upset its
normal position. Type T powered
[[Page 185]]
platforms may be either roof-powered or self-powered.
(iv) The requirements of this section apply to powered platforms
with winding drum type hoisting machines. It is not the intent of this
section to prohibit powered platforms using other types of hoisting
machines such as, but not limited to, traction drum hoisting machines,
air powered machines, hydraulic powered machines, and internal
combustion machines. Installation of powered platforms with other types
of hoisting machines is permitted, provided adequate protective devices
are used, and provided reasonable safety of life and limb to users of
the equipment and to others who may be exposed is assured.
(v) Both Type F and Type T powered platforms shall comply with the
requirements of appendix C of this standard.
(c) Type F powered platforms--(1) Roof car, general. (i) A roof car
shall be provided whenever it is necessary to move the working platform
horizontally to working or storage positions.
(ii) The maximum rated speed at which a power traversed roof car may
be moved in a horizontal direction shall be 50 feet per minute.
(2) Movement and positioning of roof car. (i) Provision shall be
made to protect against having the roof car leave the roof or enter roof
areas not designed for travel.
(ii) The horizontal motion of the roof cars shall be positively
controlled so as to insure proper movement and positioning of the roof
car.
(iii) Roof car positioning devices shall be provided to insure that
the working platform is placed and retained in proper position for
vertical travel and during storage.
(iv) Mechanical stops shall be provided to prevent the traversing of
the roof car beyond its normal limits of travel. Such stops shall be
capable of withstanding a force equal to 100 percent of the inertial
effect of the roof car in motion with traversing power applied.
(v)(a) The operating device of a power-operated roof car for
traversing shall be located on the roof car, the working platform, or
both, and shall be of the continuous pressure weather-proof electric
type. If more than one operating device is provided, they shall be so
arranged that traversing is possible only from one operating device at a
time.
(b) The operating device shall be so connected that it is not
operable until:
(1) The working platform is located at its uppermost position of
travel and is not in contact with the building face or fixed vertical
guides in the face of the building; and
(2) All protective devices and interlocks are in a position for
traversing.
(3) Roof car stability. Roof car stability shall be determined by
either paragraph (c)(3) (i) or (ii) of this appendix, whichever is
greater.
(i) The roof car shall be continuously stable, considering
overturning moment as determined by 125 percent rated load, plus maximum
dead load and the prescribed wind loading.
(ii) The roof car and its anchorages shall be capable of resisting
accidental over-tensioning of the wire ropes suspending the working
platform and this calculated value shall include the effect of one and
one-half times the value. For this calculation, the simultaneous effect
of one-half wind load shall be included, and the design stresses shall
not exceed those referred to in paragraph (b)(1) of this appendix.
(iii) If the load on the motors is at any time in excess of three
times that required for lifting the working platform with its rated load
the motor shall stall.
(4) Access to the roof car. Safe access to the roof car and from the
roof car to the working platform shall be provided. If the access to the
roof car at any point of its travel is not over the roof area or where
otherwise necessary for safety, self-closing, self-locking gates shall
be provided. Applicable provisions of the American National Standard
Safety Requirements for Floor and Wall Openings, Railings and Toeboard,
A12.1-1967, shall apply.
(5) Means for maintenance, repair, and storage. Means shall be
provided to run the roof car away from the roof perimeter, where
necessary, and to provide a safe area for maintenance, repairs, and
storage. Provisions shall be made to secure the machine in the stored
position. For stored machines subject to wind forces, see special design
and anchorage requirements for ``wind forces'' in Part II, section
10.5.1.1 of ANSI A120.1-1970 American National Standard Safety
Requirements for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building Maintenance.
(6) General requirements for working platforms. The working platform
shall be of girder or truss construction and shall be adequate to
support its rated load under any position of loading, and comply with
the provisions set forth in section 10 of ANSI A120.1-1970, American
National Standard Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Exterior
Building Maintenance.
(7) Load rating plate. Each working platform shall bear a
manufacturer's load rating plate, conspicuously posted; stating the
maximum permissible rated load. Load rating plates shall be made of
noncorrosive material and shall have letters and figures stamped,
etched, or cast on the surface. The minimum height of the letters and
figures shall be one-fourth inch.
(8) Minimum size. The working platform shall have a minimum net
width of 24 inches.
(9) Guardrails. Working platforms shall be furnished with permanent
guard rails not
[[Page 186]]
less than 36 inches high, and not more than 42 inches high at the front
(building side). At the rear, and on the sides, the rail shall not be
less than 42 inches high. An intermediate guardrail shall be provided
around the entire platform between the top guardrail and the toeboard.
(10) Toeboards. A four-inch toeboard shall be provided along all
sides of the working platform.
(11) Open spaces between guardrails and toeboards. The spaces
between the intermediate guardrail and platform toeboard on the building
side of the working platform, and between the top guardrail and the
toeboard on other sides of the platform, shall be filled with metalic
mesh or similar material that will reject a ball one inch in diameter.
The installed mesh shall be capable of withstanding a load of 100 pounds
applied horizontally over any area of 144 square inches. If the space
between the platform and the building face does not exceed eight inches,
and the platform is restrained by guides, the mesh may be omitted on the
front side.
(12) Flooring. The platform flooring shall be of the nonskid type,
and if of open construction, shall reject a \9/16\-inch diameter ball,
or be provided with a screen below the floor to reject a \9/16\-inch
diameter ball.
(13) Access gates. Where access gates are provided, they shall be
self-closing and self-locking.
(14) Operating device for vertical movement of the working platform.
(i) The normal operating device for the working platform shall be
located on the working platform and shall be of the continuous pressure
weatherproof electric type.
(ii) The operating device shall be operable only when all electrical
protective devices and interlocks on the working platform are in
position for normal service and, the roof car, if provided, is at an
established operating point.
(15) Emergency electric operative device. (i) In addition, on roof-
powered platforms, an emergency electric operating device shall be
provided near the hoisting machine for use in the event of failure of
the normal operating device for the working platform, or failure of the
traveling cable system. The emergency operating device shall be mounted
in a locked compartment and shall have a legend mounted thereon reading:
``For Emergency Operation Only. Establish Communication With Personnel
on Working Platform Before Use.''
(ii) A key for unlocking the compartment housing the emergency
operating device shall be mounted in a break-glass receptacle located
near the emergency operating device.
(16) Manual cranking for emergency operation. Emergency operation of
the main drive machine may be provided to allow manual cranking. This
provision for manual operation shall be designed so that not more than
two persons will be required to perform this operation. The access to
this provision shall include a means to automatically make the machine
inoperative electrically while under the emergency manual operation. The
design shall be such that the emergency brake is operative at or below
governor tripping speed during manual operation.
(17) Arrangement and guarding of hoisting equipment.
(i) Hoisting equipment shall consist of a power-driven drum or drum
contained in the roof car (roof-powered platforms) or contained on the
working platform (self-powered platform).
(ii) The hoisting equipment shall be power-operated in both up and
down directions.
(iii) Guard or other protective devices shall be installed wherever
rotating shafts or other mechanisms or gears may expose personnel to a
hazard.
(iv) Friction devices or clutches shall not be used for connecting
the main driving mechanism to the drum or drums. Belt or chain-driven
machines are prohibited.
(18) Hoisting motors. (i) Hoisting motors shall be electric and of
weather-proof construction.
(ii) Hoisting motors shall be in conformance with applicable
provisions of paragraph (c)(22) of this appendix, Electric Wiring and
Equipment.
(iii) Hoisting motors shall be directly connected to the hoisting
machinery. Motor couplings, if used, shall be of steel construction.
(19) Brakes. The hoisting machine(s) shall have two independent
braking means, each designed to stop and hold the working platform with
125 percent of rated load.
(20) Hoisting ropes and rope connections. (i) Working platforms
shall be suspended by wire ropes of either 6x19 or 6x37 classification,
preformed or nonpreformed.
(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) The minimum factor of safety shall be 10, and shall be
calculated by the following formula:
F = SxN/W
Where
S = Manufacturer's rated breaking strength of one rope.
N = Number of ropes under load.
W = Maximum static load on all ropes with the platform and its rated
load at any point of its travel.
(iv) Hoisting ropes shall be sized to conform with the required
factor of safety, but in no case shall the size be less than \5/16\ inch
diameter.
(v) Winding drums shall have at least three turns of rope remaining
when the platform has landed at the lowest possible point of its travel.
[[Page 187]]
(vi) The lengthening or repairing of wire rope by the joining of two
or more lengths is prohibited.
(vii) The nondrum ends of the hoisting ropes shall be provided with
individual shackle rods which will permit individual adjustment of rope
lengths, if required.
(viii) More than two reverse bends in each rope is prohibited.
(21) Rope tag data. (i) A metal data tag shall be securely attached
to one of the wire rope fastenings. This data tag shall bear the
following wire rope data:
(a) The diameter in inches.
(b) Construction classification.
(c) Whether nonpreformed or preformed.
(d) The grade of material used.
(e) The manufacturer's rated breaking strength.
(f) Name of the manufacturer of the rope.
(g) The month and year the ropes were installed.
(22) Electrical wiring and equipment. (i) All electrical equipment
and wiring shall conform to the requirements of the National Electrical
Code, NFPA 70-1971; ANSI C1-1971 (Rev. of C1-1968), except as modified
by ANSI A120.1-1970 ``American National Standard Safety Requirements for
Powered Platforms for Exterior Building Maintenance.'' For detail design
specifications for electrical equipment, see Part 2, ANSI A120.1-1970.
(ii) All motors and operation and control equipment shall be
supplied from a single power source.
(iii) The power supply for the powered platform shall be an
independent circuit supplied through a fused disconnect switch.
(iv) Electrical conductor parts of the power supply system shall be
protected against accidental contact.
(v) Electrical grounding shall be provided.
(a) Provisions for electrical grounding shall be included with the
power-supply system.
(b) Controller cabinets, motor frames, hoisting machines, the
working platform, roof car and roof car track system, and noncurrent
carrying parts of electrical equipment, where provided, shall be
grounded.
(c) The controller, where used, shall be so designed and installed
that a single ground or short circuit will not prevent both the normal
and final stopping device from stopping the working platform.
(d) Means shall be provided on the roof car and working platform for
grounding portable electric tools.
(e) The working platform shall be grounded through a grounding
connection in a traveling cable. Electrically powered tools utilized on
the working platform shall be grounded.
(vi) Electrical receptacles located on the roof or other exterior
location shall be of a weatherproof type and shall be located so as not
to be subject to contact with water or accumulated snow. The receptacles
shall be grounded and the electric cable shall include a grounding
conductor. The receptacle and plug shall be a type designed to avoid
hazard to persons inserting or withdrawing the plug. Provision shall be
made to prevent application of cable strain directly to the plug and
receptacle.
(vii) Electric runway conductor systems shall be of the type
designed for use in exterior locations and shall be located so as not to
be subject to contact with water or accumulated snow. The conductors,
collectors, and disconnecting means shall conform to the same
requirements as those for cranes and hoists in Article 610 of the
National Electrical Code, NFPA 70-1971; ANSI C1-1971 (Rev. of C1-1968).
A grounded conductor shall parallel the power conductors and be so
connected that it cannot be opened by the disconnecting means. The
system shall be designed to avoid hazard to persons in the area.
(viii) Electrical protective devices and interlocks of the
weatherproof type shall be provided.
(ix) Where the installation includes a roof car, electric contact(s)
shall be provided and so connected that the operating devices for the
working platform shall be operative only when the roof car is located
and mechanically retained at an established operating point.
(x) Where the powered platform includes a powered-operated roof car,
the operating device for the roof car shall be inoperative when the roof
car is mechanically retained at an established operating point.
(xi) An electric contact shall be provided and so connected that it
will cause the down direction relay for vertical travel to open if the
tension in the traveling cable exceeds safe limits.
(xii) An automatic overload device shall be provided to cut off the
electrical power to the circuit in all hoisting motors for travel in the
up direction, should the load applied to the hoisting ropes at either
end of the working platform exceed 125 percent of its normal tension
with rated load, as shown on the manufacturer's data plate on the
working platform.
(xiii) An automatic device shall be provided for each hoisting rope
which will cut off the electrical power to the hoisting motor or motors
in the down direction and apply the brakes if any hoisting rope becomes
slack.
(xiv) Upper and lower directional limit devices shall be provided to
prevent the travel of the working platform beyond the normal upper and
lower limits of travel.
(xv) Operation of a directional limit device shall prevent further
motion in the appropriate direction, if the normal limit of travel has
been reached.
(xvi) Directional limit devices, if driven from the hoisting machine
by chains, tapes,
[[Page 188]]
or cables, shall incorporate a device to disconnect the electric power
from the hoisting machine and apply both the primary and secondary
brakes in the event of failure of the driving means.
(xvii) Final terminal stopping devices of the working platform:
(a) Final terminal stopping devices for the working platform shall
be provided as a secondary means of preventing the working platform from
over-traveling at the terminals.
(b) The device shall be set to function as close to each terminal
landing as practical, but in such a way that under normal operating
conditions it will not function when the working platform is stopped by
the normal terminal stopping device.
(c) Operation of the final terminal stopping device shall open the
potential relay for vertical travel, thereby disconnecting the electric
power from the hoisting machine, and applying both the primary and
secondary brakes.
(d) The final terminal stopping device for the upper limit of travel
shall be mounted so that it is operated directly by the motion of the
working platform itself.
(xviii) Emergency stop switches shall be provided in or adjacent to
each operating device.
(xix) Emergency stop switches shall:
(a) Have red operating buttons or handles.
(b) Be conspicuously and permanently marked ``Stop.''
(c) Be the manually opened and manually closed type.
(d) Be positively opened with the opening not solely dependent on
springs.
(xx) The manual operation of an emergency stop switch associated
with an operating device for the working platform shall open the
potential relay for vertical travel, thereby disconnecting the electric
power from the hoisting machine and applying both the primary and
secondary brakes.
(xxi) The manual operation of the emergency stop switch associated
with the operating device for a power-driven roof car shall cause the
electrical power to the traverse machine to be interrupted, and the
traverse machine brake to apply.
(23) Requirements for emergency communications. (i) Communication
equipment shall be provided for each powered platform for use in an
emergency.
(ii) Two-way communication shall be established between personnel on
the roof and personnel on the stalled working platform before any
emergency operation of the working platform is undertaken by personnel
on the roof.
(iii) The equipment shall permit two-way voice communication between
the working platform and
(a) Designated personnel continuously available while the powered
platform is in use; and
(b) Designated personnel on roof-powered platforms, undertaking
emergency operation of the working platform by means of the emergency
operating device located near the hoisting machine.
(iv) The emergency communication equipment shall be one of the
following types:
(a) Telephone connected to the central telephone exchange system; or
(b) Telephones on a limited system or an approved two-way radio
system, provided designated personnel are available to receive a message
during the time the powered platform is in use.
(d) Type T powered platforms--(1) Roof car. The requirements of
paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(5) of this appendix shall apply to Type T
powered platforms.
(2) Working platform. The requirements of paragraphs (c)(6) through
(c)(16) of this appendix apply to Type T powered platforms.
(i) The working platform shall be suspended by at least two wire
ropes.
(ii) The maximum rated speed at which the working platform of self-
powered platforms may be moved in a vertical direction shall not exceed
35 feet per minute.
(3) Hoisting equipment. The requirements of paragraphs (c) (17) and
(18) of this appendix shall apply to Type T powered platforms.
(4) Brakes. Brakes requirements of paragraph (c)(19) of this
appendix shall apply.
(5) Hoisting ropes and rope connections. (i) Paragraphs (c)(20) (i)
through (vi) and (viii) of this appendix shall apply to Type T powered
platforms.
(ii) Adjustable shackle rods in subparagraph (c)(20)(vii) of this
appendix shall apply to Type T powered platforms, if the working
platform is suspended by more than two wire ropes.
(6) Electrical wiring and equipment. (i) The requirements of
paragraphs (c)(22) (i) through (vi) of this appendix shall apply to Type
T powered platforms. ``Circuit protection limitation,'' ``powered
platform electrical service system,'' all operating services and control
equipment shall comply with the specifications contained in Part 2,
section 26, ANSI A120.1-1970.
(ii) For electrical protective devices the requirements of
paragraphs (c)(22) (i) through (viii) of this appendix shall apply to
Type T powered platforms. Requirements for the ``circuit potential
limitation'' shall be in accordance with specifications contained in
Part 2, section 26, of ANSI A120.1-1970.
(7) Emergency communications. All the requirements of paragraph
(c)(23) of this appendix shall apply to Type T powered platforms.
[54 FR 31456, July 28, 1989, as amended at 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996]
[[Page 189]]
Sec. 1910.67 Vehicle-mounted elevating and rotating work platforms.
(a) Definitions applicable to this section--(1) Aerial device. Any
vehicle--mounted device, telescoping or articulating, or both, which is
used to position personnel.
(2) Aerial ladder. An aerial device consisting of a single- or
multiple-section extensible ladder.
(3) Articulating boom platform. An aerial device with two or more
hinged boom sections.
(4) Extensible boom platform. An aerial device (except ladders) with
a telescopic or extensible boom. Telescopic derricks with personnel
platform attachments shall be considered to be extensible boom platforms
when used with a personnel platform.
(5) Insulated aerial device. An aerial device designed for work on
energized lines and apparatus.
(6) Mobile unit. A combination of an aerial device, its vehicle, and
related equipment.
(7) Platform. Any personnel-carrying device (basket or bucket) which
is a component of an aerial device.
(8) Vehicle. Any carrier that is not manually propelled.
(9) Vertical tower. An aerial device designed to elevate a platform
in a substantially vertical axis.
(b) General requirements. (1) Unless otherwise provided in this
section, aerial devices (aerial lifts) acquired on or after July 1,
1975, shall be designed and constructed in conformance with the
applicable requirements of the American National Standard for ``Vehicle
Mounted Elevating and Rotating Work Platforms,'' ANSI A92.2--1969,
including appendix, which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6. Aerial lifts acquired for use before July 1, 1975 which do
not meet the requirements of ANSI A92.2--1969, may not be used after
July 1, 1976, unless they shall have been modified so as to conform with
the applicable design and construction requirements of ANSI A92.2--1969.
Aerial devices include the following types of vehicle-mounted aerial
devices used to elevate personnel to jobsites above ground: (i)
Extensible boom platforms, (ii) aerial ladders, (iii) articulating boom
platforms, (iv) vertical towers, and (v) a combination of any of the
above. Aerial equipment may be made of metal, wood, fiberglass
reinforced plastic (FRP), or other material; may be powered or manually
operated; and are deemed to be aerial lifts whether or not they are
capable of rotating about a substantially vertical axis.
(2) Aerial lifts may be ``field modified'' for uses other than those
intended by the manufacturer, provided the modification has been
certified in writing by the manufacturer or by any other equivalent
entity, such as a nationally recognized testing laboratory, to be in
conformity with all applicable provisions of ANSI A92.2--1969 and this
section, and to be at least as safe as the equipment was before
modification.
(3) The requirements of this section do not apply to firefighting
equipment or to the vehicles upon which aerial devices are mounted,
except with respect to the requirement that a vehicle be a stable
support for the aerial device.
(4) For operations near overhead electric lines, see
Sec. 1910.333(c)(3).
(c) Specific requirements--(1) Ladder trucks and tower trucks.
Before the truck is moved for highway travel, aerial ladders shall be
secured in the lower traveling position by the locking device above the
truck cab, and the manually operated device at the base of the ladder,
or by other equally effective means (e.g., cradles which prevent
rotation of the ladder in combination with positive acting linear
actuators).
(2) Extensible and articulating boom platforms. (i) Lift controls
shall be tested each day prior to use to determine that such controls
are in safe working condition.
(ii) Only trained persons shall operate an aerial lift.
(iii) Belting off to an adjacent pole, structure, or equipment while
working from an aerial lift shall not be permitted.
(iv) Employees shall always stand firmly on the floor of the basket,
and shall not sit or climb on the edge of the basket or use planks,
ladders, or other devices for a work position.
(v) A body belt shall be worn and a lanyard attached to the boom or
basket when working from an aerial lift.
(vi) Boom and basket load limits specified by the manufacturer shall
not be exceeded.
[[Page 190]]
(vii) The brakes shall be set and outriggers, when used, shall be
positioned on pads or a solid surface. Wheel chocks shall be installed
before using an aerial lift on an incline.
(viii) An aerial lift truck may not be moved when the boom is
elevated in a working position with men in the basket, except for
equipment which is specifically designed for this type of operation in
accordance with the provisions of paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this
section.
(ix) Articulating boom and extensible boom platforms, primarily
designed as personnel carriers, shall have both platform (upper) and
lower controls. Upper controls shall be in or beside the platform within
easy reach of the operator. Lower controls shall provide for overriding
the upper controls. Controls shall be plainly marked as to their
function. Lower level controls shall not be operated unless permission
has been obtained from the employee in the lift, except in case of
emergency.
(x) Climbers shall not be worn while performing work from an aerial
lift.
(xi) The insulated portion of an aerial lift shall not be altered in
any manner that might reduce its insulating value.
(xii) Before moving an aerial lift for travel, the boom(s) shall be
inspected to see that it is properly cradled and outriggers are in
stowed position, except as provided in paragraph (c)(2)(viii) of this
section.
(3) Electrical tests. Electrical tests shall be made in conformance
with the requirements of ANSI A92.2--1969, Section 5. However,
equivalent DC voltage tests may be used in lieu of the AC voltage test
specified in A92.2--1969. DC voltage tests which are approved by the
equipment manufacturer or equivalent entity shall be considered an
equivalent test for the purpose of this paragraph (c)(3).
(4) Bursting safety factor. All critical hydraulic and pneumatic
components shall comply with the provisions of the American National
Standards Institute standard, ANSI A92.2--1969, Section 4.9 Bursting
Safety Factor. Critical components are those in which a failure would
result in a free fall or free rotation of the boom. All noncritical
components shall have a bursting safety factor of at least two to one.
(5) Welding standards. All welding shall conform to the following
Automotive Welding Society (AWS) Standards, which are incorporated by
reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, as applicable:
(i) Standard Qualification Procedure, AWS B3.0--41.
(ii) Recommended Practices for Automotive Welding Design, AWS D8.4-
61.
(iii) Standard Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for
Piping and Tubing, AWS D10.9-69.
(iv) Specifications for Welding Highway and Railway Bridges, AWS
D2.0-69.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 13439, Mar. 26, 1975;
55 FR 32014, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.68 Manlifts.
(a) Definitions applicable to this section--(1) Handhold (Handgrip).
A handhold is a device attached to the belt which can be grasped by the
passenger to provide a means of maintaining balance.
(2) Open type. One which has a handgrip surface fully exposed and
capable of being encircled by the passenger's fingers.
(3) Closed type. A cup-shaped device, open at the top in the
direction of travel of the step for which it is to be used, and closed
at the bottom, into which the passenger may place his fingers.
(4) Limit switch. A device, the purpose of which is to cut off the
power to the motor and apply the brake to stop the carrier in the event
that a loaded step passes the terminal landing.
(5) Manlift. A device consisting of a power-driven endless belt
moving in one direction only, and provided with steps or platforms and
handholds attached to it for the transportation of personnel from floor
to floor.
(6) Rated speed. Rated speed is the speed for which the device is
designed and installed.
(7) Split-rail switch. An electric limit switch operated
mechanically by the rollers on the manlift steps. It consists of an
additional hinged or ``split'' rail, mounted on the regular guide rail,
over which the step rollers pass. It is springloaded in the ``split''
position. If the step supports no load, the rollers
[[Page 191]]
will ``bump'' over the switch; if a loaded step should pass over the
section, the split rail will be forced straight, tripping the switch and
opening the electrical circuit.
(8) Step (platform). A step is a passenger carrying unit.
(9) Travel. The travel is the distance between the centers of the
top and bottom pulleys.
(b) General requirements--(1) Application. This section applies to
the construction, maintenance, inspection, and operation of manlifts in
relation to accident hazards. Manlifts covered by this section consist
of platforms or brackets and accompanying handholds mounted on, or
attached to an endless belt, operating vertically in one direction only
and being supported by, and driven through pulleys, at the top and
bottom. These manlifts are intended for conveyance of persons only. It
is not intended that this section cover moving stairways, elevators with
enclosed platforms (``Paternoster'' elevators), gravity lifts, nor
conveyors used only for conveying material. This section applies to
manlifts used to carry only personnel trained and authorized by the
employer in their use.
(2) Purpose. The purpose of this section is to provide reasonable
safety for life and limb.
(3) Design requirements. All new manlift installations and equipment
installed after the effective date of these regulations shall meet the
design requirements of the ``American National Safety Standard for
Manlifts ANSI A90.1-1969'', which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6, and the requirements of this section.
(4) Reference to other codes and subparts. The following codes, and
subparts of this part, are applicable to this section: Safety Code for
Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus, ANSI B15.1-1953 (R 1958), and
subpart O; subpart S; Safety Code for Fixed Ladders, ANSI A14.3-1956,
and Safety Requirements for Floor and Wall Openings, Railings and
Toeboards, ANSI A12.1-1967, and subpart D. The preceding ANSI standards
are incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(5) Floor openings--(i) Allowable size. Floor openings for both the
``up'' and ``down'' runs shall be not less than 28 inches nor more than
36 inches in width for a 12-inch belt; not less than 34 inches nor more
than 38 inches for a 14-inch belt; and not less than 36 inches nor more
than 40 inches for a 16-inch belt and shall extend not less than 24
inches, nor more than 28 inches from the face of the belt.
(ii) Uniformity. All floor openings for a given manlift shall be
uniform in size and shall be approximately circular, and each shall be
located vertically above the opening below it.
(6) Landing--(i) Vertical clearance. The clearanace between the
floor or mounting platform and the lower edge for the conical guard
above it required by subparagraph (7) of this paragraph shall not be
less than 7 feet 6 inches. Where this clearance cannot be obtained no
access to the manlift shall be provided and the manlift runway shall be
enclosed where it passes through such floor.
(ii) Clear landing space. The landing space adjacent to the floor
openings shall be free from obstruction and kept clear at all times.
This landing space shall be at least 2 feet in width from the edge of
the floor opening used for mounting and dismounting.
(iii) Lighting and landing. Adequate lighting, not less than 5-foot
candles, shall be provided at each floor landing at all times when the
lift is in operation.
(iv) Landing surface. The landing surfaces at the entrances and
exits to the manlift shall be constructed and maintained as to provide
safe footing at all times.
(v) Emergency landings. Where there is a travel of 50 feet or more
between floor landings, one or more emergency landings shall be provided
so that there will be a landing (either floor or emergency) for every 25
feet or less of manlift travel.
(a) Emergency landings shall be accessible from both the ``up'' and
``down'' rungs of the manlift and shall give access to the ladder
required in subparagraph (12) of this paragraph.
(b) Emergency landings shall be completely enclosed with a standard
railing and toeboard.
[[Page 192]]
(c) Platforms constructed to give access to bucket elevators or
other equipment for the purpose of inspection, lubrication, and repair
may also serve as emergency landings under this rule. All such platforms
will then be considered part of the emergency landing and shall be
provided with standard railings and toeboards.
(7) Guards on underside of floor openings--(i) Fixed type. On the
ascending side of the manlift floor openings shall be provided with a
bevel guard or cone meeting the following requirements:
(a) The cone shall make an angle of not less than 45 deg. with the
horizontal. An angle of 60 deg. or greater shall be used where ceiling
heights permit.
(b) The lower edge of this guard shall extend at least 42 inches
outward from any handhold on the belt. It shall not extend beyond the
upper surface of the floor above.
(c) The cone shall be made of not less than No. 18 U.S. gauge sheet
steel or material of equivalent strength or stiffness. The lower edge
shall be rolled to a minimum diameter of one-half inch and the interior
shall be smooth with no rivets, bolts or screws protruding.
(ii) Floating type. In lieu of the fixed guards specified in
subdivision (i) of this subparagraph a floating type safety cone may be
used, such floating cones to be mounted on hinges at least 6 inches
below the underside of the floor and so constructed as to actuate a
limit switch should a force of 2 pounds be applied on the edge of the
cone closest to the hinge. The depth of this floating cone need not
exceed 12 inches.
(8) Protection of entrances and exits--(i) Guard rail requirement.
The entrances and exits at all floor landings affording access to the
manlift shall be guarded by a maze (staggered railing) or a handrail
equipped with self-closing gates.
(ii) Construction. The rails shall be standard guardrails with
toeboards meeting the provisions of the Safety Requirements for Floor
and Wall Openings, Railings and Toeboards, ANSI A12.1-1967 and
Sec. 1910.23.
(iii) Gates. Gates, if used, shall open outward and shall be self-
closing. Corners of gates shall be rounded.
(iv) Maze. Maze or staggered openings shall offer no direct passage
between enclosure and outer floor space.
(v) Except where building layout prevents, entrances at all landings
shall be in the same relative position.
(9) Guards for openings--(i) Construction. The floor opening at each
landing shall be guarded on sides not used for entrance or exit by a
wall, a railing and toeboard or by panels of wire mesh of suitable
strength.
(ii) Height and location. Such rails or guards shall be at least 42
inches in height on the up-running side and 66 inches on the down-
running side.
(10) Bottom arrangement--(i) Bottom landing. At the bottom landing
the clear area shall be not smaller than the area enclosed by the
guardrails on the floors above, and any wall in front of the down-
running side of the belt shall be not less than 48 inches from the face
of the belt. This space shall not be encroached upon by stairs or
ladders.
(ii) Location of lower pulley. The lower (boot) pulley shall be
installed so that it is supported by the lowest landing served. The
sides of the pulley support shall be guarded to prevent contact with the
pulley or the steps.
(iii) Mounting platform. A mounting platform shall be provided in
front or to one side of the uprun at the lowest landing, unless the
floor level is such that the following requirement can be met: The floor
or platform shall be at or above the point at which the upper surface of
the ascending step completes its turn and assumes a horizontal position.
(iv) Guardrails. To guard against persons walking under a descending
step, the area on the downside of the manlift shall be guarded in
accordance with subparagraph (8) of this paragraph. To guard against a
person getting between the mounting platform and an ascending step, the
area between the belt and the platform shall be protected by a
guardrail.
(11) Top arrangements--(i) Clearance from floor. A top clearance
shall be provided of at least 11 feet above the top terminal landing.
This clearance shall be maintained from a plane through each face of the
belt to a vertical cylindrical plane having a diameter 2 feet greater
than the diameter of the floor
[[Page 193]]
opening, extending upward from the top floor to the ceiling on the up-
running side of the belt. No encroachment of structural or machine
supporting members within this space will be permitted.
(ii) Pulley clearance. (a) There shall be a clearance of at least 5
feet between the center of the head pulley shaft and any ceiling
obstruction.
(b) The center of the head pulley shaft shall be not less than 6
feet above the top terminal landing.
(iii) Emergency grab rail. An emergency grab bar or rail and
platform shall be provided at the head pulley when the distance to the
head pulley is over 6 feet above the top landing, otherwise only a grab
bar or rail is to be provided to permit the rider to swing free should
the emergency stops become inoperative.
(12) Emergency exit ladder. A fixed metal ladder accessible from
both the ``up'' and ``down'' run of the manlift shall be provided for
the entire travel of the manlift. Such ladder shall be in accordance
with the existing ANSI A14.3-1956 Safety Code for Fixed Ladders and
Sec. 1910.27.
(13) Superstructure bracing. Manlift rails shall be secured in such
a manner as to avoid spreading, vibration, and misalinement.
(14) Illumination--(i) General. Both runs of the manlift shall be
illuminated at all times when the lift is in operation. An intensity of
not less than 1-foot candle shall be maintained at all points. (However,
see subparagraph (6)(iii) of this paragraph for illumination
requirements at landings.)
(ii) Control of illumination. Lighting of manlift runways shall be
by means of circuits permanently tied in to the building circuits (no
switches), or shall be controlled by switches at each landing. Where
separate switches are provided at each landing, any switch shall turn on
all lights necessary to illuminate the entire runway.
(15) Weather protection. The entire manlift and its driving
mechanism shall be protected from the weather at all times.
(c) Mechanical requirements--(1) Machines, general--(i) Brakes.
Brakes provided for stopping and holding a manlift shall be inherently
self-engaging, by requiring power or force from an external source to
cause disengagement. The brake shall be electrically released, and shall
be applied to the motor shaft for direct-connected units or to the input
shaft for belt-driven units. The brake shall be capable of stopping and
holding the manlift when the descending side is loaded with 250 lb on
each step.
(ii) Belt. (a) The belts shall be of hard-woven canvas, rubber-
coated canvas, leather, or other material meeting the strength
requirements of paragraph (b)(3) of this section and having a
coefficient of friction such that when used in conjunction with an
adequate tension device it will meet the brake test specified in
subdivision (i) of this subparagraph.
(b) The width of the belt shall be not less than 12 inches for a
travel not exceeding 100 feet, not less than 14 inches for a travel
greater than 100 feet but not exceeding 150 feet and 16 inches for a
travel exceeding 150 feet.
(c) A belt that has become torn while in use on a manlift shall not
be spliced and put back in service.
(2) Speed--(i) Maximum speed. No manlift designed for a speed in
excess of 80 feet per minute shall be installed.
(ii) [Reserved]
(3) Platforms or steps--(i) Minimum depth. Steps or platforms shall
be not less than 12 inches nor more than 14 inches deep, measured from
the belt to the edge of the step or platform.
(ii) Width. The width of the step or platform shall be not less than
the width of the belt to which it is attached.
(iii) Distance between steps. The distance between steps shall be
equally spaced and not less than 16 feet measured from the upper surface
of one step to the upper surface of the next step above it.
(iv) Angle of step. The surface of the step shall make approximately
a right angle with the ``up'' and ``down'' run of the belt, and shall
travel in the approximate horizontal position with the ``up'' and
``down'' run of the belt.
(v) Surfaces. The upper or working surfaces of the step shall be of
a material having inherent nonslip characteristics (coefficient of
friction not less than 0.5) or shall be covered completely
[[Page 194]]
by a nonslip tread securely fastened to it.
(vi) Strength of step supports. When subjected to a load of 400
pounds applied at the approximate center of the step, step frames, or
supports and their guides shall be of adequate strength to:
(a) Prevent the disengagement of any step roller.
(b) Prevent any appreciable misalinement.
(c) Prevent any visible deformation of the steps or its support.
(vii) Prohibition of steps without handholds. No steps shall be
provided unless there is a corresponding handhold above or below it
meeting the requirements of paragraph (c)(4) of this section. If a step
is removed for repairs or permanently, the handholds immediately above
and below it shall be removed before the lift is again placed in
service.
(4) Handholds--(i) Location. Handholds attached to the belt shall be
provided and installed so that they are not less than 4 feet nor more
than 4 feet 8 inches above the step tread. These shall be so located as
to be available on the both ``up'' and ``down'' run of the belt.
(ii) Size. The grab surface of the handhold shall be not less than
4\1/2\ inches in width, not less than 3 inches in depth, and shall
provide 2 inches of clearance from the belt. Fastenings for handholds
shall be located not less than 1 inch from the edge of the belt.
(iii) Strength. The handhold shall be capable of withstanding,
without damage, a load of 300 pounds applied parallel to the run of the
belt.
(iv) Prohibition of handhold without steps. No handhold shall be
provided without a corresponding step. If a handhold is removed
permanently or temporarily, the corresponding step and handhold for the
opposite direction of travel shall also be removed before the lift is
again placed in service.
(v) Type. All handholds shall be of the closed type.
(5) Up limit stops--(i) Requirements. Two separate automatic stop
devices shall be provided to cut off the power and apply the brake when
a loaded step passes the upper terminal landing. One of these shall
consist of a split-rail switch mechanically operated by the step roller
and located not more than 6 inches above the top terminal landing. The
second automatic stop device may consist of any of the following:
(a) Any split-rail switch placed 6 inches above and on the side
opposite the first limit switch.
(b) An electronic device.
(c) A switch actuated by a lever, rod, or plate, the latter to be
placed on the ``up'' side of the head pulley so as to just clear a
passing step.
(ii) Manual reset location. After the manlift has been stopped by a
stop device it shall be necessary to reset the automatic stop manually.
The device shall be so located that a person resetting it shall have a
clear view of both the ``up'' and ``down'' runs of the manlift. It shall
not be possible to reset the device from any step or platform.
(iii) Cut-off point. The initial limit stop device shall function so
that the manlift will be stopped before the loaded step has reached a
point 24 inches above the top terminal landing.
(iv) Electrical requirements. (a) Where such switches open the main
motor circuit directly they shall be of the multipole type.
(b) Where electronic devices are used they shall be so designed and
installed that failure will result in shutting off the power to the
driving motor.
(c) Where flammable vapors or combustible dusts may be present,
electrical installations shall be in accordance with the requirements of
subpart S of this part for such locations.
(d) Unless of the oil-immersed type controller contacts carrying the
main motor current shall be copper to carbon or equal, except where the
circuit is broken at two or more points simultaneously.
(6) Emergency stop--(i) General. An emergency stop means shall be
provided.
(ii) Location. This stop means shall be within easy reach of the
ascending and descending runs of the belt.
(iii) Operation. This stop means shall be so connected with the
control lever or operating mechanism that it will cut off the power and
apply the brake when pulled in the direction of travel.
[[Page 195]]
(iv) Rope. If rope is used, it shall be not less than three-eights
inch in diameter. Wire rope, unless marlin-covered, shall not be used.
(7) Instruction and warning signs--(i) Instruction signs at landings
or belts. Signs of conspicuous and easily read style giving instructions
for the use of the manlift shall be posted at each landing or stenciled
on the belt.
(a) [Reserved]
(b) The instructions shall read approximately as follows:
Face the Belt.
Use the Handholds.
To Stop--Pull Rope.
(ii) Top floor warning sign and light. (a) At the top floor an
illuminated sign shall be displayed bearing the following wording:
``TOP FLOOR--GET OFF''
Signs shall be in block letters not less than 2 inches in height. This
sign shall be located within easy view of an ascending passenger and not
more than 2 feet above the top terminal landing.
(b) In addition to the sign required by paragraph (c)(7)(ii)(a) of
this section, a red warning light of not less than 40- watt rating shall
be provided immediately below the upper landing terminal and so located
as to shine in the passenger's face.
(iii) Visitor warning. A conspicuous sign having the following
legend--AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY--shall be displayed at each landing.
(d) Operating rules--(1) Proper use of manlifts. No freight,
packaged goods, pipe, lumber, or construction materials of any kind
shall be handled on any manlift.
(2) [Reserved]
(e) Periodic inspection--(1) Frequency. All manlifts shall be
inspected by a competent designated person at intervals of not more than
30 days. Limit switches shall be checked weekly. Manlifts found to be
unsafe shall not be operated until properly repaired.
(2) Items covered. This periodic inspection shall cover but is not
limited to the following items:
Steps.
Step Fastenings.
Rails.
Rail Supports and Fastenings.
Rollers and Slides.
Belt and Belt Tension.
Handholds and Fastenings.
Floor Landings.
Guardrails.
Lubrication.
Limit Switches.
Warning Signs and Lights.
Illumination.
Drive Pulley.
Bottom (boot) Pulley and Clearance.
Pulley Supports.
Motor.
Driving Mechanism.
Brake.
Electrical Switches.
Vibration and Misalignment.
``Skip'' on up or down run when mounting step (indicating worn gears).
(3) Inspection record. A certification record shall be kept of each
inspection which includes the date of the inspection, the signature of
the person who performed the inspection and the serial number, or other
identifier, of the manlift which was inspected. This record of
inspection shall be made available to the Assistant Secretary of Labor
or a duly authorized representative.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978;
51 FR 34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 55 FR 32014,
Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996]
Subpart G--Occupational Health and Environmental Control
Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's
Orders Nos. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736),
1-90 (55 FR 9033), or 6-96 (62 FR 111), as applicable; and 29 CFR part
1911.
Sec. 1910.94 Ventilation.
(a) Abrasive blasting--(1) Definitions applicable to this paragraph-
-(i) Abrasive. A solid substance used in an abrasive blasting operation.
(ii) Abrasive-blasting respirator. A respirator constructed so that
it covers the wearer's head, neck, and shoulders to protect the wearer
from rebounding abrasive.
(iii) Blast cleaning barrel. A complete enclosure which rotates on
an axis, or which has an internal moving tread to tumble the parts, in
order to expose various surfaces of the parts to the action of an
automatic blast spray.
[[Page 196]]
(iv) Blast cleaning room. A complete enclosure in which blasting
operations are performed and where the operator works inside of the room
to operate the blasting nozzle and direct the flow of the abrasive
material.
(v) Blasting cabinet. An enclosure where the operator stands outside
and operates the blasting nozzle through an opening or openings in the
enclosure.
(vi) Clean air. Air of such purity that it will not cause harm or
discomfort to an individual if it is inhaled for extended periods of
time.
(vii) Dust collector. A device or combination of devices for
separating dust from the air handled by an exhaust ventilation system.
(viii) Exhaust ventilation system. A system for removing
contaminated air from a space, comprising two or more of the following
elements (a) enclosure or hood, (b) duct work, (c) dust collecting
equipment, (d) exhauster, and (e) discharge stack.
(ix) Particulate-filter respirator. An air purifying respirator,
commonly referred to as a dust or a fume respirator, which removes most
of the dust or fume from the air passing through the device.
(x) Respirable dust. Airborne dust in sizes capable of passing
through the upper respiratory system to reach the lower lung passages.
(xi) Rotary blast cleaning table. An enclosure where the pieces to
be cleaned are positioned on a rotating table and are passed
automatically through a series of blast sprays.
(xii) Abrasive blasting. The forcible application of an abrasive to
a surface by pneumatic pressure, hydraulic pressure, or centrifugal
force.
(2) Dust hazards from abrasive blasting. (i) Abrasives and the
surface coatings on the materials blasted are shattered and pulverized
during blasting operations and the dust formed will contain particles of
respirable size. The composition and toxicity of the dust from these
sources shall be considered in making an evaluation of the potential
health hazards.
(ii) The concentration of respirable dust or fume in the breathing
zone of the abrasive-blasting operator or any other worker shall be kept
below the levels specified in Sec. 1910.1000.
(iii) Organic abrasives which are combustible shall be used only in
automatic systems. Where flammable or explosive dust mixtures may be
present, the construction of the equipment, including the exhaust system
and all electric wiring, shall conform to the requirements of American
National Standard Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust,
Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1-1961 (NFPA 91-1961), which
is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, and subpart S
of this part. The blast nozzle shall be bonded and grounded to prevent
the build up of static charges. Where flammable or explosive dust
mixtures may be present, the abrasive blasting enclosure, the ducts, and
the dust collector shall be constructed with loose panels or explosion
venting areas, located on sides away from any occupied area, to provide
for pressure relief in case of explosion, following the principles set
forth in the National Fire Protection Association Explosion Venting
Guide, NFPA 68-1954, which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6.
(3) Blast-cleaning enclosures. (i) Blast-cleaning enclosures shall
be exhaust ventilated in such a way that a continuous inward flow of air
will be maintained at all openings in the enclosure during the blasting
operation.
(a) All air inlets and access openings shall be baffled or so
arranged that by the combination of inward air flow and baffling the
escape of abrasive or dust particules into an adjacent work area will be
minimized and visible spurts of dust will not be observed.
(b) The rate of exhaust shall be sufficient to provide prompt
clearance of the dust-laden air within the enclosure after the cessation
of blasting.
(c) Before the enclosure is opened, the blast shall be turned off
and the exhaust system shall be run for a sufficient period of time to
remove the dusty air within the enclosure.
(d) Safety glass protected by screening shall be used in observation
windows, where hard deep-cutting abrasives are used.
(e) Slit abrasive-resistant baffles shall be installed in multiple
sets at all small access openings where dust
[[Page 197]]
might escape, and shall be inspected regularly and replaced when needed.
(1) Doors shall be flanged and tight when closed.
(2) Doors on blast-cleaning rooms shall be operable from both inside
and outside, except that where there is a small operator access door,
the large work access door may be closed or opened from the outside
only.
(ii) [Reserved]
(4) Exhaust ventilation systems. (i) The construction, installation,
inspection, and maintenance of exhaust systems shall conform to the
principles and requirements set forth in American National Standard
Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust
Systems, Z9.2-1960, and ANSI Z33.1-1961, which is incorporated by
reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(a) When dust leaks are noted, repairs shall be made as soon as
possible.
(b) The static pressure drop at the exhaust ducts leading from the
equipment shall be checked when the installation is completed and
periodically thereafter to assure continued satisfactory operation.
Whenever an appreciable change in the pressure drop indicates a partial
blockage, the system shall be cleaned and returned to normal operating
condition.
(ii) In installations where the abrasive is recirculated, the
exhaust ventilation system for the blasting enclosure shall not be
relied upon for the removal of fines from the spent abrasive instead of
an abrasive separator. An abrasive separator shall be provided for the
purpose.
(iii) The air exhausted from blast-cleaning equipment shall be
discharged through dust collecting equipment. Dust collectors shall be
set up so that the accumulated dust can be emptied and removed without
contaminating other working areas.
(5) Personal protective equipment. (i) Employers must use only
respirators approved by the National Institute for Occupational Safety
and Health (NIOSH) under 42 CFR part 84 to protect employees from dusts
produced during abrasive-blasting operations.
(ii) Abrasive-blasting respirators shall be worn by all abrasive-
blasting operators:
(a) When working inside of blast-cleaning rooms, or
(b) When using silica sand in manual blasting operations where the
nozzle and blast are not physically separated from the operator in an
exhaust ventilated enclosure, or
(c) Where concentrations of toxic dust dispersed by the abrasive
blasting may exceed the limits set in Sec. 1910.1000 and the nozzle and
blast are not physically separated from the operator in an exhaust-
ventilated enclosure.
(iii) Properly fitted particulate-filter respirators, commonly
referred to as dust-filter respirators, may be used for short,
intermittent, or occasional dust exposures such as cleanup, dumping of
dust collectors, or unloading shipments of sand at a receiving point
when it is not feasible to control the dust by enclosure, exhaust
ventilation, or other means. The respirators used must be approved by
NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 for protection against the specific type of
dust encountered.
(a) Dust-filter respirators may be used to protect the operator of
outside abrasive-blasting operations where nonsilica abrasives are used
on materials having low toxicities.
(b) Dust-filter respirators shall not be used for continuous
protection where silica sand is used as the blasting abrasive, or toxic
materials are blasted.
(iv) For employees who use respirators required by this section, the
employer must implement a respiratory protection program in accordance
with 29 CFR 1910.134.
(v) Operators shall be equipped with heavy canvas or leather gloves
and aprons or equivalent protection to protect them from the impact of
abrasives. Safety shoes shall be worn to protect against foot injury
where heavy pieces of work are handled.
(a) Safety shoes shall conform to the requirements of American
National Standard for Men's Safety-Toe Footwear, Z41.1-1967, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(b) Equipment for protection of the eyes and face shall be supplied
to the operator when the respirator design does not provide such
protection and to any other personnel working in the vicinity of
abrasive blasting operations.
[[Page 198]]
This equipment shall conform to the requirements of Sec. 1910.133.
(6) Air supply and air compressors. Air for abrasive-blasting
respirators must be free of harmful quantities of dusts, mists, or
noxious gases, and must meet the requirements for supplied-air quality
and use specified in 29 CFR 1910.134(i).
(7) Operational procedures and general safety. Dust shall not be
permitted to accumulate on the floor or on ledges outside of an
abrasive-blasting enclosure, and dust spills shall be cleaned up
promptly. Aisles and walkways shall be kept clear of steel shot or
similar abrasive which may create a slipping hazard.
(8) Scope. This paragraph (a) applies to all operations where an
abrasive is forcibly applied to a surface by pneumatic or hydraulic
pressure, or by centrifugal force. It does not apply to steam blasting,
or steam cleaning, or hydraulic cleaning methods where work is done
without the aid of abrasives.
(b) Grinding, polishing, and buffing operations--(1) Definitions
applicable to this paragraph--(i) Abrasive cutting-off wheels. Organic-
bonded wheels, the thickness of which is not more than one forty-eighth
of their diameter for those up to, and including, 20 inches in diameter,
and not more than one-sixtieth of their diameter for those larger than
20 inches in diameter, used for a multitude of operations variously
known as cutting, cutting off, grooving, slotting, coping, and jointing,
and the like. The wheels may be ``solid'' consisting of organic-bonded
abrasive material throughout, ``steel centered'' consisting of a steel
disc with a rim of organic-bonded material moulded around the periphery,
or of the ``inserted tooth'' type consisting of a steel disc with
organic-bonded abrasive teeth or inserts mechanically secured around the
periphery.
(ii) Belts. All power-driven, flexible, coated bands used for
grinding, polishing, or buffing purposes.
(iii) Branch pipe. The part of an exhaust system piping that is
connected directly to the hood or enclosure.
(iv) Cradle. A movable fixture, upon which the part to be ground or
polished is placed.
(v) Disc wheels. All power-driven rotatable discs faced with
abrasive materials, artificial or natural, and used for grinding or
polishing on the side of the assembled disc.
(vi) Entry loss. The loss in static pressure caused by air flowing
into a duct or hood. It is usually expressed in inches of water gauge.
(vii) Exhaust system. A system consisting of branch pipes connected
to hoods or enclosures, one or more header pipes, an exhaust fan, means
for separating solid contaminants from the air flowing in the system,
and a discharge stack to outside.
(viii) Grinding wheels. All power-driven rotatable grinding or
abrasive wheels, except disc wheels as defined in this standard,
consisting of abrasive particles held together by artificial or natural
bonds and used for peripheral grinding.
(ix) Header pipe (main pipe). A pipe into which one or more branch
pipes enter and which connects such branch pipes to the remainder of the
exhaust system.
(x) Hoods and enclosures. The partial or complete enclosure around
the wheel or disc through which air enters an exhaust system during
operation.
(xi) Horizontal double-spindle disc grinder. A grinding machine
carrying two power-driven, rotatable, coaxial, horizontal spindles upon
the inside ends of which are mounted abrasive disc wheels used for
grinding two surfaces simultaneously.
(xii) Horizontal single-spindle disc grinder. A grinding machine
carrying an abrasive disc wheel upon one or both ends of a power-driven,
rotatable single horizontal spindle.
(xiii) Polishing and buffing wheels. All power-driven rotatable
wheels composed all or in part of textile fabrics, wood, felt, leather,
paper, and may be coated with abrasives on the periphery of the wheel
for purposes of polishing, buffing, and light grinding.
(xiv) Portable grinder. Any power-driven rotatable grinding,
polishing, or buffing wheel mounted in such manner that it may be
manually manipulated.
(xv) Scratch brush wheels. All power-driven rotatable wheels made
from wire or bristles, and used for scratch cleaning and brushing
purposes.
[[Page 199]]
(xvi) Swing-frame grinder. Any power-driven rotatable grinding,
polishing, or buffing wheel mounted in such a manner that the wheel with
its supporting framework can be manipulated over stationary objects.
(xvii) Velocity pressure (vp). The kinetic pressure in the direction
of flow necessary to cause a fluid at rest to flow at a given velocity.
It is usually expressed in inches of water gauge.
(xviii) Vertical spindle disc grinder. A grinding machine having a
vertical, rotatable power-driven spindle carrying a horizontal abrasive
disc wheel.
(2) Application. Wherever dry grinding, dry polishing or buffing is
performed, and employee exposure, without regard to the use of
respirators, exceeds the permissible exposure limits prescribed in
Sec. 1910.1000 or other sections of this part, a local exhaust
ventilation system shall be provided and used to maintain employee
exposures within the prescribed limits.
(3) Hood and branch pipe requirements. (i) Hoods connected to
exhaust systems shall be used, and such hoods shall be designed,
located, and placed so that the dust or dirt particles shall fall or be
projected into the hoods in the direction of the air flow. No wheels,
discs, straps, or belts shall be operated in such manner and in such
direction as to cause the dust and dirt particles to be thrown into the
operator's breathing zone.
(ii) Grinding wheels on floor stands, pedestals, benches, and
special-purpose grinding machines and abrasive cutting-off wheels shall
have not less than the minimum exhaust volumes shown in Table G-4 with a
recommended minimum duct velocity of 4,500 feet per minute in the branch
and 3,500 feet per minute in the main. The entry losses from all hoods
except the vertical-spindle disc grinder hood, shall equal 0.65 velocity
pressure for a straight takeoff and 0.45 velocity pressure for a tapered
takeoff. The entry loss for the vertical-spindle disc grinder hood is
shown in figure G-1 (following Sec. 1910.94(b)).
Table G-4--Grinding and Abrasive Cutting-Off Wheels
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum
Wheel exhaust
Wheel diameter (inches) width volume
(inches) (feet\3\/
min.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
To 9............................................ 1\1/2\ 220
Over 9 to 16.................................... 2 390
Over 16 to 19................................... 3 500
Over 19 to 24................................... 4 610
Over 24 to 30................................... 5 880
Over 30 to 36................................... 6 1,200
------------------------------------------------------------------------
For any wheel wider than wheel diameters shown in Table G-4, increase
the exhaust volume by the ratio of the new width to the width shown.
Example: If wheel width=4\1/2\ inches, then
4.5/4x610 = 686 (rounded to 690).
(iii) Scratch-brush wheels and all buffing and polishing wheels
mounted on floor stands, pedestals, benches, or special-purpose machines
shall have not less than the minimum exhaust volume shown in Table G-5.
Table G-5--Buffing and Polishing Wheels
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum
Wheel exhaust
Wheel diameter (inches) width volume
(inches) (feet\3\/
min.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
To 9............................................ 2 300
Over 9 to 16.................................... 3 500
Over 16 to 19................................... 4 610
Over 19 to 24................................... 5 740
Over 24 to 30................................... 6 1,040
Over 30 to 36................................... 6 1,200
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(iv) Grinding wheels or discs for horizontal single-spindle disc
grinders shall be hooded to collect the dust or dirt generated by the
grinding operation and the hoods shall be connected to branch pipes
having exhaust volumes as shown in Table G-6.
Table G-6--Horizontal Single-Spindle Disc Grinder
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Exhaust
volume
Disc diameter (inches) (ft.\3\/
min.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Up to 12.................................................... 220
Over 12 to 19............................................... 390
Over 19 to 30............................................... 610
Over 30 to 36............................................... 880
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 200]]
(v) Grinding wheels or discs for horizontal double-spindle disc
grinders shall have a hood enclosing the grinding chamber and the hood
shall be connected to one or more branch pipes having exhaust volumes as
shown in Table G-7.
Table G-7--Horizontal Double-Spindle Disc Grinder
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Exhaust
volume
Disc diameter (inches) (ft.\3\/
min.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Up to 19.................................................... 610
Over 19 to 25............................................... 880
Over 25 to 30............................................... 1,200
Over 30 to 53............................................... 1,770
Over 53 to 72............................................... 6,280
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(vi) Grinding wheels or discs for vertical single-spindle disc
grinders shall be encircled with hoods to remove the dust generated in
the operation. The hoods shall be connected to one or more branch pipes
having exhaust volumes as shown in Table G-8.
Table G-8--Vertical Spindle Disc Grinder
------------------------------------------------------------------------
One-half or more of Disc not covered
disc covered ---------------------
----------------------
Disc diameter (inches) Exhaust Exhaust
Number \1\ foot\3\/ Number \1\ foot\3\/
min.) min.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Up to 20.................... 1 500 2 780
Over 20 to 30............... 2 780 2 1,480
Over 30 to 53............... 2 1,770 4 3,530
Over 53 to 72............... 2 3,140 5 6,010
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Number of exhaust outlets around periphery of hood, or equal
distribution provided by other means.
(vii) Grinding and polishing belts shall be provided with hoods to
remove dust and dirt generated in the operations and the hoods shall be
connected to branch pipes having exhaust volumes as shown in Table G-9.
Table G-9--Grinding and Polishing Belts
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Exhaust
volume
Belts width (inches) (ft.\3\/
min.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Up to 3..................................................... 220
Over 3 to 5................................................. 300
Over 5 to 7................................................. 390
Over 7 to 9................................................. 500
Over 9 to 11................................................ 610
Over 11 to 13............................................... 740
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(viii) Cradles and swing-frame grinders. Where cradles are used for
handling the parts to be ground, polished, or buffed, requiring large
partial enclosures to house the complete operation, a minimum average
air velocity of 150 feet per minute shall be maintained over the entire
opening of the enclosure. Swing-frame grinders shall also be exhausted
in the same manner as provided for cradles. (See fig. G-3)
(ix) Where the work is outside the hood, air volumes must be
increased as shown in American Standard Fundamentals Governing the
Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2-1960 (section 4,
exhaust hoods).
(4) Exhaust systems. (i) Exhaust systems for grinding, polishing,
and buffing operations should be designed in accordance with American
Standard Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local
Exhaust Systems, Z9.2-1960.
(ii) Exhaust systems for grinding, polishing, and buffing operations
shall be tested in the manner described in American Standard
Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust
Systems, Z9.2-1960.
(iii) All exhaust systems shall be provided with suitable dust
collectors.
(5) Hood and enclosure design. (i)(a) It is the dual function of
grinding and abrasive cutting-off wheel hoods to protect the operator
from the hazards of bursting wheels as well as to provide a means for
the removal of dust and dirt generated. All hoods shall be not less in
structural strength than specified in the American National Standard
Safety Code for the Use, Care, and Protection of Abrasive Wheels, B7.1-
1970, which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(b) Due to the variety of work and types of grinding machines
employed, it is necessary to develop hoods adaptable to the particular
machine in question, and such hoods shall be located as close as
possible to the operation.
(ii) Exhaust hoods for floor stands, pedestals, and bench grinders
shall be designed in accordance with figure G-2. The adjustable tongue
shown in the figure shall be kept in working order and shall be adjusted
within one-fourth inch of the wheel periphery at all times.
(iii) Swing-frame grinders shall be provided with exhaust booths as
indicated in figure G-3.
[[Page 201]]
(iv) Portable grinding operations, whenever the nature of the work
permits, shall be conducted within a partial enclosure. The opening in
the enclosure shall be no larger than is actually required in the
operation and an average face air velocity of not less than 200 feet per
minute shall be maintained.
(v) Hoods for polishing and buffing and scratch-brush wheels shall
be constructed to conform as closely to figure G-4 as the nature of the
work will permit.
(vi) Cradle grinding and polishing operations shall be performed
within a partial enclosure similar to figure G-5. The operator shall be
positioned outside the working face of the opening of the enclosure. The
face opening of the enclosure should not be any greater in area than
that actually required for the performance of the operation and the
average air velocity into the working face of the enclosure shall not be
less than 150 feet per minute.
(vii) Hoods for horizontal single-spindle disc grinders shall be
constructed to conform as closely as possible to the hood shown in
figure G-6. It is essential that there be a space between the back of
the wheel and the hood, and a space around the periphery of the wheel of
at least 1 inch in order to permit the suction to act around the wheel
periphery. The opening on the side of the disc shall be no larger than
is required for the grinding operation, but must never be less than
twice the area of the branch outlet.
(viii) Horizontal double-spindle disc grinders shall have a hood
encircling the wheels and grinding chamber similar to that illustrated
in figure G-7. The openings for passing the work into the grinding
chamber should be kept as small as possible, but must never be less than
twice the area of the branch outlets.
(ix) Vertical-spindle disc grinders shall be encircled with a hood
so constructed that the heavy dust is drawn off a surface of the disc
and the lighter dust exhausted through a continuous slot at the top of
the hood as shown in figure G-1.
(x) Grinding and polishing belt hoods shall be constructed as close
to the operation as possible. The hood should extend almost to the belt,
and 1-inch wide openings should be provided on either side. Figure G-8
shows a typical hood for a belt operation.
[[Page 202]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.015
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dia D. inches Exhaust E Volume
-------------------------------------------------------------------- Exhausted
at 4,500 Note
Min. Max. No Dia. ft/min
Pipes ft\3\/min
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 1 4\1/4\ 500 When one-half or more of the
disc can be hooded, use
exhaust ducts as shown at the
left.
Over 20................................. 30 2 4 780
Over 30................................. 72 2 6 1,770
Over 53................................. 72 2 8 3,140
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 2 4 780 When no hood can be used over
disc, use exhaust ducts as
shown at left.
Over 20................................. 20 2 4 780
Over 30................................. 30 2 5\1/2\ 1,480
Over 53................................. 53 4 6 3,530
72 5 7 6,010
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Entry loss=1.0 slot velocity pressure + 0.5 branch velocity pressure.
Minimum slot velocity=2,000 ft/min--\1/2\-inch slot width.
[[Page 203]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.016
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wheel dimension, inches
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Exhaust Volume of
Diameter outlet, air at
----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Width, Max inches E 4,500 ft/
Min=d Max=D min
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 1\1/2\ 3 220
Over 9.......................................................... 16 2 4 390
Over 16......................................................... 19 3 4\1/2\ 500
Over 19......................................................... 24 4 5 610
Over 24......................................................... 30 5 6 880
Over 30......................................................... 36 6 7 1,200
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
[[Page 204]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.017
[[Page 205]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.018
Standard Buffing and Polishing Hood
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wheel dimension, inches
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Exhaust Volume of
Diameter outlet, air at
----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Width, Max inches E 4,500 ft/
Min=d Max=D min
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 2 3\1/2\ 300
Over 9.......................................................... 16 3 4 500
Over 16......................................................... 19 4 5 610
Over 19......................................................... 24 5 5\1/2\ 740
Over 24......................................................... 30 6 6\1/2\ 1.040
Over 30......................................................... 36 6 7 1.200
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Entry loss = 0.15 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
[[Page 206]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.019
[[Page 207]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.020
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dia D, inches Volume
------------------------------------------------ Exhaust E, exhausted
dia. at 4,500 ft/
Min. Max. inches min ft\3\/
min
------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 3 220
Over 12............................ 19 4 390
Over 19............................ 30 5 610
Over 30............................ 36 6 880
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: If grinding wheels are used for disc grinding purposes, hoods must
conform to structural strength and materials as described in 9.1.
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.
[[Page 208]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.021
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Disc dia. inches Exhaust E Volume
------------------------------------------------------------------------ exhaust at
4,500 ft/ Note
Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. min. ft\3\/
min
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
19 1 5 610
Over 19............................ 25 1 6 880 When width ``W'' permits,
exhaust ducts should be as
near heaviest grinding as
possible.
Over 25............................ 30 1 7 1,200
Over 30............................ 53 2 6 1,770
Over 53............................ 72 4 8 6,280
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.
[[Page 209]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.022
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Exhaust
Belt width W. Inches volume.
ft.\1\/min
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Up to 3..................................................... 220
3 to 5...................................................... 300
5 to 7...................................................... 390
7 to 9...................................................... 500
9 to 11..................................................... 610
11 to 13.................................................... 740
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum duct velocity = 4,500 ft/min branch, 3,500 ft/min main.
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity
pressure for straight takeoff.
(6) Scope. This paragraph (b), prescribes the use of exhaust hood
enclosures and systems in removing dust, dirt, fumes, and gases
generated through the grinding, polishing, or buffing of ferrous and
nonferrous metals.
(c) Spray finishing operations--(1) Definitions applicable to this
paragraph--(i) Spray-finishing operations. Spray-finishing operations
are employment of methods wherein organic or inorganic materials are
utilized in dispersed form for deposit on surfaces to be coated,
treated, or cleaned. Such methods of deposit may involve either
automatic, manual, or electrostatic deposition but do not include metal
spraying or metallizing, dipping, flow coating, roller coating,
tumbling, centrifuging, or spray washing and degreasing as conducted in
self-contained washing and degreasing machines or systems.
(ii) Spray booth. Spray booths are defined and described in
Sec. 1910.107(a). (See sections 103, 104, and 105 of the Standard for
Spray Finishing Using Flammable and Combustible Materials, NFPA No. 33-
1969, which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6).
(iii) Spray room. A spray room is a room in which spray-finishing
operations not conducted in a spray booth are performed separately from
other areas.
(iv) Minimum maintained velocity. Minimum maintained velocity is the
velocity of air movement which must be maintained in order to meet
minimum specified requirements for health and safety.
(2) Location and application. Spray booths or spray rooms are to be
used to enclose or confine all operations. Spray-finishing operations
shall be located as provided in sections 201 through 206 of the Standard
for Spray Finishing Using Flammable and Combustible Materials, NFPA No.
33-1969.
(3) Design and construction of spray booths. (i) Spray booths shall
be designed and constructed in accordance with Sec. 1910.107(b) (1)
through (4) and (6) through (10) (see sections 301-304 and 306-310 of
the Standard for Spray Finishing Using Flammable and Combustible
Materials, NFPA No. 33-1969), for general construction specifications.
For a more detailed discussion of fundamentals relating to this subject,
see ANSI Z9.2-1960
(a) Lights, motors, electrical equipment, and other sources of
ignition shall conform to the requirements of Sec. 1910.107 (b)(10) and
(c). (See section 310 and chapter 4 of the Standard for Spray Finishing
Using Flammable and Combustible Materials NFPA No. 33-1969.)
(b) In no case shall combustible material be used in the
construction of a spray booth and supply or exhaust duct connected to
it.
[[Page 210]]
(ii) Unobstructed walkways shall not be less than 6\1/2\ feet high
and shall be maintained clear of obstruction from any work location in
the booth to a booth exit or open booth front. In booths where the open
front is the only exit, such exits shall be not less than 3 feet wide.
In booths having multiple exits, such exits shall not be less than 2
feet wide, provided that the maximum distance from the work location to
the exit is 25 feet or less. Where booth exits are provided with doors,
such doors shall open outward from the booth.
(iii) Baffles, distribution plates, and dry-type overspray
collectors shall conform to the requirements of Sec. 1910.107(b) (4) and
(5). (See sections 304 and 305 of the Standard for Spray Finishing Using
Flammable and Combustible Materials, NFPA No. 33-1969.)
(a) Overspray filters shall be installed and maintained in
accordance with the requirements of Sec. 1910.107 (b)(5), (see section
305 of the Standard for Spray Finishing Using Flammable and Combustible
Materials, NFPA No. 33-1969), and shall only be in a location easily
accessible for inspection, cleaning, or replacement.
(b) Where effective means, independent of the overspray filters, are
installed which will result in design air distribution across the booth
cross section, it is permissible to operate the booth without the
filters in place.
(iv) (a) For wet or water-wash spray booths, the water-chamber
enclosure, within which intimate contact of contaminated air and
cleaning water or other cleaning medium is maintained, if made of steel,
shall be 18 gage or heavier and adequately protected against corrosion.
(b) Chambers may include scrubber spray nozzles, headers, troughs,
or other devices. Chambers shall be provided with adequate means for
creating and maintaining scrubbing action for removal of particulate
matter from the exhaust air stream.
(v) Collecting tanks shall be of welded steel construction or other
suitable non-combustible material. If pits are used as collecting tanks,
they shall be concrete, masonry, or other material having similar
properties.
(a) Tanks shall be provided with weirs, skimmer plates, or screens
to prevent sludge and floating paint from entering the pump suction box.
Means for automatically maintaining the proper water level shall also be
provided. Fresh water inlets shall not be submerged. They shall
terminate at least one pipe diameter above the safety overflow level of
the tank.
(b) Tanks shall be so constructed as to discourage accumulation of
hazardous deposits.
(vi) Pump manifolds, risers, and headers shall be adequately sized
to insure sufficient water flow to provide efficient operation of the
water chamber.
(4) Design and construction of spray rooms. (i) Spray rooms,
including floors, shall be constructed of masonry, concrete, or other
noncombustible material.
(ii) Spray rooms shall have noncombustible fire doors and shutters.
(iii) Spray rooms shall be adequately ventilated so that the
atmosphere in the breathing zone of the operator shall be maintained in
accordance with the requirements of paragraph (c)(6)(ii) of this
section.
(iv) Spray rooms used for production spray-finishing operations
shall conform to the requirements for spray booths.
(5) Ventilation. (i) Ventilation shall be provided in accordance
with provisions of Sec. 1910.107(d) (see chapter 5 of the Standard for
Spray Finishing Using Flammable or Combustible Materials, NFPA No. 33-
1969), and in accordance with the following:
(a) Where a fan plenum is used to equalize or control the
distribution of exhaust air movement through the booth, it shall be of
sufficient strength or rigidity to withstand the differential air
pressure or other superficially imposed loads for which the equipment is
designed and also to facilitate cleaning. Construction specifications
shall be at least equivalent to those of paragraph (c)(5)(iii) of this
section.
(b) [Reserved]
(ii) Inlet or supply ductwork used to transport makeup air to spray
booths or surrounding areas shall be constructed of noncombustible
materials.
(a) If negative pressure exists within inlet ductwork, all seams and
joints
[[Page 211]]
shall be sealed if there is a possibility of infiltration of harmful
quantities of noxious gases, fumes, or mists from areas through which
ductwork passes.
(b) Inlet ductwork shall be sized in accordance with volume flow
requirements and provide design air requirements at the spray booth.
(c) Inlet ductwork shall be adequately supported throughout its
length to sustain at least its own weight plus any negative pressure
which is exerted upon it under normal operating conditions.
(iii)(a) Exhaust ductwork shall be adequately supported throughout
its length to sustain its weight plus any normal accumulation in
interior during normal operating conditions and any negative pressure
exerted upon it.
(b) Exhaust ductwork shall be sized in accordance with good design
practice which shall include consideration of fan capacity, length of
duct, number of turns and elbows, variation in size, volume, and
character of materials being exhausted. See American National Standard
Z9.2-1960 for further details and explanation concerning elements of
design.
(c) Longitudinal joints in sheet steel ductwork shall be either
lock-seamed, riveted, or welded. For other than steel construction,
equivalent securing of joints shall be provided.
(d) Circumferential joints in ductwork shall be substantially
fastened together and lapped in the direction of airflow. At least every
fourth joint shall be provided with connecting flanges, bolted together,
or of equivalent fastening security.
(e) Inspection or clean-out doors shall be provided for every 9 to
12 feet of running length for ducts up to 12 inches in diameter, but the
distance between cleanout doors may be greater for larger pipes. (See
8.3.21 of American National Standard Z9.1-1951, which is incorporated by
reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.) A clean-out door or doors shall
be provided for servicing the fan, and where necessary, a drain shall be
provided.
(f) Where ductwork passes through a combustible roof or wall, the
roof or wall shall be protected at the point of penetration by open
space or fire-resistive material between the duct and the roof or wall.
When ducts pass through firewalls, they shall be provided with automatic
fire dampers on both sides of the wall, except that three-eighth-inch
steel plates may be used in lieu of automatic fire dampers for ducts not
exceeding 18 inches in diameter.
(g) Ductwork used for ventilating any process covered in this
standard shall not be connected to ducts ventilating any other process
or any chimney or flue used for conveying any products of combustion.
(6) Velocity and air flow requirements. (i) Except where a spray
booth has an adequate air replacement system, the velocity of air into
all openings of a spray booth shall be not less than that specified in
Table G-10 for the operating conditions specified. An adequate air
replacement system is one which introduces replacement air upstream or
above the object being sprayed and is so designed that the velocity of
air in the booth cross section is not less than that specified in Table
G-10 when measured upstream or above the object being sprayed.
Table G-10--Minimum Maintained Velocities Into Spray Booths
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Airflow velocities, f.p.m.
Operating conditions for objects Crossdraft, f.p.m. ----------------------------------------
completely inside booth Design Range
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Electrostatic and automatic airless Negligible................. 50 large booth............. 50-75
operation contained in booth without
operator.
100 small booth............ 75-125
Air-operated guns, manual or automatic.... Up to 50................... 100 large booth............ 75-125
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
150 small booth............ 125-175
Air-operated guns, manual or automatic.... Up to 100.................. 150 large booth............ 125-175
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
200 small booth............ 150-250
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes:
(1) Attention is invited to the fact that the effectiveness of the spray booth is dependent upon the
relationship of the depth of the booth to its height and width.
[[Page 212]]
(2) Crossdrafts can be eliminated through proper design and such design should be sought. Crossdrafts in
excess of 100fpm (feet per minute) should not be permitted.
(3) Excessive air pressures result in loss of both efficiency and material waste in addition to creating a
backlash that may carry overspray and fumes into adjacent work areas.
(4) Booths should be designed with velocities shown in the column headed ``Design.'' However, booths operating
with velocities shown in the column headed ``Range'' are in compliance with this standard.
(ii) In addition to the requirements in paragraph (c)(6)(i) of this
section the total air volume exhausted through a spray booth shall be
such as to dilute solvent vapor to at least 25 percent of the lower
explosive limit of the solvent being sprayed. An example of the method
of calculating this volume is given below.
Example: To determine the lower explosive limits of the most common
solvents used in spray finishing, see Table G-11. Column 1 gives the
number of cubic feet of vapor per gallon of solvent and column 2 gives
the lower explosive limit (LEL) in percentage by volume of air. Note
that the quantity of solvent will be diminished by the quantity of
solids and nonflammables contained in the finish.
To determine the volume of air in cubic feet necessary to dilute the
vapor from 1 gallon of solvent to 25 percent of the lower explosive
limit, apply the following formula:
Dilution volume required per gallon of solvent = 4 (100-LEL) (cubic feet
of vapor per gallon)/ LEL
Using toluene as the solvent.
(1) LEL of toluene from Table G-11, column 2, is 1.4 percent.
(2) Cubic feet of vapor per gallon from Table G-11, column 1, is
30.4 cubic feet per gallon.
(3) Dilution volume required=
4 (100-1.4) 30.4/ 1.4 = 8,564 cubic feet.
(4) To convert to cubic feet per minute of required ventilation,
multiply the dilution volume required per gallon of solvent by the
number of gallons of solvent evaporated per minute.
Table G-11--Lower Explosive Limit of Some Commonly Used Solvents
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lower
Cubic feet explosive
per gallon limit in
Solvent of vapor percent by
of liquid volume of
at 70 air at 70
deg.F. deg.F
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Column 1 Column 2
Acetone......................................... 44.0 2.6
Amyl Acetate (iso).............................. 21.6 \1\ 1.0
Amyl Alcohol (n)................................ 29.6 1.2
Amyl Alcohol (iso).............................. 29.6 1.2
Benzene......................................... 36.8 \1\ 1.4
Butyl Acetate (n)............................... 24.8 1.7
Butyl Alcohol (n)............................... 35.2 1.4
Butyl Cellosolve................................ 24.8 1.1
Cellosolve...................................... 33.6 1.8
Cellosolve Acetate.............................. 23.2 1.7
Cyclohexanone................................... 31.2 \1\ 1.1
1,1 Dichloroethylene............................ 42.4 5.9
1,2 Dichloroethylene............................ 42.4 9.7
Ethyl Acetate................................... 32.8 2.5
Ethyl Alcohol................................... 55.2 4.3
Ethyl Lactate................................... 28.0 \1\ 1.5
Methyl Acetate.................................. 40.0 3.1
Methyl Alcohol.................................. 80.8 7.3
Methyl Cellosolve............................... 40.8 2.5
Methyl Ethyl Ketone............................. 36.0 1.8
Methyl n-Propyl Ketone.......................... 30.4 1.5
Naphtha (VM&P) (76 deg. Naphtha)................ 22.4 0.9
Naphtha (100 deg.Flash) Safety Solvent-- 23.2 1.0
Stoddard Solvent...............................
Propyl Acetate (n).............................. 27.2 2.8
Propyl Acetate (iso)............................ 28.0 1.1
Propyl Alcohol (n).............................. 44.8 2.1
Propyl Alcohol (iso)............................ 44.0 2.0
Toluene......................................... 30.4 1.4
Turpentine...................................... 20.8 0.8
Xylene (o)...................................... 26.4 1.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ At 212 deg.F.
(iii)(a) When an operator is in a booth downstream from the object
being sprayed, an air-supplied respirator or other type of respirator
must be used by employees that has been approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR
part 84 for the material being sprayed.
(b) Where downdraft booths are provided with doors, such doors shall
be closed when spray painting.
(7) Make-up air. (i) Clean fresh air, free of contamination from
adjacent industrial exhaust systems, chimneys, stacks, or vents, shall
be supplied to a spray booth or room in quantities equal to the volume
of air exhausted through the spray booth.
(ii) Where a spray booth or room receives make-up air through self-
closing doors, dampers, or louvers, they shall be fully open at all
times when the booth or room is in use for spraying. The velocity of air
through such doors, dampers, or louvers shall not exceed
[[Page 213]]
200 feet per minute. If the fan characteristics are such that the
required air flow through the booth will be provided, higher velocities
through the doors, dampers, or louvers may be used.
(iii)(a) Where the air supply to a spray booth or room is filtered,
the fan static pressure shall be calculated on the assumption that the
filters are dirty to the extent that they require cleaning or
replacement.
(b) The rating of filters shall be governed by test data supplied by
the manufacturer of the filter. A pressure gage shall be installed to
show the pressure drop across the filters. This gage shall be marked to
show the pressure drop at which the filters require cleaning or
replacement. Filters shall be replaced or cleaned whenever the pressure
drop across them becomes excessive or whenever the air flow through the
face of the booth falls below that specified in Table G-10.
(iv)(a) Means for heating make-up air to any spray booth or room,
before or at the time spraying is normally performed, shall be provided
in all places where the outdoor temperature may be expected to remain
below 55 deg.F. for appreciable periods of time during the operation of
the booth except where adequate and safe means of radiant heating for
all operating personnel affected is provided. The replacement air during
the heating seasons shall be maintained at not less than 65 deg.F. at
the point of entry into the spray booth or spray room. When otherwise
unheated make-up air would be at a temperature of more than 10 deg.F.
below room temperature, its temperature shall be regulated as provided
in section 3.6.3 of ANSI Z9.2-1960.
(b) As an alternative to an air replacement system complying with
the preceding section, general heating of the building in which the
spray room or booth is located may be employed provided that all
occupied parts of the building are maintained at not less than 65
deg.F. when the exhaust system is in operation or the general heating
system supplemented by other sources of heat may be employed to meet
this requirement.
(c) No means of heating make-up air shall be located in a spray
booth.
(d) Where make-up air is heated by coal or oil, the products of
combustion shall not be allowed to mix with the make-up air, and the
products of combustion shall be conducted outside the building through a
flue terminating at a point remote from all points where make-up air
enters the building.
(e) Where make-up air is heated by gas, and the products of
combustion are not mixed with the make-up air but are conducted through
an independent flue to a point outside the building remote from all
points where make-up air enters the building, it is not necessary to
comply with paragraph (c)(7)(iv)(f) of this section.
(f) Where make-up air to any manually operated spray booth or room
is heated by gas and the products of combustion are allowed to mix with
the supply air, the following precautions must be taken:
(1) The gas must have a distinctive and strong enough odor to warn
workmen in a spray booth or room of its presence if in an unburned state
in the make-up air.
(2) The maximum rate of gas supply to the make-up air heater burners
must not exceed that which would yield in excess of 200 p.p.m. (parts
per million) of carbon monoxide or 2,000 p.p.m. of total combustible
gases in the mixture if the unburned gas upon the occurrence of flame
failure were mixed with all of the make-up air supplied.
(3) A fan must be provided to deliver the mixture of heated air and
products of combustion from the plenum chamber housing the gas burners
to the spray booth or room.
(8) Scope. Spray booths or spray rooms are to be used to enclose or
confine all spray finishing operations covered by this paragraph (c).
This paragraph does not apply to the spraying of the exteriors of
buildings, fixed tanks, or similar structures, nor to small portable
spraying apparatus not used repeatedly in the same location.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 40
FR 24522, June 9, 1975; 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10,
1984; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 58 FR 35308, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9236,
Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1269, Jan. 8, 1998; 64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999]
[[Page 214]]
Sec. 1910.95 Occupational noise exposure.
(a) Protection against the effects of noise exposure shall be
provided when the sound levels exceed those shown in Table G-16 when
measured on the A scale of a standard sound level meter at slow
response. When noise levels are determined by octave band analysis, the
equivalent A-weighted sound level may be determined as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.023
Figure G-9
Equivalent sound level contours. Octave band sound pressure levels may
be converted to the equivalent A-weighted sound level by plotting them
on this graph and noting the A-weighted sound level corresponding to the
point of highest penetration into the sound level contours. This
equivalent A-weighted sound level, which may differ from the actual A-
weighted sound level of the noise, is used to determine exposure limits
from Table 1.G-16.
(b)(1) When employees are subjected to sound exceeding those listed
in Table G-16, feasible administrative or engineering controls shall be
utilized. If such controls fail to reduce sound levels within the levels
of Table G-16, personal protective equipment shall be provided and used
to reduce sound levels within the levels of the table.
(2) If the variations in noise level involve maxima at intervals of
1 second or less, it is to be considered continuous.
Table G-16--Permissible Noise Exposures \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sound
level dBA
Duration per day, hours slow
response
------------------------------------------------------------------------
8........................................................... 90
6........................................................... 92
4........................................................... 95
3........................................................... 97
2........................................................... 100
1\1/2\...................................................... 102
1........................................................... 105
\1/2\....................................................... 110
\1/4\ or less............................................... 115
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ When the daily noise exposure is composed of two or more periods of
noise exposure of different levels, their combined effect should be
considered, rather than the individual effect of each. If the sum of
the following fractions: C1/T1+C2/T2Cn/Tn exceeds unity, then, the
mixed exposure should be considered to exceed the limit value. Cn
indicates the total time of exposure at a specified noise level, and
Tn indicates the total time of exposure permitted at that level.
Exposure to impulsive or impact noise should not exceed 140 dB peak
sound pressure level.
(c) Hearing conservation program. (1) The employer shall administer
a continuing, effective hearing conservation program, as described in
paragraphs (c) through (o) of this section, whenever employee noise
exposures equal or exceed an 8-hour time-weighted average sound level
(TWA) of 85 decibels measured on the A scale (slow response) or,
equivalently, a dose of fifty percent. For purposes of the hearing
conservation program, employee noise exposures shall be computed in
accordance with appendix A and Table G-16a, and without regard to any
attenuation provided by the use of personal protective equipment.
(2) For purposes of paragraphs (c) through (n) of this section, an
8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels or a dose of fifty percent
shall also be referred to as the action level.
(d) Monitoring. (1) When information indicates that any employee's
exposure may equal or exceed an 8-hour time-weighted average of 85
decibels, the employer shall develop and implement a monitoring program.
(i) The sampling strategy shall be designed to identify employees
for inclusion in the hearing conservation program and to enable the
proper selection of hearing protectors.
(ii) Where circumstances such as high worker mobility, significant
variations
[[Page 215]]
in sound level, or a significant component of impulse noise make area
monitoring generally inappropriate, the employer shall use
representative personal sampling to comply with the monitoring
requirements of this paragraph unless the employer can show that area
sampling produces equivalent results.
(2)(i) All continuous, intermittent and impulsive sound levels from
80 decibels to 130 decibels shall be integrated into the noise
measurements.
(ii) Instruments used to measure employee noise exposure shall be
calibrated to ensure measurement accuracy.
(3) Monitoring shall be repeated whenever a change in production,
process, equipment or controls increases noise exposures to the extent
that:
(i) Additional employees may be exposed at or above the action
level; or
(ii) The attenuation provided by hearing protectors being used by
employees may be rendered inadequate to meet the requirements of
paragraph (j) of this section.
(e) Employee notification. The employer shall notify each employee
exposed at or above an 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels of
the results of the monitoring.
(f) Observation of monitoring. The employer shall provide affected
employees or their representatives with an opportunity to observe any
noise measurements conducted pursuant to this section.
(g) Audiometric testing program. (1) The employer shall establish
and maintain an audiometric testing program as provided in this
paragraph by making audiometric testing available to all employees whose
exposures equal or exceed an 8-hour time-weighted average of 85
decibels.
(2) The program shall be provided at no cost to employees.
(3) Audiometric tests shall be performed by a licensed or certified
audiologist, otolaryngologist, or other physician, or by a technician
who is certified by the Council of Accreditation in Occupational Hearing
Conservation, or who has satisfactorily demonstrated competence in
administering audiometric examinations, obtaining valid audiograms, and
properly using, maintaining and checking calibration and proper
functioning of the audiometers being used. A technician who operates
microprocessor audiometers does not need to be certified. A technician
who performs audiometric tests must be responsible to an audiologist,
otolaryngologist or physician.
(4) All audiograms obtained pursuant to this section shall meet the
requirements of appendix C: Audiometric Measuring Instruments.
(5) Baseline audiogram. (i) Within 6 months of an employee's first
exposure at or above the action level, the employer shall establish a
valid baseline audiogram against which subsequent audiograms can be
compared.
(ii) Mobile test van exception. Where mobile test vans are used to
meet the audiometric testing obligation, the employer shall obtain a
valid baseline audiogram within 1 year of an employee's first exposure
at or above the action level. Where baseline audiograms are obtained
more than 6 months after the employee's first exposure at or above the
action level, employees shall wearing hearing protectors for any period
exceeding six months after first exposure until the baseline audiogram
is obtained.
(iii) Testing to establish a baseline audiogram shall be preceded by
at least 14 hours without exposure to workplace noise. Hearing
protectors may be used as a substitute for the requirement that baseline
audiograms be preceded by 14 hours without exposure to workplace noise.
(iv) The employer shall notify employees of the need to avoid high
levels of non-occupational noise exposure during the 14-hour period
immediately preceding the audiometric examination.
(6) Annual audiogram. At least annually after obtaining the baseline
audiogram, the employer shall obtain a new audiogram for each employee
exposed at or above an 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels.
(7) Evaluation of audiogram. (i) Each employee's annual audiogram
shall be compared to that employee's baseline audiogram to determine if
the audiogram is valid and if a standard threshold shift as defined in
paragraph (g)(10)
[[Page 216]]
of this section has occurred. This comparison may be done by a
technician.
(ii) If the annual audiogram shows that an employee has suffered a
standard threshold shift, the employer may obtain a retest within 30
days and consider the results of the retest as the annual audiogram.
(iii) The audiologist, otolaryngologist, or physician shall review
problem audiograms and shall determine whether there is a need for
further evaluation. The employer shall provide to the person performing
this evaluation the following information:
(A) A copy of the requirements for hearing conservation as set forth
in paragraphs (c) through (n) of this section;
(B) The baseline audiogram and most recent audiogram of the employee
to be evaluated;
(C) Measurements of background sound pressure levels in the
audiometric test room as required in appendix D: Audiometric Test Rooms.
(D) Records of audiometer calibrations required by paragraph (h)(5)
of this section.
(8) Follow-up procedures. (i) If a comparison of the annual
audiogram to the baseline audiogram indicates a standard threshold shift
as defined in paragraph (g)(10) of this section has occurred, the
employee shall be informed of this fact in writing, within 21 days of
the determination.
(ii) Unless a physician determines that the standard threshold shift
is not work related or aggravated by occupational noise exposure, the
employer shall ensure that the following steps are taken when a standard
threshold shift occurs:
(A) Employees not using hearing protectors shall be fitted with
hearing protectors, trained in their use and care, and required to use
them.
(B) Employees already using hearing protectors shall be refitted and
retrained in the use of hearing protectors and provided with hearing
protectors offering greater attenuation if necessary.
(C) The employee shall be referred for a clinical audiological
evaluation or an otological examination, as appropriate, if additional
testing is necessary or if the employer suspects that a medical
pathology of the ear is caused or aggravated by the wearing of hearing
protectors.
(D) The employee is informed of the need for an otological
examination if a medical pathology of the ear that is unrelated to the
use of hearing protectors is suspected.
(iii) If subsequent audiometric testing of an employee whose
exposure to noise is less than an 8-hour TWA of 90 decibels indicates
that a standard threshold shift is not persistent, the employer:
(A) Shall inform the employee of the new audiometric interpretation;
and
(B) May discontinue the required use of hearing protectors for that
employee.
(9) Revised baseline. An annual audiogram may be substituted for the
baseline audiogram when, in the judgment of the audiologist,
otolaryngologist or physician who is evaluating the audiogram:
(i) The standard threshold shift revealed by the audiogram is
persistent; or
(ii) The hearing threshold shown in the annual audiogram indicates
significant improvement over the baseline audiogram.
(10) Standard threshold shift. (i) As used in this section, a
standard threshold shift is a change in hearing threshold relative to
the baseline audiogram of an average of 10 dB or more at 2000, 3000, and
4000 Hz in either ear.
(ii) In determining whether a standard threshold shift has occurred,
allowance may be made for the contribution of aging (presbycusis) to the
change in hearing level by correcting the annual audiogram according to
the procedure described in appendix F: Calculation and Application of
Age Correction to Audiograms.
(h) Audiometric test requirements. (1) Audiometric tests shall be
pure tone, air conduction, hearing threshold examinations, with test
frequencies including as a minimum 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 6000
Hz. Tests at each frequency shall be taken separately for each ear.
(2) Audiometric tests shall be conducted with audiometers (including
microprocessor audiometers) that meet
[[Page 217]]
the specifications of, and are maintained and used in accordance with,
American National Standard Specification for Audiometers, S3.6-1969,
which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(3) Pulsed-tone and self-recording audiometers, if used, shall meet
the requirements specified in appendix C: Audiometric Measuring
Instruments.
(4) Audiometric examinations shall be administered in a room meeting
the requirements listed in appendix D: Audiometric Test Rooms.
(5) Audiometer calibration. (i) The functional operation of the
audiometer shall be checked before each day's use by testing a person
with known, stable hearing thresholds, and by listening to the
audiometer's output to make sure that the output is free from distorted
or unwanted sounds. Deviations of 10 decibels or greater require an
acoustic calibration.
(ii) Audiometer calibration shall be checked acoustically at least
annually in accordance with appendix E: Acoustic Calibration of
Audiometers. Test frequencies below 500 Hz and above 6000 Hz may be
omitted from this check. Deviations of 15 decibels or greater require an
exhaustive calibration.
(iii) An exhaustive calibration shall be performed at least every
two years in accordance with sections 4.1.2; 4.1.3.; 4.1.4.3; 4.2;
4.4.1; 4.4.2; 4.4.3; and 4.5 of the American National Standard
Specification for Audiometers, S3.6-1969. Test frequencies below 500 Hz
and above 6000 Hz may be omitted from this calibration.
(i) Hearing protectors. (1) Employers shall make hearing protectors
available to all employees exposed to an 8-hour time-weighted average of
85 decibels or greater at no cost to the employees. Hearing protectors
shall be replaced as necessary.
(2) Employers shall ensure that hearing protectors are worn:
(i) By an employee who is required by paragraph (b)(1) of this
section to wear personal protective equipment; and
(ii) By any employee who is exposed to an 8-hour time-weighted
average of 85 decibels or greater, and who:
(A) Has not yet had a baseline audiogram established pursuant to
paragraph (g)(5)(ii); or
(B) Has experienced a standard threshold shift.
(3) Employees shall be given the opportunity to select their hearing
protectors from a variety of suitable hearing protectors provided by the
employer.
(4) The employer shall provide training in the use and care of all
hearing protectors provided to employees.
(5) The employer shall ensure proper initial fitting and supervise
the correct use of all hearing protectors.
(j) Hearing protector attenuation. (1) The employer shall evaluate
hearing protector attenuation for the specific noise environments in
which the protector will be used. The employer shall use one of the
evaluation methods described in appendix B: Methods for Estimating the
Adequacy of Hearing Protection Attenuation.
(2) Hearing protectors must attenuate employee exposure at least to
an 8-hour time-weighted average of 90 decibels as required by paragraph
(b) of this section.
(3) For employees who have experienced a standard threshold shift,
hearing protectors must attenuate employee exposure to an 8-hour time-
weighted average of 85 decibels or below.
(4) The adequacy of hearing protector attenuation shall be re-
evaluated whenever employee noise exposures increase to the extent that
the hearing protectors provided may no longer provide adequate
attenuation. The employer shall provide more effective hearing
protectors where necessary.
(k) Training program. (1) The employer shall institute a training
program for all employees who are exposed to noise at or above an 8-hour
time-weighted average of 85 decibels, and shall ensure employee
participation in such program.
(2) The training program shall be repeated annually for each
employee included in the hearing conservation program. Information
provided in the training program shall be updated to be consistent with
changes in protective equipment and work processes.
(3) The employer shall ensure that each employee is informed of the
following:
(i) The effects of noise on hearing;
[[Page 218]]
(ii) The purpose of hearing protectors, the advantages,
disadvantages, and attenuation of various types, and instructions on
selection, fitting, use, and care; and
(iii) The purpose of audiometric testing, and an explanation of the
test procedures.
(l) Access to information and training materials. (1) The employer
shall make available to affected employees or their representatives
copies of this standard and shall also post a copy in the workplace.
(2) The employer shall provide to affected employees any
informational materials pertaining to the standard that are supplied to
the employer by the Assistant Secretary.
(3) The employer shall provide, upon request, all materials related
to the employer's training and education program pertaining to this
standard to the Assistant Secretary and the Director.
(m) Recordkeeping--(1) Exposure measurements. The employer shall
maintain an accurate record of all employee exposure measurements
required by paragraph (d) of this section.
(2) Audiometric tests. (i) The employer shall retain all employee
audiometric test records obtained pursuant to paragraph (g) of this
section:
(ii) This record shall include:
(A) Name and job classification of the employee;
(B) Date of the audiogram;
(C) The examiner's name;
(D) Date of the last acoustic or exhaustive calibration of the
audiometer; and
(E) Employee's most recent noise exposure assessment.
(F) The employer shall maintain accurate records of the measurements
of the background sound pressure levels in audiometric test rooms.
(3) Record retention. The employer shall retain records required in
this paragraph (m) for at least the following periods.
(i) Noise exposure measurement records shall be retained for two
years.
(ii) Audiometric test records shall be retained for the duration of
the affected employee's employment.
(4) Access to records. All records required by this section shall be
provided upon request to employees, former employees, representatives
designated by the individual employee, and the Assistant Secretary. The
provisions of 29 CFR 1910.20 (a)-(e) and (g)-(i) apply to access to
records under this section.
(5) Transfer of records. If the employer ceases to do business, the
employer shall transfer to the successor employer all records required
to be maintained by this section, and the successor employer shall
retain them for the remainder of the period prescribed in paragraph
(m)(3) of this section.
(n) Appendices. (1) Appendices A, B, C, D, and E to this section are
incorporated as part of this section and the contents of these
appendices are mandatory.
(2) Appendices F and G to this section are informational and are not
intended to create any additional obligations not otherwise imposed or
to detract from any existing obligations.
(o) Exemptions. Paragraphs (c) through (n) of this section shall not
apply to employers engaged in oil and gas well drilling and servicing
operations.
(p) Startup date. Baseline audiograms required by paragraph (g) of
this section shall be completed by March 1, 1984.
Appendix A to Sec. 1910.95--Noise Exposure Computation
This Appendix is Mandatory
I. Computation of Employee Noise Exposure
(1) Noise dose is computed using Table G-16a as follows:
(i) When the sound level, L, is constant over the entire work shift,
the noise dose, D, in percent, is given by: D=100 C/T where C is the
total length of the work day, in hours, and T is the reference duration
corresponding to the measured sound level, L, as given in Table G-16a or
by the formula shown as a footnote to that table.
(ii) When the workshift noise exposure is composed of two or more
periods of noise at different levels, the total noise dose over the work
day is given by:
D = 100 (C1/T1+C2/T2+ . . .
+ Cn/Tn),
where Cn indicates the total time of exposure at a specific
noise level, and Tn indicates the reference duration for that
level as given by Table G-16a.
(2) The eight-hour time-weighted average sound level (TWA), in
decibels, may be computed from the dose, in percent, by means of the
formula: TWA=16.61 log10 (D/100)+90. For
[[Page 219]]
an eight-hour workshift with the noise level constant over the entire
shift, the TWA is equal to the measured sound level.
(3) A table relating dose and TWA is given in Section II.
Table G-16a
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reference
A-weighted sound level, L (decibel) duration,
T (hour)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
80........................................................... 32
81........................................................... 27.9
82........................................................... 24.3
83........................................................... 21.1
84........................................................... 18.4
85........................................................... 16
86........................................................... 13.9
87........................................................... 12.1
88........................................................... 10.6
89........................................................... 9.2
90........................................................... 8
91........................................................... 7.0
92........................................................... 6.1
93........................................................... 5.3
94........................................................... 4.6
95........................................................... 4
96........................................................... 3.5
97........................................................... 3.0
98........................................................... 2.6
99........................................................... 2.3
100.......................................................... 2
101.......................................................... 1.7
102.......................................................... 1.5
103.......................................................... 1.3
104.......................................................... 1.1
105.......................................................... 1
106.......................................................... 0.87
107.......................................................... 0.76
108.......................................................... 0.66
109.......................................................... 0.57
110.......................................................... 0.5
111.......................................................... 0.44
112.......................................................... 0.38
113.......................................................... 0.33
114.......................................................... 0.29
115.......................................................... 0.25
116.......................................................... 0.22
117.......................................................... 0.19
118.......................................................... 0.16
119.......................................................... 0.14
120.......................................................... 0.125
121.......................................................... 0.11
122.......................................................... 0.095
123.......................................................... 0.082
124.......................................................... 0.072
125.......................................................... 0.063
126.......................................................... 0.054
127.......................................................... 0.047
128.......................................................... 0.041
129.......................................................... 0.036
130.......................................................... 0.031
------------------------------------------------------------------------
In the above table the reference duration, T, is computed by
8
T ----------------
= 2(L-90)/5
------------------------------------------------------------------------
where L is the measured A-weighted sound level.
II. Conversion Between ``Dose'' and ``8-Hour Time-Weighted Average''
Sound Level
Compliance with paragraphs (c)-(r) of this regulation is determined
by the amount of exposure to noise in the workplace. The amount of such
exposure is usually measured with an audiodosimeter which gives a
readout in terms of ``dose.'' In order to better understand the
requirements of the amendment, dosimeter readings can be converted to an
``8-hour time-weighted average sound level.'' (TWA).
In order to convert the reading of a dosimeter into TWA, see Table
A-1, below. This table applies to dosimeters that are set by the
manufacturer to calculate dose or percent exposure according to the
relationships in Table G-16a. So, for example, a dose of 91 percent over
an eight hour day results in a TWA of 89.3 dB, and, a dose of 50 percent
corresponds to a TWA of 85 dB.
If the dose as read on the dosimeter is less than or greater than
the values found in Table A-1, the TWA may be calculated by using the
formula: TWA=16.61 log10 (D/100)+90 where TWA=8-hour time-
weighted average sound level and D=accumulated dose in percent exposure.
Table A-1--Conversion From ``Percent Noise Exposure'' or ``Dose'' to ``8-
Hour Time-Weighted Average Sound Level'' (TWA)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dose or percent noise exposure TWA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10........................................................... 73.4
15........................................................... 76.3
20........................................................... 78.4
25........................................................... 80.0
30........................................................... 81.3
35........................................................... 82.4
40........................................................... 83.4
45........................................................... 84.2
50........................................................... 85.0
55........................................................... 85.7
60........................................................... 86.3
65........................................................... 86.9
70........................................................... 87.4
75........................................................... 87.9
80........................................................... 88.4
81........................................................... 88.5
82........................................................... 88.6
83........................................................... 88.7
84........................................................... 88.7
85........................................................... 88.8
86........................................................... 88.9
87........................................................... 89.0
88........................................................... 89.1
89........................................................... 89.2
90........................................................... 89.2
91........................................................... 89.3
92........................................................... 89.4
93........................................................... 89.5
94........................................................... 89.6
95........................................................... 89.6
96........................................................... 89.7
97........................................................... 89.8
98........................................................... 89.9
99........................................................... 89.9
100.......................................................... 90.0
[[Page 220]]
101.......................................................... 90.1
102.......................................................... 90.1
103.......................................................... 90.2
104.......................................................... 90.3
105.......................................................... 90.4
106.......................................................... 90.4
107.......................................................... 90.5
108.......................................................... 90.6
109.......................................................... 90.6
110.......................................................... 90.7
111.......................................................... 90.8
112.......................................................... 90.8
113.......................................................... 90.9
114.......................................................... 90.9
115.......................................................... 91.1
116.......................................................... 91.1
117.......................................................... 91.1
118.......................................................... 91.2
119.......................................................... 91.3
120.......................................................... 91.3
125.......................................................... 91.6
130.......................................................... 91.9
135.......................................................... 92.2
140.......................................................... 92.4
145.......................................................... 92.7
150.......................................................... 92.9
155.......................................................... 93.2
160.......................................................... 93.4
165.......................................................... 93.6
170.......................................................... 93.8
175.......................................................... 94.0
180.......................................................... 94.2
185.......................................................... 94.4
190.......................................................... 94.6
195.......................................................... 94.8
200.......................................................... 95.0
210.......................................................... 95.4
220.......................................................... 95.7
230.......................................................... 96.0
240.......................................................... 96.3
250.......................................................... 96.6
260.......................................................... 96.9
270.......................................................... 97.2
280.......................................................... 97.4
290.......................................................... 97.7
300.......................................................... 97.9
310.......................................................... 98.2
320.......................................................... 98.4
330.......................................................... 98.6
340.......................................................... 98.8
350.......................................................... 99.0
360.......................................................... 99.2
370.......................................................... 99.4
380.......................................................... 99.6
390.......................................................... 99.8
400.......................................................... 100.0
410.......................................................... 100.2
420.......................................................... 100.4
430.......................................................... 100.5
440.......................................................... 100.7
450.......................................................... 100.8
460.......................................................... 101.0
470.......................................................... 101.2
480.......................................................... 101.3
490.......................................................... 101.5
500.......................................................... 101.6
510.......................................................... 101.8
520.......................................................... 101.9
530.......................................................... 102.0
540.......................................................... 102.2
550.......................................................... 102.3
560.......................................................... 102.4
570.......................................................... 102.6
580.......................................................... 102.7
590.......................................................... 102.8
600.......................................................... 102.9
610.......................................................... 103.0
620.......................................................... 103.2
630.......................................................... 103.3
640.......................................................... 103.4
650.......................................................... 103.5
660.......................................................... 103.6
670.......................................................... 103.7
680.......................................................... 103.8
690.......................................................... 103.9
700.......................................................... 104.0
710.......................................................... 104.1
720.......................................................... 104.2
730.......................................................... 104.3
740.......................................................... 104.4
750.......................................................... 104.5
760.......................................................... 104.6
770.......................................................... 104.7
780.......................................................... 104.8
790.......................................................... 104.9
800.......................................................... 105.0
810.......................................................... 105.1
820.......................................................... 105.2
830.......................................................... 105.3
840.......................................................... 105.4
850.......................................................... 105.4
860.......................................................... 105.5
870.......................................................... 105.6
880.......................................................... 105.7
890.......................................................... 105.8
900.......................................................... 105.8
910.......................................................... 105.9
920.......................................................... 106.0
930.......................................................... 106.1
940.......................................................... 106.2
950.......................................................... 106.2
960.......................................................... 106.3
970.......................................................... 106.4
980.......................................................... 106.5
990.......................................................... 106.5
999.......................................................... 106.6
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Appendix B to Sec. 1910.95--Methods for Estimating the Adequacy of
Hearing Protector Attenuation
This Appendix is Mandatory
For employees who have experienced a significant threshold shift,
hearing protector attenuation must be sufficient to reduce employee
exposure to a TWA of 85 dB. Employers must select one of the following
methods by which to estimate the adequacy of hearing protector
attenuation.
The most convenient method is the Noise Reduction Rating (NRR)
developed by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). According to EPA
regulation, the NRR must
[[Page 221]]
be shown on the hearing protector package. The NRR is then related to an
individual worker's noise environment in order to assess the adequacy of
the attenuation of a given hearing protector. This appendix describes
four methods of using the NRR to determine whether a particular hearing
protector provides adequate protection within a given exposure
environment. Selection among the four procedures is dependent upon the
employer's noise measuring instruments.
Instead of using the NRR, employers may evaluate the adequacy of
hearing protector attenuation by using one of the three methods
developed by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
(NIOSH), which are described in the ``List of Personal Hearing
Protectors and Attenuation Data,'' HEW Publication No. 76-120, 1975,
pages 21-37. These methods are known as NIOSH methods 1B1,
1B2 and 1B3. The NRR described below is a
simplification of NIOSH method 1B2. The most complex method is
NIOSH method 1B1, which is probably the most accurate method
since it uses the largest amount of spectral information from the
individual employee's noise environment. As in the case of the NRR
method described below, if one of the NIOSH methods is used, the
selected method must be applied to an individual's noise environment to
assess the adequacy of the attenuation. Employers should be careful to
take a sufficient number of measurements in order to achieve a
representative sample for each time segment.
Note: The employer must remember that calculated attenuation values
reflect realistic values only to the extent that the protectors are
properly fitted and worn.
When using the NRR to assess hearing protector adequacy, one of the
following methods must be used:
(i) When using a dosimeter that is capable of C-weighted
measurements:
(A) Obtain the employee's C-weighted dose for the entire workshift,
and convert to TWA (see appendix A, II).
(B) Subtract the NRR from the C-weighted TWA to obtain the estimated
A-weighted TWA under the ear protector.
(ii) When using a dosimeter that is not capable of C-weighted
measurements, the following method may be used:
(A) Convert the A-weighted dose to TWA (see appendix A).
(B) Subtract 7 dB from the NRR.
(C) Subtract the remainder from the A-weighted TWA to obtain the
estimated A-weighted TWA under the ear protector.
(iii) When using a sound level meter set to the A-weighting network:
(A) Obtain the employee's A-weighted TWA.
(B) Subtract 7 dB from the NRR, and subtract the remainder from the
A-weighted TWA to obtain the estimated A-weighted TWA under the ear
protector.
(iv) When using a sound level meter set on the C-weighting network:
(A) Obtain a representative sample of the C-weighted sound levels in
the employee's environment.
(B) Subtract the NRR from the C-weighted average sound level to
obtain the estimated A-weighted TWA under the ear protector.
(v) When using area monitoring procedures and a sound level meter
set to the A-weighing network.
(A) Obtain a representative sound level for the area in question.
(B) Subtract 7 dB from the NRR and subtract the remainder from the
A-weighted sound level for that area.
(vi) When using area monitoring procedures and a sound level meter
set to the C-weighting network:
(A) Obtain a representative sound level for the area in question.
(B) Subtract the NRR from the C-weighted sound level for that area.
Appendix C to Sec. 1910.95--Audiometric Measuring Instruments
This Appendix is Mandatory
1. In the event that pulsed-tone audiometers are used, they shall
have a tone on-time of at least 200 milliseconds.
2. Self-recording audiometers shall comply with the following
requirements:
(A) The chart upon which the audiogram is traced shall have lines at
positions corresponding to all multiples of 10 dB hearing level within
the intensity range spanned by the audiometer. The lines shall be
equally spaced and shall be separated by at least \1/4\ inch. Additional
increments are optional. The audiogram pen tracings shall not exceed 2
dB in width.
(B) It shall be possible to set the stylus manually at the 10-dB
increment lines for calibration purposes.
(C) The slewing rate for the audiometer attenuator shall not be more
than 6 dB/sec except that an initial slewing rate greater than 6 dB/sec
is permitted at the beginning of each new test frequency, but only until
the second subject response.
(D) The audiometer shall remain at each required test frequency for
30 seconds ( 3 seconds). The audiogram shall be clearly
marked at each change of frequency and the actual frequency change of
the audiometer shall not deviate from the frequency boundaries marked on
the audiogram by more than 3 seconds.
(E) It must be possible at each test frequency to place a horizontal
line segment parallel to the time axis on the audiogram, such that the
audiometric tracing crosses the line segment at least six times at that
test frequency. At each test frequency the threshold shall be the
average of the midpoints of the tracing excursions.
[[Page 222]]
Appendix D to Sec. 1910.95--Audiometric Test Rooms
This Appendix is Mandatory
Rooms used for audiometric testing shall not have background sound
pressure levels exceeding those in Table D-1 when measured by equipment
conforming at least to the Type 2 requirements of American National
Standard Specification for Sound Level Meters, S1.4-1971 (R1976), and to
the Class II requirements of American National Standard Specification
for Octave, Half-Octave, and Third-Octave Band Filter Sets, S1.11-1971
(R1976).
Table D-1--Maximum Allowable Octave-Band Sound Pressure Levels for
Audiometric Test Rooms
Octave-band center frequency (Hz).... 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Sound pressure level (dB)............ 40 40 47 57 62
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Appendix E to Sec. 1910.95--Acoustic Calibration of Audiometers
This Appendix is Mandatory
Audiometer calibration shall be checked acoustically, at least
annually, according to the procedures described in this appendix. The
equipment necessary to perform these measurements is a sound level
meter, octave-band filter set, and a National Bureau of Standards 9A
coupler. In making these measurements, the accuracy of the calibrating
equipment shall be sufficient to determine that the audiometer is within
the tolerances permitted by American Standard Specification for
Audiometers, S3.6-1969.
(1) Sound Pressure Output Check
A. Place the earphone coupler over the microphone of the sound level
meter and place the earphone on the coupler.
B. Set the audiometer's hearing threshold level (HTL) dial to 70 dB.
C. Measure the sound pressure level of the tones at each test
frequency from 500 Hz through 6000 Hz for each earphone.
D. At each frequency the readout on the sound level meter should
correspond to the levels in Table E-1 or Table E-2, as appropriate, for
the type of earphone, in the column entitled ``sound level meter
reading.''
(2) Linearity Check
A. With the earphone in place, set the frequency to 1000 Hz and the
HTL dial on the audiometer to 70 dB.
B. Measure the sound levels in the coupler at each 10-dB decrement
from 70 dB to 10 dB, noting the sound level meter reading at each
setting.
C. For each 10-dB decrement on the audiometer the sound level meter
should indicate a corresponding 10 dB decrease.
D. This measurement may be made electrically with a voltmeter
connected to the earphone terminals.
(3) Tolerances
When any of the measured sound levels deviate from the levels in
Table E-1 or Table E-2 by 3 dB at any test frequency
between 500 and 3000 Hz, 4 dB at 4000 Hz, or 5 dB at 6000 Hz, an
exhaustive calibration is advised. An exhaustive calibration is required
if the deviations are greater than 15 dB or greater at any test
frequency.
Table E-1--Reference Threshold Levels for Telephonics--TDH-39 Earphones
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reference
threshold Sound
level for level
Frequency, Hz TDH-39 meter
earphones, reading,
dB dB
------------------------------------------------------------------------
500............................................. 11.5 81.5
1000............................................ 7 77
2000............................................ 9 79
3000............................................ 10 80
4000............................................ 9.5 79.5
6000............................................ 15.5 85.5
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table E-2--Reference Threshold Levels for Telephonics--TDH-49 Earphones
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reference
threshold Sound
level for level
Frequency, Hz TDH-49 meter
earphones, reading,
dB dB
------------------------------------------------------------------------
500.............................................. 13.5 83.5
1000............................................. 7.5 77.5
2000............................................. 11 81.0
3000............................................. 9.5 79.5
4000............................................. 10.5 80.5
6000............................................. 13.5 83.5
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Appendix F to Sec. 1910.95--Calculations and Application of Age
Corrections to Audiograms
This Appendix Is Non-Mandatory
In determining whether a standard threshold shift has occurred,
allowance may be made for the contribution of aging to the change in
hearing level by adjusting the most recent audiogram. If the employer
chooses to adjust the audiogram, the employer shall follow the procedure
described below. This procedure and the age correction tables were
developed by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
in the criteria document entitled ``Criteria for
[[Page 223]]
a Recommended Standard . . . Occupational Exposure to Noise,'' ((HSM)-
11001).
For each audiometric test frequency;
(i) Determine from Tables F-1 or F-2 the age correction values for
the employee by:
(A) Finding the age at which the most recent audiogram was taken and
recording the corresponding values of age corrections at 1000 Hz through
6000 Hz;
(B) Finding the age at which the baseline audiogram was taken and
recording the corresponding values of age corrections at 1000 Hz through
6000 Hz.
(ii) Subtract the values found in step (i)(B) from the value found
in step (i)(A).
(iii) The differences calculated in step (ii) represented that
portion of the change in hearing that may be due to aging.
Example: Employee is a 32-year-old male. The audiometric history for
his right ear is shown in decibels below.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Audiometric test frequency (Hz)
Employee's age ---------------------------------------
1000 2000 3000 4000 6000
------------------------------------------------------------------------
26.............................. 10 5 5 10 5
*27............................. 0 0 0 5 5
28.............................. 0 0 0 10 5
29.............................. 5 0 5 15 5
30.............................. 0 5 10 20 10
31.............................. 5 10 20 15 15
*32............................. 5 10 10 25 20
------------------------------------------------------------------------
The audiogram at age 27 is considered the baseline since it shows
the best hearing threshold levels. Asterisks have been used to identify
the baseline and most recent audiogram. A threshold shift of 20 dB
exists at 4000 Hz between the audiograms taken at ages 27 and 32.
(The threshold shift is computed by subtracting the hearing
threshold at age 27, which was 5, from the hearing threshold at age 32,
which is 25). A retest audiogram has confirmed this shift. The
contribution of aging to this change in hearing may be estimated in the
following manner:
Go to Table F-1 and find the age correction values (in dB) for 4000
Hz at age 27 and age 32.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Frequency (Hz)
---------------------------------------
1000 2000 3000 4000 6000
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Age 32.......................... 6 5 7 10 14
Age 27.......................... 5 4 6 7 11
---------------------------------------
Difference.................. 1 1 1 3 3
------------------------------------------------------------------------
The difference represents the amount of hearing loss that may be
attributed to aging in the time period between the baseline audiogram
and the most recent audiogram. In this example, the difference at 4000
Hz is 3 dB. This value is subtracted from the hearing level at 4000 Hz,
which in the most recent audiogram is 25, yielding 22 after adjustment.
Then the hearing threshold in the baseline audiogram at 4000 Hz (5) is
subtracted from the adjusted annual audiogram hearing threshold at 4000
Hz (22). Thus the age-corrected threshold shift would be 17 dB (as
opposed to a threshold shift of 20 dB without age correction).
Table F-1--Age Correction Values in Decibels for Males
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Audiometric Test Frequencies (Hz)
Years ---------------------------------------
1000 2000 3000 4000 6000
------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 or younger................... 5 3 4 5 8
21.............................. 5 3 4 5 8
22.............................. 5 3 4 5 8
23.............................. 5 3 4 6 9
24.............................. 5 3 5 6 9
25.............................. 5 3 5 7 10
26.............................. 5 4 5 7 10
27.............................. 5 4 6 7 11
28.............................. 6 4 6 8 11
29.............................. 6 4 6 8 12
30.............................. 6 4 6 9 12
31.............................. 6 4 7 9 13
32.............................. 6 5 7 10 14
33.............................. 6 5 7 10 14
34.............................. 6 5 8 11 15
35.............................. 7 5 8 11 15
36.............................. 7 5 9 12 16
37.............................. 7 6 9 12 17
38.............................. 7 6 9 13 17
39.............................. 7 6 10 14 18
40.............................. 7 6 10 14 19
41.............................. 7 6 10 14 20
42.............................. 8 7 11 16 20
43.............................. 8 7 12 16 21
44.............................. 8 7 12 17 22
45.............................. 8 7 13 18 23
46.............................. 8 8 13 19 24
47.............................. 8 8 14 19 24
48.............................. 9 8 14 20 25
49.............................. 9 9 15 21 26
50.............................. 9 9 16 22 27
51.............................. 9 9 16 23 28
52.............................. 9 10 17 24 29
53.............................. 9 10 18 25 30
54.............................. 10 10 18 26 31
55.............................. 10 11 19 27 32
56.............................. 10 11 20 28 34
57.............................. 10 11 21 29 35
58.............................. 10 12 22 31 36
59.............................. 11 12 22 32 37
60 or older..................... 11 13 23 33 38
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table F-2--Age Correction Values in Decibels for Females
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Audiometric Test Frequencies (Hz)
Years ---------------------------------------
1000 2000 3000 4000 6000
------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 or younger................... 7 4 3 3 6
21.............................. 7 4 4 3 6
22.............................. 7 4 4 4 6
23.............................. 7 5 4 4 7
24.............................. 7 5 4 4 7
25.............................. 8 5 4 4 7
26.............................. 8 5 5 4 8
27.............................. 8 5 5 5 8
28.............................. 8 5 5 5 8
29.............................. 8 5 5 5 9
30.............................. 8 6 5 5 9
31.............................. 8 6 6 5 9
32.............................. 9 6 6 6 10
[[Page 224]]
33.............................. 9 6 6 6 10
34.............................. 9 6 6 6 10
35.............................. 9 6 7 7 11
36.............................. 9 7 7 7 11
37.............................. 9 7 7 7 12
38.............................. 10 7 7 7 12
39.............................. 10 7 8 8 12
40.............................. 10 7 8 8 13
41.............................. 10 8 8 8 13
42.............................. 10 8 9 9 13
43.............................. 11 8 9 9 14
44.............................. 11 8 9 9 14
45.............................. 11 8 10 10 15
46.............................. 11 9 10 10 15
47.............................. 11 9 10 11 16
48.............................. 12 9 11 11 16
49.............................. 12 9 11 11 16
50.............................. 12 10 11 12 17
51.............................. 12 10 12 12 17
52.............................. 12 10 12 13 18
53.............................. 13 10 13 13 18
54.............................. 13 11 13 14 19
55.............................. 13 11 14 14 19
56.............................. 13 11 14 15 20
57.............................. 13 11 15 15 20
58.............................. 14 12 15 16 21
59.............................. 14 12 16 16 21
60 or older..................... 14 12 16 17 22
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Appendix G to Sec. 1910.95--Monitoring Noise Levels Non-Mandatory
Informational Appendix
This appendix provides information to help employers comply with the
noise monitoring obligations that are part of the hearing conservation
amendment.
What is the purpose of noise monitoring?
This revised amendment requires that employees be placed in a
hearing conservation program if they are exposed to average noise levels
of 85 dB or greater during an 8 hour workday. In order to determine if
exposures are at or above this level, it may be necessary to measure or
monitor the actual noise levels in the workplace and to estimate the
noise exposure or ``dose'' received by employees during the workday.
When is it necessary to implement a noise monitoring program?
It is not necessary for every employer to measure workplace noise.
Noise monitoring or measuring must be conducted only when exposures are
at or above 85 dB. Factors which suggest that noise exposures in the
workplace may be at this level include employee complaints about the
loudness of noise, indications that employees are losing their hearing,
or noisy conditions which make normal conversation difficult. The
employer should also consider any information available regarding noise
emitted from specific machines. In addition, actual workplace noise
measurements can suggest whether or not a monitoring program should be
initiated.
How is noise measured?
Basically, there are two different instruments to measure noise
exposures: the sound level meter and the dosimeter. A sound level meter
is a device that measures the intensity of sound at a given moment.
Since sound level meters provide a measure of sound intensity at only
one point in time, it is generally necessary to take a number of
measurements at different times during the day to estimate noise
exposure over a workday. If noise levels fluctuate, the amount of time
noise remains at each of the various measured levels must be determined.
To estimate employee noise exposures with a sound level meter it is
also generally necessary to take several measurements at different
locations within the workplace. After appropriate sound level meter
readings are obtained, people sometimes draw ``maps'' of the sound
levels within different areas of the workplace. By using a sound level
``map'' and information on employee locations throughout the day,
estimates of individual exposure levels can be developed. This
measurement method is generally referred to as area noise monitoring.
A dosimeter is like a sound level meter except that it stores sound
level measurements and integrates these measurements over time,
providing an average noise exposure reading for a given period of time,
such as an 8-hour workday. With a dosimeter, a microphone is attached to
the employee's clothing and the exposure measurement is simply read at
the end of the desired time period. A reader may be used to read-out the
dosimeter's measurements. Since the dosimeter is worn by the employee,
it measures noise levels in those locations in which the employee
travels. A sound level meter can also be positioned within the immediate
vicinity of the exposed worker to obtain an individual exposure
estimate. Such procedures are generally referred to as personal noise
monitoring.
Area monitoring can be used to estimate noise exposure when the
noise levels are relatively constant and employees are not mobile. In
workplaces where employees move about in different areas or where the
noise intensity tends to fluctuate over time, noise exposure is
generally more accurately estimated by the personal monitoring approach.
In situations where personal monitoring is appropriate, proper
positioning of the microphone is necessary to obtain accurate
measurements. With a dosimeter, the microphone is generally located on
the shoulder and remains in that position for the entire workday. With a
sound level meter, the microphone is stationed near the employee's head,
and the instrument is usually held by an individual who follows the
employee as he or she moves about.
[[Page 225]]
Manufacturer's instructions, contained in dosimeter and sound level
meter operating manuals, should be followed for calibration and
maintenance. To ensure accurate results, it is considered good
professional practice to calibrate instruments before and after each
use.
How often is it necessary to monitor noise levels?
The amendment requires that when there are significant changes in
machinery or production processes that may result in increased noise
levels, remonitoring must be conducted to determine whether additional
employees need to be included in the hearing conservation program. Many
companies choose to remonitor periodically (once every year or two) to
ensure that all exposed employees are included in their hearing
conservation programs.
Where can equipment and technical advice be obtained?
Noise monitoring equipment may be either purchased or rented. Sound
level meters cost about $500 to $1,000, while dosimeters range in price
from about $750 to $1,500. Smaller companies may find it more economical
to rent equipment rather than to purchase it. Names of equipment
suppliers may be found in the telephone book (Yellow Pages) under
headings such as: ``Safety Equipment,'' ``Industrial Hygiene,'' or
``Engineers-Acoustical.'' In addition to providing information on
obtaining noise monitoring equipment, many companies and individuals
included under such listings can provide professional advice on how to
conduct a valid noise monitoring program. Some audiological testing
firms and industrial hygiene firms also provide noise monitoring
services. Universities with audiology, industrial hygiene, or acoustical
engineering departments may also provide information or may be able to
help employers meet their obligations under this amendment.
Free, on-site assistance may be obtained from OSHA-supported state
and private consultation organizations. These safety and health
consultative entities generally give priority to the needs of small
businesses.
Appendix H to Sec. 1910.95--Availability of Referenced Documents
Paragraphs (c) through (o) of 29 CFR 1910.95 and the accompanying
appendices contain provisions which incorporate publications by
reference. Generally, the publications provide criteria for instruments
to be used in monitoring and audiometric testing. These criteria are
intended to be mandatory when so indicated in the applicable paragraphs
of Sec. 1910.95 and appendices.
It should be noted that OSHA does not require that employers
purchase a copy of the referenced publications. Employers, however, may
desire to obtain a copy of the referenced publications for their own
information.
The designation of the paragraph of the standard in which the
referenced publications appear, the titles of the publications, and the
availability of the publications are as follows:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Referenced
Paragraph designation publication Available from--
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Appendix B.................... ``List of National Technical
Personal Hearing Information Service,
Protectors and Port Royal Road,
Attenuation Springfield, VA
Data,'' HEW Pub. 22161.
No. 76-120,
1975. NTIS-
PB267461.
Appendix D.................... ``Specification American National
for Sound Level Standards Institute,
Meters,'' S1.4- Inc., 1430 Broadway,
1971 (R1976). New York, NY 10018.
Sec. 1910.95(k)(2), appendix ``Specifications American National
E. for Standards Institute,
Audiometers,'' Inc., 1430 Broadway,
S3.6-1969. New York, NY 10018.
Appendix D.................... ``Specification Back Numbers
for Octave, Half- Department, Dept.
Octave and Third- STD, American
Octave Band Institute of
Filter Sets,'' Physics, 333 E. 45th
S1.11-1971 St., New York, NY
(R1976). 10017; American
National Standards
Institute, Inc.,
1430 Broadway, New
York, NY 10018.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
The referenced publications (or a microfiche of the publications)
are available for review at many universities and public libraries
throughout the country. These publications may also be examined at the
OSHA Technical Data Center, Room N2439, United States Department of
Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210, (202) 219-
7500 or at any OSHA Regional Office (see telephone directories under
United States Government--Labor Department).
Appendix I to Sec. 1910.95--Definitions
These definitions apply to the following terms as used in paragraphs
(c) through (n) of 29 CFR 1910.95.
Action level--An 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels measured on
the A-scale, slow response, or equivalently, a dose of fifty percent.
Audiogram--A chart, graph, or table resulting from an audiometric test
showing an individual's hearing threshold levels as a function of
frequency.
Audiologist--A professional, specializing in the study and
rehabilitation of hearing,
[[Page 226]]
who is certified by the American Speech-Language-Hearing Association or
licensed by a state board of examiners.
Baseline audiogram--The audiogram against which future audiograms are
compared.
Criterion sound level--A sound level of 90 decibels.
Decibel (dB)--Unit of measurement of sound level.
Hertz (Hz)--Unit of measurement of frequency, numerically equal to
cycles per second.
Medical pathology--A disorder or disease. For purposes of this
regulation, a condition or disease affecting the ear, which should be
treated by a physician specialist.
Noise dose--The ratio, expressed as a percentage, of (1) the time
integral, over a stated time or event, of the 0.6 power of the measured
SLOW exponential time-averaged, squared A-weighted sound pressure and
(2) the product of the criterion duration (8 hours) and the 0.6 power of
the squared sound pressure corresponding to the criterion sound level
(90 dB).
Noise dosimeter--An instrument that integrates a function of sound
pressure over a period of time in such a manner that it directly
indicates a noise dose.
Otolaryngologist--A physician specializing in diagnosis and treatment of
disorders of the ear, nose and throat.
Representative exposure--Measurements of an employee's noise dose or 8-
hour time-weighted average sound level that the employers deem to be
representative of the exposures of other employees in the workplace.
Sound level--Ten times the common logarithm of the ratio of the square
of the measured A-weighted sound pressure to the square of the standard
reference pressure of 20 micropascals. Unit: decibels (dB). For use with
this regulation, SLOW time response, in accordance with ANSI S1.4-1971
(R1976), is required.
Sound level meter--An instrument for the measurement of sound level.
Time-weighted average sound level--That sound level, which if constant
over an 8-hour exposure, would result in the same noise dose as is
measured.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 46 FR 4161, Jan. 16, 1981; 46
FR 62845, Dec. 29, 1981; 48 FR 9776, Mar. 8, 1983; 48 FR 29687, June 28,
1983; 54 FR 24333, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.97 Nonionizing radiation.
(a) Electromagnetic radiation--(1) Definitions applicable to this
paragraph. (i) The term electromagnetic radiation is restricted to that
portion of the spectrum commonly defined as the radio frequency region,
which for the purpose of this specification shall include the microwave
frequency region.
(ii) Partial body irradiation. Pertains to the case in which part of
the body is exposed to the incident electromagnetic energy.
(iii) Radiation protection guide. Radiation level which should not
be exceeded without careful consideration of the reasons for doing so.
(iv) The word ``symbol'' as used in this specification refers to the
overall design, shape, and coloring of the rf radiation sign shown in
figure G-11.
(v) Whole body irradiation. Pertains to the case in which the entire
body is exposed to the incident electromagnetic energy or in which the
cross section of the body is smaller than the cross section of the
incident radiation beam.
(2) Radiation protection guide. (i) For normal environmental
conditions and for incident electromagnetic energy of frequencies from
10 MHz to 100 GHz, the radiation protection guide is 10 mW/cm.\2\
(milliwatt per square centimeter) as averaged over any possible 0.1-hour
period. This means the following:
Power density: 10 mW./cm.\2\ for periods of 0.1-hour or more.
Energy density: 1 mW.-hr./cm.\2\ (milliwatt hour per square centimeter)
during any 0.1-hour period.
This guide applies whether the radiation is continuous or intermittent.
(ii) These formulated recommendations pertain to both whole body
irradiation and partial body irradiation. Partial body irradiation must
be included since it has been shown that some parts of the human body
(e.g., eyes, testicles) may be harmed if exposed to incident radiation
levels significantly in excess of the recommended levels.
(3) Warning symbol. (i) The warning symbol for radio frequency
radiation hazards shall consist of a red isosceles triangle above an
inverted black isosceles triangle, separated and outlined by an aluminum
color border. The words ``Warning--Radio-Frequency Radiation Hazard''
shall appear in the upper triangle. See figure G-11.
(ii) American National Standard Safety Color Code for Marking
Physical Hazards and the Identification of Certain Equipment, Z53.1-
1953, which is
[[Page 227]]
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, shall be used for
color specification. All lettering and the border shall be of aluminum
color.
(iii) The inclusion and choice of warning information or
precautionary instructions is at the discretion of the user. If such
information is included it shall appear in the lower triangle of the
warning symbol.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.024
Figure G-11 Radio-Frequency Radiation Hazard Warning Symbol
[[Page 228]]
(4) Scope. This section applies to all radiations originating from
radio stations, radar equipment, and other possible sources of
electromagnetic radiation such as used for communication, radio
navigation, and industrial and scientific purposes. This section does
not apply to the deliberate exposure of patients by, or under the
direction of, practitioners of the healing arts.
(b) [Reserved]
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61 FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.98 Effective dates.
(a) The provisions of this Subpart G shall become effective on
August 27, 1971, except as provided in the remaining paragraphs of this
section.
(b) The following provisions shall become effective on February 15,
1972:
Sec. 1910.94 (a)(2)(iii), (a)(3), (a)(4), (b), (c)(2), (c)(3), (c)(4),
(c)(5), (c)(6)(i), (c)(6)(ii), (d)(1)(ii), (d)(3), (d)(4), (d)(5), and
(d)(7).
(c) Notwithstanding anything in paragraph (a), (b), or (d) of this
section, any provision in any other section of this subpart which
contains in itself a specific effective date or time limitation shall
become effective on such date or shall apply in accordance with such
limitation.
(d) Notwithstanding anything in paragraph (a) of this section, if
any standard in 41 CFR part 50-204, other than a national consensus
standard incorporated by reference in Sec. 50-204.2(a)(1), is or becomes
applicable at any time to any employment and place of employment, by
virtue of the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act, or the Service Contract
Act of 1965, or the National Foundation on Arts and Humanities Act of
1965, any corresponding established Federal standard in this Subpart G
which is derived from 41 CFR part 50-204 shall also become effective,
and shall be applicable to such employment and place of employment, on
the same date.
Subpart H--Hazardous Materials
Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's
Orders Nos. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736),
1-90 (55 FR 9033), or 6-96 (62 FR 111), as applicable; and 29 CFR part
11.
Sections 1910.103, 1910.106 through 1910.111, and 1910.119,
1910.120, and 1910.122 through 1910.126 also issued under 29 CFR part
1911.
Section 1910.119 also issued under Section 304, Clean Air Act
Amendments of 1990 (Pub.L. 101-549), reprinted at 29 U.S.C. 655 Note.
Section 1910.120 also issued under Section 126, Superfund Amendments
and Reauthorization Act of 1986 as amended (29 U.S.C. 655 Note), and 5
U.S.C. 553.
Sec. 1910.101 Compressed gases (general requirements).
(a) Inspection of compressed gas cylinders. Each employer shall
determine that compressed gas cylinders under his control are in a safe
condition to the extent that this can be determined by visual
inspection. Visual and other inspections shall be conducted as
prescribed in the Hazardous Materials Regulations of the Department of
Transportation (49 CFR parts 171-179 and 14 CFR part 103). Where those
regulations are not applicable, visual and other inspections shall be
conducted in accordance with Compressed Gas Association Pamphlets C-6-
1968 and C-8-1962, which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6.
(b) Compressed gases. The in-plant handling, storage, and
utilization of all compressed gases in cylinders, portable tanks, rail
tankcars, or motor vehicle cargo tanks shall be in accordance with
Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet P-1-1965, which is incorporated by
reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(c) Safety relief devices for compressed gas containers. Compressed
gas cylinders, portable tanks, and cargo tanks shall have pressure
relief devices installed and maintained in accordance with Compressed
Gas Association Pamphlets S-1.1-1963 and 1965 addenda and S-1.2-1963,
which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61 FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.102 Acetylene.
(a) Cylinders. The in-plant transfer, handling, storage, and
utilization of
[[Page 229]]
acetylene in cylinders shall be in accordance with Compressed Gas
Association Pamphlet G-1-1966, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(b) Piped systems. The piped systems for the inplant transfer and
distribution of acetylene shall be designed, installed, maintained, and
operated in accordance with Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet G-1.3-
1959, which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(c) Generators and filling cylinders. Plants for the generation of
acetylene and the charging (filling) of acetylene cylinders shall be
designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with the standards
prescribed in Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet G-1.4-1966, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61 FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.103 Hydrogen.
(a) General--(1) Definitions. As used in this section (i) Gaseous
hydrogen system is one in which the hydrogen is delivered, stored and
discharged in the gaseous form to consumer's piping. The system includes
stationary or movable containers, pressure regulators, safety relief
devices, manifolds, interconnecting piping and controls. The system
terminates at the point where hydrogen at service pressure first enters
the consumer's distribution piping.
(ii) Approved--Means, unless otherwise indicated, listed or approved
by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Refer to Sec. 1910.7 for
definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory.
(iii) Listed--See ``approved''.
(iv) ASME--American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
(v) DOT Specifications--Regulations of the Department of
Transportation published in 49 CFR Chapter I.
(vi) DOT regulations--See Sec. 1910.103 (a)(1)(v).
(2) Scope--(i) Gaseous hydrogen systems. (a) Paragraph (b) of this
section applies to the installation of gaseous hydrogen systems on
consumer premises where the hydrogen supply to the consumer premises
originates outside the consumer premises and is delivered by mobile
equipment.
(b) Paragraph (b) of this section does not apply to gaseous hydrogen
systems having a total hydrogen content of less than 400 cubic feet, nor
to hydrogen manufacturing plants or other establishments operated by the
hydrogen supplier or his agent for the purpose of storing hydrogen and
refilling portable containers, trailers, mobile supply trucks, or tank
cars.
(ii) Liquefied hydrogen systems. (a) Paragraph (c) of this section
applies to the installation of liquefied hydrogen systems on consumer
premises.
(b) Paragraph (c) of this section does not apply to liquefied
hydrogen portable containers of less than 150 liters (39.63 gallons)
capacity; nor to liquefied hydrogen manufacturing plants or other
establishments operated by the hydrogen supplier or his agent for the
sole purpose of storing liquefied hydrogen and refilling portable
containers, trailers, mobile supply trucks, or tank cars.
(b) Gaseous hydrogen systems--(1) Design--(i) Containers. (a)
Hydrogen containers shall comply with one of the following:
(1) Designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with appropriate
requirements of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII--
Unfired Pressure Vessels--1968, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(2) Designed, constructed, tested and maintained in accordance with
U.S. Department of Transportation Specifications and Regulations.
(b) Permanently installed containers shall be provided with
substantial noncombustible supports on firm noncombustible foundations.
(c) Each portable container shall be legibly marked with the name
``Hydrogen'' in accordance with ``Marking Portable Compressed Gas
Containers to Identify the Material Contained'' ANSI Z48.1--1954, which
is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6. Each
manifolded hydrogen supply unit shall be legibly marked with the name
Hydrogen or a legend such as ``This unit contains hydrogen.''
[[Page 230]]
(ii) Safety relief devices. (a) Hydrogen containers shall be
equipped with safety relief devices as required by the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII Unfired Pressure Vessels, 1968 or the
DOT Specifications and Regulations under which the container is
fabricated.
(b) Safety relief devices shall be arranged to discharge upward and
unobstructed to the open air in such a manner as to prevent any
impingement of escaping gas upon the container, adjacent structure or
personnel. This requirement does not apply to DOT Specification
containers having an internal volume of 2 cubic feet or less.
(c) Safety relief devices or vent piping shall be designed or
located so that moisture cannot collect and freeze in a manner which
would interfere with proper operation of the device.
(iii) Piping, tubing, and fittings. (a) Piping, tubing, and fittings
shall be suitable for hydrogen service and for the pressures and
temperatures involved. Cast iron pipe and fittings shall not be used.
(b) Piping and tubing shall conform to Section 2--``Industrial Gas
and Air Piping''--Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI B31.1-1967 with addenda
B31.1-1969, which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6.
(c) Joints in piping and tubing may be made by welding or brazing or
by use of flanged, threaded, socket, or compression fittings. Gaskets
and thread sealants shall be suitable for hydrogen service.
(iv) Equipment assembly. (a) Valves, gauges, regulators, and other
accessories shall be suitable for hydrogen service.
(b) Installation of hydrogen systems shall be supervised by
personnel familiar with proper practices with reference to their
construction and use.
(c) Storage containers, piping, valves, regulating equipment, and
other accessories shall be readily accessible, and shall be protected
against physical damage and against tampering.
(d) Cabinets or housings containing hydrogen control or operating
equipment shall be adequately ventilated.
(e) Each mobile hydrogen supply unit used as part of a hydrogen
system shall be adequately secured to prevent movement.
(f) Mobile hydrogen supply units shall be electrically bonded to the
system before discharging hydrogen.
(v) Marking. The hydrogen storage location shall be permanently
placarded as follows: ``HYDROGEN--FLAMMABLE GAS--NO SMOKING--NO OPEN
FLAMES,'' or equivalent.
(vi) Testing. After installations, all piping, tubing, and fittings
shall be tested and proved hydrogen gas tight at maximum operating
pressure.
(2) Location--(i) General. (a) The system shall be located so that
it is readily accessible to delivery equipment and to authorized
personnel.
(b) Systems shall be located above ground.
(c) Systems shall not be located beneath electric power lines.
(d) Systems shall not be located close to flammable liquid piping or
piping of other flammable gases.
(e) Systems near aboveground flammable liquid storage shall be
located on ground higher than the flammable liquid storage except when
dikes, diversion curbs, grading, or separating solid walls are used to
prevent accumulation of flammable liquids under the system.
(ii) Specific requirements. (a) The location of a system, as
determined by the maximum total contained volume of hydrogen, shall be
in the order of preference as indicated by Roman numerals in Table H-1.
Table H-1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Size of hydrogen system
Nature of location --------------------------------------------------------------------------
Less than 3,000 CF 3,000 CF to 15,000 CF In excess of 15,000 CF
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Outdoors............................. I...................... IDI....................
In a separate building............... II..................... II..................... II.
In a special room.................... III.................... III.................... Not permitted.
Inside buildings not in a special IV..................... Not permitted.......... Not permitted.
room and exposed to other
occupancies.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(b) The minimum distance in feet from a hydrogen system of indicated
capacity located outdoors, in separate buildings or in special rooms to
any specified outdoor exposure shall be in accordance with Table H-2.
[[Page 231]]
(c) The distances in Table H-2 Items 1, 14, and 3 to 10 inclusive do
not apply where protective structures such as adequate fire walls are
located between the system and the exposure.
Table H-2
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Type of outdoor exposure Size of hydrogen system
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3,000 CF In excess
Less than to 15,000 of 15,000
3,000 CF CF CF
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Building or structure................. Wood frame construction \1\...... 10 25 50
Heavy timber, noncombustible or 0 10 \2\ 25
ordinary construction \1\.
Fire-resistive construction \1\.. 0 0 0
2. Wall openings......................... Not above any part of a system... 10 10 10
Above any part of a system....... 25 25 25
3. Flammable liquids above ground........ 0 to 1,000 gallons............... 10 25 25
In excess of 1,000 gallons....... 25 50 50
4. Flammable liquids below ground--0 to Tank............................. 10 10 10
1,000 gallons. Vent or fill opening of tank..... 25 25 25
5. Flammable liquids below ground--in Tank............................. 20 20 20
excess of 1,000 gallons.. Vent or fill opening of tank..... 25 25 25
6. Flammable gas storage, either high 0 to 15,000 CF capacity.......... 10 25 25
pressure or low pressure.. In excess of 15,000 CF capacity.. 25 50 50
7. Oxygen storage........................ 12,000 CF or less \4\............ .......... .......... ..........
More than 12,000 CF \5\.......... .......... .......... ..........
8. Fast burning solids such as ordinary lumber, excelsior or paper.......... 50 50 50
9. Slow burning solids such as heavy timber or coal......................... 25 25 25
10. Open flames and other sources of ignition............................... 25 25 25
11. Air compressor intakes or inlets to ventilating or air-conditioning 50 50 50
equipment.
12. Concentration of people \3\............................................. 25 50 50
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Refer to NFPA No. 220 Standard Types of Building Construction for definitions of various types of
construction. (1969 Ed.)
\2\ But not less than one-half the height of adjacent side wall of the structure.
\3\ In congested areas such as offices, lunchrooms, locker rooms, time-clock areas.
\4\ Refer to NFPA No. 51, gas systems for welding and cutting (1969).
\5\ Refer to NFPA No. 566, bulk oxygen systems at consumer sites (1969).
(d) Hydrogen systems of less than 3,000 CF when located inside
buildings and exposed to other occupancies shall be situated in the
building so that the system will be as follows:
(1) In an adequately ventilated area as in paragraph (b)(3)(ii)(b)
of this section.
(2) Twenty feet from stored flammable materials or oxidizing gases.
(3) Twenty-five feet from open flames, ordinary electrical equipment
or other sources of ignition.
(4) Twenty-five feet from concentrations of people.
(5) Fifty feet from intakes of ventilation or air-conditioning
equipment and air compressors.
(6) Fifty feet from other flammable gas storage.
(7) Protected against damage or injury due to falling objects or
working activity in the area.
(8) More than one system of 3,000 CF or less may be installed in the
same room, provided the systems are separated by at least 50 feet. Each
such system shall meet all of the requirements of this paragraph.
(3) Design consideration at specific locations--(i) Outdoor
locations. (a) Where protective walls or roofs are provided, they shall
be constructed of noncombustible materials.
(b) Where the enclosing sides adjoin each other, the area shall be
properly ventilated.
(c) Electrical equipment within 15 feet shall be in accordance with
subpart S of this part.
(ii) Separate buildings. (a) Separate buildings shall be built of at
least noncombustible construction. Windows and doors shall be located so
as to be readily accessible in case of emergency. Windows shall be of
glass or plastic in metal frames.
(b) Adequate ventilation to the outdoors shall be provided. Inlet
openings shall be located near the floor in exterior walls only. Outlet
openings shall be located at the high point of the room in exterior
walls or roof. Inlet and outlet openings shall each have
[[Page 232]]
minimum total area of one (1) square foot per 1,000 cubic feet of room
volume. Discharge from outlet openings shall be directed or conducted to
a safe location.
(c) Explosion venting shall be provided in exterior walls or roof
only. The venting area shall be equal to not less than 1 square foot per
30 cubic feet of room volume and may consist of any one or any
combination of the following: Walls of light, noncombustible material,
preferably single thickness, single strength glass; lightly fastened
hatch covers; lightly fastened swinging doors in exterior walls opening
outward; lightly fastened walls or roof designed to relieve at a maximum
pressure of 25 pounds per square foot.
(d) There shall be no sources of ignition from open flames,
electrical equipment, or heating equipment.
(e) Electrical equipment shall be in accordance with subpart S of
this part for Class I, Division 2 locations.
(f) Heating, if provided, shall be by steam, hot water, or other
indirect means.
(iii) Special rooms. (a) Floor, walls, and ceiling shall have a
fire-resistance rating of at least 2 hours. Walls or partitions shall be
continuous from floor to ceiling and shall be securely anchored. At
least one wall shall be an exterior wall. Openings to other parts of the
building shall not be permitted. Windows and doors shall be in exterior
walls and shall be located so as to be readily accessible in case of
emergency. Windows shall be of glass or plastic in metal frames.
(b) Ventilation shall be as provided in paragraph (b)(3)(ii)(b) of
this section.
(c) Explosion venting shall be as provided in paragraph
(b)(3)(ii)(c) of this section.
(d) There shall be no sources of ignition from open flames,
electrical equipment, or heating equipment.
(e) Electric equipment shall be in accordance with the requirements
of subpart S of this part for Class I, Division 2 locations.
(f) Heating, if provided, shall be by steam, hot water, or indirect
means.
(4) Operating instructions. For installations which require any
operation of equipment by the user, legible instructions shall be
maintained at operating locations.
(5) Maintenance. The equipment and functioning of each charged
gaseous hydrogen system shall be maintained in a safe operating
condition in accordance with the requirements of this section. The area
within 15 feet of any hydrogen container shall be kept free of dry
vegetation and combustible material.
(c) Liquefied hydrogen systems--(1) Design--(i) Containers. (a)
Hydrogen containers shall comply with the following: Storage containers
shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with
appropriate requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section VIII--Unfired Pressure Vessels (1968) or applicable provisions
of API Standard 620, Recommended Rules for Design and Construction of
Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage Tanks, Second Edition (June 1963)
and appendix R (April 1965), which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(b) Portable containers shall be designed, constructed and tested in
accordance with DOT Specifications and Regulations.
(ii) Supports. Permanently installed containers shall be provided
with substantial noncombustible supports securely anchored on firm
noncombustible foundations. Steel supports in excess of 18 inches in
height shall be protected with a protective coating having a 2-hour
fire-resistance rating.
(iii) Marking. Each container shall be legibly marked to indicate
``LIQUEFIED HYDROGEN--FLAMMABLE GAS.''
(iv) Safety relief devices. (a)(1) Stationary liquefied hydrogen
containers shall be equipped with safety relief devices sized in
accordance with CGA Pamphlet S-1, Part 3, Safety Relief Device Standards
for Compressed Gas Storage Containers, which is incorporated by
reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
[[Page 233]]
(2) Portable liquefied hydrogen containers complying with the U.S.
Department of Transportation Regulations shall be equipped with safety
relief devices as required in the U.S. Department of Transportation
Specifications and Regulations. Safety relief devices shall be sized in
accordance with the requirements of CGA Pamphlet S-1, Safety Relief
Device Standards, Part 1, Compressed Gas Cylinders and Part 2, Cargo and
Portable Tank Containers.
(b) Safety relief devices shall be arranged to discharge
unobstructed to the outdoors and in such a manner as to prevent
impingement of escaping liquid or gas upon the container, adjacent
structures or personnel. See paragraph (c)(2)(i)(f) of this section for
venting of safety relief devices in special locations.
(c) Safety relief devices or vent piping shall be designed or
located so that moisture cannot collect and freeze in a manner which
would interfere with proper operation of the device.
(d) Safety relief devices shall be provided in piping wherever
liquefied hydrogen could be trapped between closures.
(v) Piping, tubing, and fittings. (a) Piping, tubing, and fittings
and gasket and thread sealants shall be suitable for hydrogen service at
the pressures and temperatures involved. Consideration shall be given to
the thermal expansion and contraction of piping systems when exposed to
temperature fluctuations of ambient to liquefied hydrogen temperatures.
(b) Gaseous hydrogen piping and tubing (above -20 deg.F.) shall
conform to the applicable sections of Pressure Piping Section 2--
Industrial Gas and Air Piping, ANSI B31.1-1967 with addenda B31.1-1969.
Design of liquefied hydrogen or cold (-20 deg.F. or below) gas piping
shall use Petroleum Refinery Piping ANSI B31.3-1966 or Refrigeration
Piping ANSI B31.5-1966 with addenda B31.5a-1968 as a guide, which are
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(c) Joints in piping and tubing shall preferably be made by welding
or brazing; flanged, threaded, socket, or suitable compression fittings
may be used.
(d) Means shall be provided to minimize exposure of personnel to
piping operating at low temperatures and to prevent air condensate from
contacting piping, structural members, and surfaces not suitable for
cryogenic temperatures. Only those insulating materials which are rated
nonburning in accordance with ASTM Procedures D1692-68, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, may be used.
Other protective means may be used to protect personnel. The insulation
shall be designed to have a vapor-tight seal in the outer covering to
prevent the condensation of air and subsequent oxygen enrichment within
the insulation. The insulation material and outside shield shall also be
of adequate design to prevent attrition of the insulation due to normal
operating conditions.
(e) Uninsulated piping and equipment which operate at liquefied-
hydrogen temperature shall not be installed above asphalt surfaces or
other combustible materials in order to prevent contact of liquid air
with such materials. Drip pans may be installed under uninsulated piping
and equipment to retain and vaporize condensed liquid air.
(vi) Equipment assembly. (a) Valves, gauges, regulators, and other
accessories shall be suitable for liquefied hydrogen service and for the
pressures and temperatures involved.
(b) Installation of liquefied hydrogen systems shall be supervised
by personnel familiar with proper practices and with reference to their
construction and use.
(c) Storage containers, piping, valves, regulating equipment, and
other accessories shall be readily accessible and shall be protected
against physical damage and against tampering. A shutoff valve shall be
located in liquid product withdrawal lines as close to the container as
practical. On containers of over 2,000 gallons capacity, this shutoff
valve shall be of the remote control type with no connections, flanges,
or other appurtenances (other than a welded manual shutoff valve)
allowed in the piping between the shutoff valve and its connection to
the inner container.
(d) Cabinets or housings containing hydrogen control equipment shall
be ventilated to prevent any accumulation of hydrogen gas.
[[Page 234]]
(vii) Testing. (a) After installation, all field-erected piping
shall be tested and proved hydrogen gas-tight at operating pressure and
temperature.
(b) Containers if out of service in excess of 1 year shall be
inspected and tested as outlined in (a) of this subdivision. The safety
relief devices shall be checked to determine if they are operable and
properly set.
(viii) Liquefied hydrogen vaporizers. (a) The vaporizer shall be
anchored and its connecting piping shall be sufficiently flexible to
provide for the effect of expansion and contraction due to temperature
changes.
(b) The vaporizer and its piping shall be adequately protected on
the hydrogen and heating media sections with safety relief devices.
(c) Heat used in a liquefied hydrogen vaporizer shall be indirectly
supplied utilizing media such as air, steam, water, or water solutions.
(d) A low temperature shutoff switch shall be provided in the
vaporizer discharge piping to prevent flow of liquefied hydrogen in the
event of the loss of the heat source.
(ix) Electrical systems. (a) Electrical wiring and equipment located
within 3 feet of a point where connections are regularly made and
disconnected, shall be in accordance with subpart S of this part, for
Class I, Group B, Division 1 locations.
(b) Except as provided in (a) of this subdivision, electrical
wiring, and equipment located within 25 feet of a point where
connections are regularly made and disconnected or within 25 feet of a
liquid hydrogen storage container, shall be in accordance with subpart S
of this part, for Class I, Group B, Division 2 locations. When equipment
approved for class I, group B atmospheres is not commercially available,
the equipment may be--
(1) Purged or ventilated in accordance with NFPA No. 496-1967,
Standard for Purged Enclosures for Electrical Equipment in Hazardous
Locations,
(2) Intrinsically safe, or
(3) Approved for Class I, Group C atmospheres. This requirement does
not apply to electrical equipment which is installed on mobile supply
trucks or tank cars from which the storage container is filled.
(x) Bonding and grounding. The liquefied hydrogen container and
associated piping shall be electrically bonded and grounded.
(2) Location of liquefied hydrogen storage--(i) General
requirements. (a) The storage containers shall be located so that they
are readily accessible to mobile supply equipment at ground level and to
authorized personnel.
(b) The containers shall not be exposed by electric power lines,
flammable liquid lines, flammable gas lines, or lines carrying oxidizing
materials.
(c) When locating liquified hydrogen storage containers near above-
ground flammable liquid storage or liquid oxygen storage, it is
advisable to locate the liquefied hydrogen container on ground higher
than flammable liquid storage or liquid oxygen storage.
(d) Where it is necessary to locate the liquefied hydrogen container
on ground that is level with or lower than adjacent flammable liquid
storage or liquid oxygen storage, suitable protective means shall be
taken (such as by diking, diversion curbs, grading), with respect to the
adjacent flammable liquid storage or liquid oxygen storage, to prevent
accumulation of liquids within 50 feet of the liquefied hydrogen
container.
(e) Storage sites shall be fenced and posted to prevent entrance by
unauthorized personnel. Sites shall also be placarded as follows:
``Liquefied Hydrogen--Flammable Gas--No Smoking--No Open Flames.''
(f) If liquified hydrogen is located in (as specified in Table H-3)
a separate building, in a special room, or inside buildings when not in
a special room and exposed to other occupancies, containers shall have
the safety relief devices vented unobstructed to the outdoors at a
minimum elevation of 25 feet above grade to a safe location as required
in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(b) of this section.
(ii) Specific requirements. (a) The location of liquefied hydrogen
storage, as determined by the maximum total quantity of liquified
hydrogen, shall be in the order of preference as indicated by Roman
numerals in the following Table H-3.
[[Page 235]]
Table H-3--Maximum Total Quantity of Liquefied Hydrogen Storage Permitted
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Size of hydrogen storage (capacity in gallons)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nature of location 39.63 (150 liters)
to 50 51 to 300 301 to 600 In excess of 600
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Outdoors........................ I................. I................. I................. I.
In a separate building.......... II................ II................ II................ Not permitted.
In a special room............... III............... III............... Not permitted..... Do.
Inside buildings not in a IV................ Not permitted..... ......do.......... Do.
special room and exposed to
other occupancies.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: This table does not apply to the storage in dewars of the type generally used in laboratories for
experimental purposes.
(b) The minimum distance in feet from liquefied hydrogen systems of
indicated storage capacity located outdoors, in a separate building, or
in a special room to any specified exposure shall be in accordance with
Table H-4.
Table H-4--Minimum Distance (Feet) From Liquefied Hydrogen Systems to
Exposure \1\ \2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Liquefied hydrogen storage
(capacity in gallons)
-----------------------------
Type of exposure 39.63
(150 3,501 to 15,001
liters) 15,000 to
to 3,500 30,000
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Fire-resistive building and fire walls 5 5 5
\3\......................................
2. Noncombustible building \3\............ 25 50 75
3. Other buildings \3\.................... 50 75 100
4. Wall openings, air-compressor intakes, 75 75 75
inlets for air-conditioning or
ventilating equipment....................
5. Flammable liquids (above ground and 50 75 100
vent or fill openings if below ground)
(see 513 and 514)........................
6. Between stationary liquefied hydrogen 5 5 5
containers...............................
7. Flammable gas storage.................. 50 75 100
8. Liquid oxygen storage and other 100 100 100
oxidizers (see 513 and 514)..............
9. Combustible solids..................... 50 75 100
10. Open flames, smoking and welding...... 50 50 50
11. Concentrations of people.............. 75 75 75
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The distance in Nos. 2, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 12 in Table H-4 may be
reduced where protective structures, such as firewalls equal to height
of top of the container, to safeguard the liquefied hydrogen storage
system, are located between the liquefied hydrogen storage
installation and the exposure.
\2\ Where protective structures are provided, ventilation and
confinement of product should be considered. The 5-foot distance in
Nos. 1 and 6 facilitates maintenance and enhances ventilation.
\3\ Refer to Standard Types of Building Construction, NFPA No. 220-1969
for definitions of various types of construction.
In congested areas such as offices, lunchrooms, locker rooms, time-clock
areas.
(iii) Handling of liquefied hydrogen inside buildings other than
separate buildings and special rooms. Portable liquefied hydrogen
containers of 50 gallons or less capacity as permitted in Table H-3 and
in compliance with subdivision (i)(f) of this subparagraph when housed
inside buildings not located in a special room and exposed to other
occupancies shall comply with the following minimum requirements:
(a) Be located 20 feet from flammable liquids and readily
combustible materials such as excelsior or paper.
(b) Be located 25 feet from ordinary electrical equipment and other
sources of ignition including process or analytical equipment.
(c) Be located 25 feet from concentrations of people.
(d) Be located 50 feet from intakes of ventilation and air-
conditioning equipment or intakes of compressors.
(e) Be located 50 feet from storage of other flammable-gases or
storage of oxidizing gases.
(f) Containers shall be protected against damage or injury due to
falling objects or work activity in the area.
(g) Containers shall be firmly secured and stored in an upright
position.
(h) Welding or cutting operations, and smoking shall be prohibited
while hydrogen is in the room.
(i) The area shall be adequately ventilated. Safety relief devices
on the containers shall be vented directly outdoors or to a suitable
hood. See paragraphs (c)(1)(iv)(b) and (c)(2)(i)(f) of this section.
(3) Design considerations at specific locations--(i) Outdoor
locations. (a) Outdoor location shall mean outside of any building or
structure, and includes locations under a weather shelter or canopy
provided such locations are not enclosed by more than two walls set at
right angles and are provided with vent-space between the walls and
vented roof or canopy.
[[Page 236]]
(b) Roadways and yard surfaces located below liquefied hydrogen
piping, from which liquid air may drip, shall be constructed of
noncombustible materials.
(c) If protective walls are provided, they shall be constructed of
noncombustible materials and in accordance with the provisions of
paragraph (c)(3)(i)(a) of this section.
(d) Electrical wiring and equipment shall comply with paragraph
(c)(1)(ix) (a) and (b) of this section.
(e) Adequate lighting shall be provided for nighttime transfer
operation.
(ii) Separate buildings. (a) Separate buildings shall be of light
noncombustible construction on a substantial frame. Walls and roofs
shall be lightly fastened and designed to relieve at a maximum internal
pressure of 25 pounds per square foot. Windows shall be of shatterproof
glass or plastic in metal frames. Doors shall be located in such a
manner that they will be readily accessible to personnel in an
emergency.
(b) Adequate ventilation to the outdoors shall be provided. Inlet
openings shall be located near the floor level in exterior walls only.
Outlet openings shall be located at the high point of the room in
exterior walls or roof. Both the inlet and outlet vent openings shall
have a minimum total area of 1 square foot per 1,000 cubic feet of room
volume. Discharge from outlet openings shall be directed or conducted to
a safe location.
(c) There shall be no sources of ignition.
(d) Electrical wiring and equipment shall comply with paragraphs
(c)(1)(ix) (a) and (b) of this section except that the provisions of
paragraph (c)(1)(ix)(b) of this section shall apply to all electrical
wiring and equipment in the separate building.
(e) Heating, if provided, shall be by steam, hot water, or other
indirect means.
(iii) Special rooms. (a) Floors, walls, and ceilings shall have a
fire resistance rating of at least 2 hours. Walls or partitions shall be
continuous from floor to ceiling and shall be securely anchored. At
least one wall shall be an exterior wall. Openings to other parts of the
building shall not be permitted. Windows and doors shall be in exterior
walls and doors shall be located in such a manner that they will be
accessible in an emergency. Windows shall be of shatterproof glass or
plastic in metal frames.
(b) Ventilation shall be as provided in paragraph (c)(3)(ii)(b) of
this section.
(c) Explosion venting shall be provided in exterior walls or roof
only. The venting area shall be equal to not less than 1 square foot per
30 cubic feet of room volume and may consist of any one or any
combination of the following: Walls of light noncombustible material;
lightly fastened hatch covers; lightly fastened swinging doors opening
outward in exterior walls; lightly fastened walls or roofs designed to
relieve at a maximum pressure of 25 pounds per square foot.
(d) There shall be no sources of ignition.
(e) Electrical wiring and equipment shall comply with paragraph
(c)(1)(ix) (a) and (b) of this section except that the provision of
paragraph (c)(1)(ix)(b) of this section shall apply to all electrical
wiring and equipment in the special room.
(f) Heating, if provided, shall be steam, hot water, or by other
indirect means.
(4) Operating instructions--(i) Written instructions. For
installation which require any operation of equipment by the user,
legible instructions shall be maintained at operating locations.
(ii) Attendant. A qualified person shall be in attendance at all
times while the mobile hydrogen supply unit is being unloaded.
(iii) Security. Each mobile liquefied hydrogen supply unit used as
part of a hydrogen system shall be adequately secured to prevent
movement.
(iv) Grounding. The mobile liquefied hydrogen supply unit shall be
grounded for static electricity.
(5) Maintenance. The equipment and functioning of each charged
liquefied hydrogen system shall be maintained in a safe operating
condition in accordance with the requirements of this section. Weeds or
similar combustibles
[[Page 237]]
shall not be permitted within 25 feet of any liquefied hydrogen
equipment.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978;
53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 58 FR 35309, June
30, 1993; 61 FR 9236, 9237, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.104 Oxygen.
(a) Scope. This section applies to the installation of bulk oxygen
systems on industrial and institutional consumer premises. This section
does not apply to oxygen manufacturing plants or other establishments
operated by the oxygen supplier or his agent for the purpose of storing
oxygen and refilling portable containers, trailers, mobile supply
trucks, or tank cars, nor to systems having capacities less than those
stated in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
(b) Bulk oxygen systems--(1) Definition. As used in this section: A
bulk oxygen system is an assembly of equipment, such as oxygen storage
containers, pressure regulators, safety devices, vaporizers, manifolds,
and interconnecting piping, which has storage capacity of more than
13,000 cubic feet of oxygen, Normal Temperature and Pressure (NTP),
connected in service or ready for service, or more than 25,000 cubic
feet of oxygen (NTP) including unconnected reserves on hand at the site.
The bulk oxygen system terminates at the point where oxygen at service
pressure first enters the supply line. The oxygen containers may be
stationary or movable, and the oxygen may be stored as gas or liquid.
(2) Location--(i) General. Bulk oxygen storage systems shall be
located above ground out of doors, or shall be installed in a building
of noncombustible construction, adequately vented, and used for that
purpose exclusively. The location selected shall be such that containers
and associated equipment shall not be exposed by electric power lines,
flammable or combustible liquid lines, or flammable gas lines.
(ii) Accessibility. The system shall be located so that it is
readily accessible to mobile supply equipment at ground level and to
authorized personnel.
(iii) Leakage. Where oxygen is stored as a liquid, noncombustible
surfacing shall be provided in an area in which any leakage of liquid
oxygen might fall during operation of the system and filling of a
storage container. For purposes of this paragraph, asphaltic or
bituminous paving is considered to be combustible.
(iv) Elevation. When locating bulk oxygen systems near above-ground
flammable or combustible liquid storage which may be either indoors or
outdoors, it is advisable to locate the system on ground higher than the
flammable or combustible liquid storage.
(v) Dikes. Where it is necessary to locate a bulk oxygen system on
ground lower than adjacent flammable or combustible liquid storage
suitable means shall be taken (such as by diking, diversion curbs, or
grading) with respect to the adjacent flammable or combustible liquid
storage to prevent accumulation of liquids under the bulk oxygen system.
(3) Distance between systems and exposures--(i) General. The minimum
distance from any bulk oxygen storage container to exposures, measured
in the most direct line except as indicated in paragraphs (b)(3) (vi)
and (viii) of this section, shall be as indicated in paragraphs (b)(3)
(ii) to (xviii) of this section inclusive.
(ii) Combustible structures. Fifty feet from any combustible
structures.
(iii) Fire resistive structures. Twenty-five feet from any
structures with fire-resistive exterior walls or sprinklered buildings
of other construction, but not less than one-half the height of adjacent
side wall of the structure.
(iv) Openings. At least 10 feet from any opening in adjacent walls
of fire resistive structures. Spacing from such structures shall be
adequate to permit maintenance, but shall not be less than 1 foot.
(v) Flammable liquid storage above-ground.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Distance (feet) Capacity (gallons)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
50........................................ 0 to 1000.
90........................................ 1001 or more.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(vi) Flammable liquid storage below-ground.
[[Page 238]]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Distance from
oxygen storage
container to
Distance measured horizontally filling and vent
from oxygen storage container to connections or Capacity gallons
flammable liquid tank (feet) openings to
flammable liquid
tank (feet)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
15.............................. 50................ 0 to 1000.
30.............................. 50................ 1001 or more.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(vii) Combustible liquid storage above-ground.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Distance (feet) Capacity (gallons)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
25........................................ 0 to 1000.
50........................................ 1001 or more.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(viii) Combustible liquid storage belowground.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Distance from oxygen storage
Distance measured horizontally from oxygen container to filling and
storage container to combustible liquid vent connections or openings
tank (feet) to combustible liquid tank
(feet)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
15........................................ 40.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ix) Flammable gas storage. (Such as compressed flammable gases,
liquefied flammable gases and flammable gases in low pressure gas
holders):
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Distance (feet) Capacity (cu. ft. NTP)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
50........................................ Less than 5000.
90........................................ 5000 or more.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(x) Highly combustible materials. Fifty feet from solid materials
which burn rapidly, such as excelsior or paper.
(xi) Slow-burning materials. Twenty-five feet from solid materials
which burn slowly, such as coal and heavy timber.
(xii) Ventilation. Seventy-five feet in one direction and 35 feet in
approximately 90 deg. direction from confining walls (not including
firewalls less than 20 feet high) to provide adequate ventilation in
courtyards and similar confining areas.
(xiii) Congested areas. Twenty-five feet from congested areas such
as offices, lunchrooms, locker rooms, time clock areas, and similar
locations where people may congregate.
(xiv)-(xvii) [Reserved]
(xviii) Exceptions. The distances in paragraphs (b)(3) (ii), (iii),
(v) to (xi) inclusive, of this section do not apply where protective
structures such as firewalls of adequate height to safeguard the oxygen
storage systems are located between the bulk oxygen storage installation
and the exposure. In such cases, the bulk oxygen storage installation
may be a minimum distance of 1 foot from the firewall.
(4) Storage containers--(i) Foundations and supports. Permanently
installed containers shall be provided with substantial noncombustible
supports on firm noncombustible foundations.
(ii) Construction--liquid. Liquid oxygen storage containers shall be
fabricated from materials meeting the impact test requirements of
paragraph UG-84 of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII--
Unfired Pressure Vessels--1968, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6. Containers operating at pressures above 15
pounds per square inch gage (p.s.i.g.) shall be designed, constructed,
and tested in accordance with appropriate requirements of ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VII--Unfired Pressure Vessels--1968.
Insulation surrounding the liquid oxygen container shall be
noncombustible.
(iii) Construction--gaseous. High- pressure gaseous oxygen
containers shall comply with one of the following:
(a) Designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with appropriate
requirements of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII--
Unfired Pressure Vessels--1968.
(b) Designed, constructed, tested, and maintained in accordance with
DOT Specifications and Regulations.
(5) Piping, tubing, and fittings--(i) Selection. Piping, tubing, and
fittings shall be suitable for oxygen service and for the pressures and
temperatures involved.
(ii) Specification. Piping and tubing shall conform to Section 2--
Gas and Air Piping Systems of Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI, B31.1-1967
with addenda B31.10a-1969, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(iii) Fabrication. Piping or tubing for operating temperatures below
-20 deg.F. shall be fabricated from materials meeting the impact test
requirements of paragraph UG-84 of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section VIII--Unfired Pressure Vessels--1968, when tested at the minimum
operating
[[Page 239]]
temperature to which the piping may be subjected in service.
(6) Safety relief devices--(i) General. Bulk oxygen storage
containers, regardless of design pressure shall be equipped with safety
relief devices as required by the ASME code or the DOT specifications
and regulations.
(ii) DOT containers. Bulk oxygen storage containers designed and
constructed in accordance with DOT specification shall be equipped with
safety relief devices as required thereby.
(iii) ASME containers. Bulk oxygen storage containers designed and
constructed in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section VIII--Unfired Pressure Vessel--1968 shall be equipped with
safety relief devices meeting the provisions of the Compressed Gas
Association Pamphlet ``Safety Relief Device Standards for Compressed Gas
Storage Containers,'' S-1, Part 3, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(iv) Insulation. Insulation casings on liquid oxygen containers
shall be equipped with suitable safety relief devices.
(v) Reliability. All safety relief devices shall be so designed or
located that moisture cannot collect and freeze in a manner which would
interfere with proper operation of the device.
(7) Liquid oxygen vaporizers--(i) Mounts and couplings. The
vaporizer shall be anchored and its connecting piping be sufficiently
flexible to provide for the effect of expansion and contraction due to
temperature changes.
(ii) Relief devices. The vaporizer and its piping shall be
adequately protected on the oxygen and heating medium sections with
safety relief devices.
(iii) Heating. Heat used in an oxygen vaporizer shall be indirectly
supplied only through media such as steam, air, water, or water
solutions which do not react with oxygen.
(iv) Grounding. If electric heaters are used to provide the primary
source of heat, the vaporizing system shall be electrically grounded.
(8) Equipment assembly and installation--(i) Cleaning. Equipment
making up a bulk oxygen system shall be cleaned in order to remove oil,
grease or other readily oxidizable materials before placing the system
in service.
(ii) Joints. Joints in piping and tubing may be made by welding or
by use of flanged, threaded, slip, or compression fittings. Gaskets or
thread sealants shall be suitable for oxygen service.
(iii) Accessories. Valves, gages, regulators, and other accessories
shall be suitable for oxygen service.
(iv) Installation. Installation of bulk oxygen systems shall be
supervised by personnel familiar with proper practices with reference to
their construction and use.
(v) Testing. After installation all field erected piping shall be
tested and proved gas tight at maximum operating pressure. Any medium
used for testing shall be oil free and nonflammable.
(vi) Security. Storage containers, piping, valves, regulating
equipment, and other accessories shall be protected against physical
damage and against tampering.
(vii) Venting. Any enclosure containing oxygen control or operating
equipment shall be adequately vented.
(viii) Placarding. The bulk oxygen storage location shall be
permanently placarded to indicate: ``OXYGEN--NO SMOKING--NO OPEN
FLAMES'', or an equivalent warning.
(ix) Electrical wiring. Bulk oxygen installations are not hazardous
locations as defined and covered in subpart S of this part. Therefore,
general purpose or weatherproof types of electrical wiring and equipment
are acceptable depending upon whether the installation is indoors or
outdoors. Such equipment shall be installed in accordance with the
applicable provisions of subpart S of this part.
(9) Operating instructions. For installations which require any
operation of equipment by the user, legible instructions shall be
maintained at operating locations.
(10) Maintenance. The equipment and functioning of each charged bulk
oxygen system shall be maintained in a safe operating condition in
accordance with the requirements of this section. Wood and long dry
grass shall be cut
[[Page 240]]
back within 15 feet of any bulk oxygen storage container.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978;
61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.105 Nitrous oxide.
The piped systems for the in-plant transfer and distribution of
nitrous oxide shall be designed, installed, maintained, and operated in
accordance with Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet G-8.1-1964, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.106 Flammable and combustible liquids.
(a) Definitions. As used in this section:
(1) Aerosol shall mean a material which is dispensed from its
container as a mist, spray, or foam by a propellant under pressure.
(2) Atmospheric tank shall mean a storage tank which has been
designed to operate at pressures from atmospheric through 0.5 p.s.i.g.
(3) Automotive service station shall mean that portion of property
where flammable or combustible liquids used as motor fuels are stored
and dispensed from fixed equipment into the fuel tanks of motor vehicles
and shall include any facilities available for the sale and service of
tires, batteries, and accessories, and for minor automotive maintenance
work. Major automotive repairs, painting, body and fender work are
excluded.
(4) Basement shall mean a story of a building or structure having
one-half or more of its height below ground level and to which access
for fire fighting purposes is unduly restricted.
(5) Boiling point shall mean the boiling point of a liquid at a
pressure of 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute (p.s.i.a.) (760 mm.).
Where an accurate boiling point is unavailable for the material in
question, or for mixtures which do not have a constant boiling point,
for purposes of this section the 10 percent point of a distillation
performed in accordance with the Standard Method of Test for
Distillation of Petroleum Products, ASTM D-86-62, which is incorporated
by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, may be used as the boiling
point of the liquid.
(6) Boilover shall mean the expulsion of crude oil (or certain other
liquids) from a burning tank. The light fractions of the crude oil
burnoff producing a heat wave in the residue, which on reaching a water
strata may result in the expulsion of a portion of the contents of the
tank in the form of froth.
(7) Bulk plant shall mean that portion of a property where flammable
or combustible liquids are received by tank vessel, pipelines, tank car,
or tank vehicle, and are stored or blended in bulk for the purpose of
distributing such liquids by tank vessel, pipeline, tank car, tank
vehicle, or container.
(8) Chemical plant shall mean a large integrated plant or that
portion of such a plant other than a refinery or distillery where
flammable or combustible liquids are produced by chemical reactions or
used in chemical reactions.
(9) Closed container shall mean a container as herein defined, so
sealed by means of a lid or other device that neither liquid nor vapor
will escape from it at ordinary temperatures.
(10) Crude petroleum shall mean hydrocarbon mixtures that have a
flash point below 150 deg.F. and which have not been processed in a
refinery.
(11) Distillery shall mean a plant or that portion of a plant where
flammable or combustible liquids produced by fermentation are
concentrated, and where the concentrated products may also be mixed,
stored, or packaged.
(12) Fire area shall mean an area of a building separated from the
remainder of the building by construction having a fire resistance of at
least 1 hour and having all communicating openings properly protected by
an assembly having a fire resistance rating of at least 1 hour.
(13) Flammable aerosol shall mean an aerosol which is required to be
labeled ``Flammable'' under the Federal Hazardous Substances Labeling
Act (15 U.S.C. 1261). For the purposes of paragraph (d) of this section,
such aerosols are considered Class IA liquids.
(14) Flashpoint means the minimum temperature at which a liquid
gives off vapor within a test vessel in sufficient
[[Page 241]]
concentration to form an ignitable mixture with air near the surface of
the liquid, and shall be determined as follows:
(i) For a liquid which has a viscosity of less than 45 SUS at 100
deg.F. (37.8 deg.C.), does not contain suspended solids, and does not
have a tendency to form a surface film while under test, the procedure
specified in the Standard Method of Test for Flashpoint by Tag Closed
Tester (ASTM D-56-70), which is incorporated by reference as specified
in Sec. 1910.6, shall be used.
(ii) For a liquid which has a viscosity of 45 SUS or more at 100
deg.F. (37.8 deg.C.), or contains suspended solids, or has a tendency
to form a surface film while under test, the Standard Method of Test for
Flashpoint by Pensky-Martens Closed Tester (ASTM D-93-71) shall be used,
except that the methods specified in Note 1 to section 1.1 of ASTM D-93-
71 may be used for the respective materials specified in the Note. The
preceding ASTM standards are incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6.
(iii) For a liquid that is a mixture of compounds that have
different volatilities and flashpoints, its flashpoint shall be
determined by using the procedure specified in paragraph (a)(14) (i) or
(ii) of this section on the liquid in the form it is shipped. If the
flashpoint, as determined by this test, is 100 deg.F. (37.8 deg.C.) or
higher, an additional flashpoint determination shall be run on a sample
of the liquid evaporated to 90 percent of its original volume, and the
lower value of the two tests shall be considered the flashpoint of the
material.
(iv) Organic peroxides, which undergo autoaccelerating thermal
decomposition, are excluded from any of the flashpoint determination
methods specified in this subparagraph.
(15) Hotel shall mean buildings or groups of buildings under the
same management in which there are sleeping accommodations for hire,
primarily used by transients who are lodged with or without meals
including but not limited to inns, clubs, motels, and apartment hotels.
(16) Institutional occupancy shall mean the occupancy or use of a
building or structure or any portion thereof by persons harbored or
detained to receive medical, charitable or other care or treatment, or
by persons involuntarily detained.
(17) Liquid shall mean, for the purpose of this section, any
material which has a fluidity greater than that of 300 penetration
asphalt when tested in accordance with ASTM Test for Penetration for
Bituminous Materials, D-5-65, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6. When not otherwise identified, the term liquid
shall include both flammable and combustible liquids.
(18) Combustible liquid means any liquid having a flashpoint at or
above 100 deg.F. (37.8 deg.C.) Combustible liquids shall be divided
into two classes as follows:
(i) Class II liquids shall include those with flashpoints at or
above 100 deg.F. (37.8 deg.C.) and below 140 deg.F. (60 deg.C.),
except any mixture having components with flashpoints of 200 deg.F.
(93.3 deg.C.) or higher, the volume of which make up 99 percent or more
of the total volume of the mixture.
(ii) Class III liquids shall include those with flashpoints at or
above 140 deg.F. (60 deg.C.) Class III liquids are subdivided into two
subclasses:
(a) Class IIIA liquids shall include those with flashpoints at or
above 140 deg.F. (60 deg.C.) and below 200 deg.F. (93.3 deg.C.),
except any mixture having components with flashpoints of 200 deg.F.
(93.3 deg.C.), or higher, the total volume of which make up 99 percent
or more of the total volume of the mixture.
(b) Class IIIB liquids shall include those with flashpoints at or
above 200 deg.F. (93.3 deg.C.). This section does not cover Class IIIB
liquids. Where the term ``Class III liquids is used in this section, it
shall mean only Class IIIA liquids.
(iii) When a combustible liquid is heated for use to within 30
deg.F. (16.7 deg.C.) of its flashpoint, it shall be handled in
accordance with the requirements for the next lower class of liquids.
(19) Flammable liquid means any liquid having a flashpoint below 100
deg.F. (37.8 deg.C.), except any mixture having components with
flashpoints of 100 deg.F. (37.8 deg.C.) or higher, the total of which
make up 99 percent or more of the total volume of the mixture. Flammable
liquids shall be known as Class I liquids.
[[Page 242]]
Class I liquids are divided into three classes as follows:
(i) Class IA shall include liquids having flashpoints below 73
deg.F. (22.8 deg.C.) and having a boiling point below 100 deg.F. (37.8
deg.C.).
(ii) Class IB shall include liquids having flashpoints below 73
deg.F. (22.8 deg.C.) and having a boiling point at or above 100 deg.F.
(37.8 deg.C.).
(iii) Class IC shall include liquids having flashpoints at or above
73 deg.F. (22.8 deg.C.) and below 100 deg.F. (37.8 deg.C.).
(20) Unstable (reactive) liquid shall mean a liquid which in the
pure state or as commercially produced or transported will vigorously
polymerize, decompose, condense, or will become self-reactive under
conditions of shocks, pressure, or temperature.
(21) Low-pressure tank shall mean a storage tank which has been
designed to operate at pressures above 0.5 p.s.i.g. but not more than 15
p.s.i.g.
(22) Marine service station shall mean that portion of a property
where flammable or combustible liquids used as fuels are stored and
dispensed from fixed equipment on shore, piers, wharves, or floating
docks into the fuel tanks of self-propelled craft, and shall include all
facilities used in connection therewith.
(23) Mercantile occupancy shall mean the occupancy or use of a
building or structure or any portion thereof for the displaying,
selling, or buying of goods, wares, or merchandise.
(24) Office occupancy shall mean the occupancy or use of a building
or structure or any portion thereof for the transaction of business, or
the rendering or receiving of professional services.
(25) Portable tank shall mean a closed container having a liquid
capacity over 60 U.S. gallons and not intended for fixed installation.
(26) Pressure vessel shall mean a storage tank or vessel which has
been designed to operate at pressures above 15 p.s.i.g.
(27) Protection for exposure shall mean adequate fire protection for
structures on property adjacent to tanks, where there are employees of
the establishment.
(28) Refinery shall mean a plant in which flammable or combustible
liquids are produced on a commercial scale from crude petroleum, natural
gasoline, or other hydrocarbon sources.
(29) Safety can shall mean an approved container, of not more than 5
gallons capacity, having a spring-closing lid and spout cover and so
designed that it will safely relieve internal pressure when subjected to
fire exposure.
(30) Vapor pressure shall mean the pressure, measured in pounds per
square inch (absolute) exerted by a volatile liquid as determined by the
``Standard Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of Petroleum Products (Reid
Method),'' American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM D323-68,
which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(31) Ventilation as specified in this section is for the prevention
of fire and explosion. It is considered adequate if it is sufficient to
prevent accumulation of significant quantities of vapor-air mixtures in
concentration over one-fourth of the lower flammable limit.
(32) Storage: Flammable or combustible liquids shall be stored in a
tank or in a container that complies with paragraph (d)(2) of this
section.
(33) Barrel shall mean a volume of 42 U.S. gallons.
(34) Container shall mean any can, barrel, or drum.
(35) Approved unless otherwise indicated, approved, or listed by a
nationally recognized testing laboratory. Refer to Sec. 1910.7 for
definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory.
(36) Listed see ``approved'' in Sec. 1910.106(a)(35).
(37) SUS means Saybolt Universal Seconds as determined by the
Standard Method of Test for Saybolt Viscosity (ASTM D-88-56), and may be
determined by use of the SUS conversion tables specified in ASTM Method
D2161-66 following determination of viscosity in accordance with the
procedures specified in the Standard Method of Test for Viscosity of
Transparent and Opaque Liquids (ASTM D445-65).
(38) Viscous means a viscosity of 45 SUS or more.
(b) Tank storage--(1) Design and construction of tanks--(i)
Materials. (a) Tanks shall be built of steel except as provided in
paragraphs (b)(1)(i) (b) through (e) of this section.
[[Page 243]]
(b) Tanks may be built of materials other than steel for
installation underground or if required by the properties of the liquid
stored. Tanks located above ground or inside buildings shall be of
noncombustible construction.
(c) Tanks built of materials other than steel shall be designed to
specifications embodying principles recognized as good engineering
design for the material used.
(d) Unlined concrete tanks may be used for storing flammable or
combustible liquids having a gravity of 40 deg. API or heavier. Concrete
tanks with special lining may be used for other services provided the
design is in accordance with sound engineering practice.
(e) [Reserved]
(f) Special engineering consideration shall be required if the
specific gravity of the liquid to be stored exceeds that of water or if
the tanks are designed to contain flammable or combustible liquids at a
liquid temperature below 0 deg.F.
(ii) Fabrication. (a) [Reserved]
(b) Metal tanks shall be welded, riveted, and caulked, brazed, or
bolted, or constructed by use of a combination of these methods. Filler
metal used in brazing shall be nonferrous metal or an alloy having a
melting point above 1000 deg.F. and below that of the metal joined.
(iii) Atmospheric tanks. (a) Atmospheric tanks shall be built in
accordance with acceptable good standards of design. Atmospheric tanks
may be built in accordance with the following consensus standards that
are incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6:
(1) Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., Subjects No. 142, Standard for
Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, 1968; No.
58, Standard for Steel Underground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible
Liquids, Fifth Edition, December 1961; or No. 80, Standard for Steel
Inside Tanks for Oil-Burner Fuel, September 1963.
(2) American Petroleum Institute Standards No. 12A, Specification
for Oil Storage Tanks with Riveted Shells, Seventh Edition, September
1951, or No. 650, Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage, Third Edition,
1966.
(3) American Petroleum Institute Standards No. 12B, Specification
for Bolted Production Tanks, Eleventh Edition, May 1958, and Supplement
1, March 1962; No. 12D, Specification for Large Welded Production Tanks,
Seventh Edition, August 1957; or No. 12F, Specification for Small Welded
Production Tanks, Fifth Edition, March 1961. Tanks built in accordance
with these standards shall be used only as production tanks for storage
of crude petroleum in oil-producing areas.
(b) Tanks designed for underground service not exceeding 2,500
gallons capacity may be used aboveground.
(c) Low-pressure tanks and pressure vessels may be used as
atmospheric tanks.
(d) Atmospheric tanks shall not be used for the storage of a
flammable or combustible liquid at a temperature at or above its boiling
point.
(iv) Low pressure tanks. (a) The normal operating pressure of the
tank shall not exceed the design pressure of the tank.
(b) Low-pressure tanks shall be built in accordance with acceptable
standards of design. Low-pressure tanks may be built in accordance with
the following consensus standards that are incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6:
(1) American Petroleum Institute Standard No. 620. Recommended Rules
for the Design and Construction of Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage
Tanks, Third Edition, 1966.
(2) The principles of the Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section
VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code, 1968.
(c) Atmospheric tanks built according to Underwriters' Laboratories,
Inc., requirements in subdivision (iii)(a) of and shall be limited to
2.5 p.s.i.g. under emergency venting conditions.
This paragraph may be used for operating pressures not exceeding 1
p.s.i.g.
(d) Pressure vessels may be used as low-pressure tanks.
(v) Pressure vessels. (a) The normal operating pressure of the
vessel shall not exceed the design pressure of the vessel.
(b) Pressure vessels shall be built in accordance with the Code for
Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code 1968.
[[Page 244]]
(vi) Provisions for internal corrosion. When tanks are not designed
in accordance with the American Petroleum Institute, American Society of
Mechanical Engineers, or the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.'s,
standards, or if corrosion is anticipated beyond that provided for in
the design formulas used, additional metal thickness or suitable
protective coatings or linings shall be provided to compensate for the
corrosion loss expected during the design life of the tank.
(2) Installation of outside aboveground tanks.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) Spacing (shell-to-shell) between aboveground tanks. (a) The
distance between any two flammable or combustible liquid storage tanks
shall not be less than 3 feet.
(b) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(2)(ii)(c) of this section,
the distance between any two adjacent tanks shall not be less than one-
sixth the sum of their diameters. When the diameter of one tank is less
than one-half the diameter of the adjacent tank, the distance between
the two tanks shall not be less than one-half the diameter of the
smaller tank.
(c) Where crude petroleum in conjunction with production facilities
are located in noncongested areas and have capacities not exceeding
126,000 gallons (3,000 barrels), the distance between such tanks shall
not be less than 3 feet.
(d) Where unstable flammable or combustible liquids are stored, the
distance between such tanks shall not be less than one-half the sum of
their diameters.
(e) When tanks are compacted in three or more rows or in an
irregular pattern, greater spacing or other means shall be provided so
that inside tanks are accessible for firefighting purposes.
(f) The minimum separation between a liquefied petroleum gas
container and a flammable or combustible liquid storage tank shall be 20
feet, except in the case of flammable or combustible liquid tanks
operating at pressures exceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. or equipped with emergency
venting which will permit pressures to exceed 2.5 p.s.i.g. in which case
the provisions of subdivisions (a) and (b) of this subdivision shall
apply. Suitable means shall be taken to prevent the accumulation of
flammable or combustible liquids under adjacent liquefied petroleum gas
containers such as by diversion curbs or grading. When flammable or
combustible liquid storage tanks are within a diked area, the liquefied
petroleum gas containers shall be outside the diked area and at least 10
feet away from the centerline of the wall of the diked area. The
foregoing provisions shall not apply when liquefied petroleum gas
containers of 125 gallons or less capacity are installed adjacent to
fuel oil supply tanks of 550 gallons or less capacity.
(iii) [Reserved]
(iv) Normal venting for aboveground tanks. (a) Atmospheric storage
tanks shall be adequately vented to prevent the development of vacuum or
pressure sufficient to distort the roof of a cone roof tank or exceeding
the design pressure in the case of other atmospheric tanks, as a result
of filling or emptying, and atmospheric temperature changes.
(b) Normal vents shall be sized either in accordance with: (1) The
American Petroleum Institute Standard 2000 (1968), Venting Atmospheric
and Low-Pressure Storage Tanks, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6; or (2) other accepted standard; or (3) shall
be at least as large as the filling or withdrawal connection, whichever
is larger but in no case less than 1\1/4\ inch nominal inside diameter.
(c) Low-pressure tanks and pressure vessels shall be adequately
vented to prevent development of pressure or vacuum, as a result of
filling or emptying and atmospheric temperature changes, from exceeding
the design pressure of the tank or vessel. Protection shall also be
provided to prevent overpressure from any pump discharging into the tank
or vessel when the pump discharge pressure can exceed the design
pressure of the tank or vessel.
(d) If any tank or pressure vessel has more than one fill or
withdrawal connection and simultaneous filling or withdrawal can be
made, the vent size shall be based on the maximum anticipated
simultaneous flow.
(e) Unless the vent is designed to limit the internal pressure 2.5
p.s.i. or
[[Page 245]]
less, the outlet of vents and vent drains shall be arranged to discharge
in such a manner as to prevent localized overheating of any part of the
tank in the event vapors from such vents are ignited.
(f) Tanks and pressure vessels storing Class IA liquids shall be
equipped with venting devices which shall be normally closed except when
venting to pressure or vacuum conditions. Tanks and pressure vessels
storing Class IB and IC liquids shall be equipped with venting devices
which shall be normally closed except when venting under pressure or
vacuum conditions, or with approved flame arresters.
Exemption: Tanks of 3,000 bbls. capacity or less containing crude
petroleum in crude-producing areas; and, outside aboveground atmospheric
tanks under 1,000 gallons capacity containing other than Class IA
flammable liquids may have open vents. (See subdivision (vi)(b) of this
subparagraph.)
(g) Flame arresters or venting devices required in subdivision (f)
of this subdivision may be omitted for Class IB and IC liquids where
conditions are such that their use may, in case of obstruction, result
in tank damage.
(v) Emergency relief venting for fire exposure for aboveground
tanks. (a) Every aboveground storage tank shall have some form of
construction or device that will relieve excessive internal pressure
caused by exposure fires.
(b) In a vertical tank the construction referred to in subdivision
(a) of this subdivision may take the form of a floating roof, lifter
roof, a weak roof-to-shell seam, or other approved pressure relieving
construction. The weak roof-to-shell seam shall be constructed to fail
preferential to any other seam.
(c) Where entire dependence for emergency relief is placed upon
pressure relieving devices, the total venting capacity of both normal
and emergency vents shall be enough to prevent rupture of the shell or
bottom of the tank if vertical, or of the shell or heads if horizontal.
If unstable liquids are stored, the effects of heat or gas resulting
from polymerization, decomposition, condensation, or self-reactivity
shall be taken into account. The total capacity of both normal and
emergency venting devices shall be not less than that derived from Table
H-10 except as provided in subdivision (e) or (f) of this subdivision.
Such device may be a self-closing manhole cover, or one using long bolts
that permit the cover to lift under internal pressure, or an additional
or larger relief valve or valves. The wetted area of the tank shall be
calculated on the basis of 55 percent of the total exposed area of a
sphere or spheroid, 75 percent of the total exposed area of a horizontal
tank and the first 30 feet above grade of the exposed shell area of a
vertical tank.
Table H-10--Wetted Area Versus Cubic Feet Free Air Per Hour
[14.7 psia and 60 deg.F.]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Square Square
Square feet CFH feet CFH feet CFH
------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 21,100 200 211,000 1,000 524,000
30 31,600 250 239,000 1,200 557,000
40 42,100 300 265,000 1,400 587,000
50 52,700 350 288,000 1,600 614,000
60 63,200 400 312,000 1,800 639,000
70 73,700 500 354,000 2,000 662,000
80 84,200 600 392,000 2,400 704,000
90 94,800 700 428,000 2,800 742,000
100 105,000 800 462,000 and
120 126,000 900 493,000 over
140 147,000 1,000 524,000
160 168,000
180 190,000
200 211,000
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(d) For tanks and storage vessels designed for pressure over 1
p.s.i.g., the total rate of venting shall be determined in accordance
with Table H-10, except that when the exposed wetted area of the surface
is greater than 2,800 square feet, the total rate of venting
[[Page 246]]
shall be calculated by the following formula:
CFH = 1,107A \0.82\
Where;
CFH = Venting requirement, in cubic feet of free air per hour.
A = Exposed wetted surface, in square feet.
Note: The foregoing formula is based on Q=21,000A\0.82\.
(e) The total emergency relief venting capacity for any specific
stable liquid may be determined by the following formula:
V = 1337 / L[radic]M
V = Cubic feet of free air per hour from Table H-10.
L = Latent heat of vaporization of specific liquid in B.t.u. per pound.
M = Molecular weight of specific liquids.
(f) The required airflow rate of subdivision (c) or (e) of this
subdivision may be multiplied by the appropriate factor listed in the
following schedule when protection is provided as indicated. Only one
factor may be used for any one tank.
0.5 for drainage in accordance with subdivision (vii)(b) of this
subparagraph for tanks over 200 square feet of wetted area.
0.3 for approved water spray.
0.3 for approved insulation.
0.15 for approved water spray with approved insulation.
(g) The outlet of all vents and vent drains on tanks equipped with
emergency venting to permit pressures exceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. shall be
arranged to discharge in such a way as to prevent localized overheating
of any part of the tank, in the event vapors from such vents are
ignited.
(h) Each commercial tank venting device shall have stamped on it the
opening pressure, the pressure at which the valve reaches the full open
position, and the flow capacity at the latter pressure, expressed in
cubic feet per hour of air at 60 deg.F. and at a pressure of 14.7
p.s.i.a.
(i) The flow capacity of tank venting devices 12 inches and smaller
in nominal pipe size shall be determined by actual test of each type and
size of vent. These flow tests may be conducted by the manufacturer if
certified by a qualified impartial observer, or may be conducted by an
outside agency. The flow capacity of tank venting devices larger than 12
inches nominal pipe size, including manhole covers with long bolts or
equivalent, may be calculated provided that the opening pressure is
actually measured, the rating pressure and corresponding free orifice
area are stated, the word ``calculated'' appears on the nameplate, and
the computation is based on a flow coefficient of 0.5 applied to the
rated orifice area.
(vi) Vent piping for aboveground tanks. (a) Vent piping shall be
constructed in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.
(b) Where vent pipe outlets for tanks storing Class I liquids are
adjacent to buildings or public ways, they shall be located so that the
vapors are released at a safe point outside of buildings and not less
than 12 feet above the adjacent ground level. In order to aid their
dispersion, vapors shall be discharged upward or horizontally away from
closely adjacent walls. Vent outlets shall be located so that flammable
vapors will not be trapped by eaves or other obstructions and shall be
at least five feet from building openings.
(c) When tank vent piping is manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as
to discharge, within the pressure limitations of the system, the vapors
they may be required to handle when manifolded tanks are subject to the
same fire exposure.
(vii) Drainage, dikes, and walls for aboveground tanks--(a) Drainage
and diked areas. The area surrounding a tank or a group of tanks shall
be provided with drainage as in subdivision (b) of this subdivision, or
shall be diked as provided in subdivision (c) of this subdivision, to
prevent accidental discharge of liquid from endangering adjoining
property or reaching waterways.
(b) Drainage. Where protection of adjoining property or waterways is
by means of a natural or manmade drainage system, such systems shall
comply with the following:
(1) [Reserved]
(2) The drainage system shall terminate in vacant land or other area
or in an impounding basin having a capacity not smaller than that of the
largest tank served. This termination area and the route of the drainage
system shall be so located that, if the flammable or
[[Page 247]]
combustible liquids in the drainage system are ignited, the fire will
not seriously expose tanks or adjoining property.
(c) Diked areas. Where protection of adjoining property or waterways
is accomplished by retaining the liquid around the tank by means of a
dike, the volume of the diked area shall comply with the following
requirements:
(1) Except as provided in subdivision (2) of this subdivision, the
volumetric capacity of the diked area shall not be less than the
greatest amount of liquid that can be released from the largest tank
within the diked area, assuming a full tank. The capacity of the diked
area enclosing more than one tank shall be calculated by deducting the
volume of the tanks other than the largest tank below the height of the
dike.
(2) For a tank or group of tanks with fixed roofs containing crude
petroleum with boilover characteristics, the volumetric capacity of the
diked area shall be not less than the capacity of the largest tank
served by the enclosure, assuming a full tank. The capacity of the diked
enclosure shall be calculated by deducting the volume below the height
of the dike of all tanks within the enclosure.
(3) Walls of the diked area shall be of earth, steel, concrete or
solid masonry designed to be liquidtight and to withstand a full
hydrostatic head. Earthen walls 3 feet or more in height shall have a
flat section at the top not less than 2 feet wide. The slope of an
earthen wall shall be consistent with the angle of repose of the
material of which the wall is constructed.
(4) The walls of the diked area shall be restricted to an average
height of 6 feet above interior grade.
(5) [Reserved]
(6) No loose combustible material, empty or full drum or barrel,
shall be permitted within the diked area.
(viii) Tank openings other than vents for aboveground tanks.
(a)-(c) [Reserved]
(d) Openings for gaging shall be provided with a vaportight cap or
cover.
(e) For Class IB and Class IC liquids other than crude oils,
gasolines, and asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed and
installed as to minimize the possibility of generating static
electricity. A fill pipe entering the top of a tank shall terminate
within 6 inches of the bottom of the tank and shall be installed to
avoid excessive vibration.
(f) Filling and emptying connections which are made and broken shall
be located outside of buildings at a location free from any source of
ignition and not less than 5 feet away from any building opening. Such
connection shall be closed and liquidtight when not in use. The
connection shall be properly identified.
(3) Installation of underground tanks--(i) Location. Excavation for
underground storage tanks shall be made with due care to avoid
undermining of foundations of existing structures. Underground tanks or
tanks under buildings shall be so located with respect to existing
building foundations and supports that the loads carried by the latter
cannot be transmitted to the tank. The distance from any part of a tank
storing Class I liquids to the nearest wall of any basement or pit shall
be not less than 1 foot, and to any property line that may be built
upon, not less than 3 feet. The distance from any part of a tank storing
Class II or Class III liquids to the nearest wall of any basement, pit
or property line shall be not less than 1 foot.
(ii) Depth and cover. Underground tanks shall be set on firm
foundations and surrounded with at least 6 inches of noncorrosive, inert
materials such as clean sand, earth, or gravel well tamped in place. The
tank shall be placed in the hole with care since dropping or rolling the
tank into the hole can break a weld, puncture or damage the tank, or
scrape off the protective coating of coated tanks. Tanks shall be
covered with a minimum of 2 feet of earth, or shall be covered with not
less than 1 foot of earth, on top of which shall be placed a slab of
reinforced concrete not less than 4 inches thick. When underground tanks
are, or are likely to be, subject to traffic, they shall be protected
against damage from vehicles passing over them by at least 3 feet of
earth cover, or 18 inches of
[[Page 248]]
well-tamped earth, plus 6 inches of reinforced concrete or 8 inches of
asphaltic concrete. When asphaltic or reinforced concrete paving is used
as part of the protection, it shall extend at least 1 foot horizontally
beyond the outline of the tank in all directions.
(iii) Corrosion protection. Corrosion protection for the tank and
its piping shall be provided by one or more of the following methods:
(a) Use of protective coatings or wrappings;
(b) Cathodic protection; or,
(c) Corrosion resistant materials of construction.
(iv) Vents. (a) Location and arrangement of vents for Class I
liquids. Vent pipes from tanks storing Class I liquids shall be so
located that the discharge point is outside of buildings, higher than
the fill pipe opening, and not less than 12 feet above the adjacent
ground level. Vent pipes shall discharge only upward in order to
disperse vapors. Vent pipes 2 inches or less in nominal inside diameter
shall not be obstructed by devices that will cause excessive back
pressure. Vent pipe outlets shall be so located that flammable vapors
will not enter building openings, or be trapped under eaves or other
obstructions. If the vent pipe is less than 10 feet in length, or
greater than 2 inches in nominal inside diameter, the outlet shall be
provided with a vacuum and pressure relief device or there shall be an
approved flame arrester located in the vent line at the outlet or within
the approved distance from the outlet.
(b) Size of vents. Each tank shall be vented through piping adequate
in size to prevent blow-back of vapor or liquid at the fill opening
while the tank is being filled. Vent pipes shall be not less than 1\1/4\
inch nominal inside diameter.
Table H-11--Vent Line Diameters
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pipe length \1\
Maximum flow GPM -----------------------------
50 feet 100 feet 200 feet
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Inches Inches Inches
100....................................... 1\1/4\ 1\1/4\ 1\1/4\
200....................................... 1\1/4\ 1\1/4\ 1\1/4\
300....................................... 1\1/4\ 1\1/4\ 1\1/2\
400....................................... 1\1/4\ 1\1/2\ 2
500....................................... 1\1/2\ 1\1/2\ 2
600....................................... 1\1/2\ 2 2
700....................................... 2 2 2
800....................................... 2 2 3
900....................................... 2 2 3
1,000..................................... 2 2 3
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Vent lines of 50 ft., 100 ft., and 200 ft. of pipe plus 7 ells.
(c) Location and arrangement of vents for Class II or Class III
liquids. Vent pipes from tanks storing Class II or Class III flammable
liquids shall terminate outside of the building and higher than the fill
pipe opening. Vent outlets shall be above normal snow level. They may be
fitted with return bends, coarse screens or other devices to minimize
ingress of foreign material.
(d) Vent piping shall be constructed in accordance with paragraph
(c) of this section. Vent pipes shall be so laid as to drain toward the
tank without sags or traps in which liquid can collect. They shall be
located so that they will not be subjected to physical damage. The tank
end of the vent pipe shall enter the tank through the top.
(e) When tank vent piping is manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as
to discharge, within the pressure limitations of the system, the vapors
they may be required to handle when manifolded tanks are filled
simultaneously.
(v) Tank openings other than vents. (a) Connections for all tank
openings shall be vapor or liquid tight.
(b) Openings for manual gaging, if independent of the fill pipe,
shall be provided with a liquid-tight cap or cover. If inside a
building, each such opening shall be protected against liquid overflow
and possible vapor release by means of a spring loaded check valve or
other approved device.
(c) Fill and discharge lines shall enter tanks only through the top.
Fill lines shall be sloped toward the tank.
(d) For Class IB and Class IC liquids other than crude oils,
gasolines, and asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed and
installed as to minimize the possibility of generating static
electricity by terminating within 6 inches of the bottom of the tank.
(e) Filling and emptying connections which are made and broken shall
be located outside of buildings at a location
[[Page 249]]
free from any source of ignition and not less than 5 feet away from any
building opening. Such connection shall be closed and liquidtight when
not in use. The connection shall be properly identified.
(4) Installation of tanks inside of buildings--(i) Location. Tanks
shall not be permitted inside of buildings except as provided in
paragraphs (e), (g), (h), or (i) of this section.
(ii) Vents. Vents for tanks inside of buildings shall be as provided
in subparagraphs (2) (iv), (v), (vi)(b), and (3)(iv) of this paragraph,
except that emergency venting by the use of weak roof seams on tanks
shall not be permitted. Vents shall discharge vapors outside the
buildings.
(iii) Vent piping. Vent piping shall be constructed in accordance
with paragraph (c) of this section.
(iv) Tank openings other than vents. (a) Connections for all tank
openings shall be vapor or liquidtight. Vents are covered in subdivision
(ii) of this subparagraph.
(b) Each connection to a tank inside of buildings through which
liquid can normally flow shall be provided with an internal or an
external valve located as close as practical to the shell of the tank.
Such valves, when external, and their connections to the tank shall be
of steel except when the chemical characteristics of the liquid stored
are incompatible with steel. When materials other than steel are
necessary, they shall be suitable for the pressures, structural
stresses, and temperatures involved, including fire exposures.
(c) Flammable or combustible liquid tanks located inside of
buildings, except in one-story buildings designed and protected for
flammable or combustible liquid storage, shall be provided with an
automatic-closing heat-actuated valve on each withdrawal connection
below the liquid level, except for connections used for emergency
disposal, to prevent continued flow in the event of fire in the vicinity
of the tank. This function may be incorporated in the valve required in
(b) of this subdivision, and if a separate valve, shall be located
adjacent to the valve required in (b) of this subdivision.
(d) Openings for manual gaging, if independent of the fill pipe (see
(f) of this subdivision), shall be provided with a vaportight cap or
cover. Each such opening shall be protected against liquid overflow and
possible vapor release by means of a spring loaded check valve or other
approved device.
(e) For Class IB and Class IC liquids other than crude oils,
gasolines, and asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed and
installed as to minimize the possibility of generating static
electricity by terminating within 6 inches of the bottom of the tank.
(f) The fill pipe inside of the tank shall be installed to avoid
excessive vibration of the pipe.
(g) The inlet of the fill pipe shall be located outside of buildings
at a location free from any source of ignition and not less than 5 feet
away from any building opening. The inlet of the fill pipe shall be
closed and liquidtight when not in use. The fill connection shall be
properly identified.
(h) Tanks inside buildings shall be equipped with a device, or other
means shall be provided, to prevent overflow into the building.
(5) Supports, foundations, and anchorage for all tank locations--(i)
General. Tank supports shall be installed on firm foundations. Tank
supports shall be of concrete, masonry, or protected steel. Single wood
timber supports (not cribbing) laid horizontally may be used for outside
aboveground tanks if not more than 12 inches high at their lowest point.
(ii) Fire resistance. Steel supports or exposed piling shall be
protected by materials having a fire resistance rating of not less than
2 hours, except that steel saddles need not be protected if less than 12
inches high at their lowest point. Water spray protection or its
equivalent may be used in lieu of fire-resistive materials to protect
supports.
(iii) Spheres. The design of the supporting structure for tanks such
as spheres shall receive special engineering consideration.
(iv) Load distribution. Every tank shall be so supported as to
prevent the excessive concentration of loads on the supporting portion
of the shell.
(v) Foundations. Tanks shall rest on the ground or on foundations
made of concrete, masonry, piling, or steel. Tank foundations shall be
designed to
[[Page 250]]
minimize the possibility of uneven settling of the tank and to minimize
corrosion in any part of the tank resting on the foundation.
(vi) Flood areas. Where a tank is located in an area that may be
subjected to flooding, the applicable precautions outlined in this
subdivision shall be observed.
(a) No aboveground vertical storage tank containing a flammable or
combustible liquid shall be located so that the allowable liquid level
within the tank is below the established maximum flood stage, unless the
tank is provided with a guiding structure such as described in (m), (n),
and (o) of this subdivision.
(b) Independent water supply facilities shall be provided at
locations where there is no ample and dependable public water supply
available for loading partially empty tanks with water.
(c) In addition to the preceding requirements, each tank so located
that more than 70 percent, but less than 100 percent, of its allowable
liquid storage capacity will be submerged at the established maximum
flood stage, shall be safeguarded by one of the following methods: Tank
shall be raised, or its height shall be increased, until its top extends
above the maximum flood stage a distance equivalent to 30 percent or
more of its allowable liquid storage capacity: Provided, however, That
the submerged part of the tank shall not exceed two and one-half times
the diameter. Or, as an alternative to the foregoing, adequate
noncombustible structural guides, designed to permit the tank to float
vertically without loss of product, shall be provided.
(d) Each horizontal tank so located that more than 70 percent of its
storage capacity will be submerged at the established flood stage, shall
be anchored, attached to a foundation of concrete or of steel and
concrete, of sufficient weight to provide adequate load for the tank
when filled with flammable or combustible liquid and submerged by flood
waters to the established flood stage, or adequately secured by other
means.
(e) [Reserved]
(f) At locations where there is no ample and dependable water
supply, or where filling of underground tanks with liquids is
impracticable because of the character of their contents, their use, or
for other reasons, each tank shall be safeguarded against movement when
empty and submerged by high ground water or flood waters by anchoring,
weighting with concrete or other approved solid loading material, or
securing by other means. Each such tank shall be so constructed and
installed that it will safely resist external pressures due to high
ground water or flood waters.
(g) At locations where there is an ample and dependable water supply
available, underground tanks containing flammable or combustible
liquids, so installed that more than 70 percent of their storage
capacity will be submerged at the maximum flood stage, shall be so
anchored, weighted, or secured by other means, as to prevent movement of
such tanks when filled with flammable or combustible liquids, and
submerged by flood waters to the established flood stage.
(h) Pipe connections below the allowable liquid level in a tank
shall be provided with valves or cocks located as closely as practicable
to the tank shell. Such valves and their connections to tanks shall be
of steel or other material suitable for use with the liquid being
stored. Cast iron shall not be permitted.
(i) At locations where an independent water supply is required, it
shall be entirely independent of public power and water supply.
Independent source of water shall be available when flood waters reach a
level not less than 10 feet below the bottom of the lowest tank on a
property.
(j) The self-contained power and pumping unit shall be so located or
so designed that pumping into tanks may be carried on continuously
throughout the rise in flood waters from a level 10 feet below the
lowest tank to the level of the potential flood stage.
(k) Capacity of the pumping unit shall be such that the rate of rise
of water in all tanks shall be equivalent to the established potential
average rate of rise of flood waters at any stage.
(l) Each independent pumping unit shall be tested periodically to
insure
[[Page 251]]
that it is in satisfactory operating condition.
(m) Structural guides for holding floating tanks above their
foundations shall be so designed that there will be no resistance to the
free rise of a tank, and shall be constructed of noncombustible
material.
(n) The strength of the structure shall be adequate to resist
lateral movement of a tank subject to a horizontal force in any
direction equivalent to not less than 25 pounds per square foot acting
on the projected vertical cross-sectional area of the tank.
(o) Where tanks are situated on exposed points or bends in a
shoreline where swift currents in flood waters will be present, the
structures shall be designed to withstand a unit force of not less than
50 pounds per square foot.
(p) The filling of a tank to be protected by water loading shall be
started as soon as flood waters reach a dangerous flood stage. The rate
of filling shall be at least equal to the rate of rise of the
floodwaters (or the established average potential rate of rise).
(q) Sufficient fuel to operate the water pumps shall be available at
all times to insure adequate power to fill all tankage with water.
(r) All valves on connecting pipelines shall be closed and locked in
closed position when water loading has been completed.
(s) Where structural guides are provided for the protection of
floating tanks, all rigid connections between tanks and pipelines shall
be disconnected and blanked off or blinded before the floodwaters reach
the bottom of the tank, unless control valves and their connections to
the tank are of a type designed to prevent breakage between the valve
and the tank shell.
(t) All valves attached to tanks other than those used in connection
with water loading operations shall be closed and locked.
(u) If a tank is equipped with a swing line, the swing pipe shall be
raised to and secured at its highest position.
(v) Inspections. The Assistant Secretary or his designated
representative shall make periodic inspections of all plants where the
storage of flammable or combustible liquids is such as to require
compliance with the foregoing requirements, in order to assure the
following:
(1) That all flammable or combustible liquid storage tanks are in
compliance with these requirements and so maintained.
(2) That detailed printed instructions of what to do in flood
emergencies are properly posted.
(3) That station operators and other employees depended upon to
carry out such instructions are thoroughly informed as to the location
and operation of such valves and other equipment necessary to effect
these requirements.
(vii) Earthquake areas. In areas subject to earthquakes, the tank
supports and connections shall be designed to resist damage as a result
of such shocks.
(6) Sources of ignition. In locations where flammable vapors may be
present, precautions shall be taken to prevent ignition by eliminating
or controlling sources of ignition. Sources of ignition may include open
flames, lightning, smoking, cutting and welding, hot surfaces,
frictional heat, sparks (static, electrical, and mechanical),
spontaneous ignition, chemical and physical-chemical reactions, and
radiant heat.
(7) Testing--(i) General. All tanks, whether shop built or field
erected, shall be strength tested before they are placed in service in
accordance with the applicable paragraphs of the code under which they
were built. The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) code
stamp, American Petroleum Institute (API) monogram, or the label of the
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., on a tank shall be evidence of
compliance with this strength test. Tanks not marked in accordance with
the above codes shall be strength tested before they are placed in
service in accordance with good engineering principles and reference
shall be made to the sections on testing in the codes listed in
subparagraphs (1) (iii)(a), (iv)(b), or (v)(b) of this paragraph.
(ii) Strength. When the vertical length of the fill and vent pipes
is such that when filled with liquid the static head imposed upon the
bottom of the tank exceeds 10 pounds per square inch, the tank and
related piping shall be
[[Page 252]]
tested hydrostatically to a pressure equal to the static head thus
imposed.
(iii) Tightness. In addition to the strength test called for in
subdivisions (i) and (ii) of this subparagraph, all tanks and
connections shall be tested for tightness. Except for underground tanks,
this tightness test shall be made at operating pressure with air, inert
gas, or water prior to placing the tank in service. In the case of
field-erected tanks the strength test may be considered to be the test
for tank tightness. Underground tanks and piping, before being covered,
enclosed, or placed in use, shall be tested for tightness
hydrostatically, or with air pressure at not less than 3 pounds per
square inch and not more than 5 pounds per square inch.
(iv) Repairs. All leaks or deformations shall be corrected in an
acceptable manner before the tank is placed in service. Mechanical
caulking is not permitted for correcting leaks in welded tanks except
pinhole leaks in the roof.
(v) Derated operations. Tanks to be operated at pressures below
their design pressure may be tested by the applicable provisions of
subdivision (i) or (ii) of this subparagraph, based upon the pressure
developed under full emergency venting of the tank.
(c) Piping, valves, and fittings--(1) General--(i) Design. The
design (including selection of materials) fabrication, assembly, test,
and inspection of piping systems containing flammable or combustible
liquids shall be suitable for the expected working pressures and
structural stresses. Conformity with the applicable provisions of
Pressure Piping, ANSI B31 series and the provisions of this paragraph,
shall be considered prima facie evidence of compliance with the
foregoing provisions.
(ii) Exceptions. This paragraph does not apply to any of the
following:
(a) Tubing or casing on any oil or gas wells and any piping
connected directly thereto.
(b) Motor vehicle, aircraft, boat, or portable or stationary
engines.
(c) Piping within the scope of any applicable boiler and pressures
vessel code.
(iii) Definitions. As used in this paragraph, piping systems consist
of pipe, tubing, flanges, bolting, gaskets, valves, fittings, the
pressure containing parts of other components such as expansion joints
and strainers, and devices which serve such purposes as mixing,
separating, snubbing, distributing, metering, or controlling flow.
(2) Materials for piping, valves, and fittings--(i) Required
materials. Materials for piping, valves, or fittings shall be steel,
nodular iron, or malleable iron, except as provided in paragraph (c)(2)
(ii), (iii) and (iv) of this section.
(ii) Exceptions. Materials other than steel, nodular iron, or
malleable iron may be used underground, or if required by the properties
of the flammable or combustible liquid handled. Material other than
steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron shall be designed to
specifications embodying principles recognized as good engineering
practices for the material used.
(iii) Linings. Piping, valves, and fittings may have combustible or
noncombustible linings.
(iv) Low-melting materials. When low-melting point materials such as
aluminum and brass or materials that soften on fire exposure such as
plastics, or non-ductile materials such as cast iron, are necessary,
special consideration shall be given to their behavior on fire exposure.
If such materials are used in above ground piping systems or inside
buildings, they shall be suitably protected against fire exposure or so
located that any spill resulting from the failure of these materials
could not unduly expose persons, important buildings or structures or
can be readily controlled by remote valves.
(3) Pipe joints. Joints shall be made liquid tight. Welded or
screwed joints or approved connectors shall be used. Threaded joints and
connections shall be made up tight with a suitable lubricant or piping
compound. Pipe joints dependent upon the friction characteristics of
combustible materials for mechanical continuity of piping shall not be
used inside buildings. They may be used outside of buildings above or
below ground. If used above ground, the piping shall either be secured
to prevent disengagement at the fitting or the piping system shall be so
designed that any spill resulting from such disengagement could not
unduly expose
[[Page 253]]
persons, important buildings or structures, and could be readily
controlled by remote valves.
(4) Supports. Piping systems shall be substantially supported and
protected against physical damage and excessive stresses arising from
settlement, vibration, expansion, or contraction.
(5) Protection against corrosion. All piping for flammable or
combustible liquids, both aboveground and underground, where subject to
external corrosion, shall be painted or otherwise protected.
(6) Valves. Piping systems shall contain a sufficient number of
valves to operate the system properly and to protect the plant. Piping
systems in connection with pumps shall contain a sufficient number of
valves to control properly the flow of liquid in normal operation and in
the event of physical damage. Each connection to pipelines, by which
equipments such as tankcars or tank vehicles discharge liquids by means
of pumps into storage tanks, shall be provided with a check valve for
automatic protection against backflow if the piping arrangement is such
that backflow from the system is possible.
(7) Testing. All piping before being covered, enclosed, or placed in
use shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 percent of the maximum
anticipated pressure of the system, or pneumatically tested to 110
percent of the maximum anticipated pressure of the system, but not less
than 5 pounds per square inch gage at the highest point of the system.
This test shall be maintained for a sufficient time to complete visual
inspection of all joints and connections, but for at least 10 minutes.
(d) Container and portable tank storage--(1) Scope--(i) General.
This paragraph shall apply only to the storage of flammable or
combustible liquids in drums or other containers (including flammable
aerosols) not exceeding 60 gallons individual capacity and those
portable tanks not exceeding 660 gallons individual capacity.
(ii) Exceptions. This paragraph shall not apply to the following:
(a) Storage of containers in bulk plants, service stations,
refineries, chemical plants, and distilleries;
(b) Class I or Class II liquids in the fuel tanks of a motor
vehicle, aircraft, boat, or portable or stationary engine;
(c) Flammable or combustible paints, oils, varnishes, and similar
mixtures used for painting or maintenance when not kept for a period in
excess of 30 days;
(d) Beverages when packaged in individual containers not exceeding 1
gallon in size.
(2) Design, construction, and capacity of containers--(i) General.
Only approved containers and portable tanks shall be used. Metal
containers and portable tanks meeting the requirements of and containing
products authorized by chapter I, title 49 of the Code of Federal
Regulations (regulations issued by the Hazardous Materials Regulations
Board, Department of Transportation), shall be deemed to be acceptable.
(ii) Emergency venting. Each portable tank shall be provided with
one or more devices installed in the top with sufficient emergency
venting capacity to limit internal pressure under fire exposure
conditions to 10 p.s.i.g., or 30 percent of the bursting pressure of the
tank, whichever is greater. The total venting capacity shall be not less
than that specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(v) (c) or (e) of this section.
At least one pressure-activated vent having a minimum capacity of 6,000
cubic feet of free air (14.7 p.s.i.a. and 60 deg.F.) shall be used. It
shall be set to open at not less than 5 p.s.i.g. If fusible vents are
used, they shall be actuated by elements that operate at a temperature
not exceeding 300 deg.F.
(iii) Size. Flammable and combustible liquid containers shall be in
accordance with Table H-12, except that glass or plastic containers of
no more than 1-gallon capacity may be used for a Class IA or IB
flammable liquid if:
(a)(1) Such liquid either would be rendered unfit for its intended
use by contact with metal or would excessively corrode a metal container
so as to create a leakage hazard; and
(2) The user's process either would require more than 1 pint of a
Class IA liquid or more than 1 quart of a Class IB liquid of a single
assay lot to be used at one time, or would require the maintenance of an
analytical standard liquid
[[Page 254]]
of a quality which is not met by the specified standards of liquids
available, and the quantity of the analytical standard liquid required
to be used in any one control process exceeds one-sixteenth the capacity
of the container allowed under Table H-12 for the class of liquid; or
(b) The containers are intended for direct export outside the United
States.
Table H-12--Maximum Allowable Size of Containers and Portable Tanks
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flammable liquids Combustible liquids
Container type -----------------------------------------------------------
Class IA Class IB Class IC Class II Class III
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Glass or approved plastic........................... 1 pt 1 qt 1 gal 1 gal 1 gal.
Metal (other than DOT drums)........................ 1 gal 5 gal 5 gal 5 gal 5 gal.
Safety cans......................................... 2 gal 5 gal 5 gal 5 gal 5 gal.
Metal drums (DOT specifications).................... 60 gal 60 gal 60 gal 60 gal 60 gal.
Approved portable tanks............................. 660 gal 660 gal 660 gal 660 gal 660 gal.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: Container exemptions: (a) Medicines, beverages, foodstuffs, cosmetics, and other common consumer items,
when packaged according to commonly accepted practices, shall be exempt from the requirements of Sec.
1910.106(d)(2) (i) and (ii).
(3) Design, construction, and capacity of storage cabinets--(i)
Maximum capacity. Not more than 60 gallons of Class I or Class II
liquids, nor more than 120 gallons of Class III liquids may be stored in
a storage cabinet.
(ii) Fire resistance. Storage cabinets shall be designed and
constructed to limit the internal temperature to not more than 325
deg.F. when subjected to a 10-minute fire test using the standard time-
temperature curve as set forth in Standard Methods of Fire Tests of
Building Construction and Materials, NFPA 251-1969, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6. All joints and
seams shall remain tight and the door shall remain securely closed
during the fire test. Cabinets shall be labeled in conspicuous
lettering, ``Flammable--Keep Fire Away.''
(a) Metal cabinets constructed in the following manner shall be
deemed to be in compliance. The bottom, top, door, and sides of cabinet
shall be at least No. 18 gage sheet iron and double walled with 1\1/2\-
inch air space. Joints shall be riveted, welded or made tight by some
equally effective means. The door shall be provided with a three-point
lock, and the door sill shall be raised at least 2 inches above the
bottom of the cabinet.
(b) Wooden cabinets constructed in the following manner shall be
deemed in compliance. The bottom, sides, and top shall be constructed of
an approved grade of plywood at least 1 inch in thickness, which shall
not break down or delaminate under fire conditions. All joints shall be
rabbetted and shall be fastened in two directions with flathead
woodscrews. When more than one door is used, there shall be a rabbetted
overlap of not less than 1 inch. Hinges shall be mounted in such a
manner as not to lose their holding capacity due to loosening or burning
out of the screws when subjected to the fire test.
(4) Design and construction of inside storage rooms--(i)
Construction. Inside storage rooms shall be constructed to meet the
required fire-resistive rating for their use. Such construction shall
comply with the test specifications set forth in Standard Methods of
Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials, NFPA 251-1969. Where
an automatic sprinkler system is provided, the system shall be designed
and installed in an acceptable manner. Openings to other rooms or
buildings shall be provided with noncombustible liquid-tight raised
sills or ramps at least 4 inches in height, or the floor in the storage
area shall be at least 4 inches below the surrounding floor. Openings
shall be provided with approved self-closing fire doors. The room shall
be liquid-tight where the walls join the floor. A permissible alternate
to the sill or ramp is an open-grated trench inside of the room which
drains to a safe location. Where other portions of the building or other
properties are exposed, windows shall be protected as set forth in the
Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, NFPA No. 80-1968, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, for Class E or F
openings. Wood
[[Page 255]]
at least 1 inch nominal thickness may be used for shelving, racks,
dunnage, scuffboards, floor overlay, and similar installations.
(ii) Rating and capacity. Storage in inside storage rooms shall
comply with Table H-13.
Table H-13--Storage in Inside Rooms
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total
allowable
quantities
Fire protection \1\ provided Fire resistance Maximum size (gals./sq.
ft./floor
area)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Yes...................................... 2 hours..................... 500 sq. ft................. 10
No....................................... 2 hours..................... 500 sq. ft................. 5
Yes...................................... 1 hour...................... 150 sq. ft................. 4
No....................................... 1 hour...................... 150 sq. ft................. 2
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Fire protection system shall be sprinkler, water spray, carbon dioxide, or other system.
(iii) Wiring. Electrical wiring and equipment located in inside
storage rooms used for Class I liquids shall be approved under Subpart S
of this part for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations; for Class II
and Class III liquids, shall be approved for general use.
(iv) Ventilation. Every inside storage room shall be provided with
either a gravity or a mechanical exhaust ventilation system. Such system
shall be designed to provide for a complete change of air within the
room at least six times per hour. If a mechanical exhaust system is
used, it shall be controlled by a switch located outside of the door.
The ventilating equipment and any lighting fixtures shall be operated by
the same switch. A pilot light shall be installed adjacent to the switch
if Class I flammable liquids are dispensed within the room. Where
gravity ventilation is provided, the fresh air intake, as well as the
exhaust outlet from the room, shall be on the exterior of the building
in which the room is located.
(v) Storage in inside storage rooms. In every inside storage room
there shall be maintained one clear aisle at least 3 feet wide.
Containers over 30 gallons capacity shall not be stacked one upon the
other. Dispensing shall be by approved pump or self-closing faucet only.
(5) Storage inside building--(i) Egress. Flammable or combustible
liquids, including stock for sale, shall not be stored so as to limit
use of exits, stairways, or areas normally used for the safe egress of
people.
(ii) Containers. The storage of flammable or combustible liquids in
containers or portable tanks shall comply with subdivisions (iii)
through (v) of this subparagraph.
(iii) Office occupancies. Storage shall be prohibited except that
which is required for maintenance and operation of building and
operation of equipment. Such storage shall be kept in closed metal
containers stored in a storage cabinet or in safety cans or in an inside
storage room not having a door that opens into that portion of the
building used by the public.
(iv) Mercantile occupancies and other retail stores.
(a)-(d) [Reserved]
(e) Leaking containers shall be removed to a storage room or taken
to a safe location outside the building and the contents transferred to
an undamaged container.
(v) General purpose public warehouses. Storage shall be in
accordance with Table H-14 or H-15 and in buildings or in portions of
such buildings cut off by standard firewalls. Material creating no fire
exposure hazard to the flammable or combustible liquids may be stored in
the same area.
Table H-14--Indoor Container Storage
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gallons
---------------------------
Protected Unprotected
Class liquid Storage level storage storage
maximum per maximum per
pile pile
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A............................................. Ground and upper floors............. 2,750 660
(50) (12)
Basement............................ Not Not
permitted permitted
B............................................. Ground and upper floors............. 5,500 1,375
(100) (25)
Basement............................ Not Not
permitted permitted
C............................................. Ground and upper floors............. 16,500 4,125
[[Page 256]]
(300) (75)
Basement............................ Not Not
permitted permitted
II............................................ Ground and upper floors............. 16,500 4,125
(300) (75)
Basement............................ 5,500 Not
permitted
(100)
III........................................... Ground and upper floors............. 55,000 13,750
(1,000) (250)
Basement............................ 8,250 Not
permitted
(450)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1: When 2 or more classes of materials are stored in a single pile, the maximum gallonage permitted in that
pile shall be the smallest of the 2 or more separate maximum gallonages.
Note 2: Aisles shall be provided so that no container is more than 12 ft. from an aisle. Main aisles shall be at
least 3 ft. wide and side aisles at least 4 ft. wide.
Note 3: Each pile shall be separated from each other by at least 4 ft.
(Numbers in parentheses indicate corresponding number of 55-gal. drums.)
Table H-15--Indoor Portable Tank Storage
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gallons
---------------------------
Protected Unprotected
Class liquid Storage level storage storage
maximum per maximum per
pile pile
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IA............................................ Ground and upper floors............. Not Not
permitted permitted
Basement............................ Not Not
permitted permitted
IB............................................ Ground and upper floors............. 20,000 2,000
Basement............................ Not Not
permitted permitted
IC............................................ Ground and upper floors............. 40,000 5,500
Basement............................ Not Not
permitted permitted
II............................................ Ground and upper floors............. 40,000 5,500
Basement............................ 20,000 Not
permitted
III........................................... Ground and upper floors............. 60,000 22,000
Basement............................ 20,000 Not
permitted
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1: When 1 or more classes of materials are stored in a single pile, the maximum gallonage permitted in that
pile shall be the smallest of the 2 or more separate maximum gallonages.
Note 2: Aisles shall be provided so that no portable tank is more than 12 ft. from an aisle. Main aisles shall
be at least 8 ft. wide and side aisles at least 4 ft. wide.
Note 3: Each pile shall be separated from each other by at least 4 ft.
(vi) Flammable and combustible liquid warehouses or storage
buildings. (a) If the storage building is located 50 feet or less from a
building or line of adjoining property that may be built upon, the
exposing wall shall be a blank wall having a fire-resistance rating of
at least 2 hours.
(b) The total quantity of liquids within a building shall not be
restricted, but the arrangement of storage shall comply with Table H-14
or H-15.
(c) Containers in piles shall be separated by pallets or dunnage
where necessary to provide stability and to prevent excessive stress on
container walls.
(d) Portable tanks stored over one tier high shall be designed to
nest securely, without dunnage, and adequate materials handing equipment
shall be available to handle tanks safely at the upper tier level.
(e) No pile shall be closer than 3 feet to the nearest beam, chord,
girder, or other obstruction, and shall be 3 feet below sprinkler
deflectors or discharge orifices of water spray, or other overhead fire
protection systems.
(f) Aisles of at least 3 feet wide shall be provided where necessary
for reasons of access to doors, windows or standpipe connections.
(6) Storage outside buildings--(i) General. Storage outside
buildings shall be in accordance with Table H-16 or H-17, and
subdivisions (ii) and (iv) of this subparagraph.
[[Page 257]]
Table H-16--Outdoor Container Storage
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4--Distance
3--Distance to property 5--Distance
1--Class 2--Maximum between line that to street,
per pile piles can be alley,
built upon public way
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
gallons feet feet feet
---------------------------------------------------
IA.......................................................... 1,100 5 20 10
IB.......................................................... 2,200 5 20 10
IC.......................................................... 4,400 5 20 10
II.......................................................... 8,800 5 10 5
III......................................................... 22,000 5 10 5
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1: When 2 or more classes of materials are stored in a single pile, the maximum gallonage in that pile
shall be the smallest of the 2 or more separate gallonages.
Note 2: Within 200 ft. of each container, there shall be a 12-ft. wide access way to permit approach of fire
control apparatus.
Note 3: The distances listed apply to properties that have protection for exposures as defined. If there are
exposures, and such protection for exposures does not exist, the distances in column 4 shall be doubled.
Note 4: When total quantity stored does not exceed 50 percent of maximum per pile, the distances in columns 4
and 5 may be reduced 50 percent, but not less than 3 ft.
(ii) Maximum storage. A maximum of 1,100 gallons of flammable or
combustible liquids may be located adjacent to buildings located on the
same premises and under the same management provided the provisions of
subdivisions (a) and (b) of this subdivision are complied with.
(a) [Reserved]
(b) Where quantity stored exceeds 1,100 gallons, or provisions of
subdivision (a) of this subdivision cannot be met, a minimum distance of
10 feet between buildings and nearest container of flammable or
combustible liquid shall be maintained.
(iii) Spill containment. The storage area shall be graded in a
manner to divert possible spills away from buildings or other exposures
or shall be surrounded by a curb at least 6 inches high. When curbs are
used, provisions shall be made for draining of accumulations of ground
or rain water or spills of flammable or combustible liquids. Drains
shall terminate at a safe location and shall be accessible to operation
under fire conditions.
(iv) Security. The storage area shall be protected against tampering
or trespassers where necessary and shall be kept free of weeds, debris
and other combustible material not necessary to the storage.
(7) Fire control--(i) Extinguishers. Suitable fire control devices,
such as small hose or portable fire extinguishers, shall be available at
locations where flammable or combustible liquids are stored.
Table H-17--Outdoor Portable Tank Storage
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4--Distance
3--Distance to property 5--Distance
1--Class 2--Maximum between line that to street,
per pile piles can be alley,
built upon public way
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
gallon feet feet feet
---------------------------------------------------
IA.......................................................... 2,200 5 20 10
IB.......................................................... 4,400 5 20 10
IC.......................................................... 8,800 5 20 10
II.......................................................... 17,600 5 10 5
III......................................................... 44,000 5 10 5
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1: When 2 or more classes of materials are stored in a single pile, the maximum gallonage in that pile
shall be the the smallest of the 2 or more separate gallonages.
Note 2: Within 200 ft. of each portable tank, there shall be a 12-ft. wide access way to permit approach of fire
control apparatus.
Note 3: The distances listed apply to properties that have protection for exposures as defined. If there are
exposures, and such protection for exposures does not exist, the distances in column 4 shall be doubled.
Note 4: When total quantity stored does not exceed 50 percent of maximum per pile, the distances in columns 4
and 5 may be reduced 50 percent, but not less than 3 ft.
[[Page 258]]
(a) At least one portable fire extinguisher having a rating of not
less than 12-B units shall be located outside of, but not more than 10
feet from, the door opening into any room used for storage.
(b) At least one portable fire extinguisher having a rating of not
less than 12-B units must be located not less than 10 feet, nor more
than 25 feet, from any Class I or Class II liquid storage area located
outside of a storage room but inside a building.
(ii) Sprinklers. When sprinklers are provided, they shall be
installed in accordance with Sec. 1910.159.
(iii) Open flames and smoking. Open flames and smoking shall not be
permitted in flammable or combustible liquid storage areas.
(iv) Water reactive materials. Materials which will react with water
shall not be stored in the same room with flammable or combustible
liquids.
(e) Industrial plants--(1) Scope--(i) Application. This paragraph
shall apply to those industrial plants where:
(a) The use of flammable or combustible liquids is incidental to the
principal business, or
(b) Where flammable or combustible liquids are handled or used only
in unit physical operations such as mixing, drying, evaporating,
filtering, distillation, and similar operations which do not involve
chemical reaction. This paragraph shall not apply to chemical plants,
refineries or distilleries.
(ii) Exceptions. Where portions of such plants involve chemical
reactions such as oxidation, reduction, halogenation, hydrogenation,
alkylation, polymerization, and other chemical processes, those portions
of the plant shall be in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section.
(2) Incidental storage or use of flammable and combustible liquids--
(i) Application. This subparagraph shall be applicable to those portions
of an industrial plant where the use and handling of flammable or
combustible liquids is only incidental to the principal business, such
as automobile assembly, construction of electronic equipment, furniture
manufacturing, or other similar activities.
(ii) Containers. Flammable or combustible liquids shall be stored in
tanks or closed containers.
(a) Except as provided in subdivisions (b) and (c) of this
subdivision, all storage shall comply with paragraph (d) (3) or (4) of
this section.
(b) The quantity of liquid that may be located outside of an inside
storage room or storage cabinet in a building or in any one fire area of
a building shall not exceed:
(1) 25 gallons of Class IA liquids in containers
(2) 120 gallons of Class IB, IC, II, or III liquids in containers
(3) 660 gallons of Class IB, IC, II, or III liquids in a single
portable tank.
(c) Where large quantities of flammable or combustible liquids are
necessary, storage may be in tanks which shall comply with the
applicable requirements of paragraph (b) of this section.
(iii) Separation and protection. Areas in which flammable or
combustible liquids are transferred from one tank or container to
another container shall be separated from other operations in the
building by adequate distance or by construction having adequate fire
resistance. Drainage or other means shall be provided to control spills.
Adequate natural or mechanical ventilation shall be provided.
(iv) Handling liquids at point of final use. (a) Flammable liquids
shall be kept in covered containers when not actually in use.
(b) Where flammable or combustible liquids are used or handled,
except in closed containers, means shall be provided to dispose promptly
and safely of leakage or spills.
(c) Class I liquids may be used only where there are no open flames
or other sources of ignition within the possible path of vapor travel.
(d) Flammable or combustible liquids shall be drawn from or
transferred into vessels, containers, or portable tanks within a
building only through a closed piping system, from safety cans, by means
of a device drawing through the top, or from a container or portable
tanks by gravity through an approved self-closing valve. Transferring by
means of air pressure on the container or portable tanks shall be
prohibited.
[[Page 259]]
(3) Unit physical operations--(i) Application. This subparagraph
shall be applicable in those portions of industrial plants where
flammable or combustible liquids are handled or used in unit physical
operations such as mixing, drying, evaporating, filtering, distillation,
and similar operations which do not involve chemical change. Examples
are plants compounding cosmetics, pharmaceuticals, solvents, cleaning
fluids, insecticides, and similar types of activities.
(ii) Location. Industrial plants shall be located so that each
building or unit of equipment is accessible from at least one side for
firefighting and fire control purposes. Buildings shall be located with
respect to lines of adjoining property which may be built upon as set
forth in paragraph (h)(2) (i) and (ii) of this section except that the
blank wall referred to in paragraph (h)(2)(ii) of this section shall
have a fire resistance rating of at least 2 hours.
(iii) Chemical processes. Areas where unstable liquids are handled
or small scale unit chemical processes are carried on shall be separated
from the remainder of the plant by a fire wall of 2-hour minimum fire
resistance rating.
(iv) Drainage. (a) Emergency drainage systems shall be provided to
direct flammable or combustible liquid leakage and fire protection water
to a safe location. This may require curbs, scuppers, or special
drainage systems to control the spread of fire; see paragraph
(b)(2)(vii)(b) of this section.
(b) Emergency drainage systems, if connected to public sewers or
discharged into public waterways, shall be equipped with traps or
separator.
(v) Ventilation. (a) Areas as defined in subdivision (i) of this
subparagraph using Class I liquids shall be ventilated at a rate of not
less than 1 cubic foot per minute per square foot of solid floor area.
This shall be accomplished by natural or mechanical ventilation with
discharge or exhaust to a safe location outside of the building.
Provision shall be made for introduction of makeup air in such a manner
as not to short circuit the ventilation. Ventilation shall be arranged
to include all floor areas or pits where flammable vapors may collect.
(b) Equipment used in a building and the ventilation of the building
shall be designed so as to limit flammable vapor-air mixtures under
normal operating conditions to the interior of equipment, and to not
more than 5 feet from equipment which exposes Class I liquids to the
air. Examples of such equipment are dispensing stations, open
centrifuges, plate and frame filters, open vacuum filters, and surfaces
of open equipment.
(vi) Storage and handling. The storage, transfer, and handling of
liquid shall comply with paragraph (h)(4) of this section.
(4) Tank vehicle and tank car loading and unloading. (i) Tank
vehicle and tank car loading or unloading facilities shall be separated
from aboveground tanks, warehouses, other plant buildings or nearest
line of adjoining property which may be built upon by a distance of 25
feet for Class I liquids and 15 feet for Class II and Class III liquids
measured from the nearest position of any fill stem. Buildings for pumps
or shelters for personnel may be a part of the facility. Operations of
the facility shall comply with the appropriate portions of paragraph
(f)(3) of this section.
(ii) [Reserved]
(5) Fire control--(i) Portable and special equipment. Portable fire
extinguishment and control equipment shall be provided in such
quantities and types as are needed for the special hazards of operation
and storage.
(ii) Water supply. Water shall be available in volume and at
adequate pressure to supply water hose streams, foam-producing
equipment, automatic sprinklers, or water spray systems as the need is
indicated by the special hazards of operation, dispensing and storage.
(iii) Special extinguishers. Special extinguishing equipment such as
that utilizing foam, inert gas, or dry chemical shall be provided as the
need is indicated by the special hazards of operation dispensing and
storage.
(iv) Special hazards. Where the need is indicated by special hazards
of operation, flammable or combustible liquid processing equipment,
major piping, and supporting steel shall be protected by approved water
spray systems, deluge systems, approved fire-resistant
[[Page 260]]
coatings, insulation, or any combination of these.
(v) Maintenance. All plant fire protection facilities shall be
adequately maintained and periodically inspected and tested to make sure
they are always in satisfactory operating condition, and they will serve
their purpose in time of emergency.
(6) Sources of ignition--(i) General. Adequate precautions shall be
taken to prevent the ignition of flammable vapors. Sources of ignition
include but are not limited to open flames; lightning; smoking; cutting
and welding; hot surfaces; frictional heat; static, electrical, and
mechanical sparks; spontaneous ignition, including heat-producing
chemical reactions; and radiant heat.
(ii) Grounding. Class I liquids shall not be dispensed into
containers unless the nozzle and container are electrically
interconnected. Where the metallic floorplate on which the container
stands while filling is electrically connected to the fill stem or where
the fill stem is bonded to the container during filling operations by
means of a bond wire, the provisions of this section shall be deemed to
have been complied with.
(7) Electrical--(i) Equipment. (a) All electrical wiring and
equipment shall be installed according to the requirements of Subpart S
of this part.
(b) Locations where flammable vapor-air mixtures may exist under
normal operations shall be classified Class I, Division 1 according to
the requirements of Subpart S of this part. For those pieces of
equipment installed in accordance with subparagraph (3)(v)(b) of this
paragraph, the Division 1 area shall extend 5 feet in all directions
from all points of vapor liberation. All areas within pits shall be
classified Division 1 if any part of the pit is within a Division 1 or 2
classified area, unless the pit is provided with mechanical ventilation.
(c) Locations where flammable vapor-air mixtures may exist under
abnormal conditions and for a distance beyond Division 1 locations shall
be classified Division 2 according to the requirements of Subpart S of
this part. These locations include an area within 20 feet horizontally,
3 feet vertically beyond a Division 1 area, and up to 3 feet above floor
or grade level within 25 feet, if indoors, or 10 feet if outdoors, from
any pump, bleeder, withdrawal fitting, meter, or similar device handling
Class I liquids. Pits provided with adequate mechanical ventilation
within a Division 1 or 2 area shall be classified Division 2. If Class
II or Class III liquids only are handled, then ordinary electrical
equipment is satisfactory though care shall be used in locating
electrical apparatus to prevent hot metal from falling into open
equipment.
(d) Where the provisions of subdivisions (a), (b), and (c), of this
subdivision require the installation of electrical equipment suitable
for Class I, Division 1 or Division 2 locations, ordinary electrical
equipment including switchgear may be used if installed in a room or
enclosure which is maintained under positive pressure with respect to
the hazardous area. Ventilation makeup air shall be uncontaminated by
flammable vapors.
(8) Repairs to equipment. Hot work, such as welding or cutting
operations, use of spark-producing power tools, and chipping operations
shall be permitted only under supervision of an individual in
responsible charge. The individual in responsible charge shall make an
inspection of the area to be sure that it is safe for the work to be
done and that safe procedures will be followed for the work specified.
(9) Housekeeping--(i) General. Maintenance and operating practices
shall be in accordance with established procedures which will tend to
control leakage and prevent the accidental escape of flammable or
combustible liquids. Spills shall be cleaned up promptly.
(ii) Access. Adequate aisles shall be maintained for unobstructed
movement of personnel and so that fire protection equipment can be
brought to bear on any part of flammable or combustible liquid storage,
use, or any unit physical operation.
(iii) Waste and residue. Combustible waste material and residues in
a building or unit operating area shall be kept to a minimum, stored in
covered metal receptacles and disposed of daily.
(iv) Clear zone. Ground area around buildings and unit operating
areas shall be kept free of weeds, trash, or
[[Page 261]]
other unnecessary combustible materials.
(f) Bulk plants--(1) Storage--(i) Class I liquids. Class I liquids
shall be stored in closed containers, or in storage tanks above ground
outside of buildings, or underground in accordance with paragraph (b) of
this section.
(ii) Class II and III liquids. Class II and Class III liquids shall
be stored in containers, or in tanks within buildings or above ground
outside of buildings, or underground in accordance with paragraph (b) of
this section.
(iii) Piling containers. Containers of flammable or combustible
liquids when piled one upon the other shall be separated by dunnage
sufficient to provide stability and to prevent excessive stress on
container walls. The height of the pile shall be consistent with the
stability and strength of containers.
(2) Buildings--(i) Exits. Rooms in which flammable or combustible
liquids are stored or handled by pumps shall have exit facilities
arranged to prevent occupants from being trapped in the event of fire.
(ii) Heating. Rooms in which Class I liquids are stored or handled
shall be heated only by means not constituting a source of ignition,
such as steam or hot water. Rooms containing heating appliances
involving sources of ignition shall be located and arranged to prevent
entry of flammable vapors.
(iii) Ventilation. (a) Ventilation shall be provided for all rooms,
buildings, or enclosures in which Class I liquids are pumped or
dispensed. Design of ventilation systems shall take into account the
relatively high specific gravity of the vapors. Ventilation may be
provided by adequate openings in outside walls at floor level
unobstructed except by louvers or coarse screens. Where natural
ventilation is inadequate, mechanical ventilation shall be provided.
(b) Class I liquids shall not be stored or handled within a building
having a basement or pit into which flammable vapors may travel, unless
such area is provided with ventilation designed to prevent the
accumulation of flammable vapors therein.
(c) Containers of Class I liquids shall not be drawn from or filled
within buildings unless provision is made to prevent the accumulation of
flammable vapors in hazardous concentrations. Where mechanical
ventilation is required, it shall be kept in operation while flammable
liquids are being handled.
(3) Loading and unloading facilities--(i) Separation. Tank vehicle
and tank car loading or unloading facilities shall be separated from
aboveground tanks, warehouses, other plant buildings or nearest line of
adjoining property that may be built upon by a distance of 25 feet for
Class I liquids and 15 feet for Class II and Class III liquids measured
from the nearest position of any fill spout. Buildings for pumps or
shelters for personnel may be a part of the facility.
(ii) Class restriction. Equipment such as piping, pumps, and meters
used for the transfer of Class I liquids between storage tanks and the
fill stem of the loading rack shall not be used for the transfer of
Class II or Class III liquids.
(iii) Valves. Valves used for the final control for filling tank
vehicles shall be of the self-closing type and manually held open except
where automatic means are provided for shutting off the flow when the
vehicle is full or after filling of a preset amount.
(iv) Static protection. (a) Bonding facilities for protection
against static sparks during the loading of tank vehicles through open
domes shall be provided:
(1) Where Class I liquids are loaded, or
(2) Where Class II or Class III liquids are loaded into vehicles
which may contain vapors from previous cargoes of Class I liquids.
(b) Protection as required in (a) of this subdivision (iv) shall
consist of a metallic bond wire permanently electrically connected to
the fill stem or to some part of the rack structure in electrical
contact with the fill stem. The free end of such wire shall be provided
with a clamp or equivalent device for convenient attachment to some
metallic part in electrical contact with the cargo tank of the tank
vehicle.
(c) Such bonding connection shall be made fast to the vehicle or
tank before dome covers are raised and shall remain in place until
filling is completed and all dome covers have been closed and secured.
[[Page 262]]
(d) Bonding as specified in (a), (b), and (c) of this subdivision is
not required:
(1) Where vehicles are loaded exclusively with products not having a
static accumulating tendency, such as asphalt, most crude oils, residual
oils, and water soluble liquids;
(2) Where no Class I liquids are handled at the loading facility and
the tank vehicles loaded are used exclusively for Class II and Class III
liquids; and
(3) Where vehicles are loaded or unloaded through closed bottom or
top connections.
(e) Filling through open domes into the tanks of tank vehicles or
tank cars, that contain vapor-air mixtures within the flammable range or
where the liquid being filled can form such a mixture, shall be by means
of a downspout which extends near the bottom of the tank. This
precaution is not required when loading liquids which are
nonaccumulators of static charges.
(v) Stray currents. Tank car loading facilities where Class I
liquids are loaded through open domes shall be protected against stray
currents by bonding the pipe to at least one rail and to the rack
structure if of metal. Multiple lines entering the rack area shall be
electrically bonded together. In addition, in areas where excessive
stray currents are known to exist, all pipe entering the rack area shall
be provided with insulating sections to electrically isolate the rack
piping from the pipelines. No bonding between the tank car and the rack
or piping is required during either loading or unloading of Class II or
III liquids.
(vi) Container filling facilities. Class I liquids shall not be
dispensed into containers unless the nozzle and container are
electrically interconnected. Where the metallic floorplate on which the
container stands while filling is electrically connected to the fill
stem or where the fill stem is bonded to the container during filling
operations by means of a bond wire, the provisions of this section shall
be deemed to have been complied with.
(4) Wharves--(i) Definition, application. The term wharf shall mean
any wharf, pier, bulkhead, or other structure over or contiguous to
navigable water used in conjunction with a bulk plant, the primary
function of which is the transfer of flammable or combustible liquid
cargo in bulk between the bulk plant and any tank vessel, ship, barge,
lighter boat, or other mobile floating craft; and this subparagraph
shall apply to all such installations except Marine Service Stations as
covered in paragraph (g) of this section.
(ii)-(iii) [Reserved]
(iv) Design and construction. Substructure and deck shall be
substantially designed for the use intended. Deck may employ any
material which will afford the desired combination of flexibility,
resistance to shock, durability, strength, and fire resistance. Heavy
timber construction is acceptable.
(v) [Reserved]
(vi) Pumps. Loading pumps capable of building up pressures in excess
of the safe working pressure of cargo hose or loading arms shall be
provided with bypasses, relief valves, or other arrangement to protect
the loading facilities against excessive pressure. Relief devices shall
be tested at not more than yearly intervals to determine that they
function satisfactorily at the pressure at which they are set.
(vii) Hoses and couplings. All pressure hoses and couplings shall be
inspected at intervals appropriate to the service. The hose and
couplings shall be tested with the hose extended and using the
``inservice maximum operating pressures.'' Any hose showing material
deteriorations, signs of leakage, or weakness in its carcass or at the
couplings shall be withdrawn from service and repaired or discarded.
(viii) Piping and fittings. Piping, valves, and fittings shall be in
accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, with the following
exceptions and additions:
(a) Flexibility of piping shall be assured by appropriate layout and
arrangement of piping supports so that motion of the wharf structure
resulting from wave action, currents, tides, or the mooring of vessels
will not subject the pipe to repeated strain beyond the elastic limit.
(b) Pipe joints depending upon the friction characteristics of
combustible materials or grooving of pipe ends for
[[Page 263]]
mechanical continuity of piping shall not be used.
(c) Swivel joints may be used in piping to which hoses are
connected, and for articulated swivel-joint transfer systems, provided
that the design is such that the mechanical strength of the joint will
not be impaired if the packing material should fail, as by exposure to
fire.
(d) Piping systems shall contain a sufficient number of valves to
operate the system properly and to control the flow of liquid in normal
operation and in the event of physical damage.
(e) In addition to the requirements of subdivision (d) of this
subdivision, each line conveying flammable liquids leading to a wharf
shall be provided with a readily accessible block valve located on shore
near the approach to the wharf and outside of any diked area. Where more
than one line is involved, the valves shall be grouped in one location.
(f) Means of easy access shall be provided for cargo line valves
located below the wharf deck.
(g) Pipelines on flammable or combustible liquids wharves shall be
adequately bonded and grounded. If excessive stray currents are
encountered, insulating joints shall be installed. Bonding and grounding
connections on all pipelines shall be located on wharfside of hose-riser
insulating flanges, if used, and shall be accessible for inspection.
(h) Hose or articulated swivel-joint pipe connections used for cargo
transfer shall be capable of accommodating the combined effects of
change in draft and maximum tidal range, and mooring lines shall be kept
adjusted to prevent the surge of the vessel from placing stress on the
cargo transfer system.
(i) Hose shall be supported so as to avoid kinking and damage from
chafing.
(ix) Fire protection. Suitable portable fire extinguishers with a
rating of not less than 12-BC shall be located within 75 feet of those
portions of the facility where fires are likely to occur, such as hose
connections, pumps, and separator tanks.
(a) Where piped water is available, ready-connected fire hose in
size appropriate for the water supply shall be provided so that
manifolds where connections are made and broken can be reached by at
least one hose stream.
(b) Material shall not be placed on wharves in such a manner as to
obstruct access to firefighting equipment, or important pipeline control
valves.
(c) Where the wharf is accessible to vehicle traffic, an
unobstructed roadway to the shore end of the wharf shall be maintained
for access of firefighting apparatus.
(x) Operations control. Loading or discharging shall not commence
until the wharf superintendent and officer in charge of the tank vessel
agree that the tank vessel is properly moored and all connections are
properly made. Mechanical work shall not be performed on the wharf
during cargo transfer, except under special authorization based on a
review of the area involved, methods to be employed, and precautions
necessary.
(5) Electrical equipment--(i) Application. This subparagraph shall
apply to areas where Class I liquids are stored or handled. For areas
where Class II or Class III liquids only are stored or handled, the
electrical equipment may be installed in accordance with the provisions
of Subpart S of this part, for ordinary locations.
(ii) Conformance. All electrical equipment and wiring shall be of a
type specified by and shall be installed in accordance with Subpart S of
this part.
(iii) Classification. So far as it applies Table H-18 shall be used
to delineate and classify hazardous areas for the purpose of
installation of electrical equipment under normal circumstances. In
Table H-18 a classified area shall not extend beyond an unpierced wall,
roof, or other solid partition. The area classifications listed shall be
based on the premise that the installation meets the applicable
requirements of this section in all respects.
(6) Sources of ignition. Class I liquids shall not be handled,
drawn, or dispensed where flammable vapors may reach a source of
ignition. Smoking shall be prohibited except in designated localities.
``No Smoking'' signs shall be conspicuously posted where hazard from
flammable liquid vapors is normally present.
[[Page 264]]
(7) Drainage and waste disposal. Provision shall be made to prevent
flammable or combustible liquids which may be spilled at loading or
unloading points from entering public sewers and drainage systems, or
natural waterways. Connection to such sewers, drains, or waterways by
which flammable or combustible liquids might enter shall be provided
with separator boxes or other approved means whereby such entry is
precluded. Crankcase drainings and flammable or combustible liquids
shall not be dumped into sewers, but shall be stored in tanks or tight
drums outside of any building until removed from the premises.
(8) Fire control. Suitable fire-control devices, such as small hose
or portable fire extinguishers, shall be available to locations where
fires are likely to occur. Additional fire-control equipment may be
required where a tank of more than 50,000 gallons individual capacity
contains Class I liquids and where an unusual exposure hazard exists
from surrounding property. Such additional fire-control equipment shall
be sufficient to extinguish a fire in the largest tank. The design and
amount of such equipment shall be in accordance with approved
engineering standards.
(g) Service stations--(1) Storage and handling--(i) General
provisions. (a) Liquids shall be stored in approved closed containers
not exceeding 60 gallons capacity, in tanks located underground, in
tanks in special enclosures as described in paragraph (g)(i) of this
section, or in aboveground tanks as provided for in paragraphs
(g)(4)(ii), (b), (c) and (d) of this section.
(b) Aboveground tanks, located in an adjoining bulk plant, may be
connected by piping to service station underground tanks if, in addition
to valves at aboveground tanks, a valve is also installed within control
of service station personnel.
(c) Apparatus dispensing Class I liquids into the fuel tanks of
motor vehicles of the public shall not be located at a bulk plant unless
separated by a fence or similar barrier from the area in which bulk
operations are conducted.
(d) [Reserved]
(e) The provisions of paragraph (g)(1)(i)(a) of this section shall
not prohibit the dispensing of flammable liquids in the open from a tank
vehicle to a motor vehicle. Such dispensing shall be permitted provided:
(1) The tank vehicle complies with the requirements covered in the
Standard on Tank Vehicles for Flammable Liquids, NFPA 385-1966.
(2) The dispensing is done on premises not open to the public.
(3) [Reserved]
(4) The dispensing hose does not exceed 50 feet in length.
(5) The dispensing nozzle is a listed automatic-closing type without
a latchopen device.
(f) Class I liquids shall not be stored or handled within a building
having a basement or pit into which flammable vapors may travel, unless
such area is provided with ventilation designed to prevent the
accumulation of flammable vapors therein.
(g) [Reserved]
Table H-18--Electrical Equipment Hazardous Areas--Bulk Plants
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Class I
Location Group D Extent of classified area
division
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tank vehicle and tank car:
\1\
Loading through open dome.. 1 Within 3 feet of edge of
dome, extending in all
directions.
2 Area between 3 feet and 5
feet from edge of dome,
extending in all directions.
Loading through bottom 1 Within 3 feet of point of
connections with venting to atmosphere
atmospheric venting. extending in all directions.
2 Area between 3 feet and 5
feet from point of venting
to atmosphere, extending in
all directions. Also up to
18 inches above grade within
a horizontal radius of 10
feet from point of loading
connection.
Loading through closed dome 1 Within 3 feet of open end of
with atmospheric venting. 2 vent, extending in all
directions.
Area between 3 feet and 5
feet from open end of vent,
extending in all directions.
Also within 3 feet of edge
of dome, extending in all
directions.
[[Page 265]]
Loading through closed dome 2 Within 3 feet of point of
with vapor recovery. connection of both fill and
vapor lines, extending in
all directions.
Bottom loading with vapor 2 Within 3 feet of point of
recovery or any bottom connections extending in all
unloading. directions. Also up to 18
inches above grade with in a
horizontal radius of 10 feet
from point of connection.
Drum and container filling:
Outdoors, or indoors with 1 Within 3 feet of vent and
adequate ventilation. fill opening, extending in
all directions.
2 Area between 3 feet and 5
feet from vent or fill
opening, extending in all
directions. Also up to 18
inches above floor or grade
level within a horizontal
radius of 10 feet from vent
or fill opening.
Outdoors, or indoors with 1 Within 3 feet of vent and
adequate ventilation. fill opening, extending in
all directions.
2 Area between 3 feet and 5
feet from vent or fill
opening, extending in all
directions. Also up to 18
inches above floor or grade
level within a horizontal
radius of 10 feet from vent
or fill opening.
Tank--Aboveground:
Shell, ends, or roof and 2 Within 10 feet from shell,
dike area. ends, or roof of tank, Area
inside dikes to level of top
of dike.
Vent....................... 1 Within 5 feet of open end of
vent, extending in all
directions.
2 Area between 5 feet and 10
feet from open end of vent,
extending in all directions.
Floating roof.............. 1 Area above the roof and
within the shell.
Pits:
Without mechanical 1 Entire area within pit if any
ventilation. part is within a Division 1
or 2 classified area.
With mechanical ventilation 2 Entire area within pit if any
part is within a Division 1
or 2 classified area.
Containing valves, fittings 2 Entire pit.
or piping, and not within
a Division 1 or 2
classified area.
Pumps, bleeders, withdrawal
fittings, meters and similar
devices:
Indoors.................... 2 Within 5 feet of any edge of
such devices, extending in
all directions. Also up to 3
feet above floor or grade
level within 25 feet
horizontally from any edge
of such devices.
Outdoors................... 2 Within 3 feet of any edge of
such devices, extending in
all directions. Also up to
18 inches above grade level
within 10 feet horizontally
from any edge of such
devices.
Storage and repair garage 1 All pits or spaces below
for tank vehicles. floor level.
2 Area up to 18 inches above
floor or grade level for
entire storage or repair
garage.
Drainage ditches, 2 Area up to 18 inches above
separators, impounding ditch, separator or basin.
basins. Also up to 18 inches above
grade within 15 feet
horizontally from any edge.
Garages for other than tank (\2\ ) If there is any opening to
vehicles. these rooms within the
extent of an outdoor
classified area, the entire
room shall be classified the
same as the area
classification at the point
of the opening.
Outdoor drum storage....... (\2\ )
Indoor warehousing where (\2\ ) If there is any opening to
there is no flammable these rooms within the
liquid transfer. extent of an indoor
classified are, the room
shall be classified the same
as if the wall, curb or
partition did not exist.
Office and rest rooms...... (\2\ )
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ When classifying the extent of the area, consideration shall be
given to the fact that tank cars or tank vehicles may be spotted at
varying points. Therefore, the extremities of the loading or unloading
positions shall be used.
\2\ Ordinary.
(ii) Special enclosures. (a) When installation of tanks in
accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section is impractical because
of property or building limitations, tanks for flammable or combustible
liquids may be installed in buildings if properly enclosed.
(b) The enclosure shall be substantially liquid and vaportight
without backfill. Sides, top, and bottom of the enclosure shall be of
reinforced concrete at least 6 inches thick, with openings for
inspection through the top only. Tank connections shall be so
[[Page 266]]
piped or closed that neither vapors nor liquid can escape into the
enclosed space. Means shall be provided whereby portable equipment may
be employed to discharge to the outside any liquid or vapors which might
accumulate should leakage occur.
(iii) Inside buildings. (a) Except where stored in tanks as provided
in subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph, no Class I liquids shall be
stored within any service station building except in closed containers
of aggregate capacity not exceeding 60 gallons. One container not
exceeding 60 gallons capacity equipped with an approved pump is
permitted.
(b) Class I liquids may be transferred from one container to another
in lubrication or service rooms of a service station building provided
the electrical installation complies with Table H-19 and provided that
any heating equipment complies with subparagraph (6) of this paragraph.
(c) Class II and Class III liquids may be stored and dispensed
inside service station buildings from tanks of not more than 120 gallons
capacity each.
(iv) [Reserved]
(v) Dispensing into portable containers. No delivery of any Class I
liquids shall be made into portable containers unless the container is
constructed of metal, has a tight closure with screwed or spring cover,
and is fitted with a spout or so designed that the contents can be
poured without spilling.
(2) [Reserved]
(3) Dispensing systems--(i) Location. Dispensing devices at
automotive service stations shall be so located that all parts of the
vehicle being served will be on the premises of the service station.
(ii) Inside location. Approved dispensing units may be located
inside of buildings. The dispensing area shall be separated from other
areas in an approved manner. The dispensing unit and its piping shall be
mounted either on a concrete island or protected against collision
damage by suitable means and shall be located in a position where it
cannot be struck by a vehicle descending a ramp or other slope out of
control. The dispensing area shall be provided with an approved
mechanical or gravity ventilation system. When dispensing units are
located below grade, only approved mechanical ventilation shall be used
and the entire dispensing area shall be protected by an approved
automatic sprinkler system. Ventilating systems shall be electrically
interlocked with gasoline dispensing units so that the dispensing units
cannot be operated unless the ventilating fan motors are energized.
(iii) Emergency power cutoff. A clearly identified and easily
accessible switch(es) or a circuit breaker(s) shall be provided at a
location remote from dispensing devices, including remote pumping
systems, to shut off the power to all dispensing devices in the event of
an emergency.
(iv) Dispensing units. (a) Class I liquids shall be transferred from
tanks by means of fixed pumps so designed and equipped as to allow
control of the flow and to prevent leakage or accidental discharge.
(b)(1) Only listed devices may be used for dispensing Class I
liquids. No such device may be used if it shows evidence of having been
dismantled.
(2) Every dispensing device for Class I liquids installed after
December 31, 1978, shall contain evidence of listing so placed that any
attempt to dismantle the device will result in damage to such evidence,
visible without disassembly or dismounting of the nozzle.
(c) Class I liquids shall not be dispensed by pressure from drums,
barrels, and similar containers. Approved pumps taking suction through
the top of the container or approved self-closing faucets shall be used.
(d) The dispensing units, except those attached to containers, shall
be mounted either on a concrete island or protected against collision
damage by suitable means.
(v) Remote pumping systems.
(a) This subdivision shall apply to systems for dispensing Class I
liquids where such liquids are transferred from storage to individual or
multiple dispensing units by pumps located elsewhere than at the
dispensing units.
(b) Pumps shall be designed or equipped so that no part of the
system will be subjected to pressures above its allowable working
pressure. Pumps installed above grade, outside of buildings, shall be
located not less than 10
[[Page 267]]
feet from lines of adjoining property which may be built upon, and not
less than 5 feet from any building opening. When an outside pump
location is impractical, pumps may be installed inside of buildings, as
provided for dispensers in subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph, or in
pits as provided in subdivision (c) of this subdivision. Pumps shall be
substantially anchored and protected against physical damage by
vehicles.
(c) Pits for subsurface pumps or piping manifolds of submersible
pumps shall withstand the external forces to which they may be subjected
without damage to the pump, tank, or piping. The pit shall be no larger
than necessary for inspection and maintenance and shall be provided with
a fitted cover.
(d) A control shall be provided that will permit the pump to operate
only when a dispensing nozzle is removed from its bracket on the
dispensing unit and the switch on this dispensing unit is manually
actuated. This control shall also stop the pump when all nozzles have
been returned to their brackets.
(e) An approved impact valve, incorporating a fusible link, designed
to close automatically in the event of severe impact or fire exposure
shall be properly installed in the dispensing supply line at the base of
each individual dispensing device.
(f) Testing. After the completion of the installation, including any
paving, that section of the pressure piping system between the pump
discharge and the connection for the dispensing facility shall be tested
for at least 30 minutes at the maximum operating pressure of the system.
Such tests shall be repeated at 5-year intervals thereafter.
(vi) Delivery nozzles. (a) A listed manual or automatic-closing type
hose nozzle valve shall be provided on dispensers used for the
dispensing of Class I liquids.
(b) Manual-closing type valves shall be held open manually during
dispensing. Automatic-closing type valves may be used in conjunction
with an approved latch-open device.
(4) Marine service stations--(i) Dispensing. (a) The dispensing area
shall be located away from other structures so as to provide room for
safe ingress and egress of craft to be fueled. Dispensing units shall in
all cases be at least 20 feet from any activity involving fixed sources
of ignition.
(b) Dispensing shall be by approved dispensing units with or without
integral pumps and may be located on open piers, wharves, or floating
docks or on shore or on piers of the solid fill type.
(c) Dispensing nozzles shall be automatic-closing without a hold-
open latch.
(ii) Tanks and pumps. (a) Tanks, and pumps not integral with the
dispensing unit, shall be on shore or on a pier of the solid fill type,
except as provided in paragraphs (g)(4)(ii) (b) and (c) of this section.
(b) Where shore location would require excessively long supply lines
to dispensers, tanks may be installed on a pier provided that applicable
portions of paragraph (b) of this section relative to spacing, diking,
and piping are complied with and the quantity so stored does not exceed
1,100 gallons aggregate capacity.
(c) Shore tanks supplying marine service stations may be located
above ground, where rock ledges or high water table make underground
tanks impractical.
(d) Where tanks are at an elevation which would produce gravity head
on the dispensing unit, the tank outlet shall be equipped with a
pressure control valve positioned adjacent to and outside the tank block
valve specified in paragraph (b)(2)(ix)(b) of this section, so adjusted
that liquid cannot flow by gravity from the tank in case of piping or
hose failure.
(iii) Piping. (a) Piping between shore tanks and dispensing units
shall be as described in paragraph (c) of this section, except that,
where dispensing is from a floating structure, suitable lengths of oil-
resistant flexible hose may be employed between the shore piping and the
piping on the floating structure as made necessary by change in water
level or shoreline.
[[Page 268]]
Table H-19--Electrical Equipment Hazardous Areas--Service Stations
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Class I
Location Group D Extent of classified area
division
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Underground tank:
Fill opening............... 1 Any pit, box or space below
grade level, any part of
which is within the Division
1 or 2 classified area.
2 Up to 18 inches above grade
level within a horizontal
radius of 10 feet from a
loose fill connection and
within a horizontal radius
of 5 feet from a tight fill
connection.
Vent--Discharging upward... 1 Within 3 feet of open end of
vent, extending in all
directions.
2 Area between 3 feet and 5
feet of open end of vent,
extending in all directions.
Dispenser:
Pits....................... 1 Any pit, box or space below
grade level, any part of
which is within the Division
1 or 2 classified area.
Dispenser enclosure........ 1 The area 4 feet vertically
above base within the
enclosure and 18 inches
horizontally in all
directions.
Outdoor.................... 2 Up to 18 inches above grade
level within 20 feet
horizontally of any edge of
enclosure.
Indoor:
With mechanical ventilation 2 Up to 18 inches above grade
or floor level within 20
feet horizontally of any
edge of enclosure.
With gravity ventilation... 2 Up to 18 inches above grade
or floor level within 25
feet horizontally of any
edge of enclosure.
Remote pump--Outdoor....... 1 Any pit, box or space below
grade level if any part is
within a horizontal distance
of 10 feet from any edge of
pump.
2 Within 3 feet of any edge of
pump, extending in all
directions. Also up to 18
inches above grade level
within 10 feet horizontally
from any edge of pump.
Remote pump--Indoor........ 1 Entire area within any pit.
2 Within 5 feet of any edge of
pump, extending in all
directions. Also up to 3
feet above floor or grade
level within 25 feet
horizontally from any edge
of pump.
Lubrication or service room 1 Entire area within any pit.
2 Area up to 18 inches above
floor or grade level within
entire lubrication room.
Dispenser for Class I 2 Within 3 feet of any fill or
liquids. dispensing point, extending
in all directions.
Special enclosure inside 1 Entire enclosure.
building per Sec. 1910.-
106(f)(1)(ii).
Sales, storage and rest (\1\ ) If there is any opening to
rooms. these rooms within the
extent of a Division 1 area,
the entire room shall be
classified as Division 1.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Ordinary.
(b) A readily accessible valve to shut off the supply from shore
shall be provided in each pipeline at or near the approach to the pier
and at the shore end of each pipeline adjacent to the point where
flexible hose is attached.
(c) Piping shall be located so as to be protected from physical
damage.
(d) Piping handling Class I liquids shall be grounded to control
stray currents.
(5) Electrical equipment--(i) Application. This subparagraph shall
apply to areas where Class I liquids are stored or handled. For areas
where Class II or Class III liquids are stored or handled the electrical
equipment may be installed in accordance with the provisions of subpart
S of this part, for ordinary locations.
(ii) All electrical equipment and wiring shall be of a type
specified by and shall be installed in accordance with subpart S of this
part.
(iii) So far as it applies. Table H-19 shall be used to delineate
and classify hazardous areas for the purpose of installation of
electrical equipment under normal circumstances. A classified area shall
not extend beyond an unpierced wall, roof, or other solid partition.
(iv) The area classifications listed shall be based on the
assumption that the installation meets the applicable requirements of
this section in all respects.
[[Page 269]]
(6) Heating equipment--(i) Conformance. Heating equipment shall be
installed as provided in paragraphs (g)(6) (ii) through (v) of this
section.
(ii) Application. Heating equipment may be installed in the
conventional manner in an area except as provided in paragraph (g)(6)
(iii), (iv), or (v) of this section.
(iii) Special room. Heating equipment may be installed in a special
room separated from an area classified by Table H-19 by walls having a
fire resistance rating of at least 1 hour and without any openings in
the walls within 8 feet of the floor into an area classified in Table H-
19. This room shall not be used for combustible storage and all air for
combustion purposes shall come from outside the building.
(iv) Work areas. Heating equipment using gas or oil fuel may be
installed in the lubrication, sales, or service room where there is no
dispensing or transferring of Class I liquids provided the bottom of the
combustion chamber is at least 18 inches above the floor and the heating
equipment is protected from physical damage by vehicles. Heating
equipment using gas or oil fuel listed for use in garages may be
installed in the lubrication or service room where Class I liquids are
dispensed provided the equipment is installed at least 8 feet above the
floor.
(v) Electric heat. Electrical heating equipment shall conform to
paragraph (g)(5) of this section.
(7) Drainage and waste disposal. Provision shall be made in the area
where Class I liquids are dispensed to prevent spilled liquids from
flowing into the interior of service station buildings. Such provision
may be by grading driveways, raising door sills, or other equally
effective means. Crankcase drainings and flammable or combustible
liquids shall not be dumped into sewers but shall be stored in tanks or
drums outside of any building until removed from the premises.
(8) Sources of ignition. In addition to the previous restrictions of
this paragraph, the following shall apply: There shall be no smoking or
open flames in the areas used for fueling, servicing fuel systems for
internal combustion engines, receiving or dispensing of flammable or
combustible liquids. Conspicuous and legible signs prohibiting smoking
shall be posted within sight of the customer being served. The motors of
all equipment being fueled shall be shut off during the fueling
operation.
(9) Fire control. Each service station shall be provided with at
least one fire extinguisher having a minimum approved classification of
6 B, C, located so that an extinguisher, will be within 75 feet of each
pump, dispenser, underground fill pipe opening, and lubrication or
service room.
(h) Processing plants--(1) Scope. This paragraph shall apply to
those plants or buildings which contain chemical operations such as
oxidation, reduction, halogenation, hydrogenation, alkylation,
polymerization, and other chemical processes but shall not apply to
chemical plants, refineries or distilleries.
(2) Location--(i) Classification. The location of each processing
vessel shall be based upon its flammable or combustible liquid capacity.
(ii) [Reserved]
(3) Processing building--(i) Construction. (a) Processing buildings
shall be of fire-resistance or noncombustible construction, except heavy
timber construction with load-bearing walls may be permitted for plants
utilizing only stable Class II or Class III liquids. Except as provided
in paragraph (h)(2)(ii) of this section or in the case of explosion
resistant walls used in conjunction with explosion relieving facilities,
see paragraph (h)(3)(iv) of this section, load-bearing walls are
prohibited. Buildings shall be without basements or covered pits.
(b) Areas shall have adequate exit facilities arranged to prevent
occupants from being trapped in the event of fire. Exits shall not be
exposed by the drainage facilities described in paragraph (h)(ii) of
this section.
(ii) Drainage. (a) Emergency drainage systems shall be provided to
direct flammable or combustible liquid leakage and fire protection water
to a safe location. This may require curbs, scuppers, or special
drainage systems to control the spread of fire, see paragraph
(b)(2)(vii)(b) of this section.
[[Page 270]]
(b) Emergency drainage systems, if connected to public sewers or
discharged into public waterways, shall be equipped with traps or
separators.
(iii) Ventilation. (a) Enclosed processing buildings shall be
ventilated at a rate of not less than 1 cubic foot per minute per square
foot of solid floor area. This shall be accomplished by natural or
mechanical ventilation with discharge or exhaust to a safe location
outside of the building. Provisions shall be made for introduction of
makeup air in such a manner as not to short circuit the ventilation.
Ventilation shall be arranged to include all floor areas or pits where
flammable vapors may collect.
(b) Equipment used in a building and the ventilation of the building
shall be designed so as to limit flammable vapor-air mixtures under
normal operating conditions to the interior of equipment, and to not
more than 5 feet from equipment which exposes Class I liquids to the
air. Examples of such equipment are dispensing stations, open
centrifuges, plate and frame filters, open vacuum filters, and surfaces
of open equipment.
(iv) Explosion relief. Areas where Class IA or unstable liquids are
processed shall have explosion venting through one or more of the
following methods:
(a) Open air construction.
(b) Lightweight walls and roof.
(c) Lightweight wall panels and roof hatches.
(d) Windows of explosion venting type.
(4) Liquid handling--(i) Storage. (a) The storage of flammable or
combustible liquids in tanks shall be in accordance with the applicable
provisions of paragraph (b) of this section.
(b) If the storage of flammable or combustible liquids in outside
aboveground or underground tanks is not practical because of temperature
or production considerations, tanks may be permitted inside of buildings
or structures in accordance with the applicable provisions of paragraph
(b) of this section.
(c) Storage tanks inside of buildings shall be permitted only in
areas at or above grade which have adequate drainage and are separated
from the processing area by construction having a fire resistance rating
of at least 2 hours.
(d) The storage of flammable or combustible liquids in containers
shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of paragraph (d)
of this section.
(ii) Piping, valves, and fittings. (a) Piping, valves, and fittings
shall be in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.
(b) Approved flexible connectors may be used where vibration exists
or where frequent movement is necessary. Approved hose may be used at
transfer stations.
(c) Piping containing flammable or combustible liquids shall be
identified.
(iii) Transfer. (a) The transfer of large quantities of flammable or
combustible liquids shall be through piping by means of pumps or water
displacement. Except as required in process equipment, gravity flow
shall not be used. The use of compressed air as a transferring medium is
prohibited.
(b) Positive displacement pumps shall be provided with pressure
relief discharging back to the tank or to pump suction.
(iv) Equipment. (a) Equipment shall be designed and arranged to
prevent the unintentional escape of liquids and vapors and to minimize
the quantity escaping in the event of accidental release.
(b) Where the vapor space of equipment is usually within the
flammable range, the probability of explosion damage to the equipment
can be limited by inerting, by providing an explosion suppression
system, or by designing the equipment to contain the peak explosion
pressure which may be modified by explosion relief. Where the special
hazards of operation, sources of ignition, or exposures indicate a need,
consideration shall be given to providing protection by one or more of
the above means.
(5) Tank vehicle and tank car loading and unloading. Tank vehicle
and tank car loading or unloading facilities shall be separated from
aboveground tanks, warehouses, other plant buildings, or nearest line of
adjoining property which may be built upon by a distance of 25 feet for
Class I liquids and 15 feet for Class II and Class III liquids measured
from the nearest position of any
[[Page 271]]
fill stem. Buildings for pumps or shelters for personnel may be a part
of the facility. Operations of the facility shall comply with the
appropriate portions of paragraph (f)(3) of this section.
(6) Fire control--(i) Portable extinguishers. Approved portable fire
extinguishers of appropriate size, type, and number shall be provided.
(ii) Other controls. Where the special hazards of operation or
exposure indicate a need, the following fire control provision shall be
provided.
(a) A reliable water supply shall be available in pressure and
quantity adequate to meet the probable fire demands.
(b) Hydrants shall be provided in accordance with accepted good
practice.
(c) Hose connected to a source of water shall be installed so that
all vessels, pumps, and other equipment containing flammable or
combustible liquids can be reached with at least one hose stream.
Nozzles that are capable of discharging a water spray shall be provided.
(d) Processing plants shall be protected by an approved automatic
sprinkler system or equivalent extinguishing system. If special
extinguishing systems including but not limited to those employing foam,
carbon dioxide, or dry chemical are provided, approved equipment shall
be used and installed in an approved manner.
(iii) Alarm systems. An approved means for prompt notification of
fire to those within the plant and any public fire department available
shall be provided. It may be advisable to connect the plant system with
the public system where public fire alarm system is available.
(iv) Maintenance. All plant fire protection facilities shall be
adequately maintained and periodically inspected and tested to make sure
they are always in satisfactory operating condition and that they will
serve their purpose in time of emergency.
(7) Sources of ignition--(i) General. (a) Precautions shall be taken
to prevent the ignition of flammable vapors. Sources of ignition include
but are not limited to open flames; lightning; smoking; cutting and
welding; hot surfaces; frictional heat; static, electrical, and
mechanical sparks; spontaneous ignition, including heat-producing
chemical reactions; and radiant heat.
(b) Class I liquids shall not be dispensed into containers unless
the nozzle and container are electrically interconnected. Where the
metallic floorplate on which the container stands while filling is
electrically connected to the fill stem or where the fill stem is bonded
to the container during filling operations by means of a bond wire, the
provisions of this section shall be deemed to have been complied with.
(ii) Maintenance and repair. (a) When necessary to do maintenance
work in a flammable or combustible liquid processing area, the work
shall be authorized by a responsible representative of the employer.
(b) Hot work, such as welding or cutting operations, use of spark-
producing power tools, and chipping operations shall be permitted only
under supervision of an individual in responsible charge who shall make
an inspection of the area to be sure that it is safe for the work to be
done and that safe procedures will be followed for the work specified.
(iii) Electrical. (a) All electric wiring and equipment shall be
installed in accordance with subpart S of this part.
(b) Locations where flammable vapor-air mixtures may exist under
normal operations shall be classified Class I, Division 1 according to
the requirements of subpart S of this part. For those pieces of
equipment installed in accordance with paragraph (h)(3)(iii)(b) of this
section, the Division 1 area shall extend 5 feet in all directions from
all points of vapor liberation. All areas within pits shall be
classified Division 1 if any part of the pit is within a Division 1 or 2
classified area, unless the pit is provided with mechanical ventilation.
(c) Locations where flammable vapor-air mixtures may exist under
abnormal conditions and for a distance beyond Division 1 locations shall
be classified Division 2 according to the requirements of subpart S of
this part. These locations include an area within 20 feet horizontally,
3 feet vertically beyond a Division 1 area, and up to 3 feet above
[[Page 272]]
floor or grade level within 25 feet, if indoors, or 10 feet if outdoors,
from any pump, bleeder, withdrawal fitting, meter, or similar device
handling Class I liquids. Pits provided with adequate mechanical
ventilation within a Division 1 or 2 area shall be classified Division
2. If Class II or Class III liquids only are handled, then ordinary
electrical equipment is satisfactory though care shall be used in
locating electrical apparatus to prevent hot metal from falling into
open equipment.
(d) Where the provisions of paragraphs (h)(7)(iii) (a), (b), and (c)
of this section require the installation of explosion-proof equipment,
ordinary electrical equipment including switchgear may be used if
installed in a room or enclosure which is maintained under positive
pressure with respect to the hazardous area. Ventilation makeup air
shall be uncontaminated by flammable vapors.
(8) Housekeeping--(i) General. Maintenance and operating practices
shall be in accordance with established procedures which will tend to
control leakage and prevent the accidental escape of flammable or
combustible liquids. Spills shall be cleaned up promptly.
(ii) Access. Adequate aisles shall be maintained for unobstructed
movement of personnel and so that fire protection equipment can be
brought to bear on any part of the processing equipment.
(iii) Waste and residues. Combustible waste material and residues in
a building or operating area shall be kept to a minimum, stored in
closed metal waste cans, and disposed of daily.
(iv) Clear zone. Ground area around buildings and operating areas
shall be kept free of tall grass, weeds, trash, or other combustible
materials.
(i) Refineries, chemical plants, and distilleries--(1) Storage
tanks. Flammable or combustible liquids shall be stored in tanks, in
containers, or in portable tanks. Tanks shall be installed in accordance
with paragraph (b) of this section. Tanks for the storage of flammable
or combustible liquids in tank farms and in locations other than process
areas shall be located in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) (i) and (ii)
of this section.
(2) Wharves. Wharves handling flammable or combustible liquids shall
be in accordance with paragraph (f)(4) of this section.
(3) Fired and unfired pressure vessels--(i) Fired vessels. Fired
pressure vessels shall be constructed in accordance with the Code for
Fired Pressure Vessels, Section I of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code--1968.
(ii) Unfired vessels shall be constructed in accordance with the
Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code--1968.
(4) Location of process units. Process units shall be located so
that they are accessible from at least one side for the purpose of fire
control.
(5) Fire control--(i) Portable equipment. Portable fire
extinguishment and control equipment shall be provided in such
quantities and types as are needed for the special hazards of operation
and storage.
(ii) Water supply. Water shall be available in volume and at
adequate pressure to supply water hose streams, foam producing
equipment, automatic sprinklers, or water spray systems as the need is
indicated by the special hazards of operation and storage.
(iii) Special equipment. Special extinguishing equipment such as
that utilizing foam, inert gas, or dry chemical shall be provided as the
need is indicated by the special hazards of operation and storage.
(j) Scope. This section applies to the handling, storage, and use of
flammable and combustible liquids with a flashpoint below 200 deg.F.
This section does not apply to:
(1) Bulk transportation of flammable and combustible liquids;
(2) Storage, handling, and use of fuel oil tanks and containers
connected with oil burning equipment;
(3) Storage of flammable and combustible liquids on farms;
(4) Liquids without flashpoints that may be flammable under some
conditions, such as certain halogenated hydrocarbons and mixtures
containing halogenated hydrocarbons;
(5) Mists, sprays, or foams, except flammable aerosols covered in
paragraph (d) of this section; or
[[Page 273]]
(6) Installations made in accordance with requirements of the
following standards that are incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6:
(i) National Fire Protection Association Standard for Drycleaning
Plants, NFPA No. 32-1970;
(ii) National Fire Protection Association Standard for the
Manufacture of Organic Coatings, NFPA No. 35-1970;
(iii) National Fire Protection Association Standard for Solvent
Extraction Plants, NFPA No. 36-1967; or
(iv) National Fire Protection Association Standard for the
Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines,
NFPA No. 37-1970.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 3982, Jan. 27, 1975; 40
FR 23743, June 2, 1975; 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51759, Nov. 7,
1978; 47 FR 39164, Sept. 7, 1982; 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR
12121, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7,
1996]
Sec. 1910.107 Spray finishing using flammable and combustible materials.
(a) Definitions applicable to this section--(1) Aerated solid
powders. Aerated powders shall mean any powdered material used as a
coating material which shall be fluidized within a container by passing
air uniformly from below. It is common practice to fluidize such
materials to form a fluidized powder bed and then dip the part to be
coated into the bed in a manner similar to that used in liquid dipping.
Such beds are also used as sources for powder spray operations.
(2) Spraying area. Any area in which dangerous quantities of
flammable vapors or mists, or combustible residues, dusts, or deposits
are present due to the operation of spraying processes.
(3) Spray booth. A power-ventilated structure provided to enclose or
accommodate a spraying operation to confine and limit the escape of
spray, vapor, and residue, and to safely conduct or direct them to an
exhaust system.
(4) Waterwash spray booth. A spray booth equipped with a water
washing system designed to minimize dusts or residues entering exhaust
ducts and to permit the recovery of overspray finishing material.
(5) Dry spray booth. A spray booth not equipped with a water washing
system as described in subparagraph (4) of this paragraph. A dry spray
booth may be equipped with (i) distribution or baffle plates to promote
an even flow of air through the booth or cause the deposit of overspray
before it enters the exhaust duct; or (ii) overspray dry filters to
minimize dusts; or (iii) overspray dry filters to minimize dusts or
residues entering exhaust ducts; or (iv) overspray dry filter rolls
designed to minimize dusts or residues entering exhaust ducts; or (v)
where dry powders are being sprayed, with powder collection systems so
arranged in the exhaust to capture oversprayed material.
(6) Fluidized bed. A container holding powder coating material which
is aerated from below so as to form an air-supported expanded cloud of
such material through which the preheated object to be coated is
immersed and transported.
(7) Electrostatic fluidized bed. A container holding powder coating
material which is aerated from below so as to form an air-supported
expanded cloud of such material which is electrically charged with a
charge opposite to the charge of the object to be coated; such object is
transported, through the container immediately above the charged and
aerated materials in order to be coated.
(8) Approved. Shall mean approved and listed by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory. Refer to Sec. 1910.7 for definition of
nationally recognized testing laboratory.
(9) Listed. See ``approved'' in Sec. 1910.107(a)(8).
(b) Spray booths--(1) Construction. Spray booths shall be
substantially constructed of steel, securely and rigidly supported, or
of concrete or masonry except that aluminum or other substantial
noncombustible material may be used for intermittent or low volume
spraying. Spray booths shall be designed to sweep air currents toward
the exhaust outlet.
(2) Interiors. The interior surfaces of spray booths shall be smooth
and continuous without edges and otherwise designed to prevent pocketing
of residues and facilitate cleaning and washing without injury.
(3) Floors. The floor surface of a spray booth and operator's
working area, if
[[Page 274]]
combustible, shall be covered with noncombustible material of such
character as to facilitate the safe cleaning and removal of residues.
(4) Distribution or baffle plates. Distribution or baffle plates, if
installed to promote an even flow of air through the booth or cause the
deposit of overspray before it enters the exhaust duct, shall be of
noncombustible material and readily removable or accessible on both
sides for cleaning. Such plates shall not be located in exhaust ducts.
(5) Dry type overspray collectors--(exhaust air filters). In
conventional dry type spray booths, overspray dry filters or filter
rolls, if installed, shall conform to the following:
(i) The spraying operations except electrostatic spraying operations
shall be so designed, installed and maintained that the average air
velocity over the open face of the booth (or booth cross section during
spraying operations) shall be not less than 100 linear feet per minute.
Electrostatic spraying operations may be conducted with an air velocity
over the open face of the booth of not less than 60 linear feet per
minute, or more, depending on the volume of the finishing material being
applied and its flammability and explosion characteristics. Visible
gauges or audible alarm or pressure activated devices shall be installed
to indicate or insure that the required air velocity is maintained.
Filter rolls shall be inspected to insure proper replacement of filter
media.
(ii) All discarded filter pads and filter rolls shall be immediately
removed to a safe, well-detached location or placed in a water-filled
metal container and disposed of at the close of the day's operation
unless maintained completely in water.
(iii) The location of filters in a spray booth shall be so as to not
reduce the effective booth enclosure of the articles being sprayed.
(iv) Space within the spray booth on the downstream and upstream
sides of filters shall be protected with approved automatic sprinklers.
(v) Filters or filter rolls shall not be used when applying a spray
material known to be highly susceptible to spontaneous heating and
ignition.
(vi) Clean filters or filter rolls shall be noncombustible or of a
type having a combustibility not in excess of class 2 filters as listed
by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Filters and filter rolls shall not
be alternately used for different types of coating materials, where the
combination of materials may be conducive to spontaneous ignition. See
also paragraph (g)(6) of this section.
(6) Frontal area. Each spray booth having a frontal area larger than
9 square feet shall have a metal deflector or curtain not less than 2\1/
2\ inches deep installed at the upper outer edge of the booth over the
opening.
(7) Conveyors. Where conveyors are arranged to carry work into or
out of spray booths, the openings therefor shall be as small as
practical.
(8) Separation of operations. Each spray booth shall be separated
from other operations by not less than 3 feet, or by a greater distance,
or by such partition or wall as to reduce the danger from juxtaposition
of hazardous operations. See also paragraph (c)(1) of this section.
(9) Cleaning. Spray booths shall be so installed that all portions
are readily accessible for cleaning. A clear space of not less than 3
feet on all sides shall be kept free from storage or combustible
construction.
(10) Illumination. When spraying areas are illuminated through glass
panels or other transparent materials, only fixed lighting units shall
be used as a source of illumination. Panels shall effectively isolate
the spraying area from the area in which the lighting unit is located,
and shall be of a noncombustible material of such a nature or so
protected that breakage will be unlikely. Panels shall be so arranged
that normal accumulations of residue on the exposed surface of the panel
will not be raised to a dangerous temperature by radiation or conduction
from the source of illumination.
(c) Electrical and other sources of ignition--(1) Conformance. All
electrical equipment, open flames and other sources of ignition shall
conform to the requirements of this paragraph, except as follows:
[[Page 275]]
(i) Electrostatic apparatus shall conform to the requirements of
paragraphs (h) and (i) of this section;
(ii) Drying, curing, and fusion apparatus shall conform to the
requirements of paragraph (j) of this section;
(iii) Automobile undercoating spray operations in garages shall
conform to the requirements of paragraph (k) of this section;
(iv) Powder coating equipment shall conform to the requirements of
paragraph (c)(1) of this section.
(2) Minimum separation. There shall be no open flame or spark
producing equipment in any spraying area nor within 20 feet thereof,
unless separated by a partition.
(3) Hot surfaces. Space-heating appliances, steampipes, or hot
surfaces shall not be located in a spraying area where deposits of
combustible residues may readily accumulate.
(4) Wiring conformance. Electrical wiring and equipment shall
conform to the provisions of this paragraph and shall otherwise be in
accordance with subpart S of this part.
(5) Combustible residues, areas. Unless specifically approved for
locations containing both deposits of readily ignitable residue and
explosive vapors, there shall be no electrical equipment in any spraying
area, whereon deposits of combustible residues may readily accumulate,
except wiring in rigid conduit or in boxes or fittings containing no
taps, splices, or terminal connections.
(6) Wiring type approved. Electrical wiring and equipment not
subject to deposits of combustible residues but located in a spraying
area as herein defined shall be of explosion-proof type approved for
Class I, group D locations and shall otherwise conform to the provisions
of subpart S of this part, for Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Locations.
Electrical wiring, motors, and other equipment outside of but within
twenty (20) feet of any spraying area, and not separated therefrom by
partitions, shall not produce sparks under normal operating conditions
and shall otherwise conform to the provisions of subpart S of this part
for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations.
(7) Lamps. Electric lamps outside of, but within twenty (20) feet of
any spraying area, and not separated therefrom by a partition, shall be
totally enclosed to prevent the falling of hot particles and shall be
protected from mechanical injury by suitable guards or by location.
(8) Portable lamps. Portable electric lamps shall not be used in any
spraying area during spraying operations. Portable electric lamps, if
used during cleaning or repairing operations, shall be of the type
approved for hazardous Class I locations.
(9) Grounding. (i) All metal parts of spray booths, exhaust ducts,
and piping systems conveying flammable or combustible liquids or aerated
solids shall be properly electrically grounded in an effective and
permanent manner.
(ii) [Reserved]
(d) Ventilation--(1) Conformance. Ventilating and exhaust systems
shall be in accordance with the Standard for Blower and Exhaust Systems
for Vapor Removal, NFPA No. 91-1961, which is incorporated by reference
as specified in Sec. 1910.6, where applicable and shall also conform to
the provisions of this section.
(2) General. All spraying areas shall be provided with mechanical
ventilation adequate to remove flammable vapors, mists, or powders to a
safe location and to confine and control combustible residues so that
life is not endangered. Mechanical ventilation shall be kept in
operation at all times while spraying operations are being conducted and
for a sufficient time thereafter to allow vapors from drying coated
articles and drying finishing material residue to be exhausted.
(3) Independent exhaust. Each spray booth shall have an independent
exhaust duct system discharging to the exterior of the building, except
that multiple cabinet spray booths in which identical spray finishing
material is used with a combined frontal area of not more than 18 square
feet may have a common exhaust. If more than one fan serves one booth,
all fans shall be so interconnected that one fan cannot operate without
all fans being operated.
(4) Fan-rotating element. The fan-rotating element shall be
nonferrous or nonsparking or the casing shall consist of or be lined
with such material.
[[Page 276]]
There shall be ample clearance between the fan-rotating element and the
fan casing to avoid a fire by friction, necessary allowance being made
for ordinary expansion and loading to prevent contact between moving
parts and the duct or fan housing. Fan blades shall be mounted on a
shaft sufficiently heavy to maintain perfect alignment even when the
blades of the fan are heavily loaded, the shaft preferably to have
bearings outside the duct and booth. All bearings shall be of the self-
lubricating type, or lubricated from the outside duct.
(5) Electric motors. Electric motors driving exhaust fans shall not
be placed inside booths or ducts. See also paragraph (c) of this
section.
(6) Belts. Belts shall not enter the duct or booth unless the belt
and pulley within the duct or booth are thoroughly enclosed.
(7) Exhaust ducts. Exhaust ducts shall be constructed of steel and
shall be substantially supported. Exhaust ducts without dampers are
preferred; however, if dampers are installed, they shall be maintained
so that they will be in a full open position at all times the
ventilating system is in operation.
(i) Exhaust ducts shall be protected against mechanical damage and
have a clearance from unprotected combustible construction or other
combustible material of not less than 18 inches.
(ii) If combustible construction is provided with the following
protection applied to all surfaces within 18 inches, clearances may be
reduced to the distances indicated:
(a) 28-gage sheet metal on \1/4\-inch 12 inches.
asbestos mill board.
(b) 28-gage sheet metal on \1/8\-inch 9 inches.
asbestos mill board spaced out 1 inch on
noncombustible spacers.
(c) 22-gage sheet metal on 1-inch rockwool 3 inches.
batts reinforced with wire mesh or the
equivalent.
(d) Where ducts are protected with an
approved automatic sprinkler system,
properly maintained, the clearance
required in subdivision (i) of this
subparagraph may be reduced to 6 inches.
(8) Discharge clearance. Unless the spray booth exhaust duct
terminal is from a water-wash spray booth, the terminal discharge point
shall be not less than 6 feet from any combustible exterior wall or roof
nor discharge in the direction of any combustible construction or
unprotected opening in any noncombustible exterior wall within 25 feet.
(9) Air exhaust. Air exhaust from spray operations shall not be
directed so that it will contaminate makeup air being introduced into
the spraying area or other ventilating intakes, nor directed so as to
create a nuisance. Air exhausted from spray operations shall not be
recirculated.
(10) Access doors. When necessary to facilitate cleaning, exhaust
ducts shall be provided with an ample number of access doors.
(11) Room intakes. Air intake openings to rooms containing spray
finishing operations shall be adequate for the efficient operation of
exhaust fans and shall be so located as to minimize the creation of dead
air pockets.
(12) Drying spaces. Freshly sprayed articles shall be dried only in
spaces provided with adequate ventilation to prevent the formation of
explosive vapors. In the event adequate and reliable ventilation is not
provided such drying spaces shall be considered a spraying area. See
also paragraph (j) of this section.
(e) Flammable and combustible liquids--storage and handling--(1)
Conformance. The storage of flammable or combustible liquids in
connection with spraying operations shall conform to the requirements of
Sec. 1910.106, where applicable.
(2) Quantity. The quantity of flammable or combustible liquids kept
in the vicinity of spraying operations shall be the minimum required for
operations and should ordinarily not exceed a supply for 1 day or one
shift. Bulk storage of portable containers of flammable or combustible
liquids shall be in a separate, constructed building detached from other
important buildings or cut off in a standard manner.
(3) Containers. Original closed containers, approved portable tanks,
approved safety cans or a properly arranged system of piping shall be
used for bringing flammable or combustible liquids into spray finishing
room. Open or glass containers shall not be used.
(4) Transferring liquids. Except as provided in paragraph (e)(5) of
this section the withdrawal of flammable and combustible liquids from
containers having
[[Page 277]]
a capacity of greater than 60 gallons shall be by approved pumps. The
withdrawal of flammable or combustible liquids from containers and the
filling of containers, including portable mixing tanks, shall be done
only in a suitable mixing room or in a spraying area when the
ventilating system is in operation. Adequate precautions shall be taken
to protect against liquid spillage and sources of ignition.
(5) Spraying containers. Containers supplying spray nozzles shall be
of closed type or provided with metal covers kept closed. Containers not
resting on floors shall be on metal supports or suspended by wire
cables. Containers supplying spray nozzles by gravity flow shall not
exceed 10 gallons capacity. Original shipping containers shall not be
subject to air pressure for supplying spray nozzles. Containers under
air pressure supplying spray nozzles shall be of limited capacity, not
exceeding that necessary for 1 day's operation; shall be designed and
approved for such use; shall be provided with a visible pressure gage;
and shall be provided with a relief valve set to operate in conformance
with the requirements of the Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section
VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code--1968, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6. Containers under
air pressure supplying spray nozzles, air-storage tanks and coolers
shall conform to the standards of the Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels,
Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code--1968 for
construction, tests, and maintenance.
(6) Pipes and hoses. (i) All containers or piping to which is
attached a hose or flexible connection shall be provided with a shutoff
valve at the connection. Such valves shall be kept shut when spraying
operations are not being conducted.
(ii) When a pump is used to deliver products, automatic means shall
be provided to prevent pressure in excess of the design working pressure
of accessories, piping, and hose.
(iii) All pressure hose and couplings shall be inspected at regular
intervals appropriate to this service. The hose and couplings shall be
tested with the hose extended, and using the ``inservice maximum
operating pressures.'' Any hose showing material deteriorations, signs
of leakage, or weakness in its carcass or at the couplings, shall be
withdrawn from service and repaired or discarded.
(iv) Piping systems conveying flammable or combustible liquids shall
be of steel or other material having comparable properties of resistance
to heat and physical damage. Piping systems shall be properly bonded and
grounded.
(7) Spray liquid heaters. Electrically powered spray liquid heaters
shall be approved and listed for the specific location in which used
(see paragraph (c) of this section). Heaters shall not be located in
spray booths nor other locations subject to the accumulation of deposits
or combustible residue. If an electric motor is used, see paragraph (c)
of this section.
(8) Pump relief. If flammable or combustible liquids are supplied to
spray nozzles by positive displacement pumps, the pump discharge line
shall be provided with an approved relief valve discharging to a pump
suction or a safe detached location, or a device provided to stop the
prime mover if the discharge pressure exceeds the safe operating
pressure of the system.
(9) Grounding. Whenever flammable or combustible liquids are
transferred from one container to another, both containers shall be
effectively bonded and grounded to prevent discharge sparks of static
electricity.
(f) Protection--(1) Conformance. In sprinklered buildings, the
automatic sprinkler system in rooms containing spray finishing
operations shall conform to the requirements of Sec. 1910.159. In
unsprinklered buildings where sprinklers are installed only to protect
spraying areas, the installation shall conform to such standards insofar
as they are applicable. Sprinkler heads shall be located so as to
provide water distribution throughout the entire booth.
(2) Valve access. Automatic sprinklers protecting each spray booth
(together with its connecting exhaust) shall be under an accessibly
located separate outside stem and yoke (OS&Y) subcontrol valve.
(3) Cleaning of heads. Sprinklers protecting spraying areas shall be
kept as
[[Page 278]]
free from deposits as practical by cleaning daily if necessary. (See
also paragraph (g) of this section.)
(4) Portable extinguishers. An adequate supply of suitable portable
fire extinguishers shall be installed near all spraying areas.
(g) Operations and maintenance--(1) Spraying. Spraying shall not be
conducted outside of predetermined spraying areas.
(2) Cleaning. All spraying areas shall be kept as free from the
accumulation of deposits of combustible residues as practical, with
cleaning conducted daily if necessary. Scrapers, spuds, or other such
tools used for cleaning purposes shall be of nonsparking material.
(3) Residue disposal. Residue scrapings and debris contaminated with
residue shall be immediately removed from the premises and properly
disposed of. Approved metal waste cans shall be provided wherever rags
or waste are impregnated with finishing material and all such rags or
waste deposited therein immediately after use. The contents of waste
cans shall be properly disposed of at least once daily or at the end of
each shift.
(4) Clothing storage. Spray finishing employees' clothing shall not
be left on the premises overnight unless kept in metal lockers.
(5) Cleaning solvents. The use of solvents for cleaning operations
shall be restricted to those having flashpoints not less than 100
deg.F.; however, for cleaning spray nozzles and auxiliary equipment,
solvents having flashpoints not less than those normally used in spray
operations may be used. Such cleaning shall be conducted inside spray
booths and ventilating equipment operated during cleaning.
(6) Hazardous materials combinations. Spray booths shall not be
alternately used for different types of coating materials, where the
combination of the materials may be conducive to spontaneous ignition,
unless all deposits of the first used material are removed from the
booth and exhaust ducts prior to spraying with the second used material.
(7) ``No Smoking'' signs. ``No smoking'' signs in large letters on
contrasting color background shall be conspicuously posted at all
spraying areas and paint storage rooms.
(h) Fixed electrostatic apparatus--(1) Conformance. Where
installation and use of electrostatic spraying equipment is used, such
installation and use shall conform to all other paragraphs of this
section, and shall also conform to the requirements of this paragraph.
(2) Type approval. Electrostatic apparatus and devices used in
connection with coating operations shall be of approved types.
(3) Location. Transformers, power packs, control apparatus, and all
other electrical portions of the equipment, with the exception of high-
voltage grids, electrodes, and electrostatic atomizing heads and their
connections, shall be located outside of the spraying area, or shall
otherwise conform to the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.
(4) Support. Electrodes and electrostatic atomizing heads shall be
adequately supported in permanent locations and shall be effectively
insulated from the ground. Electrodes and electrostatic atomizing heads
which are permanently attached to their bases, supports, or
reciprocators, shall be deemed to comply with this section. Insulators
shall be nonporous and noncombustible.
(5) Insulators, grounding. High-voltage leads to electrodes shall be
properly insulated and protected from mechanical injury or exposure to
destructive chemicals. Electrostatic atomizing heads shall be
effectively and permanently supported on suitable insulators and shall
be effectively guarded against accidental contact or grounding. An
automatic means shall be provided for grounding the electrode system
when it is electrically deenergized for any reason. All insulators shall
be kept clean and dry.
(6) Safe distance. A safe distance shall be maintained between goods
being painted and electrodes or electrostatic atomizing heads or
conductors of at least twice the sparking distance. A suitable sign
indicating this safe distance shall be conspicuously posted near the
assembly.
(7) Conveyors required. Goods being painted using this process are
to be supported on conveyors. The conveyors
[[Page 279]]
shall be so arranged as to maintain safe distances between the goods and
the electrodes or electrostatic atomizing heads at all times. Any
irregularly shaped or other goods subject to possible swinging or
movement shall be rigidly supported to prevent such swinging or movement
which would reduce the clearance to less than that specified in
paragraph (h)(6) of this section.
(8) Prohibition. This process is not acceptable where goods being
coated are manipulated by hand. When finishing materials are applied by
electrostatic equipment which is manipulated by hand, see paragraph (i)
of this section for applicable requirements.
(9) Fail-safe controls. Electrostatic apparatus shall be equipped
with automatic controls which will operate without time delay to
disconnect the power supply to the high voltage transformer and to
signal the operator under any of the following conditions:
(i) Stoppage of ventilating fans or failure of ventilating equipment
from any cause.
(ii) Stoppage of the conveyor carrying goods through the high
voltage field.
(iii) Occurrence of a ground or of an imminent ground at any point
on the high voltage system.
(iv) Reduction of clearance below that specified in paragraph (h)(6)
of this section.
(10) Guarding. Adequate booths, fencing, railings, or guards shall
be so placed about the equipment that they, either by their location or
character or both, assure that a safe isolation of the process is
maintained from plant storage or personnel. Such railings, fencing, and
guards shall be of conducting material, adequately grounded.
(11) Ventilation. Where electrostatic atomization is used the
spraying area shall be so ventilated as to insure safe conditions from a
fire and health standpoint.
(12) Fire protection. All areas used for spraying, including the
interior of the booth, shall be protected by automatic sprinklers where
this protection is available. Where this protection is not available,
other approved automatic extinguishing equipment shall be provided.
(i) Electrostatic hand spraying equipment--(1) Application. This
paragraph shall apply to any equipment using electrostatically charged
elements for the atomization and/or, precipitation of materials for
coatings on articles, or for other similar purposes in which the
atomizing device is hand held and manipulated during the spraying
operation.
(2) Conformance. Electrostatic hand spraying equipment shall conform
with the other provisions of this section.
(3) Equipment approval and specifications. Electrostatic hand spray
apparatus and devices used in connection with coating operations shall
be of approved types. The high voltage circuits shall be designed so as
to not produce a spark of sufficient intensity to ignite any vapor-air
mixtures nor result in appreciable shock hazard upon coming in contact
with a grounded object under all normal operating conditions. The
electrostatically charged exposed elements of the handgun shall be
capable of being energized only by a switch which also controls the
coating material supply.
(4) Electrical support equipment. Transformers, powerpacks, control
apparatus, and all other electrical portions of the equipment, with the
exception of the handgun itself and its connections to the power supply
shall be located outside of the spraying area or shall otherwise conform
to the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.
(5) Spray gun ground. The handle of the spraying gun shall be
electrically connected to ground by a metallic connection and to be so
constructed that the operator in normal operating position is in
intimate electrical contact with the grounded handle.
(6) Grounding--general. All electrically conductive objects in the
spraying area shall be adequately grounded. This requirement shall apply
to paint containers, wash cans, and any other objects or devices in the
area. The equipment shall carry a prominent permanently installed
warning regarding the necessity for this grounding feature.
(7) Maintenance of grounds. Objects being painted or coated shall be
maintained in metallic contact with the conveyor or other grounded
support.
[[Page 280]]
Hooks shall be regularly cleaned to insure this contact and areas of
contact shall be sharp points or knife edges where possible. Points of
support of the object shall be concealed from random spray where
feasible and where the objects being sprayed are supported from a
conveyor, the point of attachment to the conveyor shall be so located as
to not collect spray material during normal operation.
(8) Interlocks. The electrical equipment shall be so interlocked
with the ventilation of the spraying area that the equipment cannot be
operated unless the ventilation fans are in operation.
(9) Ventilation. The spraying operation shall take place within a
spray area which is adequately ventilated to remove solvent vapors
released from the operation.
(j) Drying, curing, or fusion apparatus--(1) Conformance. Drying,
curing, or fusion apparatus in connection with spray application of
flammable and combustible finishes shall conform to the Standard for
Ovens and Furnaces, NFPA 86A-1969, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6, where applicable and shall also conform with
the following requirements of this paragraph.
(2) Alternate use prohibited. Spray booths, rooms, or other
enclosures used for spraying operations shall not alternately be used
for the purpose of drying by any arrangement which will cause a material
increase in the surface temperature of the spray booth, room, or
enclosure.
(3) Adjacent system interlocked. Except as specifically provided in
paragraph (j)(4) of this section, drying, curing, or fusion units
utilizing a heating system having open flames or which may produce
sparks shall not be installed in a spraying area, but may be installed
adjacent thereto when equipped with an interlocked ventilating system
arranged to:
(i) Thoroughly ventilate the drying space before the heating system
can be started;
(ii) Maintain a safe atmosphere at any source of ignition;
(iii) Automatically shut down the heating system in the event of
failure of the ventilating system.
(4) Alternate use permitted. Automobile refinishing spray booths or
enclosures, otherwise installed and maintained in full conformity with
this section, may alternately be used for drying with portable
electrical infrared drying apparatus when conforming with the following:
(i) Interior (especially floors) of spray enclosures shall be kept
free of overspray deposits.
(ii) During spray operations, the drying apparatus and electrical
connections and wiring thereto shall not be located within spray
enclosure nor in any other location where spray residues may be
deposited thereon.
(iii) The spraying apparatus, the drying apparatus, and the
ventilating system of the spray enclosure shall be equipped with
suitable interlocks so arranged that:
(a) The spraying apparatus cannot be operated while the drying
apparatus is inside the spray enclosure.
(b) The spray enclosure will be purged of spray vapors for a period
of not less than 3 minutes before the drying apparatus can be energized.
(c) The ventilating system will maintain a safe atmosphere within
the enclosure during the drying process and the drying apparatus will
automatically shut off in the event of failure of the ventilating
system.
(iv) All electrical wiring and equipment of the drying apparatus
shall conform with the applicable sections of subpart S of this part.
Only equipment of a type approved for Class I, Division 2 hazardous
locations shall be located within 18 inches of floor level. All metallic
parts of the drying apparatus shall be properly electrically bonded and
grounded.
(v) The drying apparatus shall contain a prominently located,
permanently attached warning sign indicating that ventilation should be
maintained during the drying period and that spraying should not be
conducted in the vicinity that spray will deposit on apparatus.
(k) Automobile undercoating in garages. Automobile undercoating
spray operations in garages, conducted in areas having adequate natural
or mechanical
[[Page 281]]
ventilation, are exempt from the requirements pertaining to spray
finishing operations, when using undercoating materials not more
hazardous than kerosene (as listed by Underwriters' Laboratories in
respect to fire hazard rating 30-40) or undercoating materials using
only solvents listed as having a flash point in excess of 100 deg.F.
Undercoating spray operations not conforming to these provisions are
subject to all requirements of this section pertaining to spray
finishing operations.
(l) Powder coating--(1) Electrical and other sources of ignition.
Electrical equipment and other sources of ignition shall conform to the
requirements of paragraphs (c)(1) (i)-(iv), (8) and (9)(i) of this
section and subpart S of this part.
(2) Ventilation. (i) In addition to the provisions of paragraph (d)
of this section, where applicable, exhaust ventilation shall be
sufficient to maintain the atmosphere below the lowest explosive limits
for the materials being applied. All nondeposited air-suspended powders
shall be safely removed via exhaust ducts to the powder recovery cyclone
or receptacle. Each installation shall be designed and operated to meet
the foregoing performance specification.
(ii) Powders shall not be released to the outside atmosphere.
(3) Drying, curing, or fusion equipment. The provisions of the
Standard for ovens and furnaces, NFPA No. 86A-1969 shall apply where
applicable.
(4) Operation and maintenance. (i) All areas shall be kept free of
the accumulation of powder coating dusts, particularly such horizontal
surfaces as ledges, beams, pipes, hoods, booths, and floors.
(ii) Surfaces shall be cleaned in such manner as to avoid scattering
dust to other places or creating dust clouds.
(iii) ``No Smoking'' signs in large letters on contrasting color
background shall be conspicuously posted at all powder coating areas and
powder storage rooms.
(5) Fixed electrostatic spraying equipment. The provisions of
paragraph (h) of this section and other subparagraphs of this paragraph
shall apply to fixed electrostatic equipment, except that electrical
equipment not covered therein shall conform to paragraph (l)(1) of this
section.
(6) Electrostatic hand spraying equipment. The provisions of
paragraph (i) of this section and other subparagraphs of this paragraph,
shall apply to electrostatic handguns when used in powder coating,
except that electrical equipment not covered therein shall conform to
paragraph (l)(1) of this section.
(7) Electrostatic fluidized beds. (i) Electrostatic fluidized beds
and associated equipment shall be of approved types. The maximum surface
temperature of this equipment in the coating area shall not exceed 150
deg.F. The high voltage circuits shall be so designed as to not produce
a spark of sufficient intensity to ignite any powder-air mixtures nor
result in appreciable shock hazard upon coming in contact with a
grounded object under normal operating conditions.
(ii) Transformers, powerpacks, control apparatus, and all other
electrical portions of the equipment, with the exception of the charging
electrodes and their connections to the power supply shall be located
outside of the powder coating area or shall otherwise conform to the
requirements of paragraph (l)(1) of this section.
(iii) All electrically conductive objects within the charging
influence of the electrodes shall be adequately grounded. The powder
coating equipment shall carry a prominent, permanently installed warning
regarding the necessity for grounding these objects.
(iv) Objects being coated shall be maintained in contact with the
conveyor or other support in order to insure proper grounding. Hangers
shall be regularly cleaned to insure effective contact and areas of
contact shall be sharp points or knife edges where possible.
(v) The electrical equipment shall be so interlocked with the
ventilation system that the equipment cannot be operated unless the
ventilation fans are in operation.
(m) Organic peroxides and dual component coatings--(1) Conformance.
All spraying operations involving the use of organic peroxides and other
dual component coatings shall be conducted in approved sprinklered spray
booths
[[Page 282]]
meeting the requirements of this section.
(2) Smoking. Smoking shall be prohibited and ``No Smoking'' signs
shall be prominently displayed and only nonsparking tools shall be used
in any area where organic peroxides are stored, mixed or applied.
(n) Scope. This section applies to flammable and combustible
finishing materials when applied as a spray by compressed air,
``airless'' or ``hydraulic atomization,'' steam, electrostatic methods,
or by any other means in continuous or intermittent processes. The
section also covers the application of combustible powders by powder
spray guns, electrostatic powder spray guns, fluidized beds, or
electrostatic fluidized beds. The section does not apply to outdoor
spray application of buildings, tanks, or other similar structures, nor
to small portable spraying apparatus not used repeatedly in the same
location.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 45 FR 60704, Sept. 12, 1980;
49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, 1988; 61 FR 9237, Mar.
7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.108 [Reserved]
Sec. 1910.109 Explosives and blasting agents.
(a) Definitions applicable to this section--(1) Blasting agent.
Blasting agent--any material or mixture, consisting of a fuel and
oxidizer, intended for blasting, not otherwise classified as an
explosive and in which none of the ingredients are classified as an
explosive, provided that the finished product, as mixed and packaged for
use or shipment, cannot be detonated by means of a No. 8 test blasting
cap when unconfined.
(2) Explosive-actuated power devices. Explosive-actuated power
device--any tool or special mechanized device which is actuated by
explosives, but not including propellant-actuated power devices.
Examples of explosive-actuated power devices are jet tappers and jet
perforators.
(3) Explosive. Explosive--any chemical compound, mixture, or device,
the primary or common purpose of which is to function by explosion,
i.e., with substantially instantaneous release of gas and heat, unless
such compound, mixture, or device is otherwise specifically classified
by the U.S. Department of Transportation; see 49 CFR chapter I. The term
``explosives'' shall include all material which is classified as Class
A, Class B, and Class C explosives by the U.S. Department of
Transportation, and includes, but is not limited to dynamite, black
powder, pellet powders, initiating explosives, blasting caps, electric
blasting caps, safety fuse, fuse lighters, fuse igniters, squibs,
cordeau detonant fuse, instantaneous fuse, igniter cord, igniters, small
arms ammunition, small arms ammunition primers, smokeless propellant,
cartridges for propellant-actuated power devices, and cartridges for
industrial guns. Commercial explosives are those explosives which are
intended to be used in commercial or industrial operations.
Note 1: Classification of explosives is described by the U.S.
Department of Transportation as follows (see 49 CFR chapter I):
(i) Class A explosives. Possessing, detonating, or otherwise maximum
hazard; such as dynamite, nitroglycerin, picric acid, lead azide,
fulminate of mercury, black powder, blasting caps, and detonating
primers.
(ii) Class B explosives. Possessing flammable hazard, such as
propellant explosives (including some smokeless propellants),
photographic flash powders, and some special fireworks.
(iii) Class C explosives. Includes certain types of manufactured
articles which contain Class A or Class B explosives, or both, as
components but in restricted quantities.
(iv) Forbidden or not acceptable explosives. Explosives which are
forbidden or not acceptable for transportation by common carriers by
rail freight, rail express, highway, or water in accordance with the
regulations of the U.S. Department of Transportation, 49 CFR chapter I.
(4) Highway. Highway--any public street, public alley, or public
road.
(5) [Reserved]
(6) Magazine. Magazine--any building or structure, other than an
explosives manufacturing building, used for the storage of explosives.
(7) Motor vehicle. Motor vehicle--any self-propelled vehicle, truck,
tractor, semitrailer, or truck-full trailers used
[[Page 283]]
for the transportation of freight over public highways.
(8) Propellant-actuated power devices. Propellant-actuated power
devices--any tool or special mechanized device or gas generator system
which is actuated by a smokeless propellant or which releases and
directs work through a smokeless propellant charge.
(9) [Reserved]
(10) Pyrotechnics. Pyrotechnics--any combustible or explosive
compositions or manufactured articles designed and prepared for the
purpose of producing audible or visible effects which are commonly
referred to as fireworks.
(11) [Reserved]
(12) Semiconductive hose. Semiconductive hose--a hose with an
electrical resistance high enough to limit flow of stray electric
currents to safe levels, yet not so high as to prevent drainage of
static electric charges to ground; hose of not more than 2 megohms
resistance over its entire length and of not less than 5,000 ohms per
foot meets the requirement.
(13) Small arms ammunition. Small arms ammunition--any shotgun,
rifle, pistol, or revolver cartridge, and cartridges for propellant-
actuated power devices and industrial guns. Military-type ammunition
containing explosive-bursting charges, incendiary, tracer, spotting, or
pyrotechnic projectiles is excluded from this definition.
(14) Small arms ammunition primers. Small arms ammunition primers--
small percussion-sensitive explosive charges, encased in a cup, used to
ignite propellant powder.
(15) Smokeless propellants. Smokeless propellants--solid
propellants, commonly called smokeless powders in the trade, used in
small arms ammunition, cannon, rockets, propellant-actuated power
devices, etc.
(16) Special industrial explosives devices. Special industrial
explosives devices--explosive-actuated power devices and propellant-
actuated power devices.
(17) Special industrial explosives materials. Special industrial
explosives materials--shaped materials and sheet forms and various other
extrusions, pellets, and packages of high explosives, which include
dynamite, trinitrotoluene (TNT), pentaerythritol tetranitrate (PETN),
hexahydro-1,3,5-trinitro-s-triazine (RDX), and other similar compounds
used for high-energy-rate forming, expanding, and shaping in metal
fabrication, and for dismemberment and quick reduction of scrap metal.
(18) Water gels or slurry explosives. These comprise a wide variety
of materials used for blasting. They all contain substantial proportions
of water and high proportions of ammonium nitrate, some of which is in
solution in the water. Two broad classes of water gels are (i) those
which are sensitized by a material classed as an explosive, such as TNT
or smokeless powder, (ii) those which contain no ingredient classified
as an explosive; these are sensitized with metals such as aluminum or
with other fuels. Water gels may be premixed at an explosives plant or
mixed at the site immediately before delivery into the borehole.
(19) DOT specifications. Regulations of the Department of
Transportation published in 49 CFR chapter I.
(b) Miscellaneous provisions--(1) General hazard. No person shall
store, handle, or transport explosives or blasting agents when such
storage, handling, and transportation of explosives or blasting agents
constitutes an undue hazard to life.
(2) [Reserved]
(c) Storage of explosives--(1) General provisions. (i) All Class A,
Class B, Class C explosives, and special industrial explosives, and any
newly developed and unclassified explosives, shall be kept in magazines
which meet the requirements of this paragraph.
(ii) Blasting caps, electric blasting caps, detonating primers, and
primed cartridges shall not be stored in the same magazine with other
explosives.
(iii) Ground around magazines shall slope away for drainage. The
land surrounding magazines shall be kept clear of brush, dried grass,
leaves, and other materials for a distance of at least 25 feet.
(iv) Magazines as required by this paragraph shall be of two
classes; namely, Class I magazines, and Class II magazines.
(v) Class I magazines shall be required where the quantity of
explosives stored is more than 50 pounds. Class II
[[Page 284]]
magazines may be used where the quantity of explosives stored is 50
pounds or less.
(vi) Class I magazines shall be located away from other magazines in
conformity with Table H-21.
Table H-21--American Table of Distances for Storage of Explosives \1-5\
[As revised and approved by the Institute of Makers of Explosives, June
5, 1964]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Explosives Distances in feet when
------------------------------------------------ storage is barricaded:
Pounds over Pounds not over Separation of magazines
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 5 6
5 10 8
10 20 10
20 30 11
30 40 12
40 50 14
50 75 15
75 100 16
100 125 18
125 150 19
150 200 21
200 250 23
250 300 24
300 400 27
400 500 29
500 600 31
600 700 32
700 800 33
800 900 35
900 1,000 36
1,000 1,200 39
1,200 1,400 41
1,400 1,600 43
1,600 1,800 44
1,800 2,000 45
2,000 2,500 49
2,500 3,000 52
3,000 4,000 58
4,000 5,000 61
5,000 6,000 65
6,000 7,000 68
7,000 8,000 72
8,000 9,000 75
9,000 10,000 78
10,000 12,000 82
12,000 14,000 87
14,000 16,000 90
16,000 18,000 94
18,000 20,000 98
20,000 25,000 105
25,000 30,000 112
30,000 35,000 119
35,000 40,000 124
40,000 45,000 129
45,000 50,000 135
50,000 55,000 140
55,000 60,000 145
60,000 65,000 150
65,000 70,000 155
70,000 75,000 160
75,000 80,000 165
80,000 85,000 170
85,000 90,000 175
90,000 95,000 180
95,000 100,000 185
100,000 110,000 195
110,000 120,000 205
120,000 130,000 215
130,000 140,000 225
140,000 150,000 235
150,000 160,000 245
160,000 170,000 255
170,000 180,000 265
180,000 190,000 275
190,000 200,000 285
200,000 210,000 295
210,000 230,000 315
230,000 250,000 335
250,000 275,000 360
275,000 300,000 385
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ ``Natural barricade'' means natural features of the ground, such as
hills, or timber of sufficient density that the surrounding exposures
which require protection cannot be seen from the magazine when the
trees are bare of leaves.
\2\ ``Artificial barricade'' means an artificial mound or revetted wall
of earth of a minimum thickness of three feet.
\3\ ``Barricaded'' means that a building containing explosives is
effectually screened from a magazine, building, railway, or highway,
either by a natural barricade, or by an artificial barricade of such
height that a straight line from the top of any sidewall of the
building containing explosives to the eave line of any magazine, or
building, or to a point 12 feet above the center of a railway or
highway, will pass through such intervening natural or artificial
barricade.
\4\ When two or more storage magazines are located on the same property,
each magazine must comply with the minimum distances specified from
inhabited buildings, railways, and highways, and in addition, they
should be separated from each other by not less than the distances
shown for ``Separation of Magazines,'' except that the quantity of
explosives contained in cap magazines shall govern in regard to the
spacing of said cap magazines from magazines containing other
explosives. If any two or more magazines are separated from each other
by less than the specified ``Separation of Magazines'' distances, then
such two or more magazines, as a group, must be considered as one
magazine, and the total quantity of explosives stored in such group
must be treated as if stored in a single magazine located on the site
of any magazine of the group, and must comply with the minimum of
distances specified from other magazines, inhabited buildings,
railways, and highways.
\5\ This table applies only to the permanent storage of commercial
explosives. It is not applicable to transportation of explosives, or
any handling or temporary storage necessary or incident thereto. It is
not intended to apply to bombs, projectiles, or other heavily encased
explosives.
(vii) Except as provided in subdivision (viii) of this subparagraph,
class II magazines shall be located in conformity with Table H-21, but
may be permitted in warehouses and in wholesale and retail
establishments when located on a floor which has an entrance at outside
grade level and the magazine is located not more than 10 feet from such
an entrance. Two class II magazines may be located in the same building
when one is used only for blasting caps in quantities not in excess of
5,000
[[Page 285]]
caps and a distance of 10 feet is maintained between magazines.
(viii) When used for temporary storage at a site for blasting
operations, class II magazines shall be located away from other
magazines. A distance of at least one hundred and fifty (150) feet shall
be maintained between class II magazines and the work in progress when
the quantity of explosives kept therein is in excess of 25 pounds, and
at least 50 feet when the quantity of explosives is 25 pounds, or less.
(ix) This paragraph (c) does not apply to:
(a) Stocks of small arms ammunition, propellant-actuated power
cartridges, small arms ammunition primers in quantities of less than
750,000, or of smokeless propellants in quantities less than 750 pounds;
(b) Explosive-actuated power devices when in quantities less than 50
pounds net weight of explosives;
(c) Fuse lighters and fuse igniters;
(d) Safety fuses other than cordeau detonant fuses.
(2) Construction of magazines--general. (i) Magazines shall be
constructed in conformity with the provisions of this paragraph.
(ii) Magazines for the storage of explosives, other than black
powder, Class B and Class C explosives shall be bullet resistant,
weather resistant, fire resistant, and ventilated sufficiently to
protect the explosive in the specific locality. Magazines used only for
storage of black powder, Class B and Class C explosives shall be weather
resistant, fire-resistant, and have ventilation. Magazines for storage
of blasting and electric blasting caps shall be weather resistant, fire-
resistant, and ventilated.
(iii) Property upon which Class I magazines are located and property
where Class II magazines are located outside of buildings shall be
posted with signs reading ``Explosives--Keep Off.''
(iv) Magazines requiring heat shall be heated by either hot-water
radiant heating with the magazine building; or air directed into the
magazine building over either hot water or low pressure steam (15
p.s.i.g.) coils located outside the magazine building.
(v) The magazine heating systems shall meet the following
requirements:
(a) The radiant heating coils within the building shall be installed
in such a manner that the explosives or explosives containers cannot
contact the coils and air is free to circulate between the coils and the
explosives or explosives containers.
(b) The heating ducts shall be installed in such a manner that the
hot-air discharge from the duct is not directed against the explosives
or explosives containers.
(c) The heating device used in connection with a magazine shall have
controls which prevent the ambient building temperature from exceeding
130 deg.F.
(d) The electric fan or pump used in the heating system for a
magazine shall be mounted outside and separate from the wall of the
magazine and shall be grounded.
(e) The electric fan motor and the controls for electrical heating
devices used in heating water or steam shall have overloads and
disconnects, which comply with subpart S of this part. All electrical
switch gear shall be located a minimum distance of 25 feet from the
magazine.
(f) The heating source for water or steam shall be separated from
the magazine by a distance of not less than 25 feet when electrical and
50 feet when fuel fired. The area between the heating unit and the
magazine shall be cleared of all combustible materials.
(g) The storage of explosives and explosives containers in the
magazine shall allow uniform air circulation so product temperature
uniformity can be maintained.
(vi) When lights are necessary inside the magazine, electric safety
flashlight, or electric safety lanterns shall be used.
(3) Construction of Class I magazines. (i) Class I magazines shall
be of masonry construction or of wood or of metal construction, or a
combination of these types. Thickness of masonry units shall not be less
than 8 inches. Hollow masonry units used in construction required to be
bullet resistant shall have all hollow spaces filled with weak cement or
well-tamped sand. Wood constructed walls, required to be
[[Page 286]]
bullet resistant, shall have at least a 6-inch space between interior
and exterior sheathing and the space between sheathing shall be filled
with well-tamped sand. Metal wall construction, when required to be
bullet resistant, shall be lined with brick at least 4 inches in
thickness or shall have at least a 6-inch sandfill between interior and
exterior walls.
(ii) Floors and roofs of masonry magazines may be of wood
construction. Wood floors shall be tongue and grooved lumber having a
nominal thickness of 1 inch.
(iii) Roofs required to be bullet resistant shall be protected by a
sand tray located at the line of eaves and covering the entire area
except that necessary for ventilation. Sand in the sand tray shall be
maintained at a depth of not less than 4 inches.
(iv) All wood at the exterior of magazines, including eaves, shall
be protected by being covered with black or galvanized steel or aluminum
metal of thickness of not less than No. 26 gage. All nails exposed to
the interior of magazines shall be well countersunk.
(v) Foundations for magazines shall be of substantial construction
and arranged to provide good cross ventilation.
(vi) Magazines shall be ventilated sufficiently to prevent dampness
and heating of stored explosives. Ventilating openings shall be screened
to prevent the entrance of sparks.
(vii) Openings to magazines shall be restricted to that necessary
for the placement and removal of stocks of explosives. Doors for
openings in magazines for Class A explosives shall be bullet resistant.
Doors for magazines not required to be bullet resistant shall be
designed to prevent unauthorized entrance to the magazine.
(viii) [Reserved]
(ix) Provisions shall be made to prevent the piling of stocks of
explosives directly against masonry walls, brick-lined or sand-filled
metal walls and single-thickness metal walls; such protection, however,
shall not interfere with proper ventilation at the interior of side and
end walls.
(4) Construction of Class II magazines. (i) Class II magazines shall
be of wood or metal construction, or a combination thereof.
(ii) Wood magazines of this class shall have sides, bottom, and
cover constructed of 2-inch hardwood boards well braced at corners and
protected by being entirely covered with sheet metal of not less than
No. 20 gage. All nails exposed to the interior of the magazine shall be
well countersunk. All metal magazines of this class shall have sides,
bottom, and cover constructed of sheet metal, and shall be lined with
three-eighths-inch plywood or equivalent. Edges of metal covers shall
overlap sides at least 1 inch.
(iii) Covers for both wood- and metal-constructed magazines of this
class shall be provided with substantial strap hinges and shall be
provided with substantial means for locking.
(iv) Magazines of this class shall be painted red and shall bear
lettering in white, on all sides and top, at least 3 inches high,
``Explosives--Keep Fire Away.'' Class II magazines when located in
warehouses, and in wholesale and retail establishments shall be provided
with substantial wheels or casters to facilitate easy removal in the
case of fire. Where necessary due to climatic conditions, Class II
magazines shall be ventilated.
(5) Storage within magazines. (i) Packages of explosives shall be
laid flat with top side up. Black powder when stored in magazines with
other explosives shall be stored separately. Black powder stored in kegs
shall be stored on ends, bungs down, or on side, seams down.
Corresponding grades and brands shall be stored together in such a
manner that brands and grade marks show. All stocks shall be stored so
as to be easily counted and checked. Packages of explosives shall be
piled in a stable manner. When any kind of explosive is removed from a
magazine for use, the oldest explosive of that particular kind shall
always be taken first.
(ii) Packages of explosives shall not be unpacked or repacked in a
magazine nor within 50 feet of a magazine or in close proximity to other
explosives. Tools used for opening packages of explosives shall be
constructed of nonsparking materials, except that metal slitters may be
used for opening fiberboard boxes. A wood wedge and a fiber,
[[Page 287]]
rubber, or wood mallet shall be used for opening or closing wood
packages of explosives. Opened packages of explosives shall be securely
closed before being returned to a magazine.
(iii) Magazines shall not be used for the storage of any metal tools
nor any commodity except explosives, but this restriction shall not
apply to the storage of blasting agents and blasting supplies.
(iv) Magazine floors shall be regularly swept, kept clean, dry, free
of grit, paper, empty used packages, and rubbish. Brooms and other
cleaning utensils shall not have any spark-producing metal parts.
Sweepings from floors of magazines shall be properly disposed of.
Magazine floors stained with nitroglycerin shall be cleaned according to
instructions by the manufacturer.
(v) When any explosive has deteriorated to an extent that it is in
an unstable or dangerous condition, or if nitroglycerin leaks from any
explosives, then the person in possession of such explosive shall
immediately proceed to destroy such explosive in accordance with the
instructions of the manufacturer. Only experienced persons shall be
allowed to do the work of destroying explosives.
(vi) When magazines need inside repairs, all explosives shall be
removed therefrom and the floors cleaned. In making outside repairs, if
there is a possibility of causing sparks or fire the explosives shall be
removed from the magazine. Explosives removed from a magazine under
repair shall either be placed in another magazine or placed a safe
distance from the magazine where they shall be properly guarded and
protected until repairs have been completed, when they shall be returned
to the magazine.
(vii) Smoking, matches, open flames, spark-producing devices, and
firearms (except firearms carried by guards) shall not be permitted
inside of or within 50 feet of magazines. The land surrounding a
magazine shall be kept clear of all combustible materials for a distance
of at least 25 feet. Combustible materials shall not be stored within 50
feet of magazines.
(viii) Magazines shall be in the charge of a competent person at all
times and who shall be held responsible for the enforcement of all
safety precautions.
(ix) Explosives recovered from blasting misfires shall be placed in
a separate magazine until competent personnel has determined from the
manufacturer the method of disposal. Caps recovered from blasting
misfires shall not be reused. Such explosives and caps shall then be
disposed of in the manner recommended by the manufacturer.
(d) Transportation of explosives--(1) General provisions. (i) No
employee shall be allowed to smoke, carry matches or any other flame-
producing device, or carry any firearms or loaded cartridges while in or
near a motor vehicle transporting explosives; or drive, load, or unload
such vehicle in a careless or reckless manner.
(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) Explosives shall not be transferred from one vehicle to
another within the confines of any jurisdiction (city, county, State, or
other area) without informing the fire and police departments thereof.
In the event of breakdown or collision the local fire and police
departments shall be promptly notified to help safeguard such
emergencies. Explosives shall be transferred from the disabled vehicle
to another only, when proper and qualified supervision is provided.
(iv) Blasting caps or electric blasting caps shall not be
transported over the highways on the same vehicles with other
explosives, unless packaged, segregated, and transported in accordance
with the Department of Transportation's Hazardous Materials Regulations
(49 CFR parts 177-180).
(2) Transportation vehicles. (i) Vehicles used for transporting
explosives shall be strong enough to carry the load without difficulty
and be in good mechanical condition. If vehicles do not have a closed
body, the body shall be covered with a flameproof and moistureproof
tarpaulin or other effective protection against moisture and sparks. All
vehicles used for the transportation of explosives shall have tight
floors and any exposed spark-producing metal on the inside of the body
shall be covered with wood or other nonsparking materials to prevent
contact with packages of explosives. Packages
[[Page 288]]
of explosives shall not be loaded above the sides of an open-body
vehicle.
(ii) Every vehicle used for transporting explosives and oxidizing
materials listed in paragraph (d)(2)(ii)(a) of this section shall be
marked as follows:
(a) Exterior markings or placards required on applicable vehicles
shall be as follows for the various classes of commodities:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Commodity Type of marking or placard
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Explosives, Class A, any quantity or a Explosives A (Red letters on
combination of Class A and Class B white background).
explosives.
Explosives, Class B, and quantity......... Explosives B (Red letters on
white background).
Oxidizing material (blasting agents, Oxidizers (Yellow letters on
ammonium nitrate, etc.), 1,000 pounds or black background).
more gross weight.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(b) [Reserved]
(c) Such markings or placards shall be displayed at the front, rear,
and on each side of the motor vehicle or trailer, or other cargo
carrying body while it contains explosives or other dangerous articles
of such type and in such quantity as specified in paragraph
(d)(1)(ii)(a) of this subdivision. The front marking or placard may be
displayed on the front of either the truck, truck body, truck tractor or
the trailer.
(d) Any motor vehicle, trailer, or other cargo-carrying body
containing more than one kind of explosive as well as an oxidizing
material requiring a placard under the provisions of paragraph
(d)(2)(ii)(a), the aggregate gross weight of which totals 1,000 pounds
or more, shall be marked or placarded ``Dangerous'' as well as
``Explosive A'' or ``Explosive B'' as appropriate. If explosives Class A
and explosives Class B are loaded on the same vehicle, the ``Explosives
B'' marking need not be displayed.
(e) In any combination of two or more vehicles containing explosives
or other dangerous articles each vehicle shall be marked or placarded as
to its contents and in accordance with paragraphs (d)(2)(ii) (a) and (c)
of this subdivision.
(iii) Each motor vehicle used for transporting explosives shall be
equipped with a minimum of two extinguishers, each having a rating of at
least 10-BC.
(a) Only extinguishers listed or approved by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory shall be deemed suitable for use on explosives-
carrying vehicles. Refer to Sec. 1910.155(c)(3)(iv)(A) for definition of
listed, and Sec. 1910.7 for nationally recognized testing laboratory.
(b) Extinguishers shall be filled and ready for immediate use and
located near the driver's seat. Extinguishers shall be examined
periodically by a competent person.
(iv) A motor vehicle used for transporting explosives shall be given
the following inspection to determine that it is in proper condition for
safe transportation of explosives:
(a) Fire extinguishers shall be filled and in working order.
(b) All electrical wiring shall be completely protected and securely
fastened to prevent short-circuiting.
(c) Chassis, motor, pan, and underside of body shall be reasonably
clean and free of excess oil and grease.
(d) Fuel tank and feedline shall be secure and have no leaks.
(e) Brakes, lights, horn, windshield wipers, and steering apparatus
shall function properly.
(f) Tires shall be checked for proper inflation and defects.
(g) The vehicle shall be in proper condition in every other respect
and acceptable for handling explosives.
(3) Operation of transportation vehicles. (i) Vehicles transporting
explosives shall only be driven by and be in the charge of a driver who
is familiar with the traffic regulations, State laws, and the provisions
of this section.
(ii) Except under emergency conditions, no vehicle transporting
explosives shall be parked before reaching its destination, even though
attended, on any public street adjacent to or in proximity to any place
where people work.
(iii) Every motor vehicle transporting any quantity of Class A or
Class B explosives shall, at all times, be attended by a driver or other
attendant of the motor carrier. This attendant shall have been made
aware of the class of the explosive material in the vehicle and of its
inherent dangers, and shall have been instructed in the
[[Page 289]]
measures and procedures to be followed in order to protect the public
from those dangers. He shall have been made familiar with the vehicle he
is assigned, and shall be trained, supplied with the necessary means,
and authorized to move the vehicle when required.
(a) For the purpose of this subdivision, a motor vehicle shall be
deemed ``attended'' only when the driver or other attendant is
physically on or in the vehicle, or has the vehicle within his field of
vision and can reach it quickly and without any kind of interference
``attended'' also means that the driver or attendant is awake, alert,
and not engaged in other duties or activities which may divert his
attention from the vehicle, except for necessary communication with
public officers, or representatives of the carrier shipper, or
consignee, or except for necessary absence from the vehicle to obtain
food or to provide for his physical comfort.
(b) However, an explosive-laden vehicle may be left unattended if
parked within a securely fenced or walled area with all gates or
entrances locked where parking of such vehicle is otherwise permissible,
or at a magazine site established solely for the purpose of storing
explosives.
(iv) No spark-producing metal, spark-producing metal tools, oils,
matches, firearms, electric storage batteries, flammable substances,
acids, oxidizing materials, or corrosive compounds shall be carried in
the body of any motor truck and/or vehicle transporting explosives,
unless the loading of such dangerous articles and the explosives comply
with U.S. Department of Transportation regulations.
(v) Vehicles transporting explosives shall avoid congested areas and
heavy traffic. Where routes through congested areas have been designated
by local authorities such routes shall be followed.
(vi) Delivery shall only be made to authorized persons and into
authorized magazines or authorized temporary storage or handling areas.
(e) Use of explosives and blasting agents--(1) General provisions.
(i) While explosives are being handled or used, smoking shall not be
permitted and no one near the explosives shall possess matches, open
light or other fire or flame. No person shall be allowed to handle
explosives while under the influence of intoxicating liquors, narcotics,
or other dangerous drugs.
(ii) Original containers or Class II magazines shall be used for
taking detonators and other explosives from storage magazines to the
blasting area.
(iii) When blasting is done in congested areas or in close proximity
to a structure, or any other installation that may be damaged, the blast
shall be covered before firing with a mat constructed so that it is
capable of preventing fragments from being thrown.
(iv) Persons authorized to prepare explosive charges or conduct
blasting operations shall use every reasonable precaution, including but
not limited to warning signals, flags, barricades, or woven wire mats to
insure the safety of the general public and workmen.
(v) Blasting operations shall be conducted during daylight hours.
(vi) Whenever blasting is being conducted in the vicinity of gas,
electric, water, fire alarm, telephone, telegraph, and steam utilities,
the blaster shall notify the appropriate representatives of such
utilities at least 24 hours in advance of blasting, specifying the
location and intended time of such blasting. Verbal notice shall be
confirmed with written notice.
(vii) Due precautions shall be taken to prevent accidental discharge
of electric blasting caps from current induced by radar, radio
transmitters, lightning, adjacent powerlines, dust storms, or other
sources of extraneous electricity. These precautions shall include:
(a) The suspension of all blasting operations and removal of persons
from the blasting area during the approach and progress of an electric
storm.
(b) The posting of signs warning against the use of mobile radio
transmitters on all roads within 350 feet of the blasting operations.
(2) Storage at use sites. (i) Empty containers and paper and fiber
packing materials which have previously contained explosive materials
shall be disposed of in a safe manner, or reused in accordance with the
Department of Transportation's Hazardous Materials Regulations (49 CFR
parts 177-180).
(ii) Containers of explosives shall not be opened in any magazine or
within 50
[[Page 290]]
feet of any magazine. In opening kegs or wooden cases, no sparking metal
tools shall be used; wooden wedges and either wood, fiber or rubber
mallets shall be used. Nonsparking metallic slitters may be used for
opening fiberboard cases.
(iii) Explosives or blasting equipment that are obviously
deteriorated or damaged shall not be used.
(iv) No explosives shall be abandoned.
(3) Loading of explosives in blast holes. (i) All drill holes shall
be sufficiently large to admit freely the insertion of the cartridges of
explosives.
(ii) Tamping shall be done only with wood rods without exposed metal
parts, but nonsparking metal connectors may be used for jointed poles.
Violent tamping shall be avoided. Primed cartridges shall not be tamped.
(iii) When loading blasting agents pneumatically over electric
blasting caps, semiconductive delivery hose shall be used and the
equipment shall be bonded and grounded.
(iv) No holes shall be loaded except those to be fired in the next
round of blasting. After loading, all remaining explosives shall be
immediately returned to an authorized magazine.
(v) Drilling shall not be started until all remaining butts of old
holes are examined with a wooden stick for unexploded charges, and if
any are found, they shall be refired before work proceeds.
(vi) No person shall be allowed to deepen drill holes which have
contained explosives.
(vii) After loading for a blast is completed, all excess blasting
caps or electric blasting caps and other explosives shall immediately be
returned to their separate storage magazines.
(4) Initiation of explosive charges.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) When fuse is used, the blasting cap shall be securely attached
to the safety fuse with a standard-ring type cap crimper. All primers
shall be assembled at least 50 feet from any magazine.
(iii) Primers shall be made up only as required for each round of
blasting.
(iv) No blasting cap shall be inserted in the explosives without
first making a hole in the cartridge for the cap with a wooden punch of
proper size or standard cap crimper.
(v) Explosives shall not be extracted from a hole that has once been
charged or has misfired unless it is impossible to detonate the
unexploded charge by insertion of a fresh additional primer.
(vi) If there are any misfires while using cap and fuse, all persons
shall be required to remain away from the charge for at least 1 hour. If
electric blasting caps are used and a misfire occurs, this waiting
period may be reduced to 30 minutes. Misfires shall be handled under the
direction of the person in charge of the blasting and all wires shall be
carefully traced and search made for unexploded charges.
(vii) Blasters, when testing circuits to charged holes, shall use
only blasting galvanometers designed for this purpose.
(viii) Only the employee making leading wire connections in
electrical firing shall be allowed to fire the shot. Leading wires shall
remain shorted and not be connected to the blasting machine or other
source of current until the charge is to be fired.
(5) Warning required. Before a blast is fired, the employer shall
require that a loud warning signal be given by the person in charge, who
has made certain that all surplus explosives are in a safe place, all
persons and vehicles are at a safe distance or under sufficient cover,
and that an adequate warning has been given.
(f) Explosives at piers, railway stations, and cars or vessels not
otherwise specified in this standard--(1) Railway cars. Except in an
emergency and with permission of the local authority, no person shall
have or keep explosives in a railway car unless said car and contents
and methods of loading are in accordance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Regulations for the Transportation of Explosives, 49 CFR
chapter I.
(2) Packing and marking. No person shall deliver any explosive to
any carrier unless such explosive conforms in all respects, including
marking and packing, to the U.S. Department of Transportation
Regulations for the Transportation of Explosives.
(3) Marking cars. Every railway car containing explosives which has
[[Page 291]]
reached its designation, or is stopped in transit so as no longer to be
in interstate commerce, shall have attached to both sides and ends of
the car, cards with the words ``Explosives--Handle Carefully--Keep Fire
Away'' in red letters at least 1\1/2\ inches high on a white background.
(4) Storage. Any explosives at a railway facility, truck terminal,
pier, wharf harbor facility, or airport terminal whether for delivery to
a consignee, or forwarded to some other destination shall be kept in a
safe place, isolated as far as practicable and in such manner that they
can be easily and quickly removed.
(5) Hours of transfer. Explosives shall not be delivered to or
received from any railway station, truck terminal, pier, wharf, harbor
facility, or airport terminal between the hours of sunset and sunrise.
(g) Blasting agents--(1) General. Unless otherwise set forth in this
paragraph, blasting agents, excluding water gels, shall be transported,
stored, and used in the same manner as explosives. Water gels are
covered in paragraph (h) of this section.
(2) Fixed location mixing. (i) [Reserved]
(ii) Buildings used for the mixing of blasting agents shall conform
to the requirements of this section.
(a) Buildings shall be of noncombustible construction or sheet metal
on wood studs.
(b) Floors in a mixing plant shall be of concrete or of other
nonabsorbent materials.
(c) All fuel oil storage facilities shall be separated from the
mixing plant and located in such a manner that in case of tank rupture,
the oil will drain away from the mixing plant building.
(d) The building shall be well ventilated.
(e) Heating units which do not depend on combustion processes, when
properly designed and located, may be used in the building. All direct
sources of heat shall be provided exclusively from units located outside
the mixing building.
(f) All internal-combustion engines used for electric power
generation shall be located outside the mixing plant building, or shall
be properly ventilated and isolated by a firewall. The exhaust systems
on all such engines shall be located so any spark emission cannot be a
hazard to any materials in or adjacent to the plant.
(iii) Equipment used for mixing blasting agents shall conform to the
requirements of this subdivision.
(a) The design of the mixer shall minimize the possibility of
frictional heating, compaction, and especially confinement. All bearings
and drive assemblies shall be mounted outside the mixer and protected
against the accumulation of dust. All surfaces shall be accessible for
cleaning.
(b) Mixing and packaging equipment shall be constructed of materials
compatible with the fuel-ammonium nitrate composition.
(c) Suitable means shall be provided to prevent the flow of fuel oil
to the mixer in case of fire. In gravity flow systems an automatic
spring-loaded shutoff valve with fusible link shall be installed.
(iv) The provisions of this subdivision shall be considered when
determining blasting agent compositions.
(a) The sensitivity of the blasting agent shall be determined by
means of a No. 8 test blasting cap at regular intervals and after every
change in formulation.
(b) Oxidizers of small particle size, such as crushed ammonium
nitrate prills or fines, may be more sensitive than coarser products and
shall, therefore, be handled with greater care.
(c) No hydrocarbon liquid fuel with flashpoint lower than that of
No. 2 diesel fuel oil 125 deg.F. minimum shall be used.
(d) Crude oil and crankcase oil shall not be used.
(e) Metal powders such as aluminum shall be kept dry and shall be
stored in containers or bins which are moisture-resistant or
weathertight. Solid fuels shall be used in such manner as to minimize
dust explosion hazards.
(f) Peroxides and chlorates shall not be used.
(v) All electrical switches, controls, motors, and lights located in
the mixing room shall conform to the requirements in subpart S of this
part for Class II, Division 2 locations; otherwise
[[Page 292]]
they shall be located outside the mixing room. The frame of the mixer
and all other equipment that may be used shall be electrically bonded
and be provided with a continuous path to the ground.
(vi) Safety precautions at mixing plants shall include the
requirements of this subdivision.
(a) Floors shall be constructed so as to eliminate floor drains and
piping into which molten materials could flow and be confined in case of
fire.
(b) The floors and equipment of the mixing and packaging room shall
be cleaned regularly and thoroughly to prevent accumulation of oxidizers
or fuels and other sensitizers.
(c) The entire mixing and packaging plant shall be cleaned regularly
and thoroughly to prevent excessive accumulation of dust.
(d) Smoking, matches, open flames, spark-producing devices, and
firearms (except firearms carried by guards) shall not be permitted
inside of or within 50 feet of any building or facility used for the
mixing of blasting agents.
(e) The land surrounding the mixing plant shall be kept clear of
brush, dried grass, leaves, and other materials for a distance of at
least 25 feet.
(f) Empty ammonium nitrate bags shall be disposed of daily in a safe
manner.
(g) No welding shall be permitted or open flames used in or around
the mixing or storage area of the plant unless the equipment or area has
been completely washed down and all oxidizer material removed.
(h) Before welding or repairs to hollow shafts, all oxidizer
material shall be removed from the outside and inside of the shaft and
the shaft vented with a minimum one-half inch diameter opening.
(i) Explosives shall not be permitted inside of or within 50 feet of
any building or facility used for the mixing of blasting agents.
(3) Bulk delivery and mixing vehicles. (i) The provisions of this
paragraph shall apply to off-highway private operations as well as to
all public highway movements.
(ii) A bulk vehicle body for delivering and mixing blasting agents
shall conform with the requirements of this paragraph (ii).
(a) The body shall be constructed of noncombustible materials.
(b) Vehicles used to transport bulk premixed blasting agents on
public highways shall have closed bodies.
(c) All moving parts of the mixing system shall be designed as to
prevent a heat buildup. Shafts or axles which contact the product shall
have outboard bearings with 1-inch minimum clearance between the
bearings and the outside of the product container. Particular attention
shall be given to the clearances on all moving parts.
(d) A bulk delivery vehicle shall be strong enough to carry the load
without difficulty and be in good mechanical condition.
(iii) Operation of bulk delivery vehicles shall conform to the
requirements of this subdivision. These include the placarding
requirements as specified by Department of Transportation.
(a) The operator shall be trained in the safe operation of the
vehicle together with its mixing, conveying, and related equipment. The
employer shall assure that the operator is familiar with the commodities
being delivered and the general procedure for handling emergency
situations.
(b) The hauling of either blasting caps or other explosives but not
both, shall be permitted on bulk trucks provided that a special wood or
nonferrous-lined container is installed for the explosives. Such
blasting caps or other explosives shall be in DOT-specified shipping
containers: see 49 CFR chapter I.
(c) No person shall smoke, carry matches or any flame-producing
device, or carry any firearms while in or about bulk vehicles effecting
the mixing transfer or down-the-hole loading of blasting agents at or
near the blasting site.
(d) Caution shall be exercised in the movement of the vehicle in the
blasting area to avoid driving the vehicle over or dragging hoses over
firing lines, cap wires, or explosive materials. The employer shall
assure that the driver, in moving the vehicle, has assistance of a
second person to guide his movements.
[[Page 293]]
(e) No intransit mixing of materials shall be performed.
(iv) Pneumatic loading from bulk delivery vehicles into blastholes
primed with electric blasting caps or other static-sensitive systems
shall conform to the requirements of this subdivision.
(a) A positive grounding device shall be used to prevent the
accumulation of static electricity.
(b) A discharge hose shall be used that has a resistance range that
will prevent conducting stray currents, but that is conductive enough to
bleed off static buildup.
(c) A qualified person shall evaluate all systems to determine if
they will adequately dissipate static under potential field conditions.
(v) Repairs to bulk delivery vehicles shall conform to the
requirements of this section.
(a) No welding or open flames shall be used on or around any part of
the delivery equipment unless it has been completely washed down and all
oxidizer material removed.
(b) Before welding or making repairs to hollow shafts, the shaft
shall be thoroughly cleaned inside and out and vented with a minimum
one-half-inch diameter opening.
(4) Bulk storage bins. (i) The bin, including supports, shall be
constructed of compatible materials, waterproof, and adequately
supported and braced to withstand the combination of all loads including
impact forces arising from product movement within the bin and
accidental vehicle contact with the support legs.
(ii) The bin discharge gate shall be designed to provide a closure
tight enough to prevent leakage of the stored product. Provision shall
also be made so that the gate can be locked.
(iii) Bin loading manways or access hatches shall be hinged or
otherwise attached to the bin and be designed to permit locking.
(iv) Any electrically driven conveyors for loading or unloading bins
shall conform to the requirements of subpart S of this part. They shall
be designed to minimize damage from corrosion.
(v) Bins containing blasting agent shall be located, with respect to
inhabited buildings, passenger railroads, and public highways, in
accordance with Table-21 and separation from other blasting agent
storage and explosives storage shall be in conformity with Table H-22.
(vi) Bins containing ammonium nitrate shall be separated from
blasting agent storage and explosives storage in conformity with Table
H-22.
Table H-22--Table of Recommended Separation Distances of Ammonium
Nitrate and Blasting Agents From Explosives or Blasting Agents \1-6\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Donor weight Minimum separation distance
----------------------- of receptor when barricaded Minimum thickness
\2\ (ft.) of artificial
Pounds Pounds not ------------------------------- barricades \5\
over over Ammonium Blasting (in.)
nitrate \3\ agent \4\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
100 3 11 12
100 300 4 14 12
300 600 5 18 12
600 1,000 6 22 12
1,000 1,600 7 25 12
1,600 2,000 8 29 12
2,000 3,000 9 32 15
3,000 4,000 10 36 15
4,000 6,000 11 40 15
6,000 8,000 12 43 20
8,000 10,000 13 47 20
10,000 12,000 14 50 20
12,000 16,000 15 54 25
16,000 20,000 16 58 25
20,000 25,000 18 65 25
25,000 30,000 19 68 30
30,000 35,000 20 72 30
35,000 40,000 21 76 30
40,000 45,000 22 79 35
45,000 50,000 23 83 35
50,000 55,000 24 86 35
55,000 60,000 25 90 35
60,000 70,000 26 94 40
70,000 80,000 28 101 40
80,000 90,000 30 108 40
90,000 100,000 32 115 40
100,000 120,000 34 122 50
120,000 140,000 37 133 50
140,000 160,000 40 144 50
160,000 180,000 44 158 50
180,000 200,000 48 173 50
200,000 220,000 52 187 60
220,000 250,000 56 202 60
250,000 275,000 60 216 60
275,000 300,000 64 230 60
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ These distances apply to the separation of stores only. Table H-21
shall be used in determining separation distances from inhabited
buildings, passenger railways, and public highways.
\2\ When the ammonium nitrate and/or blasting agent is not barricaded,
the distances shown in the table shall be multiplied by six. These
distances allow for the possibility of high velocity metal fragments
from mixers, hoppers, truck bodies, sheet metal structures, metal
container, and the like which may enclose the ``donor''. Where storage
is in bullet-resistant magazines recommended for explosives or where
the storage is protected by a bullet-resistant wall, distances, and
barricade thicknesses in excess of those prescribed in Table H-21 are
not required.
[[Page 294]]
\3\ The distances in the table apply to ammonium nitrate that passes the
insensitivity test prescribed in the definition of ammonium nitrate
fertilizer promulgated by the National Plant Food Institute*; and
ammonium nitrate failing to pass said test shall be stored at
separation distances determined by competent persons. (*Definition and
Test Procedures for Ammonium Nitrate Fertilizer, National Plant Food
Institute, November 1964.)
\4\ These distances apply to nitro-carbo-nitrates and blasting agents
which pass the insensitivity test prescribed in the U.S. Department of
Transportation (DOT) regulations.
\5\ Earth, or sand dikes, or enclosures filled with the prescribed
minimum thickness of earth or sand are acceptable artificial
barricades. Natural barricades, such as hills or timber of sufficient
density that the surrounding exposures which require protection cannot
be seen from the ``donor'' when the trees are bare of leaves, are also
acceptable.
\6\ When the ammonium nitrate must be counted in determining the
distances to be maintained from inhabited buildings, passenger
railways and public highways, it may be counted at one-half its actual
weight because its blast effect is lower.
Note 7: Guide to use of table of recommended separation distances of
ammonium nitrate and blasting agents from explosives or blasting
agents.
(a) Sketch location of all potential donor and acceptor materials
together with the maximum mass of material to be allowed in that
vicinity. (Potential donors are high explosives, blasting agents, and
combination of masses of detonating materials. Potential acceptors are
high explosives, blasting agents, and ammonium nitrate.)
(b) Consider separately each donor mass in combination with each
acceptor mass. If the masses are closer than table allowance
(distances measured between nearest edges), the combination of masses
becomes a new potential donor of weight equal to the total mass. When
individual masses are considered as donors, distances to potential
acceptors shall be measured between edges. When combined masses within
propagating distance of each other are considered as a donor, the
appropriate distance to the edge of potential acceptors shall be
computed as a weighted distance from the combined masses.
Calculation of weighted distance from combined masses:
Let M2, M3 . . . Mn be donor masses to be combined.
M1 is a potential acceptor mass.
D12 is distance from M1 to M2 (edge to edge).
D13 is distance from M1 to M3 (edge to edge), etc.
To find weighted distance [D1(2,3 . . . n)] from combined masses to M1,
add the products of the individual masses and distances and divide the
total by the sum of the masses thus:
D1(2, 3 . . . n)=M2xD12+M3xD12 . . . +MnxD12M2+M3 . . . +Mn
Propagation is possible if either an individual donor mass is less than
the tabulated distance from an acceptor or a combined mass is less
than the weighted distance from an acceptor.
(c) In determining the distances separating highways, railroads, and
inhabited buildings from potential explosions (as prescribed in Table
H-21), the sum of all masses which may propagate (i.e., lie at
distances less than prescribed in the Table) from either individual or
combined donor masses are included. However, when the ammonium nitrate
must be included, only 50 percent of its weight shall be used because
of its reduced blast effects. In applying Table H-21 to distances from
highways, railroads, and inhabited buildings, distances are measured
from the nearest edge of potentially explodable material as prescribed
in Table H-21, Note 5.
(d) When all or part of a potential acceptor comprises Explosives Class
A as defined in DOT regulations, storage in bullet-resistant magazines
is required. Safe distances to stores in bullet-resistant magazines
may be obtained from the intermagazine distances prescribed in Table H-
21.
(e) Barricades must not have line-of-sight openings between potential
donors and acceptors which permit blast or missiles to move directly
between masses.
(f) Good housekeeping practices shall be maintained around any bin
containing ammonium nitrate or blasting agent. This includes keeping
weeds and other combustible materials cleared within 25 feet of such
bin. Accumulation of spilled product on the ground shall be prevented.
(5) Storage of blasting agents and supplies. (i) Blasting agents and
oxidizers used for mixing of blasting agents shall be stored in the
manner set forth in this subdivision.
(a) Blasting agents or ammonium nitrate, when stored in conjunction
with explosives, shall be stored in the manner set forth in paragraph
(c) of this section for explosives. The mass of blasting agents and one-
half the mass of ammonium nitrate shall be included when computing the
total quantity of explosives for determining distance requirements.
(b) Blasting agents, when stored entirely separate from explosives,
may be stored in the manner set forth in paragraph (c) of this section
or in one-story warehouses (without basements) which shall be:
(1) Noncombustible or fire resistive;
(2) Constructed so as to eliminate open floor drains and piping into
which molten materials could flow and be confined in case of fire;
(3) Weather resistant;
(4) Well ventilated; and
(5) Equipped with a strong door kept securely locked except when
open for business.
(c) Semitrailer or full-trailer vans used for highway or onsite
transportation of the blasting agents are satisfactory for temporarily
storing these materials, provided they are located in accordance with
Table H-22 with respect to one another. Trailers shall be provided with
substantial means for locking, and the trailer doors shall be kept
locked, except during the time of placement and removal of stocks of
blasting agents.
(ii) Warehouses used for the storage of blasting agents separate
from explosives shall be located as set forth in this subdivision.
(a) Warehouses used for the storage of blasting agents shall be
located in Table H-22 with respect to one another.
(b) If both blasting agents and ammonium nitrate are handled or
stored within the distance limitations prescribed through paragraph
(g)(2) of this section, one-half the mass of the ammonium nitrate shall
be added to the mass of the blasting agent when computing the total
quantity of explosives for determining the proper distance for
compliance with Table H-21.
(iii) Smoking, matches, open flames, spark producing devices, and
firearms
[[Page 295]]
are prohibited inside of or within 50 feet of any warehouse used for the
storage of blasting agents. Combustible materials shall not be stored
within 50 feet of warehouses used for the storage of blasting agents.
(iv) The interior of warehouses used for the storage of blasting
agents shall be kept clean and free from debris and empty containers.
Spilled materials shall be cleaned up promptly and safely removed.
Combustible materials, flammable liquids, corrosive acids, chlorates, or
nitrates shall not be stored in any warehouse used for blasting agents
unless separated therefrom by a fire resistive separation of not less
than 1 hour resistance. The provisions of this subdivision shall not
prohibit the storage of blasting agents together with nonexplosive
blasting supplies.
(v) Piles of ammonium nitrate and warehouses containing ammonium
nitrate shall be adequately separated from readily combustible fuels.
(vi) Caked oxidizers, either in bags or in bulk, shall not be
loosened by blasting.
(vii) Every warehouse used for the storage of blasting agents shall
be under the supervision of a competent person.
(6) Transportation of packaged blasting agents. (i) When blasting
agents are transported in the same vehicle with explosives, all of the
requirements of paragraph (d) of this section shall be complied with.
(ii) Vehicles transporting blasting agents shall only be driven by
and be in charge of a driver in possession of a valid motor vehicle
operator's license. Such a person shall also be familiar with the
State's vehicle and traffic laws.
(iii) No matches, firearms, acids, or other corrosive liquids shall
be carried in the bed or body of any vehicle containing blasting agents.
(iv) No person shall be permitted to ride upon, drive, load, or
unload a vehicle containing blasting agents while smoking or under the
influence of intoxicants, narcotics, or other dangerous drugs.
(v) [Reserved]
(vi) Vehicles transporting blasting agents shall be in safe
operating condition at all times.
(7) Use of blasting agents. Persons using blasting agents shall
comply with all of the applicable provisions of paragraph (e) of this
section.
(h) Water gel (Slurry) explosives and blasting agents--(1) General
provisions. Unless otherwise set forth in this paragraph, water gels
shall be transported, stored and used in the same manner as explosives
or blasting agents in accordance with the classification of the product.
(2) Types and classifications. (i) Water gels containing a substance
in itself classified as an explosive shall be classified as an explosive
and manufactured, transported, stored, and used as specified for
``explosives'' in this section, except as noted in subdivision (iv) of
this subparagraph.
(ii) Water gels containing no substance in itself classified as an
explosive and which are cap-sensitive as defined in paragraph (a) of
this section under Blasting Agent shall be classified as an explosive
and manufactured, transported, stored and used as specified for
``explosives'' in this section.
(iii) Water gels containing no substance in itself classified as an
explosive and which are not cap-sensitive as defined in paragraph (a) of
this section under Blasting Agent shall be classified as blasting agents
and manufactured, transported, stored, and used as specified for
``blasting agents'' in this section.
(iv) When tests on specific formulations of water gels result in
Department of Transportation classification as a Class B explosive,
bullet-resistant magazines are not required, see paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of
this section.
(3) Fixed location mixing.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) Buildings used for the mixing of water gels shall conform to
the requirements of this subdivision.
(a) Buildings shall be of noncombustible construction or sheet metal
on wood studs.
(b) Floors in a mixing plant shall be of concrete or of other
nonabsorbent materials.
(c) Where fuel oil is used all fuel oil storage facilities shall be
separated from the mixing plant and located in
[[Page 296]]
such a manner that in case of tank rupture, the oil will drain away from
the mixing plant building.
(d) The building shall be well ventilated.
(e) Heating units that do not depend on combustion processes, when
properly designed and located, may be used in the building. All direct
sources of heat shall be provided exclusively from units located outside
of the mixing building.
(f) All internal-combustion engines used for electric power
generation shall be located outside the mixing plant building, or shall
be properly ventilated and isolated by a firewall. The exhaust systems
on all such engines shall be located so any spark emission cannot be a
hazard to any materials in or adjacent to the plant.
(iii) Ingredients of water gels shall conform to the requirements of
this subdivision.
(a) Ingredients in themselves classified as Class A or Class B
explosives shall be stored in conformity with paragraph (c) of this
section.
(b) Nitrate-water solutions may be stored in tank cars, tank trucks,
or fixed tanks without quantity or distance limitations. Spills or leaks
which may contaminate combustible materials shall be cleaned up
immediately.
(c) Metal powders such as aluminum shall be kept dry and shall be
stored in containers or bins which are moisture-resistant or
weathertight. Solid fuels shall be used in such manner as to minimize
dust explosion hazards.
(d) Ingredients shall not be stored with incompatible materials.
(e) Peroxides and chlorates shall not be used.
(iv) Mixing equipment shall comply with the requirements of this
subdivision.
(a) The design of the processing equipment, including mixing and
conveying equipment, shall be compatible with the relative sensitivity
of the materials being handled. Equipment shall be designed to minimize
the possibility of frictional heating, compaction, overloading, and
confinement.
(b) Both equipment and handling procedures shall be designed to
prevent the introduction of foreign objects or materials.
(c) Mixers, pumps, valves, and related equipment shall be designed
to permit regular and periodic flushing, cleaning, dismantling, and
inspection.
(d) All electrical equipment including wiring, switches, controls,
motors, and lights, shall conform to the requirements of subpart S of
this part.
(e) All electric motors and generators shall be provided with
suitable overload protection devices. Electrical generators, motors,
proportioning devices, and all other electrical enclosures shall be
electrically bonded. The grounding conductor to all such electrical
equipment shall be effectively bonded to the service-entrance ground
connection and to all equipment ground connections in a manner so as to
provide a continuous path to ground.
(v) Mixing facilities shall comply with the fire prevention
requirements of this subdivision.
(a) The mixing, loading, and ingredient transfer areas where
residues or spilled materials may accumulate shall be cleaned
periodically. A cleaning and collection system for dangerous residues
shall be provided. ,
(b) A daily visual inspection shall be made of mixing, conveying,
and electrical equipment to establish that such equipment is in good
operating condition. A program of systematic maintenance shall be
conducted on regular schedule.
(c) Heaters which are not dependent on the combustion process within
the heating unit may be used within the confines of processing
buildings, or compartments, if provided with temperature and safety
controls and located away from combustible materials and the finished
product.
(4) Bulk delivery and mixing vehicles. (i) The design of vehicles
shall comply with the requirements of this subdivision.
(a) Vehicles used over public highways for the bulk transportation
of water gels or of ingredients classified as dangerous commodities,
shall meet the requirements of the Department of Transportation and
shall meet the requirements of paragraphs (d) and (g)(6) of this
section.
(b) When electric power is supplied by a self-contained motor
generator located on the vehicle the generator
[[Page 297]]
shall be at a point separate from where the water gel is discharged.
(c) The design of processing equipment and general requirements
shall conform to subparagraphs (3) (iii) and (iv) of this paragraph.
(d) A positive action parking brake, which will set the wheel brakes
on at least one axle shall be provided on vehicles when equipped with
air brakes and shall be used during bulk delivery operations. Wheel
chocks shall supplement parking brakes whenever conditions may require.
(ii) Operation of bulk delivery and mixing vehicles shall comply
with the requirements of this subdivision.
(a) The placarding requirements contained in DOT regulations apply
to vehicles carrying water gel explosives or blasting agents.
(b) The operator shall be trained in the safe operation of the
vehicle together with its mixing, conveying, and related equipment. He
shall be familiar with the commodities being delivered and the general
procedure for handling emergency situations.
(c) The hauling of either blasting caps or other explosives, but not
both, shall be permitted on bulk trucks provided that a special wood or
nonferrous-lined container is installed for the explosives. Such
blasting caps or other explosives shall be in DOT-specified shipping
containers; see 49 CFR chapter I.
(d) No person shall be allowed to smoke, carry matches or any flame-
producing device, or carry any firearms while in or about bulk vehicles
effecting the mixing, transfer, or down-the-hole loading of water gels
at or near the blasting site.
(e) Caution shall be exercised in the movement of the vehicle in the
blasting area to avoid driving the vehicle over or dragging hoses over
firing lines, cap wires, or explosive materials. The employer shall
furnish the driver the assistance of a second person to guide the
driver's movements.
(f) No intransit mixing of materials shall be performed.
(g) The location chosen for water gel or ingredient transfer from a
support vehicle into the borehole loading vehicle shall be away from the
blasthole site when the boreholes are loaded or in the process of being
loaded.
(i) Storage of ammonium nitrate--(1) Scope and definitions. (i)(a)
Except as provided in paragraph (i)(1)(i)(d) of this paragraph applies
to the storage of ammonium nitrate in the form of crystals, flakes,
grains, or prills including fertilizer grade, dynamite grade, nitrous
oxide grade, technical grade, and other mixtures containing 60 percent
or more ammonium nitrate by weight but does not apply to blasting
agents.
(b) This paragraph does not apply to the transportation of ammonium
nitrate.
(c) This paragraph does not apply to storage under the jurisdiction
of and in compliance with the regulations of the U.S. Coast Guard (see
46 CFR parts 146-149).
(d) The storage of ammonium nitrate and ammonium nitrate mixtures
that are more sensitive than allowed by the ``Definition of Test
Procedures for Ammonium Nitrate Fertilizer'' is prohibited.
(ii)(a) [Reserved]
(b) The standards for ammonium nitrate (nitrous oxide grade) are
those found in the ``Specifications, Properties, and Recommendations for
Packaging, Transportation, Storage, and Use of Ammonium Nitrate'',
available from the Compressed Gas Association, Inc., which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(2) General provisions. (i) This paragraph applies to all persons
storing, having, or keeping ammonium nitrate, and to the owner or lessee
of any building, premises, or structure in which ammonium nitrate is
stored in quantities of 1,000 pounds or more.
(ii) Approval of large quantity storage shall be subject to due
consideration of the fire and explosion hazards, including exposure to
toxic vapors from burning or decomposing ammonium nitrate.
(iii)(a) Storage buildings shall not have basements unless the
basements are open on at least one side. Storage buildings shall not be
over one story in height.
(b) Storage buildings shall have adequate ventilation or be of a
construction that will be self-ventilating in the event of fire.
[[Page 298]]
(c) The wall on the exposed side of a storage building within 50
feet of a combustible building, forest, piles of combustible materials
and similar exposure hazards shall be of fire-resistive construction. In
lieu of the fire-resistive wall, other suitable means of exposure
protection such as a free standing wall may be used. The roof coverings
shall be Class C or better, as defined in the Manual on Roof Coverings,
NFPA 203M-1970, which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6.
(d) All flooring in storage and handling areas, shall be of
noncombustible material or protected against impregnation by ammonium
nitrate and shall be without open drains, traps, tunnels, pits, or
pockets into which any molten ammonium nitrate could flow and be
confined in the event of fire.
(e) The continued use of an existing storage building or structure
not in strict conformity with this paragraph may be approved in cases
where such continued use will not constitute a hazard to life.
(f) Buildings and structures shall be dry and free from water
seepage through the roof, walls, and floors.
(3) Storage of ammonium nitrate in bags, drums, or other containers.
(i)(a) Bags and containers used for ammonium nitrate must comply with
specifications and standards required for use in interstate commerce
(see 49 CFR chapter I).
(b) Containers used on the premises in the actual manufacturing or
processing need not comply with provisions of paragraph (i)(3)(i)(a) of
this paragraph.
(ii)(a) Containers of ammonium nitrate shall not be accepted for
storage when the temperature of the ammonium nitrate exceeds 130 deg.F.
(b) Bags of ammonium nitrate shall not be stored within 30 inches of
the storage building walls and partitions.
(c) The height of piles shall not exceed 20 feet. The width of piles
shall not exceed 20 feet and the length 50 feet except that where the
building is of noncombustible construction or is protected by automatic
sprinklers the length of piles shall not be limited. In no case shall
the ammonium nitrate be stacked closer than 36 inches below the roof or
supporting and spreader beams overhead.
(d) Aisles shall be provided to separate piles by a clear space of
not less than 3 feet in width. At least one service or main aisle in the
storage area shall be not less than 4 feet in width.
(4) Storage of bulk ammonium nitrate. (i)(a) Warehouses shall have
adequate ventilation or be capable of adequate ventilation in case of
fire.
(b) Unless constructed of noncombustible material or unless adequate
facilities for fighting a roof fire are available, bulk storage
structures shall not exceed a height of 40 feet.
(ii)(a) Bins shall be clean and free of materials which may
contaminate ammonium nitrate.
(b) Due to the corrosive and reactive properties of ammonium
nitrate, and to avoid contamination, galvanized iron, copper, lead, and
zinc shall not be used in a bin construction unless suitably protected.
Aluminum bins and wooden bins protected against impregnation by ammonium
nitrate are permissible. The partitions dividing the ammonium nitrate
storage from other products which would contaminate the ammonium nitrate
shall be of tight construction.
(c) The ammonium nitrate storage bins or piles shall be clearly
identified by signs reading ``Ammonium Nitrate'' with letters at least 2
inches high.
(iii)(a) Piles or bins shall be so sized and arranged that all
material in the pile is moved out periodically in order to minimize
possible caking of the stored ammonium nitrate.
(b) Height or depth of piles shall be limited by the pressure-
setting tendency of the product. However, in no case shall the ammonium
nitrate be piled higher at any point than 36 inches below the roof or
supporting and spreader beams overhead.
(c) Ammonium nitrate shall not be accepted for storage when the
temperature of the product exceeds 130 deg.F.
(d) Dynamite, other explosives, and blasting agents shall not be
used to break up or loosen caked ammonium nitrate.
(5) Contaminants. (i)(a) Ammonium nitrate shall be in a separate
building or shall be separated by approved type
[[Page 299]]
firewalls of not less than 1 hour fire-resistance rating from storage of
organic chemicals, acids, or other corrosive materials, materials that
may require blasting during processing or handling, compressed flammable
gases, flammable and combustible materials or other contaminating
substances, including but not limited to animal fats, baled cotton,
baled rags, baled scrap paper, bleaching powder, burlap or cotton bags,
caustic soda, coal, coke, charcoal, cork, camphor, excelsior, fibers of
any kind, fish oils, fish meal, foam rubber, hay, lubricating oil,
linseed oil, or other oxidizable or drying oils, naphthalene, oakum,
oiled clothing, oiled paper, oiled textiles, paint, straw, sawdust, wood
shavings, or vegetable oils. Walls referred to in this subdivision need
extend only to the underside of the roof.
(b) In lieu of separation walls, ammonium nitrate may be separated
from the materials referred to in paragraph (a) of this section by a
space of at least 30 feet.
(c) Flammable liquids such as gasoline, kerosene, solvents, and
light fuel oils shall not be stored on the premises except when such
storage conforms to Sec. 1910.106, and when walls and sills or curbs are
provided in accordance with paragraphs (i)(5)(i) (a) or (b) of this
section.
(d) LP-Gas shall not be stored on the premises except when such
storage conforms to Sec. 1910.110.
(ii)(a) Sulfur and finely divided metals shall not be stored in the
same building with ammonium nitrate except when such storage conforms to
paragraphs (a) through (h) of this section.
(b) Explosives and blasting agents shall not be stored in the same
building with ammonium nitrate except on the premises of makers,
distributors, and user-compounders of explosives or blasting agents.
(c) Where explosives or blasting agents are stored in separate
buildings, other than on the premises of makers, distributors, and user-
compounders of explosives or blasting agents, they shall be separated
from the ammonium nitrate by the distances and/or barricades specified
in Table H-22 of this subpart, but by not less than 50 feet.
(d) Storage and/or operations on the premises of makers,
distributors, and user-compounders of explosives or blasting agents
shall be in conformity with paragraphs (a) through (h) of this section.
(6) General precautions. (i) Electrical installations shall conform
to the requirements of subpart S of this part, for ordinary locations.
They shall be designed to minimize damage from corrosion.
(ii) In areas where lightning storms are prevalent, lightning
protection shall be provided. (See the Lightning Protection Code, NFPA
78-1968, which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6.)
(iii) Provisions shall be made to prevent unauthorized personnel
from entering the ammonium nitrate storage area.
(7) Fire protection. (i) Not more than 2,500 tons (2270 tonnes) of
bagged ammonium nitrate shall be stored in a building or structure not
equipped with an automatic sprinkler system. Sprinkler systems shall be
of the approved type and installed in accordance with Sec. 1910.159.
(ii)(a) Suitable fire control devices such as small hose or portable
fire extinguishers shall be provided throughout the warehouse and in the
loading and unloading areas. Suitable fire control devices shall comply
with the requirements of Secs. 1910.157 and 1910.158.
(b) Water supplies and fire hydrants shall be available in
accordance with recognized good practices.
(j) Small arms ammunition, small arms primers, and small arms
propellants--(1) Scope. This paragraph does not apply to in-process
storage and intraplant transportation during manufacture of small arms
ammunition, small arms primers, and smokeless propellants.
(2) Small arms ammunition. (i) No quantity limitations are imposed
on the storage of small arms ammunition in warehouses, retail stores,
and other general occupancy facilities, except those imposed by
limitations of storage facilities.
(ii) Small arms ammunition shall be separated from flammable
liquids, flammable solids as classified in 49
[[Page 300]]
CFR part 172, and from oxidizing materials, by a fire-resistive wall of
1-hour rating or by a distance of 25 feet.
(iii) Small arms ammunition shall not be stored together with Class
A or Class B explosives unless the storage facility is adequate for this
latter storage.
(3) Smokeless propellants. (i) All smokeless propellants shall be
stored in shipping containers specified in 49 CFR 173.93 for smokeless
propellants.
(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) Commercial stocks of smokeless propellants over 20 pounds and
not more than 100 pounds shall be stored in portable wooden boxes having
walls of at least 1 inch nominal thickness.
(iv) Commercial stocks in quantities not to exceed 750 pounds shall
be stored in nonportable storage cabinets having wooden walls of at
least 1 inch nominal thickness. Not more than 400 pounds shall be
permitted in any one cabinet.
(v) Quantities in excess of 750 pounds shall be stored in magazines
in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.
(4) Small arms ammunition primers. (i) Small arms ammunition primers
shall not be stored except in the original shipping container in
accordance with the requirements of 49 CFR 173.107 for small arms
ammunition primers.
(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) Small arms ammunition primers shall be separated from
flammable liquids, flammable solids as classified in 49 CFR part 172,
and oxidizing materials by a fire-resistive wall of 1-hour rating or by
a distance of 25 feet.
(iv) Not more than 750,000 small arms ammunition primers shall be
stored in any one building, except as provided in paragraph (j)(4)(v) of
this paragraph. Not more than 100,000 shall be stored in any one pile.
Piles shall be at least 15 feet apart.
(v) Quantities of small arms ammunition primers in excess of 750,000
shall be stored in magazines in accordance with paragraph (c) of this
section.
(k) Scope. (1) This section applies to the manufacture, keeping,
having, storage, sale, transportation, and use of explosives, blasting
agents, and pyrotechnics. The section does not apply to the sale and use
(public display) of pyrotechnics, commonly known as fireworks, nor the
use of explosives in the form prescribed by the official U.S.
Pharmacopeia.
(2) The manufacture of explosives as defined in paragraph (a)(3) of
this section shall also meet the requirements contained in
Sec. 1910.119.
(3) The manufacture of pyrotechnics as defined in paragraph (a)(10)
of this section shall also meet the requirements contained in
Sec. 1910.119.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49747, Oct. 24, 1978;
45 FR 60704, Sept. 12, 1980; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 57 FR 6403,
Feb. 24, 1992; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, 1996; 63
FR 33466, June 18, 1998]
Sec. 1910.110 Storage and handling of liquefied petroleum gases.
(a) Definitions applicable to this section. As used in this section:
(1) API-ASME container--A container constructed in accordance with
the requirements of paragraph (b)(3)(iii) of this section.
(2) ASME container--A container constructed in accordance with the
requirements of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section.
(3) Container assembly--An assembly consisting essentially of the
container and fittings for all container openings, including shutoff
valves, excess flow valves, liquid-level gaging devices, safety relief
devices, and protective housing.
(4) Containers--All vessels, such as tanks, cylinders, or drums,
used for transportation or storing liquefied petroleum gases.
(5) DOT--Department of Transportation.
(6) DOT container--A container constructed in accordance with the
applicable requirements of 49 CFR chapter 1.
(7) ``Liquified petroleum gases''-- ``LPG'' and ``LP-Gas''--Any
material which is composed predominantly of any of the following
hydrocarbons, or mixtures of them; propane, propylene, butanes (normal
butane or iso-butane), and butylenes.
(8) Movable fuel storage tenders or farm carts--Containers not in
excess of 1,200 gallons water capacity, equipped with wheels to be towed
from one location of usage to another. They are basically nonhighway
vehicles, but may occasionally be moved over public roads or highways.
They are used as a fuel
[[Page 301]]
supply for farm tractors, construction machinery and similar equipment.
(9) P.S.I.G.--pounds per square inch gauge.
(10) P.S.I.A.--pounds per square inch absolute.
(11) Systems--an assembly of equipment consisting essentially of the
container or containers, major devices such as vaporizers, safety relief
valves, excess flow valves, regulators, and piping connecting such
parts.
(12) Vaporizer-burner--an integral vaporizer-burner unit, dependent
upon the heat generated by the burner as the source of heat to vaporize
the liquid used for dehydrators or dryers.
(13) Ventilation, adequate--when specified for the prevention of
fire during normal operation, ventilation shall be considered adequate
when the concentration of the gas in a gas-air mixture does not exceed
25 percent of the lower flammable limit.
(14) Approved--unless otherwise indicated, listing or approval by a
nationally recognized testing laboratory. Refer to Sec. 1910.7 for
definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory.
(15) Listed--see ``approved'' in Sec. 1910.110(14).
(16) DOT Specifications--regulations of the Department of
Transportation published in 49 CFR chapter I.
(17)-(18) [Reserved]
(19) DOT cylinders--cylinders meeting the requirements of 49 CFR
chapter I.
(b) Basic rules--(1) Odorizing gases. (i) All liquefied petroleum
gases shall be effectively odorized by an approved agent of such
character as to indicate positively, by distinct odor, the presence of
gas down to concentration in air of not over one-fifth the lower limit
of flammability. Odorization, however, is not required if harmful in the
use of further processing of the liquefied petroleum gas, or if
odorization will serve no useful purpose as a warning agent in such use
or further processing.
(ii) The odorization requirement of paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this
section shall be considered to be met by the use of 1.0 pounds of ethyl
mercaptan, 1.0 pounds of thiophane or 1.4 pounds of amyl mercaptan per
10,000 gallons of LP-Gas. However, this listing of odorants and
quantities shall not exclude the use of other odorants that meet the
odorization requirements of paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section.
(2) Approval of equipment and systems. (i) Each system utilizing DOT
containers in accordance with 49 CFR part 178 shall have its container
valves, connectors, manifold valve assemblies, and regulators approved.
(ii) Each system for domestic or commercial use utilizing containers
of 2,000 gallons or less water capacity, other than those constructed in
accordance with 49 CFR part 178, shall consist of a container assembly
and one or more regulators, and may include other parts. The system as a
unit or the container assembly as a unit, and the regulator or
regulators, shall be individually listed.
(iii) In systems utilizing containers of over 2,000 gallons water
capacity, each regulator, container valve, excess flow valve, gaging
device, and relief valve installed on or at the container, shall have
its correctness as to design, construction, and performance determined
by listing by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Refer to
Sec. 1910.7 for definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory.
(3) Requirements for construction and original test of containers.
(i) Containers used with systems embodied in paragraphs (d), (e), (g),
and (h) of this section, except as provided in paragraphs (e)(3)(iii)
and (g)(2)(i) of this section, shall be designed, constructed, and
tested in accordance with the Rules for Construction of Unfired Pressure
Vessels, section VIII, Division 1, American Society of Mechanical
Engineers (ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 1968 edition, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(ii) Containers constructed according to the 1949 and earlier
editions of the ASME Code do not have to comply with paragraphs U-2
through U-10 and U-19 thereof. Containers constructed according to
paragraph U-70 in the 1949 and earlier editions are not authorized.
(iii) Containers designed, constructed, and tested prior to July 1,
1961, according to the Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels for Petroleum
Liquids
[[Page 302]]
and Gases, 1951 edition with 1954 Addenda, of the American Petroleum
Institute and the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, shall be
considered in conformance. Containers constructed according to API-ASME
Code do not have to comply with section I or with appendix to section I.
Paragraphs W-601 to W-606 inclusive in the 1943 and earlier editions do
not apply.
(iv) The provisions of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section shall not
be construed as prohibiting the continued use or reinstallation of
containers constructed and maintained in accordance with the standard
for the Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases NFPA No. 58 in
effect at the time of fabrication.
(v) Containers used with systems embodied in paragraph (b),
(d)(3)(iii), and (f) of this section, shall be constructed, tested, and
stamped in accordance with DOT specifications effective at the date of
their manufacture.
(4) Welding of containers. (i) Welding to the shell, head, or any
other part of the container subject to internal pressure, shall be done
in compliance with the code under which the tank was fabricated. Other
welding is permitted only on saddle plates, lugs, or brackets attached
to the container by the tank manufacturer.
(ii) Where repair or modification involving welding of DOT
containers is required, the container shall be returned to a qualified
manufacturer making containers of the same type, and the repair or
modification made in compliance with DOT regulations.
(5) Markings on containers. (i) Each container covered in paragraph
(b)(3)(i) of this section, except as provided in paragraph (b)(3)(iv) of
this section shall be marked as specified in the following:
(a) With a marking identifying compliance with, and other markings
required by, the rules of the reference under which the container is
constructed; or with the stamp and other markings required by the
National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors.
(b) With notation as to whether the container is designed for
underground or aboveground installation or both. If intended for both
and different style hoods are provided, the marking shall indicate the
proper hood for each type of installation.
(c) With the name and address of the supplier of the container, or
with the trade name of the container.
(d) With the water capacity of the container in pounds or gallons,
U.S. Standard.
(e) With the pressure in p.s.i.g., for which the container is
designed.
(f) With the wording ``This container shall not contain a product
having a vapor pressure in excess of -- p.s.i.g. at 100 deg.F.,'' see
subparagraph (14)(viii) of this paragraph.
(g) With the tare weight in pounds or other identified unit of
weight for containers with a water capacity of 300 pounds or less.
(h) With marking indicating the maximum level to which the container
may be filled with liquid at temperatures between 20 deg.F. and 130
deg.F., except on containers provided with fixed maximum level
indicators or which are filled by weighing. Markings shall be increments
of not more than 20 deg.F. This marking may be located on the liquid
level gaging device.
(i) With the outside surface area in square feet.
(ii) Markings specified shall be on a metal nameplate attached to
the container and located in such a manner as to remain visible after
the container is installed.
(iii) When LP-Gas and one or more other gases are stored or used in
the same area, the containers shall be marked to identify their content.
Marking shall be in compliance with American National Standard Z48.1-
1954, ``Method of Marking Portable Compressed Gas Containers To Identify
the Material Contained'', which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(6) Location of containers and regulating equipment. (i) Containers,
and first stage regulating equipment if used, shall be located outside
of buildings, except under one or more of the following:
(a) In buildings used exclusively for container charging,
vaporization pressure reduction, gas mixing, gas manufacturing, or
distribution.
[[Page 303]]
(b) When portable use is necessary and in accordance with paragraph
(c)(5) of this section.
(c) LP-Gas fueled stationary or portable engines in accordance with
paragraph (e) (11) or (12) of this section.
(d) LP-Gas fueled industrial trucks used in accordance with
paragraph (e)(13) of this section.
(e) LP-Gas fueled vehicles garaged in accordance with paragraph
(e)(14) of this section.
(f) Containers awaiting use or resale when stored in accordance with
paragraph (f) of this section.
(ii) Each individual container shall be located with respect to the
nearest important building or group of buildings in accordance with
Table H-23.
Table H-23
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum distances
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Water capacity per container Containers
-------------------------------------------------- Between aboveground
Underground Aboveground containers
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Less than 125 gals.\1\............... 10 feet................ None................... None.
125 to 250 gals...................... 10 feet................ 10 feet................ None.
251 to 500 gals...................... 10 feet................ 10 feet................ 3 feet.
501 to 2,000 gals.................... 25 feet \2\............ 25 feet \2\............ 3 feet.
2,001 to 30,000 gals................. 50 feet................ 50 feet................ 5 feet.
30,001 to 70,000 gals................ 50 feet................ 75 feet.\3\............
70,001 to 90,000 gals................ 50 feet................ 100 feet.\3\...........
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ If the aggregate water capacity of a multi-container installation at a consumer site is 501 gallons or
greater, the minimum distance shall comply with the appropriate portion of this table, applying the aggregate
capacity rather than the capacity per container. If more than one installation is made, each installation
shall be separated from another installation by at least 25 feet. Do not apply the MINIMUM DISTANCES BETWEEN
ABOVE-GROUND CONTAINERS to such installations.
\2\ The above distance requirements may be reduced to not less than 10 feet for a single container of 1,200
gallons water capacity or less, providing such a container is at least 25 feet from any other LP-Gas container
of more than 125 gallons water capacity.
\3\ \1/4\ of sum of diameters of adjacent containers.
(iii) Containers installed for use shall not be stacked one above
the other.
(iv) [Reserved]
(v) In the case of buildings devoted exclusively to gas
manufacturing and distributing operations, the distances required by
Table H-23 may be reduced provided that in no case shall containers of
water capacity exceeding 500 gallons be located closer than 10 feet to
such gas manufacturing and distributing buildings.
(vi) Readily ignitible material such as weeds and long dry grass
shall be removed within 10 feet of any container.
(vii) The minimum separation between liquefied petroleum gas
containers and flammable liquid tanks shall be 20 feet, and the minimum
separation between a container and the centerline of the dike shall be
10 feet. The foregoing provision shall not apply when LP-Gas containers
of 125 gallons or less capacity are installed adjacent to Class III
flammable liquid tanks of 275 gallons or less capacity.
(viii) Suitable means shall be taken to prevent the accumulation of
flammable liquids under adjacent liquified petroleum gas containers,
such as by diking, diversion curbs, or grading.
(ix) When dikes are used with flammable liquid tanks, no liquefied
petroleum gas containers shall be located within the diked area.
(7) Container valves and container accessories. (i) Valves,
fittings, and accessories connected directly to the container including
primary shutoff valves, shall have a rated working pressure of at least
250 p.s.i.g. and shall be of material and design suitable for LP-Gas
service. Cast iron shall not be used for container valves, fittings, and
accessories. This does not prohibit the use of container valves made of
malleable or nodular iron.
(ii) Connections to containers, except safety relief connections,
liquid level gaging devices, and plugged openings, shall have shutoff
valves located as close to the container as practicable.
(iii) Excess flow valves, where required shall close automatically
at the rated flows of vapor or liquid as specified by the manufacturer.
The connections or line including valves, fittings, etc., being
protected by an excess flow valve shall have a greater capacity than the
rated flow of the excess flow valve.
(iv) Liquid level gaging devices which are so constructed that
outward flow of container contents shall not exceed that passed by a No.
54 drill size opening, need not be equipped with excess flow valves.
(v) Openings from container or through fittings attached directly on
container to which pressure gage connection is made, need not be
equipped with shutoff or excess flow valves if such openings are
restricted to not larger than No. 54 drill size opening.
[[Page 304]]
(vi) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(5)(i)(b) of this section,
excess flow and back pressure check valves where required by this
section shall be located inside of the container or at a point outside
where the line enters the container; in the latter case, installation
shall be made in such manner that any undue strain beyond the excess
flow or back pressure check valve will not cause breakage between the
container and such valve.
(vii) Excess flow valves shall be designed with a bypass, not to
exceed a No. 60 drill size opening to allow equalization of pressures.
(viii) Containers of more than 30 gallons water capacity and less
than 2,000 gallons water capacity, filled on a volumetric basis, and
manufactured after December 1, 1963, shall be equipped for filling into
the vapor space.
(8) Piping--including pipe, tubing, and fittings. (i) Pipe, except
as provided in paragraphs (e)(6)(i) and (g)(10)(iii), of this section
shall be wrought iron or steel (black or galvanized), brass, copper, or
aluminum alloy. Aluminum alloy pipe shall be at least Schedule 40 in
accordance with the specifications for Aluminum Alloy Pipe, American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) H38.7-1969 (ASTM, B241-69), which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, except that the
use of alloy 5456 is prohibited and shall be suitably marked at each end
of each length indicating compliance with American National Standard
Institute Specifications. Aluminum Alloy pipe shall be protected against
external corrosion when it is in contact with dissimilar metals other
than galvanized steel, or its location is subject to repeated wetting by
such liquids as water (except rain water), detergents, sewage, or
leaking from other piping, or it passes through flooring, plaster,
masonry, or insulation. Galvanized sheet steel or pipe, galvanized
inside and out, may be considered suitable protection. The maximum
nominal pipe size for aluminum pipe shall be three-fourths inch and
shall not be used for pressures exceeding 20 p.s.i.g. Aluminum alloy
pipe shall not be installed within 6 inches of the ground.
(a) Vapor piping with operating pressures not exceeding 125 p.s.i.g.
shall be suitable for a working pressure of at least 125 p.s.i.g. Pipe
shall be at least Schedule 40 (ASTM A-53-69, Grade B Electric Resistance
Welded and Electric Flash Welded Pipe, which is incorporated by
reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, or equal).
(b) Vapor piping with operating pressures over 125 p.s.i.g. and all
liquid piping shall be suitable for a working pressure of at least 250
p.s.i.g. Pipe shall be at least Schedule 80 if joints are threaded or
threaded and back welded. At least Schedule 40 (ASTM A-53-69 Grade B
Electric Resistance Welded and Electric Flash Welded Pipe or equal)
shall be used if joints are welded, or welded and flanged.
(ii) Tubing shall be seamless and of copper, brass, steel, or
aluminum alloy. Copper tubing shall be of type K or L or equivalent as
covered in the Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube, ANSI H23.1-
1970 (ASTM B88-69), which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6. Aluminum alloy tubing shall be of Type A or B or equivalent
as covered in Specification ASTM B210-68 (which is incorporated by
reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6) and shall be suitably marked
every 18 inches indicating compliance with ASTM Specifications. The
minimum nominal wall thickness of copper tubing and aluminum alloy
tubing shall be as specified in Table H-24 and Table H-25.
Aluminum alloy tubing shall be protected against external corrosion when
it is in contact with dissimilar metals other than galvanized steel, or
its location is subject to repeated wetting by liquids such as water
(except rainwater), detergents, sewage, or leakage from other piping, or
it passes through flooring, plaster, masonry, or insulation. Galvanized
sheet steel or pipe, galvanized inside and out, may be considered
suitable protection. The maximum outside diameter for aluminum alloy
tubing shall be three-fourths inch and shall not be used for pressures
exceeding 20 p.s.i.g. Aluminum alloy tubing shall not be installed
within 6 inches of the ground.
[[Page 305]]
Table H-24--Wall Thickness of Copper Tubing \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nominal wall thickness (inches)
Standard size Nominal outside ---------------------------------
(inches) diameter (inches) Type K Type L
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/4\ 0.375 0.035 0.030
\3/8\ 0.500 0.049 0.035
\1/2\ 0.625 0.049 0.040
\5/8\ 0.750 0.049 0.042
\3/4\ 0.875 0.065 0.045
1 1.125 0.065 0.050
1\1/4\ 1.375 0.065 0.055
1\1/2\ 1.625 0.072 0.060
2 2.125 0.083 0.070
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Based on data in Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube, ANSI
H23.1-1970 (ASTM B-88-69).
Note: The standard size by which tube is designated is \1/8\ inch
smaller than its nominal outside diameter.
Table H-25--Wall Thickness of Aluminum Alloy Tubing \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nominal wall thickness (inches)
Outside diameter -----------------------------------------------
(inches) Type A Type B
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\3/8\ 0.035 0.049
\1/2\ 0.035 0.049
\5/8\ 0.042 0.049
\3/4\ 0.049 0.058
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Based on data in Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Drawn
Seamless Coiled Tubes for Special Purpose Applications, ASTM B210-68.
(iii) In systems where the gas in liquid form without pressure
reduction enters the building, only heavy walled seamless brass or
copper tubing with an internal diameter not greater than three thirty-
seconds inch, and a wall thickness of not less than three sixty-fourths
inch shall be used. This requirement shall not apply to research and
experimental laboratories, buildings, or separate fire divisions of
buildings used exclusively for housing internal combustion engines, and
to commercial gas plants or bulk stations where containers are charged,
nor to industrial vaporizer buildings, nor to buildings, structures, or
equipment under construction or undergoing major renovation.
(iv) Pipe joints may be screwed, flanged, welded, soldered, or
brazed with a material having a melting point exceeding 1,000 deg.F.
Joints on seamless copper, brass, steel, or aluminum alloy gas tubing
shall be made by means of approved gas tubing fittings, or soldered or
brazed with a material having a melting point exceeding 1,000 deg.F.
(v) For operating pressures of 125 p.s.i.g. or less, fittings shall
be designed for a pressure of at least 125 p.s.i.g. For operating
pressures above 125 p.s.i.g., fittings shall be designed for a minimum
of 250 p.s.i.g.
(vi) The use of threaded cast iron pipe fittings such as ells, tees,
crosses, couplings, and unions is prohibited. Aluminum alloy fittings
shall be used with aluminum alloy pipe and tubing. Insulated fittings
shall be used where aluminum alloy pipe or tubing connects with a
dissimilar metal.
(vii) Strainers, regulators, meters, compressors, pumps, etc., are
not to be considered as pipe fittings. This does not prohibit the use of
malleable, nodular, or higher strength gray iron for such equipment.
(viii) All materials such as valve seats, packing, gaskets,
diaphragms, etc., shall be of such quality as to be resistant to the
action of liquefied petroleum gas under the service conditions to which
they are subjected.
(ix) All piping, tubing, or hose shall be tested after assembly and
proved free from leaks at not less than normal operating pressures.
After installation, piping and tubing of all domestic and commercial
systems shall be tested and proved free of leaks using a manometer or
equivalent device that will indicate a drop in pressure. Test shall not
be made with a flame.
(x) Provision shall be made to compensate for expansion,
contraction, jarring, and vibration, and for settling. This may be
accomplished by flexible connections.
(xi) Piping outside buildings may be buried, above ground, or both,
but shall be well supported and protected against physical damage. Where
soil conditions warrant, all piping shall be protected against
corrosion. Where condensation may occur, the piping shall be pitched
back to the container, or suitable means shall be provided for
revaporization of the condensate.
(9) Hose specifications. (i) Hose shall be fabricated of materials
that are resistant to the action of LP-Gas in the liquid and vapor
phases. If wire braid is used for reinforcing the hose, it shall be of
corrosion-resistant material such as stainless steel.
(ii) Hose subject to container pressure shall be marked ``LP-Gas''
or
[[Page 306]]
``LPG'' at not greater than 10-foot intervals.
(iii) Hose subject to container pressure shall be designed for a
bursting pressure of not less than 1,250 p.s.i.g.
(iv) Hose subject to container pressure shall have its correctness
as to design construction and performance determined by being listed
(see Sec. 1910.110(a)(15)).
(v) Hose connections subject to container pressure shall be capable
of withstanding, without leakage, a test pressure of not less than 500
p.s.i.g.
(vi) Hose and hose connections on the low-pressure side of the
regulator or reducing valve shall be designed for a bursting pressure of
not less than 125 p.s.i.g. or five times the set pressure of the relief
devices protecting that portion of the system, whichever is higher.
(vii) Hose may be used on the low-pressure side of regulators to
connect to other than domestic and commercial gas appliances under the
following conditions:
(a) The appliances connected with hose shall be portable and need a
flexible connection.
(b) For use inside buildings the hose shall be of minimum practical
length, but shall not exceed 6 feet except as provided in paragraph
(c)(5)(i)(g) of this section and shall not extend from one room to
another, nor pass through any walls, partitions, ceilings, or floors.
Such hose shall not be concealed from view or used in a concealed
location. For use outside of buildings, the hose may exceed this length
but shall be kept as short as practical.
(c) The hose shall be approved and shall not be used where it is
likely to be subjected to temperatures above 125 deg.F. The hose shall
be securely connected to the appliance and the use of rubber slip ends
shall not be permitted.
(d) The shutoff valve for an appliance connected by hose shall be in
the metal pipe or tubing and not at the appliance end of the hose. When
shutoff valves are installed close to each other, precautions shall be
taken to prevent operation of the wrong valve.
(e) Hose used for connecting to wall outlets shall be protected from
physical damage.
(10) Safety devices. (i) Every container except those constructed in
accordance with DOT specifications and every vaporizer (except motor
fuel vaporizers and except vaporizers described in paragraph
(b)(11)(ii)(c) of this section and paragraph (d)(4)(v)(a) of this
section) whether heated by artificial means or not, shall be provided
with one or more safety relief valves of spring-loaded or equivalent
type. These valves shall be arranged to afford free vent to the outer
air with discharge not less than 5 feet horizontally away from any
opening into the building which is below such discharge. The rate of
discharge shall be in accordance with the requirements of paragraph
(b)(10)(ii) or (b)(10)(iii) of this section in the case of vaporizers.
(ii) Minimum required rate of discharge in cubic feet per minute of
air at 120 percent of the maximum permitted start to discharge pressure
for safety relief valves to be used on containers other than those
constructed in accordance with DOT specification shall be as follows:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flow rate
Surface area (sq. ft.) CFM air
------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 or less.................................................. 626
25.......................................................... 751
30.......................................................... 872
35.......................................................... 990
40.......................................................... 1,100
45.......................................................... 1,220
50.......................................................... 1,330
55.......................................................... 1,430
60.......................................................... 1,540
65.......................................................... 1,640
70.......................................................... 1,750
75.......................................................... 1,850
80.......................................................... 1,950
85.......................................................... 2,050
90.......................................................... 2,150
95.......................................................... 2,240
100......................................................... 2,340
105......................................................... 2,440
110......................................................... 2,530
115......................................................... 2,630
120......................................................... 2,720
125......................................................... 2,810
130......................................................... 2,900
135......................................................... 2,990
140......................................................... 3,080
145......................................................... 3,170
150......................................................... 3,260
155......................................................... 3,350
160......................................................... 3,440
165......................................................... 3,530
170......................................................... 3,620
175......................................................... 3,700
180......................................................... 3,790
185......................................................... 3,880
190......................................................... 3,960
195......................................................... 4,050
200......................................................... 4,130
210......................................................... 4,300
220......................................................... 4,470
[[Page 307]]
230......................................................... 4,630
240......................................................... 4,800
250......................................................... 4,960
260......................................................... 5,130
270......................................................... 5,290
280......................................................... 5,450
290......................................................... 5,610
300......................................................... 5,760
310......................................................... 5,920
320......................................................... 6,080
330......................................................... 6,230
340......................................................... 6,390
350......................................................... 6,540
360......................................................... 6,690
370......................................................... 6,840
380......................................................... 7,000
390......................................................... 7,150
400......................................................... 7,300
450......................................................... 8,040
500......................................................... 8,760
550......................................................... 9,470
600......................................................... 10,170
650......................................................... 10,860
700......................................................... 11,550
750......................................................... 12,220
800......................................................... 12,880
850......................................................... 13,540
900......................................................... 14,190
950......................................................... 14,830
1,000....................................................... 15,470
1,050....................................................... 16,100
1,100....................................................... 16,720
1,150....................................................... 17,350
1,200....................................................... 17,960
1,250....................................................... 18,570
1,300....................................................... 19,180
1,350....................................................... 19,780
1,400....................................................... 20,380
1,450....................................................... 20,980
1,500....................................................... 21,570
1,550....................................................... 22,160
1,600....................................................... 22,740
1,650....................................................... 23,320
1,700....................................................... 23,900
1,750....................................................... 24,470
1,800....................................................... 25,050
1,850....................................................... 25,620
1,900....................................................... 26,180
1,950....................................................... 26,750
2,000....................................................... 27,310
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Surface area=total outside surface area of container in square feet.
When the surface area is not stamped on the nameplate or when the
marking is not legible, the area can be calculated by using one of the
following formulas:
(1) Cylindrical container with hemispherical heads:
Area=Overall lengthxoutside diameterx 3.1416.
(2) Cylindrical container with other than hemispherical heads:
Area=(Overall length+0.3 outside diameter) xoutside diameterx3.1416.
Note: This formula is not exact, but will give results within the
limits of practical accuracy for the sole purpose of sizing relief
valves.
(3) Spherical container:
Area=Outside diameter squaredx3.1416.
Flow Rate-CFM Air=Required flow capacity in cubic feet per minute of air
at standard conditions, 60 F. and atmospheric pressure (14.7 p.s.i.a.).
The rate of discharge may be interpolated for intermediate values of
surface area. For containers with total outside surface area greater
than 2,000 square feet, the required flow rate can be calculated using
the formula, Flow Rate-CFM Air=53.632 A0.82.
A=total outside surface area of the container in square feet.
Valves not marked ``Air'' have flow rate marking in cubic feet per
minute of liquefied petroleum gas. These can be converted to ratings in
cubic feet per minute of air by multiplying the liquefied petroleum gas
ratings by factors listed below. Air flow ratings can be converted to
ratings in cubic feet per minute of liquefied petroleum gas by dividing
the air ratings by the factors listed below.
Air Conversion Factors
Container type.................. 100 125 150 175 200
Air conversion factor........... 1.162 1.142 1.113 1.078 1.010
(iii) Minimum Required Rate of Discharge for Safety Relief Valves
for Liquefied Petroleum Gas Vaporizers (Steam Heated, Water Heated, and
Direct Fired).
The minimum required rate of discharge for safety relief valves shall be
determined as follows:
(a) Obtain the total surface area by adding the surface area of
vaporizer shell in square feet directly in contact with LP-Gas and the
heat exchanged surface area in square feet directly in contact with LP-
Gas.
(b) Obtain the minimum required rate of discharge in cubic feet of
air per minute, at 60 deg.F. and 14.7 p.s.i.a. from paragraph
(b)(10)(ii) of this section, for this total surface area.
(iv) Container and vaporizer safety relief valves shall be set to
start-to-discharge, with relation to the design pressure of the
container, in accordance with Table H-26.
(v) Safety relief devices used with systems employing containers
other than those constructed according to DOT specifications shall be so
constructed as to discharge at not less than the rates shown in
paragraph (b)(10)(ii) of this section, before the pressure is in excess
of 120 percent of
[[Page 308]]
the maximum (not including the 10 percent referred to in paragraph
(b)(10)(iv) of this section) permitted start to discharge pressure
setting of the device.
Table H-26
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum Maximum
Containers (percent) (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ASME Code; Par. U-68, U-69--1949 and earlier 110 \1\ 25
editions.......................................
ASME Code; Par. U-200, U-201--1949 edition...... 88 \1\ 100
ASME Code--1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965 88 \1\ 100
and 1968 (Division I) editions.................
API--ASME Code--all editions.................... 88 \1\ 100
DOT--As prescribed in 49 CFR Chapter I..........
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Manufacturers of safety relief valves are allowed a plus tolerance
not exceeding 10 percent of the set pressure marked on the valve.
(vi) In certain locations sufficiently sustained high temperatures
prevail which require the use of a lower vapor pressure product to be
stored or the use of a higher designed pressure vessel in order to
prevent the safety valves opening as the result of these temperatures.
As an alternative the tanks may be protected by cooling devices such as
by spraying, by shading, or other effective means.
(vii) Safety relief valves shall be arranged so that the possibility
of tampering will be minimized. If pressure setting or adjustment is
external, the relief valves shall be provided with approved means for
sealing adjustment.
(viii) Shutoff valves shall not be installed between the safety
relief devices and the container, or the equipment or piping to which
the safety relief device is connected except that a shutoff valve may be
used where the arrangement of this valve is such that full required
capacity flow through the safety relief device is always afforded.
(ix) Safety relief valves shall have direct communication with the
vapor space of the container at all times.
(x) Each container safety relief valve used with systems covered by
paragraphs (d), (e), (g), and (h) of this section, except as provided in
paragraph (e)(3)(iii) of this section shall be plainly and permanently
marked with the following: ``Container Type'' of the pressure vessel on
which the valve is designed to be installed; the pressure in p.s.i.g. at
which the valve is set to discharge; the actual rate of discharge of the
valve in cubic feet per minute of air at 60 deg.F. and 14.7 p.s.i.a.;
and the manufacturer's name and catalog number, for example: T200-250-
4050 AIR--indicating that the valve is suitable for use on a Type 200
container, that it is set to start to discharge at 250 p.s.i.g.; and
that its rate of discharge is 4,050 cubic feet per minute of air as
determined in subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph.
(xi) Safety relief valve assemblies, including their connections,
shall be of sufficient size so as to provide the rate of flow required
for the container on which they are installed.
(xii) A hydrostatic relief valve shall be installed between each
pair of shut-off valves on liquefied petroleum gas liquid piping so as
to relieve into a safe atmosphere. The start-to-discharge pressure
setting of such relief valves shall not be in excess of 500 p.s.i.g. The
minimum setting on relief valves installed in piping connected to other
than DOT containers shall not be lower than 140 percent of the container
relief valve setting and in piping connected to DOT containers not lower
than 400 p.s.i.g. The start-to-discharge pressure setting of such a
relief valve, if installed on the discharge side of a pump, shall be
greater than the maximum pressure permitted by the recirculation device
in the system.
(xiii) The discharge from any safety relief device shall not
terminate in or beneath any building, except relief devices covered by
paragraphs (b)(6)(i) (a) through (e) of this section, or paragraphs (c)
(4)(i) or (5) of this section.
(xiv) Container safety relief devices and regulator relief vents
shall be located not less than five (5) feet in any direction from air
openings into sealed combustion system appliances or mechanical
ventilation air intakes.
(11) Vaporizer and housing. (i) Indirect fired vaporizers utilizing
steam, water, or other heating medium shall be constructed and installed
as follows:
(a) Vaporizers shall be constructed in accordance with the
requirements of paragraph (b)(3) (i)-(iii) of this section and shall be
permanently marked as follows:
(1) With the code marking signifying the specifications to which the
vaporizer is constructed.
[[Page 309]]
(2) With the allowable working pressure and temperature for which
the vaporizer is designed.
(3) With the sum of the outside surface area and the inside heat
exchange surface area expressed in square feet.
(4) With the name or symbol of the manufacturer.
(b) Vaporizers having an inside diameter of 6 inches or less
exempted by the ASME Unfired Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code--1968 shall have a design pressure
not less than 250 p.s.i.g. and need not be permanently marked.
(c) Heating or cooling coils shall not be installed inside a storage
container.
(d) Vaporizers may be installed in buildings, rooms, sheds, or lean-
tos used exclusively for gas manufacturing or distribution, or in other
structures of light, noncombustible construction or equivalent, well
ventilated near the floor line and roof.
When vaporizing and/or mixing equipment is located in a structure or
building not used exclusively for gas manufacturing or distribution,
either attached to or within such a building, such structure or room
shall be separated from the remainder of the building by a wall designed
to withstand a static pressure of at least 100 pounds per square foot.
This wall shall have no openings or pipe or conduit passing through it.
Such structure or room shall be provided with adequate ventilation and
shall have a roof or at least one exterior wall of lightweight
construction.
(e) Vaporizers shall have, at or near the discharge, a safety relief
valve providing an effective rate of discharge in accordance with
paragraph (b)(10)(iii) of this section, except as provided in paragraph
(d)(4)(v)(a), of this section.
(f) The heating medium lines into and leaving the vaporizer shall be
provided with suitable means for preventing the flow of gas into the
heat systems in the event of tube rupture in the vaporizer. Vaporizers
shall be provided with suitable automatic means to prevent liquid
passing through the vaporizers to the gas discharge piping.
(g) The device that supplies the necessary heat for producing steam,
hot water, or other heating medium may be installed in a building,
compartment, room, or lean-to which shall be ventilated near the
floorline and roof to the outside. The device location shall be
separated from all compartments or rooms containing liquefied petroleum
gas vaporizers, pumps, and central gas mixing devices by a wall designed
to withstand a static pressure of at least 100 pounds per square foot.
This wall shall have no openings or pipes or conduit passing through it.
This requirement does not apply to the domestic water heaters which may
supply heat for a vaporizer in a domestic system.
(h) Gas-fired heating systems supplying heat exclusively for
vaporization purposes shall be equipped with automatic safety devices to
shut off the flow of gas to main burners, if the pilot light should
fail.
(i) Vaporizers may be an integral part of a fuel storage container
directly connected to the liquid section or gas section or both.
(j) Vaporizers shall not be equipped with fusible plugs.
(k) Vaporizer houses shall not have unprotected drains to sewers or
sump pits.
(ii) Atmospheric vaporizers employing heat from the ground or
surrounding air shall be installed as follows:
(a) Buried underground, or
(b) Located inside the building close to a point at which pipe
enters the building provided the capacity of the unit does not exceed 1
quart.
(c) Vaporizers of less than 1 quart capacity heated by the ground or
surrounding air, need not be equipped with safety relief valves provided
that adequate tests demonstrate that the assembly is safe without safety
relief valves.
(iii) Direct gas-fired vaporizers shall be constructed, marked, and
installed as follows:
(a)(1) In accordance with the requirements of the American Society
of Mechanical Engineers Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code--1968 that are
applicable to the maximum working conditions for which the vaporizer is
designed.
(2) With the name of the manufacturer; rated BTU input to the
burner; the area of the heat exchange surface
[[Page 310]]
in square feet; the outside surface of the vaporizer in square feet; and
the maximum vaporizing capacity in gallons per hour.
(b)(1) Vaporizers may be connected to the liquid section or the gas
section of the storage container, or both; but in any case there shall
be at the container a manually operated valve in each connection to
permit completely shutting off when desired, of all flow of gas or
liquid from container to vaporizer.
(2) Vaporizers with capacity not exceeding 35 gallons per hour shall
be located at least 5 feet from container shutoff valves. Vaporizers
having capacity of more than 35 gallons but not exceeding 100 gallons
per hour shall be located at least 10 feet from the container shutoff
valves. Vaporizers having a capacity greater than 100 gallons per hour
shall be located at least 15 feet from container shutoff valves.
(c) Vaporizers may be installed in buildings, rooms, housings,
sheds, or lean-tos used exclusively for vaporizing or mixing of
liquefied petroleum gas. Vaporizing housing structures shall be of
noncombustible construction, well ventilated near the floorline and the
highest point of the roof. When vaporizer and/or mixing equipment is
located in a structure or room attached to or within a building, such
structure or room shall be separated from the remainder of the building
by a wall designed to withstand a static pressure of at least 100 pounds
per square foot. This wall shall have no openings or pipes or conduit
passing through it. Such structure or room shall be provided with
adequate ventilation, and shall have a roof or at least one exterior
wall of lightweight construction.
(d) Vaporizers shall have at or near the discharge, a safety relief
valve providing an effective rate of discharge in accordance with
paragraph (b)(10)(iii) of this section. The relief valve shall be so
located as not to be subjected to temperatures in excess of 140 deg.F.
(e) Vaporizers shall be provided with suitable automatic means to
prevent liquid passing from the vaporizer to the gas discharge piping of
the vaporizer.
(f) Vaporizers shall be provided with means for manually turning off
the gas to the main burner and pilot.
(g) Vaporizers shall be equipped with automatic safety devices to
shut off the flow of gas to main burners if the pilot light should fail.
When the flow through the pilot exceeds 2,000 B.t.u. per hour, the pilot
also shall be equipped with an automatic safety device to shut off the
flow of gas to the pilot should the pilot flame be extinguished.
(h) Pressure regulating and pressure reducing equipment if located
within 10 feet of a direct fire vaporizer shall be separated from the
open flame by a substantially airtight noncombustible partition or
partitions.
(i) Except as provided in (c) of this subdivision, the following
minimum distances shall be maintained between direct fired vaporizers
and the nearest important building or group of buildings:
Ten feet for vaporizers having a capacity of 15 gallons per hour or
less vaporizing capacity.
Twenty-five feet for vaporizers having a vaporizing capacity of 16
to 100 gallons per hour.
Fifty feet for vaporizers having a vaporizing capacity exceeding 100
gallons per hour.
(j) Direct fired vaporizers shall not raise the product pressure
above the design pressure of the vaporizer equipment nor shall they
raise the product pressure within the storage container above the
pressure shown in the second column of Table H-31.
(k) Vaporizers shall not be provided with fusible plugs.
(l) Vaporizers shall not have unprotected drains to sewers or sump
pits.
(iv) Direct gas-fired tank heaters shall be constructed and
installed as follows:
(a) Direct gas-fired tank heaters, and tanks to which they are
applied, shall only be installed above ground.
(b) Tank heaters shall be permanently marked with the name of the
manufacturer, the rated B.t.u. input to the burner, and the maximum
vaporizing capacity in gallons per hour.
(c) Tank heaters may be an integral part of a fuel storage container
directly connected to the container liquid section, or vapor section, or
both.
(d) Tank heaters shall be provided with a means for manually turning
off the gas to the main burner and pilot.
[[Page 311]]
(e) Tank heaters shall be equipped with an automatic safety device
to shut off the flow of gas to main burners, if the pilot light should
fail. When flow through pilot exceeds 2,000 B.t.u. per hour, the pilot
also shall be equipped with an automatic safety device to shut off the
flow of gas to the pilot should the pilot flame be extinguished.
(f) Pressure regulating and pressure reducing equipment if located
within 10 feet of a direct fired tank heater shall be separated from the
open flame by a substantially airtight noncombustible partition.
(g) The following minimum distances shall be maintained between a
storage tank heated by a direct fired tank heater and the nearest
important building or group of buildings:
Ten feet for storage containers of less than 500 gallons water
capacity.
Twenty-five feet for storage containers of 500 to 1,200 gallons
water capacity.
Fifty feet for storage containers of over 1,200 gallons water
capacity.
(h) No direct fired tank heater shall raise the product pressure
within the storage container over 75 percent of the pressure set out in
the second column of Table H-31.
(v) The vaporizer section of vaporizer-burners used for dehydrators
or dryers shall be located outside of buildings; they shall be
constructed and installed as follows:
(a) Vaporizer-burners shall have a minimum design pressure of 250
p.s.i.g. with a factor of safety of five.
(b) Manually operated positive shut-off valves shall be located at
the containers to shut off all flow to the vaporizer-burners.
(c) Minimum distances between storage containers and vaporizer-
burners shall be as follows:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum
Water capacity per container (gallons) distances
(feet)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Less than 501............................................... 10
501 to 2,000................................................ 25
Over 2,000.................................................. 50
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(d) The vaporizer section of vaporizer-burners shall be protected by
a hydrostatic relief valve. The relief valve shall be located so as not
to be subjected to temperatures in excess of 140 deg.F. The start-to-
discharge pressure setting shall be such as to protect the components
involved, but not less than 250 p.s.i.g. The discharge shall be directed
upward and away from component parts of the equipment and away from
operating personnel.
(e) Vaporizer-burners shall be provided with means for manually
turning off the gas to the main burner and pilot.
(f) Vaporizer-burners shall be equipped with automatic safety
devices to shut off the flow of gas to the main burner and pilot in the
event the pilot is extinguished.
(g) Pressure regulating and control equipment shall be located or
protected so that the temperatures surrounding this equipment shall not
exceed 140 deg.F. except that equipment components may be used at
higher temperatures if designed to withstand such temperatures.
(h) Pressure regulating and control equipment when located
downstream of the vaporizer shall be designed to withstand the maximum
discharge temperature of the vapor.
(i) The vaporizer section of vaporizer-burners shall not be provided
with fusible plugs.
(j) Vaporizer coils or jackets shall be made of ferrous metal or
high temperature alloys.
(k) Equipment utilizing vaporizer-burners shall be equipped with
automatic shutoff devices upstream and downstream of the vaporizer
section connected so as to operate in the event of excessive
temperature, flame failure, and, if applicable, insufficient airflow.
(12) Filling densities. (i) The ``filling density'' is defined as
the percent ratio of the weight of the gas in a container to the weight
of water the container will hold at 60 deg.F. All containers shall be
filled according to the filling densities shown in Table H-27.
Table H-27--Maximum Permitted Filling Density
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Above ground containers
----------------------------------
0 to 1,200 U.S. Over 1,200 U.S.
Specific gravity at gals. (1,000 gals. (1,000 Under ground
60 deg.F. (15.6 imp. gal., imp. gal., containers, all
deg.C.) 4,550 liters) 4,550 liters) capacities
total water total water
cap. cap.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Percent Percent Percent
[[Page 312]]
0 .496-0 .503 41 44 45
.504- .510 42 45 46
.511- .519 43 46 47
.520- .527 44 47 48
.528- .536 45 48 49
.537- .544 46 49 50
.545- .552 47 50 51
.553- .560 48 51 52
.561- .568 49 52 53
.569- .576 50 53 54
.577- .584 51 54 55
.585- .592 52 55 56
.593- .600 53 56 57
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(12)(iii) of this section,
any container including mobile cargo tanks and portable tank containers
regardless of size or construction, shipped under DOT jurisdiction or
constructed in accordance with 49 CFR chapter I Specifications shall be
charged according to 49 CFR chapter I requirements.
(iii) Portable containers not subject to DOT jurisdiction (such as,
but not limited to, motor fuel containers on industrial and lift trucks,
and farm tractors covered in paragraph (e) of this section, or
containers recharged at the installation) may be filled either by
weight, or by volume using a fixed length dip tube gaging device.
(13) LP-Gas in buildings. (i) Vapor shall be piped into buildings at
pressures in excess of 20 p.s.i.g. only if the buildings or separate
areas thereof, (a) are constructed in accordance with this section; (b)
are used excusively to house equipment for vaporization, pressure
reduction, gas mixing, gas manufacturing, or distribution, or to house
internal combustion engines, industrial processes, research and
experimental laboratories, or equipment and processes using such gas and
having similar hazard; (c) buildings, structures, or equipment under
construction or undergoing major renovation.
(ii) Liquid may be permitted in buildings as follows:
(a) Buildings, or separate areas of buildings, used exclusively to
house equipment for vaporization, pressure reduction, gas mixing, gas
manufacturing, or distribution, or to house internal combustion engines,
industrial processes, research and experimental laboratories, or
equipment and processes using such gas and having similar hazard; and
when such buildings, or separate areas thereof are constructed in
accordance with this section.
(b) Buildings, structures, or equipment under construction or
undergoing major renovation provided the temporary piping meets the
following conditions:
(1) Liquid piping inside the building shall conform to the
requirements of paragraph (b)(8) of this section, and shall not exceed
three-fourths iron pipe size. Copper tubing with an outside diameter of
three-fourths inch or less may be used provided it conforms to Type K of
Specifications for Seamless Water Tube, ANSI H23.1-1970 (ASTM B88-69)
(see Table H-24). All such piping shall be protected against
construction hazards. Liquid piping inside buildings shall be kept to a
minimum. Such piping shall be securely fastened to walls or other
surfaces so as to provide adequate protection from breakage and so
located as to subject the liquid line to lowest ambient temperatures.
(2) A shutoff valve shall be installed in each intermediate branch
line where it takes off the main line and shall be readily accessible. A
shutoff valve shall also be placed at the appliance end of the
intermediate branch line. Such shutoff valve shall be upstream of any
flexible connector used with the appliance.
(3) Suitable excess flow valves shall be installed in the container
outlet line supplying liquid LP-Gas to the building. A suitable excess
flow valve shall be installed immediately downstream of each shutoff
valve. Suitable excess flow valves shall be installed where piping size
is reduced and shall be sized for the reduced size piping.
(4) Hydrostatic relief valves shall be installed in accordance with
paragraph (b)(10)(xii) of this section.
(5) The use of hose to carry liquid between the container and the
building or at any point in the liquid line, except at the appliance
connector, shall be prohibited.
[[Page 313]]
(6) Where flexible connectors are necessary for appliance
installation, such connectors shall be as short as practicable and shall
comply with paragraph (b)(8)(ii) or (9) of this section.
(7) Release of fuel when any section of piping or appliances is
disconnected shall be minimized by either of the following methods:
(i) Using an approved automatic quick-closing coupling (a type
closing in both directions when coupled in the fuel line), or
(ii) Closing the valve nearest to the appliance and allowing the
appliance to operate until the fuel in the line is consumed.
(iii) Portable containers shall not be taken into buildings except
as provided in paragraph (b)(6)(i) of this section.
(14) Transfer of liquids. The employer shall assure that (i) at
least one attendant shall remain close to the transfer connection from
the time the connections are first made until they are finally
disconnected, during the transfer of the product.
(ii) Containers shall be filled or used only upon authorization of
the owner.
(iii) Containers manufactured in accordance with specifications of
49 CFR part 178 and authorized by 49 CFR chapter 1 as a ``single trip''
or ``nonrefillable container'' shall not be refilled or reused in LP-Gas
service.
(iv) Gas or liquid shall not be vented to the atmosphere to assist
in transferring contents of one container to another, except as provided
in paragraph (e)(5)(iv) of this section and except that this shall not
preclude the use of listed pump utilizing LP-Gas in the vapor phase as a
source of energy and venting such gas to the atmosphere at a rate not to
exceed that from a No. 31 drill size opening and provided that such
venting and liquid transfer shall be located not less than 50 feet from
the nearest important building.
(v) Filling of fuel containers for industrial trucks or motor
vehicles from industrial bulk storage containers shall be performed not
less than 10 feet from the nearest important masonry-walled building or
not less than 25 feet from the nearest important building or other
construction and, in any event, not less than 25 feet from any building
opening.
(vi) Filling of portable containers, containers mounted on skids,
fuel containers on farm tractors, or similar applications, from storage
containers used in domestic or commercial service, shall be performed
not less than 50 feet from the nearest important building.
(vii) The filling connection and the vent from the liquid level
gages in containers, filled at point of installation, shall not be less
than 10 feet in any direction from air openings into sealed combustion
system appliances or mechanical ventilation air intakes.
(viii) Fuel supply containers shall be gaged and charged only in the
open air or in buildings especially provided for that purpose.
(ix) The maximum vapor pressure of the product at 100 deg.F. which
may be transferred into a container shall be in accordance with
paragraphs (d)(2) and (e)(3) of this section. (For DOT containers use
DOT requirements.)
(x) Marketers and users shall exercise precaution to assure that
only those gases for which the system is designed, examined, and listed,
are employed in its operation, particularly with regard to pressures.
(xi) Pumps or compressors shall be designed for use with LP-Gas.
When compressors are used they shall normally take suction from the
vapor space of the container being filled and discharge to the vapor
space of the container being emptied.
(xii) Pumping systems, when equipped with a positive displacement
pump, shall include a recirculating device which shall limit the
differential pressure on the pump under normal operating conditions to
the maximum differential pressure rating of the pump. The discharge of
the pumping system shall be protected so that pressure does not exceed
350 p.s.i.g. If a recirculation system discharges into the supply tank
and contains a manual shutoff valve, an adequate secondary safety
recirculation system shall be incorporated which shall have no means of
rendering it inoperative. Manual shutoff valves in recirculation systems
shall be kept open except during an emergency or when repairs are being
made to the system.
[[Page 314]]
(xiii) When necessary, unloading piping or hoses shall be provided
with suitable bleeder valves for relieving pressure before
disconnection.
(xiv) Agricultural air moving equipment, including crop dryers,
shall be shut down when supply containers are being filled unless the
air intakes and sources of ignition on the equipment are located 50 feet
or more from the container.
(xv) Agricultural equipment employing open flames or equipment with
integral containers, such as flame cultivators, weed burners, and, in
addition, tractors, shall be shut down during refueling.
(15) Tank car or transport truck loading or unloading points and
operations. (i) The track of tank car siding shall be relatively level.
(ii) A ``Tank Car Connected'' sign, as covered by DOT rules, shall
be installed at the active end or ends of the siding while the tank car
is connected.
(iii) While cars are on sidetrack for loading or unloading, the
wheels at both ends shall be blocked on the rails.
(iv) The employer shall insure that an employee is in attendance at
all times while the tank car, cars, or trucks are being loaded or
unloaded.
(v) A backflow check valve, excess-flow valve, or a shutoff valve
with means of remote closing, to protect against uncontrolled discharge
of LP-Gas from storage tank piping shall be installed close to the point
where the liquid piping and hose or swing joint pipe is connected.
(vi) Where practical, the distance of the unloading or loading point
shall conform to the distances in subparagraph (6)(ii) of this
paragraph.
(16) Instructions. Personnel performing installation, removal,
operation, and maintenance work shall be properly trained in such
function.
(17) Electrical equipment and other sources of ignition. (i)
Electrical equipment and wiring shall be of a type specified by and
shall be installed in accordance with subpart S of this part, for
ordinary locations except that fixed electrical equipment in classified
areas shall comply with subparagraph (18) of this paragraph.
(ii) Open flames or other sources of ignition shall not be permitted
in vaporizer rooms (except those housing direct-fired vaporizers),
pumphouses, container charging rooms or other similar locations. Direct-
fired vaporizers shall not be permitted in pumphouses or container
charging rooms.
(iii) Liquefied petroleum gas storage containers do not require
lightning protection.
(iv) Since liquefied petroleum gas is contained in a closed system
of piping and equipment, the system need not be electrically conductive
or electrically bonded for protection against static electricity.
(v) Open flames (except as provided for in paragraph (b)(11) of this
section), cutting or welding, portable electric tools, and extension
lights capable of igniting LP-Gas, shall not be permitted within
classified areas specified in Table H-28 unless the LP-Gas facilities
have been freed of all liquid and vapor, or special precautions observed
under carefully controlled conditions.
Table H-28
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Equipment shall
Extent of classified area be suitable for
Part Location \1\ Class 1, Group
D \2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
A Storage Within 15 feet in all Division 2.
containers directions from
other than DOT connections, except
cylinders. connections otherwise
covered in Table H-28.
B Tank vehicle and Within 5 feet in all Division 1.
tank car directions from connections
loading and regularly made or
unloading \3\. disconnected for product
transfer.
Beyond 5 feet but within 15 Division 2.
feet in all directions from
a point where connections
are regularly made or
disconnected and within the
cylindrical volume between
the horizontal equator of
the sphere and grade. (See
Figure H-1).
C Gage vent Within 5 feet in all Division 1.
openings other directions from point of
than those on discharge.
DOT cylinders. Beyond 5 feet but within 15
feet in all directions from
point of discharge.
Division 2.
D Relief valve Within direct path of Division 1.
discharge other discharge.
than those on
DOT cylinders.
Within 5 feet in all Division 1.
directions from point of
discharge.
[[Page 315]]
Beyond 5 feet but within 15 Division 2.
feet in all directions from
point of discharge except
within the direct path of
discharge.
E Pumps, ............................
compressors,
gas-air mixers
and vaporizers
other than
direct fired.
Indoors without Entire room and any adjacent Division 1.
ventilation. room not separated by a
gastight partition.
Within 15 feet of the Division 2.
exterior side of any
exterior wall or roof that
is not vaportight or within
15 feet of any exterior
opening.
Indoors with Entire room and any adjacent Division 2.
adequate room not separated by a
ventilation \4\. gastight partition.
Outdoors in open Within 15 feet in all Division 2.
air at or directions from this
abovegrade. equipment and within the
cylindrical volume between
the horizontal equator of
the sphere and grade. See
Figure H-1.
F Service Station Entire space within Division 1.
Dispensing dispenser enclosure, and 18
Units. inches horizontally from
enclosure exterior up to an
elevation 4 ft. above
dispenser base. Entire pit
or open space beneath
dispenser.
Up to 18 inches abovegrade Division 2.
within 20 ft. horizontally
from any edge of enclosure.
Note: For pits within this
area, see Part F of this
table..
G Pits or trenches ............................
containing or
located beneath
LP-Gas valves,
pumps,
compressors,
regulators, and
similar
equipment.
Without Entire pit or trench........ Division 1.
mechanical
ventilation.
Entire room and any adjacent Division 1.
room not separated by a
gastight partition.
Within 15 feet in all Division 2.
directions from pit or
trench when located
outdoors.
With adequate Entire pit or trench........ Division 2.
mechanical
ventilation.
Entire room and any adjacent Division 2.
room not separated by a
gastight partition.
Within 15 feet in all Division 2.
directions from pit or
trench when located
outdoors.
H Special Entire room................. Division 2.
buildings or
rooms for
storage of
portable
containers.
Pipelines and Within 5 ft. in all Division 1.
connections directions from point of
containing discharge.
operational Beyond 5 ft. from point of
bleeds, drips, discharge, same as Part E
vents or drains. of this table.
J Container
filling:.
Indoors without Entire room................. Division 1.
ventilation.
Indoors with Within 5 feet in all Division 1.
adequate directions from connections
ventilation \4\. regularly made or
disconnected for product
transfer.
Beyond 5 feet and entire Division 2.
room.
Outdoors in open Within 5 feet in all Division 1.
air. directions from connections
regularly made or
disconnected for product
transfer.
Beyond 5 feet but within 15 Division 2.
feet in all directions from
a point where connections
are regularly made or
disconnected and within the
cylindrical volume between
the horizontal equator of
the sphere and grade. (See
Figure H-1).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The classified area shall not extend beyond an unpierced wall, roof,
or solid vaportight partition.
\2\ See subpart S of this part.
\3\ When classifying extent of hazardous area, consideration shall be
given to possible variations in the spotting of tank cars and tank
vehicles at the unloading points and the effect these variations of
actual spotting point may have on the point of connection.
\4\ Ventilation, either natural or mechanical, is considered adequate
when the concentration of the gas in a gas-air mixture does not exceed
25 percent of the lower flammable limit under normal operating
conditions.
[[Page 316]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.025
Figure H-1
(18) Fixed electrical equipment in classified areas. Fixed
electrical equipment and wiring installed within classified areas
specified in Table H-28 shall comply with Table H-28 and shall be
installed in accordance with Subpart S of this part. This provision does
not apply to fixed electrical equipment at residential or commercial
installations of LP-Gas systems or to systems covered by paragraph (e)
or (g) of this section.
(19) Liquid-level gaging device. (i) Each container manufactured
after December 31, 1965, and filled on a volumetric basis shall be
equipped with a fixed liquid-level gage to indicate the maximum
permitted filling level as provided in paragraph (b)(19)(v) of this
section. Each container manufactured after December 31, 1969, shall have
permanently attached to the container adjacent to the fixed level gage a
marking showing the percentage full that will be shown by that gage.
When a variable liquid-level gage is also provided, the fixed liquid-
level gage will also serve as a means for checking the variable gage.
These gages shall be used in charging containers as required in
paragraph (b)(12) of this section.
(ii) All variable gaging devices shall be arranged so that the
maximum liquid level for butane, for a 50-50 mixture of butane and
propane, and for propane, to which the container may be charged is
readily determinable. The markings indicating the various liquid levels
from empty to full shall be on the system nameplate or gaging device or
part may be on the system nameplate and part on the gaging device. Dials
of magnetic or rotary gages shall show whether they are for cylindrical
or spherical containers and whether for aboveground or underground
service. The dials of gages intended for use only on aboveground
containers of over 1,200 gallons water capacity shall be so marked.
(iii) Gaging devices that require bleeding of the product to the
atmosphere, such as the rotary tube, fixed tube, and slip tube, shall be
designed so that the bleed valve maximum opening is not larger than a
No. 54 drill size, unless provided with excess flow valve.
(iv) Gaging devices shall have a design working pressure of at least
250 p.s.i.g.
(v) Length of tube or position of fixed liquid-level gage shall be
designed to indicate the maximum level to which the container may be
filled for the product contained. This level shall be based on the
volume of the product at 40 deg.F. at its maximum permitted filling
density for aboveground containers and at 50 deg.F. for underground
containers. The employer shall calculate the filling point for which the
fixed liquid level gage shall be designed according to the method in
this subdivision.
(a) It is impossible to set out in a table the length of a fixed dip
tube for various capacity tanks because of the varying tank diameters
and lengths and because the tank may be installed either in a vertical
or horizontal position. Knowing the maximum permitted filling volume in
gallons, however, the length of the fixed tube can be determined by the
use of a strapping table obtained from the container manufacturer. The
length of the fixed tube should be such that when its lower end touches
the surface of the liquid in the container, the contents of the
container will be the maximum permitted volume as determined by the
following formula:
[(Water capacity (gals.) of container*xfilling density**)/(Specific
gravity of LP-Gas*xvolume correction factor x 100)]=Maximum volume of
LP-Gas
*Measured at 60 deg.F.
**From subparagraph (12) of this paragraph ``Filling Densities.''
For aboveground containers the liquid temperature is assumed to be
40 deg.F. and for underground containers the liquid temperature is
assumed to be 50 deg.F. To correct the liquid volumes at these
temperatures to 60 deg.F. the following factors shall be used.
[[Page 317]]
(b) Formula for determining maximum volume of liquefied petroleum
gas for which a fixed length of dip tube shall be set:
Table H-29--Volume Correction Factors
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Specific gravity Aboveground Underground
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.500 1.033 1.017
.510 1.031 1.016
.520 1.029 1.015
.530 1.028 1.014
.540 1.026 1.013
.550 1.025 1.013
.560 1.024 1.012
.570 1.023 1.011
.580 1.021 1.011
.590 1.020 1.010
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) The maximum volume of LP-Gas which can be placed in a container
when determining the length of the dip tube expressed as a percentage of
total water content of the container is calculated by the following
formula.
(d) The maximum weight of LP-Gas which may be placed in a container
for determining the length of a fixed dip tube is determined by
multiplying the maximum volume of liquefied petroleum gas obtained by
the formula in paragraph (b)(19)(b) of this section by the pounds of
liquefied petroleum gas in a gallon at 40 deg.F. for abovegound and at
50 deg.F. for underground containers. For example, typical pounds per
gallon are specified below:
Example: Assume a 100-gallon total water capacity tank for
aboveground storage of propane having a specific gravity of 0.510 of 60
deg.F.
[(100 (gals.)x42 (filling density from subparagraph (12) of this
paragraph))/(0.510x1.031 (correction factor from Table H-
29)x100)]=(4200/52.6)
(4200/52.6)=79.8 gallons propane, the maximum amount permitted to be
placed in a 100-gallon total water capacity aboveground container
equipped with a fixed dip tube.
[(Maximum volume of LP-Gas (from formula in subdivision (b) of this
subdivision)x100)/Total water content of container in gallons]=Maximum
percent of LP-Gas
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Aboveground, Underground,
pounds per pounds per
gallon gallon
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Propane..................................... 4.37 4.31
N Butane.................................... 4.97 4.92
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(vi) Fixed liquid-level gages used on containers other than DOT
containers shall be stamped on the exterior of the gage with the letters
``DT'' followed by the vertical distance (expressed in inches and
carried out to one decimal place) from the top of container to the end
of the dip tube or to the centerline of the gage when it is located at
the maximum permitted filling level. For portable containers that may be
filled in the horizontal and/or vertical position the letters ``DT''
shall be followed by ``V'' with the vertical distance from the top of
the container to the end of the dip tube for vertical filling and with
``H'' followed by the proper distance for horizontal filling. For DOT
containers the stamping shall be placed both on the exterior of the gage
and on the container. On above-ground or cargo containers where the
gages are positioned at specific levels, the marking may be specified in
percent of total tank contents and the marking shall be stamped on the
container.
(vii) Gage glasses of the columnar type shall be restricted to
charging plants where the fuel is withdrawn in the liquid phase only.
They shall be equipped with valves having metallic handwheels, with
excess flow valves, and with extra-heavy glass adequately protected with
a metal housing applied by the gage manufacturer. They shall be shielded
against the direct rays of the sun. Gage glasses of the columnar type
are prohibited on tank trucks, and on motor fuel tanks, and on
containers used in domestic, commercial, and industrial installations.
(viii) Gaging devices of the float, or equivalent type which do not
require flow for their operation and having connections extending to a
point outside the container do not have to be equipped with excess flow
valves provided the piping and fittings are adequately designed to
withstand the container pressure and are properly protected against
physical damage and breakage.
(20) Requirements for appliances. (i) Except as provided in
paragraph (b)(20)(ii) of this section, new commercial and industrial gas
consuming appliances shall be approved.
(ii) Any appliance that was originally manufactured for operation
with a gaseous fuel other than LP-Gas and is in good condition may be
used with LP-
[[Page 318]]
Gas only after it is properly converted, adapted, and tested for
performance with LP-Gas before the appliance is placed in use.
(iii) Unattended heaters used inside buildings for the purpose of
animal or poultry production or care shall be equipped with an approved
automatic device designed to shut off the flow of gas to the main
burners, and pilot if used, in the event of flame extinguishment.
(iv) All commercial, industrial, and agricultural appliances or
equipment shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of this
section and in accordance with the following NFPA consensus standards,
which are incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6:
(a) Domestic and commercial appliances--NFPA 54-1969, Standard for
the Installation of Gas Appliances and Gas Piping.
(b) Industrial appliances--NFPA 54A-1969, Standard for the
Installation of Gas Piping and Gas Equipment on Industrial Premises and
Certain Other Premises.
(c) Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion
Engines and Gas Turbines--NFPA 37-1970.
(d) Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of
Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment, NFPA
96-1970.
(c) Cylinder systems--(1) Application. This paragraph applies
specifically to systems utilizing containers constructed in accordance
with DOT Specifications. All requirements of paragraph (b) of this
section apply to this paragraph unless otherwise noted in paragraph (b)
of this section.
(2) Marking of containers. Containers shall be marked in accordance
with DOT regulations. Additional markings not in conflict with DOT
regulations may be used.
(3) Description of a system. A system shall include the container
base or bracket, containers, container valves, connectors, manifold
valve assembly, regulators, and relief valves.
(4) Containers and regulating equipment installed outside of
buildings or structures. (i) Containers shall not be buried below
ground. However, this shall not prohibit the installation in a
compartment or recess below grade level such as a niche in a slope or
terrace wall which is used for no other purpose, providing that the
container and regulating equipment are not in contact with the ground
and the compartment or recess is drained and ventilated horizontally to
the outside air from its lowest level, with the outlet at least 3 feet
away from any building opening which is below the level of such outlet.
Except as provided in paragraph (b)(10)(xiii) of this section, the
discharge from safety relief devices shall be located not less than 3
feet horizontally away from any building opening which is below the
level of such discharge and shall not terminate beneath any building
unless such space is well ventilated to the outside and is not enclosed
on more than two sides.
(ii) Containers shall be set upon firm foundation or otherwise
firmly secured; the possible effect on the outlet piping of settling
shall be guarded against by a flexible connection or special fitting.
(5) Containers and equipment used inside of buildings or structures.
(i) When operational requirements make portable use of containers
necessary and their location outside of buildings or structure is
impracticable, containers and equipment are permitted to be used inside
of buildings or structures in accordance with (a) through (l) of this
subdivision, and, in addition, such other provisions of this
subparagraph as are applicable to the particular use or occupancy.
(a) Containers in use shall mean connected for use.
(b) Systems utilizing containers having a water capacity greater
than 2\1/2\ pounds (nominal 1 pound LP-Gas capacity) shall be equipped
with excess flow valves. Such excess flow valves shall be either
integral with the container valves or in the connections to the
container valve outlets. In either case, an excess flow valve shall be
installed in such a manner that any undue strain beyond the excess flow
valve will not cause breakage between the container and the excess flow
valve. The installation of excess flow valves shall take into account
the type of valve protection provided.
[[Page 319]]
(c) Regulators, if used, shall be either directly connected to the
container valves or to manifolds connected to the container values. The
regulator shall be suitable for use with LP-Gas. Manifolds and fittings
connecting containers to pressure regulator inlets shall be designed for
at least 250 p.s.i.g. service pressure.
(d) Valves on containers having a water capacity greater than 50
pounds (nominal 20 pounds LP-Gas capacity) shall be protected while in
use.
(e) Containers shall be marked in accordance with paragraph
(b)(5)(iii) of this section and paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
(f) Pipe or tubing shall conform to paragraph (b)(8) of this section
except that aluminum pipe or tubing shall not be used.
(g)(1) Hose shall be designed for a working pressure of at least 250
p.s.i.g. Hose and hose connections shall have their correctness as to
design, construction and performance determined by listing by a
nationally recognized testing laboratory. The hose length may exceed the
length specified in paragraph (b)(9)(vii)(b) of this section, but shall
be as short as practicable. Refer to Sec. 1910.7 for definition of
nationally recognized testing laboratory.
(2) Hose shall be long enough to permit compliance with spacing
provisions of this subparagraph without kinking or straining or causing
hose to be so close to a burner as to be damaged by heat.
(h) Portable heaters, including salamanders, shall be equipped with
an approved automatic device to shut off the flow of gas to the main
burner, and pilot if used, in the event of flame extinguishment. Such
heaters having inputs above 50,000 B.t.u. manufactured on or after May
17, 1967, and such heaters having inputs above 100,000 B.t.u.
manufactured before May 17, 1967, shall be equipped with either.
(1) A pilot which must be lighted and proved before the main burner
can be turned on; or
(2) An electric ignition system.
The provisions of this paragraph (h) do not apply to tar kettle burners,
torches, melting pots, nor do they apply to portable heaters under 7,500
B.t.u.h. input when used with containers having a maximum water capacity
of 2\1/2\ pounds. Container valves, connectors, regulators, manifolds,
piping, and tubing shall not be used as structural supports for heaters.
(i) Containers, regulating equipment, manifolds, pipe, tubing, and
hose shall be located so as to minimize exposure to abnormally high
temperatures (such as may result from exposure to convection or
radiation from heating equipment or installation in confined spaces),
physical damage, or tampering by unauthorized persons.
(j) Heat producing equipment shall be located and used so as to
minimize the possibility of ignition of combustibles.
(k) Containers having a water capacity greater than 2\1/2\ pounds
(nominal 1 pound LP-Gas capacity) connected for use, shall stand on a
firm and substantially level surface and, when necessary, shall be
secured in an upright position.
(l) Containers, including the valve protective devices, shall be
installed so as to minimize the probability of impingement of discharge
of safety relief devices upon containers.
(ii) Containers having a maximum water capacity of 2\1/2\ pounds
(nominal 1 pound LP-Gas capacity) are permitted to be used inside of
buildings as part of approved self-contained hand torch assemblies or
similar appliances.
(iii) Containers having a maximum water capacity of 12 pounds
(nominal 5 pounds LP-Gas capacity) are permitted to be used temporarily
inside of buildings for public exhibition or demonstration purposes,
including use for classroom demonstrations.
(iv) [Reserved]
(v) Containers are permitted to be used in buildings or structures
under construction or undergoing major renovation when such buildings or
structures are not occupied by the public, as follows:
(a) The maximum water capacity of individual containers shall be 245
pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas capacity).
(b) For temporary heating such as curing concrete, drying plaster
and similar applications, heaters (other than integral heater-container
units) shall be located at least 6 feet from any
[[Page 320]]
LP-Gas container. This shall not prohibit the use of heaters
specifically designed for attachment to the container or to a supporting
standard, provided they are designed and installed so as to prevent
direct or radiant heat application from the heater onto the container.
Blower and radiant type heaters shall not be directed toward any LP-Gas
container within 20 feet.
(c) If two or more heater-container units, of either the integral or
nonintegral type, are located in an unpartitioned area on the same
floor, the container or containers of each unit shall be separated from
the container or containers of any other unit by at least 20 feet.
(d) When heaters are connected to containers for use in an
unpartitioned area on the same floor, the total water capacity of
containers manifolded together for connection to a heater or heaters
shall not be greater than 735 pounds (nominal 300 pounds LP-Gas
capacity). Such manifolds shall be separated by at least 20 feet.
(e) On floors on which heaters are not connected for use, containers
are permitted to be manifolded together for connection to a heater or
heaters on another floor, Provided:
(1) The total water capacity of containers connected to any one
manifold is not greater than 2,450 pounds (nominal 1,000 pounds LP-Gas
capacity) and;
(2) Where more than one manifold having a total water capacity
greater than 735 pounds (nominal 300 pounds LP-Gas capacity) are located
in the same unpartitioned area, they shall be separated by at least 50
feet.
(f) Storage of containers awaiting use shall be in accordance with
paragraph (f) of this section.
(vi) Containers are permitted to be used in industrial occupancies
for processing, research, or experimental purposes as follows:
(a) The maximum water capacity of individual containers shall be 245
pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas capacity).
(b) Containers connected to a manifold shall have a total water
capacity not greater than 735 pounds (nominal 300 pounds LP-Gas
capacity) and not more than one such manifold may be located in the same
room unless separated at least 20 feet from a similar unit.
(c) The amount of LP-Gas in containers for research and experimental
use shall be limited to the smallest practical quantity.
(vii)(a) Containers are permitted to be used in industrial
occupancies with essentially noncombustible contents where portable
equipment for space heating is essential and where a permanent heating
installation is not practical, as follows:
(b) Containers and heaters shall comply with and be used in
accordance with paragraph (c)(5)(v) of this section.
(viii) Containers are permitted to be used in buildings for
temporary emergency heating purposes, if necessary to prevent damage to
the buildings or contents, when the permanent heating system is
temporarily out of service, as follows:
(a) Containers and heaters shall comply with and be used in
accordance with paragraph (c)(5)(v) of this section.
(b) The temporary heating equipment shall not be left unattended.
(ix) Containers are permitted to be used temporarily in buildings
for training purposes related in installation and use of LP-Gas systems,
as follows:
(a) The maximum water capacity of individual containers shall be 245
pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas capacity), but the maximum quantity of
LP-Gas that may be placed in each container shall be 20 pounds.
(b) If more than one such container is located in the same room, the
containers shall be separated by at least 20 feet.
(6) Container valves and accessories.
(i) Valves in the assembly of multiple container systems shall be
arranged so that replacement of containers can be made without shutting
off the flow of gas in the system.
Note: This provision is not to be construed as requiring an
automatic changeover device.
(ii) Regulators and low-pressure relief devices shall be rigidly
attached to the cylinder valves, cylinders, supporting standards, the
building walls or otherwise rigidly secured and shall be so installed or
protected that the elements (sleet, snow, or ice) will not affect their
operation.
[[Page 321]]
(iii) Valves and connections to the containers shall be protected
while in transit, in storage, and while being moved into final
utilization, as follows:
(a) By setting into the recess of the container to prevent the
possibility of their being struck if the container is dropped upon a
flat surface, or
(b) By ventilated cap or collar, fastened to the container capable
of withstanding a blow from any direction equivalent to that of a 30-
pound weight dropped 4 feet. Construction must be such that a blow will
not be transmitted to the valve or other connection.
(iv) When containers are not connected to the system, the outlet
valves shall be kept tightly closed or plugged, even though containers
are considered empty.
(v) Containers having a water capacity in excess of 50 pounds
(approximately 21 pounds LP-Gas capacity), recharged at the
installation, shall be provided with excess flow or backflow check
valves to prevent the discharge of container contents in case of failure
of the filling or equalizing connection.
(7) Safety devices. (i) Containers shall be provided with safety
devices as required by DOT regulations.
(ii) A final stage regulator of an LP-Gas system (excluding any
appliance regulator) shall be equipped on the low-pressure side with a
relief valve which is set to start to discharge within the limits
specified in Table H-30.
Table H-30
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Relief valve start-to-
discharge pressure
setting (percent of
Regulator delivery pressure regulator delivery
pressure)
-----------------------
Minimum Maximum
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 p.s.i.g. or less.............................. 200 300
Above 1 p.s.i.g. but not over 3 p.s.i.g......... 140 200
Above 3 p.s.i.g................................. 125 200
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(iii) When a regulator or pressure relief valve is used inside a
building for other than purposes specified in paragraphs (b)(6)(i) (a)-
(g) of this section, the relief valve and the space above the regulator
and relief valve diaphragms shall be vented to the outside air with the
discharge outlet located not less than 3 feet horizontally away from any
building opening which is below such discharge. These provisions do not
apply to individual appliance regulators when protection is otherwise
provided nor to paragraph (c)(5) of this section and paragraph
(b)(10)(xiii) of this section. In buildings devoted exclusively to gas
distribution purposes, the space above the diaphragm need not be vented
to the outside.
(8) Reinstallation of containers. Containers shall not be
reinstalled unless they are requalified in accordance with DOT
regulations.
(9) Permissible product. A product shall not be placed in a
container marked with a service pressure less than four-fifths of the
maximum vapor pressure of product at 130 deg.F.
(d) Systems utilizing containers other than DOT containers--(1)
Application. This paragraph applies specifically to systems utilizing
storage containers other than those constructed in accordance with DOT
specifications. Paragraph (b) of this section applies to this paragraph
unless otherwise noted in paragraph (b) of this section.
(2) Design pressure and classification of storage containers.
Storage containers shall be designed and classified in accordance with
Table H-31.
Table H-31
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum design pressure of container,
lb. per sq. in. gage
--------------------------------------
For gases with 1949 edition of ASME
vapor press. Code (Par. U-200, U-
Not to exceed 1949 and 201); 1950, 1952,
Container type lb. per sq. in. earlier 1956, 1959, 1962,
gage at 100 editions of 1965, and 1968
deg.F. (37.8 ASME Code (Par. (Division 1)
deg.C.) U-68, U-69) editions of ASME
Code; All editions
of API-ASME Code \3\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ 80 \1\ 80 \1\ 80 \1\ 100
100 100 100 125
125 125 125 156
150 150 150 187
175 175 175 219
\2\ 200 215 200 250
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ New storage containers of the 80 type have not been authorized since
Dec. 31, 1947.
\2\ Container type may be increased by increments of 25. The minimum
design pressure of containers shall be 100% of the container type
designation when constructed under 1949 or earlier editions of the
ASME Code (Par. U-68 and U-69). The minimum design pressure of
containers shall be 125% of the container type designation when
constructed under: (1) the 1949 ASME Code (Par. U-200 and U-201), (2)
1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions of
the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the API-ASME Code.
\3\ Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is not authorized
after July 1, 1961.
(3) Container valves and accessories, filler pipes, and discharge
pipes. (i) The
[[Page 322]]
filling pipe inlet terminal shall not be located inside a building. For
containers with a water capacity of 125 gallons or more, such terminals
shall be located not less than 10 feet from any building (see paragraph
(b)(6)(ii) of this section), and preferably not less than 5 feet from
any driveway, and shall be located in a protective housing built for the
purpose.
(ii) The filling connection shall be fitted with one of the
following:
(a) Combination back-pressure check valve and excess flow valve.
(b) One double or two single back-pressure check valves.
(c) A positive shutoff valve, in conjunction with either:
(1) An internal back-pressure valve, or
(2) An internal excess flow valve.
(iii) All openings in a container shall be equipped with approved
automatic excess flow valves except in the following: Filling
connections as provided in paragraph (d)(3)(ii) of this section; safety
relief connections, liquid-level gaging devices as provided in
paragraphs (b)(7)(iv), (19)(iii), and (19)(viii) of this section;
pressure gage connections as provided in paragraph (b)(7)(v) of this
section, as provided in paragraphs (d) (iv), (vi), and (vii) of this
section.
(iv) An excess flow valve is not required in the withdrawal service
line providing the following are complied with:
(a) Such systems' total water capacity does not exceed 2,000 U.S.
gallons.
(b) The discharge from the service outlet is controlled by a
suitable manually operated shutoff valve which is:
(1) Threaded directly into the service outlet of the container; or
(2) Is an integral part of a substantial fitting threaded into or on
the service outlet of the container; or
(3) Threaded directly into a substantial fitting threaded into or on
the service outlet of the container.
(c) The shutoff valve is equipped with an attached handwheel or the
equivalent.
(d) The controlling orifice between the contents of the container
and the outlet of the shutoff valve does not exceed five-sixteenths inch
in diameter for vapor withdrawal systems and one-eighth inch in diameter
for liquid withdrawal systems.
(e) An approved pressure-reducing regulator is directly attached to
the outlet of the shutoff valve and is rigidly supported, or that an
approved pressure-reducing regulator is attached to the outlet of the
shutoff valve by means of a suitable flexible connection, provided the
regulator is adequately supported and properly protected on or at the
tank.
(v) All inlet and outlet connections except safety relief valves,
liquid level gaging devices and pressure gages on containers of 2,000
gallons water capacity, or more, and on any container used to supply
fuel directly to an internal combustion engine, shall be labeled to
designate whether they communicate with vapor or liquid space. Labels
may be on valves.
(vi) In lieu of an excess flow valve openings may be fitted with a
quick-closing internal valve which, except during operating periods
shall remain closed. The internal mechanism for such valves may be
provided with a secondary control which shall be equipped with a fusible
plug (not over 220 deg.F. melting point) which will cause the internal
valve to close automatically in case of fire.
(vii) Not more than two plugged openings shall be permitted on a
container of 2,000 gallons or less water capacity.
(viii) Containers of 125 gallons water capacity or more manufactured
after July 1, 1961, shall be provided with an approved device for liquid
evacuation, the size of which shall be three-fourths inch National Pipe
Thread minimum. A plugged opening will not satisfy this requirement.
(4) Safety devices. (i) All safety devices shall comply with the
following:
(a) All container safety relief devices shall be located on the
containers and shall have direct communication with the vapor of space
of the container.
(b) In industrial and gas manufacturing plants, discharge pipe from
safety relief valves on pipe lines within a building shall discharge
vertically upward and shall be piped to a point outside a building.
[[Page 323]]
(c) Safety relief device discharge terminals shall be so located as
to provide protection against physical damage and such discharge pipes
shall be fitted with loose raincaps. Return bends and restrictive
pipefittings shall not be permitted.
(d) If desired, discharge lines from two or more safety relief
devices located on the same unit, or similar lines from two or more
different units, may be run into a common discharge header, provided
that the cross-sectional area of such header be at least equal to the
sum of the cross-sectional area of the individual discharge lines, and
that the setting of safety relief valves are the same.
(e) Each storage container of over 2,000 gallons water capacity
shall be provided with a suitable pressure gage.
(f) A final stage regulator of an LP-Gas system (excluding any
appliance regulator) shall be equipped on the low-pressure side with a
relief valve which is set to start to discharge within the limits
specified in Table H-30.
(g) When a regulator or pressure relief valve is installed inside a
building, the relief valve and the space above the regulator and relief
valve diaphragms shall be vented to the outside air with the discharge
outlet located not less than 3 feet horizontally away from any opening
into the building which is below such discharge. (These provisions do
not apply to individual appliance regulators when protection is
otherwise provided. In buildings devoted exclusively to gas distribution
purposes, the space above the diaphragm need not be vented to the
outside.)
(ii) Safety devices for aboveground containers shall be provided as
follows:
(a) Containers of 1,200 gallons water capacity or less which may
contain liquid fuel when installed above ground shall have the rate of
discharge required by paragraph (b)(10)(ii) of this section provided by
a spring-loaded relief valve or valves. In addition to the required
spring-loaded relief valve(s), suitable fuse plug(s) may be used
provided the total discharge area of the fuse plug(s) for each container
does not exceed 0.25 square inch.
(b) The fusible metal of the fuse plugs shall have a yield
temperature of 208 deg.F. minimum and 220 deg.F. maximum. Relief
valves and fuse plugs shall have direct communication with the vapor
space of the container.
(c) On a container having a water capacity greater than 125 gallons,
but not over 2,000 gallons, the discharge from the safety relief valves
shall be vented away from the container vertically upwards and
unobstructed to the open air in such a manner as to prevent any
impingement of escaping gas upon the container; loose-fitting rain caps
shall be used. Suitable provision shall be made for draining condensate
which may accumulate in the relief valve or its discharge pipe.
(d) On containers of 125 gallons water capacity or less, the
discharge from safety relief devices shall be located not less than 5
feet horizontally away from any opening into the building below the
level of such discharge.
(e) On a container having a water capacity greater than 2,000
gallons, the discharge from the safety relief valves shall be vented
away from the container vertically upwards to a point at least 7 feet
above the container, and unobstructed to the open air in such a manner
as to prevent any impingement of escaping gas upon the container; loose-
fitting rain caps shall be used. Suitable provision shall be made so
that any liquid or condensate that may accumulate inside of the safety
relief valve or its discharge pipe will not render the valve
inoperative. If a drain is used, a means shall be provided to protect
the container, adjacent containers, piping, or equipment against
impingement of flame resulting from ignition of product escaping from
the drain.
(iii) On all containers which are installed underground and which
contain no liquid fuel until buried and covered, the rate of discharge
of the spring-loaded relief valve installed thereon may be reduced to a
minimum of 30 percent of the rate of discharge specified in paragraph
(b)(10)(ii) of this section. Containers so protected shall not be
uncovered after installation until the liquid fuel has been removed
therefrom. Containers which may contain liquid fuel before being
installed under ground and before being completely covered with earth
are to be considered aboveground containers when determining the rate
[[Page 324]]
of discharge requirement of the relief valves.
(iv) On underground containers of more than 2,000 gallons water
capacity, the discharge from safety relief devices shall be piped
vertically and directly upward to a point at least 7 feet above the
ground.
Where there is a probability of the manhole or housing becoming flooded,
the discharge from regulator vent lines shall be above the highest
probable water level. All manholes or housings shall be provided with
ventilated louvers or their equivalent, the area of such openings
equaling or exceeding the combined discharge areas of the safety relief
valves and other vent lines which discharge their content into the
manhole housing.
(v) Safety devices for vaporizers shall be provided as follows:
(a) Vaporizers of less than 1 quart total capacity, heated by the
ground or the surrounding air, need not be equipped with safety relief
valves provided that adequate tests certified by any of the authorities
referred to in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, demonstrate that the
assembly is safe without safety relief valves.
(b) No vaporizer shall be equipped with fusible plugs.
(c) In industrial and gas manufacturing plants, safety relief valves
on vaporizers within a building shall be piped to a point outside the
building and be discharged upward.
(5) Reinstallation of containers. Containers may be reinstalled if
they do not show any evidence of harmful external corrosion or other
damage. Where containers are reinstalled underground, the corrosion
resistant coating shall be put in good condition (see paragraph
(c)(7)(vi) of this section). Where containers are reinstalled above
ground, the safety devices and gaging devices shall comply with
paragraph (c)(4) of this section and paragraph (b)(19) of this section
respectively for aboveground containers.
(6) Capacity of containers. A storage container shall not exceed
90,000 gallons water capacity.
(7) Installation of storage containers. (i) Containers installed
above ground, except as provided in paragraph (c)(7)(vii) of this
section, shall be provided with substantial masonry or noncombustible
structural supports on firm masonry foundation.
(ii) Aboveground containers shall be supported as follows:
(a) Horizontal containers shall be mounted on saddles in such a
manner as to permit expansion and contraction. Structural metal supports
may be employed when they are protected against fire in an approved
manner. Suitable means of preventing corrosion shall be provided on that
portion of the container in contact with the foundations or saddles.
(b) Containers of 2,000 gallons water capacity or less may be
installed with nonfireproofed ferrous metal supports if mounted on
concrete pads or footings, and if the distance from the outside bottom
of the container shell to the concrete pad, footing, or the ground does
not exceed 24 inches.
(iii) Any container may be installed with nonfireproofed ferrous
metal supports if mounted on concrete pads or footings, and if the
distance from the outside bottom of the container to the ground does not
exceed 5 feet, provided the container is in an isolated location.
(iv) Containers may be partially buried providing the following
requirements are met:
(a) The portion of the container below the surface and for a
vertical distance not less than 3 inches above the surface of the ground
is protected to resist corrosion, and the container is protected against
settling and corrosion as required for fully buried containers.
(b) Spacing requirements shall be as specified for underground tanks
in paragraph (b)(6)(ii) of this section.
(c) Relief valve capacity shall be as required for aboveground
containers.
(d) Container is located so as not to be subject to vehicular
damage, or is adequately protected against such damage.
(e) Filling densities shall be as required for above-ground
containers.
(v) Containers buried underground shall be placed so that the top of
the container is not less than 6 inches below grade. Where an
underground container might be subject to abrasive
[[Page 325]]
action or physical damage due to vehicular traffic or other causes, then
it shall be:
(a) Placed not less than 2 feet below grade, or
(b) Otherwise protected against such physical damage.
It will not be necessary to cover the portion of the container to which
manhole and other connections are affixed; however, where necessary,
protection shall be provided against vehicular damage. When necessary to
prevent floating, containers shall be securely anchored or weighted.
(vi)(a) Containers shall be given a protective coating before being
placed under ground. This coating shall be equivalent to hot-dip
galvanizing or to two coatings of red lead followed by a heavy coating
of coal tar or asphalt. In lowering the container into place, care shall
be exercised to prevent damage to the coating. Any damage to the coating
shall be repaired before backfilling.
(b) Containers shall be set on a firm foundation (firm earth may be
used) and surrounded with earth or sand firmly tamped in place.
(vii) Containers with foundations attached (portable or semiportable
containers with suitable steel ``runners'' or ``skids'' and popularly
known in the industry as ``skid tanks'') shall be designed, installed,
and used in accordance with these rules subject to the following
provisions:
(a) If they are to be used at a given general location for a
temporary period not to exceed 6 months they need not have fire-
resisting foundations or saddles but shall have adequate ferrous metal
supports.
(b) They shall not be located with the outside bottom of the
container shell more than 5 feet above the surface of the ground unless
fire-resisting supports are provided.
(c) The bottom of the skids shall not be less than 2 inches or more
than 12 inches below the outside bottom of the container shell.
(d) Flanges, nozzles, valves, fittings, and the like, having
communication with the interior of the container, shall be protected
against physical damage.
(e) When not permanently located on fire-resisting foundations,
piping connections shall be sufficiently flexible to minimize the
possibility of breakage or leakage of connections if the container
settles, moves, or is otherwise displaced.
(f) Skids, or lugs for attachment of skids, shall be secured to the
container in accordance with the code or rules under which the container
is designed and built (with a minimum factor of safety of four) to
withstand loading in any direction equal to four times the weight of the
container and attachments when filled to the maximum permissible loaded
weight.
(viii) Field welding where necessary shall be made only on saddle
plates or brackets which were applied by the manufacturer of the tank.
(ix) For aboveground containers, secure anchorage or adequate pier
height shall be provided against possible container flotation wherever
sufficiently high floodwater might occur.
(x) When permanently installed containers are interconnected,
provision shall be made to compensate for expansion, contraction,
vibration, and settling of containers, and interconnecting piping. Where
flexible connections are used, they shall be of an approved type and
shall be designed for a bursting pressure of not less than five times
the vapor pressure of the product at 100 deg.F. The use of nonmetallic
hose is prohibited for permanently interconnecting such containers.
(xi) Container assemblies listed for interchangeable installation
above ground or under ground shall conform to the requirements for
aboveground installations with respect to safety relief capacity and
filling density. For installation above ground all other requirements
for aboveground installations shall apply. For installation under ground
all other requirements for underground installations shall apply.
(8) Protection of container accessories. (i) Valves, regulating,
gaging, and other container accessory equipment shall be protected
against tampering and physical damage. Such accessories shall also be so
protected during the transit of containers intended for installation
underground.
(ii) On underground or combination aboveground-underground
containers,
[[Page 326]]
the service valve handwheel, the terminal for connecting the hose, and
the opening through which there can be a flow from safety relief valves
shall be at least 4 inches above the container and this opening shall be
located in the dome or housing. Underground systems shall be so
installed that all the above openings, including the regulator vent, are
located above the normal maximum water table.
(iii) All connections to underground containers shall be located
within a substantial dome, housing, or manhole and with access thereto
protected by a substantial cover.
(9) Drips for condensed gas. Where vaporized gas on the low-pressure
side of the system may condense to a liquid at normal operating
temperatures and pressures, suitable means shall be provided for
revaporization of the condensate.
(10) Damage from vehicles. When damage to LP-Gas systems from
vehicular traffic is a possibility, precautions against such damage
shall be taken.
(11) Drains. No drains or blowoff lines shall be directed into or in
proximity to sewer systems used for other purposes.
(12) General provisions applicable to systems in industrial plants
(of 2,000 gallons water capacity and more) and to bulk filling plants.
(i) When standard watch service is provided, it shall be extended to the
LP-Gas installation and personnel properly trained.
(ii) If loading and unloading are normally done during other than
daylight hours, adequate lights shall be provided to illuminate storage
containers, control valves, and other equipment.
(iii) Suitable roadways or means of access for extinguishing
equipment such as wheeled extinguishers or fire department apparatus
shall be provided.
(iv) To minimize trespassing or tampering, the area which includes
container appurtenances, pumping equipment, loading and unloading
facilities, and cylinder-filling facilities shall be enclosed with at
least a 6-foot-high industrial type fence unless otherwise adequately
protected. There shall be at least two means of emergency access.
(13) Container-charging plants. (i) The container-charging room
shall be located not less than:
(a) Ten feet from bulk storage containers.
(b) [Reserved]
(ii) Tank truck filling station outlets shall be located not less
than:
(a) [Reserved]
(b) Ten feet from pumps and compressors if housed in one or more
separate buildings.
(iii) The pumps or compressors may be located in the container-
charging room or building, in a separate building, or outside of
buildings. When housed in a separate building, such building (a small
noncombustible weather cover is not to be construed as a building) shall
be located not less than:
(a) Ten feet from bulk storage tanks.
(b) [Reserved]
(c) Twenty-five feet from sources of ignition.
(iv) When a part of the container-charging building is to be used
for a boiler room or where open flames or similar sources of ignition
exist or are employed, the space to be so occupied shall be separated
from container charging room by a partition wall or walls of fire-
resistant construction continuous from floor to roof or ceiling. Such
separation walls shall be without openings and shall be joined to the
floor, other walls, and ceiling or roof in a manner to effect a
permanent gas-tight joint.
(v) Electrical equipment and installations shall conform with
paragraphs (b) (17) and (18) of this section.
(14) Fire protection. (i) Each bulk plant shall be provided with at
least one approved portable fire extinguisher having a minimum rating of
12-B, C.
(ii) In industrial installations involving containers of 150,000
gallons aggregate water capacity or more, provision shall be made for an
adequate supply of water at the container site for fire protection in
the container area, unless other adequate means for fire control are
provided. Water hydrants shall be readily accessible and so spaced as to
provide water protection for all containers. Sufficient lengths of
firehose shall be provided at each hydrant location on a hose cart, or
other means
[[Page 327]]
provided to facilitate easy movement of the hose in the container area.
It is desirable to equip the outlet of each hose line with a combination
fog nozzle. A shelter shall be provided to protect the hose and its
conveyor from the weather.
(15) [Reserved]
(16) Lighting. Electrical equipment and installations shall conform
to paragraphs (b) (17) and (18) of this section.
(17) Vaporizers for internal combustion engines. The provisions of
paragraph (e)(8) of this section shall apply.
(18) Gas regulating and mixing equipment for internal combustion
engines. The provisions of paragraph (e)(9) of this section shall apply.
(e) Liquefied petroleum gas as a motor fuel--(1) Application. (i)
This paragraph applies to internal combustion engines, fuel containers,
and pertinent equipment for the use of liquefied petroleum gases as a
motor fuel on easily movable, readily portable units including self-
propelled vehicles.
(ii) Fuel containers and pertinent equipment for internal combustion
engines using liquefied petroleum gas where installation is of the
stationary type are covered by paragraph (d) of this section. This
paragraph does not apply to containers for transportation of liquefied
petroleum gases nor to marine fuel use. All requirements of paragraph
(b) of this section apply to this paragraph, unless otherwise noted in
paragraph (b) of this section.
(2) General. (i) Fuel may be used from the cargo tank of a truck
while in transit, but not from cargo tanks on trailers or semitrailers.
The use of fuel from the cargo tanks to operate stationary engines is
permitted providing wheels are securely blocked.
(ii) Passenger-carrying vehicles shall not be fueled while
passengers are on board.
(iii) Industrial trucks (including lift trucks) equipped with
permanently mounted fuel containers shall be charged outdoors. Charging
equipment shall comply with the provisions of paragraph (h) of this
section.
(iv) LP-Gas fueled industrial trucks shall comply with the Standard
for Type Designations, Areas of Use, Maintenance and Operation of
Powered Industrial Trucks, NFPA 505-1969, which is incorporated by
reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(v) Engines on vehicles shall be shut down while fueling if the
fueling operation involves venting to the atmosphere.
(3) Design pressure and classification of fuel containers. (i)
Except as covered in paragraphs (e)(3) (ii) and (iii) of this section,
containers shall be in accordance with Table H-32.
(ii) Fuel containers for use in industrial trucks (including lift
trucks) shall be either DOT containers authorized for LP-Gas service
having a minimum service pressure of 240 p.s.i.g. or minimum Container
Type 250. Under 1950 and later ASME codes, this means a 312.5-p.s.i.g.
design pressure container.
Table H-32
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum design pressure of container,
lb. per sq. in. gage
--------------------------------------
For gases with 1949 edition of ASME
vapor press. Code (Par. U-200, U-
Not to exceed 1949 and 201); 1950, 1952,
Container type lb. per sq. in. earlier 1956, 1959, 1962,
gage at 100 editions of 1965, and 1968
deg.F. (37.8 ASME Code (Par. (Division 1)
deg.C.) U-68, U-69) editions of ASME
Code; All editions
of API-ASME Code \2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ 200 215Z 200 250
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Container type may be increased by increments of 25. The minimum
design pressure of containers shall be 100% of the container type
designation when constructed under 1949 or earlier editions of the
ASME Code (Par. U-68 and U-69). The minimum design pressure of
containers shall be 125% of the container type designation when
constructed under: (1) the 1949 ASME Code (Par. U-200 and U-201), (2)
1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions of
the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the API-ASME Code.
\2\ Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is not authorized
after July 1, 1961.
(iii) Containers manufactured and maintained under DOT
specifications and regulations may be used as fuel containers. When so
used they shall conform to all requirements of this paragraph.
(iv) All container inlets and outlets except safety relief valves
and gaging devices shall be labeled to designate whether they
communicate with vapor or liquid space. Labels may be on valves.
(4) Installation of fuel containers. (i) Containers shall be located
in a place and in a manner to minimize the possibility of damage to the
container. Containers located in the rear of trucks
[[Page 328]]
and buses, when protected by substantial bumpers, will be considered in
conformance with this requirement. Fuel containers on passenger-carrying
vehicles shall be installed as far from the engine as is practicable,
and the passenger space and any space containing radio equipment shall
be sealed from the container space to prevent direct seepage of gas to
these spaces. The container compartment shall be vented to the outside.
In case the fuel container is mounted near the engine or the exhaust
system, the container shall be shielded against direct heat radiation.
(ii) Containers shall be installed with as much clearance as
practicable but never less than the minimum road clearance of the
vehicle under maximum spring deflection. This minimum clearance shall be
to the bottom of the container or to the lowest fitting on the container
or housing, whichever is lower.
(iii) Permanent and removable fuel containers shall be securely
mounted to prevent jarring loose, slipping, or rotating, and the
fastenings shall be designed and constructed to withstand static loading
in any direction equal to twice the weight of the tank and attachments
when filled with fuel using a safety factor of not less than four based
on the ultimate strength of the material to be used. Field welding, when
necessary, shall be made only on saddle plates, lugs or brackets,
originally attached to the container by the tank manufacturer.
(iv) Fuel containers on buses shall be permanently installed.
(v) Containers from which vapor only is to be withdrawn shall be
installed and equipped with suitable connections to minimize the
accidental withdrawal of liquid.
(5) Valves and accessories. (i) Container valves and accessories
shall have a rated working pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g., and shall
be of a type suitable for liquefied petroleum gas service.
(ii) The filling connection shall be fitted with an approved double
back-pressure check valve, or a positive shutoff in conjunction with an
internal back-pressure check valve. On a removable container the filler
valve may be a hand operated shutoff valve with an internal excess flow
valve. Main shutoff valves on the container on liquid and vapor lines
must be readily accessible.
(iii) With the exceptions of paragraph (e)(5)(iv)(c) of this
section, filling connections equipped with approved automatic back-
pressure check valves, and safety relief valves, all connections to
containers having openings for the flow of gas in excess of a No. 54
drill size shall be equipped with approved automatic excess flow valves
to prevent discharge of content in case connections are broken.
(iv) Liquid-level gaging devices:
(a) Variable liquid-level gages which require the venting of fuel to
the atmosphere shall not be used on fuel containers of industrial trucks
(including lift trucks).
(b) On portable containers that may be filled in the vertical and/or
horizontal position, the fixed liquid-level gage must indicate maximum
permitted filling level for both vertical and horizontal filling with
the container oriented to place the safety relief valve in communication
with the vapor space.
(c) In the case of containers used solely in farm tractor service,
and charged at a point at least 50 feet from any important building, the
fixed liquid-level gaging device may be so constructed that the outward
flow of container content exceeds that passed by a No. 54 drill size
opening, but in no case shall the flow exceed that passed by a No. 31
drill-size opening. An excess flow valve is not required. Fittings
equipped with such restricted drill size opening and container on which
they are used shall be marked to indicate the size of the opening.
(d) All valves and connections on containers shall be adequately
protected to prevent damage due to accidental contact with stationary
objects or from loose objects thrown up from the road, and all valves
shall be safeguarded against damage due to collision, overturning or
other accident. For farm tractors where parts of the vehicle provide
such protection to valves and fittings, the foregoing requirements shall
be considered fulfilled. However, on removable type containers the
protection for the fittings shall be permanently attached to the
container.
[[Page 329]]
(e) When removable fuel containers are used, means shall be provided
in the fuel system to minimize the escape of fuel when the containers
are exchanged. This may be accomplished by either of the following
methods:
(1) Using an approved automatic quick-closing coupling (a type
closing in both directions when uncoupled) in the fuel line, or
(2) Closing the valve at the fuel container and allowing the engine
to run until the fuel in the line is consumed.
(6) Piping--including pipe, tubing, and fittings. (i) Pipe from fuel
container to first-stage regulator shall be not less than schedule 80
wrought iron or steel (black or galvanized), brass or copper; or
seamless copper, brass, or steel tubing. Steel tubing shall have a
minimum wall thickness of 0.049 inch. Steel pipe or tubing shall be
adequately protected against exterior corrosion. Copper tubing shall be
types K or L or equivalent having a minimum wall thickness of 0.032
inch. Approved flexible connections may be used between container and
regulator or between regulator and gas-air mixer within the limits of
approval. The use of aluminum pipe or tubing is prohibited. In the case
of removable containers an approved flexible connection shall be used
between the container and the fuel line.
(ii) All piping shall be installed, braced, and supported so as to
reduce to a minimum the possibility of vibration strains or wear.
(7) Safety devices. (i) Spring-loaded internal type safety relief
valves shall be used on all motor fuel containers.
(ii) The discharge outlet from safety relief valves shall be located
on the outside of enclosed spaces and as far as practicable from
possible sources of ignition, and vented upward within 45 degrees of the
vertical in such a manner as to prevent impingement of escaping gas upon
containers, or parts of vehicles, or on vehicles in adjacent lines of
traffic. A rain cap or other protector shall be used to keep water and
dirt from collecting in the valve.
(iii) When a discharge line from the container safety relief valve
is used, the line shall be metallic, other than aluminum, and shall be
sized, located, and maintained so as not to restrict the required flow
of gas from the safety relief valve. Such discharge line shall be able
to withstand the pressure resulting from the discharge of vapor when the
safety relief valve is in the full open position. When flexibility is
necessary, flexible metal hose or tubing shall be used.
(iv) Portable containers equipped for volumetric filling may be
filled in either the vertical or horizontal position only when oriented
to place the safety relief valve in communication with the vapor space.
(v) Paragraph (b)(10)(xii) of this section for hydrostatic relief
valves shall apply.
(8) Vaporizers. (i) Vaporizers and any part thereof and other
devices that may be subjected to container pressure shall have a design
pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g.
(ii) Each vaporizer shall have a valve or suitable plug which will
permit substantially complete draining of the vaporizer. It shall be
located at or near the lowest portion of the section occupied by the
water or other heating medium.
(iii) Vaporizers shall be securely fastened so as to minimize the
possibility of becoming loosened.
(iv) Each vaporizer shall be permanently marked at a visible point
as follows:
(a) With the design pressure of the fuel-containing portion in
p.s.i.g.
(b) With the water capacity of the fuel-containing portion of the
vaporizer in pounds.
(v) Devices to supply heat directly to a fuel container shall be
equipped with an automatic device to cut off the supply of heat before
the pressure inside the fuel container reaches 80 percent of the start
to discharge pressure setting of the safety relief device on the fuel
container.
(vi) Engine exhaust gases may be used as a direct source of heat
supply for the vaporization of fuel if the materials of construction of
those parts of the vaporizer in contact with exhaust gases are resistant
to the corrosive action of exhaust gases and the vaporizer system is
designed to prevent excessive pressures.
(vii) Vaporizers shall not be equipped with fusible plugs.
[[Page 330]]
(9) Gas regulating and mixing equipment. (i) Approved automatic
pressure reducing equipment shall be installed in a secure manner
between the fuel supply container and gas-air mixer for the purpose of
reducing the pressure of the fuel delivered to the gas-air mixer.
(ii) An approved automatic shutoff valve shall be provided in the
fuel system at some point ahead of the inlet of the gas-air mixer,
designed to prevent flow of fuel to the mixer when the ignition is off
and the engine is not running. In the case of industrial trucks and
engines operating in buildings other than those used exclusively to
house engines, the automatic shutoff valve shall be designed to operate
if the engine should stop. Atmospheric type regulators (zero governors)
shall be considered adequate as an automatic shutoff valve only in cases
of outdoor operation such as farm tractors, construction equipment,
irrigation pump engines, and other outdoor stationary engine
installations.
(iii) The source of the air for combustion shall be completely
isolated from the passenger compartment, ventilating system, or air-
conditioning system.
(10) [Reserved]
(11) Stationary engines in buildings. Stationary engines and gas
turbines installed in buildings, including portable engines used instead
of or to supplement stationary engines, shall comply with the Standard
for the Institution and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas
Turbines, NFPA 37-1970, and the appropriate provisions of paragraphs
(b), (c), and (d) of this section.
(12) Portable engines in buildings. (i) Portable engines may be used
in buildings only for emergency use, except as provided by subparagraph
(11) of this paragraph.
(ii) Exhaust gases shall be discharged to outside the building or to
an area where they will not constitute a hazard.
(iii) Provision shall be made to supply sufficient air for
combustion and cooling.
(iv) An approved automatic shutoff valve shall be provided in the
fuel system ahead of the engine, designed to prevent flow of fuel to the
engine when the ignition is off or if the engine should stop.
(v) The capacity of LP-Gas containers used with such engines shall
comply with the applicable occupancy provision of paragraph (c)(5) of
this section.
(13) Industrial trucks inside buildings. (i) LP-Gas-fueled
industrial trucks are permitted to be used in buildings and structures.
(ii) No more than two LP-Gas containers shall be used on an
industrial truck for motor fuel purposes.
(iii)-(iv) [Reserved]
(v) Industrial trucks shall not be parked and left unattended in
areas of possible excessive heat or sources of ignition.
(14) Garaging LP-Gas-fueled vehicles. (i) LP-Gas-fueled vehicles may
be stored or serviced inside garages provided there are no leaks in the
fuel system and the fuel tanks are not filled beyond the maximum filling
capacity specified in paragraph (b)(12)(i) of this section.
(ii) LP-Gas-fueled vehicles being repaired in garages shall have the
container shutoff valve closed except when fuel is required for engine
operation.
(iii) Such vehicles shall not be parked near sources of heat, open
flames, or similar sources of ignition or near open pits unless such
pits are adequately ventilated.
(f) Storage of containers awaiting use or resale--(1) Application.
This paragraph shall apply to the storage of portable containers not in
excess of 1,000 pounds water capacity, filled or partially filled, at
user location but not connected for use, or in storage for resale by
dealers or resellers. This paragraph shall not apply to containers
stored at charging plants or at plants devoted primarily to the storage
and distribution of LP-Gas or other petroleum products.
(2) General. (i) Containers in storage shall be located so as to
minimize exposure to excessive temperature rise, physical damage, or
tampering by unauthorized persons.
(ii) Containers when stored inside shall not be located near exits,
stairways, or in areas normally used or intended for the safe exit of
people.
[[Page 331]]
(iii) Container valves shall be protected while in storage as
follows:
(a) By setting into recess of container to prevent the possibility
of their being struck if the container is dropped upon a flat surface,
or
(b) By ventilated cap or collar, fastened to container capable of
withstanding blow from any direction equivalent to that of a 30-pound
weight dropped 4 feet. Construction must be such that a blow will not be
transmitted to a valve or other connection.
(iv) The outlet valves of containers in storage shall be closed.
(v) Empty containers which have been in LP-Gas service when stored
inside, shall be considered as full containers for the purpose of
determining the maximum quantity of LP-Gas permitted by this paragraph.
(3) [Reserved]
(4) Storage within buildings not frequented by the public (such as
industrial buildings). (i) The quantity of LP-Gas stored shall not
exceed 300 pounds (approximately 2,550 cubic feet in vapor form) except
as provided in subparagraph (5) of this paragraph.
(ii) Containers carried as a part of service equipment on highway
mobile vehicles are not to be considered in the total storage capacity
in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph provided such vehicles are
stored in private garages, and are limited to one container per vehicle
with an LP-Gas capacity of not more than 100 pounds. All container
valves shall be closed.
(5) Storage within special buildings or rooms. (i) The quantity of
LP-Gas stored in special buildings or rooms shall not exceed 10,000
pounds.
(ii) The walls, floors, and ceilings of container storage rooms that
are within or adjacent to other parts of the building shall be
constructed of material having at least a 2-hour fire resistance rating.
(iii) A portion of the exterior walls or roof having an area not
less than 10 percent of that of the combined area of the enclosing walls
and roof shall be of explosion relieving construction.
(iv) Each opening from such storage rooms to other parts of the
building shall be protected by a 1\1/2\ hour (B) fire door listed by a
nationally recognized testing laboratory. Refer to Sec. 1910.7 for
definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory.
(v) Such rooms shall have no open flames for heating or lighting.
(vi) Such rooms shall be adequately ventilated both top and bottom
to the outside only. The openings from such vents shall be at least 5
feet away from any other opening into any building.
(vii) The floors of such rooms shall not be below ground level. Any
space below the floor shall be of solid fill or properly ventilated to
the open air.
(viii) Such storage rooms shall not be located adjoining the line of
property occupied by schools, churches, hospitals, athletic fields or
other points of public gathering.
(ix) Fixed electrical equipment shall be installed in accordance
with paragraph (b)(18) of this section.
(6) Storage outside of buildings. (i) Storage outside of buildings,
for containers awaiting use or resale, shall be located in accordance
with Table H-33 with respect to:
(a) The nearest important building or group of buildings;
(b) [Reserved]
(c) Busy thoroughfares;
Table H-33
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quantity of LP-Gas Stored Distance
------------------------------------------------------------------------
500 pounds or less.......................................... 0
501 to 2,500 pounds......................................... \1\ 0
2,501 to 6,000 pounds....................................... 10 feet
6,001 to 10,000 pounds...................................... 20 feet
Over 10,000 pounds.......................................... 25 feet
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Container or containers shall be at least 10 feet from any building
on adjoining property, any sidewalk, or any of the exposures described
in Sec. 1910.110(f)(6)(i) (c) or (d) of this paragraph.
(ii) Containers shall be in a suitable enclosure or otherwise
protected against tampering.
(7) Fire protection. Storage locations other than supply depots
separated and located apart from dealer, reseller, or user
establishments shall be provided with at least one approved portable
fire extinguisher having a minimum rating of 8-B, C.
(g) [Reserved]
(h) Liquefied petroleum gas service stations--(1) Application. This
paragraph applies to storage containers, and dispensing devices, and
pertinent equipment in service stations where LP-Gas is stored and is
dispensed into fuel tanks of motor vehicles. See paragraph
[[Page 332]]
(e) of this section for requirements covering use of LP-Gas as a motor
fuel. All requirements of paragraph (b) of this section apply to this
paragraph unless otherwise noted.
(2) Design pressure and classification of storage containers.
Storage containers shall be designed and classified in accordance with
Table H-34.
Table H-34
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum design pressure of container,
lb. per sq. in. gage
--------------------------------------
For gases with 1949 edition of ASME
vapor press. Code (Par. U-200, U-
Not to exceed 1949 and 201); 1950, 1952,
Container type lb. per sq. in. earlier 1956, 1959, 1962,
gage at 100 editions of 1965, and 1968
deg.F. (37.8 ASME Code (Par. (Division 1)
deg.C.) U-68, U-69) editions of ASME
Code; All editions
of API-ASME Code \2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ 200 215 200 250
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Container type may be increased by increments of 25. The minimum
design pressure of containers shall be 100 percent of the container
type designation when constructed under 1949 or earlier editions of
the ASME Code (Par. U-68 and U-69). The minimum design pressure of
containers shall be 125 percent of the container type designation when
constructed under: (1) The 1949 ASME Code (Paragraphs U-200 and U-
201), (2) 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1)
editions of the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the API-ASME Code.
\2\ Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is not authorized
after July 1, 1961.
(3) Container valves and accessories. (i) A filling connection on
the container shall be fitted with one of the following:
(a) A combination back-pressure check and excess flow valve.
(b) One double or two single back-pressure valves.
(c) A positive shutoff valve, in conjunction with either,
(1) An internal back-pressure valve, or
(2) On internal excess flow valve.
In lieu of an excess flow valve, filling connections may be fitted with
a quick-closing internal valve, which shall remain closed except during
operating periods. The mechanism for such valves may be provided with a
secondary control which will cause it to close automatically in case of
fire. When a fusible plug is used its melting point shall not exceed 220
deg.F.
(ii) A filling pipe inlet terminal not on the container shall be
fitted with a positive shutoff valve in conjunction with either;
(a) A black pressure check valve, or
(b) An excess flow check valve.
(iii) All openings in the container except those listed below shall
be equipped with approved excess flow check valves:
(a) Filling connections as provided in subdivision (i) of this
subparagraph.
(b) Safety relief connections as provided in paragraph (b)(7)(ii) of
this section.
(c) Liquid-level gaging devices as provided in paragraphs (b)(7)(iv)
and (19)(iv) of this section.
(d) Pressure gage connections as provided in paragraph (b)(7)(v) of
this section.
(iv) All container inlets and outlets except those listed below
shall be labeled to designate whether they connect with vapor or liquid
(labels may be on valves):
(a) Safety relief valves.
(b) Liquid-level gaging devices.
(c) Pressure gages.
(v) Each storage container shall be provided with a suitable
pressure gage.
(4) Safety-relief valves. (i) All safety-relief devices shall be
installed as follows:
(a) On the container and directly connected with the vapor space.
(b) Safety-relief valves and discharge piping shall be protected
against physical damage. The outlet shall be provided with loose-fitting
rain caps. There shall be no return bends or restrictions in the
discharge piping.
(c) The discharge from two or more safety relief valves having the
same pressure settings may be run into a common discharge header. The
cross-sectional area of such header shall be at least equal to the sum
of the cross-sectional areas of the individual discharges.
(d) Discharge from any safety relief device shall not terminate in
any building nor beneath any building.
(ii) Aboveground containers shall be provided with safety relief
valves as follows:
(a) The rate of discharge, which may be provided by one or more
valves, shall be not less than that specified in paragraph (b)(10)(ii)
of this section.
(b) The discharge from safety relief valves shall be vented to the
open air unobstructed and vertically upwards in such a manner as to
prevent any impingement of escaping gas upon the
[[Page 333]]
container; loose-fitting rain caps shall be used. On a container having
a water capacity greater than 2,000 gallons, the discharge from the
safety relief valves shall be vented away from the container vertically
upwards to a point at least 7 feet above the container. Suitable
provisions shall be made so that any liquid or condensate that may
accumulate inside of the relief valve or its discharge pipe will not
render the valve inoperative. If a drain is used, a means shall be
provided to protect the container, adjacent containers, piping, or
equipment against impingement of flame resulting from ignition of the
product escaping from the drain.
(iii) Underground containers shall be provided with safety relief
valves as follows:
(a) The discharge from safety-relief valves shall be piped
vertically upward to a point at least 10 feet above the ground. The
discharge lines or pipes shall be adequately supported and protected
against physical damage.
(b) [Reserved]
(c) If no liquid is put into a container until after it is buried
and covered, the rate of discharge of the relief valves may be reduced
to not less than 30 percent of the rate shown in paragraph (b)(10)(ii)
of this section. If liquid fuel is present during installation of
containers, the rate of discharge shall be the same as for aboveground
containers. Such containers shall not be uncovered until emptied of
liquid fuel.
(5) Capacity of liquid containers. Individual liquid storage
containers shall not exceed 30,000 gallons water capacity.
(6) Installation of storage containers. (i)(a) Each storage
container used exclusively in service station operation shall comply
with the following table which specifies minimum distances to a building
and groups of buildings.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum distances
-------------------------
Aboveground Between
Water capacity per container (gallons) and aboveground
underground containers
(feet) (feet)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Up to 2,000................................... 25 3
Over 2,000.................................... 50 5
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: The above distances may be reduced to not less than 10 feet for
service station buildings of other than wood frame construction.
(b) Readily ignitible material including weeds and long dry grass,
shall be removed within 10 feet of containers.
(c) The minimum separation between LP-Gas containers and flammable
liquid tanks shall be 20 feet and the minimum separation between a
container and the centerline of the dike shall be 10 feet.
(d) LP-Gas containers located near flammable liquid containers shall
be protected against the flow or accumulation of flammable liquids by
diking, diversion curbs, or grading.
(e) LP-Gas containers shall not be located within diked areas for
flammable liquid containers.
(f) Field welding is permitted only on saddle plates or brackets
which were applied by the container manufacturer.
(g) When permanently installed containers are interconnected,
provision shall be made to compensate for expansion, contraction,
vibration, and settling of containers and interconnecting piping. Where
flexible connections are used, they shall be of an approved type and
shall be designed for a bursting pressure of not less than five times
the vapor pressure of the product at 100 deg.F. The use of nonmetallic
hose is prohibited for interconnecting such containers.
(h) Where high water table or flood conditions may be encountered
protection against container flotation shall be provided.
(ii) Aboveground containers shall be installed in accordance with
this subdivision.
(a) Containers may be installed horizontally or vertically.
(b) Containers shall be protected by crash rails or guards to
prevent physical damage unless they are so protected by virtue of their
location. Vehicles shall not be serviced within 10 feet of containers.
(c) Container foundations shall be of substantial masonry or other
noncombustible material. Containers shall be mounted on saddles which
shall permit expansion and contraction, and shall provide against the
excessive concentration of stresses. Corrosion protection shall be
provided for tank-mounting areas. Structural metal container supports
shall be protected
[[Page 334]]
against fire. This protection is not required on prefabricated storage
and pump assemblies, mounted on a common base, with container bottom not
more than 24 inches above ground and whose water capacity is 2,000
gallons or less if the piping connected to the storage and pump assembly
is sufficiently flexible to minimize the possibility of breakage or
leakage in the event of failure of the container supports.
(iii) Underground containers shall be installed in accordance with
this subdivision.
(a) Containers shall be given a protective coating before being
placed under ground. This coating shall be equivalent to hot-dip
galvanizing or to two coatings of red lead followed by a heavy coating
of coal tar or asphalt. In lowering the container into place, care shall
be exercised to minimize abrasion or other damage to the coating. Damage
to the coating shall be repaired before back-filling.
(b) Containers shall be set on a firm foundation (firm earth may be
used) and surrounded with earth or sand firmly tamped in place. Backfill
should be free of rocks or other abrasive materials.
(c) A minimum of 2 feet of earth cover shall be provided. Where
ground conditions make compliance with this requirement impractical,
equivalent protection against physical damage shall be provided. The
portion of the container to which manhole and other connections are
attached need not be covered. If the location is subjected to vehicular
traffic, containers shall be protected by a concrete slab or other cover
adequate to prevent the weight of a loaded vehicle imposing concentrated
direct loads on the container shell.
(7) Protection of container fittings. Valves, regulators, gages, and
other container fittings shall be protected against tampering and
physical damage.
(8) Transport truck unloading point. (i) During unloading, the
transport truck shall not be parked on public thoroughfares and shall be
at least 5 feet from storage containers, and shall be positioned so that
shutoff valves are readily accessible.
(ii) The filling pipe inlet terminal shall not be located within a
building nor within 10 feet of any building or driveway. It shall be
protected against physical damage.
(9) Piping, valves, and fittings. (i) Piping may be underground,
above ground, or a combination of both. It shall be well supported and
protected against physical damage and corrosion.
(ii) Piping laid beneath driveways shall be installed to prevent
physical damage by vehicles.
(iii) Piping shall be wrought iron or steel (black or galvanized),
brass or copper pipe; or seamless copper, brass, or steel tubing and
shall be suitable for a minimum pressure of 250 p.s.i.g. Pipe joints may
be screwed, flanged, brazed, or welded. The use of aluminum alloy piping
or tubing is prohibited.
(iv) All shutoff valves (liquid or gas) shall be suitable for
liquefied petroleum gas service and designed for not less than the
maximum pressure to which they may be subjected. Valves which may be
subjected to container pressure shall have a rated working pressure of
at least 250 p.s.i.g.
(v) All materials used for valve seats, packing, gaskets,
diaphragms, etc., shall be resistant to the action of LP-Gas.
(vi) Fittings shall be steel, malleable iron, or brass having a
minimum working pressure of 250 p.s.i.g. Cast iron pipe fittings, such
as ells, tees, and unions shall not be used.
(vii) All piping shall be tested after assembly and proved free from
leaks at not less than normal operating pressures.
(viii) Provision shall be made for expansion, contraction, jarring,
and vibration, and for settling. This may be accomplished by flexible
connections.
(10) Pumps and accessories. All pumps and accessory equipment shall
be suitable for LP-Gas service, and designed for not less than the
maximum pressure to which they may be subjected. Accessories shall have
a minimum rated working pressure of 250 p.s.i.g. Positive displacement
pumps shall be equipped with suitable pressure actuated bypass valves
permitting flow from pump discharge to storage container or pump
suction.
[[Page 335]]
(11) Dispensing devices. (i) Meters, vapor separators, valves, and
fittings in the dispenser shall be suitable for LP-Gas service and shall
be designed for a minimum working pressure of 250 p.s.i.g.
(ii) Provisions shall be made for venting LP-Gas contained in a
dispensing device to a safe location.
(iii) Pumps used to transfer LP-Gas shall be equipped to allow
control of the flow and to prevent leakage or accidental discharge.
Means shall be provided outside the dispensing device to readily shut
off the power in the event of fire or accident.
(iv) A manual shutoff valve and an excess flow check valve shall be
installed downstream of the pump and ahead of the dispenser inlet.
(v)(a) Dispensing hose shall be resistant to the action of LP-Gas in
the liquid phase and designed for a minimum bursting pressure of 1,250
p.s.i.g.
(b) An excess flow check valve or automatic shutoff valve shall be
installed at the terminus of the liquid line at the point of attachment
of the dispensing hose.
(vi)(a) LP-Gas dispensing devices shall be located not less than 10
feet from aboveground storage containers greater than 2,000 gallons
water capacity. The dispensing devices shall not be less than 20 feet
from any building (not including canopies), basement, cellar, pit, or
line of adjoining property which may be built upon and not less than 10
feet from sidewalks, streets, or thoroughfares. No drains or blowoff
lines shall be directed into or in proximity to the sewer systems used
for other purposes.
(b) LP-Gas dispensing devices shall be installed on a concrete
foundation or as part of a complete storage and dispensing assembly
mounted on a common base, and shall be adequately protected from
physical damage.
(c) LP-Gas dispensing devices shall not be installed within a
building except that they may be located under a weather shelter or
canopy provided this area is not enclosed on more than two sides. If the
enclosing sides are adjacent to each other, the area shall be properly
ventilated.
(vii) The dispensing of LP-Gas into the fuel container of a vehicle
shall be performed by a competent attendant who shall remain at the LP-
Gas dispenser during the entire transfer operation.
(12) Additional rules. There shall be no smoking on the driveway of
service stations in the dispensing areas or transport truck unloading
areas. Conspicuous signs prohibiting smoking shall be posted within
sight of the customer being served. Letters on such signs shall be not
less than 4 inches high. The motors of all vehicles being fueled shall
be shut off during the fueling operations.
(13) Electrical. Electrical equipment and installations shall
conform to paragraphs (b) (17) and (18) of this section.
(14) Fire protection. Each service station shall be provided with at
least one approved portable fire extinguisher having at least an 8-B, C,
rating.
(i) Scope--(1) Application. (i) Paragraph (b) of this section
applies to installations made in accordance with the requirements of
paragraphs (c), (d), (e), (g), and (h) of this section, except as noted
in each of those paragraphs.
(ii) Paragraphs (c) through (h) of this section apply as provided in
each of those paragraphs.
(2) Inapplicability. This section does not apply to:
(i) Marine and pipeline terminals, natural gas processing plants,
refineries, or tank farms other than those at industrial sites.
(ii) LP-Gas refrigerated storage systems;
(iii) LP-Gas when used with oxygen. The requirements of
Sec. 1910.253 shall apply to such use;
(iv) LP-Gas when used in utility gas plants. The National Fire
Protection Association Standard for the Storage and Handling of
Liquefied Petroleum Gases at Utility Gas Plants, NFPA No. 59-1968, shall
apply to such use;
(v) Low-pressure (not in excess of one-half pound per square inch or
14 inches water column) LP-Gas piping systems, and the installation and
operation of residential and commercial appliances including their inlet
connections, supplied through such systems. For such systems, the
National Fire Protection Association Standard for
[[Page 336]]
the Installation of Gas Appliances and Gas Piping, NFPA 54-1969 shall
apply.
(3) Retroactivity. Unless otherwise stated, it is not intended that
the provisions of this section be retroactive.
(i) Existing plants, appliances, equipment, buildings, structures,
and installations for the storage, handling or use of LP-Gas, which were
in compliance with the current provisions of the National Fire
Protection Association Standard for the Storage and Handling of
Liquefied Petroleum Gases NFPA No. 58, at the time of manufacture or
installation may be continued in use, if such continued use does not
constitute a recognized hazard that is causing or is likely to cause
death or serious physical harm to employees.
(ii) Stocks of equipment and appliances on hand in such locations as
manufacturers' storage, distribution warehouses, and dealers' storage
and showrooms, which were in compliance with the current provisions of
the National Fire Protection Association Standard for the Storage and
Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases, NFPA No. 58, at the time of
manufacture, may be placed in service, if such use does not constitute a
recognized hazard that is causing or is likely to cause death or serious
physical harm to employees.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49747, Oct. 24, 1978;
49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 25094, June
20, 1990; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR
9237, 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998]
Sec. 1910.111 Storage and handling of anhydrous ammonia.
(a) General--(1) Scope. (i) This standard is intended to apply to
the design, construction, location, installation, and operation of
anhydrous ammonia systems including refrigerated ammonia storage
systems.
(ii) This standard does not apply to:
(a) Ammonia manufacturing plants.
(b) Refrigeration plants where ammonia is used solely as a
refrigerant.
(2) Definitions. As used in this section.
(i) Appurtenances. All devices such as pumps, compressors, safety
relief devices, liquid-level gaging devices, valves and pressure gages.
(ii) Cylinder. A container of 1,000 pounds of water capacity or less
constructed in accordance with Department of Transportation
specifications.
(iii) Code. The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII,
Unfired Pressure Vessels of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers
(ASME)--1968.
(iv) Container. Includes all vessels, tanks, cylinders, or spheres
used for transportation, storage, or application of anhydrous ammonia.
(v) DOT. U.S. Department of Transportation.
(vi) Design pressure is identical to the term Maximum Allowable
Working Pressure used in the Code.
(vii) Farm vehicle (implement of husbandry). A vehicle for use on a
farm on which is mounted a container of not over 1,200 gallons water
capacity.
(viii) Filling density. the percent ratio of the weight of the gas
in a container to the weight of water at 60 deg.F. that the container
will hold.
(ix) Gas. Anhydrous ammonia in either the gaseous or liquefied
state.
(x) Gas masks. Gas masks must be approved by the National Institute
for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) under 42 CFR part 84 for use
with anhydrous ammonia.
(xi) Capacity. Total volume of the container in standard U.S.
gallons.
(xii) DOT specifications--Regulations of the Department of
Transportation published in 49 CFR Chapter I.
(b) Basic rules. This paragraph applies to all paragraphs of this
section unless otherwise noted.
(1) Approval of equipment and systems. Each appurtenance shall be
approved in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) (i), (ii), (iii), or (iv)
of this section.
(i) It was installed before February 8, 1973, and was approved,
tested, and installed in accordance with either the provisions of the
American National Standard for the Storage and Handling of Anhydrous
Ammonia, K61.1, or the Fertilizer Institute Standards for the Storage
and Handling of Agricultural Anhydrous Ammonia, M-1, (both of which are
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6) in effect at the
time of installation; or
(ii) It is accepted, or certified, or listed, or labeled, or
otherwise determined
[[Page 337]]
to be safe by a nationally recognized testing laboratory; or
(iii) It is a type which no nationally recognized testing laboratory
does, or will undertake to, accept, certify, list, label, or determine
to be safe; and such equipment is inspected or tested by any Federal,
State, municipal, or other local authority responsible for enforcing
occupational safety provisions of a Federal, State, municipal or other
local law, code, or regulation pertaining to the storage, handling,
transport, and use of anhydrous ammonia, and found to be in compliance
with either the provisions of the American National Standard for the
Storage and Handling of Anhydrous Ammonia, K61.1, or the Fertilizer
Institute Standards for the Storage and Handling of Agricultural
Anhydrous Ammonia, M-1, in effect at the time of installation; or
(iv) It is a custom-designed and custom-built unit, which no
nationally recognized testing laboratory, or Federal, State, municipal
or local authority responsible for the enforcement of a Federal, State,
municipal, or local law, code or regulation pertaining to the storage,
transportation and use of anhydrous ammonia is willing to undertake to
accept, certify, list, label or determine to be safe, and the employer
has on file a document attesting to its safe condition following the
conduct of appropriate tests. The document shall be signed by a
registered professional engineer or other person having special training
or experience sufficient to permit him to form an opinion as to safety
of the unit involved. The document shall set forth the test bases, test
data and results, and also the qualifications of the certifying person.
(v) For the purposes of this paragraph (b)(1), the word listed means
that equipment is of a kind mentioned in a list which is published by a
nationally recognized laboratory which makes periodic inspection of the
production of such equipment, and states such equipment meets nationally
recognized standards or has been tested and found safe for use in a
specified manner. Labeled means there is attached to it a label, symbol,
or other identifying mark of a nationally recognized testing laboratory
which, makes periodic inspections of the production of such equipment,
and whose labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized
standards or tests to determine safe use in a specified manner.
Certified means it has been tested and found by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory to meet nationally recognized standards or to be safe
for use in a specified manner, or is of a kind whose production is
periodically inspected by a nationally recognized testing laboratory,
and it bears a label, tag, or other record of certification.
(vi) For the purposes of this paragraph (b)(1), refer to Sec. 1910.7
for definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory.
(2) Requirements for construction, original test and requalification
of nonrefrigerated containers. (i) Containers used with systems covered
in paragraphs (c), (f), (g), and (h) of this section shall be
constructed and tested in accordance with the Code except that
construction under Table UW12 at a basic joint efficiency of under 80
percent is not authorized.
(ii) Containers built according to the Code do not have to comply
with Paragraphs UG125 to UG128 inclusive, and Paragraphs UG132 and UG133
of the Code.
(iii) Containers exceeding 36 inches in diameter or 250 gallons
water capacity shall be constructed to comply with one or more of the
following:
(a) Containers shall be stress relieved after fabrication in
accordance with the Code, or
(b) Cold-form heads when used, shall be stress relieved, or
(c) Hot-formed heads shall be used.
(iv) Welding to the shell, head, or any other part of the container
subject to internal pressure shall be done in compliance with the Code.
Other welding is permitted only on saddle plates, lugs, or brackets
attached to the container by the container manufacturer.
(v) Containers used with systems covered in paragraph (e) of this
section shall be constructed and tested in accordance with the DOT
specifications.
(vi) The provisions of subdivision (i) of this subparagraph shall
not be construed as prohibiting the continued use or reinstallation of
containers constructed and maintained in accordance
[[Page 338]]
with the 1949, 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, and 1962 editions of the Code or
any revisions thereof in effect at the time of fabrication.
(3) Marking nonrefrigerated containers. (i) System nameplates, when
required, shall be permanently attached to the system so as to be
readily accessible for inspection and shall include markings as
prescribed in subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph.
(ii) Each container or system covered in paragraphs (c), (f), (g),
and (h) of this section shall be marked as specified in the following:
(a) With a notation ``Anhydrous Ammonia.''
(b) With a marking identifying compliance with the rules of the Code
under which the container is constructed.
Under ground: Container and system nameplate.
Above ground: Container.
(c) With a notation whether the system is designed for underground
or aboveground installation or both.
(d) With the name and address of the supplier of the system or the
trade name of the system and with the date of fabrication.
Under ground and above ground: System nameplate.
(e) With the water capacity of the container in pounds at 60 deg.F.
or gallons, U.S. Standard.
Under ground: Container and system nameplate.
Above ground: Container.
(f) With the design pressure in pounds per square inch.
Under ground: Container and system nameplate.
Above ground: Container.
(g) With the wall thickness of the shell and heads.
Under ground: Container and system nameplate.
Above ground: Container.
(h) With marking indicating the maximum level to which the container
may be filled with liquid anhydrous ammonia at temperatures between 20
deg.F. and 130 deg.F. except on containers provided with fixed level
indicators, such as fixed length dip tubes, or containers that are
filled with weight. Markings shall be in increments of not more than 20
deg.F.
Above ground and under ground: System nameplate or on liquid-level
gaging device.
(i) With the total outside surface area of the container in square
feet.
Under ground: System nameplate.
Above ground: No requirement.
(j) Marking specified on the container shall be on the container
itself or on a nameplate permanently attached to it.
(4) Marking refrigerated containers. Each refrigerated container
shall be marked with nameplate on the outer covering in an accessible
place as specified in the following:
(i) With the notation, ``Anhydrous Ammonia.''
(ii) With the name and address of the builder and the date of
fabrication.
(iii) With the water capacity of the container in gallons, U.S.
Standard.
(iv) With the design pressure.
(v) With the minimum temperature in degrees Fahrenheit for which the
container was designed.
(vi) The maximum allowable water level to which the container may be
filled for test purposes.
(vii) With the density of the product in pounds per cubic foot for
which the container was designed.
(viii) With the maximum level to which the container may be filled
with liquid anhydrous ammonia.
(5) Location of containers. (i) Consideration shall be given to the
physiological effects of ammonia as well as to adjacent fire hazards in
selecting the location for a storage container. Containers shall be
located outside of buildings or in buildings or sections thereof
especially provided for this purpose.
(ii) Permanent storage containers shall be located at least 50 feet
from a dug well or other sources of potable water supply, unless the
container is a part of a water-treatment installation.
(iii)-(iv) [Reserved]
(v) Storage areas shall be kept free of readily ignitible materials
such as waste, weeds, and long dry grass.
(6) Container appurtenances. (i) All appurtenances shall be designed
for not
[[Page 339]]
less than the maximum working pressure of that portion of the system on
which they are installed. All appurtenances shall be fabricated from
materials proved suitable for anhydrous ammonia service.
(ii) All connections to containers except safety relief devices,
gaging devices, or those fitted with No. 54 drill-size orifice shall
have shutoff valves located as close to the container as practicable.
(iii) Excess flow valves where required by these standards shall
close automatically at the rated flows of vapor or liquid as specified
by the manufacturer. The connections and line including valves and
fittings being protected by an excess flow valve shall have a greater
capacity than the rated flow of the excess flow valve so that the valve
will close in case of failure of the line or fittings.
(iv) Liquid-level gaging devices that require bleeding of the
product to the atmosphere and which are so constructed that outward flow
will not exceed that passed by a No. 54 drill-size opening need not be
equipped with excess flow valves.
(v) Openings from the container or through fittings attached
directly on the container to which pressure gage connections are made
need not be equipped with excess flow valves if such openings are not
larger than No. 54 drill size.
(vi) Excess flow and back pressure check valves where required by
the standards in this section shall be located inside of the container
or at a point outside as close as practicable to where the line enters
the container. In the latter case installation shall be made in such
manner that any undue strain beyond the excess flow or back pressure
check valve will not cause breakage between the container and the valve.
(vii) Excess flow valves shall be designed with a bypass, not to
exceed a No. 60 drill-size opening to allow equalization of pressures.
(viii) All excess flow valves shall be plainly and permanently
marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer, the catalog
number, and the rated capacity.
(7) Piping, tubing, and fittings. (i) All piping, tubing, and
fittings shall be made of material suitable for anhydrous ammonia
service.
(ii) All piping, tubing, and fittings shall be designed for a
pressure not less than the maximum pressure to which they may be
subjected in service.
(iii) All refrigerated piping shall conform to the Refrigeration
Piping Code, American National Standards Institute, B31.5-1966 with
addenda B31.1a-1968, which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6, as it applies to ammonia.
(iv) Piping used on non-refrigerated systems shall be at least
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A-53-69 Grade B
Electric Resistance Welded and Electric Flash Welded Pipe, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, or equal. Such
pipe shall be at least schedule 40 when joints are welded, or welded and
flanged. Such pipe shall be at least schedule 80 when joints are
threaded. Threaded connections shall not be back-welded. Brass, copper,
or galvanized steel pipe shall not be used.
(v) Tubing made of brass, copper, or other material subject to
attack by ammonia shall not be used.
(vi) Cast iron fittings shall not be used but this shall not
prohibit the use of fittings made specifically for ammonia service of
malleable, nodular, or high strength gray iron meeting American Society
for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A47-68, ASTM 395-68, or ASTM A126-66
Class B or C all of which are incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6.
(vii) Joint compounds shall be resistant to ammonia.
(8) Hose specifications. (i) Hose used in ammonia service shall
conform to the joint Agricultural Ammonia Institute--Rubber
Manufacturers Association Specifications for Anhydrous Ammonia Hose.
(ii) Hose subject to container pressure shall be designed for a
minimum working pressure of 350 p.s.i.g. and a minimum burst pressure of
1,750 p.s.i.g. Hose assemblies, when made up, shall be capable of
withstanding a test pressure of 500 p.s.i.g.
(iii) Hose and hose connections located on the low-pressure side of
flow
[[Page 340]]
control of pressure-reducing valves shall be designed for a bursting
pressure of not less than 5 times the pressure setting of the safety
relief devices protecting that portion of the system but not less than
125 p.s.i.g. All connections shall be so designed and constructed that
there will be no leakage when connected.
(iv) Where hose is to be used for transferring liquid from one
container to another, ``wet'' hose is recommended. Such hose shall be
equipped with approved shutoff valves at the discharge end. Provision
shall be made to prevent excessive pressure in the hose.
(v) On all hose one-half inch outside diameter and larger, used for
the transfer of anhydrous ammonia liquid or vapor, there shall be
etched, cast, or impressed at 5-foot intervals the following
information.
``Anhydrous Ammonia'' xxx p.s.i.g. (maximum working pressure),
manufacturer's name or trademark, year of manufacture.
In lieu of this requirement the same information may be contained on a
nameplate permanently attached to the hose.
Table H-36
[Minimum required rate of discharge in cubic feet per minute of air at
120 percent of the maximum permitted start to discharge pressure of
safety relief valves]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flow rate
Surface area (sq. ft.) CFM air
------------------------------------------------------------------------
20.......................................................... 258
25.......................................................... 310
30.......................................................... 360
35.......................................................... 408
40.......................................................... 455
45.......................................................... 501
50.......................................................... 547
55.......................................................... 591
60.......................................................... 635
65.......................................................... 678
70.......................................................... 720
75.......................................................... 762
80.......................................................... 804
85.......................................................... 845
90.......................................................... 885
95.......................................................... 925
100......................................................... 965
105......................................................... 1,010
110......................................................... 1,050
115......................................................... 1,090
120......................................................... 1,120
125......................................................... 1,160
130......................................................... 1,200
135......................................................... 1,240
140......................................................... 1,280
145......................................................... 1,310
150......................................................... 1,350
155......................................................... 1,390
160......................................................... 1,420
165......................................................... 1,460
170......................................................... 1,500
175......................................................... 1,530
180......................................................... 1,570
185......................................................... 1,600
190......................................................... 1,640
195......................................................... 1,670
200......................................................... 1,710
210......................................................... 1,780
220......................................................... 1,850
230......................................................... 1,920
240......................................................... 1,980
250......................................................... 2,050
260......................................................... 2,120
270......................................................... 2,180
280......................................................... 2,250
290......................................................... 2,320
300......................................................... 2,380
310......................................................... 2,450
320......................................................... 2,510
330......................................................... 2,570
340......................................................... 2,640
350......................................................... 2,700
360......................................................... 2,760
370......................................................... 2,830
380......................................................... 2,890
390......................................................... 2,950
400......................................................... 3,010
450......................................................... 3,320
500......................................................... 3,620
550......................................................... 3,910
600......................................................... 4,200
650......................................................... 4,480
700......................................................... 4,760
750......................................................... 5,040
800......................................................... 5,300
850......................................................... 5,590
900......................................................... 5,850
950......................................................... 6,120
1,000....................................................... 6,380
1,050....................................................... 6,640
1,100....................................................... 6,900
1,150....................................................... 7,160
1,200....................................................... 7,410
1,250....................................................... 7,660
1,300....................................................... 7,910
1,350....................................................... 8,160
1,400....................................................... 8,410
1,450....................................................... 8,650
1,500....................................................... 8,900
1,550....................................................... 9,140
1,600....................................................... 9,380
1,650....................................................... 9,620
1,700....................................................... 9,860
1,750....................................................... 10,090
1,800....................................................... 10,330
1,850....................................................... 10,560
1,900....................................................... 10,800
1,950....................................................... 11,030
2,000....................................................... 11,260
2,050....................................................... 11,490
2,100....................................................... 11,720
2,150....................................................... 11,950
2,200....................................................... 12,180
2,250....................................................... 12,400
2,300....................................................... 12,630
2,350....................................................... 12,850
[[Page 341]]
2,400....................................................... 13,080
2,450....................................................... 13,300
2,500....................................................... 13,520
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Surface Area=total outside surface area of container in square feet.
When the surface area is not stamped on the nameplate or when the
marking is not legible the area can be calculated by using one of the
following formulas:
(1) Cylindrical container with hemispherical heads:
Area=overall length in feet times outside diameter in feet times 3.1416.
(2) Cylindrical container with other than hemispherical heads:
Area=(overall length in feet plus 0.3 outside diameter in feet) times
outside diameter in feet times 3.1416.
(3) Spherical container:
Area=outside diameter in feet squared times 3.1416.
Flow Rate--CFM Air=cubic feet per minute of air required at standard
conditions, 60 deg.F. and atmospheric pressure (14.7 p.s.i.a.).
The rate of discharge may be interpolated for intermediate values of
surface area. For containers with total outside surface area greater
than 2,500 square feet, the required flow rate can be calculated using
the formula: Flow Rate CFM Air=22.11 A\ 0 82\, where A=outside surface
area of the container in square feet.
(9) Safety relief devices. (i) Every container used in systems
covered by paragraphs (c), (f), (g), and (h) of this section shall be
provided with one or more safety relief valves of the spring-loaded or
equivalent type. The discharge from safety-relief valves shall be vented
away from the container upward and unobstructed to the atmosphere. All
relief-valve discharge openings shall have suitable rain caps that will
allow free discharge of the vapor and prevent entrance of water.
Provision shall be made for draining condensate which may accumulate.
The rate of the discharge shall be in accordance with the provisions of
Table H-36.
(ii) Container safety-relief valves shall be set to start-to-
discharge as follows, with relation to the design pressure of the
container:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum Maximum
Containers (percent) (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ASME-U-68, U-69................................. 110 125
ASME-U-200, U-201............................... 95 100
ASME 1959, 1956, 1952, or 1962.................. 95 100
API-ASME........................................ 95 100
U.S. Coast Guard................................ 95 100
------------------------------------------------------------------------
As required by DOT Regulations.
(iii) Safety relief devices used in systems covered by paragraphs
(c), (f), (g), and (h) of this section shall be constructed to discharge
at not less than the rates required in paragraph (b)(9)(i) of this
section before the pressure is in excess of 120 percent (not including
the 10 percent tolerance referred to in paragraph (b)(9)(ii) of this
section) of the maximum permitted start-to-discharge pressure setting of
the device.
(iv) Safety-relief valves shall be so arranged that the possibility
of tampering will be minimized. If the pressure setting adjustment is
external, the relief valves shall be provided with means for sealing the
adjustment.
(v) Shutoff valves shall not be installed between the safety-relief
valves and the container; except, that a shutoff valve may be used where
the arrangement of this valve is such as always to afford full required
capacity flow through the relief valves.
(vi) Safety-relief valves shall have direct communication with the
vapor space of the container.
(vii) Each container safety-relief valve used with systems covered
by paragraphs (c), (f), (g), and (h) of this section shall be plainly
and permanently marked with the symbol ``NH3'' or ``AA'';
with the pressure in pounds-per-square-inch gage at which the valve is
set to start-to-discharge; with the actual rate of discharge of the
valve at its full open position in cubic feet per minute of air at 60
deg.F. and atmospheric pressure; and with the manufacturer's name and
catalog number. Example: ``NH3 250-4050 Air'' indicates that
the valve is suitable for use on an anhydrous ammonia container, is set
to start-to-discharge at a pressure of 250 p.s.i.g., and that its rate
of discharge at full open position (subdivisions (ii) and (iii) of this
subparagraph) is 4,050 cubic feet per minute of air.
(viii) The flow capacity of the relief valve shall not be restricted
by any
[[Page 342]]
connection to it on either the upstream or downstream side.
(ix) A hydrostatic relief valve shall be installed between each pair
of valves in the liquid ammonia piping or hose where liquid may be
trapped so as to relieve into the atmosphere at a safe location.
(10) General.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) Stationary storage installations must have at least two
suitable gas masks in readily-accessible locations. Full-face masks with
ammonia canisters that have been approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84
are suitable for emergency action involving most anhydrous ammonia
leaks, particularly leaks that occur outdoors. For respiratory
protection in concentrated ammonia atmospheres, a self-contained
breathing apparatus is required.
(iii) Stationary storage installations shall have an easily
accessible shower or a 50-gallon drum of water.
(iv) Each vehicle transporting ammonia in bulk except farm
applicator vehicles shall carry a container of at least 5 gallons of
water and shall be equipped with a full face mask.
(11) Charging of containers. (i) The filling densities for
containers that are not refrigerated shall not exceed the following:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Percent by Percent by
Type of container weight volume
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Aboveground-Uninsulated......................... 56 82
Aboveground-Uninsulated......................... .......... 87.5
Aboveground-Insulated........................... 57 83.5
Underground-Uninsulated......................... 58 85
DOT--In accord with DOT regulations.............
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) Aboveground uninsulated containers may be charged 87.5 percent
by volume provided the temperature of the anhydrous ammonia being
charged is determined to be not lower than 30 deg.F. or provided the
charging of the container is stopped at the first indication of frost or
ice formation on its outside surface and is not resumed until such frost
or ice has disappeared.
(12) Transfer of liquids. (i) Anhydrous ammonia shall always be at a
temperature suitable for the material of construction and the design of
the receiving container.
(ii) The employer shall require the continuous presence of an
attendant in the vicinity of the operation during such time as ammonia
is being transferred.
(iii) Containers shall be charged or used only upon authorization of
the owner.
(iv) Containers shall be gaged and charged only in the open
atmosphere or in buildings or areas thereof provided for that purpose.
(v) Pumps used for transferring ammonia shall be those manufactured
for that purpose.
(a) Pumps shall be designed for at least 250 p.s.i.g. working
pressure.
(b) Positive displacement pumps shall have, installed off the
discharged port, a constant differential relief valve discharging into
the suction port of the pump through a line of sufficient size to carry
the full capacity of the pump at relief valve setting, which setting and
installation shall be according to the pump manufacturer's
recommendations.
(c) On the discharge side of the pump, before the relief valve line,
there shall be installed a pressure gage graduated from 0 to 400 p.s.i.
(d) Plant piping shall contain shutoff valves located as close as
practical to pump connections.
(vi) Compressors used for transferring or refrigerating ammonia
shall be recommended for ammonia service by the manufacturer.
(a) Compressors shall be designed for at least 250 p.s.i.g. working
pressure.
(b) Plant piping shall contain shutoff valves located as close as
practical to compressor connections.
(c) A relief valve large enough to discharge the full capacity of
the compressor shall be connected to the discharge before any shutoff
valve.
(d) Compressors shall have pressure gages at suction and discharge
graduated to at least one and one-half times the maximum pressure that
can be developed.
(e) Adequate means, such as drainable liquid trap, shall be provided
on the compressor suction to minimize the entry of liquid into the
compressor.
(vii) Loading and unloading systems shall be protected by suitable
devices to prevent emptying of the storage
[[Page 343]]
container or the container being loaded or unloaded in the event of
severance of the hose. Backflow check valves or properly sized excess
flow valves shall be installed where necessary to provide such
protection. In the event that such valves are not practical, remotely
operated shutoff valves may be installed.
(13) Tank car unloading points and operations. (i) Provisions for
unloading tank cars shall conform to the applicable recommendations
contained in the DOT regulations.
(ii) The employer shall insure that unloading operations are
performed by reliable persons properly instructed and given the
authority to monitor careful compliance with all applicable procedures.
(iii) Caution signs shall be so placed on the track or car as to
give necessary warning to persons approaching the car from open end or
ends of siding and shall be left up until after the car is unloaded and
disconnected from discharge connections. Signs shall be of metal or
other suitable material, at least 12 by 15 inches in size and bear the
words ``STOP--Tank Car Connected'' or ``STOP--Men at Work'' the word,
``STOP,'' being in letters at least 4 inches high and the other words in
letters at least 2 inches high.
(iv) The track of a tank car siding shall be substantially level.
(v) Brakes shall be set and wheels blocked on all cars being
unloaded.
(14) Liquid-level gaging device. (i) Each container except those
filled by weight shall be equipped with an approved liquid-level gaging
device. A thermometer well shall be provided in all containers not
utilizing a fixed liquid-level gaging device.
(ii) All gaging devices shall be arranged so that the maximum liquid
level to which the container is filled is readily determined.
(iii) Gaging devices that require bleeding of the product to the
atmosphere such as the rotary tube, fixed tube, and slip tube devices
shall be designed so that the maximum opening of the bleed valve is not
larger than No. 54 drill size unless provided with an excess flow valve.
(This requirement does not apply to farm vehicles used for the
application of ammonia as covered in paragraph (h) of this section.)
(iv) Gaging devices shall have a design pressure equal to or greater
than the design pressure of the container on which they are installed.
(v) Fixed tube liquid-level gages shall be designed and installed to
indicate that level at which the container is filled to 85 percent of
its water capacity in gallons.
(vi) Gage glasses of the columnar type shall be restricted to
stationary storage installations. They shall be equipped with shutoff
valves having metallic handwheels, with excess-flow valves, and with
extra heavy glass adequately protected with a metal housing applied by
the gage manufacturer. They shall be shielded against the direct rays of
the sun.
(15) [Reserved]
(16) Electrical equipment and wiring. (i) Electrical equipment and
wiring for use in ammonia installations shall be general purpose or
weather resistant as appropriate.
(ii) Electrical systems shall be installed and maintained in
accordance with subpart S of this part.
(c) Systems utilizing stationary, nonrefrigerated storage
containers. This paragraph applies to stationary, nonrefrigerated
storage installations utilizing containers other than those covered in
paragraph (e) of this section. Paragraph (b) of this section applies to
this paragraph unless otherwise noted.
(1) Design pressure and construction of containers. The minimum
design pressure for nonrefrigerated containers shall be 250 p.s.i.g.
(2) Container valves and accessories, filling and discharge
connections. (i) Each filling connection shall be provided with
combination back-pressure check valve and excess-flow valve; one double
or two single back-pressure check valves; or a positive shutoff valve in
conjunction with either an internal back-pressure check valve or an
internal excess flow valve.
(ii) All liquid and vapor connections to containers except filling
pipes, safety relief connections, and liquid-level gaging and pressure
gage connections provided with orifices not larger than No. 54 drill
size as required in paragraphs (b)(6) (iv) and (v) of this section shall
be equipped with excess-flow valves.
[[Page 344]]
(iii) Each storage container shall be provided with a pressure gage
graduated from 0 to 400 p.s.i. Gages shall be designated for use in
ammonia service.
(iv) All containers shall be equipped with vapor return valves.
(3) Safety-relief devices. (i) Every container shall be provided
with one or more safety-relief valves of the spring-loaded or equivalent
type in accordance with paragraph (b)(9) of this section.
(ii) The rate of discharge of spring-loaded safety relief valves
installed on underground containers may be reduced to a minimum of 30
percent of the rate of discharge specified in Table H-36. Containers so
protected shall not be uncovered after installation until the liquid
ammonia has been removed. Containers which may contain liquid ammonia
before being installed underground and before being completely covered
with earth are to be considered aboveground containers when determining
the rate of discharge requirements of the safety-relief valves.
(iii) On underground installations where there is a probability of
the manhole or housing becoming flooded, the discharge from vent lines
shall be located above the high water level. All manholes or housings
shall be provided with ventilated louvers or their equivalent, the area
of such openings equalling or exceeding combined discharge areas of
safety-relief valves and vent lines which discharge their content into
the manhole housing.
(iv) Vent pipes, when used, shall not be restricted or of smaller
diameter than the relief-valve outlet connection.
(v) If desired, vent pipes from two or more safety-relief devices
located on the same unit, or similar lines from two or more different
units may be run into a common discharge header, provided the capacity
of such header is at least equal to the sum of the capacities of the
individual discharge lines.
(4) Reinstallation of containers. (i) Containers once installed
under ground shall not later be reinstalled above ground or under
ground, unless they successfully withstand hydrostatic pressure retests
at the pressure specified for the original hydrostatic test as required
by the code under which constructed and show no evidence of serious
corrosion.
(ii) Where containers are reinstalled above ground, safety devices
or gaging devices shall comply with paragraph (b)(9) of this section and
this paragraph respectively for aboveground containers.
(5) Installation of storage containers. (i) Containers installed
above ground, except as provided in paragraph (c)(5)(v) of this section
shall be provided with substantial concrete or masonry supports, or
structural steel supports on firm concrete or masonry foundations. All
foundations shall extend below the frost line.
(ii) Horizontal aboveground containers shall be so mounted on
foundations as to permit expansion and contraction. Every container
shall be supported to prevent the concentration of excessive loads on
the supporting portion of the shell. That portion of the container in
contact with foundations or saddles shall be protected against
corrosion.
(iii) Containers installed under ground shall be so placed that the
top of the container is below the frost line and in no case less than 2
feet below the surface of the ground. Should ground conditions make
compliance with these requirements impracticable, installation shall be
made otherwise to prevent physical damage. It will not be necessary to
cover the portion of the container to which manhole and other
connections are affixed. When necessary to prevent floating, containers
shall be securely anchored or weighted.
(iv) Underground containers shall be set on a firm foundation (firm
earth may be used) and surrounded with earth or sand well tamped in
place. The container, prior to being placed under ground, shall be given
a corrosion resisting protective coating. The container thus coated
shall be so lowered into place as to prevent abrasion or other damage to
the coating.
(v) Containers with foundations attached (portable or semiportable
tank containers with suitable steel ``runners'' or ``skids'' and
commonly known in the industry as ``skid tanks'') shall be designed and
constructed in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) of this section.
[[Page 345]]
(vi) Secure anchorage or adequate pier height shall be provided
against container flotation wherever sufficiently high flood water might
occur.
(vii) The distance between underground containers of over 2,000
gallons capacity shall be at least 5 feet.
(6) Protection of appurtenances. (i) Valves, regulating, gaging, and
other appurtenances shall be protected against tampering and physical
damage. Such appurtenances shall also be protected during transit of
containers.
(ii) All connections to underground containers shall be located
within a dome, housing, or manhole and with access thereto by means of a
substantial cover.
(7) Damage from vehicles. Precaution shall be taken against damage
to ammonia systems from vehicles.
(d) Refrigerated storage systems. This paragraph applies to systems
utilizing containers with the storage of anhydrous ammonia under
refrigerated conditions. All applicable rules of paragraph (b) of this
section apply to this paragraph unless otherwise noted.
(1) Design of containers. (i) The design temperature shall be the
minimum temperature to which the container will be refrigerated.
(ii) Containers with a design pressure exceeding 15 p.s.i.g. shall
be constructed in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section, and
the materials shall be selected from those listed in API Standard 620,
Recommended Rules for Design and Construction of Large, Welded, Low-
Pressure Storage Tanks, Fourth Edition, 1970, Tables 2.02, R2.2,
R2.2(A), R2.2.1, or R2.3 which are incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(iii) Containers with a design pressure of 15 p.s.i.g. and less
shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable requirements of
API Standard 620 including its appendix R.
(iv) When austenitic steels or nonferrous materials are used, the
Code shall be used as a guide in the selection of materials for use at
the design temperature.
(v) The filling density for refrigerated storage containers shall be
such that the container will not be liquid full at a liquid temperature
corresponding to the vapor pressure at the start-to-discharge pressure
setting of the safety-relief valve.
(2) Installation of refrigerated storage containers. (i) Containers
shall be supported on suitable noncombustible foundations designed to
accommodate the type of container being used.
(ii) Adequate protection against flotation or other water damage
shall be provided wherever high flood water might occur.
(iii) Containers for product storage at less than 32 deg.F. shall
be supported in such a way, or heat shall be supplied, to prevent the
effects of freezing and consequent frost heaving.
(3) Shutoff valves. When operating conditions make it advisable, a
check valve shall be installed on the fill connection and a remotely
operated shutoff valve on other connections located below the maximum
liquid level.
(4) Safety relief devices. (i) Safety relief valves shall be set to
start-to-discharge at a pressure not in excess of the design pressure of
the container and shall have a total relieving capacity sufficient to
prevent a maximum pressure in the container of more than 120 percent of
the design pressure. Relief valves for refrigerated storage containers
shall be self-contained spring-loaded, weight-loaded, or self-contained
pilot-operated type.
(ii) The total relieving capacity shall be the larger of:
(a) Possible refrigeration system upset such as (1) cooling water
failure, (2) power failure, (3) instrument air or instrument failure,
(4) mechanical failure of any equipment, (5) excessive pumping rates.
(b) Fire exposure determined in accordance with Compressed Gas
Association (CGA) S-1, Part 3, Safety Relief Device Standards for
Compressed Gas Storage Containers, 1959, which is incorporated by
reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, except that ``A'' shall be the
total exposed surface area in square feet up to 25 foot above grade or
to the equator of the storage container if it is a sphere, whichever is
greater. If the relieving capacity required for fire exposure is greater
than that required by (a) of this subdivision, the additional capacity
may be provided by weak roof to shell seams in containers operating at
essentially atmospheric pressure
[[Page 346]]
and having an inherently weak roof-to-shell seam. The weak roof-to-shell
seam is not to be considered as providing any of the capacity required
in (a) of this subdivision.
(iii) If vent lines are installed to conduct the vapors from the
relief valve, the back pressure under full relieving conditions shall
not exceed 50 percent of the start-to-discharge pressure for pressure
balanced valves or 10 percent of the start-to-discharge pressure for
conventional valves. The vent lines shall be installed to prevent
accumulation of liquid in the lines.
(iv) The valve or valve installation shall provide weather
protection.
(v) Atmospheric storage shall be provided with vacuum breakers.
Ammonia gas, nitrogen, methane, or other inert gases can be used to
provide a pad.
(5) Protection of container appurtenances. Appurtenances shall be
protected against tampering and physical damage.
(6) Reinstallation of refrigerated storage containers. Containers of
such size as to require field fabrication shall, when moved and
reinstalled, be reconstructed and reinspected in complete accordance
with the requirements under which they were constructed. The containers
shall be subjected to a pressure retest and if rerating is necessary,
rerating shall be in accordance with applicable requirements.
(7) Damage from vehicles. Precaution shall be taken against damage
from vehicles.
(8) Refrigeration load and equipment. (i) The total refrigeration
load shall be computed as the sum of the following:
(a) Load imposed by heat flow into the container caused by the
temperature differential between design ambient temperature and storage
temperature.
(b) Load imposed by heat flow into the container caused by maximum
sun radiation.
(c) Maximum load imposed by filling the container with ammonia
warmer than the design storage temperature.
(ii) More than one storage container may be handled by the same
refrigeration system.
(9) Compressors. (i) A minimum of two compressors shall be provided
either of which shall be of sufficient size to handle the loads listed
in paragraphs (d)(8)(i) (a) and (b) of this section. Where more than two
compressors are provided minimum standby equipment equal to the largest
normally operating equipment shall be installed. Filling compressors may
be used as standby equipment for holding compressors.
(ii) Compressors shall be sized to operate with a suction pressure
at least 10 percent below the minimum setting of the safety valve(s) on
the storage container and shall withstand a suction pressure at least
equal to 120 percent of the design pressure of the container.
(10) Compressor drives. (i) Each compressor shall have its
individual driving unit.
(ii) An emergency source of power of sufficient capacity to handle
the loads listed in paragraphs (d)(8)(i) (a) and (b) of this section
shall be provided unless facilities are available to safely dispose of
vented vapors while the refrigeration system is not operating.
(11) Automatic control equipment. (i) The refrigeration system shall
be arranged with suitable controls to govern the compressor operation in
accordance with the load as evidenced by the pressure in the
container(s).
(ii) An emergency alarm system shall be installed to function in the
event the pressure in the container(s) rises to the maximum allowable
operating pressure.
(iii) An emergency alarm and shut- off shall be located in the
condenser system to respond to excess discharge pressure caused by
failure of the cooling medium.
(iv) All automatic controls shall be installed in a manner to
preclude operation of alternate compressors unless the controls will
function with the alternate compressors.
(12) Separators for compressors. (i) An entrainment separator of
suitable size and design pressure shall be installed in the compressor
suction line of lubricated compression. The separator shall be equipped
with a drain and gaging device.
(ii) [Reserved]
(13) Condensers. The condenser system may be cooled by air or water
or both. The condenser shall be designed for at least 250 p.s.i.g.
Provision shall
[[Page 347]]
be made for purging noncondensibles either manually or automatically.
(14) Receiver and liquid drain. A receiver shall be provided with a
liquid-level control to discharge the liquid ammonia to storage. The
receiver shall be designed for at least 250 p.s.i.g. and be equipped
with the necessary connections, safety valves, and gaging device.
(15) Insulation. Refrigerated containers and pipelines which are
insulated shall be covered with a material of suitable quality and
thickness for the temperatures encountered. Insulation shall be suitably
supported and protected against the weather. Weatherproofing shall be of
a type which will not support flame propagation.
(e) Systems utilizing portable DOT containers--(1) Conformance.
Cylinders shall comply with DOT specifications and shall be maintained,
filled, packaged, marked, labeled, and shipped to comply with 49 CFR
chapter I and Marking Portable Compressed Gas Containers to Identify the
Material Contained, ANSI Z48.1-1954 (R1970), which is incorporated by
reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(2) Storage. Cylinders shall be stored in an area free from
ignitable debris and in such manner as to prevent external corrosion.
Storage may be indoors or outdoors.
(3) Heat protection. Cylinders filled in accordance with DOT
regulations will become liquid full at 145 deg.F. Cylinders shall be
protected from heat sources such as radiant flame and steampipes. Heat
shall not be applied directly to cylinders to raise the pressure.
(4) Protection. Cylinders shall be stored in such manner as to
protect them from moving vehicles or external damage.
(5) Valve cap. Any cylinder which is designed to have a valve
protection cap shall have the cap securely in place when the cylinder is
not in service.
(f) Tank motor vehicles for the transportation of ammonia. (1) This
paragraph applies to containers and pertinent equipment mounted on tank
motor vehicles including semitrailers and full trailers used for the
transportation of ammonia. This paragraph does not apply to farm
vehicles. For requirements covering farm vehicles, refer to paragraphs
(g) and (h) of this section.
Paragraph (b) of this section applies to this paragraph unless otherwise
noted. Containers and pertinent equipment for tank motor vehicles for
the transportation of anhydrous ammonia, in addition to complying with
the requirements of this section, shall also comply with the
requirements of DOT.
(2) Design pressure and construction of containers. (i) The minimum
design pressure for containers shall be that specified in the
regulations of the DOT.
(ii) The shell or head thickness of any container shall not be less
than three-sixteenth inch.
(iii) All container openings, except safety relief valves, liquid-
level gaging devices, and pressure gages, shall be labeled to designate
whether they communicate with liquid or vapor space.
(3) Container appurtenances. (i) All appurtenances shall be
protected against physical damage.
(ii) All connections to containers, except filling connections,
safety relief devices, and liquid-level and pressure gage connections,
shall be provided with suitable automatic excess flow valves, or in lieu
thereof, may be fitted with quick-closing internal valves, which shall
remain closed except during delivery operations. The control mechanism
for such valves may be provided with a secondary control remote from the
delivery connections and such control mechanism shall be provided with a
fusible section (melting point 208 deg.F. to 220 deg.F.) which will
permit the internal valve to close automatically in case of fire.
(iii) Filling connections shall be provided with automatic back-
pressure check valves, excess-flow valves, or quick-closing internal
valves, to prevent back-flow in case the filling connection is broken.
Where the filling and discharge connect to a common opening in the
container shell and that opening is fitted with a quick-closing internal
valve as specified in paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this section, the
automatic valve shall not be required.
(iv) All containers shall be equipped for spray loading (filling in
the vapor space) or with an approved vapor return valve of adequate
capacity.
(4) Piping and fittings. (i) All piping, tubing, and fittings shall
be securely
[[Page 348]]
mounted and protected against damage. Means shall be provided to protect
hoses while the vehicle is in motion.
(ii) Fittings shall comply with paragraph (b)(6) of this section.
Pipe shall be Schedule 80.
(5) Safety relief devices. (i) The discharge from safety relief
valves shall be vented away from the container upward and unobstructed
to the open air in such a manner as to prevent any impingement of
escaping gas upon the container; loose-fitting rain caps shall be used.
Size of discharge lines from safety valves shall not be smaller than the
nominal size of the safety-relief valve outlet connection. Suitable
provision shall be made for draining condensate which may accumulate in
the discharge pipe.
(ii) Any portion of liquid ammonia piping which at any time may be
closed at both ends shall be provided with a hydrostatic relief valve.
(6) Transfer of liquids. (i) The content of tank motor vehicle
containers shall be determined by weight, by a suitable liquid-level
gaging device, or other approved methods. If the content of a container
is to be determined by liquid-level measurement, the container shall
have a thermometer well so that the internal liquid temperature can be
easily determined. This volume when converted to weight shall not exceed
the filling density specified by the DOT.
(ii) Any pump, except a constant speed centrifugal pump, shall be
equipped with a suitable pressure actuated bypass valve permitting flow
from discharge to suction when the discharge pressure rises above a
predetermined point. Pump discharge shall also be equipped with a
spring-loaded safety relief valve set at a pressure not more than 135
percent of the setting of the bypass valve or more than 400 p.s.i.g.,
whichever is larger.
(iii) Compressors shall be equipped with manually operated shutoff
valves on both suction and discharge connections. Pressure gages of
bourdon-tube type shall be installed on the suction and discharge of the
compressor before the shutoff valves. The compressor shall not be
operated if either pressure gage is removed or is inoperative. A spring-
loaded, safety-relief valve capable of discharging to atmosphere the
full flow of gas from the compressor at a pressure not exceeding 300
p.s.i.g. shall be connected between the compressor discharge and the
discharge shutoff valve.
(iv) Valve functions shall be clearly and legibly identified by
metal tags or nameplates permanently affixed to each valve.
(7)-(8) [Reserved]
(9) Chock blocks. At least two chock blocks shall be provided. These
blocks shall be placed to prevent rolling of the vehicle whenever it is
parked during loading and unloading operations.
(10) Portable tank containers (skid tanks). Where portable tank
containers are used for farm storage they shall comply with paragraph
(c)(1) of this section. When portable tank containers are used in lieu
of cargo tanks and are permanently mounted on tank motor vehicles for
the transportation of ammonia, they shall comply with the requirements
of this paragraph.
(g) Systems mounted on farm vehicles other than for the application
of ammonia--(1) Application. This paragraph applies to containers of
1,200 gallons capacity or less and pertinent equipment mounted on farm
vehicles (implements of husbandry) and used other than for the
application of ammonia to the soil. Paragraph (b) of this section
applies to this paragraph unless otherwise noted.
(2) Design pressure and classification of containers. (i) The
minimum design pressure for containers shall be 250 p.s.i.g.
(ii) The shell or head thickness of any container shall be not less
than three-sixteenths of an inch.
(3) Mounting containers. (i) A suitable ``stop'' or ``stops'' shall
be mounted on the vehicle or on the container in such a way that the
container shall not be dislodged from its mounting due to the vehicle
coming to a sudden stop. Back slippage shall also be prevented by proper
methods.
(ii) A suitable ``hold down'' device shall be provided which will
anchor the container to the vehicle at one or more places on each side
of the container.
(iii) When containers are mounted on four-wheel trailers, care shall
be taken to insure that the weight is distributed evenly over both
axles.
[[Page 349]]
(iv) When the cradle and the tank are not welded together suitable
material shall be used between them to eliminate metal-to-metal
friction.
(4) Container appurtenances. (i) All containers shall be equipped
with a fixed liquid-level gage.
(ii) All containers with a capacity exceeding 250 gallons shall be
equipped with a pressure gage having a dial graduated from 0-400 p.s.i.
(iii) The filling connection shall be fitted with combination back-
pressure check valve and excess-flow valve; one double or two single
back-pressure check valves; or a positive shutoff valve in conjunction
with either an internal back-pressure check valve or an internal excess
flow valve.
(iv) All containers with a capacity exceeding 250 gallons shall be
equipped for spray loading or with an approved vapor return valve.
(v) All vapor and liquid connections except safety-relief valves and
those specifically exempted by paragraph (b)(6)(v) of this section shall
be equipped with approved excess-flow valves or may be fitted with
quick-closing internal valves which, except during operating periods,
shall remain closed.
(vi) Fittings shall be adequately protected from damage by a metal
box or cylinder with open top securely fastened to the container or by
rigid guards, well braced, welded to the container on both sides of the
fittings or by a metal dome. If a metal dome is used, the relief valve
shall be properly vented through the dome.
(vii) If a liquid withdrawal line is installed in the bottom of a
container, the connections thereto, including hose, shall not be lower
than the lowest horizontal edge of the vehicle axle.
(viii) Provision shall be made to secure both ends of the hose while
in transit.
(5) Marking the container. There shall appear on each side and on
the rear end of the container in letters at least 4 inches high, the
words, ``Caution--Ammonia'' or the container shall be marked in
accordance with DOT regulations.
(6) Farm vehicles. (i) Farm vehicles shall conform with State
regulations.
(ii) All trailers shall be securely attached to the vehicle drawing
them by means of drawbars supplemented by suitable safety chains.
(iii) A trailer shall be constructed so that it will follow
substantially in the path of the towing vehicle and will not whip or
swerve dangerously from side to side.
(iv) All vehicles shall carry a can containing 5 gallons or more of
water.
(h) Systems mounted on farm vehicles for the application of ammonia.
(1) This paragraph applies to systems utilizing containers of 250
gallons capacity or less which are mounted on farm vehicles (implement
of husbandry) and used for the application of ammonia to the soil.
Paragraph (b) of this section applies to this paragraph unless otherwise
noted. Where larger containers are used, they shall comply with
paragraph (g) of this section.
(2) Design pressure and classification of containers. (i) The
minimum design pressure for containers shall be 250 p.s.i.g.
(ii) The shell or head thickness of any container shall not be less
than three-sixteenths inch.
(3) Mounting of containers. All containers and flow-control devices
shall be securely mounted.
(4) Container valves and accessories. (i) Each container shall have
a fixed liquid-level gage.
(ii) The filling connection shall be fitted with a combination back-
pressure check valve and an excess-flow valve; one double or two single
back-pressure check valves: or a positive shutoff valve in conjunction
with an internal back-pressure check valve or an internal excess-flow
valve.
(iii) The applicator tank may be filled by venting to open air
provided the bleeder valve orifice does not exceed seven-sixteenths inch
in diameter.
(iv) Regulation equipment may be connected directly to the tank
coupling or flange, in which case a flexible connection shall be used
between such regulating equipment and the remainder of the liquid
withdrawal system.Regulating equipment not so installed shall be
flexibly connected to the container shutoff valve.
(v) No excess flow valve is required in the liquid withdrawal line
provided the
[[Page 350]]
controlling orifice between the contents of the container and the outlet
of the shutoff valve does not exceed seven-sixteenths inch in diameter.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978;
49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 61 FR 9238, Mar.
7, 1996; 63 FR 1269, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998]
Secs. 1910.112-1910.113 [Reserved]
Sec. 1910.119 Process safety management of highly hazardous chemicals.
Purpose. This section contains requirements for preventing or
minimizing the consequences of catastrophic releases of toxic, reactive,
flammable, or explosive chemicals. These releases may result in toxic,
fire or explosion hazards.
(a) Application. (1) This section applies to the following:
(i) A process which involves a chemical at or above the specified
threshold quantities listed in appendix A to this section;
(ii) A process which involves a flammable liquid or gas (as defined
in 1910.1200(c) of this part) on site in one location, in a quantity of
10,000 pounds (4535.9 kg) or more except for:
(A) Hydrocarbon fuels used solely for workplace consumption as a
fuel (e.g., propane used for comfort heating, gasoline for vehicle
refueling), if such fuels are not a part of a process containing another
highly hazardous chemical covered by this standard;
(B) Flammable liquids stored in atmospheric tanks or transferred
which are kept below their normal boiling point without benefit of
chilling or refrigeration.
(2) This section does not apply to:
(i) Retail facilities;
(ii) Oil or gas well drilling or servicing operations; or,
(iii) Normally unoccupied remote facilities.
(b) Definitions. Atmospheric tank means a storage tank which has
been designed to operate at pressures from atmospheric through 0.5
p.s.i.g. (pounds per square inch gauge, 3.45 Kpa).
Boiling point means the boiling point of a liquid at a pressure of
14.7 pounds per square inch absolute (p.s.i.a.) (760 mm.). For the
purposes of this section, where an accurate boiling point is unavailable
for the material in question, or for mixtures which do not have a
constant boiling point, the 10 percent point of a distillation performed
in accordance with the Standard Method of Test for Distillation of
Petroleum Products, ASTM D-86-62, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6, may be used as the boiling point of the
liquid.
Catastrophic release means a major uncontrolled emission, fire, or
explosion, involving one or more highly hazardous chemicals, that
presents serious danger to employees in the workplace.
Facility means the buildings, containers or equipment which contain
a process.
Highly hazardous chemical means a substance possessing toxic,
reactive, flammable, or explosive properties and specified by paragraph
(a)(1) of this section.
Hot work means work involving electric or gas welding, cutting,
brazing, or similar flame or spark-producing operations.
Normally unoccupied remote facility means a facility which is
operated, maintained or serviced by employees who visit the facility
only periodically to check its operation and to perform necessary
operating or maintenance tasks. No employees are permanently stationed
at the facility.
Facilities meeting this definition are not contiguous with, and must
be geographically remote from all other buildings, processes or persons.
Process means any activity involving a highly hazardous chemical
including any use, storage, manufacturing, handling, or the on-site
movement of such chemicals, or combination of these activities. For
purposes of this definition, any group of vessels which are
interconnected and separate vessels which are located such that a highly
hazardous chemical could be involved in a potential release shall be
considered a single process.
Replacement in kind means a replacement which satisfies the design
specification.
Trade secret means any confidential formula, pattern, process,
device, information or compilation of information that is used in an
employer's business,
[[Page 351]]
and that gives the employer an opportunity to obtain an advantage over
competitors who do not know or use it. Appendix D contained in
Sec. 1910.1200 sets out the criteria to be used in evaluating trade
secrets.
(c) Employee participation. (1) Employers shall develop a written
plan of action regarding the implementation of the employee
participation required by this paragraph.
(2) Employers shall consult with employees and their representatives
on the conduct and development of process hazards analyses and on the
development of the other elements of process safety management in this
standard.
(3) Employers shall provide to employees and their representatives
access to process hazard analyses and to all other information required
to be developed under this standard.
(d) Process safety information. In accordance with the schedule set
forth in paragraph (e)(1) of this section, the employer shall complete a
compilation of written process safety information before conducting any
process hazard analysis required by the standard. The compilation of
written process safety information is to enable the employer and the
employees involved in operating the process to identify and understand
the hazards posed by those processes involving highly hazardous
chemicals. This process safety information shall include information
pertaining to the hazards of the highly hazardous chemicals used or
produced by the process, information pertaining to the technology of the
process, and information pertaining to the equipment in the process.
(1) Information pertaining to the hazards of the highly hazardous
chemicals in the process. This information shall consist of at least the
following:
(i) Toxicity information;
(ii) Permissible exposure limits;
(iii) Physical data;
(iv) Reactivity data:
(v) Corrosivity data;
(vi) Thermal and chemical stability data; and
(vii) Hazardous effects of inadvertent mixing of different materials
that could foreseeably occur.
Note: Material Safety Data Sheets meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
1910.1200(g) may be used to comply with this requirement to the extent
they contain the information required by this subparagraph.
(2) Information pertaining to the technology of the process. (i)
Information concerning the technology of the process shall include at
least the following:
(A) A block flow diagram or simplified process flow diagram (see
appendix B to this section);
(B) Process chemistry;
(C) Maximum intended inventory;
(D) Safe upper and lower limits for such items as temperatures,
pressures, flows or compositions; and,
(E) An evaluation of the consequences of deviations, including those
affecting the safety and health of employees.
(ii) Where the original technical information no longer exists, such
information may be developed in conjunction with the process hazard
analysis in sufficient detail to support the analysis.
(3) Information pertaining to the equipment in the process. (i)
Information pertaining to the equipment in the process shall include:
(A) Materials of construction;
(B) Piping and instrument diagrams (P&ID's);
(C) Electrical classification;
(D) Relief system design and design basis;
(E) Ventilation system design;
(F) Design codes and standards employed;
(G) Material and energy balances for processes built after May 26,
1992; and,
(H) Safety systems (e.g. interlocks, detection or suppression
systems).
(ii) The employer shall document that equipment complies with
recognized and generally accepted good engineering practices.
(iii) For existing equipment designed and constructed in accordance
with codes, standards, or practices that are no longer in general use,
the employer shall determine and document that the equipment is
designed, maintained, inspected, tested, and operating in a safe manner.
(e) Process hazard analysis. (1) The employer shall perform an
initial process hazard analysis (hazard evaluation) on processes covered
by this standard.
[[Page 352]]
The process hazard analysis shall be appropriate to the complexity of
the process and shall identify, evaluate, and control the hazards
involved in the process. Employers shall determine and document the
priority order for conducting process hazard analyses based on a
rationale which includes such considerations as extent of the process
hazards, number of potentially affected employees, age of the process,
and operating history of the process. The process hazard analysis shall
be conducted as soon as possible, but not later than the following
schedule:
(i) No less than 25 percent of the initial process hazards analyses
shall be completed by May 26, 1994;
(ii) No less than 50 percent of the initial process hazards analyses
shall be completed by May 26, 1995;
(iii) No less than 75 percent of the initial process hazards
analyses shall be completed by May 26, 1996;
(iv) All initial process hazards analyses shall be completed by May
26, 1997.
(v) Process hazards analyses completed after May 26, 1987 which meet
the requirements of this paragraph are acceptable as initial process
hazards analyses. These process hazard analyses shall be updated and
revalidated, based on their completion date, in accordance with
paragraph (e)(6) of this section.
(2) The employer shall use one or more of the following
methodologies that are appropriate to determine and evaluate the hazards
of the process being analyzed.
(i) What-If;
(ii) Checklist;
(iii) What-If/Checklist;
(iv) Hazard and Operability Study (HAZOP):
(v) Failure Mode and Effects Analysis (FMEA);
(vi) Fault Tree Analysis; or
(vii) An appropriate equivalent methodology.
(3) The process hazard analysis shall address:
(i) The hazards of the process;
(ii) The identification of any previous incident which had a likely
potential for catastrophic consequences in the workplace;
(iii) Engineering and administrative controls applicable to the
hazards and their interrelationships such as appropriate application of
detection methodologies to provide early warning of releases.
(Acceptable detection methods might include process monitoring and
control instrumentation with alarms, and detection hardware such as
hydrocarbon sensors.);
(iv) Consequences of failure of engineering and administrative
controls;
(v) Facility siting;
(vi) Human factors; and
(vii) A qualitative evaluation of a range of the possible safety and
health effects of failure of controls on employees in the workplace.
(4) The process hazard analysis shall be performed by a team with
expertise in engineering and process operations, and the team shall
include at least one employee who has experience and knowledge specific
to the process being evaluated. Also, one member of the team must be
knowledgeable in the specific process hazard analysis methodology being
used.
(5) The employer shall establish a system to promptly address the
team's findings and recommendations; assure that the recommendations are
resolved in a timely manner and that the resolution is documented;
document what actions are to be taken; complete actions as soon as
possible; develop a written schedule of when these actions are to be
completed; communicate the actions to operating, maintenance and other
employees whose work assignments are in the process and who may be
affected by the recommendations or actions.
(6) At least every five (5) years after the completion of the
initial process hazard analysis, the process hazard analysis shall be
updated and revalidated by a team meeting the requirements in paragraph
(e)(4) of this section, to assure that the process hazard analysis is
consistent with the current process.
(7) Employers shall retain process hazards analyses and updates or
revalidations for each process covered by this section, as well as the
documented resolution of recommendations described in paragraph (e)(5)
of this section for the life of the process.
(f) Operating procedures (1) The employer shall develop and
implement
[[Page 353]]
written operating procedures that provide clear instructions for safely
conducting activities involved in each covered process consistent with
the process safety information and shall address at least the following
elements.
(i) Steps for each operating phase:
(A) Initial startup;
(B) Normal operations;
(C) Temporary operations;
(D) Emergency shutdown including the conditions under which
emergency shutdown is required, and the assignment of shutdown
responsibility to qualified operators to ensure that emergency shutdown
is executed in a safe and timely manner.
(E) Emergency Operations;
(F) Normal shutdown; and,
(G) Startup following a turnaround, or after an emergency shutdown.
(ii) Operating limits:
(A) Consequences of deviation; and
(B) Steps required to correct or avoid deviation.
(iii) Safety and health considerations:
(A) Properties of, and hazards presented by, the chemicals used in
the process;
(B) Precautions necessary to prevent exposure, including engineering
controls, administrative controls, and personal protective equipment;
(C) Control measures to be taken if physical contact or airborne
exposure occurs;
(D) Quality control for raw materials and control of hazardous
chemical inventory levels; and,
(E) Any special or unique hazards.
(iv) Safety systems and their functions.
(2) Operating procedures shall be readily accessible to employees
who work in or maintain a process.
(3) The operating procedures shall be reviewed as often as necessary
to assure that they reflect current operating practice, including
changes that result from changes in process chemicals, technology, and
equipment, and changes to facilities. The employer shall certify
annually that these operating procedures are current and accurate.
(4) The employer shall develop and implement safe work practices to
provide for the control of hazards during operations such as lockout/
tagout; confined space entry; opening process equipment or piping; and
control over entrance into a facility by maintenance, contractor,
laboratory, or other support personnel. These safe work practices shall
apply to employees and contractor employees.
(g) Training--(1) Initial training. (i) Each employee presently
involved in operating a process, and each employee before being involved
in operating a newly assigned process, shall be trained in an overview
of the process and in the operating procedures as specified in paragraph
(f) of this section. The training shall include emphasis on the specific
safety and health hazards, emergency operations including shutdown, and
safe work practices applicable to the employee's job tasks.
(ii) In lieu of initial training for those employees already
involved in operating a process on May 26, 1992, an employer may certify
in writing that the employee has the required knowledge, skills, and
abilities to safely carry out the duties and responsibilities as
specified in the operating procedures.
(2) Refresher training. Refresher training shall be provided at
least every three years, and more often if necessary, to each employee
involved in operating a process to assure that the employee understands
and adheres to the current operating procedures of the process. The
employer, in consultation with the employees involved in operating the
process, shall determine the appropriate frequency of refresher
training.
(3) Training documentation. The employer shall ascertain that each
employee involved in operating a process has received and understood the
training required by this paragraph. The employer shall prepare a record
which contains the identity of the employee, the date of training, and
the means used to verify that the employee understood the training.
(h) Contractors--(1) Application. This paragraph applies to
contractors performing maintenance or repair, turnaround, major
renovation, or specialty work on or adjacent to a covered process. It
does not apply to contractors providing incidental services which do not
influence process safety, such as
[[Page 354]]
janitorial work, food and drink services, laundry, delivery or other
supply services.
(2) Employer responsibilities. (i) The employer, when selecting a
contractor, shall obtain and evaluate information regarding the contract
employer's safety performance and programs.
(ii) The employer shall inform contract employers of the known
potential fire, explosion, or toxic release hazards related to the
contractor's work and the process.
(iii) The employer shall explain to contract employers the
applicable provisions of the emergency action plan required by paragraph
(n) of this section.
(iv) The employer shall develop and implement safe work practices
consistent with paragraph (f)(4) of this section, to control the
entrance, presence and exit of contract employers and contract employees
in covered process areas.
(v) The employer shall periodically evaluate the performance of
contract employers in fulfilling their obligations as specified in
paragraph (h)(3) of this section.
(vi) The employer shall maintain a contract employee injury and
illness log related to the contractor's work in process areas.
(3) Contract employer responsibilities. (i) The contract employer
shall assure that each contract employee is trained in the work
practices necessary to safely perform his/her job.
(ii) The contract employer shall assure that each contract employee
is instructed in the known potential fire, explosion, or toxic release
hazards related to his/her job and the process, and the applicable
provisions of the emergency action plan.
(iii) The contract employer shall document that each contract
employee has received and understood the training required by this
paragraph. The contract employer shall prepare a record which contains
the identity of the contract employee, the date of training, and the
means used to verify that the employee understood the training.
(iv) The contract employer shall assure that each contract employee
follows the safety rules of the facility including the safe work
practices required by paragraph (f)(4) of this section.
(v) The contract employer shall advise the employer of any unique
hazards presented by the contract employer's work, or of any hazards
found by the contract employer's work.
(i) Pre-startup safety review. (1) The employer shall perform a pre-
startup safety review for new facilities and for modified facilities
when the modification is significant enough to require a change in the
process safety information.
(2) The pre-startup safety review shall confirm that prior to the
introduction of highly hazardous chemicals to a process:
(i) Construction and equipment is in accordance with design
specifications;
(ii) Safety, operating, maintenance, and emergency procedures are in
place and are adequate;
(iii) For new facilities, a process hazard analysis has been
performed and recommendations have been resolved or implemented before
startup; and modified facilities meet the requirements contained in
management of change, paragraph (l).
(iv) Training of each employee involved in operating a process has
been completed.
(j) Mechanical integrity--(1) Application. Paragraphs (j)(2) through
(j)(6) of this section apply to the following process equipment:
(i) Pressure vessels and storage tanks;
(ii) Piping systems (including piping components such as valves);
(iii) Relief and vent systems and devices;
(iv) Emergency shutdown systems;
(v) Controls (including monitoring devices and sensors, alarms, and
interlocks) and,
(vi) Pumps.
(2) Written procedures. The employer shall establish and implement
written procedures to maintain the on-going integrity of process
equipment.
(3) Training for process maintenance activities. The employer shall
train each employee involved in maintaining the on-going integrity of
process equipment in an overview of that process and its hazards and in
the procedures
[[Page 355]]
applicable to the employee's job tasks to assure that the employee can
perform the job tasks in a safe manner.
(4) Inspection and testing. (i) Inspections and tests shall be
performed on process equipment.
(ii) Inspection and testing procedures shall follow recognized and
generally accepted good engineering practices.
(iii) The frequency of inspections and tests of process equipment
shall be consistent with applicable manufacturers' recommendations and
good engineering practices, and more frequently if determined to be
necessary by prior operating experience.
(iv) The employer shall document each inspection and test that has
been performed on process equipment. The documentation shall identify
the date of the inspection or test, the name of the person who performed
the inspection or test, the serial number or other identifier of the
equipment on which the inspection or test was performed, a description
of the inspection or test performed, and the results of the inspection
or test.
(5) Equipment deficiencies. The employer shall correct deficiencies
in equipment that are outside acceptable limits (defined by the process
safety information in paragraph (d) of this section) before further use
or in a safe and timely manner when necessary means are taken to assure
safe operation.
(6) Quality assurance. (i) In the construction of new plants and
equipment, the employer shall assure that equipment as it is fabricated
is suitable for the process application for which they will be used.
(ii) Appropriate checks and inspections shall be performed to assure
that equipment is installed properly and consistent with design
specifications and the manufacturer's instructions.
(iii) The employer shall assure that maintenance materials, spare
parts and equipment are suitable for the process application for which
they will be used.
(k) Hot work permit. (1) The employer shall issue a hot work permit
for hot work operations conducted on or near a covered process.
(2) The permit shall document that the fire prevention and
protection requirements in 29 CFR 1910.252(a) have been implemented
prior to beginning the hot work operations; it shall indicate the
date(s) authorized for hot work; and identify the object on which hot
work is to be performed. The permit shall be kept on file until
completion of the hot work operations.
(l) Management of change. (1) The employer shall establish and
implement written procedures to manage changes (except for
``replacements in kind'') to process chemicals, technology, equipment,
and procedures; and, changes to facilities that affect a covered
process.
(2) The procedures shall assure that the following considerations
are addressed prior to any change:
(i) The technical basis for the proposed change;
(ii) Impact of change on safety and health;
(iii) Modifications to operating procedures;
(iv) Necessary time period for the change; and,
(v) Authorization requirements for the proposed change.
(3) Employees involved in operating a process and maintenance and
contract employees whose job tasks will be affected by a change in the
process shall be informed of, and trained in, the change prior to start-
up of the process or affected part of the process.
(4) If a change covered by this paragraph results in a change in the
process safety information required by paragraph (d) of this section,
such information shall be updated accordingly.
(5) If a change covered by this paragraph results in a change in the
operating procedures or practices required by paragraph (f) of this
section, such procedures or practices shall be updated accordingly.
(m) Incident investigation. (1) The employer shall investigate each
incident which resulted in, or could reasonably have resulted in a
catastrophic release of highly hazardous chemical in the workplace.
(2) An incident investigation shall be initiated as promptly as
possible, but not later than 48 hours following the incident.
(3) An incident investigation team shall be established and consist
of at least one person knowledgeable in the process involved, including
a contract employee if the incident involved work
[[Page 356]]
of the contractor, and other persons with appropriate knowledge and
experience to thoroughly investigate and analyze the incident.
(4) A report shall be prepared at the conclusion of the
investigation which includes at a minimum:
(i) Date of incident;
(ii) Date investigation began;
(iii) A description of the incident;
(iv) The factors that contributed to the incident; and,
(v) Any recommendations resulting from the investigation.I11(5) The
employer shall establish a system to promptly address and resolve the
incident report findings and recommendations. Resolutions and corrective
actions shall be documented.
(6) The report shall be reviewed with all affected personnel whose
job tasks are relevant to the incident findings including contract
employees where applicable.
(7) Incident investigation reports shall be retained for five years.
(n) Emergency planning and response. The employer shall establish
and implement an emergency action plan for the entire plant in
accordance with the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.38(a). In addition, the
emergency action plan shall include procedures for handling small
releases. Employers covered under this standard may also be subject to
the hazardous waste and emergency response provisions contained in 29
CFR 1910.120 (a), (p) and (q).
(o) Compliance Audits. (1) Employers shall certify that they have
evaluated compliance with the provisions of this section at least every
three years to verify that the procedures and practices developed under
the standard are adequate and are being followed.
(2) The compliance audit shall be conducted by at least one person
knowledgeable in the process.
(3) A report of the findings of the audit shall be developed.
(4) The employer shall promptly determine and document an
appropriate response to each of the findings of the compliance audit,
and document that deficiencies have been corrected.
(5) Employers shall retain the two (2) most recent compliance audit
reports.
(p) Trade secrets. (1) Employers shall make all information
necessary to comply with the section available to those persons
responsible for compiling the process safety information (required by
paragraph (d) of this section), those assisting in the development of
the process hazard analysis (required by paragraph (e) of this section),
those responsible for developing the operating procedures (required by
paragraph (f) of this section), and those involved in incident
investigations (required by paragraph (m) of this section), emergency
planning and response (paragraph (n) of this section) and compliance
audits (paragraph (o) of this section) without regard to possible trade
secret status of such information.
(2) Nothing in this paragraph shall preclude the employer from
requiring the persons to whom the information is made available under
paragraph (p)(1) of this section to enter into confidentiality
agreements not to disclose the information as set forth in 29 CFR
1910.1200.
(3) Subject to the rules and procedures set forth in 29 CFR
1910.1200(i)(1) through 1910.1200(i)(12), employees and their designated
representatives shall have access to trade secret information contained
within the process hazard analysis and other documents required to be
developed by this standard.
Appendix A to Sec. 1910.119--List of Highly Hazardous Chemicals, Toxics
and Reactives (Mandatory)
This appendix contains a listing of toxic and reactive highly
hazardous chemicals which present a potential for a catastrophic event
at or above the threshold quantity.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
CHEMICAL name CAS* TQ**
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Acetaldehyde....................................... 75-07-0 2500
Acrolein (2-Propenal).............................. 107-02-8 150
Acrylyl Chloride................................... 814-68-6 250
Allyl Chloride..................................... 107-05-1 1000
Allylamine......................................... 107-11-9 1000
Alkylaluminums..................................... Varies 5000
Ammonia, Anhydrous................................. 7664-41-7 10000
Ammonia solutions (44% ammonia by 7664-41-7 15000
weight)...........................................
Ammonium Perchlorate............................... 7790-98-9 7500
Ammonium Permanganate.............................. 7787-36-2 7500
Arsine (also called Arsenic Hydride)............... 7784-42-1 100
Bis(Chloromethyl) Ether............................ 542-88-1 100
Boron Trichloride.................................. 10294-34-5 2500
Boron Trifluoride.................................. 7637-07-2 250
Bromine............................................ 7726-95-6 1500
Bromine Chloride................................... 13863-41-7 1500
Bromine Pentafluoride.............................. 7789-30-2 2500
Bromine Trifluoride................................ 7787-71-5 15000
[[Page 357]]
3-Bromopropyne (also called Propargyl Bromide)..... 106-96-7 100
Butyl Hydroperoxide (Tertiary)..................... 75-91-2 5000
Butyl Perbenzoate (Tertiary)....................... 614-45-9 7500
Carbonyl Chloride (see Phosgene)................... 75-44-5 100
Carbonyl Fluoride.................................. 353-50-4 2500
Cellulose Nitrate (concentration 12.6% 9004-70-0 2500
nitrogen..........................................
Chlorine........................................... 7782-50-5 1500
Chlorine Dioxide................................... 10049-04-4 1000
Chlorine Pentrafluoride............................ 13637-63-3 1000
Chlorine Trifluoride............................... 7790-91-2 1000
Chlorodiethylaluminum (also called Diethylaluminum 96-10-6 5000
Chloride).........................................
1-Chloro-2,4-Dinitrobenzene........................ 97-00-7 5000
Chloromethyl Methyl Ether.......................... 107-30-2 500
Chloropicrin....................................... 76-06-2 500
Chloropicrin and Methyl Bromide mixture............ None 1500
Chloropicrin and Methyl Chloride mixture........... None 1500
Cumene Hydroperoxide............................... 80-15-9 5000
Cyanogen........................................... 460-19-5 2500
Cyanogen Chloride.................................. 506-77-4 500
Cyanuric Fluoride.................................. 675-14-9 100
Diacetyl Peroxide (Concentration 70%)... 110-22-5 5000
Diazomethane....................................... 334-88-3 500
Dibenzoyl Peroxide................................. 94-36-0 7500
Diborane........................................... 19287-45-7 100
Dibutyl Peroxide (Tertiary)........................ 110-05-4 5000
Dichloro Acetylene................................. 7572-29-4 250
Dichlorosilane..................................... 4109-96-0 2500
Diethylzinc........................................ 557-20-0 10000
Diisopropyl Peroxydicarbonate...................... 105-64-6 7500
Dilaluroyl Peroxide................................ 105-74-8 7500
Dimethyldichlorosilane............................. 75-78-5 1000
Dimethylhydrazine, 1,1-............................ 57-14-7 1000
Dimethylamine, Anhydrous........................... 124-40-3 2500
2,4-Dinitroaniline................................. 97-02-9 5000
Ethyl Methyl Ketone Peroxide (also Methyl Ethyl 1338-23-4 5000
Ketone Peroxide; concentration 60%)....
Ethyl Nitrite...................................... 109-95-5 5000
Ethylamine......................................... 75-04-7 7500
Ethylene Fluorohydrin.............................. 371-62-0 100
Ethylene Oxide..................................... 75-21-8 5000
Ethyleneimine...................................... 151-56-4 1000
Fluorine........................................... 7782-41-4 1000
Formaldehyde (Formalin)............................ 50-00-0 1000
Furan.............................................. 110-00-9 500
Hexafluoroacetone.................................. 684-16-2 5000
Hydrochloric Acid, Anhydrous....................... 7647-01-0 5000
Hydrofluoric Acid, Anhydrous....................... 7664-39-3 1000
Hydrogen Bromide................................... 10035-10-6 5000
Hydrogen Chloride.................................. 7647-01-0 5000
Hydrogen Cyanide, Anhydrous........................ 74-90-8 1000
Hydrogen Fluoride.................................. 7664-39-3 1000
Hydrogen Peroxide (52% by weight or greater)....... 7722-84-1 7500
Hydrogen Selenide.................................. 7783-07-5 150
Hydrogen Sulfide................................... 7783-06-4 1500
Hydroxylamine...................................... 7803-49-8 2500
Iron, Pentacarbonyl................................ 13463-40-6 250
Isopropylamine..................................... 75-31-0 5000
Ketene............................................. 463-51-4 100
Methacrylaldehyde.................................. 78-85-3 1000
Methacryloyl Chloride.............................. 920-46-7 150
Methacryloyloxyethyl Isocyanate.................... 30674-80-7 100
Methyl Acrylonitrile............................... 126-98-7 250
Methylamine, Anhydrous............................. 74-89-5 1000
Methyl Bromide..................................... 74-83-9 2500
Methyl Chloride.................................... 74-87-3 15000
Methyl Chloroformate............................... 79-22-1 500
Methyl Ethyl Ketone Peroxide (concentration 60%)...........................................
Methyl Fluoroacetate............................... 453-18-9 100
Methyl Fluorosulfate............................... 421-20-5 100
Methyl Hydrazine................................... 60-34-4 100
Methyl Iodide...................................... 74-88-4 7500
Methyl Isocyanate.................................. 624-83-9 250
Methyl Mercaptan................................... 74-93-1 5000
Methyl Vinyl Ketone................................ 79-84-4 100
Methyltrichlorosilane.............................. 75-79-6 500
Nickel Carbonly (Nickel Tetracarbonyl)............. 13463-39-3 150
Nitric Acid (94.5% by weight or greater)........... 7697-37-2 500
Nitric Oxide....................................... 10102-43-9 250
Nitroaniline (para Nitroaniline.................... 100-01-6 5000
Nitromethane....................................... 75-52-5 2500
Nitrogen Dioxide................................... 10102-44-0 250
Nitrogen Oxides (NO; NO2; N204; N203).............. 10102-44-0 250
Nitrogen Tetroxide (also called Nitrogen Peroxide). 10544-72-6 250
Nitrogen Trifluoride............................... 7783-54-2 5000
Nitrogen Trioxide.................................. 10544-73-7 250
Oleum (65% to 80% by weight; also called Fuming 8014-94-7 1000
Sulfuric Acid)....................................
Osmium Tetroxide................................... 20816-12-0 100
Oxygen Difluoride (Fluorine Monoxide).............. 7783-41-7 100
Ozone.............................................. 10028-15-6 100
Pentaborane........................................ 19624-22-7 100
Peracetic Acid (concentration 60% Acetic 79-21-0 1000
Acid; also called Peroxyacetic Acid)..............
Perchloric Acid (concentration 60% by 7601-90-3 5000
weight)...........................................
Perchloromethyl Mercaptan.......................... 594-42-3 150
Perchloryl Fluoride................................ 7616-94-6 5000
Peroxyacetic Acid (concentration 60% 79-21-0 1000
Acetic Acid; also called Peracetic Acid)..........
Phosgene (also called Carbonyl Chloride)........... 75-44-5 100
Phosphine (Hydrogen Phosphide)..................... 7803-51-2 100
Phosphorus Oxychloride (also called Phosphoryl 10025-87-3 1000
Chloride).........................................
Phosphorus Trichloride............................. 7719-12-2 1000
Phosphoryl Chloride (also called Phosphorus 10025-87-3 1000
Oxychloride)......................................
Propargyl Bromide.................................. 106-96-7 100
Propyl Nitrate..................................... 627-3-4 2500
Sarin.............................................. 107-44-8 100
Selenium Hexafluoride.............................. 7783-79-1 1000
Stibine (Antimony Hydride)......................... 7803-52-3 500
Sulfur Dioxide (liquid)............................ 7446-09-5 1000
Sulfur Pentafluoride............................... 5714-22-7 250
Sulfur Tetrafluoride............................... 7783-60-0 250
Sulfur Trioxide (also called Sulfuric Anhydride)... 7446-11-9 1000
Sulfuric Anhydride (also called Sulfur Trioxide)... 7446-11-9 1000
Tellurium Hexafluoride............................. 7783-80-4 250
Tetrafluoroethylene................................ 116-14-3 5000
Tetrafluorohydrazine............................... 10036-47-2 5000
Tetramethyl Lead................................... 75-74-1 1000
Thionyl Chloride................................... 7719-09-7 250
Trichloro (chloromethyl) Silane.................... 1558-25-4 100
Trichloro (dichlorophenyl) Silane.................. 27137-85-5 2500
Trichlorosilane.................................... 10025-78-2 5000
Trifluorochloroethylene............................ 79-38-9 10000
Trimethyoxysilane.................................. 2487-90-3 1500
------------------------------------------------------------------------
*Chemical Abstract Service Number.
**Threshold Quantity in Pounds (Amount necessary to be covered by this
standard).
[[Page 358]]
Appendix B to Sec. 1910.119--Block Flow Diagram and Simplified Process
Flow Diagram (Nonmandatory)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.026
[[Page 359]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.027
Appendix C to Sec. 1910.119--Compliance Guidelines and Recommendations
for Process Safety Management (Nonmandatory)
This appendix serves as a nonmandatory guideline to assist employers
and employees in complying with the requirements of this section, as
well as provides other helpful recommendations and information. Examples
presented in this appendix are not the only means of achieving the
performance goals in the standard. This appendix neither adds nor
detracts from the requirements of the standard.
1. Introduction to Process Safety Management. The major objective of
process safety management of highly hazardous chemicals is to prevent
unwanted releases of hazardous chemicals especially into locations which
could expose employees and others to serious hazards. An effective
process safety management program requires a systematic approach to
evaluating the whole process. Using this approach the process design,
process technology, operational and maintenance activities and
procedures, nonroutine activities and procedures, emergency preparedness
plans and procedures, training programs, and other elements which impact
the process are all considered in the evaluation. The various lines of
defense that have been incorporated into the design and operation of the
process to prevent or mitigate the release of hazardous chemicals need
to be evaluated and strengthened to assure their effectiveness at each
level. Process safety management is the proactive identification,
evaluation and mitigation or prevention of chemical releases that could
occur as a result of failures in process, procedures or equipment.
The process safety management standard targets highly hazardous
chemicals that
[[Page 360]]
have the potential to cause a catastrophic incident. This standard as a
whole is to aid employers in their efforts to prevent or mitigate
episodic chemical releases that could lead to a catastrophe in the
workplace and possibly to the surrounding community. To control these
types of hazards, employers need to develop the necessary expertise,
experiences, judgement and proactive initiative within their workforce
to properly implement and maintain an effective process safety
management program as envisioned in the OSHA standard. This OSHA
standard is required by the Clean Air Act Amendments as is the
Environmental Protection Agency's Risk Management Plan. Employers, who
merge the two sets of requirements into their process safety management
program, will better assure full compliance with each as well as
enhancing their relationship with the local community.
While OSHA believes process safety management will have a positive
effect on the safety of employees in workplaces and also offers other
potential benefits to employers (increased productivity), smaller
businesses which may have limited resources available to them at this
time, might consider alternative avenues of decreasing the risks
associated with highly hazardous chemicals at their workplaces. One
method which might be considered is the reduction in the inventory of
the highly hazardous chemical. This reduction in inventory will result
in a reduction of the risk or potential for a catastrophic incident.
Also, employers including small employers may be able to establish more
efficient inventory control by reducing the quantities of highly
hazardous chemicals on site below the established threshold quantities.
This reduction can be accomplished by ordering smaller shipments and
maintaining the minimum inventory necessary for efficient and safe
operation. When reduced inventory is not feasible, then the employer
might consider dispersing inventory to several locations on site.
Dispersing storage into locations where a release in one location will
not cause a release in another location is a practical method to also
reduce the risk or portential for catastrophic incidents.
2. Employee Involvement in Process Safety Management. Section 304 of
the Clean Air Act Amendments states that employers are to consult with
their employees and their representatives regarding the employers
efforts in the development and implementation of the process safety
management program elements and hazard assessments. Section 304 also
requires employers to train and educate their employees and to inform
affected employees of the findings from incident investigations required
by the process safety management program. Many employers, under their
safety and health programs, have already established means and methods
to keep employees and their representatives informed about relevant
safety and health issues and employers may be able to adapt these
practices and procedures to meet their obligations under this standard.
Employers who have not implemented an occupational safety and health
program may wish to form a safety and health committee of employees and
management representatives to help the employer meet the obligations
specified by this standard. These committees can become a significant
ally in helping the employer to implement and maintain an effective
process safety managment program for all employees.
3. Process Safety Information. Complete and accurate written
information concerning process chemicals, process technology, and
process equipment is essential to an effective process safety management
program and to a process hazards analysis. The compiled information will
be a necessary resource to a variety of users including the team that
will perform the process hazards analysis as required under paragraph
(e); those developing the training programs and the operating
procedures; contractors whose employees will be working with the
process; those conducting the pre-startup reviews; local emergency
preparedness planners; and insurance and enforcement officials.
The information to be compiled about the chemicals, including
process intermediates, needs to be comprehensive enough for an accurate
assessment of the fire and explosion characteristics, reactivity
hazards, the safety and health hazards to workers, and the corrosion and
erosion effects on the process equipment and monitoring tools. Current
material safety data sheet (MSDS) information can be used to help meet
this requirement which must be supplemented with process chemistry
information including runaway reaction and over pressure hazards if
applicable.
Process technology information will be a part of the process safety
information package and it is expected that it will include diagrams of
the type shown in appendix B of this section as well as employer
established criteria for maximum inventory levels for process chemicals;
limits beyond which would be considered upset conditions; and a
qualitative estimate of the consequences or results of deviation that
could occur if operating beyond the established process limits.
Employers are encouraged to use diagrams which will help users
understand the process.
A block flow diagram is used to show the major process equipment and
interconnecting process flow lines and show flow rates, stream
composition, temperatures, and pressures when necessary for clarity. The
block flow diagram is a simplified diagram.
Process flow diagrams are more complex and will show all main flow
streams including valves to enhance the understanding of
[[Page 361]]
the process, as well as pressures and temperatures on all feed and
product lines within all major vessels, in and out of headers and heat
exchangers, and points of pressure and temperature control. Also,
materials of construction information, pump capacities and pressure
heads, compressor horsepower and vessel design pressures and
temperatures are shown when necessary for clarity. In addition, major
components of control loops are usually shown along with key utilities
on process flow diagrams.
Piping and instrument diagrams (P&IDs) may be the more appropriate
type of diagrams to show some of the above details and to display the
information for the piping designer and engineering staff. The P&IDs are
to be used to describe the relationships between equipment and
instrumentation as well as other relevant information that will enhance
clarity. Computer software programs which do P&IDs or other diagrams
useful to the information package, may be used to help meet this
requirement.
The information pertaining to process equipment design must be
documented. In other words, what were the codes and standards relied on
to establish good engineering practice. These codes and standards are
published by such organizations as the American Society of Mechanical
Engineers, American Petroleum Institute, American National Standards
Institute, National Fire Protection Association, American Society for
Testing and Materials, National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Inspectors, National Association of Corrosion Engineers, American
Society of Exchange Manufacturers Association, and model building code
groups.
In addition, various engineering societies issue technical reports
which impact process design. For example, the American Institute of
Chemical Engineers has published technical reports on topics such as two
phase flow for venting devices. This type of technically recognized
report would constitute good engineering practice.
For existing equipment designed and constructed many years ago in
accordance with the codes and standards available at that time and no
longer in general use today, the employer must document which codes and
standards were used and that the design and construction along with the
testing, inspection and operation are still suitable for the intended
use. Where the process technology requires a design which departs from
the applicable codes and standards, the employer must document that the
design and construction is suitable for the intended purpose.
4. Process Hazard Analysis. A process hazard analysis (PHA),
sometimes called a process hazard evaluation, is one of the most
important elements of the process safety management program. A PHA is an
organized and systematic effort to identify and analyze the significance
of potential hazards associated with the processing or handling of
highly hazardous chemicals. A PHA provides information which will assist
employers and employees in making decisions for improving safety and
reducing the consequences of unwanted or unplanned releases of hazardous
chemicals. A PHA is directed toward analyzing potential causes and
consequences of fires, explosions, releases of toxic or flammable
chemicals and major spills of hazardous chemicals. The PHA focuses on
equipment, instrumentation, utilities, human actions (routine and
nonroutine), and external factors that might impact the process. These
considerations assist in determining the hazards and potential failure
points or failure modes in a process.
The selection of a PHA methodology or technique will be influenced
by many factors including the amount of existing knowledge about the
process. Is it a process that has been operated for a long period of
time with little or no innovation and extensive experience has been
generated with its use? Or, is it a new process or one which has been
changed frequently by the inclusion of innovative features? Also, the
size and complexity of the process will influence the decision as to the
appropriate PHA methodology to use. All PHA methodologies are subject to
certain limitations. For example, the checklist methodology works well
when the process is very stable and no changes are made, but it is not
as effective when the process has undergone extensive change. The
checklist may miss the most recent changes and consequently the changes
would not be evaluated. Another limitation to be considered concerns the
assumptions made by the team or analyst. The PHA is dependent on good
judgement and the assumptions made during the study need to be
documented and understood by the team and reviewer and kept for a future
PHA.
The team conducting the PHA need to understand the methodology that
is going to be used. A PHA team can vary in size from two people to a
number of people with varied operational and technical backgrounds. Some
team members may only be a part of the team for a limited time. The team
leader needs to be fully knowledgeable in the proper implementation of
the PHA methodology that is to be used and should be impartial in the
evaluation. The other full or part time team members need to provide the
team with expertise in areas such as process technology, process design,
operating procedures and practices, including how the work is actually
performed, alarms, emergency procedures, instrumentation, maintenance
procedures, both routine and nonroutine tasks, including how the tasks
are authorized, procurement of parts and supplies, safety and health,
and any other relevant subject as the
[[Page 362]]
need dictates. At least one team member must be familiar with the
process.
The ideal team will have an intimate knowledge of the standards,
codes, specifications and regulations applicable to the process being
studied. The selected team members need to be compatible and the team
leader needs to be able to manage the team, and the PHA study. The team
needs to be able to work together while benefiting from the expertise of
others on the team or outside the team, to resolve issues, and to forge
a consensus on the findings of the study and recommendations.
The application of a PHA to a process may involve the use of
different methodologies for various parts of the process. For example, a
process involving a series of unit operation of varying sizes,
complexities, and ages may use different methodologies and team members
for each operation. Then the conclusions can be integrated into one
final study and evaluation. A more specific example is the use of a
checklist PHA for a standard boiler or heat exchanger and the use of a
Hazard and Operability PHA for the overall process. Also, for batch type
processes like custom batch operations, a generic PHA of a
representative batch may be used where there are only small changes of
monomer or other ingredient ratios and the chemistry is documented for
the full range and ratio of batch ingredients. Another process that
might consider using a generic type of PHA is a gas plant. Often these
plants are simply moved from site to site and therefore, a generic PHA
may be used for these movable plants. Also, when an employer has several
similar size gas plants and no sour gas is being processed at the site,
then a generic PHA is feasible as long as the variations of the
individual sites are accounted for in the PHA. Finally, when an employer
has a large continuous process which has several control rooms for
different portions of the process such as for a distillation tower and a
blending operation, the employer may wish to do each segment separately
and then integrate the final results.
Additionally, small businesses which are covered by this rule, will
often have processes that have less storage volume, less capacity, and
less complicated than processes at a large facility. Therefore, OSHA
would anticipate that the less complex methodologies would be used to
meet the process hazard analysis criteria in the standard. These process
hazard analyses can be done in less time and with a few people being
involved. A less complex process generally means that less data, P&IDs,
and process information is needed to perform a process hazard analysis.
Many small businesses have processes that are not unique, such as
cold storage lockers or water treatment facilities. Where employer
associations have a number of members with such facilities, a generic
PHA, evolved from a checklist or what-if questions, could be developed
and used by each employer effectively to reflect his/her particular
process; this would simplify compliance for them.
When the employer has a number of processes which require a PHA, the
employer must set up a priority system of which PHAs to conduct first. A
preliminary or gross hazard analysis may be useful in prioritizing the
processes that the employer has determined are subject to coverage by
the process safety management standard. Consideration should first be
given to those processes with the potential of adversely affecting the
largest number of employees. This prioritizing should consider the
potential severity of a chemical release, the number of potentially
affected employees, the operating history of the process such as the
frequency of chemical releases, the age of the process and any other
relevant factors. These factors would suggest a ranking order and would
suggest either using a weighing factor system or a systematic ranking
method. The use of a preliminary hazard analysis would assist an
employer in determining which process should be of the highest priority
and thereby the employer would obtain the greatest improvement in safety
at the facility.
Detailed guidance on the content and application of process hazard
analysis methodologies is available from the American Institute of
Chemical Engineers' Center for Chemical Process Safety (see appendix D).
5. Operating Procedures and Practices. Operating procedures describe
tasks to be performed, data to be recorded, operating conditions to be
maintained, samples to be collected, and safety and health precautions
to be taken. The procedures need to be technically accurate,
understandable to employees, and revised periodically to ensure that
they reflect current operations. The process safety information package
is to be used as a resource to better assure that the operating
procedures and practices are consistent with the known hazards of the
chemicals in the process and that the operating parameters are accurate.
Operating procedures should be reviewed by engineering staff and
operating personnel to ensure that they are accurate and provide
practical instructions on how to actually carry out job duties safely.
Operating procedures will include specific instructions or details
on what steps are to be taken or followed in carrying out the stated
procedures. These operating instructions for each procedure should
include the applicable safety precautions and should contain appropriate
information on safety implications. For example, the operating
procedures addressing operating parameters will contain operating
instructions about pressure limits, temperature ranges, flow rates, what
to do when an upset condition
[[Page 363]]
occurs, what alarms and instruments are pertinent if an upset condition
occurs, and other subjects. Another example of using operating
instructions to properly implement operating procedures is in starting
up or shutting down the process. In these cases, different parameters
will be required from those of normal operation. These operating
instructions need to clearly indicate the distinctions between startup
and normal operations such as the appropriate allowances for heating up
a unit to reach the normal operating parameters. Also the operating
instructions need to describe the proper method for increasing the
temperature of the unit until the normal operating temperature
parameters are achieved.
Computerized process control systems add complexity to operating
instructions. These operating instructions need to describe the logic of
the software as well as the relationship between the equipment and the
control system; otherwise, it may not be apparent to the operator.
Operating procedures and instructions are important for training
operating personnel. The operating procedures are often viewed as the
standard operating practices (SOPs) for operations. Control room
personnel and operating staff, in general, need to have a full
understanding of operating procedures. If workers are not fluent in
English then procedures and instructions need to be prepared in a second
language understood by the workers. In addition, operating procedures
need to be changed when there is a change in the process as a result of
the management of change procedures. The consequences of operating
procedure changes need to be fully evaluated and the information
conveyed to the personnel. For example, mechanical changes to the
process made by the maintenance department (like changing a valve from
steel to brass or other subtle changes) need to be evaluated to
determine if operating procedures and practices also need to be changed.
All management of change actions must be coordinated and integrated with
current operating procedures and operating personnel must be oriented to
the changes in procedures before the change is made. When the process is
shut down in order to make a change, then the operating procedures must
be updated before startup of the process.
Training in how to handle upset conditions must be accomplished as
well as what operating personnel are to do in emergencies such as when a
pump seal fails or a pipeline ruptures. Communication between operating
personnel and workers performing work within the process area, such as
nonroutine tasks, also must be maintained. The hazards of the tasks are
to be conveyed to operating personnel in accordance with established
procedures and to those performing the actual tasks. When the work is
completed, operating personnel should be informed to provide closure on
the job.
6. Employee Training. All employees, including maintenance and
contractor employees, involved with highly hazardous chemicals need to
fully understand the safety and health hazards of the chemicals and
processes they work with for the protection of themselves, their fellow
employees and the citizens of nearby communities. Training conducted in
compliance with Sec. 1910.1200, the Hazard Communication standard, will
help employees to be more knowledgeable about the chemicals they work
with as well as familiarize them with reading and understanding MSDS.
However, additional training in subjects such as operating procedures
and safety work practices, emergency evacuation and response, safety
procedures, routine and nonroutine work authorization activities, and
other areas pertinent to process safety and health will need to be
covered by an employer's training program.
In establishing their training programs, employers must clearly
define the employees to be trained and what subjects are to be covered
in their training. Employers in setting up their training program will
need to clearly establish the goals and objectives they wish to achieve
with the training that they provide to their employees. The learning
goals or objectives should be written in clear measurable terms before
the training begins. These goals and objectives need to be tailored to
each of the specific training modules or segments. Employers should
describe the important actions and conditions under which the employee
will demonstrate competence or knowledge as well as what is acceptable
performance.
Hands-on-training where employees are able to use their senses
beyond listening, will enhance learning. For example, operating
personnel, who will work in a control room or at control panels, would
benefit by being trained at a simulated control panel or panels. Upset
conditions of various types could be displayed on the simulator, and
then the employee could go through the proper operating procedures to
bring the simulator panel back to the normal operating parameters. A
training environment could be created to help the trainee feel the full
reality of the situation but, of course, under controlled conditions.
This realistic type of training can be very effective in teaching
employees correct procedures while allowing them to also see the
consequences of what might happen if they do not follow established
operating procedures. Other training techniques using videos or on-the-
job training can also be very effective for teaching other job tasks,
duties, or other important information. An effective training program
will allow the employee to fully participate in the training process and
to practice their skill or knowledge.
[[Page 364]]
Employers need to periodically evaluate their training programs to
see if the necessary skills, knowledge, and routines are being properly
understood and implemented by their trained employees. The means or
methods for evaluating the training should be developed along with the
training program goals and objectives. Training program evaluation will
help employers to determine the amount of training their employees
understood, and whether the desired results were obtained. If, after the
evaluation, it appears that the trained employees are not at the level
of knowledge and skill that was expected, the employer will need to
revise the training program, provide retraining, or provide more
frequent refresher training sessions until the deficiency is resolved.
Those who conducted the training and those who received the training
should also be consulted as to how best to improve the training process.
If there is a language barrier, the language known to the trainees
should be used to reinforce the training messages and information.
Careful consideration must be given to assure that employees
including maintenance and contract employees receive current and updated
training . For example, if changes are made to a process, impacted
employees must be trained in the changes and understand the effects of
the changes on their job tasks (e.g., any new operating procedures
pertinent to their tasks). Additionally, as already discussed the
evaluation of the employee's absorption of training will certainly
influence the need for training.
7. Contractors. Employers who use contractors to perform work in and
around processes that involve highly hazardous chemicals, will need to
establish a screening process so that they hire and use contractors who
accomplish the desired job tasks without compromising the safety and
health of employees at a facility. For contractors, whose safety
performance on the job is not known to the hiring employer, the employer
will need to obtain information on injury and illness rates and
experience and should obtain contractor references. Additionally, the
employer must assure that the contractor has the appropriate job skills,
knowledge and certifications (such as for pressure vessel welders).
Contractor work methods and experiences should be evaluated. For
example, does the contractor conducting demolition work swing loads over
operating processes or does the contractor avoid such hazards?
Maintaining a site injury and illness log for contractors is another
method employers must use to track and maintain current knowledge of
work activities involving contract employees working on or adjacent to
covered processes. Injury and illness logs of both the employer's
employees and contract employees allow an employer to have full
knowledge of process injury and illness experience. This log will also
contain information which will be of use to those auditing process
safety management compliance and those involved in incident
investigations.
Contract employees must perform their work safely. Considering that
contractors often perform very specialized and potentially hazardous
tasks such as confined space entry activities and nonroutine repair
activities it is quite important that their activities be controlled
while they are working on or near a covered process. A permit system or
work authorization system for these activities would also be helpful to
all affected employers. The use of a work authorization system keeps an
employer informed of contract employee activities, and as a benefit the
employer will have better coordination and more management control over
the work being performed in the process area. A well run and well
maintained process where employee safety is fully recognized will
benefit all of those who work in the facility whether they be contract
employees or employees of the owner.
8. Pre-Startup Safety. For new processes, the employer will find a
PHA helpful in improving the design and construction of the process from
a reliability and quality point of view. The safe operation of the new
process will be enhanced by making use of the PHA recommendations before
final installations are completed. P&IDs are to be completed along with
having the operating procedures in place and the operating staff trained
to run the process before startup. The initial startup procedures and
normal operating procedures need to be fully evaluated as part of the
pre-startup review to assure a safe transfer into the normal operating
mode for meeting the process parameters.
For existing processes that have been shutdown for turnaround, or
modification, etc., the employer must assure that any changes other than
``replacement in kind'' made to the process during shutdown go through
the management of change procedures. P&IDs will need to be updated as
necessary, as well as operating procedures and instructions. If the
changes made to the process during shutdown are significant and impact
the training program, then operating personnel as well as employees
engaged in routine and nonroutine work in the process area may need some
refresher or additional training in light of the changes. Any incident
investigation recommendations, compliance audits or PHA recommendations
need to be reviewed as well to see what impacts they may have on the
process before beginning the startup.
9. Mechanical Integrity. Employers will need to review their
maintenance programs and schedules to see if there are areas where
``breakdown'' maintenance is used rather than an on-going mechanical
integrity program. Equipment used to process, store, or
[[Page 365]]
handle highly hazardous chemicals needs to be designed, constructed,
installed and maintained to minimize the risk of releases of such
chemicals. This requires that a mechanical integrity program be in place
to assure the continued integrity of process equipment. Elements of a
mechanical integrity program include the identification and
categorization of equipment and instrumentation, inspections and tests,
testing and inspection frequencies, development of maintenance
procedures, training of maintenance personnel, the establishment of
criteria for acceptable test results, documentation of test and
inspection results, and documentation of manufacturer recommendations as
to meantime to failure for equipment and instrumentation.
The first line of defense an employer has available is to operate
and maintain the process as designed, and to keep the chemicals
contained. This line of defense is backed up by the next line of defense
which is the controlled release of chemicals through venting to
scrubbers or flares, or to surge or overflow tanks which are designed to
receive such chemicals, etc. These lines of defense are the primary
lines of defense or means to prevent unwanted releases. The secondary
lines of defense would include fixed fire protection systems like
sprinklers, water spray, or deluge systems, monitor guns, etc., dikes,
designed drainage systems, and other systems which would control or
mitigate hazardous chemicals once an unwanted release occurs. These
primary and secondary lines of defense are what the mechanical integrity
program needs to protect and strengthen these primary and secondary
lines of defenses where appropriate.
The first step of an effective mechanical integrity program is to
compile and categorize a list of process equipment and instrumentation
for inclusion in the program. This list would include pressure vessels,
storage tanks, process piping, relief and vent systems, fire protection
system components, emergency shutdown systems and alarms and interlocks
and pumps. For the categorization of instrumentation and the listed
equipment the employer would prioritize which pieces of equipment
require closer scrutiny than others. Meantime to failure of various
instrumentation and equipment parts would be known from the
manufacturers data or the employer's experience with the parts, which
would then influence the inspection and testing frequency and associated
procedures. Also, applicable codes and standards such as the National
Board Inspection Code, or those from the American Society for Testing
and Material, American Petroleum Institute, National Fire Protection
Association, American National Standards Institute, American Society of
Mechanical Engineers, and other groups, provide information to help
establish an effective testing and inspection frequency, as well as
appropriate methodologies.
The applicable codes and standards provide criteria for external
inspections for such items as foundation and supports, anchor bolts,
concrete or steel supports, guy wires, nozzles and sprinklers, pipe
hangers, grounding connections, protective coatings and insulation, and
external metal surfaces of piping and vessels, etc. These codes and
standards also provide information on methodologies for internal
inspection, and a frequency formula based on the corrosion rate of the
materials of construction. Also, erosion both internal and external
needs to be considered along with corrosion effects for piping and
valves. Where the corrosion rate is not known, a maximum inspection
frequency is recommended, and methods of developing the corrosion rate
are available in the codes. Internal inspections need to cover items
such as vessel shell, bottom and head; metallic linings; nonmetallic
linings; thickness measurements for vessels and piping; inspection for
erosion, corrosion, cracking and bulges; internal equipment like trays,
baffles, sensors and screens for erosion, corrosion or cracking and
other deficiencies. Some of these inspections may be performed by state
of local government inspectors under state and local statutes. However,
each employer needs to develop procedures to ensure that tests and
inspections are conducted properly and that consistency is maintained
even where different employees may be involved. Appropriate training is
to be provided to maintenance personnel to ensure that they understand
the preventive maintenance program procedures, safe practices, and the
proper use amd application of special equipment or unique tools that may
be required. This training is part of the overall training program
called for in the standard.
A quality assurance system is needed to help ensure that the proper
materials of construction are used, that fabrication and inspection
procedures are proper, and that installation procedures recognize field
installation concerns. The quality assurance program is an essential
part of the mechanical integrity program and will help to maintain the
primary and secondary lines of defense that have been designed into the
process to prevent unwanted chemical releases or those which control or
mitigate a release. ``As built'' drawings, together with certifications
of coded vessels and other equipment, and materials of construction need
to be verified and retained in the quality assurance documentation.
Equipment installation jobs need to be properly inspected in the field
for use of proper materials and procedures and to assure that qualified
craftsmen are used to do the job. The use of appropriate gaskets,
packing, bolts, valves, lubricants and welding rods need to be verified
in the field. Also
[[Page 366]]
procedures for installation of safety devices need to be verified, such
as the torque on the bolts on ruptured disc installations, uniform
torque on flange bolts, proper installation of pump seals, etc. If the
quality of parts is a problem, it may be appropriate to conduct audits
of the equipment supplier's facilities to better assure proper purchases
of required equipment which is suitable for its intended service. Any
changes in equipment that may become necessary will need to go through
the management of change procedures.
10. Nonroutine Work Authorizations. Nonroutine work which is
conducted in process areas needs to be controlled by the employer in a
consistent manner. The hazards identified involving the work that is to
be accomplished must be communicated to those doing the work, but also
to those operating personnel whose work could affect the safety of the
process. A work authorization notice or permit must have a procedure
that describes the steps the maintenance supervisor, contractor
representative or other person needs to follow to obtain the necessary
clearance to get the job started. The work authorization procedures need
to reference and coordinate, as applicable, lockout/tagout procedures,
line breaking procedures, confined space entry procedures and hot work
authorizations. This procedure also needs to provide clear steps to
follow once the job is completed in order to provide closure for those
that need to know the job is now completed and equipment can be returned
to normal.
11. Managing Change. To properly manage changes to process
chemicals, technology, equipment and facilities, one must define what is
meant by change. In this process safety management standard, change
includes all modifications to equipment, procedures, raw materials and
processing conditions other than ``replacement in kind''. These changes
need to be properly managed by identifying and reviewing them prior to
implementation of the change. For example, the operating procedures
contain the operating parameters (pressure limits, temperature ranges,
flow rates, etc.) and the importance of operating within these limits.
While the operator must have the flexibility to maintain safe operation
within the established parameters, any operation outside of these
parameters requires review and approval by a written management of
change procedure.
Management of change covers such as changes in process technology
and changes to equipment and instrumentation. Changes in process
technology can result from changes in production rates, raw materials,
experimentation, equipment unavailability, new equipment, new product
development, change in catalyst and changes in operating conditions to
improve yield or quality. Equipment changes include among others change
in materials of construction, equipment specifications, piping pre-
arrangements, experimental equipment, computer program revisions and
changes in alarms and interlocks. Employers need to establish means and
methods to detect both technical changes and mechanical changes.
Temporary changes have caused a number of catastrophes over the
years, and employers need to establish ways to detect temporary changes
as well as those that are permanent. It is important that a time limit
for temporary changes be established and monitored since, without
control, these changes may tend to become permanent. Temporary changes
are subject to the management of change provisions. In addition, the
management of change procedures are used to insure that the equipment
and procedures are returned to their original or designed conditions at
the end of the temporary change. Proper documentation and review of
these changes is invaluable in assuring that the safety and health
considerations are being incorporated into the operating procedures and
the process.
Employers may wish to develop a form or clearance sheet to
facilitate the processing of changes through the management of change
procedures. A typical change form may include a description and the
purpose of the change, the technical basis for the change, safety and
health considerations, documentation of changes for the operating
procedures, maintenance procedures, inspection and testing, P&IDs,
electrical classification, training and communications, pre-startup
inspection, duration if a temporary change, approvals and authorization.
Where the impact of the change is minor and well understood, a check
list reviewed by an authorized person with proper communication to
others who are affected may be sufficient. However, for a more complex
or significant design change, a hazard evaluation procedure with
approvals by operations, maintenance, and safety departments may be
appropriate. Changes in documents such as P&IDs, raw materials,
operating procedures, mechanical integrity programs, electrical
classifications, etc., need to be noted so that these revisions can be
made permanent when the drawings and procedure manuals are updated.
Copies of process changes need to be kept in an accessible location to
ensure that design changes are available to operating personnel as well
as to PHA team members when a PHA is being done or one is being updated.
12. Investigation of Incidents. Incident investigation is the
process of identifying the underlying causes of incidents and
implementing steps to prevent similar events from occurring. The intent
of an incident investigation is for employers to learn from past
experiences and thus avoid repeating past
[[Page 367]]
mistakes. The incidents for whicn OSHA expects employers to become aware
and to investigate are the types of events which result in or could
reasonably have resulted in a catastrophic release. Some of the events
are sometimes referred to as ``near misses,'' meaning that a serious
consequence did not occur, but could have.
Employers need to develop in-house capability to investigate
incidents that occur in their facilities. A team needs to be assembled
by the employer and trained in the techniques of investigation including
how to conduct interviews of witnesses, needed documentation and report
writing. A multi-disciplinary team is better able to gather the facts of
the event and to analyze them and develop plausible scenarios as to what
happened, and why. Team members should be selected on the basis of their
training, knowledge and ability to contribute to a team effort to fully
investigate the incident. Employees in the process area where the
incident occurred should be consulted, interviewed or made a member of
the team. Their knowledge of the events form a significant set of facts
about the incident which occurred. The report, its findings and
recommendations are to be shared with those who can benefit from the
information. The cooperation of employees is essential to an effective
incident investigation. The focus of the investigation should be to
obtain facts, and not to place blame. The team and the investigation
process should clearly deal with all involved individuals in a fair,
open and consistent manner.
13. Emergency Preparedness. Each employer must address what actions
employees are to take when there is an unwanted release of highly
hazardous chemicals. Emergency preparedness or the employer's tertiary
(third) lines of defense are those that will be relied on along with the
secondary lines of defense when the primary lines of defense which are
used to prevent an unwanted release fail to stop the release. Employers
will need to decide if they want employees to handle and stop small or
minor incidental releases. Whether they wish to mobilize the available
resources at the plant and have them brought to bear on a more
significant release. Or whether employers want their employees to
evacuate the danger area and promptly escape to a preplanned safe zone
area, and allow the local community emergency response organizations to
handle the release. Or whether the employer wants to use some
combination of these actions. Employers will need to select how many
different emergency preparedness or tertiary lines of defense they plan
to have and then develop the necessary plans and procedures, and
appropriately train employees in their emergency duties and
responsibilities and then implement these lines of defense.
Employers at a minimum must have an emergency action plan which will
facilitate the prompt evacuation of employees due to an unwanted release
of a highly hazardous chemical. This means that the employer will have a
plan that will be activated by an alarm system to alert employees when
to evacuate and, that employees who are physically impaired, will have
the necessary support and assistance to get them to the safe zone as
well. The intent of these requirements is to alert and move employees to
a safe zone quickly. Delaying alarms or confusing alarms are to be
avoided. The use of process control centers or similar process buildings
in the process area as safe areas is discouraged. Recent catastrophes
have shown that a large life loss has occurred in these structures
because of where they have been sited and because they are not
necessarily designed to withstand over-pressures from shockwaves
resulting from explosions in the process area.
Unwanted incidental releases of highly hazardous chemicals in the
process area must be addressed by the employer as to what actions
employees are to take. If the employer wants employees to evacuate the
area, then the emergency action plan will be activated. For outdoor
processes where wind direction is important for selecting the safe route
to a refuge area, the employer should place a wind direction indicator
such as a wind sock or pennant at the highest point that can be seen
throughout the process area. Employees can move in the direction of
cross wind to upwind to gain safe access to the refuge area by knowing
the wind direction.
If the employer wants specific employees in the release area to
control or stop the minor emergency or incidental release, these actions
must be planned for in advance and procedures developed and implemented.
Preplanning for handling incidental releases for minor emergencies in
the process area needs to be done, appropriate equipment for the hazards
must be provided, and training conducted for those employees who will
perform the emergency work before they respond to handle an actual
release. The employer's training program, including the Hazard
Communication standard training is to address the training needs for
employees who are expected to handle incidental or minor releases.
Preplanning for releases that are more serious than incidental
releases is another important line of defense to be used by the
employer. When a serious release of a highly hazardous chemical occurs,
the employer through preplanning will have determined in advance what
actions employees are to take. The evacuation of the immediate release
area and other areas as necessary would be accomplished under the
emergency action
[[Page 368]]
plan. If the employer wishes to use plant personnel such as a fire
brigade, spill control team, a hazardous materials team, or use
employees to render aid to those in the immediate release area and
control or mitigate the incident, these actions are covered by
Sec. 1910.120, the Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response
(HAZWOPER) standard. If outside assistance is necessary, such as through
mutual aid agreements between employers or local government emergency
response organizations, these emergency responders are also covered by
HAZWOPER. The safety and health protections required for emergency
responders are the responsibility of their employers and of the on-scene
incident commander.
Responders may be working under very hazardous conditions and
therefore the objective is to have them competently led by an on-scene
incident commander and the commander's staff, properly equipped to do
their assigned work safely, and fully trained to carry out their duties
safely before they respond to an emergency. Drills, training exercises,
or simulations with the local community emergency response planners and
responder organizations is one means to obtain better preparedness. This
close cooperation and coordination between plant and local community
emergency preparedness managers will also aid the employer in complying
with the Environmental Protection Agency's Risk Management Plan
criteria.
One effective way for medium to large facilities to enhance
coordination and communication during emergencies for on plant
operations and with local community organizations is for employers to
establish and equip an emergency control center. The emergency control
center would be sited in a safe zone area so that it could be occupied
throughout the duration of an emergency. The center would serve as the
major ccommunication link between the on-scene incident commander and
plant or corporate management as well as with the local community
officials. The communication equipment in the emergency control center
should include a network to receive and transmit information by
telephone, radio or other means. It is important to have a backup
communication network in case of power failure or one communication
means fails. The center should also be equipped with the plant layout
and community maps, utility drawings including fire water, emergency
lighting, appropriate reference materials such as a government agency
notification list, company personnel phone list, SARA Title III reports
and material safety data sheets, emergency plans and procedures manual,
a listing with the location of emergency response equipment, mutual aid
information, and access to meteorological or weather condition data and
any dispersion modeling data.
14. Compliance Audits. Employers need to select a trained individual
or assemble a trained team of people to audit the process safety
management system and program. A small process or plant may need only
one knowledgeable person to conduct an audit. The audit is to include an
evaluation of the design and effectiveness of the process safety
management system and a field inspection of the safety and health
conditions and practices to verify that the employer's systems are
effectively implemented. The audit should be conducted or lead by a
person knowledgeable in audit techniques and who is impartial towards
the facility or area being audited. The essential elements of an audit
program include planning, staffing, conduting the audit, evaluation and
corrective action, follow-up and documentation.
Planning in advance is essential to the success of the auditing
process. Each employer needs to establish the format, staffing,
scheduling and verification methods prior to conducting the audit. The
format should be designed to provide the lead auditor with a procedure
or checklist which details the requirements of each section of the
standard. The names of the audit team members should be listed as part
of the format as well. The checklist, if properly designed, could serve
as the verification sheet which provides the auditor with the necessary
information to expedite the review and assure that no requirements of
the standard are omitted. This verification sheet format could also
identify those elements that will require evaluation or a response to
correct deficiencies. This sheet could also be used for developing the
follow-up and documentation requirements.
The selection of effective audit team members is critical to the
success of the program. Team members should be chosen for their
experience, knowledge, and training and should be familiar with the
processes and with auditing techniques, practices and procedures. The
size of the team will vary depending on the size and complexity of the
process under consideration. For a large, complex, highly instrumented
plant, it may be desirable to have team members with expertise in
process engineering and design, process chemistry, instrumentation and
computer controls, electrical hazards and classifications, safety and
health disciplines, maintenance, emergency preparedness, warehousing or
shipping, and process safety auditing. The team may use part-time
members to provide for the depth of expertise required as well as for
what is actually done or followed, compared to what is written.
An effective audit includes a review of the relevant documentation
and process safety information, inspection of the physical facilities,
and interviews with all levels of plant personnel. Utilizing the audit
procedure and checklist developed in the
[[Page 369]]
preplanning stage, the audit team can systematically analyze compliance
with the provisions of the standard and any other corporate policies
that are relevant. For example, the audit team will review all aspects
of the training program as part of the overall audit. The team will
review the written training program for adequacy of content, frequency
of training, effectiveness of training in terms of its goals and
objectives as well as to how it fits into meeting the standard's
requirements, documentation, etc. Through interviews, the team can
determine the employee's knowledge and awareness of the safety
procedures, duties, rules, emergency response assignments, etc. During
the inspection, the team can observe actual practices such as safety and
health policies, procedures, and work authorization practices. This
approach enables the team to identify deficiencies and determine where
corrective actions or improvements are necessary.
An audit is a technique used to gather sufficient facts and
information, including statistical information, to verify compliance
with standards. Auditors should select as part of their preplanning a
sample size sufficient to give a degree of confidence that the audit
reflects the level of compliance with the standard. The audit team,
through this systematic analysis, should document areas which require
corrective action as well as those areas where the process safety
management system is effective and working in an effective manner. This
provides a record of the audit procedures and findings, and serves as a
baseline of operation data for future audits. It will assist future
auditors in determining changes or trends from previous audits.
Corrective action is one of the most important parts of the audit.
It includes not only addressing the identified deficiencies, but also
planning, followup, and documentation. The corrective action process
normally begins with a management review of the audit findings. The
purpose of this review is to determine what actions are appropriate, and
to establish priorities, timetables, resource allocations and
requirements and responsibilities. In some cases, corrective action may
involve a simple change in procedure or minor maintenance effort to
remedy the concern. Management of change procedures need to be used, as
appropriate, even for what may seem to be a minor change. Many of the
deficiencies can be acted on promptly, while some may require
engineering studies or indepth review of actual procedures and
practices. There may be instances where no action is necessary and this
is a valid response to an audit finding. All actions taken, including an
explanation where no action is taken on a finding, needs to be
documented as to what was done and why.
It is important to assure that each deficiency identified is
addressed, the corrective action to be taken noted, and the audit person
or team responsible be properly documented by the employer. To control
the corrective action process, the employer should consider the use of a
tracking system. This tracking system might include periodic status
reports shared with affected levels of management, specific reports such
as completion of an engineering study, and a final implementation report
to provide closure for audit findings that have been through management
of change, if appropriate, and then shared with affected employees and
management. This type of tracking system provides the employer with the
status of the corrective action. It also provides the documentation
required to verify that appropriate corrective actions were taken on
deficiencies identified in the audit.
Appendix D to Sec. 1910.119--Sources of Further Information
(Nonmandatory)
1. Center for Chemical Process Safety, American Institute of
Chemical Engineers, 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017, (212) 705-
7319.
2. ``Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Procedures,'' American
Institute of Chemical Engineers; 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY
10017.
3. ``Guidelines for Technical Management of Chemical Process
Safety,'' Center for Chemical Process Safety of the American Institute
of Chemical Engineers; 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017.
4. ``Evaluating Process Safety in the Chemical Industry,'' Chemical
Manufacturers Association; 2501 M Street NW, Washington, DC 20037.
5. ``Safe Warehousing of Chemicals,'' Chemical Manufacturers
Association; 2501 M Street NW, Washington, DC 20037.
6. ``Management of Process Hazards,'' American Petroleum Institute
(API Recommended Practice 750); 1220 L Street, N.W., Washington, D.C.
20005.
7. ``Improving Owner and Contractor Safety Performance,'' American
Petroleum Institute (API Recommended Practice 2220); API, 1220 L Street
N.W., Washington, D.C. 20005.
8. Chemical Manufacturers Association (CMA's Manager Guide), First
Edition, September 1991; CMA, 2501 M Street, N.W., Washington, D.C.
20037.
9. ``Improving Construction Safety Performance,'' Report A-3, The
Business Roundtable; The Business Roundtable, 200 Park Avenue, New York,
NY 10166. (Report includes criteria to evaluate contractor safety
performance and criteria to enhance contractor safety performance).
10. ``Recommended Guidelines for Contractor Safety and Health,''
Texas Chemical Council; Texas Chemical Council, 1402 Nueces Street,
Austin, TX 78701-1534.
[[Page 370]]
11. ``Loss Prevention in the Process Industries,'' Volumes I and II;
Frank P. Lees, Butterworth; London 1983.
12. ``Safety and Health Program Management Guidelines,'' 1989; U.S.
Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
13. ``Safety and Health Guide for the Chemical Industry,'' 1986,
(OSHA 3091); U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration; 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20210.
14. ``Review of Emergency Systems,'' June 1988; U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA), Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response,
Washington, DC 20460.
15. ``Technical Guidance for Hazards Analysis, Emergency Planning
for Extremely Hazardous Substances,'' December 1987; U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA), Federal Emergency Management Administration
(FEMA) and U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT), Washington, DC
20460.
16. ``Accident Investigation * * * A New Approach,'' 1983, National
Safety Council; 444 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611-3991.
17. ``Fire & Explosion Index Hazard Classification Guide,'' 6th
Edition, May 1987, Dow Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan 48674.
18. ``Chemical Exposure Index,'' May 1988, Dow Chemical Company;
Midland, Michigan 48674.
[57 FR 6403, Feb. 24, 1992; 57 FR 7847, Mar. 4, 1992, as amended at 61
FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.120 Hazardous waste operations and emergency response.
(a) Scope, application, and definitions--(1) Scope. This section
covers the following operations, unless the employer can demonstrate
that the operation does not involve employee exposure or the reasonable
possibility for employee exposure to safety or health hazards:
(i) Clean-up operations required by a governmental body, whether
Federal, state, local or other involving hazardous substances that are
conducted at uncontrolled hazardous waste sites (including, but not
limited to, the EPA's National Priority Site List (NPL), state priority
site lists, sites recommended for the EPA NPL, and initial
investigations of government identified sites which are conducted before
the presence or absence of hazardous substances has been ascertained);
(ii) Corrective actions involving clean-up operations at sites
covered by the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976 (RCRA) as
amended (42 U.S.C. 6901 et seq.);
(iii) Voluntary clean-up operations at sites recognized by Federal,
state, local or other governmental bodies as uncontrolled hazardous
waste sites;
(iv) Operations involving hazardous wastes that are conducted at
treatment, storage, and disposal (TSD) facilities regulated by 40 CFR
parts 264 and 265 pursuant to RCRA; or by agencies under agreement with
U.S.E.P.A. to implement RCRA regulations; and
(v) Emergency response operations for releases of, or substantial
threats of releases of, hazardous substances without regard to the
location of the hazard.
(2) Application. (i) All requirements of part 1910 and part 1926 of
title 29 of the Code of Federal Regulations apply pursuant to their
terms to hazardous waste and emergency response operations whether
covered by this section or not. If there is a conflict or overlap, the
provision more protective of employee safety and health shall apply
without regard to 29 CFR 1910.5(c)(1).
(ii) Hazardous substance clean-up operations within the scope of
paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iii) of this section must comply
with all paragraphs of this section except paragraphs (p) and (q).
(iii) Operations within the scope of paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this
section must comply only with the requirements of paragraph (p) of this
section.
Notes and Exceptions: (A) All provisions of paragraph (p) of this
section cover any treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) operation
regulated by 40 CFR parts 264 and 265 or by state law authorized under
RCRA, and required to have a permit or interim status from EPA pursuant
to 40 CFR 270.1 or from a state agency pursuant to RCRA.
(B) Employers who are not required to have a permit or interim
status because they are conditionally exempt small quantity generators
under 40 CFR 261.5 or are generators who qualify under 40 CFR 262.34 for
exemptions from regulation under 40 CFR parts 264, 265 and 270
(``excepted employers'') are not covered by paragraphs (p)(1) through
(p)(7) of this section. Excepted employers who are required by the EPA
or state agency to have their employees engage in emergency response or
who direct their employees to engage in emergency response are covered
by paragraph (p)(8) of this section, and
[[Page 371]]
cannot be exempted by (p)(8)(i) of this section. Excepted employers who
are not required to have employees engage in emergency response, who
direct their employees to evacuate in the case of such emergencies and
who meet the requirements of paragraph (p)(8)(i) of this section are
exempt from the balance of paragraph (p)(8) of this section.
(C) If an area is used primarily for treatment, storage or disposal,
any emergency response operations in that area shall comply with
paragraph (p)(8) of this section. In other areas not used primarily for
treatment, storage, or disposal, any emergency response operations shall
comply with paragraph (q) of this section. Compliance with the
requirements of paragraph (q) of this section shall be deemed to be in
compliance with the requirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this section.
(iv) Emergency response operations for releases of, or substantial
threats of releases of, hazardous substances which are not covered by
paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iv) of this section must only comply
with the requirements of paragraph (q) of this section.
(3) Definitions--Buddy system means a system of organizing employees
into work groups in such a manner that each employee of the work group
is designated to be observed by at least one other employee in the work
group. The purpose of the buddy system is to provide rapid assistance to
employees in the event of an emergency.
Clean-up operation means an operation where hazardous substances are
removed, contained, incinerated, neutralized, stabilized, cleared-up, or
in any other manner processed or handled with the ultimate goal of
making the site safer for people or the environment.
Decontamination means the removal of hazardous substances from
employees and their equipment to the extent necessary to preclude the
occurrence of foreseeable adverse health affects.
Emergency response orresponding to emergencies means a response
effort by employees from outside the immediate release area or by other
designated responders (i.e., mutual-aid groups, local fire departments,
etc.) to an occurrence which results, or is likely to result, in an
uncontrolled release of a hazardous substance. Responses to incidental
releases of hazardous substances where the substance can be absorbed,
neutralized, or otherwise controlled at the time of release by employees
in the immediate release area, or by maintenance personnel are not
considered to be emergency responses within the scope of this standard.
Responses to releases of hazardous substances where there is no
potential safety or health hazard (i.e., fire, explosion, or chemical
exposure) are not considered to be emergency responses.
Facility means (A) any building, structure, installation, equipment,
pipe or pipeline (including any pipe into a sewer or publicly owned
treatment works), well, pit, pond, lagoon, impoundment, ditch, storage
container, motor vehicle, rolling stock, or aircraft, or (B) any site or
area where a hazardous substance has been deposited, stored, disposed
of, or placed, or otherwise come to be located; but does not include any
consumer product in consumer use or any water-borne vessel.
Hazardous materials response (HAZMAT) team means an organized group
of employees, designated by the employer, who are expected to perform
work to handle and control actual or potential leaks or spills of
hazardous substances requiring possible close approach to the substance.
The team members perform responses to releases or potential releases of
hazardous substances for the purpose of control or stabilization of the
incident. A HAZMAT team is not a fire brigade nor is a typical fire
brigade a HAZMAT team. A HAZMAT team, however, may be a separate
component of a fire brigade or fire department.
Hazardous substance means any substance designated or listed under
paragraphs (A) through (D) of this definition, exposure to which results
or may result in adverse affects on the health or safety of employees:
(A) Any substance defined under section 101(14) of CERCLA;
(B) Any biological agent and other disease-causing agent which after
release into the environment and upon exposure, ingestion, inhalation,
or assimilation into any person, either directly from the environment or
indirectly by ingestion through food chains, will or may reasonably be
anticipated to cause death, disease, behavioral abnormalities, cancer,
genetic
[[Page 372]]
mutation, physiological malfunctions (including malfunctions in
reproduction) or physical deformations in such persons or their
offspring;
(C) Any substance listed by the U.S. Department of Transportation as
hazardous materials under 49 CFR 172.101 and appendices; and
(D) Hazardous waste as herein defined.
Hazardous waste means--
(A) A waste or combination of wastes as defined in 40 CFR 261.3, or
(B) Those substances defined as hazardous wastes in 49 CFR 171.8.
Hazardous waste operation means any operation conducted within the
scope of this standard.
Hazardous waste site or Site means any facility or location within
the scope of this standard at which hazardous waste operations take
place.
Health hazard means a chemical, mixture of chemicals or a pathogen
for which there is statistically significant evidence based on at least
one study conducted in accordance with established scientific principles
that acute or chronic health effects may occur in exposed employees. The
term ``health hazard'' includes chemicals which are carcinogens, toxic
or highly toxic agents, reproductive toxins, irritants, corrosives,
sensitizers, heptaotoxins, nephrotoxins, neurotoxins, agents which act
on the hematopoietic system, and agents which damage the lungs, skin,
eyes, or mucous membranes. It also includes stress due to temperature
extremes. Further definition of the terms used above can be found in
appendix A to 29 CFR 1910.1200.
IDLH orImmediately dangerous to life or health means an atmospheric
concentration of any toxic, corrosive or asphyxiant substance that poses
an immediate threat to life or would cause irreversible or delayed
adverse health effects or would interfere with an individual's ability
to escape from a dangerous atmosphere.
Oxygen deficiency means that concentration of oxygen by volume below
which atmosphere supplying respiratory protection must be provided. It
exists in atmospheres where the percentage of oxygen by volume is less
than 19.5 percent oxygen.
Permissible exposure limit means the exposure, inhalation or dermal
permissible exposure limit specified in 29 CFR part 1910, subparts G and
Z.
Published exposure level means the exposure limits published in
``NIOSH Recommendations for Occupational Health Standards'' dated 1986,
which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6 or if
none is specified, the exposure limits published in the standards
specified by the American Conference of Governmental Industrial
Hygienists in their publication ``Threshold Limit Values and Biological
Exposure Indices for 1987-88'' dated 1987, which is incorporated by
reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
Post emergency response means that portion of an emergency response
performed after the immediate threat of a release has been stabilized or
eliminated and clean-up of the site has begun. If post emergency
response is performed by an employer's own employees who were part of
the initial emergency response, it is considered to be part of the
initial response and not post emergency response. However, if a group of
an employer's own employees, separate from the group providing initial
response, performs the clean-up operation, then the separate group of
employees would be considered to be performing post-emergency response
and subject to paragraph (q)(11) of this section.
Qualified person means a person with specific training, knowledge
and experience in the area for which the person has the responsibility
and the authority to control.
Site safety and health supervisor (or official) means the individual
located on a hazardous waste site who is responsible to the employer and
has the authority and knowledge necessary to implement the site safety
and health plan and verify compliance with applicable safety and health
requirements.
Small quantity qenerator means a generator of hazardous wastes who
in any calendar month generates no more than 1,000 kilograms (2,205
pounds) of hazardous waste in that month.
Uncontrolled hazardous waste site, means an area identified as an
uncontrolled hazardous waste site by a governmental body, whether
Federal,
[[Page 373]]
state, local or other where an accumulation of hazardous substances
creates a threat to the health and safety of individuals or the
environment or both. Some sites are found on public lands such as those
created by former municipal, county or state landfills where illegal or
poorly managed waste disposal has taken place. Other sites are found on
private property, often belonging to generators or former generators of
hazardous substance wastes. Examples of such sites include, but are not
limited to, surface impoundments, landfills, dumps, and tank or drum
farms. Normal operations at TSD sites are not covered by this
definition.
(b) Safety and health program.
Note to (b): Safety and health programs developed and implemented to
meet other Federal, state, or local regulations are considered
acceptable in meeting this requirement if they cover or are modified to
cover the topics required in this paragraph. An additional or separate
safety and health program is not required by this paragraph.
(1) General. (i) Employers shall develop and implement a written
safety and health program for their employees involved in hazardous
waste operations. The program shall be designed to identify, evaluate,
and control safety and health hazards, and provide for emergency
response for hazardous waste operations.
(ii) The written safety and health program shall incorporate the
following:
(A) An organizational structure;
(B) A comprehensive workplan;
(C) A site-specific safety and health plan which need not repeat the
employer's standard operating procedures required in paragraph
(b)(1)(ii)(F) of this section;
(D) The safety and health training program;
(E) The medical surveillance program;
(F) The employer's standard operating procedures for safety and
health; and
(G) Any necessary interface between general program and site
specific activities.
(iii) Site excavation. Site excavations created during initial site
preparation or during hazardous waste operations shall be shored or
sloped as appropriate to prevent accidental collapse in accordance with
subpart P of 29 CFR part 1926.
(iv) Contractors and sub-contractors. An employer who retains
contractor or sub-contractor services for work in hazardous waste
operations shall inform those contractors, sub-contractors, or their
representatives of the site emergency response procedures and any
potential fire, explosion, health, safety or other hazards of the
hazardous waste operation that have been identified by the employer,
including those identified in the employer's information program.
(v) Program availability. The written safety and health program
shall be made available to any contractor or subcontractor or their
representative who will be involved with the hazardous waste operation;
to employees; to employee designated representatives; to OSHA personnel,
and to personnel of other Federal, state, or local agencies with
regulatory authority over the site.
(2) Organizational structure part of the site program--(i) The
organizationa1 structure part of the program shall establish the
specific chain of command and specify the overall responsibilities of
supervisors and employees. It shall include, at a minimum, the following
elements:
(A) A general supervisor who has the responsibility and authority to
direct all hazardous waste operations.
(B) A site safety and health supervisor who has the responsibility
and authority to develop and implement the site safety and health plan
and verify compliance.
(C) All other personnel needed for hazardous waste site operations
and emergency response and their general functions and responsibilities.
(D) The lines of authority, responsibility, and communication.
(ii) The organizational structure shall be reviewed and updated as
necessary to reflect the current status of waste site operations.
(3) Comprehensive workplan part of the site program. The
comprehensive workplan part of the program shall address the tasks and
objectives of the site operations and the logistics and resources
required to reach those tasks and objectives.
[[Page 374]]
(i) The comprehensive workplan shall address anticipated clean-up
activities as well as normal operating procedures which need not repeat
the employer's procedures available elsewhere.
(ii) The comprehensive workplan shall define work tasks and
objectives and identify the methods for accomplishing those tasks and
objectives.
(iii) The comprehensive workplan shall establish personnel
requirements for implementing the plan.
(iv) The comprehensive workplan shall provide for the implementation
of the training required in paragraph (e) of this section.
(v) The comprehensive workplan shall provide for the implementation
of the required informational programs required in paragraph (i) of this
section.
(vi) The comprehensive workplan shall provide for the implementation
of the medical surveillance program described in paragraph (f) of this
section.
(4) Site-specific safety and health plan part of the program--(i)
General. The site safety and health plan, which must be kept on site,
shall address the safety and health hazards of each phase of site
operation and include the requirements and procedures for employee
protection.
(ii) Elements. The site safety and health plan, as a minimum, shall
address the following:
(A) A safety and health risk or hazard analysis for each site task
and operation found in the workplan.
(B) Employee training assignments to assure compliance with
paragraph (e) of this section.
(C) Personal protective equipment to be used by employees for each
of the site tasks and operations being conducted as required by the
personal protective equipment program in paragraph (g)(5) of this
section.
(D) Medical surveillance requirements in accordance with the program
in paragraph (f) of this section.
(E) Frequency and types of air monitoring, personnel monitoring, and
environmental sampling techniques and instrumentation to be used,
including methods of maintenance and calibration of monitoring and
sampling equipment to be used.
(F) Site control measures in accordance with the site control
program required in paragraph (d) of this section.
(G) Decontamination procedures in accordance with paragraph (k) of
this section.
(H) An emergency response plan meeting the requirements of paragraph
(l) of this section for safe and effective responses to emergencies,
including the necessary PPE and other equipment.
(I) Confined space entry procedures.
(J) A spill containment program meeting the requirements of
paragraph (j) of this section.
(iii) Pre-entry briefing. The site specific safety and health plan
shall provide for pre-entry briefings to be held prior to initiating any
site activity, and at such other times as necessary to ensure that
employees are apprised of the site safety and health plan and that this
plan is being followed. The information and data obtained from site
characterization and analysis work required in paragraph (c) of this
section shall be used to prepare and update the site safety and health
plan.
(iv) Effectiveness of site safety and health plan. Inspections shall
be conducted by the site safety and health supervisor or, in the absence
of that individual, another individual who is knowledgeable in
occupational safety and health, acting on behalf of the employer as
necessary to determine the effectiveness of the site safety and health
plan. Any deficiencies in the effectiveness of the site safety and
health plan shall be corrected by the employer.
(c) Site characterization and analysis--(1) General. Hazardous waste
sites shall be evaluated in accordance with this paragraph to identify
specific site hazards and to determine the appropriate safety and health
control procedures needed to protect employees from the identified
hazards.
(2) Preliminary evaluation. A preliminary evaluation of a site's
characteristics shall be performed prior to site entry by a qualified
person in order to aid in the selection of appropriate employee
protection methods prior to site entry. Immediately after initial site
entry, a more detailed evaluation of the site's specific characteristics
shall
[[Page 375]]
be performed by a qualified person in order to further identify existing
site hazards and to further aid in the selection of the appropriate
engineering controls and personal protective equipment for the tasks to
be performed.
(3) Hazard identification. All suspected conditions that may pose
inhalation or skin absorption hazards that are immediately dangerous to
life or health (IDLH), or other conditions that may cause death or
serious harm, shall be identified during the preliminary survey and
evaluated during the detailed survey. Examples of such hazards include,
but are not limited to, confined space entry, potentially explosive or
flammable situations, visible vapor clouds, or areas where biological
indicators such as dead animals or vegetation are located.
(4) Required information. The following information to the extent
available shall be obtained by the employer prior to allowing employees
to enter a site:
(i) Location and approximate size of the site.
(ii) Description of the response activity and/or the job task to be
performed.
(iii) Duration of the planned employee activity.
(iv) Site topography and accessibility by air and roads.
(v) Safety and health hazards expected at the site.
(vi) Pathways for hazardous substance dispersion.
(vii) Present status and capabilities of emergency response teams
that would provide assistance to hazardous waste clean-up site employees
at the time of an emergency.
(viii) Hazardous substances and health hazards involved or expected
at the site, and their chemical and physical properties.
(5) Personal protective equipment. Personal protective equipment
(PPE) shall be provided and used during initial site entry in accordance
with the following requirements:
(i) Based upon the results of the preliminary site evaluation, an
ensemble of PPE shall be selected and used during initial site entry
which will provide protection to a level of exposure below permissible
exposure limits and published exposure levels for known or suspected
hazardous substances and health hazards, and which will provide
protection against other known and suspected hazards identified during
the preliminary site evaluation. If there is no permissible exposure
limit or published exposure level, the employer may use other published
studies and information as a guide to appropriate personal protective
equipment.
(ii) If positive-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus is not
used as part of the entry ensemble, and if respiratory protection is
warranted by the potential hazards identified during the preliminary
site evaluation, an escape self-contained breathing apparatus of at
least five minute's duration shall be carried by employees during
initial site entry.
(iii) If the preliminary site evaluation does not produce sufficient
information to identify the hazards or suspected hazards of the site, an
ensemble providing protection equivalent to Level B PPE shall be
provided as minimum protection, and direct reading instruments shall be
used as appropriate for identifying IDLH conditions. (See appendix B for
a description of Level B hazards and the recommendations for Level B
protective equipment.)
(iv) Once the hazards of the site have been identified, the
appropriate PPE shall be selected and used in accordance with paragraph
(g) of this section.
(6) Monitoring. The following monitoring shall be conducted during
initial site entry when the site evaluation produces information that
shows the potential for ionizing radiation or IDLH conditions, or when
the site information is not sufficient reasonably to eliminate these
possible conditions:
(i) Monitoring with direct reading instruments for hazardous levels
of ionizing radiation.
(ii) Monitoring the air with appropriate direct reading test
equipment (i.e., combustible gas meters, detector tubes) for IDLH and
other conditions that may cause death or serious harm (combustible or
explosive atmospheres, oxygen deficiency, toxic substances).
(iii) Visually observing for signs of actual or potential IDLH or
other dangerous conditions.
[[Page 376]]
(iv) An ongoing air monitoring program in accordance with paragraph
(h) of this section shall be implemented after site characterization has
determined the site is safe for the start-up of operations.
(7) Risk identification. Once the presence and concentrations of
specific hazardous substances and health hazards have been established,
the risks associated with these substances shall be identified.
Employees who will be working on the site shall be informed of any risks
that have been identified. In situations covered by the Hazard
Communication Standard, 29 CFR 1910.1200, training required by that
standard need not be duplicated.
Note to paragraph (c)(7).--Risks to consider include, but are not
limited to:
(a) Exposures exceeding the permissible exposure limits and
published exposure levels.
(b) IDLH concentrations.
(c) Potential skin absorption and irritation sources.
(d) Potential eye irritation sources.
(e) Explosion sensitivity and flammability ranges.
(f) Oxygen deficiency.
(8) Employee notification. Any information concerning the chemical,
physical, and toxicologic properties of each substance known or expected
to be present on site that is available to the employer and relevant to
the duties an employee is expected to perform shall be made available to
the affected employees prior to the commencement of their work
activities. The employer may utilize information developed for the
hazard communication standard for this purpose.
(d) Site control--(1) General. Appropriate site control procedures
shall be implemented to control employee exposure to hazardous
substances before clean-up work begins.
(2) Site control program. A site control program for protecting
employees which is part of the employer's site safety and health program
required in paragraph (b) of this section shall be developed during the
planning stages of a hazardous waste clean-up operation and modified as
necessary as new information becomes available.
(3) Elements of the site control program. The site control program
shall, as a minimum, include: A site map; site work zones; the use of a
``buddy system''; site communications including alerting means for
emergencies; the standard operating procedures or safe work practices;
and, identification of the nearest medical assistance. Where these
requirements are covered elsewhere they need not be repeated.
(e) Training--(1) General. (i) All employees working on site (such
as but not limited to equipment operators, general laborers and others)
exposed to hazardous substances, health hazards, or safety hazards and
their supervisors and management responsible for the site shall receive
training meeting the requirements of this paragraph before they are
permitted to engage in hazardous waste operations that could expose them
to hazardous substances, safety, or health hazards, and they shall
receive review training as specified in this paragraph.
(ii) Employees shall not be permitted to participate in or supervise
field activities until they have been trained to a level required by
their job function and responsibility.
(2) Elements to be covered. The training shall thoroughly cover the
following:
(i) Names of personnel and alternates responsible for site safety
and health;
(ii) Safety, health and other hazards present on the site;
(iii) Use of personal protective equipment;
(iv) Work practices by which the employee can minimize risks from
hazards;
(v) Safe use of engineering controls and equipment on the site;
(vi) Medical surveillance requirements, including recognition of
symptoms and signs which might indicate overexposure to hazards; and
(vii) The contents of paragraphs (G) through (J) of the site safety
and health plan set forth in paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section.
(3) Initial training. (i) General site workers (such as equipment
operators, general laborers and supervisory personnel) engaged in
hazardous substance removal or other activities which expose or
potentially expose workers to hazardous substances and health hazards
shall receive a minimum of 40 hours of instruction off the site, and a
[[Page 377]]
minimum of three days actual field experience under the direct
supervision of a trained, experienced supervisor.
(ii) Workers on site only occasionally for a specific limited task
(such as, but not limited to, ground water monitoring, land surveying,
or geo-physical surveying) and who are unlikely to be exposed over
permissible exposure limits and published exposure limits shall receive
a minimum of 24 hours of instruction off the site, and the minimum of
one day actual field experience under the direct supervision of a
trained, experienced supervisor.
(iii) Workers regularly on site who work in areas which have been
monitored and fully characterized indicating that exposures are under
permissible exposure limits and published exposure limits where
respirators are not necessary, and the characterization indicates that
there are no health hazards or the possibility of an emergency
developing, shall receive a minimum of 24 hours of instruction off the
site and the minimum of one day actual field experience under the direct
supervision of a trained, experienced supervisor.
(iv) Workers with 24 hours of training who are covered by paragraphs
(e)(3)(ii) and (e)(3)(iii) of this section, and who become general site
workers or who are required to wear respirators, shall have the
additional 16 hours and two days of training necessary to total the
training specified in paragraph (e)(3)(i).
(4) Management and supervisor training. On-site management and
supervisors directly responsible for, or who supervise employees engaged
in, hazardous waste operations shall receive 40 hours initial training,
and three days of supervised field experience (the training may be
reduced to 24 hours and one day if the only area of their responsibility
is employees covered by paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) and (e)(3)(iii)) and at
least eight additional hours of specialized training at the time of job
assignment on such topics as, but not limited to, the employer's safety
and health program and the associated employee training program,
personal protective equipment program, spill containment program, and
health hazard monitoring procedure and techniques.
(5) Qualifications for trainers. Trainers shall be qualified to
instruct employees about the subject matter that is being presented in
training. Such trainers shall have satisfactorily completed a training
program for teaching the subjects they are expected to teach, or they
shall have the academic credentials and instructional experience
necessary for teaching the subjects. Instructors shall demonstrate
competent instructional skills and knowledge of the applicable subject
matter.
(6) Training certification. Employees and supervisors that have
received and successfully completed the training and field experience
specified in paragraphs (e)(1) through (e)(4) of this section shall be
certified by their instructor or the head instructor and trained
supervisor as having successfully completed the necessary training. A
written certificate shall be given to each person so certified. Any
person who has not been so certified or who does not meet the
requirements of paragraph (e)(9) of this section shall be prohibited
from engaging in hazardous waste operations.
(7) Emergency response. Employees who are engaged in responding to
hazardous emergency situations at hazardous waste clean-up sites that
may expose them to hazardous substances shall be trained in how to
respond to such expected emergencies.
(8) Refresher training. Employees specified in paragraph (e)(1) of
this section, and managers and supervisors specified in paragraph (e)(4)
of this section, shall receive eight hours of refresher training
annually on the items specified in paragraph (e)(2) and/or (e)(4) of
this section, any critique of incidents that have occurred in the past
year that can serve as training examples of related work, and other
relevant topics.
(9) Equivalent training. Employers who can show by documentation or
certification that an employee's work experience and/or training has
resulted in training equivalent to that training required in paragraphs
(e)(1) through (e)(4) of this section shall not be required to provide
the initial training requirements of those paragraphs to such employees
and shall provide a copy of the certification or documentation to the
employee upon request. However, certified employees or employees with
equivalent training new
[[Page 378]]
to a site shall receive appropriate, site specific training before site
entry and have appropriate supervised field experience at the new site.
Equivalent training includes any academic training or the training that
existing employees might have already received from actual hazardous
waste site work experience.
(f) Medical surveillance--(1) General. Employers engaged in
operations specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iv) of this
section and not covered by (a)(2)(iii) exceptions and employers of
employees specified in paragraph (q)(9) shall institute a medical
surveillance program in accordance with this paragraph.
(2) Employees covered. The medical surveillance program shall be
instituted by the employer for the following employees:
(i) All employees who are or may be exposed to hazardous substances
or health hazards at or above the permissible exposure limits or, if
there is no permissible exposure limit, above the published exposure
levels for these substances, without regard to the use of respirators,
for 30 days or more a year;
(ii) All employees who wear a respirator for 30 days or more a year
or as required by Sec. 1910.134;
(iii) All employees who are injured, become ill or develop signs or
symptoms due to possible overexposure involving hazardous substances or
health hazards from an emergency response or hazardous waste operation;
and
(iv) Members of HAZMAT teams.
(3) Frequency of medical examinations and consultations. Medical
examinations and consultations shall be made available by the employer
to each employee covered under paragraph (f)(2) of this section on the
following schedules:
(i) For employees covered under paragraphs (f)(2)(i), (f)(2)(ii),
and (f)(2)(iv):
(A) Prior to assignment;
(B) At least once every twelve months for each employee covered
unless the attending physician believes a longer interval (not greater
than biennially) is appropriate;
(C) At termination of employment or reassignment to an area where
the employee would not be covered if the employee has not had an
examination within the last six months;
(D) As soon as possible upon notification by an employee that the
employee has developed signs or symptoms indicating possible
overexposure to hazardous substances or health hazards, or that the
employee has been injured or exposed above the permissible exposure
limits or published exposure levels in an emergency situation;
(E) At more frequent times, if the examining physician determines
that an increased frequency of examination is medically necessary.
(ii) For employees covered under paragraph (f)(2)(iii) and for all
employees including those of employers covered by paragraph (a)(1)(v)
who may have been injured, received a health impairment, developed signs
or symptoms which may have resulted from exposure to hazardous
substances resulting from an emergency incident, or exposed during an
emergency incident to hazardous substances at concentrations above the
permissible exposure limits or the published exposure levels without the
necessary personal protective equipment being used:
(A) As soon as possible following the emergency incident or
development of signs or symptoms;
(B) At additional times, if the examining physician determines that
follow-up examinations or consultations are medically necessary.
(4) Content of medical examinations and consultations. (i) Medical
examinations required by paragraph (f)(3) of this section shall include
a medical and work history (or updated history if one is in the
employee's file) with special emphasis on symptoms related to the
handling of hazardous substances and health hazards, and to fitness for
duty including the ability to wear any required PPE under conditions
(i.e., temperature extremes) that may be expected at the work site.
(ii) The content of medical examinations or consultations made
available to employees pursuant to paragraph (f) shall be determined by
the attending physician. The guidelines in the Occupational Safety and
Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities (See appendix
D, Reference 10) should be consulted.
[[Page 379]]
(5) Examination by a physician and costs. All medical examinations
and procedures shall be performed by or under the supervision of a
licensed physician, preferably one knowledgeable in occupational
medicine, and shall be provided without cost to the employee, without
loss of pay, and at a reasonable time and place.
(6) Information provided to the physician. The employer shall
provide one copy of this standard and its appendices to the attending
physician, and in addition the following for each employee:
(i) A description of the employee's duties as they relate to the
employee's exposures.
(ii) The employee's exposure levels or anticipated exposure levels.
(iii) A description of any personal protective equipment used or to
be used.
(iv) Information from previous medical examinations of the employee
which is not readily available to the examining physician.
(v) Information required by Sec. 1910.134.
(7) Physician's written opinion. (i) The employer shall obtain and
furnish the employee with a copy of a written opinion from the attending
physician containing the following:
(A) The physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any
detected medical conditions which would place the employee at increased
risk of material impairment of the employee's health from work in
hazardous waste operations or emergency response, or from respirator
use.
(B) The physician's recommended limitations upon the employee's
assigned work.
(C) The results of the medical examination and tests if requested by
the employee.
(D) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician
of the results of the medical examination and any medical conditions
which require further examination or treatment.
(ii) The written opinion obtained by the employer shall not reveal
specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposures.
(8) Recordkeeping. (i) An accurate record of the medical
surveillance required by paragraph (f) of this section shall be
retained. This record shall be retained for the period specified and
meet the criteria of 29 CFR 1910.20.
(ii) The record required in paragraph (f)(8)(i) of this section
shall include at least the following information:
(A) The name and social security number of the employee;
(B) Physician's written opinions, recommended limitations, and
results of examinations and tests;
(C) Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to hazardous
substances;
(D) A copy of the information provided to the examining physician by
the employer, with the exception of the standard and its appendices.
(g) Engineering controls, work practices, and personal protective
equipment for employee protection. Engineering controls, work practices,
personal protective equipment, or a combination of these shall be
implemented in accordance with this paragraph to protect employees from
exposure to hazardous substances and safety and health hazards.
(1) Engineering controls, work practices and PPE for substances
regulated in subparts G and Z. (i) Engineering controls and work
practices shall be instituted to reduce and maintain employee exposure
to or below the permissible exposure limits for substances regulated by
29 CFR part 1910, to the extent required by subpart Z, except to the
extent that such controls and practices are not feasible.
Note to paragraph (g)(1)(i): Engineering controls which may be
feasible include the use of pressurized cabs or control booths on
equipment, and/or the use of remotely operated material handling
equipment. Work practices which may be feasible are removing all non-
essential employees from potential exposure during opening of drums,
wetting down dusty operations and locating employees upwind of possible
hazards.
(ii) Whenever engineering controls and work practices are not
feasible or not required, any reasonable combination of engineering
controls, work practices and PPE shall be used to reduce and maintain
employee exposures to or below the permissible exposure limits or dose
limits for substances regulated by 29 CFR part 1910, subpart Z.
[[Page 380]]
(iii) The employer shall not implement a schedule of employee
rotation as a means of compliance with permissible exposure limits or
dose limits except when there is no other feasible way of complying with
the airborne or dermal dose limits for ionizing radiation.
(iv) The provisions of 29 CFR, subpart G, shall be followed.
(2) Engineering controls, work practices, and PPE for substances not
regulated in subparts G and Z. An appropriate combination of engineering
controls, work practices and personal protective equipment shall be used
to reduce and maintain employee exposure to or below published exposure
levels for hazardous substances and health hazards not regulated by 29
CFR part 1910, subparts G and Z. The employer may use the published
literature and MSDS as a guide in making the employer's determination as
to what level of protection the employer believes is appropriate for
hazardous substances and health hazards for which there is no
permissible exposure limit or published exposure limit.
(3) Personal protective equipment selection. (i) Personal protective
equipment (PPE) shall be selected and used which will protect employees
from the hazards and potential hazards they are likely to encounter as
identified during the site characterization and analysis.
(ii) Personal protective equipment selection shall be based on an
evaluation of the performance characteristics of the PPE relative to the
requirements and limitations of the site, the task-specific conditions
and duration, and the hazards and potential hazards identified at the
site.
(iii) Positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus, or
positive pressure air-line respirators equipped with an escape air
supply, shall be used when chemical exposure levels present will create
a substantial possibility of immediate death, immediate serious illness
or injury, or impair the ability to escape.
(iv) Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suits (protection
equivalent to Level A protection as recommended in appendix B) shall be
used in conditions where skin absorption of a hazardous substance may
result in a substantial possibility of immediate death, immediate
serious illness or injury, or impair the ability to escape.
(v) The level of protection provided by PPE selection shall be
increased when additional information on site conditions indicates that
increased protection is necessary to reduce employee exposures below
permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels for hazardous
substances and health hazards. (See appendix B for guidance on selecting
PPE ensembles.)
Note to paragraph (g)(3): The level of employee protection provided
may be decreased when additional information or site conditions show
that decreased protection will not result in hazardous exposures to
employees.
(vi) Personal protective equipment shall be selected and used to
meet the requirements of 29 CFR part 1910, subpart I, and additional
requirements specified in this section.
(4) Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suits. (i) Totally-
encapsulating suits shall protect employees from the particular hazards
which are identified during site characterization and analysis.
(ii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall be capable of maintaining
positive air pressure. (See appendix A for a test method which may be
used to evaluate this requirement.)
(iii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall be capable of preventing
inward test gas leakage of more than 0.5 percent. (See appendix A for a
test method which may be used to evaluate this requirement.)
(5) Personal protective equipment (PPE) program. A written personal
protective equipment program, which is part of the employer's safety and
health program required in paragraph (b) of this section or required in
paragraph (p)(1) of this section and which is also a part of the site-
specific safety and health plan shall be established. The PPE program
shall address the elements listed below. When elements, such as donning
and doffing procedures, are provided by the manufacturer of a piece of
equipment and are attached to the plan, they need not be rewritten into
the plan as long as they adequately address the procedure or element.
(i) PPE selection based upon site hazards,
[[Page 381]]
(ii) PPE use and limitations of the equipment,
(iii) Work mission duration,
(iv) PPE maintenance and storage,
(v) PPE decontamination and disposal,
(vi) PPE training and proper fitting,
(vii) PPE donning and doffing procedures,
(viii) PPE inspection procedures prior to, during, and after use,
(ix) Evaluation of the effectiveness of the PPE program, and
(x) Limitations during temperature extremes, heat stress, and other
appropriate medical considerations.
(h) Monitoring--(1) General. (i) Monitoring shall be performed in
accordance with this paragraph where there may be a question of employee
exposure to hazardous concentrations of hazardous substances in order to
assure proper selection of engineering controls, work practices and
personal protective equipment so that employees are not exposed to
levels which exceed permissible exposure limits, or published exposure
levels if there are no permissible exposure limits, for hazardous
substances.
(ii) Air monitoring shall be used to identify and quantify airborne
levels of hazardous substances and safety and health hazards in order to
determine the appropriate level of employee protection needed on site.
(2) Initial entry. Upon initial entry, representative air monitoring
shall be conducted to identify any IDLH condition, exposure over
permissible exposure limits or published exposure levels, exposure over
a radioactive material's dose limits or other dangerous condition such
as the presence of flammable atmospheres or oxygen-deficient
environments.
(3) Periodic monitoring. Periodic monitoring shall be conducted when
the possibility of an IDLH condition or flammable atmosphere has
developed or when there is indication that exposures may have risen over
permissible exposure limits or published exposure levels since prior
monitoring. Situations where it shall be considered whether the
possibility that exposures have risen are as follows:
(i) When work begins on a different portion of the site.
(ii) When contaminants other than those previously identified are
being handled.
(iii) When a different type of operation is initiated (e.g., drum
opening as opposed to exploratory well drilling).
(iv) When employees are handling leaking drums or containers or
working in areas with obvious liquid contamination (e.g., a spill or
lagoon).
(4) Monitoring of high-risk employees. After the actual clean-up
phase of any hazardous waste operation commences; for example, when
soil, surface water or containers are moved or disturbed; the employer
shall monitor those employees likely to have the highest exposures to
hazardous substances and health hazards likely to be present above
permissible exposure limits or published exposure levels by using
personal sampling frequently enough to characterize employee exposures.
If the employees likely to have the highest exposure are over
permissible exposure limits or published exposure limits, then
monitoring shall continue to determine all employees likely to be above
those limits. The employer may utilize a representative sampling
approach by documenting that the employees and chemicals chosen for
monitoring are based on the criteria stated above.
Note to paragraph (h): It is not required to monitor employees
engaged in site characterization operations covered by paragraph (c) of
this section.
(i) Informational programs. Employers shall develop and implement a
program, which is part of the employer's safety and health program
required in paragraph (b) of this section, to inform employees,
contractors, and subcontractors (or their representative) actually
engaged in hazardous waste operations of the nature, level and degree of
exposure likely as a result of participation in such hazardous waste
operations. Employees, contractors and subcontractors working outside of
the operations part of a site are not covered by this standard.
(j) Handling drums and containers--(1) General. (i) Hazardous
substances and contaminated soils, liquids, and other residues shall be
handled, transported, labeled, and disposed of in accordance with this
paragraph.
[[Page 382]]
(ii) Drums and containers used during the clean-up shall meet the
appropriate DOT, OSHA, and EPA regulations for the wastes that they
contain.
(iii) When practical, drums and containers shall be inspected and
their integrity shall be assured prior to being moved. Drums or
containers that cannot be inspected before being moved because of
storage conditions (i.e., buried beneath the earth, stacked behind other
drums, stacked several tiers high in a pile, etc.) shall be moved to an
accessible location and inspected prior to further handling.
(iv) Unlabelled drums and containers shall be considered to contain
hazardous substances and handled accordingly until the contents are
positively identified and labeled.
(v) Site operations shall be organized to minimize the amount of
drum or container movement.
(vi) Prior to movement of drums or containers, all employees exposed
to the transfer operation shall be warned of the potential hazards
associated with the contents of the drums or containers.
(vii) U.S. Department of Transportation specified salvage drums or
containers and suitable quantities of proper absorbent shall be kept
available and used in areas where spills, leaks, or ruptures may occur.
(viii) Where major spills may occur, a spill containment program,
which is part of the employer's safety and health program required in
paragraph (b) of this section, shall be implemented to contain and
isolate the entire volume of the hazardous substance being transferred.
(ix) Drums and containers that cannot be moved without rupture,
leakage, or spillage shall be emptied into a sound container using a
device classified for the material being transferred.
(x) A ground-penetrating system or other type of detection system or
device shall be used to estimate the location and depth of buried drums
or containers.
(xi) Soil or covering material shall be removed with caution to
prevent drum or container rupture.
(xii) Fire extinguishing equipment meeting the requirements of 29
CFR part 1910, subpart L, shall be on hand and ready for use to control
incipient fires.
(2) Openinq drums and containers. The following procedures shall be
followed in areas where drums or containers are being opened:
(i) Where an airline respirator system is used, connections to the
source of air supply shall be protected from contamination and the
entire system shall be protected from physical damage.
(ii) Employees not actually involved in opening drums or containers
shall be kept a safe distance from the drums or containers being opened.
(iii) If employees must work near or adjacent to drums or containers
being opened, a suitable shield that does not interfere with the work
operation shall be placed between the employee and the drums or
containers being opened to protect the employee in case of accidental
explosion.
(iv) Controls for drum or container opening equipment, monitoring
equipment, and fire suppression equipment shall be located behind the
explosion-resistant barrier.
(v) When there is a reasonable possibility of flammable atmospheres
being present, material handling equipment and hand tools shall be of
the type to prevent sources of ignition.
(vi) Drums and containers shall be opened in such a manner that
excess interior pressure will be safely relieved. If pressure can not be
relieved from a remote location, appropriate shielding shall be placed
between the employee and the drums or containers to reduce the risk of
employee injury.
(vii) Employees shall not stand upon or work from drums or
containers.
(3) Material handling equipment. Material handiing equipment used to
transfer drums and containers shall be selected, positioned and operated
to minimize sources of ignition related to the equipment from igniting
vapors released from ruptured drums or containers.
(4) Radioactive wastes. Drums and containers containing radioactive
wastes shall not be handled until such time as their hazard to employees
is properly assessed.
(5) Shock sensitive wastes. As a minimum, the following special
precautions shall be taken when drums
[[Page 383]]
and containers containing or suspected of containing shock-sensitive
wastes are handled:
(i) All non-essential employees shall be evacuated from the area of
transfer.
(ii) Material handling equipment shall be provided with explosive
containment devices or protective shields to protect equipment operators
from exploding containers.
(iii) An employee alarm system capable of being perceived above
surrounding light and noise conditions shall be used to signal the
commencement and completion of explosive waste handling activities.
(iv) Continuous communications (i.e., portable radios, hand signals,
telephones, as appropriate) shall be maintained between the employee-in-
charge of the immediate handling area and both the site safety and
health supervisor and the command post until such time as the handling
operation is completed. Communication equipment or methods that could
cause shock sensitive materials to explode shall not be used.
(v) Drums and containers under pressure, as evidenced by bulging or
swelling, shall not be moved until such time as the cause for excess
pressure is determined and appropriate containment procedures have been
implemented to protect employees from explosive relief of the drum.
(vi) Drums and containers containing packaged laboratory wastes
shall be considered to contain shock-sensitive or explosive materials
until they have been characterized.
Caution: Shipping of shock sensitive wastes may be prohibited under
U.S. Department of Transportation regulations. Employers and their
shippers should refer to 49 CFR 173.21 and 173.50.
(6) Laboratory waste packs. In addition to the requirements of
paragraph (j)(5) of this section, the following precautions shall be
taken, as a minimum, in handling laboratory waste packs (lab packs):
(i) Lab packs shall be opened only when necessary and then only by
an individual knowledgeable in the inspection, classification, and
segregation of the containers within the pack according to the hazards
of the wastes.
(ii) If crystalline material is noted on any container, the contents
shall be handled as a shock-sensitive waste until the contents are
identified.
(7) Sampling of drum and container contents. Sampling of containers
and drums shall be done in accordance with a sampling procedure which is
part of the site safety and health plan developed for and available to
employees and others at the specific worksite.
(8) Shipping and transport. (i) Drums and containers shall be
identified and classified prior to packaging for shipment.
(ii) Drum or container staging areas shall be kept to the minimum
number necessary to identify and classify materials safely and prepare
them for transport.
(iii) Staging areas shall be provided with adequate access and
egress routes.
(iv) Bulking of hazardous wastes shall be permitted only after a
thorough characterization of the materials has been completed.
(9) Tank and vault procedures. (i) Tanks and vaults containing
hazardous substances shall be handled in a manner similar to that for
drums and containers, taking into consideration the size of the tank or
vault.
(ii) Appropriate tank or vault entry procedures as described in the
employer's safety and health plan shall be followed whenever employees
must enter a tank or vault.
(k) Decontamination--(1) General. Procedures for all phases of
decontamination shall be developed and implemented in accordance with
this paragraph.
(2) Decontamination procedures. (i) A decontamination procedure
shall be developed, communicated to employees and implemented before any
employees or equipment may enter areas on site where potential for
exposure to hazardous substances exists.
(ii) Standard operating procedures shall be developed to minimize
employee contact with hazardous substances or with equipment that has
contacted hazardous substances.
[[Page 384]]
(iii) All employees leaving a contaminated area shall be
appropriately decontaminated; all contaminated clothing and equipment
leaving a contaminated area shall be appropriately disposed of or
decontaminated.
(iv) Decontamination procedures shall be monitored by the site
safety and health supervisor to determine their effectiveness. When such
procedures are found to be ineffective, appropriate steps shall be taken
to correct any deficiencies.
(3) Location. Decontamination shall be performed in geographical
areas that will minimize the exposure of uncontaminated employees or
equipment to contaminated employees or equipment.
(4) Equipment and solvents. All equipment and solvents used for
decontamination shall be decontaminated or disposed of properly.
(5) Personal protective clothing and equipment. (i) Protective
clothing and equipment shall be decontaminated, cleaned, laundered,
maintained or replaced as needed to maintain their effectiveness.
(ii) Employees whose non-impermeable clothing becomes wetted with
hazardous substances shall immediately remove that clothing and proceed
to shower. The clothing shall be disposed of or decontaminated before it
is removed from the work zone.
(6) Unauthorized employees. Unauthorized employees shall not remove
protective clothing or equipment from change rooms.
(7) Commercial laundries or cleaning establishments. Commercial
laundries or cleaning establishments that decontaminate protective
clothing or equipment shall be informed of the potentially harmful
effects of exposures to hazardous substances.
(8) Showers and change rooms. Where the decontamination procedure
indicates a need for regular showers and change rooms outside of a
contaminated area, they shall be provided and meet the requirements of
29 CFR 1910.141. If temperature conditions prevent the effective use of
water, then other effective means for cleansing shall be provided and
used.
(l) Emergency response by employees at uncontrolled hazardous waste
sites--(1) Emergency response plan. (i) An emergency response plan shall
be developed and implemented by all employers within the scope of
paragraphs (a)(1) (i)-(ii) of this section to handle anticipated
emergencies prior to the commencement of hazardous waste operations. The
plan shall be in writing and available for inspection and copying by
employees, their representatives, OSHA personnel and other governmental
agencies with relevant responsibilities.
(ii) Employers who will evacuate their employees from the danger
area when an emergency occurs, and who do not permit any of their
employees to assist in handling the emergency, are exempt from the
requirements of this paragraph if they provide an emergency action plan
complying with Sec. 1910.38(a) of this part.
(2) Elements of an emergency response plan. The employer shall
develop an emergency response plan for emergencies which shall address,
as a minimum, the following:
(i) Pre-emergency planning.
(ii) Personnel roles, lines of authority, and communication.
(iii) Emergency recognition and prevention.
(iv) Safe distances and places of refuge.
(v) Site security and control.
(vi) Evacuation routes and procedures.
(vii) Decontamination procedures which are not covered by the site
safety and health plan.
(viii) Emergency medical treatment and first aid.
(ix) Emergency alerting and response procedures.
(x) Critique of response and follow-up.
(xi) PPE and emergency equipment.
(3) Procedures for handling emergency incidents. (i) In addition to
the elements for the emergency response plan required in paragraph
(l)(2) of this section, the following elements shall be included for
emergency response plans:
(A) Site topography, layout, and prevailing weather conditions.
(B) Procedures for reporting incidents to local, state, and federal
governmental agencies.
[[Page 385]]
(ii) The emergency response plan shall be a separate section of the
Site Safety and Health Plan.
(iii) The emergency response plan shall be compatible and integrated
with the disaster, fire and/or emergency response plans of local, state,
and federal agencies.
(iv) The emergency response plan shall be rehearsed regularly as
part of the overall training program for site operations.
(v) The site emergency response plan shall be reviewed periodically
and, as necessary, be amended to keep it current with new or changing
site conditions or information.
(vi) An employee alarm system shall be installed in accordance with
29 CFR 1910.165 to notify employees of an emergency situation; to stop
work activities if necessary; to lower background noise in order to
speed communication; and to begin emergency procedures.
(vii) Based upon the information available at time of the emergency,
the employer shall evaluate the incident and the site response
capabilities and proceed with the appropriate steps to implement the
site emergency response plan.
(m) Illumination. Areas accessible to employees shall be lighted to
not less than the minimum illumination intensities listed in the
following Table H-120.1 while any work is in progress:
Table H-120.1--Minimum Illumination Intensities in Foot-Candles
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Foot-candles Area or operations
------------------------------------------------------------------------
5...................................... General site areas.
3...................................... Excavation and waste areas,
accessways, active storage
areas, loading platforms,
refueling, and field
maintenance areas.
5...................................... Indoors: Warehouses,
corridors, hallways, and
exitways.
5...................................... Tunnels, shafts, and general
underground work areas.
(Exception: Minimum of 10 foot-
candles is required at tunnel
and shaft heading during
drilling mucking, and scaling.
Mine Safety and Health
Administration approved cap
lights shall be acceptable for
use in the tunnel heading.)
10..................................... General shops (e.g.,
mechanical and electrical
equipment rooms, active
storerooms, barracks or living
quarters, locker or dressing
rooms, dining areas, and
indoor toilets and workrooms.)
30..................................... First aid stations,
infirmaries, and offices.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(n) Sanitation at temporary workplaces--(1) Potable water. (i) An
adequate supply of potable water shall be provided on the site.
(ii) Portable containers used to dispense drinking water shall be
capable of being tightly closed, and equipped with a tap. Water shall
not be dipped from containers.
(iii) Any container used to distribute drinking water shall be
clearly marked as to the nature of its contents and not used for any
other purpose.
(iv) Where single service cups (to be used but once) are supplied,
both a sanitary container for the unused cups and a receptacle for
disposing of the used cups shall be provided.
(2) Nonpotable water. (i) Outlets for nonpotable water, such as
water for firefighting purposes, shall be identified to indicate clearly
that the water is unsafe and is not to be used for drinking, washing, or
cooking purposes.
(ii) There shall be no cross-connection, open or potential, between
a system furnishing potable water and a system furnishing nonpotable
water.
(3) Toilet facilities. (i) Toilets shall be provided for employees
according to the following Table H-120.2.
Table H-120.2--Toilet Facilities
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum number of
Number of employees facilities
------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 or fewer............................... One.
More than 20, fewer than 200.............. One toilet seat and one
urinal per 40 employees.
More than 200............................. One toilet seat and one
urinal per 50 employees.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) Under temporary field conditions, provisions shall be made to
assure that at least one toilet facility is available.
(iii) Hazardous waste sites not provided with a sanitary sewer shall
be provided with the following toilet facilities unless prohibited by
local codes:
(A) Chemical toilets;
(B) Recirculating toilets;
(C) Combustion toilets; or
(D) Flush toilets.
(iv) The requirements of this paragraph for sanitation facilities
shall not apply to mobile crews having transportation readily available
to nearby toilet facilities.
(v) Doors entering toilet facilities shall be provided with entrance
locks controlled from inside the facility.
[[Page 386]]
(4) Food handling. All food service facilities and operations for
employees shall meet the applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations of
the jurisdictions in which they are located.
(5) Temporary sleeping quarters. When temporary sleeping quarters
are provided, they shall be heated, ventilated, and lighted.
(6) Washing facilities. The employer shall provide adequate washing
facilities for employees engaged in operations where hazardous
substances may be harmful to employees. Such facilities shall be in near
proximity to the worksite; in areas where exposures are below
permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels and which are
under the controls of the employer; and shall be so equipped as to
enable employees to remove hazardous substances from themselves.
(7) Showers and change rooms. When hazardous waste clean-up or
removal operations commence on a site and the duration of the work will
require six months or greater time to complete, the employer shall
provide showers and change rooms for all employees exposed to hazardous
substances and health hazards involved in hazardous waste clean-up or
removal operations.
(i) Showers shall be provided and shall meet the requirements of 29
CFR 1910.141(d)(3).
(ii) Change rooms shall be provided and shall meet the requirements
of 29 CFR 1910.141(e). Change rooms shall consist of two separate change
areas separated by the shower area required in paragraph (n)(7)(i) of
this section. One change area, with an exit leading off the worksite,
shall provide employees with a clean area where they can remove, store,
and put on street clothing. The second area, with an exit to the
worksite, shall provide employees with an area where they can put on,
remove and store work clothing and personal protective equipment.
(iii) Showers and change rooms shall be located in areas where
exposures are below the permissible exposure limits and published
exposure levels. If this cannot be accomplished, then a ventilation
system shall be provided that will supply air that is below the
permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels.
(iv) Employers shall assure that employees shower at the end of
their work shift and when leaving the hazardous waste site.
(o) New technology programs. (1) The employer shall develop and
implement procedures for the introduction of effective new technologies
and equipment developed for the improved protection of employees working
with hazardous waste clean-up operations, and the same shall be
implemented as part of the site safety and health program to assure that
employee protection is being maintained.
(2) New technologies, equipment or control measures available to the
industry, such as the use of foams, absorbents, adsorbents,
neutralizers, or other means to suppress the level of air contaminates
while excavating the site or for spill control, shall be evaluated by
employers or their representatives. Such an evaluation shall be done to
determine the effectiveness of the new methods, materials, or equipment
before implementing their use on a large scale for enhancing employee
protection. Information and data from manufacturers or suppliers may be
used as part of the employer's evaluation effort. Such evaluations shall
be made available to OSHA upon request.
(p) Certain Operations Conducted Under the Resource Conservation and
Recovery Act of 1976 (RCRA). Employers conducting operations at
treatment, storage and disposal (TSD) facilities specified in paragraph
(a)(1)(iv) of this section shall provide and implement the programs
specified in this paragraph. See the ``Notes and Exceptions'' to
paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section for employers not covered.)''.
(1) Safety and health program. The employer shall develop and
implement a written safety and health program for employees involved in
hazardous waste operations that shall be available for inspection by
employees, their representatives and OSHA personnel. The program shall
be designed to identify, evaluate and control safety and health hazards
in their facilities for the purpose of employee protection, to provide
for emergency response meeting the requirements of paragraph (p)(8) of
this section and to address as appropriate site analysis, engineering
controls,
[[Page 387]]
maximum exposure limits, hazardous waste handling procedures and uses of
new technologies.
(2) Hazard communication program. The employer shall implement a
hazard communication program meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
1910.1200 as part of the employer's safety and program.
Note to Sec. 1910.120: The exemption for hazardous waste provided in
Sec. 1910.1200 is applicable to this section.
(3) Medical surveillance program. The employer shall develop and
implement a medical surveillance program meeting the requirements of
paragraph (f) of this section.
(4) Decontamination program. The employer shall develop and
implement a decontamination procedure meeting the requirements of
paragraph (k) of this section.
(5) New technology program. The employer shall develop and implement
procedures meeting the requirements of paragraph (o) of this section for
introducing new and innovative equipment into the workplace.
(6) Material handling program. Where employees will be handling
drums or containers, the employer shall develop and implement procedures
meeting the requirements of paragraphs (j)(1) (ii) through (viii) and
(xi) of this section, as well as (j)(3) and (j)(8) of this section prior
to starting such work.
(7) Training program--(i) New employees. The employer shall develop
and implement a training program, which is part of the employer's safety
and health program, for employees exposed to health hazards or hazardous
substances at TSD operations to enable the employees to perform their
assigned duties and functions in a safe and healthful manner so as not
endanger themselves or other employees. The initial training shall be
for 24 hours and refresher training shall be for eight hours annually.
Employees who have received the initial training required by this
paragraph shall be given a written certificate attesting that they have
successfully completed the necessary training.
(ii) Current employees. Employers who can show by an employee's
previous work experience and/or training that the employee has had
training equivalent to the initial training required by this paragraph,
shall be considered as meeting the initial training requirements of this
paragraph as to that employee. Equivalent training includes the training
that existing employees might have already received from actual site
work experience. Current employees shall receive eight hours of
refresher training annually.
(iii) Trainers. Trainers who teach initial training shall have
satisfactorily completed a training course for teaching the subjects
they are expected to teach or they shall have the academic credentials
and instruction experience necessary to demonstrate a good command of
the subject matter of the courses and competent instructional skills.
(8) Emergency response program--(i) Emergency response plan. An
emergency response plan shall be developed and implemented by all
employers. Such plans need not duplicate any of the subjects fully
addressed in the employer's contingency planning required by permits,
such as those issued by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
provided that the contingency plan is made part of the emergency
response plan. The emergency response plan shall be a written portion of
the employers safety and health program required in paragraph (p)(1) of
this section. Employers who will evacuate their employees from the
worksite location when an emergency occurs and who do not permit any of
their employees to assist in handling the emergency are exempt from the
requirements of paragraph (p)(8) if they provide an emergency action
plan complying with Sec. 1910.38(a) of this part.
(ii) Elements of an emergency response plan. The employer shall
develop an emergency response plan for emergencies which shall address,
as a minimum, the following areas to the extent that they are not
addressed in any specific program required in this paragraph:
(A) Pre-emergency planning and coordination with outside parties.
(B) Personnel roles, lines of authority, and communication.
(C) Emergency recognition and prevention.
[[Page 388]]
(D) Safe distances and places of refuge.
(E) Site security and control.
(F) Evacuation routes and procedures.
(G) Decontamination procedures.
(H) Emergency medical treatment and first aid.
(I) Emergency alerting and response procedures.
(J) Critique of response and follow-up.
(K) PPE and emergency equipment.
(iii) Training. (A) Training for emergency response employees shall
be completed before they are called upon to perform in real emergencies.
Such training shall include the elements of the emergency response plan,
standard operating procedures the employer has established for the job,
the personal protective equipment to be worn and procedures for handling
emergency incidents.
Exception #1: An employer need not train all employees to the degree
specified if the employer divides the work force in a manner such that a
sufficient number of employees who have responsibility to control
emergencies have the training specified, and all other employees, who
may first respond to an emergency incident, have sufficient awareness
training to recognize that an emergency response situation exists and
that they are instructed in that case to summon the fully trained
employees and not attempt control activities for which they are not
trained.
Exception #2: An employer need not train all employees to the degree
specified if arrangements have been made in advance for an outside
fully-trained emergency response team to respond in a reasonable period
and all employees, who may come to the incident first, have sufficient
awareness training to recognize that an emergency response situation
exists and they have been instructed to call the designated outside
fully-trained emergency response team for assistance.
(B) Employee members of TSD facility emergency response
organizations shall be trained to a level of competence in the
recognition of health and safety hazards to protect themselves and other
employees. This would include training in the methods used to minimize
the risk from safety and health hazards; in the safe use of control
equipment; in the selection and use of appropriate personal protective
equipment; in the safe operating procedures to be used at the incident
scene; in the techniques of coordination with other employees to
minimize risks; in the appropriate response to over exposure from health
hazards or injury to themselves and other employees; and in the
recognition of subsequent symptoms which may result from over exposures.
(C) The employer shall certify that each covered employee has
attended and successfully completed the training required in paragraph
(p)(8)(iii) of this section, or shall certify the employee's competency
at least yearly. The method used to demonstrate competency for
certification of training shall be recorded and maintained by the
employer.
(iv) Procedures for handling emergency incidents. (A) In addition to
the elements for the emergency response plan required in paragraph
(p)(8)(ii) of this section, the following elements shall be included for
emergency response plans to the extent that they do not repeat any
information already contained in the emergency response plan:
(1) Site topography, layout, and prevailing weather conditions.
(2) Procedures for reporting incidents to local, state, and federal
governmental agencies.
(B) The emergency response plan shall be compatible and integrated
with the disaster, fire and/or emergency response plans of local, state,
and federal agencies.
(C) The emergency response plan shall be rehearsed regularly as part
of the overall training program for site operations.
(D) The site emergency response plan shall be reviewed periodically
and, as necessary, be amended to keep it current with new or changing
site conditions or information.
(E) An employee alarm system shall be installed in accordance with
29 CFR 1910.165 to notify employees of an emergency situation; to stop
work activities if necessary; to lower background noise in order to
speed communication; and to begin emergency procedures.
(F) Based upon the information available at time of the emergency,
the employer shall evaluate the incident and
[[Page 389]]
the site response capabilities and proceed with the appropriate steps to
implement the site emergency response plan.
(q) Emerqency response to hazardous substance releases. This
paragraph covers employers whose employees are engaged in emergency
response no matter where it occurs except that it does not cover
employees engaged in operations specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i)
through (a)(1)(iv) of this section. Those emergency response
organizations who have developed and implemented programs equivalent to
this paragraph for handling releases of hazardous substances pursuant to
section 303 of the Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986
(Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act of 1986, 42 U.S.C.
11003) shall be deemed to have met the requirements of this paragraph.
(1) Emergency response plan. An emergency response plan shall be
developed and implemented to handle anticipated emergencies prior to the
commencement of emergency response operations. The plan shall be in
writing and available for inspection and copying by employees, their
representatives and OSHA personnel. Employers who will evacuate their
employees from the danger area when an emergency occurs, and who do not
permit any of their employees to assist in handling the emergency, are
exempt from the requirements of this paragraph if they provide an
emergency action plan in accordance with Sec. 1910.38(a) of this part.
(2) Elements of an emergency response plan. The employer shall
develop an emergency response plan for emergencies which shall address,
as a minimum, the following to the extent that they are not addressed
elsewhere:
(i) Pre-emergency planning and coordination with outside parties.
(ii) Personnel roles, lines of authority, training, and
communication.
(iii) Emergency recognition and prevention.
(iv) Safe distances and places of refuge.
(v) Site security and control.
(vi) Evacuation routes and procedures.
(vii) Decontamination.
(viii) Emergency medical treatment and first aid.
(ix) Emergency alerting and response procedures.
(x) Critique of response and follow-up.
(xi) PPE and emergency equipment.
(xii) Emergency response organizations may use the local emergency
response plan or the state emergency response plan or both, as part of
their emergency response plan to avoid duplication. Those items of the
emergency response plan that are being properly addressed by the SARA
Title III plans may be substituted into their emergency plan or
otherwise kept together for the employer and employee's use.
(3) Procedures for handlinq emergency response. (i) The senior
emergency response official responding to an emergency shall become the
individual in charge of a site-specific Incident Command System (ICS).
All emergency responders and their communications shall be coordinated
and controlled through the individual in charge of the ICS assisted by
the senior official present for each employer.
Note to paragraph (q)(3)(i).--The ``senior official'' at an
emergency response is the most senior official on the site who has the
responsibility for controlling the operations at the site. Initially it
is the senior officer on the first-due piece of responding emergency
apparatus to arrive on the incident scene. As more senior officers
arrive (i.e., battalion chief, fire chief, state law enforcement
official, site coordinator, etc.) the position is passed up the line of
authority which has been previously established.
(ii) The individual in charge of the ICS shall identify, to the
extent possible, all hazardous substances or conditions present and
shall address as appropriate site analysis, use of engineering controls,
maximum exposure limits, hazardous substance handling procedures, and
use of any new technologies.
(iii) Based on the hazardous substances and/or conditions present,
the individual in charge of the ICS shall implement appropriate
emergency operations, and assure that the personal protective equipment
worn is appropriate for the hazards to be encountered. However, personal
protective equipment shall meet, at a minimum,
[[Page 390]]
the criteria contained in 29 CFR 1910.156(e) when worn while performing
fire fighting operations beyond the incipient stage for any incident.
(iv) Employees engaged in emergency response and exposed to
hazardous substances presenting an inhalation hazard or potential
inhalation hazard shall wear positive pressure self-contained breathing
apparatus while engaged in emergency response, until such time that the
individual in charge of the ICS determines through the use of air
monitoring that a decreased level of respiratory protection will not
result in hazardous exposures to employees.
(v) The individual in charge of the ICS shall limit the number of
emergency response personnel at the emergency site, in those areas of
potential or actual exposure to incident or site hazards, to those who
are actively performing emergency operations. However, operations in
hazardous areas shall be performed using the buddy system in groups of
two or more.
(vi) Back-up personnel shall stand by with equipment ready to
provide assistance or rescue. Advance first aid support personnel, as a
minimum, shall also stand by with medical equipment and transportation
capability.
(vii) The individual in charge of the ICS shall designate a safety
official, who is knowledgable in the operations being implemented at the
emergency response site, with specific responsibility to identify and
evaluate hazards and to provide direction with respect to the safety of
operations for the emergency at hand.
(viii) When activities are judged by the safety official to be an
IDLH condition and/or to involve an imminent danger condition, the
safety official shall have the authority to alter, suspend, or terminate
those activities. The safety official shall immediately inform the
individual in charge of the ICS of any actions needed to be taken to
correct these hazards at the emergency scene.
(ix) After emergency operations have terminated, the individual in
charge of the ICS shall implement appropriate decontamination
procedures.
(x) When deemed necessary for meeting the tasks at hand, approved
self-contained compressed air breathing apparatus may be used with
approved cylinders from other approved self-contained compressed air
breathing apparatus provided that such cylinders are of the same
capacity and pressure rating. All compressed air cylinders used with
self-contained breathing apparatus shall meet U.S. Department of
Transportation and National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
criteria.
(4) Skilled support personnel. Personnel, not necessarily an
employer's own employees, who are skilled in the operation of certain
equipment, such as mechanized earth moving or digging equipment or crane
and hoisting equipment, and who are needed temporarily to perform
immediate emergency support work that cannot reasonably be performed in
a timely fashion by an employer's own employees, and who will be or may
be exposed to the hazards at an emergency response scene, are not
required to meet the training required in this paragraph for the
employer's regular employees. However, these personnel shall be given an
initial briefing at the site prior to their participation in any
emergency response. The initial briefing shall include instruction in
the wearing of appropriate personal protective equipment, what chemical
hazards are involved, and what duties are to be performed. All other
appropriate safety and health precautions provided to the employer's own
employees shall be used to assure the safety and health of these
personnel.
(5) Specialist employees. Employees who, in the course of their
regular job duties, work with and are trained in the hazards of specific
hazardous substances, and who will be called upon to provide technical
advice or assistance at a hazardous substance release incident to the
individual in charge, shall receive training or demonstrate competency
in the area of their specialization annually.
(6) Training. Training shall be based on the duties and function to
be performed by each responder of an emergency response organization.
The skill and knowledge levels required for all new responders, those
hired after the effective date of this standard, shall be
[[Page 391]]
conveyed to them through training before they are permitted to take part
in actual emergency operations on an incident. Employees who
participate, or are expected to participate, in emergency response,
shall be given training in accordance with the following paragraphs:
(i) First responder awareness level. First responders at the
awareness level are individuals who are likely to witness or discover a
hazardous substance release and who have been trained to initiate an
emergency response sequence by notifying the proper authorities of the
release. They would take no further action beyond notifying the
authorities of the release. First responders at the awareness level
shall have sufficient training or have had sufficient experience to
objectively demonstrate competency in the following areas:
(A) An understanding of what hazardous substances are, and the risks
associated with them in an incident.
(B) An understanding of the potential outcomes associated with an
emergency created when hazardous substances are present.
(C) The ability to recognize the presence of hazardous substances in
an emergency.
(D) The ability to identify the hazardous substances, if possible.
(E) An understanding of the role of the first responder awareness
individual in the employer's emergency response plan including site
security and control and the U.S. Department of Transportation's
Emergency Response Guidebook.
(F) The ability to realize the need for additional resources, and to
make appropriate notifications to the communication center.
(ii) First responder operations level. First responders at the
operations level are individuals who respond to releases or potential
releases of hazardous substances as part of the initial response to the
site for the purpose of protecting nearby persons, property, or the
environment from the effects of the release. They are trained to respond
in a defensive fashion without actually trying to stop the release.
Their function is to contain the release from a safe distance, keep it
from spreading, and prevent exposures. First responders at the
operational level shall have received at least eight hours of training
or have had sufficient experience to objectively demonstrate competency
in the following areas in addition to those listed for the awareness
level and the employer shall so certify:
(A) Knowledge of the basic hazard and risk assessment techniques.
(B) Know how to select and use proper personal protective equipment
provided to the first responder operational level.
(C) An understanding of basic hazardous materials terms.
(D) Know how to perform basic control, containment and/or
confinement operations within the capabilities of the resources and
personal protective equipment available with their unit.
(E) Know how to implement basic decontamination procedures.
(F) An understanding of the relevant standard operating procedures
and termination procedures.
(iii) Hazardous materials technician. Hazardous materials
technicians are individuals who respond to releases or potential
releases for the purpose of stopping the release. They assume a more
aggressive role than a first responder at the operations level in that
they will approach the point of release in order to plug, patch or
otherwise stop the release of a hazardous substance. Hazardous materials
technicians shall have received at least 24 hours of training equal to
the first responder operations level and in addition have competency in
the following areas and the employer shall so certify:
(A) Know how to implement the employer's emergency response plan.
(B) Know the classification, identification and verification of
known and unknown materials by using field survey instruments and
equipment.
(C) Be able to function within an assigned role in the Incident
Command System.
(D) Know how to select and use proper specialized chemical personal
protective equipment provided to the hazardous materials technician.
(E) Understand hazard and risk assessment techniques.
(F) Be able to perform advance control, containment, and/or
confinement
[[Page 392]]
operations within the capabilities of the resources and personal
protective equipment available with the unit.
(G) Understand and implement decontamination procedures.
(H) Understand termination procedures.
(I) Understand basic chemical and toxicological terminology and
behavior.
(iv) Hazardous materials specialist. Hazardous materials specialists
are individuals who respond with and provide support to hazardous
materials technicians. Their duties parallel those of the hazardous
materials technician, however, those duties require a more directed or
specific knowledge of the various substances they may be called upon to
contain. The hazardous materials specialist would also act as the site
liaison with Federal, state, local and other government authorities in
regards to site activities. Hazardous materials specialists shall have
received at least 24 hours of training equal to the technician level and
in addition have competency in the following areas and the employer
shall so certify:
(A) Know how to implement the local emergency response plan.
(B) Understand classification, identification and verification of
known and unknown materials by using advanced survey instruments and
equipment.
(C) Know of the state emergency response plan.
(D) Be able to select and use proper specialized chemical personal
protective equipment provided to the hazardous materials specialist.
(E) Understand in-depth hazard and risk techniques.
(F) Be able to perform specialized control, containment, and/or
confinement operations within the capabilities of the resources and
personal protective equipment available.
(G) Be able to determine and implement decontamination procedures.
(H) Have the ability to develop a site safety and control plan.
(I) Understand chemical, radiological and toxicological terminology
and behavior.
(v) On scene incident commander. Incident commanders, who will
assume control of the incident scene beyond the first responder
awareness level, shall receive at least 24 hours of training equal to
the first responder operations level and in addition have competency in
the following areas and the employer shall so certify:
(A) Know and be able to implement the employer's incident command
system.
(B) Know how to implement the employer's emergency response plan.
(C) Know and understand the hazards and risks associated with
employees working in chemical protective clothing.
(D) Know how to implement the local emergency response plan.
(E) Know of the state emergency response plan and of the Federal
Regional Response Team.
(F) Know and understand the importance of decontamination
procedures.
(7) Trainers. Trainers who teach any of the above training subjects
shall have satisfactorily completed a training course for teaching the
subjects they are expected to teach, such as the courses offered by the
U.S. National Fire Academy, or they shall have the training and/or
academic credentials and instructional experience necessary to
demonstrate competent instructional skills and a good command of the
subject matter of the courses they are to teach.
(8) Refresher training. (i) Those employees who are trained in
accordance with paragraph (q)(6) of this section shall receive annual
refresher training of sufficient content and duration to maintain their
competencies, or shall demonstrate competency in those areas at least
yearly.
(ii) A statement shall be made of the training or competency, and if
a statement of competency is made, the employer shall keep a record of
the methodology used to demonstrate competency.
(9) Medical surveillance and consultation. (i) Members of an
organized and designated HAZMAT team and hazardous materials specialists
shall receive a baseline physical examination and be provided with
medical surveillance as required in paragraph (f) of this section.
(ii) Any emergency response employees who exhibits signs or symptoms
[[Page 393]]
which may have resulted from exposure to hazardous substances during the
course of an emergency incident, either immediately or subsequently,
shall be provided with medical consultation as required in paragraph
(f)(3)(ii) of this section.
(10) Chemical protective clothing. Chemical protective clothing and
equipment to be used by organized and designated HAZMAT team members, or
to be used by hazardous materials specialists, shall meet the
requirements of paragraphs (g) (3) through (5) of this section.
(11) Post-emergency response operations. Upon completion of the
emergency response, if it is determined that it is necessary to remove
hazardous substances, health hazards, and materials contaminated with
them (such as contaminated soil or other elements of the natural
environment) from the site of the incident, the employer conducting the
clean-up shall comply with one of the following:
(i) Meet all of the requirements of paragraphs (b) through (o) of
this section; or
(ii) Where the clean-up is done on plant property using plant or
workplace employees, such employees shall have completed the training
requirements of the following: 29 CFR 1910.38(a); 1910.134; 1910.1200,
and other appropriate safety and health training made necessary by the
tasks that they are expected to be performed such as personal protective
equipment and decontamination procedures. All equipment to be used in
the performance of the clean-up work shall be in serviceable condition
and shall have been inspected prior to use.
APPENDICES TO Sec. 1910.120--HAZARDOUS WASTE OPERATIONS AND EMERGENCY
RESPONSE
Note: The following appendices serve as non-mandatory guidelines to
assist employees and employers in complying with the appropriate
requirements of this section. However paragraph 1910.120(g) makes
mandatory in certain circumstances the use of Level A and Level B PPE
protection.
Appendix A to Sec. 1910.120--Personal Protective Equipment Test Methods
This appendix sets forth the non-mandatory examples of tests which
may be used to evaluate compliance with Sec. 1910.120 (g)(4) (ii) and
(iii). Other tests and other challenge agents may be used to evaluate
compliance.
A. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit pressure test
1.0--Scope
1.1 This practice measures the ability of a gas tight totally-
encapsulating chemical protective suit material, seams, and closures to
maintain a fixed positive pressure. The results of this practice allow
the gas tight integrity of a totally-encapsulating chemical protective
suit to be evaluated.
1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to permeation, penetration,
and degradation by specific hazardous substances is not determined by
this test method.
2.0--Definition of terms
2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suit (TECP suit) means
a full body garment which is constructed of protective clothing
materials; covers the wearer's torso, head, arms, legs and respirator;
may cover the wearer's hands and feet with tightly attached gloves and
boots; completely encloses the wearer and respirator by itself or in
combination with the wearer's gloves and boots.
2.2 Protective clothing material means any material or combination
of materials used in an item of clothing for the purpose of isolating
parts of the body from direct contact with a potentially hazardous
liquid or gaseous chemicals.
2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this test method, the
limited flow of a gas under pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to
atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and time interval.
3.0--Summary of test method
3.1 The TECP suit is visually inspected and modified for the test.
The test apparatus is attached to the suit to permit inflation to the
pre-test suit expansion pressure for removal of suit wrinkles and
creases. The pressure is lowered to the test pressure and monitored for
three minutes. If the pressure drop is excessive, the TECP suit fails
the test and is removed from service. The test is repeated after leak
location and repair.
4.0--Required Supplies
4.1 Source of compressed air.
4.2 Test apparatus for suit testing, including a pressure
measurement device with a sensitivity of at least \1/4\ inch water
gauge.
4.3 Vent valve closure plugs or sealing tape.
4.4 Soapy water solution and soft brush.
4.5 Stop watch or appropriate timing device.
5.0--Safety Precautions
5.1 Care shall be taken to provide the correct pressure safety
devices required for the source of compressed air used.
6.0--Test Procedure
6.1 Prior to each test, the tester shall perform a visual inspection
of the suit. Check
[[Page 394]]
the suit for seam integrity by visually examining the seams and gently
pulling on the seams. Ensure that all air supply lines, fittings, visor,
zippers, and valves are secure and show no signs of deterioration.
6.1.1 Seal off the vent valves along with any other normal inlet or
exhaust points (such as umbilical air line fittings or face piece
opening) with tape or other appropriate means (caps, plugs, fixture,
etc.). Care should be exercised in the sealing process not to damage any
of the suit components.
6.1.2 Close all closure assemblies.
6.1.3 Prepare the suit for inflation by providing an improvised
connection point on the suit for connecting an airline. Attach the
pressure test apparatus to the suit to permit suit inflation from a
compressed air source equipped with a pressure indicating regulator. The
leak tightness of the pressure test apparatus should be tested before
and after each test by closing off the end of the tubing attached to the
suit and assuring a pressure of three inches water gauge for three
minutes can be maintained. If a component is removed for the test, that
component shall be replaced and a second test conducted with another
component removed to permit a complete test of the ensemble.
6.1.4 The pre-test expansion pressure (A) and the suit test pressure
(B) shall be supplied by the suit manufacturer, but in no case shall
they be less than: (A)=three inches water gauge; and (B)=two inches
water gauge. The ending suit pressure (C) shall be no less than 80
percent of the test pressure (B); i.e., the pressure drop shall not
exceed 20 percent of the test pressure (B).
6.1.5 Inflate the suit until the pressure inside is equal to
pressure (A), the pre-test expansion suit pressure. Allow at least one
minute to fill out the wrinkles in the suit. Release sufficient air to
reduce the suit pressure to pressure (B), the suit test pressure. Begin
timing. At the end of three minutes, record the suit pressure as
pressure (C), the ending suit pressure. The difference between the suit
test pressure and the ending suit test pressure (B-C) shall be defined
as the suit pressure drop.
6.1.6 If the suit pressure drop is more than 20 percent of the suit
test pressure (B) during the three-minute test period, the suit fails
the test and shall be removed from service.
7.0--Retest Procedure
7.1 If the suit fails the test check for leaks by inflating the suit
to pressure (A) and brushing or wiping the entire suit (including seams,
closures, lens gaskets, glove-to-sleeve joints, etc.) with a mild soap
and water solution. Observe the suit for the formation of soap bubbles,
which is an indication of a leak. Repair all identified leaks.
7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in Test procedure 6.0.
8.0--Report
8.1 Each TECP suit tested by this practice shall have the following
information recorded:
8.1.1 Unique identification number, identifying brand name, date of
purchase, material of construction, and unique fit features, e.g.,
special breathing apparatus.
8.1.2 The actual values for test pressures (A), (B), and (C) shall
be recorded along with the specific observation times. If the ending
pressure (C) is less than 80 percent of the test pressure (B), the suit
shall be identified as failing the test. When possible, the specific
leak location shall be identified in the test records. Retest pressure
data shall be recorded as an additional test.
8.1.3 The source of the test apparatus used shall be identified and
the sensitivity of the pressure gauge shall be recorded.
8.1.4 Records shall be kept for each pressure test even if repairs
are being made at the test location.
Caution
Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be sure they are
positioned correctly and secured tightly before putting the suit back
into service. Special care should be taken to examine each exhaust valve
to make sure it is not blocked.
Care should also be exercised to assure that the inside and outside
of the suit is completely dry before it is put into storage.
B. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit qualitative leak test
1.0--Scope
1.1 This practice semi-qualitatively tests gas tight totally-
encapsulating chemical protective suit integrity by detecting inward
leakage of ammonia vapor. Since no modifications are made to the suit to
carry out this test, the results from this practice provide a realistic
test for the integrity of the entire suit.
1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to permeation, penetration, and
degradation is not determined by this test method. ASTM test methods are
available to test suit materials for these characteristics and the tests
are usually conducted by the manufacturers of the suits.
2.0--Definition of terms
2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suit (TECP suit) means
a full body garment which is constructed of protective clothing
materials; covers the wearer's torso, head, arms, legs and respirator;
may cover the wearer's hands and feet with tightly attached gloves and
boots; completely encloses the wearer and respirator by itself or in
combination with the wearer's gloves, and boots.
2.2 Protective clothing material means any material or combination
of materials used in an item of clothing for the purpose of isolating
parts of the body from direct contact
[[Page 395]]
with a potentially hazardous liquid or gaseous chemicals.
2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this test method, the
limited flow of a gas under pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to
atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and time interval.
2.4 Intrusion Coefficient means a number expressing the level of
protection provided by a gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical
protective suit. The intrusion coefficient is calculated by dividing the
test room challenge agent concentration by the concentration of
challenge agent found inside the suit. The accuracy of the intrusion
coefficient is dependent on the challenge agent monitoring methods. The
larger the intrusion coefficient the greater the protection provided by
the TECP suit.
3.0--Summary of recommended practice
3.1 The volume of concentrated aqueous ammonia solution (ammonia
hydroxide NH4 OH) required to generate the test atmosphere is
determined using the directions outlined in 6.1. The suit is donned by a
person wearing the appropriate respiratory equipment (either a positive
pressure self-contained breathing apparatus or a positive pressure
supplied air respirator) and worn inside the enclosed test room. The
concentrated aqueous ammonia solution is taken by the suited individual
into the test room and poured into an open plastic pan. A two-minute
evaporation period is observed before the test room concentration is
measured, using a high range ammonia length of stain detector tube. When
the ammonia vapor reaches a concentration of between 1000 and 1200 ppm,
the suited individual starts a standardized exercise protocol to stress
and flex the suit. After this protocol is completed, the test room
concentration is measured again. The suited individual exits the test
room and his stand-by person measures the ammonia concentration inside
the suit using a low range ammonia length of stain detector tube or
other more sensitive ammonia detector. A stand-by person is required to
observe the test individual during the test procedure; aid the person in
donning and doffing the TECP suit; and monitor the suit interior. The
intrusion coefficient of the suit can be calculated by dividing the
average test area concentration by the interior suit concentration. A
colorimetric ammonia indicator strip of bromophenol blue or equivalent
is placed on the inside of the suit face piece lens so that the suited
individual is able to detect a color change and know if the suit has a
significant leak. If a color change is observed the individual shall
leave the test room immediately.
4.0--Required supplies
4.1 A supply of concentrated aqueous ammonium hydroxide (58% by
weight).
4.2 A supply of bromophenol/blue indicating paper or equivalent,
sensitive to 5-10 ppm ammonia or greater over a two-minute period of
exposure. [pH 3.0 (yellow) to pH 4.6 (blue)]
4.3 A supply of high range (0.5-10 volume percent) and low range (5-
700 ppm) detector tubes for ammonia and the corresponding sampling pump.
More sensitive ammonia detectors can be substituted for the low range
detector tubes to improve the sensitivity of this practice.
4.4 A shallow plastic pan (PVC) at least
12:14:1 and a half pint plastic
container (PVC) with tightly closing lid.
4.5 A graduated cylinder or other volumetric measuring device of at
least 50 milliliters in volume with an accuracy of at least
1 milliliters.
5.0--Safety precautions
5.1 Concentrated aqueous ammonium hydroxide, NH4 OH, is
a corrosive volatile liquid requiring eye, skin, and respiratory
protection. The person conducting the test shall review the MSDS for
aqueous ammonia.
5.2 Since the established permissible exposure limit for ammonia is
35 ppm as a 15 minute STEL, only persons wearing a positive pressure
self-contained breathing apparatus or a positive pressure supplied air
respirator shall be in the chamber. Normally only the person wearing the
totally-encapsulating suit will be inside the chamber. A stand-by person
shall have a positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus, or a
positive pressure supplied air respirator available to enter the test
area should the suited individual need assistance.
5.3 A method to monitor the suited individual must be used during
this test. Visual contact is the simplest but other methods using
communication devices are acceptable.
5.4 The test room shall be large enough to allow the exercise
protocol to be carried out and then to be ventilated to allow for easy
exhaust of the ammonia test atmosphere after the test(s) are completed.
5.5 Individuals shall be medically screened for the use of
respiratory protection and checked for allergies to ammonia before
participating in this test procedure.
6.0--Test procedure
6.1.1 Measure the test area to the nearest foot and calculate its
volume in cubic feet. Multiply the test area volume by 0.2 milliliters
of concentrated aqueous ammonia solution per cubic foot of test area
volume to determine the approximate volume of concentrated aqueous
ammonia required to generate 1000 ppm in the test area.
6.1.2 Measure this volume from the supply of concentrated aqueous
ammonia and place it into a closed plastic container.
6.1.3 Place the container, several high range ammonia detector
tubes, and the pump in the clean test pan and locate it near the test
area entry door so that the suited individual has easy access to these
supplies.
[[Page 396]]
6.2.1 In a non-contaminated atmosphere, open a pre-sealed ammonia
indicator strip and fasten one end of the strip to the inside of the
suit face shield lens where it can be seen by the wearer. Moisten the
indicator strip with distilled water. Care shall be taken not to
contaminate the detector part of the indicator paper by touching it. A
small piece of masking tape or equivalent should be used to attach the
indicator strip to the interior of the suit face shield.
6.2.2 If problems are encountered with this method of attachment,
the indicator strip can be attached to the outside of the respirator
face piece lens being used during the test.
6.3 Don the respiratory protective device normally used with the
suit, and then don the TECP suit to be tested. Check to be sure all
openings which are intended to be sealed (zippers, gloves, etc.) are
completely sealed. DO NOT, however, plug off any venting valves.
6.4 Step into the enclosed test room such as a closet, bathroom, or
test booth, equipped with an exhaust fan. No air should be exhausted
from the chamber during the test because this will dilute the ammonia
challenge concentrations.
6.5 Open the container with the pre-measured volume of concentrated
aqueous ammonia within the enclosed test room, and pour the liquid into
the empty plastic test pan. Wait two minutes to allow for adequate
volatilization of the concentrated aqueous ammonia. A small mixing fan
can be used near the evaporation pan to increase the evaporation rate of
the ammonia solution.
6.6 After two minutes a determination of the ammonia concentration
within the chamber should be made using the high range colorimetric
detector tube. A concentration of 1000 ppm ammonia or greater shall be
generated before the exercises are started.
6.7 To test the integrity of the suit the following four minute
exercise protocol should be followed:
6.7.1 Raising the arms above the head with at least 15 raising
motions completed in one minute.
6.7.2 Walking in place for one minute with at least 15 raising
motions of each leg in a one-minute period.
6.7.3 Touching the toes with a least 10 complete motions of the
arms from above the head to touching of the toes in a one-minute period.
6.7.4 Knee bends with at least 10 complete standing and squatting
motions in a one-minute period.
6.8 If at any time during the test the colorimetric indicating
paper should change colors, the test should be stopped and section 6.10
and 6.12 initiated (See [para]4.2).
6.9 After completion of the test exercise, the test area
concentration should be measured again using the high range colorimetric
detector tube.
6.10 Exit the test area.
6.11 The opening created by the suit zipper or other appropriate
suit penetration should be used to determine the ammonia concentration
in the suit with the low range length of stain detector tube or other
ammonia monitor. The internal TECP suit air should be sampled far enough
from the enclosed test area to prevent a false ammonia reading.
6.12 After completion of the measurement of the suit interior
ammonia concentration the test is concluded and the suit is doffed and
the respirator removed.
6.13 The ventilating fan for the test room should be turned on and
allowed to run for enough time to remove the ammonia gas. The fan shall
be vented to the outside of the building.
6.14 Any detectable ammonia in the suit interior (five ppm ammonia
(NH3) or more for the length of stain detector tube)
indicates that the suit has failed the test. When other ammonia
detectors are used a lower level of detection is possible, and it should
be specified as the pass/fail criteria.
6.15 By following this test method, an intrusion coefficient of
approximately 200 or more can be measured with the suit in a completely
operational condition. If the intrusion coefficient is 200 or more, then
the suit is suitable for emergency response and field use.
7.0--Retest procedures
7.1 If the suit fails this test, check for leaks by following the
pressure test in test A above.
7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in the test procedure 6.0.
8.0--Report
8.1 Each gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit
tested by this practice shall have the following information recorded.
8.1.1 Unique identification number, identifying brand name, date of
purchase, material of construction, and unique suit features; e.g.,
special breathing apparatus.
8.1.2 General description of test room used for test.
8.1.3 Brand name and purchase date of ammonia detector strips and
color change data.
8.1.4 Brand name, sampling range, and expiration date of the length
of stain ammonia detector tubes. The brand name and model of the
sampling pump should also be recorded. If another type of ammonia
detector is used, it should be identified along with its minimum
detection limit for ammonia.
8.1.5 Actual test results shall list the two test area
concentrations, their average, the interior suit concentration, and the
calculated intrusion coefficient. Retest data shall be recorded as an
additional test.
[[Page 397]]
8.2 The evaluation of the data shall be specified as ``suit
passed'' or ``suit failed,'' and the date of the test. Any detectable
ammonia (five ppm or greater for the length of stain detector tube) in
the suit interior indicates the suit has failed this test. When other
ammonia detectors are used, a lower level of detection is possible and
it should be specified as the pass fail criteria.
Caution
Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be sure they are
positioned correctly and secured tightly before putting the suit back
into service. Special care should be taken to examine each exhaust valve
to make sure it is not blocked.
Care should also be exercised to assure that the inside and outside
of the suit is completely dry before it is put into storage.
Appendix B to Sec. 1910.120--General Description and Discussion of the
Levels of Protection and Protective Gear
This appendix sets forth information about personal protective
equipment (PPE) protection levels which may be used to assist employers
in complying with the PPE requirements of this section.
As required by the standard, PPE must be selected which will protect
employees from the specific hazards which they are likely to encounter
during their work on-site.
Selection of the appropriate PPE is a complex process which should
take into consideration a variety of factors. Key factors involved in
this process are identification of the hazards, or suspected hazards;
their routes of potential hazard to employees (inhalation, skin
absorption, ingestion, and eye or skin contact); and the performance of
the PPE materials (and seams) in providing a barrier to these hazards.
The amount of protection provided by PPE is material-hazard specific.
That is, protective equipment materials will protect well against some
hazardous substances and poorly, or not at all, against others. In many
instances, protective equipment materials cannot be found which will
provide continuous protection from the particular hazardous substance.
In these cases the breakthrough time of the protective material should
exceed the work durations.
Other factors in this selection process to be considered are
matching the PPE to the employee's work requirements and task-specific
conditions. The durability of PPE materials, such as tear strength and
seam strength, should be considered in relation to the employee's tasks.
The effects of PPE in relation to heat stress and task duration are a
factor in selecting and using PPE. In some cases layers of PPE may be
necessary to provide sufficient protection, or to protect expensive PPE
inner garments, suits or equipment.
The more that is known about the hazards at the site, the easier the
job of PPE selection becomes. As more information about the hazards and
conditions at the site becomes available, the site supervisor can make
decisions to up-grade or down-grade the level of PPE protection to match
the tasks at hand.
The following are guidelines which an employer can use to begin the
selection of the appropriate PPE. As noted above, the site information
may suggest the use of combinations of PPE selected from the different
protection levels (i.e., A, B, C, or D) as being more suitable to the
hazards of the work. It should be cautioned that the listing below does
not fully address the performance of the specific PPE material in
relation to the specific hazards at the job site, and that PPE
selection, evaluation and re-selection is an ongoing process until
sufficient information about the hazards and PPE performance is
obtained.
Part A. Personal protective equipment is divided into four
categories based on the degree of protection afforded. (See Part B of
this appendix for further explanation of Levels A, B, C, and D hazards.)
I. Level A-- To be selected when the greatest level of skin,
respiratory, and eye protection is required.
The following constitute Level A equipment; it may be used as
appropriate;
1. Positive pressure, full face-piece self-contained breathing
apparatus (SCBA), or positive pressure supplied air respirator with
escape SCBA, approved by the National Institute for Occupational Safety
and Health (NIOSH).
2. Totally-encapsulating chemical-protective suit.
3. Coveralls.\1\
4. Long underwear.\1\
5. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant.
6. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant.
7. Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and shank.
8. Hard hat (under suit).\1\
9. Disposable protective suit, gloves and boots (depending on suit
construction, may be worn over totally-encapsulating suit).
II. Level B--The highest level of respiratory protection is
necessary but a lesser level of skin protection is needed.
The following constitute Level B equipment; it may be used as
appropriate.
1. Positive pressure, full-facepiece self-contained breathing
apparatus (SCBA), or positive pressure supplied air respirator with
escape SCBA (NIOSH approved).
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing (overalls and long-sleeved
jacket; coveralls; one or two-piece chemical-splash suit; disposable
chemical-resistant overalls).
3. Coveralls. \1\
[[Page 398]]
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant.
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant.
6. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant steel toe and shank.
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable).\1\
8. Hard hat. \1\
9. [Reserved]
10. Face shield. \1\
III. Level C--The concentration(s) and type(s) of airborne
substance(s) is known and the criteria for using air purifying
respirators are met.
The following constitute Level C equipment; it may be used as
appropriate.
1. Full-face or half-mask, air purifying respirators (NIOSH
approved).
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing (overalls; two-piece chemical-
splash suit; disposable chemical-resistant overalls).
3. Coveralls. \1\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Optional, as applicable.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant.
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant.
6. Boots (outer), chemical-resistant steel toe and shank. \1\
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable) \1\.
8. Hard hat. \1\
9. Escape mask. \1\
10. Face shield. \1\
IV. Level D--A work uniform affording minimal protection, used for
nuisance contamination only.
The following constitute Level D equipment; it may be used as
appropriate:
1. Coveralls.
2. Gloves. \1\
3. Boots/shoes, chemical-resistant steel toe and shank.
4. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable). \1\
5. Safety glasses or chemical splash goggles*.
6. Hard hat. \1\
7. Escape mask. \1\
8. Face shield. \1\
Part B. The types of hazards for which levels A, B, C, and D
protection are appropriate are described below:
I. Level A--Level A protection should be used when:
1. The hazardous substance has been identified and requires the
highest level of protection for skin, eyes, and the respiratory system
based on either the measured (or potential for) high concentration of
atmospheric vapors, gases, or particulates; or the site operations and
work functions involve a high potential for splash, immersion, or
exposure to unexpected vapors, gases, or particulates of materials that
are harmful to skin or capable of being absorbed through the skin;
2. Substances with a high degree of hazard to the skin are known or
suspected to be present, and skin contact is possible; or
3. Operations are being conducted in confined, poorly ventilated
areas, and the absence of conditions requiring Level A have not yet been
determined.
II. Level B--Level B protection should be used when:
1. The type and atmospheric concentration of substances have been
identified and require a high level of respiratory protection, but less
skin protection;
2. The atmosphere contains less than 19.5 percent oxygen; or
3. The presence of incompletely identified vapors or gases is
indicated by a direct-reading organic vapor detection instrument, but
vapors and gases are not suspected of containing high levels of
chemicals harmful to skin or capable of being absorbed through the skin.
Note: This involves atmospheres with IDLH concentrations of specific
substances that present severe inhalation hazards and that do not
represent a severe skin hazard; or that do not meet the criteria for use
of air-purifying respirators.
III. Level C--Level C protection should be used when:
1. The atmospheric contaminants, liquid splashes, or other direct
contact will not adversely affect or be absorbed through any exposed
skin;
2. The types of air contaminants have been identified,
concentrations measured, and an air-purifying respirator is available
that can remove the contaminants; and
3. All criteria for the use of air-purifying respirators are met.
IV. Level D--Level D protection should be used when:
1. The atmosphere contains no known hazard; and
2. Work functions preclude splashes, immersion, or the potential for
unexpected inhalation of or contact with hazardous levels of any
chemicals.
Note: As stated before, combinations of personal protective
equipment other than those described for Levels A, B, C, and D
protection may be more appropriate and may be used to provide the proper
level of protection.
As an aid in selecting suitable chemical protective clothing, it
should be noted that the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) has
developed standards on chemical protective clothing. The standards that
have been adopted by include:
NFPA 1991--Standard on Vapor-Protective Suits for Hazardous Chemical
Emergencies (EPA Level A Protective Clothing).
NFPA 1992--Standard on Liquid Splash-Protective Suits for Hazardous
Chemical Emergencies (EPA Level B Protective Clothing).
[[Page 399]]
NFPA 1993--Standard on Liquid Splash-Protective Suits for Non-
emergency, Non-flammable Hazardous Chemical Situations (EPA Level B
Protective Clothing).
These standards apply documentation and performance requirements to
the manufacture of chemical protective suits. Chemical protective suits
meeting these requirements are labelled as compliant with the
appropriate standard. It is recommended that chemical protective suits
that meet these standards be used.
Appendix C to Sec. 1910.120--Compliance Guidelines
1. Occupational Safety and Health Program. Each hazardous waste site
clean-up effort will require an occupational safety and health program
headed by the site coordinator or the employer's representative. The
purpose of the program will be the protection of employees at the site
and will be an extension of the employer's overall safety and health
program. The program will need to be developed before work begins on the
site and implemented as work proceeds as stated in paragraph (b). The
program is to facilitate coordination and communication of safety and
health issues among personnel responsible for the various activities
which will take place at the site. It will provide the overall means for
planning and implementing the needed safety and health training and job
orientation of employees who will be working at the site. The program
will provide the means for identifying and controlling worksite hazards
and the means for monitoring program effectiveness. The program will
need to cover the responsibilities and authority of the site coordinator
or the employer's manager on the site for the safety and health of
employees at the site, and the relationships with contractors or support
services as to what each employer's safety and health responsibilities
are for their employees on the site. Each contractor on the site needs
to have its own safety and health program so structured that it will
smoothly interface with the program of the site coordinator or principal
contractor.
Also those employers involved with treating, storing or disposal of
hazardous waste as covered in paragraph (p) must have implemented a
safety and health program for their employees. This program is to
include the hazard communication program required in paragraph (p)(1)
and the training required in paragraphs (p)(7) and (p)(8) as parts of
the employers comprehensive overall safety and health program. This
program is to be in writing.
Each site or workplace safety and health program will need to
include the following: (1) Policy statements of the line of authority
and accountability for implementing the program, the objectives of the
program and the role of the site safety and health supervisor or manager
and staff; (2) means or methods for the development of procedures for
identifying and controlling workplace hazards at the site; (3) means or
methods for the development and communication to employees of the
various plans, work rules, standard operating procedures and practices
that pertain to individual employees and supervisors; (4) means for the
training of supervisors and employees to develop the needed skills and
knowledge to perform their work in a safe and healthful manner; (5)
means to anticipate and prepare for emergency situations; and (6) means
for obtaining information feedback to aid in evaluating the program and
for improving the effectiveness of the program. The management and
employees should be trying continually to improve the effectiveness of
the program thereby enhancing the protection being afforded those
working on the site.
Accidents on the site or workplace should be investigated to provide
information on how such occurrences can be avoided in the future. When
injuries or illnesses occur on the site or workplace, they will need to
be investigated to determine what needs to be done to prevent this
incident from occurring again. Such information will need to be used as
feedback on the effectiveness of the program and the information turned
into positive steps to prevent any reoccurrence. Receipt of employee
suggestions or complaints relating to safety and health issues involved
with site or workplace activities is also a feedback mechanism that can
be used effectively to improve the program and may serve in part as an
evaluative tool(s).
For the development and implementation of the program to be the most
effective, professional safety and health personnel should be used.
Certified Safety Professionals, Board Certified Industrial Hygienists or
Registered Professional Safety Engineers are good examples of
professional stature for safety and health managers who will administer
the employer's program.
2. Training. The training programs for employees subject to the
requirements of paragraph (e) of this standard should address: the
safety and health hazards employees should expect to find on hazardous
waste clean-up sites; what control measures or techniques are effective
for those hazards; what monitoring procedures are effective in
characterizing exposure levels; what makes an effective employer's
safety and health program; what a site safety and health plan should
include; hands on training with personal protective equipment and
clothing they may be expected to use; the contents of the OSHA standard
relevant to the employee's duties and function; and, employee's
responsibilities under OSHA and other regulations. Supervisors will need
training in their responsibilities under the safety and health program
and its subject areas such as the spill
[[Page 400]]
containment program, the personal protective equipment program, the
medical surveillance program, the emergency response plan and other
areas.
The training programs for employees subject to the requirements of
paragraph (p) of this standard should address: the employers safety and
health program elements impacting employees; the hazard communication
program; the medical surveillance program; the hazards and the controls
for such hazards that employees need to know for their job duties and
functions. All require annual refresher training.
The training programs for employees covered by the requirements of
paragraph (q) of this standard should address those competencies
required for the various levels of response such as: the hazards
associated with hazardous substances; hazard identification and
awareness; notification of appropriate persons; the need for and use of
personal protective equipment including respirators; the decontamination
procedures to be used; preplanning activities for hazardous substance
incidents including the emergency reponse plan; company standard
operating procedures for hazardous substance emergency responses; the
use of the incident command system and other subjects. Hands-on training
should be stressed whenever possible. Critiques done after an incident
which include an evaluation of what worked and what did not and how
could the incident be better handled the next time may be counted as
training time.
For hazardous materials specialists (usually members of hazardous
materials teams), the training should address the care, use and/or
testing of chemical protective clothing including totally encapsulating
suits, the medical surveillance program, the standard operating
procedures for the hazardous materials team including the use of
plugging and patching equipment and other subject areas.
Officers and leaders who may be expected to be in charge at an
incident should be fully knowledgeable of their company's incident
command system. They should know where and how to obtain additional
assistance and be familiar with the local district's emergency response
plan and the state emergency response plan.
Specialist employees such as technical experts, medical experts or
environmental experts that work with hazardous materials in their
regular jobs, who may be sent to the incident scene by the shipper,
manufacturer or governmental agency to advise and assist the person in
charge of the incident should have training on an annual basis. Their
training should include the care and use of personal protective
equipment including respirators; knowledge of the incident command
system and how they are to relate to it; and those areas needed to keep
them current in their respective field as it relates to safety and
health involving specific hazardous substances.
Those skilled support personnel, such as employees who work for
public works departments or equipment operators who operate bulldozers,
sand trucks, backhoes, etc., who may be called to the incident scene to
provide emergency support assistance, should have at least a safety and
health briefing before entering the area of potential or actual
exposure. These skilled support personnel, who have not been a part of
the emergency response plan and do not meet the training requirements,
should be made aware of the hazards they face and should be provided all
necessary protective clothing and equipment required for their tasks.
There are two National Fire Protection Association standards, NFPA
472--``Standard for Professional Competence of Responders to Hazardous
Material Incidents'' and NFPA 471--``Recommended Practice for Responding
to Hazardous Material Incidents'', which are excellent resource
documents to aid fire departments and other emergency response
organizations in developing their training program materials. NFPA 472
provides guidance on the skills and knowledge needed for first responder
awareness level, first responder operations level, hazmat technicians,
and hazmat specialist. It also offers guidance for the officer corp who
will be in charge of hazardous substance incidents.
3. Decontamination. Decontamination procedures should be tailored to
the specific hazards of the site, and may vary in complexity and number
of steps, depending on the level of hazard and the employee's exposure
to the hazard. Decontamination procedures and PPE decontamination
methods will vary depending upon the specific substance, since one
procedure or method may not work for all substances. Evaluation of
decontamination methods and procedures should be performed, as
necessary, to assure that employees are not exposed to hazards by re-
using PPE. References in appendix D may be used for guidance in
establishing an effective decontamination program. In addition, the U.S.
Coast Guard's Manual, ``Policy Guidance for Response to Hazardous
Chemical Releases,'' U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC
(COMDTINST M16465.30) is a good reference for establishing an effective
decontamination program.
4. Emergency response plans. States, along with designated districts
within the states, will be developing or have developed local emergency
response plans. These state and district plans should be utilized in the
emergency response plans called for in the standard. Each employer
should assure that its emergency response plan is compatible with the
local plan. The major reference being used to aid in developing the
state and local district plans is the Hazardous Materials
[[Page 401]]
Emergency Planning Guide, NRT-1. The current Emergency Response
Guidebook from the U.S. Department of Transportation, CMA's CHEMTREC and
the Fire Service Emergency Management Handbook may also be used as
resources.
Employers involved with treatment, storage, and disposal facilities
for hazardous waste, which have the required contingency plan called for
by their permit, would not need to duplicate the same planning elements.
Those items of the emergency response plan that are properly addressed
in the contingency plan may be substituted into the emergency response
plan required in 1910.120 or otherwise kept together for employer and
employee use.
5. Personal protective equipment programs. The purpose of personal
protective clothing and equipment (PPE) is to shield or isolate
individuals from the chemical, physical, and biologic hazards that may
be encountered at a hazardous substance site.
As discussed in appendix B, no single combination of protective
equipment and clothing is capable of protecting against all hazards.
Thus PPE should be used in conjunction with other protective methods and
its effectiveness evaluated periodically.
The use of PPE can itself create significant worker hazards, such as
heat stress, physical and psychological stress, and impaired vision,
mobility, and communication. For any given situation, equipment and
clothing should be selected that provide an adequate level of
protection. However, over-protection, as well as under-protection, can
be hazardous and should be avoided where possible.
Two basic objectives of any PPE program should be to protect the
wearer from safety and health hazards, and to prevent injury to the
wearer from incorrect use and/or malfunction of the PPE. To accomplish
these goals, a comprehensive PPE program should include hazard
identification, medical monitoring, environmental surveillance,
selection, use, maintenance, and decontamination of PPE and its
associated training.
The written PPE program should include policy statements,
procedures, and guidelines. Copies should be made available to all
employees, and a reference copy should be made available at the
worksite. Technical data on equipment, maintenance manuals, relevant
regulations, and other essential information should also be collected
and maintained.
6. Incident command system (ICS). Paragraph 1910.120(q)(3)(ii)
requires the implementation of an ICS. The ICS is an organized approach
to effectively control and manage operations at an emergency incident.
The individual in charge of the ICS is the senior official responding to
the incident. The ICS is not much different than the ``command post''
approach used for many years by the fire service. During large complex
fires involving several companies and many pieces of apparatus, a
command post would be established. This enabled one individual to be in
charge of managing the incident, rather than having several officers
from different companies making separate, and sometimes conflicting,
decisions. The individual in charge of the command post would delegate
responsibility for performing various tasks to subordinate officers.
Additionally, all communications were routed through the command post to
reduce the number of radio transmissions and eliminate confusion.
However, strategy, tactics, and all decisions were made by one
individual.
The ICS is a very similar system, except it is implemented for
emergency response to all incidents, both large and small, that involve
hazardous substances.
For a small incident, the individual in charge of the ICS may
perform many tasks of the ICS. There may not be any, or little,
delegation of tasks to subordinates. For example, in response to a small
incident, the individual in charge of the ICS, in addition to normal
command activities, may become the safety officer and may designate only
one employee (with proper equipment) as a back-up to provide assistance
if needed. OSHA does recommend, however, that at least two employees be
designated as back-up personnel since the assistance needed may include
rescue.
To illustrate the operation of the ICS, the following scenario might
develop during a small incident, such as an overturned tank truck with a
small leak of flammable liquid.
The first responding senior officer would implement and take command
of the ICS. That person would size-up the incident and determine if
additional personnel and apparatus were necessary; would determine what
actions to take to control the leak; and, determine the proper level of
personal protective equipment. If additional assistance is not needed,
the individual in charge of the ICS would implement actions to stop and
control the leak using the fewest number of personnel that can
effectively accomplish the tasks. The individual in charge of the ICS
then would designate himself as the safety officer and two other
employees as a back-up in case rescue may become necessary. In this
scenario, decontamination procedures would not be necessary.
A large complex incident may require many employees and difficult,
time-consuming efforts to control. In these situations, the individual
in charge of the ICS will want to delegate different tasks to
subordinates in order to maintain a span of control that will keep the
number of subordinates, that are reporting, to a manageable level.
Delegation of task at large incidents may be by location, where the
incident scene is divided into sectors, and subordinate officers
[[Page 402]]
coordinate activities within the sector that they have been assigned.
Delegation of tasks can also be by function. Some of the functions
that the individual in charge of the ICS may want to delegate at a large
incident are: medical services; evacuation; water supply; resources
(equipment, apparatus); media relations; safety; and, site control
(integrate activities with police for crowd and traffic control). Also
for a large incident, the individual in charge of the ICS will designate
several employees as back-up personnel; and a number of safety officers
to monitor conditions and recommend safety precautions.
Therefore, no matter what size or complexity an incident may be, by
implementing an ICS there will be one individual in charge who makes the
decisions and gives directions; and, all actions, and communications are
coordinated through one central point of command. Such a system should
reduce confusion, improve safety, organize and coordinate actions, and
should facilitate effective management of the incident.
7. Site Safety and Control Plans. The safety and security of
response personnel and others in the area of an emergeny response
incident site should be of primary concern to the incident commander.
The use of a site safety and control plan could greatly assist those in
charge of assuring the safety and health of employees on the site.
A comprehensive site safety and control plan should include the
following: summary analysis of hazards on the site and a risk analysis
of those hazards; site map or sketch; site work zones (clean zone,
transition or decontamination zone, work or hot zone); use of the buddy
system; site communications; command post or command center; standard
operating procedures and safe work practices; medical assistance and
triage area; hazard monitoring plan (air contaminate monitoring, etc.);
decontamination procedures and area; and other relevant areas. This plan
should be a part of the employer's emergency response plan or an
extension of it to the specific site.
8. Medical surveillance programs. Workers handling hazardous
substances may be exposed to toxic chemicals, safety hazards, biologic
hazards, and radiation. Therefore, a medical surveillance program is
essential to assess and monitor workers' health and fitness for
employment in hazardous waste operations and during the course of work;
to provide emergency and other treatment as needed; and to keep accurate
records for future reference.
The Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous
Waste Site Activities developed by the National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA), the U.S. Coast Guard (USCG), and the
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA); October 1985 provides an
excellent example of the types of medical testing that should be done as
part of a medical surveillance program.
9. New Technology and Spill Containment Programs. Where hazardous
substances may be released by spilling from a container that will expose
employees to the hazards of the materials, the employer will need to
implement a program to contain and control the spilled material. Diking
and ditching, as well as use of absorbents like diatomaceous earth, are
traditional techniques which have proven to be effective over the years.
However, in recent years new products have come into the marketplace,
the use of which complement and increase the effectiveness of these
traditional methods. These new products also provide emergency
responders and others with additional tools or agents to use to reduce
the hazards of spilled materials.
These agents can be rapidly applied over a large area and can be
uniformly applied or otherwise can be used to build a small dam, thus
improving the workers' ability to control spilled material. These
application techniques enhance the intimate contact between the agent
and the spilled material allowing for the quickest effect by the agent
or quickest control of the spilled material. Agents are available to
solidify liquid spilled materials, to suppress vapor generation from
spilled materials, and to do both. Some special agents, which when
applied as recommended by the manufacturer, will react in a controlled
manner with the spilled material to neutralize acids or caustics, or
greatly reduce the level of hazard of the spilled material.
There are several modern methods and devices for use by emergency
response personnel or others involved with spill control efforts to
safely apply spill control agents to control spilled material hazards.
These include portable pressurized applicators similar to hand-held
portable fire extinguishing devices, and nozzle and hose systems similar
to portable fire fighting foam systems which allow the operator to apply
the agent without having to come into contact with the spilled material.
The operator is able to apply the agent to the spilled material from a
remote position.
The solidification of liquids provides for rapid containment and
isolation of hazardous substance spills. By directing the agent at run-
off points or at the edges of the spill, the reactant solid will
automatically create a barrier to slow or stop the spread of the
material. Clean-up of hazardous substances is greatly improved when
solidifying agents, acid or caustic neutralizers, or activated carbon
adsorbents are used. Properly applied, these agents can totally solidify
liquid hazardous substances or neutralize or absorb them, which results
in materials which are less hazardous and easier to handle,
[[Page 403]]
transport, and dispose of. The concept of spill treatment, to create
less hazardous substances, will improve the safety and level of
protection of employees working at spill clean-up operations or
emergency response operations to spills of hazardous substances.
The use of vapor suppression agents for volatile hazardous
substances, such as flammable liquids and those substances which present
an inhalation hazard, is important for protecting workers. The rapid and
uniform distribution of the agent over the surface of the spilled
material can provide quick vapor knockdown. There are temporary and
long-term foam-type agents which are effective on vapors and dusts, and
activated carbon adsorption agents which are effective for vapor control
and soaking-up of the liquid. The proper use of hose lines or hand-held
portable pressurized applicators provides good mobility and permits the
worker to deliver the agent from a safe distance without having to step
into the untreated spilled material. Some of these systems can be
recharged in the field to provide coverage of larger spill areas than
the design limits of a single charged applicator unit. Some of the more
effective agents can solidify the liquid flammable hazardous substances
and at the same time elevate the flashpoint above 140 deg.F so the
resulting substance may be handled as a nonhazardous waste material if
it meets the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's 40 CFR part 261
requirements (See particularly Sec. 261.21).
All workers performing hazardous substance spill control work are
expected to wear the proper protective clothing and equipment for the
materials present and to follow the employer's established standard
operating procedures for spill control. All involved workers need to be
trained in the established operating procedures; in the use and care of
spill control equipment; and in the associated hazards and control of
such hazards of spill containment work.
These new tools and agents are the things that employers will want
to evaluate as part of their new technology program. The treatment of
spills of hazardous substances or wastes at an emergency incident as
part of the immediate spill containment and control efforts is sometimes
acceptable to EPA and a permit exception is described in 40 CFR
264.1(g)(8) and 265.1(c)(11).
Appendix D to Sec. 1910.120--References
The following references may be consulted for further information on
the subject of this standard:
1. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2.70--January 29, 1986, Special Emphasis
Program: Hazardous Waste Sites.
2. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2-2.37A--January 29, 1986, Technical
Assistance and Guidelines for Superfund and Other Hazardous Waste Site
Activities.
3. OSHA Instruction DTS CPL 2.74--January 29, 1986, Hazardous Waste
Activity Form, OSHA 175.
4. Hazardous Waste Inspections Reference Manual, U.S. Department of
Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, 1986.
5. Memorandum of Understanding Among the National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health, the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration, the United States Coast Guard, and the United States
Environmental Protection Agency, Guidance for Worker Protection During
Hazardous Waste Site Investigations and Clean-up and Hazardous Substance
Emergencies. December 18, 1980.
6. National Priorities List, 1st Edition, October 1984; U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Revised periodically.
7. The Decontamination of Response Personnel, Field Standard
Operating Procedures (F.S.O.P.) 7; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Office of Emergency and Remedial Response, Hazardous Response Support
Division, December 1984.
8. Preparation of a Site Safety Plan, Field Standard Operating
Procedures (F.S.O.P.) 9; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of
Emergency and Remedial Response, Hazardous Response Support Division,
April 1985.
9. Standard Operating Safety Guidelines; U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Office of Emergency and Remedial Response, Hazardous
Response Support Division, Environmental Response Team; November 1984.
10. Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous
Waste Site Activities, National Institute for Occupational Safety and
Health (NIOSH), Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA),
U.S. Coast Guard (USCG), and Environmental Protection Agency (EPA);
October 1985.
11. Protecting Health and Safety at Hazardous Waste Sites: An
Overview, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, EPA/625/9-85/006;
September 1985.
12. Hazardous Waste Sites and Hazardous Substance Emergencies, NIOSH
Worker Bulletin, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public
Health Service, Centers for Disease Control, National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health; December 1982.
13. Personal Protective Equipment for Hazardous Materials Incidents:
A Selection Guide; U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public
Health Service, Centers for Disease Control, National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health; October 1984.
14. Fire Service Emergency Management Handbook, International
Association of Fire Chiefs Foundation, 101 East Holly Avenue, Unit 10B,
Sterling, VA 22170, January 1985.
15. Emergency Response Guidebook, U.S Department of Transportation,
Washington, DC, 1987.
[[Page 404]]
16. Report to the Congress on Hazardous Materials Training, Planning
and Preparedness, Federal Emergency Management Agency, Washington, DC,
July 1986.
17. Workbook for Fire Command, Alan V. Brunacini and J. David
Beageron, National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Quincy, MA 02269, 1985.
18. Fire Command, Alan V. Brunacini, National Fire Protection
Association, Batterymarch Park,, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985.
19. Incident Command System, Fire Protection Publications, Oklahoma
State University, Stillwater, OK 74078, 1983.
20. Site Emergency Response Planning, Chemical Manufacturers
Association, Washington, DC 20037, 1986.
21. Hazardous Materials Emergency Planning Guide, NRT-1,
Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC, March 1987.
22. Community Teamwork: Working Together to Promote Hazardous
Materials Transportation Safety. U.S. Department of Transportation,
Washington, DC, May 1983.
23. Disaster Planning Guide for Business and Industry, Federal
Emergency Management Agency, Publication No. FEMA 141, August 1987.
(The Office of Management and Budget has approved the information
collection requirements in this section under control number 1218-0139)
Appendix E to Sec. 1910.120--Training Curriculum Guidelines
The following non-mandatory general criteria may be used for
assistance in developing site-specific training curriculum used to meet
the training requirements of 29 CFR 1910.120(e); 29 CFR 1910.120(p)(7),
(p)(8)(iii); and 29 CFR 1910.120(q)(6), (q)(7), and (q)(8). These are
generic guidelines and they are not presented as a complete training
curriculum for any specific employer. Site-specific training programs
must be developed on the basis of a needs assessment of the hazardous
waste site, RCRA/TSDF, or emergency response operation in accordance
with 29 CFR 1910.120.
It is noted that the legal requirements are set forth in the
regulatory text of Sec. 1910.120. The guidance set forth here presents a
highly effective program that in the areas covered would meet or exceed
the regulatory requirements. In addition, other approaches could meet
the regulatory requirements.
Suggested General Criteria
Definitions:
``Competent'' means possessing the skills, knowledge, experience,
and judgment to perform assigned tasks or activities satisfactorily as
determined by the employer.
``Demonstration'' means the showing by actual use of equipment or
procedures.
``Hands-on training'' means training in a simulated work environment
that permits each student to have experience performing tasks, making
decisions, or using equipment appropriate to the job assignment for
which the training is being conducted.
``Initial training'' means training required prior to beginning
work.
``Lecture'' means an interactive discourse with a class lead by an
instructor.
``Proficient'' means meeting a stated level of achievement.
``Site-specific'' means individual training directed to the
operations of a specific job site.
``Training hours'' means the number of hours devoted to lecture,
learning activities, small group work sessions, demonstration,
evaluations, or hands-on experience.
Suggested core criteria:
1. Training facility. The training facility should have available
sufficient resources, equipment, and site locations to perform didactic
and hands-on training when appropriate. Training facilities should have
sufficient organization, support staff, and services to conduct training
in each of the courses offered.
2. Training Director. Each training program should be under the
direction of a training director who is responsible for the program. The
Training Director should have a minimum of two years of employee
education experience.
3. Instructors. Instructors should be deem competent on the basis of
previous documented experience in their area of instruction, successful
completion of a ``train-the-trainer'' program specific to the topics
they will teach, and an evaluation of instructional competence by the
Training Director.
Instructors should be required to maintain professional competency
by participating in continuing education or professional development
programs or by completing successfully an annual refresher course and
having an annual review by the Training Director.
The annual review by the Training Director should include
observation of an instructor's delivery, a review of those observations
with the trainer, and an analysis of any instructor or class evaluations
completed by the students during the previous year.
4. Course materials. The Training Director should approve all course
materials to be used by the training provider. Course materials should
be reviewed and updated at least annually. Materials and equipment
should be in good working order and maintained properly.
All written and audio-visual materials in training curricula should
be peer reviewed by technically competent outside reviewers or by a
standing advisory committee.
[[Page 405]]
Reviews should possess expertise in the following disciplines were
applicable: occupational health, industrial hygiene and safety,
chemical/environmental engineering, employee education, or emergency
response. One or more of the peer reviewers should be a employee
experienced in the work activities to which the training is directed.
5. Students. The program for accepting students should include:
a. Assurance that the student is or will be involved in work where
chemical exposures are likely and that the student possesses the skills
necessary to perform the work.
b. A policy on the necessary medical clearance.
6. Ratios. Student-instructor ratios should not exceed 30 students
per instructor. Hands-on activity requiring the use of personal
protective equipment should have the following student-instructor
ratios. For Level C or Level D personal protective equipment the ratio
should be 10 students per instructor. For Level A or Level B personal
protective equipment the ratio should be 5 students per instructor.
7. Proficiency assessment. Proficiency should be evaluated and
documented by the use of a written assessment and a skill demonstration
selected and developed by the Training Director and training staff. The
assessment and demonstration should evaluate the knowledge and
individual skills developed in the course of training. The level of
minimum achievement necessary for proficiency shall be specified in
writing by the Training Director.
If a written test is used, there should be a minimum of 50
questions. If a written test is used in combination with a skills
demonstration, a minimum of 25 questions should be used. If a skills
demonstration is used, the tasks chosen and the means to rate successful
completion should be fully documented by the Training Director.
The content of the written test or of the skill demonstration shall
be relevant to the objectives of the course. The written test and skill
demonstration should be updated as necessary to reflect changes in the
curriculum and any update should be approved by the Training Director.
The proficiency assessment methods, regardless of the approach or
combination of approaches used, should be justified, documented and
approved by the Training Director.
The proficiency of those taking the additional courses for
supervisors should be evaluated and documented by using proficiency
assessment methods acceptable to the Training Director. These
proficiency assessment methods must reflect the additional
responsibilities borne by supervisory personnel in hazardous waste
operations or emergency response.
8. Course certificate. Written documentation should be provided to
each student who satisfactorily completes the training course. The
documentation should include:
a. Student's name.
b. Course title.
c. Course date.
d. Statement that the student has successfully completed the course.
e. Name and address of the training provider.
f. An individual identification number for the certificate.
g. List of the levels of personal protective equipment used by the
student to complete the course.
This documentation may include a certificate and an appropriate
wallet-sized laminated card with a photograph of the student and the
above information. When such course certificate cards are used, the
individual identification number for the training certificate should be
shown on the card.
9. Recordkeeping. Training providers should maintain records listing
the dates courses were presented, the names of the individual course
attenders, the names of those students successfully completing each
course, and the number of training certificates issued to each
successful student. These records should be maintained for a minimum of
five years after the date an individual participated in a training
program offered by the training provider. These records should be
available and provided upon the student's request or as mandated by law.
10. Program quality control. The Training Director should conduct or
direct an annual written audit of the training program. Program
modifications to address deficiencies, if any, should be documented,
approved, and implemented by the training provider. The audit and the
program modification documents should be maintained at the training
facility.
Suggested Program Quality Control Criteria
Factors listed here are suggested criteria for determining the
quality and appropriateness of employee health and safety training for
hazardous waste operations and emergency response.
A. Training Plan.
Adequacy and appropriateness of the training program's curriculum
development, instructor training, distribution of course materials, and
direct student training should be considered, including
1. The duration of training, course content, and course schedules/
agendas;
2. The different training requirements of the various target
populations, as specified in the appropriate generic training
curriculum;
[[Page 406]]
3. The process for the development of curriculum, which includes
appropriate technical input, outside review, evaluation, program
pretesting.
4. The adequate and appropriate inclusion of hands-on,
demonstration, and instruction methods;
5. Adequate monitoring of student safety, progress, and performance
during the training.
B. Program management, Training Director, staff, and consultants.
Adequacy and appropriateness of staff performance and delivering an
effective training program should be considered, including
1. Demonstration of the training director's leadership in assuring
quality of health and safety training.
2. Demonstration of the competency of the staff to meet the demands
of delivering high quality hazardous waste employee health and safety
training.
3. Organization charts establishing clear lines of authority.
4. Clearly defined staff duties including the relationship of the
training staff to the overall program.
5. Evidence that the training organizational structure suits the
needs of the training program.
6. Appropriateness and adequacy of the training methods used by the
instructors.
7. Sufficiency of the time committed by the training director and
staff to the training program.
8. Adequacy of the ratio of training staff to students.
9. Availability and commitment of the training program of adequate
human and equipment resources in the areas of
a. Health effects,
b. Safety,
c. Personal protective equipment (PPE),
d. Operational procedures,
e. Employee protection practices/procedures.
10. Appropriateness of management controls.
11. Adequacy of the organization and appropriate resources assigned
to assure appropriate training.
12. In the case of multiple-site training programs, adequacy of
satellite centers management.
C. Training facilities and resources.
Adequacy and appropriateness of the facilities and resources for
supporting the training program should be considered, including,
1. Space and equipment to conduct the training.
2. Facilities for representative hands-on training.
3. In the case of multiple-site programs, equipment and facilities
at the satellite centers.
4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and
evaluations program to account for instructor performance.
5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and
evaluation program to ensure appropriate course evaluation, feedback,
updating, and corrective action.
6. Adequacy and appropriateness of disciplines and expertise being
used within the quality control and evaluation program.
7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the role of student evaluations
to provide feedback for training program improvement.
D. Quality control and evaluation.
Adequacy and appropriateness of quality control and evaluation plans
for training programs should be considered, including:
1. A balanced advisory committee and/or competent outside reviewers
to give overall policy guidance;
2. Clear and adequate definition of the composition and active
programmatic role of the advisory committee or outside reviewers.
3. Adequacy of the minutes or reports of the advisory committee or
outside reviewers' meetings or written communication.
4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and
evaluations program to account for instructor performance.
5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and
evaluation program to ensure appropriate course evaluation, feedback,
updating, and corrective action.
6. Adequacy and appropriateness of disciplines and expertise being
used within the quality control and evaluation program.
7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the role of student evaluations
to provide feedback for training program improvement.
E. Students
Adequacy and appropriateness of the program for accepting students
should be considered, including
1. Assurance that the student already possess the necessary skills
for their job, including necessary documentation.
2. Appropriateness of methods the program uses to ensure that
recruits are capable of satisfactorily completing training.
3. Review and compliance with any medical clearance policy.
F. Institutional Environment and Administrative Support
The adequacy and appropriateness of the institutional environment
and administrative support system for the training program should be
considered, including
1. Adequacy of the institutional commitment to the employee training
program.
2. Adequacy and appropriateness of the administrative structure and
administrative support.
G. Summary of Evaluation Questions
Key questions for evaluating the quality and appropriateness of an
overall training program should include the following:
[[Page 407]]
1. Are the program objectives clearly stated?
2. Is the program accomplishing its objectives?
3. Are appropriate facilities and staff available?
4. Is there an appropriate mix of classroom, demonstration, and
hands-on training?
5. Is the program providing quality employee health and safety
training that fully meets the intent of regulatory requirements?
6. What are the program's main strengths?
7. What are the program's main weaknesses?
8. What is recommended to improve the program?
9. Are instructors instructing according to their training outlines?
10. Is the evaluation tool current and appropriate for the program
content?
11. Is the course material current and relevant to the target group?
Suggested Training Curriculum Guidelines
The following training curriculum guidelines are for those
operations specifically identified in 29 CFR 1910.120 as requiring
training. Issues such as qualifications of instructors, training
certification, and similar criteria appropriate to all categories of
operations addressed in 1910.120 have been covered in the preceding
section and are not re-addressed in each of the generic guidelines.
Basic core requirements for training programs that are addressed include
1. General Hazardous Waste Operations
2. RCRA operations--Treatment, storage, and disposal facilities.
3. Emergency Response.
A. General Hazardous Waste Operations and Site-specific Training
1. Off-site training.Training course content for hazardous waste
operations, required by 29 CFR 1910.120(e), should include the following
topics or procedures:
a. Regulatory knowledge.
(1) An review of 29 CFR 1910.120 and the core elements of an
occupational safety and health program.
(2) The content of a medical surveillance program as outlined in 29
CFR 1910.120(f).
(3) The content of an effective site safety and health plan
consistent with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.120(b)(4)(ii).
(4) Emergency response plan and procedures as outlined in 29 CFR
1910.38 and 29 CFR 1910.120(l).
(5) Adequate illumination.
(6) Sanitation recommendation and equipment.
(7) Review and explanation of OSHA's hazard-communication standard
(29 CFR 1910.1200) and lock-out-tag-out standard (29 CFR 1910.147).
(8) Review of other applicable standards including but not limited
to those in the construction standards (29 CFR Part 1926).
(9) Rights and responsibilities of employers and employees under
applicable OSHA and EPA laws.
b. Technical knowledge.
(1) Type of potential exposures to chemical, biological, and
radiological hazards; types of human responses to these hazards and
recognition of those responses; principles of toxicology and information
about acute and chronic hazards; health and safety considerations of new
technology.
(2) Fundamentals of chemical hazards including but not limited to
vapor pressure, boiling points, flash points, ph, other physical and
chemical properties.
(3) Fire and explosion hazards of chemicals.
(4) General safety hazards such as but not limited to electrical
hazards, powered equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, walking-
working surface hazards, excavation hazards, and hazards associated with
working in hot and cold temperature extremes.
(5) Review and knowledge of confined space entry procedures in 29
CFR 1910.146.
(6) Work practices to minimize employee risk from site hazards.
(7) Safe use of engineering controls, equipment, and any new
relevant safety technology or safety procedures.
(8) Review and demonstration of competency with air sampling and
monitoring equipment that may be used in a site monitoring program.
(9) Container sampling procedures and safeguarding; general drum and
container handling procedures including special requirement for
laboratory waste packs, shock-sensitive wastes, and radioactive wastes.
(10) The elements of a spill control program.
(11) Proper use and limitations of material handling equipment.
(12) Procedures for safe and healthful preparation of containers for
shipping and transport.
(13) Methods of communication including those used while wearing
respiratory protection.
c. Technical skills.
(1) Selection, use maintenance, and limitations of personal
protective equipment including the components and procedures for
carrying out a respirator program to comply with 29 CFR 1910.134.
(2) Instruction in decontamination programs including personnel,
equipment, and hardware; hands-on training including level A, B, and C
ensembles and appropriate decontamination lines; field activities
including the donning and doffing of protective equipment to a level
commensurate with the employee's anticipated job function and
responsibility and to the degree required by potential hazards.
[[Page 408]]
(3) Sources for additional hazard information; exercises using
relevant manuals and hazard coding systems.
d. Additional suggested items.
(1) A laminated, dated card or certificate with photo, denoting
limitations and level of protection for which the employee is trained
should be issued to those students successfully completing a course.
(2) Attendance should be required at all training modules, with
successful completion of exercises and a final written or oral
examination with at least 50 questions.
(3) A minimum of one-third of the program should be devoted to
hands-on exercises.
(4) A curriculum should be established for the 8-hour refresher
training required by 29 CFR 1910.120(e)(8), with delivery of such
courses directed toward those areas of previous training that need
improvement or reemphasis.
(5) A curriculum should be established for the required 8-hour
training for supervisors. Demonstrated competency in the skills and
knowledge provided in a 40-hour course should be a prerequisite for
supervisor training.
2. Refresher training.
The 8-hour annual refresher training required in 29 CFR
1910.120(e)(8) should be conducted by qualified training providers.
Refresher training should include at a minimum the following topics and
procedures:
(a) Review of and retraining on relevant topics covered in the 40-
hour program, as appropriate, using reports by the students on their
work experiences.
(b) Update on developments with respect to material covered in the
40-hour course.
(c) Review of changes to pertinent provisions of EPA or OSHA
standards or laws.
(d) Introduction of additional subject areas as appropriate.
(e) Hands-on review of new or altered PPE or decontamination
equipment or procedures. Review of new developments in personal
protective equipment.
(f) Review of newly developed air and contaminant monitoring
equipment.
3. On-site training.
a. The employer should provide employees engaged in hazardous waste
site activities with information and training prior to initial
assignment into their work area, as follows:
(1) The requirements of the hazard communication program including
the location and availability of the written program, required lists of
hazardous chemicals, and material safety data sheets.
(2) Activities and locations in their work area where hazardous
substance may be present.
(3) Methods and observations that may be used to detect the present
or release of a hazardous chemical in the work area (such as monitoring
conducted by the employer, continuous monitoring devices, visual
appearances, or other evidence (sight, sound or smell) of hazardous
chemicals being released, and applicable alarms from monitoring devices
that record chemical releases.
(4) The physical and health hazards of substances known or
potentially present in the work area.
(5) The measures employees can take to help protect themselves from
work-site hazards, including specific procedures the employer has
implemented.
(6) An explanation of the labeling system and material safety data
sheets and how employees can obtain and use appropriate hazard
information.
(7) The elements of the confined space program including special
PPE, permits, monitoring requirements, communication procedures,
emergency response, and applicable lock-out procedures.
b. The employer should provide hazardous waste employees information
and training and should provide a review and access to the site safety
and plan as follows:
(1) Names of personnel and alternate responsible for site safety and
health.
(2) Safety and health hazards present on the site.
(3) Selection, use, maintenance, and limitations of personal
protective equipment specific to the site.
(4) Work practices by which the employee can minimize risks from
hazards.
(5) Safe use of engineering controls and equipment available on
site.
(6) Safe decontamination procedures established to minimize employee
contact with hazardous substances, including:
(A) Employee decontamination,
(B) Clothing decontamination, and
(C) Equipment decontamination.
(7) Elements of the site emergency response plan, including:
(A) Pre-emergency planning.
(B) Personnel roles and lines of authority and communication.
(C) Emergency recognition and prevention.
(D) Safe distances and places of refuge.
(E) Site security and control.
(F) Evacuation routes and procedures.
(G) Decontamination procedures not covered by the site safety and
health plan.
(H) Emergency medical treatment and first aid.
(I) Emergency equipment and procedures for handling emergency
incidents.
c. The employer should provide hazardous waste employees information
and training on personal protective equipment used at the site, such as
the following:
(1) PPE to be used based upon known or anticipated site hazards.
(2) PPE limitations of materials and construction; limitations
during temperature extremes, heat stress, and other appropriate
[[Page 409]]
medical considerations; use and limitations of respirator equipment as
well as documentation procedures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.134.
(3) PPE inspection procedures prior to, during, and after use.
(4) PPE donning and doffing procedures.
(5) PPE decontamination and disposal procedures.
(6) PPE maintenance and storage.
(7) Task duration as related to PPE limitations.
d. The employer should instruct the employee about the site medical
surveillance program relative to the particular site, including
(1) Specific medical surveillance programs that have been adapted
for the site.
(2) Specific signs and symptoms related to exposure to hazardous
materials on the site.
(3) The frequency and extent of periodic medical examinations that
will be used on the site.
(4) Maintenance and availability of records.
(5) Personnel to be contacted and procedures to be followed when
signs and symptoms of exposures are recognized.
e. The employees will review and discuss the site safety plan as
part of the training program. The location of the site safety plan and
all written programs should be discussed with employees including a
discussion of the mechanisms for access, review, and references
described.
B. RCRA Operations Training for Treatment, Storage and Disposal
Facilities.
1. As a minimum, the training course required in 29 CFR 1910.120 (p)
should include the following topics:
(a) Review of the applicable paragraphs of 29 CFR 1910.120 and the
elements of the employer's occupational safety and health plan.
(b) Review of relevant hazards such as, but not limited to,
chemical, biological, and radiological exposures; fire and explosion
hazards; thermal extremes; and physical hazards.
(c) General safety hazards including those associated with
electrical hazards, powered equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out
procedures, motor vehicle hazards and walking-working surface hazards.
(d) Confined-space hazards and procedures.
(e) Work practices to minimize employee risk from workplace hazards.
(f) Emergency response plan and procedures including first aid
meeting the requirements of paragraph (p)(8).
(g) A review of procedures to minimize exposure to hazardous waste
and various type of waste streams, including the materials handling
program and spill containment program.
(h) A review of hazard communication programs meeting the
requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200.
(i) A review of medical surveillance programs meeting the
requirements of 29 CFR 1910.120(p)(3) including the recognition of signs
and symptoms of overexposure to hazardous substance including known
synergistic interactions.
(j) A review of decontamination programs and procedures meeting the
requirements of 29 CFR 1910.120(p)(4).
(k) A review of an employer's requirements to implement a training
program and its elements.
(l) A review of the criteria and programs for proper selection and
use of personal protective equipment, including respirators.
(m) A review of the applicable appendices to 29 CFR 1910.120.
(n) Principles of toxicology and biological monitoring as they
pertain to occupational health.
(o) Rights and responsibilities of employees and employers under
applicable OSHA and EPA laws.
(p) Hands-on exercises and demonstrations of competency with
equipment to illustrate the basic equipment principles that may be used
during the performance of work duties, including the donning and doffing
of PPE.
(q) Sources of reference, efficient use of relevant manuals, and
knowledge of hazard coding systems to include information contained in
hazardous waste manifests.
(r) At least 8 hours of hands-on training.
(s) Training in the job skills required for an employee's job
function and responsibility before they are permitted to participate in
or supervise field activities.
2. The individual employer should provide hazardous waste employees
with information and training prior to an employee's initial assignment
into a work area. The training and information should cover the
following topics:
(a) The Emergency response plan and procedures including first aid.
(b) A review of the employer's hazardous waste handling procedures
including the materials handling program and elements of the spill
containment program, location of spill response kits or equipment, and
the names of those trained to respond to releases.
(c) The hazardous communication program meeting the requirements of
29 CFR 1910.1200.
(d) A review of the employer's medical surveillance program
including the recognition of signs and symptoms of exposure to relevant
hazardous substance including known synergistic interactions.
(e) A review of the employer's decontamination program and
procedures.
(f) An review of the employer's training program and the parties
responsible for that program.
(g) A review of the employer's personal protective equipment program
including the
[[Page 410]]
proper selection and use of PPE based upon specific site hazards.
(h) All relevant site-specific procedures addressing potential
safety and health hazards. This may include, as appropriate, biological
and radiological exposures, fire and explosion hazards, thermal hazards,
and physical hazards such as electrical hazards, powered equipment
hazards, lock-out-tag-out hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-
working surface hazards.
(i) Safe use engineering controls and equipment on site.
(j) Names of personnel and alternates responsible for safety and
health.
C. Emergency response training.
Federal OSHA standards in 29 CFR 1910.120(q) are directed toward
private sector emergency responders. Therefore, the guidelines provided
in this portion of the appendix are directed toward that employee
population. However, they also impact indirectly through State OSHA or
USEPA regulations some public sector emergency responders. Therefore,
the guidelines provided in this portion of the appendix may be applied
to both employee populations.
States with OSHA state plans must cover their employees with
regulations at least as effective as the Federal OSHA standards. Public
employees in states without approved state OSHA programs covering
hazardous waste operations and emergency response are covered by the
U.S. EPA under 40 CFR 311, a regulation virtually identical to
Sec. 1910.120.
Since this is a non-mandatory appendix and therefore not an
enforceable standard, OSHA recommends that those employers, employees or
volunteers in public sector emergency response organizations outside
Federal OSHA jurisdiction consider the following criteria in developing
their own training programs. A unified approach to training at the
community level between emergency response organizations covered by
Federal OSHA and those not covered directly by Federal OSHA can help
ensure an effective community response to the release or potential
release of hazardous substances in the community.
a. General considerations.
Emergency response organizations are required to consider the topics
listed in Sec. 1910.120(q)(6). Emergency response organizations may use
some or all of the following topics to supplement those mandatory topics
when developing their response training programs. Many of the topics
would require an interaction between the response provider and the
individuals responsible for the site where the response would be
expected.
(1) Hazard recognition, including:
(A) Nature of hazardous substances present,
(B) Practical applications of hazard recognition, including
presentations on biology, chemistry, and physics.
(2) Principles of toxicology, biological monitoring, and risk
assessment.
(3) Safe work practices and general site safety.
(4) Engineering controls and hazardous waste operations.
(5) Site safety plans and standard operating procedures.
(6) Decontamination procedures and practices.
(7) Emergency procedures, first aid, and self-rescue.
(8) Safe use of field equipment.
(9) Storage, handling, use and transportation of hazardous
substances.
(10) Use, care, and limitations of personal protective equipment.
(11) Safe sampling techniques.
(12) Rights and responsibilities of employees under OSHA and other
related laws concerning right-to-know, safety and health, compensations
and liability.
(13) Medical monitoring requirements.
(14) Community relations.
b. Suggested criteria for specific courses.
(1) First responder awareness level.
(A) Review of and demonstration of competency in performing the
applicable skills of 29 CFR 1910.120(q).
(B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. Department of Transportation's
Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG) and familiarization with OSHA
standard 29 CFR 1910.1201.
(C) Review of the principles and practices for analyzing an incident
to determine both the hazardous substances present and the basic hazard
and response information for each hazardous substance present.
(D) Review of procedures for implementing actions consistent with
the local emergency response plan, the organization's standard operating
procedures, and the current edition of DOT's ERG including emergency
notification procedures and follow-up communications.
(E) Review of the expected hazards including fire and explosions
hazards, confined space hazards, electrical hazards, powered equipment
hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-working surface hazards.
(F) Awareness and knowledge of the competencies for the First
Responder at the Awareness Level covered in the National Fire Protection
Association's Standard No. 472, Professional Competence of Responders to
Hazardous Materials Incidents.
(2) First responder operations level.
(A) Review of and demonstration of competency in performing the
applicable skills of 29 CFR 1910.120(q).
(B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. Department of Transportation's
Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer material safety data
sheets, CHEMTREC/
[[Page 411]]
CANUTEC, shipper or manufacturer contacts, and other relevant sources of
information addressing hazardous substance releases. Familiarization
with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1201.
(C) Review of the principles and practices for analyzing an incident
to determine the hazardous substances present, the likely behavior of
the hazardous substance and its container, the types of hazardous
substance transportation containers and vehicles, the types and
selection of the appropriate defensive strategy for containing the
release.
(D) Review of procedures for implementing continuing response
actions consistent with the local emergency response plan, the
organization's standard operating procedures, and the current edition of
DOT's ERG including extended emergency notification procedures and
follow-up communications.
(E) Review of the principles and practice for proper selection and
use of personal protective equipment.
(F) Review of the principles and practice of personnel and equipment
decontamination.
(G) Review of the expected hazards including fire and explosions
hazards, confined space hazards, electrical hazards, powered equipment
hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-working surface hazards.
(H) Awareness and knowledge of the competencies for the First
Responder at the Operations Level covered in the National Fire
Protection Association's Standard No. 472, Professional Competence of
Responders to Hazardous Materials Incidents.
(3) Hazardous materials technician.
(A) Review of and demonstration of competency in performing the
applicable skills of 29 CFR 1910.120(q).
(B) Hands-on experience with written and electronic information
relative to response decision making including but not limited to the
U.S. Department of Transportation's Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG),
manufacturer material safety data sheets, CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, shipper or
manufacturer contacts, computer data bases and response models, and
other relevant sources of information addressing hazardous substance
releases. Familiarization with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1201.
(C) Review of the principles and practices for analyzing an incident
to determine the hazardous substances present, their physical and
chemical properties, the likely behavior of the hazardous substance and
its container, the types of hazardous substance transportation
containers and vehicles involved in the release, the appropriate
strategy for approaching release sites and containing the release.
(D) Review of procedures for implementing continuing response
actions consistent with the local emergency response plan, the
organization's standard operating procedures, and the current edition of
DOT's ERG including extended emergency notification procedures and
follow-up communications.
(E) Review of the principles and practice for proper selection and
use of personal protective equipment.
(F) Review of the principles and practices of establishing exposure
zones, proper decontamination and medical surveillance stations and
procedures.
(G) Review of the expected hazards including fire and explosions
hazards, confined space hazards, electrical hazards, powered equipment
hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-working surface hazards.
(H) Awareness and knowledge of the competencies for the Hazardous
Materials Technician covered in the National Fire Protection
Association's Standard No. 472, Professional Competence of Responders to
Hazardous Materials Incidents.
(4) Hazardous materials specialist.
(A) Review of and demonstration of competency in performing the
applicable skills of 29 CFR 1910.120(q).
(B) Hands-on experience with retrieval and use of written and
electronic information relative to response decision making including
but not limited to the U.S. Department of Transportation's Emergency
Response Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer material safety data sheets,
CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, shipper or manufacturer contacts, computer data bases
and response models, and other relevant sources of information
addressing hazardous substance releases. Familiarization with OSHA
standard 29 CFR 1910.1201.
(C) Review of the principles and practices for analyzing an incident
to determine the hazardous substances present, their physical and
chemical properties, and the likely behavior of the hazardous substance
and its container, vessel, or vehicle.
(D) Review of the principles and practices for identification of the
types of hazardous substance transportation containers, vessels and
vehicles involved in the release; selecting and using the various types
of equipment available for plugging or patching transportation
containers, vessels or vehicles; organizing and directing the use of
multiple teams of hazardous material technicians and selecting the
appropriate strategy for approaching release sites and containing or
stopping the release.
(E) Review of procedures for implementing continuing response
actions consistent with the local emergency response plan, the
organization's standard operating procedures, including knowledge of the
available public and private response resources, establishment of an
incident command post, direction of hazardous material technician teams,
and extended emergency notification procedures and follow-up
communications.
(F) Review of the principles and practice for proper selection and
use of personal protective equipment.
[[Page 412]]
(G) Review of the principles and practices of establishing exposure
zones and proper decontamination, monitoring and medical surveillance
stations and procedures.
(H) Review of the expected hazards including fire and explosions
hazards, confined space hazards, electrical hazards, powered equipment
hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-working surface hazards.
(I) Awareness and knowledge of the competencies for the Off-site
Specialist Employee covered in the National Fire Protection
Association's Standard No. 472, Professional Competence of Responders to
Hazardous Materials Incidents.
(5) Incident commander.
The incident commander is the individual who, at any one time, is
responsible for and in control of the response effort. This individual
is the person responsible for the direction and coordination of the
response effort. An incident commander's position should be occupied by
the most senior, appropriately trained individual present at the
response site. Yet, as necessary and appropriate by the level of
response provided, the position may be occupied by many individuals
during a particular response as the need for greater authority,
responsibility, or training increases. It is possible for the first
responder at the awareness level to assume the duties of incident
commander until a more senior and appropriately trained individual
arrives at the response site.
Therefore, any emergency responder expected to perform as an
incident commander should be trained to fulfill the obligations of the
position at the level of response they will be providing including the
following:
(A) Ability to analyze a hazardous substance incident to determine
the magnitude of the response problem.
(B) Ability to plan and implement an appropriate response plan
within the capabilities of available personnel and equipment.
(C) Ability to implement a response to favorably change the outcome
of the incident in a manner consistent with the local emergency response
plan and the organization's standard operating procedures.
(D) Ability to evaluate the progress of the emergency response to
ensure that the response objectives are being met safely, effectively,
and efficiently.
(E) Ability to adjust the response plan to the conditions of the
response and to notify higher levels of response when required by the
changes to the response plan.
[54 FR 9317, Mar. 6, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 14073, Apr. 13, 1990; 56
FR 15832, Apr. 18, 1991; 59 FR 43270, Aug. 22, 1994; 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7,
1996]
Sec. 1910.121 [Reserved]
Dipping and Coating Operations
Source: 64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 1910.122 Table of contents.
This section lists the paragraph headings contained in
Secs. 1910.123 through 1910.126.
Sec. 1910.123 Dipping and coating operations: Coverage and definitions.
(a) Does this rule apply to me?
(b) What operations are covered?
(c) What operations are not covered?
(d) How are terms used in Secs. 1910.123 through 1910.126 defined?
Sec. 1910.124 General requirements for dipping and coating operations.
(a) What construction requirements apply to dip tanks?
(b) What ventilation requirements apply to vapor areas?
(c) What requirements must I follow to recirculate exhaust air into the
workplace?
(d) What must I do when I use an exhaust hood?
(e) What requirements must I follow when an employee enters a dip tank?
(f) What first-aid procedures must my employees know?
(g) What hygiene facilities must I provide?
(h) What treatment and first aid must I provide?
(i) What must I do before an employee cleans a dip tank?
(j) What must I do to inspect and maintain my dipping or coating
operation?
Sec. 1910.125 Additional requirements for dipping and coating
operations that use flammable or combustible liquids.
(a) What type of construction material must be used in making my dip
tank?
(b) When must I provide overflow piping?
(c) When must I provide a bottom drain?
(d) When must my conveyer system shut down automatically?
(e) What ignition and fuel sources must be controlled?
(f) What fire protection must I provide?
(g) To what temperature may I heat a liquid in a dip tank?
Sec. 1910.126 Additional requirements for special dipping and coating
operations.
(a) What additional requirements apply to hardening or tempering tanks?
(b) What additional requirements apply to flow coating?
[[Page 413]]
(c) What additional requirements apply to roll coating, roll spreading,
or roll impregnating?
(d) What additional requirements apply to vapor degreasing tanks?
(e) What additional requirements apply to cyanide tanks?
(f) What additional requirements apply to spray cleaning tanks and spray
degreasing tanks?
(g) What additional requirements apply to electrostatic paint detearing?
Sec. 1910.123 Dipping and coating operations: Coverage and definitions.
(a) Does this rule apply to me? (1) This rule (Secs. 1910.123
through 1910.126) applies when you use a dip tank containing a liquid
other than water. It applies when you use the liquid in the tank or its
vapor to:
(i) Clean an object;
(ii) Coat an object;
(iii) Alter the surface of an object; or
(iv) Change the character of an object.
(2) This rule also applies to the draining or drying of an object
you have dipped or coated.
(b) What operations are covered? Examples of covered operations are
paint dipping, electroplating, pickling, quenching, tanning, degreasing,
stripping, cleaning, roll coating, flow coating, and curtain coating.
(c) What operations are not covered? You are not covered by this
rule if your dip-tank operation only uses a molten material (a molten
metal, alloy, or salt, for example).
(d) How are terms used in Secs. 1910.123 through 1910.126 defined?
Adjacent area means any area within 20 feet (6.1 m) of a vapor area
that is not separated from the vapor area by tight partitions.
Approved means that the equipment so designated is listed or
approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, as defined by
Sec. 1910.7.
Autoignition temperature means the minimum temperature required to
cause self-sustained combustion, independent of any other source of
heat.
Combustible liquid means a liquid having a flash point of 100 deg.F
(37.8 deg.C) or above.
Dip tank means a container holding a liquid other than water and
that is used for dipping or coating. An object may be immersed (or
partially immersed) in a dip tank or it may be suspended in a vapor
coming from the tank.
Flammable liquid means a liquid having a flashpoint below 100 deg.F
(37.8 deg.C).
Flashpoint means the minimum temperature at which a liquid gives off
a vapor in sufficient concentration to ignite if tested in accordance
with the definition of ``flashpoint'' in Sec. 1910.1200(c).
Lower flammable limit (LFL) means the lowest concentration of a
material that will propagate a flame. The LFL is usually expressed as a
percent by volume of the material in air (or other oxidant).
Vapor area means any space containing a dip tank, including its
drain boards, associated drying or conveying equipment, and any
surrounding area where the vapor concentration exceeds 25% of the LFL of
the liquid in the tank.
You means the employer, as defined by the Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 651 et seq.).
Sec. 1910.124 General requirements for dipping and coating operations.
(a) What construction requirements apply to dip tanks? Any container
that you use as a dip tank must be strong enough to withstand any
expected load.
(b) What ventilation requirements apply to vapor areas? (1) The
ventilation that you provide to a vapor area must keep the airborne
concentration of any substance below 25% of its LFL.
(2) When a liquid in a dip tank creates an exposure hazard covered
by a standard listed in subpart Z of this part, you must control worker
exposure as required by that standard.
(3) You may use a tank cover or material that floats on the surface
of the liquid in a dip tank to replace or supplement ventilation. The
method or combination of methods you choose must maintain the airborne
concentration of the hazardous material and the worker's exposure within
the limits specified in paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this section.
(4) When you use mechanical ventilation, it must conform to the
following standards that are incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6:
[[Page 414]]
(i) ANSI Z9.2-1979, Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation
of Local Exhaust Systems;
(ii) NFPA 34-1995, Standard for Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or
Combustible Liquids;
(iii) ACGIH's ``Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended
Practice'' (22nd ed., 1995); or
(iv) ANSI Z9.1-1971, Practices for Ventilation and Operation of
Open-Surface Tanks, and NFPA 34-1966, Standard for Dip Tanks Containing
Flammable or Combustible Liquids.
(5) When you use mechanical ventilation, it must draw the flow of
air into a hood or exhaust duct.
(6) When you use mechanical ventilation, each dip tank must have an
independent exhaust system unless the combination of substances being
removed will not cause a:
(i) Fire;
(ii) Explosion; or
(iii) Chemical reaction.
(c) What requirements must I follow to recirculate exhaust air into
the workplace? (1) You may not recirculate exhaust air when any
substance in that air poses a health hazard to employees or exceeds 25%
of its LFL.
(2) You must ensure that any exhaust air recirculated from a dipping
or coating operation using flammable or combustible liquids is:
(i) Free of any solid particulate that poses a health or safety
hazard for employees; and
(ii) Monitored by approved equipment.
(3) You must have a system that sounds an alarm and automatically
shuts down the operation when the vapor concentration for any substance
in the exhaust airstream exceeds 25% of its LFL.
(d) What must I do when I use an exhaust hood? You must:
(1) Provide each room having exhaust hoods with a volume of outside
air that is at least 90 percent of the volume of the exhaust air; and
(2) Ensure that the outside air supply does not damage exhaust
hoods.
(e) What requirements must I follow when an employee enters a dip
tank? When an employee enters a dip tank, you must meet the entry
requirements of Sec. 1910.146, OSHA's standard for Permit-Required
Confined Spaces, as applicable.
(f) What first-aid procedures must my employees know? Your employees
must know the first-aid procedures that are appropriate to the dipping
or coating hazards to which they are exposed.
(g) What hygiene facilities must I provide? When your employees work
with liquids that may burn, irritate, or otherwise harm their skin, you
must provide:
(1) Locker space or other storage space to prevent contamination of
the employee's street clothes;
(2) An emergency shower and eye-wash station close to the dipping or
coating operation. In place of this equipment, you may use a water hose
that is at least 4 feet (1.22 m) long and at least \3/4\ of an inch (18
mm) thick with a quick-opening valve and carrying a pressure of 25
pounds per square inch (1.62 k/cm\2\) or less; and
(3) At least one basin with a hot-water faucet for every 10
employees who work with such liquids. (See paragraph (d) of
Sec. 1910.141.)
(h) What treatment and first aid must I provide? When your employees
work with liquids that may burn, irritate, or otherwise harm their skin,
you must provide:
(1) A physician's approval before an employee with a sore, burn, or
other skin lesion that requires medical treatment works in a vapor area;
(2) Treatment by a properly designated person of any small skin
abrasion, cut, rash, or open sore;
(3) Appropriate first-aid supplies that are located near the dipping
or coating operation; and
(4) For employees who work with chromic acid, periodic examinations
of their exposed body parts, especially their nostrils.
(i) What must I do before an employee cleans a dip tank? Before
permitting an employee to clean the interior of a dip tank, you must:
(1) Drain the contents of the tank and open the cleanout doors; and
(2) Ventilate and clear any pockets where hazardous vapors may have
accumulated.
(j) What must I do to inspect and maintain my dipping or coating
operation? You must:
[[Page 415]]
(1) Inspect the hoods and ductwork of the ventilation system for
corrosion or damage:
(i) At least quarterly during operation; and
(ii) Prior to operation after a prolonged shutdown.
(2) Ensure that the airflow is adequate:
(i) At least quarterly during operation; and
(ii) Prior to operation after a prolonged shutdown.
(3) Periodically inspect all dipping and coating equipment,
including covers, drains, overflow piping, and electrical and fire-
extinguishing systems, and promptly correct any deficiencies;
(4) Provide mechanical ventilation or respirators (selected and used
as specified in Sec. 1910.134, OSHA's Respiratory Protection standard)
to protect employees in the vapor area from exposure to toxic substances
released during welding, burning, or open-flame work; and
(5) Have dip tanks thoroughly cleaned of solvents and vapors before
permitting welding, burning, or open-flame work on them.
Sec. 1910.125 Additional requirements for dipping and coating operations that use flammable or combustible liquids.
If you use flammable or combustible liquids, you must comply with
the requirements of this section as well as the requirements of sections
1910.123, 1910.124, and 1910.126, as applicable.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You must comply with this section
if: And:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The flashpoint of the The liquid is heated as part of the operation; or
flammable or combustible liquid is
200 deg.F (93.3 deg.C) or above.
A heated object is placed in the liquid.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(a) What type of construction material must be used in making my dip
tank? Your dip tank must be made of noncombustible material.
(b) When must I provide overflow piping? (1) You must provide
properly trapped overflow piping that discharges to a safe location for
any dip tank having:
(i) A capacity greater than 150 gallons (568 L); or
(ii) A liquid surface area greater than 10 feet \2\ (0.95 m\2\).
(2) You must also ensure that:
(i) Any overflow piping is at least 3 inches (7.6 cm) in diameter
and has sufficient capacity to prevent the dip tank from overflowing;
(ii) Piping connections on drains and overflow pipes allow ready
access to the interior of the pipe for inspection and cleaning; and
(iii) The bottom of the overflow connection is at least 6 inches
(15.2 cm) below the top of the dip tank.
(c) When must I provide a bottom drain? (1) You must provide a
bottom drain for dip tanks that contain more than 500 gallons (1893 L)
of liquid, unless:
(i) The dip tank is equipped with an automatic closing cover meeting
the requirements of paragraph (f)(3) of this section; or
(ii) The viscosity of the liquid at normal atmospheric temperature
does not allow the liquid to flow or be pumped easily.
(2) You must ensure that the bottom drain required by this section:
(i) Will empty the dip tank during a fire;
(ii) Is properly trapped;
(iii) Has pipes that permit the dip tank's contents to be removed
within five minutes after a fire begins; and
(iv) Discharges to a safe location.
(3) Any bottom drain you provide must be capable of manual and
automatic operation, and manual operation must be from a safe and
accessible location.
(4) You must ensure that automatic pumps are used when gravity flow
from the bottom drain is impractical.
(d) When must my conveyor system shut down automatically? If your
conveyor system is used with a dip tank, the system must shut down
automatically:
(1) If there is a fire; or
(2) If the ventilation rate drops below what is required by
paragraph (b) of Sec. 1910.124.
[[Page 416]]
(e) What ignition and fuel sources must be controlled? (1) In each
vapor area and any adjacent area, you must ensure that:
(i) All electrical wiring and equipment conform to the applicable
hazardous (classified)-area requirements of subpart S of this part
(except as specifically permitted in paragraph (g) of Sec. 1910.126);
and
(ii) There are no flames, spark-producing devices, or other surfaces
that are hot enough to ignite vapors.
(2) You must ensure that any portable container used to add liquid
to the tank is electrically bonded to the dip tank and positively
grounded to prevent static electrical sparks or arcs.
(3) You must ensure that a heating system that is used in a drying
operation and could cause ignition:
(i) Is installed in accordance with NFPA 86A-1969, Standard for
Ovens and Furnaces (which is incorporated by reference in Sec. 1910.6 of
this part);
(ii) Has adequate mechanical ventilation that operates before and
during the drying operation; and
(iii) Shuts down automatically if any ventilating fan fails to
maintain adequate ventilation.
(4) You also must ensure that:
(i) All vapor areas are free of combustible debris and as free as
practicable of combustible stock;
(ii) Rags and other material contaminated with liquids from dipping
or coating operations are placed in approved waste cans immediately
after use; and
(iii) Waste can contents are properly disposed of at the end of each
shift.
(5) You must prohibit smoking in a vapor area and must post a
readily visible ``No Smoking'' sign near each dip tank.
(f) What fire protection must I provide? (1) You must provide the
fire protection required by this paragraph (f) for:
(i) Any dip tank having a capacity of at least 150 gallons (568 L)
or a liquid surface area of at least 4 feet \2\ (0.38 m \1\); and
(ii) Any hardening or tempering tank having a capacity of at least
500 gallons (1893 L) or a liquid surface area of at least 25 feet \2\
(2.37 m \2\).
(2) For every vapor area, you must provide:
(i) Manual fire extinguishers that are suitable for flammable and
combustible liquid fires and that conform to the requirements of
Sec. 1910.157; and
(ii) An automatic fire-extinguishing system that conforms to the
requirements of subpart L of this part.
(3) You may substitute a cover that is closed by an approved
automatic device for the automatic fire-extinguishing system if the
cover:
(i) Can also be activated manually;
(ii) Is noncombustible or tin-clad, with the enclosing metal applied
with locked joints; and
(iii) Is kept closed when the dip tank is not in use.
(g) To what temperature may I heat a liquid in a dip tank? You must
maintain the temperature of the liquid in a dip tank:
(1) Below the liquid's boiling point; and
(2) At least 100 deg.F (37.8 deg.C) below the liquid's
autoignition temperature.
Sec. 1910.126 Additional requirements for special dipping and coating operations.
In addition to the requirements in Secs. 1910.123 through 1910.125,
you must comply with any requirement in this section that applies to
your operation.
(a) What additional requirements apply to hardening or tempering
tanks?
(1) You must ensure that hardening or tempering tanks:
(i) Are located as far as practicable from furnaces;
(ii) Are on noncombustible flooring; and
(iii) Have noncombustible hoods and vents (or equivalent devices)
for venting to the outside. For this purpose, vent ducts must be treated
as flues and kept away from combustible materials, particularly roofs.
(2) You must equip each tank with an alarm that will sound if the
temperature of the liquid comes within 50 deg.F (10 deg.C) of its
flashpoint (the alarm set point).
(3) When practicable, you must also provide each tank with a limit
switch to shut down the conveyor supplying work to the tank.
[[Page 417]]
(4) If the temperature of the liquid can exceed the alarm set point,
you must equip the tank with a circulating cooling system.
(5) If the tank has a bottom drain, the bottom drain may be combined
with the oil-circulating system.
(6) You must not use air under pressure when you fill the dip tank
or agitate the liquid in the dip tank.
(b) What additional requirements apply to flow coating? (1) You must
use a direct low-pressure pumping system or a 10-gallon (38 L) or
smaller gravity tank to supply the paint for flow coating. In case of
fire, an approved heat-actuated device must shut down the pumping
system.
(2) You must ensure that the piping is substantial and rigidly
supported.
(c) What additional requirements apply to roll coating, roll
spreading, or roll impregnating? When these operations use a flammable
or combustible liquid that has a flashpoint below 140 deg.F (60
deg.C), you must prevent sparking of static electricity by:
(1) Bonding and grounding all metallic parts (including rotating
parts) and installing static collectors; or
(2) Maintaining a conductive atmosphere (for example, one with a
high relative humidity) in the vapor area.
(d) What additional requirements apply to vapor degreasing tanks?
(1) You must ensure that the condenser or vapor-level thermostat keeps
the vapor level at least 36 inches (91 cm) or one-half the tank width,
whichever is less, below the top of the vapor degreasing tank.
(2) When you use gas as a fuel to heat the tank liquid, you must
prevent solvent vapors from entering the air-fuel mixture. To do this,
you must make the combustion chamber airtight (except for the flue
opening).
(3) The flue must be made of corrosion-resistant material, and it
must extend to the outside. You must install a draft diverter if
mechanical exhaust is used on the flue.
(4) You must not allow the temperature of the heating element to
cause a solvent or mixture to decompose or to generate an excessive
amount of vapor.
(e) What additional requirements apply to cyanide tanks? You must
ensure that cyanide tanks have a dike or other safeguard to prevent
cyanide from mixing with an acid if a dip tank fails.
(f) What additional requirements apply to spray cleaning tanks and
spray degreasing tanks? If you spray a liquid in the air over an open-
surface cleaning or degreasing tank, you must control the spraying to
the extent feasible by:
(1) Enclosing the spraying operation; and
(2) Using mechanical ventilation to provide enough inward air
velocity to prevent the spray from leaving the vapor area.
(g) What additional requirements apply to electrostatic paint
detearing? (1) You must use only approved electrostatic equipment in
paint-detearing operations. Electrodes in such equipment must be
substantial, rigidly supported, permanently located, and effectively
insulated from ground by nonporous, noncombustible, clean, dry
insulators.
(2) You must use conveyors to support any goods being paint
deteared.
(3) You must ensure that goods being electrostatically deteared are
not manually handled.
(4) Between goods being electrostatically deteared and the
electrodes or conductors of the electrostatic equipment, you must
maintain a minimum distance of twice the sparking distance. This minimum
distance must be displayed conspicuously on a sign located near the
equipment.
(5) You must ensure that the electrostatic equipment has automatic
controls that immediately disconnect the power supply to the high-
voltage transformer and signal the operator if:
(i) Ventilation or the conveyors fail to operate;
(ii) A ground (or imminent ground) occurs anywhere in the high-
voltage system; or
(iii) Goods being electrostatically deteared come within twice the
sparking distance of the electrodes or conductors of the equipment.
(6) You must use fences, rails, or guards, made of conducting
material and adequately grounded, to separate paint-detearing operations
from storage areas and from personnel.
[[Page 418]]
(7) To protect paint-detearing operations from fire, you must have
in place:
(i) Automatic sprinklers; or
(ii) An automatic fire-extinguishing system conforming to the
requirements of subpart L of this part.
(8) To collect paint deposits, you must:
(i) Provide drip plates and screens; and
(ii) Clean these plates and screens in a safe location.
Subpart I--Personal Protective Equipment
Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act
of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71
(36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033),
or 6-96 (62 FR 111), as applicable.
Sections 1910.132, 1910.134, and 1910.138 also issued under 29 CFR
part 1911.
Sections 1910.133, 1910.135, and 1910.136 also issued under 29 CFR
part 1911 and 5 U.S.C. 553.
Sec. 1910.132 General requirements.
(a) Application. Protective equipment, including personal protective
equipment for eyes, face, head, and extremities, protective clothing,
respiratory devices, and protective shields and barriers, shall be
provided, used, and maintained in a sanitary and reliable condition
wherever it is necessary by reason of hazards of processes or
environment, chemical hazards, radiological hazards, or mechanical
irritants encountered in a manner capable of causing injury or
impairment in the function of any part of the body through absorption,
inhalation or physical contact.
(b) Employee-owned equipment. Where employees provide their own
protective equipment, the employer shall be responsible to assure its
adequacy, including proper maintenance, and sanitation of such
equipment.
(c) Design. All personal protective equipment shall be of safe
design and construction for the work to be performed.
(d) Hazard assessment and equipment selection. (1) The employer
shall assess the workplace to determine if hazards are present, or are
likely to be present, which necessitate the use of personal protective
equipment (PPE). If such hazards are present, or likely to be present,
the employer shall:
(i) Select, and have each affected employee use, the types of PPE
that will protect the affected employee from the hazards identified in
the hazard assessment;
(ii) Communicate selection decisions to each affected employee; and,
(iii) Select PPE that properly fits each affected employee.
Note: Non-mandatory Appendix B contains an example of procedures
that would comply with the requirement for a hazard assessment.
(2) The employer shall verify that the required workplace hazard
assessment has been performed through a written certification that
identifies the workplace evaluated; the person certifying that the
evaluation has been performed; the date(s) of the hazard assessment;
and, which identifies the document as a certification of hazard
assessment.
(e) Defective and damaged equipment. Defective or damaged personal
protective equipment shall not be used.
(f) Training. (1) The employer shall provide training to each
employee who is required by this section to use PPE. Each such employee
shall be trained to know at least the following:
(i) When PPE is necessary;
(ii) What PPE is necessary;
(iii) How to properly don, doff, adjust, and wear PPE;
(iv) The limitations of the PPE; and,
(v) The proper care, maintenance, useful life and disposal of the
PPE.
(2) Each affected employee shall demonstrate an understanding of the
training specified in paragraph (f)(1) of this section, and the ability
to use PPE properly, before being allowed to perform work requiring the
use of PPE.
(3) When the employer has reason to believe that any affected
employee who has already been trained does not have the understanding
and skill required by paragraph (f)(2) of this section, the employer
shall retrain each such employee. Circumstances where retraining is
required include, but are not limited to, situations where:
(i) Changes in the workplace render previous training obsolete; or
[[Page 419]]
(ii) Changes in the types of PPE to be used render previous training
obsolete; or
(iii) Inadequacies in an affected employee's knowledge or use of
assigned PPE indicate that the employee has not retained the requisite
understanding or skill.
(4) The employer shall verify that each affected employee has
received and understood the required training through a written
certification that contains the name of each employee trained, the
date(s) of training, and that identifies the subject of the
certification.
(g) Paragraphs (d) and (f) of this section apply only to
Secs. 1910.133, 1910.135, 1919.136, and 1910.138. Parpagraphs (d) and
(f) of this section do not apply to Secs. 1910.134 and 1910.137.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 59 FR 16334, Apr. 6, 1994; 59
FR 33910, July 1, 1994]
Sec. 1910.133 Eye and face protection.
(a) General requirements. (1) The employer shall ensure that each
affected employee uses appropriate eye or face protection when exposed
to eye or face hazards from flying particles, molten metal, liquid
chemicals, acids or caustic liquids, chemical gases or vapors, or
potentially injurious light radiation.
(2) The employer shall ensure that each affected employee uses eye
protection that provides side protection when there is a hazard from
flying objects. Detachable side protectors (e.g. clip-on or slide-on
side shields) meeting the pertinent requirements of this section are
acceptable.
(3) The employer shall ensure that each affected employee who wears
prescription lenses while engaged in operations that involve eye hazards
wears eye protection that incorporates the prescription in its design,
or wears eye protection that can be worn over the prescription lenses
without disturbing the proper position of the prescription lenses or the
protective lenses.
(4) Eye and face PPE shall be distinctly marked to facilitate
identification of the manufacturer.
(5) The employer shall ensure that each affected employee uses
equipment with filter lenses that have a shade number appropriate for
the work being performed for protection from injurious light radiation.
The following is a listing of appropriate shade numbers for various
operations.
[[Page 420]]
Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum* Protective
Operations Electrode Size 1/32 in. Arc Current Shade
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Shielded metal arc welding Less than 3................. Less than 60............... 7
3-5......................... 60-160..................... 8
5-8......................... 160-250.................... 10
More than 8................. 250-550.................... 11
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gas metal arc welding and flux less than 60............... 7
cored arc welding
60-160..................... 10
160-250.................... 10
250-500.................... 10
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gas Tungsten arc welding less than 50............... 8
50-150..................... 8
150-500.................... 10
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Air carbon (Light)..................... less than 500.............. 10
Arc cutting (Heavy)..................... 500-1000................... 11
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Plasma arc welding less than 20............... 6
20-100..................... 8
100-400.................... 10
400-800.................... 11
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Plasma arc cutting (light)**................... less than 300.............. 8
(medium)**.................. 300-400.................... 9
(heavy)**................... 400-800.................... 10
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Torch brazing ........................... 3
Torch soldering ........................... 2
Carbon arc welding ........................... 14
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum* Protective
Operations Plate thickness--inches Plate thickness--mm Shade
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gas Welding:
Light Under 1/8................... Under 3.2.................. 4
Medium 1/8 to 1/2.................. 3.2 to 12.7................ 5
Heavy Over 1/2.................... Over 12.7.................. 6
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Oxygen cutting:
Light Under 1..................... Under 25................... 3
Medium 1 to 6...................... 25 to 150.................. 4
Heavy Over 6...................... Over 150................... 5
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* As a rule of thumb, start with a shade that is too dark to see the weld zone. Then go to a lighter shade which
gives sufficient view of the weld zone without going below the minimum. In oxyfuel gas welding or cutting
where the torch produces a high yellow light, it is desirable to use a filter lens that absorbs the yellow or
sodium line in the visible light of the (spectrum) operation.
** These values apply where the actual arc is clearly seen. Experience has shown that lighter filters may be
used when the arc is hidden by the workpiece.
[[Page 421]]
(b) Criteria for protective eye and face devices. (1) Protective eye
and face devices purchased after July 5, 1994 shall comply with ANSI
Z87.1-1989, ``American National Standard Practice for Occupational and
Educational Eye and Face Protection,'' which is incorporated by
reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, or shall be demonstrated by the
employer to be equally effective.
(2) Eye and face protective devices purchased before July 5, 1994
shall comply with the ANSI ``USA standard for Occupational and
Educational Eye and Face Protection,'' Z87.1-1968, which is incorporated
by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, or shall be demonstrated by
the employer to be equally effective.
[59 FR 16360, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33911, July 1, 1994, as amended at 61
FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 19548, May 2, 1996]
Sec. 1910.134 Respiratory protection.
This section applies to General Industry (part 1910), Shipyards
(part 1915), Marine Terminals (part 1917), Longshoring (part 1918), and
Construction (part 1926).
(a) Permissible practice. (1) In the control of those occupational
diseases caused by breathing air contaminated with harmful dusts, fogs,
fumes, mists, gases, smokes, sprays, or vapors, the primary objective
shall be to prevent atmospheric contamination. This shall be
accomplished as far as feasible by accepted engineering control measures
(for example, enclosure or confinement of the operation, general and
local ventilation, and substitution of less toxic materials). When
effective engineering controls are not feasible, or while they are being
instituted, appropriate respirators shall be used pursuant to this
section.
(2) Respirators shall be provided by the employer when such
equipment is necessary to protect the health of the employee. The
employer shall provide the respirators which are applicable and suitable
for the purpose intended. The employer shall be responsible for the
establishment and maintenance of a respiratory protection program which
shall include the requirements outlined in paragraph (c) of this
section.
(b) Definitions. The following definitions are important terms used
in the respiratory protection standard in this section.
Air-purifying respirator means a respirator with an air-purifying
filter, cartridge, or canister that removes specific air contaminants by
passing ambient air through the air-purifying element.
Assigned protection factor (APF) [Reserved]
Atmosphere-supplying respirator means a respirator that supplies the
respirator user with breathing air from a source independent of the
ambient atmosphere, and includes supplied-air respirators (SARs) and
self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) units.
Canister or cartridge means a container with a filter, sorbent, or
catalyst, or combination of these items, which removes specific
contaminants from the air passed through the container.
Demand respirator means an atmosphere-supplying respirator that
admits breathing air to the facepiece only when a negative pressure is
created inside the facepiece by inhalation.
Emergency situation means any occurrence such as, but not limited
to, equipment failure, rupture of containers, or failure of control
equipment that may or does result in an uncontrolled significant release
of an airborne contaminant.
Employee exposure means exposure to a concentration of an airborne
contaminant that would occur if the employee were not using respiratory
protection.
End-of-service-life indicator (ESLI) means a system that warns the
respirator user of the approach of the end of adequate respiratory
protection, for example, that the sorbent is approaching saturation or
is no longer effective.
Escape-only respirator means a respirator intended to be used only
for emergency exit.
Filter or air purifying element means a component used in
respirators to remove solid or liquid aerosols from the inspired air.
Filtering facepiece (dust mask) means a negative pressure
particulate respirator with a filter as an integral part of the
facepiece or with the entire facepiece composed of the filtering medium.
[[Page 422]]
Fit factor means a quantitative estimate of the fit of a particular
respirator to a specific individual, and typically estimates the ratio
of the concentration of a substance in ambient air to its concentration
inside the respirator when worn.
Fit test means the use of a protocol to qualitatively or
quantitatively evaluate the fit of a respirator on an individual. (See
also Qualitative fit test QLFT and Quantitative fit test QNFT.)
Helmet means a rigid respiratory inlet covering that also provides
head protection against impact and penetration.
High efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter means a filter that is
at least 99.97% efficient in removing monodisperse particles of 0.3
micrometers in diameter. The equivalent NIOSH 42 CFR 84 particulate
filters are the N100, R100, and P100 filters.
Hood means a respiratory inlet covering that completely covers the
head and neck and may also cover portions of the shoulders and torso.
Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) means an atmosphere
that poses an immediate threat to life, would cause irreversible adverse
health effects, or would impair an individual's ability to escape from a
dangerous atmosphere.
Interior structural firefighting means the physical activity of fire
suppression, rescue or both, inside of buildings or enclosed structures
which are involved in a fire situation beyond the incipient stage. (See
29 CFR 1910.155)
Loose-fitting facepiece means a respiratory inlet covering that is
designed to form a partial seal with the face.
Maximum use concentration (MUC) [Reserved].
Negative pressure respirator (tight fitting) means a respirator in
which the air pressure inside the facepiece is negative during
inhalation with respect to the ambient air pressure outside the
respirator.
Oxygen deficient atmosphere means an atmosphere with an oxygen
content below 19.5% by volume.
Physician or other licensed health care professional (PLHCP) means
an individual whose legally permitted scope of practice (i.e., license,
registration, or certification) allows him or her to independently
provide, or be delegated the responsibility to provide, some or all of
the health care services required by paragraph (e) of this section.
Positive pressure respirator means a respirator in which the
pressure inside the respiratory inlet covering exceeds the ambient air
pressure outside the respirator.
Powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) means an air-purifying
respirator that uses a blower to force the ambient air through air-
purifying elements to the inlet covering.
Pressure demand respirator means a positive pressure atmosphere-
supplying respirator that admits breathing air to the facepiece when the
positive pressure is reduced inside the facepiece by inhalation.
Qualitative fit test (QLFT) means a pass/fail fit test to assess the
adequacy of respirator fit that relies on the individual's response to
the test agent.
Quantitative fit test (QNFT) means an assessment of the adequacy of
respirator fit by numerically measuring the amount of leakage into the
respirator.
Respiratory inlet covering means that portion of a respirator that
forms the protective barrier between the user's respiratory tract and an
air-purifying device or breathing air source, or both. It may be a
facepiece, helmet, hood, suit, or a mouthpiece respirator with nose
clamp.
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) means an atmosphere-
supplying respirator for which the breathing air source is designed to
be carried by the user.
Service life means the period of time that a respirator, filter or
sorbent, or other respiratory equipment provides adequate protection to
the wearer.
Supplied-air respirator (SAR) or airline respirator means an
atmosphere-supplying respirator for which the source of breathing air is
not designed to be carried by the user.
This section means this respiratory protection standard.
Tight-fitting facepiece means a respiratory inlet covering that
forms a complete seal with the face.
[[Page 423]]
User seal check means an action conducted by the respirator user to
determine if the respirator is properly seated to the face.
(c) Respiratory protection program. This paragraph requires the
employer to develop and implement a written respiratory protection
program with required worksite-specific procedures and elements for
required respirator use. The program must be administered by a suitably
trained program administrator. In addition, certain program elements may
be required for voluntary use to prevent potential hazards associated
with the use of the respirator. The Small Entity Compliance Guide
contains criteria for the selection of a program administrator and a
sample program that meets the requirements of this paragraph. Copies of
the Small Entity Compliance Guide will be available on or about April 8,
1998 from the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's Office of
Publications, Room N 3101, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW, Washington, DC,
20210 (202-219-4667).
(1) In any workplace where respirators are necessary to protect the
health of the employee or whenever respirators are required by the
employer, the employer shall establish and implement a written
respiratory protection program with worksite-specific procedures. The
program shall be updated as necessary to reflect those changes in
workplace conditions that affect respirator use. The employer shall
include in the program the following provisions of this section, as
applicable:
(i) Procedures for selecting respirators for use in the workplace;
(ii) Medical evaluations of employees required to use respirators;
(iii) Fit testing procedures for tight-fitting respirators;
(iv) Procedures for proper use of respirators in routine and
reasonably foreseeable emergency situations;
(v) Procedures and schedules for cleaning, disinfecting, storing,
inspecting, repairing, discarding, and otherwise maintaining
respirators;
(vi) Procedures to ensure adequate air quality, quantity, and flow
of breathing air for atmosphere-supplying respirators;
(vii) Training of employees in the respiratory hazards to which they
are potentially exposed during routine and emergency situations;
(viii) Training of employees in the proper use of respirators,
including putting on and removing them, any limitations on their use,
and their maintenance; and
(ix) Procedures for regularly evaluating the effectiveness of the
program.
(2) Where respirator use is not required:
(i) An employer may provide respirators at the request of employees
or permit employees to use their own respirators, if the employer
determines that such respirator use will not in itself create a hazard.
If the employer determines that any voluntary respirator use is
permissible, the employer shall provide the respirator users with the
information contained in Appendix D to this section (``Information for
Employees Using Respirators When Not Required Under the Standard''); and
(ii) In addition, the employer must establish and implement those
elements of a written respiratory protection program necessary to ensure
that any employee using a respirator voluntarily is medically able to
use that respirator, and that the respirator is cleaned, stored, and
maintained so that its use does not present a health hazard to the user.
Exception: Employers are not required to include in a written
respiratory protection program those employees whose only use of
respirators involves the voluntary use of filtering facepieces (dust
masks).
(3) The employer shall designate a program administrator who is
qualified by appropriate training or experience that is commensurate
with the complexity of the program to administer or oversee the
respiratory protection program and conduct the required evaluations of
program effectiveness.
(4) The employer shall provide respirators, training, and medical
evaluations at no cost to the employee.
(d) Selection of respirators. This paragraph requires the employer
to evaluate respiratory hazard(s) in the workplace, identify relevant
workplace and user factors, and base respirator selection on these
factors. The paragraph
[[Page 424]]
also specifies appropriately protective respirators for use in IDLH
atmospheres, and limits the selection and use of air-purifying
respirators.
(1) General requirements. (i) The employer shall select and provide
an appropriate respirator based on the respiratory hazard(s) to which
the worker is exposed and workplace and user factors that affect
respirator performance and reliability.
(ii) The employer shall select a NIOSH-certified respirator. The
respirator shall be used in compliance with the conditions of its
certification.
(iii) The employer shall identify and evaluate the respiratory
hazard(s) in the workplace; this evaluation shall include a reasonable
estimate of employee exposures to respiratory hazard(s) and an
identification of the contaminant's chemical state and physical form.
Where the employer cannot identify or reasonably estimate the employee
exposure, the employer shall consider the atmosphere to be IDLH.
(iv) The employer shall select respirators from a sufficient number
of respirator models and sizes so that the respirator is acceptable to,
and correctly fits, the user.
(2) Respirators for IDLH atmospheres. (i) The employer shall provide
the following respirators for employee use in IDLH atmospheres:
(A) A full facepiece pressure demand SCBA certified by NIOSH for a
minimum service life of thirty minutes, or
(B) A combination full facepiece pressure demand supplied-air
respirator (SAR) with auxiliary self-contained air supply.
(ii) Respirators provided only for escape from IDLH atmospheres
shall be NIOSH-certified for escape from the atmosphere in which they
will be used.
(iii) All oxygen-deficient atmospheres shall be considered IDLH.
Exception: If the employer demonstrates that, under all foreseeable
conditions, the oxygen concentration can be maintained within the ranges
specified in Table II of this section (i.e., for the altitudes set out
in the table), then any atmosphere-supplying respirator may be used.
(3) Respirators for atmospheres that are not IDLH. (i) The employer
shall provide a respirator that is adequate to protect the health of the
employee and ensure compliance with all other OSHA statutory and
regulatory requirements, under routine and reasonably foreseeable
emergency situations.
(A) Assigned Protection Factors (APFs) [Reserved]
(B) Maximum Use Concentration (MUC) [Reserved]
(ii) The respirator selected shall be appropriate for the chemical
state and physical form of the contaminant.
(iii) For protection against gases and vapors, the employer shall
provide:
(A) An atmosphere-supplying respirator, or
(B) An air-purifying respirator, provided that:
(1) The respirator is equipped with an end-of-service-life indicator
(ESLI) certified by NIOSH for the contaminant; or
(2) If there is no ESLI appropriate for conditions in the employer's
workplace, the employer implements a change schedule for canisters and
cartridges that is based on objective information or data that will
ensure that canisters and cartridges are changed before the end of their
service life. The employer shall describe in the respirator program the
information and data relied upon and the basis for the canister and
cartridge change schedule and the basis for reliance on the data.
(iv) For protection against particulates, the employer shall
provide:
(A) An atmosphere-supplying respirator; or
(B) An air-purifying respirator equipped with a filter certified by
NIOSH under 30 CFR part 11 as a high efficiency particulate air (HEPA)
filter, or an air-purifying respirator equipped with a filter certified
for particulates by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84; or
(C) For contaminants consisting primarily of particles with mass
median aerodynamic diameters (MMAD) of at least 2 micrometers, an air-
purifying respirator equipped with any filter certified for particulates
by NIOSH.
Table I--Assigned Protection Factors [Reserved]
[[Page 425]]
Table II
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Oxygen
deficient
Atmospheres
(% 02) for
which the
Altitude (ft.) employer
may rely on
atmosphere-
supplying
respirators
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Less than 3,001............................................ 16.0-19.5
3,001-4,000................................................ 16.4-19.5
4,001-5,000................................................ 17.1-19.5
5,001-6,000................................................ 17.8-19.5
6,001-7,000................................................ 18.5-19.5
7,001-8,000\1\............................................. 19.3-19.5.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Above 8,000 feet the exception does not apply. Oxygen-enriched
breathing air must be supplied above 14,000 feet.
(e) Medical evaluation. Using a respirator may place a physiological
burden on employees that varies with the type of respirator worn, the
job and workplace conditions in which the respirator is used, and the
medical status of the employee. Accordingly, this paragraph specifies
the minimum requirements for medical evaluation that employers must
implement to determine the employee's ability to use a respirator.
(1) General. The employer shall provide a medical evaluation to
determine the employee's ability to use a respirator, before the
employee is fit tested or required to use the respirator in the
workplace. The employer may discontinue an employee's medical
evaluations when the employee is no longer required to use a respirator.
(2) Medical evaluation procedures. (i) The employer shall identify a
physician or other licensed health care professional (PLHCP) to perform
medical evaluations using a medical questionnaire or an initial medical
examination that obtains the same information as the medical
questionnaire.
(ii) The medical evaluation shall obtain the information requested
by the questionnaire in Sections 1 and 2, Part A of Appendix C of this
section.
(3) Follow-up medical examination. (i) The employer shall ensure
that a follow-up medical examination is provided for an employee who
gives a positive response to any question among questions 1 through 8 in
Section 2, Part A of Appendix C or whose initial medical examination
demonstrates the need for a follow-up medical examination.
(ii) The follow-up medical examination shall include any medical
tests, consultations, or diagnostic procedures that the PLHCP deems
necessary to make a final determination.
(4) Administration of the medical questionnaire and examinations.
(i) The medical questionnaire and examinations shall be administered
confidentially during the employee's normal working hours or at a time
and place convenient to the employee. The medical questionnaire shall be
administered in a manner that ensures that the employee understands its
content.
(ii) The employer shall provide the employee with an opportunity to
discuss the questionnaire and examination results with the PLHCP.
(5) Supplemental information for the PLHCP. (i) The following
information must be provided to the PLHCP before the PLHCP makes a
recommendation concerning an employee's ability to use a respirator:
(A) The type and weight of the respirator to be used by the
employee;
(B) The duration and frequency of respirator use (including use for
rescue and escape);
(C) The expected physical work effort;
(D) Additional protective clothing and equipment to be worn; and
(E) Temperature and humidity extremes that may be encountered.
(ii) Any supplemental information provided previously to the PLHCP
regarding an employee need not be provided for a subsequent medical
evaluation if the information and the PLHCP remain the same.
(iii) The employer shall provide the PLHCP with a copy of the
written respiratory protection program and a copy of this section.
Note to paragraph (e)(5)(iii): When the employer replaces a PLHCP,
the employer must ensure that the new PLHCP obtains this information,
either by providing the documents directly to the PLHCP or having the
documents transferred from the former PLHCP to the new PLHCP. However,
OSHA does not expect employers to have employees medically reevaluated
solely because a new PLHCP has been selected.
[[Page 426]]
(6) Medical determination. In determining the employee's ability to
use a respirator, the employer shall:
(i) Obtain a written recommendation regarding the employee's ability
to use the respirator from the PLHCP. The recommendation shall provide
only the following information:
(A) Any limitations on respirator use related to the medical
condition of the employee, or relating to the workplace conditions in
which the respirator will be used, including whether or not the employee
is medically able to use the respirator;
(B) The need, if any, for follow-up medical evaluations; and
(C) A statement that the PLHCP has provided the employee with a copy
of the PLHCP's written recommendation.
(ii) If the respirator is a negative pressure respirator and the
PLHCP finds a medical condition that may place the employee's health at
increased risk if the respirator is used, the employer shall provide a
PAPR if the PLHCP's medical evaluation finds that the employee can use
such a respirator; if a subsequent medical evaluation finds that the
employee is medically able to use a negative pressure respirator, then
the employer is no longer required to provide a PAPR.
(7) Additional medical evaluations. At a minimum, the employer shall
provide additional medical evaluations that comply with the requirements
of this section if:
(i) An employee reports medical signs or symptoms that are related
to ability to use a respirator;
(ii) A PLHCP, supervisor, or the respirator program administrator
informs the employer that an employee needs to be reevaluated;
(iii) Information from the respiratory protection program, including
observations made during fit testing and program evaluation, indicates a
need for employee reevaluation; or
(iv) A change occurs in workplace conditions (e.g., physical work
effort, protective clothing, temperature) that may result in a
substantial increase in the physiological burden placed on an employee.
(f) Fit testing. This paragraph requires that, before an employee
may be required to use any respirator with a negative or positive
pressure tight-fitting facepiece, the employee must be fit tested with
the same make, model, style, and size of respirator that will be used.
This paragraph specifies the kinds of fit tests allowed, the procedures
for conducting them, and how the results of the fit tests must be used.
(1) The employer shall ensure that employees using a tight-fitting
facepiece respirator pass an appropriate qualitative fit test (QLFT) or
quantitative fit test (QNFT) as stated in this paragraph.
(2) The employer shall ensure that an employee using a tight-fitting
facepiece respirator is fit tested prior to initial use of the
respirator, whenever a different respirator facepiece (size, style,
model or make) is used, and at least annually thereafter.
(3) The employer shall conduct an additional fit test whenever the
employee reports, or the employer, PLHCP, supervisor, or program
administrator makes visual observations of, changes in the employee's
physical condition that could affect respirator fit. Such conditions
include, but are not limited to, facial scarring, dental changes,
cosmetic surgery, or an obvious change in body weight.
(4) If after passing a QLFT or QNFT, the employee subsequently
notifies the employer, program administrator, supervisor, or PLHCP that
the fit of the respirator is unacceptable, the employee shall be given a
reasonable opportunity to select a different respirator facepiece and to
be retested.
(5) The fit test shall be administered using an OSHA-accepted QLFT
or QNFT protocol. The OSHA-accepted QLFT and QNFT protocols and
procedures are contained in Appendix A of this section.
(6) QLFT may only be used to fit test negative pressure air-
purifying respirators that must achieve a fit factor of 100 or less.
(7) If the fit factor, as determined through an OSHA-accepted QNFT
protocol, is equal to or greater than 100 for tight-fitting half
facepieces, or equal to or greater than 500 for tight-fitting full
facepieces, the QNFT has been passed with that respirator.
[[Page 427]]
(8) Fit testing of tight-fitting atmosphere-supplying respirators
and tight-fitting powered air-purifying respirators shall be
accomplished by performing quantitative or qualitative fit testing in
the negative pressure mode, regardless of the mode of operation
(negative or positive pressure) that is used for respiratory protection.
(i) Qualitative fit testing of these respirators shall be
accomplished by temporarily converting the respirator user's actual
facepiece into a negative pressure respirator with appropriate filters,
or by using an identical negative pressure air-purifying respirator
facepiece with the same sealing surfaces as a surrogate for the
atmosphere-supplying or powered air-purifying respirator facepiece.
(ii) Quantitative fit testing of these respirators shall be
accomplished by modifying the facepiece to allow sampling inside the
facepiece in the breathing zone of the user, midway between the nose and
mouth. This requirement shall be accomplished by installing a permanent
sampling probe onto a surrogate facepiece, or by using a sampling
adapter designed to temporarily provide a means of sampling air from
inside the facepiece.
(iii) Any modifications to the respirator facepiece for fit testing
shall be completely removed, and the facepiece restored to NIOSH-
approved configuration, before that facepiece can be used in the
workplace.
(g) Use of respirators. This paragraph requires employers to
establish and implement procedures for the proper use of respirators.
These requirements include prohibiting conditions that may result in
facepiece seal leakage, preventing employees from removing respirators
in hazardous environments, taking actions to ensure continued effective
respirator operation throughout the work shift, and establishing
procedures for the use of respirators in IDLH atmospheres or in interior
structural firefighting situations.
(1) Facepiece seal protection. (i) The employer shall not permit
respirators with tight-fitting facepieces to be worn by employees who
have:
(A) Facial hair that comes between the sealing surface of the
facepiece and the face or that interferes with valve function; or
(B) Any condition that interferes with the face-to-facepiece seal or
valve function.
(ii) If an employee wears corrective glasses or goggles or other
personal protective equipment, the employer shall ensure that such
equipment is worn in a manner that does not interfere with the seal of
the facepiece to the face of the user.
(iii) For all tight-fitting respirators, the employer shall ensure
that employees perform a user seal check each time they put on the
respirator using the procedures in Appendix B-1 or procedures
recommended by the respirator manufacturer that the employer
demonstrates are as effective as those in Appendix B-1 of this section.
(2) Continuing respirator effectiveness. (i) Appropriate
surveillance shall be maintained of work area conditions and degree of
employee exposure or stress. When there is a change in work area
conditions or degree of employee exposure or stress that may affect
respirator effectiveness, the employer shall reevaluate the continued
effectiveness of the respirator.
(ii) The employer shall ensure that employees leave the respirator
use area:
(A) To wash their faces and respirator facepieces as necessary to
prevent eye or skin irritation associated with respirator use; or
(B) If they detect vapor or gas breakthrough, changes in breathing
resistance, or leakage of the facepiece; or
(C) To replace the respirator or the filter, cartridge, or canister
elements.
(iii) If the employee detects vapor or gas breakthrough, changes in
breathing resistance, or leakage of the facepiece, the employer must
replace or repair the respirator before allowing the employee to return
to the work area.
(3) Procedures for IDLH atmospheres. For all IDLH atmospheres, the
employer shall ensure that:
(i) One employee or, when needed, more than one employee is located
outside the IDLH atmosphere;
(ii) Visual, voice, or signal line communication is maintained
between the employee(s) in the IDLH atmosphere
[[Page 428]]
and the employee(s) located outside the IDLH atmosphere;
(iii) The employee(s) located outside the IDLH atmosphere are
trained and equipped to provide effective emergency rescue;
(iv) The employer or designee is notified before the employee(s)
located outside the IDLH atmosphere enter the IDLH atmosphere to provide
emergency rescue;
(v) The employer or designee authorized to do so by the employer,
once notified, provides necessary assistance appropriate to the
situation;
(vi) Employee(s) located outside the IDLH atmospheres are equipped
with:
(A) Pressure demand or other positive pressure SCBAs, or a pressure
demand or other positive pressure supplied-air respirator with auxiliary
SCBA; and either
(B) Appropriate retrieval equipment for removing the employee(s) who
enter(s) these hazardous atmospheres where retrieval equipment would
contribute to the rescue of the employee(s) and would not increase the
overall risk resulting from entry; or
(C) Equivalent means for rescue where retrieval equipment is not
required under paragraph (g)(3)(vi)(B).
(4) Procedures for interior structural firefighting. In addition to
the requirements set forth under paragraph (g)(3), in interior
structural fires, the employer shall ensure that:
(i) At least two employees enter the IDLH atmosphere and remain in
visual or voice contact with one another at all times;
(ii) At least two employees are located outside the IDLH atmosphere;
and
(iii) All employees engaged in interior structural firefighting use
SCBAs.
Note 1 to paragraph (g): One of the two individuals located outside
the IDLH atmosphere may be assigned to an additional role, such as
incident commander in charge of the emergency or safety officer, so long
as this individual is able to perform assistance or rescue activities
without jeopardizing the safety or health of any firefighter working at
the incident.
Note 2 to paragraph (g): Nothing in this section is meant to
preclude firefighters from performing emergency rescue activities before
an entire team has assembled.
(h) Maintenance and care of respirators. This paragraph requires the
employer to provide for the cleaning and disinfecting, storage,
inspection, and repair of respirators used by employees.
(1) Cleaning and disinfecting. The employer shall provide each
respirator user with a respirator that is clean, sanitary, and in good
working order. The employer shall ensure that respirators are cleaned
and disinfected using the procedures in Appendix B-2 of this section, or
procedures recommended by the respirator manufacturer, provided that
such procedures are of equivalent effectiveness. The respirators shall
be cleaned and disinfected at the following intervals:
(i) Respirators issued for the exclusive use of an employee shall be
cleaned and disinfected as often as necessary to be maintained in a
sanitary condition;
(ii) Respirators issued to more than one employee shall be cleaned
and disinfected before being worn by different individuals;
(iii) Respirators maintained for emergency use shall be cleaned and
disinfected after each use; and
(iv) Respirators used in fit testing and training shall be cleaned
and disinfected after each use.
(2) Storage. The employer shall ensure that respirators are stored
as follows:
(i) All respirators shall be stored to protect them from damage,
contamination, dust, sunlight, extreme temperatures, excessive moisture,
and damaging chemicals, and they shall be packed or stored to prevent
deformation of the facepiece and exhalation valve.
(ii) In addition to the requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(i) of this
section, emergency respirators shall be:
(A) Kept accessible to the work area;
(B) Stored in compartments or in covers that are clearly marked as
containing emergency respirators; and
(C) Stored in accordance with any applicable manufacturer
instructions.
(3) Inspection. (i) The employer shall ensure that respirators are
inspected as follows:
(A) All respirators used in routine situations shall be inspected
before each use and during cleaning;
[[Page 429]]
(B) All respirators maintained for use in emergency situations shall
be inspected at least monthly and in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, and shall be checked for proper function before and
after each use; and
(C) Emergency escape-only respirators shall be inspected before
being carried into the workplace for use.
(ii) The employer shall ensure that respirator inspections include
the following:
(A) A check of respirator function, tightness of connections, and
the condition of the various parts including, but not limited to, the
facepiece, head straps, valves, connecting tube, and cartridges,
canisters or filters; and
(B) A check of elastomeric parts for pliability and signs of
deterioration.
(iii) In addition to the requirements of paragraphs (h)(3)(i) and
(ii) of this section, self-contained breathing apparatus shall be
inspected monthly. Air and oxygen cylinders shall be maintained in a
fully charged state and shall be recharged when the pressure falls to
90% of the manufacturer's recommended pressure level. The employer shall
determine that the regulator and warning devices function properly.
(iv) For respirators maintained for emergency use, the employer
shall:
(A) Certify the respirator by documenting the date the inspection
was performed, the name (or signature) of the person who made the
inspection, the findings, required remedial action, and a serial number
or other means of identifying the inspected respirator; and
(B) Provide this information on a tag or label that is attached to
the storage compartment for the respirator, is kept with the respirator,
or is included in inspection reports stored as paper or electronic
files. This information shall be maintained until replaced following a
subsequent certification.
(4) Repairs. The employer shall ensure that respirators that fail an
inspection or are otherwise found to be defective are removed from
service, and are discarded or repaired or adjusted in accordance with
the following procedures:
(i) Repairs or adjustments to respirators are to be made only by
persons appropriately trained to perform such operations and shall use
only the respirator manufacturer's NIOSH-approved parts designed for the
respirator;
(ii) Repairs shall be made according to the manufacturer's
recommendations and specifications for the type and extent of repairs to
be performed; and
(iii) Reducing and admission valves, regulators, and alarms shall be
adjusted or repaired only by the manufacturer or a technician trained by
the manufacturer.
(i) Breathing air quality and use. This paragraph requires the
employer to provide employees using atmosphere-supplying respirators
(supplied-air and SCBA) with breathing gases of high purity.
(1) The employer shall ensure that compressed air, compressed
oxygen, liquid air, and liquid oxygen used for respiration accords with
the following specifications:
(i) Compressed and liquid oxygen shall meet the United States
Pharmacopoeia requirements for medical or breathing oxygen; and
(ii) Compressed breathing air shall meet at least the requirements
for Grade D breathing air described in ANSI/Compressed Gas Association
Commodity Specification for Air, G-7.1-1989, to include:
(A) Oxygen content (v/v) of 19.5-23.5%;
(B) Hydrocarbon (condensed) content of 5 milligrams per cubic meter
of air or less;
(C) Carbon monoxide (CO) content of 10 ppm or less;
(D) Carbon dioxide content of 1,000 ppm or less; and
(E) Lack of noticeable odor.
(2) The employer shall ensure that compressed oxygen is not used in
atmosphere-supplying respirators that have previously used compressed
air.
(3) The employer shall ensure that oxygen concentrations greater
than 23.5% are used only in equipment designed for oxygen service or
distribution.
(4) The employer shall ensure that cylinders used to supply
breathing air
[[Page 430]]
to respirators meet the following requirements:
(i) Cylinders are tested and maintained as prescribed in the
Shipping Container Specification Regulations of the Department of
Transportation (49 CFR part 173 and part 178);
(ii) Cylinders of purchased breathing air have a certificate of
analysis from the supplier that the breathing air meets the requirements
for Grade D breathing air; and
(iii) The moisture content in the cylinder does not exceed a dew
point of -50 deg.F (-45.6 deg.C) at 1 atmosphere pressure.
(5) The employer shall ensure that compressors used to supply
breathing air to respirators are constructed and situated so as to:
(i) Prevent entry of contaminated air into the air-supply system;
(ii) Minimize moisture content so that the dew point at 1 atmosphere
pressure is 10 degrees F (5.56 deg.C) below the ambient temperature;
(iii) Have suitable in-line air-purifying sorbent beds and filters
to further ensure breathing air quality. Sorbent beds and filters shall
be maintained and replaced or refurbished periodically following the
manufacturer's instructions.
(iv) Have a tag containing the most recent change date and the
signature of the person authorized by the employer to perform the
change. The tag shall be maintained at the compressor.
(6) For compressors that are not oil-lubricated, the employer shall
ensure that carbon monoxide levels in the breathing air do not exceed 10
ppm.
(7) For oil-lubricated compressors, the employer shall use a high-
temperature or carbon monoxide alarm, or both, to monitor carbon
monoxide levels. If only high-temperature alarms are used, the air
supply shall be monitored at intervals sufficient to prevent carbon
monoxide in the breathing air from exceeding 10 ppm.
(8) The employer shall ensure that breathing air couplings are
incompatible with outlets for nonrespirable worksite air or other gas
systems. No asphyxiating substance shall be introduced into breathing
air lines.
(9) The employer shall use breathing gas containers marked in
accordance with the NIOSH respirator certification standard, 42 CFR part
84.
(j) Identification of filters, cartridges, and canisters. The
employer shall ensure that all filters, cartridges and canisters used in
the workplace are labeled and color coded with the NIOSH approval label
and that the label is not removed and remains legible.
(k) Training and information. This paragraph requires the employer
to provide effective training to employees who are required to use
respirators. The training must be comprehensive, understandable, and
recur annually, and more often if necessary. This paragraph also
requires the employer to provide the basic information on respirators in
Appendix D of this section to employees who wear respirators when not
required by this section or by the employer to do so.
(1) The employer shall ensure that each employee can demonstrate
knowledge of at least the following:
(i) Why the respirator is necessary and how improper fit, usage, or
maintenance can compromise the protective effect of the respirator;
(ii) What the limitations and capabilities of the respirator are;
(iii) How to use the respirator effectively in emergency situations,
including situations in which the respirator malfunctions;
(iv) How to inspect, put on and remove, use, and check the seals of
the respirator;
(v) What the procedures are for maintenance and storage of the
respirator;
(vi) How to recognize medical signs and symptoms that may limit or
prevent the effective use of respirators; and
(vii) The general requirements of this section.
(2) The training shall be conducted in a manner that is
understandable to the employee.
(3) The employer shall provide the training prior to requiring the
employee to use a respirator in the workplace.
(4) An employer who is able to demonstrate that a new employee has
received training within the last 12 months that addresses the elements
specified in paragraph (k)(1)(i) through (vii) is not required to repeat
such
[[Page 431]]
training provided that, as required by paragraph (k)(1), the employee
can demonstrate knowledge of those element(s). Previous training not
repeated initially by the employer must be provided no later than 12
months from the date of the previous training.
(5) Retraining shall be administered annually, and when the
following situations occur:
(i) Changes in the workplace or the type of respirator render
previous training obsolete;
(ii) Inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of the
respirator indicate that the employee has not retained the requisite
understanding or skill; or
(iii) Any other situation arises in which retraining appears
necessary to ensure safe respirator use.
(6) The basic advisory information on respirators, as presented in
Appendix D of this section, shall be provided by the employer in any
written or oral format, to employees who wear respirators when such use
is not required by this section or by the employer.
(l) Program evaluation. This section requires the employer to
conduct evaluations of the workplace to ensure that the written
respiratory protection program is being properly implemented, and to
consult employees to ensure that they are using the respirators
properly.
(1) The employer shall conduct evaluations of the workplace as
necessary to ensure that the provisions of the current written program
are being effectively implemented and that it continues to be effective.
(2) The employer shall regularly consult employees required to use
respirators to assess the employees' views on program effectiveness and
to identify any problems. Any problems that are identified during this
assessment shall be corrected. Factors to be assessed include, but are
not limited to:
(i) Respirator fit (including the ability to use the respirator
without interfering with effective workplace performance);
(ii) Appropriate respirator selection for the hazards to which the
employee is exposed;
(iii) Proper respirator use under the workplace conditions the
employee encounters; and
(iv) Proper respirator maintenance.
(m) Recordkeeping. This section requires the employer to establish
and retain written information regarding medical evaluations, fit
testing, and the respirator program. This information will facilitate
employee involvement in the respirator program, assist the employer in
auditing the adequacy of the program, and provide a record for
compliance determinations by OSHA.
(1) Medical evaluation. Records of medical evaluations required by
this section must be retained and made available in accordance with 29
CFR 1910.1020.
(2) Fit testing. (i) The employer shall establish a record of the
qualitative and quantitative fit tests administered to an employee
including:
(A) The name or identification of the employee tested;
(B) Type of fit test performed;
(C) Specific make, model, style, and size of respirator tested;
(D) Date of test; and
(E) The pass/fail results for QLFTs or the fit factor and strip
chart recording or other recording of the test results for QNFTs.
(ii) Fit test records shall be retained for respirator users until
the next fit test is administered.
(3) A written copy of the current respirator program shall be
retained by the employer.
(4) Written materials required to be retained under this paragraph
shall be made available upon request to affected employees and to the
Assistant Secretary or designee for examination and copying.
(n) Dates--(1) Effective date. This section is effective April 8,
1998. The obligations imposed by this section commence on the effective
date unless otherwise noted in this paragraph. Compliance with
obligations that do not commence on the effective date shall occur no
later than the applicable start-up date.
(2) Compliance dates. All obligations of this section commence on
the effective date except as follows:
[[Page 432]]
(i) The determination that respirator use is required (paragraph
(a)) shall be completed no later than September 8, 1998.
(ii) Compliance with provisions of this section for all other
provisions shall be completed no later than October 5, 1998.
(3) The provisions of 29 CFR 1910.134 and 29 CFR 1926.103, contained
in the 29 CFR parts 1900 to 1910.99 and the 29 CFR part 1926 editions,
revised as of July 1, 1997, are in effect and enforceable until October
5, 1998, or during any administrative or judicial stay of the provisions
of this section.
(4) Existing respiratory protection programs. If, in the 12 month
period preceding April 8, 1998, the employer has conducted annual
respirator training, fit testing, respirator program evaluation, or
medical evaluations, the employer may use the results of those
activities to comply with the corresponding provisions of this section,
providing that these activities were conducted in a manner that meets
the requirements of this section.
(o) Appendices. (1) Compliance with Appendix A, Appendix B-1,
Appendix B-2, and Appendix C of this section is mandatory.
(2) Appendix D of this section is non-mandatory and is not intended
to create any additional obligations not otherwise imposed or to detract
from any existing obligations.
Appendix A to Sec. 1910.134--Fit Testing Procedures (Mandatory)
Part I. OSHA-Accepted Fit Test Protocols
A. Fit Testing Procedures--General Requirements
The employer shall conduct fit testing using the following
procedures. The requirements in this appendix apply to all OSHA-accepted
fit test methods, both QLFT and QNFT.
1. The test subject shall be allowed to pick the most acceptable
respirator from a sufficient number of respirator models and sizes so
that the respirator is acceptable to, and correctly fits, the user.
2. Prior to the selection process, the test subject shall be shown
how to put on a respirator, how it should be positioned on the face, how
to set strap tension and how to determine an acceptable fit. A mirror
shall be available to assist the subject in evaluating the fit and
positioning of the respirator. This instruction may not constitute the
subject's formal training on respirator use, because it is only a
review.
3. The test subject shall be informed that he/she is being asked to
select the respirator that provides the most acceptable fit. Each
respirator represents a different size and shape, and if fitted and used
properly, will provide adequate protection.
4. The test subject shall be instructed to hold each chosen
facepiece up to the face and eliminate those that obviously do not give
an acceptable fit.
5. The more acceptable facepieces are noted in case the one selected
proves unacceptable; the most comfortable mask is donned and worn at
least five minutes to assess comfort. Assistance in assessing comfort
can be given by discussing the points in the following item A.6. If the
test subject is not familiar with using a particular respirator, the
test subject shall be directed to don the mask several times and to
adjust the straps each time to become adept at setting proper tension on
the straps.
6. Assessment of comfort shall include a review of the following
points with the test subject and allowing the test subject adequate time
to determine the comfort of the respirator:
(a) Position of the mask on the nose
(b) Room for eye protection
(c) Room to talk
(d) Position of mask on face and cheeks
7. The following criteria shall be used to help determine the
adequacy of the respirator fit:
(a) Chin properly placed;
(b) Adequate strap tension, not overly tightened;
(c) Fit across nose bridge;
(d) Respirator of proper size to span distance from nose to chin;
(e) Tendency of respirator to slip;
(f) Self-observation in mirror to evaluate fit and respirator
position.
8. The test subject shall conduct a user seal check, either the
negative and positive pressure seal checks described in Appendix B-1 of
this section or those recommended by the respirator manufacturer which
provide equivalent protection to the procedures in Appendix B-1. Before
conducting the negative and positive pressure checks, the subject shall
be told to seat the mask on the face by moving the head from side-to-
side and up and down slowly while taking in a few slow deep breaths.
Another facepiece shall be selected and retested if the test subject
fails the user seal check tests.
9. The test shall not be conducted if there is any hair growth
between the skin and the facepiece sealing surface, such as stubble
beard growth, beard, mustache or sideburns which cross the respirator
sealing surface. Any type of apparel which interferes with a
satisfactory fit shall be altered or removed.
[[Page 433]]
10. If a test subject exhibits difficulty in breathing during the
tests, she or he shall be referred to a physician or other licensed
health care professional, as appropriate, to determine whether the test
subject can wear a respirator while performing her or his duties.
11. If the employee finds the fit of the respirator unacceptable,
the test subject shall be given the opportunity to select a different
respirator and to be retested.
12. Exercise regimen. Prior to the commencement of the fit test, the
test subject shall be given a description of the fit test and the test
subject's responsibilities during the test procedure. The description of
the process shall include a description of the test exercises that the
subject will be performing. The respirator to be tested shall be worn
for at least 5 minutes before the start of the fit test.
13. The fit test shall be performed while the test subject is
wearing any applicable safety equipment that may be worn during actual
respirator use which could interfere with respirator fit.
14. Test Exercises. (a) The following test exercises are to be
performed for all fit testing methods prescribed in this appendix,
except for the CNP method. A separate fit testing exercise regimen is
contained in the CNP protocol. The test subject shall perform exercises,
in the test environment, in the following manner:
(1) Normal breathing. In a normal standing position, without
talking, the subject shall breathe normally.
(2) Deep breathing. In a normal standing position, the subject shall
breathe slowly and deeply, taking caution so as not to hyperventilate.
(3) Turning head side to side. Standing in place, the subject shall
slowly turn his/her head from side to side between the extreme positions
on each side. The head shall be held at each extreme momentarily so the
subject can inhale at each side.
(4) Moving head up and down. Standing in place, the subject shall
slowly move his/her head up and down. The subject shall be instructed to
inhale in the up position (i.e., when looking toward the ceiling).
(5) Talking. The subject shall talk out loud slowly and loud enough
so as to be heard clearly by the test conductor. The subject can read
from a prepared text such as the Rainbow Passage, count backward from
100, or recite a memorized poem or song.
Rainbow Passage
When the sunlight strikes raindrops in the air, they act like a
prism and form a rainbow. The rainbow is a division of white light into
many beautiful colors. These take the shape of a long round arch, with
its path high above, and its two ends apparently beyond the horizon.
There is, according to legend, a boiling pot of gold at one end. People
look, but no one ever finds it. When a man looks for something beyond
reach, his friends say he is looking for the pot of gold at the end of
the rainbow.
(6) Grimace. The test subject shall grimace by smiling or frowning.
(This applies only to QNFT testing; it is not performed for QLFT)
(7) Bending over. The test subject shall bend at the waist as if he/
she were to touch his/her toes. Jogging in place shall be substituted
for this exercise in those test environments such as shroud type QNFT or
QLFT units that do not permit bending over at the waist.
(8) Normal breathing. Same as exercise (1).
(b) Each test exercise shall be performed for one minute except for
the grimace exercise which shall be performed for 15 seconds. The test
subject shall be questioned by the test conductor regarding the comfort
of the respirator upon completion of the protocol. If it has become
unacceptable, another model of respirator shall be tried. The respirator
shall not be adjusted once the fit test exercises begin. Any adjustment
voids the test, and the fit test must be repeated.
B. Qualitative Fit Test (QLFT) Protocols
1. General
(a) The employer shall ensure that persons administering QLFT are
able to prepare test solutions, calibrate equipment and perform tests
properly, recognize invalid tests, and ensure that test equipment is in
proper working order.
(b) The employer shall ensure that QLFT equipment is kept clean and
well maintained so as to operate within the parameters for which it was
designed.
2. Isoamyl Acetate Protocol
Note: This protocol is not appropriate to use for the fit testing of
particulate respirators. If used to fit test particulate respirators,
the respirator must be equipped with an organic vapor filter.
(a) Odor Threshold Screening
Odor threshold screening, performed without wearing a respirator, is
intended to determine if the individual tested can detect the odor of
isoamyl acetate at low levels.
(1) Three 1 liter glass jars with metal lids are required.
(2) Odor-free water (e.g., distilled or spring water) at
approximately 25 deg.C (77 deg.F) shall be used for the solutions.
(3) The isoamyl acetate (IAA) (also known at isopentyl acetate)
stock solution is prepared by adding 1 ml of pure IAA to 800 ml of odor-
free water in a 1 liter jar, closing the lid and shaking for 30 seconds.
A new solution shall be prepared at least weekly.
[[Page 434]]
(4) The screening test shall be conducted in a room separate from
the room used for actual fit testing. The two rooms shall be well-
ventilated to prevent the odor of IAA from becoming evident in the
general room air where testing takes place.
(5) The odor test solution is prepared in a second jar by placing
0.4 ml of the stock solution into 500 ml of odor-free water using a
clean dropper or pipette. The solution shall be shaken for 30 seconds
and allowed to stand for two to three minutes so that the IAA
concentration above the liquid may reach equilibrium. This solution
shall be used for only one day.
(6) A test blank shall be prepared in a third jar by adding 500 cc
of odor-free water.
(7) The odor test and test blank jar lids shall be labeled (e.g., 1
and 2) for jar identification. Labels shall be placed on the lids so
that they can be peeled off periodically and switched to maintain the
integrity of the test.
(8) The following instruction shall be typed on a card and placed on
the table in front of the two test jars (i.e., 1 and 2): ``The purpose
of this test is to determine if you can smell banana oil at a low
concentration. The two bottles in front of you contain water. One of
these bottles also contains a small amount of banana oil. Be sure the
covers are on tight, then shake each bottle for two seconds. Unscrew the
lid of each bottle, one at a time, and sniff at the mouth of the bottle.
Indicate to the test conductor which bottle contains banana oil.''
(9) The mixtures used in the IAA odor detection test shall be
prepared in an area separate from where the test is performed, in order
to prevent olfactory fatigue in the subject.
(10) If the test subject is unable to correctly identify the jar
containing the odor test solution, the IAA qualitative fit test shall
not be performed.
(11) If the test subject correctly identifies the jar containing the
odor test solution, the test subject may proceed to respirator selection
and fit testing.
(b) Isoamyl Acetate Fit Test
(1) The fit test chamber shall be a clear 55-gallon drum liner
suspended inverted over a 2-foot diameter frame so that the top of the
chamber is about 6 inches above the test subject's head. If no drum
liner is available, a similar chamber shall be constructed using plastic
sheeting. The inside top center of the chamber shall have a small hook
attached.
(2) Each respirator used for the fitting and fit testing shall be
equipped with organic vapor cartridges or offer protection against
organic vapors.
(3) After selecting, donning, and properly adjusting a respirator,
the test subject shall wear it to the fit testing room. This room shall
be separate from the room used for odor threshold screening and
respirator selection, and shall be well-ventilated, as by an exhaust fan
or lab hood, to prevent general room contamination.
(4) A copy of the test exercises and any prepared text from which
the subject is to read shall be taped to the inside of the test chamber.
(5) Upon entering the test chamber, the test subject shall be given
a 6-inch by 5-inch piece of paper towel, or other porous, absorbent,
single-ply material, folded in half and wetted with 0.75 ml of pure IAA.
The test subject shall hang the wet towel on the hook at the top of the
chamber. An IAA test swab or ampule may be substituted for the IAA
wetted paper towel provided it has been demonstrated that the
alternative IAA source will generate an IAA test atmosphere with a
concentration equivalent to that generated by the paper towel method.
(6) Allow two minutes for the IAA test concentration to stabilize
before starting the fit test exercises. This would be an appropriate
time to talk with the test subject; to explain the fit test, the
importance of his/her cooperation, and the purpose for the test
exercises; or to demonstrate some of the exercises.
(7) If at any time during the test, the subject detects the banana-
like odor of IAA, the test is failed. The subject shall quickly exit
from the test chamber and leave the test area to avoid olfactory
fatigue.
(8) If the test is failed, the subject shall return to the selection
room and remove the respirator. The test subject shall repeat the odor
sensitivity test, select and put on another respirator, return to the
test area and again begin the fit test procedure described in (b) (1)
through (7) above. The process continues until a respirator that fits
well has been found. Should the odor sensitivity test be failed, the
subject shall wait at least 5 minutes before retesting. Odor sensitivity
will usually have returned by this time.
(9) If the subject passes the test, the efficiency of the test
procedure shall be demonstrated by having the subject break the
respirator face seal and take a breath before exiting the chamber.
(10) When the test subject leaves the chamber, the subject shall
remove the saturated towel and return it to the person conducting the
test, so that there is no significant IAA concentration buildup in the
chamber during subsequent tests. The used towels shall be kept in a
self-sealing plastic bag to keep the test area from being contaminated.
3. Saccharin Solution Aerosol Protocol
The entire screening and testing procedure shall be explained to the
test subject prior to the conduct of the screening test.
(a) Taste threshold screening. The saccharin taste threshold
screening, performed without wearing a respirator, is intended to
[[Page 435]]
determine whether the individual being tested can detect the taste of
saccharin.
(1) During threshold screening as well as during fit testing,
subjects shall wear an enclosure about the head and shoulders that is
approximately 12 inches in diameter by 14 inches tall with at least the
front portion clear and that allows free movements of the head when a
respirator is worn. An enclosure substantially similar to the 3M hood
assembly, parts FT 14 and FT 15 combined, is
adequate.
(2) The test enclosure shall have a \3/4\-inch (1.9 cm) hole in
front of the test subject's nose and mouth area to accommodate the
nebulizer nozzle.
(3) The test subject shall don the test enclosure. Throughout the
threshold screening test, the test subject shall breathe through his/her
slightly open mouth with tongue extended. The subject is instructed to
report when he/she detects a sweet taste.
(4) Using a DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation Medication Nebulizer or
equivalent, the test conductor shall spray the threshold check solution
into the enclosure. The nozzle is directed away from the nose and mouth
of the person. This nebulizer shall be clearly marked to distinguish it
from the fit test solution nebulizer.
(5) The threshold check solution is prepared by dissolving 0.83 gram
of sodium saccharin USP in 100 ml of warm water. It can be prepared by
putting 1 ml of the fit test solution (see (b)(5) below) in 100 ml of
distilled water.
(6) To produce the aerosol, the nebulizer bulb is firmly squeezed so
that it collapses completely, then released and allowed to fully expand.
(7) Ten squeezes are repeated rapidly and then the test subject is
asked whether the saccharin can be tasted. If the test subject reports
tasting the sweet taste during the ten squeezes, the screening test is
completed. The taste threshold is noted as ten regardless of the number
of squeezes actually completed.
(8) If the first response is negative, ten more squeezes are
repeated rapidly and the test subject is again asked whether the
saccharin is tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the sweet taste
during the second ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. The
taste threshold is noted as twenty regardless of the number of squeezes
actually completed.
(9) If the second response is negative, ten more squeezes are
repeated rapidly and the test subject is again asked whether the
saccharin is tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the sweet taste
during the third set of ten squeezes, the screening test is completed.
The taste threshold is noted as thirty regardless of the number of
squeezes actually completed.
(10) The test conductor will take note of the number of squeezes
required to solicit a taste response.
(11) If the saccharin is not tasted after 30 squeezes (step 10), the
test subject is unable to taste saccharin and may not perform the
saccharin fit test.
Note to paragraph 3. (a): If the test subject eats or drinks
something sweet before the screening test, he/she may be unable to taste
the weak saccharin solution.
(12) If a taste response is elicited, the test subject shall be
asked to take note of the taste for reference in the fit test.
(13) Correct use of the nebulizer means that approximately 1 ml of
liquid is used at a time in the nebulizer body.
(14) The nebulizer shall be thoroughly rinsed in water, shaken dry,
and refilled at least each morning and afternoon or at least every four
hours.
(b) Saccharin solution aerosol fit test procedure.
(1) The test subject may not eat, drink (except plain water), smoke,
or chew gum for 15 minutes before the test.
(2) The fit test uses the same enclosure described in 3. (a) above.
(3) The test subject shall don the enclosure while wearing the
respirator selected in section I. A. of this appendix. The respirator
shall be properly adjusted and equipped with a particulate filter(s).
(4) A second DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation Medication Nebulizer or
equivalent is used to spray the fit test solution into the enclosure.
This nebulizer shall be clearly marked to distinguish it from the
screening test solution nebulizer.
(5) The fit test solution is prepared by adding 83 grams of sodium
saccharin to 100 ml of warm water.
(6) As before, the test subject shall breathe through the slightly
open mouth with tongue extended, and report if he/she tastes the sweet
taste of saccharin.
(7) The nebulizer is inserted into the hole in the front of the
enclosure and an initial concentration of saccharin fit test solution is
sprayed into the enclosure using the same number of squeezes (either 10,
20 or 30 squeezes) based on the number of squeezes required to elicit a
taste response as noted during the screening test. A minimum of 10
squeezes is required.
(8) After generating the aerosol, the test subject shall be
instructed to perform the exercises in section I. A. 14. of this
appendix.
(9) Every 30 seconds the aerosol concentration shall be replenished
using one half the original number of squeezes used initially (e.g., 5,
10 or 15).
(10) The test subject shall indicate to the test conductor if at any
time during the fit test the taste of saccharin is detected. If the
[[Page 436]]
test subject does not report tasting the saccharin, the test is passed.
(11) If the taste of saccharin is detected, the fit is deemed
unsatisfactory and the test is failed. A different respirator shall be
tried and the entire test procedure is repeated (taste threshold
screening and fit testing).
(12) Since the nebulizer has a tendency to clog during use, the test
operator must make periodic checks of the nebulizer to ensure that it is
not clogged. If clogging is found at the end of the test session, the
test is invalid.
4. Bitrex\TM\ (Denatonium Benzoate) Solution Aerosol Qualitative Fit
Test Protocol
The Bitrex\TM\ (Denatonium benzoate) solution aerosol QLFT protocol
uses the published saccharin test protocol because that protocol is
widely accepted. Bitrex is routinely used as a taste aversion agent in
household liquids which children should not be drinking and is endorsed
by the American Medical Association, the National Safety Council, and
the American Association of Poison Control Centers. The entire screening
and testing procedure shall be explained to the test subject prior to
the conduct of the screening test.
(a) Taste Threshold Screening.
The Bitrex taste threshold screening, performed without wearing a
respirator, is intended to determine whether the individual being tested
can detect the taste of Bitrex.
(1) During threshold screening as well as during fit testing,
subjects shall wear an enclosure about the head and shoulders that is
approximately 12 inches (30.5 cm) in diameter by 14 inches (35.6 cm)
tall. The front portion of the enclosure shall be clear from the
respirator and allow free movement of the head when a respirator is
worn. An enclosure substantially similar to the 3M hood assembly, parts
FT 14 and FT 15 combined, is adequate.
(2) The test enclosure shall have a \3/4\ inch (1.9 cm) hole in
front of the test subject's nose and mouth area to accommodate the
nebulizer nozzle.
(3) The test subject shall don the test enclosure. Throughout the
threshold screening test, the test subject shall breathe through his or
her slightly open mouth with tongue extended. The subject is instructed
to report when he/she detects a bitter taste.
(4) Using a DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation Medication Nebulizer or
equivalent, the test conductor shall spray the Threshold Check Solution
into the enclosure. This Nebulizer shall be clearly marked to
distinguish it from the fit test solution nebulizer.
(5) The Threshold Check Solution is prepared by adding 13.5
milligrams of Bitrex to 100 ml of 5% salt (NaCl) solution in distilled
water.
(6) To produce the aerosol, the nebulizer bulb is firmly squeezed so
that the bulb collapses completely, and is then released and allowed to
fully expand.
(7) An initial ten squeezes are repeated rapidly and then the test
subject is asked whether the Bitrex can be tasted. If the test subject
reports tasting the bitter taste during the ten squeezes, the screening
test is completed. The taste threshold is noted as ten regardless of the
number of squeezes actually completed.
(8) If the first response is negative, ten more squeezes are
repeated rapidly and the test subject is again asked whether the Bitrex
is tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the bitter taste during
the second ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. The taste
threshold is noted as twenty regardless of the number of squeezes
actually completed.
(9) If the second response is negative, ten more squeezes are
repeated rapidly and the test subject is again asked whether the Bitrex
is tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the bitter taste during
the third set of ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. The
taste threshold is noted as thirty regardless of the number of squeezes
actually completed.
(10) The test conductor will take note of the number of squeezes
required to solicit a taste response.
(11) If the Bitrex is not tasted after 30 squeezes (step 10), the
test subject is unable to taste Bitrex and may not perform the Bitrex
fit test.
(12) If a taste response is elicited, the test subject shall be
asked to take note of the taste for reference in the fit test.
(13) Correct use of the nebulizer means that approximately 1 ml of
liquid is used at a time in the nebulizer body.
(14) The nebulizer shall be thoroughly rinsed in water, shaken to
dry, and refilled at least each morning and afternoon or at least every
four hours.
(b) Bitrex Solution Aerosol Fit Test Procedure.
(1) The test subject may not eat, drink (except plain water), smoke,
or chew gum for 15 minutes before the test.
(2) The fit test uses the same enclosure as that described in 4. (a)
above.
(3) The test subject shall don the enclosure while wearing the
respirator selected according to section I. A. of this appendix. The
respirator shall be properly adjusted and equipped with any type
particulate filter(s).
(4) A second DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation Medication Nebulizer or
equivalent is used to spray the fit test solution into the enclosure.
This nebulizer shall be clearly marked to distinguish it from the
screening test solution nebulizer.
(5) The fit test solution is prepared by adding 337.5 mg of Bitrex
to 200 ml of a 5% salt (NaCl) solution in warm water.
[[Page 437]]
(6) As before, the test subject shall breathe through his or her
slightly open mouth with tongue extended, and be instructed to report if
he/she tastes the bitter taste of Bitrex..
(7) The nebulizer is inserted into the hole in the front of the
enclosure and an initial concentration of the fit test solution is
sprayed into the enclosure using the same number of squeezes (either 10,
20 or 30 squeezes) based on the number of squeezes required to elicit a
taste response as noted during the screening test.
(8) After generating the aerosol, the test subject shall be
instructed to perform the exercises in section I. A. 14. of this
appendix.
(9) Every 30 seconds the aerosol concentration shall be replenished
using one half the number of squeezes used initially (e.g., 5, 10 or
15).
(10) The test subject shall indicate to the test conductor if at any
time during the fit test the taste of Bitrex is detected. If the test
subject does not report tasting the Bitrex, the test is passed.
(11) If the taste of Bitrex is detected, the fit is deemed
unsatisfactory and the test is failed. A different respirator shall be
tried and the entire test procedure is repeated (taste threshold
screening and fit testing).
5. Irritant Smoke (Stannic Chloride) Protocol
This qualitative fit test uses a person's response to the irritating
chemicals released in the ``smoke'' produced by a stannic chloride
ventilation smoke tube to detect leakage into the respirator.
(a) General Requirements and Precautions
(1) The respirator to be tested shall be equipped with high
efficiency particulate air (HEPA) or P100 series filter(s).
(2) Only stannic chloride smoke tubes shall be used for this
protocol.
(3) No form of test enclosure or hood for the test subject shall be
used.
(4) The smoke can be irritating to the eyes, lungs, and nasal
passages. The test conductor shall take precautions to minimize the test
subject's exposure to irritant smoke. Sensitivity varies, and certain
individuals may respond to a greater degree to irritant smoke. Care
shall be taken when performing the sensitivity screening checks that
determine whether the test subject can detect irritant smoke to use only
the minimum amount of smoke necessary to elicit a response from the test
subject.
(5) The fit test shall be performed in an area with adequate
ventilation to prevent exposure of the person conducting the fit test or
the build-up of irritant smoke in the general atmosphere.
(b) Sensitivity Screening Check
The person to be tested must demonstrate his or her ability to
detect a weak concentration of the irritant smoke.
(1) The test operator shall break both ends of a ventilation smoke
tube containing stannic chloride, and attach one end of the smoke tube
to a low flow air pump set to deliver 200 milliliters per minute, or an
aspirator squeeze bulb. The test operator shall cover the other end of
the smoke tube with a short piece of tubing to prevent potential injury
from the jagged end of the smoke tube.
(2) The test operator shall advise the test subject that the smoke
can be irritating to the eyes, lungs, and nasal passages and instruct
the subject to keep his/her eyes closed while the test is performed.
(3) The test subject shall be allowed to smell a weak concentration
of the irritant smoke before the respirator is donned to become familiar
with its irritating properties and to determine if he/she can detect the
irritating properties of the smoke. The test operator shall carefully
direct a small amount of the irritant smoke in the test subject's
direction to determine that he/she can detect it.
(c) Irritant Smoke Fit Test Procedure
(1) The person being fit tested shall don the respirator without
assistance, and perform the required user seal check(s).
(2) The test subject shall be instructed to keep his/her eyes
closed.
(3) The test operator shall direct the stream of irritant smoke from
the smoke tube toward the faceseal area of the test subject, using the
low flow pump or the squeeze bulb. The test operator shall begin at
least 12 inches from the facepiece and move the smoke stream around the
whole perimeter of the mask. The operator shall gradually make two more
passes around the perimeter of the mask, moving to within six inches of
the respirator.
(4) If the person being tested has not had an involuntary response
and/or detected the irritant smoke, proceed with the test exercises.
(5) The exercises identified in section I.A. 14. of this appendix
shall be performed by the test subject while the respirator seal is
being continually challenged by the smoke, directed around the perimeter
of the respirator at a distance of six inches.
(6) If the person being fit tested reports detecting the irritant
smoke at any time, the test is failed. The person being retested must
repeat the entire sensitivity check and fit test procedure.
(7) Each test subject passing the irritant smoke test without
evidence of a response (involuntary cough, irritation) shall be given a
second sensitivity screening check, with
[[Page 438]]
the smoke from the same smoke tube used during the fit test, once the
respirator has been removed, to determine whether he/she still reacts to
the smoke. Failure to evoke a response shall void the fit test.
(8) If a response is produced during this second sensitivity check,
then the fit test is passed.
C. Quantitative Fit Test (QNFT) Protocols
The following quantitative fit testing procedures have been
demonstrated to be acceptable: Quantitative fit testing using a non-
hazardous test aerosol (such as corn oil, polyethylene glycol 400 [PEG
400], di-2-ethyl hexyl sebacate [DEHS], or sodium chloride) generated in
a test chamber, and employing instrumentation to quantify the fit of the
respirator; Quantitative fit testing using ambient aerosol as the test
agent and appropriate instrumentation (condensation nuclei counter) to
quantify the respirator fit; Quantitative fit testing using controlled
negative pressure and appropriate instrumentation to measure the
volumetric leak rate of a facepiece to quantify the respirator fit.
1. General
(a) The employer shall ensure that persons administering QNFT are
able to calibrate equipment and perform tests properly, recognize
invalid tests, calculate fit factors properly and ensure that test
equipment is in proper working order.
(b) The employer shall ensure that QNFT equipment is kept clean, and
is maintained and calibrated according to the manufacturer's
instructions so as to operate at the parameters for which it was
designed.
2. Generated Aerosol Quantitative Fit Testing Protocol
(a) Apparatus.
(1) Instrumentation. Aerosol generation, dilution, and measurement
systems using particulates (corn oil, polyethylene glycol 400 [PEG 400],
di-2-ethyl hexyl sebacate [DEHS] or sodium chloride) as test aerosols
shall be used for quantitative fit testing.
(2) Test chamber. The test chamber shall be large enough to permit
all test subjects to perform freely all required exercises without
disturbing the test agent concentration or the measurement apparatus.
The test chamber shall be equipped and constructed so that the test
agent is effectively isolated from the ambient air, yet uniform in
concentration throughout the chamber.
(3) When testing air-purifying respirators, the normal filter or
cartridge element shall be replaced with a high efficiency particulate
air (HEPA) or P100 series filter supplied by the same manufacturer.
(4) The sampling instrument shall be selected so that a computer
record or strip chart record may be made of the test showing the rise
and fall of the test agent concentration with each inspiration and
expiration at fit factors of at least 2,000. Integrators or computers
that integrate the amount of test agent penetration leakage into the
respirator for each exercise may be used provided a record of the
readings is made.
(5) The combination of substitute air-purifying elements, test agent
and test agent concentration shall be such that the test subject is not
exposed in excess of an established exposure limit for the test agent at
any time during the testing process, based upon the length of the
exposure and the exposure limit duration.
(6) The sampling port on the test specimen respirator shall be
placed and constructed so that no leakage occurs around the port (e.g.,
where the respirator is probed), a free air flow is allowed into the
sampling line at all times, and there is no interference with the fit or
performance of the respirator. The in-mask sampling device (probe) shall
be designed and used so that the air sample is drawn from the breathing
zone of the test subject, midway between the nose and mouth and with the
probe extending into the facepiece cavity at least 1/4 inch.
(7) The test setup shall permit the person administering the test to
observe the test subject inside the chamber during the test.
(8) The equipment generating the test atmosphere shall maintain the
concentration of test agent constant to within a 10 percent variation
for the duration of the test.
(9) The time lag (interval between an event and the recording of the
event on the strip chart or computer or integrator) shall be kept to a
minimum. There shall be a clear association between the occurrence of an
event and its being recorded.
(10) The sampling line tubing for the test chamber atmosphere and
for the respirator sampling port shall be of equal diameter and of the
same material. The length of the two lines shall be equal.
(11) The exhaust flow from the test chamber shall pass through an
appropriate filter (i.e., high efficiency particulate filter) before
release.
(12) When sodium chloride aerosol is used, the relative humidity
inside the test chamber shall not exceed 50 percent.
(13) The limitations of instrument detection shall be taken into
account when determining the fit factor.
(14) Test respirators shall be maintained in proper working order
and be inspected regularly for deficiencies such as cracks or missing
valves and gaskets.
(b) Procedural Requirements.
(1) When performing the initial user seal check using a positive or
negative pressure check, the sampling line shall be crimped closed in
order to avoid air pressure leakage during either of these pressure
checks.
[[Page 439]]
(2) The use of an abbreviated screening QLFT test is optional. Such
a test may be utilized in order to quickly identify poor fitting
respirators that passed the positive and/or negative pressure test and
reduce the amount of QNFT time. The use of the CNC QNFT instrument in
the count mode is another optional method to obtain a quick estimate of
fit and eliminate poor fitting respirators before going on to perform a
full QNFT.
(3) A reasonably stable test agent concentration shall be measured
in the test chamber prior to testing. For canopy or shower curtain types
of test units, the determination of the test agent's stability may be
established after the test subject has entered the test environment.
(4) Immediately after the subject enters the test chamber, the test
agent concentration inside the respirator shall be measured to ensure
that the peak penetration does not exceed 5 percent for a half mask or 1
percent for a full facepiece respirator.
(5) A stable test agent concentration shall be obtained prior to the
actual start of testing.
(6) Respirator restraining straps shall not be over-tightened for
testing. The straps shall be adjusted by the wearer without assistance
from other persons to give a reasonably comfortable fit typical of
normal use. The respirator shall not be adjusted once the fit test
exercises begin.
(7) The test shall be terminated whenever any single peak
penetration exceeds 5 percent for half masks and 1 percent for full
facepiece respirators. The test subject shall be refitted and retested.
(8) Calculation of fit factors.
(i) The fit factor shall be determined for the quantitative fit test
by taking the ratio of the average chamber concentration to the
concentration measured inside the respirator for each test exercise
except the grimace exercise.
(ii) The average test chamber concentration shall be calculated as
the arithmetic average of the concentration measured before and after
each test (i.e., 7 exercises) or the arithmetic average of the
concentration measured before and after each exercise or the true
average measured continuously during the respirator sample.
(iii) The concentration of the challenge agent inside the respirator
shall be determined by one of the following methods:
(A) Average peak penetration method means the method of determining
test agent penetration into the respirator utilizing a strip chart
recorder, integrator, or computer. The agent penetration is determined
by an average of the peak heights on the graph or by computer
integration, for each exercise except the grimace exercise. Integrators
or computers that calculate the actual test agent penetration into the
respirator for each exercise will also be considered to meet the
requirements of the average peak penetration method.
(B) Maximum peak penetration method means the method of determining
test agent penetration in the respirator as determined by strip chart
recordings of the test. The highest peak penetration for a given
exercise is taken to be representative of average penetration into the
respirator for that exercise.
(C) Integration by calculation of the area under the individual peak
for each exercise except the grimace exercise. This includes
computerized integration.
(D) The calculation of the overall fit factor using individual
exercise fit factors involves first converting the exercise fit factors
to penetration values, determining the average, and then converting that
result back to a fit factor. This procedure is described in the
following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR08JA98.006
Where ff1, ff2, ff3, etc. are the fit
factors for exercises 1, 2, 3, etc.
(9) The test subject shall not be permitted to wear a half mask or
quarter facepiece respirator unless a minimum fit factor of 100 is
obtained, or a full facepiece respirator unless a minimum fit factor of
500 is obtained.
(10) Filters used for quantitative fit testing shall be replaced
whenever increased breathing resistance is encountered, or when the test
agent has altered the integrity of the filter media.
3. Ambient aerosol condensation nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative
fit testing protocol.
The ambient aerosol condensation nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative
fit testing (Portacount \TM\ ) protocol quantitatively fit tests
respirators with the use of a probe. The probed respirator is only used
for quantitative fit tests. A probed respirator has a special sampling
device, installed on the respirator, that allows the probe to sample the
air from inside the mask. A probed respirator is required for each make,
style, model, and size that the employer uses and
[[Page 440]]
can be obtained from the respirator manufacturer or distributor. The CNC
instrument manufacturer, TSI Inc., also provides probe attachments (TSI
sampling adapters) that permit fit testing in an employee's own
respirator. A minimum fit factor pass level of at least 100 is necessary
for a half-mask respirator and a minimum fit factor pass level of at
least 500 is required for a full facepiece negative pressure respirator.
The entire screening and testing procedure shall be explained to the
test subject prior to the conduct of the screening test.
(a) Portacount Fit Test Requirements. (1) Check the respirator to
make sure the sampling probe and line are properly attached to the
facepiece and that the respirator is fitted with a particulate filter
capable of preventing significant penetration by the ambient particles
used for the fit test (e.g., NIOSH 42 CFR 84 series 100, series 99, or
series 95 particulate filter) per manufacturer's instruction.
(2) Instruct the person to be tested to don the respirator for five
minutes before the fit test starts. This purges the ambient particles
trapped inside the respirator and permits the wearer to make certain the
respirator is comfortable. This individual shall already have been
trained on how to wear the respirator properly.
(3) Check the following conditions for the adequacy of the
respirator fit: Chin properly placed; Adequate strap tension, not overly
tightened; Fit across nose bridge; Respirator of proper size to span
distance from nose to chin; Tendency of the respirator to slip; Self-
observation in a mirror to evaluate fit and respirator position.
(4) Have the person wearing the respirator do a user seal check. If
leakage is detected, determine the cause. If leakage is from a poorly
fitting facepiece, try another size of the same model respirator, or
another model of respirator.
(5) Follow the manufacturer's instructions for operating the
Portacount and proceed with the test.
(6) The test subject shall be instructed to perform the exercises in
section I. A. 14. of this appendix.
(7) After the test exercises, the test subject shall be questioned
by the test conductor regarding the comfort of the respirator upon
completion of the protocol. If it has become unacceptable, another model
of respirator shall be tried.
(b) Portacount Test Instrument.
(1) The Portacount will automatically stop and calculate the overall
fit factor for the entire set of exercises. The overall fit factor is
what counts. The Pass or Fail message will indicate whether or not the
test was successful. If the test was a Pass, the fit test is over.
(2) Since the pass or fail criterion of the Portacount is user
programmable, the test operator shall ensure that the pass or fail
criterion meet the requirements for minimum respirator performance in
this Appendix.
(3) A record of the test needs to be kept on file, assuming the fit
test was successful. The record must contain the test subject's name;
overall fit factor; make, model, style, and size of respirator used; and
date tested.
4. Controlled negative pressure (CNP) quantitative fit testing
protocol.
The CNP protocol provides an alternative to aerosol fit test
methods. The CNP fit test method technology is based on exhausting air
from a temporarily sealed respirator facepiece to generate and then
maintain a constant negative pressure inside the facepiece. The rate of
air exhaust is controlled so that a constant negative pressure is
maintained in the respirator during the fit test. The level of pressure
is selected to replicate the mean inspiratory pressure that causes
leakage into the respirator under normal use conditions. With pressure
held constant, air flow out of the respirator is equal to air flow into
the respirator. Therefore, measurement of the exhaust stream that is
required to hold the pressure in the temporarily sealed respirator
constant yields a direct measure of leakage air flow into the
respirator. The CNP fit test method measures leak rates through the
facepiece as a method for determining the facepiece fit for negative
pressure respirators. The CNP instrument manufacturer Dynatech Nevada
also provides attachments (sampling manifolds) that replace the filter
cartridges to permit fit testing in an employee's own respirator. To
perform the test, the test subject closes his or her mouth and holds
his/her breath, after which an air pump removes air from the respirator
facepiece at a pre-selected constant pressure. The facepiece fit is
expressed as the leak rate through the facepiece, expressed as
milliliters per minute. The quality and validity of the CNP fit tests
are determined by the degree to which the in-mask pressure tracks the
test pressure during the system measurement time of approximately five
seconds. Instantaneous feedback in the form of a real-time pressure
trace of the in-mask pressure is provided and used to determine test
validity and quality. A minimum fit factor pass level of 100 is
necessary for a half-mask respirator and a minimum fit factor of at
least 500 is required for a full facepiece respirator. The entire
screening and testing procedure shall be explained to the test subject
prior to the conduct of the screening test.
(a) CNP Fit Test Requirements.
(1) The instrument shall have a non-adjustable test pressure of 15.0
mm water pressure.
(2) The CNP system defaults selected for test pressure shall be set
at -15 mm of water (-0.58 inches of water) and the modeled inspiratory
flow rate shall be 53.8 liters per minute for performing fit tests.
[[Page 441]]
Note: CNP systems have built-in capability to conduct fit testing
that is specific to unique work rate, mask, and gender situations that
might apply in a specific workplace. Use of system default values, which
were selected to represent respirator wear with medium cartridge
resistance at a low-moderate work rate, will allow inter-test comparison
of the respirator fit.)
(3) The individual who conducts the CNP fit testing shall be
thoroughly trained to perform the test.
(4) The respirator filter or cartridge needs to be replaced with the
CNP test manifold. The inhalation valve downstream from the manifold
either needs to be temporarily removed or propped open.
(5) The test subject shall be trained to hold his or her breath for
at least 20 seconds.
(6) The test subject shall don the test respirator without any
assistance from the individual who conducts the CNP fit test.
(7) The QNFT protocol shall be followed according to section I. C.
1. of this appendix with an exception for the CNP test exercises.
(b) CNP Test Exercises.
(1) Normal breathing. In a normal standing position, without
talking, the subject shall breathe normally for 1 minute. After the
normal breathing exercise, the subject needs to hold head straight ahead
and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during the test measurement.
(2) Deep breathing. In a normal standing position, the subject shall
breathe slowly and deeply for 1 minute, being careful not to
hyperventilate. After the deep breathing exercise, the subject shall
hold his or her head straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10
seconds during test measurement.
(3)Turning head side to side. Standing in place, the subject shall
slowly turn his or her head from side to side between the extreme
positions on each side for 1 minute. The head shall be held at each
extreme momentarily so the subject can inhale at each side. After the
turning head side to side exercise, the subject needs to hold head full
left and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during test measurement.
Next, the subject needs to hold head full right and hold his or her
breath for 10 seconds during test measurement.
(4) Moving head up and down. Standing in place, the subject shall
slowly move his or her head up and down for 1 minute. The subject shall
be instructed to inhale in the up position (i.e., when looking toward
the ceiling). After the moving head up and down exercise, the subject
shall hold his or her head full up and hold his or her breath for 10
seconds during test measurement. Next, the subject shall hold his or her
head full down and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during test
measurement.
(5) Talking. The subject shall talk out loud slowly and loud enough
so as to be heard clearly by the test conductor. The subject can read
from a prepared text such as the Rainbow Passage, count backward from
100, or recite a memorized poem or song for 1 minute. After the talking
exercise, the subject shall hold his or her head straight ahead and hold
his or her breath for 10 seconds during the test measurement.
(6) Grimace. The test subject shall grimace by smiling or frowning
for 15 seconds.
(7) Bending Over. The test subject shall bend at the waist as if he
or she were to touch his or her toes for 1 minute. Jogging in place
shall be substituted for this exercise in those test environments such
as shroud-type QNFT units that prohibit bending at the waist. After the
bending over exercise, the subject shall hold his or her head straight
ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during the test
measurement.
(8) Normal Breathing. The test subject shall remove and re-don the
respirator within a one-minute period. Then, in a normal standing
position, without talking, the subject shall breathe normally for 1
minute. After the normal breathing exercise, the subject shall hold his
or her head straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds
during the test measurement. After the test exercises, the test subject
shall be questioned by the test conductor regarding the comfort of the
respirator upon completion of the protocol. If it has become
unacceptable, another model of a respirator shall be tried.
(c) CNP Test Instrument.
(1) The test instrument shall have an effective audio warning device
when the test subject fails to hold his or her breath during the test.
The test shall be terminated whenever the test subject failed to hold
his or her breath. The test subject may be refitted and retested.
(2) A record of the test shall be kept on file, assuming the fit
test was successful. The record must contain the test subject's name;
overall fit factor; make, model, style and size of respirator used; and
date tested.
Part II. New Fit Test Protocols
A. Any person may submit to OSHA an application for approval of a
new fit test protocol. If the application meets the following criteria,
OSHA will initiate a rulemaking proceeding under section 6(b)(7) of the
OSH Act to determine whether to list the new protocol as an approved
protocol in this Appendix A.
B. The application must include a detailed description of the
proposed new fit test protocol. This application must be supported by
either:
1. A test report prepared by an independent government research
laboratory (e.g., Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory, Los Alamos
National Laboratory, the National Institute for Standards and
Technology) stating that the laboratory has tested the
[[Page 442]]
protocol and had found it to be accurate and reliable; or
2. An article that has been published in a peer-reviewed industrial
hygiene journal describing the protocol and explaining how test data
support the protocol's accuracy and reliability.
C. If OSHA determines that additional information is required before
the Agency commences a rulemaking proceeding under this section, OSHA
will so notify the applicant and afford the applicant the opportunity to
submit the supplemental information. Initiation of a rulemaking
proceeding will be deferred until OSHA has received and evaluated the
supplemental information.
Appendix B-1 to Sec. 1910.134: User Seal Check Procedures (Mandatory)
The individual who uses a tight-fitting respirator is to perform a
user seal check to ensure that an adequate seal is achieved each time
the respirator is put on. Either the positive and negative pressure
checks listed in this appendix, or the respirator manufacturer's
recommended user seal check method shall be used. User seal checks are
not substitutes for qualitative or quantitative fit tests.
I. Facepiece Positive and/or Negative Pressure Checks
A. Positive pressure check. Close off the exhalation valve and
exhale gently into the facepiece. The face fit is considered
satisfactory if a slight positive pressure can be built up inside the
facepiece without any evidence of outward leakage of air at the seal.
For most respirators this method of leak testing requires the wearer to
first remove the exhalation valve cover before closing off the
exhalation valve and then carefully replacing it after the test.
B. Negative pressure check. Close off the inlet opening of the
canister or cartridge(s) by covering with the palm of the hand(s) or by
replacing the filter seal(s), inhale gently so that the facepiece
collapses slightly, and hold the breath for ten seconds. The design of
the inlet opening of some cartridges cannot be effectively covered with
the palm of the hand. The test can be performed by covering the inlet
opening of the cartridge with a thin latex or nitrile glove. If the
facepiece remains in its slightly collapsed condition and no inward
leakage of air is detected, the tightness of the respirator is
considered satisfactory.
II. Manufacturer's Recommended User Seal Check Procedures
The respirator manufacturer's recommended procedures for performing
a user seal check may be used instead of the positive and/or negative
pressure check procedures provided that the employer demonstrates that
the manufacturer's procedures are equally effective.
Appendix B-2 to Sec. 1910.134: Respirator Cleaning Procedures
(Mandatory)
These procedures are provided for employer use when cleaning
respirators. They are general in nature, and the employer as an
alternative may use the cleaning recommendations provided by the
manufacturer of the respirators used by their employees, provided such
procedures are as effective as those listed here in Appendix B-2.
Equivalent effectiveness simply means that the procedures used must
accomplish the objectives set forth in Appendix B-2, i.e., must ensure
that the respirator is properly cleaned and disinfected in a manner that
prevents damage to the respirator and does not cause harm to the user.
I. Procedures for Cleaning Respirators
A. Remove filters, cartridges, or canisters. Disassemble facepieces
by removing speaking diaphragms, demand and pressure-demand valve
assemblies, hoses, or any components recommended by the manufacturer.
Discard or repair any defective parts.
B. Wash components in warm (43 deg.C [110 deg.F] maximum) water
with a mild detergent or with a cleaner recommended by the manufacturer.
A stiff bristle (not wire) brush may be used to facilitate the removal
of dirt.
C. Rinse components thoroughly in clean, warm (43 deg.C [110
deg.F] maximum), preferably running water. Drain.
D. When the cleaner used does not contain a disinfecting agent,
respirator components should be immersed for two minutes in one of the
following:
1. Hypochlorite solution (50 ppm of chlorine) made by adding
approximately one milliliter of laundry bleach to one liter of water at
43 deg.C (110 deg.F); or,
2. Aqueous solution of iodine (50 ppm iodine) made by adding
approximately 0.8 milliliters of tincture of iodine (6-8 grams ammonium
and/or potassium iodide/100 cc of 45% alcohol) to one liter of water at
43 deg.C (110 deg.F); or,
3. Other commercially available cleansers of equivalent disinfectant
quality when used as directed, if their use is recommended or approved
by the respirator manufacturer.
E. Rinse components thoroughly in clean, warm (43 deg.C [110
deg.F] maximum), preferably running water. Drain. The importance of
thorough rinsing cannot be overemphasized. Detergents or disinfectants
that dry on facepieces may result in dermatitis. In addition, some
disinfectants may cause deterioration of rubber or corrosion of metal
parts if not completely removed.
F. Components should be hand-dried with a clean lint-free cloth or
air-dried.
[[Page 443]]
G. Reassemble facepiece, replacing filters, cartridges, and
canisters where necessary.
H. Test the respirator to ensure that all components work properly.
Appendix C to Sec. 1910.134: OSHA Respirator Medical Evaluation
Questionnaire (Mandatory)
To the employer: Answers to questions in Section 1, and to question
9 in Section 2 of Part A, do not require a medical examination.
To the employee:
Can you read (circle one): Yes/No
Your employer must allow you to answer this questionnaire during
normal working hours, or at a time and place that is convenient to you.
To maintain your confidentiality, your employer or supervisor must not
look at or review your answers, and your employer must tell you how to
deliver or send this questionnaire to the health care professional who
will review it.
Part A. Section 1. (Mandatory) The following information must be
provided by every employee who has been selected to use any type of
respirator (please print).
1. Today's date:________________________________________________________
2. Your name:___________________________________________________________
3. Your age (to nearest year):__________________________________________
4. Sex (circle one): Male/Female
5. Your height: ---- ft. ---- in.
6. Your weight: ---- lbs.
7. Your job title:______________________________________________________
8. A phone number where you can be reached by the health care
professional who reviews this questionnaire (include the Area Code): --
----
9. The best time to phone you at this number: ----
10. Has your employer told you how to contact the health care
professional who will review this questionnaire (circle one): Yes/No
11. Check the type of respirator you will use (you can check more than
one category):
a. ---- N, R, or P disposable respirator (filter-mask, non-cartridge
type only).
b. ---- Other type (for example, half- or full-facepiece type,
powered-air purifying, supplied-air, self-contained breathing
apparatus).
12. Have you worn a respirator (circle one): Yes/No
7 If ``yes,'' what type(s):____________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
Part A. Section 2. (Mandatory) Questions 1 through 9 below must be
answered by every employee who has been selected to use any type of
respirator (please circle ``yes'' or ``no'').
1. Do you currently smoke tobacco, or have you smoked tobacco in the
last month: Yes/No
2. Have you ever had any of the following conditions?
a. Seizures (fits): Yes/No
b. Diabetes (sugar disease): Yes/No
c. Allergic reactions that interfere with your breathing: Yes/No
d. Claustrophobia (fear of closed-in places): Yes/No
e. Trouble smelling odors: Yes/No
3. Have you ever had any of the following pulmonary or lung problems?
a. Asbestosis: Yes/No
b. Asthma: Yes/No
c. Chronic bronchitis: Yes/No
d. Emphysema: Yes/No
e. Pneumonia: Yes/No
f. Tuberculosis: Yes/No
g. Silicosis: Yes/No
h. Pneumothorax (collapsed lung): Yes/No
i. Lung cancer: Yes/No
j. Broken ribs: Yes/No
k. Any chest injuries or surgeries: Yes/No
l. Any other lung problem that you've been told about: Yes/No
4. Do you currently have any of the following symptoms of pulmonary or
lung illness?
a. Shortness of breath: Yes/No
b. Shortness of breath when walking fast on level ground or walking
up a slight hill or incline: Yes/No
c. Shortness of breath when walking with other people at an ordinary
pace on level ground: Yes/No
d. Have to stop for breath when walking at your own pace on level
ground: Yes/No
e. Shortness of breath when washing or dressing yourself: Yes/No
f. Shortness of breath that interferes with your job: Yes/No
g. Coughing that produces phlegm (thick sputum): Yes/No
h. Coughing that wakes you early in the morning: Yes/No
i. Coughing that occurs mostly when you are lying down: Yes/No
j. Coughing up blood in the last month: Yes/No
k. Wheezing: Yes/No
l. Wheezing that interferes with your job: Yes/No
m. Chest pain when you breathe deeply: Yes/No
n. Any other symptoms that you think may be related to lung
problems: Yes/No
5. Have you ever had any of the following cardiovascular or heart
problems?
a. Heart attack: Yes/No
b. Stroke: Yes/No
c. Angina: Yes/No
d. Heart failure: Yes/No
e. Swelling in your legs or feet (not caused by walking): Yes/No
f. Heart arrhythmia (heart beating irregularly): Yes/No
[[Page 444]]
g. High blood pressure: Yes/No
h. Any other heart problem that you've been told about: Yes/No
6. Have you ever had any of the following cardiovascular or heart
symptoms?
a. Frequent pain or tightness in your chest: Yes/No
b. Pain or tightness in your chest during physical activity: Yes/No
c. Pain or tightness in your chest that interferes with your job:
Yes/No
d. In the past two years, have you noticed your heart skipping or
missing a beat: Yes/No
e. Heartburn or indigestion that is not related to eating: Yes/No
f. Any other symptoms that you think may be related to heart or
circulation problems: Yes/No
7. Do you currently take medication for any of the following problems?
a. Breathing or lung problems: Yes/No
b. Heart trouble: Yes/No
c. Blood pressure: Yes/No
d. Seizures (fits): Yes/No
8. If you've used a respirator, have you ever had any of the following
problems? (If you've never used a respirator, check the
following space and go to question 9:)
a. Eye irritation: Yes/No
b. Skin allergies or rashes: Yes/No
c. Anxiety: Yes/No
d. General weakness or fatigue: Yes/No
e. Any other problem that interferes with your use of a respirator:
Yes/No
9. Would you like to talk to the health care professional who will
review this questionnaire about your answers to this
questionnaire: Yes/No
Questions 10 to 15 below must be answered by every employee who has
been selected to use either a full-facepiece respirator or a self-
contained breathing apparatus (SCBA). For employees who have been
selected to use other types of respirators, answering these questions is
voluntary.
10. Have you ever lost vision in either eye (temporarily or
permanently): Yes/No
11. Do you currently have any of the following vision problems?
a. Wear contact lenses: Yes/No
b. Wear glasses: Yes/No
c. Color blind: Yes/No
d. Any other eye or vision problem: Yes/No
12. Have you ever had an injury to your ears, including a broken ear
drum: Yes/No
13. Do you currently have any of the following hearing problems?
a. Difficulty hearing: Yes/No
b. Wear a hearing aid: Yes/No
c. Any other hearing or ear problem: Yes/No
14. Have you ever had a back injury: Yes/No
15. Do you currently have any of the following musculoskeletal problems?
a. Weakness in any of your arms, hands, legs, or feet: Yes/No
b. Back pain: Yes/No
c. Difficulty fully moving your arms and legs: Yes/No
d. Pain or stiffness when you lean forward or backward at the waist:
Yes/No
e. Difficulty fully moving your head up or down: Yes/No
f. Difficulty fully moving your head side to side: Yes/No
g. Difficulty bending at your knees: Yes/No
h. Difficulty squatting to the ground: Yes/No
i. Climbing a flight of stairs or a ladder carrying more than 25
lbs: Yes/No
j. Any other muscle or skeletal problem that interferes with using a
respirator: Yes/No
Part B Any of the following questions, and other questions not
listed, may be added to the questionnaire at the discretion of the
health care professional who will review the questionnaire.
1. In your present job, are you working at high altitudes (over 5,000
feet) or in a place that has lower than normal amounts of
oxygen: Yes/No
If ``yes,'' do you have feelings of dizziness, shortness of breath,
pounding in your chest, or other symptoms when you're working under
these conditions: Yes/No
2. At work or at home, have you ever been exposed to hazardous solvents,
hazardous airborne chemicals (e.g., gases, fumes, or dust), or
have you come into skin contact with hazardous chemicals: Yes/
No
If ``yes,'' name the chemicals if you know them:______________________
3. Have you ever worked with any of the materials, or under any of the
conditions, listed below:
a. Asbestos: Yes/No
b. Silica (e.g., in sandblasting): Yes/No
c. Tungsten/cobalt (e.g., grinding or welding this material): Yes/No
d. Beryllium: Yes/No
e. Aluminum: Yes/No
f. Coal (for example, mining): Yes/No
g. Iron: Yes/No
h. Tin: Yes/No
i. Dusty environments: Yes/No
j. Any other hazardous exposures: Yes/No
If ``yes,'' describe these exposures:_________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
4. List any second jobs or side businesses you have:____________________
________________________________________________________________________
5. List your previous occupations:______________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
6. List your current and previous hobbies:______________________________
________________________________________________________________________
7. Have you been in the military services? Yes/No
[[Page 445]]
If ``yes,'' were you exposed to biological or chemical agents
(either in training or combat): Yes/No
8. Have you ever worked on a HAZMAT team? Yes/No
9. Other than medications for breathing and lung problems, heart
trouble, blood pressure, and seizures mentioned earlier in
this questionnaire, are you taking any other medications for
any reason (including over-the-counter medications): Yes/No
If ``yes,'' name the medications if you know them:____________________
10. Will you be using any of the following items with your
respirator(s)?
a. HEPA Filters: Yes/No
b. Canisters (for example, gas masks): Yes/No
c. Cartridges: Yes/No
11. How often are you expected to use the respirator(s) (circle ``yes''
or ``no'' for all answers that apply to you)?:
a. Escape only (no rescue): Yes/No
b. Emergency rescue only: Yes/No
c. Less than 5 hours per week: Yes/No
d. Less than 2 hours per day: Yes/No
e. 2 to 4 hours per day: Yes/No
f. Over 4 hours per day: Yes/No
12. During the period you are using the respirator(s), is your work
effort:
a. Light (less than 200 kcal per hour): Yes/No
If ``yes,'' how long does this period last during the average shift:----
--------hrs.------------mins.
Examples of a light work effort are sitting while writing, typing,
drafting, or performing light assembly work; or standing while operating
a drill press (1-3 lbs.) or controlling machines.
b. Moderate (200 to 350 kcal per hour): Yes/No
If ``yes,'' how long does this period last during the average
shift:------------hrs.------------mins.
Examples of moderate work effort are sitting while nailing or
filing; driving a truck or bus in urban traffic; standing while
drilling, nailing, performing assembly work, or transferring a moderate
load (about 35 lbs.) at trunk level; walking on a level surface about 2
mph or down a 5-degree grade about 3 mph; or pushing a wheelbarrow with
a heavy load (about 100 lbs.) on a level surface.
c. Heavy (above 350 kcal per hour): Yes/No
If ``yes,'' how long does this period last during the average
shift:------------hrs.------------mins.
Examples of heavy work are lifting a heavy load (about 50 lbs.) from
the floor to your waist or shoulder; working on a loading dock;
shoveling; standing while bricklaying or chipping castings; walking up
an 8-degree grade about 2 mph; climbing stairs with a heavy load (about
50 lbs.).
13. Will you be wearing protective clothing and/or equipment (other than
the respirator) when you're using your respirator: Yes/No
If ``yes,'' describe this protective clothing and/or equipment:_______
________________________________________________________________________
14. Will you be working under hot conditions (temperature exceeding 77
deg.F): Yes/No
15. Will you be working under humid conditions: Yes/No
16. Describe the work you'll be doing while you're using your
respirator(s):
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
17. Describe any special or hazardous conditions you might encounter
when you're using your respirator(s) (for example, confined
spaces, life-threatening gases):
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
18. Provide the following information, if you know it, for each toxic
substance that you'll be exposed to when you're using your
respirator(s):
Name of the first toxic substance:____________________________________
Estimated maximum exposure level per shift:___________________________
Duration of exposure per shift________________________________________
Name of the second toxic substance:___________________________________
Estimated maximum exposure level per shift:___________________________
Duration of exposure per shift:_______________________________________
Name of the third toxic substance:____________________________________
Estimated maximum exposure level per shift:___________________________
Duration of exposure per shift:_______________________________________
The name of any other toxic substances that you'll be exposed to
while using your respirator:
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
19. Describe any special responsibilities you'll have while using your
respirator(s) that may affect the safety and well-being of
others (for example, rescue, security):
________________________________________________________________________
Appendix D to Sec. 1910.134 (Mandatory) Information for Employees Using
Respirators When Not Required Under the Standard
Respirators are an effective method of protection against designated
hazards when properly selected and worn. Respirator use is encouraged,
even when exposures are below the exposure limit, to provide an
additional level of comfort and protection for workers. However, if a
respirator is used improperly
[[Page 446]]
or not kept clean, the respirator itself can become a hazard to the
worker. Sometimes, workers may wear respirators to avoid exposures to
hazards, even if the amount of hazardous substance does not exceed the
limits set by OSHA standards. If your employer provides respirators for
your voluntary use, of if you provide your own respirator, you need to
take certain precautions to be sure that the respirator itself does not
present a hazard.
You should do the following:
1. Read and heed all instructions provided by the manufacturer on
use, maintenance, cleaning and care, and warnings regarding the
respirators limitations.
2. Choose respirators certified for use to protect against the
contaminant of concern. NIOSH, the National Institute for Occupational
Safety and Health of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services,
certifies respirators. A label or statement of certification should
appear on the respirator or respirator packaging. It will tell you what
the respirator is designed for and how much it will protect you.
3. Do not wear your respirator into atmospheres containing
contaminants for which your respirator is not designed to protect
against. For example, a respirator designed to filter dust particles
will not protect you against gases, vapors, or very small solid
particles of fumes or smoke.
4. Keep track of your respirator so that you do not mistakenly use
someone else's respirator.
[63 FR 1270, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 20098, 20099, Apr. 23, 1998]
Sec. 1910.135 Head protection.
(a) General requirements. (1) The employer shall ensure that each
affected employee wears a protective helmet when working in areas where
there is a potential for injury to the head from falling objects.
(2) The employer shall ensure that a protective helmet designed to
reduce electrical shock hazard is worn by each such affected employee
when near exposed electrical conductors which could contact the head.
(b) Criteria for protective helmets. (1) Protective helmets
purchased after July 5, 1994 shall comply with ANSI Z89.1-1986,
``American National Standard for Personnel Protection--Protective
Headwear for Industrial Workers-Requirements,'' which is incorporated by
reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, or shall be demonstrated to be
equally effective.
(2) Protective helmets purchased before July 5, 1994 shall comply
with the ANSI standard ``American National Standard Safety Requirements
for Industrial Head Protection,'' ANSI Z89.1-1969, which is incorporated
by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, or shall be demonstrated by
the employer to be equally effective.
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994, as amended at 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 61
FR 19548, May 2, 1996]
Sec. 1910.136 Foot protection.
(a) General requirements. The employer shall ensure that each
affected employee uses protective footwear when working in areas where
there is a danger of foot injuries due to falling or rolling objects, or
objects piercing the sole, and where such employee's feet are exposed to
electrical hazards.
(b) Criteria for protective footwear. (1) Protective footwear
purchased after July 5, 1994 shall comply with ANSI Z41-1991, ``American
National Standard for Personal Protection--Protective Footwear,'' which
is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, or shall be
demonstrated by the employer to be equally effective.
(2) Protective footwear purchased before July 5, 1994 shall comply
with the ANSI standard ``USA Standard for Men's Safety-Toe Footwear,''
Z41.1-1967, which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6, or shall be demonstrated by the employer to be equally
effective.
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33911, July 1, 1994, as amended at 61
FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 19548, May 2, 1996; 61 FR 21228, May 9,
1996]
Sec. 1910.137 Electrical protective equipment.
(a) Design requirements. Insulating blankets, matting, covers, line
hose, gloves, and sleeves made of rubber shall meet the following
requirements:
(1) Manufacture and marking. (i) Blankets, gloves, and sleeves shall
be produced by a seamless process.
(ii) Each item shall be clearly marked as follows:
(A) Class 0 equipment shall be marked Class 0.
(B) Class 1 equipment shall be marked Class 1.
[[Page 447]]
(C) Class 2 equipment shall be marked Class 2.
(D) Class 3 equipment shall be marked Class 3.
(E) Class 4 equipment shall be marked Class 4.
(F) Non-ozone-resistant equipment other than matting shall be marked
Type I.
(G) Ozone-resistant equipment other than matting shall be marked
Type II.
(H) Other relevant markings, such as the manufacturer's
identification and the size of the equipment, may also be provided.
(iii) Markings shall be nonconducting and shall be applied in such a
manner as not to impair the insulating qualities of the equipment.
(iv) Markings on gloves shall be confined to the cuff portion of the
glove.
(2) Electrical requirements. (i) Equipment shall be capable of
withstanding the a-c proof-test voltage specified in Table I-2 or the d-
c proof-test voltage specified in Table I-3.
(A) The proof test shall reliably indicate that the equipment can
withstand the voltage involved.
(B) The test voltage shall be applied continuously for 3 minutes for
equipment other than matting and shall be applied continuously for 1
minute for matting.
(C) Gloves shall also be capable of withstanding the a-c proof-test
voltage specified in Table I-2 after a 16-hour water soak. (See the note
following paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.)
(ii) When the a-c proof test is used on gloves, the 60-hertz proof-
test current may not exceed the values specified in Table I-2 at any
time during the test period.
(A) If the a-c proof test is made at a frequency other than 60
hertz, the permissible proof-test current shall be computed from the
direct ratio of the frequencies.
(B) For the test, gloves (right side out) shall be filled with tap
water and immersed in water to a depth that is in accordance with Table
I-4. Water shall be added to or removed from the glove, as necessary, so
that the water level is the same inside and outside the glove.
(C) After the 16-hour water soak specified in paragraph (a)(2)(i)(C)
of this section, the 60-hertz proof-test current may exceed the values
given in Table I-2 by not more than 2 milliamperes.
(iii) Equipment that has been subjected to a minimum breakdown
voltage test may not be used for electrical protection. (See the note
following paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.)
(iv) Material used for Type II insulating equipment shall be capable
of withstanding an ozone test, with no visible effects. The ozone test
shall reliably indicate that the material will resist ozone exposure in
actual use. Any visible signs of ozone deterioration of the material,
such as checking, cracking, breaks, or pitting, is evidence of failure
to meet the requirements for ozone-resistant material. (See the note
following paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.)
(3) Workmanship and finish. (i) Equipment shall be free of harmful
physical irregularities that can be detected by the tests or inspections
required under this section.
(ii) Surface irregularities that may be present on all rubber goods
because of imperfections on forms or molds or because of inherent
difficulties in the manufacturing process and that may appear as
indentations, protuberances, or imbedded foreign material are acceptable
under the following conditions:
(A) The indentation or protuberance blends into a smooth slope when
the material is stretched.
(B) Foreign material remains in place when the insulating material
is folded and stretches with the insulating material surrounding it.
Note: Rubber insulating equipment meeting the following national
consensus standards is deemed to be in compliance with paragraph (a) of
this section:
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D 120-87,
Specification for Rubber Insulating Gloves.
ASTM D 178-93 (or D 178-88) Specification for Rubber Insulating
Matting.
ASTM D 1048-93 (or D 1048-88a) Specification for Rubber Insulating
Blankets.
ASTM D 1049-93 (or D 1049-88) Specification for Rubber Insulating
Covers.
ASTM D 1050-90, Specification for Rubber Insulating Line Hose.
ASTM D 1051-87, Specification for Rubber Insulating Sleeves.
These standards contain specifications for conducting the various
tests required in paragraph (a) of this section. For example,
[[Page 448]]
the a-c and d-c proof tests, the breakdown test, the water soak
procedure, and the ozone test mentioned in this paragraph are described
in detail in the ASTM standards.
(b) In-service care and use. (1) Electrical protective equipment
shall be maintained in a safe, reliable condition.
(2) The following specific requirements apply to insulating
blankets, covers, line hose, gloves, and sleeves made of rubber:
(i) Maximum use voltages shall conform to those listed in Table I-5.
(ii) Insulating equipment shall be inspected for damage before each
day's use and immediately following any incident that can reasonably be
suspected of having caused damage. Insulating gloves shall be given an
air test, along with the inspection.
(iii) Insulating equipment with any of the following defects may not
be used:
(A) A hole, tear, puncture, or cut;
(B) Ozone cutting or ozone checking (the cutting action produced by
ozone on rubber under mechanical stress into a series of interlacing
cracks);
(C) An embedded foreign object;
(D) Any of the following texture changes: swelling, softening,
hardening, or becoming sticky or inelastic.
(E) Any other defect that damages the insulating properties.
(iv) Insulating equipment found to have other defects that might
affect its insulating properties shall be removed from service and
returned for testing under paragraphs (b)(2)(viii) and (b)(2)(ix) of
this section.
(v) Insulating equipment shall be cleaned as needed to remove
foreign substances.
(vi) Insulating equipment shall be stored in such a location and in
such a manner as to protect it from light, temperature extremes,
excessive humidity, ozone, and other injurious substances and
conditions.
(vii) Protector gloves shall be worn over insulating gloves, except
as follows:
(A) Protector gloves need not be used with Class 0 gloves, under
limited-use conditions, where small equipment and parts manipulation
necessitate unusually high finger dexterity.
Note: Extra care is needed in the visual examination of the glove
and in the avoidance of handling sharp objects.
(B) Any other class of glove may be used for similar work without
protector gloves if the employer can demonstrate that the possibility of
physical damage to the gloves is small and if the class of glove is one
class higher than that required for the voltage involved. Insulating
gloves that have been used without protector gloves may not be used at a
higher voltage until they have been tested under the provisions of
paragraphs (b)(2)(viii) and (b)(2)(ix) of this section.
(viii) Electrical protective equipment shall be subjected to
periodic electrical tests. Test voltages and the maximum intervals
between tests shall be in accordance with Table I-5 and Table I-6.
(ix) The test method used under paragraphs (b)(2)(viii) and
(b)(2)(ix) of this section shall reliably indicate whether the
insulating equipment can withstand the voltages involved.
Note: Standard electrical test methods considered as meeting this
requirement are given in the following national consensus standards:
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D 120-87,
Specification for Rubber Insulating Gloves.
ASTM D 1048-93, Specification for Rubber Insulating Blankets.
ASTM D 1049-93, Specification for Rubber Insulating Covers.
ASTM D 1050-90, Specification for Rubber Insulating Line Hose.
ASTM D 1051-87, Specification for Rubber Insulating Sleeves.
ASTM F 478-92, Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Line
Hose and Covers.
ASTM F 479-93, Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating
Blankets.
ASTM F 496-93b Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating
Gloves and Sleeves.
(x) Insulating equipment failing to pass inspections or electrical
tests may not be used by employees, except as follows:
(A) Rubber insulating line hose may be used in shorter lengths with
the defective portion cut off.
(B) Rubber insulating blankets may be repaired using a compatible
patch that results in physical and electrical properties equal to those
of the blanket.
(C) Rubber insulating blankets may be salvaged by severing the
defective area from the undamaged portion of
[[Page 449]]
the blanket. The resulting undamaged area may not be smaller than 22
inches by 22 inches (560 mm by 560 mm) for Class 1, 2, 3, and 4
blankets.
(D) Rubber insulating gloves and sleeves with minor physical
defects, such as small cuts, tears, or punctures, may be repaired by the
application of a compatible patch. Also, rubber insulating gloves and
sleeves with minor surface blemishes may be repaired with a compatible
liquid compound. The patched area shall have electrical and physical
properties equal to those of the surrounding material. Repairs to gloves
are permitted only in the area between the wrist and the reinforced edge
of the opening.
(xi) Repaired insulating equipment shall be retested before it may
be used by employees.
(xii) The employer shall certify that equipment has been tested in
accordance with the requirements of paragraphs (b)(2)(viii), (b)(2)(ix),
and (b)(2)(xi) of this section. The certification shall identify the
equipment that passed the test and the date it was tested.
Note: Marking of equipment and entering the results of the tests and
the dates of testing onto logs are two acceptable means of meeting this
requirement.
Table I-2--A-C Proof-Test Requirements
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum proof-test current, mA (gloves only)
Proof-test -----------------------------------------------
Class of equipment voltage 267-mm
rms V (10.5-in) 356-mm (14- 406-mm (16- 457-mm (18-
glove in) glove in) glove in) glove
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0................................................... 5,000 8 12 14 16
1................................................... 10,000 .......... 14 16 18
2................................................... 20,000 .......... 16 18 20
3................................................... 30,000 .......... 18 20 22
4................................................... 40,000 .......... .......... 22 24
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table I-3--D-C Proof-Test Requirements
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Proof-test
Class of equipment voltage
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.......................................................... 20,000
1.......................................................... 40,000
2.......................................................... 50,000
3.......................................................... 60,000
4.......................................................... 70,000
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: The d-c voltages listed in this table are not appropriate for
proof testing rubber insulating line hose or covers. For this equipment,
d-c proof tests shall use a voltage high enough to indicate that the
equipment can be safely used at the voltages listed in Table I-4. See
ASTM D 1050-90 and ASTM D 1049-88 for further information on proof tests
for rubber insulating line hose and covers.
Table I-4--Glove Tests--Water Level \1, 2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
AC proof test DC proof test
Class of glove -------------------------------
mm. in. mm. in.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0....................................... 38 1.5 38 1.5
1....................................... 38 1.5 51 2.0
2....................................... 64 2.5 76 3.0
3....................................... 89 3.5 102 4.0
4....................................... 127 5.0 153 6.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The water level is given as the clearance from the cuff of the glove
to the water line, with a tolerance of 13 mm. (0.5 in.).
\2\ If atmospheric conditions make the specified clearances impractical,
the clearances may be increased by a maximum of 25 mm. (1 in.).
[[Page 450]]
Table I-5--Rubber Insulating Equipment Voltage Requirements
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum use Retest voltage Retest voltage
Class of equipment voltage \1\ a- \2\ a-c--rms \2\ d-c--avg
c--rms
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0............................................................... 1,000 5,000 20,000
1............................................................... 7,500 10,000 40,000
2............................................................... 17,000 20,000 50,000
3............................................................... 26,500 30,000 60,000
4............................................................... 36,000 40,000 70,000
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The maximum use voltage is the a-c voltage (rms) classification of the protective equipment that designates
the maximum nominal design voltage of the energized system that may be safely worked. The nominal design
voltage is equal to the phase-to-phase voltage on multiphase circuits. However, the phase-to-ground potential
is considered to be the nominal design voltage:
(1) If there is no multiphase exposure in a system area and if the voltage exposure is limited to the phase-to-
ground potential, or
(2) If the electrical equipment and devices are insulated or isolated or both so that the multiphase exposure on
a grounded wye circuit is removed.
\2\ The proof-test voltage shall be applied continuously for at least 1 minute, but no more than 3 minutes.
Table I-6--Rubber Insulating Equipment Test Intervals
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Type of equipment When to test
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rubber insulating line hose............ Upon indication that insulating
value is suspect.
Rubber insulating covers............... Upon indication that insulating
value is suspect.
Rubber insulating blankets............. Before first issue and every 12
months thereafter.\1\
Rubber insulating gloves............... Before first issue and every 6
months thereafter.\1\
Rubber insulating sleeves.............. Before first issue and every 12
months thereafter.\1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ If the insulating equipment has been electrically tested but not
issued for service, it may not be placed into service unless it has
been electrically tested within the previous 12 months.
[59 FR 4435, Jan. 31, 1994; 59 FR 33662, June 30, 1994]
Sec. 1910.139 Respiratory protection for M. tuberculosis.
This section applies only to respiratory protection against M.
tuberculosis and applies in lieu of Sec. 1910.134.
(a) Permissible practice. (1) In the control of those occupational
diseases caused by breathing air contaminated with harmful dusts, fogs,
fumes, mists, gases, smokes, sprays, or vapors, the primary objective
shall be to prevent atmospheric contamination. This shall be
accomplished as far as feasible by accepted engineering control measures
(for example, enclosure or confinement of the operation, general and
local ventilation, and substitution of less toxic materials). When
effective engineering controls are not feasible, or while they are being
instituted, appropriate respirators shall be used pursuant to the
following requirements.
(2) Respirators shall be provided by the employer when such
equipment is necessary to protect the health of the employee. The
employer shall provide the respirators which are applicable and suitable
for the purpose intended. The employer shall be responsible for the
establishment and maintenance of a respiratory protective program which
shall include the requirements outlined in paragraph (b) of this
section.
(3) The employee shall use the provided respiratory protection in
accordance with instructions and training received.
[[Page 451]]
(b) Requirements for a minimal acceptable program. (1) Written
standard operating procedures governing the selection and use of
respirators shall be established.
(2) Respirators shall be selected on the basis of hazards to which
the worker is exposed.
(3) The user shall be instructed and trained in the proper use of
respirators and their limitations.
(4) [Reserved]
(5) Respirators shall be regularly cleaned and disinfected. Those
used by more than one worker shall be thoroughly cleaned and disinfected
after each use.
(6) Respirators shall be stored in a convenient, clean, and sanitary
location.
(7) Respirators used routinely shall be inspected during cleaning.
Worn or deteriorated parts shall be replaced. Respirators for emergency
use such as self-contained devices shall be thoroughly inspected at
least once a month and after each use.
(8) Appropriate surveillance of work area conditions and degree of
em- ployee exposure or stress shall be maintained.
(9) There shall be regular inspection and evaluation to determine
the continued effectiveness of the program.
(10) Persons should not be assigned to tasks requiring use of
respirators unless it has been determined that they are physically able
to perform the work and use the equipment. The local physician shall
determine what health and physical conditions are pertinent. The
respirator user's medical status should be reviewed periodically (for
instance, annually).
(11) Respirators shall be selected from among those jointly approved
by the Mine Safety and Health Administration and the National Institute
for Occupational Safety and Health under the provisions of 30 CFR part
11.
(c) Selection of respirators. Proper selection of respirators shall
be made according to the guidance of American National Standard
Practices for Respiratory Protection Z88.2-1969.
(d) Air quality. (1) Compressed air, compressed oxygen, liquid air,
and liquid oxygen used for respiration shall be of high purity. Oxygen
shall meet the requirements of the United States Pharmacopoeia for
medical or breathing oxygen. Breathing air shall meet at least the
requirements of the specification for Grade D breathing air as described
in Compressed Gas Association Commodity Specification G-7.1-1966.
Compressed oxygen shall not be used in supplied-air respirators or in
open circuit self-contained breathing apparatus that have previously
used compressed air. Oxygen must never be used with air line
respirators.
(2) Breathing air may be supplied to respirators from cylinders or
air compressors.
(i) Cylinders shall be tested and maintained as prescribed in the
Shipping Container Specification Regulations of the Department of
Transportation (49 CFR part 178).
(ii) The compressor for supplying air shall be equipped with
necessary safety and standby devices. A breathing air-type compressor
shall be used. Compressors shall be constructed and situated so as to
avoid entry of contaminated air into the system and suitable in-line air
purifying sorbent beds and filters installed to further assure breathing
air quality. A receiver of sufficient capacity to enable the respirator
wearer to escape from a contaminated atmosphere in event of compressor
failure, and alarms to indicate compressor failure and overheating shall
be installed in the system. If an oil-lubricated compressor is used, it
shall have a high-temperature or carbon monoxide alarm, or both. If only
a high-temperature alarm is used, the air from the compressor shall be
frequently tested for carbon monoxide to insure that it meets the
specifications in paragraph (d)(1) of this section.
(3) Air line couplings shall be incompatible with outlets for other
gas systems to prevent inadvertent servicing of air line respirators
with nonrespirable gases or oxygen.
(4) Breathing gas containers shall be marked in accordance with
American National Standard Method of Marking Portable Compressed Gas
Containers to Identify the Material Contained, Z48.1-1954; Federal
Specification BB-A-1034a, June 21, 1968, Air, Compressed for Breathing
Purposes; or Interim Federal Specification GG-B-00675b, April 27,
[[Page 452]]
1965, Breathing Apparatus, Self-Contained.
(e) Use of respirators. (1) Standard procedures shall be developed
for respirator use. These should include all information and guidance
necessary for their proper selection, use, and care. Possible emergency
and routine uses of respirators should be anticipated and planned for.
(2) The correct respirator shall be specified for each job. The
respirator type is usually specified in the work procedures by a
qualified individual supervising the respiratory protective program. The
individual issuing them shall be adequately instructed to insure that
the correct respirator is issued.
(3) Written procedures shall be prepared covering safe use of
respirators in dangerous atmospheres that might be encountered in normal
operations or in emergencies. Personnel shall be familiar with these
procedures and the available respirators.
(i) In areas where the wearer, with failure of the respirator, could
be overcome by a toxic or oxygen-deficient atmosphere, at least one
additional man shall be present. Communications (visual, voice, or
signal line) shall be maintained between both or all individuals
present. Planning shall be such that one individual will be unaffected
by any likely incident and have the proper rescue equipment to be able
to assist the other(s) in case of emergency.
(ii) When self-contained breathing apparatus or hose masks with
blowers are used in atmospheres immediately dangerous to life or health,
standby men must be present with suitable rescue equipment.
(iii) Persons using air line respirators in atmospheres immediately
hazardous to life or health shall be equipped with safety harnesses and
safety lines for lifting or removing persons from hazardous atmospheres
or other and equivalent provisions for the rescue of persons from
hazardous atmospheres shall be used. A standby man or men with suitable
self-contained breathing apparatus shall be at the nearest fresh air
base for emergency rescue.
(4) Respiratory protection is no better than the respirator in use,
even though it is worn conscientiously. Frequent random inspections
shall be conducted by a qualified individual to assure that respirators
are properly selected, used, cleaned, and maintained.
(5) For safe use of any respirator, it is essential that the user be
properly instructed in its selection, use, and maintenance. Both
supervisors and workers shall be so instructed by competent persons.
Training shall provide the men an opportunity to handle the respirator,
have it fitted properly, test its face-piece-to-face seal, wear it in
normal air for a long familiarity period, and, finally, to wear it in a
test atmosphere.
(i) Every respirator wearer shall receive fitting instructions
including demonstrations and practice in how the respirator should be
worn, how to adjust it, and how to determine if it fits properly.
Respirators shall not be worn when conditions prevent a good face seal.
Such conditions may be a growth of beard, sideburns, a skull cap that
projects under the facepiece, or temple pieces on glasses. Also, the
absence of one or both dentures can seriously affect the fit of a
facepiece. The worker's diligence in observing these factors shall be
evaluated by periodic check. To assure proper protection, the facepiece
fit shall be checked by the wearer each time he puts on the respirator.
This may be done by following the manufacturer's facepiece fitting
instructions.
(ii) Providing respiratory protection for individuals wearing
corrective glasses is a serious problem. A proper seal cannot be
established if the temple bars of eye glasses extend through the sealing
edge of the full facepiece. As a temporary measure, glasses with short
temple bars or without temple bars may be taped to the wearer's head.
Wearing of contact lenses in contaminated atmospheres with a respirator
shall not be allowed. Systems have been developed for mounting
corrective lenses inside full facepieces. When a workman must wear
corrective lenses as part of the facepiece, the facepiece and lenses
shall be fitted by qualified individuals to provide good vision,
comfort, and a gas-tight seal.
(iii) If corrective spectacles or goggles are required, they shall
be worn so as not to affect the fit of the facepiece.
[[Page 453]]
Proper selection of equipment will minimize or avoid this problem.
(f) Maintenance and care of respirators. (1) A program for
maintenance and care of respirators shall be adjusted to the type of
plant, working conditions, and hazards involved, and shall include the
following basic services:
(i) Inspection for defects (including a leak check),
(ii) Cleaning and disinfecting,
(iii) Repair,
(iv) Storage
Equipment shall be properly maintained to retain its original
effectiveness.
(2)(i) All respirators shall be inspected routinely before and after
each use. A respirator that is not routinely used but is kept ready for
emergency use shall be inspected after each use and at least monthly to
assure that it is in satisfactory working condition.
(ii) Self-contained breathing apparatus shall be inspected monthly.
Air and oxygen cylinders shall be fully charged according to the
manufacturer's instructions. It shall be determined that the regulator
and warning devices function properly.
(iii) Respirator inspection shall include a check of the tightness
of connections and the condition of the facepiece, headbands, valves,
connecting tube, and canisters. Rubber or elastomer parts shall be
inspected for pliability and signs of deterioration. Stretching and
manipulating rubber or elastomer parts with a massaging action will keep
them pliable and flexible and prevent them from taking a set during
storage.
(iv) A record shall be kept of inspection dates and findings for
respirators maintained for emergency use.
(3) Routinely used respirators shall be collected, cleaned, and
disinfected as frequently as necessary to insure that proper protection
is provided for the wearer. Respirators maintained for emergency use
shall be cleaned and disinfected after each use.
(4) Replacement or repairs shall be done only by experienced persons
with parts designed for the respirator. No attempt shall be made to
replace components or to make adjustment or repairs beyond the
manufacturer's recommendations. Reducing or admission valves or
regulators shall be returned to the manufacturer or to a trained
technician for adjustment or repair.
(5)(i) After inspection, cleaning, and necessary repair, respirators
shall be stored to protect against dust, sunlight, heat, extreme cold,
excessive moisture, or damaging chemicals. Respirators placed at
stations and work areas for emergency use should be quickly accessible
at all times and should be stored in compartments built for the purpose.
The compartments should be clearly marked. Routinely used respirators,
such as dust respirators, may be placed in plastic bags. Respirators
should not be stored in such places as lockers or tool boxes unless they
are in carrying cases or cartons.
(ii) Respirators should be packed or stored so that the facepiece
and exhalation valve will rest in a normal position and function will
not be impaired by the elastomer setting in an abnormal position.
(iii) Instructions for proper storage of emergency respirators, such
as gas masks and self-contained breathing apparatus, are found in ``use
and care'' instructions usually mounted inside the carrying case lid.
(g) Identification of gas mask canisters. (1) The primary means of
identifying a gas mask canister shall be by means of properly worded
labels. The secondary means of identifying a gas mask canister shall be
by a color code.
(2) All who issue or use gas masks falling within the scope of this
section shall see that all gas mask canisters purchased or used by them
are properly labeled and colored in accordance with these requirements
before they are placed in service and that the labels and colors are
properly maintained at all times thereafter until the canisters have
completely served their purpose.
(3) On each canister shall appear in bold letters the following:
(i)--
Canister for____________________________________________________________
[[Page 454]]
(Name for atmospheric contaminant)
or
Type N Gas Mask Canister
(ii) In addition, essentially the following wording shall appear
beneath the appropriate phrase on the canister label: ``For respiratory
protection in atmospheres containing not more than ---- ---- ------
percent by volume of ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----.''
(Name of atmospheric contaminant)
(4) Canisters having a special high- efficiency filter for
protection against radionuclides and other highly toxic particulates
shall be labeled with a statement of the type and degree of protection
afforded by the filter. The label shall be affixed to the neck end of,
or to the gray stripe which is around and near the top of, the canister.
The degree of protection shall be marked as the percent of penetration
of the canister by a 0.3-micron-diameter dioctyl phthalate (DOP) smoke
at a flow rate of 85 liters per minute.
(5) Each canister shall have a label warning that gas masks should
be used only in atmospheres containing sufficient oxygen to support life
(at least 16 percent by volume), since gas mask canisters are only
designed to neutralize or remove contaminants from the air.
(6) Each gas mask canister shall be painted a distinctive color or
combination of colors indicated in Table I-1. All colors used shall be
such that they are clearly identifiable by the user and clearly
distinguishable from one another. The color coating used shall offer a
high degree of resistance to chipping, scaling, peeling, blistering,
fading, and the effects of the ordinary atmospheres to which they may be
exposed under normal conditions of storage and use. Appropriately
colored pressure sensitive tape may be used for the stripes.
Table I-1
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Atmospheric contaminants to be
protected against Colors assigned \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Acid gases............................. White.
Hydrocyanic acid gas................... White with \1/2\-inch green
stripe completely around the
canister near the bottom.
Chlorine gas........................... White with \1/2\-inch yellow
stripe completely around the
canister near the bottom.
Organic vapors......................... Black.
Ammonia gas............................ Green.
Acid gases and ammonia gas............. Green with \1/2\-inch white
stripe completely around the
canister near the bottom.
Carbon monoxide........................ Blue.
Acid gases and organic vapors.......... Yellow.
Hydrocyanic acid gas and chloropicrin Yellow with \1/2\-inch blue
vapor. stripe completely around the
canister near the bottom.
Acid gases, organic vapors, and ammonia Brown.
gases.
Radioactive materials, excepting Purple (Magenta).
tritium and noble gases.
Particulates (dusts, fumes, mists, Canister color for contaminant,
fogs, or smokes) in combination with as designated above, with \1/
any of the above gases or vapors. 2\-inch gray stripe completely
around the canister near the
top.
All of the above atmospheric Red with \1/2\-inch gray stripe
contaminants. completely around the canister
near the top.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Gray shall not be assigned as the main color for a canister designed
to remove acids or vapors.
Note: Orange shall be used as a complete body, or stripe color to
represent gases not included in this table. The user will need to
refer to the canister label to determine the degree of protection the
canister will afford.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978;
49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 58 FR 35309, June
30, 1993. Redesignated and amended at 63 FR 1270, Jan. 8, 1998]
Appendix A to Subpart I of Part 1910--References for Further Information
(Non-mandatory)
The documents in appendix A provide information which may be helpful
in understanding and implementing the standards in Subpart I.
1. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). ``Accidents Involving Eye
Injuries.'' Report 597, Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1980.
2. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). ``Accidents Involving Face
Injuries.'' Report 604, Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1980.
[[Page 455]]
3. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). ``Accidents Involving Head
Injuries.'' Report 605, Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1980.
4. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). ``Accidents Involving Foot
Injuries.'' Report 626, Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1981.
5. National Safety Council. ``Accident Facts'', Annual edition,
Chicago, IL: 1981.
6. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). ``Occupational Injuries and
Illnesses in the United States by Industry,'' Annual edition,
Washington, D.C.: BLS.
7. National Society to Prevent Blindness. ``A Guide for Controlling
Eye Injuries in Industry,'' Chicago, Il: 1982.
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994]
Appendix B to Subpart I to Part 1910--Non-mandatory Compliance
Guidelines for Hazard Assessment and Personal Protective Equipment
Selection
This appendix is intended to provide compliance assistance for
employers and employees in implementing requirements for a hazard
assessment and the selection of personal protective equipment.
1. Controlling hazards. PPE devices alone should not be relied on to
provide protection against hazards, but should be used in conjunction
with guards, engineering controls, and sound manufacturing practices.
2. Assessment and selection. It is necessary to consider certain
general guidelines for assessing the foot, head, eye and face, and hand
hazard situations that exist in an occupational or educational operation
or process, and to match the protective devices to the particular
hazard. It should be the responsibility of the safety officer to
exercise common sense and appropriate expertise to accomplish these
tasks.
3. Assessment guidelines. In order to assess the need for PPE the
following steps should be taken:
a. Survey. Conduct a walk-through survey of the areas in question.
The purpose of the survey is to identify sources of hazards to workers
and co-workers. Consideration should be given to the basic hazard
categories:
(a) Impact
(b) Penetration
(c) Compression (roll-over)
(d) Chemical
(e) Heat
(f) Harmful dust
(g) Light (optical) radiation
b. Sources. During the walk-through survey the safety officer should
observe: (a) sources of motion; i.e., machinery or processes where any
movement of tools, machine elements or particles could exist, or
movement of personnel that could result in collision with stationary
objects; (b) sources of high temperatures that could result in burns,
eye injury or ignition of protective equipment, etc.; (c) types of
chemical exposures; (d) sources of harmful dust; (e) sources of light
radiation, i.e., welding, brazing, cutting, furnaces, heat treating,
high intensity lights, etc.; (f) sources of falling objects or potential
for dropping objects; (g) sources of sharp objects which might pierce
the feet or cut the hands; (h) sources of rolling or pinching objects
which could crush the feet; (i) layout of workplace and location of co-
workers; and (j) any electrical hazards. In addition, injury/accident
data should be reviewed to help identify problem areas.
c. Organize data. Following the walk-through survey, it is necessary
to organize the data and information for use in the assessment of
hazards. The objective is to prepare for an analysis of the hazards in
the environment to enable proper selection of protective equipment.
d. Analyze data. Having gathered and organized data on a workplace,
an estimate of the potential for injuries should be made. Each of the
basic hazards (paragraph 3.a.) should be reviewed and a determination
made as to the type, level of risk, and seriousness of potential injury
from each of the hazards found in the area. The possibility of exposure
to several hazards simultaneously should be considered.
4. Selection guidelines. After completion of the procedures in
paragraph 3, the general procedure for selection of protective equipment
is to: a) Become familiar with the potential hazards and the type of
protective equipment that is available, and what it can do; i.e., splash
protection, impact protection, etc.; b) compare the hazards associated
with the environment; i.e., impact velocities, masses, projectile shape,
radiation intensities, with the capabilities of the available protective
equipment; c) select the protective equipment which ensures a level of
protection greater than the minimum required to protect employees from
the hazards; and d) fit the user with the protective device and give
instructions on care and use of the PPE. It is very important that end
users be made aware of all warning labels for and limitations of their
PPE.
5. Fitting the device. Careful consideration must be given to
comfort and fit. PPE that fits poorly will not afford the necessary
protection. Continued wearing of the device is more likely if it fits
the wearer comfortably. Protective devices are generally available in a
variety of sizes. Care should be taken to ensure that the right size is
selected.
6. Devices with adjustable features. Adjustments should be made on
an individual basis for a comfortable fit that will maintain the
protective device in the proper position. Particular care should be
taken in fitting devices for eye protection against dust and chemical
splash to ensure that the devices
[[Page 456]]
are sealed to the face. In addition, proper fitting of helmets is
important to ensure that it will not fall off during work operations. In
some cases a chin strap may be necessary to keep the helmet on an
employee's head. (Chin straps should break at a reasonably low force,
however, so as to prevent a strangulation hazard). Where manufacturer's
instructions are available, they should be followed carefully.
7. Reassessment of hazards. It is the responsibility of the safety
officer to reassess the workplace hazard situation as necessary, by
identifying and evaluating new equipment and processes, reviewing
accident records, and reevaluating the suitability of previously
selected PPE.
8. Selection chart guidelines for eye and face protection. Some
occupations (not a complete list) for which eye protection should be
routinely considered are: carpenters, electricians, machinists,
mechanics and repairers, millwrights, plumbers and pipe fitters, sheet
metal workers and tinsmiths, assemblers, sanders, grinding machine
operators, lathe and milling machine operators, sawyers, welders,
laborers, chemical process operators and handlers, and timber cutting
and logging workers. The following chart provides general guidance for
the proper selection of eye and face protection to protect against
hazards associated with the listed hazard ``source'' operations.
Eye and Face Protection Selection Chart
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Assessment of
Source Hazard Protection
------------------------------------------------------------------------
IMPACT--Chipping, grinding Flying fragments, Spectacles with side
machining, masonry work, objects, large protection,
woodworking, sawing, drilling, chips, particles goggles, face
chiseling, powered fastening, sand, dirt, etc. shields. See notes
riveting, and sanding. (1), (3), (5), (6),
(10). For severe
exposure, use
faceshield.
HEAT--Furnace operations, Hot sparks....... Faceshields,
pouring, casting, hot dipping, goggles, spectacles
and welding. with side
protection. For
severe exposure use
faceshield. See
notes (1), (2),
(3).
Splash from Faceshields worn
molten metals. over goggles. See
notes (1), (2),
(3).
High temperature Screen face shields,
exposure. reflective face
shields. See notes
(1), (2), (3).
CHEMICALS--Acid and chemicals Splash........... Goggles, eyecup and
handling, degreasing plating. cover types. For
severe exposure,
use face shield.
See notes (3),
(11).
Irritating mists. Special-purpose
goggles.
DUST-- Woodworking, buffing, Nuisance dust.... Goggles, eyecup and
general dusty conditions. cover types. See
note (8).
LIGHT and/or RADIATION--.......
Welding: Electric arc Optical radiation Welding helmets or
welding shields.
Typical shades: 10-
14. See notes (9),
(12)
Welding: Gas Optical radiation Welding goggles or
welding face
shield. Typical
shades: gas welding
4-8, cutting 3-6,
brazing 3-4. See
note (9)
Cutting, Torch brazing, Torch Optical radiation Spectacles or
soldering welding face-
shield. Typical
shades, 1.5-3. See
notes (3), (9)
Glare Poor vision...... Spectacles with
shaded or special-
purpose lenses, as
suitable. See notes
(9), (10).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes to Eye and Face Protection Selection Chart:
(1) Care should be taken to recognize the possibility of multiple and
simultaneous exposure to a variety of hazards. Adequate protection
against the highest level of each of the hazards should be provided.
Protective devices do not provide unlimited protection.
(2) Operations involving heat may also involve light radiation. As
required by the standard, protection from both hazards must be
provided.
(3) Faceshields should only be worn over primary eye protection
(spectacles or goggles).
(4) As required by the standard, filter lenses must meet the
requirements for shade designations in Sec. 1910.133(a)(5). Tinted and
shaded lenses are not filter lenses unless they are marked or
identified as such.
(5) As required by the standard, persons whose vision requires the use
of prescription (Rx) lenses must wear either protective devices fitted
with prescription (Rx) lenses or protective devices designed to be
worn over regular prescription (Rx) eyewear.
(6) Wearers of contact lenses must also wear appropriate eye and face
protection devices in a hazardous environment. It should be recognized
that dusty and/or chemical environments may represent an additional
hazard to contact lens wearers.
(7) Caution should be exercised in the use of metal frame protective
devices in electrical hazard areas.
(8) Atmospheric conditions and the restricted ventilation of the
protector can cause lenses to fog. Frequent cleansing may be
necessary.
(9) Welding helmets or faceshields should be used only over primary eye
protection (spectacles or goggles).
(10) Non-sideshield spectacles are available for frontal protection
only, but are not acceptable eye protection for the sources and
operations listed for ``impact.''
(11) Ventilation should be adequate, but well protected from splash
entry. Eye and face protection should be designed and used so that it
provides both adequate ventilation and protects the wearer from splash
entry.
(12) Protection from light radiation is directly related to filter lens
density. See note (4) . Select the darkest shade that allows task
performance.
[[Page 457]]
9. Selection guidelines for head protection. All head protection
(helmets) is designed to provide protection from impact and penetration
hazards caused by falling objects. Head protection is also available
which provides protection from electric shock and burn. When selecting
head protection, knowledge of potential electrical hazards is important.
Class A helmets, in addition to impact and penetration resistance,
provide electrical protection from low-voltage conductors (they are
proof tested to 2,200 volts). Class B helmets, in addition to impact and
penetration resistance, provide electrical protection from high-voltage
conductors (they are proof tested to 20,000 volts). Class C helmets
provide impact and penetration resistance (they are usually made of
aluminum which conducts electricity), and should not be used around
electrical hazards.
Where falling object hazards are present, helmets must be worn. Some
examples include: working below other workers who are using tools and
materials which could fall; working around or under conveyor belts which
are carrying parts or materials; working below machinery or processes
which might cause material or objects to fall; and working on exposed
energized conductors.
Some examples of occupations for which head protection should be
routinely considered are: carpenters, electricians, linemen, mechanics
and repairers, plumbers and pipe fitters, assemblers, packers, wrappers,
sawyers, welders, laborers, freight handlers, timber cutting and
logging, stock handlers, and warehouse laborers.
10. Selection guidelines for foot protection. Safety shoes and boots
which meet the ANSI Z41-1991 Standard provide both impact and
compression protection. Where necessary, safety shoes can be obtained
which provide puncture protection. In some work situations, metatarsal
protection should be provided, and in other special situations
electrical conductive or insulating safety shoes would be appropriate.
Safety shoes or boots with impact protection would be required for
carrying or handling materials such as packages, objects, parts or heavy
tools, which could be dropped; and, for other activities where objects
might fall onto the feet. Safety shoes or boots with compression
protection would be required for work activities involving skid trucks
(manual material handling carts) around bulk rolls (such as paper rolls)
and around heavy pipes, all of which could potentially roll over an
employee's feet. Safety shoes or boots with puncture protection would be
required where sharp objects such as nails, wire, tacks, screws, large
staples, scrap metal etc., could be stepped on by employees causing a
foot injury.
Some occupations (not a complete list) for which foot protection
should be routinely considered are: shipping and receiving clerks, stock
clerks, carpenters, electricians, machinists, mechanics and repairers,
plumbers and pipe fitters, structural metal workers, assemblers, drywall
installers and lathers, packers, wrappers, craters, punch and stamping
press operators, sawyers, welders, laborers, freight handlers, gardeners
and grounds-keepers, timber cutting and logging workers, stock handlers
and warehouse laborers.
11. Selection guidelines for hand protection. Gloves are often
relied upon to prevent cuts, abrasions, burns, and skin contact with
chemicals that are capable of causing local or systemic effects
following dermal exposure. OSHA is unaware of any gloves that provide
protection against all potential hand hazards, and commonly available
glove materials provide only limited protection against many chemicals.
Therefore, it is important to select the most appropriate glove for a
particular application and to determine how long it can be worn, and
whether it can be reused.
It is also important to know the performance characteristics of
gloves relative to the specific hazard anticipated; e.g., chemical
hazards, cut hazards, flame hazards, etc. These performance
characteristics should be assessed by using standard test procedures.
Before purchasing gloves, the employer should request documentation from
the manufacturer that the gloves meet the appropriate test standard(s)
for the hazard(s) anticipated.
Other factors to be considered for glove selection in general
include:
(A) As long as the performance characteristics are acceptable, in
certain circumstances, it may be more cost effective to regularly change
cheaper gloves than to reuse more expensive types; and,
(B) The work activities of the employee should be studied to
determine the degree of dexterity required, the duration, frequency, and
degree of exposure of the hazard, and the physical stresses that will be
applied.
With respect to selection of gloves for protection against chemical
hazards:
(A) The toxic properties of the chemical(s) must be determined; in
particular, the ability of the chemical to cause local effects on the
skin and /or to pass through the skin and cause systemic effects;
(B) Generally, any ``chemical resistant'' glove can be used for dry
powders;
(C) For mixtures and formulated products (unless specific test data
are available), a glove should be selected on the basis of the chemical
component with the shortest breakthrough time, since it is possible for
solvents to carry active ingredients through polymeric materials; and,
(D) Employees must be able to remove the gloves in such a manner as
to prevent skin contamination.
[[Page 458]]
12. Cleaning and maintenance. It is important that all PPE be kept
clean and properly maintained. Cleaning is particularly important for
eye and face protection where dirty or fogged lenses could impair
vision.
For the purposes of compliance with Sec. 1910.132 (a) and (b), PPE
should be inspected, cleaned, and maintained at regular intervals so
that the PPE provides the requisite protection.
It is also important to ensure that contaminated PPE which cannot be
decontaminated is disposed of in a manner that protects employees from
exposure to hazards.
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994]
Subpart J--General Environmental Controls
Authority: Secs. 4, 6, and 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act of
1970, 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36
FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), or
6-96 (62 FR 111), as applicable.
Sections 1910.141, 1910.142, 1910.145, 1910.146, and 1910.147 also
issued under 29 CFR part 1911.
Sec. 1910.141 Sanitation.
(a) General--(1) Scope. This section applies to permanent places of
employment.
(2) Definitions applicable to this section.
Nonwater carriage toilet facility, means a toilet facility not
connected to a sewer.
Number of employees means, unless otherwise specified, the maximum
number of employees present at any one time on a regular shift.
Personal service room, means a room used for activities not directly
connected with the production or service function performed by the
establishment. Such activities include, but are not limited to, first-
aid, medical services, dressing, showering, toilet use, washing, and
eating.
Potable water means water which meets the quality standards
prescribed in the U.S. Public Health Service Drinking Water Standards,
published in 42 CFR part 72, or water which is approved for drinking
purposes by the State or local authority having jurisdiction.
Toilet facility, means a fixture maintained within a toilet room for
the purpose of defecation or urination, or both.
Toilet room, means a room maintained within or on the premises of
any place of employment, containing toilet facilities for use by
employees.
Toxic material means a material in concentration or amount which
exceeds the applicable limit established by a standard, such as
Secs. 1910.1000 and 1910.1001 or, in the absence of an applicable
standard, which is of such toxicity so as to constitute a recognized
hazard that is causing or is likely to cause death or serious physical
harm.
Urinal means a toilet facility maintained within a toilet room for
the sole purpose of urination.
Water closet means a toilet facility maintained within a toilet room
for the purpose of both defecation and urination and which is flushed
with water.
Wet process means any process or operation in a workroom which
normally results in surfaces upon which employees may walk or stand
becoming wet.
(3) Housekeeping. (i) All places of employment shall be kept clean
to the extent that the nature of the work allows.
(ii) The floor of every workroom shall be maintained, so far as
practicable, in a dry condition. Where wet processes are used, drainage
shall be maintained and false floors, platforms, mats, or other dry
standing places shall be provided, where practicable, or appropriate
waterproof footgear shall be provided.
(iii) To facilitate cleaning, every floor, working place, and
passageway shall be kept free from protruding nails, splinters, loose
boards, and unnecessary holes and openings.
(4) Waste disposal. (i) Any receptacle used for putrescible solid or
liquid waste or refuse shall be so constructed that it does not leak and
may be thoroughly cleaned and maintained in a sanitary condition. Such a
receptacle shall be equipped with a solid tight-fitting cover, unless it
can be maintained in a sanitary condition without a cover. This
requirement does not prohibit the use of receptacles which are designed
to permit the maintenance of a sanitary condition without regard to the
aforementioned requirements.
(ii) All sweepings, solid or liquid wastes, refuse, and garbage
shall be removed in such a manner as to avoid
[[Page 459]]
creating a menace to health and as often as necessary or appropriate to
maintain the place of employment in a sanitary condition.
(5) Vermin control. Every enclosed workplace shall be so
constructed, equipped, and maintained, so far as reasonably practicable,
as to prevent the entrance or harborage of rodents, insects, and other
vermin. A continuing and effective extermination program shall be
instituted where their presence is detected.
(b) Water supply--(1) Potable water. (i) Potable water shall be
provided in all places of employment, for drinking, washing of the
person, cooking, washing of foods, washing of cooking or eating
utensils, washing of food preparation or processing premises, and
personal service rooms.
(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) Portable drinking water dispensers shall be designed,
constructed, and serviced so that sanitary conditions are maintained,
shall be capable of being closed, and shall be equipped with a tap.
(iv) [Reserved]
(v) Open containers such as barrels, pails, or tanks for drinking
water from which the water must be dipped or poured, whether or not they
are fitted with a cover, are prohibited.
(vi) A common drinking cup and other common utensils are prohibited.
(2) Nonpotable water. (i) Outlets for nonpotable water, such as
water for industrial or firefighting purposes, shall be posted or
otherwise marked in a manner that will indicate clearly that the water
is unsafe and is not to be used for drinking, washing of the person,
cooking, washing of food, washing of cooking or eating utensils, washing
of food preparation or processing premises, or personal service rooms,
or for washing clothes.
(ii) Construction of nonpotable water systems or systems carrying
any other nonpotable substance shall be such as to prevent backflow or
backsiphonage into a potable water system.
(iii) Nonpotable water shall not be used for washing any portion of
the person, cooking or eating utensils, or clothing. Nonpotable water
may be used for cleaning work premises, other than food processing and
preparation premises and personal service rooms: Provided, That this
nonpotable water does not contain concentrations of chemicals, fecal
coliform, or other substances which could create insanitary conditions
or be harmful to employees.
(c) Toilet facilities--(1) General. (i) Except as otherwise
indicated in this paragraph (c)(1)(i), toilet facilities, in toilet
rooms separate for each sex, shall be provided in all places of
employment in accordance with table J-1 of this section. The number of
facilities to be provided for each sex shall be based on the number of
employees of that sex for whom the facilities are furnished. Where
toilet rooms will be occupied by no more than one person at a time, can
be locked from the inside, and contain at least one water closet,
separate toilet rooms for each sex need not be provided. Where such
single-occupancy rooms have more than one toilet facility, only one such
facility in each toilet room shall be counted for the purpose of table
J-1.
Table J-1
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum
number of
Number of employees water
closets \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 to 15.................................................... 1
16 to 35................................................... 2
36 to 55................................................... 3
56 to 80................................................... 4
81 to 110.................................................. 5.
111 to 150................................................. 6
Over 150................................................... (\2\)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Where toilet facilities will not be used by women, urinals may be
provided instead of water closets, except that the number of water
closets in such cases shall not be reduced to less than \2/3\ of the
minimum specified.
\2\ 1 additional fixture for each additional 40 employees.
(ii) The requirements of paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section do not
apply to mobile crews or to normally unattended work locations so long
as employees working at these locations have transportation immediately
available to nearby toilet facilities which meet the other requirements
of this subparagraph.
(iii) The sewage disposal method shall not endanger the health of
employees.
(2) Construction of toilet rooms. (i) Each water closet shall occupy
a separate compartment with a door and walls or partitions between
fixtures sufficiently high to assure privacy.
[[Page 460]]
(ii) [Reserved]
(d) Washing facilities--(1) General. Washing facilities shall be
maintained in a sanitary condition.
(2) Lavatories. (i) Lavatories shall be made available in all places
of employment. The requirements of this subdivision do not apply to
mobile crews or to normally unattended work locations if employees
working at these locations have transportation readily available to
nearby washing facilities which meet the other requirements of this
paragraph.
(ii) Each lavatory shall be provided with hot and cold running
water, or tepid running water.
(iii) Hand soap or similar cleansing agents shall be provided.
(iv) Individual hand towels or sections thereof, of cloth or paper,
warm air blowers or clean individual sections of continuous cloth
toweling, convenient to the lavatories, shall be provided.
(3) Showers. (i) Whenever showers are required by a particular
standard, the showers shall be provided in accordance with paragraphs
(d)(3) (ii) through (v) of this section.
(ii) One shower shall be provided for each 10 employees of each sex,
or numerical fraction thereof, who are required to shower during the
same shift.
(iii) Body soap or other appropriate cleansing agents convenient to
the showers shall be provided as specified in paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of
this section.
(iv) Showers shall be provided with hot and cold water feeding a
common discharge line.
(v) Employees who use showers shall be provided with individual
clean towels.
(e) Change rooms. Whenever employees are required by a particular
standard to wear protective clothing because of the possibility of
contamination with toxic materials, change rooms equipped with storage
facilities for street clothes and separate storage facilities for the
protective clothing shall be provided.
(f) Clothes drying facilities. Where working clothes are provided by
the employer and become wet or are washed between shifts, provision
shall be made to insure that such clothing is dry before reuse.
(g) Consumption of food and beverages on the premises--(1)
Application. This paragraph shall apply only where employees are
permitted to consume food or beverages, or both, on the premises.
(2) Eating and drinking areas. No employee shall be allowed to
consume food or beverages in a toilet room nor in any area exposed to a
toxic material.
(3) Waste disposal containers. Receptacles constructed of smooth,
corrosion resistant, easily cleanable, or disposable materials, shall be
provided and used for the disposal of waste food. The number, size, and
location of such receptacles shall encourage their use and not result in
overfilling. They shall be emptied not less frequently than once each
working day, unless unused, and shall be maintained in a clean and
sanitary condition. Receptacles shall be provided with a solid tight-
fitting cover unless sanitary conditions can be maintained without use
of a cover.
(4) Sanitary storage. No food or beverages shall be stored in toilet
rooms or in an area exposed to a toxic material.
(h) Food handling. All employee food service facilities and
operations shall be carried out in accordance with sound hygienic
principles. In all places of employment where all or part of the food
service is provided, the food dispensed shall be wholesome, free from
spoilage, and shall be processed, prepared, handled, and stored in such
a manner as to be protected against contamination.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 18446, April 28, 1975;
40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 63 FR 33466, June
18, 1998]
Sec. 1910.142 Temporary labor camps.
(a) Site. (1) All sites used for camps shall be adequately drained.
They shall not be subject to periodic flooding, nor located within 200
feet of swamps, pools, sink holes, or other surface collections of water
unless such quiescent water surfaces can be subjected to mosquito
control measures. The camp shall be located so the drainage from and
through the camp will not endanger any domestic or public water supply.
All sites shall be graded, ditched, and
[[Page 461]]
rendered free from depressions in which water may become a nuisance.
(2) All sites shall be adequate in size to prevent overcrowding of
necessary structures. The principal camp area in which food is prepared
and served and where sleeping quarters are located shall be at least 500
feet from any area in which livestock is kept.
(3) The grounds and open areas surrounding the shelters shall be
maintained in a clean and sanitary condition free from rubbish, debris,
waste paper, garbage, or other refuse.
(b) Shelter. (1) Every shelter in the camp shall be constructed in a
manner which will provide protection against the elements.
(2) Each room used for sleeping purposes shall contain at least 50
square feet of floor space for each occupant. At least a 7-foot ceiling
shall be provided.
(3) Beds, cots, or bunks, and suitable storage facilities such as
wall lockers for clothing and personal articles shall be provided in
every room used for sleeping purposes. Such beds or similar facilities
shall be spaced not closer than 36 inches both laterally and end to end,
and shall be elevated at least 12 inches from the floor. If double-deck
bunks are used, they shall be spaced not less than 48 inches both
laterally and end to end. The minimum clear space between the lower and
upper bunk shall be not less than 27 inches. Triple-deck bunks are
prohibited.
(4) The floors of each shelter shall be constructed of wood,
asphalt, or concrete. Wooden floors shall be of smooth and tight
construction. The floors shall be kept in good repair.
(5) All wooden floors shall be elevated not less than 1 foot above
the ground level at all points to prevent dampness and to permit free
circulation of air beneath.
(6) Nothing in this section shall be construed to prohibit
``banking'' with earth or other suitable material around the outside
walls in areas subject to extreme low temperatures.
(7) All living quarters shall be provided with windows the total of
which shall be not less than one-tenth of the floor area. At least one-
half of each window shall be so constructed that it can be opened for
purposes of ventilation.
(8) All exterior openings shall be effectively screened with 16-mesh
material. All screen doors shall be equipped with self-closing devices.
(9) In a room where workers cook, live, and sleep a minimum of 100
square feet per person shall be provided. Sanitary facilities shall be
provided for storing and preparing food.
(10) In camps where cooking facilities are used in common, stoves
(in ratio of one stove to 10 persons or one stove to two families) shall
be provided in an enclosed and screened shelter. Sanitary facilities
shall be provided for storing and preparing food.
(11) All heating, cooking, and water heating equipment shall be
installed in accordance with State and local ordinances, codes, and
regulations governing such installations. If a camp is used during cold
weather, adequate heating equipment shall be provided.
(c) Water supply. (1) An adequate and convenient water supply,
approved by the appropriate health authority, shall be provided in each
camp for drinking, cooking, bathing, and laundry purposes.
(2) A water supply shall be deemed adequate if it is capable of
delivering 35 gallons per person per day to the campsite at a peak rate
of 2\1/2\ times the average hourly demand.
(3) The distribution lines shall be capable of supplying water at
normal operating pressures to all fixtures for simultaneous operation.
Water outlets shall be distributed throughout the camp in such a manner
that no shelter is more than 100 feet from a yard hydrant if water is
not piped to the shelters.
(4) Where water under pressure is available, one or more drinking
fountains shall be provided for each 100 occupants or fraction thereof.
The construction of drinking fountains shall comply with ANSI Standard
Specifications for Drinking Fountains, Z4.2-1942, which is incorporated
by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6. Common drinking cups are
prohibited.
(d) Toilet facilities. (1) Toilet facilities adequate for the
capacity of the camp shall be provided.
[[Page 462]]
(2) Each toilet room shall be located so as to be accessible without
any individual passing through any sleeping room. Toilet rooms shall
have a window not less than 6 square feet in area opening directly to
the outside area or otherwise be satisfactorily ventilated. All outside
openings shall be screened with 16-mesh material. No fixture, water
closet, chemical toilet, or urinal shall be located in a room used for
other than toilet purposes.
(3) A toilet room shall be located within 200 feet of the door of
each sleeping room. No privy shall be closer than 100 feet to any
sleeping room, dining room, lunch area, or kitchen.
(4) Where the toilet rooms are shared, such as in multifamily
shelters and in barracks type facilities, separate toilet rooms shall be
provided for each sex. These rooms shall be distinctly marked ``for
men'' and ``for women'' by signs printed in English and in the native
language of the persons occupying the camp, or marked with easily
understood pictures or symbols. If the facilities for each sex are in
the same building, they shall be separated by solid walls or partitions
extending from the floor to the roof or ceiling.
(5) Where toilet facilities are shared, the number of water closets
or privy seats provided for each sex shall be based on the maximum
number of persons of that sex which the camp is designed to house at any
one time, in the ratio of one such unit to each 15 persons, with a
minimum of two units for any shared facility.
(6) Urinals shall be provided on the basis of one unit or 2 linear
feet of urinal trough for each 25 men. The floor from the wall and for a
distance not less than 15 inches measured from the outward edge of the
urinals shall be constructed of materials impervious to moisture. Where
water under pressure is available, urinals shall be provided with an
adequate water flush. Urinal troughs in privies shall drain freely into
the pit or vault and the construction of this drain shall be such as to
exclude flies and rodents from the pit.
(7) Every water closet installed on or after August 31, 1971, shall
be located in a toilet room.
(8) Each toilet room shall be lighted naturally, or artificially by
a safe type of lighting at all hours of the day and night.
(9) An adequate supply of toilet paper shall be provided in each
privy, water closet, or chemical toilet compartment.
(10) Privies and toilet rooms shall be kept in a sanitary condition.
They shall be cleaned at least daily.
(e) Sewage disposal facilities. In camps where public sewers are
available, all sewer lines and floor drains from buildings shall be
connected thereto.
(f) Laundry, handwashing, and bathing facilities. (1) Laundry,
handwashing, and bathing facilities shall be provided in the following
ratio:
(i) Handwash basin per family shelter or per six persons in shared
facilities.
(ii) Shower head for every 10 persons.
(iii) Laundry tray or tub for every 30 persons.
(iv) Slop sink in each building used for laundry, hand washing, and
bathing.
(2) Floors shall be of smooth finish but not slippery materials;
they shall be impervious to moisture. Floor drains shall be provided in
all shower baths, shower rooms, or laundry rooms to remove waste water
and facilitate cleaning. All junctions of the curbing and the floor
shall be coved. The walls and partitions of shower rooms shall be smooth
and impervious to the height of splash.
(3) An adequate supply of hot and cold running water shall be
provided for bathing and laundry purposes. Facilities for heating water
shall be provided.
(4) Every service building shall be provided with equipment capable
of maintaining a temperature of at least 70 deg.F. during cold weather.
(5) Facilities for drying clothes shall be provided.
(6) All service buildings shall be kept clean.
(g) Lighting. Where electric service is available, each habitable
room in a camp shall be provided with at least one ceiling-type light
fixture and at least one separate floor- or wall-type convenience
outlet. Laundry and toilet rooms and rooms where people congregate shall
contain at least one ceiling- or wall-type fixture. Light levels in
toilet and storage rooms shall be
[[Page 463]]
at least 20 foot-candles 30 inches from the floor. Other rooms,
including kitchens and living quarters, shall be at least 30 foot-
candles 30 inches from the floor.
(h) Refuse disposal. (1) Fly-tight, rodent-tight, impervious,
cleanable or single service containers, approved by the appropriate
health authority shall be provided for the storage of garbage. At least
one such container shall be provided for each family shelter and shall
be located within 100 feet of each shelter on a wooden, metal, or
concrete stand.
(2) Garbage containers shall be kept clean.
(3) Garbage containers shall be emptied when full, but not less than
twice a week.
(i) Construction and operation of kitchens, dining hall, and feeding
facilities. (1) In all camps where central dining or multiple family
feeding operations are permitted or provided, the food handling
facilities shall comply with the requirements of the ``Food Service
Sanitation Ordinance and Code,'' Part V of the ``Food Service Sanitation
Manual,'' U.S. Public Health Service Publication 934 (1965), which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(2) A properly constructed kitchen and dining hall adequate in size,
separate from the sleeping quarters of any of the workers or their
families, shall be provided in connection with all food handling
facilities. There shall be no direct opening from living or sleeping
quarters into a kitchen or dining hall.
(3) No person with any communicable disease shall be employed or
permitted to work in the preparation, cooking, serving, or other
handling of food, foodstuffs, or materials used therein, in any kitchen
or dining room operated in connection with a camp or regularly used by
persons living in a camp.
(j) Insect and rodent control. Effective measures shall be taken to
prevent infestation by and harborage of animal or insect vectors or
pests.
(k) First aid. (1) Adequate first aid facilities approved by a
health authority shall be maintained and made available in every labor
camp for the emergency treatment of injured persons.
(2) Such facilities shall be in charge of a person trained to
administer first aid and shall be readily accessible for use at all
times.
(l) Reporting communicable disease. (1) It shall be the duty of the
camp superintendent to report immediately to the local health officer
the name and address of any individual in the camp known to have or
suspected of having a communicable disease.
(2) Whenever there shall occur in any camp a case of suspected food
poisoning or an unusual prevalence of any illness in which fever,
diarrhea, sore throat, vomiting, or jaundice is a prominent symptom, it
shall be the duty of the camp superintendent to report immediately the
existence of the outbreak to the health authority by telegram or
telephone.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 47 FR 14696, Apr. 6, 1982; 49
FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33466, June 18,
1998]
Sec. 1910.143 Nonwater carriage disposal systems. [Reserved]
Sec. 1910.144 Safety color code for marking physical hazards.
(a) Color identification--(1) Red. Red shall be the basic color for
the identification of:
(i) Fire protection equipment and apparatus. [Reserved]
(ii) Danger. Safety cans or other portable containers of flammable
liquids having a flash point at or below 80 deg.F, table containers of
flammable liquids (open cup tester), excluding shipping containers,
shall be painted red with some additional clearly visible identification
either in the form of a yellow band around the can or the name of the
contents conspicuously stenciled or painted on the can in yellow. Red
lights shall be provided at barricades and at temporary obstructions, as
specified in ANSI Safety Code for Building Construction, A10.2-1944,
which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6. Danger
signs shall be painted red.
(iii) Stop. Emergency stop bars on hazardous machines such as rubber
mills, wire blocks, flat work ironers, etc., shall be red. Stop buttons
or electrical switches which letters or other
[[Page 464]]
markings appear, used for emergency stopping of machinery shall be red.
(2) [Reserved]
(3) Yellow. Yellow shall be the basic color for designating caution
and for marking physical hazards such as: Striking against, stumbling,
falling, tripping, and ``caught in between.''
(b) [Reserved]
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978;
49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.145 Specifications for accident prevention signs and tags.
(a) Scope. (1) These specifications apply to the design,
application, and use of signs or symbols (as included in paragraphs (c)
through (e) of this section) intended to indicate and, insofar as
possible, to define specific hazards of a nature such that failure to
designate them may lead to accidental injury to workers or the public,
or both, or to property damage. These specifications are intended to
cover all safety signs except those designed for streets, highways,
railroads, and marine regulations. These specifications do not apply to
plant bulletin boards or to safety posters.
(2) All new signs and replacements of old signs shall be in
accordance with these specifications.
(b) Definitions. As used in this section, the word sign refers to a
surface on prepared for the warning of, or safety instructions of,
industrial workers or members of the public who may be exposed to
hazards. Excluded from this definition, however, are news releases,
displays commonly known as safety posters, and bulletins used for
employee education.
(c) Classification of signs according to use--(1) Danger signs. (i)
There shall be no variation in the type of design of signs posted to
warn of specific dangers and radiation hazards.
(ii) All employees shall be instructed that danger signs indicate
immediate danger and that special precautions are necessary.
(2) Caution signs. (i) Caution signs shall be used only to warn
against potential hazards or to caution against unsafe practices.
(ii) All employees shall be instructed that caution signs indicate a
possible hazard against which proper precaution should be taken.
(3) Safety instruction signs. Safety instruction signs shall be used
where there is a need for general instructions and suggestions relative
to safety measures.
(d) Sign design--(1) Design features. All signs shall be furnished
with rounded or blunt corners and shall be free from sharp edges, burrs,
splinters, or other sharp projections. The ends or heads of bolts or
other fastening devices shall be located in such a way that they do not
constitute a hazard.
(2) Danger signs. The colors red, black, and white shall be those of
opaque glossy samples as specified in Table 1 of Fundamental
Specification of Safety Colors for CIE Standard Source ``C'', American
National Standard Z53.1-1967, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(3) [Reserved]
(4) Caution signs. Standard color of the background shall be yellow;
and the panel, black with yellow letters. Any letters used against the
yellow background shall be black. The colors shall be those of opaque
glossy samples as specified in Table 1 of American National Standard
Z53.1-1967.
(5) [Reserved]
(6) Safety instruction signs. Standard color of the background shall
be white; and the panel, green with white letters. Any letters used
against the white background shall be black. The colors shall be those
of opaque glossy samples as specified in Table 1 of American National
Standard, Z53.1-1967.
(7)-(9) [Reserved]
(10) Slow-moving vehicle emblem. This emblem (see fig. J-7) consists
of a fluorescent yellow-orange triangle with a dark red reflective
border. The yellow-orange fluorescent triangle is a highly visible color
for daylight exposure. The reflective border defines the shape of the
fluorescent color in daylight and creates a hollow red triangle in the
path of motor vehicle headlights at night. The emblem is intended as a
unique identification for, and it shall be used only on, vehicles which
by design move slowly (25 m.p.h. or less) on the public roads. The
emblem is not a clearance marker for wide machinery nor is it intended
to replace required
[[Page 465]]
lighting or marking of slow-moving vehicles. Neither the color film
pattern and its dimensions nor the backing shall be altered to permit
use of advertising or other markings. The material, location, mounting,
etc., of the emblem shall be in accordance with the American Society of
Agricultural Engineers Emblem for Identifying Slow-Moving Vehicles, ASAE
R276, 1967, or ASAE S276.2 (ANSI B114.1-1971), which are incorporated by
reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.028
Figure J-7.--Slow-Moving Vehicle Emblem
Note: All dimensions are in inches.
(e) Sign wordings.
(1) [Reserved]
(2) Nature of wording. The wording of any sign should be easily read
and concise. The sign should contain sufficient information to be easily
understood. The wording should make a positive, rather than negative
suggestion and should be accurate in fact.
(3) [Reserved]
(4) Biological hazard signs. The biological hazard warning shall be
used to signify the actual or potential presence of a biohazard and to
identify equipment, containers, rooms, materials, experimental animals,
or combinations thereof, which contain, or are contaminated with, viable
hazardous agents. For the purpose of this subparagraph the term
``biological hazard,'' or ``biohazard,'' shall include only those
infectious agents presenting a risk or potential risk to the well-being
of man.
(f) Accident prevention tags--(1) Scope and application. (i) This
paragraph (f) applies to all accident prevention tags used to identify
hazardous conditions and provide a message to employees with respect to
hazardous conditions as set forth in paragraph (f)(3) of this section,
or to meet the specific tagging requirements of other OSHA standards.
(ii) This paragraph (f) does not apply to construction, maritime or
agriculture.
(2) Definitions. Biological hazard or BIOHAZARD means those
infectious agents presenting a risk of death, injury or illness to
employees.
Major message means that portion of a tag's inscription that is more
specific than the signal word and that indicates the specific hazardous
condition or the instruction to be communicated to the employee.
Examples include: ``High Voltage,'' ``Close Clearance,'' ``Do Not
Start,'' or ``Do Not Use'' or a corresponding pictograph used with a
written text or alone.
Pictograph means a pictorial representation used to identify a
hazardous condition or to convey a safety instruction.
Signal word means that portion of a tag's inscription that contains
the word or words that are intended to capture the employee's immediate
attention.
Tag means a device usually made of card, paper, pasteboard, plastic
or other material used to identify a hazardous condition.
(3) Use. Tags shall be used as a means to prevent accidental injury
or illness to employees who are exposed to hazardous or potentially
hazardous conditions, equipment or operations which are out of the
ordinary, unexpected or not readily apparent. Tags shall be used until
such time as the identified hazard is eliminated or the hazardous
operation is completed. Tags need not be used where signs, guarding or
other positive means of protection are being used.
(4) General tag criteria. All required tags shall meet the following
criteria:
(i) Tags shall contain a signal word and a major message.
(A) The signal word shall be either ``Danger,'' ``Caution,'' or
``Biological Hazard,'' ``BIOHAZARD,'' or the biological hazard symbol.
(B) The major message shall indicate the specific hazardous
condition or the
[[Page 466]]
instruction to be communicated to the employee.
(ii) The signal word shall be readable at a minimum distance of five
feet (1.52 m) or such greater distance as warranted by the hazard.
(iii) The tag's major message shall be presented in either
pictographs, written text or both.
(iv) The signal word and the major message shall be understandable
to all employees who may be exposed to the identified hazard.
(v) All employees shall be informed as to the meaning of the various
tags used throughout the workplace and what special precautions are
necessary.
(vi) Tags shall be affixed as close as safely possible to their
respective hazards by a positive means such as string, wire, or adhesive
that prevents their loss or unintentional removal.
(5) Danger tags. Danger tags shall be used in major hazard
situations where an immediate hazard presents a threat of death or
serious injury to employees. Danger tags shall be used only in these
situations.
(6) Caution tags. Caution tags shall be used in minor hazard
situations where a non-immediate or potential hazard or unsafe practice
presents a lesser threat of employee injury. Caution tags shall be used
only in these situations.
(7) Warning tags. Warning tags may be used to represent a hazard
level between ``Caution'' and ``Danger,'' instead of the required
``Caution'' tag, provided that they have a signal word of ``Warning,''
an appropriate major message, and otherwise meet the general tag
criteria of paragraph (f)(4) of this section.
(8) Biological hazard tags. (i) Biological hazard tags shall be used
to identify the actual or potential presence of a biological hazard and
to identify equipment, containers, rooms, experimental animals, or
combinations thereof, that contain or are contaminated with hazardous
biological agents.
(ii) The symbol design for biological hazard tags shall conform to
the design shown below:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.086
Biological Hazard Symbol Configuration
(9) Other tags. Other tags may be used in addition to those required
by this paragraph (f), or in other situations where this paragraph (f)
does not require tags, provided that they do not detract from the impact
or visibility of the signal word and major message of any required tag.
APPENDICES TO Sec. 1910.145(f), ACCIDENT PREVENTION TAGS
Appendix A to Sec. 1910.145(f)--Recommended Color Coding
While the standard does not specifically mandate colors to be used
on accident prevention tags, the following color scheme is recommended
by OSHA for meeting the requirements of this section:
``DANGER''--Red, or predominantly red, with lettering or symbols in
a contrasting color.
``CAUTION''--Yellow, or predominantly yellow, with lettering or
symbols in a contrasting color.
``WARNING''--Orange, or predominantly orange, with lettering or
symbols in a contrasting color.
``BIOLOGICAL HAZARD''--Fluorescent orange or orange-red, or
predominantly so, with lettering or symbols in a contrasting color.
[[Page 467]]
Appendix B to Sec. 1910.145(f)--References for Further Information
The following references provide information which can be helpful in
understanding the requirements contained in various sections of the
standard:
1. Bresnahan, Thomas F., and Bryk, Joseph, ``The Hazard Association
Values of Accident Prevention Signs'', Journal of American Society of
Safety Engineers; January 1975.
2. Dreyfuss, H., Symbol Sourcebook, McGraw Hill; New York, NY, 1972.
3. Glass, R.A. and others, Some Criteria for Colors and Signs in
Workplaces, National Bureau of Standards, Washington DC, 1983.
4. Graphic Symbols for Public Areas and Occupational Environments,
Treasury Board of Canada, Ottawa, Canada, July 1980.
5. Howett, G.L., Size of Letters Required for Visibility as a
Function of Viewing Distance and Observer Acuity, National Bureau of
Standards, Washington DC, July 1983.
6. Lerner, N.D. and Collins, B.L., The Assessment of Safety Symbol
Understandability by Different Testing Methods, National Bureau of
Standards, Washington DC, 1980.
7. Lerner, N.D. and Collins, B.L., Workplace Safety Symbols,
National Bureau of Standards, Washington DC, 1980.
8. Modley, R. and Meyers, W.R., Handbook of Pictorial Symbols, Dover
Publication, New York, NY, 1976.
9. Product Safety Signs and Labels, FMC Corporation, Santa Clara,
CA, 1978.
10. Safety Color Coding for Marking Physical Hazards, Z53.1,
American National Standards Institute, New York, NY, 1979.
11. Signs and Symbols for the Occupational Environment, Can. 3-Z-
321-77, Canadian Standards Association, Ottawa, September 1977.
12. Symbols for Industrial Safety, National Bureau of Standards,
Washington DC, April 1982.
13. Symbol Signs, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington DC,
November 1974.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49749, Oct. 24, 1978;
43 FR 51759, Nov. 7, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 33260, Sept.
19, 1986; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.146 Permit-required confined spaces.
(a) Scope and application. This section contains requirements for
practices and procedures to protect employees in general industry from
the hazards of entry into permit-required confined spaces. This section
does not apply to agriculture, to construction, or to shipyard
employment (Parts 1928, 1926, and 1915 of this chapter, respectively).
(b) Definitions.
Acceptable entry conditions means the conditions that must exist in
a permit space to allow entry and to ensure that employees involved with
a permit-required confined space entry can safely enter into and work
within the space.
Attendant means an individual stationed outside one or more permit
spaces who monitors the authorized entrants and who performs all
attendant's duties assigned in the employer's permit space program.
Authorized entrant means an employee who is authorized by the
employer to enter a permit space.
Blanking or blinding means the absolute closure of a pipe, line, or
duct by the fastening of a solid plate (such as a spectacle blind or a
skillet blind) that completely covers the bore and that is capable of
withstanding the maximum pressure of the pipe, line, or duct with no
leakage beyond the plate.
Confined space means a space that:
(1) Is large enough and so configured that an employee can bodily
enter and perform assigned work; and
(2) Has limited or restricted means for entry or exit (for example,
tanks, vessels, silos, storage bins, hoppers, vaults, and pits are
spaces that may have limited means of entry.); and
(3) Is not designed for continuous employee occupancy.
Double block and bleed means the closure of a line, duct, or pipe by
closing and locking or tagging two in-line valves and by opening and
locking or tagging a drain or vent valve in the line between the two
closed valves.
Emergency means any occurrence (including any failure of hazard
control or monitoring equipment) or event internal or external to the
permit space that could endanger entrants.
Engulfment means the surrounding and effective capture of a person
by a liquid or finely divided (flowable) solid substance that can be
aspirated to cause death by filling or plugging the respiratory system
or that can exert enough force on the body to cause death by
strangulation, constriction, or crushing.
Entry means the action by which a person passes through an opening
into a permit-required confined space. Entry includes ensuing work
activities in that space and is considered to have
[[Page 468]]
occurred as soon as any part of the entrant's body breaks the plane of
an opening into the space.
Entry permit (permit) means the written or printed document that is
provided by the employer to allow and control entry into a permit space
and that contains the information specified in paragraph (f) of this
section.
Entry supervisor means the person (such as the employer, foreman, or
crew chief) responsible for determining if acceptable entry conditions
are present at a permit space where entry is planned, for authorizing
entry and overseeing entry operations, and for terminating entry as
required by this section.
Note: An entry supervisor also may serve as an attendant or as an
authorized entrant, as long as that person is trained and equipped as
required by this section for each role he or she fills. Also, the duties
of entry supervisor may be passed from one individual to another during
the course of an entry operation.
Hazardous atmosphere means an atmosphere that may expose employees
to the risk of death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-
rescue (that is, escape unaided from a permit space), injury, or acute
illness from one or more of the following causes:
(1) Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in excess of 10 percent of its
lower flammable limit (LFL);
(2) Airborne combustible dust at a concentration that meets or
exceeds its LFL;
Note: This concentration may be approximated as a condition in which
the dust obscures vision at a distance of 5 feet (1.52 m) or less.
(3) Atmospheric oxygen concentration below 19.5 percent or above
23.5 percent;
(4) Atmospheric concentration of any substance for which a dose or a
permissible exposure limit is published in Subpart G, Occupational
Health and Environmental Control, or in Subpart Z, Toxic and Hazardous
Substances, of this part and which could result in employee exposure in
excess of its dose or permissible exposure limit;
Note: An atmospheric concentration of any substance that is not
capable of causing death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-
rescue, injury, or acute illness due to its health effects is not
covered by this provision.
(5) Any other atmospheric condition that is immediately dangerous to
life or health.
Note: For air contaminants for which OSHA has not determined a dose
or permissible exposure limit, other sources of information, such as
Material Safety Data Sheets that comply with the Hazard Communication
Standard, Sec. 1910.1200 of this part, published information, and
internal documents can provide guidance in establishing acceptable
atmospheric conditions.
Hot work permit means the employer's written authorization to
perform operations (for example, riveting, welding, cutting, burning,
and heating) capable of providing a source of ignition.
Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) means any condition
that poses an immediate or delayed threat to life or that would cause
irreversible adverse health effects or that would interfere with an
individual's ability to escape unaided from a permit space.
Note: Some materials--hydrogen fluoride gas and cadmium vapor, for
example--may produce immediate transient effects that, even if severe,
may pass without medical attention, but are followed by sudden, possibly
fatal collapse 12-72 hours after exposure. The victim ``feels normal''
from recovery from transient effects until collapse. Such materials in
hazardous quantities are considered to be ``immediately'' dangerous to
life or health.
Inerting means the displacement of the atmosphere in a permit space
by a noncombustible gas (such as nitrogen) to such an extent that the
resulting atmosphere is noncombustible.
Note: This procedure produces an IDLH oxygen-deficient atmosphere.
Isolation means the process by which a permit space is removed from
service and completely protected against the release of energy and
material into the space by such means as: blanking or blinding;
misaligning or removing sections of lines, pipes, or ducts; a double
block and bleed system; lockout or tagout of all sources of energy; or
blocking or disconnecting all mechanical linkages.
Line breaking means the intentional opening of a pipe, line, or duct
that is or has been carrying flammable, corrosive, or toxic material, an
inert gas, or any fluid at a volume, pressure, or temperature capable of
causing injury.
Non-permit confined space means a confined space that does not
contain
[[Page 469]]
or, with respect to atmospheric hazards, have the potential to contain
any hazard capable of causing death or serious physical harm.
Oxygen deficient atmosphere means an atmosphere containing less than
19.5 percent oxygen by volume.
Oxygen enriched atmosphere means an atmosphere containing more than
23.5 percent oxygen by volume.
Permit-required confined space (permit space) means a confined space
that has one or more of the following characteristics:
(1) Contains or has a potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere;
(2) Contains a material that has the potential for engulfing an
entrant;
(3) Has an internal configuration such that an entrant could be
trapped or asphyxiated by inwardly converging walls or by a floor which
slopes downward and tapers to a smaller cross- section; or
(4) Contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard.
Permit-required confined space program (permit space program) means
the employer's overall program for controlling, and, where appropriate,
for protecting employees from, permit space hazards and for regulating
employee entry into permit spaces.
Permit system means the employer's written procedure for preparing
and issuing permits for entry and for returning the permit space to
service following termination of entry.
Prohibited condition means any condition in a permit space that is
not allowed by the permit during the period when entry is authorized.
Rescue service means the personnel designated to rescue employees
from permit spaces.
Retrieval system means the equipment (including a retrieval line,
chest or full-body harness, wristlets, if appropriate, and a lifting
device or anchor) used for non-entry rescue of persons from permit
spaces.
Testing means the process by which the hazards that may confront
entrants of a permit space are identified and evaluated. Testing
includes specifying the tests that are to be performed in the permit
space.
Note: Testing enables employers both to devise and implement
adequate control measures for the protection of authorized entrants and
to determine if acceptable entry conditions are present immediately
prior to, and during, entry.
(c) General requirements. (1) The employer shall evaluate the
workplace to determine if any spaces are permit- required confined
spaces.
Note: Proper application of the decision flow chart in appendix A to
Sec. 1910.146 would facilitate compliance with this requirement.
(2) If the workplace contains permit spaces, the employer shall
inform exposed employees, by posting danger signs or by any other
equally effective means, of the existence and location of and the danger
posed by the permit spaces.
Note: A sign reading ``DANGER--PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE, DO
NOT ENTER'' or using other similar language would satisfy the
requirement for a sign.
(3) If the employer decides that its employees will not enter permit
spaces, the employer shall take effective measures to prevent its
employees from entering the permit spaces and shall comply with
paragraphs (c)(1), (c)(2), (c)(6), and (c)(8) of this section.
(4) If the employer decides that its employees will enter permit
spaces, the employer shall develop and implement a written permit space
program that complies with this section. The written program shall be
available for inspection by employees and their authorized
representatives.
(5) An employer may use the alternate procedures specified in
paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section for entering a permit space under
the conditions set forth in paragraph (c)(5)(i) of this section.
(i) An employer whose employees enter a permit space need not comply
with paragraphs (d) through (f) and (h) through (k) of this section,
provided that:
(A) The employer can demonstrate that the only hazard posed by the
permit space is an actual or potential hazardous atmosphere;
(B) The employer can demonstrate that continuous forced air
ventilation alone is sufficient to maintain that permit space safe for
entry;
(C) The employer develops monitoring and inspection data that
supports the demonstrations required by paragraphs (c)(5)(i)(A) and
(c)(5)(i)(B) of this section;
[[Page 470]]
(D) If an initial entry of the permit space is necessary to obtain
the data required by paragraph (c)(5)(i)(C) of this section, the entry
is performed in compliance with paragraphs (d) through (k) of this
section;
(E) The determinations and supporting data required by paragraphs
(c)(5)(i)(A), (c)(5)(i)(B), and (c)(5)(i)(C) of this section are
documented by the employer and are made available to each employee who
enters the permit space under the terms of paragraph (c)(5) of this
section or to that employee's authorized representative; and
(F) Entry into the permit space under the terms of paragraph
(c)(5)(i) of this section is performed in accordance with the
requirements of paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section.
Note: See paragraph (c)(7) of this section for reclassification of a
permit space after all hazards within the space have been eliminated.
(ii) The following requirements apply to entry into permit spaces
that meet the conditions set forth in paragraph (c)(5)(i) of this
section.
(A) Any conditions making it unsafe to remove an entrance cover
shall be eliminated before the cover is removed.
(B) When entrance covers are removed, the opening shall be promptly
guarded by a railing, temporary cover, or other temporary barrier that
will prevent an accidental fall through the opening and that will
protect each employee working in the space from foreign objects entering
the space.
(C) Before an employee enters the space, the internal atmosphere
shall be tested, with a calibrated direct-reading instrument, for oxygen
content, for flammable gases and vapors, and for potential toxic air
contaminants, in that order. Any employee who enters the space, or that
employee's authorized representative, shall be provided an opportunity
to observe the pre-entry testing required by this paragraph.
(D) There may be no hazardous atmosphere within the space whenever
any employee is inside the space.
(E) Continuous forced air ventilation shall be used, as follows:
(1) An employee may not enter the space until the forced air
ventilation has eliminated any hazardous atmosphere;
(2) The forced air ventilation shall be so directed as to ventilate
the immediate areas where an employee is or will be present within the
space and shall continue until all employees have left the space;
(3) The air supply for the forced air ventilation shall be from a
clean source and may not increase the hazards in the space.
(F) The atmosphere within the space shall be periodically tested as
necessary to ensure that the continuous forced air ventilation is
preventing the accumulation of a hazardous atmosphere. Any employee who
enters the space, or that employee's authorized representative, shall be
provided with an opportunity to observe the periodic testing required by
this paragraph.
(G) If a hazardous atmosphere is detected during entry:
(1) Each employee shall leave the space immediately;
(2) The space shall be evaluated to determine how the hazardous
atmosphere developed; and
(3) Measures shall be implemented to protect employees from the
hazardous atmosphere before any subsequent entry takes place.
(H) The employer shall verify that the space is safe for entry and
that the pre-entry measures required by paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this
section have been taken, through a written certification that contains
the date, the location of the space, and the signature of the person
providing the certification. The certification shall be made before
entry and shall be made available to each employee entering the space or
to that employee's authorized representative .
(6) When there are changes in the use or configuration of a non-
permit confined space that might increase the hazards to entrants, the
employer shall reevaluate that space and, if necessary, reclassify it as
a permit-required confined space.
(7) A space classified by the employer as a permit-required confined
space may be reclassified as a non-permit confined space under the
following procedures:
(i) If the permit space poses no actual or potential atmospheric
hazards and if
[[Page 471]]
all hazards within the space are eliminated without entry into the
space, the permit space may be reclassified as a non-permit confined
space for as long as the non-atmospheric hazards remain eliminated.
(ii) If it is necessary to enter the permit space to eliminate
hazards, such entry shall be performed under paragraphs (d) through (k)
of this section. If testing and inspection during that entry demonstrate
that the hazards within the permit space have been eliminated, the
permit space may be reclassified as a non-permit confined space for as
long as the hazards remain eliminated.
Note: Control of atmospheric hazards through forced air ventilation
does not constitute elimination of the hazards. Paragraph (c)(5) covers
permit space entry where the employer can demonstrate that forced air
ventilation alone will control all hazards in the space.
(iii) The employer shall document the basis for determining that all
hazards in a permit space have been eliminated, through a certification
that contains the date, the location of the space, and the signature of
the person making the determination. The certification shall be made
available to each employee entering the space or to that employee's
authorized representative.
(iv) If hazards arise within a permit space that has been
declassified to a non-permit space under paragraph (c)(7) of this
section, each employee in the space shall exit the space. The employer
shall then reevaluate the space and determine whether it must be
reclassified as a permit space, in accordance with other applicable
provisions of this section.
(8) When an employer (host employer) arranges to have employees of
another employer (contractor) perform work that involves permit space
entry, the host employer shall:
(i) Inform the contractor that the workplace contains permit spaces
and that permit space entry is allowed only through compliance with a
permit space program meeting the requirements of this section;
(ii) Apprise the contractor of the elements, including the hazards
identified and the host employer's experience with the space, that make
the space in question a permit space;
(iii) Apprise the contractor of any precautions or procedures that
the host employer has implemented for the protection of employees in or
near permit spaces where contractor personnel will be working;
(iv) Coordinate entry operations with the contractor, when both host
employer personnel and contractor personnel will be working in or near
permit spaces, as required by paragraph (d)(11) of this section; and
(v) Debrief the contractor at the conclusion of the entry operations
regarding the permit space program followed and regarding any hazards
confronted or created in permit spaces during entry operations.
(9) In addition to complying with the permit space requirements that
apply to all employers, each contractor who is retained to perform
permit space entry operations shall:
(i) Obtain any available information regarding permit space hazards
and entry operations from the host employer;
(ii) Coordinate entry operations with the host employer, when both
host employer personnel and contractor personnel will be working in or
near permit spaces, as required by paragraph (d)(11) of this section;
and
(iii) Inform the host employer of the permit space program that the
contractor will follow and of any hazards confronted or created in
permit spaces, either through a debriefing or during the entry
operation.
(d) Permit-required confined space program (permit space program).
Under the permit space program required by paragraph (c)(4) of this
section, the employer shall:
(1) Implement the measures necessary to prevent unauthorized entry;
(2) Identify and evaluate the hazards of permit spaces before
employees enter them;
(3) Develop and implement the means, procedures, and practices
necessary for safe permit space entry operations, including, but not
limited to, the following:
(i) Specifying acceptable entry conditions;
(ii) Providing each authorized entrant or that employee's authorized
representative with the opportunity to
[[Page 472]]
observe any monitoring or testing of permit spaces;
(iii) Isolating the permit space;
(iv) Purging, inerting, flushing, or ventilating the permit space as
necessary to eliminate or control atmospheric hazards;
(v) Providing pedestrian, vehicle, or other barriers as necessary to
protect entrants from external hazards; and
(vi) Verifying that conditions in the permit space are acceptable
for entry throughout the duration of an authorized entry.
(4) Provide the following equipment (specified in paragraphs
(d)(4)(i) through (d)(4)(ix) of this section) at no cost to employees,
maintain that equipment properly, and ensure that employees use that
equipment properly:
(i) Testing and monitoring equipment needed to comply with paragraph
(d)(5) of this section;
(ii) Ventilating equipment needed to obtain acceptable entry
conditions;
(iii) Communications equipment necessary for compliance with
paragraphs (h)(3) and (i)(5) of this section;
(iv) Personal protective equipment insofar as feasible engineering
and work practice controls do not adequately protect employees;
(v) Lighting equipment needed to enable employees to see well enough
to work safely and to exit the space quickly in an emergency;
(vi) Barriers and shields as required by paragraph (d)(3)(iv) of
this section;
(vii) Equipment, such as ladders, needed for safe ingress and egress
by authorized entrants;
(viii) Rescue and emergency equipment needed to comply with
paragraph (d)(9) of this section, except to the extent that the
equipment is provided by rescue services; and
(ix) Any other equipment necessary for safe entry into and rescue
from permit spaces.
(5) Evaluate permit space conditions as follows when entry
operations are conducted:
(i) Test conditions in the permit space to determine if acceptable
entry conditions exist before entry is authorized to begin, except that,
if isolation of the space is infeasible because the space is large or is
part of a continuous system (such as a sewer), pre-entry testing shall
be performed to the extent feasible before entry is authorized and, if
entry is authorized, entry conditions shall be continuously monitored in
the areas where authorized entrants are working;
(ii) Test or monitor the permit space as necessary to determine if
acceptable entry conditions are being maintained during the course of
entry operations; and
(iii) When testing for atmospheric hazards, test first for oxygen,
then for combustible gases and vapors, and then for toxic gases and
vapors.
(iv) Provide each authorized entrant or that employee's authorized
representative an opportunity to observe the pre-entry and any
subsequent testing or monitoring of permit spaces;
(v) Reevaluate the permit space in the presence of any authorized
entrant or that employee's authorized representative who requests that
the employer conduct such reevaluation because the entrant or
representative has reason to believe that the evaluation of that space
may not have been adequate;
(vi) Immediately provide each authorized entrant or that employee's
authorized representative with the results of any testing conducted in
accord with paragraph (d) of this section.
Note: Atmospheric testing conducted in accordance with appendix B to
Sec. 1910.146 would be considered as satisfying the requirements of this
paragraph. For permit space operations in sewers, atmospheric testing
conducted in accordance with appendix B, as supplemented by appendix E
to Sec. 1910.146, would be considered as satisfying the requirements of
this paragraph.
(6) Provide at least one attendant outside the permit space into
which entry is authorized for the duration of entry operations;
Note: Attendants may be assigned to monitor more than one permit
space provided the duties described in paragraph (i) of this section can
be effectively performed for each permit space that is monitored.
Likewise, attendants may be stationed at any location outside the permit
space to be monitored as long as the duties described in paragraph (i)
of this section can be effectively performed for each permit space that
is monitored.
(7) If multiple spaces are to be monitored by a single attendant,
include in
[[Page 473]]
the permit program the means and procedures to enable the attendant to
respond to an emergency affecting one or more of the permit spaces being
monitored without distraction from the attendant's responsibilities
under paragraph (i) of this section;
(8) Designate the persons who are to have active roles (as, for
example, authorized entrants, attendants, entry supervisors, or persons
who test or monitor the atmosphere in a permit space) in entry
operations, identify the duties of each such employee, and provide each
such employee with the training required by paragraph (g) of this
section;
(9) Develop and implement procedures for summoning rescue and
emergency services, for rescuing entrants from permit spaces, for
providing necessary emergency services to rescued employees, and for
preventing unauthorized personnel from attempting a rescue;
(10) Develop and implement a system for the preparation, issuance,
use, and cancellation of entry permits as required by this section;
(11) Develop and implement procedures to coordinate entry operations
when employees of more than one employer are working simultaneously as
authorized entrants in a permit space, so that employees of one employer
do not endanger the employees of any other employer;
(12) Develop and implement procedures (such as closing off a permit
space and canceling the permit) necessary for concluding the entry after
entry operations have been completed;
(13) Review entry operations when the employer has reason to believe
that the measures taken under the permit space program may not protect
employees and revise the program to correct deficiencies found to exist
before subsequent entries are authorized; and
Note: Examples of circumstances requiring the review of the permit
space program are: any unauthorized entry of a permit space, the
detection of a permit space hazard not covered by the permit, the
detection of a condition prohibited by the permit, the occurrence of an
injury or near-miss during entry, a change in the use or configuration
of a permit space, and employee complaints about the effectiveness of
the program.
(14) Review the permit space program, using the canceled permits
retained under paragraph (e)(6) of this section within 1 year after each
entry and revise the program as necessary, to ensure that employees
participating in entry operations are protected from permit space
hazards.
Note: Employers may perform a single annual review covering all
entries performed during a 12-month period. If no entry is performed
during a 12-month period, no review is necessary.
Appendix C to Sec. 1910.146 presents examples of permit space programs
that are considered to comply with the requirements of paragraph (d) of
this section.
(e) Permit system. (1) Before entry is authorized, the employer
shall document the completion of measures required by paragraph (d)(3)
of this section by preparing an entry permit.
Note: Appendix D to Sec. 1910.146 presents examples of permits whose
elements are considered to comply with the requirements of this section.
(2) Before entry begins, the entry supervisor identified on the
permit shall sign the entry permit to authorize entry.
(3) The completed permit shall be made available at the time of
entry to all authorized entrants or their authorized representatives, by
posting it at the entry portal or by any other equally effective means,
so that the entrants can confirm that pre-entry preparations have been
completed.
(4) The duration of the permit may not exceed the time required to
complete the assigned task or job identified on the permit in accordance
with paragraph (f)(2) of this section.
(5) The entry supervisor shall terminate entry and cancel the entry
permit when:
(i) The entry operations covered by the entry permit have been
completed; or
(ii) A condition that is not allowed under the entry permit arises
in or near the permit space.
(6) The employer shall retain each canceled entry permit for at
least 1 year to facilitate the review of the permit-required confined
space program required by paragraph (d)(14) of this section. Any
problems encountered during an entry operation shall be noted on the
pertinent permit so that
[[Page 474]]
appropriate revisions to the permit space program can be made.
(f) Entry permit. The entry permit that documents compliance with
this section and authorizes entry to a permit space shall identify:
(1) The permit space to be entered;
(2) The purpose of the entry;
(3) The date and the authorized duration of the entry permit;
(4) The authorized entrants within the permit space, by name or by
such other means (for example, through the use of rosters or tracking
systems) as will enable the attendant to determine quickly and
accurately, for the duration of the permit, which authorized entrants
are inside the permit space;
Note: This requirement may be met by inserting a reference on the
entry permit as to the means used, such as a roster or tracking system,
to keep track of the authorized entrants within the permit space.
(5) The personnel, by name, currently serving as attendants;
(6) The individual, by name, currently serving as entry supervisor,
with a space for the signature or initials of the entry supervisor who
originally authorized entry;
(7) The hazards of the permit space to be entered;
(8) The measures used to isolate the permit space and to eliminate
or control permit space hazards before entry;
Note: Those measures can include the lockout or tagging of equipment
and procedures for purging, inerting, ventilating, and flushing permit
spaces.
(9) The acceptable entry conditions;
(10) The results of initial and periodic tests performed under
paragraph (d)(5) of this section, accompanied by the names or initials
of the testers and by an indication of when the tests were performed;
(11) The rescue and emergency services that can be summoned and the
means (such as the equipment to use and the numbers to call) for
summoning those services;
(12) The communication procedures used by authorized entrants and
attendants to maintain contact during the entry;
(13) Equipment, such as personal protective equipment, testing
equipment, communications equipment, alarm systems, and rescue
equipment, to be provided for compliance with this section;
(14) Any other information whose inclusion is necessary, given the
circumstances of the particular confined space, in order to ensure
employee safety; and
(15) Any additional permits, such as for hot work, that have been
issued to authorize work in the permit space.
(g) Training. (1) The employer shall provide training so that all
employees whose work is regulated by this section acquire the
understanding, knowledge, and skills necessary for the safe performance
of the duties assigned under this section.
(2) Training shall be provided to each affected employee:
(i) Before the employee is first assigned duties under this section;
(ii) Before there is a change in assigned duties;
(iii) Whenever there is a change in permit space operations that
presents a hazard about which an employee has not previously been
trained;
(iv) Whenever the employer has reason to believe either that there
are deviations from the permit space entry procedures required by
paragraph (d)(3) of this section or that there are inadequacies in the
employee's knowledge or use of these procedures.
(3) The training shall establish employee proficiency in the duties
required by this section and shall introduce new or revised procedures,
as necessary, for compliance with this section.
(4) The employer shall certify that the training required by
paragraphs (g)(1) through (g)(3) of this section has been accomplished.
The certification shall contain each employee's name, the signatures or
initials of the trainers, and the dates of training. The certification
shall be available for inspection by employees and their authorized
representatives.
(h) Duties of authorized entrants. The employer shall ensure that
all authorized entrants:
(1) Know the hazards that may be faced during entry, including
information on the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the
exposure;
(2) Properly use equipment as required by paragraph (d)(4) of this
section;
[[Page 475]]
(3) Communicate with the attendant as necessary to enable the
attendant to monitor entrant status and to enable the attendant to alert
entrants of the need to evacuate the space as required by paragraph
(i)(6) of this section;
(4) Alert the attendant whenever:
(i) The entrant recognizes any warning sign or symptom of exposure
to a dangerous situation, or
(ii) The entrant detects a prohibited condition; and
(5) Exit from the permit space as quickly as possible whenever:
(i) An order to evacuate is given by the attendant or the entry
supervisor,
(ii) The entrant recognizes any warning sign or symptom of exposure
to a dangerous situation,
(iii) The entrant detects a prohibited condition, or
(iv) An evacuation alarm is activated.
(i) Duties of attendants. The employer shall ensure that each
attendant:
(1) Knows the hazards that may be faced during entry, including
information on the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the
exposure;
(2) Is aware of possible behavioral effects of hazard exposure in
authorized entrants;
(3) Continuously maintains an accurate count of authorized entrants
in the permit space and ensures that the means used to identify
authorized entrants under paragraph (f)(4) of this section accurately
identifies who is in the permit space;
(4) Remains outside the permit space during entry operations until
relieved by another attendant;
Note: When the employer's permit entry program allows attendant
entry for rescue, attendants may enter a permit space to attempt a
rescue if they have been trained and equipped for rescue operations as
required by paragraph (k)(1) of this section and if they have been
relieved as required by paragraph (i)(4) of this section.
(5) Communicates with authorized entrants as necessary to monitor
entrant status and to alert entrants of the need to evacuate the space
under paragraph (i)(6) of this section;
(6) Monitors activities inside and outside the space to determine if
it is safe for entrants to remain in the space and orders the authorized
entrants to evacuate the permit space immediately under any of the
following conditions;
(i) If the attendant detects a prohibited condition;
(ii) If the attendant detects the behavioral effects of hazard
exposure in an authorized entrant;
(iii) If the attendant detects a situation outside the space that
could endanger the authorized entrants; or
(iv) If the attendant cannot effectively and safely perform all the
duties required under paragraph (i) of this section;
(7) Summon rescue and other emergency services as soon as the
attendant determines that authorized entrants may need assistance to
escape from permit space hazards;
(8) Takes the following actions when unauthorized persons approach
or enter a permit space while entry is underway:
(i) Warn the unauthorized persons that they must stay away from the
permit space;
(ii) Advise the unauthorized persons that they must exit immediately
if they have entered the permit space; and
(iii) Inform the authorized entrants and the entry supervisor if
unauthorized persons have entered the permit space;
(9) Performs non-entry rescues as specified by the employer's rescue
procedure; and
(10) Performs no duties that might interfere with the attendant's
primary duty to monitor and protect the authorized entrants.
(j) Duties of entry supervisors. The employer shall ensure that each
entry supervisor:
(1) Knows the hazards that may be faced during entry, including
information on the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the
exposure;
(2) Verifies, by checking that the appropriate entries have been
made on the permit, that all tests specified by the permit have been
conducted and that all procedures and equipment specified by the permit
are in place before endorsing the permit and allowing entry to begin;
(3) Terminates the entry and cancels the permit as required by
paragraph (e)(5) of this section;
[[Page 476]]
(4) Verifies that rescue services are available and that the means
for summoning them are operable;
(5) Removes unauthorized individuals who enter or who attempt to
enter the permit space during entry operations; and
(6) Determines, whenever responsibility for a permit space entry
operation is transferred and at intervals dictated by the hazards and
operations performed within the space, that entry operations remain
consistent with terms of the entry permit and that acceptable entry
conditions are maintained.
(k) Rescue and emergency services.
(1) An employer who designates rescue and emergency services,
pursuant to paragraph (d)(9) of this section, shall:
(i) Evaluate a prospective rescuer's ability to respond to a rescue
summons in a timely manner, considering the hazard(s) identified;
Note to paragraph (k)(1)(i): What will be considered timely will
vary according to the specific hazards involved in each entry. For
example, Sec. 1910.134, Respiratory Protection, requires that employers
provide a standby person or persons capable of immediate action to
rescue employee(s) wearing respiratory protection while in work areas
defined as IDLH atmospheres.
(ii) Evaluate a prospective rescue service's ability, in terms of
proficiency with rescue-related tasks and equipment, to function
appropriately while rescuing entrants from the particular permit space
or types of permit spaces identified;
(iii) Select a rescue team or service from those evaluated that:
(A) Has the capability to reach the victim(s) within a time frame
that is appropriate for the permit space hazard(s) identified;
(B) Is equipped for and proficient in performing the needed rescue
services;
(iv) Inform each rescue team or service of the hazards they may
confront when called on to perform rescue at the site; and
(v) Provide the rescue team or service selected with access to all
permit spaces from which rescue may be necessary so that the rescue
service can develop appropriate rescue plans and practice rescue
operations.
Note to paragraph (k)(1): Non-mandatory appendix F contains examples
of criteria which employers can use in evaluating prospective rescuers
as required by paragraph (k)(1) of this section.
(2) An employer whose employees have been designated to provide
permit space rescue and emergency services shall take the following
measures:
(i) Provide affected employees with the personal protective
equipment (PPE) needed to conduct permit space rescues safely and train
affected employees so they are proficient in the use of that PPE, at no
cost to those employees;
(ii) Train affected employees to perform assigned rescue duties. The
employer must ensure that such employees successfully complete the
training required to establish proficiency as an authorized entrant, as
provided by paragraphs (g) and (h) of this section;
(iii) Train affected employees in basic first-aid and
cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR). The employer shall ensure that at
least one member of the rescue team or service holding a current
certification in first aid and CPR is available; and
(iv) Ensure that affected employees practice making permit space
rescues at least once every 12 months, by means of simulated rescue
operations in which they remove dummies, manikins, or actual persons
from the actual permit spaces or from representative permit spaces.
Representative permit spaces shall, with respect to opening size,
configuration, and accessibility, simulate the types of permit spaces
from which rescue is to be performed.
(3) To facilitate non-entry rescue, retrieval systems or methods
shall be used whenever an authorized entrant enters a permit space,
unless the retrieval equipment would increase the overall risk of entry
or would not contribute to the rescue of the entrant. Retrieval systems
shall meet the following requirements.
(i) Each authorized entrant shall use a chest or full body harness,
with a retrieval line attached at the center of the entrant's back near
shoulder level, above the entrant's head, or at another point which the
employer can establish presents a profile small enough for the
successful removal of the entrant.
[[Page 477]]
Wristlets may be used in lieu of the chest or full body harness if the
employer can demonstrate that the use of a chest or full body harness is
infeasible or creates a greater hazard and that the use of wristlets is
the safest and most effective alternative.
(ii) The other end of the retrieval line shall be attached to a
mechanical device or fixed point outside the permit space in such a
manner that rescue can begin as soon as the rescuer becomes aware that
rescue is necessary. A mechanical device shall be available to retrieve
personnel from vertical type permit spaces more than 5 feet (1.52 m)
deep.
(4) If an injured entrant is exposed to a substance for which a
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or other similar written information
is required to be kept at the worksite, that MSDS or written information
shall be made available to the medical facility treating the exposed
entrant.
(l) Employee participation. (1) Employers shall consult with
affected employees and their authorized representatives on the
development and implementation of all aspects of the permit space
program required by paragraph (c) of this section.
(2) Employers shall make available to affected employees and their
authorized representatives all information required to be developed by
this section.
APPENDICES TO Sec. 1910.146--PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACES
Note: Appendices A through F serve to provide information and non-
mandatory guidelines to assist employers and employees in complying with
the appropriate requirements of this section.
[[Page 478]]
Appendix A to Sec. 1910.146--Permit-Required Confined Space Decision
Flow Chart
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.029
Appendix B to Sec. 1910.146--Procedures for Atmospheric Testing
Atmospheric testing is required for two distinct purposes:
evaluation of the hazards of the permit space and verification that
acceptable entry conditions for entry into that space exist.
(1) Evaluation testing. The atmosphere of a confined space should be
analyzed using equipment of sufficient sensitivity and specificity to
identify and evaluate any hazardous
[[Page 479]]
atmospheres that may exist or arise, so that appropriate permit entry
procedures can be developed and acceptable entry conditions stipulated
for that space. Evaluation and interpretation of these data, and
development of the entry procedure, should be done by, or reviewed by, a
technically qualified professional (e.g., OSHA consultation service, or
certified industrial hygienist, registered safety engineer, certified
safety professional, certified marine chemist, etc.) based on evaluation
of all serious hazards.
(2) Verification testing. The atmosphere of a permit space which may
contain a hazardous atmosphere should be tested for residues of all
contaminants identified by evaluation testing using permit specified
equipment to determine that residual concentrations at the time of
testing and entry are within the range of acceptable entry conditions.
Results of testing (i.e., actual concentration, etc.) should be recorded
on the permit in the space provided adjacent to the stipulated
acceptable entry condition.
(3) Duration of testing. Measurement of values for each atmospheric
parameter should be made for at least the minimum response time of the
test instrument specified by the manufacturer.
(4) Testing stratified atmospheres. When monitoring for entries
involving a descent into atmospheres that may be stratified, the
atmospheric envelope should be tested a distance of approximately 4 feet
(1.22 m) in the direction of travel and to each side. If a sampling
probe is used, the entrant's rate of progress should be slowed to
accommodate the sampling speed and detector response.
(5) Order of testing. A test for oxygen is performed first because
most combustible gas meters are oxygen dependent and will not provide
reliable readings in an oxygen deficient atmosphere. Combustible gasses
are tested for next because the threat of fire or explosion is both more
immediate and more life threatening, in most cases, than exposure to
toxic gasses and vapors. If tests for toxic gasses and vapors are
necessary, they are performed last.
Appendix C to Sec. 1910.146--Examples of Permit-required Confined Space
Programs
Example 1.
Workplace. Sewer entry.
Potential hazards. The employees could be exposed to the following:
Engulfment.
Presence of toxic gases. Equal to or more than 10 ppm hydrogen sulfide
measured as an 8-hour time-weighted average. If the presence of other
toxic contaminants is suspected, specific monitoring programs will be
developed.
Presence of explosive/flammable gases. Equal to or greater than 10% of
the lower flammable limit (LFL).
Oxygen Deficiency. A concentration of oxygen in the atmosphere equal to
or less than 19.5% by volume.
A. Entry Without Permit/Attendant
Certification. Confined spaces may be entered without the need for a
written permit or attendant provided that the space can be maintained in
a safe condition for entry by mechanical ventilation alone, as provided
in Sec. 1910.146(c)(5). All spaces shall be considered permit-required
confined spaces until the pre-entry procedures demonstrate otherwise.
Any employee required or permitted to pre-check or enter an enclosed/
confined space shall have successfully completed, -as a minimum, the
training as required by the following sections of these procedures. A
written copy of operating and rescue procedures as required by these
procedures shall be at the work site for the duration of the job. The
Confined Space Pre-Entry Check List must be completed by the LEAD WORKER
before entry into a confined space. This list verifies completion of
items listed below. This check list shall be kept at the job site for
duration of the job. If circumstances dictate an interruption in the
work, the permit space must be re-evaluated and a new check list must be
completed.
Control of atmospheric and engulfment hazards.
Pumps and Lines. All pumps and lines which may reasonably cause
contaminants to flow into the space shall be disconnected, blinded and
locked out, or effectively isolated by other means to prevent
development of dangerous air contamination or engulfment. Not all
laterals to sewers or storm drains require blocking. However, where
experience or knowledge of industrial use indicates there is a
reasonable potential for contamination of air or engulfment into an
occupied sewer, then all affected laterals shall be blocked. If blocking
and/or isolation requires entry into the space the provisions for entry
into a permit- required confined space must be implemented.
Surveillance. The surrounding area shall be surveyed to avoid hazards
such as drifting vapors from the tanks, piping, or sewers.
Testing. The atmosphere within the space will be tested to determine
whether dangerous air contamination and/or oxygen deficiency exists.
Detector tubes, alarm only gas monitors and explosion meters are
examples of monitoring equipment that may be used to test permit space
atmospheres. Testing shall be performed by the LEAD WORKER who has
successfully completed the Gas Detector training for the monitor he will
use. The minimum parameters to be monitored are oxygen deficiency, LFL,
and hydrogen sulfide concentration. A written record of
[[Page 480]]
the pre-entry test results shall be made and kept at the work site for
the duration of the job. The supervisor will certify in writing, based
upon the results of the pre-entry testing, that all hazards have been
eliminated. Affected employees shall be able to review the testing
results. The most hazardous conditions shall govern when work is being
performed in two adjoining, connecting spaces.
Entry Procedures. If there are no non-atmospheric hazards present and if
the pre-entry tests show there is no dangerous air contamination and/or
oxygen deficiency within the space and there is no reason to believe
that any is likely to develop, entry into and work within may proceed.
Continuous testing of the atmosphere in the immediate vicinity of the
workers within the space shall be accomplished. The workers will
immediately leave the permit space when any of the gas monitor alarm set
points are reached as defined. Workers will not return to the area until
a SUPERVISOR who has completed the gas detector training has used a
direct reading gas detector to evaluate the situation and has determined
that it is safe to enter.
Rescue. Arrangements for rescue services are not required where there is
no attendant. See the rescue portion of section B., below, for
instructions regarding rescue planning where an entry permit is
required.
B. Entry Permit Required
Permits. Confined Space Entry Permit. All spaces shall be considered
permit-required confined spaces until the pre-entry procedures
demonstrate otherwise. Any employee required or permitted to pre-check
or enter a permit-required confined space shall have successfully
completed, as a minimum, the training as required by the following
sections of these procedures. A written copy of operating and rescue
procedures as required by these procedures shall be at the work site for
the duration of the job. The Confined Space Entry Permit must be
completed before approval can be given to enter a permit-required
confined space. This permit verifies completion of items listed below.
This permit shall be kept at the job site for the duration of the job.
If circumstances cause an interruption in the work or a change in the
alarm conditions for which entry was approved, a new Confined Space
Entry Permit must be completed.
Control of atmospheric and engulfment hazards.
Surveillance. The surrounding area shall be surveyed to avoid hazards
such as drifting vapors from tanks, piping or sewers.
Testing. The confined space atmosphere shall be tested to determine
whether dangerous air contamination and/or oxygen deficiency exists. A
direct reading gas monitor shall be used. Testing shall be performed by
the SUPERVISOR who has successfully completed the gas detector training
for the monitor he will use. The minimum parameters to be monitored are
oxygen deficiency, LFL and hydrogen sulfide concentration. A written
record of the pre- entry test results shall be made and kept at the work
site for the duration of the job. Affected employees shall be able to
review the testing results. The most hazardous conditions shall govern
when work is being performed in two adjoining, connected spaces.
Space Ventilation. Mechanical ventilation systems, where applicable,
shall be set at 100% outside air. Where possible, open additional
manholes to increase air circulation. Use portable blowers to augment
natural circulation if needed. After a suitable ventilating period,
repeat the testing. Entry may not begin until testing has demonstrated
that the hazardous atmosphere has been eliminated.
Entry Procedures. The following procedure shall be observed under any of
the following conditions: 1.) Testing demonstrates the existence of
dangerous or deficient conditions and additional ventilation cannot
reduce concentrations to safe levels; 2.) The atmosphere tests as safe
but unsafe conditions can reasonably be expected to develop; 3.) It is
not feasible to provide for ready exit from spaces equipped with
automatic fire suppression systems and it is not practical or safe to
deactivate such systems; or 4.) An emergency exists and it is not
feasible to wait for pre-entry procedures to take effect.
All personnel must be trained. A self contained breathing apparatus
shall be worn by any person entering the space. At least one worker
shall stand by the outside of the space ready to give assistance in case
of emergency. The standby worker shall have a self contained breathing
apparatus available for immediate use. There shall be at least one
additional worker within sight or call of the standby worker. Continuous
powered communications shall be maintained between the worker within the
confined space and standby personnel.
If at any time there is any questionable action or non- movement by
the worker inside, a verbal check will be made. If there is no response,
the worker will be moved immediately. Exception: If the worker is
disabled due to falling or impact, he/she shall not be removed from the
confined space unless there is immediate danger to his/her life. Local
fire department rescue personnel shall be notified immediately. The
standby worker may only enter the confined space in case of an emergency
(wearing the self contained breathing apparatus) and only after being
relieved by another worker. Safety belt or harness with attached
lifeline shall be used by all workers entering the space with the free
end of the line secured outside the entry opening. The standby worker
shall attempt
[[Page 481]]
to remove a disabled worker via his lifeline before entering the space.
When practical, these spaces shall be entered through side openings-
-those within 3 1/2 feet (1.07 m) of the bottom. When entry must be
through a top opening, the safety belt shall be of the harness type that
suspends a person upright and a hoisting device or similar apparatus
shall be available for lifting workers out of the space.
In any situation where their use may endanger the worker, use of a
hoisting device or safety belt and attached lifeline may be
discontinued.
When dangerous air contamination is attributable to flammable and/or
explosive substances, lighting and electrical equipment shall be Class
1, Division 1 rated per National Electrical Code and no ignition sources
shall be introduced into the area.
Continuous gas monitoring shall be performed during all confined
space operations. If alarm conditions change adversely, entry personnel
shall exit the confined space and a new confined space permit issued.
Rescue. Call the fire department services for rescue. Where immediate
hazards to injured personnel are present, workers at the site shall
implement emergency procedures to fit the situation.
Example 2.
Workplace. Meat and poultry rendering plants.
Cookers and dryers are either batch or continuous in their
operation. Multiple batch cookers are operated in parallel. When one
unit of a multiple set is shut down for repairs, means are available to
isolate that unit from the others which remain in operation.
Cookers and dryers are horizontal, cylindrical vessels equipped with
a center, rotating shaft and agitator paddles or discs. If the inner
shell is jacketed, it is usually heated with steam at pressures up to
150 psig (1034.25 kPa). The rotating shaft assembly of the continuous
cooker or dryer is also steam heated.
Potential Hazards. The recognized hazards associated with cookers and
dryers are the risk that employees could be:
1. Struck or caught by rotating agitator;
2. Engulfed in raw material or hot, recycled fat;
3. Burned by steam from leaks into the cooker/dryer steam jacket or the
condenser duct system if steam valves are not properly closed and locked
out;
4. Burned by contact with hot metal surfaces, such as the agitator shaft
assembly, or inner shell of the cooker/dryer;
5. Heat stress caused by warm atmosphere inside cooker/dryer;
6. Slipping and falling on grease in the cooker/dryer;
7. Electrically shocked by faulty equipment taken into the cooker/dryer;
8. Burned or overcome by fire or products of combustion; or
9. Overcome by fumes generated by welding or cutting done on grease
covered surfaces.
Permits. The supervisor in this case is always present at the cooker/
dryer or other permit entry confined space when entry is made. The
supervisor must follow the pre-entry isolation procedures described in
the entry permit in preparing for entry, and ensure that the protective
clothing, ventilating equipment and any other equipment required by the
permit are at the entry site.
Control of hazards. Mechanical. Lock out main power switch to agitator
motor at main power panel. Affix tag to the lock to inform others that a
permit entry confined space entry is in progress.
Engulfment. Close all valves in the raw material blow line. Secure each
valve in its closed position using chain and lock. Attach a tag to the
valve and chain warning that a permit entry confined space entry is in
progress. The same procedure shall be used for securing the fat recycle
valve.
Burns and heat stress. Close steam supply valves to jacket and secure
with chains and tags. Insert solid blank at flange in cooker vent line
to condenser manifold duct system. Vent cooker/dryer by opening access
door at discharge end and top center door to allow natural ventilation
throughout the entry. If faster cooling is needed, use an portable
ventilation fan to increase ventilation. Cooling water may be circulated
through the jacket to reduce both outer and inner surface temperatures
of cooker/dryers faster. Check air and inner surface temperatures in
cooker/dryer to assure they are within acceptable limits before
entering, or use proper protective clothing.
Fire and fume hazards. Careful site preparation, such as cleaning the
area within 4 inches (10.16 cm) of all welding or torch cutting
operations, and proper ventilation are the preferred controls. All
welding and cutting operations shall be done in accordance with the
requirements of 29 CFR Part 1910, Subpart Q, OSHA's welding standard.
Proper ventilation may be achieved by local exhaust ventilation, or the
use of portable ventilation fans, or a combination of the two practices.
Electrical shock. Electrical equipment used in cooker/dryers shall be in
serviceable condition.
Slips and falls. Remove residual grease before entering cooker/dryer.
Attendant. The supervisor shall be the attendant for employees entering
cooker/dryers.
[[Page 482]]
Permit. The permit shall specify how isolation shall be done and any
other preparations needed before making entry. This is especially
important in parallel arrangements of cooker/dryers so that the entire
operation need not be shut down to allow safe entry into one unit.
Rescue. When necessary, the attendant shall call the fire department as
previously arranged.
Example 3.
Workplace. Workplaces where tank cars, trucks, and trailers, dry bulk
tanks and trailers, railroad tank cars, and similar portable tanks are
fabricated or serviced.
A. During fabrication. These tanks and dry-bulk carriers are entered
repeatedly throughout the fabrication process. These products are not
configured identically, but the manufacturing processes by which they
are made are very similar.
Sources of hazards. In addition to the mechanical hazards arising from
the risks that an entrant would be injured due to contact with
components of the tank or the tools being used, there is also the risk
that a worker could be injured by breathing fumes from welding materials
or mists or vapors from materials used to coat the tank interior. In
addition, many of these vapors and mists are flammable, so the failure
to properly ventilate a tank could lead to a fire or explosion.
Control of hazards.
Welding. Local exhaust ventilation shall be used to remove welding fumes
once the tank or carrier is completed to the point that workers may
enter and exit only through a manhole. (Follow the requirements of 29
CFR 1910, Subpart Q, OSHA's welding standard, at all times.) Welding gas
tanks may never be brought into a tank or carrier that is a permit entry
confined space.
Application of interior coatings/linings. Atmospheric hazards shall
be controlled by forced air ventilation sufficient to keep the
atmospheric concentration of flammable materials below 10% of the lower
flammable limit (LFL) (or lower explosive limit (LEL), whichever term is
used locally). The appropriate respirators are provided and shall be
used in addition to providing forced ventilation if the forced
ventilation does not maintain acceptable respiratory conditions.
Permits. Because of the repetitive nature of the entries in these
operations, an ``Area Entry Permit'' will be issued for a 1 month period
to cover those production areas where tanks are fabricated to the point
that entry and exit are made using manholes.
Authorization. Only the area supervisor may authorize an employee to
enter a tank within the permit area. The area supervisor must determine
that conditions in the tank trailer, dry bulk trailer or truck, etc.
meet permit requirements before authorizing entry.
Attendant. The area supervisor shall designate an employee to maintain
communication by employer specified means with employees working in
tanks to ensure their safety. The attendant may not enter any permit
entry confined space to rescue an entrant or for any other reason,
unless authorized by the rescue procedure and, and even then, only after
calling the rescue team and being relieved by as attendant by another
worker.
Communications and observation. Communications between attendant and
entrant(s) shall be maintained throughout entry. Methods of
communication that may be specified by the permit include voice, voice
powered radio, tapping or rapping codes on tank walls, signalling tugs
on a rope, and the attendant's observation that work activities such as
chipping, grinding, welding, spraying, etc., which require deliberate
operator control continue normally. These activities often generate so
much noise that the necessary hearing protection makes communication by
voice difficult.
Rescue procedures. Acceptable rescue procedures include entry by a team
of employee-rescuers, use of public emergency services, and procedures
for breaching the tank. The area permit specifies which procedures are
available, but the area supervisor makes the final decision based on
circumstances. (Certain injuries may make it necessary to breach the
tank to remove a person rather than risk additional injury by removal
through an existing manhole. However, the supervisor must ensure that no
breaching procedure used for rescue would violate terms of the entry
permit. For instance, if the tank must be breached by cutting with a
torch, the tank surfaces to be cut must be free of volatile or
combustible coatings within 4 inches (10.16 cm) of the cutting line and
the atmosphere within the tank must be below the LFL.
Retrieval line and harnesses. The retrieval lines and harnesses
generally required under this standard are usually impractical for use
in tanks because the internal configuration of the tanks and their
interior baffles and other structures would prevent rescuers from
hauling out injured entrants. However, unless the rescue procedure calls
for breaching the tank for rescue, the rescue team shall be trained in
the use of retrieval lines and harnesses for removing injured employees
through manholes.
B. Repair or service of ``used'' tanks and bulk trailers.
Sources of hazards. In addition to facing the potential hazards
encountered in fabrication or manufacturing, tanks or trailers which
have been in service may contain residues of
[[Page 483]]
dangerous materials, whether left over from the transportation of
hazardous cargoes or generated by chemical or bacterial action on
residues of non-hazardous cargoes.
Control of atmospheric hazards. A ``used'' tank shall be brought into
areas where tank entry is authorized only after the tank has been
emptied, cleansed (without employee entry) of any residues, and purged
of any potential atmospheric hazards.
Welding. In addition to tank cleaning for control of atmospheric
hazards, coating and surface materials shall be removed 4 inches (10.16
cm) or more from any surface area where welding or other torch work will
be done and care taken that the atmosphere within the tank remains well
below the LFL. (Follow the requirements of 29 CFR 1910, Subpart Q,
OSHA's welding standard, at all times.)
Permits. An entry permit valid for up to 1 year shall be issued prior to
authorization of entry into used tank trailers, dry bulk trailers or
trucks. In addition to the pre-entry cleaning requirement, this permit
shall require the employee safeguards specified for new tank fabrication
or construction permit areas.
Authorization. Only the area supervisor may authorize an employee to
enter a tank trailer, dry bulk trailer or truck within the permit area.
The area supervisor must determine that the entry permit requirements
have been met before authorizing entry.
[[Page 484]]
Appendix D to Sec. 1910.146--Sample Permits
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.030
[[Page 485]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.031
Appendix E to Sec. 1910.146--Sewer System Entry
Sewer entry differs in three vital respects from other permit
entries; first, there rarely exists any way to completely isolate the
space (a section of a continuous system) to be entered; second, because
isolation is not complete, the atmosphere may suddenly and
[[Page 486]]
unpredictably become lethally hazardous (toxic, flammable or explosive)
from causes beyond the control of the entrant or employer, and third,
experienced sewer workers are especially knowledgeable in entry and work
in their permit spaces because of their frequent entries. Unlike other
employments where permit space entry is a rare and exceptional event,
sewer workers' usual work environment is a permit space.
(1) Adherence to procedure. The employer should designate as
entrants only employees who are thoroughly trained in the employer's
sewer entry procedures and who demonstrate that they follow these entry
procedures exactly as prescribed when performing sewer entries.
(2) Atmospheric monitoring. Entrants should be trained in the use
of, and be equipped with, atmospheric monitoring equipment which sounds
an audible alarm, in addition to its visual readout, whenever one of the
following conditions are encountered: Oxygen concentration less than
19.5 percent; flammable gas or vapor at 10 percent or more of the lower
flammable limit (LFL); or hydrogen sulfide or carbon monoxide at or
above 10 ppm or 35 ppm, respectively, measured as an 8-hour time-
weighted average. Atmospheric monitoring equipment needs to be
calibrated according to the manufacturer's instructions. The oxygen
sensor/broad range sensor is best suited for initial use in situations
where the actual or potential contaminants have not been identified,
because broad range sensors, unlike substance-specific sensors, enable
employers to obtain an overall reading of the hydrocarbons (flammables)
present in the space. However, such sensors only indicate that a
hazardous threshold of a class of chemicals has been exceeded. They do
not measure the levels of contamination of specific substances.
Therefore, substance-specific devices, which measure the actual levels
of specific substances, are best suited for use where actual and
potential contaminants have been identified. The measurements obtained
with substance-specific devices are of vital importance to the employer
when decisions are made concerning the measures necessary to protect
entrants (such as ventilation or personal protective equipment) and the
setting and attainment of appropriate entry conditions. However, the
sewer environment may suddenly and unpredictably change, and the
substance-specific devices may not detect the potentially lethal
atmospheric hazards which may enter the sewer environment.
Although OSHA considers the information and guidance provided above
to be appropriate and useful in most sewer entry situations, the Agency
emphasizes that each employer must consider the unique circumstances,
including the predictability of the atmosphere, of the sewer permit
spaces in the employer's workplace in preparing for entry. Only the
employer can decide, based upon his or her knowledge of, and experience
with permit spaces in sewer systems, what the best type of testing
instrument may be for any specific entry operation.
The selected testing instrument should be carried and used by the
entrant in sewer line work to monitor the atmosphere in the entrant's
environment, and in advance of the entrant's direction of movement, to
warn the entrant of any deterioration in atmospheric conditions. Where
several entrants are working together in the same immediate location,
one instrument, used by the lead entrant, is acceptable.
(3) Surge flow and flooding. Sewer crews should develop and maintain
liaison, to the extent possible, with the local weather bureau and fire
and emergency services in their area so that sewer work may be delayed
or interrupted and entrants withdrawn whenever sewer lines might be
suddenly flooded by rain or fire suppression activities, or whenever
flammable or other hazardous materials are released into sewers during
emergencies by industrial or transportation accidents.
(4) Special Equipment. Entry into large bore sewers may require the
use of special equipment. Such equipment might include such items as
atmosphere monitoring devices with automatic audible alarms, escape
self-contained breathing apparatus (ESCBA) with at least 10 minute air
supply (or other NIOSH approved self-rescuer), and waterproof
flashlights, and may also include boats and rafts, radios and rope
stand-offs for pulling around bends and corners as needed.
Appendix F to Sec. 1910.146--Rescue Team or Rescue Service Evaluation
Criteria (Non-Mandatory)
(1) This appendix provides guidance to employers in choosing an
appropriate rescue service. It contains criteria that may be used to
evaluate the capabilities both of prospective and current rescue teams.
Before a rescue team can be trained or chosen, however, a satisfactory
permit program, including an analysis of all permit-required confined
spaces to identify all potential hazards in those spaces, must be
completed. OSHA believes that compliance with all the provisions of
Sec. 1910.146 will enable employers to conduct permit space operations
without recourse to rescue services in nearly all cases. However,
experience indicates that circumstances will arise where entrants will
need to be rescued from permit spaces. It is therefore important for
employers to select rescue services or teams, either on-site or off-
site, that are equipped and capable of minimizing harm to both entrants
and rescuers if the need arises.
(2) For all rescue teams or services, the employer's evaluation
should consist of two components: an initial evaluation, in which
[[Page 487]]
employers decide whether a potential rescue service or team is
adequately trained and equipped to perform permit space rescues of the
kind needed at the facility and whether such rescuers can respond in a
timely manner, and a performance evaluation, in which employers measure
the performance of the team or service during an actual or practice
rescue. For example, based on the initial evaluation, an employer may
determine that maintaining an on-site rescue team will be more expensive
than obtaining the services of an off-site team, without being
significantly more effective, and decide to hire a rescue service.
During a performance evaluation, the employer could decide, after
observing the rescue service perform a practice rescue, that the
service's training or preparedness was not adequate to effect a timely
or effective rescue at his or her facility and decide to select another
rescue service, or to form an internal rescue team.
A. Initial Evaluation
I. The employer should meet with the prospective rescue service to
facilitate the evaluations required by Sec. 1910.146(k)(1)(i) and
Sec. 1910.146(k)(1)(ii). At a minimum, if an off-site rescue service is
being considered, the employer must contact the service to plan and
coordinate the evaluations required by the standard. Merely posting the
service's number or planning to rely on the 911 emergency phone number
to obtain these services at the time of a permit space emergency would
not comply with paragraph (k)(1) of the standard.
II. The capabilities required of a rescue service vary with the type
of permit spaces from which rescue may be necessary and the hazards
likely to be encountered in those spaces. Answering the questions below
will assist employers in determining whether the rescue service is
capable of performing rescues in the permit spaces present at the
employer's workplace.
1. What are the needs of the employer with regard to response time
(time for the rescue service to receive notification, arrive at the
scene, and set up and be ready for entry)? For example, if entry is to
be made into an IDLH atmosphere, or into a space that can quickly
develop an IDLH atmosphere (if ventilation fails or for other reasons),
the rescue team or service would need to be standing by at the permit
space. On the other hand, if the danger to entrants is restricted to
mechanical hazards that would cause injuries (e.g., broken bones,
abrasions) a response time of 10 or 15 minutes might be adequate.
2. How quickly can the rescue team or service get from its location
to the permit spaces from which rescue may be necessary? Relevant
factors to consider would include: the location of the rescue team or
service relative to the employer's workplace, the quality of roads and
highways to be traveled, potential bottlenecks or traffic congestion
that might be encountered in transit, the reliability of the rescuer's
vehicles, and the training and skill of its drivers.
3. What is the availability of the rescue service? Is it unavailable
at certain times of the day or in certain situations? What is the
likelihood that key personnel of the rescue service might be unavailable
at times? If the rescue service becomes unavailable while an entry is
underway, does it have the capability of notifying the employer so that
the employer can instruct the attendant to abort the entry immediately?
4. Does the rescue service meet all the requirements of paragraph
(k)(2) of the standard? If not, has it developed a plan that will enable
it to meet those requirements in the future? If so, how soon can the
plan be implemented?
5. For off-site services, is the service willing to perform rescues
at the employer's workplace? (An employer may not rely on a rescuer who
declines, for whatever reason, to provide rescue services.)
6. Is an adequate method for communications between the attendant,
employer and prospective rescuer available so that a rescue request can
be transmitted to the rescuer without delay? How soon after notification
can a prospective rescuer dispatch a rescue team to the entry site?
7. For rescues into spaces that may pose significant atmospheric
hazards and from which rescue entry, patient packaging and retrieval
cannot be safely accomplished in a relatively short time (15-20
minutes), employers should consider using airline respirators (with
escape bottles) for the rescuers and to supply rescue air to the
patient. If the employer decides to use SCBA, does the prospective
rescue service have an ample supply of replacement cylinders and
procedures for rescuers to enter and exit (or be retrieved) well within
the SCBA's air supply limits?
8. If the space has a vertical entry over 5 feet in depth, can the
prospective rescue service properly perform entry rescues? Does the
service have the technical knowledge and equipment to perform rope work
or elevated rescue, if needed?
9. Does the rescue service have the necessary skills in medical
evaluation, patient packaging and emergency response?
10. Does the rescue service have the necessary equipment to perform
rescues, or must the equipment be provided by the employer or another
source?
B. Performance Evaluation
Rescue services are required by paragraph (k)(2)(iv) of the standard
to practice rescues at least once every 12 months, provided that the
team or service has not successfully performed a permit space rescue
within that time. As part of each practice session, the
[[Page 488]]
service should perform a critique of the practice rescue, or have
another qualified party perform the critique, so that deficiencies in
procedures, equipment, training, or number of personnel can be
identified and corrected. The results of the critique, and the
corrections made to respond to the deficiencies identified, should be
given to the employer to enable it to determine whether the rescue
service can quickly be upgraded to meet the employer's rescue needs or
whether another service must be selected. The following questions will
assist employers and rescue teams and services evaluate their
performance.
1. Have all members of the service been trained as permit space
entrants, at a minimum, including training in the potential hazards of
all permit spaces, or of representative permit spaces, from which rescue
may be needed? Can team members recognize the signs, symptoms, and
consequences of exposure to any hazardous atmospheres that may be
present in those permit spaces?
2. Is every team member provided with, and properly trained in, the
use and need for PPE, such as SCBA or fall arrest equipment, which may
be required to perform permit space rescues in the facility? Is every
team member properly trained to perform his or her functions and make
rescues, and to use any rescue equipment, such as ropes and backboards,
that may be needed in a rescue attempt?
3. Are team members trained in the first aid and medical skills
needed to treat victims overcome or injured by the types of hazards that
may be encountered in the permit spaces at the facility?
4. Do all team members perform their functions safely and
efficiently? Do rescue service personnel focus on their own safety
before considering the safety of the victim?
5. If necessary, can the rescue service properly test the atmosphere
to determine if it is IDLH?
6. Can the rescue personnel identify information pertinent to the
rescue from entry permits, hot work permits, and MSDSs?
7. Has the rescue service been informed of any hazards to personnel
that may arise from outside the space, such as those that may be caused
by future work near the space?
8. If necessary, can the rescue service properly package and
retrieve victims from a permit space that has a limited size opening
(less than 24 inches (60.9 cm) in diameter), limited internal space, or
internal obstacles or hazards?
9. If necessary, can the rescue service safely perform an elevated
(high angle) rescue?
10. Does the rescue service have a plan for each of the kinds of
permit space rescue operations at the facility? Is the plan adequate for
all types of rescue operations that may be needed at the facility? Teams
may practice in representative spaces, or in spaces that are ``worst-
case'' or most restrictive with respect to internal configuration,
elevation, and portal size. The following characteristics of a practice
space should be considered when deciding whether a space is truly
representative of an actual permit space:
(1) Internal configuration.
(a) Open--there are no obstacles, barriers, or obstructions within
the space. One example is a water tank.
(b) Obstructed--the permit space contains some type of obstruction
that a rescuer would need to maneuver around. An example would be a
baffle or mixing blade. Large equipment, such as a ladder or scaffold,
brought into a space for work purposes would be considered an
obstruction if the positioning or size of the equipment would make
rescue more difficult.
(2) Elevation.
(a) Elevated--a permit space where the entrance portal or opening is
above grade by 4 feet or more. This type of space usually requires
knowledge of high angle rescue procedures because of the difficulty in
packaging and transporting a patient to the ground from the portal.
(b) Non-elevated--a permit space with the entrance portal located
less than 4 feet above grade. This type of space will allow the rescue
team to transport an injured employee normally.
(3) Portal size.
(a) Restricted--A portal of 24 inches or less in the least
dimension. Portals of this size are too small to allow a rescuer to
simply enter the space while using SCBA. The portal size is also too
small to allow normal spinal immobilization of an injured employee.
(b) Unrestricted--A portal of greater than 24 inches in the least
dimension. These portals allow relatively free movement into and out of
the permit space.
(4) Space access.
(a) Horizontal--The portal is located on the side of the permit
space. Use of retrieval lines could be difficult.
(b) Vertical--The portal is located on the top of the permit space,
so that rescuers must climb down, or the bottom of the permit space, so
that rescuers must climb up to enter the space. Vertical portals may
require knowledge of rope techniques, or special patient packaging to
safely retrieve a downed entrant.
[58 FR 4549, Jan. 14, 1993; 58 FR 34845, 34846, June 29, 1993, as
amended at 59 FR 26114, May 19, 1994; 63 FR 66038, 66039, Dec. 1, 1998]
Sec. 1910.147 The control of hazardous energy (lockout/tagout).
(a) Scope, application and purpose--(1) Scope. (i) This standard
covers the servicing and maintenance of machines and equipment in which
the unexpected
[[Page 489]]
energization or start up of the machines or equipment, or release of
stored energy could cause injury to employees. This standard establishes
minimum performance requirements for the control of such hazardous
energy.
(ii) This standard does not cover the following:
(A) Construction, agriculture and maritime employment;
(B) Installations under the exclusive control of electric utilities
for the purpose of power generation, transmission and distribution,
including related equipment for communication or metering; and
(C) Exposure to electrical hazards from work on, near, or with
conductors or equipment in electric utilization installations, which is
covered by subpart S of this part; and
(D) Oil and gas well drilling and servicing.
(2) Application. (i) This standard applies to the control of energy
during servicing and/or maintenance of machines and equipment.
(ii) Normal production operations are not covered by this standard
(See subpart 0 of this part). Servicing and/or maintenance which takes
place during normal production operations is covered by this standard
only if;:
(A) An employee is required to remove or bypass a guard or other
safety device; or
(B) An employee is required to place any part of his or her body
into an area on a machine or piece of equipment where work is actually
performed upon the material being processed (point of operation) or
where an associated danger zone exists during a machine operating cycle.
Note: Exception to paragraph (a)(2)(ii): Minor tool changes and
adjustments, and other minor servicing activities, which take place
during normal production operations, are not covered by this standard if
they are routine, repetitive, and integral to the use of the equipment
for production, provided that the work is performed using alternative
measures which provide effective protection (See subpart 0 of this
part).
(iii) This standard does not apply to the following.
(A) Work on cord and plug connected electric equipment for which
exposure to the hazards of unexpected energization or start up of the
equipment is controlled by the unplugging of the equipment from the
energy source and by the plug being under the exclusive control of the
employee performing the servicing or maintenance.
(B) Hot tap operations involving transmission and distribution
systems for substances such as gas, steam, water or petroleum products
when they are performed on pressurized pipelines, provided that the
employer demonstrates that (1) continuity of service is essential; (2)
shutdown of the system is impractical; and (3) documented procedures are
followed, and special equipment is used which will provide proven
effective protection for employees.
(3) Purpose. (i) This section requires employers to establish a
program and utilize procedures for affixing appropriate lockout devices
or tagout devices to energy isolating devices, and to otherwise disable
machines or equipment to prevent unexpected energization, start-up or
release of stored energy in order to prevent injury to employees.
(ii) When other standards in this part require the use of lockout or
tagout, they shall be used and supplemented by the procedural and
training requirements of this section.
(b) Definitions applicable to this section.
Affected employee. An employee whose job requires him/her to operate
or use a machine or equipment on which servicing or maintenance is being
performed under lockout or tagout, or whose job requires him/her to work
in an area in which such servicing or maintenance is being performed.
Authorized employee. A person who locks out or tags out machines or
equipment in order to perform servicing or maintenance on that machine
or equipment. An affected employee becomes an authorized employee when
that employee's duties include performing servicing or maintenance
covered under this section.
Capable of being locked out. An energy isolating device is capable
of being locked out if it has a hasp or other means of attachment to
which, or through which, a lock can be affixed, or it has a locking
mechanism built into it. Other energy isolating devices are capable of
being locked out, if lockout
[[Page 490]]
can be achieved without the need to dismantle, rebuild, or replace the
energy isolating device or permanently alter its energy control
capability.
Energized. Connected to an energy source or containing residual or
stored energy.
Energy isolating device. A mechanical device that physically
prevents the transmission or release of energy, including but not
limited to the following: A manually operated electrical circuit
breaker; a disconnect switch; a manually operated switch by which the
conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from all ungrounded supply
conductors, and, in addition, no pole can be operated independently; a
line valve; a block; and any similar device used to block or isolate
energy. Push buttons, selector switches and other control circuit type
devices are not energy isolating devices.
Energy source. Any source of electrical, mechanical, hydraulic,
pneumatic, chemical, thermal, or other energy.
Hot tap. A procedure used in the repair, maintenance and services
activities which involves welding on a piece of equipment (pipelines,
vessels or tanks) under pressure, in order to install connections or
appurtenances. It is commonly used to replace or add sections of
pipeline without the interruption of service for air, gas, water, steam,
and petrochemical distribution systems.
Lockout. The placement of a lockout device on an energy isolating
device, in accordance with an established procedure, ensuring that the
energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled cannot be
operated until the lockout device is removed.
Lockout device. A device that utilizes a positive means such as a
lock, either key or combination type, to hold an energy isolating device
in a safe position and prevent the energizing of a machine or equipment.
Included are blank flanges and bolted slip blinds.
Normal production operations. The utilization of a machine or
equipment to perform its intended production function.
Servicing and/or maintenance. Workplace activities such as
constructing, installing, setting up, adjusting, inspecting, modifying,
and maintaining and/or servicing machines or equipment. These activities
include lubrication, cleaning or unjamming of machines or equipment and
making adjustments or tool changes, where the employee may be exposed to
the unexpected energization or startup of the equipment or release of
hazardous energy.
Setting up. Any work performed to prepare a machine or equipment to
perform its normal production operation.
Tagout. The placement of a tagout device on an energy isolating
device, in accordance with an established procedure, to indicate that
the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled may not
be operated until the tagout device is removed.
Tagout device. A prominent warning device, such as a tag and a means
of attachment, which can be securely fastened to an energy isolating
device in accordance with an established procedure, to indicate that the
energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled may not be
operated until the tagout device is removed.
(c) General--(1) Energy control program. The employer shall
establish a program consisting of energy control procedures, employee
training and periodic inspections to ensure that before any employee
performs any servicing or maintenance on a machine or equipment where
the unexpected energizing, start up or release of stored energy could
occur and cause injury, the machine or equipment shall be isolated from
the energy source, and rendered inoperative.
(2) Lockout/tagout. (i) If an energy isolating device is not capable
of being locked out, the employer's energy control program under
paragraph (c)(1) of this section shall utilize a tagout system.
(ii) If an energy isolating device is capable of being locked out,
the employer's energy control program under paragraph (c)(1) of this
section shall utilize lockout, unless the employer can demonstrate that
the utilization of a tagout system will provide full employee protection
as set forth in paragraph (c)(3) of this section.
[[Page 491]]
(iii) After January 2, 1990, whenever replacement or major repair,
renovation or modification of a machine or equipment is performed, and
whenever new machines or equipment are installed, energy isolating
devices for such machine or equipment shall be designed to accept a
lockout device.
(3) Full employee protection. (i) When a tagout device is used on an
energy isolating device which is capable of being locked out, the tagout
device shall be attached at the same location that the lockout device
would have been attached, and the employer shall demonstrate that the
tagout program will provide a level of safety equivalent to that
obtained by using a lockout program.
(ii) In demonstrating that a level of safety is achieved in the
tagout program which is equivalent to the level of safety obtained by
using a lockout program, the employer shall demonstrate full compliance
with all tagout-related provisions of this standard together with such
additional elements as are necessary to provide the equivalent safety
available from the use of a lockout device. Additional means to be
considered as part of the demonstration of full employee protection
shall include the implementation of additional safety measures such as
the removal of an isolating circuit element, blocking of a controlling
switch, opening of an extra disconnecting device, or the removal of a
valve handle to reduce the likelihood of inadvertent energization.
(4) Energy control procedure. (i) Procedures shall be developed,
documented and utilized for the control of potentially hazardous energy
when employees are engaged in the activities covered by this section.
Note: Exception: The employer need not document the required
procedure for a particular machine or equipment, when all of the
following elements exist: (1) The machine or equipment has no potential
for stored or residual energy or reaccumulation of stored energy after
shut down which could endanger employees; (2) the machine or equipment
has a single energy source which can be readily identified and isolated;
(3) the isolation and locking out of that energy source will completely
deenergize and deactivate the machine or equipment; (4) the machine or
equipment is isolated from that energy source and locked out during
servicing or maintenance; (5) a single lockout device will achieve a
locked-out condition; (6) the lockout device is under the exclusive
control of the authorized employee performing the servicing or
maintenance; (7) the servicing or maintenance does not create hazards
for other employees; and (8) the employer, in utilizing this exception,
has had no accidents involving the unexpected activation or
reenergization of the machine or equipment during servicing or
maintenance.
(ii) The procedures shall clearly and specifically outline the
scope, purpose, authorization, rules, and techniques to be utilized for
the control of hazardous energy, and the means to enforce compliance
including, but not limited to, the following:
(A) A specific statement of the intended use of the procedure;
(B) Specific procedural steps for shutting down, isolating, blocking
and securing machines or equipment to control hazardous energy;
(C) Specific procedural steps for the placement, removal and
transfer of lockout devices or tagout devices and the responsibility for
them; and
(D) Specific requirements for testing a machine or equipment to
determine and verify the effectiveness of lockout devices, tagout
devices, and other energy control measures.
(5) Protective materials and hardware. (i) Locks, tags, chains,
wedges, key blocks, adapter pins, self-locking fasteners, or other
hardware shall be provided by the employer for isolating, securing or
blocking of machines or equipment from energy sources.
(ii) Lockout devices and tagout devices shall be singularly
identified; shall be the only devices(s) used for controlling energy;
shall not be used for other purposes; and shall meet the following
requirements:
(A) Durable. (1) Lockout and tagout devices shall be capable of
withstanding the environment to which they are exposed for the maximum
period of time that exposure is expected.
(2) Tagout devices shall be constructed and printed so that exposure
to weather conditions or wet and damp locations will not cause the tag
to deteriorate or the message on the tag to become illegible.
(3) Tags shall not deteriorate when used in corrosive environments
such as areas where acid and alkali chemicals are handled and stored.
[[Page 492]]
(B) Standardized. Lockout and tagout devices shall be standardized
within the facility in at least one of the following criteria: Color;
shape; or size; and additionally, in the case of tagout devices, print
and format shall be standardized.
(C) Substantial--(1) Lockout devices. Lockout devices shall be
substantial enough to prevent removal without the use of excessive force
or unusual techniques, such as with the use of bolt cutters or other
metal cutting tools.
(2) Tagout devices. Tagout devices, including and their means of
attachment, shall be substantial enough to prevent inadvertent or
accidental removal. Tagout device attachment means shall be of a non-
reusable type, attachable by hand, self-locking, and non-releasable with
a minimum unlocking strength of no less than 50 pounds and having the
general design and basic characteristics of being at least equivalent to
a one-piece, all-environment-tolerant nylon cable tie.
(D) Identifiable. Lockout devices and tagout devices shall indicate
the identity of the employee applying the device(s).
(iii) Tagout devices shall warn against hazardous conditions if the
machine or equipment is energized and shall include a legend such as the
following: Do Not Start, Do Not Open, Do Not Close, Do Not Energize, Do
Not Operate.
(6) Periodic inspection. (i) The employer shall conduct a periodic
inspection of the energy control procedure at least annually to ensure
that the procedure and the requirements of this standard are being
followed.
(A) The periodic inspection shall be perfomed by an authorized
employee other than the ones(s) utilizing the energy control procedure
being inspected.
(B) The periodic inspection shall be conducted to correct any
deviations or inadequacies identified.
(C) Where lockout is used for energy control, the periodic
inspection shall include a review, between the inspector and each
authorized employee, of that employee's responsibilities under the
energy control procedure being inspected.
(D) Where tagout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection
shall include a review, between the inspector and each authorized and
affected employee, of that employee's responsibilities under the energy
control procedure being inspected, and the elements set forth in
paragraph (c)(7)(ii) of this section.
(ii) The employer shall certify that the periodic inspections have
been performed. The certification shall identify the machine or
equipment on which the energy control procedure was being utilized, the
date of the inspection, the employees included in the inspection, and
the person performing the inspection.
(7) Training and communication. (i) The employer shall provide
training to ensure that the purpose and function of the energy control
program are understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills
required for the safe application, usage, and removal of the energy
controls are acquired by employees. The training shall include the
following:
(A) Each authorized employee shall receive training in the
recognition of applicable hazardous energy sources, the type and
magnitude of the energy available in the workplace, and the methods and
means necessary for energy isolation and control.
(B) Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose and
use of the energy control procedure.
(C) All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an
area where energy control procedures may be utilized, shall be
instructed about the procedure, and about the prohibition relating to
attempts to restart or reenergize machines or equipment which are locked
out or tagged out.
(ii) When tagout systems are used, employees shall also be trained
in the following limitations of tags:
(A) Tags are essentially warning devices affixed to energy isolating
devices, and do not provide the physical restraint on those devices that
is provided by a lock.
(B) When a tag is attached to an energy isolating means, it is not
to be removed without authorization of the authorized person responsible
for it, and it is never to be bypassed, ignored, or otherwise defeated.
[[Page 493]]
(C) Tags must be legible and understandable by all authorized
employees, affected employees, and all other employees whose work
operations are or may be in the area, in order to be effective.
(D) Tags and their means of attachment must be made of materials
which will withstand the environmental conditions encountered in the
workplace.
(E) Tags may evoke a false sense of security, and their meaning
needs to be understood as part of the overall energy control program.
(F) Tags must be securely attached to energy isolating devices so
that they cannot be inadvertently or accidentally detached during use.
(iii) Employee retraining.
(A) Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected
employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a change
in machines, equipment or processes that present a new hazard, or when
there is a change in the energy control procedures.
(B) Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a
periodic inspection under paragraph (c)(6) of this section reveals, or
whenever the employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations
from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of the energy
control procedures.
(C) The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and
introduce new or revised control methods and procedures, as necessary.
(iv) The employer shall certify that employee training has been
accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall
contain each employee's name and dates of training.
(8) Energy isolation. Lockout or tagout shall be performed only
bythe authorized employees who are performing the servicing or
maintenance.
(9) Notification of employees. Affected employees shall be notified
by the employer or authorized employee of the application and removal of
lockout devices or tagout devices. Notification shall be given before
the controls are applied, and after they are removed from the machine or
equipment.
(d) Application of control. The established procedures for the
application of energy control (the lockout or tagout procedures) shall
cover the following elements and actions and shall be done in the
following sequence:
(1) Preparation for shutdown. Before an authorized or affected
employee turns off a machine or equipment, the authorized employee shall
have knowledge of the type and magnitude of the energy, the hazards of
the energy to be controlled, and the method or means to control the
energy.
(2) Machine or equipment shutdown. The machine or equipment shall be
turned off or shut down using the procedures established for the machine
or equipment. An orderly shutdown must be utilized to avoid any
additional or increased hazard(s) to employees as a result of the
equipment stoppage.
(3) Machine or equipment isolation. All energy isolating devices
that are needed to control the energy to the machine or equipment shall
be physically located and operated in such a manner as to isolate the
machine or equipment from the energy source(s).
(4) Lockout or tagout device application. (i) Lockout or tagout
devices shall be affixed to each energy isolating device by authorized
employees.
(ii) Lockout devices, where used, shall be affixed in a manner to
that will hold the energy isolating devices in a ``safe'' or ``off''
position.
(iii) Tagout devices, where used, shall be affixed in such a manner
as will clearly indicate that the operation or movement of energy
isolating devices from the ``safe'' or ``off'' position is prohibited.
(A) Where tagout devices are used with energy isolating devices
designed with the capability of being locked, the tag attachment shall
be fastened at the same point at which the lock would have been
attached.
(B) Where a tag cannot be affixed directly to the energy isolating
device, the tag shall be located as close as safely possible to the
device, in a position that will be immediately obvious to anyone
attempting to operate the device.
(5) Stored energy. (i) Following the application of lockout or
tagout devices to energy isolating devices, all potentially hazardous
stored or residual energy shall be relieved, disconnected, restrained,
and otherwise rendered safe.
[[Page 494]]
(ii) If there is a possibility of reaccumulation of stored energy to
a hazardous level, verification of isolation shall be continued until
the servicing or maintenance is completed, or until the possibility of
such accumulation no longer exists.
(6) Verification of isolation. Prior to starting work on machines or
equipment that have been locked out or tagged out, the authorized
employee shall verify that isolation and deenergization of the machine
or equipment have been accomplished.
(e) Release from lockout or tagout. Before lockout or tagout devices
are removed and energy is restored to the machine or equipment,
procedures shall be followed and actions taken by the authorized
employee(s) to ensure the following:
(1) The machine or equipment. The work area shall be inspected to
ensure that nonessential items have been removed and to ensure that
machine or equipment components are operationally intact.
(2) Employees. (i) The work area shall be checked to ensure that all
employees have been safely positioned or removed.
(ii) After lockout or tagout devices have been removed and before a
machine or equipment is started, affected employees shall be notified
that the lockout or tagout device(s) have been removed.
(3) Lockout or tagout devices removal. Each lockout or tagout device
shall be removed from each energy isolating device by the employee who
applied the device. Exception to paragraph (e)(3): When the authorized
employee who applied the lockout or tagout device is not available to
remove it, that device may be removed under the direction of the
employer, provided that specific procedures and training for such
removal have been developed, documented and incorporated into the
employer's energy control program. The employer shall demonstrate that
the specific procedure provides equivalent safety to the removal of the
device by the authorized employee who applied it. The specific procedure
shall include at least the following elements:
(i) Verfication by the employer that the authorized employee who
applied the device is not at the facility;
(ii) Making all reasonable efforts to contact the authorized
employee to inform him/her that his/her lockout or tagout device has
been removed; and
(iii) Ensuring that the authorized employee has this knowledge
before he/she resumes work at that facility.
(f) Additional requirements--(1) Testing or positioning of machines,
equipment or components thereof. In situations in which lockout or
tagout devices must be temporarily removed from the energy isolating
device and the machine or equipment energized to test or position the
machine, equipment or component thereof, the following sequence of
actions shall be followed:
(i) Clear the machine or equipment of tools and materials in
accordance with paragraph (e)(1) of this section;
(ii) Remove employees from the machine or equipment area in
accordance with paragraph (e)(2) of this section;
(iii) Remove the lockout or tagout devices as specified in paragraph
(e)(3) of this section;
(iv) Energize and proceed with testing or positioning;
(v) Deenergize all systems and reapply energy control measures in
accordance with paragraph (d) of this section to continue the servicing
and/or maintenance.
(2) Outside personnel (contractors, etc.). (i) Whenever outside
servicing personnel are to be engaged in activities covered by the scope
and application of this standard, the on-site employer and the outside
employer shall inform each other of their respective lockout or tagout
procedures.
(ii) The on-site employer shall ensure that his/her employees
understand and comply with the restrictions and prohibitions of the
outside employer's energy control program.
(3) Group lockout or tagout. (i) When servicing and/or maintenance
is performed by a crew, craft, department or other group, they shall
utilize a procedure which affords the employees a level of protection
equivalent to that provided by the implementation of a personal lockout
or tagout device.
(ii) Group lockout or tagout devices shall be used in accordance
with the
[[Page 495]]
procedures required by paragraph (c)(4) of this section including, but
not necessarily limited to, the following specific requirements:
(A) Primary responsibility is vested in an authorized employee for a
set number of employees working under the protection of a group lockout
or tagout device (such as an operations lock);
(B) Provision for the authorized employee to ascertain the exposure
status of individual group members with regard to the lockout or tagout
of the machine or equipment and
(C) When more than one crew, craft, department, etc. is involved,
assignment of overall job-associated lockout or tagout control
responsibility to an authorized employee designated to coordinate
affected work forces and ensure continuity of protection; and
(D) Each authorized employee shall affix a personal lockout or
tagout device to the group lockout device, group lockbox, or comparable
mechanism when he or she begins work, and shall remove those devices
when he or she stops working on the machine or equipment being serviced
or maintained.
(4) Shift or personnel changes. Specific procedures shall be
utilized during shift or personnel changes to ensure the continuity of
lockout or tagout protection, including provision for the orderly
transfer of lockout or tagout device protection between off-going and
oncoming employees, to minimize exposure to hazards from the unexpected
energization or start-up of the machine or equipment, or the release of
stored energy.
Note: The following appendix to Sec. 1910.147 services as a non-
mandatory guideline to assist employers and employees in complying with
the requirements of this section, as well as to provide other helpful
information. Nothing in the appendix adds to or detracts from any of the
requirements of this section.
Appendix A to Sec. 1910.147--Typical Minimal Lockout Procedure
General
The following simple lockout procedure is provided to assist
employers in developing their procedures so they meet the requirements
of this standard. When the energy isolating devices are not lockable,
tagout may be used, provided the employer complies with the provisions
of the standard which require additional training and more rigorous
periodic inspections. When tagout is used and the energy isolating
devices are lockable, the employer must provide full employee protection
(see paragraph (c)(3)) and additional training and more rigorous
periodic inspections are required. For more complex systems, more
comprehensive procedures may need to be developed, documented and
utilized.
Lockout Procedure
Lockout procedure for
________________________________________________________________________
(Name of Company for single procedure or identification of equipment if
multiple procedures are used)
Purpose
This procedure establishes the minimum requirements for the lockout
of energy isolating devices whenever maintenance or servicing is done on
machines or equipment. It shall be used to ensure that the machine or
equipment is stopped, isolated from all potentially hazardous energy
sources and locked out before employees perform any servicing or
maintenance where the unexpected energization or start-up of the machine
or equipment or release of stored energy could cause injury.
Compliance With This Program
All employees are required to comply with the restrictions and
limitations imposed upon them during the use of lockout. The authorized
employees are required to perform the lockout in accordance with this
procedure. All employees, upon observing a machine or piece of equipment
which is locked out to perform servicing or maintenance shall not
attempt to start, energize or use that machine or equipment.
________________________________________________________________________
Type of compliance enforcement to be taken for violation of the above.
Sequence of Lockout
(1) Notify all affected employees that servicing or maintenance is
required on a machine or equipment and that the machine or equipment
must be shut down and locked out to perform the servicing or
maintenance.
________________________________________________________________________
Name(s)/Job Title(s) of affected employees and how to notify.
(2) The authorized employee shall refer to the company procedure to
identify the type and magnitude of the energy that the machine or
equipment utilizes, shall understand the hazards of the energy, and
shall know the methods to control the energy.
________________________________________________________________________
[[Page 496]]
________________________________________________________________________
Type(s) and magnitude(s) of energy, its hazards and the methods to
control the energy.
(3) If the machine or equipment is operating, shut it down by the
normal stopping procedure (depress stop button, open switch, close
valve, etc.).
________________________________________________________________________
Type(s) and location(s) of machine or equipment operating controls.
(4) De-activate the energy isolating device(s) so that the machine
or equipment is isolated from the energy source(s).
________________________________________________________________________
Type(s) and location(s) of energy isolating devices.
(5) Lock out the energy isolating device(s) with assigned individual
lock(s).
(6) Stored or residual energy (such as that in capacitors, springs,
elevated machine members, rotating flywheels, hydraulic systems, and
air, gas, steam, or water pressure, etc.) must be dissipated or
restrained by methods such as grounding, repositioning, blocking,
bleeding down, etc.
________________________________________________________________________
Type(s) of stored energy--methods to dissipate or restrain.
(7) Ensure that the equipment is disconnected from the energy
source(s) by first checking that no personnel are exposed, then verify
the isolation of the equipment by operating the push button or other
normal operating control(s) or by testing to make certain the equipment
will not operate.
Caution: Return operating control(s) to neutral or ``off'' position
after verifying the isolation of the equipment.
________________________________________________________________________
Method of verifying the isolation of the equipment.
(8) The machine or equipment is now locked out.
Restoring Equipment to Service. When the servicing or maintenance is
completed and the machine or equipment is ready to return to normal
operating condition, the following steps shall be taken.
(1) Check the machine or equipment and the immediate area around the
machine or equipment to ensure that nonessential items have been removed
and that the machine or equipment components are operationally intact.
(2) Check the work area to ensure that all employees have been
safely positioned or removed from the area.
(3) Verify that the controls are in neutral.
(4) Remove the lockout devices and reenergize the machine or
equipment.
Note: The removal of some forms of blocking may require
reenergization of the machine before safe removal.
(5) Notify affected employees that the servicing or maintenance is
completed and the machine or equipment is ready for use.
[54 FR 36687, Sept. 1, 1989, as amended at 54 FR 42498, Oct. 17, 1989;
55 FR 38685, 38686, Sept. 20, 1990]
Subpart K--Medical and First Aid
Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order
No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), or 6-96
(62 FR 111), as applicable, 29 CFR part 1911.
Sec. 1910.151 Medical services and first aid.
(a) The employer shall ensure the ready availability of medical
personnel for advice and consultation on matters of plant health.
(b) In the absence of an infirmary, clinic, or hospital in near
proximity to the workplace which is used for the treatment of all
injured employees, a person or persons shall be adequately trained to
render first aid. Adequate first aid supplies shall be readily
available.
(c) Where the eyes or body of any person may be exposed to injurious
corrosive materials, suitable facilities for quick drenching or flushing
of the eyes and body shall be provided within the work area for
immediate emergency use.
Appendix A to Sec. 1910.151--First aid kits (Non-Mandatory)
First aid supplies are required to be readily available under
paragraph Sec. 1910.151(b). An example of the minimal contents of a
generic first aid kit is described in American National Standard (ANSI)
Z308.1-1978 ``Minimum Requirements for Industrial Unit-Type First-aid
Kits.'' The contents of the kit listed in the ANSI standard should be
adequate for small worksites. When larger operations or multiple
operations are being conducted at the same location, employers should
determine the need for additional first aid kits at the worksite,
additional types of first aid equipment and supplies and additional
quantities and types of supplies and equipment in the first aid kits.
In a similar fashion, employers who have unique or changing first-
aid needs in their workplace may need to enhance their first-aid kits.
The employer can use the OSHA 200 log, OSHA 101's or other reports to
identify these unique problems. Consultation from
[[Page 497]]
the local fire/rescue department, appropriate medical professional, or
local emergency room may be helpful to employers in these circumstances.
By assessing the specific needs of their workplace, employers can ensure
that reasonably anticipated supplies are available. Employers should
assess the specific needs of their worksite periodically and augment the
first aid kit appropriately.
If it is reasonably anticipated that employees will be exposed to
blood or other potentially infectious materials while using first aid
supplies, employers are required to provide appropriate personal
protective equipment (PPE) in compliance with the provisions of the
Occupational Exposure to Blood borne Pathogens standard,
Sec. 1910.1030(d)(3) (56 FR 64175). This standard lists appropriate PPE
for this type of exposure, such as gloves, gowns, face shields, masks,
and eye protection.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998]
Sec. 1910.152 [Reserved]
Subpart L--Fire Protection
Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order
No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), or 6-96
(62 FR 111) as applicable; 29 CFR part 1911.
Sec. 1910.155 Scope, application and definitions applicable to this subpart.
(a) Scope. This subpart contains requirements for fire brigades, and
all portable and fixed fire suppression equipment, fire detection
systems, and fire or employee alarm systems installed to meet the fire
protection requirements of 29 CFR part 1910.
(b) Application. This subpart applies to all employments except for
maritime, construction, and agriculture.
(c) Definitions applicable to this subpart. (1) After-flame means
the time a test specimen continues to flame after the flame source has
been removed.
(2) Aqueous film forming foam (AFFF) means a fluorinated surfactant
with a foam stabilizer which is diluted with water to act as a temporary
barrier to exclude air from mixing with the fuel vapor by developing an
aqueous film on the fuel surface of some hydrocarbons which is capable
of suppressing the generation of fuel vapors.
(3) Approved means acceptable to the Assistant Secretary under the
following criteria:
(i) If it is accepted, or certified, or listed, or labeled or
otherwise determined to be safe by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory; or
(ii) With respect to an installation or equipment of a kind which no
nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists,
labels, or determines to be safe, if it is inspected or tested by
another Federal agency and found in compliance with the provisions of
the applicable National Fire Protection Association Fire Code; or
(iii) With respect to custom-made equipment or related installations
which are designed, fabricated for, and intended for use by its
manufacturer on the basis of test data which the employer keeps and
makes available for inspection to the Assistant Secretary.
(iv) For the purposes of paragraph (c)(3) of this section:
(A) Equipment is listed if it is of a kind mentioned in a list which
is published by a nationally recognized testing laboratory which makes
periodic inspections of the production of such equipment and which
states that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has
been tested and found safe for use in a specified manner;
(B) Equipment is labeled if there is attached to it a label, symbol,
or other identifying mark of a nationally recognized testing laboratory
which makes periodic inspections of the production of such equipment,
and whose labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized
standards or tests to determine safe use in a specified manner;
(C) Equipment is accepted if it has been inspected and found by a
nationally recognized testing laboratory to conform to specified plans
or to procedures of applicable codes; and
(D) Equipment is certified if it has been tested and found by a
nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet nationally recognized
standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner or is of a kind
whose production is periodically inspected by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory, and if it bears a label, tag, or other record of
certification.
[[Page 498]]
(E) Refer to Sec. 1910.7 for definition of nationally recognized
testing laboratory.
(4) Assistant Secretary means the Assistant Secretary of Labor for
Occupational Safety and Health or designee.
(5) Automatic fire detection device means a device designed to
automatically detect the presence of fire by heat, flame, light, smoke
or other products of combustion.
(6) Buddy-breathing device means an accessory to self-contained
breathing apparatus which permits a second person to share the same air
supply as that of the wearer of the apparatus.
(7) Carbon dioxide means a colorless, odorless, electrically
nonconductive inert gas (chemical formula CO2) that is a
medium for extinguishing fires by reducing the concentration of oxygen
or fuel vapor in the air to the point where conbustion is impossible.
(8) Class A fire means a fire involving ordinary combustible
materials such as paper, wood, cloth, and some rubber and plastic
materials.
(9) Class B fire means a fire involving flammable or combustible
liquids, flammable gases, greases and similar materials, and some rubber
and plastic materials.
(10) Class C fire means a fire involving energized electrical
equipment where safety to the employee requires the use of electrically
nonconductive extinguishing media.
(11) Class D fire means a fire involving combustible metals such as
magnesium, titanium, zirconium, sodium, lithium and potassium.
(12) Dry chemical means an extinguishing agent composed of very
small particles of chemicals such as, but not limited to, sodium
bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, urea-based potassium bicarbonate,
potassium chloride, or monoammonium phosphate supplemented by special
treatment to provide resistance to packing and moisture absorption
(caking) as well as to provide proper flow capabilities. Dry chemical
does not include dry powders.
(13) Dry powder means an compound used to extinguish or control
Class D fires.
(14) Education means the process of imparting knowledge or skill
through systematic instruction. It does not require formal classroom
instruction.
(15) Enclosed structure means a structure with a roof or ceiling and
at least two walls which may present fire hazards to employees, such as
accumulations of smoke, toxic gases and heat, similar to those found in
buildings.
(16) Extinguisher classification means the letter classification
given an extinguisher to designate the class or classes of fire on which
an extinguisher will be effective.
(17) Extinguisher rating means the numerical rating given to an
extinguisher which indicates the extinguishing potential of the unit
based on standardized tests developed by Underwriters' Laboratories,
Inc.
(18) Fire brigade (private fire department, industrial fire
department) means an organized group of employees who are knowledgeable,
trained, and skilled in at least basic fire fighting operations.
(19) Fixed extinguishing system means a permanently installed system
that either extinguishes or controls a fire at the location of the
system.
(20) Flame resistance is the property of materials, or combinations
of component materials, to retard ignition and restrict the spread of
flame.
(21) Foam means a stable aggregation of small bubbles which flow
freely over a burning liquid surface and form a coherent blanket which
seals combustible vapors and thereby extinguishes the fire.
(22) Gaseous agent is a fire extinguishing agent which is in the
gaseous state at normal room temperature and pressure. It has low
viscosity, can expand or contract with changes in pressure and
temperature, and has the ability to diffuse readily and to distribute
itself uniformly throughout an enclosure.
(23) Halon 1211 means a colorless, faintly sweet smelling,
electrically nonconductive liquefied gas (chemical formula
CBrC1F2) which is a medium for extinguishing fires by
inhibiting the chemical chain reaction of fuel and oxygen. It is also
known as bromochlorodifluoromethane.
(24) Halon 1301 means a colorless, odorless, electrically
nonconductive gas (chemical formula CBrF3) which is
[[Page 499]]
a medium for extinguishing fires by inhibiting the chemical chain
reaction of fuel and oxygen. It is also known as bromotrifluoromethane.
(25) Helmet is a head protective device consisting of a rigid shell,
energy absorption system, and chin strap intended to be worn to provide
protection for the head or portions thereof, against impact, flying or
falling objects, electric shock, penetration, heat and flame.
(26) Incipient stage fire means a fire which is in the initial or
beginning stage and which can be controlled or extinguished by portable
fire extinguishers, Class II standpipe or small hose systems without the
need for protective clothing or breathing apparatus.
(27) Inspection means a visual check of fire protection systems and
equipment to ensure that they are in place, charged, and ready for use
in the event of a fire.
(28) Interior structural fire fighting means the physical activity
of fire suppression, rescue or both, inside of buildings or enclosed
structures which are involved in a fire situation beyond the incipient
stage.
(29) Lining means a material permanently attached to the inside of
the outer shell of a garment for the purpose of thermal protection and
padding.
(30) Local application system means a fixed fire suppression system
which has a supply of extinguishing agent, with nozzles arranged to
automatically discharge extinguishing agent directly on the burning
material to extinguish or control a fire.
(31) Maintenance means the performance of services on fire
protection equipment and systems to assure that they will perform as
expected in the event of a fire. Maintenance differs from inspection in
that maintenance requires the checking of internal fittings, devices and
agent supplies.
(32) Multipurpose dry chemical means a dry chemical which is
approved for use on Class A, Class B and Class C fires.
(33) Outer shell is the exterior layer of material on the fire coat
and protective trousers which forms the outermost barrier between the
fire fighter and the environment. It is attached to the vapor barrier
and liner and is usually constructed with a storm flap, suitable
closures, and pockets.
(34) Positive-pressure breathing apparatus means self-contained
breathing apparatus in which the pressure in the breathing zone is
positive in relation to the immediate environment during inhalation and
exhalation.
(35) Pre-discharge employee alarm means an alarm which will sound at
a set time prior to actual discharge of an extinguishing system so that
employees may evacuate the discharge area prior to system discharge.
(36) Quick disconnect valve means a device which starts the flow of
air by inserting of the hose (which leads from the facepiece) into the
regulator of self-contained breathing apparatus, and stops the flow of
air by disconnection of the hose from the regulator.
(37) Sprinkler alarm means an approved device installed so that any
waterflow from a sprinkler system equal to or greater than that from
single automatic sprinkler will result in an audible alarm signal on the
premises.
(38) Sprinkler system means a system of piping designed in
accordance with fire protection engineering standards and installed to
control or extinguish fires. The system includes an adequate and
reliable water supply, and a network of specially sized piping and
sprinklers which are interconnected. The system also includes a control
valve and a device for actuating an alarm when the system is in
operation.
(39) Standpipe systems. (i) Class I standpipe system means a 2\1/
2\ (6.3 cm) hose connection for use by fire departments and
those trained in handling heavy fire streams.
(ii) Class II standpipe system means a 1\1/2\ (3.8 cm)
hose system which provides a means for the control or extinguishment of
incipient stage fires.
(iii) Class III standpipe system means a combined system of hose
which is for the use of employees trained in the use of hose operations
and which is capable of furnishing effective water discharge during the
more advanced stages of fire (beyond the incipient stage) in the
interior of workplaces. Hose outlets are available for both 1\1/
2\ (3.8 cm) and 2\1/2\ (6.3 cm) hose.
[[Page 500]]
(iv) Small hose system means a system of hose ranging in diameter
from \5/8\ (1.6 cm up to 1\1/2\ (3.8 cm) which is
for the use of employees and which provides a means for the control and
extinguishment of incipient stage fires.
(40) Total flooding system means a fixed suppression system which is
arranged to automatically discharge a predetermined concentration of
agent into an enclosed space for the purpose of fire extinguishment or
control.
(41) Training means the process of making proficient through
instruction and hands-on practice in the operation of equipment,
including respiratory protection equipment, that is expected to be used
and in the performance of assigned duties.
(42) Vapor barrier means that material used to prevent or
substantially inhibit the transfer of water, corrosive liquids and steam
or other hot vapors from the outside of a garment to the wearer's body.
[45 FR 60704, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988]
Sec. 1910.156 Fire brigades.
(a) Scope and application--(1) Scope. This section contains
requirements for the organization, training, and personal protective
equipment of fire brigades whenever they are established by an employer.
(2) Application. The requirements of this section apply to fire
brigades, industrial fire departments and private or contractual type
fire departments. Personal protective equipment requirements apply only
to members of fire brigades performing interior structural fire
fighting. The requirements of this section do not apply to airport crash
rescue or forest fire fighting operations.
(b) Organization--(1) Organizational statement. The employer shall
prepare and maintain a statement or written policy which establishes the
existence of a fire brigade; the basic organizational structure; the
type, amount, and frequency of training to be provided to fire brigade
members; the expected number of members in the fire brigade; and the
functions that the fire brigade is to perform at the workplace. The
organizational statement shall be available for inspection by the
Assistant Secretary and by employees or their designated
representatives.
(2) Personnel. The employer shall assure that employees who are
expected to do interior structural fire fighting are physically capable
of performing duties which may be assigned to them during emergencies.
The employer shall not permit employees with known heart disease,
epilepsy, or emphysema, to participate in fire brigade emergency
activities unless a physician's certificate of the employees' fitness to
participate in such activities is provided. For employees assigned to
fire brigades before September 15, 1980, this paragraph is effective on
September 15, 1990. For employees assigned to fire brigades on or after
September 15, 1980, this paragraph is effective December 15, 1980.
(c) Training and education. (1) The employer shall provide training
and education for all fire brigade members commensurate with those
duties and functions that fire brigade members are expected to perform.
Such training and education shall be provided to fire brigade members
before they perform fire brigade emergency activities. Fire brigade
leaders and training instructors shall be provided with training and
education which is more comprehensive than that provided to the general
membership of the fire brigade.
(2) The employer shall assure that training and education is
conducted frequently enough to assure that each member of the fire
brigade is able to perform the member's assigned duties and functions
satisfactorily and in a safe manner so as not to endanger fire brigade
members or other employees. All fire brigade members shall be provided
with training at least annually. In addition, fire brigade members who
are expected to perform interior structural fire fighting shall be
provided with an education session or training at least quarterly.
(3) The quality of the training and education program for fire
brigade members shall be similar to those conducted by such fire
training schools as the Maryland Fire and Rescue Institute; Iowa Fire
Service Extension; West Virginia Fire Service Extension; Georgia Fire
Academy, New York State Department, Fire Prevention and
[[Page 501]]
Control; Louisiana State University Firemen Training Program, or
Washington State's Fire Service Training Commission for Vocational
Education. (For example, for the oil refinery industry, with its unique
hazards, the training and education program for those fire brigade
members shall be similar to those conducted by Texas A & M University,
Lamar University, Reno Fire School, or the Delaware State Fire School.)
(4) The employer shall inform fire brigade members about special
hazards such as storage and use of flammable liquids and gases, toxic
chemicals, radioactive sources, and water reactive substances, to which
they may be exposed during fire and other emergencies. The fire brigade
members shall also be advised of any changes that occur in relation to
the special hazards. The employer shall develop and make available for
inspection by fire brigade members, written procedures that describe the
actions to be taken in situations involving the special hazards and
shall include these in the training and education program.
(d) Fire fighting equipment. The employer shall maintain and
inspect, at least annually, fire fighting equipment to assure the safe
operational condition of the equipment. Portable fire extinguishers and
respirators shall be inspected at least monthly. Fire fighting equipment
that is in damaged or unserviceable condition shall be removed from
service and replaced.
(e) Protective clothing. The following requirements apply to those
employees who perform interior structural fire fighting. The
requirements do not apply to employees who use fire extinguishers or
standpipe systems to control or extinguish fires only in the incipient
stage.
(1) General. (i) The employer shall provide at no cost to the
employee and assure the use of protective clothing which complies with
the requirements of this paragraph. The employer shall assure that
protective clothing ordered or purchased after July 1, 1981, meets the
requirements contained in this paragraph. As the new equipment is
provided, the employer shall assure that all fire brigade members wear
the equipment when performing interior structural fire fighting. After
July 1, 1985, the employer shall assure that all fire brigade members
wear protective clothing meeting the requirements of this paragraph when
performing interior structural fire fighting.
(ii) The employer shall assure that protective clothing protects the
head, body, and extremities, and consists of at least the following
components: foot and leg protection; hand protection; body protection;
eye, face and head protection.
(2) Foot and leg protection. (i) Foot and leg protection shall meet
the requirements of paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) and (e)(2)(iii) of this
section, and may be achieved by either of the following methods:
(A) Fully extended boots which provide protection for the legs; or
(B) Protective shoes or boots worn in combination with protective
trousers that meet the requirements of paragraph (e)(3) of this section.
(ii) Protective footwear shall meet the requirements of
Sec. 1910.136 for Class 75 footwear. In addition, protective footwear
shall be water-resistant for at least 5 inches (12.7 cm) above the
bottom of the heel and shall be equipped with slip-resistant outer
soles.
(iii) Protective footwear shall be tested in accordance with
paragraph (1) of appendix E, and shall provide protection against
penetration of the midsole by a size 8D common nail when at least 300
pounds (1330 N) of static force is applied to the nail.
(3) Body protection. (i) Body protection shall be coordinated with
foot and leg protection to ensure full body protection for the wearer.
This shall be achieved by one of the following methods:
(A) Wearing of a fire-resistive coat meeting the requirements of
paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section in combination with fully extended
boots meeting the requirements of paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) and (e)(2)(iii)
of this section; or
(B) Wearing of a fire-resistive coat in combination with protective
trousers both of which meet the requirements of paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of
this section.
(ii) The performance, construction, and testing of fire-resistive
coats and protective trousers shall be at least equivalent to the
requirements of the
[[Page 502]]
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) standard NFPA No. 1971-1975,
``Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fighting,'' which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, (See appendix D
to subpart L) with the following permissible variations from those
requirements:
(A) Tearing strength of the outer shell shall be a minimum of 8
pounds (35.6 N) in any direction when tested in accordance with
paragraph (2) of appendix E; and
(B) The outer shell may discolor but shall not separate or melt when
placed in a forced air laboratory oven at a temperature of 500 deg.F
(260 deg.C) for a period of five minutes. After cooling to ambient
temperature and using the test method specified in paragraph (3) of
appendix E, char length shall not exceed 4.0 inches (10.2 cm) and after-
flame shall not exceed 2.0 seconds.
(4) Hand protection. (i) Hand protection shall consist of protective
gloves or glove system which will provide protection against cut,
puncture, and heat penetration. Gloves or glove system shall be tested
in accordance with the test methods contained in the National Institute
for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) 1976 publication, ``The
Development of Criteria for Fire Fighter's Gloves; Vol. II, Part II:
Test Methods,'' which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6, (See appendix D to subpart L) and shall meet the following
criteria for cut, puncture, and heat penetration:
(A) Materials used for gloves shall resist surface cut by a blade
with an edge having a 60 deg. included angle and a .001 inch (.0025 cm.)
radius, under an applied force of 16 lbf (72N), and at a slicing
velocity of greater or equal to 60 in/min (2.5 cm./sec);
(B) Materials used for the palm and palm side of the fingers shall
resist puncture by a penetrometer (simulating a 4d lath nail), under an
applied force of 13.2 lbf (60N), and at a velocity greater or equal to
20 in/min (.85 cm./sec); and
(C) The temperature inside the palm and gripping surface of the
fingers of gloves shall not exceed 135 deg.F (57 deg.C) when gloves or
glove system are exposed to 932 deg.F (500 deg.C) for five seconds at
4 psi (28 kPa) pressure.
(ii) Exterior materials of gloves shall be flame resistant and shall
be tested in accordance with paragraph (3) of appendix E. Maximum
allowable afterflame shall be 2.0 seconds, and the maximum char length
shall be 4.0 inches (10.2 cm).
(iii) When design of the fire-resistive coat does not otherwise
provide protection for the wrists, protective gloves shall have
wristlets of at least 4.0 inches (10.2 cm) in length to protect the
wrist area when the arms are extended upward and outward from the body.
(5) Head, eye and face protection. (i) Head protection shall consist
of a protective head device with ear flaps and chin strap which meet the
performance, construction, and testing requirements of the National Fire
Safety and Research Office of the National Fire Prevention and Control
Administration, U.S. Department of Commerce (now known as the U.S. Fire
Administration), which are contained in ``Model Performance Criteria for
Structural Firefighters' Helmets'' (August 1977) which is incorporated
by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, (See appendix D to subpart L).
(ii) Protective eye and face devices which comply with Sec. 1910.133
shall be used by fire brigade members when performing operations where
the hazards of flying or falling materials which may cause eye and face
injuries are present. Protective eye and face devices provided as
accessories to protective head devices (face shields) are permitted when
such devices meet the requirements of Sec. 1910.133.
(iii) Full facepieces, helmets, or hoods of breathing apparatus
which meet the requirements of Sec. 1910.134 and paragraph (f) of this
section, shall be acceptable as meeting the eye and face protection
requirements of paragraph (e)(5)(ii) of this section.
(f) Respiratory protection devices. (1) General requirements. (i)
The employer must ensure that respirators are provided to, and used by,
fire brigade members, and that the respirators meet the requirements of
29 CFR 1910.134 and this paragraph.
(ii) Approved self-contained breathing apparatus with full-
facepiece, or
[[Page 503]]
with approved helmet or hood configuration, shall be provided to and
worn by fire brigade members while working inside buildings or confined
spaces where toxic products of combustion or an oxygen deficiency may be
present.
Such apparatus shall also be worn during emergency situations involving
toxic substances.
(iii) Approved self-contained breathing apparatus may be equipped
with either a ``buddy-breathing'' device or a quick disconnect valve,
even if these devices are not certified by NIOSH. If these accessories
are used, they shall not cause damage to the apparatus, or restrict the
air flow of the apparatus, or obstruct the normal operation of the
apparatus.
(iv) Approved self-contained compressed air breathing apparatus may
be used with approved cylinders from other approved self-contained
compressed air breathing apparatus provided that such cylinders are of
the same capacity and pressure rating. All compressed air cylinders used
with self-contained breathing apparatus shall meet DOT and NIOSH
criteria.
(v) Self-contained breathing apparatuses must have a minimum
service-life rating of 30 minutes in accordance with the methods and
requirements specified by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84, except for escape
self-contained breathing apparatus (ESCBAs) used only for emergency
escape purposes.
(vi) Self-contained breathing apparatus shall be provided with an
indicator which automatically sounds an audible alarm when the remaining
service life of the apparatus is reduced to within a range of 20 to 25
percent of its rated service time.
(2) Positive-pressure breathing apparatus. (i) The employer shall
assure that self-contained breathing apparatus ordered or purchased
after July 1, 1981, for use by fire brigade members performing interior
structural fire fighting operations, are of the pressure-demand or other
positive-pressure type. Effective July 1, 1983, only pressure-demand or
other positive-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus shall be worn
by fire brigade members performing interior structural fire fighting.
(ii) This paragraph does not prohibit the use of a self-contained
breathing apparatus where the apparatus can be switched from a demand to
a positive-pressure mode. However, such apparatus shall be in the
positive-pressure mode when fire brigade members are performing interior
structural fire fighting operations.
[45 FR 60706, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981; 49 FR 18295,
Apr. 30, 1984; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1284, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR
33467, June 18, 1998]
Portable Fire Suppression Equipment
Sec. 1910.157 Portable fire extinguishers.
(a) Scope and application. The requirements of this section apply to
the placement, use, maintenance, and testing of portable fire
extinguishers provided for the use of employees. Paragraph (d) of this
section does not apply to extinguishers provided for employee use on the
outside of workplace buildings or structures. Where extinguishers are
provided but are not intended for employee use and the employer has an
emergency action plan and a fire prevention plan which meet the
requirements of Sec. 1910.38, then only the requirements of paragraphs
(e) and (f) of this section apply.
(b) Exemptions. (1) Where the employer has established and
implemented a written fire safety policy which requires the immediate
and total evacuation of employees from the workplace upon the sounding
of a fire alarm signal and which includes an emergency action plan and a
fire prevention plan which meet the requirements of Sec. 1910.38, and
when extinguishers are not available in the workplace, the employer is
exempt from all requirements of this section unless a specific standard
in part 1910 requires that a portable fire extinguisher be provided.
(2) Where the employer has an emergency action plan meeting the
requirements of Sec. 1910.38 which designates certain employees to be
the only employees authorized to use the available portable fire
extinguishers, and which requires all other employees in the fire area
to immediately evacuate the affected work area upon the sounding of
[[Page 504]]
the fire alarm, the employer is exempt from the distribution
requirements in paragraph (d) of this section.
(c) General requirements. (1) The employer shall provide portable
fire extinguishers and shall mount, locate and identify them so that
they are readily accessible to employees without subjecting the
employees to possible injury.
(2) Only approved portable fire extinguishers shall be used to meet
the requirements of this section.
(3) The employer shall not provide or make available in the
workplace portable fire extinguishers using carbon tetrachloride or
chlorobromomethane extinguishing agents.
(4) The employer shall assure that portable fire extinguishers are
maintained in a fully charged and operable condition and kept in their
designated places at all times except during use.
(5) The employer shall remove from service all soldered or riveted
shell self-generating soda acid or self-generating foam or gas cartridge
water type portable fire extinguishers which are operated by inverting
the extinguisher to rupture the cartridge or to initiate an
uncontrollable pressure generating chemical reaction to expel the agent.
(d) Selection and distribution. (1) Portable fire extinguishers
shall be provided for employee use and selected and distributed based on
the classes of anticipated workplace fires and on the size and degree of
hazard which would affect their use.
(2) The employer shall distribute portable fire extinguishers for
use by employees on Class A fires so that the travel distance for
employees to any extinguisher is 75 feet (22.9 m) or less.
(3) The employer may use uniformly spaced standpipe systems or hose
stations connected to a sprinkler system installed for emergency use by
employees instead of Class A portable fire extinguishers, provided that
such systems meet the respective requirements of Sec. 1910.158 or
Sec. 1910.159, that they provide total coverage of the area to be
protected, and that employees are trained at least annually in their
use.
(4) The employer shall distribute portable fire extinguishers for
use by employees on Class B fires so that the travel distance from the
Class B hazard area to any extinguisher is 50 feet (15.2 m) or less.
(5) The employer shall distribute portable fire extinguishers used
for Class C hazards on the basis of the appropriate pattern for the
existing Class A or Class B hazards.
(6) The employer shall distribute portable fire extinguishers or
other containers of Class D extinguishing agent for use by employees so
that the travel distance from the combustible metal working area to any
extinguishing agent is 75 feet (22.9 m) or less. Portable fire
extinguishers for Class D hazards are required in those combustible
metal working areas where combustible metal powders, flakes, shavings,
or similarly sized products are generated at least once every two weeks.
(e) Inspection, maintenance and testing. (1) The employer shall be
responsible for the inspection, maintenance and testing of all portable
fire extinguishers in the workplace.
(2) Portable extinguishers or hose used in lieu thereof under
paragraph (d)(3) of this section shall be visually inspected monthly.
(3) The employer shall assure that portable fire extinguishers are
subjected to an annual maintenance check. Stored pressure extinguishers
do not require an internal examination. The employer shall record the
annual maintenance date and retain this record for one year after the
last entry or the life of the shell, whichever is less. The record shall
be available to the Assistant Secretary upon request.
(4) The employer shall assure that stored pressure dry chemical
extinguishers that require a 12-year hydrostatic test are emptied and
subjected to applicable maintenance procedures every 6 years. Dry
chemical extinguishers having non-refillable disposable containers are
exempt from this requirement. When recharging or hydrostatic testing is
performed, the 6-year requirement begins from that date.
(5) The employer shall assure that alternate equivalent protection
is provided when portable fire extinguishers are removed from service
for maintenance and recharging.
[[Page 505]]
(f) Hydrostatic testing. (1) The employer shall assure that
hydrostatic testing is performed by trained persons with suitable
testing equipment and facilities.
(2) The employer shall assure that portable extinguishers are
hydrostatically tested at the intervals listed in Table L-1 of this
section, except under any of the following conditions:
(i) When the unit has been repaired by soldering, welding, brazing,
or use of patching compounds;
(ii) When the cylinder or shell threads are damaged;
(iii) When there is corrosion that has caused pitting, including
corrosion under removable name plate assemblies;
(iv) When the extinguisher has been burned in a fire; or
(v) When a calcium chloride extinguishing agent has been used in a
stainless steel shell.
(3) In addition to an external visual examination, the employer
shall assure that an internal examination of cylinders and shells to be
tested is made prior to the hydrostatic tests.
Table L-1
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Test
Type of extinguishers interval
(years)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Soda acid (soldered brass shells) (until 1/1/82).............. (\1\)
Soda acid (stainless steel shell)............................. 5
Cartridge operated water and/or antifreeze.................... 5
Stored pressure water and/or antifreeze....................... 5
Wetting agent................................................. 5
Foam (soldered brass shells) (until 1/1/82)................... (\1\)
Foam (stainless steel shell).................................. 5
Aqueous Film Forming foam (AFFF).............................. 5
Loaded stream................................................. 5
Dry chemical with stainless steel............................. 5
Carbon dioxide................................................ 5
Dry chemical, stored pressure, with mild steel, brazed brass 12
or aluminum shells...........................................
Dry chemical, cartridge or cylinder operated, with mild steel 12
shells.......................................................
Halon 1211.................................................... 12
Halon 1301.................................................... 12
Dry powder, cartridge or cylinder operated with mild steel 12
shells.......................................................
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Extinguishers having shells constructed of copper or brass joined by
soft solder or rivets shall not be hydrostatically tested and shall be
removed from service by January 1, 1982. (Not permitted)
(4) The employer shall assure that portable fire extinguishers are
hydrostatically tested whenever they show new evidence of corrosion or
mechanical injury, except under the conditions listed in paragraphs
(f)(2)(i)-(v) of this section.
(5) The employer shall assure that hydrostatic tests are performed
on extinguisher hose assemblies which are equipped with a shut-off
nozzle at the discharge end of the hose. The test interval shall be the
same as specified for the extinguisher on which the hose is installed.
(6) The employer shall assure that carbon dioxide hose assemblies
with a shut-off nozzle are hydrostatically tested at 1,250 psi (8,620
kPa).
(7) The employer shall assure that dry chemical and dry powder hose
assemblies with a shut-off nozzle are hydrostatically tested at 300 psi
(2,070 kPa).
(8) Hose assemblies passing a hydrostatic test do not require any
type of recording or stamping.
(9) The employer shall assure that hose assemblies for carbon
dioxide extinguishers that require a hydrostatic test are tested within
a protective cage device.
(10) The employer shall assure that carbon dioxide extinguishers and
nitrogen or carbon dioxide cylinders used with wheeled extinguishers are
tested every 5 years at 5/3 of the service pressure as stamped into the
cylinder. Nitrogen cylinders which comply with 49 CFR 173.34(e)(15) may
be hydrostatically tested every 10 years.
(11) The employer shall assure that all stored pressure and Halon
1211 types of extinguishers are hydrostatically tested at the factory
test pressure not to exceed two times the service pressure.
(12) The employer shall assure that acceptable self-generating type
soda acid and foam extinguishers are tested at 350 psi (2,410 kPa).
(13) Air or gas pressure may not be used for hydrostatic testing.
(14) Extinguisher shells, cylinders, or cartridges which fail a
hydrostatic pressure test, or which are not fit for testing shall be
removed from service and from the workplace.
(15)(i) The equipment for testing compressed gas type cylinders
shall be of the water jacket type. The equipment shall be provided with
an expansion indicator which operates with an
[[Page 506]]
accuracy within one percent of the total expansion or .1cc (.1mL) of
liquid.
(ii) The equipment for testing non-compressed gas type cylinders
shall consist of the following:
(A) A hydrostatic test pump, hand or power operated, capable of
producing not less than 150 percent of the test pressure, which shall
include appropriate check valves and fittings;
(B) A flexible connection for attachment to fittings to test through
the extinguisher nozzle, test bonnet, or hose outlet, as is applicable;
and
(C) A protective cage or barrier for personal protection of the
tester, designed to provide visual observation of the extinguisher under
test.
(16) The employer shall maintain and provide upon request to the
Assistant Secretary evidence that the required hydrostatic testing of
fire extinguishers has been performed at the time intervals shown in
Table L-1. Such evidence shall be in the form of a certification record
which includes the date of the test, the signature of the person who
performed the test and the serial number, or other identifier, of the
fire extinguisher that was tested. Such records shall be kept until the
extinguisher is hydrostatically retested at the time interval specified
in Table L-1 or until the extinguisher is taken out of service,
whichever comes first.
(g) Training and education. (1) Where the employer has provided
portable fire extinguishers for employee use in the workplace, the
employer shall also provide an educational program to familiarize
employees with the general principles of fire extinguisher use and the
hazards involved with incipient stage fire fighting.
(2) The employer shall provide the education required in paragraph
(g)(1) of this section upon initial employment and at least annually
thereafter.
(3) The employer shall provide employees who have been designated to
use fire fighting equipment as part of an emergency action plan with
training in the use of the appropriate equipment.
(4) The employer shall provide the training required in paragraph
(g)(3) of this section upon initial assignment to the designated group
of employees and at least annually thereafter.
[45 FR 60708, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981, as amended at 51
FR 34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.158 Standpipe and hose systems.
(a) Scope and application--(1) Scope. This section applies to all
small hose, Class II, and Class III standpipe systems installed to meet
the requirements of a particular OSHA standard.
(2) Exception. This section does not apply to Class I standpipe
systems.
(b) Protection of standpipes. The employer shall assure that
standpipes are located or otherwise protected against mechanical damage.
Damaged standpipes shall be repaired promptly.
(c) Equipment--(1) Reels and cabinets. Where reels or cabinets are
provided to contain fire hose, the employer shall assure that they are
designed to facilitate prompt use of the hose valves, the hose, and
other equipment at the time of a fire or other emergency. The employer
shall assure that the reels and cabinets are conspicuously identified
and used only for fire equipment.
(2) Hose outlets and connections. (i) The employer shall assure that
hose outlets and connections are located high enough above the floor to
avoid being obstructed and to be accessible to employees.
(ii) The employer shall standardize screw threads or provide
appropriate adapters throughout the system and assure that the hose
connections are compatible with those used on the supporting fire
equipment.
(3) Hose. (i) The employer shall assure that every 1\1/2\
(3.8 cm) or smaller hose outlet used to meet this standard is equipped
with hose connected and ready for use. In extremely cold climates where
such installation may result in damaged equipment, the hose may be
stored in another location provided it is readily available and can be
connected when needed.
(ii) Standpipe systems installed after January 1, 1981, for use by
employees, shall be equipped with lined hose. Unlined hose may remain in
use on existing systems. However, after the effective date of this
standard, unlined hose which becomes unserviceable shall be replaced
with lined hose.
[[Page 507]]
(iii) The employer shall provide hose of such length that friction
loss resulting from water flowing through the hose will not decrease the
pressure at the nozzle below 30 psi (210 kPa). The dynamic pressure at
the nozzle shall be within the range of 30 psi (210 kPa) to 125 psi (860
kPa).
(4) Nozzles. The employer shall assure that standpipe hose is
equipped with shut-off type nozzles.
(d) Water supply. The minimum water supply for standpipe and hose
systems, which are provided for the use of employees, shall be
sufficient to provide 100 gallons per minute (6.3 l/s) for a period of
at least thirty minutes.
(e) Tests and maintenance--(1) Acceptance tests. (i) The employer
shall assure that the piping of Class II and Class III systems installed
after January 1, 1981, including yard piping, is hydrostatically tested
for a period of at least 2 hours at not less than 200 psi (1380 kPa), or
at least 50 psi (340 kPa) in excess of normal pressure when such
pressure is greater than 150 psi (1030 kPa).
(ii) The employer shall assure that hose on all standpipe systems
installed after January 1, 1981, is hydrostatically tested with
couplings in place, at a pressure of not less than 200 psi (1380 kPa),
before it is placed in service. This pressure shall be maintained for at
least 15 seconds and not more than one minute during which time the hose
shall not leak nor shall any jacket thread break during the test.
(2) Maintenance. (i) The employer shall assure that water supply
tanks are kept filled to the proper level except during repairs. When
pressure tanks are used, the employer shall assure that proper pressure
is maintained at all times except during repairs.
(ii) The employer shall assure that valves in the main piping
connections to the automatic sources of water supply are kept fully open
at all times except during repair.
(iii) The employer shall assure that hose systems are inspected at
least annually and after each use to assure that all of the equipment
and hose are in place, available for use, and in serviceable condition.
(iv) When the system or any portion thereof is found not to be
serviceable, the employer shall remove it from service immediately and
replace it with equivalent protection such as extinguishers and fire
watches.
(v) The employer shall assure that hemp or linen hose on existing
systems is unracked, physically inspected for deterioration, and
reracked using a different fold pattern at least annually. The employer
shall assure that defective hose is replaced in accordance with
paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of this section.
(vi) The employer shall designate trained persons to conduct all
inspections required under this section.
[45 FR 60710, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
Fixed Fire Suppression Equipment
Sec. 1910.159 Automatic sprinkler systems.
(a) Scope and application. (1) The requirements of this section
apply to all automatic sprinkler systems installed to meet a particular
OSHA standard.
(2) For automatic sprinkler systems used to meet OSHA requirements
and installed prior to the effective date of this standard, compliance
with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) or the National
Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU) standard in effect at the time of the
system's installation will be acceptable as compliance with this
section.
(b) Exemptions. Automatic sprinkler systems installed in workplaces,
but not required by OSHA, are exempt from the requirements of this
section.
(c) General requirements--(1) Design. (i) All automatic sprinkler
designs used to comply with this standard shall provide the necessary
discharge patterns, densities, and water flow characteristics for
complete coverage in a particular workplace or zoned subdivision of the
workplace.
(ii) The employer shall assure that only approved equipment and
devices are used in the design and installation of automatic sprinkler
systems used to comply with this standard.
(2) Maintenance. The employer shall properly maintain an automatic
sprinkler system installed to comply with this section. The employer
shall assure that a main drain flow test is performed on each system
annually. The
[[Page 508]]
inspector's test valve shall be opened at least every two years to
assure that the sprinkler system operates properly.
(3) Acceptance tests. The employer shall conduct proper acceptance
tests on sprinkler systems installed for employee protection after
January 1, 1981, and record the dates of such tests. Proper acceptance
tests include the following:
(i) Flushing of underground connections;
(ii) Hydrostatic tests of piping in system;
(iii) Air tests in dry-pipe systems;
(iv) Dry-pipe valve operation; and
(v) Test of drainage facilities.
(4) Water supplies. The employer shall assure that every automatic
sprinkler system is provided with at least one automatic water supply
capable of providing design water flow for at least 30 minutes. An
auxiliary water supply or equivalent protection shall be provided when
the automatic water supply is out of service, except for systems of 20
or fewer sprinklers.
(5) Hose connections for fire fighting use. The employer may attach
hose connections for fire fighting use to wet pipe sprinkler systems
provided that the water supply satisfies the combined design demand for
sprinklers and standpipes.
(6) Protection of piping. The employer shall assure that automatic
sprinkler system piping is protected against freezing and exterior
surface corrosion.
(7) Drainage. The employer shall assure that all dry sprinkler pipes
and fittings are installed so that the system may be totally drained.
(8) Sprinklers. (i) The employer shall assure that only approved
sprinklers are used on systems.
(ii) The employer may not use older style sprinklers to replace
standard sprinklers without a complete engineering review of the altered
part of the system.
(iii) The employer shall assure that sprinklers are protected from
mechanical damage.
(9) Sprinkler alarms. On all sprinkler systems having more than
twenty (20) sprinklers, the employer shall assure that a local waterflow
alarm is provided which sounds an audible signal on the premises upon
water flow through the system equal to the flow from a single sprinkler.
(10) Sprinkler spacing. The employer shall assure that sprinklers
are spaced to provide a maximum protection area per sprinkler, a minimum
of interference to the discharge pattern by building or structural
members or building contents and suitable sensitivity to possible fire
hazards. The minimum vertical clearance between sprinklers and material
below shall be 18 inches (45.7 cm).
(11) Hydraulically designed systems. The employer shall assure that
hydraulically designed automatic sprinkler systems or portions thereof
are identified and that the location, number of sprinklers in the
hydraulically designed section, and the basis of the design is
indicated. Central records may be used in lieu of signs at sprinkler
valves provided the records are available for inspection and copying by
the Assistant Secretary.
[45 FR 60710, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981]
Sec. 1910.160 Fixed extinguishing systems, general.
(a) Scope and application. (1) This section applies to all fixed
extinguishing systems installed to meet a particular OSHA standard
except for automatic sprinkler systems which are covered by
Sec. 1910.159.
(2) This section also applies to fixed systems not installed to meet
a particular OSHA standard, but which, by means of their operation, may
expose employees to possible injury, death, or adverse health
consequences caused by the extinguishing agent. Such systems are only
subject to the requirements of paragraphs (b)(4) through (b)(7) and (c)
of this section.
(3) Systems otherwise covered in paragraph (a)(2) of this section
which are installed in areas with no employee exposure are exempted from
the requirements of this section.
(b) General requirements. (1) Fixed extinguishing system components
and agents shall be designed and approved for use on the specific fire
hazards they are expected to control or extinguish.
(2) If for any reason a fixed extinguishing system becomes
inoperable, the employer shall notify employees
[[Page 509]]
and take the necessary temporary precautions to assure their safety
until the system is restored to operating order. Any defects or
impairments shall be properly corrected by trained personnel.
(3) The employer shall provide a distinctive alarm or signaling
system which complies with Sec. 1910.165 and is capable of being
perceived above ambient noise or light levels, on all extinguishing
systems in those portions of the workplace covered by the extinguishing
system to indicate when the extinguishing system is discharging.
Discharge alarms are not required on systems where discharge is
immediately recognizable.
(4) The employer shall provide effective safeguards to warn
employees against entry into discharge areas where the atmosphere
remains hazardous to employee safety or health.
(5) The employer shall post hazard warning or caution signs at the
entrance to, and inside of, areas protected by fixed extinguishing
systems which use agents in concentrations known to be hazardous to
employee safety and health.
(6) The employer shall assure that fixed systems are inspected
annually by a person knowledgeable in the design and function of the
system to assure that the system is maintained in good operating
condition.
(7) The employer shall assure that the weight and pressure of
refillable containers is checked at least semi-annually. If the
container shows a loss in net content or weight of more than 5 percent,
or a loss in pressure of more than 10 percent, it shall be subjected to
maintenance.
(8) The employer shall assure that factory charged nonrefillable
containers which have no means of pressure indication are weighed at
least semi-annually. If a container shows a loss in net weight or more
than 5 percent it shall be replaced.
(9) The employer shall assure that inspection and maintenance dates
are recorded on the container, on a tag attached to the container, or in
a central location. A record of the last semi-annual check shall be
maintained until the container is checked again or for the life of the
container, whichever is less.
(10) The employer shall train employees designated to inspect,
maintain, operate, or repair fixed extinguishing systems and annually
review their training to keep them up-to-date in the functions they are
to perform.
(11) The employer shall not use chlorobromomethane or carbon
tetrachloride as an extinguishing agent where employees may be exposed.
(12) The employer shall assure that systems installed in the
presence of corrosive atmospheres are constructed of non-corrosive
material or otherwise protected against corrosion.
(13) Automatic detection equipment shall be approved, installed and
maintained in accordance with Sec. 1910.164.
(14) The employer shall assure that all systems designed for and
installed in areas with climatic extremes shall operate effectively at
the expected extreme temperatures.
(15) The employer shall assure that at least one manual station is
provided for discharge activation of each fixed extinguishing system.
(16) The employer shall assure that manual operating devices are
identified as to the hazard against which they will provide protection.
(17) The employer shall provide and assure the use of the personal
protective equipment needed for immediate rescue of employees trapped in
hazardous atmospheres created by an agent discharge.
(c) Total flooding systems with potential health and safety hazards
to employees. (1) The employer shall provide an emergency action plan in
accordance with Sec. 1910.38 for each area within a workplace that is
protected by a total flooding system which provides agent concentrations
exceeding the maximum safe levels set forth in paragraphs (b)(5) and
(b)(6) of Sec. 1910.162.
(2) Systems installed in areas where employees cannot enter during
or after the system's operation are exempt from the requirements of
paragraph (c) of this section.
(3) On all total flooding systems the employer shall provide a pre-
discharge employee alarm which complies with Sec. 1910.165, and is
capable of being perceived above ambient light or noise
[[Page 510]]
levels before the system discharges, which will give employees time to
safely exit from the discharge area prior to system discharge.
(4) The employer shall provide automatic actuation of total flooding
systems by means of an approved fire detection device installed and
interconnected with a pre-discharge employee alarm system to give
employees time to safely exit from the discharge area prior to system
discharge.
[45 FR 60711, Sept. 12, 1980]
Sec. 1910.161 Fixed extinguishing systems, dry chemical.
(a) Scope and application. This section applies to all fixed
extinguishing systems, using dry chemical as the extinguishing agent,
installed to meet a particular OSHA standard. These systems shall also
comply with Sec. 1910.160.
(b) Specific requirements. (1) The employer shall assure that dry
chemical agents are compatible with any foams or wetting agents with
which they are used.
(2) The employer may not mix together dry chemical extinguishing
agents of different compositions. The employer shall assure that dry
chemical systems are refilled with the chemical stated on the approval
nameplate or an equivalent compatible material.
(3) When dry chemical discharge may obscure vision, the employer
shall provide a pre-discharge employee alarm which complies with
Sec. 1910.165 and which will give employees time to safely exit from the
discharge area prior to system discharge.
(4) The employer shall sample the dry chemical supply of all but
stored pressure systems at least annually to assure that the dry
chemical supply is free of moisture which may cause the supply to cake
or form lumps.
(5) The employer shall assure that the rate of application of dry
chemicals is such that the designed concentration of the system will be
reached within 30 seconds of initial discharge.
[45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980]
Sec. 1910.162 Fixed extinguishing systems, gaseous agent.
(a) Scope and application--(1) Scope. This section applies to all
fixed extinguishing systems, using a gas as the extinguishing agent,
installed to meet a particular OSHA standard. These systems shall also
comply with Sec. 1910.160. In some cases, the gas may be in a liquid
state during storage.
(2) Application. The requirements of paragraphs (b)(2) and (b)(4)
through (b)(6) shall apply only to total flooding systems.
(b) Specific requirements. (1) Agents used for initial supply and
replenishment shall be of the type approved for the system's
application. Carbon dioxide obtained by dry ice conversion to liquid is
not acceptable unless it is processed to remove excess water and oil.
(2) Except during overhaul, the employer shall assure that the
designed concentration of gaseous agents is maintained until the fire
has been extinguished or is under control.
(3) The employer shall assure that employees are not exposed to
toxic levels of gaseous agent or its decomposition products.
(4) The employer shall assure that the designed extinguishing
concentration is reached within 30 seconds of initial discharge except
for Halon systems which must achieve design concentration within 10
seconds.
(5) The employer shall provide a distinctive pre-discharge employee
alarm capable of being perceived above ambient light or noise levels
when agent design concentrations exceed the maximum safe level for
employee exposure. A pre-discharge employee alarm for alerting employees
before system discharge shall be provided on Halon 1211 and carbon
dioxide systems with a design concentration of 4 percent or greater and
for Halon 1301 systems with a design concentration of 10 percent or
greater. The pre-discharge employee alarm shall provide employees time
to safely exit the discharge area prior to system discharge.
(6)(i) Where egress from an area cannot be accomplished within one
minute, the employer shall not use
[[Page 511]]
Halon 1301 in concentrations greater than 7 percent.
(ii) Where egress takes greater than 30 seconds but less than one
minute, the employer shall not use Halon 1301 in a concentration greater
than 10 percent.
(iii) Halon 1301 concentrations greater than 10 percent are only
permitted in areas not normally occupied by employees provided that any
employee in the area can escape within 30 seconds. The employer shall
assure that no unprotected employees enter the area during agent
discharge.
[45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981]
Sec. 1910.163 Fixed extinguishing systems, water spray and foam.
(a) Scope and application. This section applies to all fixed
extinguishing systems, using water or foam solution as the extinguishing
agent, installed to meet a particular OSHA standard. These systems shall
also comply with Sec. 1910.160. This section does not apply to automatic
sprinkler systems which are covered under Sec. 1910.159.
(b) Specific requirements. (1) The employer shall assure that foam
and water spray systems are designed to be effective in at least
controlling fire in the protected area or on protected equipment.
(2) The employer shall assure that drainage of water spray systems
is directed away from areas where employees are working and that no
emergency egress is permitted through the drainage path.
[45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980]
Other Fire Protection Systems
Sec. 1910.164 Fire detection systems.
(a) Scope and application. This section applies to all automatic
fire detection systems installed to meet the requirements of a
particular OSHA standard.
(b) Installation and restoration. (1) The employer shall assure that
all devices and equipment constructed and installed to comply with this
standard are approved for the purpose for which they are intended.
(2) The employer shall restore all fire detection systems and
components to normal operating condition as promptly as possible after
each test or alarm. Spare detection devices and components which are
normally destroyed in the process of detecting fires shall be available
on the premises or from a local supplier in sufficient quantities and
locations for prompt restoration of the system.
(c) Maintenance and testing. (1) The employer shall maintain all
systems in an operable condition except during repairs or maintenance.
(2) The employer shall assure that fire detectors and fire detection
systems are tested and adjusted as often as needed to maintain proper
reliability and operating condition except that factory calibrated
detectors need not be adjusted after installation.
(3) The employer shall assure that pneumatic and hydraulic operated
detection systems installed after January 1, 1981, are equipped with
supervised systems.
(4) The employer shall assure that the servicing, maintenance and
testing of fire detection systems, including cleaning and necessary
sensitivity adjustments are performed by a trained person knowledgeable
in the operations and functions of the system.
(5) The employer shall also assure that fire detectors that need to
be cleaned of dirt, dust, or other particulates in order to be fully
operational are cleaned at regular periodic intervals.
(d) Protection of fire detectors. (1) The employer shall assure that
fire detection equipment installed outdoors or in the presence of
corrosive atmospheres be protected from corrosion. The employer shall
provide a canopy, hood, or other suitable protection for detection
equipment requiring protection from the weather.
(2) The employer shall locate or otherwise protect detection
equipment so that it is protected from mechanical or physical impact
which might render it inoperable.
(3) The employer shall assure that detectors are supported
independently of their attachment to wires or tubing.
(e) Response time. (1) The employer shall assure that fire detection
systems installed for the purpose of actuating
[[Page 512]]
fire extinguishment or suppression systems shall be designed to operate
in time to control or extinguish a fire.
(2) The employer shall assure that fire detection systems installed
for the purpose of employee alarm and evacuation be designed and
installed to provide a warning for emergency action and safe escape of
employees.
(3) The employer shall not delay alarms or devices initiated by fire
detector actuation for more than 30 seconds unless such delay is
necessary for the immediate safety of employees. When such delay is
necessary, it shall be addressed in an emergency action plan meeting the
requirements of Sec. 1910.38.
(f) Number, location and spacing of detecting devices. The employer
shall assure that the number, spacing and location of fire detectors is
based upon design data obtained from field experience, or tests,
engineering surveys, the manufacturer's recommendations, or a recognized
testing laboratory listing.
[45 FR 60713, Sept. 12, 1980]
Sec. 1910.165 Employee alarm systems.
(a) Scope and application. (1) This section applies to all emergency
employee alarms installed to meet a particular OSHA standard. This
section does not apply to those discharge or supervisory alarms required
on various fixed extinguishing systems or to supervisory alarms on fire
suppression, alarm or detection systems unless they are intended to be
employee alarm systems.
(2) The requirements in this section that pertain to maintenance,
testing and inspection shall apply to all local fire alarm signaling
systems used for alerting employees regardless of the other functions of
the system.
(3) All pre-discharge employee alarms installed to meet a particular
OSHA standard shall meet the requirements of paragraphs (b)(1) through
(4), (c), and (d)(1) of this section.
(b) General requirements. (1) The employee alarm system shall
provide warning for necessary emergency action as called for in the
emergency action plan, or for reaction time for safe escape of employees
from the workplace or the immediate work area, or both.
(2) The employee alarm shall be capable of being perceived above
ambient noise or light levels by all employees in the affected portions
of the workplace. Tactile devices may be used to alert those employees
who would not otherwise be able to recognize the audibile or visual
alarm.
(3) The employee alarm shall be distinctive and recognizable as a
signal to evacuate the work area or to perform actions designated under
the emergency action plan.
(4) The employer shall explain to each employee the preferred means
of reporting emergencies, such as manual pull box alarms, public address
systems, radio or telephones. The employer shall post emergency
telephone numbers near telephones, or employee notice boards, and other
conspicuous locations when telephones serve as a means of reporting
emergencies. Where a communication system also serves as the employee
alarm system, all emergency messages shall have priority over all non-
emergency messages.
(5) The employer shall establish procedures for sounding emergency
alarms in the workplace. For those employers with 10 or fewer employees
in a particular workplace, direct voice communication is an acceptable
procedure for sounding the alarm provided all employees can hear the
alarm. Such workplaces need not have a back-up system.
(c) Installation and restoration. (1) The employer shall assure that
all devices, components, combinations of devices or systems constructed
and installed to comply with this standard are approved. Steam whistles,
air horns, strobe lights or similar lighting devices, or tactile devices
meeting the requirements of this section are considered to meet this
requirement for approval.
(2) The employer shall assure that all employee alarm systems are
restored to normal operating condition as promptly as possible after
each test or alarm. Spare alarm devices and components subject to wear
or destruction shall be available in sufficient quantities and locations
for prompt restoration of the system.
(d) Maintenance and testing. (1) The employer shall assure that all
employee alarm systems are maintained
[[Page 513]]
in operating condition except when undergoing repairs or maintenance.
(2) The employer shall assure that a test of the reliability and
adequacy of non-supervised employee alarm systems is made every two
months. A different actuation device shall be used in each test of a
multi-actuation device system so that no individual device is used for
two consecutive tests.
(3) The employer shall maintain or replace power supplies as often
as is necessary to assure a fully operational condition. Back-up means
of alarm, such as employee runners or telephones, shall be provided when
systems are out of service.
(4) The employer shall assure that employee alarm circuitry
installed after January 1, 1981, which is capable of being supervised is
supervised and that it will provide positive notification to assigned
personnel whenever a deficiency exists in the system. The employer shall
assure that all supervised employee alarm systems are tested at least
annually for reliability and adequacy.
(5) The employer shall assure that the servicing, maintenance and
testing of employee alarms are done by persons trained in the designed
operation and functions necessary for reliable and safe operation of the
system.
(e) Manual operation. The employer shall assure that manually
operated actuation devices for use in conjunction with employee alarms
are unobstructed, conspicuous and readily accessible.
[45 FR 60713, Sept. 12, 1980]
APPENDICES TO SUBPART L TO PART 1910
Note: The following appendices to subpart L, except appendix E,
serve as nonmandatory guidelines to assist employers in complying with
the appropriate requirements of subpart L.
Appendix A to Subpart L of Part 1910--Fire Protection
Sec. 1910.156 Fire brigades.
1. Scope. This section does not require an employer to organize a
fire brigade. However, if an employer does decide to organize a fire
brigade, the requirements of this section apply.
2. Pre-fire planning. It is suggested that pre-fire planning be
conducted by the local fire department and/or the workplace fire brigade
in order for them to be familiar with the workplace and process hazards.
Involvement with the local fire department or fire prevention bureau is
encouraged to facilitate coordination and cooperation between members of
the fire brigade and those who might be called upon for assistance
during a fire emergency.
3. Organizational statement. In addition to the information required
in the organizational statement, paragraph 1910.156(b)(1), it is
suggested that the organizational statement also contain the following
information: a description of the duties that the fire brigade members
are expected to perform; the line authority of each fire brigade
officer; the number of the fire brigade officers and number of training
instructors; and a list and description of the types of awards or
recognition that brigade members may be eligible to receive.
4. Physical capability. The physical capability requirement applies
only to those fire brigade members who perform interior structural fire
fighting. Employees who cannot meet the physical capability requirement
may still be members of the fire brigade as long as such employees do
not perform interior structural fire fighting. It is suggested that fire
brigade members who are unable to perform interior structural fire
fighting be assigned less stressful and physically demanding fire
brigade duties, e.g., certain types of training, recordkeeping, fire
prevention inspection and maintenance, and fire pump operations.
Physically capable can be defined as being able to perform those
duties specified in the training requirements of section 1910.156(c).
Physically capable can also be determined by physical performance tests
or by a physical examination when the examining physician is aware of
the duties that the fire brigade member is expected to perform.
It is also recommended that fire brigade members participate in a
physical fitness program. There are many benefits which can be
attributed to being physically fit. It is believed that physical fitness
may help to reduce the number of sprain and strain injuries as well as
contributing to the improvement of the cardiovascular system.
5. Training and education. The paragraph on training and education
does not contain specific training and education requirements because
the type, amount, and frequency of training and education will be as
varied as are the purposes for which fire brigades are organized.
However, the paragraph does require that training and education be
commensurate with those functions that the fire brigade is expected to
perform; i.e., those functions specified in the organizational
statement. Such a performance requirement
[[Page 514]]
provides the necessary flexibility to design a training program which
meets the needs of individual fire brigades.
At a minimum, hands-on training is required to be conducted annually
for all fire brigade members. However, for those fire brigade members
who are expected to perform interior structural fire fighting, some type
of training or education session must be provided at least quarterly.
In addition to the required hands-on training, it is strongly
recommended that fire brigade members receive other types of training
and education such as: classroom instruction, review of emergency action
procedures, pre-fire planning, review of special hazards in the
workplace, and practice in the use of self-contained breathing
apparatus.
It is not necessary for the employer to duplicate the same training
or education that a fire brigade member receives as a member of a
community volunteer fire department, rescue squad, or similar
organization. However, such training or education must have been
provided to the fire brigade member within the past year and it must be
documented that the fire brigade member has received the training or
education. For example: there is no need for a fire brigade member to
receive another training class in the use of positive-pressure self-
contained breathing apparatus if the fire brigade member has recently
completed such training as a member of a community fire department.
Instead, the fire brigade member should receive training or education
covering other important equipment or duties of the fire brigade as they
relate to the workplace hazards, facilities and processes.
It is generally recognized that the effectiveness of fire brigade
training and education depends upon the expertise of those providing the
training and education as well as the motivation of the fire brigade
members. Fire brigade training instructors must receive a higher level
of training and education than the fire brigade members they will be
teaching. This includes being more knowledgeable about the functions to
be performed by the fire brigade and the hazards involved. The
instructors should be qualified to train fire brigade members and
demonstrate skills in communication, methods of teaching, and
motivation. It is important for instructors and fire brigade members
alike to be motivated toward the goals of the fire brigade and be aware
of the importance of the service that they are providing for the
protection of other employees and the workplace.
It is suggested that publications from the International Fire
Service Training Association, the National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA-1041), the International Society of Fire Service Instructors and
other fire training sources be consulted for recommended qualifications
of fire brigade training instructors.
In order to be effective, fire brigades must have competent
leadership and supervision. It is important for those who supervise the
fire brigade during emergency situations, e.g., fire brigade chiefs,
leaders, etc., to receive the necessary training and education for
supervising fire brigade activities during these hazardous and stressful
situations. These fire brigade members with leadership responsibilities
should demonstrate skills in strategy and tactics, fire suppression and
prevention techniques, leadership principles, pre-fire planning, and
safety practices. It is again suggested that fire service training
sources be consulted for determining the kinds of training and education
which are necessary for those with fire brigade leadership
responsibilities.
It is further suggested that fire brigade leaders and fire brigade
instructors receive more formalized training and education on a
continuing basis by attending classes provided by such training sources
as universities and university fire extension services.
The following recommendations should not be considered to be all of
the necessary elements of a complete comprehensive training program, but
the information may be helpful as a guide in developing a fire brigade
training program.
All fire brigade members should be familiar with exit facilities and
their location, emergency escape routes for handicapped workers, and the
workplace ``emergency action plan.''
In addition, fire brigade members who are expected to control and
extinguish fires in the incipient stage should, at a minimum, be trained
in the use of fire extinguishers, standpipes, and other fire equipment
they are assigned to use. They should also be aware of first aid medical
procedures and procedures for dealing with special hazards to which they
may be exposed. Training and education should include both classroom
instruction and actual operation of the equipment under simulated
emergency conditions. Hands-on type training must be conducted at least
annually but some functions should be reviewed more often.
In addition to the above training, fire brigade members who are
expected to perform emergency rescue and interior structural fire
fighting should, at a minimum, be familiar with the proper techniques in
rescue and fire suppression procedures. Training and education should
include fire protection courses, classroom training, simulated fire
situations including ``wet drills'' and, when feasible, extinguishment
of actual mock fires. Frequency of training or education must be at
least quarterly, but some drills or classroom training should be
conducted as often as monthly or even weekly to maintain the proficiency
of fire brigade members.
[[Page 515]]
There are many excellent sources of training and education that the
employer may want to use in developing a training program for the
workplace fire brigade. These sources include publications, seminars,
and courses offered by universities.
There are also excellent fire school courses by such facilities as
Texas A and M University, Delaware State Fire School, Lamar University,
and Reno Fire School, that deal with those unique hazards which may be
encountered by fire brigades in the oil and chemical industry. These
schools, and others, also offer excellent training courses which would
be beneficial to fire brigades in other types of industries. These
courses should be a continuing part of the training program, and
employers are strongly encouraged to take advantage of these excellent
resources.
It is also important that fire brigade members be informed about
special hazards to which they may be exposed during fire and other
emergencies. Such hazards as storage and use areas of flammable liquids
and gases, toxic chemicals, water-reactive substances, etc., can pose
difficult problems. There must be written procedures developed that
describe the actions to be taken in situations involving special
hazards. Fire brigade members must be trained in handling these special
hazards as well as keeping abreast of any changes that occur in relation
to these special hazards.
6. Fire fighting equipment. It is important that fire fighting
equipment that is in damaged or unserviceable condition be removed from
service and replaced. This will prevent fire brigade members from using
unsafe equipment by mistake.
Fire fighting equipment, except portable fire extinguishers and
respirators, must be inspected at least annually. Portable fire
extinguishers and respirators are required to be inspected at least
monthly.
7. Protective clothing. (A) General. Paragraph (e) of Sec. 1910.156
does not require all fire brigade members to wear protective clothing.
It is not the intention of these standards to require employers to
provide a full ensemble of protective clothing for every fire brigade
member without consideration given to the types of hazardous
environments to which the fire brigade member might be exposed. It is
the intention of these standards to require adequate protection for
those fire brigade members who might be exposed to fires in an advanced
stage, smoke, toxic gases, and high temperatures. Therefore, the
protective clothing requirements only apply to those fire brigade
members who perform interior structural fire fighting operations.
Additionally, the protective clothing requirements do not apply to
the protective clothing worn during outside fire fighting operations
(brush and forest fires, crash crew operations) or other special fire
fighting activities. It is important that the protective clothing to be
worn during these types of fire fighting operations reflect the hazards
which are expected to be encountered by fire brigade members.
(B) Foot and leg protection. Section 1910.156 permits an option to
achieve foot and leg protection.
The section recognizes the interdependence of protective clothing to
cover one or more parts of the body. Therefore, an option is given so
that fire brigade members may meet the foot and leg requirements by
either wearing long fire-resistive coats in combination with fully
extended boots, or by wearing shorter fire-resistive costs in
combination with protective trousers and protective shoes or shorter
boots.
(C) Body protection. Paragraph (e)(3) of Sec. 1910.156 provides an
option for fire brigade members to achieve body protection. Fire brigade
members may wear a fire-resistive coat in combination with fully
extended boots, or they may wear a fire-resistive coat in combination
with protective trousers.
Fire-resistive coats and protective trousers meeting all of the
requirements contained in NFPA 1971-1975 ``Protective Clothing for
Structural Fire Fighters,'' are acceptable as meeting the requirements
of this standard.
The lining is required to be permanently attached to the outer
shell. However, it is permissible to attach the lining to the outer
shell material by stitching in one area such as at the neck. Fastener
tape or snap fasteners may be used to secure the rest of the lining to
the outer shell to facilitate cleaning. Reference to permanent lining
does not refer to a winter liner which is a detachable extra lining used
to give added protection to the wearer against the effects of cold
weather and wind.
(D) Hand protection. The requirements of the paragraph on hand
protection may be met by protective gloves or a glove system. A glove
system consists of a combination of different gloves. The usual
components of a glove system consist of a pair of gloves, which provide
thermal insulation to the hands, worn in combination with a second pair
of gloves which provide protection against flame, cut, and puncture.
It is suggested that protective gloves provide dexterity and a sense
of feel for objects. Criteria and test methods for dexterity are
contained in the NIOSH publications, ``The Development of Criteria for
Firefighters' Gloves; Vol. I: Glove Requirements'' and ``Vol. II: Glove
Criteria and Test Methods.'' These NIOSH publications also contain a
permissible modified version of Federal Test Method 191, Method 5903,
(paragraph (3) of appendix E) for flame resistance when gloves, rather
than glove material, are tested for flame resistance.
(E) Head, eye, and face protection. Head protective devices which
meet the requirements
[[Page 516]]
contained in NFPA No. 1972 are acceptable as meeting the requirements of
this standard for head protection.
Head protective devices are required to be provided with ear flaps
so that the ear flaps will be available if needed. It is recommended
that ear protection always be used while fighting interior structural
fires.
Many head protective devices are equipped with face shields to
protect the eyes and face. These face shields are permissible as meeting
the eye and face protection requirements of this paragraph as long as
such face shields meet the requirements of Sec. 1910.133 of the General
Industry Standards.
Additionally, full facepieces, helmets or hoods of approved
breathing apparatus which meet the requirements of Sec. 1910.134 and
paragraph (f) of Sec. 1910.156 are also acceptable as meeting the eye
and face protection requirements.
It is recommended that a flame resistant protective head covering
such as a hood or snood, which will not adversely affect the seal of a
respirator facepiece, be worn during interior structural fire fighting
operations to protect the sides of the face and hair.
8. Respiratory protective devices. Respiratory protection is
required to be worn by fire brigade members while working inside
buildings or confined spaces where toxic products of combustion or an
oxygen deficiency is likely to be present; respirators are also to be
worn during emergency situations involving toxic substances. When fire
brigade members respond to emergency situations, they may be exposed to
unknown contaminants in unknown concentrations. Therefore, it is
imperative that fire brigade members wear proper respiratory protective
devices during these situations. Additionally, there are many instances
where toxic products of combustion are still present during mop-up and
overhaul operations. Therefore, fire brigade members should continue to
wear respirators during these types of operations.
Self-contained breathing apparatus are not required to be equipped
with either a buddy-breathing device or a quick-disconnect valve.
However, these accessories may be very useful and are acceptable as long
as such accessories do not cause damage to the apparatus, restrict the
air flow of the apparatus, or obstruct the normal operation of the
apparatus.
Buddy-breathing devices are useful for emergency situations where a
victim or another fire brigade member can share the same air supply with
the wearer of the apparatus for emergency escape purposes.
The employer is encouraged to provide fire brigade members with an
alternative means of respiratory protection to be used only for
emergency escape purposes if the self-contained breathing apparatus
becomes inoperative. Such alternative means of respiratory protection
may be either a buddy-breathing device or an escape self-contained
breathing apparatus (ESCBA). The ESCBA is a short-duration respiratory
protective device which is approved for only emergency escape purposes.
It is suggested that if ESCBA units are used, that they be of at least 5
minutes service life.
Quick-disconnect valves are devices which start the flow of air by
insertion of the hose (which leads to the facepiece) into the regulator
of self-contained breathing apparatus, and stop the flow of air by
disconnecting the hose from the regulator. These devices are
particularly useful for those positive-pressure self-contained breathing
apparatus which do not have the capability of being switched from the
demand to the positive-pressure mode.
The use of a self-contained breathing apparatus where the apparatus
can be switched from a demand to a positive-pressure mode is acceptable
as long as the apparatus is in the positive-pressure mode when
performing interior structural fire fighting operations. Also acceptable
are approved respiratory protective devices which have been converted to
the positive-pressure type when such modification is accomplished by
trained and experienced persons using kits or parts approved by NIOSH
and provided by the manufacturer and by following the manufacturer's
instructions.
There are situations which require the use of respirators which have
a duration of 2 hours or more. Presently, there are no approved
positive-pressure apparatus with a rated service life of more than 2
hours. Consequently, negative-pressure self-contained breathing
apparatus with a rated service life of more than 2 hours and which have
a minimum protection factor of 5,000 as determined by an acceptable
quantitative fit test performed on each individual, will be acceptable
for use during situations which require long duration apparatus. Long
duration apparatus may be needed in such instances as working in
tunnels, subway systems, etc. Such negative-pressure breathing apparatus
will continue to be acceptable for a maximum of 18 months after a
positive-pressure apparatus with the same or longer rated service life
of more than 2 hours is certified by NIOSH/MSHA. After this 18 month
phase-in period, all self-contained breathing apparatus used for these
long duration situations will have to be of the positive-pressure type.
Protection factor (sometimes called fit factor) is defined as the
ratio of the contaminant concentrations outside of the respirator to the
contaminant concentrations inside the facepiece of the respirator.
Concentration outside respirator
PF= ----------------------------------------------------------------
Concentration inside facepiece
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 517]]
Protection factors are determined by quantitative fit tests. An
acceptable quantitative fit test should include the following elements:
1. A fire brigade member who is physically and medically capable of
wearing respirators, and who is trained in the use of respirators, dons
a self-contained breathing apparatus equipped with a device that will
monitor the concentration of a contaminant inside the facepiece.
2. The fire brigade member then performs a qualitative fit test to
assure the best face to facepiece seal as possible. A qualitative fit
test can consist of a negative-pressure test, positive-pressure test,
isoamyl acetate vapor (banana oil) test, or an irritant smoke test. For
more details on respirator fitting see the NIOSH booklet entitled ``A
Guide to Industrial Respiratory Protection'' June, 1976, and HEW
publication No. (NIOSH) 76-189.
3. The wearer should then perform physical activity which reflects
the level of work activity which would be expected during fire fighting
activities. The physical activity should include simulated fire-ground
work activity or physical exercise such as running-in-place, a step
test, etc.
4. Without readjusting the apparatus, the wearer is placed in a test
atmosphere containing a non-toxic contaminant with a known, constant,
concentration.
The protection factor is then determined by dividing the known
concentration of the contaminant in the test atmosphere by the
concentration of the contaminant inside the facepiece when the following
exercises are performed:
(a) Normal breathing with head motionless for one minute;
(b) Deep breathing with head motionless for 30 seconds;
(c) Turning head slowly from side to side while breathing normally,
pausing for at least two breaths before changing direction. Continue for
at least one minute;
(d) Moving head slowly up and down while breathing normally, pausing
for at least two breaths before changing direction. Continue for at
least two minutes;
(e) Reading from a prepared text, slowly and clearly, and loudly
enough to be heard and understood. Continue for one minute; and
(f) Normal breathing with head motionless for at least one minute.
The protection factor which is determined must be at least 5,000.
The quantitative fit test should be conducted at least three times. It
is acceptable to conduct all three tests on the same day. However, there
should be at least one hour between tests to reflect the protection
afforded by the apparatus during different times of the day.
The above elements are not meant to be a comprehensive, technical
description of a quantitative fit test protocol. However, quantitative
fit test procedures which include these elements are acceptable for
determining protection factors. Procedures for a quantitative fit test
are required to be available for inspection by the Assistant Secretary
or authorized representative.
Organizations such as Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory, Lawrence
Livermore Laboratory, NIOSH, and American National Standards Institute
(ANSI) are excellent sources for additional information concerning
qualitative and quantitative fit testing.
Sec. 1910.157 Portable fire extinguishers.
1. Scope and application. The scope and application of this section
is written to apply to three basic types of workplaces. First, there are
those workplaces where the employer has chosen to evacuate all employees
from the workplace at the time of a fire emergency. Second, there are
those workplaces where the employer has chosen to permit certain
employees to fight fires and to evacuate all other non-essential
employees at the time of a fire emergency. Third, there are those
workplaces where the employer has chosen to permit all employees in the
workplace to use portable fire extinguishers to fight fires.
The section also addresses two kinds of work areas. The entire
workplace can be divided into outside (exterior) work areas and inside
(interior) work areas. This division of the workplace into two areas is
done in recognition of the different types of hazards employees may be
exposed to during fire fighting operations. Fires in interior
workplaces, pose a greater hazard to employees; they can produce greater
exposure to quantities of smoke, toxic gases, and heat because of the
capability of a building or structure to contain or entrap these
products of combustion until the building can be ventilated. Exterior
work areas, normally open to the environment, are somewhat less
hazardous, because the products of combustion are generally carried away
by the thermal column of the fire. Employees also have a greater
selection of evacuation routes if it is necessary to abandon fire
fighting efforts.
In recognition of the degree of hazard present in the two types of
work areas, the standards for exterior work areas are somewhat less
restrictive in regards to extinguisher distribution. Paragraph (a)
explains this by specifying which paragraphs in the section apply.
2. Portable fire extinguisher exemptions. In recognition of the
three options given to employers in regard to the amount of employee
evacuation to be carried out, the standards permit certain exemptions
based on the number of employees expected to use fire extinguishers.
[[Page 518]]
Where the employer has chosen to totally evacuate the workplace at
the time of a fire emergency and when fire extinguishers are not
provided, the requirements of this section do not apply to that
workplace.
Where the employer has chosen to partially evacuate the workplace or
the effected area at the time of a fire emergency and has permitted
certain designated employees to remain behind to operate critical plant
operations or to fight fires with extinguishers, then the employer is
exempt from the distribution requirements of this section. Employees who
will be remaining behind to perform incipient fire fighting or members
of a fire brigade must be trained in their duties. The training must
result in the employees becoming familiar with the locations of fire
extinguishers. Therefore, the employer must locate the extinguishers in
convenient locations where the employees know they can be found. For
example, they could be mounted in the fire truck or cart that the fire
brigade uses when it responds to a fire emergency. They can also be
distributed as set forth in the National Fire Protection Association's
Standard No. 10, ``Portable Fire Extinguishers.''
Where the employer has decided to permit all employees in the
workforce to use fire extinguishers, then the entire OSHA section
applies.
3. Portable fire extinguisher mounting. Previous standards for
mounting fire extinguishers have been criticized for requiring specific
mounting locations. In recognition of this criticism, the standard has
been rewritten to permit as much flexibility in extinguisher mounting as
is acceptable to assure that fire extinguishers are available when
needed and that employees are not subjected to injury hazards when they
try to obtain an extinguisher.
It is the intent of OSHA to permit the mounting of extinguishers in
any location that is accessible to employees without the use of portable
devices such as a ladder. This limitation is necessary because portable
devices can be moved or taken from the place where they are needed and,
therefore, might not be available at the time of an emergency.
Employers are given as much flexibility as possible to assure that
employees can obtain extinguishers as fast as possible. For example, an
acceptable method of mounting extinguishers in areas where fork lift
trucks or tow-motors are used is to mount the units on retractable
boards which, by means of counterweighting, can be raised above the
level where they could be struck by vehicular traffic. When needed, they
can be lowered quickly for use. This method of mounting can also reduce
vandalism and unauthorized use of extinguishers. The extinguishers may
also be mounted as outlined in the National Fire Protection
Association's Standard No. 10, ``Portable Fire Extinguishers.''
4. Selection and distribution. The employer is responsible for the
proper selection and distribution of fire extinguishers and the
determination of the necessary degree of protection. The selection and
distribution of fire extinguishers must reflect the type and class of
fire hazards associated with a particular workplace.
Extinguishers for protecting Class A hazards may be selected from
the following types: water, foam, loaded stream, or multipurpose dry
chemical. Extinguishers for protecting Class B hazards may be selected
from the following types: Halon 1301, Halon 1211, carbon dioxide, dry
chemicals, foam, or loaded stream. Extinguishers for Class C hazards may
be selected from the following types: Halon 1301, Halon 1211, carbon
dioxide, or dry chemical.
Combustible metal (Class D hazards) fires pose a different type of
fire problem in the workplace. Extinguishers using water, gas, or
certain dry chemicals cannot extinguish or control this type of fire.
Therefore, certain metals have specific dry powder extinguishing agents
which can extinguish or control this type of fire. Those agents which
have been specifically approved for use on certain metal fires provide
the best protection; however, there are also some ``universal'' type
agents which can be used effectively on a variety of combustible metal
fires if necessary. The ``universal'' type agents include: Foundry flux,
Lith-X powder, TMB liquid, pyromet powder, TEC powder, dry talc, dry
graphite powder, dry sand, dry sodium chloride, dry soda ash, lithium
chloride, zirconium silicate, and dry dolomite.
Water is not generally accepted as an effective extinguishing agent
for metal fires. When applied to hot burning metal, water will break
down into its basic atoms of oxygen and hydrogen. This chemical
breakdown contributes to the combustion of the metal. However, water is
also a good universal coolant and can be used on some combustible
metals, but only under proper conditions and application, to reduce the
temperature of the burning metal below the ignition point. For example,
automatic deluge systems in magnesium plants can discharge such large
quantities of water on burning magnesium that the fire will be
extinguished. The National Fire Protection Association has specific
standards for this type of automatic sprinkler system. Further
information on the control of metal fires with water can be found in the
National Fire Protection Association's Fire Protection Handbook.
An excellent source of selection and distribution criteria is found
in the National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 10. Other
sources of information include the National Safety Council and the
employer's fire insurance carrier.
[[Page 519]]
5. Substitution of standpipe systems for portable fire
extinguishers. The employer is permitted to substitute acceptable
standpipe systems for portable fire extinguishers under certain
circumstances. It is necessary to assure that any substitution will
provide the same coverage that portable units provide. This means that
fire hoses, because of their limited portability, must be spaced
throughout the protected area so that they can reach around obstructions
such as columns, machinery, etc. and so that they can reach into closets
and other enclosed areas.
6. Inspection, maintenance and testing. The ultimate responsibility
for the inspection, maintenance and testing of portable fire
extinguishers lies with the employer. The actual inspection,
maintenance, and testing may, however, be conducted by outside
contractors with whom the employer has arranged to do the work. When
contracting for such work, the employer should assure that the
contractor is capable of performing the work that is needed to comply
with this standard.
If the employer should elect to perform the inspection, maintenance,
and testing requirements of this section in-house, then the employer
must make sure that those persons doing the work have been trained to do
the work and to recognize problem areas which could cause an
extinguisher to be inoperable. The National Fire Protection Association
provides excellent guidelines in its standard for portable fire
extinguishers. The employer may also check with the manufacturer of the
unit that has been purchased and obtain guidelines on inspection,
maintenance, and testing. Hydrostatic testing is a process that should
be left to contractors or individuals using suitable facilities and
having the training necessary to perform the work.
Anytime the employer has removed an extinguisher from service to be
checked or repaired, alternate equivalent protection must be provided.
Alternate equivalent protection could include replacing the extinguisher
with one or more units having equivalent or equal ratings, posting a
fire watch, restricting the unprotected area from employee exposure, or
providing a hose system ready to operate.
7. Hydrostatic testing. As stated before, the employer may contract
for hydrostatic testing. However, if the employer wishes to provide the
testing service, certain equipment and facilities must be available.
Employees should be made aware of the hazards associated with
hydrostatic testing and the importance of using proper guards and water
pressures. Severe injury can result if extinguisher shells fail
violently under hydrostatic pressure.
Employers are encouraged to use contractors who can perform adequate
and reliable service. Firms which have been certified by the Materials
Transportation Board (MTB) of the U.S. Department of Transportation
(DOT) or State licensed extinguisher servicing firms or recognized by
the National Association of Fire Equipment Distributors in Chicago,
Illinois, are generally acceptable for performing this service.
8. Training and education. This part of the standard is of the
utmost importance to employers and employees if the risk of injury or
death due to extinguisher use is to be reduced. If an employer is going
to permit an employee to fight a workplace fire of any size, the
employer must make sure that the employee knows everything necessary to
assure the employee's safety.
Training and education can be obtained through many channels. Often,
local fire departments in larger cities have fire prevention bureaus or
similar organizations which can provide basic fire prevention training
programs. Fire insurance companies will have data and information
available. The National Fire Protection Association and the National
Safety Council will provide, at a small cost, publications that can be
used in a fire prevention program.
Actual fire fighting training can be obtained from various sources
in the country. The Texas A & M University, the University of Maryland's
Fire and Rescue Institute, West Virginia University's Fire Service
Extension, Iowa State University's Fire Service Extension and other
State training schools and land grant colleges have fire fighting
programs directed to industrial applications. Some manufacturers of
extinguishers, such as the Ansul Company and Safety First, conduct fire
schools for customers in the proper use of extinguishers. Several large
corporations have taken time to develop their own on-site training
programs which expose employees to the actual ``feeling'' of fire
fighting. Simulated fires for training of employees in the proper use of
extinguishers are also an acceptable part of a training program.
In meeting the requirements of this section, the employer may also
provide educational materials, without classroom instruction, through
the use of employee notice campaigns using instruction sheets or flyers
or similar types of informal programs. The employer must make sure that
employees are trained and educated to recognize not only what type of
fire is being fought and how to fight it, but also when it is time to
get away from it and leave fire suppression to more experienced fire
fighters.
Sec. 1910.158 Standpipe and hose systems.
1. Scope and application. This section has been written to provide
adequate coverage of those standpipe and hose systems that an employer
may install in the workplace to meet the requirements of a particular
OSHA standard. For example, OSHA permits the substitution of hose
systems for portable fire
[[Page 520]]
extinguishers in Sec. 1910.157. If an employer chooses to provide hose
systems instead of portable Class A fire extinguishers, then those hose
systems used for substitution would have to meet the applicable
requirements of Sec. 1910.157. All other standpipe and hose systems not
used as a substitute would be exempt from these requirements.
The section specifically exempts Class I large hose systems. By
large hose systems, OSHA means those 2\1/2\ (6.3 cm) hose
lines that are usually associated with fire departments of the size that
provide their own water supply through fire apparatus. When the fire
gets to the size that outside protection of that degree is necessary,
OSHA believes that in most industries employees will have been evacuated
from the fire area and the ``professional'' fire fighters will take
control.
2. Protection of standpipes. Employers must make sure that
standpipes are protected so that they can be relied upon during a fire
emergency. This means protecting the pipes from mechanical and physical
damage. There are various means for protecting the equipment such as,
but not limited to, enclosing the supply piping in the construction of
the building, locating the standpipe in an area which is inaccessible to
vehicles, or locating the standpipe in a stairwell.
3. Hose covers and cabinets. The employer should keep fire
protection hose equipment in cabinets or inside protective covers which
will protect it from the weather elements, dirt or other damaging
sources. The use of protective covers must be easily removed or opened
to assure that hose and nozzle are accessible. When the employer places
hose in a cabinet, the employer must make sure that the hose and nozzle
are accessible to employees without subjecting them to injury. In order
to make sure that the equipment is readily accessible, the employer must
also make sure that the cabinets used to store equipment are kept free
of obstructions and other equipment which may interfere with the fast
distribution of the fire hose stored in the cabinet.
4. Hose outlets and connections. The employer must assure that
employees who use standpipe and hose systems can reach the hose rack and
hose valve without the use of portable equipment such as ladders. Hose
reels are encouraged for use because one employee can retrieve the hose,
charge it, and place it into service without much difficulty.
5. Hose. When the employer elects to provide small hose in lieu of
portable fire extinguishers, those hose stations being used for the
substitution must have hose attached and ready for service. However, if
more than the necessary amount of small hose outlets are provided, hose
does not have to be attached to those outlets that would provide
redundant coverage. Further, where the installation of hose on outlets
may expose the hose to extremely cold climates, the employer may store
the hose in houses or similar protective areas and connect it to the
outlet when needed.
There is approved lined hose available that can be used to replace
unlined hose which is stored on racks in cabinets. The lined hose is
constructed so that it can be folded and placed in cabinets in the same
manner as unlined hose.
Hose is considered to be unserviceable when it deteriorates to the
extent that it can no longer carry water at the required pressure and
flow rates. Dry rotted linen or hemp hose, cross threaded couplings, and
punctured hose are examples of unserviceable hose.
6. Nozzles. Variable stream nozzles can provide useful variations in
water flow and spray patterns during fire fighting operations and they
are recommended for employee use. It is recommended that 100 psi
(700kPa) nozzle pressure be used to provide good flow patterns for
variable stream nozzles. The most desirable attribute for nozzles is the
ability of the nozzle person to shut off the water flow at the nozzle
when it is necessary. This can be accomplished in many ways. For
example, a shut-off nozzle with a lever or rotation of the nozzle to
stop flow would be effective, but in other cases a simple globe valve
placed between a straight stream nozzle and the hose could serve the
same purpose. For straight stream nozzles 50 psi nozzle pressure is
recommended. The intent of this standard is to protect the employee from
``run-away'' hoses if it becomes necessary to drop a pressurized hose
line and retreat from the fire front and other related hazards.
7. Design and installation. Standpipe and hose systems designed and
installed in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 14, ``Standpipe and Hose
Systems,'' are considered to be in compliance with this standard.
Sec. 1910.159 Automatic sprinkler systems.
1. Scope and application. This section contains the minimum
requirements for design, installation and maintenance of sprinkler
systems that are needed for employee safety. The Occupational Safety and
Health Administration is aware of the fact that the National Board of
Fire Underwriters is no longer an active organization, however,
sprinkler systems still exist that were designed and installed in
accordance with that organization's standards. Therefore, OSHA will
recognize sprinkler systems designed to, and maintained in accordance
with, NBFU and earlier NFPA standards.
2. Exemptions. In an effort to assure that employers will continue
to use automatic sprinkler systems as the primary fire protection system
in workplaces, OSHA is exempting from coverage those systems not
required by a particular OSHA standard and
[[Page 521]]
which have been installed in workplaces solely for the purpose of
protecting property. Many of these types of systems are installed in
areas or buildings with little or no employee exposure. An example is
those warehouses where employees may enter occasionally to take
inventory or move stock. Some employers may choose to shut down those
systems which are not specifically required by OSHA rather than upgrade
them to comply with the standards. OSHA does not intend to regulate such
systems. OSHA only intends to regulate those systems which are installed
to comply with a particular OSHA standard.
3. Design. There are two basic types of sprinkler system design.
Pipe schedule designed systems are based on pipe schedule tables
developed to protect hazards with standard sized pipe, number of
sprinklers, and pipe lengths. Hydraulic designed systems are based on an
engineered design of pipe size which will produce a given water density
or flow rate at any particular point in the system. Either design can be
used to comply with this standard.
The National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 13,
``Automatic Sprinkler Systems,'' contains the tables needed to design
and install either type of system. Minimum water supplies, densities,
and pipe sizes are given for all types of occupancies.
The employer may check with a reputable fire protection engineering
consultant or sprinkler design company when evaluating existing systems
or designing a new installation.
With the advent of new construction materials for the manufacuture
of sprinkler pipe, materials, other than steel have been approved for
use as sprinkler pipe. Selection of pipe material should be made on the
basis of the type of installation and the acceptability of the material
to local fire and building officials where such systems may serve more
than one purpose.
Before new sprinkler systems are placed into service, an acceptance
test is to be conducted. The employer should invite the installer,
designer, insurance representative, and a local fire official to witness
the test. Problems found during the test are to be corrected before the
system is placed into service.
4. Maintenance. It is important that any sprinkler system
maintenance be done only when there is minimal employee exposure to the
fire hazard. For example, if repairs or changes to the system are to be
made, they should be made during those hours when employees are not
working or are not occupying that portion of the workplace protected by
the portion of the system which has been shut down.
The procedures for performing a flow test via a main drain test or
by the use of an inspector's test valve can be obtained from the
employer's fire insurance company or from the National Fire Protection
Association's Standard No. 13A, ``Sprinkler System, Maintenance.''
5. Water supplies. The water supply to a sprinkler system is one of
the most important factors an employer should consider when evaluationg
a system. Obviously, if there is no water supply, the system is useless.
Water supplies can be lost for various reasons such as improperly closed
valves, excessive demand, broken water mains, and broken fire pumps. The
employer must be able to determine if or when this type of condition
exists either by performing a main drain test or visual inspection.
Another problem may be an inadequate water supply. For example, a light
hazard occupancy may, through rehabilitation or change in tenants,
become an ordinary or high hazard occupancy. In such cases, the existing
water supply may not be able to provide the pressure or duration
necessary for proper protection. Employers must assure that proper
design and tests have been made to assure an adequate water supply.
These tests can be arranged through the employer's fire insurance
carrier or through a local sprinkler maintenance company or through the
local fire prevention organization.
Anytime the employer must shut down the primary water supply for a
sprinkler system, the standard requires that equivalent protection be
provided. Equivalent protection may include a fire watch with
extinguishers or hose lines in place and manned, or a secondary water
supply such as a tank truck and pump, or a tank or fire pond with fire
pumps, to protect the areas where the primary water supply is limited or
shut down. The employer may also require evacuation of the workplace and
have an emergency action plan which specifies such action.
6. Protection of piping. Piping which is exposed to corrosive
atmospheres, either chemical or natural, can become defective to the
extent that it is useless. Employers must assure that piping is
protected from corrosion by its material of construction, e.g.,
stainless steel, or by a protective coating, e.g., paint.
7. Sprinklers. When an employer finds it necessary to replace
sprinkler system components or otherwise change a sprinkler's design,
employer should make a complete fire protection engineering survey of
that part of the system being changed. This review should assure that
the changes to the system will not alter the effectiveness of the system
as it is presently designed. Water supplies, densities and flow
characteristics should be maintained.
8. Protection of sprinklers. All components of the system must be
protected from mechanical impact damage. This can be achieved with the
use of mechanical guards or screens
[[Page 522]]
or by locating components in areas where physical contact is impossible
or limited.
9. Sprinkler alarms. The most recognized sprinkler alarm is the
water motor gong or bell that sounds when water begins to flow through
the system. This is not however, the only type of acceptable water flow
alarm. Any alarm that gives an indication that water is flowing through
the system is acceptable. For example, a siren, a whistle, a flashing
light, or similar alerting device which can transmit a signal to the
necessary persons would be acceptable. The purpose of the alarm is to
alert persons that the system is operating, and that some type of
planned action is necessary.
10. Sprinkler spacing. For a sprinkler system to be effective there
must be an adequate discharge of water spray from the sprinkler head.
Any obstructions which hinder the designed density or spray pattern of
the water may create unprotected areas which can cause fire to spread.
There are some sprinklers that, because of the system's design, are
deflected to specific areas. This type of obstruction is acceptable if
the system's design takes it into consideration in providing adequate
coverage.
Sec. 1910.160 Fixed extinguishing systems, general.
1. Scope and application. This section contains the general
requirements that are applicable to all fixed extinguishing systems
installed to meet OSHA standards. It also applies to those fixed
extinguishing systems, generally total flooding, which are not required
by OSHA, but which, because of the agent's discharge, may expose
employees to hazardous concentrations of extinguishing agents or
combustion by-products. Employees who work around fixed extinguishing
systems must be warned of the possible hazards associated with the
system and its agent. For example, fixed dry chemical extinguishing
systems may generate a large enough cloud of dry chemical particles that
employees may become visually disoriented. Certain gaseous agents can
expose employees to hazardous by-products of combustion when the agent
comes into contact with hot metal or other hot surface. Some gaseous
agents may be present in hazardous concentrations when the system has
totally discharged because an extra rich concentration is necessary to
extinguish deep-seated fires. Certain local application systems may be
designed to discharge onto the flaming surface of a liquid, and it is
possible that the liquid can splatter when hit with the discharging
agent. All of these hazards must be determined before the system is
placed into operation, and must be discussed with employees.
Based on the known toxicological effects of agents such as carbon
tetrachloride and chlorobromomethane, OSHA is not permitting the use of
these agents in areas where employees can be exposed to the agent or its
side effects. However, chlorobromomethane has been accepted and may be
used as an explosion suppression agent in unoccupied spaces. OSHA is
permitting the use of this agent only in areas where employees will not
be exposed.
2. Distinctive alarm signals. A distinctive alarm signal is required
to indicate that a fixed system is discharging. Such a signal is
necessary on those systems where it is not immediately apparent that the
system is discharging. For example, certain gaseous agents make a loud
noise when they discharge. In this case no alarm signal is necessary.
However, where systems are located in remote locations or away from the
general work area and where it is possible that a system could discharge
without anyone knowing that it is doing so, then a distinctive alarm is
necessary to warn employees of the hazards that may exist. The alarm can
be a bell, gong, whistle, horn, flashing light, or any combination of
signals as long as it is identifiable as a discharge alarm.
3. Maintenance. The employer is responsible for the maintenance of
all fixed systems, but this responsibility does not preclude the use of
outside contractors to do such work. New systems should be subjected to
an acceptance test before placed in service. The employer should invite
the installer, designer, insurance representative and others to witness
the test. Problems found during the test need to be corrected before the
system is considered operational.
4. Manual discharge stations. There are instances, such as for
mechanical reasons and others, where the standards call for a manual
back-up activation device. While the location of this device is not
specified in the standard, the employer should assume that the device
should be located where employees can easily reach it. It could, for
example, be located along the main means of egress from the protected
area so that employees could activate the system as they evacuate the
work area.
5. Personal protective equipment. The employer is required to
provide the necessary personal protective equipment to rescue employees
who may be trapped in a totally flooded environment which may be
hazardous to their health. This equipment would normally include a
positive-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus and any necessary
first aid equipment. In cases where the employer can assure the prompt
arrival of the local fire department or plant emergency personnel which
can provide the equipment, this can be considered as complying with the
standards.
Sec. 1910.161 Fixed extinguishing systems, dry chemical.
1. Scope and application. The requirements of this section apply
only to dry chemical systems. These requirements are to be used
[[Page 523]]
in conjunction with the requirements of Sec. 1910.160.
2. Maintenance. The employer is responsible for assuring that dry
chemical systems will operate effectively. To do this, periodic
maintenance is necessary. One test that must be conducted during the
maintenance check is one which will determine if the agent has remained
free of moisture. If an agent absorbs any moisture, it may tend to cake
and thereby clog the system. An easy test for acceptable moisture
content is to take a lump of dry chemical from the container and drop it
from a height of four inches. If the lump crumbles into fine particles,
the agent is acceptable.
Sec. 1910.162 Fixed extinguishing systems, gaseous agent.
1. Scope and application. This section applies only to those systems
which use gaseous agents. The requirements of Sec. 1910.160 also apply
to the gaseous agent systems covered in this section.
2. Design concentrations. Total flooding gaseous systems are based
on the volume of gas which must be discharged in order to produce a
certain designed concentration of gas in an enclosed area. The
concentration needed to extinguish a fire depends on several factors
including the type of fire hazard and the amount of gas expected to leak
away from the area during discharge. At times it is necessary to
``super-saturate'' a work area to provide for expected leakage from the
enclosed area. In such cases, employers must assure that the flooded
area has been ventilated before employees are permitted to reenter the
work area without protective clothing and respirators.
3. Toxic decomposition. Certain halogenated hydrocarbons will break
down or decompose when they are combined with high temperatures found in
the fire environment. The products of the decomposition can include
toxic elements or compounds. For example, when Halon 1211 is placed into
contact with hot metal it will break down and form bromide or fluoride
fumes. The employer must find out which toxic products may result from
decomposition of a particular agent from the manufacturer, and take the
necessary precautions to prevent employee exposure to the hazard.
Sec. 1910.163 Fixed extinguishing systems, water spray and foam.
1. Scope and application. This section applies to those systems that
use water spray or foam. The requirements of Sec. 1910.160 also apply to
this type of system.
2. Characteristics of foams. When selecting the type of foam for a
specific hazard, the employer should consider the following limitations
of some foams.
a. Some foams are not acceptable for use on fires involving
flammable gases and liquefied gases with boiling points below ambient
workplace temperatures. Other foams are not effective when used on fires
involving polar solvent liquids.
b. Any agent using water as part of the mixture should not be used
on fire involving combustible metals unless it is applied under proper
conditions to reduce the temperature of burning metal below the ignition
temperature. The employer should use only those foams that have been
tested and accepted for this application by a recognized independent
testing laboratory.
c. Certain types of foams may be incompatible and break down when
they are mixed together.
d. For fires involving water miscible solvents, employers should use
only those foams tested and approved for such use. Regular protein foams
may not be effective on such solvents.
Whenever employers provide a foam or water spray system, drainage
facilities must be provided to carry contaminated water or foam overflow
away from the employee work areas and egress routes. This drainage
system should drain to a central impounding area where it can be
collected and disposed of properly. Other government agencies may have
regulations concerning environmental considerations.
Sec. 1910.164 Fire detection systems.
1. Installation and restoration. Fire detection systems must be
designed by knowledgeable engineers or other professionals, with
expertise in fire detection systems and when the systems are installed,
there should be an acceptance test performed on the system to insure it
operates properly. The manufacturer's recommendations for system design
should be consulted. While entire systems may not be approved, each
component used in the system is required to be approved. Custom fire
detection systems should be designed by knowledgeable fire protection or
electrical engineers who are familiar with the workplace hazards and
conditions. Some systems may only have one or two individual detectors
for a small workplace, but good design and installation is still
important. An acceptance test should be performed on all systems,
including these smaller systems.
OSHA has a requirement that spare components used to replace those
which may be destroyed during an alarm situation be available in
sufficient quantities and locations for prompt restoration of the
system. This does not mean that the parts or components have to be
stored at the workplace. If the employer can assure that the supply of
parts is available in the local community or the general metropolitan
area of the workplace,
[[Page 524]]
then the requirements for storage and availability have been met. The
intent is to make sure that the alarm system is fully operational when
employees are occupying the workplace, and that when the system operates
it can be returned to full service the next day or sooner.
2. Supervision. Fire detection systems should be supervised. The
object of supervision is detection of any failure of the circuitry, and
the employer should use any method that will assure that the system's
circuits are operational. Electrically operated sensors for air
pressure, fluid pressure, or electrical circuits, can provide effective
monitoring and are the typical types of supervision.
3. Protection of fire detectors. Fire detectors must be protected
from corrosion either by protective coatings, by being manufactured from
non-corrosive materials or by location. Detectors must also be protected
from mechanical impact damage, either by suitable cages or metal guards
where such hazards are present, or by locating them above or out of
contact with materials or equipment which may cause damage.
4. Number, location, and spacing of detectors. This information can
be obtained from the approval listing for detectors or NFPA standards.
It can also be obtained from fire protection engineers or consultants or
manufacturers of equipment who have access to approval listings and
design methods.
Sec. 1910.165 Employee alarm systems.
1. Scope and application. This section is intended to apply to
employee alarm systems used for all types of employee emergencies except
those which occur so quickly and at such a rapid rate (e.g., explosions)
that any action by the employee is extremely limited following
detection.
In small workplaces with 10 or less employees the alarm system can
be by direct voice communication (shouting) where any one individual can
quickly alert all other employees. Radio may be used to transmit alarms
from remote workplaces where telephone service is not available,
provided that radio messages will be monitored by emergency services,
such as fire, police or others, to insure alarms are transmitted and
received.
2. Alarm signal alternatives. In recognition of physically impaired
individuals, OSHA is accepting various methods of giving alarm signals.
For example, visual, tactile or audible alarm signals are acceptable
methods for giving alarms to employees. Flashing lights or vibrating
devices can be used in areas where the employer has hired employees with
hearing or vision impairments. Vibrating devices, air fans, or other
tactile devices can be used where visually and hearing impaired
employees work. Employers are cautioned that certain frequencies of
flashing lights have been claimed to initiate epileptic seizures in some
employees and that this fact should be considered when selecting an
alarm device. Two way radio communications would be most appropriate for
transmitting emergency alarms in such workplaces which may be remote or
where telephones may not be available.
3. Reporting alarms. Employee alarms may require different means of
reporting, depending on the workplace involved. For example, in small
workplaces, a simple shout throughout the workplace may be sufficient to
warn employees of a fire or other emergency. In larger workplaces, more
sophisticated equipment is necessary so that entire plants or high-rise
buildings are not evacuated for one small emergency. In remote areas,
such as pumping plants, radio communication with a central base station
may be necessary. The goal of this standard is to assure that all
employees who need to know that an emergency exists can be notified of
the emergency. The method of transmitting the alarm should reflect the
situation found at the workplace.
Personal radio transmitters, worn by an individual, can be used
where the individual may be working such as in a remote location. Such
personal radio transmitters shall send a distinct signal and should
clearly indicate who is having an emergency, the location, and the
nature of the emergency. All radio transmitters need a feedback system
to assure that the emergency alarm is sent to the people who can provide
assistance.
For multi-story buildings or single story buildings with interior
walls for subdivisions, the more traditional alarm systems are
recommended for these types of workplaces. Supervised telephone or
manual fire alarm or pull box stations with paging systems to transmit
messages throughout the building is the recommended alarm system. The
alarm box stations should be available within a travel distance of 200
feet. Water flow detection on a sprinkler system, fire detection systems
(guard's supervisory station) or tour signal (watchman's service), or
other related systems may be part of the overall system. The paging
system may be used for nonemergency operations provided the emergency
messages and uses will have precedence over all other uses of the
system.
4. Supervision. The requirements for supervising the employee alarm
system circuitry and power supply may be accomplished in a variety of
ways. Typically, electrically operated sensors for air pressure, fluid
pressure, steam pressure, or electrical continuity of circuitry may be
used to continuously monitor the system to assure it is operational and
to identify trouble in the system and give a warning signal.
[45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981]
[[Page 525]]
Appendix B to Subpart L of Part 1910--National Consensus Standards
The following table contains a cross-reference listing of those
current national consensus standards which contains information and
guidelines that would be considered acceptable in complying with
requirements in the specific sections of subpart L.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Subpart L section National consensus standard
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1910.156................................ ANSI/NFPA No. 1972; Structural
Fire Fighter's Helmets.
ANSI Z88.5 American National
Standard, Practice for
Respirator Protection for the
Fire Service.
ANSI/NFPA No. 1971, Protective
Clothing for Structural Fire
Fighters.
NFPA No. 1041, Fire Service
Instructor Professional
Qualifications.
1910.157................................ ANSI/NFPA No. 10, Portable
Fire Extinguishers.
1910.158................................ ANSI/NFPA No. 18, Wetting
Agents.
ANSI/NFPA No. 20, Centrifugal
Fire Pumps.
NFPA No. 21, Steam Fire Pumps.
ANSI/NFPA No. 22, Water Tanks.
NFPA No. 24, Outside
Protection.
NFPA No. 26, Supervision of
Valves.
NFPA No. 13E, Fire Department
Operations in Properties
Protected by Sprinkler,
Standpipe Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 194, Fire Hose
Connections.
NFPA No. 197, Initial Fire
Attack, Training for.
NFPA No. 1231, Water Supplies
for Suburban and Rural Fire
Fighting.
1910.159................................ ANSI-NFPA No. 13, Sprinkler
Systems.
NFPA No. 13A, Sprinkler
Systems, Maintenance.
ANSI/NFPA No. 18, Wetting
Agents.
ANSI/NFPA No. 20, Centrifugal
Fire Pumps.
ANSI/NFPA No. 22, Water Tanks.
NFPA No. 24, Outside
Protection.
NFPA No. 26, Supervision of
Valves.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72B, Auxiliary
Signaling Systems.
NFPA No. 1231, Water Supplies
for Suburban and Rural Fire
Fighting.
1910.160................................ ANSI/NFPA No. 11, Foam
Systems.
ANSI/NFPA 11A, High Expansion
Foam Extinguishing Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 11B, Synthetic
Foam and Combined Agent
Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 12, Carbon
Dioxide Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 12A, Halon 1301
Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 12B, Halon 1211
Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 15, Water Spray
Systems.
ANSI/NFPA 16 Foam-Water Spray
Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 17, Dry Chemical
Systems.
ANSI/NFPA 69, Explosion
Suppression Systems.
1910.161................................ ANSI/NFPA No. 11B, Synthetic
Foam and Combined Agent
Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 17, Dry Chemical
Systems.
1910.162................................ ANSI/NFPA No. 12, Carbon
Dioxide Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 12A, Halon 1211
Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 12B, Halon 1301
Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 69, Explosion
Suppression Systems.
1910.163................................ ANSI/NFPA No. 11, Foam
Extinguishing Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 11A, High
Expansion Foam Extinguishing
Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 11B, Synthetic
Foam and Combined Agent
Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 15, Water Spray
Fixed Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 16, Foam-Water
Spray Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 18, Wetting
Agents.
NFPA No. 26, Supervision of
Valves.
1910.164................................ ANSI/NFPA No. 71, Central
Station Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72A, Local
Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72B, Auxiliary
Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72D, Proprietary
Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72E, Automatic
Fire Detectors.
ANSI/NFPA No. 101, Life Safety
Code.
1910.165................................ ANSI/NFPA No. 71, Central
Station Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72A, Local
Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72B, Auxiliary
Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72C, Remote
Station Protective Signaling
Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72D, Proprietary
Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 101, Life Safety
Code.
Metric Conversion....................... ANSI/ASTM No. E380, American
National Standard for Metric
Practice.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
NFPA standards are available from the National Fire Protection
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
ANSI Standards are available from the American National Standards
Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018.
[45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993]
Appendix C to Subpart L of Part 1910--Fire Protection References For
Further Information
I. Appendix general references. The following references provide
information which can be helpful in understanding the requirements
contained in all of the sections of subpart L:
A. Fire Protection Handbook, National Fire Protection Association,
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
B. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations, National
Safety Council; 425 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611.
[[Page 526]]
C. Various associations also publish information which may be useful
in understanding these standards. Examples of these associations are:
Fire Equipment Manufacturers Association (FEMA) of Arlington, VA 22204
and the National Association of Fire Equipment Distributors (NAFED) of
Chicago, IL 60601.
II. Appendix references applicable to individual sections. The
following references are grouped according to individual sections
contained in subpart L. These references provide information which may
be helpful in understanding and implementing the standards of each
section of subpart L.
A. Sec. 1910.156. Fire brigades:
1. Private Fire Brigades, NFPA 27; National Fire Protection
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
2. Initial Fire Attack, Training Standard On, NFPA 197; National
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
3. Fire Fighter Professional Qualifications, NFPA 1001; National
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
4. Organization for Fire Services, NFPA 1201; National Fire
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
5. Organization of a Fire Department, NFPA 1202; National Fire
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
6. Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fighting, ANSI/NFPA 1971;
.
7. American National Standard for Men's Safety-Toe Footwear, ANSI
Z41.1; American National Standards Institute, New York, NY 10018.
8. American National Standard for Occupational and Educational Eye
and Face Protection, ANSI Z87.1; American National Standards Institute,
New York, NY 10018.
9. American National Standard, Safety Requirements for Industrial
Head Protection, ANSI Z89.1; American National Standards Institute, New
York, NY 10018.
10. Specifications for Protective Headgear for Vehicular Users, ANSI
Z90.1; American National Standards Institute, New York, NY 10018.
11. Testing Physical Fitness; Davis and Santa Maria. Fire Command.
April 1975.
12. Development of a Job-Related Physical Performance Examination
for Fire Fighters; Dotson and Others. A summary report for the National
Fire Prevention and Control Administration. Washington, DC. March 1977.
13. Proposed Sample Standards for Fire Fighters' Protective Clothing
and Equipment; International Association of Fire Fighters, Washington,
DC.
14. A Study of Facepiece Leakage of Self-Contained Breathing
Apparatus by DOP Man Tests; Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory, Los
Alamos, NM.
15. The Development of Criteria for Fire Fighters' Gloves; Vol. II:
Glove Criteria and Test Methods; National Institute for Occupational
Safety and Health, Cincinnati, OH. 1976.
16. Model Performance Criteria for Structural Fire Fighters'
Helmets; National Fire Prevention and Control Administration,
Washington, DC. 1977.
17. Firefighters; Job Safety and Health Magazine, Occupational
Safety and Health Administration, Washington, DC. June 1978.
18. Eating Smoke--The Dispensable Diet; Utech, H.P. The Fire
Independent, 1975.
19. Project Monoxide--A Medical Study of an Occupational Hazard of
Fire Fighters; International Association of Fire Fighters, Washington,
DC.
20. Occupational Exposures to Carbon Monoxide in Baltimore
Firefighters; Radford and Levine. Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore,
MD. Journal of Occupational Medicine, September, 1976.
21. Fire Brigades; National Safety Council, Chicago, IL. 1966.
22. American National Standard, Practice for Respiratory Protection
for the Fire Service; ANSI Z88.5; American National Standards Institute,
New York, NY 10018.
23. Respirator Studies for the Nuclear Regulatory Commission;
October 1, 1977--September 30, 1978. Evaluation and Performance of Open
Circuit Breathing Apparatus. NU REG/CR-1235. Los Alamos Scientific
Laboratory; Los Alamos, NM. 87545, January, 1980.
B. Sec. 1910.157. Portable fire extinguishers:
1. Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers, ANSI/NFPA 10; National
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269
2. Methods for Hydrostatic Testing of Compressed Gas Cylinders, C-1;
Compressed Gas Association, 1235 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington, VA
22202.
3. Recommendations for the Disposition of Unserviceable Compressed
Gas Cylinders, C-2; Compressed Gas Association, 1235 Jefferson Davis
Highway, Arlington, VA 22202.
4. Standard for Visual Inspection of Compressed Gas Cylinders, C-6;
Compressed Gas Association, 1235 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington, VA
22202.
5. Portable Fire Extinguisher Selection Guide, National Association
of Fire Equipment Distributors; 111 East Wacker Drive, Chicago, IL
60601.
C. Sec. 1910.158. Standpipe and hose systems:
1. Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, ANSI/NFPA 13;
National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
02269.
2. Standard of the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems, ANSI/
NFPA 14; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Quincy, MA 02269.
3. Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps, ANSI/
NFPA 20; National Fire
[[Page 527]]
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
4. Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection, ANSI/NFPA
22; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
02269.
5. Standard for Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose Connections,
ANSI/NFPA 194; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Quincy, MA 02269 .
6. Standard for Fire Hose, NFPA 196; National Fire Protection
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
7. Standard for the Care of Fire Hose, NFPA 198; National Fire
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
D. Sec. 1910.159. Automatic sprinkler systems:
1. Standard of the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, ANSI-NFPA 13;
National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
02269.
2. Standard for the Care and Maintenance of Sprinkler Systems, ANSI/
NFPA 13A; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Quincy, MA 02269.
3. Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems,
ANSI/NFPA 14; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Quincy, MA 02269.
4. Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps, ANSI/
NFPA 20; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Quincy, MA 02269 .
5. Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection, ANSI-NFPA
22; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
02269.
6. Standard for Indoor General Storage, ANSI/NFPA 231; National Fire
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
7. Standard for Rack Storage of Materials, ANSI/NFPA 231C; National
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
E. Sec. 1910.160. Fixed extinguishing systems--general information:
1. Standard for Foam Extinguishing Systems, ANSI-NFPA 11; National
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
2. Standard for Hi-Expansion Foam Systems, ANSI/NFPA 11A; National
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
3. Standard on Synthetic Foam and Combined Agent Systems, ANSI/NFPA
11B; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
02269.
4. Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems, ANSI/NFPA 12;
National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
02269 .
5. Standard on Halon 1301, ANSI/NFPA 12A; National Fire Protection
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
6. Standard on Halon 1211, ANSI/NFPA 12B; National Fire Protection
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
7. Standard for Water Spray Systems, ANSI/NFPA 15; National Fire
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
8. Standard for Foam-Water Sprinkler Systems and Foam-Water Spray
Systems, ANSI/NFPA 16; National Fire Protection Association, National
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269
9. Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems, ANSI/NFPA 17;
National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
02269.
F. Sec. 1910.161. Fixed extinguishing systems--dry chemical:
1. Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems, ANSI/NFPA 17;
National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
02269.
2. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70; National Fire Protection
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
3. Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of
Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapor from Commercial Cooking Equipment, NFPA 96;
National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
02269.
G. Sec. 1910.162. Fixed extinguishing systems--gaseous agents:
1. Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems, ANSI/NFPA 12;
National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
02269 .
2. Standard on Halon 1301, ANSI/NFPA 12B; National Fire Protection
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
3. Standard on Halon 1211, ANSI/NFPA 12B; National Fire Protection
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
4. Standard on Explosion Prevention Systems, ANSI/NFPA 69; National
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
5. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70; National Fire Protection
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
6. Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors, ANSI/NFPA 72E; National
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
7. Determination of Halon 1301/1211 Threshold Extinguishing
Concentrations Using the Cup Burner Method; Riley and Olson, Ansul
Report AL-530-A.
H. Sec. 1910.163. Fixed extinguishing systems--water spray and foam
agents:
1. Standard for Foam Extinguisher Systems, ANSI/NFPA 11; National
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
2. Standard for High Expansion Foam Systems, ANSI/NFPA 11A; National
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
[[Page 528]]
3. Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection, ANSI/
NFPA 15; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Quincy, MA 02269 .
4. Standard for the Installation of Foam-Water Sprinkler Systems and
Foam-Water Spray Systems, ANSI/NFPA 16; National Fire Protection
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
I. Sec. 1910.164. Fire Detection systems:
1. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70; National Fire Protection
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
2. Standard for Central Station Signaling Systems, ANSI/NFPA 71;
National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
02269 .
3. Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors, ANSI/NFPA 72E; National
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
J. Sec. 1910.165. Employee alarm systems:
1. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70; National Fire Protection
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
2. Standard for Central Station Signaling systems, ANSI/NFPA 71;
National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
02269.
3. Standard for Local Protective Signaling Systems, ANSI/NFPA 72A;
National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
02269.
4. Standard for Auxiliary Protective Signaling Systems, ANSI/NFPA
72B; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
02269.
5. Standard for Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems, ANSI/
NFPA 72C; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Quincy, MA 02269 .
6. Standard for Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems, ANSI/NFPA
72D; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
02269.
7. Vocal Emergency Alarms in Hospitals and Nursing Facilities:
Practice and Potential. National Bureau of Standards. Washington, D.C.,
July 1977.
8. Fire Alarm and Communication Systems. National Bureau of
Standards. Washington, D.C., April 1978.
[45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993 ]
Appendix D to Subpart L of Part 1910--Availability of Publications
Incorporated by Reference in Section 1910.156 Fire Brigades
The final standard for fire brigades, Section 1910.156, contains
provisions which incorporate certain publications by reference. The
publications provide criteria and test methods for protective clothing
worn by those fire brigade members who are expected to perform interior
structural fire fighting. The standard references the publications as
the chief sources of information for determining if the protective
clothing affords the required level of protection.
It is appropriate to note that the final standard does not require
employers to purchase a copy of the referenced publications. Instead,
employers can specify (in purchase orders to the manufacturers) that the
protective clothing meet the criteria and test methods contained in the
referenced publications and can rely on the manufacturers' assurances of
compliance. Employers, however, may desire to obtain a copy of the
referenced publications for their own information.
The paragraph designation of the standard where the referenced
publications appear, the title of the publications, and the availablity
of the publications are as follows:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Paragraph designation Referenced Publication Available From
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1910.156(e)(3)(ii)...................... ``Protective Clothing for National Fire Protection
Structural Fire Fighting,'' NFPA Association, Batterymarch Park,
No. 1971 (1975). Quincy, MA 02269.
1910.156(e)(4)(i)....................... ``Development of Criteria for Fire U.S. Government Printing Office,
Fighter's Gloves; Vol. II, Part Washington, D.C. 20402. Stock No.
II: Test Methods'' (1976). for Vol. II is: 071-033-0201-1.
1910.156(e)(5)(i)....................... ``Model Performance Criteria for U.S. Fire Administration, National
Structural Firefighter's Fire Safety and Research Office,
Helmets'' (1977). Washington, D.C. 20230.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The referenced publications (or a microfiche of the publications)
are available for review at many universities and public libraries
throughout the country. These publications may also be examined at the
OSHA Technical Data Center, Room N2439-Rear, United States Department of
Labor, 200 Constitution Ave., N.W., Washington, D.C. 20210 (202-219-
7500), or at any OSHA Regional Office (see telephone directories under
United States Government-Labor Department).
[45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 58 FR 33509, June 30, 1993;
61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
[[Page 529]]
Appendix E to Subpart L of Part 1910--Test Methods for Protective
Clothing
This appendix contains test methods which must be used to determine
if protective clothing affords the required level of protection as
specified in Sec. 1910.156, fire brigades.
(1) Puncture resistance test method for foot protection.
A. Apparatus. The puncture resistance test shall be performed on a
testing machine having a movable platform adjusted to travel at \1/4\-
inch/min (0.1 cm/sec). Two blocks of hardwood, metal, or plastic shall
be prepared as follows: the blocks shall be of such size and thickness
as to insure a suitable rigid test ensemble and allow for at least one-
inch of the pointed end of an 8D nail to be exposed for the penetration.
One block shall have a hole drilled to hold an 8D common nail firmly at
an angle of 98 deg.. The second block shall have a maximum \1/2\-inch
(1.3 cm) diameter hole drilled through it so that the hole will allow
free passage of the nail after it penetrates the insole during the test.
B. Procedure. The test ensemble consisting of the sample unit, the
two prepared blocks, a piece of leather outsole 10 to 11 irons thick,
and a new 8D nail, shall be placed as follows: the 8D nail in the hole,
the sample of outsole stock superimposed above the nail, the area of the
sole plate to be tested placed on the outsole, and the second block with
hole so placed as to allow for free passage of the nail after it passes
through the outsole stock and sole plate in that order. The machine
shall be started and the pressure, in pounds required for the nail to
completely penetrate the outsole and sole plate, recorded to the nearest
five pounds. Two determinations shall be made on each sole plate and the
results averaged. A new nail shall be used for each determination.
C. Source. These test requirements are contained in ``Military
Specification For Fireman's Boots,'' MIL-B-2885D (1973 and amendment
dated 1975) and are reproduced for your convenience.
(2) Test method for determining the strength of cloth by tearing:
Trapezoid Method.
A. Test specimen. The specimen shall be a rectangle of cloth 3-
inches by 6-inches (7.6 cm by 15.2 cm). The long dimension shall be
parallel to the warp for warp tests and parallel to the filling for
filling tests. No two specimens for warp tests shall contain the same
warp yarns, nor shall any two specimens for filling tests contain the
same filling yarns. The specimen shall be taken no nearer the selvage
than \1/10\ the width of the cloth. An isosceles trapezoid having an
altitude of 3-inches (7.6 cm) and bases of 1 inch (2.5cm) and 4 inches
(10.2 cm) in length, respectively, shall be marked on each specimen,
preferably with the aid of a template. A cut approximately \3/8\-inch (1
cm) in length shall then be made in the center of a perpendicular to the
1-inch (2.5 cm) edge.
B. Apparatus. (i) Six-ounce (.17 kg) weight tension clamps shall be
used so designed that the six ounces (.17 kg) of weight are distributed
evenly across the complete width of the sample.
(ii) The machine shall consist of three main parts: Straining
mechanism, clamps for holding specimen, and load and elongation
recording mechanisms.
(iii) A machine wherein the specimen is held between two clamps and
strained by a uniform movement of the pulling clamp shall be used.
(iv) The machine shall be adjusted so that the pulling clamp shall
have a uniform speed of 12 10.5 inches per minute
(0.5 .02 cm/sec).
(v) The machine shall have two clamps with two jaws on each clamp.
The design of the two clamps shall be such that one gripping surface or
jaw may be an integral part of the rigid frame of the clamp or be
fastened to allow a slight vertical movement, while the other gripping
surface or jaw shall be completely moveable. The dimension of the
immovable jaw of each clamp parallel to the application of the load
shall measure one-inch, and the dimension of the jaw perpendicular to
this direction shall measure three inches or more. The face of the
movable jaw of each clamp shall measure one-inch by three inches.
Each jaw face shall have a flat smooth, gripping surface. All edges
which might cause a cutting action shall be rounded to a radius of not
over \1/64\-inch (.04 cm). In cases where a cloth tends to slip when
being tested, the jaws may be faced with rubber or other material to
prevent slippage. The distance between the jaws (gage length) shall be
one-inch at the start of the test.
(vi) Calibrated dial; scale or chart shall be used to indicate
applied load and elongation. The machine shall be adjusted or set, so
that the maximum load required to break the specimen will remain
indicated on the calibrated dial or scale after the test specimen has
ruptured.
(vii) The machine shall be of such capacity that the maximum load
required to break the specimen shall be not greater than 85 percent or
less than 15 percent of the rated capacity.
(viii) The error of the machine shall not exceed 2 percent up to and
including a 50-pound load (22.6 kg) and 1 percent over a 50-pound load
(22.6 kg) at any reading within its loading range.
(ix) All machine attachments for determining maximum loads shall be
disengaged during this test.
C. Procedure. (i) The specimen shall be clamped in the machine along
the nonparallel sides of the trapezoid so that these sides lie along the
lower edge of the upper clamp and the upper edge of the lower clamp with
[[Page 530]]
the cut halfway between the clamps. The short trapezoid base shall be
held taut and the long trapezoid base shall lie in the folds.
(ii) The machine shall be started and the force necessary to tear
the cloth shall be observed by means of an autographic recording device.
The speed of the pulling clamp shall be 12 inches 0.5 inch
per minute (0.5 .02 cm/sec).
(iii) If a specimen slips between the jaws, breaks in or at the
edges of the jaws, or if for any reason attributable to faulty
technique, an individual measurement falls markedly below the average
test results for the sample unit, such result shall be discarded and
another specimen shall be tested.
(iv) The tearing strength of the specimen shall be the average of
the five highest peak loads of resistance registered for 3 inches (7.6
cm) of separation of the tear.
D. Report. (i) Five specimens in each of the warp and filling
directions shall be tested from each sample unit.
(ii) The tearing strength of the sample unit shall be the average of
the results obtained from the specimens tested in each of the warp and
filling directions and shall be reported separately to the nearest 0.1-
pound (.05 kg).
E. Source. These test requirements are contained in ``Federal Test
Method Standard 191, Method 5136'' and are reproduced for your
convenience.
(3) Test method for determining flame resistance of cloth; vertical.
A. Test specimen. The specimen shall be a rectangle of cloth 2\3/4\
inches (7.0 cm) by 12 inches (30.5 cm) with the long dimension parallel
to either the warp or filling direction of the cloth. No two warp
specimens shall contain the same warp yarns, and no two filling
specimens shall contain the same filling yarn.
B. Number of determinations. Five specimens from each of the warp
and filling directions shall be tested from each sample unit.
C. Apparatus. (i) Cabinet. A cabinet and accessories shall be
fabricated in accordance with the requirements specified in Figures L-1,
L-2, and L-3. Galvanized sheet metal or other suitable metal shall be
used. The entire inside back wall of the cabinet shall be painted black
to facilitate the viewing of the test specimen and pilot flame.
(ii) Burner. The burner shall be equipped with a variable orifice to
adjust the flame height, a barrel having a \3/8\-inch (1 cm) inside
diameter and a pilot light.
(a) The burner may be constructed by combining a \3/8\-inch (1 cm)
inside diameter barrel 3 \1/4\ inches (7.6 .6
cm) long from a fixed orifice burner with a base from a variable orifice
burner.
(b) The pilot light tube shall have a diameter of approximately \1/
16\-inch (.2 cm) and shall be spaced \1/8\-inch (.3 cm) away from the
burner edge with a pilot flame \1/8\-inch (.3 cm) long.
(c) The necessary gas connections and the applicable plumbing shall
be as specified in Figure L-4 except that a solenoid valve may be used
in lieu of the stopcock valve to which the burner is attached. The
stopcock valve or solenoid valve, whichever is used, shall be capable of
being fully opened or fully closed in 0.1-second.
(d) On the side of the barrel of the burner, opposite the pilot
light there shall be a metal rod of approximately \1/8\-inch (.3 cm)
diameter spaced \1/2\-inch (1.3 cm) from the barrel and extending above
the burner. The rod shall have two \5/16\-inch (.8 cm) prongs marking
the distances of \3/4\-inch (1.9 cm) and 1\1/2\ inches (3.8 cm) above
the top of the burner.
(e) The burner shall be fixed in a position so that the center of
the barrel of the burner is directly below the center of the specimen.
(iii) There shall be a control valve system with a delivery rate
designed to furnish gas to the burner under a pressure of 2\1/2\
\1/4\ (psi) (17.5 1.8 kPa) per square inch at
the burner inlet (see (g)(3)(vi)(A)). The manufacturer's recommended
delivery rate for the valve system shall be included in the required
pressure.
(iv) A synthetic gas mixture shall be of the following composition
within the following limits (analyzed at standard conditions): 55
3 percent hydrogen, 24 1 percent methane, 3
1 percent ethane, and 18 1 percent carbon
monoxide which will give a specific gravity of 0.365 0.018
(air = 1) and a B.T.U. content of 540 20 per cubic foot
(20.1 3.7 kJ/L)(dry basis) at 69.8 deg.F (21 deg.C).
(v) There shall be metal hooks and weights to produce a series of
total loads to determine length of char. The metal hooks shall consist
of No. 19 gage steel wire or equivalent and shall be made from 3-inch
(7.6 cm) lengths of wire and bent \1/2\-inch (1.3 cm) from one end to a
45 degree hook. One end of the hook shall be fastened around the neck of
the weight to be used.
(vi) There shall be a stop watch or other device to measure the
burning time to 0.2-second.
(vii) There shall be a scale, graduated in 0.1 inch (.3 cm) to
measure the length of char.
D. Procedure. (i) The material undergoing test shall be evaluated
for the characteristics of after-flame time and char length on each
specimen.
(ii) All specimens to be tested shall be at moisture equilibrium
under standard atmospheric conditions in accordance with paragraph (3)C
of this appendix. Each specimen to be tested shall be exposed to the
test flame within 20 seconds after removal from the standard atmosphere.
In case of dispute, all testing will be conducted under Standard
Atmospheric Conditions in accordance with paragraph (3)C of this
appendix.
[[Page 531]]
(iii) The specimen in its holder shall be suspended vertically in
the cabinet in such a manner that the entire length of the specimen is
exposed and the lower end is \3/4\-inch (1.9 cm) above the top of the
gas burner. The apparatus shall be set up in a draft free area.
(iv) Prior to inserting the specimen, the pilot flame shall be
adjusted to approximately \1/8\-inch (.3 cm) in height measured from its
lowest point to the tip.
The burner flame shall be adjusted by means of the needle valve in
the base of the burner to give a flame height of 1\1/2\ inches (3.8 cm)
with the stopcock fully open and the air supply to the burner shut off
and taped. The 1\1/2\-inch (3.8 cm) flame height is obtained by
adjusting the valve so that the uppermost portion (tip) of the flame is
level with the tip of the metal prong (see Figure L-2) specified for
adjustment of flame height. It is an important aspect of the evaluation
that the flame height be adjusted with the tip of the flame level with
the tip of the metal prong. After inserting the specimen, the stopcock
shall be fully opened, and the burner flame applied vertically at the
middle of the lower edge of the specimen for 12 seconds and the burner
turned off. The cabinet door shall remain shut during testing.
(v) The after-flame shall be the time the specimen continues to
flame after the burner flame is shut off.
(vi) After each specimen is removed, the test cabinet shall be
cleared of fumes and smoke prior to testing the next specimen.
(vii) After both flaming and glowing have ceased, the char length
shall be measured. The char length shall be the distance from the end of
the specimen, which was exposed to the flame, to the end of a tear (made
lengthwise) of the specimen through the center of the charred area as
follows: The specimen shall be folded lengthwise and creased by hand
along a line through the highest peak of the charred area. The hook
shall be inserted in the specimen (or a hole, \1/4\-inch (.6 cm)
diameter or less, punched out for the hook) at one side of the charred
area \1/4\-inch (.6 cm) from the adjacent outside edge and \1/4\-inch
(.6 cm) in from the lower end. A weight of sufficient size such that the
weight and hook together shall equal the total tearing load required in
Table L-2 of this section shall be attached to the hook.
(viii) A tearing force shall be applied gently to the specimen by
grasping the corner of the cloth at the opposite edge of the char from
the load and raising the specimen and weight clear of the supporting
surface. The end of the tear shall be marked off on the edge and the
char length measurement made along the undamaged edge.
Loads for determining char length applicable to the weight of the
test cloth shall be as shown in Table L-2.
Table L-2 \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total
tearing
weight for
Specified weight per square yard of cloth before any fire determining
retardant treatment or coating--ounces the charred
length--
pound
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.0 to 6.0................................................. 0.25
Over 6.0 to 15.0........................................... 0.50
Over 15.0 to 23.0.......................................... 0.75
Over 23.0.................................................. 1.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ To change into S.I. (System International) units, 1 ounce=28.35
grams, 1 pound=453 grams, 1 yard=.91 metre.
(ix) The after-flame time of the specimen shall be recorded to the
nearest 0.2-second and the char length to the nearest 0.1-inch (.3 cm).
E. Report. (i) The after-flame time and char length of the sample
unit shall be the average of the results obtained from the individual
specimens tested. All values obtained from the individual specimens
shall be recorded.
(ii) The after-flame time shall be reported to the nearest 0.2-
second and the char length to the nearest 0.1-inch (.3 cm).
F. Source. These test requirements are contained in ``Federal Test
Method Standard 191, Method 5903 (1971)'' and are reproduced for your
convenience.
[[Page 532]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.032
[[Page 533]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.033
[[Page 534]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.034
[[Page 535]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.035
[45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981]
Subpart M--Compressed Gas and Compressed Air Equipment
Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order
No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), or 1-90
(55 FR 9033), as applicable.
Secs. 1910.166-1910.168 [Reserved]
Sec. 1910.169 Air receivers.
(a) General requirements--(1) Application. This section applies to
compressed air receivers, and other equipment used in providing and
utilizing compressed air for performing operations such as cleaning,
drilling, hoisting, and chipping. On the other hand, however, this
section does not deal with the special problems created by using
compressed air to convey materials nor the problems created when men
work in compressed air as in tunnels and caissons. This section is not
intended to apply to compressed air machinery and equipment used on
transportation vehicles such as steam railroad cars, electric railway
cars, and automotive equipment.
(2) New and existing equipment. (i) All new air receivers installed
after the effective date of these regulations shall be constructed in
accordance with the 1968 edition of the A.S.M.E. Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code Section VIII, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(ii) All safety valves used shall be constructed, installed, and
maintained in accordance with the A.S.M.E. Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section VIII Edition 1968.
(b) Installation and equipment requirements--(1) Installation. Air
receivers shall be so installed that all drains, handholes, and manholes
therein are
[[Page 536]]
easily accessible. Under no circumstances shall an air receiver be
buried underground or located in an inaccessible place.
(2) Drains and traps. A drain pipe and valve shall be installed at
the lowest point of every air receiver to provide for the removal of
accumulated oil and water. Adequate automatic traps may be installed in
addition to drain valves. The drain valve on the air receiver shall be
opened and the receiver completely drained frequently and at such
intervals as to prevent the accumulation of excessive amounts of liquid
in the receiver.
(3) Gages and valves. (i) Every air receiver shall be equipped with
an indicating pressure gage (so located as to be readily visible) and
with one or more spring-loaded safety valves. The total relieving
capacity of such safety valves shall be such as to prevent pressure in
the receiver from exceeding the maximum allowable working pressure of
the receiver by more than 10 percent.
(ii) No valve of any type shall be placed between the air receiver
and its safety valve or valves.
(iii) Safety appliances, such as safety valves, indicating devices
and controlling devices, shall be constructed, located, and installed so
that they cannot be readily rendered inoperative by any means, including
the elements.
(iv) All safety valves shall be tested frequently and at regular
intervals to determine whether they are in good operating condition.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 61
FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
Subpart N--Materials Handling and Storage
Authority: Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR
8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033) or 6-96
(62 FR 111), as applicable.
Sections 1910.176, 1910.177, 1910.178, 1910.179, 1910.180, 1910.181,
and 1910.184 also issued under 29 CFR part 1911.
Sec. 1910.176 Handling materials--general.
(a) Use of mechanical equipment. Where mechanical handling equipment
is used, sufficient safe clearances shall be allowed for aisles, at
loading docks, through doorways and wherever turns or passage must be
made. Aisles and passageways shall be kept clear and in good repair,
with no obstruction across or in aisles that could create a hazard.
Permanent aisles and passageways shall be appropriately marked.
(b) Secure storage. Storage of material shall not create a hazard.
Bags, containers, bundles, etc., stored in tiers shall be stacked,
blocked, interlocked and limited in height so that they are stable and
secure against sliding or collapse.
(c) Housekeeping. Storage areas shall be kept free from accumulation
of materials that constitute hazards from tripping, fire, explosion, or
pest harborage. Vegetation control will be exercised when necessary.
(d) [Reserved]
(e) Clearance limits. Clearance signs to warn of clearance limits
shall be provided.
(f) Rolling railroad cars. Derail and/or bumper blocks shall be
provided on spur railroad tracks where a rolling car could contact other
cars being worked, enter a building, work or traffic area.
(g) Guarding. Covers and/or guard- rails shall be provided to
protect personnel from the hazards of open pits, tanks, vats, ditches,
etc.
[39 FR 23052, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49749, Oct. 24, 1978]
Sec. 1910.177 Servicing multi-piece and single piece rim wheels.
(a) Scope. (1) This section applies to the servicing of multi-piece
and single piece rim wheels used on large vehicles such as trucks,
tractors, trailers, buses and off-road machines. It does not apply to
the servicing of rim wheels used on automobiles, or on pickup trucks and
vans utilizing automobile tires or truck tires designated ``LT''.
(2) This section does not apply to employers and places of
employment regulated under the Construction Safety
[[Page 537]]
Standards, 29 CFR part 1926; the Agriculture Standards, 29 CFR part
1928; the Shipyard Standards, 29 CFR part 1915; or the Longshoring
Standards, 29 CFR part 1918.
(3) All provisions of this section apply to the servicing of both
single piece rim wheels and multi-piece rim wheels unless designated
otherwise.
(b) Definitions. Barrier means a fence, wall or other structure or
object placed between a single piece rim wheel and an employee during
tire inflation, to contain the rim wheel components in the event of the
sudden release of the contained air of the single piece rim wheel.
Charts means the U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and
Health Administration publications entitled ``Demounting and Mounting
Procedures for Truck/Bus Tires'' and ``Multi-piece Rim Matching Chart,''
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) publications
entitled ``Demounting and Mounting Procedures Truck/Bus Tires'' and
``Multi-piece Rim Matching Chart,'' or any other poster which contains
at least the same instructions, safety precautions and other information
contained in the charts that is applicable to the types of wheels being
serviced.
Installing a rim wheel means the transfer and attachment of an
assembled rim wheel onto a vehicle axle hub. Removing means the opposite
of installing.
Mounting a tire means the assembly or putting together of the wheel
and tire components to form a rim wheel, including inflation. Demounting
means the opposite of mounting.
Multi-piece rim wheel means the assemblage of a multi-piece wheel
with the tire tube and other components.
Multi-piece wheel means a vehicle wheel consisting of two or more
parts, one of which is a side or locking ring designed to hold the tire
on the wheel by interlocking components when the tire is inflated.
Restraining device means an apparatus such as a cage, rack,
assemblage of bars and other components that will constrain all rim
wheel components during an explosive separation of a multi-piece rim
wheel, or during the sudden release of the contained air of a single
piece rim wheel.
Rim manual means a publication containing instructions from the
manufacturer or other qualified organization for correct mounting,
demounting, maintenance, and safety precautions peculiar to the type of
wheel being serviced.
Rim wheel means an assemblage of tire, tube and liner (where
appropriate), and wheel components.
Service or servicing means the mounting and demounting of rim
wheels, and related activities such as inflating, deflating, installing,
removing, and handling.
Service area means that part of an employer's premises used for the
servicing of rim wheels, or any other place where an employee services
rim wheels.
Single piece rim wheel means the assemblage of single piece rim
wheel with the tire and other components.
Single piece wheel means a vehicle wheel consisting of one part,
designed to hold the tire on the wheel when the tire is inflated.
Trajectory means any potential path or route that a rim wheel
component may travel during an explosive separation, or the sudden
release of the pressurized air, or an area at which an airblast from a
single piece rim wheel may be released. The trajectory may deviate from
paths which are perpendicular to the assembled position of the rim wheel
at the time of separation or explosion. (See appendix A for examples of
trajectories.)
Wheel means that portion of a rim wheel which provides the method of
attachment of the assembly to the axle of a vehicle and also provides
the means to contain the inflated portion of the assembly (i.e., the
tire and/or tube).
(c) Employee training. (1) The employer shall provide a program to
train all employees who service rim wheels in the hazards involved in
servicing those rim wheels and the safety procedures to be followed.
(i) The employer shall assure that no employee services any rim
wheel unless the employee has been trained and instructed in correct
procedures of
[[Page 538]]
servicing the type of wheel being serviced, and in the safe operating
procedures described in paragraphs (f) and (g) of this section.
(ii) Information to be used in the training program shall include,
at a minimum, the applicable data contained in the charts (rim manuals)
and the contents of this standard.
(iii) Where an employer knows or has reason to believe that any of
his employees is unable to read and understand the charts or rim manual,
the employer shall assure that the employee is instructed concerning the
contents of the charts and rim manual in a manner which the employee is
able to understand.
(2) The employer shall assure that each employee demonstrates and
maintains the ability to service rim wheels safely, including
performance of the following tasks:
(i) Demounting of tires (including deflation);
(ii) Inspection and identification of the rim wheel components;
(iii) Mounting of tires (including inflation with a restraining
device or other safeguard required by this section);
(iv) Use of the restraining device or barrier, and other equipment
required by this section;
(v) Handling of rim wheels;
(vi) Inflation of the tire when a single piece rim wheel is mounted
on a vehicle;
(vii) An understanding of the necessity of standing outside the
trajectory both during inflation of the tire and during inspection of
the rim wheel following inflation; and
(viii) Installation and removal of rim wheels.
(3) The employer shall evaluate each employee's ability to perform
these tasks and to service rim wheels safely, and shall provide
additional training as necessary to assure that each employee maintains
his or her proficiency.
(d) Tire servicing equipment. (1) The employer shall furnish a
restraining device for inflating tires on multi-piece wheels.
(2) The employer shall provide a restraining device or barrier for
inflating tires on single piece wheels unless the rim wheel will be
bolted onto a vehicle during inflation.
(3) Restraining devices and barriers shall comply with the following
requirements:
(i) Each restraining device or barrier shall have the capacity to
withstand the maximum force that would be transferred to it during a rim
wheel separation occurring at 150 percent of the maximum tire
specification pressure for the type of rim wheel being serviced.
(ii) Restraining devices and barriers shall be capable of preventing
the rim wheel components from being thrown outside or beyond the device
or barrier for any rim wheel positioned within or behind the device;
(iii) Restraining devices and barriers shall be visually inspected
prior to each day's use and after any separation of the rim wheel
components or sudden release of contained air. Any restraining device or
barrier exhibiting damage such as the following defects shall be
immediately removed from service:
(A) Cracks at welds;
(B) Cracked or broken components;
(C) Bent or sprung components caused by mishandling, abuse, tire
explosion or rim wheel separation;
(D) Pitting of components due to corrosion; or
(E) Other structural damage which would decrease its effectiveness.
(iv) Restraining devices or barriers removed from service shall not
be returned to service until they are repaired and reinspected.
Restraining devices or barriers requiring structural repair such as
component replacement or rewelding shall not be returned to service
until they are certified by either the manufacturer or a Registered
Professional Engineer as meeting the strength requirements of paragraph
(d)(3)(i) of this section.
(4) The employer shall furnish and assure that an air line assembly
consisting of the following components be used for inflating tires:
(i) A clip-on chuck;
(ii) An in-line valve with a pressure gauge or a presettable
regulator; and
(iii) A sufficient length of hose between the clip-on chuck and the
in-line valve (if one is used) to allow the employee to stand outside
the trajectory.
[[Page 539]]
(5) Current charts or rim manuals containing instructions for the
type of wheels being serviced shall be available in the service area.
(6) The employer shall furnish and assure that only tools
recommended in the rim manual for the type of wheel being serviced are
used to service rim wheels.
(e) Wheel component acceptability. (1) Multi-piece wheel components
shall not be interchanged except as provided in the charts or in the
applicable rim manual.
(2) Multi-piece wheel components and single piece wheels shall be
inspected prior to assembly. Any wheel or wheel component which is bent
out of shape, pitted from corrosion, broken, or cracked shall not be
used and shall be marked or tagged unserviceable and removed from the
service area. Damaged or leaky valves shall be replaced.
(3) Rim flanges, rim gutters, rings, bead seating surfaces and the
bead areas of tires shall be free of any dirt, surface rust, scale or
loose or flaked rubber build-up prior to mounting and inflation.
(4) The size (bead diameter and tire/wheel widths) and type of both
the tire and the wheel shall be checked for compatibility prior to
assembly of the rim wheel.
(f) Safe operating procedure--multi-piece rim wheels. The employer
shall establish a safe operating procedure for servicing multi-piece rim
wheels and shall assure that employees are instructed in and follow that
procedure. The procedure shall include at least the following elements:
(1) Tires shall be completely deflated before demounting by removal
of the valve core.
(2) Tires shall be completely deflated by removing the valve core
before a rim wheel is removed from the axle in either of the following
situations:
(i) When the tire has been driven underinflated at 80% or less of
its recommended pressure, or
(ii) When there is obvious or suspected damage to the tire or wheel
components.
(3) Rubber lubricant shall be applied to bead and rim mating
surfaces during assembly of the wheel and inflation of the tire, unless
the tire or wheel manufacturer recommends against it.
(4) If a tire on a vehicle is underinflated but has more than 80% of
the recommended pressure, the tire may be inflated while the rim wheel
is on the vehicle provided remote control inflation equipment is used,
and no employees remain in the trajectory during inflation.
(5) Tires shall be inflated outside a restraining device only to a
pressure sufficient to force the tire bead onto the rim ledge and create
an airtight seal with the tire and bead.
(6) Whenever a rim wheel is in a restraining device the employee
shall not rest or lean any part of his body or equipment on or against
the restraining device.
(7) After tire inflation, the tire and wheel components shall be
inspected while still within the restraining device to make sure that
they are properly seated and locked. If further adjustment to the tire
or wheel components is necessary, the tire shall be deflated by removal
of the valve core before the adjustment is made.
(8) No attempt shall be made to correct the seating of side and lock
rings by hammering, striking or forcing the components while the tire is
pressurized.
(9) Cracked, broken, bent or otherwise damaged rim components shall
not be reworked, welded, brazed, or otherwise heated.
(10) Whenever multi-piece rim wheels are being handled, employees
shall stay out of the trajectory unless the employer can demonstrate
that performance of the servicing makes the employee's presence in the
trajectory necessary.
(11) No heat shall be applied to a multi-piece wheel or wheel
component.
(g) Safe operating procedure--single piece rim wheels. The employer
shall establish a safe operating procedure for servicing single piece
rim wheels and shall assure that employees are instructed in and follow
that procedure. The procedure shall include at least the following
elements:
(1) Tires shall be completely deflated by removal of the valve core
before demounting.
[[Page 540]]
(2) Mounting and demounting of the tire shall be done only from the
narrow ledge side of the wheel. Care shall be taken to avoid damaging
the tire beads while mounting tires on wheels. Tires shall be mounted
only on compatible wheels of matching bead diameter and width.
(3) Nonflammable rubber lubricant shall be applied to bead and wheel
mating surfaces before assembly of the rim wheel, unless the tire or
wheel manufacturer recommends against the use of any rubber lubricant.
(4) If a tire changing machine is used, the tire shall be inflated
only to the minimum pressure necessary to force the tire bead onto the
rim ledge while on the tire changing machine.
(5) If a bead expander is used, it shall be removed before the valve
core is installed and as soon as the rim wheel becomes airtight (the
tire bead slips onto the bead seat).
(6) Tires may be inflated only when contained within a restraining
device, positioned behind a barrier or bolted on the vehicle with the
lug nuts fully tightened.
(7) Tires shall not be inflated when any flat, solid surface is in
the trajectory and within one foot of the sidewall.
(8) Employees shall stay out of the trajectory when inflating a
tire.
(9) Tires shall not be inflated to more than the inflation pressure
stamped in the sidewall unless a higher pressure is recommended by the
manufacturer.
(10) Tires shall not be inflated above the maximum pressure
recommended by the manufacturer to seat the tire bead firmly against the
rim flange.
(11) No heat shall be applied to a single piece wheel.
(12) Cracked, broken, bent, or otherwise damaged wheels shall not be
reworked, welded, brazed, or otherwise heated.
[[Page 541]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.036
Appendix B to Sec. 1910.177--Ordering Information for the OSHA Charts
OSHA has printed two charts entitled ``Demounting and Mounting
Procedures for Truck/Bus Tires'' and ``Multi-piece Rim Matching Chart,''
as part of a continuing campaign to reduce accidents among employees who
service large vehicle rim wheels.
[[Page 542]]
Reprints of the charts are available through the Occupational Safety
and Health Administration (OSHA) Area and Regional Offices. The address
and telephone number of the nearest OSHA office can be obtained by
looking in the local telephone directory under U.S. Government, U.S.
Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
Single copies are available without charge.
Individuals, establishments and other organizations desiring single
or multiple copies of these charts may order them from the OSHA
Publications Office, U.S. Department of Labor, Room N-3101, Washington,
DC 20210, Telephone (202) 219-4667.
[49 FR 4350, Feb. 3, 1984, as amended at 52 FR 36026, Sept. 25, 1987; 53
FR 34737, Sept. 8, 1988; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.178 Powered industrial trucks.
(a) General requirements. (1) This section contains safety
requirements relating to fire protection, design, maintenance, and use
of fork trucks, tractors, platform lift trucks, motorized hand trucks,
and other specialized industrial trucks powered by electric motors or
internal combustion engines. This section does not apply to compressed
air or nonflammable compressed gas-operated industrial trucks, nor to
farm vehicles, nor to vehicles intended primarily for earth moving or
over-the-road hauling.
(2) All new powered industrial trucks acquired and used by an
employer after the effective date specified in paragraph (b) of
Sec. 1910.182 shall meet the design and construction requirements for
powered industrial trucks established in the ``American National
Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks, Part II, ANSI B56.1-1969'',
which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, except
for vehicles intended primarily for earth moving or over-the-road
hauling.
(3) Approved trucks shall bear a label or some other identifying
mark indicating approval by the testing laboratory. See paragraph (a)(7)
of this section and paragraph 405 of ``American National Standard for
Powered Industrial Trucks, Part II, ANSI B56.1-1969'', which is
incorporated by reference in paragraph (a)(2) of this section and which
provides that if the powered industrial truck is accepted by a
nationally recognized testing laboratory it should be so marked.
(4) Modifications and additions which affect capacity and safe
operation shall not be performed by the customer or user without
manufacturers prior written approval. Capacity, operation, and
maintenance instruction plates, tags, or decals shall be changed
accordingly.
(5) If the truck is equipped with front-end attachments other than
factory installed attachments, the user shall request that the truck be
marked to identify the attachments and show the approximate weight of
the truck and attachment combination at maximum elevation with load
laterally centered.
(6) The user shall see that all nameplates and markings are in place
and are maintained in a legible condition.
(7) As used in this section, the term, approved truck or approved
industrial truck means a truck that is listed or approved for fire
safety purposes for the intended use by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory, using nationally recognized testing standards. Refer to
Sec. 1910.155(c)(3)(iv)(A) for definition of listed, and to Sec. 1910.7
for definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory.
(b) Designations. For the purpose of this standard there are eleven
different designations of industrial trucks or tractors as follows: D,
DS, DY, E, ES, EE, EX, G, GS, LP, and LPS.
(1) The D designated units are units similar to the G units except
that they are diesel engine powered instead of gasoline engine powered.
(2) The DS designated units are diesel powered units that are
provided with additional safeguards to the exhaust, fuel and electrical
systems. They may be used in some locations where a D unit may not be
considered suitable.
(3) The DY designated units are diesel powered units that have all
the safeguards of the DS units and in addition do not have any
electrical equipment including the ignition and are equipped with
temperature limitation features.
(4) The E designated units are electrically powered units that have
minimum acceptable safeguards against inherent fire hazards.
(5) The ES designated units are electrically powered units that, in
addition to all of the requirements for the E
[[Page 543]]
units, are provided with additional safeguards to the electrical system
to prevent emission of hazardous sparks and to limit surface
temperatures. They may be used in some locations where the use of an E
unit may not be considered suitable.
(6) The EE designated units are electrically powered units that
have, in addition to all of the requirements for the E and ES units, the
electric motors and all other electrical equipment completely enclosed.
In certain locations the EE unit may be used where the use of an E and
ES unit may not be considered suitable.
(7) The EX designated units are electrically powered units that
differ from the E, ES, or EE units in that the electrical fittings and
equipment are so designed, constructed and assembled that the units may
be used in certain atmospheres containing flammable vapors or dusts.
(8) The G designated units are gasoline powered units having minimum
acceptable safeguards against inherent fire hazards.
(9) The GS designated units are gasoline powered units that are
provided with additional safeguards to the exhaust, fuel, and electrical
systems. They may be used in some locations where the use of a G unit
may not be considered suitable.
(10) The LP designated unit is similar to the G unit except that
liquefied petroleum gas is used for fuel instead of gasoline.
(11) The LPS designated units are liquefied petroleum gas powered
units that are provided with additional safeguards to the exhaust, fuel,
and electrical systems. They may be used in some locations where the use
of an LP unit may not be considered suitable.
(12) The atmosphere or location shall have been classified as to
whether it is hazardous or nonhazardous prior to the consideration of
industrial trucks being used therein and the type of industrial truck
required shall be as provided in paragraph (d) of this section for such
location.
(c) Designated locations. (1) The industrial trucks specified under
subparagraph (2) of this paragraph are the minimum types required but
industrial trucks having greater safeguards may be used if desired.
(2) For specific areas of use, see Table N-1 which tabulates the
information contained in this section. References are to the
corresponding classification as used in subpart S of this part.
(i) Power-operated industrial trucks shall not be used in
atmospheres containing hazardous concentration of acetylene, butadiene,
ethylene oxide, hydrogen (or gases or vapors equivalent in hazard to
hydrogen, such as manufactured gas), propylene oxide, acetaldehyde,
cyclopropane, diethyl ether, ethylene, isoprene, or unsymmetrical
dimethyl hydrazine (UDMH).
(ii)(a) Power-operated industrial trucks shall not be used in
atmospheres containing hazardous concentrations of metal dust, including
aluminum, magnesium, and their commercial alloys, other metals of
similarly hazardous characteristics, or in atmospheres containing carbon
black, coal or coke dust except approved power-operated industrial
trucks designated as EX may be used in such atmospheres.
(b) In atmospheres where dust of magnesium, aluminum or aluminum
bronze may be present, fuses, switches, motor controllers, and circuit
breakers of trucks shall have enclosures specifically approved for such
locations.
(iii) Only approved power-operated industrial trucks designated as
EX may be used in atmospheres containing acetone, acrylonitrile,
alcohol, ammonia, benzine, benzol, butane, ethylene dichloride,
gasoline, hexane, lacquer solvent vapors, naphtha, natural gas, propane,
propylene, styrene, vinyl acetate, vinyl chloride, or xylenes in
quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures and
where such concentrations of these gases or vapors exist continuously,
intermittently or periodically under normal operating conditions or may
exist frequently because of repair, maintenance operations, leakage,
breakdown or faulty operation of equipment.
(iv) Power-operated industrial trucks designated as DY, EE, or EX
may be used in locations where volatile flammable liquids or flammable
gases are handled, processed or used, but in which the hazardous
liquids, vapors or
[[Page 544]]
gases will normally be confined within closed containers or closed
systems from which they can escape only in case of accidental rupture or
breakdown of such containers or systems, or in the case of abnormal
operation of equipment; also in locations in which hazardous
concentrations of gases or vapors are normally prevented by positive
mechanical ventilation but which might become hazardous through failure
or abnormal operation of the ventilating equipment; or in locations
which are adjacent to Class I, Division 1 locations, and to which
hazardous concentrations of gases or vapors might occasionally be
communicated unless such communication is prevented by adequate
positive-pressure ventilation from a source of clear air, and effective
safeguards against ventilation failure are provided.
[[Page 545]]
Table N-1--Summary Table on Use of Industrial Trucks in Various Locations
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Classes Unclassified Class I locations Class II locations Class III locations
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Description of classes...... Locations not possessing Locations in which flammable gases or vapors are, Locations which are hazardous because of the Locations where easily
atmospheres as described in or may be, present in the air in quantities presence of combustible dust. ignitible fibers or
other columns. sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible flyings are present
mixtures. but not likely to be
in suspension in
quantities sufficient
to produce ignitible
mixtures.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Groups in classes None A B C D E F G None
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Examples of locations Piers and wharves inside Acetylene Hydrogen Ethyl ether Gasoline Metal dust Carbon black Grain dust, flour dust, Baled waste,
or atmospheres in and outside general Naphtha coal dust, starch dust, organic cocoa fiber,
classes and groups. storage, general Alcohols coke dust dust cotton,
industrial or commercial Acetone excelsior, hemp,
properties. Lacquer istle, jute,
solvent kapok, oakum,
Benzene sisal, Spanish
moss, synthetic
fibers, tow.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table N-1--Summary Table on Use of Industrial Trucks in Various Locations--Continued
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 2 1 2 1 2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Divisions (nature None Above condition Above condition Explosive mixture Explosive mixture Locations in Locations in
of hazardous exists may occur may be present not normally which easily which easily
conditions) continuously, accidentally as under normal present, but ignitible fibers ignitible fibers
intermittently, due to a puncture operating where deposits of or materials are stored or
or periodically of a storage drum. conditions, or dust may cause producing handled (except
under normal where failure of heat rise in combustible in the process
operating equipment may electrical flyings are of manufacture).
conditions. cause the equipment, or handled,
condition to where such manufactured, or
exist deposits may be used.
simultaneously ignited by arcs
with arcing or or sparks from
sparking of electrical
electrical equipment.
equipment, or
where dusts of an
electrically
conducting nature
may be present.
[[Page 546]]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Authorized uses of trucks by types in groups of classes and divisions
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Groups in classes None A B C D A B C D E F G E F G None None
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Type of truck authorized:
Diesel:
Type D.................... D**.............. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................
Type DS................... ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. DS............... ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. DS............... ................. DS
Type DY................... ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. DY............... ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. DY............... DY............... DY
Electric:
Type E.................... E**.............. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. E
Type ES................... ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ES............... ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ES............... ................. ES
Type EE................... ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. EE............... ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. EE............... EE............... EE
Type EX................... ................. ................. ................. ................. EX............... ................. ................. ................. EX............... ................. EX............... EX............... ................. ................. EX............... EX............... EX
Gasoline:
Type G.................... G**.............. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................
Type GS................... ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. GS............... ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. GS............... ................. GS
LP-Gas:
Type LP................... LP**............. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................
Type LPS.................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. LPS.............. ................. ................. ................. ................. ................. LPS.............. ................. LPS
Paragraph Ref. in No. 505..... 210.211 201 203 209 204 202 205 209 206 207(a) 208 (a)
(a)................(a),.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(b)..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
**Trucks conforming to these types may also be used--see subdivision (c)(2)(x) and (c)(2)(xii) of this section.
[[Page 547]]
(v) In locations used for the storage of hazardous liquids in sealed
containers or liquefied or compressed gases in containers, approved
power-operated industrial trucks designated as DS, ES, GS, or LPS may be
used. This classification includes locations where volatile flammable
liquids or flammable gases or vapors are used, but which, would become
hazardous only in case of an accident or of some unusual operating
condition. The quantity of hazardous material that might escape in case
of accident, the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the total area
involved, and the record of the industry or business with respect to
explosions or fires are all factors that should receive consideration in
determining whether or not the DS or DY, ES, EE, GS, LPS designated
truck possesses sufficient safeguards for the location. Piping without
valves, checks, meters and similar devices would not ordinarily be
deemed to introduce a hazardous condition even though used for hazardous
liquids or gases. Locations used for the storage of hazardous liquids or
of liquified or compressed gases in sealed containers would not normally
be considered hazardous unless subject to other hazardous conditions
also.
(vi)(a) Only approved power operated industrial trucks designated as
EX shall be used in atmospheres in which combustible dust is or may be
in suspension continuously, intermittently, or periodically under normal
operating conditions, in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or
ignitable mixtures, or where mechanical failure or abnormal operation of
machinery or equipment might cause such mixtures to be produced.
(b) The EX classification usually includes the working areas of
grain handling and storage plants, room containing grinders or
pulverizers, cleaners, graders, scalpers, open conveyors or spouts, open
bins or hoppers, mixers, or blenders, automatic or hopper scales,
packing machinery, elevator heads and boots, stock distributors, dust
and stock collectors (except all-metal collectors vented to the
outside), and all similar dust producing machinery and equipment in
grain processing plants, starch plants, sugar pulverizing plants,
malting plants, hay grinding plants, and other occupancies of similar
nature; coal pulverizing plants (except where the pulverizing equipment
is essentially dust tight); all working areas where metal dusts and
powders are produced, processed, handled, packed, or stored (except in
tight containers); and other similar locations where combustible dust
may, under normal operating conditions, be present in the air in
quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures.
(vii) Only approved power-operated industrial trucks designated as
DY, EE, or EX shall be used in atmospheres in which combustible dust
will not normally be in suspension in the air or will not be likely to
be thrown into suspension by the normal operation of equipment or
apparatus in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable
mixtures but where deposits or accumulations of such dust may be ignited
by arcs or sparks originating in the truck.
(viii) Only approved power-operated industrial trucks designated as
DY, EE, or EX shall be used in locations which are hazardous because of
the presence of easily ignitable fibers or flyings but in which such
fibers or flyings are not likely to be in suspension in the air in
quantities sufficient to produce ignitable mixtures.
(ix) Only approved power-operated industrial trucks designated as
DS, DY, ES, EE, EX, GS, or LPS shall be used in locations where easily
ignitable fibers are stored or handled, including outside storage, but
are not being processed or manufactured. Industrial trucks designated as
E, which have been previously used in these locations may be continued
in use.
(x) On piers and wharves handling general cargo, any approved power-
operated industrial truck designated as Type D, E, G, or LP may be used,
or trucks which conform to the requirements for these types may be used.
(xi) If storage warehouses and outside storage locations are
hazardous only the approved power-operated industrial truck specified
for such locations in this paragraph (c)(2) shall be used. If not
classified as hazardous, any approved power-operated industrial truck
[[Page 548]]
designated as Type D, E, G, or LP may be used, or trucks which conform
to the requirements for these types may be used.
(xii) If general industrial or commercial properties are hazardous,
only approved power-operated industrial trucks specified for such
locations in this paragraph (c)(2) shall be used. If not classified as
hazardous, any approved power-operated industrial truck designated as
Type D, E, G, or LP may be used, or trucks which conform to the
requirements of these types may be used.
(d) Converted industrial trucks. Power-operated industrial trucks
that have been originally approved for the use of gasoline for fuel,
when converted to the use of liquefied petroleum gas fuel in accordance
with paragraph (q) of this section, may be used in those locations where
G, GS or LP, and LPS designated trucks have been specified in the
preceding paragraphs.
(e) Safety guards. (1) High Lift Rider trucks shall be fitted with
an overhead guard manufactured in accordance with paragraph (a)(2) of
this section, unless operating conditions do not permit.
(2) If the type of load presents a hazard, the user shall equip fork
trucks with a vertical load backrest extension manufactured in
accordance with paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
(f) Fuel handling and storage. (1) The storage and handling of
liquid fuels such as gasoline and diesel fuel shall be in accordance
with NFPA Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code (NFPA No. 30-1969),
which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(2) The storage and handling of liquefied petroleum gas fuel shall
be in accordance with NFPA Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum
Gases (NFPA No. 58-1969), which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(g) Changing and charging storage batteries. (1) Battery charging
installations shall be located in areas designated for that purpose.
(2) Facilities shall be provided for flushing and neutralizing
spilled electrolyte, for fire protection, for protecting charging
apparatus from damage by trucks, and for adequate ventilation for
dispersal of fumes from gassing batteries.
(3) [Reserved]
(4) A conveyor, overhead hoist, or equivalent material handling
equipment shall be provided for handling batteries.
(5) Reinstalled batteries shall be properly positioned and secured
in the truck.
(6) A carboy tilter or siphon shall be provided for handling
electrolyte.
(7) When charging batteries, acid shall be poured into water; water
shall not be poured into acid.
(8) Trucks shall be properly positioned and brake applied before
attempting to change or charge batteries.
(9) Care shall be taken to assure that vent caps are functioning.
The battery (or compartment) cover(s) shall be open to dissipate heat.
(10) Smoking shall be prohibited in the charging area.
(11) Precautions shall be taken to prevent open flames, sparks, or
electric arcs in battery charging areas.
(12) Tools and other metallic objects shall be kept away from the
top of uncovered batteries.
(h) Lighting for operating areas.
(1) [Reserved]
(2) Where general lighting is less than 2 lumens per square foot,
auxiliary directional lighting shall be provided on the truck.
(i) Control of noxious gases and fumes. (1) Concentration levels of
carbon monoxide gas created by powered industrial truck operations shall
not exceed the levels specified in Sec. 1910.1000.
(j) Dockboards (bridge plates). See Sec. 1910.30(a).
(k) Trucks and railroad cars. (1) The brakes of highway trucks shall
be set and wheel chocks placed under the rear wheels to prevent the
trucks from rolling while they are boarded with powered industrial
trucks.
(2) Wheel stops or other recognized positive protection shall be
provided to prevent railroad cars from moving during loading or
unloading operations.
(3) Fixed jacks may be necessary to support a semitrailer and
prevent upending during the loading or unloading when the trailer is not
coupled to a tractor.
[[Page 549]]
(4) Positive protection shall be provided to prevent railroad cars
from being moved while dockboards or bridge plates are in position.
(l) Operator training. (1) Safe operation. (i) The employer shall
ensure that each powered industrial truck operator is competent to
operate a powered industrial truck safely, as demonstrated by the
successful completion of the training and evaluation specified in this
paragraph (l).
(ii) Prior to permitting an employee to operate a powered industrial
truck (except for training purposes), the employer shall ensure that
each operator has successfully completed the training required by this
paragraph (l), except as permitted by paragraph (l)(5).
(2) Training program implementation. (i) Trainees may operate a
powered industrial truck only:
(A) Under the direct supervision of persons who have the knowledge,
training, and experience to train operators and evaluate their
competence; and
(B) Where such operation does not endanger the trainee or other
employees.
(ii) Training shall consist of a combination of formal instruction
(e.g., lecture, discussion, interactive computer learning, video tape,
written material), practical training (demonstrations performed by the
trainer and practical exercises performed by the trainee), and
evaluation of the operator's performance in the workplace.
(iii) All operator training and evaluation shall be conducted by
persons who have the knowledge, training, and experience to train
powered industrial truck operators and evaluate their competence.
(3) Training program content. Powered industrial truck operators
shall receive initial training in the following topics, except in topics
which the employer can demonstrate are not applicable to safe operation
of the truck in the employer's workplace.
(i) Truck-related topics:
(A) Operating instructions, warnings, and precautions for the types
of truck the operator will be authorized to operate;
(B) Differences between the truck and the automobile;
(C) Truck controls and instrumentation: where they are located, what
they do, and how they work;
(D) Engine or motor operation;
(E) Steering and maneuvering;
(F) Visibility (including restrictions due to loading);
(G) Fork and attachment adaptation, operation, and use limitations;
(H) Vehicle capacity;
(I) Vehicle stability;
(J) Any vehicle inspection and maintenance that the operator will be
required to perform;
(K) Refueling and/or charging and recharging of batteries;
(L) Operating limitations;
(M) Any other operating instructions, warnings, or precautions
listed in the operator's manual for the types of vehicle that the
employee is being trained to operate.
(ii) Workplace-related topics:
(A) Surface conditions where the vehicle will be operated;
(B) Composition of loads to be carried and load stability;
(C) Load manipulation, stacking, and unstacking;
(D) Pedestrian traffic in areas where the vehicle will be operated;
(E) Narrow aisles and other restricted places where the vehicle will
be operated;
(F) Hazardous (classified) locations where the vehicle will be
operated;
(G) Ramps and other sloped surfaces that could affect the vehicle's
stability;
(H) Closed environments and other areas where insufficient
ventilation or poor vehicle maintenance could cause a buildup of carbon
monoxide or diesel exhaust;
(I) Other unique or potentially hazardous environmental conditions
in the workplace that could affect safe operation.
(iii) The requirements of this section.
(4) Refresher training and evaluation. (i) Refresher training,
including an evaluation of the effectiveness of that training, shall be
conducted as required by paragraph (l)(4)(ii) to ensure that the
operator has the knowledge and skills needed to operate the powered
industrial truck safely.
[[Page 550]]
(ii) Refresher training in relevant topics shall be provided to the
operator when:
(A) The operator has been observed to operate the vehicle in an
unsafe manner;
(B) The operator has been involved in an accident or near-miss
incident;
(C) The operator has received an evaluation that reveals that the
operator is not operating the truck safely;
(D) The operator is assigned to drive a different type of truck; or
(E) A condition in the workplace changes in a manner that could
affect safe operation of the truck.
(iii) An evaluation of each powered industrial truck operator's
performance shall be conducted at least once every three years.
(5) Avoidance of duplicative training. If an operator has previously
received training in a topic specified in paragraph (l)(3) of this
section, and such training is appropriate to the truck and working
conditions encountered, additional training in that topic is not
required if the operator has been evaluated and found competent to
operate the truck safely.
(6) Certification. The employer shall certify that each operator has
been trained and evaluated as required by this paragraph (l). The
certification shall include the name of the operator, the date of the
training, the date of the evaluation, and the identity of the person(s)
performing the training or evaluation.
(7) Dates. The employer shall ensure that operators of powered
industrial trucks are trained, as appropriate, by the dates shown in the
following table.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
The initial training and
If the employee was hired: evaluation of that employee
must be completed:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Before December 1, 1999................ By December 1, 1999.
After December 1, 1999................. Before the employee is assigned
to operate a powered
industrial truck.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(8) Appendix A to this section provides non-mandatory guidance to
assist employers in implementing this paragraph (l). This appendix does
not add to, alter, or reduce the requirements of this section.
(m) Truck operations. (1) Trucks shall not be driven up to anyone
standing in front of a bench or other fixed object.
(2) No person shall be allowed to stand or pass under the elevated
portion of any truck, whether loaded or empty.
(3) Unauthorized personnel shall not be permitted to ride on powered
industrial trucks. A safe place to ride shall be provided where riding
of trucks is authorized.
(4) The employer shall prohibit arms or legs from being placed
between the uprights of the mast or outside the running lines of the
truck.
(5)(i) When a powered industrial truck is left unattended, load
engaging means shall be fully lowered, controls shall be neutralized,
power shall be shut off, and brakes set. Wheels shall be blocked if the
truck is parked on an incline.
(ii) A powered industrial truck is unattended when the operator is
25 ft. or more away from the vehicle which remains in his view, or
whenever the operator leaves the vehicle and it is not in his view.
(iii) When the operator of an industrial truck is dismounted and
within 25 ft. of the truck still in his view, the load engaging means
shall be fully lowered, controls neutralized, and the brakes set to
prevent movement.
(6) A safe distance shall be maintained from the edge of ramps or
platforms while on any elevated dock, or platform or freight car. Trucks
shall not be used for opening or closing freight doors.
(7) Brakes shall be set and wheel blocks shall be in place to
prevent movement of trucks, trailers, or railroad cars while loading or
unloading. Fixed jacks may be necessary to support a semitrailer during
loading or unloading when the trailer is not coupled to a tractor. The
flooring of trucks, trailers, and railroad cars shall be checked for
breaks and weakness before they are driven onto.
(8) There shall be sufficient headroom under overhead installations,
lights, pipes, sprinkler system, etc.
[[Page 551]]
(9) An overhead guard shall be used as protection against falling
objects. It should be noted that an overhead guard is intended to offer
protection from the impact of small packages, boxes, bagged material,
etc., representative of the job application, but not to withstand the
impact of a falling capacity load.
(10) A load backrest extension shall be used whenever necessary to
minimize the possibility of the load or part of it from falling
rearward.
(11) Only approved industrial trucks shall be used in hazardous
locations.
(12) Whenever a truck is equipped with vertical only, or vertical
and horizontal controls elevatable with the lifting carriage or forks
for lifting personnel, the following additional precautions shall be
taken for the protection of personnel being elevated.
(i) Use of a safety platform firmly secured to the lifting carriage
and/or forks.
(ii) Means shall be provided whereby personnel on the platform can
shut off power to the truck.
(iii) Such protection from falling objects as indicated necessary by
the operating conditions shall be provided.
(13) [Reserved]
(14) Fire aisles, access to stairways, and fire equipment shall be
kept clear.
(n) Traveling. (1) All traffic regulations shall be observed,
including authorized plant speed limits. A safe distance shall be
maintained approximately three truck lengths from the truck ahead, and
the truck shall be kept under control at all times.
(2) The right of way shall be yielded to ambulances, fire trucks, or
other vehicles in emergency situations.
(3) Other trucks traveling in the same direction at intersections,
blind spots, or other dangerous locations shall not be passed.
(4) The driver shall be required to slow down and sound the horn at
cross aisles and other locations where vision is obstructed. If the load
being carried obstructs forward view, the driver shall be required to
travel with the load trailing.
(5) Railroad tracks shall be crossed diagonally wherever possible.
Parking closer than 8 feet from the center of railroad tracks is
prohibited.
(6) The driver shall be required to look in the direction of, and
keep a clear view of the path of travel.
(7) Grades shall be ascended or descended slowly.
(i) When ascending or descending grades in excess of 10 percent,
loaded trucks shall be driven with the load upgrade.
(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) On all grades the load and load engaging means shall be tilted
back if applicable, and raised only as far as necessary to clear the
road surface.
(8) Under all travel conditions the truck shall be operated at a
speed that will permit it to be brought to a stop in a safe manner.
(9) Stunt driving and horseplay shall not be permitted.
(10) The driver shall be required to slow down for wet and slippery
floors.
(11) Dockboard or bridgeplates, shall be properly secured before
they are driven over. Dockboard or bridgeplates shall be driven over
carefully and slowly and their rated capacity never exceeded.
(12) Elevators shall be approached slowly, and then entered squarely
after the elevator car is properly leveled. Once on the elevator, the
controls shall be neutralized, power shut off, and the brakes set.
(13) Motorized hand trucks must enter elevator or other confined
areas with load end forward.
(14) Running over loose objects on the roadway surface shall be
avoided.
(15) While negotiating turns, speed shall be reduced to a safe level
by means of turning the hand steering wheel in a smooth, sweeping
motion. Except when maneuvering at a very low speed, the hand steering
wheel shall be turned at a moderate, even rate.
(o) Loading. (1) Only stable or safely arranged loads shall be
handled. Caution shall be exercised when handling off-center loads which
cannot be centered.
(2) Only loads within the rated capacity of the truck shall be
handled.
(3) The long or high (including multiple-tiered) loads which may
affect capacity shall be adjusted.
(4) Trucks equipped with attachments shall be operated as partially
[[Page 552]]
loaded trucks when not handling a load.
(5) A load engaging means shall be placed under the load as far as
possible; the mast shall be carefully tilted backward to stabilize the
load.
(6) Extreme care shall be used when tilting the load forward or
backward, particularly when high tiering. Tilting forward with load
engaging means elevated shall be prohibited except to pick up a load. An
elevated load shall not be tilted forward except when the load is in a
deposit position over a rack or stack. When stacking or tiering, only
enough backward tilt to stabilize the load shall be used.
(p) Operation of the truck. (1) If at any time a powered industrial
truck is found to be in need of repair, defective, or in any way unsafe,
the truck shall be taken out of service until it has been restored to
safe operating condition.
(2) Fuel tanks shall not be filled while the engine is running.
Spillage shall be avoided.
(3) Spillage of oil or fuel shall be carefully washed away or
completely evaporated and the fuel tank cap replaced before restarting
engine.
(4) No truck shall be operated with a leak in the fuel system until
the leak has been corrected.
(5) Open flames shall not be used for checking electrolyte level in
storage batteries or gasoline level in fuel tanks.
(q) Maintenance of industrial trucks. (1) Any power-operated
industrial truck not in safe operating condition shall be removed from
service. All repairs shall be made by authorized personnel.
(2) No repairs shall be made in Class I, II, and III locations.
(3) Those repairs to the fuel and ignition systems of industrial
trucks which involve fire hazards shall be conducted only in locations
designated for such repairs.
(4) Trucks in need of repairs to the electrical system shall have
the battery disconnected prior to such repairs.
(5) All parts of any such industrial truck requiring replacement
shall be replaced only by parts equivalent as to safety with those used
in the original design.
(6) Industrial trucks shall not be altered so that the relative
positions of the various parts are different from what they were when
originally received from the manufacturer, nor shall they be altered
either by the addition of extra parts not provided by the manufacturer
or by the elimination of any parts, except as provided in paragraph
(q)(12) of this section. Additional counterweighting of fork trucks
shall not be done unless approved by the truck manufacturer.
(7) Industrial trucks shall be examined before being placed in
service, and shall not be placed in service if the examination shows any
condition adversely affecting the safety of the vehicle. Such
examination shall be made at least daily.
Where industrial trucks are used on a round-the-clock basis, they shall
be examined after each shift. Defects when found shall be immediately
reported and corrected.
(8) Water mufflers shall be filled daily or as frequently as is
necessary to prevent depletion of the supply of water below 75 percent
of the filled capacity. Vehicles with mufflers having screens or other
parts that may become clogged shall not be operated while such screens
or parts are clogged. Any vehicle that emits hazardous sparks or flames
from the exhaust system shall immediately be removed from service, and
not returned to service until the cause for the emission of such sparks
and flames has been eliminated.
(9) When the temperature of any part of any truck is found to be in
excess of its normal operating temperature, thus creating a hazardous
condition, the vehicle shall be removed from service and not returned to
service until the cause for such overheating has been eliminated.
(10) Industrial trucks shall be kept in a clean condition, free of
lint, excess oil, and grease. Noncombustible agents should be used for
cleaning trucks. Low flash point (below 100 deg.F.) solvents shall not
be used. High flash point (at or above 100 deg.F.) solvents may be
used. Precautions regarding toxicity, ventilation, and fire hazard shall
be consonant with the agent or solvent used.
(11) [Reserved]
[[Page 553]]
(12) Industrial trucks originally approved for the use of gasoline
for fuel may be converted to liquefied petroleum gas fuel provided the
complete conversion results in a truck which embodies the features
specified for LP or LPS designated trucks. Such conversion equipment
shall be approved. The description of the component parts of this
conversion system and the recommended method of installation on specific
trucks are contained in the ``Listed by Report.''
Appendix A to Sec. 1910.178--Stability of Powered Industrial Trucks
(Non-mandatory Appendix to Paragraph (l) of This Section)
A-1. Definitions.
The following definitions help to explain the principle of
stability:
Center of gravity is the point on an object at which all of the
object's weight is concentrated. For symmetrical loads, the center of
gravity is at the middle of the load.
Counterweight is the weight that is built into the truck's basic
structure and is used to offset the load's weight and to maximize the
vehicle's resistance to tipping over.
Fulcrum is the truck's axis of rotation when it tips over.
Grade is the slope of a surface, which is usually measured as the
number of feet of rise or fall over a hundred foot horizontal distance
(the slope is expressed as a percent).
Lateral stability is a truck's resistance to overturning sideways.
Line of action is an imaginary vertical line through an object's
center of gravity.
Load center is the horizontal distance from the load's edge (or the
fork's or other attachment's vertical face) to the line of action
through the load's center of gravity.
Longitudinal stability is the truck's resistance to overturning
forward or rearward.
Moment is the product of the object's weight times the distance from
a fixed point (usually the fulcrum). In the case of a powered industrial
truck, the distance is measured from the point at which the truck will
tip over to the object's line of action. The distance is always measured
perpendicular to the line of action.
Track is the distance between the wheels on the same axle of the
truck.
Wheelbase is the distance between the centerline of the vehicle's
front and rear wheels.
A-2. General.
A-2.1. Determining the stability of a powered industrial truck is
simple once a few basic principles are understood. There are many
factors that contribute to a vehicle's stability: the vehicle's
wheelbase, track, and height; the load's weight distribution; and the
vehicle's counterweight location (if the vehicle is so equipped).
A-2.2. The ``stability triangle,'' used in most stability
discussions, demonstrates stability simply.
A-3. Basic Principles.
A-3.1. Whether an object is stable depends on the object's moment at
one end of a system being greater than, equal to, or smaller than the
object's moment at the system's other end. This principle can be seen in
the way a see-saw or teeter-totter works: that is, if the product of the
load and distance from the fulcrum (moment) is equal to the moment at
the device's other end, the device is balanced and it will not move.
However, if there is a greater moment at one end of the device, the
device will try to move downward at the end with the greater moment.
A-3.2. The longitudinal stability of a counterbalanced powered
industrial truck depends on the vehicle's moment and the load's moment.
In other words, if the mathematic product of the load moment (the
distance from the front wheels, the approximate point at which the
vehicle would tip forward) to the load's center of gravity times the
load's weight is less than the vehicle's moment, the system is balanced
and will not tip forward. However, if the load's moment is greater than
the vehicle's moment, the greater load-moment will force the truck to
tip forward.
A-4. The Stability Triangle.
A-4.1. Almost all counterbalanced powered industrial trucks have a
three-point suspension system, that is, the vehicle is supported at
three points. This is true even if the vehicle has four wheels. The
truck's steer axle is attached to the truck by a pivot pin in the axle's
center. When the points are connected with imaginary lines, this three-
point support forms a triangle called the stability triangle. Figure 1
depicts the stability triangle.
[[Page 554]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01DE98.002
A-4.2. When the vehicle's line of action, or load center, falls
within the stability triangle, the vehicle is stable and will not tip
over. However, when the vehicle's line of action or the vehicle/load
combination falls outside the stability triangle, the vehicle is
unstable and may tip over. (See Figure 2.)
[[Page 555]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01DE98.003
A-5. Longitudinal Stability.
A-5.1. The axis of rotation when a truck tips forward is the front
wheels' points of contact with the pavement. When a powered industrial
truck tips forward, the truck will rotate about this line. When a truck
is stable, the vehicle-moment must exceed the load-moment. As long as
the vehicle-moment is equal to or exceeds the load-moment, the vehicle
will not tip over. On the other hand, if the load moment slightly
exceeds the vehicle-moment, the truck will begin to tip forward, thereby
causing the rear to lose contact with the floor or ground and resulting
in loss of steering control. If the load-moment greatly exceeds the
vehicle moment, the truck will tip forward.
A-5.2. To determine the maximum safe load-moment, the truck
manufacturer normally rates the truck at a maximum load at a given
distance from the front face of the forks. The specified distance from
the front face of the forks to the line of action of the load is
commonly called the load center. Because larger trucks normally handle
loads that are physically larger, these vehicles have greater load
centers. Trucks with a capacity of 30,000 pounds or less are normally
rated at a given load weight at a 24-inch load center. Trucks with a
capacity greater than 30,000 pounds are normally rated at a given load
weight at a 36- or 48-inch load center. To safely operate the vehicle,
the operator should always check the data plate to determine the maximum
allowable weight at the rated load center.
A-5.3. Although the true load-moment distance is measured from the
front wheels, this
[[Page 556]]
distance is greater than the distance from the front face of the forks.
Calculating the maximum allowable load-moment using the load-center
distance always provides a lower load-moment than the truck was designed
to handle. When handling unusual loads, such as those that are larger
than 48 inches long (the center of gravity is greater than 24 inches) or
that have an offset center of gravity, etc., a maximum allowable load-
moment should be calculated and used to determine whether a load can be
safely handled. For example, if an operator is operating a 3000 pound
capacity truck (with a 24-inch load center), the maximum allowable load-
moment is 72,000 inch-pounds (3,000 times 24). If a load is 60 inches
long (30-inch load center), then the maximum that this load can weigh is
2,400 pounds (72,000 divided by 30).
A-6. Lateral Stability.
A-6.1. The vehicle's lateral stability is determined by the line of
action's position (a vertical line that passes through the combined
vehicle's and load's center of gravity) relative to the stability
triangle. When the vehicle is not loaded, the truck's center of gravity
location is the only factor to be considered in determining the truck's
stability. As long as the line of action of the combined vehicle's and
load's center of gravity falls within the stability triangle, the truck
is stable and will not tip over. However, if the line of action falls
outside the stability triangle, the truck is not stable and may tip
over. Refer to Figure 2.
A-6.2. Factors that affect the vehicle's lateral stability include
the load's placement on the truck, the height of the load above the
surface on which the vehicle is operating, and the vehicle's degree of
lean.
A-7. Dynamic Stability.
A-7.1. Up to this point, the stability of a powered industrial truck
has been discussed without considering the dynamic forces that result
when the vehicle and load are put into motion. The weight's transfer and
the resultant shift in the center of gravity due to the dynamic forces
created when the machine is moving, braking, cornering, lifting,
tilting, and lowering loads, etc., are important stability
considerations.
A-7.2. When determining whether a load can be safely handled, the
operator should exercise extra caution when handling loads that cause
the vehicle to approach its maximum design characteristics. For example,
if an operator must handle a maximum load, the load should be carried at
the lowest position possible, the truck should be accelerated slowly and
evenly, and the forks should be tilted forward cautiously. However, no
precise rules can be formulated to cover all of these eventualities.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43
FR 49749, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 53 FR 12122, Apr.
12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug 6, 1990; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR
66270, Dec. 1, 1998]
Sec. 1910.179 Overhead and gantry cranes.
(a) Definitions applicable to this section. (1) A crane is a machine
for lifting and lowering a load and moving it horizontally, with the
hoisting mechanism an integral part of the machine. Cranes whether fixed
or mobile are driven manually or by power.
(2) An automatic crane is a crane which when activated operates
through a preset cycle or cycles.
(3) A cab-operated crane is a crane controlled by an operator in a
cab located on the bridge or trolley.
(4) Cantilever gantry crane means a gantry or semigantry crane in
which the bridge girders or trusses extend transversely beyond the crane
runway on one or both sides.
(5) Floor-operated crane means a crane which is pendant or
nonconductive rope controlled by an operator on the floor or an
independent platform.
(6) Gantry crane means a crane similar to an overhead crane except
that the bridge for carrying the trolley or trolleys is rigidly
supported on two or more legs running on fixed rails or other runway.
(7) Hot metal handling crane means an overhead crane used for
transporting or pouring molten material.
(8) Overhead crane means a crane with a movable bridge carrying a
movable or fixed hoisting mechanism and traveling on an overhead fixed
runway structure.
(9) Power-operated crane means a crane whose mechanism is driven by
electric, air, hydraulic, or internal combustion means.
(10) A pulpit-operated crane is a crane operated from a fixed
operator station not attached to the crane.
(11) A remote-operated crane is a crane controlled by an operator
not in a pulpit or in the cab attached to the crane, by any method other
than pendant or rope control.
[[Page 557]]
(12) A semigantry crane is a gantry crane with one end of the bridge
rigidly supported on one or more legs that run on a fixed rail or
runway, the other end of the bridge being supported by a truck running
on an elevated rail or runway.
(13) Storage bridge crane means a gantry type crane of long span
usually used for bulk storage of material; the bridge girders or trusses
are rigidly or nonrigidly supported on one or more legs. It may have one
or more fixed or hinged cantilever ends.
(14) Wall crane means a crane having a jib with or without trolley
and supported from a side wall or line of columns of a building. It is a
traveling type and operates on a runway attached to the side wall or
columns.
(15) Appointed means assigned specific responsibilities by the
employer or the employer's representative.
(16) ANSI means the American National Standards Institute.
(17) An auxiliary hoist is a supplemental hoisting unit of lighter
capacity and usually higher speed than provided for the main hoist.
(18) A brake is a device used for retarding or stopping motion by
friction or power means.
(19) A drag brake is a brake which provides retarding force without
external control.
(20) A holding brake is a brake that automatically prevents motion
when power is off.
(21) Bridge means that part of a crane consisting of girders,
trucks, end ties, footwalks, and drive mechanism which carries the
trolley or trolleys.
(22) Bridge travel means the crane movement in a direction parallel
to the crane runway.
(23) A bumper (buffer) is an energy absorbing device for reducing
impact when a moving crane or trolley reaches the end of its permitted
travel; or when two moving cranes or trolleys come in contact.
(24) The cab is the operator's compartment on a crane.
(25) Clearance means the distance from any part of the crane to a
point of the nearest obstruction.
(26) Collectors current are contacting devices for collecting
current from runway or bridge conductors.
(27) Conductors, bridge are the electrical conductors located along
the bridge structure of a crane to provide power to the trolley.
(28) Conductors, runway (main) are the electrical conductors located
along a crane runway to provide power to the crane.
(29) The control braking means is a method of controlling crane
motor speed when in an overhauling condition.
(30) Countertorque means a method of control by which the power to
the motor is reversed to develop torque in the opposite direction.
(31) Dynamic means a method of controlling crane motor speeds when
in the overhauling condition to provide a retarding force.
(32) Regenerative means a form of dynamic braking in which the
electrical energy generated is fed back into the power system.
(33) Mechanical means a method of control by friction.
(34) Controller, spring return means a controller which when
released will return automatically to a neutral position.
(35) Designated means selected or assigned by the employer or the
employer's representative as being qualified to perform specific duties.
(36) A drift point means a point on a travel motion controller which
releases the brake while the motor is not energized. This allows for
coasting before the brake is set.
(37) The drum is the cylindrical member around which the ropes are
wound for raising or lowering the load.
(38) An equalizer is a device which compensates for unequal length
or stretch of a rope.
(39) Exposed means capable of being contacted inadvertently. Applied
to hazardous objects not adequately guarded or isolated.
(40) Fail-safe means a provision designed to automatically stop or
safely control any motion in which a malfunction occurs.
(41) Footwalk means the walkway with handrail, attached to the
bridge or trolley for access purposes.
(42) A hoist is an apparatus which may be a part of a crane,
exerting a force for lifting or lowering.
[[Page 558]]
(43) Hoist chain means the load bearing chain in a hoist.
Note: Chain properties do not conform to those shown in ANSI B30.9-
1971, Safety Code for Slings.
(44) Hoist motion means that motion of a crane which raises and
lowers a load.
(45) Load means the total superimposed weight on the load block or
hook.
(46) The load block is the assembly of hook or shackle, swivel,
bearing, sheaves, pins, and frame suspended by the hoisting rope.
(47) Magnet means an electromagnetic device carried on a crane hook
to pick up loads magnetically.
(48) Main hoist means the hoist mechanism provided for lifting the
maximum rated load.
(49) A man trolley is a trolley having an operator's cab attached
thereto.
(50) Rated load means the maximum load for which a crane or
individual hoist is designed and built by the manufacturer and shown on
the equipment nameplate(s).
(51) Rope refers to wire rope, unless otherwise specified.
(52) Running sheave means a sheave which rotates as the load block
is raised or lowered.
(53) Runway means an assembly of rails, beams, girders, brackets,
and framework on which the crane or trolley travels.
(54) Side pull means that portion of the hoist pull acting
horizontally when the hoist lines are not operated vertically.
(55) Span means the horizontal distance center to center of runway
rails.
(56) Standby crane means a crane which is not in regular service but
which is used occasionally or intermittently as required.
(57) A stop is a device to limit travel of a trolley or crane
bridge. This device normally is attached to a fixed structure and
normally does not have energy absorbing ability.
(58) A switch is a device for making, breaking, or for changing the
connections in an electric circuit.
(59) An emergency stop switch is a manually or automatically
operated electric switch to cut off electric power independently of the
regular operating controls.
(60) A limit switch is a switch which is operated by some part or
motion of a power-driven machine or equipment to alter the electric
circuit associated with the machine or equipment.
(61) A main switch is a switch controlling the entire power supply
to the crane.
(62) A master switch is a switch which dominates the operation of
contactors, relays, or other remotely operated devices.
(63) The trolley is the unit which travels on the bridge rails and
carries the hoisting mechanism.
(64) Trolley travel means the trolley movement at right angles to
the crane runway.
(65) Truck means the unit consisting of a frame, wheels, bearings,
and axles which supports the bridge girders or trolleys.
(b) General requirements--(1) Application. This section applies to
overhead and gantry cranes, including semigantry, cantilever gantry,
wall cranes, storage bridge cranes, and others having the same
fundamental characteristics. These cranes are grouped because they all
have trolleys and similar travel characteristics.
(2) New and existing equipment. All new overhead and gantry cranes
constructed and installed on or after August 31, 1971, shall meet the
design specifications of the American National Standard Safety Code for
Overhead and Gantry Cranes, ANSI B30.2.0-1967, which is incorporated by
reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(3) Modifications. Cranes may be modified and rerated provided such
modifications and the supporting structure are checked thoroughly for
the new rated load by a qualified engineer or the equipment
manufacturer. The crane shall be tested in accordance with paragraph
(k)(2) of this section. New rated load shall be displayed in accordance
with subparagraph (5) of this paragraph.
(4) Wind indicators and rail clamps. Outdoor storage bridges shall
be provided with automatic rail clamps. A wind-indicating device shall
be provided which will give a visible or audible alarm to the bridge
operator at a predetermined wind velocity. If the clamps act on the rail
heads, any beads
[[Page 559]]
or weld flash on the rail heads shall be ground off.
(5) Rated load marking. The rated load of the crane shall be plainly
marked on each side of the crane, and if the crane has more than one
hoisting unit, each hoist shall have its rated load marked on it or its
load block and this marking shall be clearly legible from the ground or
floor.
(6) Clearance from obstruction. (i) Minimum clearance of 3 inches
overhead and 2 inches laterally shall be provided and maintained between
crane and obstructions in conformity with Crane Manufacturers
Association of America, Inc., Specification No. 61, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6 (formerly the
Electric Overhead Crane Institute, Inc).
(ii) Where passageways or walkways are provided obstructions shall
not be placed so that safety of personnel will be jeopardized by
movements of the crane.
(7) Clearance between parallel cranes. If the runways of two cranes
are parallel, and there are no intervening walls or structure, there
shall be adequate clearance provided and maintained between the two
bridges.
(8) Designated personnel--Only designated personnel shall be
permitted to operate a crane covered by this section.
(c) Cabs--(1) Cab location. (i) The general arrangement of the cab
and the location of control and protective equipment shall be such that
all operating handles are within convenient reach of the operator when
facing the area to be served by the load hook, or while facing the
direction of travel of the cab. The arrangement shall allow the operator
a full view of the load hook in all positions.
(ii) The cab shall be located to afford a minimum of 3 inches
clearance from all fixed structures within its area of possible
movement.
(2) Access to crane. Access to the cab and/or bridge walkway shall
be by a conveniently placed fixed ladder, stairs, or platform requiring
no step over any gap exceeding 12 inches. Fixed ladders shall be in
conformance with the American National Standard Safety Code for Fixed
Ladders, ANSI A14.3-1956, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(3) Fire extinguisher. Carbon tetrachloride extinguishers shall not
be used.
(4) Lighting. Light in the cab shall be sufficient to enable the
operator to see clearly enough to perform his work.
(d) Footwalks and ladders--(1) Location of footwalks. (i) If
sufficient headroom is available on cab-operated cranes, a footwalk
shall be provided on the drive side along the entire length of the
bridge of all cranes having the trolley running on the top of the
girders.
(ii) Where footwalks are located in no case shall less than 48
inches of headroom be provided.
(2) Construction of footwalks. (i) Footwalks shall be of rigid
construction and designed to sustain a distributed load of at least 50
pounds per square foot.
(ii) Footwalks shall have a walking surface of antislip type.
Note: Wood will meet this requirement.
(iii) [Reserved]
(iv) The inner edge shall extend at least to the line of the outside
edge of the lower cover plate or flange of the girder.
(3) Toeboards and handrails for footwalks. Toeboards and handrails
shall be in compliance with section 1910.23 of this part.
(4) Ladders and stairways. (i) Gantry cranes shall be provided with
ladders or stairways extending from the ground to the footwalk or cab
platform.
(ii) Stairways shall be equipped with rigid and substantial metal
handrails. Walking surfaces shall be of an antislip type.
(iii) Ladders shall be permanently and securely fastened in place
and shall be constructed in compliance with Sec. 1910.27.
(e) Stops, bumpers, rail sweeps, and guards--(1) Trolley stops. (i)
Stops shall be provided at the limits of travel of the trolley.
(ii) Stops shall be fastened to resist forces applied when
contacted.
(iii) A stop engaging the tread of the wheel shall be of a height at
least equal to the radius of the wheel.
(2) Bridge bumpers--(i) A crane shall be provided with bumpers or
other automatic means providing equivalent effect, unless the crane
travels at a
[[Page 560]]
slow rate of speed and has a faster deceleration rate due to the use of
sleeve bearings, or is not operated near the ends of bridge and trolley
travel, or is restricted to a limited distance by the nature of the
crane operation and there is no hazard of striking any object in this
limited distance, or is used in similar operating conditions. The
bumpers shall be capable of stopping the crane (not including the lifted
load) at an average rate of deceleration not to exceed 3 ft/s/s when
traveling in either direction at 20 percent of the rated load speed.
(a) The bumpers shall have sufficient energy absorbing capacity to
stop the crane when traveling at a speed of at least 40 percent of rated
load speed.
(b) The bumper shall be so mounted that there is no direct shear on
bolts.
(ii) Bumpers shall be so designed and installed as to minimize parts
falling from the crane in case of breakage.
(3) Trolley bumpers--(i) A trolley shall be provided with bumpers or
other automatic means of equivalent effect, unless the trolley travels
at a slow rate of speed, or is not operated near the ends of bridge and
trolley travel, or is restricted to a limited distance of the runway and
there is no hazard of striking any object in this limited distance, or
is used in similar operating conditions. The bumpers shall be capable of
stopping the trolley (not including the lifted load) at an average rate
of deceleration not to exceed 4.7 ft/s/s when traveling in either
direction at one-third of the rated load speed.
(ii) When more than one trolley is operated on the same bridge, each
shall be equipped with bumpers or equivalent on their adjacent ends.
(iii) Bumpers or equivalent shall be designed and installed to
minimize parts falling from the trolley in case of age.
(4) Rail sweeps. Bridge trucks shall be equipped with sweeps which
extend below the top of the rail and project in front of the truck
wheels.
(5) Guards for hoisting ropes. (i) If hoisting ropes run near enough
to other parts to make fouling or chafing possible, guards shall be
installed to prevent this condition.
(ii) A guard shall be provided to prevent contact between bridge
conductors and hoisting ropes if they could come into contact.
(6) Guards for moving parts. (i) Exposed moving parts such as gears,
set screws, projecting keys, chains, chain sprockets, and reciprocating
components which might constitute a hazard under normal operating
conditions shall be guarded.
(ii) Guards shall be securely fastened.
(iii) Each guard shall be capable of supporting without permanent
distortion the weight of a 200-pound person unless the guard is located
where it is impossible for a person to step on it.
(f) Brakes--(1) Brakes for hoists. (i) Each independent hoisting
unit of a crane shall be equipped with at least one self-setting brake,
hereafter referred to as a holding brake, applied directly to the motor
shaft or some part of the gear train.
(ii) Each independent hoisting unit of a crane, except worm-geared
hoists, the angle of whose worm is such as to prevent the load from
accelerating in the lowering direction shall, in addition to a holding
brake, be equipped with control braking means to prevent overspeeding.
(2) Holding brakes. (i) Holding brakes for hoist motors shall have
not less than the following percentage of the full load hoisting torque
at the point where the brake is applied.
(a) 125 percent when used with a control braking means other than
mechanical.
(b) 100 percent when used in conjunction with a mechanical control
braking means.
(c) 100 percent each if two holding brakes are provided.
(ii) Holding brakes on hoists shall have ample thermal capacity for
the frequency of operation required by the service.
(iii) Holding brakes on hoists shall be applied automatically when
power is removed.
(iv) Where necessary holding brakes shall be provided with
adjustment means to compensate for wear.
(v) The wearing surface of all holding-brake drums or discs shall be
smooth.
(vi) Each independent hoisting unit of a crane handling hot metal
and having power control braking means shall
[[Page 561]]
be equipped with at least two holding brakes.
(3) Control braking means. (i) A power control braking means such as
regenerative, dynamic or countertorque braking, or a mechanically
controlled braking means shall be capable of maintaining safe lowering
speeds of rated loads.
(ii) The control braking means shall have ample thermal capacity for
the frequency of operation required by service.
(4) Brakes for trolleys and bridges. (i) Foot-operated brakes shall
not require an applied force of more than 70 pounds to develop
manufacturer's rated brake torque.
(ii) Brakes may be applied by mechanical, electrical, pneumatic,
hydraulic, or gravity means.
(iii) Where necessary brakes shall be provided with adjustment means
to compensate for wear.
(iv) The wearing surface of all brakedrums or discs shall be smooth.
(v) All foot-brake pedals shall be constructed so that the
operator's foot will not easily slip off the pedal.
(vi) Foot-operated brakes shall be equipped with automatic means for
positive release when pressure is released from the pedal.
(vii) Brakes for stopping the motion of the trolley or bridge shall
be of sufficient size to stop the trolley or bridge within a distance in
feet equal to 10 percent of full load speed in feet per minute when
traveling at full speed with full load.
(viii) If holding brakes are provided on the bridge or trolleys,
they shall not prohibit the use of a drift point in the control circuit.
(ix) Brakes on trolleys and bridges shall have ample thermal
capacity for the frequency of operation required by the service to
prevent impairment of functions from overheating.
(5) Application of trolley brakes. (i) On cab-operated cranes with
cab on trolley, a trolley brake shall be required as specified under
paragraph (f)(4) of this section.
(ii) A drag brake may be applied to hold the trolley in a desired
position on the bridge and to eliminate creep with the power off.
(6) Application of bridge brakes. (i) On cab-operated cranes with
cab on bridge, a bridge brake is required as specified under paragraph
(f)(4) of this section.
(ii) On cab-operated cranes with cab on trolley, a bridge brake of
the holding type shall be required.
(iii) On all floor, remote and pulpit-operated crane bridge drives,
a brake of noncoasting mechanical drive shall be provided.
(g) Electric equipment--(1) General. (i) Wiring and equipment shall
comply with subpart S of this part.
(ii) The control circuit voltage shall not exceed 600 volts for a.c.
or d.c. current.
(iii) The voltage at pendant push-buttons shall not exceed 150 volts
for a.c. and 300 volts for d.c.
(iv) Where multiple conductor cable is used with a suspended
pushbutton station, the station must be supported in some satisfactory
manner that will protect the electrical conductors against strain.
(v) Pendant control boxes shall be constructed to prevent electrical
shock and shall be clearly marked for identification of functions.
(2) Equipment. (i) Electrical equipment shall be so located or
enclosed that live parts will not be exposed to accidental contact under
normal operating conditions.
(ii) Electric equipment shall be protected from dirt, grease, oil,
and moisture.
(iii) Guards for live parts shall be substantial and so located that
they cannot be accidently deformed so as to make contact with the live
parts.
(3) Controllers. (i) Cranes not equipped with spring-return
controllers or momentary contact pushbuttons shall be provided with a
device which will disconnect all motors from the line on failure of
power and will not permit any motor to be restarted until the controller
handle is brought to the ``off'' position, or a reset switch or button
is operated.
(ii) Lever operated controllers shall be provided with a notch or
latch which in the ``off'' position prevents the handle from being
inadvertently moved to the ``on'' position. An ``off'' detent or spring
return arrangement is acceptable.
[[Page 562]]
(iii) The controller operating handle shall be located within
convenient reach of the operator.
(iv) As far as practicable, the movement of each controller handle
shall be in the same general directions as the resultant movements of
the load.
(v) The control for the bridge and trolley travel shall be so
located that the operator can readily face the direction of travel.
(vi) For floor-operated cranes, the controller or controllers if
rope operated, shall automatically return to the ``off'' position when
released by the operator.
(vii) Pushbuttons in pendant stations shall return to the ``off''
position when pressure is released by the crane operator.
(viii) Automatic cranes shall be so designed that all motions shall
fail-safe if any malfunction of operation occurs.
(ix) Remote-operated cranes shall function so that if the control
signal for any crane motion becomes ineffective the crane motion shall
stop.
(4) Resistors. (i) Enclosures for resistors shall have openings to
provide adequate ventilation, and shall be installed to prevent the
accumulation of combustible matter too near to hot parts.
(ii) Resistor units shall be supported so as to be as free as
possible from vibration.
(iii) Provision shall be made to prevent broken parts or molten
metal falling upon the operator or from the crane.
(5) Switches. (i) The power supply to the runway conductors shall be
controlled by a switch or circuit breaker located on a fixed structure,
accessible from the floor, and arranged to be locked in the open
position.
(ii) On cab-operated cranes a switch or circuit breaker of the
enclosed type, with provision for locking in the open position, shall be
provided in the leads from the runway conductors. A means of opening
this switch or circuit breaker shall be located within easy reach of the
operator.
(iii) On floor-operated cranes, a switch or circuit breaker of the
enclosed type, with provision for locking in the open position, shall be
provided in the leads from the runway conductors. This disconnect shall
be mounted on the bridge or footwalk near the runway collectors. One of
the following types of floor-operated disconnects shall be provided:
(a) Nonconductive rope attached to the main disconnect switch.
(b) An undervoltage trip for the main circuit breaker operated by an
emergency stop button in the pendant pushbutton in the pendant
pushbutton station.
(c) A main line contactor operated by a switch or pushbutton in the
pendant pushbutton station.
(iv) The hoisting motion of all electric traveling cranes shall be
provided with an overtravel limit switch in the hoisting direction.
(v) All cranes using a lifting magnet shall have a magnet circuit
switch of the enclosed type with provision for locking in the open
position. Means for discharging the inductive load of the magnet shall
be provided.
(6) Runway conductors. Conductors of the open type mounted on the
crane runway beams or overhead shall be so located or so guarded that
persons entering or leaving the cab or crane footwalk normally could not
come into contact with them.
(7) Extension lamps. If a service receptacle is provided in the cab
or on the bridge of cab-operated cranes, it shall be a grounded three-
prong type permanent receptacle, not exceeding 300 volts.
(h) Hoisting equipment--(1) Sheaves. (i) Sheave grooves shall be
smooth and free from surface defects which could cause rope damage.
(ii) Sheaves carrying ropes which can be momentarily unloaded shall
be provided with close-fitting guards or other suitable devices to guide
the rope back into the groove when the load is applied again.
(iii) The sheaves in the bottom block shall be equipped with close-
fitting guards that will prevent ropes from becoming fouled when the
block is lying on the ground with ropes loose.
(iv) Pockets and flanges of sheaves used with hoist chains shall be
of such dimensions that the chain does not catch or bind during
operation.
[[Page 563]]
(v) All running sheaves shall be equipped with means for
lubrication. Permanently lubricated, sealed and/or shielded bearings
meet this requirement.
(2) Ropes. (i) In using hoisting ropes, the crane manufacturer's
recommendation shall be followed. The rated load divided by the number
of parts of rope shall not exceed 20 percent of the nominal breaking
strength of the rope.
(ii) Socketing shall be done in the manner specified by the
manufacturer of the assembly.
(iii) Rope shall be secured to the drum as follows:
(a) No less than two wraps of rope shall remain on the drum when the
hook is in its extreme low position.
(b) Rope end shall be anchored by a clamp securely attached to the
drum, or by a socket arrangement approved by the crane or rope
manufacturer.
(iv) Eye splices. [Reserved]
(v) Rope clips attached with U-bolts shall have the U-bolts on the
dead or short end of the rope. Spacing and number of all types of clips
shall be in accordance with the clip manufacturer's recommendation.
Clips shall be drop-forged steel in all sizes manufactured commercially.
When a newly installed rope has been in operation for an hour, all nuts
on the clip bolts shall be retightened.
(vi) Swaged or compressed fittings shall be applied as recommended
by the rope or crane manufacturer.
(vii) Wherever exposed to temperatures, at which fiber cores would
be damaged, rope having an independent wirerope or wire-strand core, or
other temperature-damage resistant core shall be used.
(viii) Replacement rope shall be the same size, grade, and
construction as the original rope furnished by the crane manufacturer,
unless otherwise recommended by a wire rope manufacturer due to actual
working condition requirements.
(3) Equalizers. If a load is supported by more than one part of
rope, the tension in the parts shall be equalized.
(4) Hooks. Hooks shall meet the manufacturer's recommendations and
shall not be overloaded.
(i) Warning device. Except for floor-operated cranes a gong or other
effective warning signal shall be provided for each crane equipped with
a power traveling mechanism.
(j) Inspection--(1) Inspection classification. (i) Initial
inspection. Prior to initial use all new and altered cranes shall be
inspected to insure compliance with the provisions of this section.
(ii) Inspection procedure for cranes in regular service is divided
into two general classifications based upon the intervals at which
inspection should be performed. The intervals in turn are dependent upon
the nature of the critical components of the crane and the degree of
their exposure to wear, deterioration, or malfunction. The two general
classifications are herein designated as ``frequent'' and ``periodic''
with respective intervals between inspections as defined below:
(a) Frequent inspection--Daily to monthly intervals.
(b) Periodic inspection--1 to 12- month intervals.
(2) Frequent inspection. The following items shall be inspected for
defects at intervals as defined in paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of this section
or as specifically indicated, including observation during operation for
any defects which might appear between regular inspections. All
deficiencies such as listed shall be carefully examined and
determination made as to whether they constitute a safety hazard:
(i) All functional operating mechanisms for maladjustment
interfering with proper operation. Daily.
(ii) Deterioration or leakage in lines, tanks, valves, drain pumps,
and other parts of air or hydraulic systems. Daily.
(iii) Hooks with deformation or cracks. Visual inspection daily;
monthly inspection with a certification record which includes the date
of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection
and the serial number, or other identifier, of the hook inspected. For
hooks with cracks or having more than 15 percent in excess of normal
throat opening or more than 10 deg. twist from the plane of the unbent
hook refer to paragraph (l)(3)(iii)(a) of this section.
(iv) Hoist chains, including end connections, for excessive wear,
twist, distorted links interfering with proper
[[Page 564]]
function, or stretch beyond manufacturer's recommendations. Visual
inspection daily; monthly inspection with a certification record which
includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who
performed the inspection and an identifier of the chain which was
inspected.
(v) [Reserved]
(vi) All functional operating mechanisms for excessive wear of
components.
(vii) Rope reeving for noncompliance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
(3) Periodic inspection. Complete inspections of the crane shall be
performed at intervals as generally defined in paragraph (j)(1)(ii)(b)
of this section, depending upon its activity, severity of service, and
environment, or as specifically indicated below. These inspections shall
include the requirements of paragraph (j)(2) of this section and in
addition, the following items. Any deficiencies such as listed shall be
carefully examined and determination made as to whether they constitute
a safety hazard:
(i) Deformed, cracked, or corroded members.
(ii) Loose bolts or rivets.
(iii) Cracked or worn sheaves and drums.
(iv) Worn, cracked or distorted parts such as pins, bearings,
shafts, gears, rollers, locking and clamping devices.
(v) Excessive wear on brake system parts, linings, pawls, and
ratchets.
(vi) Load, wind, and other indicators over their full range, for any
significant inaccuracies.
(vii) Gasoline, diesel, electric, or other powerplants for improper
performance or noncompliance with applicable safety requirements.
(viii) Excessive wear of chain drive sprockets and excessive chain
stretch.
(ix) [Reserved]
(x) Electrical apparatus, for signs of pitting or any deterioration
of controller contactors, limit switches and pushbutton stations.
(4) Cranes not in regular use. (i) A crane which has been idle for a
period of 1 month or more, but less than 6 months, shall be given an
inspection conforming with requirements of paragraph (j)(2) of this
section and paragraph (m)(2) of this section before placing in service.
(ii) A crane which has been idle for a period of over 6 months shall
be given a complete inspection conforming with requirements of
paragraphs (j) (2) and (3) of this section and paragraph (m)(2) of this
section before placing in service.
(iii) Standby cranes shall be inspected at least semi-annually in
accordance with requirements of paragraph (j)(2) of this section and
paragraph (m)(2) of this section.
(k) Testing--(1) Operational tests. (i) Prior to initial use all new
and altered cranes shall be tested to insure compliance with this
section including the following functions:
(a) Hoisting and lowering.
(b) Trolley travel.
(c) Bridge travel.
(d) Limit switches, locking and safety devices.
(ii) The trip setting of hoist limit switches shall be determined by
tests with an empty hook traveling in increasing speeds up to the
maximum speed. The actuating mechanism of the limit switch shall be
located so that it will trip the switch, under all conditions, in
sufficient time to prevent contact of the hook or hook block with any
part of the trolley.
(2) Rated load test. Test loads shall not be more than 125 percent
of the rated load unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. The
test reports shall be placed on file where readily available to
appointed personnel.
(l) Maintenance--(1) Preventive maintenance. A preventive
maintenance program based on the crane manufacturer's recommendations
shall be established.
(2) Maintenance procedure. (i) Before adjustments and repairs are
started on a crane the following precautions shall be taken:
(a) The crane to be repaired shall be run to a location where it
will cause the least interference with other cranes and operations in
the area.
(b) All controllers shall be at the off position.
(c) The main or emergency switch shall be open and locked in the
open position.
[[Page 565]]
(d) Warning or ``out of order'' signs shall be placed on the crane,
also on the floor beneath or on the hook where visible from the floor.
(e) Where other cranes are in operation on the same runway, rail
stops or other suitable means shall be provided to prevent interference
with the idle crane.
(ii) After adjustments and repairs have been made the crane shall
not be operated until all guards have been reinstalled, safety devices
reactivated and maintenance equipment removed.
(3) Adjustments and repairs. (i) Any unsafe conditions disclosed by
the inspection requirements of paragraph (j) of this section shall be
corrected before operation of the crane is resumed. Adjustments and
repairs shall be done only by designated personnel.
(ii) Adjustments shall be maintained to assure correct functioning
of components. The following are examples:
(a) All functional operating mechanisms.
(b) Limit switches.
(c) Control systems.
(d) Brakes.
(e) Power plants.
(iii) Repairs or replacements shall be provided promptly as needed
for safe operation. The following are examples:
(a) Crane hooks showing defects described in paragraph (j)(2)(iii)
of this section shall be discarded. Repairs by welding or reshaping are
not generally recommended. If such repairs are attempted they shall only
be done under competent supervision and the hook shall be tested to the
load requirements of paragraph (k)(2) of this section before further
use.
(b) Load attachment chains and rope slings showing defects described
in paragraph (j)(2) (iv) and (v) of this section respectively.
(c) All critical parts which are cracked, broken, bent, or
excessively worn.
(d) Pendant control stations shall be kept clean and function labels
kept legible.
(m) Rope inspection--(1) Running ropes. A thorough inspection of all
ropes shall be made at least once a month and a certification record
which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who
performed the inspection and an identifier for the ropes which were
inspected shall be kept on file where readily available to appointed
personnel. Any deterioration, resulting in appreciable loss of original
strength, shall be carefully observed and determination made as to
whether further use of the rope would constitute a safety hazard. Some
of the conditions that could result in an appreciable loss of strength
are the following:
(i) Reduction of rope diameter below nominal diameter due to loss of
core support, internal or external corrosion, or wear of outside wires.
(ii) A number of broken outside wires and the degree of distribution
or concentration of such broken wires.
(iii) Worn outside wires.
(iv) Corroded or broken wires at end connections.
(v) Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied end
connections.
(vi) Severe kinking, crushing, cutting, or unstranding.
(2) Other ropes. All rope which has been idle for a period of a
month or more due to shutdown or storage of a crane on which it is
installed shall be given a thorough inspection before it is used. This
inspection shall be for all types of deterioration and shall be
performed by an appointed person whose approval shall be required for
further use of the rope. A certification record shall be available for
inspection which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the
person who performed the inspection and an identifier for the rope which
was inspected.
(n) Handling the load--(1) Size of load. The crane shall not be
loaded beyond its rated load except for test purposes as provided in
paragraph (k) of this section.
(2) Attaching the load. (i) The hoist chain or hoist rope shall be
free from kinks or twists and shall not be wrapped around the load.
(ii) The load shall be attached to the load block hook by means of
slings or other approved devices.
(iii) Care shall be taken to make certain that the sling clears all
obstacles.
(3) Moving the load. (i) The load shall be well secured and properly
balanced in the sling or lifting device before it is lifted more than a
few inches.
[[Page 566]]
(ii) Before starting to hoist the following conditions shall be
noted:
(a) Hoist rope shall not be kinked.
(b) Multiple part lines shall not be twisted around each other.
(c) The hook shall be brought over the load in such a manner as to
prevent swinging.
(iii) During hoisting care shall be taken that:
(a) There is no sudden acceleration or deceleration of the moving
load.
(b) The load does not contact any obstructions.
(iv) Cranes shall not be used for side pulls except when
specifically authorized by a responsible person who has determined that
the stability of the crane is not thereby endangered and that various
parts of the crane will not be overstressed.
(v) While any employee is on the load or hook, there shall be no
hoisting, lowering, or traveling.
(vi) The employer shall require that the operator avoid carrying
loads over people.
(vii) The operator shall test the brakes each time a load
approaching the rated load is handled. The brakes shall be tested by
raising the load a few inches and applying the brakes.
(viii) The load shall not be lowered below the point where less than
two full wraps of rope remain on the hoisting drum.
(ix) When two or more cranes are used to lift a load one qualified
responsible person shall be in charge of the operation. He shall analyze
the operation and instruct all personnel involved in the proper
positioning, rigging of the load, and the movements to be made.
(x) The employer shall insure that the operator does not leave his
position at the controls while the load is suspended.
(xi) When starting the bridge and when the load or hook approaches
near or over personnel, the warning signal shall be sounded.
(4) Hoist limit switch. (i) At the beginning of each operator's
shift, the upper limit switch of each hoist shall be tried out under no
load. Extreme care shall be exercised; the block shall be ``inched''
into the limit or run in at slow speed. If the switch does not operate
properly, the appointed person shall be immediately notified.
(ii) The hoist limit switch which controls the upper limit of travel
of the load block shall never be used as an operating control.
(o) Other requirements, general--(1) Ladders. (i) The employer shall
insure that hands are free from encumbrances while personnel are using
ladders.
(ii) Articles which are too large to be carried in pockets or belts
shall be lifted and lowered by hand line.
(2) Cabs. (i) Necessary clothing and personal belongings shall be
stored in such a manner as not to interfere with access or operation.
(ii) Tools, oil cans, waste, extra fuses, and other necessary
articles shall be stored in the tool box, and shall not be permitted to
lie loose in or about the cab.
(3) Fire extinguishers. The employer shall insure that operators are
familiar with the operation and care of fire extinguishers provided.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 27400, June 27, 1975;
49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 55 FR 32015,
Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.180 Crawler locomotive and truck cranes.
(a) Definitions applicable to this section. (1) A crawler crane
consists of a rotating superstructure with power plant, operating
machinery, and boom, mounted on a base, equipped with crawler treads for
travel. Its function is to hoist and swing loads at various radii.
(2) A locomotive crane consists of a rotating superstructure with
power-plant, operating machinery and boom, mounted on a base or car
equipped for travel on railroad track. It may be self-propelled or
propelled by an outside source. Its function is to hoist and swing loads
at various radii.
(3) A truck crane consists of a rotating superstructure with
powerplant, operating machinery and boom, mounted on an automotive truck
equipped with a powerplant for travel. Its function is to hoist and
swing loads at various radii.
(4) A wheel mounted crane (wagon crane) consists of a rotating
superstructure with powerplant, operating
[[Page 567]]
machinery and boom, mounted on a base or platform equipped with axles
and rubber-tired wheels for travel. The base is usually propelled by the
engine in the superstructure, but it may be equipped with a separate
engine controlled from the superstructure. Its function is to hoist and
swing loads at various radii.
(5) An accessory is a secondary part or assembly of parts which
contributes to the overall function and usefulness of a machine.
(6) Appointed means assigned specific responsibilities by the
employer or the employer's representative.
(7) ANSI means the American National Standards Institute.
(8) An angle indicator (boom) is an accessory which measures the
angle of the boom to the horizontal.
(9) The axis of rotation is the vertical axis around which the crane
superstructure rotates.
(10) Axle means the shaft or spindle with which or about which a
wheel rotates. On truck- and wheel-mounted cranes it refers to an
automotive type of axle assembly including housings, gearing,
differential, bearings, and mounting appurtenances.
(11) Axle (bogie) means two or more automotive-type axles mounted in
tandem in a frame so as to divide the load between the axles and permit
vertical oscillation of the wheels.
(12) The base (mounting) is the traveling base or carrier on which
the rotating superstructure is mounted such as a car, truck, crawlers,
or wheel platform.
(13) The boom (crane) is a member hinged to the front of the
rotating superstructure with the outer end supported by ropes leading to
a gantry or A-frame and used for supporting the hoisting tackle.
(14) The boom angle is the angle between the longitudinal centerline
of the boom and the horizontal. The boom longitudinal centerline is a
straight line between the boom foot pin (heel pin) centerline and boom
point sheave pin centerline.
(15) The boom hoist is a hoist drum and rope reeving system used to
raise and lower the boom. The rope system may be all live reeving or a
combination of live reeving and pendants.
(16) The boom stop is a device used to limit the angle of the boom
at the highest position.
(17) A brake is a device used for retarding or stopping motion by
friction or power means.
(18) A cab is a housing which covers the rotating superstructure
machinery and/or operator's station. On truck-crane trucks a separate
cab covers the driver's station.
(19) The clutch is a friction, electromagnetic, hydraulic,
pneumatic, or positive mechanical device for engagement or disengagement
of power.
(20) The counterweight is a weight used to supplement the weight of
the machine in providing stability for lifting working loads.
(21) Designated means selected or assigned by the employer or the
employer's representative as being qualified to perform specific duties.
(22) The drum is the cylindrical members around which ropes are
wound for raising and lowering the load or boom.
(23) Dynamic (loading) means loads introduced into the machine or
its components by forces in motion.
(24) The gantry (A-frame) is a structural frame, extending above the
superstructure, to which the boom support ropes are reeved.
(25) A jib is an extension attached to the boom point to provide
added boom length for lifting specified loads. The jib may be in line
with the boom or offset to various angles.
(26) Load (working) means the external load, in pounds, applied to
the crane, including the weight of load-attaching equipment such as load
blocks, shackles, and slings.
(27) Load block (upper) means the assembly of hook or shackle,
swivel, sheaves, pins, and frame suspended from the boom point.
(28) Load block (lower) means the assembly of hook or shackle,
swivel, sheaves, pins, and frame suspended by the hoisting ropes.
(29) A load hoist is a hoist drum and rope reeving system used for
hoisting and lowering loads.
(30) Load ratings are crane ratings in pounds established by the
manufacturer in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.
[[Page 568]]
(31) Outriggers are extendable or fixed metal arms, attached to the
mounting base, which rest on supports at the outer ends.
(32) Rail clamp means a tong-like metal device, mounted on a
locomotive crane car, which can be connected to the track.
(33) Reeving means a rope system in which the rope travels around
drums and sheaves.
(34) Rope refers to a wire rope unless otherwise specified.
(35) Side loading means a load applied at an angle to the vertical
plane of the boom.
(36) A standby crane is a crane which is not in regular service but
which is used occasionally or intermittently as required.
(37) A standing (guy) rope is a supporting rope which maintains a
constant distance between the points of attachment to the two components
connected by the rope.
(38) Structural competence means the ability of the machine and its
components to withstand the stresses imposed by applied loads.
(39) Superstructure means the rotating upper frame structure of the
machine and the operating machinery mounted thereon.
(40) Swing means the rotation of the superstructure for movement of
loads in a horizontal direction about the axis of rotation.
(41) Swing mechanism means the machinery involved in providing
rotation of the superstructure.
(42) Tackle is an assembly of ropes and sheaves arranged for
hoisting and pulling.
(43) Transit means the moving or transporting of a crane from one
jobsite to another.
(44) Travel means the function of the machine moving from one
location to another, on a jobsite.
(45) The travel mechanism is the machinery involved in providing
travel.
(46) Wheelbase means the distance between centers of front and rear
axles. For a multiple axle assembly the axle center for wheelbase
measurement is taken as the midpoint of the assembly.
(47) The whipline (auxiliary hoist) is a separate hoist rope system
of lighter load capacity and higher speed than provided by the main
hoist.
(48) A winch head is a power driven spool for handling of loads by
means of friction between fiber or wire rope and spool.
(b) General requirements--(1) Application. This section applies to
crawler cranes, locomotive cranes, wheel mounted cranes of both truck
and self-propelled wheel type, and any variations thereof which retain
the same fundamental characteristics. This section includes only cranes
of the above types, which are basically powered by internal combustion
engines or electric motors and which utilize drums and ropes. Cranes
designed for railway and automobile wreck clearances are excepted. The
requirements of this section are applicable only to machines when used
as lifting cranes.
(2) New and existing equipment. All new crawler, locomotive, and
truck cranes constructed and utilized on or after August 31, 1971, shall
meet the design specifications of the American National Standard Safety
Code for Crawler, Locomotive, and Truck Cranes, ANSI B30.5-1968, which
is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6. Crawler,
locomotive, and truck cranes constructed prior to August 31, 1971,
should be modified to conform to those design specifications by February
15, 1972, unless it can be shown that the crane cannot feasibly or
economically be altered and that the crane substantially complies with
the requirements of this section.
(3) Designated personnel. Only designated personnel shall be
permitted to operate a crane covered by this section.
(c) Load ratings--(1) Load ratings--where stability governs lifting
performance. (i) The margin of stability for determination of load
ratings, with booms of stipulated lengths at stipulated working radii
for the various types of crane mountings, is established by taking a
percentage of the loads which will produce a condition of tipping or
balance with the boom in the least stable direction, relative to the
mounting. The load ratings shall not exceed the following percentages
for cranes, with the indicated types of mounting under conditions
stipulated
[[Page 569]]
in paragraphs (c)(1) (ii) and (iii) of this section.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum
load
ratings
Type of crane mounting (percent
of tipping
loads)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Locomotive, without outriggers:
Booms 60 feet or less..................................... \1\ 85
Booms over 60 feet........................................ \1\ 85
Locomotive, using outriggers fully extended................. 80
Crawler, without outriggers................................. 75
Crawler, using outriggers fully extended.................... 85
Truck and wheel mounted without outriggers or using 85
outriggers fully extended..................................
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Unless this results in less than 30,000 pound-feet net stabilizing
moment about the rail, which shall be minimum with such booms.
(ii) The following stipulations shall govern the application of the
values in paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section for locomotive cranes:
(a) Tipping with or without the use of outriggers occurs when half
of the wheels farthest from the load leave the rail.
(b) The crane shall be standing on track which is level within 1
percent grade.
(c) Radius of the load is the horizontal distance from a projection
of the axis of rotation to the rail support surface, before loading, to
the center of vertical hoist line or tackle with load applied.
(d) Tipping loads from which ratings are determined shall be applied
under static conditions only, i.e., without dynamic effect of hoisting,
lowering, or swinging.
(e) The weight of all auxiliary handling devices such as hoist
blocks, hooks, and slings shall be considered a part of the load rating.
(iii) Stipulations governing the application of the values in
paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section for crawler, truck, and wheel-
mounted cranes shall be in accordance with Crane Load-Stability Test
Code, Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J765, which is incorporated
by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(iv) The effectiveness of these preceding stability factors will be
influenced by such additional factors as freely suspended loads, track,
wind, or ground conditions, condition and inflation of rubber tires,
boom lengths, proper operating speeds for existing conditions, and, in
general, careful and competent operation. All of these shall be taken
into account by the user.
(2) Load rating chart. A substantial and durable rating chart with
clearly legible letters and figures shall be provided with each crane
and securely fixed to the crane cab in a location easily visible to the
operator while seated at his control station.
(d) Inspection classification--(1) Initial inspection. Prior to
initial use all new and altered cranes shall be inspected to insure
compliance with provisions of this section.
(2) Regular inspection. Inspection procedure for cranes in regular
service is divided into two general classifications based upon the
intervals at which inspection should be performed. The intervals in turn
are dependent upon the nature of the critical components of the crane
and the degree of their exposure to wear, deterioration, or malfunction.
The two general classifications are herein designated as ``frequent''
and ``periodic'', with respective intervals between inspections as
defined below:
(i) Frequent inspection: Daily to monthly intervals.
(ii) Periodic inspection: 1- to 12-month intervals, or as
specifically recommended by the manufacturer.
(3) Frequent inspection. Items such as the following shall be
inspected for defects at intervals as defined in paragraph (d)(2)(i) of
this section or as specifically indicated including observation during
operation for any defects which might appear between regular
inspections. Any deficiencies such as listed shall be carefully examined
and determination made as to whether they constitute a safety hazard:
(i) All control mechanisms for maladjustment interfering with proper
operation: Daily.
(ii) All control mechanisms for excessive wear of components and
contamination by lubricants or other foreign matter.
(iii) All safety devices for malfunction.
(iv) Deterioration or leakage in air or hydraulic systems: Daily.
(v) Crane hooks with deformations or cracks. For hooks with cracks
or having more than 15 percent in excess of normal throat opening or
more than 10 deg.
[[Page 570]]
twist from the plane of the unbent hook.
(vi) Rope reeving for noncompliance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
(vii) Electrical apparatus for malfunctioning, signs of excessive
deterioration, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
(4) Periodic inspection. Complete inspections of the crane shall be
performed at intervals as generally defined in paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of
this section depending upon its activity, severity of service, and
environment, or as specifically indicated below. These inspections shall
include the requirements of paragraph (d)(3) of this section and in
addition, items such as the following. Any deficiencies such as listed
shall be carefully examined and determination made as to whether they
constitute a safety hazard:
(i) Deformed, cracked, or corroded members in the crane structure
and boom.
(ii) Loose bolts or rivets.
(iii) Cracked or worn sheaves and drums.
(iv) Worn, cracked, or distorted parts such as pins, bearings,
shafts, gears, rollers and locking devices.
(v) Excessive wear on brake and clutch system parts, linings, pawls,
and ratchets.
(vi) Load, boom angle, and other indicators over their full range,
for any significant inaccuracies.
(vii) Gasoline, diesel, electric, or other power plants for improper
performance or noncompliance with safety requirements.
(viii) Excessive wear of chain-drive sprockets and excessive chain
stretch.
(ix) Travel steering, braking, and locking devices, for malfunction.
(x) Excessively worn or damaged tires.
(5) Cranes not in regular use. (i) A crane which has been idle for a
period of one month or more, but less than 6 months, shall be given an
inspection conforming with requirements of paragraph (d)(3) of this
section and paragraph (g)(2)(ii) of this section before placing in
service.
(ii) A crane which has been idle for a period of six months shall be
given a complete inspection conforming with requirements of paragraphs
(d) (3) and (4) of this section and paragraph (g)(2)(ii) of this section
before placing in service.
(iii) Standby cranes shall be inspected at least semiannually in
accordance with requirements of paragraph (d)(3) of this section and
paragraph (g)(2)(ii) of this section. Such cranes which are exposed to
adverse environment should be inspected more frequently.
(6) Inspection records. Certification records which include the date
of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection
and the serial number, or other identifier, of the crane which was
inspected shall be made monthly on critical items in use such as brakes,
crane hooks, and ropes. This certification record shall be kept readily
available.
(e) Testing--(1) Operational tests. (i) In addition to prototype
tests and quality-control measures, each new production crane shall be
tested by the manufacturer to the extent necessary to insure compliance
with the operational requirements of this paragraph including functions
such as the following:
(a) Load hoisting and lowering mechanisms.
(b) Boom hoisting and lower mechanisms.
(c) Swinging mechanism.
(d) Travel mechanism.
(e) Safety devices.
(ii) Where the complete production crane is not supplied by one
manufacturer such tests shall be conducted at final assembly.
(iii) Certified production-crane test results shall be made
available.
(2) Rated load test. (i) Written reports shall be available showing
test procedures and confirming the adequacy of repairs or alterations.
(ii) Test loads shall not exceed 110 percent of the rated load at
any selected working radius.
(iii) Where rerating is necessary:
(a) Crawler, truck, and wheel-mounted cranes shall be tested in
accordance with SAE Recommended Practice, Crane Load Stability Test Code
J765 (April 1961).
(b) Locomotive cranes shall be tested in accordance with paragraph
(c)(1) (i) and (ii) of this section.
[[Page 571]]
(c) Rerating test report shall be readily available.
(iv) No cranes shall be rerated in excess of the original load
ratings unless such rating changes are approved by the crane
manufacturer or final assembler.
(f) Maintenance procedure--General. After adjustments and repairs
have been made the crane shall not be operated until all guards have
been reinstalled, safety devices reactivated, and maintenance equipment
removed.
(g) Rope inspection--(1) Running ropes. A thorough inspection of all
ropes in use shall be made at least once a month and a certification
record which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the
person who performed the inspection and an identifier for the ropes
shall be prepared and kept on file where readily available. All
inspections shall be performed by an appointed or authorized person. Any
deterioration, resulting in appreciable loss of original strength shall
be carefully observed and detemination made as to whether further use of
the rope would constitute a safety hazard. Some of the conditions that
could result in an appreciable loss of strength are the following:
(i) Reduction of rope diameter below nominal diameter due to loss of
core support, internal or external corrosion, or wear of outside wires.
(ii) A number of broken outside wires and the degree of distribution
of concentration of such broken wires.
(iii) Worn outside wires.
(iv) Corroded or broken wires at end connections.
(v) Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied end
connections.
(vi) Severe kinking, crushing, cutting, or unstranding.
(2) Other ropes. (i) Heavy wear and/or broken wires may occur in
sections in contact with equalizer sheaves or other sheaves where rope
travel is limited, or with saddles. Particular care shall be taken to
inspect ropes at these locations.
(ii) All rope which has been idle for a period of a month or more
due to shutdown or storage of a crane on which it is installed shall be
given a thorough inspection before it is used. This inspection shall be
for all types of deterioration and shall be performed by an appointed or
authorized person whose approval shall be required for further use of
the rope. A certification record which includes the date of inspection,
the signature of the person who performed the inspection, and an
identifier for the rope which was inspected shall be prepared and kept
readily available.
(iii) Particular care shall be taken in the inspection of
nonrotating rope.
(h) Handling the load--(1) Size of load. (i) No crane shall be
loaded beyond the rated load, except for test purposes as provided in
paragraph (e) of this section.
(ii) When loads which are limited by structural competence rather
than by stability are to be handled, it shall be ascertained that the
weight of the load has been determined within plus or minus 10 percent
before it is lifted.
(2) Attaching the load. (i) The hoist rope shall not be wrapped
around the load.
(ii) The load shall be attached to the hook by means of slings or
other approved devices.
(3) Moving the load. (i) The employer shall assure that:
(a) The crane is level and where necessary blocked properly.
(b) The load is well secured and properly balanced in the sling or
lifting device before it is lifted more than a few inches.
(ii) Before starting to hoist, the following conditions shall be
noted:
(a) Hoist rope shall not be kinked.
(b) Multiple part lines shall not be twisted around each other.
(c) The hook shall be brought over the load in such a manner as to
prevent swinging.
(iii) During hoisting care shall be taken that:
(a) There is no sudden acceleration or deceleration of the moving
load.
(b) The load does not contact any obstructions.
(iv) Side loading of booms shall be limited to freely suspended
loads. Cranes shall not be used for dragging loads sideways.
(v) No hoisting, lowering, swinging, or traveling shall be done
while anyone is on the load or hook.
[[Page 572]]
(vi) The operator should avoid carrying loads over people.
(vii) On truck-mounted cranes, no loads shall be lifted over the
front area except as approved by the crane manufacturer.
(viii) The operator shall test the brakes each time a load
approaching the rated load is handled by raising it a few inches and
applying the brakes.
(ix) Outriggers shall be used when the load to be handled at that
particular radius exceeds the rated load without outriggers as given by
the manufacturer for that crane. Where floats are used they shall be
securely attached to the outriggers. Wood blocks used to support
outriggers shall:
(a) Be strong enough to prevent crushing.
(b) Be free from defects.
(c) Be of sufficient width and length to prevent shifting or
toppling under load.
(x) Neither the load nor the boom shall be lowered below the point
where less than two full wraps of rope remain on their respective drums.
(xi) Before lifting loads with locomotive cranes without using
outriggers, means shall be applied to prevent the load from being
carried by the truck springs.
(xii) When two or more cranes are used to lift one load, one
designated person shall be responsible for the operation. He shall be
required to analyze the operation and instruct all personnel involved in
the proper positioning, rigging of the load, and the movements to be
made.
(xiii) In transit the following additional precautions shall be
exercised:
(a) The boom shall be carried in line with the direction of motion.
(b) The superstructure shall be secured against rotation, except
when negotiating turns when there is an operator in the cab or the boom
is supported on a dolly.
(c) The empty hook shall be lashed or otherwise restrained so that
it cannot swing freely.
(xiv) Before traveling a crane with load, a designated person shall
be responsible for determining and controlling safety. Decisions such as
position of load, boom location, ground support, travel route, and speed
of movement shall be in accord with his determinations.
(xv) A crane with or without load shall not be traveled with the
boom so high that it may bounce back over the cab.
(xvi) When rotating the crane, sudden starts and stops shall be
avoided. Rotational speed shall be such that the load does not swing out
beyond the radii at which it can be controlled. A tag or restraint line
shall be used when rotation of the load is hazardous.
(xvii) When a crane is to be operated at a fixed radius, the boom-
hoist pawl or other positive locking device shall be engaged.
(xviii) Ropes shall not be handled on a winch head without the
knowledge of the operator.
(xix) While a winch head is being used, the operator shall be within
convenient reach of the power unit control lever.
(4) Holding the load. (i) The operator shall not be permitted to
leave his position at the controls while the load is suspended.
(ii) No person should be permitted to stand or pass under a load on
the hook.
(iii) If the load must remain suspended for any considerable length
of time, the operator shall hold the drum from rotating in the lowering
direction by activating the positive controllable means of the
operator's station.
(i) Other requirements--(1) Rail clamps. Rail clamps shall not be
used as a means of restraining tipping of a locomotive crane.
(2) Ballast or counterweight. Cranes shall not be operated without
the full amount of any ballast or counterweight in place as specified by
the maker, but truck cranes that have dropped the ballast or
counterweight may be operated temporarily with special care and only for
light loads without full ballast or counterweight in place. The ballast
or counterweight in place specified by the manufacturer shall not be
exceeded.
(3) Cabs. (i) Necessary clothing and personal belongings shall be
stored in such a manner as to not interfere with access or operation.
(ii) Tools, oil cans, waste, extra fuses, and other necessary
articles shall be stored in the tool box, and shall not be
[[Page 573]]
permitted to lie loose in or about the cab.
(4) Refueling. (i) Refueling with small portable containers shall be
done with an approved safety type can equipped with an automatic closing
cap and flame arrester. Refer to Sec. 1910.155(c)(3) for definition of
approved.
(ii) Machines shall not be refueled with the engine running.
(5) Fire extinguishers. (i) A carbon dioxide, dry chemical, or
equivalent fire extinguisher shall be kept in the cab or vicinity of the
crane.
(ii) Operating and maintenance personnel shall be made familiar with
the use and care of the fire extinguishers provided.
(6) Swinging locomotive cranes. A locomotive crane shall not be
swung into a position where railway cars on an adjacent track might
strike it, until it has been ascertained that cars are not being moved
on the adjacent track and proper flag protection has been established.
(j) Operations near overhead lines. For operations near overhead
electric lines, see Sec. 1910.333(c)(3).
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51
FR 34561, Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug
6, 1990; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.181 Derricks.
(a) Definitions applicable to this section. (1) A derrick is an
apparatus consisting of a mast or equivalent member held at the head by
guys or braces, with or without a boom, for use with a hoisting
mechanism and operating ropes.
(2) A-frame derrick means a derrick in which the boom is hinged from
a cross member between the bottom ends of two upright members spread
apart at the lower ends and joined at the top; the boom point secured to
the junction of the side members, and the side members are braced or
guyed from this junction point.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.037
(3) A basket derrick is a derrick without a boom, similar to a gin
pole, with its base supported by ropes attached to corner posts or other
parts of the structure. The base is at a lower elevation than its
supports. The location of the base of a basket derrick can be changed by
varying the length of the rope supports. The top of the pole is secured
with multiple reeved guys to position the top of the pole to the desired
location by varying the length of the upper guy lines. The load is
raised and lowered by ropes through a sheave or block secured to the top
of the pole.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.038
(4) Breast derrick means a derrick without boom. The mast consists
of two side members spread farther apart at the base than at the top and
tied together at top and bottom by rigid members. The mast is prevented
from
[[Page 574]]
tipping forward by guys connected to its top. The load is raised and
lowered by ropes through a sheave or block secured to the top
crosspiece.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.039
(5) Chicago boom derrick means a boom which is attached to a
structure, an outside upright member of the structure serving as the
mast, and the boom being stepped in a fixed socket clamped to the
upright. The derrick is complete with load, boom, and boom point swing
line falls.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.040
(6) A gin pole derrick is a derrick without a boom. Its guys are so
arranged from its top as to permit leaning the mast in any direction.
The load is raised and lowered by ropes reeved through sheaves or blocks
at the top of the mast.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.041
(7) Guy derrick means a fixed derrick consisting of a mast capable
of being rotated, supported in a vertical position by guys, and a boom
whose bottom end is hinged or pivoted to move in a vertical plane with a
reeved rope between the head of the mast and the boom point for raising
and lowering the boom, and a reeved rope from the boom point for raising
and lowering the load.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.042
(8) Shearleg derrick means a derrick without a boom and similar to a
breast derrick. The mast, wide at the bottom and narrow at the top, is
hinged at the bottom and has its top secured by a multiple reeved guy to
permit handling loads at various radii by means of load tackle suspended
from the mast top.
(9) A stiffleg derrick is a derrick similar to a guy derrick except
that the mast is supported or held in place by two or more stiff
members, called stifflegs, which are capable of resisting either tensile
or compressive forces. Sills are generally provided to connect the lower
ends of the stifflegs to the foot of the mast.
[[Page 575]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.043
(10) Appointed means assigned specific responsibilities by the
employer or the employer's representative.
(11) ANSI means the American National Standards Institute.
(12) A boom is a timber or metal section or strut, pivoted or hinged
at the heel (lower end) at a location fixed in height on a frame or mast
or vertical member, and with its point (upper end) supported by chains,
ropes, or rods to the upper end of the frame, mast, or vertical member.
A rope for raising and lowering the load is reeved through sheaves or a
block at the boom point. The length of the boom shall be taken as the
straight line distance between the axis of the foot pin and the axis of
the boom point sheave pin, or where used, the axis of the upper load
block attachment pin.
(13) Boom harness means the block and sheave arrangement on the boom
point to which the topping lift cable is reeved for lowering and raising
the boom.
(14) The boom point is the outward end of the top section of the
boom.
(15) Derrick bullwheel means a horizontal ring or wheel, fastened to
the foot of a derrick, for the purpose of turning the derrick by means
of ropes leading from this wheel to a powered drum.
(16) Designated means selected or assigned by the employer or
employer's representative as being qualified to perform specific duties.
(17) Eye means a loop formed at the end of a rope by securing the
dead end to the live end at the base of the loop.
(18) A fiddle block is a block consisting of two sheaves in the same
plane held in place by the same cheek plates.
(19) The foot bearing or foot block (sill block) is the lower
support on which the mast rotates.
(20) A gudgeon pin is a pin connecting the mast cap to the mast
allowing rotation of the mast.
(21) A guy is a rope used to steady or secure the mast or other
member in the desired position.
(22) Load, working means the external load, in pounds, applied to
the derrick, including the weight of load attaching equipment such as
load blocks, shackles, and slings.
(23) Load block, lower means the assembly of sheaves, pins, and
frame suspended by the hoisting rope.
(24) Load block, upper means the assembly of sheaves, pins, and
frame suspended from the boom.
(25) Mast means the upright member of the derrick.
(26) Mast cap (spider) means the fitting at the top of the mast to
which the guys are connected.
(27) Reeving means a rope system in which the rope travels around
drums and sheaves.
(28) Rope refers to wire rope unless otherwise specified.
(29) Safety Hook means a hook with a latch to prevent slings or load
from accidentally slipping off the hook.
(30) Side loading is a load applied at an angle to the vertical
plane of the boom.
(31) The sill is a member connecting the foot block and stiffleg or
a member connecting the lower ends of a double member mast.
(32) A standby derrick is a derrick not in regular service which is
used occasionally or intermittently as required.
(33) Stiffleg means a rigid member supporting the mast at the head.
(34) Swing means rotation of the mast and/or boom for movements of
loads in a horizontal direction about the axis of rotation.
(b) General requirements--(1) Application. This section applies to
guy, stiffleg, basket, breast, gin pole, Chicago boom and A-frame
derricks of the stationary type, capable of handling loads at variable
reaches and powered by hoists through systems of rope reeving, used to
perform lifting hook
[[Page 576]]
work, single or multiple line bucket work, grab, grapple, and magnet
work. Derricks may be permanently installed for temporary use as in
construction work. The requirements of this section also apply to any
modification of these types which retain their fundamental features,
except for floating derricks.
(2) New and existing equipment. All new derricks constructed and
installed on or after August 31, 1971, shall meet the design
specifications of the American National Standard Safety Code for
Derricks, ANSI B30.6-1969, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(3) Designated personnel. Only designated personnel shall be
permitted to operate a derrick covered by this section.
(c) Load ratings--(1) Rated load marking. For permanently installed
derricks with fixed lengths of boom, guy, and mast, a substantial,
durable, and clearly legible rating chart shall be provided with each
derrick and securely affixed where it is visible to personnel
responsible for the safe operation of the equipment. The chart shall
include the following data:
(i) Manufacturer's approved load ratings at corresponding ranges of
boom angle or operating radii.
(ii) Specific lengths of components on which the load ratings are
based.
(iii) Required parts for hoist reeving. Size and construction of
rope may be shown either on the rating chart or in the operating manual.
(2) Nonpermanent installations. For nonpermanent installations, the
manufacturer shall provide sufficient information from which capacity
charts can be prepared for the particular installation. The capacity
charts shall be located at the derricks or the jobsite office.
(d) Inspection--(1) Inspection classification. (i) Prior to initial
use all new and altered derricks shall be inspected to insure compliance
with the provisions of this section.
(ii) Inspection procedure for derricks in regular service is divided
into two general classifications based upon the intervals at which
inspection should be performed. The intervals in turn are dependent upon
the nature of the critical components of the derrick and the degree of
their exposure to wear, deterioration, or malfunction. The two general
classifications are herein designated as frequent and periodic with
respective intervals between inspections as defined below:
(a) Frequent inspection--Daily to monthly intervals.
(b) Periodic inspection--1- to 12-month intervals, or as specified
by the manufacturer.
(2) Frequent inspection. Items such as the following shall be
inspected for defects at intervals as defined in paragraph (d)(1)(ii)(a)
of this section or as specifically indicated, including observation
during operation for any defects which might appear between regular
inspections. Deficiencies shall be carefully examined for any safety
hazard:
(i) All control mechanisms: Inspect daily for adjustment, wear, and
lubrication.
(ii) All chords and lacing: Inspect daily, visually.
(iii) Tension in guys: Daily.
(iv) Plumb of the mast.
(v) Deterioration or leakage in air or hydraulic systems: Daily.
(vi) Derrick hooks for deformations or cracks; for hooks with cracks
or having more than 15 percent in excess of normal throat opening or
more than 10 deg. twist from the plane of the unbent hook, refer to
paragraph (e)(3)(iii) of this section.
(vii) Rope reeving; visual inspection for noncompliance with derrick
manufacturer's recommendations.
(viii) Hoist brakes, clutches, and operating levers: check daily for
proper functioning before beginning operations.
(ix) Electrical apparatus for malfunctioning, signs of excessive
deterioration, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
(3) Periodic inspection. (i) Complete inspections of the derrick
shall be performed at intervals as generally defined in paragraph
(d)(1)(ii)(b) of this section depending upon its activity, severity of
service, and environment, or as specifically indicated below. These
inspections shall include the requirements of paragraph (d)(2) of this
section and in addition, items such as the following. Deficiencies shall
be carefully examined and a determination
[[Page 577]]
made as to whether they constitute a safety hazard:
(a) Structural members for deformations, cracks, and corrosion.
(b) Bolts or rivets for tightness.
(c) Parts such as pins, bearings, shafts, gears, sheaves, drums,
rollers, locking and clamping devices, for wear, cracks, and distortion.
(d) Gudgeon pin for cracks, wear, and distortion each time the
derrick is to be erected.
(e) Powerplants for proper performance and compliance with
applicable safety requirements.
(f) Hooks.
(ii) Foundation or supports shall be inspected for continued ability
to sustain the imposed loads.
(4) Derricks not in regular use. (i) A derrick which has been idle
for a period of 1 month or more, but less than 6 months, shall be given
an inspection conforming with requirements of paragraph (d)(2) of this
section and paragraph (g)(3) of this section before placing in service.
(ii) A derrick which has been idle for a period of over 6 months
shall be given a complete inspection conforming with requirements of
paragraphs (d) (2) and (3) of this section and paragraph (g)(3) of this
section before placing in service.
(iii) Standby derricks shall be inspected at least semiannually in
accordance with requirements of paragraph (d)(2) of this section and
paragraph (g)(3) of this section.
(e) Testing--(1) Operational tests. Prior to initial use all new and
altered derricks shall be tested to insure compliance with this section
including the following functions:
(i) Load hoisting and lowering.
(ii) Boom up and down.
(iii) Swing.
(iv) Operation of clutches and brakes of hoist.
(2) Anchorages. All anchorages shall be approved by the appointed
person. Rock and hairpin anchorages may require special testing.
(f) Maintenance--(1) Preventive maintenance. A preventive
maintenance program based on the derrick manufacturer's recommendations
shall be established.
(2) Maintenance procedure. (i) Before adjustments and repairs are
started on a derrick the following precautions shall be taken:
(a) The derrick to be repaired shall be arranged so it will cause
the least interference with other equipment and operations in the area.
(b) All hoist drum dogs shall be engaged.
(c) The main or emergency switch shall be locked in the open
position, if an electric hoist is used.
(d) Warning or out of order signs shall be placed on the derrick and
hoist.
(e) The repairs of booms of derricks shall either be made when the
booms are lowered and adequately supported or safely tied off.
(f) A good communication system shall be set up between the hoist
operator and the appointed individual in charge of derrick operations
before any work on the equipment is started.
(ii) After adjustments and repairs have been made the derrick shall
not be operated until all guards have been reinstalled, safety devices
reactivated, and maintenance equipment removed.
(3) Adjustments and repairs. (i) Any unsafe conditions disclosed by
inspection shall be corrected before operation of the derrick is
resumed.
(ii) Adjustments shall be maintained to assure correct functioning
of components.
(iii) Repairs or replacements shall be provided promptly as needed
for safe operation. The following are examples of conditions requiring
prompt repair or replacement:
(a) Hooks showing defects described in paragraph (d)(2)(vi) of this
section shall be discarded.
(b) All critical parts which are cracked, broken, bent, or
excessively worn.
(c) [Reserved]
(d) All replacement and repaired parts shall have at least the
original safety factor.
(g) Rope inspection--(1) Running ropes. A thorough inspection of all
ropes in use shall be made at least once a month and a certification
record which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the
person who performed the inspection, and an identifier for the
[[Page 578]]
ropes which were inspected shall be prepared and kept on file where
readily available. Any deterioration, resulting in appreciable loss of
original strength shall be carefully observed and determination made as
to whether further use of the rope would constitute a safety hazard.
Some of the conditions that could result in an appreciable loss of
strength are the following:
(i) Reduction of rope diameter below nominal diameter due to loss of
core support, internal or external corrosion, or wear of outside wires.
(ii) A number of broken outside wires and the degree of distribution
or concentration of such broken wires.
(iii) Worn outside wires.
(iv) Corroded or broken wires at end connections.
(v) Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied end
connections.
(vi) Severe kinking, crushing, cutting, or unstranding.
(2) Limited travel ropes. Heavy wear and/or broken wires may occur
in sections in contact with equalizer sheaves or other sheaves where
rope travel is limited, or with saddles. Particular care shall be taken
to inspect ropes at these locations.
(3) Idle ropes. All rope which has been idle for a period of a month
or more due to shutdown or storage of a derrick on which it is installed
shall be given a thorough inspection before it is used. This inspection
shall be for all types of deterioration. A certification record shall be
prepared and kept readily available which includes the date of
inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection,
and an identifier for the ropes which were inspected.
(4) Nonrotating ropes. Particular care shall be taken in the
inspection of nonrotating rope.
(h) Operations of derricks. Derrick operations shall be directed
only by the individual specifically designated for that purpose.
(i) Handling the load--(1) Size of load. (i) No derrick shall be
loaded beyond the rated load.
(ii) When loads approach the maximum rating of the derrick, it shall
be ascertained that the weight of the load has been determined within
plus or minus 10 percent before it is lifted.
(2) Attaching the load. (i) The hoist rope shall not be wrapped
around the load.
(ii) The load shall be attached to the hook by means of slings or
other suitable devices.
(3) Moving the load. (i) The load shall be well secured and properly
balanced in the sling or lifting device before it is lifted more than a
few inches.
(ii) Before starting to hoist, the following conditions shall be
noted:
(a) Hoist rope shall not be kinked.
(b) Multiple part lines shall not be twisted around each other.
(c) The hook shall be brought over the load in such a manner as to
prevent swinging.
(iii) During hoisting, care shall be taken that:
(a) There is no sudden acceleration or deceleration of the moving
load.
(b) Load does not contact any obstructions.
(iv) A derrick shall not be used for side loading except when
specifically authorized by a responsible person who has determined that
the various structural components will not be overstressed.
(v) No hoisting, lowering, or swinging shall be done while anyone is
on the load or hook.
(vi) The operator should avoid carrying loads over people.
(vii) The operator shall test the brakes each time a load
approaching the rated load is handled by raising it a few inches and
applying the brakes.
(viii) Neither the load nor boom shall be lowered below the point
where less than two full wraps of rope remain on their respective drums.
(ix) When rotating a derrick, sudden starts and stops shall be
avoided. Rotational speed shall be such that the load does not swing out
beyond the radius at which it can be controlled.
(x) Boom and hoisting rope systems shall not be twisted.
(4) Holding the load. (i) The operator shall not be allowed to leave
his position at the controls while the load is suspended.
(ii) People should not be permitted to stand or pass under a load on
the hook.
(iii) If the load must remain suspended for any considerable length
of time, a dog, or pawl and ratchet, or
[[Page 579]]
other equivalent means, rather than the brake alone, shall be used to
hold the load.
(5) Use of winch heads. (i) Ropes shall not be handled on a winch
head without the knowledge of the operator.
(ii) While a winch head is being used, the operator shall be within
convenient reach of the power unit control lever.
(6) Securing boom. Dogs, pawls, or other positive holding mechanism
on the hoist shall be engaged. When not in use, the derrick boom shall:
(i) Be laid down;
(ii) Be secured to a stationary member, as nearly under the head as
possible, by attachment of a sling to the load block; or
(iii) Be hoisted to a vertical position and secured to the mast.
(j) Other requirements--(1) Guards. (i) Exposed moving parts, such
as gears, ropes, setscrews, projecting keys, chains, chain sprockets,
and reciprocating components, which constitute a hazard under normal
operating conditions shall be guarded.
(ii) Guards shall be securely fastened.
(iii) Each guard shall be capable of supporting without permanent
distortion, the weight of a 200-pound person unless the guard is located
where it is impossible for a person to step on it.
(2) Hooks. (i) Hooks shall meet the manufacturer's recommendations
and shall not be overloaded.
(ii) Safety latch type hooks shall be used wherever possible.
(3) Fire extinguishers. (i) A carbon dioxide, dry chemical, or
equivalent fire extinguisher shall be kept in the immediate vicinity of
the derrick.
(ii) Operating and maintenance personnel shall be familiar with the
use and care of the fire extinguishers provided.
(4) Refueling. (i) Refueling with portable containers shall be done
with approved safety type containers equipped with automatic closing cap
and flame arrester. Refer to Sec. 1910.155(c)(3) for definition of
Approved.
(ii) Machines shall not be refueled with the engine running.
(5) Operations near overhead lines. For operations near overhead
electric lines, see Sec. 1910.333(c)(3).
(6) Cab or operating enclosure. (i) Necessary clothing and personal
belongings shall be stored in such a manner as to not interfere with
access or operation.
(ii) Tools, oilcans, waste, extra fuses, and other necessary
articles shall be stored in the toolbox, and shall not be permitted to
lie loose in or about the cab or operating enclosure.
[37 FR 22102, Oct. 18, 1972, as amended at 38 FR 14373, June 1, 1973; 43
FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34561, Sept.
29, 1986; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR
9240, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.183 Helicopters.
(a) [Reserved]
(b) Briefing. Prior to each day's operation a briefing shall be
conducted. This briefing shall set forth the plan of operation for the
pilot and ground personnel.
(c) Slings and tag lines. Loads shall be properly slung. Tag lines
shall be of a length that will not permit their being drawn up into the
rotors. Pressed sleeve, swedged eyes, or equivalent means shall be used
for all freely suspended loads to prevent hand splices from spinning
open or cable clamps from loosening.
(d) Cargo hooks. All electrically operated cargo hooks shall have
the electrical activating device so designed and installed as to prevent
inadvertent operation. In addition, these cargo hooks shall be equipped
with an emergency mechanical control for releasing the load. The
employer shall ensure that the hooks are tested prior to each day's
operation by a competent person to determine that the release functions
properly, both electrically and mechanically.
(e) Personal protective equipment. (1) Personal protective equipment
shall be provided and the employer shall ensure its use by employees
receiving the load. Personal protective equipment shall consist of
complete eye protection and hardhats secured by chinstraps.
(2) Loose-fitting clothing likely to flap in rotor downwash, and
thus be snagged on the hoist line, may not be worn.
(f) Loose gear and objects. The employer shall take all necessary
precautions to protect employees from flying objects in the rotor
downwash.
[[Page 580]]
All loose gear within 100 feet of the place of lifting the load or
depositing the load, or within all other areas susceptible to rotor
downwash, shall be secured or removed.
(g) Housekeeping. Good housekeeping shall be maintained in all
helicopter loading and unloading areas.
(h) Load safety. The size and weight of loads, and the manner in
which loads are connected to the helicopter shall be checked. A lift may
not be made if the helicopter operator believes the lift cannot be made
safely.
(i) Hooking and unhooking loads. When employees perform work under
hovering craft, a safe means of access shall be provided for employees
to reach the hoist line hook and engage or disengage cargo slings.
Employees may not be permitted to perform work under hovering craft
except when necessary to hook or unhook loads.
(j) Static charge. Static charge on the suspended load shall be
dissipated with a grounding device before ground personnel touch the
suspended load, unless protective rubber gloves are being worn by all
ground personnel who may be required to touch the suspended load.
(k) Weight limitation. The weight of an external load shall not
exceed the helicopter manufacturer's rating.
(l) Ground lines. Hoist wires or other gear, except for pulling
lines or conductors that are allowed to ``pay out'' from a container or
roll off a reel, shall not be attached to any fixed ground structure, or
allowed to foul on any fixed structure.
(m) Visibility. Ground personnel shall be instructed and the
employer shall ensure that when visibility is reduced by dust or other
conditions, they shall exercise special caution to keep clear of main
and stabilizing rotors. Precautions shall also be taken by the employer
to eliminate, as far as practical, the dust or other conditions reducing
the visibility.
(n) Signal systems. The employer shall instruct the aircrew and
ground personnel on the signal systems to be used and shall review the
system with the employees in advance of hoisting the load. This applies
to both radio and hand signal systems. Hand signals, where used, shall
be as shown in Figure N-1.
(o) Approach distance. No employee shall be permitted to approach
within 50 feet of the helicopter when the rotor blades are turning,
unless his work duties require his presence in that area.
(p) Approaching helicopter. The employer shall instruct employees,
and shall ensure, that whenever approaching or leaving a helicopter
which has its blades rotating, all employees shall remain in full view
of the pilot and keep in a crouched position. No employee shall be
permitted to work in the area from the cockpit or cabin rearward while
blades are rotating, unless authorized by the helicopter operator to
work there.
(q) Personnel. Sufficient ground personnel shall be provided to
ensure that helicopter loading and unloading operations can be performed
safely.
(r) Communications. There shall be constant reliable communication
between the pilot and a designated employee of the ground crew who acts
as a signalman during the period of loading and unloading. The signalman
shall be clearly distinguishable from other ground personnel.
(s) Fires. Open fires shall not be permitted in areas where they
could be spread by the rotor downwash.
[[Page 581]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.044
[40 FR 13440, Mar. 26, 1975, as amended at 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998]
[[Page 582]]
Sec. 1910.184 Slings.
(a) Scope. This section applies to slings used in conjunction with
other material handling equipment for the movement of material by
hoisting, in employments covered by this part. The types of slings
covered are those made from alloy steel chain, wire rope, metal mesh,
natural or synthetic fiber rope (conventional three strand
construction), and synthetic web (nylon, polyester, and polypropylene).
(b) Definitions. Angle of loading is the inclination of a leg or
branch of a sling measured from the horizontal or vertical plane as
shown in Fig. N-184-5; provided that an angle of loading of five degrees
or less from the vertical may be considered a vertical angle of loading.
Basket hitch is a sling configuration whereby the sling is passed
under the load and has both ends, end attachments, eyes or handles on
the hook or a single master link.
Braided wire rope is a wire rope formed by plaiting component wire
ropes.
Bridle wire rope sling is a sling composed of multiple wire rope
legs with the top ends gathered in a fitting that goes over the lifting
hook.
Cable laid endless sling-mechanical joint is a wire rope sling made
endless by joining the ends of a single length of cable laid rope with
one or more metallic fittings.
Cable laid grommet-hand tucked is an endless wire rope sling made
from one length of rope wrapped six times around a core formed by hand
tucking the ends of the rope inside the six wraps.
Cable laid rope is a wire rope composed of six wire ropes wrapped
around a fiber or wire rope core.
Cable laid rope sling-mechanical joint is a wire rope sling made
from a cable laid rope with eyes fabricated by pressing or swaging one
or more metal sleeves over the rope junction.
Choker hitch is a sling configuration with one end of the sling
passing under the load and through an end attachment, handle or eye on
the other end of the sling.
Coating is an elastomer or other suitable material applied to a
sling or to a sling component to impart desirable properties.
Cross rod is a wire used to join spirals of metal mesh to form a
complete fabric. (See Fig. N-184-2.)
Designated means selected or assigned by the employer or the
employer's representative as being qualified to perform specific duties.
Equivalent entity is a person or organization (including an
employer) which, by possession of equipment, technical knowledge and
skills, can perform with equal competence the same repairs and tests as
the person or organization with which it is equated.
Fabric (metal mesh) is the flexible portion of a metal mesh sling
consisting of a series of transverse coils and cross rods.
Female handle (choker) is a handle with a handle eye and a slot of
such dimension as to permit passage of a male handle thereby allowing
the use of a metal mesh sling in a choker hitch. (See Fig. N-184-1.)
Handle is a terminal fitting to which metal mesh fabric is attached.
(See Fig. N-184-1.)
Handle eye is an opening in a handle of a metal mesh sling shaped to
accept a hook, shackle or other lifting device. (See Fig. N-184-1.)
Hitch is a sling configuration whereby the sling is fastened to an
object or load, either directly to it or around it.
Link is a single ring of a chain.
Male handle (triangle) is a handle with a handle eye.
Master coupling link is an alloy steel welded coupling link used as
an intermediate link to join alloy steel chain to master links. (See
Fig. N-184-3.)
Master link or gathering ring is a forged or welded steel link used
to support all members (legs) of an alloy steel chain sling or wire rope
sling. (See Fig. N-184-3.)
Mechanical coupling link is a nonwelded, mechanically closed steel
link used to attach master links, hooks, etc., to alloy steel chain.
[[Page 583]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.045
[[Page 584]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.046
[[Page 585]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.047
Proof load is the load applied in performance of a proof test.
Proof test is a nondestructive tension test performed by the sling
manufacturer or an equivalent entity to verify construction and
workmanship of a sling.
Rated capacity or working load limit is the maximum working load
permitted by the provisions of this section.
Reach is the effective length of an alloy steel chain sling measured
from the top bearing surface of the upper terminal component to the
bottom bearing surface of the lower terminal component.
Selvage edge is the finished edge of synthetic webbing designed to
prevent unraveling.
Sling is an assembly which connects the load to the material
handling equipment.
Sling manufacturer is a person or organization that assembles sling
components into their final form for sale to users.
Spiral is a single transverse coil that is the basic element from
which metal mesh is fabricated. (See Fig. N-184-2.)
Strand laid endless sling-mechanical joint is a wire rope sling made
endless from one length of rope with the ends joined by one or more
metallic fittings.
Strand laid grommet-hand tucked is an endless wire rope sling made
from one length of strand wrapped six times around a core formed by hand
tucking the ends of the strand inside the six wraps.
Strand laid rope is a wire rope made with strands (usually six or
eight) wrapped around a fiber core, wire strand core, or independent
wire rope core (IWRC).
Vertical hitch is a method of supporting a load by a single,
vertical part or leg of the sling. (See Fig. N-184-4.)
(c) Safe operating practices. Whenever any sling is used, the
following practices shall be observed:
(1) Slings that are damaged or defective shall not be used.
[[Page 586]]
(2) Slings shall not be shortened with knots or bolts or other
makeshift devices.
(3) Sling legs shall not be kinked.
(4) Slings shall not be loaded in excess of their rated capacities.
(5) Slings used in a basket hitch shall have the loads balanced to
prevent slippage.
(6) Slings shall be securely attached to their loads.
(7) Slings shall be padded or protected from the sharp edges of
their loads.
(8) Suspended loads shall be kept clear of all obstructions.
(9) All employees shall be kept clear of loads about to be lifted
and of suspended loads.
(10) Hands or fingers shall not be placed between the sling and its
load while the sling is being tightened around the load.
(11) Shock loading is prohibited.
(12) A sling shall not be pulled from under a load when the load is
resting on the sling.
(d) Inspections. Each day before being used, the sling and all
fastenings and attachments shall be inspected for damage or defects by a
competent person designated by the employer. Additional inspections
shall be performed during sling use, where service conditions warrant.
Damaged or defective slings shall be immediately removed from service.
(e) Alloy steel chain slings. (1) Sling identification. Alloy steel
chain slings shall have permanently affixed durable identification
stating size, grade, rated capacity, and reach.
(2) Attachments. (i) Hooks, rings, oblong links, pear shaped links,
welded or mechanical coupling links or other attachments shall have a
rated capacity at least equal to that of the alloy steel chain with
which they are used or the sling shall not be used in excess of the
rated capacity of the weakest component.
(ii) Makeshift links or fasteners formed from bolts or rods, or
other such attachments, shall not be used.
(3) Inspections. (i) In addition to the inspection required by
paragraph (d) of this section, a thorough periodic inspection of alloy
steel chain slings in use shall be made on a regular basis, to be
determined on the basis of (A) frequency of sling use; (B) severity of
service conditions; (C) nature of lifts being made; and (D) experience
gained on the service life of slings used in similar circumstances. Such
inspections shall in no event be at intervals greater than once every 12
months.
(ii) The employer shall make and maintain a record of the most
recent month in which each alloy steel chain sling was thoroughly
inspected, and shall make such record available for examination.
(iii) The thorough inspection of alloy steel chain slings shall be
performed by a competent person designated by the employer, and shall
include a thorough inspection for wear, defective welds, deformation and
increase in length. Where such defects or deterioration are present, the
sling shall be immediately removed from service.
(4) Proof testing. The employer shall ensure that before use, each
new, repaired, or reconditioned alloy steel chain sling, including all
welded components in the sling assembly, shall be proof tested by the
sling manufacturer or equivalent entity, in accordance with paragraph
5.2 of the American Society of Testing and Materials Specification A391-
65, which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6 (ANSI
G61.1- 1968). The employer shall retain a certificate of the proof test
and shall make it available for examination.
(5) Sling use. Alloy steel chain slings shall not be used with loads
in excess of the rated capacities prescribed in Table N-184-1. Slings
not included in this table shall be used only in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
(6) Safe operating temperatures. Alloy steel chain slings shall be
permanently removed from service if they are heated above 1000 deg.F.
When exposed to service temperatures in excess of 600 deg.F, maximum
working load limits permitted in Table N-184-1 shall be reduced in
accordance with the chain or sling manufacturer's recommendations.
(7) Repairing and reconditioning alloy steel chain slings. (i) Worn
or damaged alloy steel chain slings or attachments shall not be used
until repaired. When
[[Page 587]]
welding or heat testing is performed, slings shall not be used unless
repaired, reconditioned and proof tested by the sling manufacturer or an
equivalent entity.
(ii) Mechanical coupling links or low carbon steel repair links
shall not be used to repair broken lengths of chain.
(8) Effects of wear. If the chain size at any point of any link is
less than that stated in Table N-184-2, the sling shall be removed from
service.
(9) Deformed attachments. (i) Alloy steel chain slings with cracked
or deformed master links, coupling links or other components shall be
removed from service.
Table N-184-1--Rated Capacity (Working Load Limit), for Alloy Steel Chain Slings
Rated Capacity (Working Load Limit), Pounds
[Horizontal angles shown in parentheses]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Single Double sling vertical angle (1) Triple and quadruple sling (3)
branch --------------------------------- vertical angle (1)
Chain size, inches sling-- --------------------------------
90 deg. 30 deg. 45 deg. 60 deg. 30 deg. 45 deg. 60 deg.
loading (60 deg.) (45 deg.) (30 deg.) (60 deg.) (45 deg.) (30 deg.)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/4\............................... 3,250 5,650 4,550 3,250 8,400 6,800 4,900
\3/8\............................... 6,600 11,400 9,300 6,600 17,000 14,000 9,900
\1/2\............................... 11,250 19,500 15,900 11,250 29,000 24,000 17,000
\5/8\............................... 16,500 28,500 23,300 16,500 43,000 35,000 24,500
\3/4\............................... 23,000 39,800 32,500 23,000 59,500 48,500 34,500
\7/8\............................... 28,750 49,800 40,600 28,750 74,500 61,000 43,000
1................................... 38,750 67,100 5,800 38,750 101,000 82,000 58,000
1\1/8\.............................. 44,500 77,000 63,000 44,500 115,500 94,500 66,500
1\1/4\.............................. 57,500 99,500 61,000 57,500 149,000 121,500 86,000
1\3/8\.............................. 67,000 116,000 94,000 67,000 174,000 141,000 100,500
1\1/2\.............................. 80,000 138,000 112,900 80,000 207,000 169,000 119,500
1\3/4\.............................. 100,000 172,000 140,000 100,000 258,000 210,000 150,000
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(1) Rating of multileg slings adjusted for angle of loading measured as the included angle between the inclined
leg and the vertical as shown in Figure N-184-5.
(2) Rating of multileg slings adjusted for angle of loading between the inclined leg and the horizontal plane of
the load, as shown in Figure N-184-5.
(3) Quadruple sling rating is same as triple sling because normal lifting practice may not distribute load
uniformly to all 4 legs.
Table N-184-2--Minimum Allowable Chain Size At Any Point of Link
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum allowable chain size,
Chain size, inches inches
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/4\ \13/64\
\3/8\ \19/64\
\1/2\ \25/64\
\5/8\ \31/64\
\3/4\ \19/32\
\7/8\ 4\5/64\
1 \13/16\
1\1/8\ \29/32\
1\1/4\ 1
1\3/8\ 1\3/32\
1\1/2\ 1\3/16\
1\3/4\ 1\13/32\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) Slings shall be removed from service if hooks are cracked, have
been opened more than 15 percent of the normal throat opening measured
at the narrowest point or twisted more than 10 degrees from the plane of
the unbent hook.
(f) Wire rope slings. (1) Sling use. Wire rope slings shall not be
used with loads in excess of the rated capacities shown in Tables N-184-
3 through N-184-14. Slings not included in these tables shall be used
only in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
(2) Minimum sling lengths. (i) Cable laid and 6x19 and 6x37 slings
shall have a minimum clear length of wire rope 10 times the component
rope diameter between splices, sleeves or end fittings.
(ii) Braided slings shall have a minimum clear length of wire rope
40 times the component rope diameter between the loops or end fittings.
(iii) Cable laid grommets, strand laid grommets and endless slings
shall have a minimum circumferential length of 96 times their body
diameter.
(3) Safe operating temperatures. Fiber core wire rope slings of all
grades shall be permanently removed from service if they are exposed to
temperatures in excess of 200 deg.F. When nonfiber core wire rope
slings of any grade are used at temperatures above 400 deg.F or below
minus 60 deg.F, recommendations of the sling manufacturer regarding use
at that temperature shall be followed.
[[Page 588]]
(4) End attachments. (i) Welding of end attachments, except covers
to thimbles, shall be performed prior to the assembly of the sling.
(ii) All welded end attachments shall not be used unless proof
tested by the manufacturer or equivalent entity at twice their rated
capacity prior to initial use. The employer shall retain a certificate
of the proof test, and make it available for examination.
Table N-184-3--Rated Capacities for Single Leg Slings
6x19 and 6x37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Fiber Core (FC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vertical Choker Vertical basket \1\
Dia Constr ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(inches) HT MS S HT MS S HT MS S
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/4\ 6x19 0.49 0.51 0.55 0.37 0.38 0.41 0.99 1.0 1.1
\5/16\ 6x19 0.76 0.79 0.85 0.57 0.59 0.64 1.5 1.6 1.7
\3/8\ 6x19 1.1 1.1 1.2 0.80 0.85 0.91 2.1 2.2 2.4
\7/16\ 6x19 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.1 1.1 1.2 2.9 3.0 3.3
\1/2\ 6x19 1.8 2.0 2.1 1.4 1.5 12.6 3.7 3.9 4.3
\9/16\ 6x19 2.3 2.5 2.7 1.7 1.9 2.0 4.6 5.0 5.4
\5/8\ 6x19 2.8 3.1 3.3 2.1 2.3 2.5 5.6 6.2 6.7
\3/4\ 6x19 3.9 4.4 4.8 2.9 3.3 3.6 7.8 8.8 9.5
\7/8\ 6x19 5.1 5.9 6.4 3.9 4.5 4.8 10.0 12.0 13.0
1 6x19 6.7 7.7 8.4 5.0 5.8 6.3 13.0 15.0 17.0
1\1/8\ 6x19 8.4 9.5 10.0 6.3 7.1 7.9 17.0 19.0 21.0
1\1/4\ 6x37 9.8 11.0 12.0 7.4 8.3 9.2 20.0 22.0 25.0
1\3/8\ 6x37 12.0 13.0 15.0 8.9 10.0 11.0 24.0 27.0 30.0
1\1/2\ 6x37 14.0 16.0 15.0 10.0 12.0 13.0 28.0 32.0 35.0
1\5/8\ 6x37 16.0 18.0 21.0 12.0 14.0 15.0 33.0 27.0 41.0
1\3/4\ 6x37 19.0 21.0 24.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 38.0 43.0 48.0
2 6x37 25.0 28.0 31.0 18.0 21.0 23.0 49.0 55.0 62.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HT = Hand Tucked Splice and Hidden Tuck Splice. For hidden tuck splice (IWRC) use values in HT columns.
MS = Mechanical Splice.
S = Swaged or Zinc Poured Socket.
\1\ These values only apply when the D/d ratio for HT slings is 10 or greater, and for MS and S slings is 20 or
greater where: D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of the sling is bent; d=Diameter of rope.
Table N-184-4--Rated Capacities for Single Leg Slings
6x19 and 6x37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Independent Wire Rope Core (IWRC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vertical Choker Vertical basket \1\
Dia Constr ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(inches) HT MS S HT MS S HT MS S
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/4\ 6x19 0.53 0.56 0.59 0.40 0.42 0.44 1.0 1.1 1.2
\5/16\ 6x19 0.81 0.87 0.92 0.61 0.65 0.69 1.6 1.7 1.8
\3/8\ 6x19 1.1 1.2 1.3 0.86 0.93 0.98 2.3 2.5 2.6
\7/16\ 6x19 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.2 1.3 1.3 3.1 3.4 3.5
\1/2\ 6x19 2.0 2.2 2.3 1.5 1.6 1.7 3.9 4.4 4.6
\9/16\ 6x19 2.5 2.7 2.9 1.8 2.1 2.2 4.9 5.5 5.8
\5/8\ 6x19 3.0 3.4 3.6 2.2 2.5 2.7 6.0 6.8 7.2
\3/4\ 6x19 4.2 4.9 5.1 3.1 3.6 3.8 8.4 9.7 10.0
\7/8\ 6x19 5.5 6.6 6.9 4.1 4.9 5.2 11.0 13.0 14.0
1 6x19 7.2 8.5 9.0 5.4 6.4 6.7 14.0 17.0 18.0
1\1/8\ 6x19 9.0 10.0 11.0 6.8 7.8 8.5 18.0 21.0 23.0
1\1/4\ 6x37 10.0 12.0 13.0 7.9 9.2 9.9 21.0 24.0 26.0
1\3/8\ 6x37 13.0 15.0 16.0 9.6 11.0 12.0 25.0 29.0 32.0
1\1/2\ 6x37 15.0 17.0 19.0 11.0 13.0 14.0 30.0 35.0 38.0
1\5/8\ 6x37 18.0 20.0 22.0 13.0 15.0 17.0 35.0 41.0 44.0
1\3/4\ 6x37 20.0 24.0 26.0 15.0 18.0 19.0 41.0 47.0 51.0
2 6x37 26.0 30.0 33.0 20.0 23.0 25.0 53.0 61.0 66.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HT = Hand Tucked Splice. For hidden tuck splice (IWRC) use Table I values in HT column.
MS = Mechanical Splice.
S = Swaged or Zinc Poured Socket.
\1\ These values only apply when the D/d ratio for HT slings is 10 or greater, and for MS and S Slings is 20 or
greater where: D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of the sling is bent; d=Diameter of rope.
[[Page 589]]
Table N-184-5--Rated Capacities for Single Leg Slings
Cable Laid Rope--Mechanical Splice Only
7x7x7&7x19 Constructions Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope
7x6x19 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vertical
Dia (inches) Constr Vertical Choker basket \1\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/4\..................................... 7x7x7........................... 0.50 0.38 1.0
\3/8\..................................... 7x7x7........................... 1.1 0.81 2.0
\1/2\..................................... 7x7x7........................... 1.8 1.4 3.7
\5/8\..................................... 7x7x7........................... 2.8 2.1 5.5
\3/4\..................................... 7x7x7........................... 3.8 2.9 7.6
\5/8\..................................... 7x7x19.......................... 2.9 2.2 5.8
\3/4\..................................... 7x7x19.......................... 4.1 3.0 8.1
\7/8\..................................... 7x7x19.......................... 5.4 4.0 11.0
1......................................... 7x7x19.......................... 6.9 5.1 14.0
1\1/8\.................................... 7x7x19.......................... 8.2 6.2 16.0
1\1/4\.................................... 7x7x19.......................... 9.9 7.4 20.0
\3/4\..................................... 7x6x19 IWRC..................... 3.8 2.8 7.6
\7/8\..................................... 7x6x19 IWRC..................... 5.0 3.8 10.0
1......................................... 7x6x19 IWRC..................... 6.4 4.8 13.0
1\1/8\.................................... 7x6x19 IWRC..................... 7.7 5.8 15.0
1\1/4\.................................... 7x6x19 IWRC..................... 9.2 6.9 18.0
1\5/16\................................... 7x6x19 IWRC..................... 10.0 7.5 20.0
1\3/8\.................................... 7x6x19 IWRC..................... 11.0 8.2 22.0
1\1/2\.................................... 7x6x19 IWRC..................... 13.0 9.6 26.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 10 or greater where: D=Diameter of curvature around which the
body of the sling is bent; d=Diameter of rope.
Table N-184-6--Rated Capacities for Single Leg Slings
8-Part and 6-Part Braided Rope
6x7 and 6x19 Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
7x7 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Component ropes Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vertical Choker Basket, vertical
------------------------------------ to 30 deg. \1\
Diameter (inches) Constr -----------------
8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\3/32\........................................... 6x7 0.42 0.32 0.32 0.24 0.74 0.55
\1/8\............................................ 6x7 0.75 0.57 0.57 0.42 1.3 0.98
\3/16\........................................... 6x7 1.7 1.3 1.3 0.94 2.9 2.2
\3/32\........................................... 7x7 0.51 0.39 0.38 0.29 0.89 0.67
\1/8\............................................ 7x7 0.95 0.7 0.71 0.53 1.6 1.2
\3/16\........................................... 7x7 2.1 1.5 1.5 1.2 3.6 2.7
\3/16\........................................... 6x19 1.7 1.3 1.3 0.98 3.0 2.2
\1/4\............................................ 6x19 3.1 2.3 2.3 1.7 5.3 4.0
\5/16\........................................... 6x19 4.8 3.6 3.6 2.7 8.3 6.2
\3/8\............................................ 6x19 6.8 5.1 5.1 3.8 12.0 8.9
\7/16\........................................... 6x19 9.3 6.9 6.9 5.2 16.0 12.0
\1/2\............................................ 6x19 12.0 9.0 9.0 6.7 21.0 15.0
\9/16\........................................... 6x19 15.0 11.0 11.0 8.5 26.0 20.0
\5/8\............................................ 6x19 19.0 14.0 14.0 10.0 32.0 24.0
\3/4\............................................ 6x19 27.0 20.0 20.0 15.0 46.0 35.0
\7/8\............................................ 6x19 36.0 27.0 27.0 20.0 62.0 47.0
1................................................ 6x19 47.0 35.0 35.0 26.0 81.0 61.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 20 or greater where: D=Diameter of curvature around which the
body of the sling is bent; d=Diameter of component rope.
[[Page 590]]
Table N-184-7--Rated Capacities for 2-Leg and 3-Leg Bridle Slings
6x19 and 6x37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Fiber Core (FC)
[Horizontal angles shown in parentheses]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2-Leg bridle slings 3-Leg bridle slings
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dia 30 deg. (60 45 deg. angle 60 deg. (30 30 deg. (60 45 deg. angle 60 deg. (30
(in.) Constr deg.) ---------------- deg.) deg.) ---------------- deg.)
---------------- -------------------------------- ---------------
HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/4\ 6x19 0.85 0.83 0.70 0.72 0.49 0.51 1.3 1.3 1.0 1.1 0.74 0.76
\5/16\ 6x19 1.3 1.4 1.1 1.1 0.76 0.79 2.0 2.0 1.6 1.7 1.1 1.2
\3/8\ 6x19 1.8 1.9 1.5 1.6 1.1 1.1 2.8 2.9 2.3 2.4 1.6 1.7
\7/16\ 6x19 2.5 2.6 2.0 2.2 1.4 1.5 3.7 4.0 3.0 3.2 2.1 2.3
\1/2\ 6x19 3.2 3.4 2.6 2.8 1.8 2.0 4.8 5.1 3.9 4.2 2.8 3.0
\9/16\ 6x19 4.0 4.3 3.2 3.5 2.3 2.5 6.0 6.5 4.9 5.3 3.4 3.7
\5/8\ 6x19 4.8 5.3 4.0 4.4 2.8 3.1 7.3 8.0 5.9 6.5 4.2 4.6
\3/4\ 6x19 6.8 7.6 5.5 6.2 3.9 4.4 10.0 11.0 8.3 9.3 5.8 6.6
\7/8\ 6x19 8.9 10.0 7.3 8.4 5.1 5.9 13.0 15.0 11.0 13.0 7.7 8.9
1 6x19 11.0 13.0 9.4 11.0 6.7 7.7 17.0 20.0 14.0 16.0 10.0 11.0
1\1/8\ 6x19 14.0 16.0 12.0 13.0 8.4 9.3 22.0 24.0 18.0 20.0 13.0 14.0
1\1/4\ 6x37 17.0 19.0 14.0 16.0 9.8 11.0 25.0 29.0 21.0 23.0 15.0 17.0
1\3/8\ 6x37 20.0 23.0 17.0 19.0 12.0 13.0 31.0 35.0 25.0 28.0 18.0 20.0
1\1/2\ 6x37 24.0 27.0 20.0 22.0 14.0 16.0 36.0 41.0 30.0 33.0 21.0 24.0
1\5/8\ 6x37 28.0 32.0 23.0 26.0 16.0 18.0 43.0 48.0 35.0 39.0 25.0 28.0
1\3/4\ 6x37 33.0 37.0 27.0 30.0 19.0 21.0 49.0 56.0 40.0 45.0 28.0 32.0
2 6x37 43.0 48.0 35.0 39.0 25.0 28.0 64.0 72.0 52.0 59.0 37.0 41.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HT=Hand Tucked Splice. MS=Mechanical Splice.
Table N-184-8--Rated Capacities for 2-Leg and 3-Leg Bridle Slings
6x19 and 6x37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Independent Wire Rope Core (IWRC)
[Horizontal angles shown in parentheses]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2-Leg bridle slings 3-Leg bridle slings
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dia 30 deg. (60 45 deg. angle 60 deg. (30 30 deg. (60 45 deg. angle 60 deg. (30
(in.) Constr deg.) ---------------- deg.) deg.) ---------------- deg.)
---------------- -------------------------------- ---------------
HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/4\ 6x19 0.92 0.97 0.75 0.79 0.53 0.56 1.4 1.4 1.1 1.2 0.79 0.84
\5/16\ 6x19 1.4 1.5 1.1 1.2 0.81 0.87 2.1 2.3 1.7 1.8 1.2 1.3
\3/8\ 6x19 2.0 2.1 1.6 1.8 1.1 1.2 3.0 3.2 2.4 2.6 1.7 1.9
\7/16\ 6x19 2.7 2.9 2.2 2.4 1.5 1.7 4.0 4.4 3.3 3.6 2.3 2.5
\1/2\ 6x19 3.4 3.8 2.8 3.1 2.0 2.2 5.1 5.7 4.2 4.6 3.0 3.3
\9/16\ 6x19 4.3 4.8 3.5 3.9 2.5 2.7 6.4 7.1 5.2 5.8 3.7 4.1
\5/8\ 6x19 5.2 5.9 4.2 4.8 3.0 3.4 7.8 8.8 6.4 7.2 4.5 5.1
\3/4\ 6x19 7.3 8.4 5.9 6.9 4.2 4.9 11.0 13.0 8.9 10.0 6.3 7.3
\7/8\ 6x19 9.6 11.0 7.8 9.3 5.5 6.6 14.0 17.0 12.0 14.0 8.3 9.9
1 6x19 12.0 15.0 10.0 12.0 7.2 8.5 19.0 22.0 15.0 18.0 11.0 13.0
1\1/8\ 6x19 16.0 18.0 13.0 15.0 9.0 10.0 23.0 27.0 19.0 22.0 13.0 16.0
1\1/4\ 6x37 18.0 21.0 15.0 17.0 10.0 12.0 27.0 32.0 22.0 26.0 16.0 18.0
1\3/8\ 6x37 22.0 25.0 18.0 21.0 13.0 15.0 33.0 38.0 27.0 31.0 19.0 22.0
1\1/2\ 6x37 26.0 30.0 21.0 25.0 15.0 17.0 39.0 45.0 32.0 37.0 23.0 26.0
1\5/8\ 6x37 31.0 35.0 25.0 29.0 18.0 20.0 46.0 53.0 38.0 43.0 27.0 31.0
1\3/4\ 6x37 35.0 41.0 29.0 33.0 20.0 24.0 53.0 61.0 43.0 50.0 31.0 35.0
2 6x37 46.0 53.0 37.0 43.0 26.0 30.0 68.0 79.0 56.0 65.0 40.0 46.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HT=Hand Tucked Splice. MS=Mechanical Splice.
Table N-184-9--Rated Capacities for 2-Leg and 3-Leg Bridle Slings
Cable Laid Rope--Mechanical Splice Only
7x7x7 and 7x7x19 Constructions Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope
7x6x19 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
[Horizontal angles shown in parentheses]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2-Leg bridle sling 3-Leg bridle sling
-------------------------------------------------------------
Dia (inches) Constr 30 deg. 45 deg. 60 deg. 30 deg. 45 deg. 60 deg.
(60 deg.) angle (30 deg.) (60 deg.) angle (30 deg.)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/4\.......................... 7x7x7............ 0.87 0.71 0.50 1.3 1.1 0.75
[[Page 591]]
\3/8\.......................... 7x7x7............ 1.9 1.5 1.1 2.8 2.3 1.6
\1/2\.......................... 7x7x7............ 3.2 2.6 1.8 4.8 3.9 2.8
\5/8\.......................... 7x7x7............ 4.8 3.9 2.8 7.2 5.9 4.2
\3/4\.......................... 7x7x7............ 6.6 5.4 3.8 9.9 8.1 3.7
\5/8\.......................... 7x7x19........... 5.0 4.1 2.9 7.5 6.1 4.3
\3/4\.......................... 7x7x19........... 7.0 5.7 4.1 10.0 8.6 6.1
\7/8\.......................... 7x7x19........... 9.3 7.6 5.4 14.0 11.0 8.1
1.............................. 7x7x19........... 12.0 9.7 6.9 18.0 14.0 10.0
1\1/8\......................... 7x7x19........... 14.0 12.0 8.2 21.0 17.0 12.0
1\1/4\......................... 7x7x19........... 17.0 14.0 9.9 26.0 21.0 15.0
\3/4\.......................... 7x6x19 IWRC...... 6.6 5.4 3.8 9.9 8.0 5.7
\7/8\.......................... 7x6x19 IWRC...... 8.7 7.1 5.0 13.0 11.0 7.5
1.............................. 7x6x19 IWRC...... 11.0 9.0 6.4 17.0 13.0 9.6
1\1/8\......................... 7x6x19 IWRC...... 13.0 11.0 7.7 20.0 16.0 11.0
1\1/4\......................... 7x6x19 IWRC...... 16.0 13.0 9.2 24.0 20.0 14.0
1\5/16\........................ 7x6x19 IWRC...... 17.0 14.0 10.0 26.0 21.0 15.0
1\3/8\......................... 7x6x19 IWRC...... 19.0 15.0 11.0 28.0 23.0 16.0
1\1/2\......................... 7x6x19 IWRC...... 22.0 18.0 13.0 33.0 27.0 19.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table N-184-10--Rated Capacities for 2-Leg and 3-Leg Bridle Slings
8-Part and 6-Part Braided Rope
6x7 and 6x19 Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
7x7 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope
[Horizontal angles shown in parentheses]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2-Leg bridle slings 3-Leg bridle slings
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
30 deg. (60 45 deg. angle 60 deg. (30 30 deg. (60 45 deg. angle 60 deg. (30
Dia Constr deg.) ---------------- deg.) deg.) ------------------- deg.)
(in.) ---------------- -------------------------------- -------------
8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8- 6-
8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part Part Part
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\3/32\ 6x7 0.74 0.55 0.60 0.45 0.42 0.32 1.1 0.83 0.90 0.68 0.64 0.48
\1/8\ 6x7 1.3 0.98 1.1 0.80 0.76 0.57 2.0 1.5 1.6 1.2 1.1 0.85
\3/16\ 6x7 2.9 2.2 2.4 1.8 1.7 1.3 4.4 3.3 3.6 2.7 2.5 1.9
\3/32\ 7x7 0.89 0.67 0.72 0.55 0.51 0.39 1.3 1.0 1.1 0.82 0.77 0.58
\1/8\ 7x7 1.6 1.2 1.3 1.0 0.95 0.71 2.5 1.8 2.0 1.5 1.4 1.1
\3/16\ 7x7 3.6 2.7 2.9 2.2 2.1 1.5 5.4 4.0 4.4 3.3 3.1 2.3
\3/16\ 6x19 3.0 2.2 2.4 1.8 1.7 1.3 4.5 3.4 3.7 2.8 2.6 1.9
\1/4\ 6x19 5.3 4.0 4.3 3.2 3.1 2.3 8.0 6.0 6.5 4.9 4.6 3.4
\5/16\ 6x19 8.3 6.2 6.7 5.0 4.8 3.6 12.0 9.3 10.0 7.6 7.1 5.4
\3/8\ 6x19 12.0 8.9 9.7 7.2 6.8 5.1 18.0 13.0 14.0 11.0 10.0 7.7
\7/16\ 6x19 16.0 12.0 13.0 9.8 9.3 6.9 24.0 18.0 20.0 15.0 14.0 10.0
\1/2\ 6x19 21.0 15.0 17.0 13.0 12.0 9.0 31.0 23.0 25.0 19.0 18.0 13.0
\9/16\ 6x19 26.0 20.0 21.0 16.0 15.0 11.0 39.0 29.0 32.0 24.0 23.0 17.0
\5/8\ 6x19 32.0 24.0 26.0 20.0 10.0 14.0 48.0 36.0 40.0 30.0 28.0 21.0
\3/4\ 6x19 46.0 35.0 38.0 28.0 27.0 20.0 69.0 52.0 56.0 42.0 40.0 30.0
\7/8\ 6x19 62.0 47.0 51.0 38.0 36.0 27.0 94.0 70.0 76.0 57.0 54.0 40.0
1 6x19 81.0 61.0 66.0 50.0 47.0 35.0 122.0 91.0 99.0 74.0 70.0 53.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 592]]
Table N-184-11--Rated Capacities for Strand Laid Grommet--Hand Tucked
Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rope body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vertical basket
Dia (inches) Constr Vertical Choker \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/4\ 7x19 0.85 0.64 1.7
\5/16\ 7x19 1.3 1.0 2.6
\3/8\ 7x19 1.9 1.4 3.8
\7/16\ 7x19 2.6 1.9 5.2
\1/2\ 7x19 3.3 2.5 6.7
\9/16\ 7x19 4.2 3.1 8.4
\5/8\ 7x19 5.2 3.9 10.0
\3/4\ 7x19 7.4 5.6 15.0
\7/8\ 7x19 10.0 7.5 20.0
1 7x19 13.0 9.7 26.0
1\1/8\ 7x19 16.0 12.0 32.0
1\1/4\ 7x37 18.0 14.0 37.0
1\3/8\ 7x37 22.0 16.0 44.0
1\1/2\ 7x37 26.0 19.0 52.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater where:
D=Diameter of curvature around which rope is bent. d=Diameter of rope
body.
Table N-184-12--Rated Capacities for Cable Laid Grommet--Hand Tucked
7x6x7 and 7x6x19 Constructions Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
7x7x7 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cable body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vertical basket
Dia (inches) Constr Vertical Choker \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\3/8\ 7x6x7 1.3 0.95 2.5
\9/16\ 7x6x7 2.8 2.1 5.6
\5/8\ 7x6x7 3.8 2.8 7.6
\3/8\ 7x7x7 1.6 1.2 3.2
\9/16\ 7x7x7 3.5 2.6 6.9
\5/8\ 7x7x7 4.5 3.4 9.0
\5/8\ 7x6x19 3.9 3.0 7.9
\3/4\ 7x6x19 5.1 3.8 10.0
\15/16\ 7x6x19 7.9 5.9 16.0
1\1/8\ 7x6x19 11.0 8.4 22.0
1\5/16\ 7x6x19 15.0 11.0 30.0
1\1/2\ 7x6x19 19.0 14.0 39.0
1\11/16\ 7x6x19 24.0 18.0 49.0
1\7/8\ 7x6x19 30.0 22.0 60.0
2\1/4\ 7x6x19 42.0 31.0 84.0
2\5/8\ 7x6x19 56.0 42.0 112.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater where:
D=Diameter of curvature around which cable body is bent. d=Diameter of
cable body.
Table N-184-13--Rated Capacities for Strand Laid Endless Slings--
Mechanical Joint
Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rope body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vertical basket
Dia (inches) Constr Vertical Choker \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/4\ \2\ 6x19 0.92 0.69 1.8
\3/8\ \2\ 6x19 2.0 1.5 4.1
\1/2\ \2\ 6x19 3.6 2.7 7.2
\5/8\ \2\ 6x19 5.6 4.2 11.0
\3/4\ \2\ 6x19 8.0 6.0 16.0
\7/8\ \2\ 6x19 11.0 8.1 21.0
1 \2\ 6x19 14.0 10.0 28.0
1\1/8\ \2\ 6x19 18.0 13.0 35.0
1\1/4\ \2\ 6x37 21.0 15.0 41.0
1\3/8\ \2\ 6x37 25.0 19.0 50.0
1\1/2\ \2\ 6x37 29.0 22.0 59.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater where:
D=Diameter of curvature around which rope is bent. d=Diameter of rope
body.
\2\ IWRC.
Table N-184-14--Rated Capacities for Cable Laid Endless Slings--
Mechanical Joint
7x7x7 and 7x7x19 Constructions Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope
7x6x19 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cable body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vertical basket
Dia (inches) Constr Vertical Choker \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/4\ 7x7x7 0.83 0.62 1.6
\3/8\ 7x7x7 1.8 1.3 3.5
\1/2\ 7x7x7 3.0 2.3 6.1
\5/8\ 7x7x7 4.5 3.4 9.1
\3/4\ 7x7x7 6.3 4.7 12.0
\5/8\ 7x7x19 4.7 3.5 9.5
\3/4\ 7x7x19 6.7 5.0 13.0
\7/8\ 7x7x19 8.9 6.6 18.0
1 7x7x19 11.0 8.5 22.0
1\1/8\ 7x7x19 14.0 10.0 28.0
1\1/4\ 7x7x19 17.0 12.0 33.0
\3/4\ \2\ 7x6x19 6.2 4.7 12.0
\7/8\ \2\ 7x6x19 8.3 6.2 16.0
1 \2\ 7x6x19 10.0 7.9 21.0
1\1/8\ \2\ 7x6x19 13.0 9.7 26.0
1\1/4\ \2\ 7x6x19 16.0 12.0 31.0
1\3/8\ \2\ 7x6x19 18.0 14.0 37.0
1\1/2\ \2\ 7x6x19 22.0 16.0 43.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ These values only apply when the D/d value is 5 or greater where:
D=Diameter of curvature around which cable body is bent. d=Diameter of
cable body.
\2\ IWRC.
(5) Removal from service. Wire rope slings shall be immediately
removed from service if any of the following conditions are present:
(i) Ten randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay, or five
broken wires in one strand in one rope lay.
(ii) Wear or scraping of one-third the original diameter of outside
individual wires.
(iii) Kinking, crushing, bird caging or any other damage resulting
in distortion of the wire rope structure.
(iv) Evidence of heat damage.
(v) End attachments that are cracked, deformed or worn.
[[Page 593]]
(vi) Hooks that have been opened more than 15 percent of the normal
throat opening measured at the narrowest point or twisted more than 10
degrees from the plane of the unbent hook.
(vii) Corrosion of the rope or end attachments.
(g) Metal mesh slings--(1) Sling marking. Each metal mesh sling
shall have permanently affixed to it a durable marking that states the
rated capacity for vertical basket hitch and choker hitch loadings.
(2) Handles. Handles shall have a rated capacity at least equal to
the metal fabric and exhibit no deformation after proof testing.
(3) Attachments of handles to fabric. The fabric and handles shall
be joined so that:
(i) The rated capacity of the sling is not reduced.
(ii) The load is evenly distributed across the width of the fabric.
(iii) Sharp edges will not damage the fabric.
(4) Sling coatings. Coatings which diminish the rated capacity of a
sling shall not be applied.
(5) Sling testing. All new and repaired metal mesh slings, including
handles, shall not be used unless proof tested by the manufacturer or
equivalent entity at a minimum of 1\1/2\ times their rated capacity.
Elastomer impregnated slings shall be proof tested before coating.
(6) Proper use of metal mesh slings. Metal mesh slings shall not be
used to lift loads in excess of their rated capacities as prescribed in
Table N-184-15. Slings not included in this table shall be used only in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
(7) Safe operating temperatures. Metal mesh slings which are not
impregnated with elastomers may be used in a temperature range from
minus 20 deg.F to plus 550 deg.F without decreasing the working load
limit. Metal mesh slings impregnated with polyvinyl chloride or neoprene
may be used only in a temperature range from zero degrees to plus 200
deg.F. For operations outside these temperature ranges or for metal mesh
slings impregnated with other materials, the sling manufacturer's
recommendations shall be followed.
(8) Repairs. (i) Metal mesh slings which are repaired shall not be
used unless repaired by a metal mesh sling manufacturer or an equivalent
entity.
(ii) Once repaired, each sling shall be permanently marked or
tagged, or a written record maintained, to indicate the date and nature
of the repairs and the person or organization that performed the
repairs. Records of repairs shall be made available for examination.
(9) Removal from service. Metal mesh slings shall be immediately
removed from service if any of the following conditions are present:
(i) A broken weld or broken brazed joint along the sling edge.
(ii) Reduction in wire diameter of 25 per cent due to abrasion or 15
per cent due to corrosion.
(iii) Lack of flexibility due to distortion of the fabric.
Table N-184-15--Rated Capacities
Carbon Steel and Stainless Steel Metal Mesh Slings
[Horizontal angles shown in parentheses]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Effect of angle on rated capacities
Sling in basket hitch
width in Vertical Vertical --------------------------------------
inches or choker basket 30 deg. (60 45 deg. (45 60 deg. (30
deg.) deg.) deg.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Heavy Duty-10 Ga 35 Spirals/Ft of sling width
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 1,500 3,000 2,600 2,100 1,500
3 2,700 5,400 4,700 3,800 2,700
4 4,000 8,000 6,900 5,600 4,000
6 6,000 12,000 10,400 8,400 6,000
8 8,000 16,000 13,800 11,300 8,000
10 10,000 20,000 17,000 14,100 10,000
12 12,000 24,000 20,700 16,900 12,000
14 14,000 28,000 24,200 19,700 14,000
16 16,000 32,000 27,700 22,600 16,000
18 18,000 36,000 31,100 25,400 18,000
20 20,000 40,000 34,600 28,200 20,000
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Medium Duty-12 Ga 43 Spirals/Ft of sling width
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 1,350 2,700 2,300 1,900 1,400
3 2,000 4,000 3,500 2,800 2,000
4 2,700 5,400 4,700 3,800 2,700
6 4,500 9,000 7,800 6,400 4,500
8 6,000 12,000 10,400 8,500 6,000
10 7,500 15,000 13,000 10,600 7,500
12 9,000 18,000 15,600 12,700 9,000
14 10,500 21,000 18,200 14,800 10,500
16 12,000 24,000 20,800 17,000 12,000
18 13,500 27,000 23,400 19,100 13,500
20 15,000 30,000 26,000 21,200 15,000
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Light Duty-14 Ga 59 Spirals/Ft of sling width
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 900 1,800 1,600 1,300 900
3 1,400 2,800 2,400 2,000 1,400
4 2,000 4,000 3,500 2,800 2,000
6 3,000 6,000 5,200 4,200 3,000
[[Page 594]]
8 4,000 8,000 6,900 5,700 4,000
10 5,000 10,000 8,600 7,100 5,000
12 6,000 12,000 10,400 8,500 6,000
14 7,000 14,000 12,100 9,900 7,000
16 8,000 16,000 13,900 11,300 8,000
18 9,000 18,000 15,600 12,700 9,000
20 10,000 20,000 17,300 14,100 10,000
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(iv) Distortion of the female handle so that the depth of the slot
is increased more than 10 per cent.
(v) Distortion of either handle so that the width of the eye is
decreased more than 10 per cent.
(vi) A 15 percent reduction of the original cross sectional area of
metal at any point around the handle eye.
(vii) Distortion of either handle out of its plane.
(h) Natural and synthetic fiber rope slings--(1) Sling use. (i)
Fiber rope slings made from conventional three strand construction fiber
rope shall not be used with loads in excess of the rated capacities
prescribed in Tables N-184-16 through N-184-19.
(ii) Fiber rope slings shall have a diameter of curvature meeting at
least the minimums specified in Figs. N-184-4 and N-184-5.
(iii) Slings not included in these tables shall be used only in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
[[Page 595]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.048
[[Page 596]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.049
[[Page 597]]
Table N-184-16--Manila Rope Slings
[Angle of rope to vertical shown in parentheses]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eye and eye sling Endless sling
Rope Nominal -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
dia. wt. per Basket hitch; Angle of rope to horizontal Basket hitch; Angle of rope to horizontal
nominal 100 ft Vertical Choker ----------------------------------------------- Vertical Choker --------------------------------------------
in in hitch hitch 90 deg. 60 deg. 45 deg. 30 deg. hitch hitch 90 deg. 60 deg. 45 deg. 30 deg.
inches pounds (0 deg.) (30 deg.) (45 deg.) (60 deg.) (0 deg.) (30 deg.) (45 deg.) (60 deg.)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/2\ 7.5 480 240 960 830 680 480 865 430 1,730 1,500 1,220 865
\9/16\ 10.4 620 310 1,240 1,070 875 620 1,120 560 2,230 1,930 1,580 1,120
\5/8\ 13.3 790 395 1,580 1,370 1,120 790 1,420 710 2,840 2,460 2,010 1,420
\3/4\ 16.7 970 485 1,940 1,680 1,370 970 1,750 875 3,490 3,020 2,470 1,750
\13/16\ 19.5 1,170 585 2,340 2,030 1,650 1,170 2,110 1,050 4,210 3,650 2,980 2,110
\7/8\ 22.5 1,390 695 2,780 2,410 1,970 1,390 2,500 1,250 5,000 4,330 3,540 2,500
1 27.0 1,620 810 3,240 2,810 2,290 1,620 2,920 1,460 5,830 5,050 4,120 2,920
1\1/16\ 31.3 1,890 945 3,780 3,270 2,670 1,890 3,400 1,700 6,800 5,890 4,810 3,400
1\1/8\ 36.0 2,160 1,080 4,320 3,740 3,050 2,160 3,890 1,940 7,780 6,730 5,500 3,890
1\1/4\ 41.7 2,430 1,220 4,860 4,210 3,440 2,430 4,370 2,190 8,750 7,580 6,190 4,370
1\5/16\ 47.9 2,700 1,350 5,400 4,680 3,820 2,700 4,860 2,430 9,720 8,420 6,870 4,860
1\1/2\ 59.9 3,330 1,670 6,660 5,770 4,710 3,330 5,990 3,000 12,000 10,400 8,480 5,990
1\5/8\ 74.6 4,050 2,030 8,100 7,010 5,730 4,050 7,290 3,650 14,600 12,600 10,300 7,290
1\3/4\ 89.3 4,770 2,390 9,540 8,260 6,740 4,770 8,590 4,290 17,200 14,900 12,100 8,590
2 107.5 5,580 2,790 11,200 9,660 7,890 5,580 10,000 5,020 20,100 17,400 14,200 10,000
2\1/8\ 125.0 6,480 3,240 13,000 11,200 9,160 6,480 11,700 5,830 23,300 2,0,200 16,500 11,700
2\1/4\ 146.0 7,380 3,690 14,800 12,800 10,400 7,380 13,300 6,640 26,600 23,000 18,800 13,300
2\1/2\ 166.7 8,370 4,190 16,700 14,500 11,800 8,370 15,100 7,530 30,100 26,100 21,300 15,100
2\5/8\ 190.8 9,360 4,680 18,700 16,200 13,200 9,360 16,800 8,420 33,700 29,200 23,800 16,800
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
See Figs. N-184-4 and N-184-5 for sling configuration descriptions.
Table N-184-17--Nylon Rope Slings
[Angle of rope to vertical shown in parentheses]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eye and eye sling Endless sling
Rope Nominal -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
dia. wt. per Basket hitch; Angle of rope to horizontal Basket hitch; Angle of rope to horizontal
nominal 100 ft Vertical Choker ----------------------------------------------- Vertical Choker --------------------------------------------
in in hitch hitch 90 deg. 60 deg. 45 deg. 30 deg. hitch hitch 90 deg. 60 deg. 45 deg. 30 deg.
inches pounds (0 deg.) (30 deg.) (45 deg.) (60 deg.) (0 deg.) (30 deg.) (45 deg.) (60 deg.)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/2\ 6.5 635 320 1,270 1,100 900 635 1,140 570 2,290 1,980 1,620 1,140
\9/16\ 8.3 790 395 1,580 1,370 1,120 790 1,420 710 2,840 2,460 2,010 1,420
\5/8\ 10.5 1,030 515 2,060 1,780 1,460 1,030 1,850 925 3,710 3,210 2,620 1,850
\3/4\ 14.5 1,410 705 2,820 2,440 1,990 1,410 2,540 1,270 5,080 4,400 3,590 2,540
\13/16\ 17.0 1,680 840 3,360 2,910 2,380 1,680 3,020 1,510 6,050 5,240 4,280 3,020
\7/8\ 20.0 1,980 990 3,960 3,430 2,800 1,980 3,560 1,780 7,130 6,170 5,040 3,560
1 26.0 2,480 1,240 4,960 4,300 3,510 2,480 4,460 2,230 8,930 7,730 6,310 4,460
1\1/16\ 29.0 2,850 1,430 5,700 4,940 4,030 2,850 5,130 2,570 10,300 8,890 7,260 5,130
1\1/8\ 34.0 3,270 1,640 6,540 5,660 4,620 3,270 5,890 2,940 11,800 10,200 8,330 5,890
1\1/4\ 40.0 3,710 1,860 7,420 6,430 5,250 3,710 6,680 3,340 13,400 11,600 9,450 6,680
1\5/16\ 45.0 4,260 2,130 8,520 7,380 6,020 4,260 7,670 3,830 15,300 13,300 10,800 7,670
[[Page 598]]
1\1/2\ 55.0 5,250 2,630 10,500 9,090 7,420 5,250 9,450 4,730 18,900 16,400 13,400 9,450
1\5/8\ 68.0 6,440 3,220 12,900 11,200 9,110 6,440 11,600 5,800 23,200 20,100 16,400 11,600
1\3/4\ 83.0 7,720 3,860 15,400 13,400 10,900 7,720 13,900 6,950 27,800 24,100 19,700 13,900
2 95.0 9,110 4,560 18,200 15,800 12,900 9,110 16,400 8,200 32,800 28,400 23,200 16,400
2\1/8\ 109.0 10,500 5,250 21,000 18,200 14,800 10,500 18,900 9,450 37,800 32,700 26,700 18,900
2\1/4\ 129.0 12,400 6,200 24,800 21,500 17,500 12,400 22,300 11,200 44,600 38,700 31,600 22,300
2\1/2\ 149.0 13,900 6,950 27,800 24,100 19,700 13,900 25,000 12,500 50,000 43,300 35,400 25,000
2\5/8\ 168.0 16,000 8,000 32,000 27,700 22,600 16,000 28,800 14,400 57,600 49,900 40,700 28,800
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
See Figs. N-184-4 and N-184-5 for sling configuration descriptions.
Table N-184-18--Polyester Rope Slings
[Angle of rope to vertical shown in parentheses]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eye and eye sling Endless sling
Rope Nominal -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
dia. wt. per Basket hitch; Angle of rope to horizontal Basket hitch; Angle of rope to horizontal
nominal 100 ft Vertical Choker ----------------------------------------------- Vertical Choker --------------------------------------------
in in hitch hitch 90 deg. 60 deg. 45 deg. 30 deg. hitch hitch 90 deg. 60 deg. 45 deg. 30 deg.
inches pounds (0 deg.) (30 deg.) (45 deg.) (60 deg.) (0 deg.) (30 deg.) (45 deg.) (60 deg.)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/2\ 8.0 635 320 1,270 1,100 900 635 1,140 570 2,290 1,980 1,620 1,140
\9/16\ 10.2 790 395 1,580 1,370 1,120 790 1,420 710 2,840 2,460 2,010 1,420
\5/8\ 13.0 990 495 1,980 1,710 1,400 990 1,780 890 3,570 3,090 2,520 1,780
\3/4\ 17.5 1,240 620 2,480 2,150 1,750 1,240 2,230 1,120 4,470 3,870 3,160 2,230
\13/16\ 21.0 1,540 770 3,080 2,670 2,180 1,540 2,770 1,390 5,540 4,800 3,920 2,770
\7/8\ 25.0 1,780 890 3,560 3,080 2,520 1,780 3,200 1,600 6,410 5,550 4,530 3,200
1 30.5 2,180 1,090 4,360 3,780 3,080 2,180 3,920 2,960 7,850 6,800 5,550 3,920
1\1/16\ 34.5 2,530 1,270 5,060 4,380 3,580 2,530 4,550 2,280 9,110 7,990 6,440 4,550
1\1/8\ 40.0 2,920 1,460 5,840 5,060 4,130 2,920 5,260 2,630 10,500 9,100 7,440 5,260
1\1/4\ 46.3 3,290 1,650 6,580 5,700 4,650 3,290 5,920 2,960 11,800 10,300 8,380 5,920
1\5/16\ 52.5 3,710 1,860 7,420 6,430 5,250 3,710 6,680 3,340 13,400 11,600 9,450 6,680
1\1/2\ 66.8 4,630 2,320 9,260 8,020 6,550 4,630 8,330 4,170 16,700 14,400 11,800 8,330
1\5/8\ 82.0 5,640 2,820 11,300 9,770 7,980 5,640 10,200 5,080 20,300 17,600 14,400 10,200
1\3/4\ 98.0 6,710 3,360 13,400 11,600 9,490 6,710 12,100 6,040 24,200 20,900 17,100 12,100
2 118.0 7,920 3,960 15,800 13,700 11,200 7,920 14,300 7,130 28,500 24,700 20,200 14,300
2\1/8\ 135.0 9,110 4,460 18,200 15,800 12,900 9,110 16,400 8,200 32,800 28,400 23,200 16,400
2\1/4\ 157.0 10,600 5,300 21,200 18,400 15,000 10,600 19,100 9,540 38,200 33,100 27,000 19,100
2\1/2\ 181.0 12,100 6,050 24,200 21,000 17,100 12,100 21,800 10,900 43,600 37,700 30,800 21,800
2\5/8\ 205.0 13,600 6,800 27,200 23,600 19,200 13,600 24,500 12,200 49,000 42,400 34,600 24,500
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
See Figs. N-184-4 and N-184-5 for sling configuration descriptions.
[[Page 599]]
Table N-184-19--Polypropylene Rope Slings
[Angle of rope to vertical shown in parentheses]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eye and eye sling Endless sling
Rope Nominal -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
dia. wt. per Basket hitch; Angle of rope to horizontal Basket hitch; Angle of rope to horizontal
nominal 100 ft Vertical Choker ----------------------------------------------- Vertical Choker --------------------------------------------
in in hitch hitch 90 deg. 60 deg. 45 deg. 30 deg. hitch hitch 90 deg. 60 deg. 45 deg. 30 deg.
inches pounds (0 deg.) (30 deg.) (45 deg.) (60 deg.) (0 deg.) (30 deg.) (45 deg.) (60 deg.)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/2\ 4.7 645 325 1,290 1,120 910 645 1,160 580 2,320 2,010 1,640 1,160
\9/16\ 6.1 780 390 1,560 1,350 1,100 780 1,400 700 2,810 2,430 1,990 1,400
\5/8\ 7.5 950 475 1,900 1,650 1,340 950 1,710 855 3,420 2,960 2,420 1,710
\3/4\ 10.7 1,300 650 2,600 2,250 1,840 1,300 2,340 1,170 4,680 4,050 3,310 2,340
\13/16\ 12.7 1,520 760 3,040 2,630 2,150 1,520 2,740 1,370 5,470 4,740 3,870 2,740
\7/8\ 15.0 1,760 880 3,520 3,050 2,490 1,760 3,170 1,580 6,340 5,490 4,480 3,170
1 18.0 2,140 1,070 4,280 3,700 3,030 2,140 3,850 1,930 7,700 6,670 5,450 3,860
1\1/16\ 20.4 2,450 1,230 4,900 4,240 3,460 2,450 4,410 2,210 8,820 7,640 6,240 4,410
1\1/8\ 23.7 2,800 1,400 5,600 4,850 3,960 2,800 5,040 2,520 10,100 8,730 7,130 5,400
1\1/4\ 27.0 3,210 1,610 6,420 5,560 4,540 3,210 5,780 2,890 11,600 10,000 8,170 5,780
1\5/16\ 30.5 3,600 1,800 7,200 6,240 5,090 3,600 6,480 3,240 13,000 11,200 9,170 6,480
1\1/2\ 38.5 4,540 2,270 9,080 7,860 6,420 4,540 8,170 4,090 16,300 14,200 11,600 8,170
1\5/8\ 47.5 5,510 2,760 11,000 9,540 7,790 5,510 9,920 4,960 19,800 17,200 14,000 9,920
1\3/4\ 57.0 6,580 3,290 13,200 11,400 9,300 6,580 11,800 5,920 23,700 20,500 16,800 11,800
2 69.0 7,960 3,980 15,900 13,800 11,300 7,960 14,300 7,160 28,700 24,800 20,300 14,300
2\1/8\ 80.0 9,330 4,670 18,700 16,200 13,200 9,330 16,800 8,400 33,600 29,100 23,800 16,800
2\1/4\ 92.0 10,600 5,300 21,200 18,400 15,000 10,600 19,100 9,540 38,200 33,100 27,000 19,100
2\1/2\ 107.0 12,200 6,100 24,400 21,100 17,300 12,200 22,000 11,000 43,900 38,000 31,100 22,000
2\5/8\ 120.0 13,800 6,900 27,600 23,900 19,600 13,800 24,800 12,400 49,700 43,000 35,100 24,800
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
See Figs. N-184-4 and N-184-5 for sling configuration descriptions.
[[Page 600]]
(2) Safe operating temperatures. Natural and synthetic fiber rope
slings, except for wet frozen slings, may be used in a temperature range
from minus 20 deg.F to plus 180 deg.F without decreasing the working
load limit. For operations outside this temperature range and for wet
frozen slings, the sling manufacturer's recommendations shall be
followed.
(3) Splicing. Spliced fiber rope slings shall not be used unless
they have been spliced in accordance with the following minimum
requirements and in accordance with any additional recommendations of
the manufacturer:
(i) In manila rope, eye splices shall consist of at least three full
tucks, and short splices shall consist of at least six full tucks, three
on each side of the splice center line.
(ii) In synthetic fiber rope, eye splices shall consist of at least
four full tucks, and short splices shall consist of at least eight full
tucks, four on each side of the center line.
(iii) Strand end tails shall not be trimmed flush with the surface
of the rope immediately adjacent to the full tucks. This applies to all
types of fiber rope and both eye and short splices. For fiber rope under
one inch in diameter, the tail shall project at least six rope diameters
beyond the last full tuck. For fiber rope one inch in diameter and
larger, the tail shall project at least six inches beyond the last full
tuck. Where a projecting tail interferes with the use of the sling, the
tail shall be tapered and spliced into the body of the rope using at
least two additional tucks (which will require a tail length of
approximately six rope diameters beyond the last full tuck).
(iv) Fiber rope slings shall have a minimum clear length of rope
between eye splices equal to 10 times the rope diameter.
(v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of splices.
(vi) Clamps not designed specifically for fiber ropes shall not be
used for splicing.
(vii) For all eye splices, the eye shall be of such size to provide
an included angle of not greater than 60 degrees at the splice when the
eye is placed over the load or support.
(4) End attachments. Fiber rope slings shall not be used if end
attachments in contact with the rope have sharp edges or projections.
(5) Removal from service. Natural and synthetic fiber rope slings
shall be immediately removed from service if any of the following
conditions are present:
(i) Abnormal wear.
(ii) Powdered fiber between strands.
(iii) Broken or cut fibers.
(iv) Variations in the size or roundness of strands.
(v) Discoloration or rotting.
(vi) Distortion of hardware in the sling.
(6) Repairs. Only fiber rope slings made from new rope shall be
used. Use of repaired or reconditioned fiber rope slings is prohibited.
(i) Synthetic web slings--(1) Sling identification. Each sling shall
be marked or coded to show the rated capacities for each type of hitch
and type of synthetic web material.
(2) Webbing. Synthetic webbing shall be of uniform thickness and
width and selvage edges shall not be split from the webbing's width.
(3) Fittings. Fittings shall be:
(i) Of a minimum breaking strength equal to that of the sling; and
(ii) Free of all sharp edges that could in any way damage the
webbing.
(4) Attachment of end fittings to webbing and formation of eyes.
Stitching shall be the only method used to attach end fittings to
webbing and to form eyes. The thread shall be in an even pattern and
contain a sufficient number of stitches to develop the full breaking
strength of the sling.
(5) Sling use. Synthetic web slings illustrated in Fig. N-184-6
shall not be used with loads in excess of the rated capacities specified
in Tables N-184-20 through N-184-22. Slings not included in these tables
shall be used only in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
(6) Environmental conditions. When synthetic web slings are used,
the following precautions shall be taken:
(i) Nylon web slings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays,
mists or liquids of acids or phenolics are present.
(ii) Polyester and polypropylene web slings shall not be used where
fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of caustics are present.
[[Page 601]]
(iii) Web slings with aluminum fittings shall not be used where
fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of caustics are present.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.050
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.051
[[Page 602]]
Table N-184-20--Synthetic Web Slings--1,000 Pounds per Inch of Width--Single-Ply
[Rated capacity in pounds]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Triangle--Choker slings, type I: Triangle-- Endless slings, type V Return eye slings, type VI
Triangle slings, type II: Eye and eye with flat -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
eye slings, type III: Eye and eye with twisted eye
Sling body width, inches slings, type IV
---------------------------------------------------- Vert. Choker Vert. 30 deg. 45 deg. 60 deg. Vert. Choker Vert. 30 deg. 45 deg. 60 deg.
Vert. 30 deg. 45 deg. 60 deg. basket basket basket basket basket basket basket basket
Vert. Choker basket basket basket basket
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1................................... 1,000 750 2,000 1,700 1,400 1,000 1,600 1,300 3,200 2,800 2,300 1,600 800 650 1,600 1,400 1,150 800
2................................... 2,000 1,500 4,000 3,500 2,800 2,000 3,200 2,600 6,400 5,500 4,500 3,200 1,600 1,300 3,200 2,800 2,300 1,600
3................................... 3,000 2,200 6,000 5,200 4,200 3,000 4,800 3,800 9,600 8,300 6,800 4,800 2,400 1,950 4,800 4,150 3,400 2,400
4................................... 4,000 3,000 8,000 6,900 5,700 4,000 6,400 5,100 12,800 11,100 9,000 6,400 3,200 2,600 6,400 5,500 4,500 3,200
5................................... 5,000 3,700 10,000 8,700 7,100 5,000 8,000 6,400 16,000 13,900 11,300 8,000 4,000 3,250 8,000 6,900 5,650 4,000
6................................... 6,000 4,500 12,000 10,400 8,500 6,000 9,600 7,700 19,200 16,600 13,600 9,600 4,800 3,800 9,600 8,300 6,800 4,800
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes: 1. All angles shown are measured from the vertical.
2. Capacities for intermediate widths not shown may be obtained by interpolation.
Table N-184-21--Synthetic Web Slings--1,200 Pounds per Inch of Width--Single-ply
[Rated capacity in pounds]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Triangle--Choker slings, type I: Triangle--Triangle Endless slings, type V Return eye slings, type VI
slings, type II: Eye and eye with flat eye slings, -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
type III: Eye and eye with twisted eye slings, type
Sling body width, inches IV
----------------------------------------------------- Vert. Choker Vert. 30 deg. 45 deg. 60 deg. Vert. Choker Vert. 30 deg. 45 deg. 60 deg.
Vert. 30 deg. 45 deg. 60 deg. basket basket basket basket basket basket basket basket
Vert. Choker basket basket basket basket
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.............................. 1,200 900 2,400 2,100 1,700 1,200 1,900 1,500 3,800 3,300 2,700 1,900 950 750 1,900 1,650 1,350 950
2.............................. 2,400 1,800 4,800 4,200 3,400 2,400 3,800 3,000 7,600 6,600 5,400 3,800 1,900 1,500 3,800 3,300 2,700 1,900
3.............................. 3,600 2,700 7,200 6,200 5,100 3,600 5,800 4,600 11,600 10,000 8,200 5,800 2,850 2,250 5,700 4,950 4,050 2,850
4.............................. 4,800 3,600 9,600 8,300 6,800 4,800 7,700 6,200 15,400 13,300 10,900 7,700 3,800 3,000 7,600 6,600 5,400 3,800
5.............................. 6,000 4,500 12,000 10,400 8,500 6,000 9,600 7,700 19,200 16,600 13,600 9,600 4,750 3,750 9,500 8,250 6,750 4,750
6.............................. 7,200 5,400 14,400 12,500 10,200 7,200 11,500 9,200 23,000 19,900 16,300 11,500 5,800 4,600 11,600 10,000 8,200 5,800
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes: 1. All angles shown are measured from the vertical.
2. Capacities for intermediate widths not shown may be obtained by interpolation.
Table N-184-22--Synthetic Web Slings--1,600 Pounds per Inch of Width--Single-Ply
[Rated capacity in pounds]
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Triangle--Choker slings, type I: Triangle-- Endless slings, type V Return eye slings, type VI
Triangle slings, type II: Eye and eye with flat -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
eye slings, type III: Eye and eye with twisted eye
Sling body width, inches slings, type IV
---------------------------------------------------- Vert. Choker Vert. 30 deg. 45 deg. 60 deg. Vert. Choker Vert. 30 deg. 45 deg. 60 deg.
Vert. 30 deg. 45 deg. 60 deg. basket basket basket basket basket basket basket basket
Vert. Choker basket basket basket basket
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1............................... 1,600 1,200 3,200 2,800 2,300 1,600 2,600 2,100 5,200 4,500 3,700 2,600 1,050 1,050 2,600 2,250 1,850 1,300
[[Page 603]]
2............................... 3,200 2,400 6,400 5,500 4,500 3,200 5,100 4,100 10,200 8,800 7,200 5,100 2,600 2,100 5,200 4,500 3,700 2,600
3............................... 4,800 3,600 9,600 8,300 6,800 4,800 7,700 6,200 15,400 13,300 10,900 7,700 3,900 3,150 7,800 6,750 5,500 3,900
4............................... 6,400 4,800 12,800 11,100 9,000 6,400 10,100 8,200 20,400 17,700 14,400 10,200 5,100 4,100 10,200 8,800 7,200 5,100
5............................... 8,000 6,000 16,000 13,800 11,300 8,000 12,800 10,200 25,600 22,200 18,100 12,800 6,400 5,150 12,800 11,050 9,050 6,400
6............................... 9,600 7,200 19,200 16,600 13,600 9,600 15,400 12,300 30,800 26,700 21,800 15,400 7,700 6,200 15,400 13,300 10,900 7,700
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes: 1. All angles shown are measured from the vertical.
2. Capacities for intermediate widths not shown may be obtained by interpolation.
[[Page 604]]
(7) Safe operating temperatures. Synthetic web slings of polyester
and nylon shall not be used at temperatures in excess of 180 deg.F.
Polypropylene web slings shall not be used at temperatures in excess of
200 deg.F.
(8) Repairs. (i) Synthetic web slings which are repaired shall not
be used unless repaired by a sling manufacturer or an equivalent entity.
(ii) Each repaired sling shall be proof tested by the manufacturer
or equivalent entity to twice the rated capacity prior to its return to
service. The employer shall retain a certificate of the proof test and
make it available for examination.
(iii) Slings, including webbing and fittings, which have been
repaired in a temporary manner shall not be used.
(9) Removal from service. Synthetic web slings shall be immediately
removed from service if any of the following conditions are present:
(i) Acid or caustic burns;
(ii) Melting or charring of any part of the sling surface;
(iii) Snags, punctures, tears or cuts;
(iv) Broken or worn stitches; or
(v) Distortion of fittings.
[40 FR 27369, June 27, 1975, as amended at 40 FR 31598, July 28, 1975;
41 FR 13353, Mar. 30, 1976; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9240, Mar.
7, 1996]
Subpart O--Machinery and Machine Guarding
Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order
No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), or 1-90
(55 FR 9033), as applicable; 29 CFR part 1911.
Sec. 1910.211 Definitions.
(a) As used in Secs. 1910.213 and 1910.214 unless the context
clearly requires otherwise, the following woodworking machinery terms
shall have the meaning prescribed in this paragraph.
(1) Point of operations means that point at which cutting, shaping,
boring, or forming is accomplished upon the stock.
(2) Push stick means a narrow strip of wood or other soft material
with a notch cut into one end and which is used to push short pieces of
material through saws.
(3) Block means a short block of wood, provided with a handle
similar to that of a plane and a shoulder at the rear end, which is used
for pushing short stock over revolving cutters.
(b) As used in Sec. 1910.215 unless the context clearly requires
otherwise, the following abrasive wheel machinery terms shall have the
meanings prescribed in this paragraph.
(1) Type 1 straight wheels means wheels having diameter, thickness,
and hole size dimensions, and they should be used only on the periphery.
Type 1 wheels shall be mounted between flanges.
Limitation: Hole dimension (H) should not be greater than two-thirds
of wheel diameter dimension (D) for precision, cylindrical, centerless,
or surface grinding applications. Maximum hole size for all other
applications should not exceed one-half wheel diameter.
Figure No. 0-1.--Type 1 Straight Wheels
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.052
Type 1--Straight Wheel
Peripheral grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and hole.
(2) Type 2 cylinder wheels means wheels having diameter, wheel
thickness, and rim thickness dimensions. Grinding is performed on the
rim face only, dimension W. Cylinder wheels may be plain, plate mounted,
inserted nut, or of the projecting stud type.
Limitation: Rim height, T dimension, is generally equal to or
greater than rim thickness, W dimension.
[[Page 605]]
Figure No. 0-2.--Type 2 Cylinder Wheels
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.053
Type 2--Cylinder Wheel
Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and wall--wheel is
mounted on the diameter.
(3) Type 6 straight cup wheels means wheels having diameter,
thickness, hole size, rim thickness, and back thickness dimensions.
Grinding is always performed on rim face, W dimension.
Limitation: Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less
than one-fourth T dimension. In addition, when unthreaded hole wheels
are specified, the inside flat, K dimension, must be large enough to
accommodate a suitable flange.
Figure No. 0-3.--Type 6 Straight Cup Wheels
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.054
Type 6--Straight-cup Wheel
Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and hole with one side
straight or flat and the opposite side recessed. This type, however,
differs from Type 5 in that the grinding is performed on the wall of the
abrasive created by the difference between the diameter of the recess
and the outside diameter of the wheel. Therefore, the wall dimension
``W'' takes precedence over the diameter of the recess as an essential
intermediate dimension to describe this shape type.
(4) Type 11 flaring cup wheels mean wheels having double diameter
dimensions D and J, and in addition have thickness, hole size, rim and
back thickness dimensions. Grinding is always performed on rim face, W
dimension. Type 11 wheels are subject to all limitations of use and
mounting listed for type 6 straight sided cup wheels definition.
Limitation: Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less
than one-fourth T dimension. In addition when unthreaded hole wheels are
specified the inside flat, K dimension, shall be large enough to
accommodate a suitable flange.
Figure No. 0-4.--Type 11 Flaring Cup Wheels
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.055
Type 11--Flaring-cup Wheel
Side grinding wheel having a wall flared or tapered outward from the
back. Wall thickness at the back is normally greater than at the
grinding face (W).
(5) Modified types 6 and 11 wheels (terrazzo) mean some type 6 and
11 cup wheels used in the terrazzo trade having tapered K dimensions to
match a special tapered flange furnished by the machine builder.
Limitation: These wheels shall be mounted only with a special
tapered flange.
Figure No. 0-5
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.056
Typical examples of modified types 6 and 11 wheels (terrazzo) showing
tapered K dimensions.
(6) Types 27 and 28 depressed center wheels mean wheels having
diameter, thickness, and hole size dimensions. Both types are
reinforced, organic
[[Page 606]]
bonded wheels having offset hubs which permit side and peripheral
grinding operations without interference with the mounting. Type 27
wheels are manufactured with flat grinding rims permitting notching and
cutting operations. Type 28 wheels have saucer shaped grinding rims.
(i) Limitations: Special supporting, back adapter and inside flange
nuts are required for the proper mounting of these types of wheels
subject to limitations of Sec. 1910.215(c)(4) (i) and (ii).
(ii) Mounts which are affixed to the wheel by the manufacturer may
not require an inside nut and shall not be reused.
(7) Type 27A depressed center, cutting-off wheels mean wheels having
diameter, thickness, and hole size dimensions. They are reinforced,
organic bonded, offset hub type wheels, usually 16 inches diameter and
larger, specially designed for use on cutting-off machines where
mounting nut or outer flange interference cannot be tolerated.
Limitations: See Sec. 1910.215(c)(1).
(8) Surface feet per minute (s.f.p.m.) means the distance in feet
any one abrasive grain on the peripheral surface of a grinding wheel
travels in 1 minute.
Surface Feet Per Minute= 3.1416xdiameter in inchesxr.p.m./12 or
.262xdiameter in inchesxr.p.m.
Examples: (a) 24-inch diameter wheel, 1,000 revolutions per minute.
Surface Feet per minute .262x24x1,000=6,288 s.f.p.m.
(b) 12-inch diameter wheel, 1,000 revolutions per minute. Surface
Feet per minute .262x12x1,000=3,144 s.f.p.m.
(9) Flanges means collars, discs or plates between which wheels are
mounted and are referred to as adaptor, sleeve, or back up type. See
paragraph (c) of Sec. 1910.215 for full description.
(10) Snagging means grinding which removes relatively large amounts
of material without regard to close tolerances or surface finish
requirements.
(11) Off-hand grinding means the grinding of any material or part
which is held in the operator's hand.
(12) Safety guard means an enclosure designed to restrain the pieces
of the grinding wheel and furnish all possible protection in the event
that the wheel is broken in operation. See paragraph (b) of
Sec. 1910.215.
(13) Cutting off wheels means wheels having diameter thickness and
hole size dimensions and are subject to all limitations of mounting and
use listed for type 1 wheels, the definition in subparagraph (1) of this
paragraph and paragraph (d) of Sec. 1910.215. They may be steel
centered, diamond abrasive or organic bonded abrasive of the plain or
reinforced type.
(i) Limitation: Cutting off wheels are recommended only for use on
specially designed and fully guarded machines and are subject to the
following maximum thickness and hole size limitations.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Max.
Wheel diameter thickness
(inch)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 inch and smaller.......................................... \3/18\
Larger than 6 inches to 12 inches........................... \1/4\
Larger than 12 inches to 23 inches.......................... \3/8\
Larger than 23 inches....................................... \1/2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) Maximum hole size for cutting-off wheels should not be larger
than \1/4\-wheel diameter.
(14) Abrasive wheel means a cutting tool consisting of abrasive
grains held together by organic or inorganic bonds. Diamond and
reinforced wheels are included.
(15) Organic wheels means wheels which are bonded by means of an
organic material such as resin, rubber, shellac, or other similar
bonding agent.
(16) Inorganic wheels means wheels which are bonded by means of
inorganic material such as clay, glass, porcelain, sodium silicate,
magnesium oxychloride, or metal. Wheels bonded with clay, glass,
porcelain or related ceramic materials are characterized as vitrified
bonded wheels.
(c) As used in Sec. 1910.216, unless the context clearly requires
otherwise, the following mills and calenders in the rubber and plastic
industries terms shall have the meanings prescribed in this paragraph.
(1) Bite means the nip point between any two inrunning rolls.
(2) Calender means a machine equipped with two or more metal rolls
revolving in opposite directions and used for continuously sheeting or
plying up rubber and plastics compounds
[[Page 607]]
and for frictioning or coating materials with rubber and plastics
compounds.
(3) Mill means a machine consisting of two adjacent metal rolls, set
horizontally, which revolve in opposite directions (i.e., toward each
other as viewed from above) used for the mechanical working of rubber
and plastics compounds.
(d) As used in Sec. 1910.217, unless the context clearly requires
otherwise, the following power press terms shall have the meaning
prescribed in this paragraph.
(1) Antirepeat means the part of the clutch/brake control system
designed to limit the press to a single stroke if the tripping means is
held operated. Antirepeat requires release of all tripping mechanisms
before another stroke can be initiated. Antirepeat is also called single
stroke reset or reset circuit.
(2) Brake means the mechanism used on a mechanical power press to
stop and/or hold the crankshaft, either directly or through a gear
train, when the clutch is disengaged.
(3) Bolster plate means the plate attached to the top of the bed of
the press having drilled holes or T-slots for attaching the lower die or
die shoe.
(4) Clutch means the coupling mechanism used on a mechanical power
press to couple the flywheel to the crankshaft, either directly or
through a gear train.
(5) Full revolution clutch means a type of clutch that, when
tripped, cannot be disengaged until the crankshaft has completed a full
revolution and the press slide a full stroke.
(6) Part revolution clutch means a type of clutch that can be
disengaged at any point before the crankshaft has completed a full
revolution and the press slide a full stroke.
(7) Direct drive means the type of driving arrangement wherein no
clutch is used; coupling and decoupling of the driving torque is
accomplished by energization and deenergization of a motor. Even though
not employing a clutch, direct drives match the operational
characteristics of ``part revolution clutches'' because the driving
power may be disengaged during the stroke of the press.
(8) Concurrent means acting in conjunction, and is used to describe
a situation wherein two or more controls exist in an operated condition
at the same time.
(9) Continuous means uninterrupted multiple strokes of the slide
without intervening stops (or other clutch control action) at the end of
individual strokes.
(10) Counterbalance means the mechanism that is used to balance or
support the weight of the connecting rods, slide, and slide attachments.
(11) Device means a press control or attachment that:
(i) Restrains the operator from inadvertently reaching into the
point of operation, or
(ii) Prevents normal press operation if the operator's hands are
inadvertently within the point of operation, or
(iii) Automatically withdraws the operator's hands if the operator's
hands are inadvertently within the point of operation as the dies close,
or
(iv) Prevents the initiation of a stroke, or stops of stroke in
progress, when there is an intrusion through the sensing field by any
part of the operator's body or by any other object.
(12) Presence sensing device means a device designed, constructed
and arranged to create a sensing field or area that signals the clutch/
brake control to deactivate the clutch and activate the brake of the
press when any part of the operator's body or a hand tool is within such
field or area.
(13) Gate or movable barrier device means a movable barrier arranged
to enclose the point of operation before the press stroke can be
started.
(14) Holdout or restraint device means a mechanism, including
attachments for operator's hands, that when anchored and adjusted
prevent the operator's hands from entering the point of operation.
(15) Pull-out device means a mechanism attached to the operator's
hands and connected to the upper die or slide of the press, that is
designed, when properly adjusted, to withdraw the operator's hands as
the dies close, if the operator's hands are inadvertently within the
point of operation.
(16) Sweep device means a single or double arm (rod) attached to the
upper
[[Page 608]]
die or slide of the press and designed to move the operator's hands to a
safe position as the dies close, if the operator's hands are
inadvertently within the point of operation.
(17) Two hand control device means a two hand trip that further
requires concurrent pressure from both hands of the operator during a
substantial part of the die-closing portion of the stroke of the press.
(18) Die means the tooling used in a press for cutting or forming
material. An upper and a lower die make a complete set.
(19) Die builder means any person who builds dies for power presses.
(20) Die set means a tool holder held in alignment by guide posts
and bushings and consisting of a lower shoe, an upper shoe or punch
holder, and guide posts and bushings.
(21) Die setter means an individual who places or removes dies in or
from mechanical power presses, and who, as a part of his duties, makes
the necessary adjustments to cause the tooling to function properly and
safely.
(22) Die setting means the process of placing or removing dies in or
from a mechanical power press, and the process of adjusting the dies,
other tooling and safeguarding means to cause them to function properly
and safely.
(23) Die shoe means a plate or block upon which a die holder is
mounted. A die shoe functions primarily as a base for the complete die
assembly, and, when used, is bolted or clamped to the bolster plate or
the face of slide.
(24) Ejector means a mechanism for removing work or material from
between the dies.
(25) Face of slide means the bottom surface of the slide to which
the punch or upper die is generally attached.
(26) Feeding means the process of placing or removing material
within or from the point of operation.
(27) Automatic feeding means feeding wherein the material or part
being processed is placed within or removed from the point of operation
by a method or means not requiring action by an operator on each stroke
of the press.
(28) Semiautomatic feeding means feeding wherein the material or
part being processed is placed within or removed from the point of
operation by an auxiliary means controlled by operator on each stroke of
the press.
(29) Manual feeding means feeding wherein the material or part being
processed is handled by the operator on each stroke of the press.
(30) Foot control means the foot operated control mechanism designed
to be used with a clutch or clutch/brake control system.
(31) Foot pedal means the foot operated lever designed to operate
the mechanical linkage that trips a full revolution clutch.
(32) Guard means a barrier that prevents entry of the operator's
hands or fingers into the point of operation.
(33) Die enclosure guard means an enclosure attached to the die shoe
or stripper, or both, in a fixed position.
(34) Fixed barrier guard means a die space barrier attached to the
press frame.
(35) Interlocked press barrier guard means a barrier attached to the
press frame and interlocked so that the press stroke cannot be started
normally unless the guard itself, or its hinged or movable sections,
enclose the point of operation.
(36) Adjustable barrier guard means a barrier requiring adjustment
for each job or die setup.
(37) Guide post means the pin attached to the upper or lower die
shoe operating within the bushing on the opposing die shoe, to maintain
the alignment of the upper and lower dies.
(38) Hand feeding tool means any hand held tool designed for placing
or removing material or parts to be processed within or from the point
of operation.
(39) Inch means an intermittent motion imparted to the slide (on
machines using part revolution clutches) by momentary operation of the
Inch operating means. Operation of the Inch operating means engages the
driving clutch so that a small portion of one stroke or indefinite
stroking can occur, depending upon the length of time the Inch operating
means is held operated. Inch is a function used by the die setter for
setup of dies and tooling, but is not intended for use during production
operations by the operator.
[[Page 609]]
(40) Jog means an intermittent motion imparted to the slide by
momentary operation of the drive motor, after the clutch is engaged with
the flywheel at rest.
(41) Knockout means a mechanism for releasing material from either
die.
(42) Liftout means the mechanism also known as knockout.
(43) Operator's station means the complete complement of controls
used by or available to an operator on a given operation for stroking
the press.
(44) Pinch point means any point other than the point of operation
at which it is possible for a part of the body to be caught between the
moving parts of a press or auxiliary equipment, or between moving and
stationary parts of a press or auxiliary equipment or between the
material and moving part or parts of the press or auxiliary equipment.
(45) Point of operation means the area of the press where material
is actually positioned and work is being performed during any process
such as shearing, punching, forming, or assembling.
(46) Press means a mechanically powered machine that shears,
punches, forms or assembles metal or other material by means of cutting,
shaping, or combination dies attached to slides. A press consists of a
stationary bed or anvil, and a slide (or slides) having a controlled
reciprocating motion toward and away from the bed surface, the slide
being guided in a definite path by the frame of the press.
(47) Repeat means an unintended or unexpected successive stroke of
the press resulting from a malfunction.
(48) Safety block means a prop that, when inserted between the upper
and lower dies or between the bolster plate and the face of the slide,
prevents the slide from falling of its own deadweight.
(49) Single stroke means one complete stroke of the slide, usually
initiated from a full open (or up) position, followed by closing (or
down), and then a return to the full open position.
(50) Single stroke mechanism means an arrangement used on a full
revolution clutch to limit the travel of the slide to one complete
stroke at each engagement of the clutch.
(51) Slide means the main reciprocating press member. A slide is
also called a ram, plunger, or platen.
(52) Stop control means an operator control designed to immediately
deactivate the clutch control and activate the brake to stop slide
motion.
(53) Stripper means a mechanism or die part for removing the parts
or material from the punch.
(54) Stroking selector means the part of the clutch/brake control
that determines the type of stroking when the operating means is
actuated. The stroking selector generally includes positions for ``Off''
(Clutch Control), ``Inch,'' ``Single Stroke,'' and ``Continuous'' (when
Continuous is furnished).
(55) Trip or (tripping) means activation of the clutch to ``run''
the press.
(56) Turnover bar means a bar used in die setting to manually turn
the crankshaft of the press.
(57) Two-hand trip means a clutch actuating means requiring the
concurrent use of both hands of the operator to trip the press.
(58) Unitized tooling means a type of die in which the upper and
lower members are incorporated into a selfcontained unit so arranged as
to hold the die members in alignment.
(59) Control system means sensors, manual input and mode selection
elements, interlocking and decision-making circuitry, and output
elements to the press operating mechanism.
(60) Brake monitor means a sensor designed, constructed, and
arranged to monitor the effectiveness of the press braking system.
(61) Presence sensing device initiation means an operating mode of
indirect manual initiation of a single stroke by a presence sensing
device when it senses that work motions of the operator, related to
feeding and/or removing parts, are completed and all parts of the
operator's body or hand tools are safely clear of the point of
operation.
(62) Safety system means the integrated total system, including the
pertinent elements of the press, the controls, the safeguarding and any
required supplemental safeguarding, and their interfaces with the
operator, and the environment, designed, constructed and arranged to
operate together as a
[[Page 610]]
unit, such that a single failure or single operating error will not
cause injury to personnel due to point of operation hazards.
(63) Authorized person means one to whom the authority and
responsibility to perform a specific assignment has been given by the
employer.
(64) Certification or certify means, in the case of design
certification/validation, that the manufacturer has reviewed and tested
the design and manufacture, and in the case of installation
certification/validation and annual recertification/revalidation, that
the employer has reviewed and tested the installation, and concludes in
both cases that the requirements of Sec. 1910.217 (a) through (h) and
appendix A have been met. The certifications are made to the validation
organization.
(65) Validation or validate means for PSDI safety systems that an
OSHA recognized third-party validation organization:
(i) For design certification/validation has reviewed the
manufacturer's certification that the PSDI safety system meets the
requirements of Sec. 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A and the
underlying tests and analyses performed by the manufacturer, has
performed additional tests and analyses which may be required by
Sec. 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A, and concludes that the
requirements of Sec. 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A have been
met; and
(ii) For installation certification/validation and annual
recertification/revalidation has reviewed the employer's certification
that the PSDI safety system meets the requirements of Sec. 1910.217 (a)
through (h) and appendix A and the underlying tests performed by the
employer, has performed additional tests and analyses which may be
required by Sec. 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A, and concludes
that the requirements of Sec. 1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A
have been met.
(66) Certification/validation and certify/validate means the
combined process of certification and validation.
(e) As used in Sec. 1910.218, unless the context clearly requires
otherwise, the following forging and hot metal terms shall have the
meaning prescribed in this paragraph.
(1) Forging means the product of work on metal formed to a desired
shape by impact or pressure in hammers, forging machines (upsetters),
presses, rolls, and related forming equipment. Forging hammers,
counterblow equipment and high-energy-rate forging machines impart
impact to the workpiece, while most other types of forging equipment
impart squeeze pressure in shaping the stock. Some metals can be forged
at room temperature, but the majority of metals are made more plastic
for forging by heating.
(2) Open framehammers (or blacksmith hammers) mean hammers used
primarily for the shaping of forgings by means of impact with flat dies.
Open frame hammers generally are so constructed that the anvil assembly
is separate from the operating mechanism and machine supports; it rests
on its own independent foundation. Certain exceptions are forging
hammers made with frame mounted on the anvil; e.g., the smaller, single-
frame hammers are usually made with the anvil and frame in one piece.
(3) Steam hammers mean a type of drop hammer where the ram is raised
for each stroke by a double-action steam cylinder and the energy
delivered to the workpiece is supplied by the velocity and weight of the
ram and attached upper die driven downward by steam pressure. Energy
delivered during each stroke may be varied.
(4) Gravity hammers mean a class of forging hammer wherein energy
for forging is obtained by the mass and velocity of a freely falling ram
and the attached upper die. Examples: board hammers and air-lift
hammers.
(5) Forging presses mean a class of forging equipment wherein the
shaping of metal between dies is performed by mechanical or hydraulic
pressure, and usually is accomplished with a single workstroke of the
press for each die station.
(6) Trimming presses mean a class of auxiliary forging equipment
which removes flash or excess metal from a forging. This trimming
operation can also be done cold, as can coining, a product sizing
operation.
(7) High-energy-rate forging machines mean a class of forging
equipment wherein high ram velocities resulting
[[Page 611]]
from the sudden release of a compressed gas against a free piston impart
impact to the workpiece.
(8) Forging rolls mean a class of auxiliary forging equipment
wherein stock is shaped between power driven rolls bearing contoured
dies. Usually used for preforming, roll forging is often employed to
reduce thickness and increase length of stock.
(9) Ring rolls mean a class for forging equipment used for shaping
weldless rings from pierced discs or thick-walled, ring-shaped blanks
between rolls which control wall thickness, ring diameter, height and
contour.
(10) Bolt-headers mean the same as an upsetter or forging machine
except that the diameter of stock fed into the machine is much smaller,
i.e., commonly three-fourths inch or less.
(11) Rivet making machines mean the same as upsetters and
boltheaders when producing rivets with stock diameter of 1-inch or more.
Rivet making with less than 1-inch diameter is usually a cold forging
operation, and therefore not included in this subpart.
(12) Upsetters (or forging machines, or headers) type of forging
equipment, related to the mechanical press, in which the main forming
energy is applied horizontally to the workpiece which is gripped and
held by prior action of the dies.
(f) As used in Sec. 1910.219, unless the context clearly requires
otherwise, the following mechanical power-transmission guarding terms
shall have the meaning prescribed in this paragraph.
(1) Belts include all power transmission belts, such as flat belts,
round belts, V-belts, etc., unless otherwise specified.
(2) Belt shifter means a device for mechanically shifting belts from
tight to loose pulleys or vice versa, or for shifting belts on cones of
speed pulleys.
(3) Belt pole (sometimes called a belt shipper or shipper pole,)
means a device used in shifting belts on and off fixed pulleys on line
or countershaft where there are no loose pulleys.
(4) Exposed to contact means that the location of an object is such
that a person is likely to come into contact with it and be injured.
(5) Flywheels include flywheels, balance wheels, and flywheel
pulleys mounted and revolving on crankshaft of engine or other shafting.
(6) Maintenance runway means any permanent runway or platform used
for oiling, maintenance, running adjustment, or repair work, but not for
passageway.
(7) Nip-point belt and pulley guard means a device which encloses
the pulley and is provided with rounded or rolled edge slots through
which the belt passes.
(8) Point of operation means that point at which cutting, shaping,
or forming is accomplished upon the stock and shall include such other
points as may offer a hazard to the operator in inserting or
manipulating the stock in the operation of the machine.
(9) Prime movers include steam, gas, oil, and air engines, motors,
steam and hydraulic turbines, and other equipment used as a source of
power.
(10) Sheaves mean grooved pulleys, and shall be so classified unless
used as flywheels.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 39 FR 41846, Dec. 3, 1974; 53
FR 8353, Mar. 14, 1988]
Sec. 1910.212 General requirements for all machines.
(a) Machine guarding--(1) Types of guarding. One or more methods of
machine guarding shall be provided to protect the operator and other
employees in the machine area from hazards such as those created by
point of operation, ingoing nip points, rotating parts, flying chips and
sparks. Examples of guarding methods are--barrier guards, two-hand
tripping devices, electronic safety devices, etc.
(2) General requirements for machine guards. Guards shall be affixed
to the machine where possible and secured elsewhere if for any reason
attachment to the machine is not possible. The guard shall be such that
it does not offer an accident hazard in itself.
(3) Point of operation guarding. (i) Point of operation is the area
on a machine where work is actually performed upon the material being
processed.
(ii) The point of operation of machines whose operation exposes an
employee to injury, shall be guarded. The guarding device shall be in
conformity
[[Page 612]]
with any appropriate standards therefor, or, in the absence of
applicable specific standards, shall be so designed and constructed as
to prevent the operator from having any part of his body in the danger
zone during the operating cycle.
(iii) Special handtools for placing and removing material shall be
such as to permit easy handling of material without the operator placing
a hand in the danger zone. Such tools shall not be in lieu of other
guarding required by this section, but can only be used to supplement
protection provided.
(iv) The following are some of the machines which usually require
point of operation guarding:
(a) Guillotine cutters.
(b) Shears.
(c) Alligator shears.
(d) Power presses.
(e) Milling machines.
(f) Power saws.
(g) Jointers.
(h) Portable power tools.
(i) Forming rolls and calenders.
(4) Barrels, containers, and drums. Revolving drums, barrels, and
containers shall be guarded by an enclosure which is interlocked with
the drive mechanism, so that the barrel, drum, or container cannot
revolve unless the guard enclosure is in place.
(5) Exposure of blades. When the periphery of the blades of a fan is
less than seven (7) feet above the floor or working level, the blades
shall be guarded. The guard shall have openings no larger than one-half
(\1/2\) inch.
(b) Anchoring fixed machinery. Machines designed for a fixed
location shall be securely anchored to prevent walking or moving.
Sec. 1910.213 Woodworking machinery requirements.
(a) Machine construction general. (1) Each machine shall be so
constructed as to be free from sensible vibration when the largest size
tool is mounted and run idle at full speed.
(2) Arbors and mandrels shall be constructed so as to have firm and
secure bearing and be free from play.
(3) [Reserved]
(4) Any automatic cutoff saw that strokes continuously without the
operator being able to control each stroke shall not be used.
(5) Saw frames or tables shall be constructed with lugs cast on the
frame or with an equivalent means to limit the size of the saw blade
that can be mounted, so as to avoid overspeed caused by mounting a saw
larger than intended.
(6) Circular saw fences shall be so constructed that they can be
firmly secured to the table or table assembly without changing their
alignment with the saw. For saws with tilting tables or tilting arbors
the fence shall be so constructed that it will remain in a line parallel
with the saw, regardless of the angle of the saw with the table.
(7) Circular saw gages shall be so constructed as to slide in
grooves or tracks that are accurately machined, to insure exact
alignment with the saw for all positions of the guide.
(8) Hinged saw tables shall be so constructed that the table can be
firmly secured in any position and in true alignment with the saw.
(9) All belts, pulleys, gears, shafts, and moving parts shall be
guarded in accordance with the specific requirements of Sec. 1910.219.
(10) It is recommended that each power-driven woodworking machine be
provided with a disconnect switch that can be locked in the off
position.
(11) The frames and all exposed, noncurrent-carrying metal parts of
portable electric woodworking machinery operated at more than 90 volts
to ground shall be grounded and other portable motors driving electric
tools which are held in the hand while being operated shall be grounded
if they operate at more than 90 volts to ground. The ground shall be
provided through use of a separate ground wire and polarized plug and
receptacle.
(12) For all circular saws where conditions are such that there is a
possibility of contact with the portion of the saw either beneath or
behind the table, that portion of the saw shall be covered with an
exhaust hood, or, if no exhaust system is required, with a guard that
shall be so arranged as to prevent accidental contact with the saw.
(13) Revolving double arbor saws shall be fully guarded in
accordance
[[Page 613]]
with all the requirements for circular crosscut saws or with all the
requirements for circular ripsaws, according to the kind of saws mounted
on the arbors.
(14) No saw, cutter head, or tool collar shall be placed or mounted
on a machine arbor unless the tool has been accurately machined to size
and shape to fit the arbor.
(15) Combs (featherboards) or suitable jigs shall be provided at the
workplace for use when a standard guard cannot be used, as in dadoing,
grooving, jointing, moulding, and rabbeting.
(b) Machine controls and equipment. (1) A mechanical or electrical
power control shall be provided on each machine to make it possible for
the operator to cut off the power from each machine without leaving his
position at the point of operation.
(2) On machines driven by belts and shafting, a locking-type belt
shifter or an equivalent positive device shall be used.
(3) On applications where injury to the operator might result if
motors were to restart after power failures, provision shall be made to
prevent machines from automatically restarting upon restoration of
power.
(4) Power controls and operating controls should be located within
easy reach of the operator while he is at his regular work location,
making it unnecessary for him to reach over the cutter to make
adjustments. This does not apply to constant pressure controls used only
for setup purposes.
(5) On each machine operated by electric motors, positive means
shall be provided for rendering such controls or devices inoperative
while repairs or adjustments are being made to the machines they
control.
(6) Each operating treadle shall be protected against unexpected or
accidental tripping.
(7) Feeder attachments shall have the feed rolls or other moving
parts so covered or guarded as to protect the operator from hazardous
points.
(c) Hand-fed ripsaws. (1) Each circular hand-fed ripsaw shall be
guarded by a hood which shall completely enclose that portion of the saw
above the table and that portion of the saw above the material being
cut. The hood and mounting shall be arranged so that the hood will
automatically adjust itself to the thickness of and remain in contact
with the material being cut but it shall not offer any considerable
resistance to insertion of material to saw or to passage of the material
being sawed. The hood shall be made of adequate strength to resist blows
and strains incidental to reasonable operation, adjusting, and handling,
and shall be so designed as to protect the operator from flying
splinters and broken saw teeth. It shall be made of material that is
soft enough so that it will be unlikely to cause tooth breakage. The
hood shall be so mounted as to insure that its operation will be
positive, reliable, and in true alignment with the saw; and the mounting
shall be adequate in strength to resist any reasonable side thrust or
other force tending to throw it out of line.
(2) Each hand-fed circular ripsaw shall be furnished with a spreader
to prevent material from squeezing the saw or being thrown back on the
operator. The spreader shall be made of hard tempered steel, or its
equivalent, and shall be thinner than the saw kerf. It shall be of
sufficient width to provide adequate stiffness or rigidity to resist any
reasonable side thrust or blow tending to bend or throw it out of
position. The spreader shall be attached so that it will remain in true
alignment with the saw even when either the saw or table is tilted. The
provision of a spreader in connection with grooving, dadoing, or
rabbeting is not required. On the completion of such operations, the
spreader shall be immediately replaced.
(3) Each hand-fed circular ripsaw shall be provided with nonkickback
fingers or dogs so located as to oppose the thrust or tendency of the
saw to pick up the material or to throw it back toward the operator.
They shall be designed to provide adequate holding power for all the
thicknesses of materials being cut.
(d) Hand-fed crosscut table saws. (1) Each circular crosscut table
saw shall be guarded by a hood which shall meet all the requirements of
paragraph (c)(1) of this section for hoods for circular ripsaws.
(2) [Reserved]
[[Page 614]]
(e) Circular resaws. (1) Each circular resaw shall be guarded by a
hood or shield of metal above the saw. This hood or shield shall be so
designed as to guard against danger from flying splinters or broken saw
teeth.
(2) Each circular resaw (other than self-feed saws with a roller or
wheel at back of the saw) shall be provided with a spreader fastened
securely behind the saw. The spreader shall be slightly thinner than the
saw kerf and slightly thicker than the saw disk.
(f) Self-feed circular saws. (1) Feed rolls and saws shall be
protected by a hood or guard to prevent the hands of the operator from
coming in contact with the in-running rolls at any point. The guard
shall be constructed of heavy material, preferably metal, and the bottom
of the guard shall come down to within three-eighths inch of the plane
formed by the bottom or working surfaces of the feed rolls. This
distance (three-eighths inch) may be increased to three-fourths inch,
provided the lead edge of the hood is extended to be not less than 5\1/
2\ inches in front of the nip point between the front roll and the work.
(2) Each self-feed circular ripsaw shall be provided with sectional
non-kickback fingers for the full width of the feed rolls. They shall be
located in front of the saw and so arranged as to be in continual
contact with the wood being fed.
(g) Swing cutoff saws. The requirements of this paragraph are also
applicable to sliding cutoff saws mounted above the table.
(1) Each swing cutoff saw shall be provided with a hood that will
completely enclose the upper half of the saw, the arbor end, and the
point of operation at all positions of the saw. The hood shall be
constructed in such a manner and of such material that it will protect
the operator from flying splinters and broken saw teeth. Its hood shall
be so designed that it will automatically cover the lower portion of the
blade, so that when the saw is returned to the back of the table the
hood will rise on top of the fence, and when the saw is moved forward
the hood will drop on top of and remain in contact with the table or
material being cut.
(2) Each swing cutoff saw shall be provided with an effective device
to return the saw automatically to the back of the table when released
at any point of its travel. Such a device shall not depend for its
proper functioning upon any rope, cord, or spring. If there is a
counterweight, the bolts supporting the bar and counterweight shall be
provided with cotter pins; and the counterweight shall be prevented from
dropping by either a bolt passing through both the bar and
counterweight, or a bolt put through the extreme end of the bar, or,
where the counterweight does not encircle the bar, a safety chain
attached to it.
(3) Limit chains or other equally effective devices shall be
provided to prevent the saw from swinging beyond the front or back edges
of the table, or beyond a forward position where the gullets of the
lowest saw teeth will rise above the table top.
(4) Inverted swing cutoff saws shall be provided with a hood that
will cover the part of the saw that protrudes above the top of the table
or above the material being cut. It shall automatically adjust itself to
the thickness of and remain in contact with the material being cut.
(h) Radial saws. (1) The upper hood shall completely enclose the
upper portion of the blade down to a point that will include the end of
the saw arbor. The upper hood shall be constructed in such a manner and
of such material that it will protect the operator from flying
splinters, broken saw teeth, etc., and will deflect sawdust away from
the operator. The sides of the lower exposed portion of the blade shall
be guarded to the full diameter of the blade by a device that will
automatically adjust itself to the thickness of the stock and remain in
contact with stock being cut to give maximum protection possible for the
operation being performed.
(2) Each radial saw used for ripping shall be provided with
nonkickback fingers or dogs located on both sides of the saw so as to
oppose the thrust or tendency of the saw to pick up the material or to
throw it back toward the operator. They shall be designed to provide
adequate holding power for all the thicknesses of material being cut.
[[Page 615]]
(3) An adjustable stop shall be provided to prevent the forward
travel of the blade beyond the position necessary to complete the cut in
repetitive operations.
(4) Installation shall be in such a manner that the front end of the
unit will be slightly higher than the rear, so as to cause the cutting
head to return gently to the starting position when released by the
operator.
(5) Ripping and ploughing shall be against the direction in which
the saw turns. The direction of the saw rotation shall be conspicuously
marked on the hood. In addition, a permanent label not less than 1\1/2\
inches by \3/4\ inch shall be affixed to the rear of the guard at
approximately the level of the arbor, reading as follows: ``Danger: Do
Not Rip or Plough From This End''.
(i) Bandsaws and band resaws. (1) All portions of the saw blade
shall be enclosed or guarded, except for the working portion of the
blade between the bottom of the guide rolls and the table. Bandsaw
wheels shall be fully encased. The outside periphery of the enclosure
shall be solid. The front and back of the band wheels shall be either
enclosed by solid material or by wire mesh or perforated metal. Such
mesh or perforated metal shall be not less than 0.037 inch (U.S. Gage
No. 20), and the openings shall be not greater than three-eighths inch.
Solid material used for this purpose shall be of an equivalent strength
and firmness. The guard for the portion of the blade between the sliding
guide and the upper-saw-wheel guard shall protect the saw blade at the
front and outer side. This portion of the guard shall be self-adjusting
to raise and lower with the guide. The upper-wheel guard shall be made
to conform to the travel of the saw on the wheel.
(2) Each bandsaw machine shall be provided with a tension control
device to indicate a proper tension for the standard saws used on the
machine, in order to assist in the elimination of saw breakage due to
improper tension.
(3) Feed rolls of band resaws shall be protected with a suitable
guard to prevent the hands of the operator from coming in contact with
the in-running rolls at any point. The guard shall be constructed of
heavy material, preferably metal, and the edge of the guard shall come
to within three-eighths inch of the plane formed by the inside face of
the feed roll in contact with the stock being cut.
(j) Jointers. (1) Each hand-fed planer and jointer with horizontal
head shall be equipped with a cylindrical cutting head, the knife
projection of which shall not exceed one-eighth inch beyond the
cylindrical body of the head.
(2) The opening in the table shall be kept as small as possible. The
clearance between the edge of the rear table and the cutter head shall
be not more than one-eighth inch. The table throat opening shall be not
more than 2\1/2\ inches when tables are set or aligned with each other
for zero cut.
(3) Each hand-fed jointer with a horizontal cutting head shall have
an automatic guard which will cover all the section of the head on the
working side of the fence or gage. The guard shall effectively keep the
operator's hand from coming in contact with the revolving knives. The
guard shall automatically adjust itself to cover the unused portion of
the head and shall remain in contact with the material at all times.
(4) Each hand-fed jointer with horizontal cutting head shall have a
guard which will cover the section of the head back of the gage or
fence.
(5) Each wood jointer with vertical head shall have either an
exhaust hood or other guard so arranged as to enclose completely the
revolving head, except for a slot of such width as may be necessary and
convenient for the application of the material to be jointed.
(k) Tenoning machines. (1) Feed chains and sprockets of all double
end tenoning machines shall be completely enclosed, except for that
portion of chain used for conveying the stock.
(2) At the rear ends of frames over which feed conveyors run,
sprockets and chains shall be guarded at the sides by plates projecting
beyond the periphery of sprockets and the ends of lugs.
(3) Each tenoning machine shall have all cutting heads, and saws if
used, covered by metal guards. These guards shall cover at least the
unused part of the periphery of the cutting head. If such a guard is
constructed of sheet metal, the material used shall be not
[[Page 616]]
less than one-sixteenth inch in thickness, and if cast iron is used, it
shall be not less than three-sixteenths inch in thickness.
(4) Where an exhaust system is used, the guard shall form part or
all of the exhaust hood and shall be constructed of metal of a thickness
not less than that specified in subparagraph (3) of this paragraph.
(l) Boring and mortising machines. (1) Safety-bit chucks with no
projecting set screws shall be used.
(2) Boring bits should be provided with a guard that will enclose
all portions of the bit and chuck above the material being worked.
(3) The top of the cutting chain and driving mechanism shall be
enclosed.
(4) If there is a counterweight, one of the following or equivalent
means shall be used to prevent its dropping:
(i) It shall be bolted to the bar by means of a bolt passing through
both bar and counterweight;
(ii) A bolt shall be put through the extreme end of the bar;
(iii) Where the counterweight does not encircle the bar, a safety
chain shall be attached to it;
(iv) Other types of counterweights shall be suspended by chain or
wire rope and shall travel in a pipe or other suitable enclosure
wherever they might fall and cause injury.
(5) Universal joints on spindles of boring machines shall be
completely enclosed in such a way as to prevent accidental contact by
the operator.
(6) Each operating treadle shall be covered by an inverted U-shaped
metal guard, fastened to the floor, and of adequate size to prevent
accidental tripping.
(m) Wood shapers and similar equipment. (1) The cutting heads of
each wood shaper, hand-fed panel raiser, or other similar machine not
automatically fed, shall be enclosed with a cage or adjustable guard so
designed as to keep the operator's hand away from the cutting edge. The
diameter of circular shaper guards shall be not less than the greatest
diameter of the cutter. In no case shall a warning device of leather or
other material attached to the spindle be acceptable.
(2) [Reserved]
(3) All double-spindle shapers shall be provided with a spindle
starting and stopping device for each spindle.
(n) Planing, molding, sticking, and matching machines. (1) Each
planing, molding, sticking, and matching machine shall have all cutting
heads, and saws if used, covered by a metal guard. If such guard is
constructed of sheet metal, the material used shall be not less than \1/
16\ inch in thickness, and if cast iron is used, it shall be not less
than three-sixteenths inch in thickness.
(2) Where an exhaust system is used, the guards shall form part or
all of the exhaust hood and shall be constructed of metal of a thickness
not less than that specified in paragraph (h)(1) of this section.
(3) Feed rolls shall be guarded by a hood or suitable guard to
prevent the hands of the operator from coming in contact with the in-
running rolls at any point. The guard shall be fastened to the frame
carrying the rolls so as to remain in adjustment for any thickness of
stock.
(4) Surfacers or planers used in thicknessing multiple pieces of
material simultaneously shall be provided with sectional infeed rolls
having sufficient yield in the construction of the sections to provide
feeding contact pressure on the stock, over the permissible range of
variation in stock thickness specified or for which the machine is
designed. In lieu of such yielding sectional rolls, suitable section
kickback finger devices shall be provided at the infeed end.
(o) Profile and swing-head lathes and wood heel turning machine. (1)
Each profile and swing-head lathe shall have all cutting heads covered
by a metal guard. If such a guard is constructed of sheet metal, the
material used shall be not less than one-sixteenth inch in thickness;
and if cast iron is used, it shall not be less than three-sixteenths
inch in thickness.
(2) Cutting heads on wood-turning lathes, whether rotating or not,
shall be covered as completely as possible by hoods or shields.
(3) Shoe last and spoke lathes, doweling machines, wood heel turning
machines, and other automatic wood-turning lathes of the rotating knife
[[Page 617]]
type shall be equipped with hoods enclosing the cutter blades completely
except at the contact points while the stock is being cut.
(4) Lathes used for turning long pieces of wood stock held only
between the two centers shall be equipped with long curved guards
extending over the tops of the lathes in order to prevent the work
pieces from being thrown out of the machines if they should become
loose.
(5) Where an exhaust system is used, the guard shall form part or
all of the exhaust hood and shall be constructed of metal of a thickness
not less than that specified in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph.
(p) Sanding machines. (1) Feed rolls of self-feed sanding machines
shall be protected with a semicylindrical guard to prevent the hands of
the operator from coming in contact with the in-running rolls at any
point. The guard shall be constructed of heavy material, preferably
metal, and firmly secured to the frame carrying the rolls so as to
remain in adjustment for any thickness of stock. The bottom of the guard
should come down to within three-eighths inch of a plane formed by the
bottom or contact face of the feed roll where it touches the stock.
(2) Each drum sanding machine shall have an exhaust hood, or other
guard if no exhaust system is required, so arranged as to enclose the
revolving drum, except for that portion of the drum above the table, if
a table is used, which may be necessary and convenient for the
application of the material to be finished.
(3) Each disk sanding machine shall have the exhaust hood, or other
guard if no exhaust system is required, so arranged as to enclose the
revolving disk, except for that portion of the disk above the table, if
a table is used, which may be necessary for the application of the
material to be finished.
(4) Belt sanding machines shall be provided with guards at each nip
point where the sanding belt runs on to a pulley. These guards shall
effectively prevent the hands or fingers of the operator from coming in
contact with the nip points. The unused run of the sanding belt shall be
guarded against accidental contact.
(q) Veneer cutters and wringers. (1) Veneer slicer knives shall be
guarded to prevent accidental contact with knife edge, at both front and
rear.
(2) Veneer clippers shall have automatic feed or shall be provided
with a guard which will make it impossible to place a finger or fingers
under the knife while feeding or removing the stock.
(3) Sprockets on chain or slat-belt conveyors shall be enclosed.
(4) Where practicable, hand and footpower guillotine veneer cutters
shall be provided with rods or plates or other satisfactory means, so
arranged on the feeding side that the hands cannot reach the cutting
edge of the knife while feeding or holding the stock in place.
(5) Power-driven guillotine veneer cutters, except continuous feed
trimmers, shall be equipped with:
(i) Starting devices which require the simultaneous action of both
hands to start the cutting motion and of at least one hand on a control
during the complete stroke of the knife; or
(ii) An automatic guard which will remove the hands of the operator
from the danger zone at every descent of the blade, used in conjunction
with one-hand starting devices which require two distinct movements of
the device to start the cutting motion, and so designed as to return
positively to the nonstarting position after each complete cycle of the
knife.
(6) Where two or more workers are employed at the same time on the
same power-driven guillotine veneer cutter equipped with two-hand
control, the device shall be so arranged that each worker shall be
required to use both hands simultaneously on the controls to start the
cutting motion, and at least one hand on a control to complete the cut.
(7) Power-driven guillotine veneer cutters, other than continuous
trimmers, shall be provided, in addition to the brake or other stopping
mechanism, with an emergency device which will prevent the machine from
operating in the event of failure of the brake when the starting
mechanism is in the nonstarting position.
(r) Miscellaneous woodworking machines. (1) The feed rolls of roll
type
[[Page 618]]
glue spreaders shall be guarded by a semicylindrical guard. The bottom
of the guard shall come to within three-eighths inch of a plane formed
by bottom or contact face of the feed roll where it touches the stock.
(2) Drag saws shall be so located as to give at least a 4-foot
clearance for passage when the saw is at the extreme end of the stroke;
or if such clearance is not obtainable, the saw and its driving
mechanism shall be provided with a standard enclosure.
(3) For combination or universal woodworking machines each point of
operation of any tool shall be guarded as required for such a tool in a
separate machine.
(4) The mention of specific machines in paragraphs (a) thru (q) and
this paragraph (r) of this section, inclusive, is not intended to
exclude other woodworking machines from the requirement that suitable
guards and exhaust hoods be provided to reduce to a minimum the hazard
due to the point of operation of such machines.
(s) Inspection and maintenance of woodworking machinery. (1) Dull,
badly set, improperly filed, or improperly tensioned saws shall be
immediately removed from service, before they begin to cause the
material to stick, jam, or kick back when it is fed to the saw at normal
speed. Saws to which gum has adhered on the sides shall be immediately
cleaned.
(2) All knives and cutting heads of woodworking machines shall be
kept sharp, properly adjusted, and firmly secured. Where two or more
knives are used in one head, they shall be properly balanced.
(3) Bearings shall be kept free from lost motion and shall be well
lubricated.
(4) Arbors of all circular saws shall be free from play.
(5) Sharpening or tensioning of saw blades or cutters shall be done
only by persons of demonstrated skill in this kind of work.
(6) Emphasis is placed upon the importance of maintaining
cleanliness around woodworking machinery, particularly as regards the
effective functioning of guards and the prevention of fire hazards in
switch enclosures, bearings, and motors.
(7) All cracked saws shall be removed from service.
(8) The practice of inserting wedges between the saw disk and the
collar to form what is commonly known as a ``wobble saw'' shall not be
permitted.
(9) Push sticks or push blocks shall be provided at the work place
in the several sizes and types suitable for the work to be done.
(10)-(11) [Reserved]
(12) The knife blade of jointers shall be so installed and adjusted
that it does not protrude more than one-eighth inch beyond the
cylindrical body of the head. Push sticks or push blocks shall be
provided at the work place in the several sizes and types suitable for
the work to be done.
(13) Whenever veneer slicers or rotary veneer-cutting machines have
been shutdown for the purpose of inserting logs or to make adjustments,
operators shall make sure that machine is clear and other workmen are
not in a hazardous position before starting the machine.
(14) Operators shall not ride the carriage of a veneer slicer.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978;
49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984]
Sec. 1910.214 Cooperage machinery. [Reserved]
Sec. 1910.215 Abrasive wheel machinery.
(a) General requirements--(1) Machine guarding. Abrasive wheels
shall be used only on machines provided with safety guards as defined in
the following paragraphs of this section, except:
(i) Wheels used for internal work while within the work being
ground;
(ii) Mounted wheels, used in portable operations, 2 inches and
smaller in diameter; and
(iii) Types 16, 17, 18, 18R, and 19 cones, plugs, and threaded hole
pot balls where the work offers protection.
(2) Guard design. The safety guard shall cover the spindle end, nut,
and flange projections. The safety guard shall be mounted so as to
maintain proper alignment with the wheel, and the strength of the
fastenings shall exceed the strength of the guard, except:
(i) Safety guards on all operations where the work provides a
suitable
[[Page 619]]
measure of protection to the operator, may be so constructed that the
spindle end, nut, and outer flange are exposed; and where the nature of
the work is such as to entirely cover the side of the wheel, the side
covers of the guard may be omitted; and
(ii) The spindle end, nut, and outer flange may be exposed on
machines designed as portable saws.
(3) Flanges. Grinding machines shall be equipped with flanges in
accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.
(4) Work rests. On offhand grinding machines, work rests shall be
used to support the work. They shall be of rigid construction and
designed to be adjustable to compensate for wheel wear. Work rests shall
be kept adjusted closely to the wheel with a maximum opening of one-
eighth inch to prevent the work from being jammed between the wheel and
the rest, which may cause wheel breakage. The work rest shall be
securely clamped after each adjustment. The adjustment shall not be made
with the wheel in motion.
(5) Excluded machinery. Natural sandstone wheels and metal, wooden,
cloth, or paper discs, having a layer of abrasive on the surface are not
covered by this section.
(b) Guarding of abrasive wheel machinery--(1) Cup wheels. Cup wheels
(Types 6 and 11) shall be protected by:
(i) Safety guards as specified in paragraphs (b) (1) through (10) of
this section;
(ii) Band type guards as specified in paragraph (b)(11) of this
section; and
(iii) Special ``Revolving Cup Guards'' which mount behind the wheel
and turn with it. They shall be made of steel or other material with
adequate strength and shall enclose the wheel sides upward from the back
for one-third of the wheel thickness. The mounting features shall
conform with all requirements of this section. It is necessary to
maintain clearance between the wheel side and the guard. This clearance
shall not exceed one-sixteenth inch.
(2) Guard exposure angles. The maximum exposure angles specified in
paragraphs (b) (3) through (8) of this section shall not be exceeded.
Visors or other accessory equipment shall not be included as a part of
the guard when measuring the guard opening, unless such equipment has
strength equal to that of the guard.
(3) Bench and floor stands. The angular exposure of the grinding
wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on machines known as
bench and floor stands should not exceed 90 deg. or one-fourth of the
periphery. This exposure shall begin at a point not more than 65 deg.
above the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle. (See Figures O-6 and O-
7 and paragraph (b)(9) of this section.)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.057
Figure No. O-6 Figure No. O-7
Wherever the nature of the work requires contact with the wheel below
the horizontal plane of the spindle, the exposure shall not exceed
125 deg.. (See Figures O-8 and O-9.)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.058
Figure No. O-8 Figure No. O-9
(4) Cylindrical grinders. The maximum angular exposure of the
grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on cylindrical
grinding machines shall not exceed 180 deg.. This exposure shall begin
at a point not more than 65 deg. above the horizontal plane of the wheel
spindle. (See Figures O-10 and O-11 and subparagraph (9) of this
paragraph.)
[[Page 620]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.059
Figure No. O-10 Figure No. O-11
(5) Surface grinders and cutting-off machines. The maximum angular
exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards
used on cutting-off machines and on surface grinding machines which
employ the wheel periphery shall not exceed 150 deg.. This exposure
shall begin at a point not less than 15 deg. below the horizontal plane
of the wheel spindle. (See Figures O-12 and O-13)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.060
Figure No. O-12 Figure No. O-13
(6) Swing frame grinders. The maximum angular exposure of the
grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on machines
known as swing frame grinding machines shall not exceed 180 deg., and
the top half of the wheel shall be enclosed at all times. (See Figures
O-14 and O-15.)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.061
Figure No. O-14 Figure No. O-15
(7) Automatic snagging machines. The maximum angular exposure of the
grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on grinders
known as automatic snagging machines shall not exceed 180 deg. and the
top half of the wheel shall be enclosed at all times. (See Figures O-14
and O-15.)
(8) Top grinding. Where the work is applied to the wheel above the
horizontal centerline, the exposure of the grinding wheel periphery
shall be as small as possible and shall not exceed 60 deg.. (See Figures
O-16 and O-17.)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.062
Figure No. O-16 Figure No. O-17
(9) Exposure adjustment. Safety guards of the types described in
subparagraphs (3) and (4) of this paragraph, where the operator stands
in front of the opening, shall be constructed so that the peripheral
protecting member can be adjusted to the constantly decreasing diameter
of the wheel. The maximum angular exposure above the horizontal plane of
the wheel spindle as specified in paragraphs (b) (3) and (4) of this
section shall never be exceeded, and the distance between the wheel
periphery and the adjustable tongue or the end of the peripheral member
at the top shall never exceed one-fourth inch. (See Figures O-18, O-19,
O-20, O-21, O-22, and O-23.)
(10) Material requirements and minimum dimensions. (i) See Figures
O-36 and O-37 and Table O-9 for minimum basic thickness of peripheral
and side members for various types of safety guards and classes of
service.
(ii) If operating speed does not exceed 8,000 surface feet per
minute cast iron safety guards, malleable iron guards or other guards as
described in paragraph (b)(10)(iii) of this section shall be used.
(iii) Cast steel, or structural steel, safety guards as specified in
Figures O-36 and O-37 and Table O-9 shall be used where operating speeds
of wheels are faster than 8,000 surface feet per minute up to a maximum
of 16,000 surface feet per minute.
(iv) For cutting-off wheels 16 inches diameter and smaller and where
speed does not exceed 16,000 surface feet per minute, cast iron or
malleable iron safety guards as specified in Figures O-
[[Page 621]]
36 and O-37, and in Table O-9 shall be used.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.063
Figure No. O-18 Figure No. O-19
correct
Showing adjustable tongue giving required angular protection for all
sizes of wheel used.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.064
Figure No. O-20 Figure No. O-21
correct
Showing movable guard with opening small enough to give required
protection for smallest size wheel used.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.065
Figure No. O-22 Figure No. O-23
incorrect
Showing movable guard with size of opening correct for full size wheel
but too large for smaller wheels.
(v) For cutting-off wheels larger than 16 inches diameter and where
speed does not exceed 14,200 surface feet per minute, safety guards as
specified in Figures O-27 and O-28, and in Table O-1 shall be used.
(vi) For thread grinding wheels not exceeding 1 inch in thickness
cast iron or malleable iron safety guards as specified in Figures O-36
and O-37, and in Table O-9 shall be used.
(11) Band type guards--general specifications. Band type guards
shall conform to the following general specifications:
(i) The bands shall be of steel plate or other material of equal or
greater strength. They shall be continuous, the ends being either
riveted, bolted, or welded together in such a manner as to leave the
inside free from projections.
(ii) The inside diameter of the band shall not be more than 1 inch
larger than the outside diameter of the wheel, and shall be mounted as
nearly concentric with the wheel as practicable.
(iii) The band shall be of sufficient width and its position kept so
adjusted that at no time will the wheel protrude beyond the edge of the
band a distance greater than that indicated in Figure O-29 and in Table
O-2 or the wall thickness (W), whichever is smaller.
(12) Guard design specifications. Abrasive wheel machinery guards
shall meet the design specifications of the American National Standard
Safety Code for the Use, Care, and Protection of Abrasive Wheels, ANSI
B7.1-1970, which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6. This requirement shall not apply to natural sandstone
wheels or metal, wooden, cloth, or paper discs, having a layer of
abrasive on the surface.
(c) Flanges--(1) General requirements. All abrasive wheels shall be
mounted between flanges which shall not be less than one-third the
diameter of the wheel.
(i) Exceptions:
(a) Mounted wheels.
(b) Portable wheels with threaded inserts or projecting studs.
(c) Abrasive discs (inserted nut, inserted washer and projecting
stud type).
(d) Plate mounted wheels.
(e) Cylinders, cup, or segmental wheels that are mounted in chucks.
(f) Types 27 and 28 wheels.
(g) Certain internal wheels.
(h) Modified types 6 and 11 wheels (terrazzo).
(i) Cutting-off wheels, Types 1 and 27A (see paragraphs (c)(1) (ii)
and (iii) of this section).
[[Page 622]]
(ii) Type 1 cutting-off wheels are to be mounted between properly
relieved flanges which have matching bearing surfaces. Such flanges
shall be at least one-fourth the wheel diameter.
(iii) Type 27A cutting-off wheels are designed to be mounted by
means of flat, not relieved, flanges having matching bearing surfaces
and which may be less than one-third but shall not be less than one-
fourth the wheel diameter. (See Figure O-24 for one such type of
mounting.)
(iv) There are three general types of flanges:
(a) Straight relieved flanges (see Figure O-32);
(b) Straight unrelieved flanges (see Figure O-30);
(c) Adaptor flanges (see Figures O-33 and O-34);
(v) Regardless of flange type used, the wheel shall always be
guarded. Blotters shall be used in accordance with paragraph (c)(6) of
this section.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.066
Figure No. O-24
The Type 27 A Wheel is mounted between flat non-relieved flanges of
equal bearing surfaces.
(2) [Reserved]
(3) Finish and balance. Flanges shall be dimensionally accurate and
in good balance. There shall be no rough surfaces or sharp edges.
(4) Uniformity of diameter. (i) Both flanges, of any type, between
which a wheel is mounted, shall be of the same diameter and have equal
bearing surface. Exceptions are set forth in the remaining subdivisions
of this subparagraph.
(ii) Type 27 and Type 28 wheels, because of their shape and usage,
require specially designed adaptors. The back flange shall extend beyond
the central hub or raised portion and contact the wheel to counteract
the side pressure on the wheel in use. The adaptor nut which is less
than the minimum one-third diameter of wheel fits in the depressed side
of wheel to prevent interference in side grinding and serves to drive
the wheel by its clamping force against the depressed portion of the
back flange. The variance in flange diameters, the adaptor nut being
less than one-third wheel diameter, and the use of side pressure in
wheel operation limits the use to reinforced organic bonded wheels.
Mounts which are affixed to the wheel by the manufacturer shall not be
reused. Type 27 and Type 28 wheels shall be used only with a safety
guard located between wheel and operator during use. (See Figure O-24-
A.)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.067
Figure No. O-24-A
Types 27 and 28 wheels, because of their shape, require specially
designed adaptors.
(iii) Modified Types 6 and 11 wheels (terrazzo) with tapered K
dimension.
(5) Recess and undercut. (i) Straight relieved flanges made
according to Table O-6 and Figure O-32 shall be recessed at least one-
sixteenth inch on the side next to the wheel for a distance as specified
in Table O-6.
(ii) Straight flanges of the adaptor or sleeve type (Table O-7 and
Figures O-33 and O-34) shall be undercut so that there will be no
bearing on the sides of
[[Page 623]]
the wheel within one-eighth inch of the arbor hole.
(6) Blotters. (i) Blotters (compressible washers) shall always be
used between flanges and abrasive wheel surfaces to insure uniform
distribution of flange pressure. (See paragraph (d)(5) of this section.)
(ii) Exception:
(a) Mounted wheels.
(b) Abrasive discs (inserted nut, inserted washer, and projecting
stud type).
(c) Plate mounted wheels.
(d) Cylinders, cups, or segmental wheels that are mounted in chucks.
(e) Types 27 and 28 wheels.
(f) Certain Type 1 and Type 27A cutting-off wheels.
(g) Certain internal wheels.
(h) Type 4 tapered wheels.
(i) Diamond wheels, except certain vitrified diamond wheels.
(j) Modified Types 6 and 11 wheel (terrazzo)--blotters applied flat
side of wheel only.
(7) Driving flange. The driving flange shall be securely fastened to
the spindle and the bearing surface shall run true. When more than one
wheel is mounted between a single set of flanges, wheels may be cemented
together or separated by specially designed spacers. Spacers shall be
equal in diameter to the mounting flanges and have equal bearing
surfaces. (See paragraph (d)(6) of this section.)
(8) Dimensions. (i) Tables O-4 and O-6 and Figures O-30 and O-32
show minimum dimensions for straight relieved and unrelieved flanges for
use with wheels with small holes that fit directly on the machine
spindle. Dimensions of such flanges shall never be less than indicated.
(ii) Table O-5, and Table O-7 and Figures O-31, O-33, O-34 show
minimum dimensions for straight adaptor flanges for use with wheels
having holes larger than the spindle. Dimensions of such adaptor flanges
shall never be less than indicated.
(iii) Table O-8 and Figure O-35 show minimum dimensions for straight
flanges that are an integral part of wheel sleeves which are frequently
used on precision grinding machines. Dimensions of such flanges shall
never be less than indicated.
(9) Repairs and maintenance. All flanges shall be maintained in good
condition. When the bearing surfaces become worn, warped, sprung, or
damaged they should be trued or refaced. When refacing or truing, care
shall be exercised to make sure that proper relief and rigidity is
maintained as specified in paragraphs (c) (2) and (5) of this section
and they shall be replaced when they do not conform to these
subparagraphs and Table O-4, Figure O-30, Table O-5, Figure O-31, Table
O-6, Figure O-32, and Table O-8, Figure O-35. Failure to observe these
rules might cause excessive flange pressure around the hole of the
wheel. This is especially true of wheel-sleeve or adaptor flanges.
(d) Mounting--(1) Inspection. Immediately before mounting, all
wheels shall be closely inspected and sounded by the user (ring test) to
make sure they have not been damaged in transit, storage, or otherwise.
The spindle speed of the machine shall be checked before mounting of the
wheel to be certain that it does not exceed the maximum operating speed
marked on the wheel. Wheels should be tapped gently with a light
nonmetallic implement, such as the handle of a screwdriver for light
wheels, or a wooden mallet for heavier wheels. If they sound cracked
(dead), they shall not be used. This is known as the ``Ring Test''.
(i) Wheels must be dry and free from sawdust when applying the ring
test, otherwise the sound will be deadened. It should also be noted that
organic bonded wheels do not emit the same clear metallic ring as do
vitrified and silicate wheels.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.068
Figure No. O-25 Figure No. O-26
[[Page 624]]
(ii) ``Tap'' wheels about 45 deg. each side of the vertical
centerline and about 1 or 2 inches from the periphery as indicated by
the spots in Figure O-25 and Figure O-26. Then rotate the wheel 45 deg.
and repeat the test. A sound and undamaged wheel will give a clear
metallic tone. If cracked, there will be a dead sound and not a clear
``ring.''
(2) Arbor size. Grinding wheels shall fit freely on the spindle and
remain free under all grinding conditions. A controlled clearance
between the wheel hole and the machine spindle (or wheel sleeves or
adaptors) is essential to avoid excessive pressure from mounting and
spindle expansion. To accomplish this, the machine spindle shall be made
to nominal (standard) size plus zero minus .002 inch, and the wheel hole
shall be made suitably oversize to assure safety clearance under the
conditions of operating heat and pressure.
(3) Surface condition. All contact surfaces of wheels, blotters and
flanges shall be flat and free of foreign matter.
(4) Bushing. When a bushing is used in the wheel hole it shall not
exceed the width of the wheel and shall not contact the flanges.
(5) Blotters. When blotters or flange facings of compressible
material are required, they shall cover entire contact area of wheel
flanges. Blotters need not be used with the following types of wheels:
(i) Mounted wheels.
(ii) Abrasive discs (inserted nut, inserted washer, and projecting-
stud type).
(iii) Plate mounted wheels.
(iv) Cylinders, cups, or segmental wheels that are mounted in
chucks.
(v) Types 27 and 28 wheels.
(vi) Certain Type 1 and Type 27A cutting-off wheels.
(vii) Certain internal wheels.
(viii) Type 4 tapered wheels.
(ix) Diamond wheels, except certain vitrified diamond wheels.
(6) Multiple wheel mounting. When more than one wheel is mounted
between a single set of flanges, wheels may be cemented together or
separated by specially designed spacers. Spacers shall be equal in
diameter to the mounting flanges and have equal bearing surfaces. When
mounting wheels which have not been cemented together, or ones which do
not utilize separating spacers, care must be exercised to use wheels
specially manufactured for that purpose.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.069
[[Page 625]]
Table O-1--Minimum Basic Thickness for Peripheral and Side Members for Safety Guards Used With Cutting-Off Wheels
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cutting off wheel diameters
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Material used in construction of Maximum thickness of 6 to 11 Over 11 to Over 20 to Over 30 to Over 48 to
guard cutting off wheel Speed not to exceed inches 20 inches 30 inches 48 inches 72 inches
---------------------------------------------------------------------
A B A B A B A B A B
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Structural steel (min. tensile \1/2\ inch or less.... 14,200 SFPM.......... \1/ \1/ \3/ \3/ \1/8\ \1/8\ \3/ \3/ \1/4\ \1/4\
strength 60,000 p.s.i.). 16\ 16\ 32\ 32\ 16\ 16\
\1/2\ inch or less.... 16,000 SFPM.......... \3/ \1/8\ \1/8\ \1/8\ \3/ \1/8\ \1/4\ \3/ \5/ \1/4\
32\ 16\ 16\ 16\
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.070
Table O-3--Guide for Construction of Band Type Guards
[Maximum Wheel Speed 7,000 SFPM]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum
Minimum Minimum distance
Minimum material specifications Diameter of wheel thickness diameter between
of band A of rivets centers of
rivets
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Inches
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hot rolled steel SAE 1008................ Under 8.......................... \1/16\ \3/16\ \3/4\
8 to 24.......................... \1/8\ \1/4\ 1
Over 24 to 30.................... \1/4\ \3/8\ 1\1/4\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.071
[[Page 626]]
Table O-5--Minimum Dimensions for Straight Adaptor Flange--for Organic Bonded Wheels Over 1\1/4\ Inches Thick
\1\
[In inches]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
E--Minimum
B--Minimum D--Minimun thickness F \1\--(D-
Wheel diameter Wheel hole flange thickness of flange E) minimum
diameter diameter of flange at edge of thickness
at bore undercut
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 to 14............................................ 4 6 \7/8\ \3/8\ \1/2\
5 7 \7/8\ \3/8\ \1/2\
6 8 \7/8\ \3/8\ \1/2\
Larger than 14 to 18................................ 4 6 \7/8\ \3/8\ \1/2\
5 7 \7/8\ \3/8\ \1/2\
6 8 \7/8\ \3/8\ \1/2\
7 9 \7/8\ \3/8\ \1/2\
8 10 \7/8\ \3/8\ \1/2\
Larger than 18 to 24................................ 6 8 1 \1/2\ \1/2\
7 9 1 \1/2\ \1/2\
8 10 1 \1/2\ \1/2\
10 12 1 \1/2\ \1/2\
12 14 1 \1/2\ \1/2\
Larger than 24 to 30................................ 12 15 1 \1/2\ \1/2\
Larger than 30 to 36................................ 12 15 1\3/8\ \7/8\ \1/2\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ For wheels under 1\1/4\ inches thick F dimension shall not exceed 40 percent of wheel thickness.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.072
Table O-6--Minimum Dimensions for Straight Relieved Flanges \1\
[In inches]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C--Radial width of E--Minimum
B--Minimum bearing surface D--Minimum thickness
A--Diameter of wheel outside ------------------------ thickness of flange
diameter of flange at edge of
of flanges Minimum Maximum at bore recess
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1................................................... \3/8\ \1/16\ \1/8\ \1/16\ \1/16\
2................................................... \3/4\ \1/8\ \3/16\ \1/8\ \3/32\
3................................................... 1 \1/8\ \3/16\ \3/16\ \3/32\
4................................................... 1\3/8\ \1/8\ \3/16\ \3/16\ \1/8\
5................................................... 1\3/4\ \3/16\ \1/4\ \1/4\ \1/8\
6................................................... 2 \1/4\ \1/2\ \3/8\ \3/16\
7................................................... 2\1/2\ \1/4\ \1/2\ \3/8\ \3/16\
8................................................... 3 \1/4\ \1/2\ \3/8\ \3/16\
10.................................................. 3\1/2\ \5/16\ \5/8\ \3/8\ \1/4\
12.................................................. 4 \5/16\ \5/8\ \1/2\ \5/16\
14.................................................. 4\1/2\ \3/8\ \3/4\ \1/2\ \5/16\
16.................................................. 5\1/2\ \1/2\ 1 \1/2\ \5/16\
18.................................................. 6 \1/2\ 1 \5/8\ \3/8\
20.................................................. 7 \5/8\ 1\1/4\ \5/8\ \3/8\
22.................................................. 7\1/2\ \5/8\ 1\1/4\ \5/8\ \7/16\
24.................................................. 8 \3/4\ 1\1/4\ \5/8\ \7/16\
26.................................................. 8\1/2\ \3/4\ 1\1/4\ \5/8\ \1/2\
28.................................................. 10 \7/8\ 1\1/2\ \3/4\ \1/2\
30.................................................. 10 \7/8\ 1\1/2\ \3/4\ \5/8\
36.................................................. 12 1 2 \7/8\ \3/4\
42.................................................. 14 1 2 \7/8\ \3/4\
48.................................................. 16 1\1/4\ 2 1\1/8\ 1
60.................................................. 20 1\1/4\ 2 1\1/4\ 1\1/8\
72.................................................. 24 1\1/2\ 2\1/2\ 1\3/8\ 1\1/4\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Flanges for wheels under 2 inches diameter may be unrelieved and shall be maintained flat and true.
[[Page 627]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.073
Table O-7--Minimum Dimensions for Straight Flanges--for Mechanical
Grinders 12,500 S.F.P.M. to 16,5 S.F.P.M.\1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
E--Minimum
B--Minimum D--Minimum thickness F \2\--(D-
Wheel Wheel hole flange thickness of flange E) minimum
diameter diameter diameter of flange at edge of thickness
at bore undercut
------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 6 8 1 \1/2\ \1/2\
20 8 10 1\1/2\ \3/4\ \3/4\
24 12 15 2 1 1
30 12 15 2 1 1
36 12 15 2 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Flanges shall be of steel, quality SAE 1040 or equivalent, annealed
plate, heat treated to R. 25-30.
\2\ For wheels under 1\1/4\ inch thick F dimension shall not exceed 40
percent of wheel thickness.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.074
Table O-8--Minimum Dimensions for Straight Flanges Used as Wheel Sleeves for Precision Grinding Only
[In inches]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
E--Minimum
B--Minimum D--Minimum thickness
Wheel diameter Wheel hole outside thickness of flange
diameter diameter of flange at edge of
of flange at bore undercut
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 to 14........................................................ 5 7 \1/2\ \7/16\
Larger than 14 to 20............................................ 5 7 \5/8\ \7/16\
6 8 \5/8\ \7/16\
8 10 \5/8\ \7/16\
10 11\1/2\ \5/8\ \7/16\
12 13\1/2\ \5/8\ \7/16\
Larger than 20 to 30............................................ 8 10 \3/4\ \1/2\
10 11\1/2\ \3/4\ \1/2\
12 13\1/2\ \3/4\ \1/2\
16 17\1/2\ \3/4\ \1/2\
Larger than 30 to 42............................................ 12 13\1/2\ \3/4\ \1/2\
16 17\1/2\ \3/4\ \1/2\
18 19\1/2\ \3/4\ \1/2\
20 21\1/2\ \3/4\ \1/2\
Larger than 42 to 60............................................ 16 20 1 \3/4\
20 24 1 \3/4\
24 29 1\1/8\ \7/8\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: These flanges may be clamped together by means of a central nut, or by a series of bolts or some other
equivalent means of fastening. For hole sizes smaller than shown in this table, use table 12.
[[Page 628]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.075
[[Page 629]]
Table O-9--Minimum Basic Thicknesses of Peripheral and Side Members for Safety Guards
[In inches]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Grinding wheel diameters
Maximum ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Material used in construction thickness 3 to 6 inches Over 6 to 12 Over 12 to 16 Over 16 to 20 Over 20 to 24 Over 24 to 30 Over 30 to 48
of guard of ---------------- inches inches inches inches inches inches
grinding -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
wheel A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Material 2 \1/4\ \1/4\ \3/8\ \5/16\ \1/2\ \3/8\ \5/8\ \1/2\ \7/8\ \5/8\ 1 \3/4\ 1\1/4\ 1
satis- 4 \5/16\ \5/16\ \3/8\ \5/16\ \1/2\ \3/8\ \3/4\ \5/8\ 1 \5/8\ 1\1/8\ \3/4\ 1\3/8\ 1
factory \1\ 6 \3/8\ \5/16\ \1/2\ \7/16\ \5/8\ \1/2\ 1 \5/8\ 1\1/8\ \3/4\ 1\1/4\ \7/8\ 1\1/2\ 1\1/8\
for 8 \5/8\ \9/16\ \7/8\ \3/4\ 1 \3/4\ 1\1/8\ \3/4\ 1\1/4\ \7/8\ 1\1/2\ 1\1/8\
speeds 10 \3/4\ \11/ \7/8\ \3/4\ 1 \3/4\ 1\1/8\ \3/4\ 1\1/4\ \7/8\ 1\1/2\ 1\1/8\
16\
up to 16 1\1/8\ 1 1\1/4\ 1 1\5/ 1 1\7/ 1\1/ 1\3/4\ 1\3/8\
16\ 16\ 16\
8,000 20 1\3/8\ 1\1/8\ 1\3/8\ 1\1/8\ 1\1/2\ 1\3/8\ 2 1\5/8\
SFPM.
Cast iron (min. tensile
strength 20,000 p.s.i.)
Class 20.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Material 2 \1/4\ \1/4\ \3/8\ \5/16\ \1/2\ \3/8\ \5/8\ \1/2\ \3/4\ \5/8\ \7/8\ \3/4\ 1 \7/8\
satis- 4 \5/16\ \5/16\ \3/8\ \5/16\ \1/2\ \3/8\ \5/8\ \1/2\ \3/4\ \5/8\ \7/8\ \3/4\ 1\1/8\ \7/8\
factory \1\ 6 \3/8\ \5/16\ \1/2\ \7/16\ \5/8\ \1/2\ \3/4\ \5/8\ \7/8\ \5/8\ 1 \3/4\ 1\1/4\ \7/8\
for 8 \1/2\ \7/16\ \5/8\ \1/2\ \3/4\ \5/8\ \7/8\ \5/8\ 1 \3/4\ 1\1/4\ \7/8\
speeds 10 \1/2\ \7/16\ \5/8\ \1/2\ \3/4\ \5/8\ \7/8\ \5/8\ 1 \3/4\ 1\1/4\ \7/8\
up to 16 \13/ \11/ \13/ \11/ 1 \3/4\ 1\1/8\ \7/8\ 1\3/8\ 1
16\ 16\ 16\ 16\
9,000 20 \7/8\ \3/4\ 1 \3/4\ 1\1/8\ \7/8\ 1\1/2\ 1\1/8\
SFPM.
Malleable iron (min. tensile
strength 50,000 p.s.i.)
Grade 32510.
Materials 2 \1/4\ \1/4\ \5/16\ \5/16\ \3/8\ \3/8\ \1/2\ \7/16\ \5/8\ \1/2\ \3/4\ \5/8\ \7/8\ \3/4\
satis- 4 \1/4\ \1/4\ \1/2\ \1/2\ \1/2\ \1/2\ \9/16\ \1/2\ \5/8\ \1/2\ \3/4\ \5/8\ 1 \3/4\
factory \1\ 6 \3/8\ \1/4\ \3/4\ \5/8\ \3/4\ \5/8\ \3/4\ \5/8\ \13/ \11/ \13/ \11/ 1\1/8\ \3/4\
16\ 16\ 16\ 16\
for 8 \7/8\ \3/4\ \7/8\ \3/4\ \7/8\ \3/4\ \7/8\ \3/4\ \15/ \13/ 1\3/8\ 1
16\ 16\
speeds 10 1 \7/8\ 1 \7/8\ 1 \7/8\ 1\1/8\ \15/ 1\1/8\ 1 1\7/ 1\1/
16\ 16\ 16\
up to 16 1\1/4\ 1\1/8\ 1\1/4\ 1\1/8\ 1\1/4\ 1\1/8\ 1\1/4\ 1\1/8\ 1\13/ 1\7/
16\ 16\
16,000 20 1\3/8\ 1\1/4\ 1\3/8\ 1\1/4\ 1\7/ 1\5/ 2\1/ 1\11/
16\ 16\ 16\ 16\
SFPM.
Steel castings (min. tensile
strength 60,000 p.s.i.)
Grade V60-30.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Structural 2 \1/8\ \1/16\ \5/16\ \1/4\ \5/16\ \1/4\ \5/16\ \1/4\ \5/16\ \1/4\ \3/8\ \5/16\ \1/2\ \3/8\
steel 4 \1/8\ \1/16\ \3/8\ \5/16\ \3/8\ \5/16\ \3/8\ \5/16\ \3/8\ \5/16\ \3/8\ \5/16\ \1/2\ \3/8\
(min. 6 \3/16\ \1/16\ \1/2\ \3/8\ \7/16\ \3/8\ \7/16\ \3/8\ \7/16\ \3/8\ \7/16\ \3/8\ \3/4\ \1/2\
tensile 8 \1/2\ \3/8\ \9/16\ \7/16\ \9/16\ \7/16\ 9
strength 10 \9/16\ \7/16\ \5/8\ \1/2\ \5/8\ \1/2\ \5/8\ \1/2\ \5/8\ \1/2\ \7/8\ \5/8\
60,000 16 \5/8\ \9/16\ \3/4\ \5/8\ \3/4\ \5/8\ \13/ \11/ 1\1/ \13/
16\ 16\ 16\ 16\
p.s.i.) 20 \13/ \11/ \13/ \11/ \7/8\ \3/4\ 1\3/ \15/
16\ 16\ 16\ 16\ 16\ 16\
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions stated. Other material, designs or dimensions affording equal or
superior protection are also acceptable.
[[Page 630]]
Table O-2--Exposure Versus Wheel Thickness
[In inches]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum
exposure
Overall thickness of wheel (T) of wheel
(C)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/2\....................................................... \1/4\
1........................................................... \1/2\
2........................................................... \3/4\
3........................................................... 1
4........................................................... 1\1/2\
5 and over.................................................. 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table O-4--Minimum Dimensions for Straight Unrelieved Flanges for Wheels
with Threaded Inserts or Projecting Studs
------------------------------------------------------------------------
B \1\--Minimum outside T--Minimum thickness of
A--Diameter of wheel diameter of flange flange
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 \5/8\ \1/8\
2 1 \1/8\
3 1 \3/16\
4 1 \3/8\ \3/16\
5 1\3/4\ \1/4\
6 2 \3/8\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Note: Must be large enough to extend beyond the bushing. Where prong
anchor or cupback bushing are used, this footnote does not apply.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978;
49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.216 Mills and calenders in the rubber and plastics industries.
(a) General requirements--
(1)-(2) [Reserved]
(3) Auxiliary equipment. Mechanical and electrical equipment and
auxiliaries shall be installed in accordance with this section and
Subpart S of this part.
(4) Mill roll heights. All new mill installations shall be installed
so that the top of the operating rolls is not less than 50 inches above
the level on which the operator stands, irrespective of the size of the
mill. This distance shall apply to the actual working level, whether it
be at the general floor level, in a pit, or on a platform.
(b) Mill safety controls--(1) Safety trip control. A safety trip
control shall be provided in front and in back of each mill. It shall be
accessible and shall operate readily on contact. The safety trip control
shall be one of the following types or a combination thereof:
(i) Pressure-sensitive body bars. Installed at front and back of
each mill having a 46-inch roll height or over. These bars shall operate
readily by pressure of the mill operator's body.
(ii) Safety triprod. Installed in the front and in the back of each
mill and located within 2 inches of a vertical plane tangent to the
front and rear rolls. The top rods shall be not more than 72 inches
above the level on which the operator stands. The triprods shall be
accessible and shall operate readily whether the rods are pushed or
pulled.
(iii) Safety tripwire cable or wire center cord. Installed in the
front and in the back of each mill and located within 2 inches of a
vertical plane tangent to the front and rear rolls. The cables shall not
be more than 72 inches above the level on which the operator stands. The
tripwire cable or wire center cord shall operate readily whether cable
or cord is pushed or pulled.
(2) [Reserved]
(3) Auxiliary equipment. All auxiliary equipment such as mill
divider, support bars, spray pipes, feed conveyors, strip knives, etc.,
shall be located in such a manner as to avoid interference with access
to and operation of safety devices.
(c) Calender safety controls--(1) Safety trip, face. A safety
triprod, cable, or wire center cord shall be provided across each pair
of in-running rolls extending the length of the face of the rolls. It
shall be readily accessible and operate whether pushed or pulled. The
safety tripping devices shall be located within reach of the operator
and the bite.
(2) Safety trip, side. On both sides of the calender and near each
end of the face of the roll, there shall be a cable or wire center cord
connected to the safety trip. They shall operate readily when pushed or
pulled.
(d) Protection by location--(1) Mills. Where a mill is so installed
that persons cannot normally reach through, over, under, or around to
come in contact with the roll bite or be caught between a roll and an
adjacent object, then, provided such elements are made a fixed part of a
mill, safety control devices listed in paragraph (b) of this section
shall not apply.
(2) Calenders. Where a calender is so installed that persons cannot
normally reach through, over, under, or around
[[Page 631]]
to come in contact with the roll bite or be caught between a roll and an
adjacent object, then, provided such elements are made a fixed part of a
calender, safety control devices listed in paragraph (c) of this section
shall not apply.
(e) Trip and emergency switches. All trip and emergency switches
shall not be of the automatically resetting type, but shall require
manual resetting.
(f) Stopping limits--(1) Determination of distance of travel. All
measurements on mills and calenders shall be taken with the rolls
running empty at maximum operating speed. Stopping distances shall be
expressed in inches of surface travel of the roll from the instant the
emergency stopping device is actuated.
(2) Stopping limits for mills. All mills irrespective of the size of
the rolls or their arrangement (individually or group-driven) shall be
stopped within a distance, as measured in inches of surface travel, not
greater than 1\1/2\ percent of the peripheral no-load surface speeds of
the respective rolls as determined in feet per minute.
(3) Stopping limits for calenders. (i) All calenders, irrespective
of size of the rolls or their configuration, shall be stopped within a
distance, as measured in inches of surface travel, not greater than 1\3/
4\ percent of the peripheral no-load surface speeds of the respective
calender rolls as determined in feet per minute.
(ii) Where speeds above 250 feet per minute as measured on the
surface of the drive roll are used, stopping distances of more than 1\3/
4\ percent are permissible. Such stopping distances shall be subject to
engineering determination.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 61
FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.217 Mechanical power presses.
(a) General requirements.
(1)-(3) [Reserved]
(4) Reconstruction and modification. It shall be the responsibility
of any person reconstructing, or modifying a mechanical power press to
do so in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section.
(5) Excluded machines. Press brakes, hydraulic and pneumatic power
presses, bulldozers, hot bending and hot metal presses, forging presses
and hammers, riveting machines and similar types of fastener applicators
are excluded from the requirements of this section.
(b) Mechanical power press guarding and construction, general--(1)
Hazards to personnel associated with broken or falling machine
components. Machine components shall be designed, secured, or covered to
minimize hazards caused by breakage, or loosening and falling or release
of mechanical energy (i.e. broken springs).
(2) Brakes. Friction brakes provided for stopping or holding a slide
movement shall be inherently self-engaging by requiring power or force
from an external source to cause disengagement. Brake capacity shall be
sufficient to stop the motion of the slide quickly and capable of
holding the slide and its attachments at any point in its travel.
(3) Machines using full revolution positive clutches. (i) Machines
using full revolution clutches shall incorporate a single-stroke
mechanism.
(ii) If the single-stroke mechanism is dependent upon spring action,
the spring(s) shall be of the compression type, operating on a rod or
guided within a hole or tube, and designed to prevent interleaving of
the spring coils in event of breakage.
(4) Foot pedals (treadle). (i) The pedal mechanism shall be
protected to prevent unintended operation from falling or moving objects
or by accidental stepping onto the pedal.
(ii) A pad with a nonslip contact area shall be firmly attached to
the pedal.
(iii) The pedal return spring(s) shall be of the compression type,
operating on a rod or guided within a hole or tube, or designed to
prevent interleaving of spring coils in event of breakage.
(iv) If pedal counterweights are provided, the path of the travel of
the weight shall be enclosed.
(5) Hand operated levers. (i) Hand-lever-operated power presses
shall be equipped with a spring latch on the operating lever to prevent
premature or accidental tripping.
(ii) The operating levers on hand-tripped presses having more than
one operating station shall be interlocked
[[Page 632]]
to prevent the tripping of the press except by the ``concurrent'' use of
all levers.
(6) Two-hand trip. (i) A two-hand trip shall have the individual
operator's hand controls protected against unintentional operation and
have the individual operator's hand controls arranged by design and
construction and/or separation to require the use of both hands to trip
the press and use a control arrangement requiring concurrent operation
of the individual operator's hand controls.
(ii) Two-hand trip systems on full revolution clutch machines shall
incorporate an antirepeat feature.
(iii) If two-hand trip systems are used on multiple operator
presses, each operator shall have a separate set of controls.
(7) Machines using part revolution clutches. (i) The clutch shall
release and the brake shall be applied when the external clutch engaging
means is removed, deactivated, or deenergized.
(ii) A red color stop control shall be provided with the clutch/
brake control system. Momentary operation of the stop control shall
immediately deactivate the clutch and apply the brake. The stop control
shall override any other control, and reactuation of the clutch shall
require use of the operating (tripping) means which has been selected.
(iii) A means of selecting Off, ``Inch,'' Single Stroke, and
Continuous (when the continuous function is furnished) shall be supplied
with the clutch/brake control to select type of operation of the press.
Fixing of selection shall be by means capable of supervision by the
employer.
(iv) The ``Inch'' operating means shall be designed to prevent
exposure of the workers hands within the point of operation by:
(a) Requiring the concurrent use of both hands to actuate the
clutch, or
(b) Being a single control protected against accidental actuation
and so located that the worker cannot reach into the point of operation
while operating the single control.
(v) Two-hand controls for single stroke shall conform to the
following requirements:
(a) Each hand control shall be protected against unintended
operation and arranged by design, construction, and/or separation so
that the concurrent use of both hands is required to trip the press.
(b) The control system shall be designed to permit an adjustment
which will require concurrent pressure from both hands during the die
closing portion of the stroke.
(c) The control system shall incorporate an antirepeat feature.
(d) The control systems shall be designed to require release of all
operators' hand controls before an interrupted stroke can be resumed.
This requirement pertains only to those single-stroke, two-hand controls
manufactured and installed on or after August 31, 1971.
(vi) [Reserved]
(vii) Controls for more than one operating station shall be designed
to be activated and deactivated in complete sets of two operator's hand
controls per operating station by means capable of being supervised by
the employer. The clutch/brake control system shall be designed and
constructed to prevent actuation of the clutch if all operating stations
are bypassed.
(viii) Those clutch/brake control systems which contain both single
and continuous functions shall be designed so that completion of
continuous circuits may be supervised by the employer. The initiation of
continuous run shall require a prior action or decision by the operator
in addition to the selection of Continuous on the stroking selector,
before actuation of the operating means will result in continuous
stroking.
(ix) If foot control is provided, the selection method between hand
and foot control shall be separate from the stroking selector and shall
be designed so that the selection may be supervised by the employer.
(x) Foot operated tripping controls, if used, shall be protected so
as to prevent operation from falling or moving objects, or from
unintended operation by accidental stepping onto the foot control.
(xi) The control of air-clutch machines shall be designed to prevent
a
[[Page 633]]
significant increase in the normal stopping time due to a failure within
the operating value mechanism, and to inhibit further operation if such
failure does occur. This requirement shall apply only to those clutch/
brake air-valve controls manufactured and installed on or after August
31, 1971, but shall not apply to machines intended only for continuous,
automatic feeding applications.
(xii) The clutch/brake control shall incorporate an automatic means
to prevent initiation or continued activation of the Single Stroke or
Continuous functions unless the press drive motor is energized and in
the forward direction.
(xiii) The clutch/brake control shall automatically deactivate in
event of failure of the power or pressure supply for the clutch engaging
means. Reactivation of the clutch shall require restoration of normal
supply and the use of the tripping mechanism(s).
(xiv) The clutch/brake control shall automatically deactivate in
event of failure of the counterbalance(s) air supply. Reactivation of
the clutch shall require restoration of normal air supply and use of the
tripping mechanism(s).
(xv) Selection of bar operation shall be by means capable of being
supervised by the employer. A separate pushbutton shall be employed to
activate the clutch, and the clutch shall be activated only if the
driver motor is deenergized.
(8) Electrical. (i) A main power disconnect switch capable of being
locked only in the Off position shall be provided with every power press
control system.
(ii) The motor start button shall be protected against accidental
operation.
(iii) All mechanical power press controls shall incorporate a type
of drive motor starter that will disconnect the drive motor from the
power source in event of control voltage or power source failure, and
require operation of the motor start button to restart the motor when
voltage conditions are restored to normal.
(iv) All a.c. control circuits and solenoid value coils shall be
powered by not more than a nominal 120-volt a.c. supply obtained from a
transformer with an isolated secondary. Higher voltages that may be
necessary for operation of machine or control mechanisms shall be
isolated from any control mechanism handled by the operator, but motor
starters with integral Start-Stop buttons may utilize line voltage
control. All d.c. control circuits shall be powered by not more than a
nominal 240-volt d.c. supply isolated from any higher voltages.
(v) All clutch/brake control electrical circuits shall be protected
against the possibility of an accidental ground in the control circuit
causing false operation of the press.
(vi) Electrical clutch/brake control circuits shall incorporate
features to minimize the possibility of an unintended stroke in the
event of the failure of a control component to function properly,
including relays, limit switches, and static output circuits.
(9) Slide counterbalance systems. (i) Spring counterbalance systems
when used shall incorporate means to retain system parts in event of
breakage.
(ii) Spring counterbalances when used shall have the capability to
hold the slide and its attachments at midstroke, without brake applied.
(iii) Air counterbalance cylinders shall incorporate means to retain
the piston and rod in case of breakage or loosening.
(iv) Air counterbalance cylinders shall have adequate capability to
hold the slide and its attachments at any point in stroke, without brake
applied.
(v) Air counterbalance cylinders shall incorporate means to prevent
failure of capability (sudden loss of pressure) in event of air supply
failure.
(10) Air controlling equipment. Air controlling equipment shall be
protected against foreign material and water entering the pneumatic
system of the press. A means of air lubrication shall be provided when
needed.
(11) Hydraulic equipment. The maximum anticipated working pressures
in any hydraulic system on a mechanical power press shall not exceed the
safe working pressure rating of any component used in that system.
(12) Pressure vessels. All pressure vessels used in conjunction with
power presses shall conform to the American Society of Mechanical
Engineers Code
[[Page 634]]
for Pressure Vessels, 1968 Edition, which is incorporated by reference
as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(13) Control reliability. When required by paragraph (c)(5) of this
section, the control system shall be constructed so that a failure
within the system does not prevent the normal stopping action from being
applied to the press when required, but does prevent initiation of a
successive stroke until the failure is corrected. The failure shall be
detectable by a simple test, or indicated by the control system. This
requirement does not apply to those elements of the control system which
have no effect on the protection against point of operation injuries.
(14) Brake system monitoring. When required by paragraph (c)(5) of
this section, the brake monitor shall meet the following requirements:
(i) Be so constructed as to automatically prevent the activation of
a successive stroke if the stopping time or braking distance
deteriorates to a point where the safety distance being utilized does
not meet the requirements set forth in paragraph (c)(3)(iii)(e) or
(c)(3)(vii)(c) of this section. The brake monitor used with the Type B
gate or movable barrier device shall be installed in a manner to detect
slide top-stop overrun beyond the normal limit reasonably established by
the employer.
(ii) Be installed on a press such that it indicates when the
performance of the braking system has deteriorated to the extent
described in paragraph (b)(14)(i) of this section; and
(iii) Be constructed and installed in a manner to monitor brake
system performance on each stroke.
(c) Safeguarding the point of operation--(1) General requirements.
(i) It shall be the responsibility of the employer to provide and insure
the usage of ``point of operation guards'' or properly applied and
adjusted point of operation devices on every operation performed on a
mechanical power press. See Table O-10.
(ii) The requirement of paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section shall
not apply when the point of operation opening is one-fourth inch or
less. See Table O-10.
(2) Point of operation guards. (i) Every point of operation guard
shall meet the following design, construction, application, and
adjustment requirements:
(a) It shall prevent entry of hands or fingers into the point of
operation by reaching through, over, under or around the guard;
(b) It shall conform to the maximum permissible openings of Table O-
10;
(c) It shall, in itself, create no pinch point between the guard and
moving machine parts;
(d) It shall utilize fasteners not readily removable by operator, so
as to minimize the possibility of misuse or removal of essential parts;
(e) It shall facilitate its inspection, and
(f) It shall offer maximum visibility of the point of operation
consistent with the other requirements.
(ii) A die enclosure guard shall be attached to the die shoe or
stripper in a fixed position.
(iii) A fixed barrier guard shall be attached securely to the frame
of the press or to the bolster plate.
(iv) An interlocked press barrier guard shall be attached to the
press frame or bolster and shall be interlocked with the press clutch
control so that the clutch cannot be activated unless the guard itself,
or the hinged or movable sections of the guard are in position to
conform to the requirements of Table O-10.
(v) The hinged or movable sections of an interlocked press barrier
guard shall not be used for manual feeding. The guard shall prevent
opening of the interlocked section and reaching into the point of
operation prior to die closure or prior to the cessation of slide
motion. See paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of this section regarding manual
feeding through interlocked press barrier devices.
(vi) The adjustable barrier guard shall be securely attached to the
press bed, bolster plate, or die shoe, and shall be adjusted and
operated in conformity with Table O-10 and the requirements of this
subparagraph. Adjustments shall be made only by authorized personnel
whose qualifications include a knowledge of the provisions of Table O-10
and this subparagraph.
(vii) A point of operation enclosure which does not meet the
requirements of this subparagraph and Table O-10
[[Page 635]]
shall be used only in conjunction with point of operation devices.
(3) Point of operation devices. (i) Point of operation devices shall
protect the operator by:
(a) Preventing and/or stopping normal stroking of the press if the
operator's hands are inadvertently placed in the point of operation; or
(b) Preventing the operator from inadvertently reaching into the
point of operation, or withdrawing his hands if they are inadvertently
located in the point of operation, as the dies close; or
(c) Preventing the operator from inadvertently reaching into the
point of operation at all times; or
(d) [Reserved]
(e) Requiring application of both of the operator's hands to machine
operating controls and locating such controls at such a safety distance
from the point of operation that the slide completes the downward travel
or stops before the operator can reach into the point of operation with
his hands; or
(f) Enclosing the point of operation before a press stroke can be
initiated, and maintaining this closed condition until the motion of the
slide had ceased; or
(g) Enclosing the point of operation before a press stroke can be
initiated, so as to prevent an operator from reaching into the point of
operation prior to die closure or prior to cessation of slide motion
during the downward stroke.
(ii) A gate or movable barrier device shall protect the operator as
follows:
(a) A Type A gate or movable barrier device shall protect the
operator in the manner specified in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(f) of this
section, and
(b) A Type B gate or movable barrier device shall protect the
operator in the manner specified in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(g) of this
section.
(iii) A presence sensing point of operation device shall protect the
operator as provided in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(a) of this section, and
shall be interlocked into the control circuit to prevent or stop slide
motion if the operator's hand or other part of his body is within the
sensing field of the device during the downstroke of the press slide.
(a) The device may not be used on machines using full revolution
clutches.
(b) The device may not be used as a tripping means to initiate slide
motion, except when used in total conformance with paragraph (h) of this
section.
(c) The device shall be constructed so that a failure within the
system does not prevent the normal stopping action from being applied to
the press when required, but does prevent the initiation of a successive
stroke until the failure is corrected. The failure shall be indicated by
the system.
(d) Muting (bypassing of the protective function) of such device,
during the upstroke of the press slide, is permitted for the purpose of
parts ejection, circuit checking, and feeding.
(e) The safety distance (Ds) from the sensing field to
the point of operation shall be greater than the distance determined by
the following formula:
Ds = 63 inches/second x Ts
where:
Ds = minimum safety distance (inches); 63 inches/second=hand
speed constant;
and
Ts = stopping time of the press measured at approximately
90 deg. position of crankshaft rotation (seconds).
(f) Guards shall be used to protect all areas of entry to the point
of operation not protected by the presence sensing device.
(iv) The pull-out device shall protect the operator as specified in
paragraph (c)(3)(i)(b) of this section, and shall include attachments
for each of the operator's hands.
(a) Attachments shall be connected to and operated only by the press
slide or upper die.
(b) Attachments shall be adjusted to prevent the operator from
reaching into the point of operation or to withdraw the operator's hands
from the point of operation before the dies close.
(c) A separate pull-out device shall be provided for each operator
if more than one operator is used on a press.
(d) Each pull-out device in use shall be visually inspected and
checked for proper adjustment at the start of each operator shift,
following a new die set-
[[Page 636]]
up, and when operators are changed. Necessary maintenance or repair or
both shall be performed and completed before the press is operated.
Records of inspections and maintenance shall be kept in accordance with
paragraph (e) of this section.
(v) The sweep device may not be used for point of operation
safeguarding.
(vi) A holdout or a restraint device shall protect the operator as
specified in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(c) of this section and shall include
attachments for each of the operator's hands. Such attachments shall be
securely anchored and adjusted in such a way that the operator is
restrained from reaching into the point of operation. A separate set of
restraints shall be provided for each operator if more than one operator
is required on a press.
(vii) The two hand control device shall protect the operator as
specified in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(e) of this section.
(a) When used in press operations requiring more than one operator,
separate two hand controls shall be provided for each operator, and
shall be designed to require concurrent application of all operators'
controls to activate the slide. The removal of a hand from any control
button shall cause the slide to stop.
(b) Each two hand control shall meet the construction requirements
of paragraph (b)(7)(v) of this section.
(c) The safety distance (Ds) between each two hand
control device and the point of operation shall be greater than the
distance determined by the following formula:
Ds = 63 inches/second x Ts;
where:
Ds = minimum safety distance (inches); 63 inches/second=hand
speed constant;
and
Ts = stopping time of the press measured at approximately
90 deg. position of crankshaft rotation (seconds).
(d) Two hand controls shall be fixed in position so that only a
supervisor or safety engineer is capable of relocating the controls.
(viii) The two hand trip device shall protect the operator as
specified in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(e) of this section.
(a) When used in press operations requiring more than one operator,
separate two hand trips shall be provided for each operator, and shall
be designed to require concurrent application of all operators' to
activate the slide.
(b) Each two hand trip shall meet the construction requirements of
paragraph (b)(6) of this section.
(c) The safety distance (Dm) between the two hand trip
and the point of operation shall be greater than the distance determined
by the following formula:
Dm = 63 inches/second X Tm;
where:
Dm = minimum safety distance (inches); 63 inches/second=hand
speed constant;
and
Tm = the maximum time the press takes for the die closure
after it has been tripped (seconds). For full revolution clutch presses
with only one engaging point Tm is equal to the time
necessary for one and one-half revolutions of the crankshaft. For full
revolution clutch presses with more than one engaging point, Tm
shall be calculated as follows:
Tm = [\1/2\ + (1 / Number of engaging points per revolution)]
x time necessary to complete one revolution of the crankshaft (seconds).
(d) Two hand trips shall be fixed in position so that only a
supervisor or safety engineer is capable of relocating the controls.
(4) Hand feeding tools. Hand feeding tools are intended for placing
and removing materials in and from the press. Hand feeding tools are not
a point of operation guard or protection device and shall not be used in
lieu of the ``guards'' or devices required in this section.
(5) Additional requirements for safe-guarding. Where the operator
feeds or removes parts by placing one or both hands in the point of
operation, and a two hand control, presence sensing device of Type B
gate or movable barrier (on a part revolution clutch) is used for
safeguarding:
(i) The employer shall use a control system and a brake monitor
which comply with paragraphs (b) (13) and (14) of this section;
(ii) The exception in paragraph (b)(7)(v)(d) of this section for two
hand controls manufactured and installed before August 31, 1971 is not
applicable under this paragraph (c)(5);
(iii) The control of air clutch machines shall be designed to
prevent a
[[Page 637]]
significant increase in the normal stopping time due to a failure within
the operating valve mechanism, and to inhibit further operation if such
failure does occur, where a part revolution clutch is employed. The
exception in paragraph (b)(7)(xi) of this section for controls
manufactured and installed before August 31, 1971, is not applicable
under this paragraph (c)(5).
(d) Design, construction, setting and feeding of dies--(1) General
requirements. The employer shall: (i) Use dies and operating methods
designed to control or eliminate hazards to operating personnel, and
(ii) furnish and enforce the use of hand tools for freeing and removing
stuck work or scrap pieces from the die, so that no employee need reach
into the point of operation for such purposes.
(2) [Reserved]
(3) Scrap handling. The employer shall provide means for handling
scrap from roll feed or random length stock operations. Scrap cutters
used in conjunction with scrap handling systems shall be safeguarded in
accordance with paragraph (c) of this section and with Sec. 1910.219.
(4) Guide post hazard. The hazard created by a guide post (when it
is located in the immediate vicinity of the operator) when separated
from its bushing by more than one-fourth inch shall be considered as a
point of operation hazard and be protected in accordance with paragraph
(c) of this section.
(5) Unitized tooling. If unitized tooling is used, the opening
between the top of the punch holder and the face of the slide, or
striking pad, shall be safeguarded in accordance with the requirements
of paragraph (c) of this section.
(6) Tonnage, stroke, and weight designation. All dies shall be:
(i) Stamped with the tonnage and stroke requirements, or have these
characteristics recorded if these records are readily available to the
die setter;
(ii) Stamped to indicate upper die weight when necessary for air
counterbalance pressure adjustment; and
(iii) Stamped to indicate complete die weight when handling
equipment may become overloaded.
(7) Die fastening. Provision shall be made in both the upper and
lower shoes for securely mounting the die to the bolster and slide.
Where clamp caps or setscrews are used in conjunction with punch stems,
additional means of securing the upper shoe to the slide shall be used.
(8) Die handling. Handling equipment attach points shall be provided
on all dies requiring mechanical handling.
(9) Diesetting. (i) The employer shall establish a diesetting
procedure that will insure compliance with paragraph (c) of this
section.
(ii) The employer shall provide spring loaded turnover bars, for
presses designed to accept such turnover bars.
(iii) The employer shall provide die stops or other means to prevent
losing control of the die while setting or removing dies in presses
which are inclined.
(iv) The employer shall provide and enforce the use of safety blocks
for use whenever dies are being adjusted or repaired in the press.
(v) The employer shall provide brushes, swabs, lubricating rolls,
and automatic or manual pressure guns so that operators and diesetters
shall not be required to reach into the point of operation or other
hazard areas to lubricate material, punches or dies.
(e) Inspection, maintenance, and modification of presses--(1)
Inspection and maintenance records. (i) It shall be the responsibility
of the employer to establish and follow a program of periodic and
regular inspections of his power presses to ensure that all their parts,
auxiliary equipment, and safeguards are in a safe operating condition
and adjustment. The employer shall maintain a certification record of
inspections which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the
person who performed the inspection and the serial number, or other
identifier, of the power press that was inspected.
(ii) Each press shall be inspected and tested no less than weekly to
determine the condition of the clutch/brake mechanism, antirepeat
feature and single stroke mechanism. Necessary maintenance or repair or
both shall be performed and completed before the press is operated.
These requirements do not apply to those presses which
[[Page 638]]
comply with paragraphs (b) (13) and (14) of this section. The employer
shall maintain a certification record of inspections, tests and
maintenance work which includes the date of the inspection, test or
maintenance; the signature of the person who performed the inspection,
test, or maintenance; and the serial number or other identifier of the
press that was inspected, tested or maintained.
(2) Modification. It shall be the responsibility of any person
modifying a power press to furnish instructions with the modification to
establish new or changed guidelines for use and care of the power press
so modified.
(3) Training of maintenance personnel. It shall be the
responsibility of the employer to insure the original and continuing
competence of personnel caring for, inspecting, and maintaining power
presses.
(f) Operation of power presses--(1) [Reserved]
(2) Instruction to operators. The employer shall train and instruct
the operator in the safe method of work before starting work on any
operation covered by this section. The employer shall insure by adequate
supervision that correct operating procedures are being followed.
(3) Work area. The employer shall provide clearance between machines
so that movement of one operator will not interfere with the work of
another. Ample room for cleaning machines, handling material, work
pieces, and scrap shall also be provided. All surrounding floors shall
be kept in good condition and free from obstructions, grease, oil, and
water.
(4) Overloading. The employer shall operate his presses within the
tonnage and attachment weight ratings specified by the manufacturer.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.076
Explanation of above diagram:
This diagram shows the accepted safe openings between the bottom
edge of a guard and feed table at various distances from the danger line
(point of operation).
The clearance line marks the distance required to prevent contact
between guard and moving parts.
The minimum guarding line is the distance between the infeed side of
the guard and the danger line which is one-half inch from the danger
line.
The various openings are such that for average size hands an
operator's fingers won't reach the point of operation.
After installation of point of operation guards and before a job is
released for operation a check should be made to verify that the guard
will prevent the operator's hands from reaching the point of operation.
[[Page 639]]
Table O-10
[In inches]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum
Distance of opening from point of operation hazard width of
opening
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/2\ to 1\1/2\............................................. \1/4\
1\1/2\ to 2\1/2\............................................ \3/8\
2\1/2\ to 3\1/2\............................................ \1/2\
3\1/2\ to 5\1/2\............................................ \5/8\
5\1/2\ to 6\1/2\............................................ \3/4\
6\1/2\ to 7\1/2\............................................ \7/8\
7\1/2\ to 12\1/2\........................................... 1\1/4\
12\1/2\ to 15\1/2\.......................................... 1\1/2\
15\1/2\ to 17\1/2\.......................................... 1\7/8\
17\1/2\ to 31\1/2\.......................................... 2\1/8\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
This table shows the distances that guards shall be positioned from
the danger line in accordance with the required openings.
(g) Reports of injuries to employees operating mechanical power
presses. (1) The employer shall, within 30 days of the occurrence,
report to either the Director of the Directorate of Safety Standards
Programs, OSHA, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, D.C. 20210, or the
State agency administering a plan approved by the Assistant Secretary of
Labor for Occupational Safety and Health, all point of operation
injuries to operators or other employees. The following information
shall be included in the report:
(i) Employer's name, address and location of the workplace
(establishment).
(ii) Employee's name, injury sustained, and the task being performed
(operation, set-up, maintenance, or other).
(iii) Type of clutch used on the press (full revolution, part
revolution, or direct drive).
(iv) Type of safeguard(s) being used (two hand control, two hand
trip, pull-outs, sweeps, or other). If the safeguard is not described in
this section, give a complete description.
(v) Cause of the accident (repeat of press, safeguard failure,
removing stuck part or scrap, no safeguard provided, no safeguard in
use, or other).
(vi) Type of feeding (manual with hands in dies or with hands out of
dies, semiautomatic, automatic, or other).
(vii) Means used to actuate press stroke (foot trip, foot control,
hand trip, hand control, or other).
(viii) Number of operators required for the operation and the number
of operators provided with controls and safeguards.
(h) Presence sensing device initiation (PSDI)--(1) General. (i) The
requirements of paragraph (h) shall apply to all part revolution
mechanical power presses used in the PSDI mode of operation.
(ii) The relevant requirements of paragraphs (a) through (g) of this
section also shall apply to all presses used in the PSDI mode of
operation, whether or not cross referenced in this paragraph (h). Such
cross-referencing of specific requirements from paragraphs (a) through
(g) of this section is intended only to enhance convenience and
understanding in relating to the new provisions to the existing
standard, and is not to be construed as limiting the applicability of
other provisions in paragraphs (a) through (g) of this section.
(iii) Full revolution mechanical power presses shall not be used in
the PSDI mode of operation.
(iv) Mechanical power presses with a configuration which would allow
a person to enter, pass through, and become clear of the sensing field
into the hazardous portion of the press shall not be used in the PSDI
mode of operation.
(v) The PSDI mode of operation shall be used only for normal
production operations. Die-setting and maintenance procedures shall
comply with paragraphs (a) through (g) of this section, and shall not be
done in the PSDI mode.
(2) Brake and clutch requirements. (i) Presses with flexible steel
band brakes or with mechanical linkage actuated brakes or clutches shall
not be used in the PSDI mode.
(ii) Brake systems on presses used in the PSDI mode shall have
sufficient torque so that each average value of stopping times (Ts) for
stops initiated at approximately 45 degrees, 60 degrees, and 90 degrees,
respectively, of crankshaft angular position, shall not be more than 125
percent of the average value of the stopping time at the top crankshaft
position. Compliance with this requirement shall be determined by using
the heaviest upper die to be used on the press, and operating at the
fastest press speed if there is speed selection.
[[Page 640]]
(iii) Where brake engagement and clutch release is effected by
spring action, such spring(s) shall operate in compression on a rod or
within a hole or tube, and shall be of non-interleaving design.
(3) Pneumatic systems. (i) Air valve and air pressure supply/
control.
(A) The requirements of paragraphs (b)(7)(xiii), (b)(7)(xiv),
(b)(10), (b)(12) and (c)(5)(iii) of this section apply to the pneumatic
systems of machines used in the PSDI mode.
(B) The air supply for pneumatic clutch/brake control valves shall
incorporate a filter, an air regulator, and, when necessary for proper
operation, a lubricator.
(C) The air pressure supply for clutch/brake valves on machines used
in the PSDI mode shall be regulated to pressures less than or equal to
the air pressure used when making the stop time measurements required by
paragraph (h)(2)(ii) of this section.
(ii) Air counterbalance systems.
(A) Where presses that have slide counterbalance systems are used in
the PSDI mode, the counterbalance system shall also meet the
requirements of paragraph (b)(9) of this section.
(B) Counterbalances shall be adjusted in accordance with the press
manufacturer's recommendations to assure correct counterbalancing of the
slide attachment (upper die) weight for all operations performed on
presses used in the PSDI mode. The adjustments shall be made before
performing the stopping time measurements required by paragraphs
(h)(2)(ii), (h)(5)(iii), and (h)(9)(v) of this section.
(4) Flywheels and bearings. Presses whose designs incorporate
flywheels running on journals on the crankshaft or back shaft, or bull
gears running on journals mounted on the crankshaft, shall be inspected,
lubricated, and maintained as provided in paragraph (h)(10) of this
section to reduce the possibility of unintended and uncontrolled press
strokes caused by bearing seizure.
(5) Brake monitoring. (i) Presses operated in the PSDI mode shall be
equipped with a brake monitor that meets the requirements of paragraphs
(b)(13) and (b)(14) of this section. In addition, the brake monitor
shall be adjusted during installation certification to prevent
successive stroking of the press if increases in stopping time cause an
increase in the safety distance above that required by paragraph
(h)(9)(v) of this section.
(ii) Once the PSDI safety system has been certified/validated,
adjustment of the brake monitor shall not be done without prior approval
of the validation organization for both the brake monitor adjustment and
the corresponding adjustment of the safety distance. The validation
organization shall in its installation validation, state that in what
circumstances, if any, the employer has advance approval for adjustment,
when prior oral approval is appropriate and when prior approval must be
in writing. The adjustment shall be done under the supervision of an
authorized person whose qualifications include knowledge of safety
distance requirements and experience with the brake system and its
adjustment. When brake wear or other factors extend press stopping time
beyond the limit permitted by the brake monitor, adjustment, repair, or
maintenance shall be performed on the brake or other press system
element that extends the stopping time.
(iii) The brake monitor setting shall allow an increase of no more
than 10 percent of the longest stopping time for the press, or 10
milliseconds, whichever is longer, measured at the top of the stroke.
(6) Cycle control and control systems. (i) The control system on
presses used in the PSDI mode shall meet the applicable requirements of
paragraphs (b)(7), (b)(8), (b)(13), and (c)(5) of this section.
(ii) The control system shall incorporate a means of dynamically
monitoring for decoupling of the rotary position indicating mechanism
drive from the crankshaft. This monitor shall stop slide motion and
prevent successive press strokes if decoupling occurs, or if the monitor
itself fails.
(iii) The mode selection means of paragraph (b)(7)(iii) of this
section shall have at least one position for selection of the PSDI mode.
Where more than one interruption of the light sensing field is used in
the initiation of a stroke, either the mode selection means must have
one position for each
[[Page 641]]
function, or a separate selection means shall be provided which becomes
operable when the PSDI mode is selected. Selection of PSDI mode and the
number of interruptions/withdrawals of the light sensing field required
to initiate a press cycle shall be by means capable of supervision by
the employer.
(iv) A PSDI set-up/reset means shall be provided which requires an
overt action by the operator, in addition to PSDI mode selection, before
operation of the press by means of PSDI can be started.
(v) An indicator visible to the operator and readily seen by the
employer shall be provided which shall clearly indicate that the system
is set-up for cycling in the PSDI mode.
(vi) The control system shall incorporate a timer to deactivate PSDI
when the press does not stroke within the period of time set by the
timer. The timer shall be manually adjustable, to a maximum time of 30
seconds. For any timer setting greater than 15 seconds, the adjustment
shall be made by the use of a special tool available only to authorized
persons. Following a deactivation of PSDI by the timer, the system shall
make it necessary to reset the set-up/reset means in order to reactivate
the PSDI mode.
(vii) Reactivation of PSDI operation following deactivation of the
PSDI mode from any other cause, such as activation of the red color stop
control required by paragraph (b)(7)(ii) of this section, interruption
of the presence sensing field, opening of an interlock, or reselection
of the number of sensing field interruptions/withdrawals required to
cycle the press, shall require resetting of the set-up/reset means.
(viii) The control system shall incorporate an automatic means to
prevent initiation or continued operation in the PSDI mode unless the
press drive motor is energized in the forward direction of crankshaft
rotation.
(ix) The control design shall preclude any movement of the slide
caused by operation of power on, power off, or selector switches, or
from checks for proper operations as required by paragraph (h)(6)(xiv)
of this section.
(x) All components and subsystems of the control system shall be
designed to operate together to provide total control system compliance
with the requirements of this section.
(xi) Where there is more than one operator of a press used for PSDI,
each operator shall be protected by a separate, independently
functioning, presence sensing device. The control system shall require
that each sensing field be interrupted the selected number of times
prior to initiating a stroke. Further, each operator shall be provided
with a set-up/reset means that meets the requirements of paragraph
(h)(6) of this section, and which must be actuated to initiate operation
of the press in the PSDI mode.
(xii) [Reserved]
(xiii) The Control system shall incorporate interlocks for
supplemental guards, if used, which will prevent stroke initiation or
will stop a stroke in progress if any supplemental guard fails or is
deactivated.
(xiv) The control system shall perform checks for proper operation
of all cycle control logic element switches and contacts at least once
each cycle. Control elements shall be checked for correct status after
power ``on'' and before the initial PSDI stroke.
(xv) The control system shall have provisions for an ``inch''
operating means meeting the requirements of paragraph (b)(7)(iv) of this
section. Die-setting shall not be done in the PSDI mode. Production
shall not be done in the ``inch'' mode.
(xvi) The control system shall permit only a single stroke per
initiation command.
(xvii) Controls with internally stored programs (e.g., mechanical,
electro-mechanical, or electronic) shall meet the requirements of
paragraph (b)(13) of this section, and shall default to a predetermined
safe condition in the event of any single failure within the system.
Programmable controllers which meet the requirements for controls with
internally stored programs stated above shall be permitted only if all
logic elements affecting the safety system and point of operation safety
are internally stored and protected in such a manner that they cannot be
altered or manipulated by the user to an unsafe condition.
[[Page 642]]
(7) Environmental requirements. Control components shall be
selected, constructed, and connected together in such a way as to
withstand expected operational and environmental stresses, at least
including those outlined in appendix A. Such stresses shall not so
affect the control system as to cause unsafe operation.
(8) Safety system. (i) Mechanical power presses used in the PSDI
mode shall be operated under the control of a safety system which, in
addition to meeting the applicable requirements of paragraphs (b)(13)
and (c)(5) and other applicable provisions of this section, shall
function such that a single failure or single operating error shall not
cause injury to personnel from point of operation hazards.
(ii) The safety system shall be designed, constructed, and arranged
as an integral total system, including all elements of the press, the
controls, the safeguarding and any required supplemental safeguarding,
and their interfaces with the operator and that part of the environment
which has effect on the protection against point of operation hazards.
(9) Safeguarding the point of operation. (i) The point of operation
of presses operated in the PSDI mode shall be safeguarded in accordance
with the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section, except that the
safety distance requirements of paragraph (h)(9)(v) of this section
shall be used for PSDI operation.
(ii)(A) PSDI shall be implemented only by use of light curtain
(photo-electric) presence sensing devices which meet the requirements of
paragraph (c)(3)(iii)(c) of this section unless the requirements of the
following paragraph have been met.
(B) Alternatives to photo-electric light curtains may be used for
PSDI when the employer can demonstrate, through tests and analysis by
the employer or the manufacturer, that the alternative is as safe as the
photo-electric light curtain, that the alternative meets the conditions
of this section, has the same long term reliability as light curtains
and can be integrated into the entire safety system as provided for in
this section. Prior to use, both the employer and manufacturer must
certify that these requirements and all the other applicable
requirements of this section are met and these certifications must be
validated by an OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization to
meet these additional requirements and all the other applicable
requirements of paragraphs (a) through (h) and appendix A of this
section. Three months prior to the operation of any alternative system,
the employer must notify the OSHA Directorate of Safety Standards
Programs of the name of the system to be installed, the manufacturer and
the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization immediately.
Upon request, the employer must make available to that office all tests
and analyses for OSHA review.
(iii) Individual sensing fields of presence sensing devices used to
initiate strokes in the PSDI mode shall cover only one side of the
press.
(iv) Light curtains used for PSDI operation shall have minimum
object sensitivity not to exceed one and one-fourth inches (31.75 mm).
Where light curtain object sensitivity is user-adjustable, either
discretely or continuously, design features shall limit the minimum
object sensitivity adjustment not to exceed one and one-fourth inches
(31.75 mm). Blanking of the sensing field is not permitted.
(v) The safety distance (Ds) from the sensing field of the presence
sensing device to the point of operation shall be greater than or equal
to the distance determined by the formula:
Ds = Hsx(Ts+Tp+Tr+2Tm)+Dp
Where:
Ds = Minimum safety distance.
Hs = Hand speed constant of 63 inches per second (1.6 m/s).
Ts = Longest press stopping time, in seconds, computed by taking
averages of multiple measurements at each of three positions (45
degrees, 60 degrees, and 90 degrees) of crankshaft angular position; the
longest of the three averages is the stopping time to use. (Ts is
defined as the sum of the kinetic energy dissipation time plus the
pneumatic/magnetic/hydraulic reaction time of the clutch/brake operating
mechanism(s).)
Tp = Longest presence sensing device response time, in seconds.
Tr = Longest response time, in seconds, of all interposing control
elements between the presence sensing device and the clutch/brake
operating mechanism(s).
[[Page 643]]
Tm = Increase in the press stopping time at the top of the stroke, in
seconds, allowed by the brake monitor for brake wear. The time increase
allowed shall be limited to no more than 10 percent of the longest press
stopping time measured at the top of the stroke, or 10 milliseconds,
whichever is longer.
Dp = Penetration depth factor, required to provide for possible
penetration through the presence sensing field by fingers or hand before
detection occurs. The penetration depth factor shall be determined from
Graph h-1 using the minimum object sensitivity size.
[[Page 644]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.077
(vi) The presence sensing device location shall either be set at
each tool change and set-up to provide at least the minimum safety
distance, or fixed in location to provide a safety distance greater than
or equal to the minimum safety distance for all tooling set-ups which
are to be used on that press.
[[Page 645]]
(vii) Where presence sensing device location is adjustable,
adjustment shall require the use of a special tool available only to
authorized persons.
(viii) Supplemental safeguarding shall be used to protect all areas
of access to the point of operation which are unprotected by the PSDI
presence sensing device. Such supplemental safeguarding shall consist of
either additional light curtain (photo-electric) presence sensing
devices or other types of guards which meet the requirements of
paragraphs (c) and (h) of this section.
(A) Presence sensing devices used as supplemental safeguarding shall
not initiate a press stroke, and shall conform to the requirements of
paragraph (c)(3)(iii) and other applicable provisions of this section,
except that the safety distance shall comply with paragraph (h)(9)(v) of
this section.
(B) Guards used as supplemental safeguarding shall conform to the
design, construction and application requirements of paragraph (c)(2) of
this section, and shall be interlocked with the press control to prevent
press PSDI operation if the guard fails, is removed, or is out of
position.
(ix) Barriers shall be fixed to the press frame or bolster to
prevent personnel from passing completely through the sensing field,
where safety distance or press configuration is such that personnel
could pass through the PSDI presence sensing field and assume a position
where the point of operation could be accessed without detection by the
PSDI presence sensing device. As an alternative, supplemental presence
sensing devices used only in the safeguard mode may be provided. If
used, these devices shall be located so as to detect all operator
locations and positions not detected by the PSDI sensing field, and
shall prevent stroking or stop a stroke in process when any supplemental
sensing field(s) are interrupted.
(x) Hand tools. Where tools are used for feeding, removal of scrap,
lubrication of parts, or removal of parts that stick on the die in PSDI
operations:
(A) The minimum diameter of the tool handle extension shall be
greater than the minimum object sensitivity of the presence sensing
device(s) used to initiate press strokes; or
(B) The length of the hand tool shall be such as to ensure that the
operator's hand will be detected for any safety distance required by the
press set-ups.
(10) Inspection and maintenance. (i) Any press equipped with
presence sensing devices for use in PSDI, or for supplemental
safeguarding on presses used in the PSDI mode, shall be equipped with a
test rod of diameter specified by the presence sensing device
manufacturer to represent the minimum object sensitivity of the sensing
field. Instructions for use of the test rod shall be noted on a label
affixed to the presence sensing device.
(ii) The following checks shall be made at the beginning of each
shift and whenever a die change is made.
(A) A check shall be performed using the test rod according to the
presence sensing device manufacturer's instructions to determine that
the presence sensing device used for PSDI is operational.
(B) The safety distance shall be checked for compliance with
(h)(9)(v) of this section.
(C) A check shall be made to determine that all supplemental
safeguarding is in place. Where presence sensing devices are used for
supplemental safeguarding, a check for proper operation shall be
performed using the test rod according to the presence sensing device
manufacturer's instructions.
(D) A check shall be made to assure that the barriers and/or
supplemental presence sensing devices required by paragraph (h)(9)(ix)
of this section are operating properly.
(E) A system or visual check shall be made to verify correct
counterbalance adjustment for die weight according to the press
manufacturer's instructions, when a press is equipped with a slide
counterbalance system.
(iii) When presses used in the PSDI mode have flywheel or bullgear
running on crankshaft mounted journals and bearings, or a flywheel
mounted on back shaft journals and bearings, periodic inspections
following the press manufacturer's recommendations shall be made to
ascertain that bearings are
[[Page 646]]
in good working order, and that automatic lubrication systems for these
bearings (if automatic lubrication is provided) are supplying proper
lubrication. On presses with provision for manual lubrication of
flywheel or bullgear bearings, lubrication shall be provided according
to the press manufacturer's recommendations.
(iv) Periodic inspections of clutch and brake mechanisms shall be
performed to assure they are in proper operating condition. The press
manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed.
(v) When any check of the press, including those performed in
accordance with the requirements of paragraphs (h)(10)(ii), (iii) or
(iv) of this section, reveals a condition of noncompliance, improper
adjustment, or failure, the press shall not be operated until the
condition has been corrected by adjustment, replacement, or repair.
(vi) It shall be the responsibility of the employer to ensure the
competence of personnel caring for, inspecting, and maintaining power
presses equipped for PSDI operation, through initial and periodic
training.
(11) Safety system certification/validation. (i) Prior to the
initial use of any mechanical press in the PSDI mode, two sets of
certification and validation are required:
(A) The design of the safety system required for the use of a press
in the PSDI mode shall be certified and validated prior to installation.
The manufacturer's certification shall be validated by an OSHA-
recognized third-party validation organization to meet all applicable
requirements of paragraphs (a) through (h) and appendix A of this
section.
(B) After a press has been equipped with a safety system whose
design has been certified and validated in accordance with paragraph
(h)(11)(i) of this section, the safety system installation shall be
certified by the employer, and then shall be validated by an OSHA-
recognized third-party validation organization to meet all applicable
requirements of paragraphs (a) through (h) and appendix A of this
section.
(ii) At least annually thereafter, the safety system on a mechanical
power press used in the PSDI mode shall be recertified by the employer
and revalidated by an OSHA-recognized third-party validation
organization to meet all applicable requirements of paragraphs (a)
through (h) and appendix A of this section. Any press whose safety
system has not been recertified and revalidated within the preceding 12
months shall be removed from service in the PSDI mode until the safety
system is recertified and revalidated.
(iii) A label shall be affixed to the press as part of each
installation certification/validation and the most recent
recertification/revalidation. The label shall indicate the press serial
number, the minimum safety distance (Ds) required by paragraph (h)(9)(v)
of this section, the fulfillment of design certification/validation, the
employer's signed certification, the identification of the OSHA-
recognized third-party validation organization, its signed validation,
and the date the certification/validation and recertification/
revalidation are issued.
(iv) Records of the installation certification and validation and
the most recent recertification and revalidation shall be maintained for
each safety system equipped press by the employer as long as the press
is in use. The records shall include the manufacture and model number of
each component and subsystem, the calculations of the safety distance as
required by paragraph (h)(9)(v) of this section, and the stopping time
measurements required by paragraph (h)(2)(ii) of this section. The most
recent records shall be made available to OSHA upon request.
(v) The employer shall notify the OSHA-recognized third-party
validation organization within five days whenever a component or a
subsystem of the safety system fails or modifications are made which may
affect the safety of the system. The failure of a critical component
shall necessitate the removal of the safety system from service until it
is recertified and revalidated, except recertification by the employer
without revalidation is permitted when a non-critical component or
subsystem is replaced by one of the same manufacture and design as the
original, or determined by the third-party validation organization to be
[[Page 647]]
equivalent by similarity analysis, as set forth in appendix A.
(vi) The employer shall notify the OSHA-recognized third-party
validation organization within five days of the occurrence of any point
of operation injury while a press is used in the PSDI mode. This is in
addition to the report of injury required by paragraph (g) of this
section; however, a copy of that report may be used for this purpose.
(12) Die setting and work set-up. (i) Die setting on presses used in
the PSDI mode shall be performed in accordance with paragraphs (d) and
(h) of this section.
(ii) The PSDI mode shall not be used for die setting or set-up. An
alternative manual cycle initiation and control means shall be supplied
for use in die setting which meets the requirements of paragraph (b)(7)
of this section.
(iii) Following a die change, the safety distance, the proper
application of supplemental safeguarding, and the slide counterbalance
adjustment (if the press is equipped with a counterbalance) shall be
checked and maintained by authorized persons whose qualifications
include knowledge of the safety distance, supplemental safeguarding
requirements, and the manufacturer's specifications for counterbalance
adjustment. Adjustment of the location of the PSDI presence sensing
device shall require use of a special tool available only to the
authorized persons.
(13) Operator training. (i) The operator training required by
paragraph (f)(2) of this section shall be provided to the employee
before the employee initially operates the press and as needed to
maintain competence, but not less than annually thereafter. It shall
include instruction relative to the following items for presses used in
the PSDI mode.
(A) The manufacturer's recommended test procedures for checking
operation of the presence sensing device. This shall include the use of
the test rod required by paragraph (h)(10)(i) of this section.
(B) The safety distance required.
(C) The operation, function and performance of the PSDI mode.
(D) The requirements for hand tools that may be used in the PSDI
mode.
(E) The severe consequences that can result if he or she attempts to
circumvent or by-pass any of the safeguard or operating functions of the
PSDI system.
(ii) The employer shall certify that employees have been trained by
preparing a certification record which includes the identity of the
person trained, the signature of the employer or the person who
conducted the training, and the date the training was completed. The
certification record shall be prepared at the completion of training and
shall be maintained on file for the duration of the employee's
employment. The certification record shall be made available upon
request to the Assistant Secretary for Occupational Safety and Health.
Appendix A to Sec. 1910.217--Mandatory Requirements for Certification/
Validation of Safety Systems for Presence Sensing Device Initiation of
Mechanical Power Presses
Purpose
The purpose of the certification/validation of safety systems for
presence sensing device initiation (PSDI) of mechanical power presses is
to ensure that the safety systems are designed, installed, and
maintained in accordance with all applicable requirements of 29 CFR
1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A.
General
The certification/validation process shall utilize an independent
third-party validation organization recognized by OSHA in accordance
with the requirements specified in appendix C of this section.
While the employer is responsible for assuring that the
certification/validation requirements in Sec. 1910.217(h)(11) are
fulfilled, the design certification of PSDI safety systems may be
initiated by manufacturers, employers, and/or their representatives. The
term manufacturers refers to the manufacturer of any of the components
of the safety system. An employer who assembles a PSDI safety system
would be a manufacturer as well as employer for purposes of this
standard and appendix.
The certification/validation process includes two stages. For design
certification, in the first stage, the manufacturer (which can be an
employer) certifies that the PSDI safety system meets the requirements
of 29
[[Page 648]]
CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A, based on appropriate
design criteria and tests. In the second stage, the OSHA-recognized
third-party validation organization validates that the PSDI safety
system meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and
this appendix A and the manufacturer's certification by reviewing the
manufacturer's design and test data and performing any additional
reviews required by this standard or which it believes appropriate.
For installation certification/validation and annual
recertification/revalidation, in the first stage the employer certifies
or recertifies that the employer is installing or utilizing a PSDI
safety system validated as meeting the design requirements of 29 CFR
1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A by an OSHA-recognized
third-party validation organization and that the installation, operation
and maintenance meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h)
and this appendix A. In the second stage, the OSHA-recognized third-
party validation organization validates or revalidates that the PSDI
safety system installation meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a)
through (h) and this appendix A and the employer's certification, by
reviewing that the PSDI safety system has been certified; the employer's
certification, designs and tests, if any; the installation, operation,
maintenance and training; and by performing any additional tests and
reviews which the validation organization believes is necessary.
Summary
The certification/validation of safety systems for PSDI shall
consider the press, controls, safeguards, operator, and environment as
an integrated system which shall comply with all of the requirements in
29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A. The certification/
validation process shall verify that the safety system complies with the
OSHA safety requirements as follows:
A. Design Certification/Validation
1. The major parts, components and subsystems used shall be defined
by part number or serial number, as appropriate, and by manufacturer to
establish the configuration of the system.
2. The identified parts, components and subsystems shall be
certified by the manufacturer to be able to withstand the functional and
operational environments of the PSDI safety system.
3. The total system design shall be certified by the manufacturer as
complying with all requirements in 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and
this appendix A.
4. The third-party validation organization shall validate the
manufacturer's certification under paragraphs 2 and 3.
B. Installation Certification/Validation
1. The employer shall certify that the PSDI safety system has been
design certified and validated, that the installation meets the
operational and environmental requirements specified by the
manufacturer, that the installation drawings are accurate, and that the
installation meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h)
and this appendix A. (The operational and installation requirements of
the PSDI safety system may vary for different applications.)
2. The third-party validation organization shall validate the
employer's certifications that the PSDI safety system is design
certified and validated, that the installation meets the installation
and environmental requirements specified by the manufacturer, and that
the installation meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through
(h) and this appendix A.
C. Recertification/Revalidation
1. The PSDI safety system shall remain under certification/
validation for the shorter of one year or until the system hardware is
changed, modified or refurbished, or operating conditions are changed
(including environmental, application or facility changes), or a failure
of a critical component has occurred.
2. Annually, or after a change specified in paragraph 1., the
employer shall inspect and recertify the installation as meeting the
requirements set forth under B., Installation Certification/Validation.
3. The third-party validation organization, annually or after a
change specified in paragraph 1., shall validate the employer's
certification that the requirements of paragraph B., Installation
Certification/Validation have been met.
(Note: Such changes in operational conditions as die changes or
press relocations not involving disassembly or revision to the safety
system would not require recertification/revalidation.)
Certification/Validation Requirements
A. General Design Certification/Validation Requirements
1. Certification/Validation Program Requirements. The manufacturer
shall certify and the OSHA-recognized third-party validation
organization shall validate that:
(a) The design of components, subsystems, software and assemblies
meets OSHA performance requirements and are ready for the intended use;
and
(b) The performance of combined subsystems meets OSHA's operational
requirements.
2. Certification/Validation Program Level of Risk Evaluation
Requirements. The manufacturer shall evaluate and certify, and the
[[Page 649]]
OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization shall validate, the
design and operation of the safety system by determining conformance
with the following:
a. The safety system shall have the ability to sustain a single
failure or a single operating error and not cause injury to personnel
from point of operation hazards. Acceptable design features shall
demonstrate, in the following order or precedence, that:
(1) No single failure points may cause injury; or
(2) Redundancy, and comparison and/or diagnostic checking, exist for
the critical items that may cause injury, and the electrical,
electronic, electromechanical and mechanical parts and components are
selected so that they can withstand operational and external
environments. The safety factor and/or derated percentage shall be
specifically noted and complied with.
b. The manufacturer shall design, evaluate, test and certify, and
the third-party validation organization shall evaluate and validate,
that the PSDI safety system meets appropriate requirements in the
following areas.
(1) Environmental Limits
(a) Temperature
(b) Relative humidity
(c) Vibration
(d) Fluid compatability with other materials
(2) Design Limits
(a) Power requirements
(b) Power transient tolerances
(c) Compatability of materials used
(d) Material stress tolerances and limits
(e) Stability to long term power fluctuations
(f) Sensitivity to signal acquisition
(g) Repeatability of measured parameter without inadvertent
initiation of a press stroke
(h) Operational life of components in cycles, hours, or both
(i) Electromagnetic tolerance to:
(1) Specific operational wave lengths; and
(2) Externally generated wave lengths
(3) New Design Certification/Validation. Design certification/
validation for a new safety system, i.e., a new design or new
integration of specifically identified components and subsystems, would
entail a single certification/validation which would be applicable to
all identical safety systems. It would not be necessary to repeat the
tests on individual safety systems of the same manufacture or design.
Nor would it be necessary to repeat these tests in the case of
modifications where determined by the manufacturer and validated by the
third-party validation organization to be equivalent by similarity
analysis. Minor modifications not affecting the safety of the system may
be made by the manufacturer without revalidation.
Substantial modifications would require testing as a new safety
system, as deemed necessary by the validation organization.
B. Additional Detailed Design Certification/Validation Requirements
1. General. The manufacturer or the manufacturer's representative
shall certify to and submit to an OSHA-recognized third-party validation
organization the documentation necessary to demonstrate that the PSDI
safety system design is in full compliance with the requirements of 29
CFR 1910.217(a)-(h) and this appendix A, as applicable, by means of
analysis, tests, or combination of both, establishing that the following
additional certification/validation requirements are fulfilled.
2. Reaction Times. For the purpose of demonstrating compliance with
the reaction time required by Sec. 1910.217(h), the tests shall use the
following definitions and requirements:
a. Reaction time means the time, in seconds, it takes the signal,
required to activate/deactivate the system, to travel through the
system, measured from the time of signal initiation to the time the
function being measured is completed.
b. Full stop or No movement of the slide or ram means when the
crankshaft rotation has slowed to two or less revolutions per minute,
just before stopping completely.
c. Function completion means for, electrical, electromechanical and
electronic devices, when the circuit produces a change of state in the
output element of the device.
d. When the change of state is motion, the measurement shall be made
at the completion of the motion.
e. The generation of the test signal introduced into the system for
measuring reaction time shall be such that the initiation time can be
established with an error of less than 0.5 percent of the reaction time
measured.
f. The instrument used to measure reaction time shall be calibrated
to be accurate to within 0.001 second.
3. Compliance with Sec. 1910.217(h)(2)(ii). For compliance with
these requirements, the average value of the stopping time, Ts, shall be
the arithmetic mean of at least 25 stops for each stop angle initiation
measured with the brake and/or clutch unused, 50 percent worn, and 90
percent worn. The recommendations of the brake system manufacturer shall
be used to simulate or estimate the brake wear. The manufacturer's
recommended minimum lining depth shall be identified and documented, and
an evaluation made that the minimum depth will not be exceeded before
the next (annual) recertification/revalidation. A correlation of the
brake and/or clutch degradation based on the above tests and/or
estimates shall be made and documented. The results shall document the
conditions
[[Page 650]]
under which the brake and/or clutch will and will not comply with the
requirement. Based upon this determination, a scale shall be developed
to indicate the allowable 10 percent of the stopping time at the top of
the stroke for slide or ram overtravel due to brake wear. The scale
shall be marked to indicate that brake adjustment and/or replacement is
required. The explanation and use of the scale shall be documented.
The test specification and procedure shall be submitted to the
validation organization for review and validation prior to the test. The
validation organization representative shall witness at least one set of
tests.
4. Compliance with Secs. 1910.217(h)(5)(iii) and (h)(9)(v). Each
reaction time required to calculate the Safety Distance, including the
brake monitor setting, shall be documented in separate reaction time
tests. These tests shall specify the acceptable tolerance band
sufficient to assure that tolerance build-up will not render the safety
distance unsafe.
a. Integrated test of the press fully equipped to operate in the
PSDI mode shall be conducted to establish the total system reaction
time.
b. Brakes which are the adjustable type shall be adjusted properly
before the test.
5. Compliance with Sec. 1910.217(h)(2)(iii). a. Prior to conducting
the brake system test required by paragraph (h)(2)(ii), a visual check
shall be made of the springs. The visual check shall include a
determination that the spring housing or rod does not show damage
sufficient to degrade the structural integrity of the unit, and the
spring does not show any tendency to interleave.
b. Any detected broken or unserviceable springs shall be replaced
before the test is conducted. The test shall be considered successful if
the stopping time remains within that which is determined by paragraph
(h)(9)(v) for the safety distance setting. If the increase in press
stopping time exceeds the brake monitor setting limit defined in
paragraph (h)(5)(iii), the test shall be considered unsuccessful, and
the cause of the excessive stopping time shall be investigated. It shall
be ascertained that the springs have not been broken and that they are
functioning properly.
6. Compliance with Sec. 1910.217(h)(7). a. Tests which are conducted
by the manufacturers of electrical components to establish stress, life,
temperature and loading limits must be tests which are in compliance
with the provisions of the National Electrical Code.
b. Electrical and/or electronic cards or boards assembled with
discreet components shall be considered a subsystem and shall require
separate testing that the subsystems do not degrade in any of the
following conditions:
(1) Ambient temperature variation from -20 deg. C to +50 deg. C.
(2) Ambient relative humidity of 99 percent.
(3) Vibration of 45G for one millisecond per stroke when the item is
to be mounted on the press frame.
(4) Electromagnetic interference at the same wavelengths used for
the radiation sensing field, at the power line frequency fundamental and
harmonics, and also from outogenous radiation due to system switching.
(5) Electrical power supply variations of 15 percent.
c. The manufacturer shall specify the test requirements and
procedures from existing consensus tests in compliance with the
provisions of the National Electrical Code.
d. Tests designed by the manufacturer shall be made available upon
request to the validation organization. The validation organization
representative shall witness at least one set of each of these tests.
7. Compliance with Sec. 1910.217(h)(9)(iv). a. The manufacturer
shall design a test to demonstrate that the prescribed minimum object
sensitivity of the presence sensing device is met.
b. The test specifications and procedures shall be made available
upon request to the validation organization.
8. Compliance with Sec. 1910.217(h)(9)(x). a. The manufacturer shall
design a test(s) to establish the hand tool extension diameters allowed
for variations in minimum object sensitivity response.
b. The test(s) shall document the range of object diameter sizes
which will produce both single and double break conditions.
c. The test(s) specifications and procedures shall be made available
upon request to the validation organization.
9. Integrated Tests Certification/Validation. a. The manufacturer
shall design a set of integrated tests to demonstrate compliance with
the following requirements:
Sections 1910.217(h)(6) (ii); (iii); (iv); (v); (vi); (vii); (viii);
(ix); (xi); (xii); (xiii); (xiv); (xv); and (xvii).
b. The integrated test specifications and procedures shall be made
available to the validation organization.
10. Analysis. a. The manufacturer shall submit to the validation
organization the technical analysis such as Hazard Analysis, Failure
Mode and Effect Analysis, Stress Analysis, Component and Material
Selection Analysis, Fluid Compatability, and/or other analyses which may
be necessary to demonstrate, compliance with the following requirements:
Sections 1910.217(h)(8) (i) and (ii); (h)(2) (ii) and (iii);
(h)(3)(i) (A) and (C), and (ii); (h)(5) (i), (ii) and (iii); (h)(6) (i),
(iii), (iv), (vi), (vii), (viii), (ix), (x), (xi), (xiii), (xiv), (xv),
(xvi), and (xvii); (h)(7) (i) and (ii); (h)(9) (iv), (v), (viii), (ix)
and (x); (h)(10) (i) and (ii).
[[Page 651]]
11. Types of Tests Acceptable for Certification/Validation. a. Test
results obtained from development testing may be used to certify/
validate the design.
b. The test results shall provide the engineering data necessary to
establish confidence that the hardware and software will meet
specifications, the manufacturing process has adequate quality control
and the data acquired was used to establish processes, procedures, and
test levels supporting subsequent hardware design, production,
installation and maintenance.
12. Validation for Design Certification/Validation. If, after review
of all documentation, tests, analyses, manufacturer's certifications,
and any additional tests which the third-party validation organization
believes are necessary, the third-party validation organization
determines that the PSDI safety system is in full compliance with the
applicable requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a) through (h) and this
appendix A, it shall validate the manufacturer's certification that it
so meets the stated requirements.
C. Installation Certification/Validation Requirements
1. The employer shall evaluate and test the PSDI system
installation, shall submit to the OSHA-recognized third-party validation
organization the necessary supporting documentation, and shall certify
that the requirements of Sec. 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix
A have been met and that the installation is proper.
2. The OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization shall
conduct tests, and/or review and evaluate the employer's installation
tests, documentation and representations. If it so determines, it shall
validate the employer's certification that the PSDI safety system is in
full conformance with all requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a) through (h)
and this appendix A.
D. Recertification/Revalidation Requirements
1. A PSDI safety system which has received installation
certification/validation shall undergo recertification/revalidation the
earlier of:
a. Each time the systems hardware is significantly changed,
modified, or refurbished;
b. Each time the operational conditions are significantly changed
(including environmental, application or facility changes, but excluding
such changes as die changes or press relocations not involving revision
to the safety system);
c. When a failure of a significant component has occurred or a
change has been made which may affect safety; or
d. When one year has elapsed since the installation certification/
validation or the last recertification/revalidation.
2. Conduct or recertification/revalidation. The employer shall
evaluate and test the PSDI safety system installation, shall submit to
the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization the necessary
supporting documentation, and shall recertify that the requirements of
Sec. 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix are being met. The
documentation shall include, but not be limited to, the following items:
a. Demonstration of a thorough inspection of the entire press and
PSDI safety system to ascertain that the installation, components and
safeguarding have not been changed, modified or tampered with since the
installation certification/validation or last recertification/
revalidation was made.
b. Demonstrations that such adjustments as may be needed (such as to
the brake monitor setting) have been accomplished with proper changes
made in the records and on such notices as are located on the press and
safety system.
c. Demonstration that review has been made of the reports covering
the design certification/validation, the installation certification/
validation, and all recertification/revalidations, in order to detect
any degradation to an unsafe condition, and that necessary changes have
been made to restore the safety system to previous certification/
validation levels.
3. The OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization shall
conduct tests, and/or review and evaluate the employer's installation,
tests, documentation and representations. If it so determines, it shall
revalidate the employer's recertification that the PSDI system is in
full conformance with all requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a) through (h)
and this appendix A.
Appendix B to Sec. 1910.217--Nonmandatory Guidelines for Certification/
Validation of Safety Systems for Presence Sensing Device Initiation of
Mechanical Power Presses
Objectives
This appendix provides employers, manufacturers, and their
representatives, with nonmandatory guidelines for use in developing
certification documents. Employers and manufacturers are encouraged to
recommend other approaches if there is a potential for improving safety
and reducing cost. The guidelines apply to certification/validation
activity from design evaluation through the completion of the
installation test and the annual recertification/revalidation tests.
General Guidelines
A. The certification/validation process should confirm that hazards
identified by hazard analysis, (HA), failure mode effect analysis
(FMEA), and other system analyses have been eliminated by design or
reduced to
[[Page 652]]
an acceptable level through the use of appropriate design features,
safety devices, warning devices, or special procedures. The
certification/validation process should also confirm that residual
hazards identified by operational analysis are addressed by warning,
labeling safety instructions or other appropriate means.
B. The objective of the certification/validation program is to
demonstrate and document that the system satisfies specification and
operational requirements for safe operations.
Quality Control
The safety attributes of a certified/validated PSDI safety system
are more likely to be maintained if the quality of the system and its
parts, components and subsystem is consistently controlled. Each
manufacturer supplying parts, components, subsystems, and assemblies
needs to maintain the quality of the product, and each employer needs to
maintain the system in a non-degraded condition.
Analysis Guidelines
A. Certification/validation of hardware design below the system
level should be accomplished by test and/or analysis.
B. Analytical methods may be used in lieu of, in combination with,
or in support of tests to satisfy specification requirements.
C. Analyses may be used for certification/validation when existing
data are available or when test is not feasible.
D. Similarity analysis may be used in lieu of tests where it can be
shown that the article is similar in design, manufacturing process, and
quality control to another article that was previously certified/
validated in accordance with equivalent or more stringent criteria. If
previous design, history and application are considered to be similar,
but not equal to or more exacting than earlier experiences, the
additional or partial certification/validation tests should concentrate
on the areas of changed or increased requirements.
Analysis Reports
The analysis reports should identify: (1) The basis for the
analysis; (2) the hardware or software items analyzed; (3) conclusions;
(4) safety factors; and (5) limit of the analysis. The assumptions made
during the analysis should be clearly stated and a description of the
effects of these assumptions on the conclusions and limits should be
included.
Certification/validation by similarity analysis reports should
identify, in addition to the above, application of the part, component
or subsystem for which certification/validation is being sought as well
as data from previous usage establishing adequacy of the item.
Similarity analysis should not be accepted when the internal and
external stresses on the item being certified/validated are not defined.
Usage experience should also include failure data supporting
adequacy of the design.
Appendix C to Sec. 1910.217--Mandatory Requirements for OSHA Recognition
of Third-Party Validation Organizations for the PSDI Standard
This appendix prescribes mandatory requirements and procedures for
OSHA recognition of third-party validation organizations to validate
employer and manufacturer certifications that their equipment and
practices meet the requirements of the PSDI standard. The scope of the
appendix includes the three categories of certification/validation
required by the PSDI standard: Design Certification/Validation,
Installation Certification/Validation, and Annual Recertification/
Revalidation.
If further detailing of these provisions will assist the validation
organization or OSHA in this activity, this detailing will be done
through appropriate OSHA Program Directives.
I. Procedure for OSHA Recognition of Validation Organizations
A. Applications
1. Eligibility. a. Any person or organization considering itself
capable of conducting a PSDI-related third-party validation function may
apply for OSHA recognition.
b. However, in determining eligibility for a foreign-based third-
party validation organization, OSHA shall take into consideration
whether there is reciprocity of treatment by the foreign government
after consultation with relevant U.S. government agencies.
2. Content of application. a. The application shall identify the
scope of the validation activity for which the applicant wishes to be
recognized, based on one of the following alternatives:
(1) Design Certification/Validation, Installation Certification/
Validation, and Annual Recertification/Revalidation;
(2) Design Certification/Validation only; or
(3) Installation/Certification/Validation and Annual
Recertification/Revalidation.
b. The application shall provide information demonstrating that it
and any validating laboratory utilized meet the qualifications set forth
in section II of this appendix.
c. The applicant shall provide information demonstrating that it and
any validating laboratory utilized meet the program requirements set
forth in section III of this appendix.
d. The applicant shall identify the test methods it or the
validating laboratory will
[[Page 653]]
use to test or judge the components and operations of the PSDI safety
system required to be tested by the PSDI standard and appendix A, and
shall specify the reasons the test methods are appropriate.
e. The applicant may include whatever enclosures, attachments, or
exhibits the applicant deems appropriate. The application need not be
submitted on a Federal form.
f. The applicant shall certify that the information submitted is
accurate.
3. Filing office location. The application shall be filed with: PSDI
Certification/Validation Program, Office of Variance Determination,
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Department of Labor,
Room N3653, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210.
4. Amendments and withdrawals. a. An application may be revised by
an applicant at any time prior to the completion of the final staff
recommendation.
b. An application may be withdrawn by an applicant, without
prejudice, at any time prior to the final decision by the Assistant
Secretary in paragraph I.B.8.b.(4) of this appendix.
B. Review and Decision Process
1. Acceptance and field inspection. All applications submitted will
be accepted by OSHA, and their receipt acknowledged in writing. After
receipt of an application, OSHA may request additional information if it
believes information relevant to the requirements for recognition have
been omitted. OSHA may inspect the facilities of the third-party
validation organization and any validating laboratory, and while there
shall review any additional documentation underlying the application. A
report shall be made of each field inspection.
2. Requirements for recognition. The requirements for OSHA
recognition of a third-party validation organization for the PSDI
standard are that the program has fulfilled the requirements of section
II of this appendix for qualifications and of section III of this
appendix for program requirements, and the program has identified
appropriate test and analysis methods to meet the requirements of the
PSDI standard and appendix A.
3. Preliminary approval. If, after review of the application, any
additional information, and the inspection report, the applicant and any
validating laboratory appear to have met the requirements for
recognition, a written recommendation shall be submitted by the
responsible OSHA personnel to the Assistant Secretary to approve the
application with a supporting explanation.
4. Preliminary disapproval. If, after review of the application,
additional information, and inspection report, the applicant does not
appear to have met the requirements for recognition, the Director of the
PSDI certification/validation program shall notify the applicant in
writing, listing the specific requirements of this appendix which the
applicant has not met, and the reasons.
5. Revision of application. After receipt of a notification of
preliminary disapproval, the applicant may submit a revised application
for further review by OSHA pursuant to subsection I.B. of this appendix
or may request that the original application be submitted to the
Assistant Secretary with a statement of reasons supplied by the
applicant as to why the application should be approved.
6. Preliminary decision by Assistant Secretary. a. The Assistant
Secretary, or a special designee for this purpose, will make a
preliminary decision whether the applicant has met the requirements for
recognition based on the completed application file and the written
staff recommendation, as well as the statement of reasons by the
applicant if there is a recommendation of disapproval.
b. This preliminary decision will be sent to the applicant and
subsequently published in the Federal Register.
7. Public review and comment period. a. The Federal Register notice
of preliminary decision will provide a period of not less than 60
calendar days for the written comments on the applicant's fulfillment of
the requirements for recognition. The application, supporting documents,
staff recommendation, statement of applicant's reasons, and any comments
received, will be available for public inspection in the OSHA Docket
Office.
b. If the preliminary decision is in favor of recognition, a member
of the public, or if the preliminary decision is against recognition,
the applicant may request a public hearing by the close of the comment
period, if it supplies detailed reasons and evidence challenging the
basis of the Assistant Secretary's preliminary decision and justifying
the need for a public hearing to bring out evidence which could not be
effectively supplied through written submissions.
8. Final decision by Assistant Secretary-- a. Without hearing. If
there are no valid requests for a hearing, based on the application,
supporting documents, staff recommendation, evidence and public comment,
the Assistant Secretary shall issue the final decision (including
reasons) of the Department of Labor on whether the applicant has
demonstrated by a preponderance of the evidence that it meets the
requirements for recognition.
b. After hearing. If there is a valid request for a hearing pursuant
to paragraph I.B.7.b. of this appendix, the following procedures will be
used:
(1) The Assistant Secretary will issue a notice of hearing before an
administrative law judge of the Department of Labor pursuant to the
rules specified in 29 CFR part 1905, subpart C.
(2) After the hearing, pursuant to subpart C, the administrative law
judge shall issue a
[[Page 654]]
decision (including reasons) based on the application, the supporting
documentation, the staff recommendation, the public comments and the
evidence submitted during the hearing (the record), stating whether it
has been demonstrated, based on a preponderance of evidence, that the
applicant meets the requirements for recognition. If no exceptions are
filed, this is the final decision of the Department of Labor.
(3) Upon issuance of the decision, any party to the hearing may file
exceptions within 20 days pursuant to subpart C. If exceptions are
filed, the administrative law judge shall forward the decision,
exceptions and record to the Assistant Secretary for the final decision
on the application.
(4) The Assistant Secretary shall review the record, the decision by
the administrative law judge, and the exceptions. Based on this, the
Assistant Secretary shall issue the final decision (including reasons)
of the Department of Labor stating whether the applicant has
demonstrated by a preponderance of evidence that it meets the
requirements for recognition.
b. Publication. A notification of the final decision shall be
published in the Federal Register.
C. Terms and Conditions of Recognition, Renewal and Revocation
1. The following terms and conditions shall be part of every
recognition:
a. The recognition of any validation organization will be evidenced
by a letter of recognition from OSHA. The letter will provide the
specific details of the scope of the OSHA recognition as well as any
conditions imposed by OSHA, including any Federal monitoring
requirements.
b. The recognition of each validation organization will be valid for
five years, unless terminated before or renewed after the expiration of
the period. The dates of the period of recognition will be stated in the
recognition letter.
c. The recognized validation organization shall continue to satisfy
all the requirements of this appendix and the letter of recognition
during the period of recognition.
2. A recognized validation organization may change a test method of
the PSDI safety system certification/validation program by notifying the
Assistant Secretary of the change, certifying that the revised method
will be at least as effective as the prior method, and providing the
supporting data upon which its conclusions are based.
3. A recognized validation organization may renew its recognition by
filing a renewal request at the address in paragraph I.A.3. of this
appendix, above, not less than 180 calendar days, nor more than one
year, before the expiration date of its current recognition. When a
recognized validation organization has filed such a renewal request, its
current recognition will not expire until a final decision has been made
on the request. The renewal request will be processed in accordance with
subsection I.B. of this appendix, above, except that a reinspection is
not required but may be performed by OSHA. A hearing will be granted to
an objecting member of the public if evidence of failure to meet the
requirements of this appendix is supplied to OSHA.
4. A recognized validation organization may apply to OSHA for an
expansion of its current recognition to cover other categories of PSDI
certification/validation in addition to those included in the current
recognition. The application for expansion will be acted upon and
processed by OSHA in accordance with subsection I.B. of this appendix,
subject to the possible reinspection exception. If the validation
organization has been recognized for more than one year, meets the
requirements for expansion of recognition, and there is no evidence that
the recognized validation organization has not been following the
requirements of this appendix and the letter of recognition, an
expansion will normally be granted. A hearing will be granted to an
objecting member of the public only if evidence of failure to meet the
requirements of this appendix is supplied to OSHA.
5. A recognized validation organization may voluntarily terminate
its recognition, either in its entirety or with respect to any area
covered in its recognition, by giving written notice to OSHA at any
time. The written notice shall indicate the termination date. A
validation organization may not terminate its installation certification
and recertification validation functions earlier than either one year
from the date of the written notice, or the date on which another
recognized validation organization is able to perform the validation of
installation certification and recertification.
6.a. OSHA may revoke its recognition of a validation organization if
its program either has failed to continue to satisfy the requirements of
this appendix or its letter of recognition, has not been performing the
validation functions required by the PSDI standard and appendix A, or
has misrepresented itself in its applications. Before proposing to
revoke recognition, the Agency will notify the recognized validation
organization of the basis of the proposed revocation and will allow
rebuttal or correction of the alleged deficiencies. If the deficiencies
are not corrected, OSHA may revoke recognition, effective in 60 days,
unless the validation organization requests a hearing within that time.
b. If a hearing is requested, it shall be held before an
administrative law judge of the Department of Labor pursuant to the
rules specified in 29 CFR part 1905, subpart C.
[[Page 655]]
c. The parties shall be OSHA and the recognized validation
organization. The decision shall be made pursuant to the procedures
specified in paragraphs I.B.8.b.(2) through (4) of this appendix except
that the burden of proof shall be on OSHA to demonstrate by a
preponderance of the evidence that the recognition should be revoked
because the validation organization either is not meeting the
requirements for recognition, has not been performing the validation
functions required by the PSDI standard and appendix A, or has
misrepresented itself in its applications.
D. Provisions of OSHA Recognition
Each recognized third-party validation organization and its
validating laboratories shall:
1. Allow OSHA to conduct unscheduled reviews or on-site audits of it
or the validating laboratories on matters relevant to PSDI, and
cooperate in the conduct of these reviews and audits;
2. Agree to terms and conditions established by OSHA in the grant of
recognition on matters such as exchange of data, submission of accident
reports, and assistance in studies for improving PSDI or the
certification/validation process.
II. Qualifications
The third-party validation organization, the validating laboratory,
and the employees of each shall meet the requirements set forth in this
section of this appendix.
A. Experience of Validation Organization
1. The third-party validation organization shall have legal
authority to perform certification/validation activities.
2. The validation organization shall demonstrate competence and
experience in either power press design, manufacture or use, or testing,
quality control or certification/validation of equipment comparable to
power presses and associated control systems.
3. The validation organization shall demonstrate a capability for
selecting, reviewing, and/or validating appropriate standards and test
methods to be used for validating the certification of PSDI safety
systems, as well as for reviewing judgements on the safety of PSDI
safety systems and their conformance with the requirements of this
section.
4. The validating organization may utilize the competence,
experience, and capability of its employees to demonstrate this
competence, experience and capability.
B. Independence of Validation Organization
1. The validation organization shall demonstrate that:
a. It is financially capable to conduct the work;
b. It is free of direct influence or control by manufacturers,
suppliers, vendors, representatives of employers and employees, and
employer or employee organizations; and
c. Its employees are secure from discharge resulting from pressures
from manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, employers or employee
representatives.
2. A validation organization may be considered independent even if
it has ties with manufacturers, employers or employee representatives if
these ties are with at least two of these three groups; it has a board
of directors (or equivalent leadership responsible for the
certification/validation activities) which includes representatives of
the three groups; and it has a binding commitment of funding for a
period of three years or more.
C. Validating Laboratory
The validation organization's laboratory (which organizationally may
be a part of the third-party validation organization):
1. Shall have legal authority to perform the validation of
certification;
2. Shall be free of operational control and influence of
manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, employers, or employee
representatives that would impair its integrity of performance; and
3. Shall not engage in the design, manufacture, sale, promotion, or
use of the certified equipment.
D. Facilities and Equipment
The validation organization's validating laboratory shall have
available all testing facilities and necessary test and inspection
equipment relevant to the validation of the certification of PSDI safety
systems, installations and operations.
E. Personnel
The validation organization and the validating laboratory shall be
adequately staffed by personnel who are qualified by technical training
and/or experience to conduct the validation of the certification of PSDI
safety systems.
1. The validation organization shall assign overall responsibility
for the validation of PSDI certification to an Administrative Director.
Minimum requirements for this position are a Bachelor's degree and five
years professional experience, at least one of which shall have been in
responsible charge of a function in the areas of power press design or
manufacture or a broad range of power press use, or in the areas of
testing, quality control, or certification/validation of equipment
comparable to power presses or their associated control systems.
[[Page 656]]
2. The validating laboratory, if a separate organization from the
validation organization, shall assign technical responsibility for the
validation of PSDI certification to a Technical Director. Minimum
requirements for this position are a Bachelor's degree in a technical
field and five years of professional experience, at least one of which
shall have been in responsible charge of a function in the area of
testing, quality control or certification/validation of equipment
comparable to power presses or their associated control systems.
3. If the validation organization and the validating laboratory are
the same organization, the administrative and technical responsibilities
may be combined in a single position, with minimum requirements as
described in E.1. and 2. for the combined position.
4. The validation organization and validating laboratory shall have
adequate administrative and technical staffs to conduct the validation
of the certification of PSDI safety systems.
F. Certification/Validation Mark or Logo
1. The validation organization or the validating laboratory shall
own a registered certification/validation mark or logo.
2. The mark or logo shall be suitable for incorporation into the
label required by paragraph (h)(11)(iii) of this section.
III. Program Requirements
A. Test and Certification/Validation Procedures
1. The validation organization and/or validating laboratory shall
have established written procedures for test and certification/
validation of PSDI safety systems. The procedures shall be based on
pertinent OSHA standards and test methods, or other publicly available
standards and test methods generally recognized as appropriate in the
field, such as national consensus standards or published standards of
professional societies or trade associations.
2. The written procedures for test and certification/validation of
PSDI systems, and the standards and test methods on which they are
based, shall be reproducible and be available to OSHA and to the public
upon request.
B. Test Reports
1. A test report shall be prepared for each PSDI safety system that
is tested. The test report shall be signed by a technical staff
representative and the Technical Director.
2. The test report shall include the following:
a. Name of manufacturer and catalog or model number of each
subsystem or major component.
b. Identification and description of test methods or procedures
used. (This may be through reference to published sources which describe
the test methods or procedures used.)
c. Results of all tests performed.
d. All safety distance calculations.
3. A copy of the test report shall be maintained on file at the
validation organization and/or validating laboratory, and shall be
available to OSHA upon request.
C. Certification/Validation Reports
1. A certification/validation report shall be prepared for each PSDI
safety system for which the certification is validated. The
certification/validation report shall be signed by the Administrative
Director and the Technical Director.
2. The certification/validation report shall include the following:
a. Name of manufacturer and catalog or model number of each
subsystem or major component.
b. Results of all tests which serve as the basis for the
certification.
c. All safety distance calculations.
d. Statement that the safety system conforms with all requirements
of the PSDI standard and appendix A.
3. A copy of the certification/validation report shall be maintained
on file at the validation organization and/or validating laboratory, and
shall be available to the public upon request.
4. A copy of the certification/validation report shall be submitted
to OSHA within 30 days of its completion.
D. Publications System
The validation organization shall make available upon request a list
of PSDI safety systems which have been certified/validated by the
program.
E. Follow-up Activities
1. The validation organization or validating laboratory shall have a
follow-up system for inspecting or testing manufacturer's production of
design certified/validated PSDI safety system components and
subassemblies where deemed appropriate by the validation organization.
2. The validation organization shall notify the appropriate product
manufacturer(s) of any reports from employers of point of operation
injuries which occur while a press is operated in a PSDI mode.
F. Records
The validation organization or validating laboratory shall maintain
a record of each certification/validation of a PSDI safety system,
including manufacturer and/or employer certification documentation, test
and
[[Page 657]]
working data, test report, certification/validation report, any follow-
up inspections or testing, and reports of equipment failures, any
reports of accidents involving the equipment, and any other pertinent
information. These records shall be available for inspection by OSHA and
OSHA State Plan offices.
G. Dispute Resolution Procedures
1. The validation organization shall have a reasonable written
procedure for acknowledging and processing appeals or complaints from
program participants (manufacturers, producers, suppliers, vendors and
employers) as well as other interested parties (employees or their
representatives, safety personnel, government agencies, etc.),
concerning certification or validation.
2. The validation organization may charge any complainant the
reasonable charge for repeating tests needed for the resolution of
disputes.
Appendix D to Sec. 1910.217--Nonmandatory Supplementary Information
This appendix provides nonmandatory supplementary information and
guidelines to assist in the understanding and use of 29 CFR 1910.217(h)
to allow presence sensing device initiation (PSDI) of mechanical power
presses. Although this appendix as such is not mandatory, it references
sections and requirements which are made mandatory by other parts of the
PSDI standard and appendices.
1. General
OSHA intends that PSDI continue to be prohibited where present
state-of-the-art technology will not allow it to be done safely. Only
part revolution type mechanical power presses are approved for PSDI.
Similarly, only presses with a configuration such that a person's body
cannot completely enter the bed area are approved for PSDI.
2. Brake and Clutch
Flexible steel band brakes do not possess a long-term reliability
against structural failure as compared to other types of brakes, and
therefore are not acceptable on presses used in the PSDI mode of
operation.
Fast and consistent stopping times are important to safety for the
PSDI mode of operation. Consistency of braking action is enhanced by
high brake torque. The requirement in paragraph (h)(2)(ii) defines a
high torque capability which should ensure fast and consistent stopping
times.
Brake design parameters important to PSDI are high torque, low
moment of inertia, low air volume (if pneumatic) mechanisms, non-
interleaving engagement springs, and structural integrity which is
enhanced by over-design. The requirement in paragrpah (h)(2)(iii)
reduces the possibility of significantly increased stopping time if a
spring breaks.
As an added precaution to the requirements in paragraph (h)(2)(iii),
brake adjustment locking means should be secured. Where brake springs
are externally accessible, lock nuts or other means may be provided to
reduce the possibility of backing off of the compression nut which holds
the springs in place.
3. Pneumatic Systems
Elevated clutch/brake air pressure results in longer stopping time.
The requirement in paragraph (h)(3)(i)(C) is intended to prevent
degradation in stoping speed from higher air pressure. Higher pressures
may be permitted, however, to increase clutch torque to free ``jammed''
dies, provided positive measures are provided to prevent the higher
pressure at other times.
4. Flywheels and Bearings
Lubrication of bearings is considered the single greatest deterrent
to their failure. The manufacturer's recommended procedures for
maintenance and inspection should be closely followed.
5. Brake Monitoring
The approval of brake monitor adjustments, as required in paragraph
(h)(5)(ii), is not considered a recertification, and does not
necessarily involve an on-site inspection by a representative of the
validation organization. It is expected that the brake monitor
adjustment normally could be evaluated on the basis of the effect on the
safety system certification/validation documentation retained by the
validation organization.
Use of a brake monitor does not eliminate the need for periodic
brake inspection and maintenance to reduce the possibility of
catastrophic failures.
6. Cycle Control and Control Systems
The PSDI set-up/reset means required by paragraph (h)(6)(iv) may be
initiated by the actuation of a special momentary pushbutton or by the
actuation of a special momentary pushbutton and the initiation of a
first stroke with two hand controls.
It would normally be preferable to limit the adjustment of the time
required in paragraph (h)(6)(vi) to a maximum of 15 seconds. However,
where an operator must do many operations outside the press, such as
lubricating, trimming, deburring, etc., a longer interval up to 30
seconds is permitted.
When a press is equipped for PSDI operation, it is recommended that
the presence sensing device be active as a guarding device in other
production modes. This should enhance the reliability of the device and
ensure that it remains operable.
[[Page 658]]
An acceptable method for interlocking supplemental guards as
required by paragraph (h)(6)(xiii) would be to incorporate the
supplemental guard and the PSDI presence sensing device into a hinged
arrangement in which the alignment of the presence sensing device
serves, in effect, as the interlock. If the supplemental guards are
moved, the presence sensing device would become misaligned and the press
control would be deactivated. No extra microswitches or interlocking
sensors would be required.
Paragraph (h)(6)(xv) of the standard requires that the control
system have provisions for an ``inch'' operating means; that die-setting
not be done in the PSDI mode; and that production not be done in the
``inch'' mode. It should be noted that the sensing device would be by-
passed in the ``inch'' mode. For that reason, the prohibitions against
die-setting in the PSDI mode, and against production in the ``inch''
mode are cited to emphasize that ``inch'' operation is of reduced safety
and is not compatible with PSDI or other production modes.
7. Environmental Requirements
It is the intent of paragraph (h)(7) that control components be
provided with inherent design protection against operating stresses and
environmental factors affecting safety and reliability.
8. Safety system
The safety system provision continues the concept of paragraph
(b)(13) that the probability of two independent failures in the length
of time required to make one press cycle is so remote as to be a
negligible risk factor in the total array of equipment and human
factors. The emphasis is on an integrated total system including all
elements affecting point of operation safety.
It should be noted that this does not require redundancy for press
components such as structural elements, clutch/brake mechanisms, plates,
etc., for which adequate reliability may be achieved by proper design,
maintenance, and inspection.
9. Safeguarding the Point of Operation
The intent of paragraph (h)(9)(iii) is to prohibit use of mirrors to
``bend'' a single light curtain sensing field around corners to cover
more than one side of a press. This prohibition is needed to increase
the reliability of the presence sensing device in initiating a stroke
only when the desired work motion has been completed.
Object sensitivity describes the capability of a presence sensing
device to detect an object in the sensing field, expressed as the linear
measurement of the smallest interruption which can be detected at any
point in the field. Minimum object sensitivity describes the largest
acceptable size of the interruption in the sensing field. A minimum
object sensitivity of one and one-fourth inches (31.75 mm) means that a
one and one-fourth inch (31.75 mm) diameter object will be continuously
detected at all locations in the sensing field.
In deriving the safety distance required in paragraph (h)(9)(v), all
stopping time measurements should be made with clutch/brake air pressure
regulated to the press manufacturer's recommended value for full clutch
torque capability. The stopping time measurements should be made with
the heaviest upper die that is planned for use in the press. If the
press has a slide counterbalance system, it is important that the
counterbalance be adjusted correctly for upper die weight according to
the manufacturer's instructions. While the brake monitor setting is
based on the stopping time it actually measures, i.e., the normal
stopping time at the top of the stroke, it is important that the safety
distance be computed from the longest stopping time measured at any of
the indicated three downstroke stopping positions listed in the
explanation of Ts. The use in the formula of twice the stopping time
increase, Tm, allowed by the brake monitor for brake wear allows for
greater increases in the downstroke stopping time than occur in normal
stopping time at the top of the stroke.
10. Inspection and Maintenance. [Reserved]
11. Safety System Certification/Validation
Mandatory requirements for certification/validation of the PSDI
safety system are provided in appendix A and appendix C to this
standard. Nonmandatory supplementary information and guidelines relating
to certification/validation of the PSDI safety system are provided to
appendix B to this standard.
[39 FR 32502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 39 FR 41846, Dec. 23, 1974;
40 FR 3982, Jan. 27, 1975; 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 45 FR 8594, Feb.
8, 1980; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 51 FR 34561, Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR
8353, 8358 Mar. 14, 1988; 54 FR 24333, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7,
1996]
Sec. 1910.218 Forging machines.
(a) General requirements--(1) Use of lead. The safety requirements
of this subparagraph apply to lead casts or other use of lead in the
forge shop or die shop.
(i) Thermostatic control of heating elements shall be provided to
maintain proper melting temperature and prevent overheating.
(ii) Fixed or permanent lead pot installations shall be exhausted.
[[Page 659]]
(iii) Portable units shall be used only in areas where good, general
room ventilation is provided.
(iv) Personal protective equipment (gloves, goggles, aprons, and
other items) shall be worn.
(v) A covered container shall be provided to store dross skimmings.
(vi) Equipment shall be kept clean, particularly from accumulations
of yellow lead oxide.
(2) Inspection and maintenance. It shall be the responsibility of
the employer to maintain all forge shop equipment in a condition which
will insure continued safe operation. This responsibility includes:
(i) Establishing periodic and regular maintenance safety checks and
keeping certification records of these inspections which include the
date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the
inspection and the serial number, or other identifier, for the forging
machine which was inspected.
(ii) Scheduling and recording the inspection of guards and point of
operation protection devices at frequent and regular intervals.
Recording of inspections shall be in the form of a certification record
which includes the date the inspection was performed, the signature of
the person who performed the inspection and the serial number, or other
identifier, of the equipment inspected.
(iii) Training personnel for the proper inspection and maintenance
of forging machinery and equipment.
(iv) All overhead parts shall be fastened or protected in such a
manner that they will not fly off or fall in event of failure.
(3) Hammers and presses. (i) All hammers shall be positioned or
installed in such a manner that they remain on or are anchored to
foundations sufficient to support them according to applicable
engineering standards.
(ii) All presses shall be installed in such a manner that they
remain where they are positioned or they are anchored to foundations
sufficient to support them according to applicable engineering
standards.
Table O-11--Strength and Dimensions for Wood Ram Props
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum
allowable Maximum static Maximum Maximum
Size of timber, Square inches crushing load within Safety recommended allowable
inches \1\ in cross strength short column factor weight of length of
section parallel to range \3\ forging hammer timber,
grain, p.s.i.\2\ for timber used inches
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4x4 16 5,000 80,000 10 8,000 44
6x6 36 5,000 180,000 10 18,000 66
8x8 64 5,000 320,000 10 32,000 88
10x10 100 5,000 500,000 10 50,000 100
12x12 144 5,000 720,000 10 72,000 132
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Actual dimension.
\2\ Adapted from U.S. Department of Agriculture Technical Bulletin 479. Hardwoods recommended are those whose
ultimate crushing strengths in compression parallel to grain are 5,000 p.s.i. (pounds per square inch) or
greater.
\3\ Slenderness ratio formula for short columns is L/d=11, where L=length of timber in inches and d=least
dimension in inches; this ratio should not exceed 11.
(iii) Means shall be provided for disconnecting the power to the
machine and for locking out or rendering cycling controls inoperable.
(iv) The ram shall be blocked when dies are being changed or other
work is being done on the hammer. Blocks or wedges shall be made of
material the strength and construction of which should meet or exceed
the specifications and dimensions shown in Table O-11.
(v) Tongs shall be of sufficient length to clear the body of the
worker in case of kickback, and shall not have sharp handle ends.
(vi) Oil swabs, or scale removers, or other devices to remove scale
shall be provided. These devices shall be long enough to enable a man to
reach the full length of the die without placing his hand or arm between
the dies.
(vii) Material handling equipment shall be of adequate strength,
size, and dimension to handle diesetting operations safely.
(viii) A scale guard of substantial construction shall be provided
at the
[[Page 660]]
back of every hammer, so arranged as to stop flying scale.
(ix) A scale guard of substantial construction shall be provided at
the back of every press, so arranged as to stop flying scale.
(b) Hammers, general--(1) Keys. Die keys and shims shall be made
from a grade of material that will not unduly crack or splinter.
(2) Foot operated devices. All foot operated devices (i.e.,
treadles, pedals, bars, valves, and switches) shall be substantially and
effectively protected from unintended operation.
(c) Presses. All manually operated valves and switches shall be
clearly identified and readily accessible.
(d) Power-driven hammers--(1) Safety cylinder head. Every steam or
airhammer shall have a safety cylinder head to act as a cushion if the
rod should break or pullout of the ram.
(2) Shutoff valve. Steam hammers shall be provided with a quick
closing emergency valve in the admission pipeline at a convenient
location. This valve shall be closed and locked in the off position
while the hammer is being adjusted, repaired, or serviced, or when the
dies are being changed.
(3) Cylinder draining. Steam hammers shall be provided with a means
of cylinder draining, such as a self-draining arrangement or a quick-
acting drain cock.
(4) Pressure pipes. Steam or air piping shall conform to the
specifications of American National Standard ANSI B31.1.0-1967, Power
Piping with Addenda issued before April 28, 1971, which is incorporated
by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(e) Gravity hammers--(1) Air-lift hammers. (i) Air-lift hammers
shall have a safety cylinder head as required in paragraph (d)(1) of
this section.
(ii) Air-lift hammers shall have an air shutoff valve as required in
paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
(iii) Air-lift hammers shall be provided with two drain cocks: one
on main head cylinder, and one on clamp cylinder.
(iv) Air piping shall conform to the specifications of the ANSI
B31.1.0-1967, Power Piping with Addenda issued before April 28, 1971,
which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(2) Board drophammers. (i) A suitable enclosure shall be provided to
prevent damaged or detached boards from falling. The board enclosure
shall be securely fastened to the hammer.
(ii) All major assemblies and fittings which can loosen and fall
shall be properly secured in place.
(f) Forging presses--(1) Mechanical forging presses. When dies are
being changed or maintenance is being performed on the press, the
following shall be accomplished:
(i) The power to the press shall be locked out.
(ii) The flywheel shall be at rest.
(iii) The ram shall be blocked with a material the strength of which
shall meet or exceed the specifications or dimensions shown in Table O-
11.
(2) Hydraulic forging presses. When dies are being changed or
maintenance is being performed on the press, the following shall be
accomplished:
(i) The hydraulic pumps and power apparatus shall be locked out.
(ii) The ram shall be blocked with a material the strength of which
shall meet or exceed the specifications or dimensions shown in Table O-
11.
(g) Trimming presses--(1) Hot trimming presses. The requirements of
paragraph (f)(1) of this section shall also apply to hot trimming
presses.
(2) Cold trimming presses. Cold trimming presses shall be
safeguarded in accordance with Sec. 1910.217(c).
(h) Upsetters--(1) General requirements. All upsetters shall be
installed so that they remain on their supporting foundations.
(2) Lockouts. Upsetters shall be provided with a means for locking
out the power at its entry point to the machine and rendering its
cycling controls inoperable.
(3) Manually operated controls. All manually operated valves and
switches shall be clearly identified and readily accessible.
(4) Tongs. Tongs shall be of sufficient length to clear the body of
the worker in case of kickback, and shall not have sharp handle ends.
(5) Changing dies. When dies are being changed, maintenance
performed, or any work done on the machine, the
[[Page 661]]
power to the upsetter shall be locked out, and the flywheel shall be at
rest.
(i) Other forging equipment--(1) Boltheading. The provisions of
paragraph (h) of this section shall apply to boltheading.
(2) Rivet making. The provisions of paragraph (h) of this section
shall apply to rivet making.
(j) Other forge facility equipment--(1) Billet shears. A positive-
type lockout device for disconnecting the power to the shear shall be
provided.
(2) Saws. Every saw shall be provided with a guard of not less than
one-eighth inch sheet metal positioned to stop flying sparks.
(3) Conveyors. Conveyor power transmission equipment shall be
guarded in accordance with ANSI B20.1-1957, Safety Code for Conveyors,
Cableways, and Related Equipment, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(4) Shot blast. The cleaning chamber shall have doors or guards to
protect operators.
(5) Grinding. Personal protective equipment shall be used in
grinding operations, and equipment shall be used and maintained in
accordance with ANSI B7.1-1970, Safety Code for the Use, Care, and
Protection of Abrasive Wheels, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6, and with Sec. 1910.215.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51
FR 34561, Sept. 29, 1986; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.219 Mechanical power-transmission apparatus.
(a) General requirements. (1) This section covers all types and
shapes of power-transmission belts, except the following when operating
at two hundred and fifty (250) feet per minute or less: (i) Flat belts
one (1) inch or less in width, (ii) flat belts two (2) inches or less in
width which are free from metal lacings or fasteners, (iii) round belts
one-half (\1/2\) inch or less in diameter; and (iv) single strand V-
belts, the width of which is thirteen thirty-seconds (\13/32\) inch or
less.
(2) Vertical and inclined belts (paragraphs (e) (3) and (4) of this
section) if not more than two and one-half (2\1/2\) inches wide and
running at a speed of less than one thousand (1,000) feet per minute,
and if free from metal lacings or fastenings may be guarded with a nip-
point belt and pulley guard.
(3) For the Textile Industry, because of the presence of excessive
deposits of lint, which constitute a serious fire hazard, the sides and
face sections only of nip-point belt and pulley guards are required,
provided the guard shall extend at least six (6) inches beyond the rim
of the pulley on the in-running and off-running sides of the belt and at
least two (2) inches away from the rim and face of the pulley in all
other directions.
(4) This section covers the principal features with which power
transmission safeguards shall comply.
(b) Prime-mover guards--(1) Flywheels. Flywheels located so that any
part is seven (7) feet or less above floor or platform shall be guarded
in accordance with the requirements of this subparagraph:
(i) With an enclosure of sheet, perforated, or expanded metal, or
woven wire;
(ii) With guard rails placed not less than fifteen (15) inches nor
more than twenty (20) inches from rim. When flywheel extends into pit or
is within 12 inches of floor, a standard toeboard shall also be
provided;
(iii) When the upper rim of flywheel protrudes through a working
floor, it shall be entirely enclosed or surrounded by a guardrail and
toeboard.
(iv) For flywheels with smooth rims five (5) feet or less in
diameter, where the preceding methods cannot be applied, the following
may be used: A disk attached to the flywheel in such manner as to cover
the spokes of the wheel on the exposed side and present a smooth surface
and edge, at the same time providing means for periodic inspection. An
open space, not exceeding four (4) inches in width, may be left between
the outside edge of the disk and the rim of the wheel if desired, to
facilitate turning the wheel over. Where a disk is used, the keys or
other dangerous projections not covered by disk shall be cut off or
covered. This subdivision does not apply to flywheels with solid web
centers.
[[Page 662]]
(v) Adjustable guard to be used for starting engine or for running
adjustment may be provided at the flywheel of gas or oil engines. A slot
opening for jack bar will be permitted.
(vi) Wherever flywheels are above working areas, guards shall be
installed having sufficient strength to hold the weight of the flywheel
in the event of a shaft or wheel mounting failure.
(2) Cranks and connecting rods. Cranks and connecting rods, when
exposed to contact, shall be guarded in accordance with paragraphs (m)
and (n) of this section, or by a guardrail as described in paragraph
(o)(5) of this section.
(3) Tail rods or extension piston rods. Tail rods or extension
piston rods shall be guarded in accordance with paragraphs (m) and (o)
of this section, or by a guardrail on sides and end, with a clearance of
not less than fifteen (15) nor more than twenty (20) inches when rod is
fully extended.
(c) Shafting--(1) Installation. (i) Each continuous line of shafting
shall be secured in position against excessive endwise movement.
(ii) Inclined and vertical shafts, particularly inclined idler
shafts, shall be securely held in position against endwise thrust.
(2) Guarding horizontal shafting. (i) All exposed parts of
horizontal shafting seven (7) feet or less from floor or working
platform, excepting runways used exclusively for oiling, or running
adjustments, shall be protected by a stationary casing enclosing
shafting completely or by a trough enclosing sides and top or sides and
bottom of shafting as location requires.
(ii) Shafting under bench machines shall be enclosed by a stationary
casing, or by a trough at sides and top or sides and bottom, as location
requires. The sides of the trough shall come within at least six (6)
inches of the underside of table, or if shafting is located near floor
within six (6) inches of floor. In every case the sides of trough shall
extend at least two (2) inches beyond the shafting or protuberance.
(3) Guarding vertical and inclined shafting. Vertical and inclined
shafting seven (7) feet or less from floor or working platform,
excepting maintenance runways, shall be enclosed with a stationary
casing in accordance with requirements of paragraphs (m) and (o) of this
section.
(4) Projecting shaft ends. (i) Projecting shaft ends shall present a
smooth edge and end and shall not project more than one-half the
diameter of the shaft unless guarded by nonrotating caps or safety
sleeves.
(ii) Unused keyways shall be filled up or covered.
(5) Power-transmission apparatus located in basements. All
mechanical power transmission apparatus located in basements, towers,
and rooms used exclusively for power transmission equipment shall be
guarded in accordance with this section, except that the requirements
for safeguarding belts, pulleys, and shafting need not be complied with
when the following requirements are met:
(i) The basement, tower, or room occupied by transmission equipment
is locked against unauthorized entrance.
(ii) The vertical clearance in passageways between the floor and
power transmission beams, ceiling, or any other objects, is not less
than five feet six inches (5 ft. 6 in.).
(iii) The intensity of illumination conforms to the requirements of
ANSI A11.1-1965 (R-1970), which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(iv) [Reserved]
(v) The route followed by the oiler is protected in such manner as
to prevent accident.
(d) Pulleys--(1) Guarding. Pulleys, any parts of which are seven (7)
feet or less from the floor or working platform, shall be guarded in
accordance with the standards specified in paragraphs (m) and (o) of
this section. Pulleys serving as balance wheels (e.g., punch presses) on
which the point of contact between belt and pulley is more than six feet
six inches (6 ft. 6 in.) from the floor or platform may be guarded with
a disk covering the spokes.
(2) Location of pulleys. (i) Unless the distance to the nearest
fixed pulley, clutch, or hanger exceeds the width of the belt used, a
guide shall be provided to prevent the belt from leaving the pulley on
the side where insufficient clearance exists.
(ii) [Reserved]
[[Page 663]]
(3) Broken pulleys. Pulleys with cracks, or pieces broken out of
rims, shall not be used.
(4) Pulley speeds. Pulleys intended to operate at rim speed in
excess of manufacturers normal recommendations shall be specially
designed and carefully balanced for the speed at which they are to
operate.
(e) Belt, rope, and chain drives--(1) Horizontal belts and ropes.
(i) Where both runs of horizontal belts are seven (7) feet or less from
the floor level, the guard shall extend to at least fifteen (15) inches
above the belt or to a standard height (see Table O-12), except that
where both runs of a horizontal belt are 42 inches or less from the
floor, the belt shall be fully enclosed in accordance with paragraphs
(m) and (o) of this section.
(ii) In powerplants or power-development rooms, a guardrail may be
used in lieu of the guard required by subdivision (i) of this
subparagraph.
(2) Overhead horizontal belts. (i) Overhead horizontal belts, with
lower parts seven (7) feet or less from the floor or platform, shall be
guarded on sides and bottom in accordance with paragraph (o)(3) of this
section.
(ii) Horizontal overhead belts more than seven (7) feet above floor
or platform shall be guarded for their entire length under the following
conditions:
(a) If located over passageways or work places and traveling 1,800
feet or more per minute.
(b) If center to center distance between pulleys is ten (10) feet or
more.
(c) If belt is eight (8) inches or more in width.
(iii) Where the upper and lower runs of horizontal belts are so
located that passage of persons between them would be possible, the
passage shall be either:
(a) Completely barred by a guardrail or other barrier in accordance
with paragraphs (m) and (o) of this section; or
(b) Where passage is regarded as necessary, there shall be a
platform over the lower run guarded on either side by a railing
completely filled in with wire mesh or other filler, or by a solid
barrier. The upper run shall be so guarded as to prevent contact
therewith either by the worker or by objects carried by him. In
powerplants only the lower run of the belt need be guarded.
(iv) Overhead chain and link belt drives are governed by the same
rules as overhead horizontal belts and shall be guarded in the same
manner as belts.
(3) Vertical and inclined belts. (i) Vertical and inclined belts
shall be enclosed by a guard conforming to standards in paragraphs (m)
and (o) of this section.
(ii) All guards for inclined belts shall be arranged in such a
manner that a minimum clearance of seven (7) feet is maintained between
belt and floor at any point outside of guard.
(4) Vertical belts. Vertical belts running over a lower pulley more
than seven (7) feet above floor or platform shall be guarded at the
bottom in the same manner as horizontal overhead belts, if conditions
are as stated in paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) (a) and (c) of this section.
(5) Cone-pulley belts. (i) The cone belt and pulley shall be
equipped with a belt shifter so constructed as to adequately guard the
nip point of the belt and pulley. If the frame of the belt shifter does
not adequately guard the nip point of the belt and pulley, the nip point
shall be further protected by means of a vertical guard placed in front
of the pulley and extending at least to the top of the largest step of
the cone.
(ii) If the belt is of the endless type or laced with rawhide laces,
and a belt shifter is not desired, the belt will be considered guarded
if the nip point of the belt and pulley is protected by a nip point
guard located in front of the cone extending at least to the top of the
largest step of the cone, and formed to show the contour of the cone in
order to give the nip point of the belt and pulley the maximum
protection.
(iii) If the cone is located less than 3 feet from the floor or
working platform, the cone pulley and belt shall be guarded to a height
of 3 feet regardless of whether the belt is endless or laced with
rawhide.
(6) Belt tighteners. (i) Suspended counterbalanced tighteners and
all parts thereof shall be of substantial construction and securely
fastened; the bearings shall be securely capped. Means must be provided
to prevent
[[Page 664]]
tightener from falling, in case the belt breaks.
(ii) Where suspended counterweights are used and not guarded by
location, they shall be so encased as to prevent accident.
(f) Gears, sprockets, and chains--(1) Gears. Gears shall be guarded
in accordance with one of the following methods:
(i) By a complete enclosure; or
(ii) By a standard guard as described in paragraph (o) of this
section, at least seven (7) feet high extending six (6) inches above the
mesh point of the gears; or
(iii) By a band guard covering the face of gear and having flanges
extended inward beyond the root of the teeth on the exposed side or
sides. Where any portion of the train of gears guarded by a band guard
is less than six (6) feet from the floor a disk guard or a complete
enclosure to the height of six (6) feet shall be required.
(2) Hand-operated gears. Paragraph (f)(1) of this section does not
apply to hand-operated gears used only to adjust machine parts and which
do not continue to move after hand power is removed. However, the
guarding of these gears is highly recommended.
(3) Sprockets and chains. All sprocket wheels and chains shall be
enclosed unless they are more than seven (7) feet above the floor or
platform. Where the drive extends over other machine or working areas,
protection against falling shall be provided. This subparagraph does not
apply to manually operated sprockets.
(4) Openings for oiling. When frequent oiling must be done, openings
with hinged or sliding self-closing covers shall be provided. All points
not readily accessible shall have oil feed tubes if lubricant is to be
added while machinery is in motion.
(g) Guarding friction drives. The driving point of all friction
drives when exposed to contact shall be guarded, all arm or spoke
friction drives and all web friction drives with holes in the web shall
be entirely enclosed, and all projecting belts on friction drives where
exposed to contact shall be guarded.
(h) Keys, setscrews, and other projections. (1) All projecting keys,
setscrews, and other projections in revolving parts shall be removed or
made flush or guarded by metal cover. This subparagraph does not apply
to keys or setscrews within gear or sprocket casings or other
enclosures, nor to keys, setscrews, or oilcups in hubs of pulleys less
than twenty (20) inches in diameter where they are within the plane of
the rim of the pulley.
(2) It is recommended, however, that no projecting setscrews or
oilcups be used in any revolving pulley or part of machinery.
(i) Collars and couplings--(1) Collars. All revolving collars,
including split collars, shall be cylindrical, and screws or bolts used
in collars shall not project beyond the largest periphery of the collar.
(2) Couplings. Shaft couplings shall be so constructed as to present
no hazard from bolts, nuts, setscrews, or revolving surfaces. Bolts,
nuts, and setscrews will, however, be permitted where they are covered
with safety sleeves or where they are used parallel with the shafting
and are countersunk or else do not extend beyond the flange of the
coupling.
(j) Bearings and facilities for oiling. All drip cups and pans shall
be securely fastened.
(k) Guarding of clutches, cutoff couplings, and clutch pulleys--(1)
Guards. Clutches, cutoff couplings, or clutch pulleys having projecting
parts, where such clutches are located seven (7) feet or less above the
floor or working platform, shall be enclosed by a stationary guard
constructed in accordance with this section. A ``U'' type guard is
permissible.
(2) Engine rooms. In engine rooms a guardrail, preferably with
toeboard, may be used instead of the guard required by paragraph (k)(1)
of this section, provided such a room is occupied only by engine room
attendants.
(l) Belt shifters, clutches, shippers, poles, perches, and
fasteners--(1) Belt shifters. (i) Tight and loose pulleys on all new
installations made on or after August 31, 1971, shall be equipped with a
permanent belt shifter provided with mechanical means to prevent belt
from creeping from loose to tight pulley. It is recommended that old
installations be changed to conform to this rule.
[[Page 665]]
(ii) Belt shifter and clutch handles shall be rounded and be located
as far as possible from danger of accidental contact, but within easy
reach of the operator. Where belt shifters are not directly located over
a machine or bench, the handles shall be cut off six feet six inches (6
ft. 6 in.) above floor level.
(2) Belt shippers and shipper poles. The use of belt poles as
substitutes for mechanical shifters is not recommended.
(3) Belt perches. Where loose pulleys or idlers are not practicable,
belt perches in form of brackets, rollers, etc., shall be used to keep
idle belts away from the shafts.
(4) Belt fasteners. Belts which of necessity must be shifted by hand
and belts within seven (7) feet of the floor or working platform which
are not guarded in accordance with this section shall not be fastened
with metal in any case, nor with any other fastening which by
construction or wear will constitute an accident hazard.
(m) Standard guards--general requirements--(1) Materials. (i)
Standard conditions shall be secured by the use of the following
materials. Expanded metal, perforated or solid sheet metal, wire mesh on
a frame of angle iron, or iron pipe securely fastened to floor or to
frame of machine.
(ii) All metal should be free from burrs and sharp edges.
(2) Methods of manufacture. (i) Expanded metal, sheet or perforated
metal, and wire mesh shall be securely fastened to frame.
(ii) [Reserved]
(n) [Reserved]
(o) Approved materials--(1) Minimum requirements. The materials and
dimensions specified in this paragraph shall apply to all guards, except
horizontal overhead belts, rope, cable, or chain guards more than seven
(7) feet above floor, or platform.
(i) [Reserved]
(a) All guards shall be rigidly braced every three (3) feet or
fractional part of their height to some fixed part of machinery or
building structure. Where guard is exposed to contact with moving
equipment additional strength may be necessary.
(b) [Reserved]
(ii) [Reserved]
(2) Wood guards. (i) Wood guards may be used in the woodworking and
chemical industries, in industries where the presence of fumes or where
manufacturing conditions would cause the rapid deterioration of metal
guards; also in construction work and in locations outdoors where
extreme cold or extreme heat make metal guards and railings undesirable.
In all other industries, wood guards shall not be used.
(ii) [Reserved]
(3) Guards for horizontal overhead belts. (i) Guards for horizontal
overhead belts shall run the entire length of the belt and follow the
line of the pulley to the ceiling or be carried to the nearest wall,
thus enclosing the belt effectively. Where belts are so located as to
make it impracticable to carry the guard to wall or ceiling,
construction of guard shall be such as to enclose completely the top and
bottom runs of belt and the face of pulleys.
(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) Suitable reinforcement shall be provided for the ceiling
rafters or overhead floor beams, where such is necessary, to sustain
safely the weight and stress likely to be imposed by the guard. The
interior surface of all guards, by which is meant the surface of the
guard with which a belt will come in contact, shall be smooth and free
from all projections of any character, except where construction demands
it; protruding shallow roundhead rivets may be used. Overhead belt
guards shall be at least one-quarter wider than belt which they protect,
except that this clearance need not in any case exceed six (6) inches on
each side. Overhead rope drive and block and roller-chain-drive guards
shall be not less than six (6) inches wider than the drive on each side.
In overhead silent chain-drive guards where the chain is held from
lateral displacement on the sprockets, the side clearances required on
drives of twenty (20) inch centers or under shall be not less than one-
fourth inch from the nearest moving chain part, and on drives of over
twenty (20) inch centers a minimum of one-half inch from the nearest
moving chain part.
(4) Guards for horizontal overhead rope and chain drives. Overhead-
rope and chain-drive guard construction shall
[[Page 666]]
conform to the rules for overhead-belt guard.
(5) Guardrails and toeboards. (i) Guardrail shall be forty-two (42)
inches in height, with midrail between top rail and floor.
(ii) Posts shall be not more than eight (8) feet apart; they are to
be permanent and substantial, smooth, and free from protruding nails,
bolts, and splinters. If made of pipe, the post shall be one and one-
fourth (1\1/4\) inches inside diameter, or larger. If made of metal
shapes or bars, their section shall be equal in strength to that of one
and one-half (1\1/2\) by one and one-half (1\1/2\) by three-sixteenths
(\3/16\) inch angle iron. If made of wood, the posts shall be two by
four (2 x 4) inches or larger. The upper rail shall be two by four (2 x
4) inches, or two one by four (1 x 4) strips, one at the top and one at
the side of posts. The midrail may be one by four (1 x 4) inches or
more. Where panels are fitted with expanded metal or wire mesh as noted
in Table O-12 the middle rails may be omitted. Where guard is exposed to
contact with moving equipment, additional strength may be necessary.
(iii) Toeboards shall be four (4) inches or more in height, of wood,
metal, or of metal grill not exceeding one (1) inch mesh.
(p) Care of equipment--(1) General. All power-transmission equipment
shall be inspected at intervals not exceeding 60 days and be kept in
good working condition at all times.
(2) Shafting. (i) Shafting shall be kept in alignment, free from
rust and excess oil or grease.
(ii) Where explosives, explosive dusts, flammable vapors or
flammable liquids exist, the hazard of static sparks from shafting shall
be carefully considered.
(3) Bearings. Bearings shall be kept in alignment and properly
adjusted.
(4) Hangers. Hangers shall be inspected to make certain that all
supporting bolts and screws are tight and that supports of hanger boxes
are adjusted properly.
(5) Pulleys. (i) Pulleys shall be kept in proper alignment to
prevent belts from running off.
(ii) [Reserved]
(6) Care of belts.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) Inspection shall be made of belts, lacings, and fasteners and
such equipment kept in good repair.
(7) Lubrication. The regular oilers shall wear tight-fitting
clothing. Machinery shall be oiled when not in motion, wherever
possible.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978;
43 FR 51760; Nov. 7, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9240, Mar.
7, 1996]
Subpart P--Hand and Portable Powered Tools and Other Hand-Held Equipment
Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order
No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), or 1-90
(55 FR 9033), as applicable; 29 CFR part 1911.
Section 1910.243 also issued under 29 CFR part 1910.
Sec. 1910.241 Definitions.
As used in this subpart:
(a) Explosive-actuated fastening tool terms--(1) Hammer-operated
piston tool--low-velocity type. A tool which, by means of a heavy mass
hammer supplemented by a load, moves a piston designed to be captive to
drive a stud, pin, or fastener into a work surface, always starting the
fastener at rest and in contact with the work surface. It shall be so
designed that when used with any load that accurately chambers in it and
that is commercially available at the time the tool is submitted for
approval, it will not cause such stud, pin, or fastener to have a mean
velocity in excess of 300 feet per second when measured 6.5 feet from
the muzzle end of the barrel.
(2) High-velocity tool. A tool or machine which, when used with a
load, propels or discharges a stud, pin, or fastener, at velocities in
excess of 300 feet per second when measured 6.5 feet from the muzzle end
of the barrel, for the purpose of impinging it upon, affixing it to, or
penetrating another object or material.
(3) Low-velocity piston tool. A tool that utilizes a piston designed
to be captive to drive a stud, pin, or fastener into a work surface. It
shall be so designed that when used with any load
[[Page 667]]
that accurately chambers in it and that is commercially available at the
time the tool is submitted for approval, it will not cause such stud,
pin, or fastener to have a mean velocity in excess of 300 feet per
second when measured 6.5 feet from the muzzle end of the barrel.
(4) Stud, pin, or fastener. A fastening device specifically designed
and manufactured for use in explosive-actuated fastening tools.
(5) To chamber. To fit properly without the use of excess force, the
case being duly supported.
(6) Explosive powerload, also known as load. Any substance in any
form capable of producing a propellant force.
(7) Tool. An explosive-actuated fastening tool, unless otherwise
indicated, and all accessories pertaining thereto.
(8) Protective shield or guard. A device or guard attached to the
muzzle end of the tool, which is designed to confine flying particles.
(b) Abrasive wheel terms--(1) Mounted wheels. Mounted wheels,
usually 2-inch diameter or smaller, and of various shapes, may be either
organic or inorganic bonded abrasive wheels. They are secured to plain
or threaded steel mandrels.
(2) Tuck pointing. Removal, by grinding, of cement, mortar, or other
nonmetallic jointing material.
(3) Tuck pointing wheels. Tuck pointing wheels, usually Type 1,
reinforced organic bonded wheels have diameter, thickness and hole size
dimension. They are subject to the same limitations of use and mounting
as Type 1 wheels defined in subparagraph (10) of this paragraph.
Limitation: Wheels used for tuck pointing should be reinforced,
organic bonded. (See Sec. 1910.243(c)(1)(ii)(c.))
(4) Portable grinding. A grinding operation where the grinding
machine is designed to be hand held and may be easily moved from one
location to another.
(5) Organic bonded wheels. Organic wheels are wheels which are
bonded by means of an organic material such as resin, rubber, shellac,
or other similar bonding agent.
(6) Safety guard. A safety guard is an enclosure designed to
restrain the pieces of the grinding wheel and furnish all possible
protection in the event that the wheel is broken in operation.
(7) Reinforced wheels. The term reinforced as applied to grinding
wheels shall define a class of organic wheels which contain
strengthening fabric or filament. The term reinforced does not cover
wheels using such mechanical additions as steel rings, steel cup backs
or wire or tape winding.
(8) Type 11 flaring cup wheels. Type 11 flaring cup wheels have
double diameter dimensions D and J, and in addition have thickness, hole
size, rim and back thickness dimensions. Grinding is always performed on
rim face, W dimension. Type 11 wheels are subject to all limitations of
use and mounting listed for Type 6 straight sided cup wheels definition
in subparagraph (9) of this paragraph.
Type 11 Flaring Cup Wheels
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.078
Figure P-1
Type 11--Flaring-cup Wheel
Side grinding wheel having a wall flared or tapered outward from the
back. Wall thickness at the back is normally greater than at the
grinding face (W).
Limitation: Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less
than one-fourth T dimension. In addition when unthreaded hole wheels are
specified the inside flat, K dimension, shall be large enough to
accommodate a suitable flange.
(9) Type 6 straight cup wheels. Type 6 cup wheels have diameter,
thickness, hole size, rim thickness, and back thickness dimensions.
Grinding is always performed on rim face, W dimension.
Limitation: Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less
than one-fourth T dimension. In addition, when
[[Page 668]]
unthreaded hole wheels are specified, the inside flat, K dimension, must
be large enough to accommodate a suitable flange.
Type 6 Straight Cup Wheels
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.079
Figure P-2
Type 6--Straight Cup Wheel
Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and hole with one side
straight or flat and the opposite side recessed. This type, however,
differs from Type 5 in that the grinding is performed on the wall of the
abrasive created by the difference between the diameter of the recess
and the outside diameter of the wheel. Therefore, the wall dimension
``W'' takes precedence over the diameter of the recess as an essential
intermediate dimension to describe this shape type.
(10) Type 1 straight wheels. Type 1 straight wheels have diameter,
thickness, and hole size dimensions and should be used only on the
periphery. Type 1 wheels shall be mounted between flanges.
Limitation: Hole dimension (H) should not be greater than two-thirds
of wheel diameter dimension (D) for precision, cylindrical, centerless,
or surface grinding applications. Maximum hole size for all other
applications should not exceed one-half wheel diameter.
Type 1 Straight Wheels
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.080
Figure P-3
Type 1--Straight Wheel
Peripheral grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and hole.
(c) [Reserved]
(d) Jack terms--(1) Jack. A jack is an appliance for lifting and
lowering or moving horizontally a load by application of a pushing
force.
Note: Jacks may be of the following types: Lever and ratchet, screw
and hydraulic.
(2) Rating. The rating of a jack is the maximum working load for
which it is designed to lift safely that load throughout its specified
amount of travel.
Note: To raise the rated load of a jack, the point of application of
the load, the applied force, and the length of lever arm should be those
designated by the manufacturer for the particular jack considered.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978]
Sec. 1910.242 Hand and portable powered tools and equipment, general.
(a) General requirements. Each employer shall be responsible for the
safe condition of tools and equipment used by employees, including tools
and equipment which may be furnished by employees.
(b) Compressed air used for cleaning. Compressed air shall not be
used for cleaning purposes except where reduced to less than 30 p.s.i.
and then only with effective chip guarding and personal protective
equipment.
Sec. 1910.243 Guarding of portable powered tools.
(a) Portable powered tool--(1) Portable circular saws. (i) All
portable, power-driven circular saws having a blade diameter greater
than 2 in. shall be equipped with guards above and below the base plate
or shoe. The upper guard shall cover the saw to the depth of the teeth,
except for the minimum arc required to permit the base to be tilted for
bevel cuts. The lower guard shall cover the saw to the depth of the
teeth, except for the minimum arc required to allow proper retraction
and contact with the work. When the tool is withdrawn from the work, the
lower guard shall automatically and instantly return to covering
position.
[[Page 669]]
(ii) Paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section does not apply to circular
saws used in the meat industry for meat cutting purposes.
(2) Switches and controls. (i) All hand-held powered circular saws
having a blade diameter greater than 2 inches, electric, hydraulic or
pneumatic chain saws, and percussion tools without positive accessory
holding means shall be equipped with a constant pressure switch or
control that will shut off the power when the pressure is released. All
hand-held gasoline powered chain saws shall be equipped with a constant
pressure throttle control that will shut off the power to the saw chain
when the pressure is released.
(ii) All hand-held powered drills, tappers, fastener drivers,
horizontal, vertical, and angle grinders with wheels greater than 2
inches in diameter, disc sanders with discs greater than 2 inches in
diameter, belt sanders, reciprocating saws, saber, scroll, and jig saws
with blade shanks greater than a nominal one-fourth inch, and other
similarly operating powered tools shall be equipped with a constant
pressure switch or control, and may have a lock-on control provided that
turnoff can be accomplished by a single motion of the same finger or
fingers that turn it on.
(iii)(a) All other hand-held powered tools, such as, but not limited
to, platen sanders, grinders with wheels 2 inches in diameter or less,
disc sanders with discs 2 inches in diameter or less, routers, planers,
laminate trimmers, nibblers, shears, saber, scroll, and jig saws with
blade shanks a nominal one-fourth of an inch wide or less, may be
equipped with either a positive ``on-off'' control, or other controls as
described by paragraph (a)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(b) Saber, scroll, and jig saws with nonstandard blade holders may
use blades with shanks which are nonuniform in width, provided the
narrowest portion of the blade shank is an integral part in mounting the
blade.
(c) Blade shank width shall be measured at the narrowest portion of
the blade shank when saber, scroll, and jig saws have nonstandard blade
holders.
(d) Nominal in this subparagraph means 0.05 inch.
(iv) The operating control on hand-held power tools shall be so
located as to minimize the possibility of its accidental operation, if
such accidental operation would constitute a hazard to employees.
(v) This subparagraph does not apply to concrete vibrators, concrete
breakers, powered tampers, jack hammers, rock drills, garden appliances,
household and kitchen appliances, personal care appliances, medical or
dental equipment, or to fixed machinery.
(3) Portable belt sanding machines. Belt sanding machines shall be
provided with guards at each nip point where the sanding belt runs onto
a pulley. These guards shall effectively prevent the hands or fingers of
the operator from coming in contact with the nip points. The unused run
of the sanding belt shall be guarded against accidental contact.
(4) Cracked saws. All cracked saws shall be removed from service.
(5) Grounding. Portable electric powered tools shall meet the
electrical requirements of subpart S of this part.
(b) Pneumatic powered tools and hose--(1) Tool retainer. A tool
retainer shall be installed on each piece of utilization equipment
which, without such a retainer, may eject the tool.
(2) Airhose. Hose and hose connections used for conducting
compressed air to utilization equipment shall be designed for the
pressure and service to which they are subjected.
(c) Portable abrasive wheels--(1) General requirements. Abrasive
wheels shall be used only on machine provided with safety guards as
defined in paragraph (c) (1) through (4) of this section.
(i) Exceptions. The requirements of this paragraph (c)(1) shall not
apply to the following classes of wheels and conditions.
(a) Wheels used for internal work while within the work being
ground;
(b) Mounted wheels used in portable operations 2 inches and smaller
in diameter; (see definition Sec. 1910.241(b)(1)); and
(c) Types 16, 17, 18, 18R, and 19 cones, and plugs, and threaded
hole pot balls where the work offers protection.
(ii)(a) A safety guard shall cover the spindle end, nut and flange
projections. The safety guard shall be mounted so
[[Page 670]]
as to maintain proper alignment with the wheel, and the strength of the
fastenings shall exceed the strength of the guard.
(b) Exception. Safety guards on all operations where the work
provides a suitable measure of protection to the operator may be so
constructed that the spindle end, nut and outer flange are exposed.
Where the nature of the work is such as to entirely cover the side of
the wheel, the side covers of the guard may be omitted.
(c) Exception. The spindle end, nut, and outer flange may be exposed
on portable machines designed for, and used with, type 6, 11, 27, and 28
abrasive wheels, cutting off wheels, and tuck pointing wheels.
(2) Cup wheels. Cup wheels (Types 6 and 11) shall be protected by:
(i) Safety guards as specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section;
or,
(ii) Special ``revolving cup guards'' which mount behind the wheel
and turn with it. They shall be made of steel or other material with
adequate strength and shall enclose the wheel sides upward from the back
for one-third of the wheel thickness. The mounting features shall
conform with all regulations. (See paragraph (c)(5) of this section.) It
is necessary to maintain clearance between the wheel side and the guard.
The clearance shall not exceed one-sixteenth inch; or,
(iii) Some other form of guard that will insure as good protection
as that which would be provided by the guards specified in paragraph
(c)(1) (i) or (ii) of this subparagraph.
(3) Vertical portable grinders. Safety guards used on machines known
as right angle head or vertical portable grinders shall have a maximum
exposure angle of 180 deg., and the guard shall be so located so as to
be between the operator and the wheel during use. Adjustment of guard
shall be such that pieces of an accidentally broken wheel will be
deflected away from the operator. (See Figure P-4.)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.081
Figure No. P-4
(4) Other portable grinders. The maximum angular exposure of the
grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on other
portable grinding machines shall not exceed 180 deg. and the top half of
the wheel shall be enclosed at all times. (See Figures P-5 and P-6.)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.082
Figure No. P-5
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.083
Figure No. P-6
(5) Mounting and inspection of abrasive wheels. (i) Immediately
before mounting, all wheels shall be closely inspected and sounded by
the user (ring
[[Page 671]]
test, see subpart O, Sec. 1910.215(d)(1)) to make sure they have not
been damaged in transit, storage, or otherwise. The spindle speed of the
machine shall be checked before mounting of the wheel to be certain that
it does not exceed the maximum operating speed marked on the wheel.
(ii) Grinding wheels shall fit freely on the spindle and remain free
under all grinding conditions. A controlled clearance between the wheel
hole and the machine spindle (or wheel sleeves or adaptors) is essential
to avoid excessive pressure from mounting and spindle expansion. To
accomplish this, the machine spindle shall be made to nominal (standard)
size plus zero minus .002 inch, and the wheel hole shall be made
suitably oversize to assure safety clearance under the conditions of
operating heat and pressure.
(iii) All contact surfaces of wheels, blotters, and flangers shall
be flat and free of foreign matter.
(iv) When a bushing is used in the wheel hole it shall not exceed
the width of the wheel and shall not contact the flanges.
(v) Requirements for the use of flanges and blotters, see subpart O,
Sec. 1910.215(c).
(6) Excluded machinery. Natural sandstone wheels and metal, wooden,
cloth, or paper discs, having a layer of abrasive on the surface are not
covered by this paragraph.
(d) Explosive actuated fastening tools--(1) General requirements.
(i) Explosive-actuated fastening tools which are actuated by explosives
or any similar means and propel a stud, pin, fastener, or other object
for the purpose of affixing it by penetration to any other object shall
meet the design requirements in ``American National Standard Safety
Requirements for Explosive-Actuated Fastening Tools,'' ANSI A10.3-1970,
which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6. This
requirement does not apply to devices designed for attaching objects to
soft construction materials, such as wood, plaster, tar, dry wallboard,
and the like, or to stud welding equipment.
(ii) Operators and assistants using tools shall be safeguarded by
means of eye protection. Head and face protection shall be used, as
required by working conditions, as set forth in subpart I.
(2) Inspection, maintenance, and tool handling--(i) High-velocity
tools. Tools of this type shall have the characteristics outlined in (a)
through (h) of this section.
(a) The muzzle end of the tool shall have a protective shield or
guard at least 3\1/2\ inches in diameter, mounted perpendicular to and
concentric with the barrel, and designed to confine any flying fragments
or particles that might otherwise create a hazard at the time of firing.
(b) Where a standard shield or guard cannot be used, or where it
does not cover all apparent avenues through which flying particles might
escape, a special shield, guard, fixture, or jig designed and built by
the manufacturer of the tool being used, which provides this degree of
protection, shall be used as a substitute.
(c) The tool shall be so designed that it cannot be fired unless it
is equipped with a standard protective shield or guard, or a special
shield, guard, fixture, or jig.
(d)(1) The firing mechanism shall be so designed that the tool
cannot fire during loading or preparation to fire, or if the tool should
be dropped while loaded.
(2) Firing of the tool shall be dependent upon at least two separate
and distinct operations of the operator, with the final firing movement
being separate from the operation of bringing the tool into the firing
position.
(e) The tool shall be so designed as not to be operable other than
against a work surface, and unless the operator is holding the tool
against the work surface with a force at least 5 pounds greater than the
total weight of the tool.
(f) The tool shall be so designed that it will not operate when
equipped with the standard guard indexed to the center position if any
bearing surface of the guard is tilted more than 8 deg. from contact
with the work surface.
(g) The tool shall be so designed that positive means of varying the
power are available or can be made available to the operator as part of
the tool, or as an auxiliary, in order to make it possible for the
operator to select a
[[Page 672]]
power level adequate to perform the desired work without excessive
force.
(h) The tool shall be so designed that all breeching parts will be
reasonably visible to allow a check for any foreign matter that may be
present.
(ii) Tools of the low-velocity-piston type shall have the
characteristics outlined in paragraphs (d)(2)(ii) (a) through (e) of
this section and any additional safety features he may wish to
incorporate.
(a) The muzzle end of the tool shall be designed so that suitable
protective shields, guards, jigs, or fixtures, designed and built by the
manufacturer of the tool being used, can be mounted perpendicular to the
barrel. A standard spall shield shall be supplied with each tool.
(b)(1) The tool shall be designed so that it shall not in ordinary
usage propel or discharge a stud, pin, or fastener while loading or
during preparation to fire, or if the tool should be dropped while
loaded.
(2) Firing of the tool shall be dependent upon at least two separate
and distinct operations of the operator, with the final firing movement
being separate from the operation of bringing the tool into the firing
position.
(c) The tool shall be so designed as not to be operable other than
against a work surface, and unless the operator is holding the tool
against the work surface with a force at least 5 pounds greater than the
total weight of the tool.
(d) The tool shall be so designed that positive means of varying the
power are available or can be made available to the operator as part of
the tool, or as an auxiliary, in order to make it possible for the
operator to select a power level adequate to perform the desired work
without excessive force.
(e) The tool shall be so designed that all breeching parts will be
reasonably visible to allow a check for any foreign matter that may be
present.
(iii) Tools of the hammer-operated piston tools--low-velocity type
shall have the characteristics outlined in paragraphs (d)(2)(iii) (a)
through (e) of this section.
(a) The muzzle end of the tool shall be so designed that suitable
protective shields, guards, jigs, or fixtures, designed and built by the
manufacturer of the tool being used, can be mounted perpendicular to the
barrel. A standard spall shield shall be supplied with each tool.
(b) The tool shall be so designed that it shall not in ordinary
usage propel or discharge a stud, pin, or fastener while loading, or
during preparation to fire, or if the tool should be dropped while
loaded.
(c) Firing of the tool shall be dependent upon at least two separate
and distinct operations of the operator, with the final firing movement
being separate from the operation of bringing the tool into the firing
position.
(d) The tool shall be so designed that positive means of varying the
power are available or can be made available to the operator as part of
the tool, or as an auxiliary, in order to make it possible for the
operator to select a power level adequate to perform the desired work
without excessive force.
(e) The tool shall be so designed that all breeching parts will be
reasonably visible to allow a check for any foreign matter that may be
present.
(3) Requirements for loads and fasteners. (i) There shall be a
standard means of identifying the power levels of loads used in tools.
(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) No load (cased or caseless) shall be used if it will
accurately chamber in any existing approved commercially available low-
velocity piston tool or hammer operated piston tool--low-velocity type
and will cause a fastener to have a mean velocity in excess of 300 feet
per second when measured 6.5 feet from the muzzle end of the barrel. No
individual test firing of a series shall exceed 300 feet per second by
more than 8 percent.
(iv) Fasteners used in tools shall be only those specifically
manufactured for use in such tools.
(4) Operating requirements. (i) Before using a tool, the operator
shall inspect it to determine to his satisfaction that it is clean, that
all moving parts operate freely, and that the barrel is free from
obstructions.
(ii) When a tool develops a defect during use, the operator shall
immediately cease to use it, until it is properly repaired.
[[Page 673]]
(iii) Tools shall not be loaded until just prior to the intended
firing time. Neither loaded nor empty tools are to be pointed at any
workmen.
(iv) No tools shall be loaded unless being prepared for immediate
use, nor shall an unattended tool be left loaded.
(v) In case of a misfire, the operator shall hold the tool in the
operating position for at least 30 seconds. He shall then try to operate
the tool a second time. He shall wait another 30 seconds, holding the
tool in the operating position; then he shall proceed to remove the
explosive load in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
(vi) A tool shall never be left unattended in a place where it would
be available to unauthorized persons.
(vii) Fasteners shall not be driven into very hard or brittle
materials including, but not limited to, cast iron, glazed tile,
surface-hardened steel, glass block, live rock, face brick, or hollow
tile.
(viii) Driving into materials easily penetrated shall be avoided
unless such materials are backed by a substance that will prevent the
pin or fastener from passing completely through and creating a flying-
missile hazard on the other side.
(ix)(a) Fasteners shall not be driven directly into materials such
as brick or concrete closer than 3 inches from the unsupported edge or
corner, or into steel surfaces closer than one-half inch from the
unsupported edge or corner, unless a special guard, fixture, or jig is
used. (Exception: Low-velocity tools may drive no closer than 2 inches
from an edge in concrete or one-fourth inch in steel.)
(b) When fastening other materials, such as a 2- by 4-inch wood
section to a concrete surface, it is permissible to drive a fastener of
no greater than \7/32\-inch shank diameter not closer than 2 inches from
the unsupported edge or corner of the work surface.
(x) Fasteners shall not be driven through existing holes unless a
positive guide is used to secure accurate alignment.
(xi) No fastener shall be driven into a spalled area caused by an
unsatisfactory fastening.
(xii) Tools shall not be used in an explosive or flammable
atmosphere.
(xiii) All tools shall be used with the correct shield, guard, or
attachment recommended by the manufacturer.
(xiv) Any tool found not in proper working order shall be
immediately removed from service. The tool shall be inspected at regular
intervals and shall be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications.
(e) Power lawnmowers--(1) General requirements. (i) Power lawnmowers
of the walk-behind, riding-rotary, and reel power lawnmowers designed
for sale to the general public shall meet the design specifications in
``American National Standard Safety Specifications for Power
Lawnmowers'' ANSI B71.1-X1968, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6. These specifications do not apply to a walk-
behind mower which has been converted to a riding mower by the addition
of a sulky. Also, these specifications do not apply to flail mowers,
sicklebar mowers, or mowers designed for commercial use.
(ii) All power-driven chains, belts, and gears shall be so
positioned or otherwise guarded to prevent the operator's accidental
contact therewith, during normal starting, mounting, and operation of
the machine.
(iii) A shutoff device shall be provided to stop operation of the
motor or engine. This device shall require manual and intentional
reactivation to restart the motor or engine.
(iv) All positions of the operating controls shall be clearly
identified.
(v) The words, ``Caution. Be sure the operating control(s) is in
neutral before starting the engine,'' or similar wording shall be
clearly visible at an engine starting control point on self-propelled
mowers.
(2) Walk-behind and riding rotary mowers. (i) The mower blade shall
be enclosed except on the bottom and the enclosure shall extend to or
below the lowest cutting point of the blade in the lowest blade
position.
(ii) Guards which must be removed to install a catcher assembly
shall comply with the following:
(a) Warning instructions shall be affixed to the mower near the
opening stating that the mower shall not be used without either the
catcher assembly or the guard in place.
[[Page 674]]
(b) The catcher assembly or the guard shall be shipped and sold as
part of the mower.
(c) The instruction manual shall state that the mower shall not be
used without either the catcher assembly or the guard in place.
(d) The catcher assembly, when properly and completely installed,
shall not create a condition which violates the limits given for the
guarded opening.
(iii) Openings in the blade enclosure, intended for the discharge of
grass, shall be limited to a maximum vertical angle of the opening of
30 deg.. Measurements shall be taken from the lowest blade position.
(iv) The total effective opening area of the grass discharge
opening(s) shall not exceed 1,000 square degrees on units having a width
of cut less than 27\1/2\ inches, or 2,000 square degrees on units having
a width of cut 27\1/2\ inches or over.
(v) The word ``Caution.'' or stronger wording, shall be placed on
the mower at or near each discharge opening.
(vi) [Reserved]
(vii) Blade(s) shall stop rotating from the manufacturer's specified
maximum speed within 15 seconds after declutching, or shutting off
power.
(viii) In a multipiece blade, the means of fastening the cutting
members to the body of the blade or disc shall be so designed that they
will not become worn to a hazardous condition before the cutting members
themselves are worn beyond use.
(ix) The maximum tip speed of any blade shall be 19,000 feet per
minute.
(3) Walk-behind rotary mowers. (i) The horizontal angle of the
opening(s) in the blade enclosure, intended for the discharge of grass,
shall not contact the operator area.
(ii) There shall be one of the following at all openings in the
blade enclosure intended for the discharge of grass:
(a) A minimum unobstructed horizontal distance of 3 inches from the
end of the discharge chute to the blade tip circle.
(b) A rigid bar fastened across the discharge opening, secured to
prevent removal without the use of tools. The bottom of the bar shall be
no higher than the bottom edge of the blade enclosure.
(iii) The highest point(s) of the front of the blade enclosure,
except discharge openings, shall be such that any line extending a
maximum of 15 deg. downward from the horizontal toward the blade shaft
axis (axes) shall not intersect the horizontal plane within the blade
tip circle. The highest point(s) on the blade enclosure front, except
discharge-openings, shall not exceed 1\1/4\ inches above the lowest
cutting point of the blade in the lowest blade position. Mowers with a
swingover handle are to be considered as having no front in the blade
enclosure and therefore shall comply with paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this
section.
(iv) The mower handle shall be fastened to the mower so as to
prevent loss of control by unintentional uncoupling while in operation.
(v) A positive upstop or latch shall be provided for the mower
handle in the normal operating position(s). The upstop shall not be
subject to unintentional disengagement during normal operation of the
mower. The upstop or latch shall not allow the center or the handle
grips to come closer than 17 inches horizontally behind the closest path
of the mower blade(s) unless manually disengaged.
(vi) A swing-over handle, which complies with the above
requirements, will be permitted.
(vii) Wheel drive disengaging controls, except deadman controls,
shall move opposite to the direction of the vehicle motion in order to
disengage the drive. Deadman controls shall automatically interrupt
power to a drive when the operator's actuating force is removed, and may
operate in any direction to disengage the drive.
(4) Riding rotary mowers. (i) The highest point(s) of all openings
in the blade enclosure, front shall be limited by a vertical angle of
opening of 15 deg. and a maximum distance of 1\1/4\ inches above the
lowest cutting point of the blade in the lowest blade position.
(ii) Opening(s) shall be placed so that grass or debris will not
discharge directly toward any part of an operator seated in a normal
operator position.
[[Page 675]]
(iii) There shall be one of the following at all openings in the
blade enclosure intended for the discharge of grass:
(a) A minimum unobstructed horizontal distance of 6 inches from the
end of the discharge chute to the blade tip circle.
(b) A rigid bar fastened across the discharge opening, secured to
prevent removal without the use of tools. The bottom of the bar shall be
no higher than the bottom edge of the blade enclosure.
(iv) Mowers shall be provided with stops to prevent jackknifing or
locking of the steering mechanism.
(v) Vehicle stopping means shall be provided.
(vi) Hand-operated wheel drive disengaging controls shall move
opposite to the direction of vehicle motion in order to disengage the
drive. Foot-operated wheel drive disengaging controls shall be depressed
to disengage the drive. Deadman controls, both hand and foot operated,
shall automatically interrupt power to a drive when the operator's
actuating force is removed, and may operate in any direction to
disengage the drive.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978;
49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 50 FR 4649, Feb. 1, 1985; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7,
1996]
Sec. 1910.244 Other portable tools and equipment.
(a) Jacks--(1) Loading and marking. (i) The operator shall make sure
that the jack used has a rating sufficient to lift and sustain the load.
(ii) The rated load shall be legibly and permanently marked in a
prominent location on the jack by casting, stamping, or other suitable
means.
(2) Operation and maintenance. (i) In the absence of a firm
foundation, the base of the jack shall be blocked. If there is a
possibility of slippage of the cap, a block shall be placed in between
the cap and the load.
(ii) The operator shall watch the stop indicator, which shall be
kept clean, in order to determine the limit of travel. The indicated
limit shall not be overrun.
(iii) After the load has been raised, it shall be cribbed, blocked,
or otherwise secured at once.
(iv) Hydraulic jacks exposed to freezing temperatures shall be
supplied with an adequate antifreeze liquid.
(v) All jacks shall be properly lubricated at regular intervals.
(vi) Each jack shall be thoroughly inspected at times which depend
upon the service conditions. Inspections shall be not less frequent than
the following:
(a) For constant or intermittent use at one locality, once every 6
months,
(b) For jacks sent out of shop for special work, when sent out and
when returned,
(c) For a jack subjected to abnormal load or shock, immediately
before and immediately thereafter.
(vii) Repair or replacement parts shall be examined for possible
defects.
(viii) Jacks which are out of order shall be tagged accordingly, and
shall not be used until repairs are made.
(b) Abrasive blast cleaning nozzles. The blast cleaning nozzles
shall be equipped with an operating valve which must be held open
manually. A support shall be provided on which the nozzle may be mounted
when it is not in use.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984]
Subpart Q--Welding, Cutting and Brazing
Authority: Secs. 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health
Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Orders 12-71
(36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033),
or 6-96 (62 FR 111), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
Source: 55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 1910.251 Definitions.
As used in this subpart:
(a) Welder and welding operator mean any operator of electric or gas
welding and cutting equipment.
(b) Approved means listed or approved by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory. Refer to Sec. 1910.155(c)(3) for definitions of
listed and approved, and Sec. 1910.7 for nationally recognized testing
laboratory.
[[Page 676]]
(c) All other welding terms are used in accordance with American
Welding Society--Terms and Definitions--A3.0--1969, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
[55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.252 General requirements.
(a) Fire prevention and protection--(1) Basic precautions. For
elaboration of these basic precautions and of the special precautions of
paragraph (a)(2) of this section as well as a delineation of the fire
protection and prevention responsibilities of welders and cutters, their
supervisors (including outside contractors) and those in management on
whose property cutting and welding is to be performed, see Standard for
Fire Prevention in Use of Cutting and Welding Processes, NFPA Standard
51B, 1962, which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6. The basic precautions for fire prevention in welding or
cutting work are:
(i) Fire hazards. If the object to be welded or cut cannot readily
be moved, all movable fire hazards in the vicinity shall be taken to a
safe place.
(ii) Guards. If the object to be welded or cut cannot be moved and
if all the fire hazards cannot be removed, then guards shall be used to
confine the heat, sparks, and slag, and to protect the immovable fire
hazards.
(iii) Restrictions. If the requirements stated in paragraphs
(a)(1)(i) and (a)(1)(ii) of this section cannot be followed then welding
and cutting shall not be performed.
(2) Special precautions. When the nature of the work to be performed
falls within the scope of paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section certain
additional precautions may be necessary:
(i) Combustible material. Wherever there are floor openings or
cracks in the flooring that cannot be closed, precautions shall be taken
so that no readily combustible materials on the floor below will be
exposed to sparks which might drop through the floor. The same
precautions shall be observed with regard to cracks or holes in walls,
open doorways and open or broken windows.
(ii) Fire extinquishers. Suitable fire extinguishing equipment shall
be maintained in a state of readiness for instant use. Such equipment
may consist of pails of water, buckets of sand, hose or portable
extinguishers depending upon the nature and quantity of the combustible
material exposed.
(iii) Fire watch. (A) Fire watchers shall be required whenever
welding or cutting is performed in locations where other than a minor
fire might develop, or any of the following conditions exist:
(1) Appreciable combustible material, in building construction or
contents, closer than 35 feet (10.7 m) to the point of operation.
(2) Appreciable combustibles are more than 35 feet (10.7 m) away but
are easily ignited by sparks.
(3) Wall or floor openings within a 35-foot (10.7 m) radius expose
combustible material in adjacent areas including concealed spaces in
walls or floors.
(4) Combustible materials are adjacent to the opposite side of metal
partitions, walls, ceilings, or roofs and are likely to be ignited by
conduction or radiation.
(B) Fire watchers shall have fire extinguishing equipment readily
available and be trained in its use. They shall be familiar with
facilities for sounding an alarm in the event of a fire. They shall
watch for fires in all exposed areas, try to extinguish them only when
obviously within the capacity of the equipment available, or otherwise
sound the alarm. A fire watch shall be maintained for at least a half
hour after completion of welding or cutting operations to detect and
extinguish possible smoldering fires.
(iv) Authorization. Before cutting or welding is permitted, the area
shall be inspected by the individual responsible for authorizing cutting
and welding operations. He shall designate precautions to be followed in
granting authorization to proceed preferably in the form of a written
permit.
(v) Floors. Where combustible materials such as paper clippings,
wood shavings, or textile fibers are on the floor, the floor shall be
swept clean for a radius of 35 feet (10.7 m). Combustible floors shall
be kept wet, covered with damp sand, or protected by fire-resistant
shields. Where floors have been wet down, personnel operating arc
welding
[[Page 677]]
or cutting equipment shall be protected from possible shock.
(vi) Prohibited areas. Cutting or welding shall not be permitted in
the following situations:
(A) In areas not authorized by management.
(B) In sprinklered buildings while such protection is impaired.
(C) In the presence of explosive atmospheres (mixtures of flammable
gases, vapors, liquids, or dusts with air), or explosive atmospheres
that may develop inside uncleaned or improperly prepared tanks or
equipment which have previously contained such materials, or that may
develop in areas with an accumulation of combustible dusts.
(D) In areas near the storage of large quantities of exposed,
readily ignitible materials such as bulk sulfur, baled paper, or cotton.
(vii) Relocation of combustibles. Where practicable, all
combustibles shall be relocated at least 35 feet (10.7 m) from the work
site. Where relocation is impracticable, combustibles shall be protected
with flameproofed covers or otherwise shielded with metal or asbestos
guards or curtains.
(viii) Ducts. Ducts and conveyor systems that might carry sparks to
distant combustibles shall be suitably protected or shut down.
(ix) Combustible walls. Where cutting or welding is done near walls,
partitions, ceiling or roof of combustible construction, fire-resistant
shields or guards shall be provided to prevent ignition.
(x) Noncombustible walls. If welding is to be done on a metal wall,
partition, ceiling or roof, precautions shall be taken to prevent
ignition of combustibles on the other side, due to conduction or
radiation, preferably by relocating combustibles. Where combustibles are
not relocated, a fire watch on the opposite side from the work shall be
provided.
(xi) Combustible cover. Welding shall not be attempted on a metal
partition, wall, ceiling or roof having a combustible covering nor on
walls or partitions of combustible sandwich-type panel construction.
(xii) Pipes. Cutting or welding on pipes or other metal in contact
with combustible walls, partitions, ceilings or roofs shall not be
undertaken if the work is close enough to cause ignition by conduction.
(xiii) Management. Management shall recognize its responsibility for
the safe usage of cutting and welding equipment on its property and:
(A) Based on fire potentials of plant facilities, establish areas
for cutting and welding, and establish procedures for cutting and
welding, in other areas.
(B) Designate an individual responsible for authorizing cutting and
welding operations in areas not specifically designed for such
processes.
(C) Insist that cutters or welders and their supervisors are
suitably trained in the safe operation of their equipment and the safe
use of the process.
(D) Advise all contractors about flammable materials or hazardous
conditions of which they may not be aware.
(xiv) Supervisor. The Supervisor:
(A) Shall be responsible for the safe handling of the cutting or
welding equipment and the safe use of the cutting or welding process.
(B) Shall determine the combustible materials and hazardous areas
present or likely to be present in the work location.
(C) Shall protect combustibles from ignition by the following:
(1) Have the work moved to a location free from dangerous
combustibles.
(2) If the work cannot be moved, have the combustibles moved to a
safe distance from the work or have the combustibles properly shielded
against ignition.
(3) See that cutting and welding are so scheduled that plant
operations that might expose combustibles to ignition are not started
during cutting or welding.
(D) Shall secure authorization for the cutting or welding operations
from the designated management representative.
(E) Shall determine that the cutter or welder secures his approval
that conditions are safe before going ahead.
(F) Shall determine that fire protection and extinguishing equipment
are properly located at the site.
[[Page 678]]
(G) Where fire watches are required, he shall see that they are
available at the site.
(xv) Fire prevention precautions. Cutting or welding shall be
permitted only in areas that are or have been made fire safe. When work
cannot be moved practically, as in most construction work, the area
shall be made safe by removing combustibles or protecting combustibles
from ignition sources.
(3) Welding or cutting containers--(i) Used containers. No welding,
cutting, or other hot work shall be performed on used drums, barrels,
tanks or other containers until they have been cleaned so thoroughly as
to make absolutely certain that there are no flammable materials present
or any substances such as greases, tars, acids, or other materials which
when subjected to heat, might produce flammable or toxic vapors. Any
pipe lines or connections to the drum or vessel shall be disconnected or
blanked.
(ii) Venting and purging. All hollow spaces, cavities or containers
shall be vented to permit the escape of air or gases before preheating,
cutting or welding. Purging with inert gas is recommended.
(4) Confined spaces--(i) Accidental contact. When arc welding is to
be suspended for any substantial period of time, such as during lunch or
overnight, all electrodes shall be removed from the holders and the
holders carefully located so that accidental contact cannot occur and
the machine be disconnected from the power source.
(ii) Torch valve. In order to eliminate the possibility of gas
escaping through leaks or improperly closed valves, when gas welding or
cutting, the torch valves shall be closed and the gas supply to the
torch positively shut off at some point outside the confined area
whenever the torch is not to be used for a substantial period of time,
such as during lunch hour or overnight. Where practicable, the torch and
hose shall also be removed from the confined space.
(b) Protection of personnel--(1) General--(i) Railing. A welder or
helper working on platforms, scaffolds, or runways shall be protected
against falling. This may be accomplished by the use of railings, safety
belts, life lines, or some other equally effective safeguards.
(ii) Welding cable. Welders shall place welding cable and other
equipment so that it is clear of passageways, ladders, and stairways.
(2) Eye protection--(i) Selection. (A) Helmets or hand shields shall
be used during all arc welding or arc cutting operations, excluding
submerged arc welding. Helpers or attendants shall be provided with
proper eye protection.
(B) Goggles or other suitable eye protection shall be used during
all gas welding or oxygen cutting operations. Spectacles without side
shields, with suitable filter lenses are permitted for use during gas
welding operations on light work, for torch brazing or for inspection.
(C) All operators and attendants of resistance welding or resistance
brazing equipment shall use transparent face shields or goggles,
depending on the particular job, to protect their faces or eyes, as
required.
(D) Eye protection in the form of suitable goggles shall be provided
where needed for brazing operations not covered in paragraphs
(b)(2)(i)(A) through (b)(2)(i)(C) of this section.
(ii) Specifications for protectors. (A) Helmets and hand shields
shall be made of a material which is an insulator for heat and
electricity. Helmets, shields and goggles shall be not readily flammable
and shall be capable of withstanding sterilization.
(B) Helmets and hand shields shall be arranged to protect the face,
neck and ears from direct radiant energy from the arc.
(C) Helmets shall be provided with filter plates and cover plates
designed for easy removal.
(D) All parts shall be constructed of a material which will not
readily corrode or discolor the skin.
(E) Goggles shall be ventilated to prevent fogging of the lenses as
much as practicable.
(F) All glass for lenses shall be tempered, substantially free from
striae, air bubbles, waves and other flaws. Except when a lens is ground
to provide proper optical correction for defective vision, the front and
rear surfaces of lenses and windows shall be smooth and parallel.
[[Page 679]]
(G) Lenses shall bear some permanent distinctive marking by which
the source and shade may be readily identified.
(H) The following is a guide for the selection of the proper shade
numbers. These recommendations may be varied to suit the individual's
needs.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Shade
Welding operation No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Shielded metal-arc welding--\1/16\-, \3/32\-, \1/8\-, \5/32\- 10
inch electrodes...............................................
Gas-shielded arc welding (nonferrous)--\1/16\-, \3/32\-, \1/8\- 11
, \5/32\-inch electrodes......................................
Gas-shielded arc welding (ferrous)--\1/16\-, \3/32\-, \1/8\-, 12
\5/32\-inch electrodes........................................
Shielded metal-arc welding:
\3/16\-, \7/32\-, \1/4\-inch electrodes.................... 12
\5/16\-, \3/8\-inch electrodes............................. 14
Atomic hydrogen welding........................................ 10-14
Carbon arc welding............................................. 14
Soldering...................................................... 2
Torch brazing.................................................. 3 or 4
Light cutting, up to 1 inch.................................... 3 or 4
Medium cutting, 1 inch to 6 inches............................. 4 or 5
Heavy cutting, 6 inches and over............................... 5 or 6
Gas welding (light) up to \1/8\ inch........................... 4 or 5
Gas welding (medium) \1/8\ inch to \1/2\ inch.................. 5 or 6
Gas welding (heavy) \1/2\ inch and over........................ 6 or 8
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: In gas welding or oxygen cutting where the torch produces a high
yellow light, it is desirable to use a filter or lens that absorbs the
yellow or sodium line in the visible light of the operation.
(I) All filter lenses and plates shall meet the test for
transmission of radiant energy prescribed in ANSI Z87.1--1968--American
National Standard Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face
Protection, which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6.
(iii) Protection from arc welding rays. Where the work permits, the
welder should be enclosed in an individual booth painted with a finish
of low reflectivity such as zinc oxide (an important factor for
absorbing ultraviolet radiations) and lamp black, or shall be enclosed
with noncombustible screens similarly painted. Booths and screens shall
permit circulation of air at floor level. Workers or other persons
adjacent to the welding areas shall be protected from the rays by
noncombustible or flameproof screens or shields or shall be required to
wear appropriate goggles.
(3) Protective clothing--General requirements. Employees exposed to
the hazards created by welding, cutting, or brazing operations shall be
protected by personal protective equipment in accordance with the
requirements of Sec. 1910.132 of this part. Appropriate protective
clothing required for any welding operation will vary with the size,
nature and location of the work to be performed.
(4) Work in confined spaces--(i) General. As used herein confined
space is intended to mean a relatively small or restricted space such as
a tank, boiler, pressure vessel, or small compartment of a ship.
(ii) Ventilation. Ventilation is a prerequisite to work in confined
spaces. For ventilation requirements see paragraph (c) of this section.
(iii) Securing cylinders and machinery. When welding or cutting is
being performed in any confined spaces the gas cylinders and welding
machines shall be left on the outside. Before operations are started,
heavy portable equipment mounted on wheels shall be securely blocked to
prevent accidental movement.
(iv) Lifelines. Where a welder must enter a confined space through a
manhole or other small opening, means shall be provided for quickly
removing him in case of emergency. When safety belts and lifelines are
used for this purpose they shall be so attached to the welder's body
that his body cannot be jammed in a small exit opening. An attendant
with a preplanned rescue procedure shall be stationed outside to observe
the welder at all times and be capable of putting rescue operations into
effect.
(v) Electrode removal. When arc welding is to be suspended for any
substantial period of time, such as during lunch or overnight, all
electrodes shall be removed from the holders and the holders carefully
located so that accidental contact cannot occur and the machine
disconnected from the power source.
(vi) Gas cylinder shutoff. In order to eliminate the possibility of
gas escaping through leaks of improperly closed valves, when gas welding
or cutting, the torch valves shall be closed and the fuel-gas and oxygen
supply to the torch positively shut off at some point outside the
confined area whenever the torch is not to be used for a substantial
period of time, such as during lunch hour or overnight. Where
practicable
[[Page 680]]
the torch and hose shall also be removed from the confined space.
(vii) Warning sign. After welding operations are completed, the
welder shall mark the hot metal or provide some other means of warning
other workers.
(c) Health protection and ventilation--(1) General--(i)
Contamination. The requirements in this paragraph have been established
on the basis of the following three factors in arc and gas welding which
govern the amount of contamination to which welders may be exposed:
(A) Dimensions of space in which welding is to be done (with special
regard to height of ceiling).
(B) Number of welders.
(C) Possible evolution of hazardous fumes, gases, or dust according
to the metals involved.
(ii) Screens. When welding must be performed in a space entirely
screened on all sides, the screens shall be so arranged that no serious
restriction of ventilation exists. It is desirable to have the screens
so mounted that they are about 2 feet (0.61 m) above the floor unless
the work is performed at so low a level that the screen must be extended
nearer to the floor to protect nearby workers from the glare of welding.
(iii) Maximum allowable concentration. Local exhaust or general
ventilating systems shall be provided and arranged to keep the amount of
toxic fumes, gases, or dusts below the maximum allowable concentration
as specified in Sec. 1910.1000 of this part.
(iv) Precautionary labels. A number of potentially hazardous
materials are employed in fluxes, coatings, coverings, and filler metals
used in welding and cutting or are released to the atmosphere during
welding and cutting. These include but are not limited to the materials
itemized in paragraphs (c)(5) through (c)(12) of this section. The
suppliers of welding materials shall determine the hazard, if any,
associated with the use of their materials in welding, cutting, etc.
(A) All filler metals and fusible granular materials shall carry the
following notice, as a minimum, on tags, boxes, or other containers:
CAUTION
Welding may produce fumes and gases hazardous to health. Avoid
breathing these fumes and gases. Use adequate ventilation. See ANSI
Z49.1 - 1967 Safety in Welding and Cutting published by the American
Welding Society.
(B) Brazing (welding) filler metals containing cadmium in
significant amounts shall carry the following notice on tags, boxes, or
other containers:
WARNING
CONTAINS CADMIUM--POISONOUS FUMES MAY BE FORMED ON HEATING
Do not breathe fumes. Use only with adequate ventilation such as
fume collectors, exhaust ventilators, or air-supplied respirators. See
ANSI Z49.1 - 1967. If chest pain, cough, or fever develops after use
call physician immediately.
(C) Brazing and gas welding fluxes containing fluorine compounds
shall have a cautionary wording to indicate that they contain fluorine
compounds. One such cautionary wording recommended by the American
Welding Society for brazing and gas welding fluxes reads as follows:
CAUTION
CONTAINS FLUORIDES
This flux when heated gives off fumes that may irritate eyes, nose
and throat.
1. Avoid fumes--use only in well-ventilated spaces.
2. Avoid contact of flux with eyes or skin.
3. Do not take internally.
(2) Ventilation for general welding and cutting--(i) General.
Mechanical ventilation shall be provided when welding or cutting is done
on metals not covered in paragraphs (c)(5) through (c)(12) of this
section. (For specific materials, see the ventilation requirements of
paragraphs (c)(5) through (c)(12) of this section.)
(A) In a space of less than 10,000 cubic feet (284 m \3\) per
welder.
(B) In a room having a ceiling height of less than 16 feet (5 m).
(C) In confined spaces or where the welding space contains
partitions, balconies, or other structural barriers to the extent that
they significantly obstruct cross ventilation.
(ii) Minimum rate. Such ventilation shall be at the minimum rate of
2,000
[[Page 681]]
cubic feet (57 m\3\) per minute per welder, except where local exhaust
hoods and booths as per paragraph (c)(3) of this section, or airline
respirators approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration and
the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, pursuant to
the provisions of 30 CFR part 11, are provided. Natural ventilation is
considered sufficient for welding or cutting operations where the
restrictions in paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section are not present.
(3) Local exhaust hoods and booths. Mechanical local exhaust
ventilation may be by means of either of the following:
(i) Hoods. Freely movable hoods intended to be placed by the welder
as near as practicable to the work being welded and provided with a rate
of air-flow sufficient to maintain a velocity in the direction of the
hood of 100 linear feet (30 m) per minute in the zone of welding when
the hood is at its most remote distance from the point of welding. The
rates of ventilation required to accomplish this control velocity using
a 3-inch (7.6 cm) wide flanged suction opening are shown in the
following table:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum air
flow \1\ Duct
Welding zone cubic feet/ diameter,
minute inches \2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 to 6 inches from arc or torch............... 150 3
6 to 8 inches from arc or torch............... 275 3\1/2\
8 to 10 inches from arc or torch.............. 425 4\1/2\
10 to 12 inches from arc or torch............. 600 5\1/2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ When brazing with cadmium bearing materials or when cutting on such
materials increased rates of ventilation may be required.
\2\ Nearest half-inch duct diameter based on 4,000 feet per minute
velocity in pipe.
(ii) Fixed enclosure. A fixed enclosure with a top and not less than
two sides which surround the welding or cutting operations and with a
rate of airflow sufficient to maintain a velocity away from the welder
of not less than 100 linear feet (30 m) per minute.
(4) Ventilation in confined spaces--(i) Air replacement. All welding
and cutting operations carried on in confined spaces shall be adequately
ventilated to prevent the accumulation of toxic materials or possible
oxygen deficiency. This applies not only to the welder but also to
helpers and other personnel in the immediate vicinity. All air replacing
that withdrawn shall be clean and respirable.
(ii) Airline respirators. In circumstances for which it is
impossible to provide such ventilation, airline respirators or hose
masks approved for this purpose by the National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) under 42 CFR part 84 must be
used.
(iii) Self-contained units. In areas immediately hazardous to life,
a full-facepiece, pressure-demand, self-contained breathing apparatus or
a combination full-facepiece, pressure-demand supplied-air respirator
with an auxiliary, self-contained air supply approved by NIOSH under 42
CFR part 84 must be used.
(iv) Outside helper. Where welding operations are carried on in
confined spaces and where welders and helpers are provided with hose
masks, hose masks with blowers or self-contained breathing equipment
approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration and the National
Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, a worker shall be
stationed on the outside of such confined spaces to insure the safety of
those working within.
(v) Oxygen for ventilation. Oxygen shall never be used for
ventilation.
(5) Fluorine compounds--(i) General. In confined spaces, welding or
cutting involving fluxes, coverings, or other materials which contain
fluorine compounds shall be done in accordance with paragraph (c)(4) of
this section. A fluorine compound is one that contains fluorine, as an
element in chemical combination, not as a free gas.
(ii) Maximum allowable concentration. The need for local exhaust
ventilation or airline respirators for welding or cutting in other than
confined spaces will depend upon the individual circumstances. However,
experience has shown such protection to be desirable for fixed-location
production welding and for all production welding on stainless steels.
Where air samples taken at the welding location indicate that the
fluorides liberated are below the maximum allowable concentration, such
protection is not necessary.
(6) Zinc--(i) Confined spaces. In confined spaces welding or cutting
involving zinc-bearing base or filler metals or
[[Page 682]]
metals coated with zinc-bearing materials shall be done in accordance
with paragraph (c)(4) of this section.
(ii) Indoors. Indoors, welding or cutting involving zinc-bearing
base or filler metals coated with zinc-bearing materials shall be done
in accordance with paragraph (c)(3) of this section.
(7) Lead--(i) Confined spaces. In confined spaces, welding involving
lead-base metals (erroneously called lead-burning) shall be done in
accordance with paragraph (c)(4) of this section.
(ii) Indoors. Indoors, welding involving lead-base metals shall be
done in accordance with paragraph (c)(3) of this section.
(iii) Local ventilation. In confined spaces or indoors, welding or
cutting operations involving metals containing lead, other than as an
impurity, or metals coated with lead-bearing materials, including paint,
must be done using local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators.
Such operations, when done outdoors, must be done using respirators
approved for this purpose by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84. In all cases,
workers in the immediate vicinity of the cutting operation must be
protected by local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators.
(8) Beryllium. Welding or cutting indoors, outdoors, or in confined
spaces involving beryllium-containing base or filler metals shall be
done using local exhaust ventilation and airline respirators unless
atmospheric tests under the most adverse conditions have established
that the workers' exposure is within the acceptable concentrations
defined by Sec. 1910.1000 of this part. In all cases, workers in the
immediate vicinity of the welding or cutting operations shall be
protected as necessary by local exhaust ventilation or airline
respirators.
(9) Cadmium--(i) General. In confined spaces or indoors, welding or
cutting operations involving cadmium-bearing or cadmium-coated base
metals must be done using local exhaust ventilation or airline
respirators unless atmospheric tests under the most adverse conditions
show that employee exposure is within the acceptable concentrations
specified by 29 CFR 1910.1000. Such operations, when done outdoors, must
be done using respirators, such as fume respirators, approved for this
purpose by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84.
(ii) Confined space. Welding (brazing) involving cadmium-bearing
filler metals shall be done using ventilation as prescribed in paragraph
(c)(3) or (c)(4) of this section if the work is to be done in a confined
space.
(10) Mercury. In confined spaces or indoors, welding or cutting
operations involving metals coated with mercury-bearing materials,
including paint, must be done using local exhaust ventilation or airline
respirators unless atmospheric tests under the most adverse conditions
show that employee exposure is within the acceptable concentrations
specified by 29 CFR 1910.1000. Such operations, when done outdoors, must
be done using respirators approved for this purpose by NIOSH under 42
CFR part 84.
(11) Cleaning compounds--(i) Manufacturer's instructions. In the use
of cleaning materials, because of their possible toxicity or
flammability, appropriate precautions such as manufacturers instructions
shall be followed.
(ii) Degreasing. Degreasing and other cleaning operations involving
chlorinated hydrocarbons shall be so located that no vapors from these
operations will reach or be drawn into the atmosphere surrounding any
welding operation. In addition, trichloroethylene and perchlorethylene
should be kept out of atmospheres penetrated by the ultraviolet
radiation of gas-shielded welding operations.
(12) Cutting of stainless steels. Oxygen cutting, using either a
chemical flux or iron powder or gas-shielded arc cutting of stainless
steel, shall be done using mechanical ventilation adequate to remove the
fumes generated.
(13) First-aid equipment. First-aid equipment shall be available at
all times. All injuries shall be reported as soon as possible for
medical attention. First aid shall be rendered until medical attention
can be provided.
(d) Industrial applications--(1) Transmission pipeline--(i) General.
The requirements of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section and
Sec. 1910.254 of this part shall be observed.
[[Page 683]]
(ii) Field shop operations. Where field shop operations are involved
for fabrication of fittings, river crossings, road crossings, and
pumping and compressor stations the requirements of paragraphs (a), (b),
and (c) of this section and Secs. 1910.253 and 1910.254 of this part
shall be observed.
(iii) Electric shock. When arc welding is performed in wet
conditions, or under conditions of high humidity, special protection
against electric shock shall be supplied.
(iv) Pressure testing. In pressure testing of pipelines, the workers
and the public shall be protected against injury by the blowing out of
closures or other pressure restraining devices. Also, protection shall
be provided against expulsion of loose dirt that may have become trapped
in the pipe.
(v) Construction standards. The welded construction of transmission
pipelines shall be conducted in accordance with the Standard for Welding
Pipe Lines and Related Facilities, API Std. 1104--1968, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(vi) Flammable substance lines. The connection, by welding, of
branches to pipelines carrying flammable substances shall be performed
in accordance with Welding or Hot Tapping on Equipment Containing
Flammables, API Std. PSD No. 2201--1963, which is incorporated by
reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(vii) X-ray inspection. The use of X-rays and radioactive isotopes
for the inspection of welded pipeline joints shall be carried out in
conformance with the American National Standard Safety Standard for Non-
Medical X-ray and Sealed Gamma-Ray Sources, ANSI Z54.1--1963, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(2) Mechanical piping systems--(i) General. The requirements of
paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this section and Secs. 1910.253 and
1910.254 of this part shall be observed.
(ii) X-ray inspection. The use of X-rays and radioactive isotopes
for the inspection of welded piping joints shall be in conformance with
the American National Standard Safety Standard for Non-Medical X-ray and
Sealed Gamma-Ray Sources, ANSI Z54.1--1963.
[55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 63
FR 1284, Jan. 8, 1998]
Sec. 1910.253 Oxygen-fuel gas welding and cutting.
(a) General requirements--(1) Flammable mixture. Mixtures of fuel
gases and air or oxygen may be explosive and shall be guarded against.
No device or attachment facilitating or permitting mixtures of air or
oxygen with flammable gases prior to consumption, except at the burner
or in a standard torch, shall be allowed unless approved for the
purpose.
(2) Maximum pressure. Under no condition shall acetylene be
generated, piped (except in approved cylinder manifolds) or utilized at
a pressure in excess of 15 psig (103 kPa gauge pressure) or 30 psia (206
kPa absolute). The 30 psia (206 kPa absolute) limit is intended to
prevent unsafe use of acetylene in pressurized chambers such as
caissons, underground excavations or tunnel construction.) This
requirement is not intended to apply to storage of acetylene dissolved
in a suitable solvent in cylinders manufactured and maintained according
to U.S. Department of Transportation requirements, or to acetylene for
chemical use. The use of liquid acetylene shall be prohibited.
(3) Apparatus. Only approved apparatus such as torches, regulators
or pressure-reducing valves, acetylene generators, and manifolds shall
be used.
(4) Personnel. Workmen in charge of the oxygen or fuel-gas supply
equipment, including generators, and oxygen or fuel-gas distribution
piping systems shall be instructed and judged competent by their
employers for this important work before being left in charge. Rules and
instructions covering the operation and maintenance of oxygen or fuel-
gas supply equipment including generators, and oxygen or fuel-gas
distribution piping systems shall be readily available.
(b) Cylinders and containers--(1) Approval and marking. (i) All
portable cylinders used for the storage and shipment of compressed gases
shall be constructed and maintained in accordance
[[Page 684]]
with the regulations of the U.S. Department of Transportation, 49 CFR
parts 171-179.
(ii) Compressed gas cylinders shall be legibly marked, for the
purpose of identifying the gas content, with either the chemical or the
trade name of the gas. Such marking shall be by means of stenciling,
stamping, or labeling, and shall not be readily removable. Whenever
practical, the marking shall be located on the shoulder of the cylinder.
This method conforms to the American National Standard Method for
Marking Portable Compressed Gas Containers to Identify the Material
Contained, ANSI Z48.1--1954, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(iii) Compressed gas cylinders shall be equipped with connections
complying with the American National Standard Compressed Gas Cylinder
Valve Outlet and Inlet Connections, ANSI B57.1--1965, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(iv) All cylinders with a water weight capacity of over 30 pounds
(13.6 kg) shall be equipped with means of connecting a valve protection
cap or with a collar or recess to protect the valve.
(2) Storage of cylinders--general. (i) Cylinders shall be kept away
from radiators and other sources of heat.
(ii) Inside of buildings, cylinders shall be stored in a well-
protected, well-ventilated, dry location, at least 20 feet (6.1 m) from
highly combustible materials such as oil or excelsior. Cylinders should
be stored in definitely assigned places away from elevators, stairs, or
gangways. Assigned storage spaces shall be located where cylinders will
not be knocked over or damaged by passing or falling objects, or subject
to tampering by unauthorized persons. Cylinders shall not be kept in
unventilated enclosures such as lockers and cupboards.
(iii) Empty cylinders shall have their valves closed.
(iv) Valve protection caps, where cylinder is designed to accept a
cap, shall always be in place, hand-tight, except when cylinders are in
use or connected for use.
(3) Fuel-gas cylinder storage. Inside a building, cylinders, except
those in actual use or attached ready for use, shall be limited to a
total gas capacity of 2,000 cubic feet (56 m\3\) or 300 pounds (135.9
kg) of liquefied petroleum gas.
(i) For storage in excess of 2,000 cubic feet (56 m\3\) total gas
capacity of cylinders or 300 (135.9 kg) pounds of liquefied petroleum
gas, a separate room or compartment conforming to the requirements
specified in paragraphs (f)(6)(i)(H) and (f)(6)(i)(I) of this section
shall be provided, or cylinders shall be kept outside or in a special
building. Special buildings, rooms or compartments shall have no open
flame for heating or lighting and shall be well ventilated. They may
also be used for storage of calcium carbide in quantities not to exceed
600 (271.8 kg) pounds, when contained in metal containers complying with
paragraphs (g)(1)(i) and (g)(1)(ii) of this section.
(ii) Acetylene cylinders shall be stored valve end up.
(4) Oxygen storage. (i) Oxygen cylinders shall not be stored near
highly combustible material, especially oil and grease; or near reserve
stocks of carbide and acetylene or other fuel-gas cylinders, or near any
other substance likely to cause or accelerate fire; or in an acetylene
generator compartment.
(ii) Oxygen cylinders stored in outside generator houses shall be
separated from the generator or carbide storage rooms by a
noncombustible partition having a fire-resistance rating of at least 1
hour. This partition shall be without openings and shall be gastight.
(iii) Oxygen cylinders in storage shall be separated from fuel-gas
cylinders or combustible materials (especially oil or grease), a minimum
distance of 20 feet (6.1 m) or by a noncombustible barrier at least 5
feet (1.5 m) high having a fire-resistance rating of at least one-half
hour.
(iv) Where a liquid oxygen system is to be used to supply gaseous
oxygen for welding or cutting and the system has a storage capacity of
more than 13,000 cubic feet (364 m\3\) of oxygen (measured at 14.7 psia
(101 kPa) and 70 deg.F (21.1 deg.C)), connected in service or ready
for service, or more than 25,000 cubic feet (700 m\3\) of oxygen
(measured at 14.7 psia (101 kPa) and 70 deg.F (21.1 deg.C)), including
unconnected reserves on hand at the site, it shall comply with the
[[Page 685]]
provisions of the Standard for Bulk Oxygen Systems at Consumer Sites,
NFPA No. 566--1965, which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6.
(5) Operating procedures. (i) Cylinders, cylinder valves, couplings,
regulators, hose, and apparatus shall be kept free from oily or greasy
substances. Oxygen cylinders or apparatus shall not be handled with oily
hands or gloves. A jet of oxygen must never be permitted to strike an
oily surface, greasy clothes, or enter a fuel oil or other storage tank.
(ii)(A) When transporting cylinders by a crane or derrick, a cradle,
boat, or suitable platform shall be used. Slings or electric magnets
shall not be used for this purpose. Valve-protection caps, where
cylinder is designed to accept a cap, shall always be in place.
(B) Cylinders shall not be dropped or struck or permitted to strike
each other violently.
(C) Valve-protection caps shall not be used for lifting cylinders
from one vertical position to another. Bars shall not be used under
valves or valve-protection caps to pry cylinders loose when frozen to
the ground or otherwise fixed; the use of warm (not boiling) water is
recommended. Valve-protection caps are designed to protect cylinder
valves from damage.
(D) Unless cylinders are secured on a special truck, regulators
shall be removed and valve-protection caps, when provided for, shall be
put in place before cylinders are moved.
(E) Cylinders not having fixed hand wheels shall have keys, handles,
or nonadjustable wrenches on valve stems while these cylinders are in
service. In multiple cylinder installations only one key or handle is
required for each manifold.
(F) Cylinder valves shall be closed before moving cylinders.
(G) Cylinder valves shall be closed when work is finished.
(H) Valves of empty cylinders shall be closed.
(I) Cylinders shall be kept far enough away from the actual welding
or cutting operation so that sparks, hot slag, or flame will not reach
them, or fire-resistant shields shall be provided.
(J) Cylinders shall not be placed where they might become part of an
electric circuit. Contacts with third rails, trolley wires, etc., shall
be avoided. Cylinders shall be kept away from radiators, piping systems,
layout tables, etc., that may be used for grounding electric circuits
such as for arc welding machines. Any practice such as the tapping of an
electrode against a cylinder to strike an arc shall be prohibited.
(K) Cylinders shall never be used as rollers or supports, whether
full or empty.
(L) The numbers and markings stamped into cylinders shall not be
tampered with.
(M) No person, other than the gas supplier, shall attempt to mix
gases in a cylinder. No one, except the owner of the cylinder or person
authorized by him, shall refill a cylinder.
(N) No one shall tamper with safety devices in cylinders or valves.
(O) Cylinders shall not be dropped or otherwise roughly handled.
(P) Unless connected to a manifold, oxygen from a cylinder shall not
be used without first attaching an oxygen regulator to the cylinder
valve. Before connecting the regulator to the cylinder valve, the valve
shall be opened slightly for an instant and then closed. Always stand to
one side of the outlet when opening the cylinder valve.
(Q) A hammer or wrench shall not be used to open cylinder valves. If
valves cannot be opened by hand, the supplier shall be notified.
(R)(1) Cylinder valves shall not be tampered with nor should any
attempt be made to repair them. If trouble is experienced, the supplier
should be sent a report promptly indicating the character of the trouble
and the cylinder's serial number. Supplier's instructions as to its
disposition shall be followed.
(2) Complete removal of the stem from a diaphragm-type cylinder
valve shall be avoided.
(iii)(A) Fuel-gas cylinders shall be placed with valve end up
whenever they are in use. Liquefied gases shall be stored and shipped
with the valve end up.
(B) Cylinders shall be handled carefully. Rough handling, knocks, or
falls
[[Page 686]]
are liable to damage the cylinder, valve or safety devices and cause
leakage.
(C) Before connecting a regulator to a cylinder valve, the valve
shall be opened slightly and closed immediately. The valve shall be
opened while standing to one side of the outlet; never in front of it.
Never crack a fuel-gas cylinder valve near other welding work or near
sparks, flame, or other possible sources of ignition.
(D) Before a regulator is removed from a cylinder valve, the
cylinder valve shall be closed and the gas released from the regulator.
(E) Nothing shall be placed on top of an acetylene cylinder when in
use which may damage the safety device or interfere with the quick
closing of the valve.
(F) If cylinders are found to have leaky valves or fittings which
cannot be stopped by closing of the valve, the cylinders shall be taken
outdoors away from sources of ignition and slowly emptied.
(G) A warning should be placed near cylinders having leaking fuse
plugs or other leaking safety devices not to approach them with a
lighted cigarette or other source of ignition. Such cylinders should be
plainly tagged; the supplier should be promptly notified and his
instructions followed as to their return.
(H) Safety devices shall not be tampered with.
(I) Fuel-gas shall never be used from cylinders through torches or
other devices equipped with shutoff valves without reducing the pressure
through a suitable regulator attached to the cylinder valve or manifold.
(J) The cylinder valve shall always be opened slowly.
(K) An acetylene cylinder valve shall not be opened more than one
and one-half turns of the spindle, and preferably no more than three-
fourths of a turn.
(L) Where a special wrench is required it shall be left in position
on the stem of the valve while the cylinder is in use so that the fuel-
gas flow can be quickly turned off in case of emergency. In the case of
manifolded or coupled cylinders at least one such wrench shall always be
available for immediate use.
(c) Manifolding of cylinders--(1) Fuel-gas manifolds. (i) Manifolds
shall be approved either separately for each component part or as an
assembled unit.
(ii) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(1)(iii) of this section
fuel-gas cylinders connected to one manifold inside a building shall be
limited to a total capacity not exceeding 300 pounds (135.9 kg) of
liquefied petroleum gas or 3,000 cubic feet (84 m \3\) of other fuel-
gas. More than one such manifold with connected cylinders may be located
in the same room provided the manifolds are at least 50 feet (15 m)
apart or separated by a noncombustible barrier at least 5 feet (1.5 m)
high having a fire-resistance rating of at least one-half hour.
(iii) Fuel-gas cylinders connected to one manifold having an
aggregate capacity exceeding 300 pounds (135.9 kg) of liquefied
petroleum gas or 3,000 cubic feet (84 m \3\) of other fuel-gas shall be
located outdoors, or in a separate building or room constructed in
accordance with paragraphs (f)(6)(i)(H) and (f)(6)(i)(I) of this
section.
(iv) Separate manifold buildings or rooms may also be used for the
storage of drums of calcium carbide and cylinders containing fuel gases
as provided in paragraph (b)(3) of this section. Such buildings or rooms
shall have no open flames for heating or lighting and shall be well-
ventilated.
(v) High-pressure fuel-gas manifolds shall be provided with approved
pressure regulating devices.
(2) High-pressure oxygen manifolds (for use with cylinders having a
Department of Transportation service pressure above 200 psig (1.36
MPa)). (i) Manifolds shall be approved either separately for each
component part or as an assembled unit.
(ii) Oxygen manifolds shall not be located in an acetylene generator
room. Oxygen manifolds shall be separated from fuel-gas cylinders or
combustible materials (especially oil or grease), a minimum distance of
20 feet (6.1 m) or by a noncombustible barrier at least 5 feet (1.5 m)
high having a fire-resistance rating of at least one-half hour.
(iii) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(2)(iv) of this section,
oxygen cylinders connected to one manifold shall be limited to a total
gas capacity of
[[Page 687]]
6,000 cubic feet (168 m \3\). More than one such manifold with connected
cylinders may be located in the same room provided the manifolds are at
least 50 feet (15 m) apart or separated by a noncombustible barrier at
least 5 feet (1.5 m) high having a fire-resistance rating of at least
one-half hour.
(iv) An oxygen manifold, to which cylinders having an aggregate
capacity of more than 6,000 cubic feet (168 m \3\) of oxygen are
connected, should be located outdoors or in a separate noncombustible
building. Such a manifold, if located inside a building having other
occupancy, shall be located in a separate room of noncombustible
construction having a fire-resistance rating of at least one-half hour
or in an area with no combustible material within 20 feet (6.1 m) of the
manifold.
(v) An oxygen manifold or oxygen bulk supply system which has
storage capacity of more than 13,000 cubic feet (364 m \3\) of oxygen
(measured at 14.7 psia (101 kPa) and 70 deg.F (21.1 deg.C)), connected
in service or ready for service, or more than 25,000 cubic feet (700 m
\3\) of oxygen (measured at 14.7 psia (101 kPa) and 70 deg.F (21.1
deg.C)), including unconnected reserves on hand at the site, shall
comply with the provisions of the Standard for Bulk Oxygen Systems at
Consumer Sites, NFPA No. 566-1965.
(vi) High-pressure oxygen manifolds shall be provided with approved
pressure-regulating devices.
(3) Low-pressure oxygen manifolds (for use with cylinders having a
Department of Transportation service pressure not exceeding 200 psig
(1.36 MPa)). (i) Manifolds shall be of substantial construction suitable
for use with oxygen at a pressure of 250 psig (1.7 MPa). They shall have
a minimum bursting pressure of 1,000 psig (6.8 MPa) and shall be
protected by a safety relief device which will relieve at a maximum
pressure of 500 psig (3.4 MPa). DOT-4L200 cylinders have safety devices
which relieve at a maximum pressure of 250 psig (1.7 MPa) (or 235 psig
(1.6 MPa) if vacuum insulation is used).
(ii) Hose and hose connections subject to cylinder pressure shall
comply with paragraph (e)(5) of this section. Hose shall have a minimum
bursting pressure of 1,000 psig (6.8 MPa).
(iii) The assembled manifold including leads shall be tested and
proven gas-tight at a pressure of 300 psig (2.04 MPa). The fluid used
for testing oxygen manifolds shall be oil-free and not combustible.
(iv) The location of manifolds shall comply with paragraphs
(c)(2)(ii), (c)(2)(iii), (c)(2)(iv), and (c)(2)(v) of this section.
(v) The following sign shall be conspicuously posted at each
manifold:
Low-Pressure Manifold
Do Not Connect High-Pressure Cylinders
Maximum Pressure--250 psig (1.7 MPa)
(4) Portable outlet headers. (i) Portable outlet headers shall not
be used indoors except for temporary service where the conditions
preclude a direct supply from outlets located on the service piping
system.
(ii) Each outlet on the service piping from which oxygen or fuel-gas
is withdrawn to supply a portable outlet header shall be equipped with a
readily accessible shutoff valve.
(iii) Hose and hose connections used for connecting the portable
outlet header to the service piping shall comply with paragraph (e)(5)
of this section.
(iv) Master shutoff valves for both oxygen and fuel-gas shall be
provided at the entry end of the portable outlet header.
(v) Portable outlet headers for fuel-gas service shall be provided
with an approved hydraulic back-pressure valve installed at the inlet
and preceding the service outlets, unless an approved pressure-reducing
regulator, an approved back-flow check valve, or an approved hydraulic
back-pressure valve is installed at each outlet. Outlets provided on
headers for oxygen service may be fitted for use with pressure-reducing
regulators or for direct hose connection.
(vi) Each service outlet on portable outlet headers shall be
provided with a valve assembly that includes a detachable outlet seal
cap, chained or otherwise attached to the body of the valve.
(vii) Materials and fabrication procedures for portable outlet
headers shall comply with paragraphs (d)(1), (d)(2), and (d)(5) of this
section.
[[Page 688]]
(viii) Portable outlet headers shall be provided with frames which
will support the equipment securely in the correct operating position
and protect them from damage during handling and operation.
(5) Manifold operation procedures. (i) Cylinder manifolds shall be
installed under the supervision of someone familiar with the proper
practices with reference to their construction and use.
(ii) All manifolds and parts used in methods of manifolding shall be
used only for the gas or gases for which they are approved.
(iii) When acetylene cylinders are coupled, approved flash arresters
shall be installed between each cylinder and the coupler block. For
outdoor use only, and when the number of cylinders coupled does not
exceed three, one flash arrester installed between the coupler block and
regulator is acceptable.
(iv) The aggregate capacity of fuel-gas cylinders connected to a
portable manifold inside a building shall not exceed 3,000 cubic feet
(84 m \3\) of gas.
(v) Acetylene and liquefied fuel-gas cylinders shall be manifolded
in a vertical position.
(vi) The pressure in the gas cylinders connected to and discharged
simultaneously through a common manifold shall be approximately equal.
(d) Service piping systems--(1) Materials and design. (i)(A) Piping
and fittings shall comply with section 2, Industrial Gas and Air Piping
Systems, of the American National Standard Code for Pressure Piping ANSI
B31.1, 1967, which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6, insofar as it does not conflict with paragraphs
(d)(1)(i)(A)(1) and (d)(1)(i)(A)(2) of this section:
(1) Pipe shall be at least Schedule 40 and fittings shall be at
least standard weight in sizes up to and including 6-inch nominal.
(2) Copper tubing shall be Types K or L in accordance with the
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube, ASTM B88-66a,
which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(B) Piping shall be steel, wrought iron, brass or copper pipe, or
seamless copper, brass or stainless steel tubing, except as provided in
paragraphs (d)(1)(ii) and (d)(1)(iii) of this section.
(ii)(A) Oxygen piping and fittings at pressures in excess of 700 psi
(4.8 MPa), shall be stainless steel or copper alloys.
(B) Hose connections and hose complying with paragraph (e)(5) of
this section may be used to connect the outlet of a manifold pressure
regulator to piping providing the working pressure of the piping is 250
psi (1.7 MPa) or less and the length of the hose does not exceed 5 feet
(1.5 m). Hose shall have a minimum bursting pressure of 1,000 psig (6.8
MPa).
(C) When oxygen is supplied to a service piping system from a low-
pressure oxygen manifold without an intervening pressure regulating
device, the piping system shall have a minimum design pressure of 250
psig (1.7 MPa). A pressure regulating device shall be used at each
station outlet when the connected equipment is for use at pressures less
than 250 psig (1.7 MPa).
(iii)(A) Piping for acetylene or acetylenic compounds shall be steel
or wrought iron.
(B) Unalloyed copper shall not be used for acetylene or acetylenic
compounds except in listed equipment.
(2) Piping joints. (i) Joints in steel or wrought iron piping shall
be welded, threaded or flanged. Fittings, such as ells, tees, couplings,
and unions, may be rolled, forged or cast steel, malleable iron or
nodular iron. Gray or white cast iron fittings are prohibited.
(ii) Joints in brass or copper pipe shall be welded, brazed,
threaded, or flanged. If of the socket type, they shall be brazed with
silver-brazing alloy or similar high melting point (not less than 800
deg.F (427 deg.C)) filler metal.
(iii) Joints in seamless copper, brass, or stainless steel tubing
shall be approved gas tubing fittings or the joints shall be brazed. If
of the socket type, they shall be brazed with silver-brazing alloy or
similar high melting point (not less than 800 deg.F (427 deg.C))
filler metal.
(3) Installation. (i) Distribution lines shall be installed and
maintained in a safe operating condition.
(ii) All piping shall be run as directly as practicable, protected
against physical damage, proper allowance being
[[Page 689]]
made for expansion and contraction, jarring and vibration. Pipe laid
underground in earth shall be located below the frost line and protected
against corrosion. After assembly, piping shall be thoroughly blown out
with air, nitrogen, or carbon dioxide to remove foreign materials. For
oxygen piping, only oil-free air, oil-free nitrogen, or oil-free carbon
dioxide shall be used.
(iii) Only piping which has been welded or brazed shall be installed
in tunnels, trenches or ducts. Shutoff valves shall be located outside
such conduits. Oxygen piping may be placed in the same tunnel, trench or
duct with fuel-gas pipelines, provided there is good natural or forced
ventilation.
(iv) Low points in piping carrying moist gas shall be drained into
drip pots constructed so as to permit pumping or draining out the
condensate at necessary intervals. Drain valves shall be installed for
this purpose having outlets normally closed with screw caps or plugs. No
open end valves or petcocks shall be used, except that in drips located
out of doors, underground, and not readily accessible, valves may be
used at such points if they are equipped with means to secure them in
the closed position. Pipes leading to the surface of the ground shall be
cased or jacketed where necessary to prevent loosening or breaking.
(v) Gas cocks or valves shall be provided for all buildings at
points where they will be readily accessible for shutting off the gas
supply to these buildings in any emergency. There shall also be provided
a shutoff valve in the discharge line from the generator, gas holder,
manifold or other source of supply.
(vi) Shutoff valves shall not be installed in safety relief lines in
such a manner that the safety relief device can be rendered ineffective.
(vii) Fittings and lengths of pipe shall be examined internally
before assembly and, if necessary freed from scale or dirt. Oxygen
piping and fittings shall be washed out with a suitable solution which
will effectively remove grease and dirt but will not react with oxygen.
Hot water solutions of caustic soda or trisodium phosphate are effective
cleaning agents for this purpose.
(viii) Piping shall be thoroughly blown out after assembly to remove
foreign materials. For oxygen piping, oil-free air, oil-free nitrogen,
or oil-free carbon dioxide shall be used. For other piping, air or inert
gas may be used.
(ix) When flammable gas lines or other parts of equipment are being
purged of air or gas, open lights or other sources of ignition shall not
be permitted near uncapped openings.
(x) No welding or cutting shall be performed on an acetylene or
oxygen pipeline, including the attachment of hangers or supports, until
the line has been purged. Only oil-free air, oil-free nitrogen, or oil-
free carbon dioxide shall be used to purge oxygen lines.
(4) Painting and signs. (i) Underground pipe and tubing and outdoor
ferrous pipe and tubing shall be covered or painted with a suitable
material for protection against corrosion.
(ii) Aboveground piping systems shall be marked in accordance with
the American National Standard Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems, ANSI A13.1-1956, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(iii) Station outlets shall be marked to indicate the name of the
gas.
(5) Testing. (i) Piping systems shall be tested and proved gastight
at 1\1/2\ times the maximum operating pressure, and shall be thoroughly
purged of air before being placed in service. The material used for
testing oxygen lines shall be oil free and noncombustible. Flames shall
not be used to detect leaks.
(ii) When flammable gas lines or other parts of equipment are being
purged of air or gas, sources of ignition shall not be permitted near
uncapped openings.
(e) Protective equipment, hose, and regulators--(1) General.
Equipment shall be installed and used only in the service for which it
is approved and as recommended by the manufacturer.
(2) Pressure relief devices. Service piping systems shall be
protected by pressure relief devices set to function at not more than
the design pressure of the systems and discharging upwards to a safe
location.
(3) Piping protective equipment. (i) The fuel-gas and oxygen piping
systems, including portable outlet headers shall
[[Page 690]]
incorporate the protective equipment shown in Figures Q-1, Q-2, and Q-3.
When only a portion of a fuel-gas system is to be used with oxygen, only
that portion need comply with this paragraph (e)(3)(i).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.084
(ii) Approved protective equipment (designated PF in
Figures Q-1, Q-2, and Q-3) shall be installed in fuel-gas piping to
prevent:
(A) Backflow of oxygen into the fuel-gas supply system;
(B) Passage of a flash back into the fuel-gas supply system; and
(C) Excessive back pressure of oxygen in the fuel-gas supply system.
The three functions of the protective equipment may be combined in one
device or may be provided by separate devices.
(1) The protective equipment shall be located in the main supply
line, as in Figure Q-1 or at the head of each branch line, as in Figure
Q-2 or at each location where fuel-gas is withdrawn, as in Figure Q-3.
Where branch lines are of 2-inch pipe size or larger or of substantial
length, protective equipment (designated as PF) shall be
located as shown in either Q-2 and Q-3.
(2) Backflow protection shall be provided by an approved device that
will prevent oxygen from flowing into the fuel-gas system or fuel from
flowing into the oxygen system (see SF, Figures Q-l and Q-2).
(3) Flash-back protection shall be provided by an approved device
that will prevent flame from passing into the fuel-gas system.
(4) Back-pressure protection shall be provided by an approved
pressure-relief device set at a pressure not greater
[[Page 691]]
than the pressure rating of the backflow or the flashback protection
device, whichever is lower. The pressure-relief device shall be located
on the downstream side of the backflow and flashback protection devices.
The vent from the pressure-relief device shall be at least as large as
the relief device inlet and shall be installed without low points that
may collect moisture. If low points are unavoidable, drip pots with
drains closed with screw plugs or caps shall be installed at the low
points. The vent terminus shall not endanger personnel or property
through gas discharge; shall be located away from ignition sources; and
shall terminate in a hood or bend.
(iii) If pipeline protective equipment incorporates a liquid, the
liquid level shall be maintained, and a suitable antifreeze may be used
to prevent freezing.
(iv) Fuel gas for use with equipment not requiring oxygen shall be
withdrawn upstream of the piping protective devices.
(4) Station outlet protective equipment. (i) A check valve, pressure
regulator, hydraulic seal, or combination of these devices shall be
provided at each station outlet, including those on portable headers, to
prevent backflow, as shown in Figures Q-1, Q-2, and Q-3 and designated
as SF and SO.
(ii) When approved pipeline protective equipment (designated
PF) is located at the station outlet as in Figure Q-3, no
additional check valve, pressure regulator, or hydraulic seal is
required.
(iii) A shutoff valve (designated VF and VO)
shall be installed at each station outlet and shall be located on the
upstream side of other station outlet equipment.
(iv) If the station outlet is equipped with a detachable regulator,
the outlet shall terminate in a union connection that complies with the
Regulator Connection Standards, 1958, Compressed Gas Association, which
is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(v) If the station outlet is connected directly to a hose, the
outlet shall terminate in a union connection complying with the Standard
Hose Connection Specifications, 1957, Compressed Gas Association, which
is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(vi) Station outlets may terminate in pipe threads to which
permanent connections are to be made, such as to a machine.
(vii) Station outlets shall be equipped with a detachable outlet
seal cap secured in place. This cap shall be used to seal the outlet
except when a hose, a regulator, or piping is attached.
(viii) Where station outlets are equipped with approved backflow and
flashback protective devices, as many as four torches may be supplied
from one station outlet through rigid piping, provided each outlet from
such piping is equipped with a shutoff valve and provided the fuel-gas
capacity of any one torch does not exceed 15 cubic feet (0.42 m\3\) per
hour. This paragraph (e)(4)(viii) does not apply to machines.
(5) Hose and hose connections. (i) Hose for oxy-fuel gas service
shall comply with the Specification for Rubber Welding Hose, 1958,
Compressed Gas Association and Rubber Manufacturers Association, which
is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(ii) When parallel lengths of oxygen and acetylene hose are taped
together for convenience and to prevent tangling, not more than 4 inches
(10.2 cm) out of 12 inches (30.5 cm) shall be covered by tape.
(iii) Hose connections shall comply with the Standard Hose
Connection Specifications, 1957, Compressed Gas Association.
(iv) Hose connections shall be clamped or otherwise securely
fastened in a manner that will withstand, without leakage, twice the
pressure to which they are normally subjected in service, but in no case
less than a pressure of 300 psi (2.04 MPa). Oil-free air or an oil-free
inert gas shall be used for the test.
(v) Hose showing leaks, burns, worn places, or other defects
rendering it unfit for service shall be repaired or replaced.
(6) Pressure-reducing regulators. (i) Pressure-reducing regulators
shall be used only for the gas and pressures for which they are
intended. The regulator inlet connections shall comply with Regulator
Connection Standards, 1958, Compressed Gas Association.
[[Page 692]]
(ii) When regulators or parts of regulators, including gages, need
repair, the work shall be performed by skilled mechanics who have been
properly instructed.
(iii) Gages on oxygen regulators shall be marked``USE NO OIL.''
(iv) Union nuts and connections on regulators shall be inspected
before use to detect faulty seats which may cause leakage of gas when
the regulators are attached to the cylinder valves.
(f) Acetylene generators--(1) Approval and marking. (i) Generators
shall be of approved construction and shall be plainly marked with the
maximum rate of acetylene in cubic feet per hour for which they are
designed; the weight and size of carbide necessary for a single charge;
the manufacturer's name and address; and the name or number of the type
of generator.
(ii) Carbide shall be of the size marked on the generator nameplate.
(2) Rating and pressure limitations. (i) The total hourly output of
a generator shall not exceed the rate for which it is approved and
marked. Unless specifically approved for higher ratings, carbide-feed
generators shall be rated at 1 cubic foot (0.028 m\3\) per hour per
pound of carbide required for a single complete charge.
(ii) Relief valves shall be regularly operated to insure proper
functioning. Relief valves for generating chambers shall be set to open
at a pressure not in excess of 15 psig (103 kPa gauge pressure). Relief
valves for hydraulic back pressure valves shall be set to open at a
pressure not in excess of 20 psig (137 kPa gauge pressure).
(iii) Nonautomatic generators shall not be used for generating
acetylene at pressures exceeding l psig (7 kPa gauge pressure), and all
water overflows shall be visible.
(3) Location. The space around the generator shall be ample for
free, unobstructed operation and maintenance and shall permit ready
adjustment and charging.
(4) Stationary acetylene generators (automatic and nonautomatic).
(i)(A) The foundation shall be so arranged that the generator will be
level and so that no excessive strain will be placed on the generator or
its connections. Acetylene generators shall be grounded.
(B) Generators shall be placed where water will not freeze. The use
of common salt (sodium chloride) or other corrosive chemicals for
protection against freezing is not permitted. (For heating systems see
paragraph (f)(6)(iii) of this section.)
(C) Except when generators are prepared in accordance with paragraph
(f)(7)(v) of this section, sources of ignition shall be prohibited in
outside generator houses or inside generator rooms.
(D) Water shall not be supplied through a continuous connection to
the generator except when the generator is provided with an adequate
open overflow or automatic water shutoff which will effectively prevent
overfilling of the generator. Where a noncontinuous connection is used,
the supply line shall terminate at a point not less than 2 inches (5 cm)
above the regularly provided opening for filling so that the water can
be observed as it enters the generator.
(E) Unless otherwise specifically approved, generators shall not be
fitted with continuous drain connections leading to sewers, but shall
discharge through an open connection into a suitably vented outdoor
receptacle or residue pit which may have such connections. An open
connection for the sludge drawoff is desirable to enable the generator
operator to observe leakage of generating water from the drain valve or
sludge cock.
(ii)(A) Each generator shall be provided with a vent pipe.
(B) The escape or relief pipe shall be rigidly installed without
traps and so that any condensation will drain back to the generator.
(C) The escape or relief pipe shall be carried full size to a
suitable point outside the building. It shall terminate in a hood or
bend located at least 12 feet (3.7 m) above the ground, preferably above
the roof, and as far away as practicable from windows or other openings
into buildings and as far away as practicable from sources of ignition
such as flues or chimneys and tracks used by locomotives. Generating
chamber relief pipes shall not be inter-connected but shall be
separately led to the outside
[[Page 693]]
air. The hood or bend shall be so constructed that it will not be
obstructed by rain, snow, ice, insects, or birds. The outlet shall be at
least 3 feet (0.9 m) from combustible construction.
(iii)(A) Gas holders shall be constructed on the gasometer
principle, the bell being suitably guided. The gas bell shall move
freely without tendency to bind and shall have a clearance of at least 2
inches (5 cm) from the shell.
(B) The gas holder may be located in the generator room, in a
separate room or out of doors. In order to prevent collapse of the gas
bell or infiltration of air due to a vacuum caused by the compressor or
booster pump or cooling of the gas, a compressor or booster cutoff shall
be provided at a point 12 inches (0.3 m) or more above the landing point
of the bell. When the gas holder is located indoors, the room shall be
ventilated in accordance with paragraph (f)(6)(ii) of this section and
heated and lighted in accordance with paragraphs (f)(6)(iii) and
(f)(6)(iv) of this section.
(C) When the gas holder is not located within a heated building, gas
holder seals shall be protected against freezing.
(D) Means shall be provided to stop the generator-feeding mechanism
before the gas holder reaches the upper limit of its travel.
(E) When the gas holder is connected to only one generator, the gas
capacity of the holder shall be not less than one-third of the hourly
rating of the generator.
(F) If acetylene is used from the gas holder without increase in
pressure at some points but with increase in pressure by a compressor or
booster pump at other points, approved piping protective devices shall
be installed in each supply line. The low-pressure protective device
shall be located between the gas holder and the shop piping, and the
medium-pressure protective device shall be located between the
compressor or booster pump and the shop piping (see Figure Q-4).
Approved protective equipment (designated PF) is used to
prevent: Backflow of oxygen into the fuel-gas supply system; passage of
a flashback into the fuel-gas supply system; and excessive back pressure
of oxygen in the fuel-gas supply system. The three functions of the
protective equipment may be combined in one device or may be provided by
separate devices.
[[Page 694]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC27OC91.085
(iv)(A) The compressor or booster system shall be of an approved
type.
(B) Wiring and electric equipment in compressor or booster pump
rooms or enclosures shall conform to the provisions of subpart S of this
part for Class I, Division 2 locations.
(C) Compressors and booster pump equipment shall be located in well-
ventilated areas away from open flames, electrical or mechanical sparks,
or other ignition sources.
(D) Compressor or booster pumps shall be provided with pressure
relief valves which will relieve pressure exceeding 15 psig (103 kPa
gauge pressure) to a safe outdoor location as provided in paragraph
(f)(4)(ii) of this section, or by returning the gas to the inlet side or
to the gas supply source.
(E) Compressor or booster pump discharge outlets shall be provided
with approved protective equipment. (See paragraph (e) of this section.)
(5) Portable acetylene generators. (i)(A) All portable generators
shall be of a type approved for portable use.
(B) Portable generators shall not be used within 10 feet (3 m) of
combustible material other than the floor.
(C) Portable generators shall not be used in rooms of total volume
less than 35 times the total gas-generating capacity per charge of all
generators in the room. Generators shall not be used in rooms having a
ceiling height of less than 10 feet (3 m). (To obtain the gas-generating
capacity in cubic feet per charge, multiply the pounds of carbide per
charge by 4.5.)
(D) Portable generators shall be protected against freezing. The use
of salt or other corrosive chemical to prevent freezing is prohibited.
(ii)(A) Portable generators shall be cleaned and recharged and the
air mixture blown off outside buildings.
(B) When charged with carbide, portable generators shall not be
moved by crane or derrick.
(C) When not in use, portable generators shall not be stored in
rooms in which open flames are used unless the generators contain no
carbide and have been thoroughly purged of acetylene. Storage rooms
shall be well ventilated.
(D) When portable acetylene generators are to be transported and
operated on vehicles, they shall be securely anchored to the vehicles.
If transported
[[Page 695]]
by truck, the motor shall be turned off during charging, cleaning, and
generating periods.
(E) Portable generators shall be located at a safe distance from the
welding position so that they will not be exposed to sparks, slag, or
misdirection of the torch flame or overheating from hot materials or
processes.
(6) Outside generator houses and inside generator rooms for
stationary acetylene generators. (i)(A) No opening in any outside
generator house shall be located within 5 feet (1.5 m) of any opening in
another building.
(B) Walls, floors, and roofs of outside generator houses shall be of
noncombustible construction.
(C) When a part of the generator house is to be used for the storage
or manifolding of oxygen cylinders, the space to be so occupied shall be
separated from the generator or carbide storage section by partition
walls continuous from floor to roof or ceiling, of the type of
construction stated in paragraph (f)(6)(i)(H) of this section. Such
separation walls shall be without openings and shall be joined to the
floor, other walls and ceiling or roof in a manner to effect a permanent
gas-tight joint.
(D) Exit doors shall be located so as to be readily accessible in
case of emergency.
(E) Explosion venting for outside generator houses and inside
generator rooms shall be provided in exterior walls or roofs. The
venting areas shall be equal to not less than 1 square foot (0.09 m\2\)
per 50 cubic feet (1.4 m\3\) of room volume and may consist of any one
or any combination of the following: Walls of light, noncombustible
material preferably single-thickness, single-strength glass; lightly
fastened hatch covers; lightly fastened swinging doors in exterior walls
opening outward; lightly fastened walls or roof designed to relieve at a
maximum pressure of 25 pounds per square foot (0.001 MPa).
(F) The installation of acetylene generators within buildings shall
be restricted to buildings not exceeding one story in height; provided,
however, that this will not be construed as prohibiting such
installations on the roof or top floor of a building exceeding such
height.
(G) Generators installed inside buildings shall be enclosed in a
separate room.
(H) The walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings of inside generator
rooms shall be of noncombustible construction having a fire-resistance
rating of at least 1 hour. The walls or partitions shall be continuous
from floor to ceiling and shall be securely anchored. At least one wall
of the room shall be an exterior wall.
(I) Openings from an inside generator room to other parts of the
building shall be protected by a swinging type, self-closing fire door
for a Class B opening and having a rating of at least 1 hour. Windows in
partitions shall be wired glass and approved metal frames with fixed
sash. Installation shall be in accordance with the Standard for the
Installation of Fire Doors and Windows, NFPA 80-1970, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(ii) Inside generator rooms or outside generator houses shall be
well ventilated with vents located at floor and ceiling levels.
(iii) Heating shall be by steam, hot water, enclosed electrically
heated elements or other indirect means. Heating by flames or fires
shall be prohibited in outside generator houses or inside generator
rooms, or in any enclosure communicating with them.
(iv)(A) Generator houses or rooms shall have natural light during
daylight hours. Where artificial lighting is necessary it shall be
restricted to electric lamps installed in a fixed position. Unless
specifically approved for use in atmospheres containing acetylene, such
lamps shall be provided with enclosures of glass or other noncombustible
material so designed and constructed as to prevent gas vapors from
reaching the lamp or socket and to resist breakage. Rigid conduit with
threaded connections shall be used.
(B) Lamps installed outside of wired-glass panels set in gas-tight
frames in the exterior walls or roof of the generator house or room are
acceptable.
(v) Electric switches, telephones, and all other electrical
apparatus which may cause a spark, unless specifically
[[Page 696]]
approved for use inside acetylene generator rooms, shall be located
outside the generator house or in a room or space separated from the
generator room by a gas-tight partition, except that where the generator
system is designed so that no carbide fill opening or other part of the
generator is open to the generator house or room during the operation of
the generator, and so that residue is carried in closed piping from the
residue discharge valve to a point outside the generator house or room,
electrical equipment in the generator house or room shall conform to the
provisions of subpart S of this part for Class I, Division 2 locations.
(7) Maintenance and operation. (i) Unauthorized persons shall not be
permitted in outside generator houses or inside generator rooms.
(A) Operating instructions shall be posted in a conspicuous place
near the generator or kept in a suitable place available for ready
reference.
(B) When recharging generators the order of operations specified in
the instructions supplied by the manufacturer shall be followed.
(C) In the case of batch-type generators, when the charge of carbide
is exhausted and before additional carbide is added, the generating
chamber shall always be flushed out with water, renewing the water
supply in accordance with the instruction card furnished by the
manufacturer.
(D) The water-carbide residue mixture drained from the generator
shall not be discharged into sewer pipes or stored in areas near open
flames. Clear water from residue settling pits may be discharged into
sewer pipes.
(ii) The carbide added each time the generator is recharged shall be
sufficient to refill the space provided for carbide without ramming the
charge. Steel or other ferrous tools shall not be used in distributing
the charge.
(iii) Generator water chambers shall be kept filled to proper level
at all times except while draining during the recharging operation.
(iv) Whenever repairs are to be made or the generator is to be
charged or carbide is to be removed, the water chamber shall be filled
to the proper level.
(v) Previous to making repairs involving welding, soldering, or
other hot work or other operations which produce a source of ignition,
the carbide charge and feed mechanism shall be completely removed. All
acetylene shall be expelled by completely flooding the generator shell
with water and the generator shall be disconnected from the piping
system. The generator shall be kept filled with water, if possible, or
positioned to hold as much water as possible.
(vi) Hot repairs shall not be made in a room where there are other
generators unless all the generators and piping have been purged of
acetylene.
(g) Calcium carbide storage--(1) Packaging. (i) Calcium carbide
shall be contained in metal packages of sufficient strength to prevent
rupture. The packages shall be provided with a screw top or equivalent.
These packages shall be constructed water- and air-tight. Solder shall
not be used in such a manner that the package would fail if exposed to
fire.
(ii) Packages containing calcium carbide shall be conspicuously
marked``Calcium Carbide--Dangerous If Not Kept Dry'' or with equivalent
warning.
(iii) Caution: Metal tools, even the so-called spark resistant type
may cause ignition of an acetylene and air mixture when opening carbide
containers.
(iv) Sprinkler systems shall not be installed in carbide storage
rooms.
(2) Storage indoors. (i) Calcium carbide in quantities not to exceed
600 pounds (272.2 kg) may be stored indoors in dry, waterproof, and
well-ventilated locations.
(A) Calcium carbide not exceeding 600 pounds (272.2 kg) may be
stored indoors in the same room with fuel-gas cylinders.
(B) Packages of calcium carbide, except for one of each size, shall
be kept sealed. The seals shall not be broken when there is carbide in
excess of 1 pound (0.5 kg) in any other unsealed package of the same
size of carbide in the room.
(ii) Calcium carbide exceeding 600 pounds (272.2 kg) but not
exceeding 5,000 pounds (2,268 kg) shall be stored:
[[Page 697]]
(A) In accordance with paragraph (g)(2)(iii) of this section;
(B) In an inside generator room or outside generator house; or
(C) In a separate room in a one-story building which may contain
other occupancies, but without cellar or basement beneath the carbide
storage section. Such rooms shall be constructed in accordance with
paragraphs (f)(6)(i)(H) and (f)(6)(i)(I) of this section and ventilated
in accordance with paragraph (f)(6)(ii) of this section. These rooms
shall be used for no other purpose.
(iii) Calcium carbide in excess of 5,000 pounds (2,268 kg) shall be
stored in one-story buildings without cellar or basement and used for no
other purpose, or in outside generator houses. If the storage building
is of noncombustible construction, it may adjoin other one-story
buildings if separated therefrom by unpierced firewalls; if it is
detached less than 10 feet (3 m) from such building or buildings, there
shall be no opening in any of the mutually exposing sides of such
buildings within 10 feet (3 m). If the storage building is of
combustible construction, it shall be at least 20 feet (6.1 m) from any
other one- or two-story building, and at least 30 feet (9.1 m) from any
other building exceeding two stories.
(3) Storage outdoors. (i) Calcium carbide in unopened metal
containers may be stored outdoors.
(ii) Carbide containers to be stored outdoors shall be examined to
make sure that they are in good condition. Periodic reexaminations shall
be made for rusting or other damage to a container that might affect its
water or air tightness.
(iii) The bottom tier of each row shall be placed on wooden planking
or equivalent, so that the containers will not come in contact with the
ground or ground water.
(iv) Containers of carbide which have been in storage the longest
shall be used first.
[55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 55 FR 32015, Aug 6, 1990; 55
FR 46053, Nov. 1, 1990; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.254 Arc welding and cutting.
(a) General--(1) Equipment selection. Welding equipment shall be
chosen for safe application to the work to be done as specified in
paragraph (b) of this section.
(2) Installation. Welding equipment shall be installed safely as
specified by paragraph (c) of this section.
(3) Instruction. Workmen designated to operate arc welding equipment
shall have been properly instructed and qualified to operate such
equipment as specified in paragraph (d) of this section.
(b) Application of arc welding equipment--(1) General. Assurance of
consideration of safety in design is obtainable by choosing apparatus
complying with the Requirements for Electric Arc-Welding Apparatus, NEMA
EW-1-1962, National Electrical Manufacturers Association or the Safety
Standard for Transformer-Type Arc-Welding Machines, ANSI C33.2--1956,
Underwriters' Laboratories, both of which are incorporated by reference
as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(2) Environmental conditions. (i) Standard machines for arc welding
service shall be designed and constructed to carry their rated load with
rated temperature rises where the temperature of the cooling air does
not exceed 40 deg.C (104 deg.F) and where the altitude does not exceed
3,300 feet (1,005.8 m), and shall be suitable for operation in
atmospheres containing gases, dust, and light rays produced by the
welding arc.
(ii) Unusual service conditions may exist, and in such circumstances
machines shall be especially designed to safely meet the requirements of
the service. Chief among these conditions are:
(A) Exposure to unusually corrosive fumes.
(B) Exposure to steam or excessive humidity.
(C) Exposure to excessive oil vapor.
(D) Exposure to flammable gases.
(E) Exposure to abnormal vibration or shock.
(F) Exposure to excessive dust.
(G) Exposure to weather.
(H) Exposure to unusual seacoast or shipboard conditions.
(3) Voltage. The following limits shall not be exceeded:
(i) Alternating-current machines
[[Page 698]]
(A) Manual arc welding and cutting--80 volts.
(B) Automatic (machine or mechanized) arc welding and cutting--100
volts.
(ii) Direct-current machines
(A) Manual arc welding and cutting--100 volts.
(B) Automatic (machine or mechanized) arc welding and cutting-100
volts.
(iii) When special welding and cutting processes require values of
open circuit voltages higher than the above, means shall be provided to
prevent the operator from making accidental contact with the high
voltage by adequate insulation or other means.
(iv) For a.c. welding under wet conditions or warm surroundings
where perspiration is a factor, the use of reliable automatic controls
for reducing no load voltage is recommended to reduce the shock hazard.
(4) Design. (i) A controller integrally mounted in an electric motor
driven welder shall have capacity for carrying rated motor current,
shall be capable of making and interrupting stalled rotor current of the
motor, and may serve as the running overcurrent device if provided with
the number of overcurrent units as specified by subpart S of this part.
(ii) On all types of arc welding machines, control apparatus shall
be enclosed except for the operating wheels, levers, or handles.
(iii) Input power terminals, tap change devices and live metal parts
connected to input circuits shall be completely enclosed and accessible
only by means of tools.
(iv) Terminals for welding leads should be protected from accidental
electrical contact by personnel or by metal objects, i.e., vehicles,
crane hooks, etc. Protection may be obtained by use of: Dead-front
receptacles for plug connections; recessed openings with nonremovable
hinged covers; heavy insulating sleeving or taping or other equivalent
electrical and mechanical protection. If a welding lead terminal which
is intended to be used exclusively for connection to the work is
connected to the grounded enclosure, it must be done by a conductor at
least two AWG sizes smaller than the grounding conductor and the
terminal shall be marked to indicate that it is grounded.
(v) No connections for portable control devices such as push buttons
to be carried by the operator shall be connected to an a.c. circuit of
higher than 120 volts. Exposed metal parts of portable control devices
operating on circuits above 50 volts shall be grounded by a grounding
conductor in the control cable.
(vi) Auto transformers or a.c. reactors shall not be used to draw
welding current directly from any a.c. power source having a voltage
exceeding 80 volts.
(c) Installation of arc weldinq equipment--(1) General. Installation
including power supply shall be in accordance with the requirements of
subpart S of this part.
(2) Grounding. (i) The frame or case of the welding machine (except
engine-driven machines) shall be grounded under the conditions and
according to the methods prescribed in subpart S of this part.
(ii) Conduits containing electrical conductors shall not be used for
completing a work-lead circuit. Pipelines shall not be used as a
permanent part of a work-lead circuit, but may be used during
construction, extension or repair providing current is not carried
through threaded joints, flanged bolted joints, or caulked joints and
that special precautions are used to avoid sparking at connection of the
work-lead cable.
(iii) Chains, wire ropes, cranes, hoists, and elevators shall not be
used to carry welding current.
(iv) Where a structure, conveyor, or fixture is regularly employed
as a welding current return circuit, joints shall be bonded or provided
with adequate current collecting devices.
(v) All ground connections shall be checked to determine that they
are mechanically strong and electrically adequate for the required
current.
(3) Supply connections and conductors. (i) A disconnecting switch or
controller shall be provided at or near each welding machine which is
not equipped with such a switch or controller mounted as an integral
part of the machine. The
[[Page 699]]
switch shall be in accordance with subpart S of this part. Overcurrent
protection shall be provided as specified in subpart S of this part. A
disconnect switch with overload protection or equivalent disconnect and
protection means, permitted by subpart S of this part, shall be provided
for each outlet intended for connection to a portable welding machine.
(ii) For individual welding machines, the rated current-carrying
capacity of the supply conductors shall be not less than the rated
primary current of the welding machines.
(iii) For groups of welding machines, the rated current-carrying
capacity of conductors may be less than the sum of the rated primary
currents of the welding machines supplied. The conductor rating shall be
determined in each case according to the machine loading based on the
use to be made of each welding machine and the allowance permissible in
the event that all the welding machines supplied by the conductors will
not be in use at the same time.
(iv) In operations involving several welders on one structure, d.c.
welding process requirements may require the use of both polarities; or
supply circuit limitations for a.c. welding may require distribution of
machines among the phases of the supply circuit. In such cases no load
voltages between electrode holders will be 2 times normal in d.c. or 1,
1.41, 1.73, or 2 times normal on a.c. machines. Similar voltage
differences will exist if both a.c. and d.c. welding are done on the
same structure.
(A) All d.c. machines shall be connected with the same polarity.
(B) All a.c. machines shall be connected to the same phase of the
supply circuit and with the same instantaneous polarity.
(d) Operation and maintenance--(1) General. Workmen assigned to
operate or maintain arc welding equipment shall be acquainted with the
requirements of this section and with Sec. 1910.252 (a), (b) and (c) of
this part; if doing gas-shielded arc welding, also Recommended Safe
Practices for Gas-Shielded Arc Welding, A6.1-1966, American Welding
Society, which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(2) Machine hook up. Before starting operations all connections to
the machine shall be checked to make certain they are properly made. The
work lead shall be firmly attached to the work; magnetic work clamps
shall be freed from adherent metal particles of spatter on contact
surfaces. Coiled welding cable shall be spread out before use to avoid
serious overheating and damage to insulation.
(3) Grounding. Grounding of the welding machine frame shall be
checked. Special attention shall be given to safety ground connections
of portable machines.
(4) Leaks. There shall be no leaks of cooling water, shielding gas
or engine fuel.
(5) Switches. It shall be determined that proper switching equipment
for shutting down the machine is provided.
(6) Manufacturers' instructions. Printed rules and instructions
covering operation of equipment supplied by the manufacturers shall be
strictly followed.
(7) Electrode holders. Electrode holders when not in use shall be so
placed that they cannot make electrical contact with persons, conducting
objects, fuel or compressed gas tanks.
(8) Electric shock. Cables with splices within 10 feet (3 m) of the
holder shall not be used. The welder should not coil or loop welding
electrode cable around parts of his body.
(9) Maintenance. (i) The operator should report any equipment defect
or safety hazard to his supervisor and the use of the equipment shall be
discontinued until its safety has been assured. Repairs shall be made
only by qualified personnel.
(ii) Machines which have become wet shall be thoroughly dried and
tested before being used.
(iii) Cables with damaged insulation or exposed bare conductors
shall be replaced. Joining lengths of work and electrode cables shall be
done by the use of connecting means specifically intended for the
purpose. The connecting means shall have insulation adequate for the
service conditions.
[55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996]
[[Page 700]]
Sec. 1910.255 Resistance welding.
(a) General--(1) Installation. All equipment shall be installed by a
qualified electrician in conformance with subpart S of this part. There
shall be a safety-type disconnecting switch or a circuit breaker or
circuit interrupter to open each power circuit to the machine,
conveniently located at or near the machine, so that the power can be
shut off when the machine or its controls are to be serviced.
(2) Thermal protection. Ignitron tubes used in resistance welding
equipment shall be equipped with a thermal protection switch.
(3) Personnel. Workmen designated to operate resistance welding
equipment shall have been properly instructed and judged competent to
operate such equipment.
(4) Guarding. Controls of all automatic or air and hydraulic clamps
shall be arranged or guarded to prevent the operator from accidentally
activating them.
(b) Spot and seam welding machines (nonportable)--(1) Voltage. All
external weld initiating control circuits shall operate on low voltage,
not over 120 volts, for the safety of the operators.
(2) Capacitor welding. Stored energy or capacitor discharge type of
resistance welding equipment and control panels involving high voltage
(over 550 volts) shall be suitably insulated and protected by complete
enclosures, all doors of which shall be provided with suitable
interlocks and contacts wired into the control circuit (similar to
elevator interlocks). Such interlocks or contacts shall be so designed
as to effectively interrupt power and short circuit all capacitors when
the door or panel is open. A manually operated switch or suitable
positive device shall be installed, in addition to the mechanical
interlocks or contacts, as an added safety measure assuring absolute
discharge of all capacitors.
(3) Interlocks. All doors and access panels of all resistance
welding machines and control panels shall be kept locked and interlocked
to prevent access, by unauthorized persons, to live portions of the
equipment.
(4) Guarding. All press welding machine operations, where there is a
possibility of the operator's fingers being under the point of
operation, shall be effectively guarded by the use of a device such as
an electronic eye safety circuit, two hand controls or protection
similar to that prescribed for punch press operation, Sec. 1910.217 of
this part. All chains, gears, operating bus linkage, and belts shall be
protected by adequate guards, in accordance with Sec. 1910.219 of this
part.
(5) Shields. The hazard of flying sparks shall be, wherever
practical, eliminated by installing a shield guard of safety glass or
suitable fire-resistant plastic at the point of operation. Additional
shields or curtains shall be installed as necessary to protect passing
persons from flying sparks. (See Sec. 1910.252(b)(2)(i)(C) of this
part.)
(6) Foot switches. All foot switches shall be guarded to prevent
accidental operation of the machine.
(7) Stop buttons. Two or more safety emergency stop buttons shall be
provided on all special multispot welding machines, including 2-post and
4-post weld presses.
(8) Safety pins. On large machines, four safety pins with plugs and
receptacles (one in each corner) shall be provided so that when safety
pins are removed and inserted in the ram or platen, the press becomes
inoperative.
(9) Grounding. Where technically practical, the secondary of all
welding transformers used in multispot, projection and seam welding
machines shall be grounded. This may be done by permanently grounding
one side of the welding secondary current circuit. Where not technically
practical, a center tapped grounding reactor connected across the
secondary or the use of a safety disconnect switch in conjunction with
the welding control are acceptable alternates. Safety disconnect shall
be arranged to open both sides of the line when welding current is not
present.
(c) Portable welding machines--(1) Counterbalance. All portable
welding guns shall have suitable counterbalanced devices for supporting
the guns, including cables, unless the design of the gun or fixture
makes counterbalancing impractical or unnecessary.
[[Page 701]]
(2) Safety chains. All portable welding guns, transformers and
related equipment that is suspended from overhead structures, eye beams,
trolleys, etc., shall be equipped with safety chains or cables. Safety
chains or cables shall be capable of supporting the total shock load in
the event of failure of any component of the supporting system.
(3) Clevis. Each clevis shall be capable of supporting the total
shock load of the suspended equipment in the event of trolley failure.
(4) Switch guards. All initiating switches, including retraction and
dual schedule switches, located on the portable welding gun shall be
equipped with suitable guards capable of preventing accidental
initiation through contact with fixturing, operator's clothing, etc.
Initiating switch voltage shall not exceed 24 volts.
(5) Moving holder. The movable holder, where it enters the gun
frame, shall have sufficient clearance to prevent the shearing of
fingers carelessly placed on the operating movable holder.
(6) Grounding. The secondary and case of all portable welding
transformers shall be grounded. Secondary grounding may be by center
tapped secondary or by a center tapped grounding reactor connected
across the secondary.
(d) Flash welding equipment--(1) Ventilation and flash guard. Flash
welding machines shall be equipped with a hood to control flying flash.
In cases of high production, where materials may contain a film of oil
and where toxic elements and metal fumes are given off, ventilation
shall be provided in accordance with Sec. 1910.252(c) of this part.
(2) Fire curtains. For the protection of the operators of nearby
equipment, fire-resistant curtains or suitable shields shall be set up
around the machine and in such a manner that the operators movements are
not hampered.
(e) Maintenance. Periodic inspection shall be made by qualified
maintenance personnel, and a certification record maintained. The
certification record shall include the date of inspection, the signature
of the person who performed the inspection and the serial number, or
other identifier, for the equipment inspected. The operator shall be
instructed to report any equipment defects to his supervisor and the use
of the equipment shall be discontinued until safety repairs have been
completed.
Subpart R--Special Industries
Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order
No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), or 6-96
(62 FR 111), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
Sec. 1910.261 Pulp, paper, and paperboard mills.
(a) General requirements--(1) Application. This section applies to
establishments where pulp, paper, and paperboard are manufactured and
converted. This section does not apply to logging and the transportation
of logs to pulp, paper, and paperboard mills.
(2) Standards incorporated by reference. Standards covering issues
of occupational safety and health which have general application without
regard to any specific industry are incorporated by reference in
paragraphs (b) through (m) of this section and in subparagraphs (3) and
(4) of this paragraph and made applicable under this section. Such
standards shall be construed according to the rules set forth in
Sec. 1910.5.
(3) General incorporation of standards. Establishments subject to
this section shall comply with the following standards of the American
National Standards Institute, which are incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6:
(i) Practice for Industrial Lighting, A11.1--1965 (R-1970).
(ii) Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems, A13.1--1956.
(iii) Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, and Moving Walks,
A17.1--1965, including Supplements A17.1a--1967, A17.1b--1968, A17.1c--
1969, and A17.1d--1970.
(iv) Practice for the Inspection of Elevators (Inspector's Manual),
A17.2--1960, including Suppelements A17.2a--1965 and A17.2b--1967.
(v) Safety Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and Related Equipment,
B20.1--1957.
[[Page 702]]
(vi) Power Piping, B31.1.0--1967 and addenda B31.10a--1969. Fuel Gas
Piping, B31.2--1968.
(vii) Identification of Gas-Mask Canisters, K13.1--1967.
(viii) Prevention of Sulfur Fires and Explosions, Z12.12--1968.
(ix) Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and
Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1--1961.
(4) Other standards. The following standards, which are incorporated
by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, shall be considered standards
under this section:
(i) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired
Pressure Vessels, including addenda 1969.
(ii) Building Exits Code for Life Safety from Fire, NFPA 101--1970.
(iii) Safety in the Handling and Use of Explosives, IME Pamphlet No.
17, July 1960, Institute of Makers of Explosives.
(b) Safe practices--(1) Lockouts. Devices such as padlocks shall be
provided for locking out the source of power at the main disconnect
switch. Before any maintenance, inspection, cleaning, adjusting, or
servicing of equipment (electrical, mechanical, or other) that requires
entrance into or close contact with the machinery or equipment, the main
power disconnect switch or valve, or both, controlling its source of
power or flow of material, shall be locked out or blocked off with
padlock, blank flange, or similar device.
(2) Emergency lighting. Emergency lighting shall be provided
wherever it is necessary for employees to remain at their machines or
stations to shut down equipment in case of power failure. Emergency
lighting shall be provided at stairways and passageways or aisleways
used by employees for emergency exit in case of power failure. Emergency
lighting shall be provided in all plant first aid and medical
facilities.
(c) Handling and storage of pulpwood and pulp chips--(1) Handling
pulpwood with forklift trucks. Where large forklift trucks, or lift
trucks with clam-jaws, are used in the yard, the operator's enclosed cab
shall be provided with an escape hatch, whenever the hydraulic arm
blocks escape through the side doors.
(2) Handling pulpwood with cranes or stackers. (i) Where locomotive
cranes are used for loading or unloading pulpwood, the pulpwood shall be
piled so as to allow a clearance of not less than 24 inches between the
pile and the end of the cab of any locomotive crane in use, when the cab
is turned in any working position.
(ii) The minimum distance of the pulpwood pile from the centerline
of a standard-gage track shall be maintained at not less than 8\1/2\
feet.
(iii) Logs shall be piled in an orderly and stable manner, with no
projection into walkways or roadways.
(iv) Railroad cars shall not be spotted on tracks adjacent to the
locomotive cranes unless a 24-inch clearance is maintained, as required
in paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section.
(v) The handling and storage of other materials shall conform to
paragraphs (c)(2) (i) and (ii) of this section with respect to
clearance.
(vi) No person shall be permitted to walk beneath a suspended load,
bucket, or hook.
(3) Handling pulpwood from ships.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) The hatch tender shall be required to signal the hoisting
engineer to move the load only after the men working in the hold are in
the clear.
(iii) The air in the ship's hold, tanks, or closed vessels shall be
tested for oxygen deficiency and for both toxic and explosive gases and
vapors.
(4) Handling pulpwood from flatcars and all other railway cars. (i)
Railroad flatcars for the conveyance of pulpwood loaded parallel to the
length of the car shall be equipped with safety-stake pockets.
(ii) Where pulpwood is loaded crosswise on a flatcar sufficient
stakes of sizes not smaller than 4 by 4 inches shall be used to prevent
the load from shifting.
(iii) When it is necessary to cut stakes, those on the unloading
side should be partially cut through first, and then the binder wires
cut on the opposite side. Wire cutters equipped with long extension
handles shall be used. No person shall be permitted
[[Page 703]]
along the dumping side of the car after the stakes have been cut.
(iv) When steel straps without stakes are used, the steel straps
shall be cut from a safe area to prevent employees from being struck by
the falling logs.
(v) Flatcars and all other cars shall be chocked during unloading.
Where equipment is not provided with hand brakes, rail clamping chocks
shall be used.
(vi) A derail shall be used to prevent movement of other rail
equipment into cars where persons are working.
(5) Handling pulpwood from trucks. (i) Cutting of stakes and binder
wires shall be done in accordance with paragraph (c)4(iii) of this
section.
(ii) Where binder chain and steel stakes are used, the binder chains
shall be released and the stakes tripped from the opposite side of the
load spillage.
(iii) Where binder chains and crane slings are used, the crane
slings shall be attached and taut before the binder chains are released.
The hooker shall see that the helper is clear before signaling for the
movement of the load.
(6) Handling pulp chips from railway cars. All cars shall be
securely fastened in place and all employees in the clear before dumping
is started.
(7) Handling pulp chips from trucks and trailers. All trucks and
trailers shall be securely fastened in place and all employees in the
clear before dumping is started.
(8) Cranes.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) A safety device such as a heavy chain or cable at least equal
in strength to the lifting cables shall be fastened to the boom and to
the frame of the boom crane (if it is other than locomotive) at the
base. Alternatively, a telescoping safety device shall be fastened to
the boom and to the cab frame, so as to prevent the boom from snapping
back over the cab in the event of lifting cable breakage.
(iii) A crane shall not be operated where any part thereof may come
within 10 feet of overhead powerlines (or other overhead obstructions)
unless the powerlines have been deenergized. The boom shall be painted
bright yellow from and including the head sheave to a point 6 feet down
the boom towards the cab.
(iv) Standard signals for the operation of cranes shall be
established for all movements of the crane, in accordance with American
National Standards B30.2--1943 (reaffirmed 1968) and B30.2.0--1967.
(v) Only one member of the crew shall be authorized to give signals
to the crane operator.
(vi) All cranes shall be equipped with a suitable warning device
such as a horn or whistle.
(vii) A sheave guard shall be provided beneath the head sheave of
the boom.
(9) Traffic warning signs or signals. (i) A flagman shall direct the
movement of cranes or locomotives being moved across railroad tracks or
roads, and at any points where the vision of the operator is restricted.
The flagman must always remain in sight of the operator when the crane
or locomotive is in motion. The blue flag policy shall be used to mark
stationary cars day and night. This policy shall include marking the
track in advance of the spotted cars (flag for daytime, light for
darkness).
(ii) After cars are spotted for loading or unloading, warning flags
or signs shall be placed in the center of the track at least 50 feet
away from the cars and a derail set to protect workmen in the car.
(10) Illumination. Artificial illumination shall be provided when
loading or unloading is performed after dark, in accordance with
American National Standard A11.1--1965 (R--1970).
(11) [Reserved]
(12) Barking devices. When barking drums are employed in the yard,
the requirements of paragraph (e)(12) of this section shall apply.
(13) Hand tools. Handles of wood hooks shall be locked to the shank
to prevent them from rotating.
(14) Removal of pulpwood. (i) The ends of a woodpile shall be
properly sloped and cross-tiered into the pile. Upright poles shall not
be used at the ends of woodpiles. To knock down wood from the woodpile,
mechanical equipment shall be used to permit employees to keep in the
clear of loosened wood.
(ii) If dynamite is used to loosen the pile, only authorized
personnel shall be permitted to handle and discharge the explosive. An
electric detonator is preferable for firing; if a fuse is used, it
[[Page 704]]
shall be an approved safety fuse with a burning rate of not less than
120 seconds per yard and a minimum length of 3 feet, in accordance with
Safety in the Handling and Use of Explosives, IME Pamphlet No. 17, July
1960.
(15) Belt conveyors. (i) The sides of the conveyor shall be
constructed so that the wood will not fall off.
(ii) Where conveyors cross passageways or roadways, a horizontal
platform shall be provided under the conveyor extending out from the
sides of the conveyor a distance equal to 1\1/2\ times the length of the
wood handled. The platform shall extend the width of the road plus 2
feet on each side and shall be kept free of wood and rubbish. The edges
of the platform shall be provided with toeboards or other protection to
prevent wood from falling, in accordance with American National Standard
A12.1--1967.
(iii) All conveyors for pulpwood shall have the inrunning nips
between chain and sprockets guarded; also, turning drums shall be
guarded.
(iv) Every belt conveyor shall have an emergency stop cable
extending the length of the conveyor so that it may be stopped from any
location along the line, or conveniently located stop buttons within 10
feet of each work station, in accordance with American National Standard
B20.1--1957.
(16) Signs. Where conveyors cross walkways or roadways in the yards,
signs reading ``Danger--Overhead Conveyor'' or an equivalent warning
shall be erected, in accordance with American National Standard Z35.1--
1968.
(d) Handling and storage of raw materials other than pulpwood or
pulp chips--(1) Personal protective equipment. Whenever possible, all
dust, fumes, and gases incident to handling materials shall be
controlled at the source, in accordance with American National Standard
Z9.2--1960. Where control at the source is not possible, respirators
with goggles or protective masks shall be provided, and employees shall
wear them when handling alum, clay, soda ash, lime, bleach powder,
sulfur, chlorine, and similar materials, and when opening rag bales.
(2) Clearance. (i) When materials are being piled inside a building
and upon platforms, an aisle clearance at least 3 feet greater than the
widest truck in use shall be provided.
(ii) Baled paper and rags stored inside a building shall not be
piled closer than 18 inches to walls, partitions, or sprinkler heads.
(3) Piling and unpiling pulp. (i) Piles of wet lap pulp (unless
palletized) shall be stepped back one-half the width of the sheet for
each 8 feet of pile height. Sheets of pulp shall be interlapped to make
the pile secure. Pulp shall not be piled over pipelines to jeopardize
pipes, or so as to cause overloading of floors, or to within 18 inches
below sprinkler heads.
(ii) Piles of pulp shall not be undermined when being unpiled.
(iii) Floor capacities shall be clearly marked on all floors.
(4)(i) [Reserved]
(ii) Where rolls are pyramided two or more high, chocks shall be
installed between each roll on the floor and at every row. Where pulp
and paper rolls are stored on smooth floors in processing areas, rubber
chocks with wooden core shall be used.
(iii) When rolls are decked two or more high, the bottom rolls shall
be chocked on each side to prevent shifting in either direction.
(e) Preparing pulpwood--(1) Gang and slasher saws. A guard shall be
provided in front of all gang and slasher saws to protect workers from
wood thrown by saws. A guard shall be placed over tail sprockets.
(2) Slasher tables. Saws shall be stopped and power switches shall
be locked out and tagged whenever it is necessary for any person to be
on the slasher table.
(3) [Reserved]
(4) Runway to the jack ladder. The runway from the pond or unloading
dock to the table shall be protected with standard handrails and
toeboards. Inclined portions shall have cleats or equivalent nonslip
surfacing, in accordance with American National Standard A12.1--1967.
Protective equipment shall be provided for persons working over water.
(5) Guards below table. Where not protected by the frame of the
machine, the underside of the slasher saws shall be enclosed with
guards.
[[Page 705]]
(6) Conveyors. The requirements of paragraph (c)(15)(iv) of this
section shall apply.
(7) [Reserved]
(8) Barker feed. Each barker shall be equipped with a feed and
turnover device which will make it unnecessary for the operator to hold
a bolt or log by hand during the barking operation. Eye, ear, and head
protection shall be provided for the operator, in accordance with
paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
(9) [Reserved]
(10) Stops. All control devices shall be locked out and tagged when
knives are being changed.
(11) Speed governor. Water wheels, when directly connected to barker
disks or grinders, shall be provided with speed governors, if operated
with gate wide open.
(12) Continuous barking drums. (i) When platforms or floors allow
access to the sides of the drums, a standard railing shall be
constructed around the drums. When two or more drums are arranged side
by side, proper walkways with standard handrails shall be provided
between each set, in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section.
(ii) Sprockets and chains, gears, and trunnions shall have standard
guards, in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
(iii) Whenever it becomes necessary for a workman to go within a
drum, the driving mechanism shall be locked and tagged, at the main
disconnect switch, in accordance with paragraph (b)(4) of this section.
(13) Intermittent barking drums. In addition to motor switch,
clutch, belt shifter, or other power disconnecting device, intermittent
barking drums shall be equipped with a device which may be locked to
prevent the drum from moving while it is being emptied or filled.
(14) Hydraulic barkers. Hydraulic barkers shall be enclosed with
strong baffles at the inlet and the outlet. The operator shall be
protected by at least five-ply laminated glass.
(15) Splitter block. The block upon or against which the wood is
rested shall have a corrugated surface or other means provided that the
wood will not slip. Wood to be split, and also the splitting block,
shall be free of ice, snow, or chips. The operator shall be provided
with eye and foot protection. A clear and unobstructed view shall be
maintained between equipment and workers around the block and the
workers' help area.
(16) Power control. Power for the operation of the splitter shall be
controlled by a clutch or equivalent device.
(17) Knot cleaners. The operators of knot cleaners of the woodpecker
type shall wear eye protection equipment.
(18) Chipper spout. The feed system to the chipper spout shall be
arranged in such a way that the operator does not stand in a direct line
with the chipper spout. All chipper spouts shall be enclosed to a height
of at least 42 inches from the floor or operator's platform. When other
protection is not sufficient, the operator shall wear a safety belt
line. The safety belt line shall be fastened in such a manner as to make
it impossible for the operator to fall into the throat of the chipper.
Ear protection equipment shall be worn by the operator and others in the
immediate area if there is any possibility that the noise level may be
harmful (see Sec. 1910.95).
(19) Carriers for knives. Carriers shall be provided and used for
transportation of knives.
(f) Rag and old paper preparation--(1) Ripping and trimming tools.
(i) Hand knives and scissors shall have blunt points, shall be fastened
to the table with chain or thong, and shall not be carried on the person
but placed safely in racks or sheaths when not in use.
(ii) Hand knives and sharpening steels shall be provided with guards
at the junction of the handle and the blade.
(2) Shredders, cutters, and dusters. (i) Rotating heads or cylinders
shall be completely enclosed except for an opening at the feed side
sufficient to permit only the entry of stock. The enclosure shall extend
over the top of the feed rolls. It shall be constructed either of solid
material or with mesh or openings not exceeding one-half inch and
substantial enough to contain flying particles and prevent accidental
contact with moving parts. The enclosure shall be bolted or locked into
place.
[[Page 706]]
(ii) A smooth-pivoted idler roll resting on the stock or feed table
shall be provided in front of feed rolls except when arrangements
prevent the operator from standing closer than 36 inches to any part of
the feed rolls.
(iii) Any manually fed cutter, shredder, or duster shall be provided
with an idler roll as per subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph or the
operator shall use special hand-feeding tools.
(iv) Hoods of cutters, shredders, and dusters shall have exhaust
ventilation, in accordance with American National Standard Z9.2--1960.
(3) Blowers. (i) Blowers used for transporting rags shall be
provided with feed hoppers having outer edges located not less than 48
inches from the fan.
(ii) The arrangement of the blower discharge outlets and work areas
shall be such as to prevent material from falling on workers.
(4) Conveyors. Conveyors and conveyor drive belts and pulleys shall
be fully enclosed or, if open and within 7 feet of the floor, shall be
constructed and guarded in accordance with paragraph (c)(15) of this
section and American National Standards B15.1--1953 (Reaffirmed 1958)
and B20.1--1957.
(5) Dust. Measures for the control of dust shall be provided, in
accordance with American National Standards Z33.1--1961, Z87.1--1968,
and Z88.2--1969.
(6) Rag cookers. (i) When cleaning, inspection, or other work
requires that persons enter rag cookers, all steam and water valves, or
other control devices, shall be locked and tagged in the closed or
``off'' position. Blank flanging of pipelines is acceptable in place of
closed and locked valves.
(ii) When cleaning, inspection, or other work requires that persons
must enter the cooker, one person shall be stationed outside in a
position to observe and assist in case of emergency, in accordance with
paragraph (b)(5) of this section.
(iii) [Reserved]
(iv) Rag cookers shall be provided with safety valves in accordance
with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired
Pressure Vessels--1968, with Addenda.
(g) Chemical processes of making pulp--(1) Sulfur burners. (i)
Sulfur-burner houses shall be safely and adequately ventilated, and
every precaution shall be taken to guard against dust explosion hazards
and fires, in accordance with American National Standards Z9.2--1960 and
Z12.12--1968.
(ii) Nonsparking tools and equipment shall be used in handling dry
sulfur.
(iii) Sulfur storage bins shall be kept free of sulfur dust
accumulation, in accordance with American National Standard Z9.2--1960.
(iv) Sulfur-melting equipment shall not be located in the burner
room.
(2) Protection for employees (acid plants). (i) Supplied air
respirators shall be strategically located for emergency and rescue use.
(ii) During inspection, repairs, or maintenance of acid towers, the
workman shall be provided with eye protection, a supplied air
respirator, a safety belt, and an attached lifeline. The line shall be
extended to an attendant stationed outside the tower opening.
(3) Acid tower structure. Outside elevators shall be inspected daily
during winter months when ice materially affects safety. Elevators,
runways, stairs, etc., for the acid tower shall be inspected monthly for
defects that may occur because of exposure to acid or corrosive gases.
(4) Tanks (acid). (i) Tanks shall be free of acid and shall be
washed out with water, and fresh air shall be blown into them before
allowing men to enter. Men entering the tanks shall be provided with
supplied air respirators, lifebelts, and attached lifelines.
(ii) A man shall be stationed outside to summon assistance if
necessary. All intake valves to a tank shall be blanked off or
disconnected.
(5) Clothing. Where lime slaking takes place, employees shall be
provided with rubber boots, rubber gloves, protective aprons, and eye
protection. A deluge shower and eye fountain shall be provided to flush
the skin and eyes to counteract lime or acid burns.
(6) Lead burning. When lead burning is being done within tanks,
fresh air shall be forced into the tanks so that fresh air will reach
the face of the worker first and the direction of the current will never
be from the source of the fumes toward the face of the workers. Supplied
air respirators (constant-flow type) shall be provided.
[[Page 707]]
(7) Hoops for acid storage tanks. Hoops of tanks shall be made of
rods rather than flat strips and shall be safely maintained by scheduled
inspections.
(8) Chip and sawdust bins. Steam or compressed-air lances, or other
facilities, shall be used for breaking down the arches caused by jamming
in chip lofts. No worker shall be permitted to enter a bin unless
provided with a safety belt, with line attached, and an attendant
stationed at the bin to summon assistance.
(9) Exits (digester building). At least one unobstructed exit at
each end of the room shall be provided on each floor of a digester
building.
(10) Gas masks (digester building). Gas masks must be available, and
they must furnish adequate protection against sulfurous acid and
chlorine gases and be inspected and repaired in accordance with 29 CFR
1910.134.
(11) Elevators. (i) Elevators shall be constructed in accordance
with American National Standard A17.1--1965.
(ii) Elevators shall be equipped with gas masks for the maximum
number of passengers.
(iii) Elevators shall be equipped with an alarm system to advise of
failure.
(12) Blowoff valves and piping. (i) The blowoff valve of a digester
shall be arranged so as to be operated from another room, remote from
safety valves.
(ii) Through bolts instead of cap bolts shall be used on all
digester pipings.
(iii) Heavy duty pipe, valves, and fittings shall be used between
the digester and blow pit. These valves, fittings, and pipes shall be
inspected at least semiannually to determine the degree of
deterioration.
(iv) Digester blow valves shall be pinned or locked in closed
position throughout the entire cooking period.
(13) Blow pits and blow tanks. (i) Blow-pit openings shall be
preferably on the side of the pit instead of on top. When located on
top, openings shall be as small as possible and shall be provided with
railings, in accordance with American National Standard A12.1--1967.
(ii) A specially constructed ladder shall be used for access to blow
pits, to be constructed so that the door of the blow pit cannot be
closed when the ladder is in place; other means shall be provided to
prevent the closing of the pit door when anyone is in the pit.
(iii) A signaling device shall be installed in the digester and
blow-pit rooms and chip bins to be operated as a warning before and
while digesters are being blown.
(iv) Blow-pit hoops shall be maintained in a safe condition.
(14) Blowing digester. (i) Blowoff valves shall be opened slowly.
(ii) After the digester has started to be blown, the blowoff valve
shall be left open, and the hand plate shall not be removed until the
digester cook signals the blow-pit man that the blow is completed.
Whenever it becomes necessary to remove the hand plate to clear stock,
operators shall wear eye protection equipment and protective clothing to
guard against burns from hot stock.
(iii) Means shall be provided whereby the digester cook shall signal
the man in the chip bin before starting to load the digester.
(15) Inspecting and repairing digester. (i) Valves controlling lines
leading into a digester shall be locked out and tagged. The keys to the
locks shall be in the possession of a person or persons doing the
inspecting or making repairs.
(ii) Fresh air shall be blown into the digester constantly while
workmen are inside. Supplied air respirators shall be available in the
event the fresh air supply fails or is inadequate.
(iii) No inspector shall enter a digester unless a lifeline is
securely fastened to his body by means of a safety belt and at least one
other experienced employee is stationed outside the digester to handle
the line and to summon assistance. All ladders and lifelines shall be
inspected before each use.
(iv) All employees entering digesters for inspection or repair work
shall be provided with protective headgear. Eye protection and dust
masks shall be provided to workmen while the old brick lining is being
removed, in accordance with American National Standards, Z87.1--1968,
Z88.2--1969, and Z99.1--1969.
(16) Pressure tanks-accumulators (acid). (i) Safety regulations
governing inspection and repairing of pressure tanks-accumulators (acid)
shall be the same as those specified in subparagraph (15) of this
paragraph.
[[Page 708]]
(ii) The pressure tanks-accumulators shall be inspected twice
annually. (See the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII,
Unfired Pressure Vessels--1968, with Addenda.)
(17) Pressure vessels (safety devices). (i) A safety valve shall be
installed in a separate line from each pressure vessel; no hand valve
shall be installed between this safety valve and the pressure vessel.
Safety valves shall be checked between each cook to be sure they have
not become plugged or corroded to the point of being inoperative. (See
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure
Vessels--1968, with Addenda.)
(ii) All safety devices shall conform to Paragraph U-2 in the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels-
-1968, with Addenda.
(18) Miscellaneous. Insofar as the processes of the sulfate and soda
operations are similar to those of the sulfite processes, the standard
of paragraphs (g) (1) through (17) of this section shall apply.
(i) Quick operating showers, bubblers, etc., shall be available for
emergency use in case of caustic soda burns.
(ii) Rotary tenders, smelter operators, and those cleaning smelt
spouts shall be provided with eye protection equipment (fitted with
lenses that filter out the harmful rays emanating from the light source)
when actively engaged in their duties, in accordance with American
National Standard Z87.1--1968.
(iii) Heavy-duty pipe, valves, and fittings shall be used between
digester and blow pit. These shall be inspected at least semiannually to
determine the degree of deterioration and repaired or replaced when
necessary, in accordance with American National Standards B31.1--1955,
B31.1a--1963, B31.1.0--1967, and B31.2--1968.
(iv) Smelt-dissolving tanks shall be covered and the cover kept
closed, except when samples are being taken.
(v) Smelt tanks shall be provided with vent stacks and explosion
doors, in accordance with American National Standard Z9.1--1951.
(19) Blow lines.
(i)-(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) When blow lines from more than one digester lead into one
pipe, the cock or valve of the blow line from the tank being inspected
or repaired shall be locked or tagged out, or the line shall be
disconnected and blocked off.
(20) Furnace room. Exhaust ventilation shall be provided where niter
cake is fed into a rotary furnace and shall be so designed and
maintained as to keep the concentration of hydrogen sulfide gas below
the parts per million listed in Sec. 1910.1000.
(21) Inspection and repair of tanks. All piping leading to tanks
shall be blanked off or valved and locked or tagged. Any lines to sewers
shall be blanked off to protect workers from air contaminants.
(22) Welding. Welding on blow tanks, accumulator tanks, or any other
vessels where turpentine vapor or other combustible vapor could gather
shall be done only after the vessel has been completely purged of fumes.
Fresh air shall be supplied workers inside of vessels.
(23) Turpentine systems and storage tanks. Nonsparking tools and
ground hose shall be used when pumping out the tank. The tank shall be
surrounded by a berm or moat.
(h) Bleaching--(1) Bleaching engines. Bleaching engines, except the
Bellmer type, shall be completely covered on the top, with the exception
of one small opening large enough to allow filling but too small to
admit a man. Platforms leading from one engine to another shall have
standard guardrails, in accordance with American National Standard
A12.1--1967.
(2) Bleach mixing rooms. (i) The room in which the bleach powder is
mixed shall be provided with adequate exhaust ventilation, located at
the floor level, in accordance with American National Standard Z9.1--
1951.
(ii) Chlorine gas shall be carried away from the work place and
breathing area by an exhaust system. The gas shall be rendered neutral
or harmless before being discharged into the atmosphere. The
requirements of American National Standard Z9.2--1960 shall apply to
this subdivision.
(iii) For emergency and rescue operations, the employer must provide
employees with self-contained breathing apparatuses or supplied-air
respirators, and ensure that employees use these
[[Page 709]]
respirators, in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.134.
(3) Liquid chlorine. (i) Tanks of liquid chlorine shall be stored in
an adequately ventilated unoccupied room, where their possible leakage
cannot affect workers.
(ii) Gas masks capable of absorbing chlorine shall be supplied,
conveniently placed, and regularly inspected, and workers who may be
exposed to chlorine gas shall be instructed in their use.
(iii) For emergency and rescue work, independent self-contained
oxygen-type masks or supplied air equipment shall be provided.
(iv) At least two exits, remote from each other, shall be provided
for all rooms in which chlorine is stored.
(v) Spur tracks upon which tank cars containing chlorine and caustic
are spotted and connected to pipelines shall be protected by means of a
derail in front of the cars.
(vi) All chlorine, caustic, and acid lines shall be marked for
positive identification, in accordance with American National Standard
A13.1--1967.
(4) Bagged or drummed chemicals. Bagged or drummed chemicals require
efficient handling to prevent damage and spillage. Certain oxidizing
chemicals used in bleaching pulp and also in some sanitizing work
require added precautions for safety in storage and handling. In
storage, these chemicals must be isolated from combustible materials and
other chemicals with which they will react such as acids. They must also
be kept dry, clean and uncontaminated.
(i) Mechanical pulp process--(1) Pulp grinders. (i) Water wheels
directly connected to pulp grinders shall be provided with speed
governors limiting the peripheral speed of the grinder to that
recommended by the manufacturer.
(ii) Doors of pocket grinders shall be arranged so as to keep them
from closing accidentally.
(2) Butting saws. Hood guards shall be provided on butting saws, in
accordance with American National Standard O1.1--1954 (reaffirmed 1961).
(3) Floors and platforms. The requirements of paragraph (b)(3) of
this section shall apply.
(4) Personal protection. Persons exposed to falling material shall
wear eye, head, foot, and shin protection equipment, in accordance with
American National Standards Z87.1--1968, Z88.2--1969, Z89.1--1969, and
Z41.1--1967.
(j) Stock preparation--(1) Pulp shredders. (i) Cutting heads shall
be completely enclosed except for an opening at the feed side sufficient
to permit only entry of stock. The enclosure shall be bolted or locked
in place. The enclosure shall be of solid material or with mesh or other
openings not exceeding one-half inch.
(ii) Either a slanting feed table with its outer edge not less than
36 inches from the cutting head or an automatic feeding device shall be
provided.
(iii) Repairs for cleaning of blockage shall be done only when the
shredder is shutdown and control devices locked.
(2) Pulp conveyors. Pulp conveyors and conveyor drive belts and
pulleys shall be fully enclosed, or if open and within 7 feet of the
floor, shall be constructed and guarded in accordance with American
National Standard B20.1--1957.
(3) [Reserved]
(4) Beaters. (i) Beater rolls shall be provided with covers.
(ii) When cleaning, inspecting, or other work requires that persons
enter the beaters, all control devices shall be locked or tagged out, in
accordance with paragraph (b)(4) of this section.
(iii) When beaters are fed from floor above, the chute opening, if
less than 42 inches from the floor, shall be provided with a complete
rail or other enclosure. Openings for manual feeding shall be sufficient
only for entry of stock and shall be provided with at least two
permanently secured crossrails, in accordance American National Standard
A12.1--1967.
(iv) [Reserved]
(v) Floors around beaters shall be provided with sufficient drainage
to remove wastes.
(5) Pulpers. (i) All pulpers having the top or any other opening of
vessel less than 42 inches from the floor or work platform shall have
such openings guarded by railed or other enclosures. For manual
charging, openings shall be sufficient only to permit the entry of stock
and shall be provided with at
[[Page 710]]
least two permanently secured crossrails, in accordance with American
National Standard A12.1--1967.
(ii) When cleaning, inspecting, or other work requires that persons
enter the pulpers, they shall be equipped with safety belt and lifeline,
and one person shall be stationed outside at a position to observe and
assist in case of emergency.
(iii) When cleaning, inspecting, or other work requires that persons
enter pulpers, all steam, water, or other control devices shall be
locked or tagged out. Blank flanging and tagging of pipe lines is
acceptable in place of closed and locked or tagged valves. Blank
flanging of steam and water lines shall be acceptable in place of valve
locks.
(6) Stock chests. (i) All control devices shall be locked or tagged
out when persons enter stock chests, in accordance with paragraph (b)(4)
of this section.
(ii) When cleaning, inspecting, or other work requires that persons
enter stock chests, they shall be provided with a low-voltage extension
light.
(k) Machine room--(1) Emergency stops. Paper machines shall be
equipped with devices that will stop the machine quickly in an
emergency. The devices shall consist of push buttons for electric motive
power (or electrically operated engine stops), pull cords connected
directly to the prime mover, control clutches, or other devices,
interlocked with adequate braking action. The devices shall be tested
periodically by making use of them when stopping the machine and shall
be so located that any person working on the machine can quickly
disconnect the machine from the source of power in case of emergency.
(2) Drives. (i) All drives shall be provided with lockout devices at
the power switch which interrupts the flow of current to the unit.
(ii) All ends of rotating shafts including dryer drum shafts shall
be completely guarded.
(iii) All accessible disengaged doctor blades should be covered.
(iv) All exposed shafts shall be guarded. Crossovers shall be
provided.
(v) Oil cups and grease fittings shall be placed in a safe area
remote from nip and heat hazards.
(3) Protective equipment. Face shields, aprons, and rubber gloves
shall be provided for workmen handling acids in accordance with
paragraphs (b)(2) and (d)(1) of this section.
(4)-(5) [Reserved]
(6) Steps. Steps of uniform rise and tread with nonslip surfaces
shall be provided at each press in accordance with American National
Standard A12.1--1967.
(7) Plank walkways. A removable plank shall be provided along each
press, with standard guardrails installed. The planks shall have nonslip
surfaces in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section.
(8) Dryer lubrication. If a gear bearing must be oiled while the
machine is in operation, an automatic oiling device to protect the oiler
shall be provided, or oil cups and grease fittings shall be placed along
the walkways out of reach of hot pipes and dryer gears.
(9) Levers. All levers carrying weights shall be constructed so that
weights will not slip or fall off.
(10) First dryer. Either a permanent guardrail or apron guard or
both shall be installed in front of the first dryer in each section in
accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
(11) Steam and hot-water pipes. All exposed steam and hot-water
pipes within 7 feet of the floor or working platform or within 15 inches
measured horizontally from stairways, ramps, or fixed ladders shall be
covered with an insulating material, or guarded in such manner as to
prevent contact.
(12) Dryer gears. Dryer gears shall be guarded excepting where the
oilers' walkway is removed out of reach of the gears' nips and spokes
and hot pipes in accordance with American National Standard B15.1--1953
(reaffirmed 1958).
(13) Broke hole. (i) A guardrail shall be provided at broke holes in
accordance with American National Standard A12.1--1967.
(ii) Where pulpers are located directly below the broke hole on a
paper machine and where the broke hole opening is large enough to permit
a worker to fall through, any employee pushing broke down the hole shall
wear a safety belt attached to a safety belt
[[Page 711]]
line. The safety belt line shall be fastened in such a manner that it is
impossible for the person to fall into the pulper.
(iii) An alarm bell or a flashing light shall be actuated before
dropping material through the broke hole.
(14) Feeder belt. A feeder belt or other effective device shall be
provided for starting paper through the calender stack.
(15) Steps. Steps or ladders of uniform rise and tread with nonslip
surfaces shall be provided at each calender stack. Handrails and hand
grips shall be provided at each calender stack in accordance with
American National Standard A12.1--1967.
(16) [Reserved]
(17) Sole plates. All exposed sole plates between dryers, calenders,
reels, and rewinders shall have a nonskid surface.
(18) Nip points. The hazard of the nip points on all calender rolls
shall be eliminated or minimized by means of an effective barrier
device, or by feeding the paper into the rolls by means of a rope
carrier, air jets, or hand feeding devices.
(19) Platforms. [Reserved]
(20) Scrapers. Alloy steel scrapers with pullthrough blades
approximately 3 by 5 inches in size shall be used to remove ``scabs''
from calender rolls.
(21) Illumination. Permanent lighting shall be installed in all
areas where employees are required to make machine adjustments and sheet
transfers in accordance with the American National Standard A11.1--1965
(R 1970).
(22) Control panels. All control panel handles and buttons shall be
protected from accidental contact.
(23) [Reserved]
(24) Lifting reels. (i) The reels shall stop rotating before being
lifted from bearings.
(ii) All lifting equipment (clamps, cables, and slings) shall be
maintained in a safe condition and inspected regularly.
(iii) Reel shafts with square block ends shall be guarded.
(25) Feeder belts. Feeder belts, carrier ropes, air carriage, or
other equally effective means shall be provided for starting paper into
the nip or drum-type reels.
(26) Inrunning nip. (i) Where the nipping points of all drum winders
and rewinders is on the operator's side, it shall be guarded by barrier
guards interlocked with the drive mechanism.
(ii) [Reserved]
(27) Core collars. Set screws for securing core collars to winding
and unwinding shafts shall not protrude above the face of the collar.
All edges of the collar with which an operator's hand comes in contact
shall be beveled to remove all sharp corners.
(28) Slitter knives. Slitter knives shall be guarded so as to
prevent accidental contact. Carriers shall be provided and used for
transportation of slitter knives.
(29) Winder shaft. The winder shall have a guide rail to align the
shaft for easy entrance into the opened rewind shaft bearing housings.
(30) Core shaft. When the core shaft weighs in excess of the safe
standard, a mechanical device such as a dolly shall be provided for
carrying all or part of the weight when it is being removed from the set
of paper and placed in the dressing brackets on the winder.
(31) Winder area. A nonskid surface shall be provided in the front
vicinity of the winder to prevent accidental slipping.
(32) Radiation. Special standards regarding the use of radiation
equipment shall be posted and followed as required by Sec. 1910.96.
(l) Finishing room--(1) Cleaning rolls. Rolls shall be cleaned only
on the outrunning side.
(2) Emergency stops. Electrically or manually operated quick power
disconnecting devices, interlocked with braking action, shall be
provided on all operating sides of the machine within easy reach of all
employees. These devices shall be tested by making use of them when
stopping the machine.
(3) Core collars. The requirements of paragraph (k)(27) of this
section and the American National Standard B15.1--1953 (reaffirmed 1958)
shall apply.
(4) Elevators. These shall be in accordance with American National
Standard A17.1--1965.
(5) Control panels. The requirements of paragraph (k)(22) of this
section shall apply.
[[Page 712]]
(6) Guillotine-type cutters. (i) Each guillotine-type cutter shall
be equipped with a control which requires the operator and his helper,
if any, to use both hands to engage the clutch.
(ii) Each guillotine-type cutter shall be equipped with a nonrepeat
device.
(iii) Carriers shall be provided and used for transportation of
guillotine-type cutter knives.
(7) Rotary cutter. (i) On single-knife machines a guard shall be
provided at a point of contact to the knife.
(ii) On duplex cutters the protection required for single-knife
machines shall be provided for the first knife, and a hood shall be
provided for the second knife.
(iii) Safe access shall be provided to the knives of a rotary cutter
by means of catwalks with nonslip surfaces, railings, and toeboards in
accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section.
(iv) A guard shall be provided for the spreader or squeeze roll at
the nip side on sheet cutters.
(v) Electrically or manually operated quick power disconnecting
devices with adequate braking action shall be provided on all operating
sides of the machine within easy reach of all operators.
(vi) The outside slitters shall be guarded.
(8) Platers. (i) A guard shall be arranged across the face of the
rolls to serve as a warning that the operator's hand is approaching the
danger zone.
(ii) A quick power disconnecting device shall be installed on each
machine within easy reach of the operator.
(9) Finishing room rewinders. (i) The nipping points of all drum
winders and rewinders located on the operator's side shall be guarded by
either automatic or manually operated barrier guards of sufficient
height to protect fully anyone working around them. The barrier guard
shall be interlocked with the drive mechanism to prevent operating above
jog speed without the guard in place.
A zero speed switch should be installed to prevent the guard from being
raised while the roll is turning.
(ii) A nonskid surface shall be provided in front of the rewinder to
prevent an employee from slipping in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of
this section.
(iii) Mechanical lifting devices shall be provided for placing and
removing rolls from the machine.
(10) Control panels. The requirements of paragraph (k)(22) of this
section shall apply.
(11) Roll-type embosser. The nipping point located on the operator's
side shall be guarded by either automatic or manually operated barrier
guards interlocked with the drive.
(12) Sorting and counting tables. (i) Tables shall be smooth and
free from splinters, with edges and corners rounded.
(ii) Paddles shall be smooth and free from splinters.
(13) Roll splitters. The nip point and cutter knife shall be guarded
by either automatic or manually operated barrier guards.
(m) Materials handling--(1) Hand trucks. No person shall be
permitted to ride on a powered hand truck unless it is so designed by
the manufacturer. A limit switch shall be on operating handle--30
degrees each way from a 45-degree angle up and down.
(2) [Reserved]
(3) Cartons. The carton-stitching machine shall be guarded to
prevent the operator from coming in contact with the stitching head.
(4) [Reserved]
(5) Unloading cars. Flag signals, derails, or other protective
devices shall be used to protect men during switching operations. The
blue flag policy shall be invoked according to paragraph (c)(9)(i) of
this section.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43
FR 49751, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6,
1990; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1285, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 33467,
June 18, 1998]
Sec. 1910.262 Textiles.
(a) Application requirements--(1) Application. The requirements of
this subpart for textile safety apply to the design, installation,
processes, operation, and maintenance of textile machinery, equipment,
and other plant facilities in all plants engaged in the manufacture and
processing of textiles, except those processes used exclusively in the
manufacture of synthetic fibers.
[[Page 713]]
(2) Standards incorporated by reference. Standards covering issues
of occupational safety and health which are of general application
without regard to any specific industry are incorporated by reference in
paragraphs of this section and made applicable to textiles. All such
standards shall be construed according to the rules of construction set
out in Sec. 1910.5.
(b) Definitions applicable to this section--(1) Belt shifter. A belt
shifter is a device for mechanically shifting a belt from one pulley to
another.
(2) Belt shifter lock. A belt shifter lock is a device for
positively locking the belt shifter in position while the machine is
stopped and the belt is idling on the loose pulleys.
(3) Calender. A calender in essence consists of a set of heavy
rollers mounted on vertical side frames and arranged to pass cloth
between them. Calenders may have two to ten rollers, or bowls, some of
which can be heated.
(4) Embossing calender. An embossing calender is a calender with two
or more rolls, one of which is engraved for producing figured effects of
various kinds on a fabric.
(5) Cans (drying). Drying cans are hollow cylindrical drums mounted
in a frame so they can rotate. They are heated with steam and are used
to dry fabrics or yarn as it passes around the perimeter of the can.
(6) Carbonizing. Carbonizing means the removing of vegetable matter
such as burns, straws, etc., from wool by treatment with acid, followed
by heat. The undesired matter is reduced to a carbon-like form which may
be removed by dusting or shaking.
(7) Card. A card machine consists of cylinders of various sizes--and
in certain cases flats--covered with card clothing and set in relation
to each other so that fibers in staple form may be separated into
individual relationship. The speed of the cylinders and their direction
of rotation varies. The finished product is delivered as a sliver. Cards
of different types are: The revolving flat card, the roller-and-clearer
card, etc.
(8) Card clothing. Card clothing is the material with which many of
the surfaces of a card are covered; e.g., the cylinder, doffer, etc. It
consists of a thick foundation material, usually made of textile
fabrics, through which are pressed many fine, closely spaced, specially
bent wires.
(9) Comber. A comber is a machine for combing fibers of cotton,
wool, etc. The essential parts are a device for feeding forward a fringe
of fibers at regular intervals and an arrangement of combs or pins
which, at the right time, pass through the fringe. All tangled fibers,
short fibers, and neps are removed and the long fibers are laid
parallel.
(10) Combing machinery. Combing machinery is a general
classification, including combers, sliver lap machines, ribbon lap
machines, and gill boxes, but excluding cards.
(11) Cutter (rotary staple). A rotary staple cutter is a machine
consisting of one or more rotary blades used for the purpose of cutting
textile fibers into staple lengths.
(12) Exposed to contact. Exposed to contact shall mean that the
location of an object, material, nip point, or point of operation is
such that a person is liable to come in contact with it in his normal
course of employment.
(13) Garnett machine. A Garnett machine means any of a number of
types of machines for opening hard twisted waste of wool, cotton, silk,
etc. Essentially, such machines consist of a lickerin; one or more
cylinders, each having a complement worker and stripper rolls; and a
fancy roll and doffer. The action of such machines is somewhat like that
of a wool card, but it is much more severe in that the various rolls are
covered with garnett wire instead of card clothing.
(14) Gill box. A gill box is a machine used in the worsted system of
manufacturing yarns. Its function is to arrange the fibers in parallel
order. Essentially, it consists of a pair of feed rolls and a series of
followers where the followers move at a faster surface speed and perform
a combing action.
(15) Interlock. An interlock is a device that operates to prevent
the operation of machine while the cover or door of the machine is open
or unlocked, and which will also hold the cover or door closed and
locked while the machine is in motion.
(16) Jig (dye). A dye jig is a machine for dyeing piece goods. The
cloth, at
[[Page 714]]
full width, passes from a roller through the dye liquor in an open vat
and is then wound on another roller. The operation is repeated until the
desired shade is obtained.
(17) Kier. A kier is a large metal vat, usually a pressure type, in
which fabrics may be boiled out, bleached, etc.
(18) Lapper (ribbon). A ribbon lapper is a machine used to prepare
laps for feeding a cotton comb; its purpose is to provide a uniform lap
in which the fibers have been straightened as much as possible.
(19) Lapper (sliver). A sliver lapper is a machine in which a number
of parallel card slivers are drafted slightly, laid side by side in a
compact sheet, and wound into a cylindrical package.
(20) Loom. A loom is a machine for effecting the interlacing of two
series of yarns crossing one another at right angles. The warp yarns are
wound on a warp beam and pass through heddles and reed. The filling is
shot across in a shuttle and settled in place by reed and lay, and the
fabric is wound on a cloth beam.
(21) Mangle (starch). A starch mangle is a mangle that is used
specifically for starching cotton goods. It commonly consists of two
large rolls and a shallow open vat with several immersion rolls. The vat
contains the starch solution.
(22) Mangle (water). A water mangle is a calender having two or more
rolls used for squeezing water from fabrics before drying. Water mangles
also may be used in other ways during the finishing of various fabrics.
(23) Mule. A mule is a type of spinning frame having a head stock
and a carriage as its two main sections. The head stock is stationary.
The carriage is movable and it carries the spindles which draft and spin
the roving into the yarn. The carriage extends over the whole width of
the machine and moves slowly toward and away from the head stock during
the spinning operation.
(24) Nip. Nip shall mean the point of contact between two in-running
rolls.
(25) Openers and pickers. Openers and pickers means a general
classification which includes breaker pickers, intermediate pickers,
finisher pickers, single process pickers, multiple process pickers,
willow machines, card and picker waste cleaners, thread extractors,
shredding machines, roving waste openers, shoddy pickers, bale breakers,
feeders, vertical openers, lattice cleaners, horizontal cleaners, and
any similar machinery equipped with either cylinders, screen section,
calender section, rolls, or beaters used for the preparation of stock
for further processing.
(26) Paddler. A paddler consists of a trough for a solution and two
or more squeeze rolls between which cloth passes after being passed
through a mordant or dye bath.
(27) Point of operation. Point of operation shall mean that part of
the machine where the work of cutting, shearing, squeezing, drawing, or
manipulating the stock in any other way is done.
(28) Printing machine (roller type). A roller printing machine is a
machine consisting of a large central cylinder, or pressure bowl, around
the lower part of the perimeter of which is placed a series of engraved
color rollers (each having a color trough), a furnisher roller, doctor
blades, etc. The machine is used for printing fabrics.
(29) Ranges (bleaching continuous). Continuous bleaching ranges are
of several types and may be made for cloth in rope or open-width form.
The goods, after wetting out, pass through a squeeze roll into a
saturator containing a solution of caustic soda and then to an enclosed
J-box. A V-shaped arrangement is attached to the front part of the J-box
for uniform and rapid saturation of the cloth with steam before it is
packed down in the J-box. The cloth, in a single strand rope form,
passes over a guide roll down the first arm of the ``V'' and up the
second. Steam is injected into the ``V'' at the upper end of the second
arm so that the cloth is rapidly saturated with steam at this point. The
J-box capacity is such that cloth will remain hot for a sufficient time
to complete the scouring action. It then passes a series of washers with
a squeeze roll in between. The cloth then passes through a second set of
saturator, J-box, and washer, where it is treated with the peroxide
solution. By slight modification of the form of the unit, the same
process can be applied to open-width cloth.
[[Page 715]]
(30) Range (mercerizing). A mercerizing range consists generally of
a 3-bowl mangle, a tenter frame, and a number of boxes for washing and
scouring. The whole setup is in a straight line and all parts operate
continuously. The combination is used to saturate the cloth with sodium
hydroxide, stretch it while saturated, and washing out most of the
caustic before releasing tension.
(31) Sanforizing machine. A sanforizing machine is a machine
consisting of a large steam-heated cylinder, an endless, thick, woolen
felt blanket which is in close contact with the cylinder for most of its
perimeter, and an electrically heated shoe which presses the cloth
against the blanket while the latter is in a stretched condition as it
curves around feed-in roll.
(32) Shearing machine. A shearing machine is a machine used in
shearing cloth. Cutting action is provided by a number of steel blades
spirally mounted on a roller. The roller rotates in close contact with a
fixed ledger blade. There may be from one to six such rollers on a
machine.
(33) Singeing machine. A singeing machine is a machine used
particularly with cotton; it comprises of a heated roller, plate, or an
open gas flame. The material is rapidly passed over the roller or the
plate or through the open gas flame to remove, fuzz or hairiness on yarn
or cloth by burning.
(34) Slasher. A slasher is a machine used for applying a size
mixture to warp yarns. Essentially, it consists of a stand for holding
section beams, a size box, one or more cylindrical dryers or an enclosed
hot air dryer, and a beaming end for finding the yarn on the loom beams.
(35) Solvent (industrial organic). Industrial organic solvent means
any organic volatile liquid or compound, or any combination of these
substances which are used to dissolve or suspend a nonvolatile or
slightly volatile substance for industrial utilization. It shall also
apply to such substances when used as detergents or cleansing agents. It
shall not apply to petroleum products when such products are used as
fuel.
(36) Tenter frame. A tenter frame is a machine for drying cloth
under tension. It essentially consists of a pair of endless traveling
chains fitted with clips of fine pins and carried on tracks. The cloth
is firmly held at the selvages by the two chains which diverge as they
move forward so that the cloth is brought to the desired width.
(37) Warper. A warper is any machine for preparing and arranging the
yarns intended for the warp of a fabric, specifically, a beam warper.
(c) General safety requirements--(1) Means of stopping machines.
Every textile machine shall be provided with individual mechanical or
electrical means for stopping such machines. On machines driven by belts
and shafting, a locking-type shifter or an equivalent positive device
shall be used. On operations where injury to the operator might result
if motors were to restart after power failures, provision shall be made
to prevent machines from automatically restarting upon restoration of
power.
(2) Handles. Stopping and starting handles shall be designed to the
proper length to prevent the worker's hand or fingers from striking
against any revolving part, gear guard, or any other part of the
machine.
(3)-(4) [Reserved]
(5) Inspection and maintenance. All guards and other safety devices,
including starting and stopping devices, shall be properly maintained.
(6) Lighting. Lighting shall conform to American National Standard
A11.1--1965, which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6.
(7) Identification of piping systems. Identification of piping
systems shall conform to American National Standard A13.1--1956, which
is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(8) Identification of physical hazards. Identification of physical
hazards shall be in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 1910.144.
(9) Steam pipes. All pipes carrying steam or hot water for process
or servicing machinery, when exposed to contact and located within seven
feet of the floor or working platform shall be covered with a heat-
insulating material, or otherwise properly guarded.
(d) Openers and pickers--(1) Beater guards. When any opening or
picker machinery is equipped with a beater, such beater shall be
provided with
[[Page 716]]
metal covers which will prevent contact with the beater. Such covers
shall be provided with an interlock which will prevent the cover from
being raised while the machine is in motion and prevent the operation of
the machine while the cover is open.
(2) Cleanout holes. Cleanout holes within reaching distance of the
fan or picker beater shall have their covers securely fastened and they
shall not be opened while the machine is in motion.
(3) Feed rolls. The feed rolls on all opening and picking machinery
shall be covered with a guard designed to prevent the operator from
reaching the nip while the machinery is in operation.
(4) Removal of foreign ferrous material. All textile opener lines
shall be equipped with magnetic separators, tramp iron separators, or
other means for the removal of foreign ferrous material.
(e) Cotton cards--(1) Enclosures. Cylinder and lickerins shall be
completely protected and the doffers should be enclosed.
(2) Enclosure fastenings. The enclosures or covers shall be kept in
place while the machine is in operation, except when stripping or
grinding.
(3) Stripping rolls. On operations calling for flat strippings which
are allowed to fall on the doffer cover, where such strippings are
removed by hand, the doffer cover shall be kept closed and securely
fastened to prevent the opening of the cover while the machine is in
operation. When it becomes necessary to clean the cards while they are
in motion, a long-handled brush or dust mop shall be used.
(f) Garnett machines--(1) Lickerin. Garnett lickerins shall be
enclosed.
(2) Fancy rolls. Garnett fancy rolls shall be enclosed by covers.
These shall be installed in a way that keeps worker rolls reasonably
accessible for removal or adjustment.
(3) Underside of machine. The underside of the garnett shall be
guarded by a screen mesh or other form of enclosure to prevent access.
(g) Spinning mules--A substantial fender of metal or hardwood shall
be installed in front of the carriage wheels, the fender to extend to
within one-fourth inch of the rail.
(h) Slashers--(1) Cylinder dryers--(i) Reducing valves, safety
valves, and pressure gages. Reducing valves, safety valves, and pressure
gages shall conform to the ASME Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII,
Unfired Pressure Vessels, 1968, which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(ii) Vacuum relief valves. Vacuum relief valves shall conform to the
ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels,
1968.
(iii) Lever control. When slashers are operated by control levers,
these levers shall be connected to a horizontal bar or treadle located
not more than 69 inches above the floor to control the operation from
any point.
(iv) Pushbutton control. Slashers operated by pushbutton control
shall have stop and start buttons located at each end of the machine,
and additional buttons located on both sides of the machine, at the size
box and the delivery end. If calender rolls are used, additional buttons
shall be provided at both sides of the machine at points near the nips,
except when slashers are equipped with an enclosed dryer.
(v) Nip guards. All nip guards shall comply with the requirements of
paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section.
(vi) Cylinder enclosure. When enclosures or hoods are used over
cylinder drying rolls, such enclosures or hoods shall be provided with
an exhaust system which will effectively prevent wet air and steam from
escaping into the workroom.
(vii) Expansion chambers. Slasher kettles and cookers shall be
provided with expansion chambers in the covers, or drains, to prevent
surging over. Steam-control valves shall be so located that they can be
operated without exposing the worker to moving parts, hot surfaces, or
steam.
(2) Enclosed hot air dryer--(i) Lever control. When slashers are
operated by control levers, these levers shall be connected to a
horizontal bar or treadle located not more than 69 inches above the
floor to control the operation from any point.
(ii) Push-button control. Slashers operated by push-button control
shall have one start button at each end of the machine and stop buttons
shall be located on both sides of the machines
[[Page 717]]
at intervals spaced not more than 6 feet on centers. Inching buttons
should be installed.
(iii) Dryer enclosure. The dryer enclosure shall be provided with an
exhaust system which will effectively prevent wet air and steam from
escaping into the workroom.
(iv) Nip guards. All nip guards shall comply with Table R-1.
Table R-1--Guard Openings
[Openings in the guard or between the guard and working surface shall
not be greater than the following]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum
Distance of opening from nip point width of
opening
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 to 1\1/2\................................................. \1/4\
1\1/2\ to 2\1/2\............................................ \3/8\
2\1/2\ to 3\1/2\............................................ \1/2\
3\1/2\ to 5\1/2\............................................ \5/8\
5\1/2\ to 6\1/2\............................................ \3/4\
6\1/2\ to 7\1/2\............................................ \7/8\
7\1/2\ to 8\1/2\............................................ 1\1/4\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
The measurements in Table R-1 are all in inches.
(v) Expansion chambers. Slasher kettles and cookers shall be
provided with expansion chambers in the covers, or drains, to prevent
surging over. Steam control valves shall be so located that they can be
operated without exposing the worker to moving parts, hot surfaces, or
steam.
(i) Warpers--(1) Swiveled double-bar gates. Swiveled double-bar
gates shall be installed on all warpers operating in excess of 450 yards
per minute. These gates shall be so interlocked that the machine cannot
be operated until the gate is in the ``closed position,'' except for the
purpose of inching or jogging.
(2) Closed position. Closed position shall mean that the top bar of
the gate shall be at least 42 inches from the floor or working platform;
and the lower bar shall be at least 21 inches from the floor or working
platform; and the gate shall be located 15 inches from the vertical
tangent to the beam head.
(j) Drawing frames, slubbers, roving parts, cotton combers, ring
spinning frames, twisters. Gear housing covers on all installations of
drawing frames, slubbers, roving frames, cotton combers, ring spinning
frames, and twisters shall be equipped with interlocks.
(k) Gill boxes--(1) Pin guard. A guard shall be placed ahead of the
feed end and shall be so designed that it will prevent the worker's
fingers from being caught in the pins of the intersecting fallers.
(2) Nip guards. All nip guards shall comply with the requirements of
paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section.
(l) Heavy draw boxes, finishers, and speeders used in worsted
drawing--(1) Band pulley covers. Covers for band pulleys shall be closed
when the machine is in motion.
(2) Benches or working platforms. Branches or working platforms
approximately 10 inches in height and 8 inches in width should be
installed along the entire running length of the machine for the worker
to stand on while creeling the machine. Such benches or platforms shall
be covered with an abrasive or nonslip material.
(m) Sliver and ribbon lappers (cotton). Cover guard. An interlocking
cover guard shall be installed over the large calender drums and the lap
spool, designed to prevent the operator from coming in contact with the
nip.
(n) Looms--(1) Shuttle guard. Each loom shall be equipped with a
guard designed to minimize the danger of the shuttle flying out of the
shed.
(2) Protection for loom fixer. Provisions shall be made so that
every loom fixer can prevent the loom from being started while he is at
work on the loom. This may be accomplished by means of a lock, the key
to which is retained in the possession of the loom fixer, or by some
other effective means to prevent starting the loom.
(o) Shearing machines. All revolving blades on shearing machines
shall be guarded so that the opening between the cloth surface and the
bottom of the guard will not exceed three-eighths inch.
(p) Continuous bleach range (cotton and rayon)--(1) J-box
protection. Each valve controlling the flow of steam, injurious gases,
or liquids into a J-box shall be equipped with a chain, lock, and key,
so that any worker who enters the J-box can lock the valve and retain
the key in his possession. Any other method which will prevent steam,
injurious gases, or liquids from entering the J-box while the worker is
in it will be acceptable.
(2) Open-width bleaching. The nip of all in-running rolls on open-
width
[[Page 718]]
bleaching machine rolls shall be protected with a guard to prevent the
worker from being caught at the nip. The guard shall extend across the
entire length of the nip.
(q) Kiers--(1) Reducing valves, safety valves, and pressure gages.
Reducing valves, safety valves, and pressure gages shall conform to the
ASME Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII, Unfired/Pressure
Vessels, 1968.
(2) Kier valve protection. Each valve controlling the flow of steam,
injurious gases, or liquids into a kier shall be equipped with a chain,
lock, and key, so that any worker who enters the kier can lock the valve
and retain the key in his possession. Any other method which will
prevent steam, injurious gases, or liquids from entering the kier while
the worker is in it will be acceptable.
(r) Gray and white bins. On new installations guard rails conforming
to Sec. 1910.23 shall be provided where workers are required to plait by
hand from the top of the bin so as to protect the worker from falling to
a lower level.
(s) Mercerizing range (piece goods)--(1) Stopping devices. A
stopping device shall be provided at each end of the machine.
(2) Frame ends. A guard shall be installed at each end of the frame
between the in-running chain and the clip opener, to prevent the
worker's fingers from being caught.
(3) Mangle and washers. The nip at the in-running rolls shall
conform to Sec. 1910.264.
(t) Tenter frames--(1) Stopping devices. A stopping device shall be
provided at each end of the machine.
(2) Frame ends. A guard shall be installed at each end of the frame
at the in-running chain and clip opener.
(3) Oil cups. Oil cups shall be safely located to permit easy
access.
(u) Dyeing jigs--(1) Stopping devices. Each dye jig shall be
equipped with individual mechanical or electrical means for stopping the
machine.
(2) Roll arms. Roll arms on jigs shall be built to allow for extra
large batches, and to prevent the center bar from being forced off,
causing the batch to fall.
(v) Padders--Nip guards. All nip guards shall comply with the
requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section.
(w) Drying cans--(1) Pressure reducing valves and pressure gages.
Pressure reducing valves and pressure gages shall conform to the ASME
Code for Pressure Vessels, Section VIII, 1968, Unfired Pressure Vessels.
(2) Vacuum collapse. If cans are not designed to prevent vacuum
collapse, each can shall be equipped with one or more vacuum relief
valves with openings of sufficient size to prevent the collapse of the
can if vacuum occurs.
(x) Flat-work ironer--(1) Feed rolls. The feed rolls shall be
guarded to conform to Sec. 1910.264.
(2) Pressure rolls. Pressure rolls shall be covered or guarded to
conform to Sec. 1910.264.
(y) Extractors--(1) Centrifugal extractor--(i) Cover. Each extractor
shall be equipped with a metal cover.
(ii) Interlocking device. Each extractor shall be equipped with an
interlocking device that will prevent the cover from being opened while
the basket is in motion, and also prevent the power operation of the
basket while the cover is open.
(iii) Brakes. Each extractor shall be equipped with a mechanically
or electrically operated brake to quickly stop the basket when the power
driving the basket is shut off.
(iv) Maximum allowable speed. Each centrifugal extractor shall be
effectively secured in position on the floor or foundation so as to
eliminate unnecessary vibration, and should not be operated at a speed
greater than the manufacturer's rating, which shall be stamped where
easily visible in letters not less than one-quarter inch in height. The
maximum allowable speed shall be given in revolutions per minute (rpm).
(2) Engine drum extractor--Over-speed governor. Each engine
individually driving an extractor shall be provided with an approved
engine stop and speed limit governor.
(3) Squeezer or wringer extractor--Nip guards. All nip guards shall
comply with the requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section.
(z) Nip guards. All nip guards for water mangle, starch mangle,
back-
[[Page 719]]
washer (worsted yarn) crabbing machines, decating machines, shall comply
with the requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(iv).
(aa) Sanforizing and palmer machine. A safety trip rod, cable, or
wire center cord shall be provided across the front and back of all
palmer cylinders extending the length of the face of the cylinder. It
shall operate readily whether pushed or pulled. This safety trip shall
be not more than 72 inches above the level on which the operator stands
and shall be readily accessible.
(bb) Rope washers--(1) Splash guard. Splash guards shall be
installed on all rope washers unless the machine is so designed as to
prevent the water or liquid from splashing the operator, the floor, or
working surface.
(2) Safety stop bar. A safety trip rod, cable or wire center cord
shall be provided across the front and back of all rope washers
extending the length of the face of the washer. It shall operate readily
whether pushed or pulled. This safety trip shall be not more than 72
inches above the level on which the operator stands and shall be readily
accessible.
(cc) Laundry washer tumbler or shaker--(1) Interlocking device. Each
drying tumbler, each double cylinder shaker or clothes tumbler, and each
washing machine shall be equipped with an interlock device which will
prevent the power operation of the inside cylinder when the outer door
on the case or shell is open, and which will also prevent the outer door
on the case or shell from being opened without shutting off the power.
(2) Means of holding covers or doors in open position. Each enclosed
barrel shall also be equipped with adequate means for holding open the
doors or covers of the inner and outer cylinders or shells while it is
being loaded or unloaded.
(dd) Printing machine (roller type)--(1) Nip guards. All nip guards
shall comply with the requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this
section.
(2) Crown wheel and roller gear nip protection. The engraved roller
gears and the large crown wheel shall be provided with a protective disc
which will enclose the nips of the in-running gears. Individual discs
for each nip will be acceptable.
(ee) Calenders. The nip at the in-running side of the rolls shall be
provided with a guard extending across the entire length of the nip and
arranged to prevent the fingers of the workers from being pulled in
between the rolls or between the guard and the rolls, and constructed so
that the cloth can be fed into the rolls safely.
(ff) Rotary staple cutters. A guard shall be installed completely
enclosing the cutters to prevent the hands of the operator from reaching
the cutting zone.
(gg) [Reserved]
(hh) Hand bailing machine. An angle-iron-handle stop guard shall be
installed at the right angle to the frame of the machine. The stop guard
shall be so designed and so located that it will prevent the handle from
traveling beyond the vertical position should the handle slip from the
operator's hand when the pawl has been released from the teeth of the
takeup gear.
(ii) Roll bench. Cleats shall be installed on the ends of roll
benches.
(jj) Cuttle or swing folder (overhead type). The bottom of the
overhead folders shall be located not less than 7 feet from the floor or
working surface.
(kk) Color-mixing room. Floors in color-mixing rooms shall be
constructed to drain easily.
(ll) Open tanks and vats for mixing and storage of hot or corrosive
liquids--Shutoff valves. Boiling tanks, caustic tanks, and hot liquid
containers, so located that the operator cannot see the contents from
the floor or working area, shall have emergency shutoff valves
controlled from a point not subject to danger of splash. Valves shall
conform to the ASME Pressure Vessel Code, section VIII, Unfired Pressure
Vessels, 1968.
(mm) Dye kettles and vats--Pipes or drains of sufficient capacity to
carry the contents safely away from the working area shall be installed
where there are dye kettles and vats which may at any time contain hot
or corrosive liquids. These shall not empty directly onto the floor.
(nn) Acid carboys. Carboys shall be provided with inclinators, or
the acid shall be withdrawn from the carboys by means of pumping without
pressure in
[[Page 720]]
the carboy, or by means of hand operated siphons.
(oo) Handling caustic soda and caustic potash. Means shall be
provided for handling and emptying caustic soda and caustic potash
containers to prevent workers from coming in contact with the caustic
(see paragraph (qq) of this section).
(pp) First aid. Wherever acids or caustics are used, provision shall
be made for a copious and flowing supply of fresh, clean water.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 49
FR 5324, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33467, June 18,
1998]
Sec. 1910.263 Bakery equipment.
(a) General requirements--(1) Application. The requirements of this
section shall apply to the design, installation, operation and
maintenance of machinery and equipment used within a bakery.
(2) [Reserved]
(b) [Reserved]
(c) General machine guarding.
(1) [Reserved]
(2) Gears. All gears shall be completely enclosed regardless of
location.
(3) Sprockets and V-belt drives. Sprockets and V-belt drives located
within reach from platforms or pasageways or located within 8 feet 6
inches from the floor shall be completely enclosed.
(4) [Reserved]
(5) Lubrication. Where machinery must be lubricated while in motion,
stationary lubrication fittings inside a machine shall be provided with
extension piping to a point of safety so that the employee will not have
to reach into any dangerous part of the machine when lubricating.
(6)-(7) [Reserved]
(8) Hot pipes. Exposed hot water and steam pipes shall be covered
with insulating material wherever necessary to protect employee from
contact.
(d) Flour-handling equipment--(1) General requirements for flour
handling. (i) Wherever any of the various pieces of apparatus comprising
a flour-handling system are run in electrical unity with one another the
following safeguards shall apply:
(a) [Reserved]
(b) Wherever a flour-handling system is of such size that the
beginning of its operation is far remote from its final delivery end,
all electric motors operating each apparatus comprising this system
shall be controlled at each of two points, one located at each remote
end, either of which will stop all motors.
(c) [Reserved]
(d) Control circuits for magnetic controllers shall be so arranged
that the opening of any one of several limit switches, which may be on
an individual unit, will serve to de-energize all of the motors of that
unit.
(ii) [Reserved]
(2) Bag chutes and bag lifts (bag-arm elevators). (i) Bag chutes
(gravity chutes for handling flour bags) shall be so designed so as to
keep to a minimum the speed of flour bags. If the chute inclines more
than 30 deg. from the horizontal, there shall be an upturn at the lower
end of the chute to slow down the bags.
(ii) Bag-arm elevators with manual takeoff shall be designed to
operate at a capacity not exceeding seven bags per minute. The arms on
the conveyor chain shall be so spaced as to obtain the full capacity of
the elevator with the lowest possible chain speed. There shall be an
electric limit switch at the unloading end of the bag-arm elevator so
installed as to automatically stop the conveyor chain if any bag fails
to clear the conveyor arms.
(iii) [Reserved]
(iv) Man lifts shall be prohibited in bakeries. Bag or barrel lifts
shall not be used as man lifts.
(3) Dumpbin and blender.
(i)-(iv) [Reserved]
(v) All dumpbin and blender hoods shall be of sufficient capacity to
prevent circulation of flour dust outside the hoods.
(vi) All dumpbins shall be of a suitable height from floor to enable
the operator to dump flour from bags, without causing undue strain or
fatigue. Where the edge of any bin is more than 24 inches above the
flour, a bag rest step shall be provided.
(vii) A control device for stopping the dumpbin and blender shall be
provided close to the normal location of the operator.
[[Page 721]]
(4)-(5) [Reserved]
(6) Storage bins.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) Storage bins shall be provided with gaskets and locks or
latches to keep the cover closed, or other equivalent devices in order
to insure the dust tightness of the cover. Covers at openings where an
employee may enter the bin shall also be provided with a hasp and a
lock, so located that the employee may lock the cover in the open
position whenever it is necessary to enter the bin.
(iii) Storage bins where the side is more than 5 feet in depth shall
be provided with standard stationary safety ladders, both inside and
outside, to reach from floor level to top of bin and from top of bin to
inside bottom, keeping the ladder end away from the moving screw
conveyor.
(iv)-(v) [Reserved]
(vi) The main entrance cover of large storage bins located at the
interior exit ladder shall be provided with an electric interlock for
motors operating both feed and unloading screw, so that these motors
cannot operate while the cover is open.
(7) Screw conveyors.
(i)-(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) The covers of all screw conveyors shall be made removable in
convenient sections, held on with stationary clamps located at proper
intervals keeping all covers dust-tight. Where drop or hinged bottom
sections are provided this provision shall not apply.
(8) Sifters. (i) Enclosures of all types of flour sifters shall be
so constructed that they are dust-tight but readily accessible for
interior inspection.
(ii) [Reserved]
(9) Flour scales.
(i)-(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) Traveling or track-type flour scales shall be equipped with
bar handles for moving same. The bar should be at least 1 inch in
diameter and well away from trolley track wheels.
(e) Mixers--(1) Horizontal dough mixers. (i) Mixers with external
power application shall have all belts, chains, gears, pulleys,
sprockets, clutches, and other moving parts completely enclosed.
(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) Each mixer shall be equipped with an individual motor and
control, and with a conveniently located manual switch to prevent the
mixer from being started in the usual manner while the machine is being
serviced and cleaned.
(iv) All electrical control stations shall be so located that the
operator must be in full view of the bowl in its open position. No
duplication of such controls other than a stop switch shall be
permitted.
(v) All mixers with power and manual dumping arrangements shall be
equipped with safety devices which shall:
(a) Engage both hands of the operator, when the agitator is in
motion under power, and while the bowl is opened more than one-fifth of
its total opening.
(b) Prevent the agitator from being started, while the bowl is more
than one-fifth open, without engaging both hands of the operator;
(vi)-(vii) [Reserved]
(viii) Every mixer shall be equipped with a full enclosure over the
bowl which is closed at all times while the agitator is in motion. Only
minor openings in this enclosure, such as ingredient doors, flour
inlets, etc., each representing less than 1\1/2\ square feet in area,
shall be capable of being opened while the mixer is in operation.
(ix) [Reserved]
(x) Overhead covers or doors which are subject to accidental closure
shall be counterbalanced to remain in an open position or provided with
means to hold them open until positively released by the operator.
(xi)-(xvii) [Reserved]
(xviii) Valves and controls to regulate the coolant in mixer jackets
shall be located so as to permit access by the operator without
jeopardizing his safety.
(2) Vertical mixers. (i) Vertical mixers shall comply with
paragraphs (e)(1) (i), (iii), (ix) and (x), of this section.
(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) Bowl locking devices shall be of a positive type which require
the attention of the operator for unlocking.
(iv) Devices shall be made available for moving bowls weighing more
than
[[Page 722]]
80 pounds, with contents, into and out of the mixing position on the
machine.
(f) Dividers.
(1)-(2) [Reserved]
(3) Rear of divider. The back of the divider shall have a complete
cover to enclose all of the moving parts, or each individual part shall
be enclosed or guarded to remove the separate hazards. The rear cover
shall be provided with a limit switch in order that the machine cannot
operate when this cover is open. The guard on the back shall be hinged
so that it cannot be completely removed and if a catch or brace is
provided for holding the cover open, it shall be designed so that it
will not release due to vibrations or minor bumping whereby the cover
may drop on an employee.
(g) Moulders--(1) Hoppers. Mechanical feed moulders shall be
provided with hoppers so designed and connected to the proofer that an
employee's hands cannot get into the hopper where they will come in
contact with the in-running rolls.
(2) Hand-fed moulders. Hand-fed moulders shall be provided with a
belt-feed device or the hopper shall be extended high enough so that the
hands of the operator cannot get into the feed rolls. The top edge of
such a hopper shall be well rounded to prevent injury when it is struck
or bumped by the employee's hand.
(3) Stopping devices. There shall be a stopping device within easy
reach of the operator who feeds the moulder and another stopping device
within the reach of the employee taking the dough away from the moulder.
(h) Manually fed dough brakes--(1) Top-roll protection. The top roll
shall be protected by a heavy gage metal shield extending over the roll
to go within 6 inches of the hopper bottom board. The shield may be
perforated to permit observation of the dough entering the rolls.
(2) Emergency stop bar--An emergency stop bar shall be provided, and
so located that the body of the operator will press against the bar if
the operator slips and falls toward the rolls, or if the operator gets
his hand caught in the rolls. The bar shall apply the body pressure to
open positively a circuit that will deenergize the drive motor. In
addition, a brake which is inherently self-engaging by requiring power
or force from an external source to cause disengagement shall be
activated at the same time causing the rolls to stop instantly. The
emergency stop bar shall be checked for proper operation every 30 days.
(i) Miscellaneous equipment--(1) Proof boxes. All door locks shall
be operable both from within and outside the box. Guide rails shall be
installed to center the rack as it enters, passes through, and leaves
the proof box.
(2) Fermentation room. Fermentation room doors shall have
nonshatterable wire glass or plastic panels for vision through doors.
(3) Troughs. Troughs shall be mounted on antifriction bearing
casters thus making it possible for the operator to move and direct the
motion of the trough with a minimum of effort.
(4) Hand trucks. (i) Casters shall be set back from corners to be
out of the way of toes and heels, but not far enough back to cause the
truck to be unstable.
(ii) A lock or other device shall be provided to hold the handle in
vertical position when the truck is not in use.
(5) Lift trucks. A lock or other device shall be provided to hold
the handle in vertical position when the truck is not in use.
(6) Racks.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) Racks shall be equipped with handles so located with reference
to the frame of the rack that no part of the operator's hands extends
beyond the outer edge of the frame when holding onto the handles.
(iii) Antifriction bearing casters shall be used to give the
operator better control of the rack.
(7) Conveyors. (i) Wherever a conveyor passes over a main aisleway,
regularly occupied work area, or passageway, the underside of the
conveyor shall be completely enclosed to prevent broken chains or other
material from falling in the passageway.
(ii) Stop bumpers shall be installed on all delivery ends of
conveyors, wherever manual removal of the product carried is practiced.
[[Page 723]]
(iii) Where hazard of getting caught exists a sufficient number of
stop buttons shall be provided to enable quick stopping of the conveyor.
(8)-(10) [Reserved]
(11) Ingredient premixers, emulsifiers, etc. (i) All top openings
shall be provided with covers attached to the machines. These covers
should be so arranged and interlocked that power will be shut off
whenever the cover is opened to a point where the operator's fingers
might come in contact with the beaters.
(ii) [Reserved]
(12) Chain tackle. (i) All chain tackle shall be marked prominently,
permanently, and legibly with maximum load capacity.
(ii) All chain tackle shall be marked permanently and legibly with
minimum support specification.
(iii) Safety hooks shall be used.
(13) Trough hoists, etc. (i) All hoists shall be marked prominently,
permanently, and legibly with maximum load capacity.
(ii) All hoists shall be marked permanently and legibly with minimum
support specifications.
(iii) Safety catches shall be provided for the chain so that the
chain will hold the load in any position.
(iv) Safety hooks shall be used.
(14) Air-conditioning units.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) On large units with doors to chambers large enough to be
entered, all door locks shall be operable from both inside and outside.
(15) Pan washing tanks.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) The surface of the floor of the working platform shall be
maintained in nonslip condition.
(iii)-(iv) [Reserved]
(v) Power ventilated exhaust hoods shall be provided over the tanks.
(16)-(19) [Reserved]
(20) Bread coolers, rack type.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) All door locks shall be operable from both within and outside
the cooler.
(21) [Reserved]
(22) Doughnut machines. Separate flues shall be provided, (i) for
venting vapors from the frying section, and (ii) for venting products of
combustion from the combustion chamber used to heat the fat.
(23) Open fat kettles. (i) The floor around kettles shall be
maintained in nonslip condition.
(ii)-(iii) [Reserved]
(iv) The top of the kettle shall be not less than 36 inches above
floor or working level.
(24) Steam kettles. (i) Positive locking devices shall be provided
to hold kettles in the desired position.
(ii) Kettles with steam jackets shall be provided with safety valves
in accordance with the ASME Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired
Pressure Vessels, 1968, which is incorporated by reference as specified
in Sec. 1910.6.
(j) Slicers and wrappers--(1) Slicers.
(i)-(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) The cover over the knife head of reciprocating-blade slicers
shall be provided with an interlocking arrangement so that the machine
cannot operate unless the cover is in place.
(iv) On slicers with endless band knives, each motor shall be
equipped with a magnet brake which operates whenever the motor is not
energized. Each door, panel, or other point of access to the cutting
blades shall be arranged by means of mechanical or electric interlocks
so that the motor will be deenergized if all such access doors, panels,
or access points are not closed.
(v) When it is necessary to sharpen slicer blades on the machine, a
barrier shall be provided leaving only sufficient opening for the
sharpening stone to reach the knife blades.
(vi) [Reserved]
(vii) Slicer wrapper conditions.
(a)-(b) [Reserved]
(c) Mechanical control levers for starting and stopping both slicing
machine conveyors and wrapping machines shall be extended or so located
that an operator in one location can control both machines. Such levers
should be provided wherever necessary, but these should be so arranged
that there is only one station capable of starting the wrapping machine
and conveyor assembly, and this starting station should be so arranged
or guarded as to prevent accidental starting. The electric control
station for starting and stopping the electric motor
[[Page 724]]
driving the wrapping machine and conveyor should be located near the
clutch starting lever.
(2) Wrappers.
(i)-(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) Electrical heaters on wrappers shall be protected by a cover
plate properly separated or insulated from the heaters in order that
accidental contact with this cover plate will not cause a burn to the
operator.
(k) Biscuit and cracker equipment--(1) Meal, peanut, and fig
grinders. (i) If the hopper is removable it shall be provided with an
electric interlock so that the machine cannot be put in operation when
the hopper is removed.
(ii) Where grid guards cannot be used, feed conveyors to hoppers, or
baffle-type hoppers, shall be provided. Hoppers in such cases shall be
enclosed and provided with hinged covers, and equipped with electric
interlock to prevent operation of the machine with the cover open.
(2) Sugar and spice pulverizers. (i) All drive belts used in
connection with sugar and spice pulverizers shall be grounded by means
of metal combs or other effective means of removing static electricity.
All pulverizing of sugar or spice grinding shall be done in accordance
with NFPA 62--1967 (Standard for Dust Hazards of Sugar and Cocoa) and
NFPA 656--1959 (Standard for Dust Hazards in Spice Grinding Plants),
which are incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(ii) Magnetic separators shall be provided to reduce fire and
explosion hazards.
(3) Cheese, fruit, and food cutters. These machines shall be
protected in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (k)(1) of
this section.
(4) [Reserved]
(5) Reversible dough brakes. Reversible brakes shall be provided
with a guard or tripping mechanism on each side of the rolls. These
guards shall be so arranged as to stop the machine or reverse the
direction of the rolls so that they are outrunning if the guard is moved
by contact of the operator.
(6) Cross-roll brakes. Cross-roll brakes shall be provided with
guards that are similar in number and equal in effectiveness to guards
on hand-fed brakes.
(7) Box- and roll-type dough sheeters.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) Hoppers for sheeters shall have an automatic stop bar or
automatic stopping device along the back edge of the hopper. If
construction does not permit location at the back edge, the automatic
stop bar or automatic stopping device shall be located where it will be
most effective to accomplish the desired protection.
(8) [Reserved]
(9) Rotary, die machines, pretzel rolling, and pretzel-stick
extruding machines. Dough hoppers shall have the entire opening
protected with substantial grid-type guards to prevent the employee from
getting his hands caught in moving parts, or the hopper shall be
extended high enough so that the operator's hands cannot get into moving
parts.
(10)-(11) [Reserved]
(12) Pan cooling towers. (i) Where pan cooling towers extend to two
or more floors, a lockout switch shall be provided on each floor in
order that mechanics working on the tower may positively lock the
mechanism against starting. Only one start switch shall be used in the
motor control circuit.
(ii) [Reserved]
(13) Chocolate melting, refining, and mixing kettles. Each kettle
shall be provided with a cover to enclose the top of the kettle. The
bottom outlet of each kettle shall be of such size and shape that the
operator cannot reach in to touch the revolving paddle or come in
contact with the shear point between the paddle and the side of the
kettle.
(14)-(16) [Reserved]
(17) Peanut cooling trucks. Mechanically operated peanut cooling
trucks shall have a grid-type cover over the entire top.
(l) Ovens--(1) General location.
(i)-(vi) [Reserved]
(vii) Ovens shall be located so that possible fire or explosion will
not expose groups of persons to possible injury. For this reason ovens
shall not adjoin lockers, lunch or sales rooms, main passageways, or
exits.
(2) [Reserved]
(3) Safeguards of mechanical parts. (i) Emergency stop buttons shall
be provided on mechanical ovens near the point where operators are
stationed.
[[Page 725]]
(ii) All piping at ovens shall be tested to be gastight.
(iii) Main shutoff valves, operable separately from any automatic
valve, shall be provided to permit turning off the fuel or steam in case
of an emergency.
(a) Main shutoff valves shall be located so that explosions, fires,
etc. will not prevent access to these valves.
(b) Main shutoff valves shall be locked in the closed position when
men must enter the oven or when the oven is not in service.
(4)-(7) [Reserved]
(8) Electrical heating equipment.
(i)-(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) A main disconnect switch or circuit breaker shall be provided.
This switch or circuit breaker shall be so located that it can be
reached quickly and safely. The main switch or circuit breaker shall
have provisions for locking it in the open position if any work on the
electrical equipment or inside the oven must be performed.
(9) General requirements. (i) Protecting devices shall be properly
maintained and kept in working order.
(ii) All safety devices on ovens shall be inspected at intervals of
not less than twice a month by an especially appointed, properly
instructed bakery employee, and not less than once a year by
representatives of the oven manufacturers.
(iii)(a) Protection of gas pilot lights shall be provided when it is
impracticable to protect the main flame of the burner and where the
pilot flame cannot contact the flame electrode without being in the path
of the main flame of the burner. Failure of any gas pilot shall
automatically shut off the fuel supply to the burner.
(b) Ovens with multiple burners shall be equipped with individual
atmospheric pilot lights where there is sufficient secondary air in the
baking chamber and where gas is available; or else each burner shall be
equipped with an electric spark-type ignition device.
(iv) Burners of a capacity exceeding 150,000 B.t.u. per hour
equipped with electric ignition shall be protected in addition by quick-
acting combustion safeguards.
(a) The high-tension current for any electric spark-type ignition
device shall originate in a power supply line which is interlocked with
the fuel supply for the oven in such a way that in case of current
failure both the source of electricity to the high-tension circuits and
the fuel supply shall be turned off simultaneously.
(b) [Reserved]
(c) Combustion safeguards used in connection with electric ignition
systems on ovens shall be so designed as to prevent an explosive mixture
from accumulating inside the oven before ignition has taken place.
(v) When fuel is supplied and used at line pressure, safety shutoff
valves shall be provided in the fuel line leading to the burner.
(a) When fuel is supplied in excess of line pressure, safety shutoff
valves shall be provided in the fuel line leading to the burners, unless
the fuel supply lines are equipped with other automatic valves which
will prevent the flow of fuel when the compressing equipment is stopped.
(b) The safety shutoff valve shall be positively tight and shall be
tested at least twice monthly.
(c)-(d) [Reserved]
(e) A safety shutoff valve shall require manual operation for
reopening after it has closed, or the electric circuit shall be so
arranged that it will require a manual operation for reopening the
safety shutoff valve.
(f) Manual reset-type safety shutoff valves shall be so arranged
that they cannot be locked in an open position by external means.
(g) Where blowers are used for supplying the air for combustion the
safety shutoff valve shall be interlocked so that it will close in case
of air failure.
(h) Where gas or electric ignition is used, the safety shutoff valve
shall close in case of ignition failure. On burners equipped with
combustion safeguards, the valve shall close in case of burner flame
failure.
(vi) One main, manually operated, fuel shutoff valve shall be
provided on each oven, and shall be located ahead of all other valves in
the system.
(vii) All individual gas or oil burners with a heating capacity over
150,000 B.t.u. per hour shall be protected by a safeguard which is
actuated by the flame and which will react to flame
[[Page 726]]
failure in a time interval not to exceed 2 seconds. All safeguards, once
having shut down a gas or oil burner, shall require manual resetting and
starting of the burner or burners.
(viii) Any space in an oven (except direct fired ovens) which could
be filled with an explosive mixture shall be protected by explosion
vents. Explosion vents shall be made of minimum weight consistent with
adequate insulation.
(a) Explosion doors which have a substantial weight shall be
attached by chains or similar means to prevent flying parts from
injuring the personnel in case of an explosion.
(b) Where explosion vents are so located that flying parts or gases
might endanger the personnel working on or near the oven, internal or
external protecting means shall be provided in the form of heavily
constructed shields or deflectors made from noncombustible material.
(c) Specifically exempted from the provisions of paragraph paragraph
(l)(8)(viii) of this section are heating systems on ovens in which the
fuel is admitted only to enclosed spaces which shall have been tested to
prove that their construction will resist repeated explosions without
deformation are exempt from the requirements of paragraph (l)(8)(viii)
(a) and (b) of this section.
(ix)-(x) [Reserved]
(xi) Where the gas supply pressure is substantially higher than that
at which the burners of an oven are designed to operate, a gas pressure
regulator shall be employed.
(a)-(c) [Reserved]
(d) A relief valve shall be placed on the outlet side of gas
pressure regulators where gas is supplied at high pressure. The
discharge from this valve shall be piped to the outside of the building.
(10) Direct-fired ovens. (i) Direct-fired ovens shall be safeguarded
against failure of fuel, air, or ignition.
(ii) To prevent the possible accumulation of explosive gases from
being ignited after a shutdown, all direct-fired ovens with a heating
capacity over 150,000 B.t.u. per hour shall be ventilated before the
ignition system, combustion air blower, and the fuel can be turned on.
The preventilation shall insure at least four complete changes of
atmosphere in the baking chamber by discharging the oven atmosphere to
the outside of the building and entraining fresh air into it. The
preventilation shall be repeated whenever the heating equipment is shut
down by a safety device.
(11) Direct recirculating ovens. (i) Each circulating fan in direct
recirculating ovens shall be interconnected with the burner in such a
manner that the fuel is shut off by a safety valve when the fan is not
running.
(ii) The flame of the burner or burners in direct recirculating
ovens shall be protected by a quick-acting flame-sensitive safeguard
which will automatically shut off the fuel supply in case of burner
failure.
(12)-(14) [Reserved]
(15) Indirect recirculating ovens.
(i)-(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) Duct systems (in ovens) operating under pressure shall be
tested for tightness in the initial starting of the oven and also at
intervals not farther apart than 6 months.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49765, Oct. 24, 1978;
43 FR 51760, Nov. 7, 1978; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.264 Laundry machinery and operations.
(a) [Reserved]
(b) General requirements. This section applies to moving parts of
equipment used in laundries and to conditions peculiar to this industry,
with special reference to the point of operation of laundry machines.
This section does not apply to dry-cleaning operations.
(c) Point-of-operation guards--(1) Washroom machines.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) Washing machine.
(a) [Reserved]
(b) Each washing machine shall be provided with means for holding
open the doors or covers of inner and outer cylinders or shells while
being loaded or unloaded.
(2) Starching and drying machines.
(i)-(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) Drying tumbler.
(a) [Reserved]
(b) Each drying tumbler shall be provided with means for holding
open the
[[Page 727]]
doors or covers of inner and outer cylinders or shells while being
loaded or unloaded.
(iv) Shaker (clothes tumbler).
(a) [Reserved]
(b)(1) [Reserved]
(2) Each shaker or clothes tumbler of the double-cylinder type shall
be provided with means for holding open the doors or covers of inner and
outer cylinders or shells while being loaded or unloaded.
(v) Exception. Provisions of paragraph (c)(2) (iii), (iv)(a)(1), and
(iv)(b) of this section shall not apply to shakeout or conditioning
tumblers where the clothes are loaded into the open end of the revolving
cylinder and are automatically discharged out of the opposite end.
(3) [Reserved]
(4) Miscellaneous machines and equipment.
(i)-(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) Steam pipes. (a) All steam pipes that are within 7 feet of the
floor or working platform, and with which the worker may come into
contact, shall be insulated or covered with a heat-resistive material or
shall be otherwise properly guarded.
(b) Where pressure-reducing valves are used, one or more relief or
safety valves shall be provided on the low-pressure side of the reducing
valve, in case the piping or equipment on the low-pressure side does not
meet the requirements for full initial pressure. The relief or safety
valve shall be located adjacent to, or as close as possible to, the
reducing valve. Proper protection shall be provided to prevent injury or
damage caused by fluid escaping from relief or safety valves if vented
to the atmosphere. The vents shall be of ample size and as short and
direct as possible. The combined discharge capacity of the relief valves
shall be such that the pressure rating of the lower-pressure piping and
equipment will not be exceeded if the reducing valve sticks or fails to
open.
(d) Operating rules--(1) General.
(i)-(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) Markers. Markers and others handling soiled clothes shall be
warned against touching the eyes, mouth, or any part of the body on
which the skin has been broken by a scratch or abrasion; and they shall
be cautioned not to touch or eat food until their hands have been
thoroughly washed.
(iv) [Reserved]
(v) Instruction of employees. Employees shall be properly instructed
as to the hazards of their work and be instructed in safe practices, by
bulletins, printed rules, and verbal instructions.
(2) Mechanical--(i) Safety guards. (a) No safeguard, safety
appliance, or device attached to, or forming an integral part of any
machinery shall be removed or made ineffective except for the purpose of
making immediate repairs or adjustments. Any such safeguard, safety
appliance, or device removed or made ineffective during the repair or
adjustment of such machinery shall be replaced immediately upon the
completion of such repairs or adjustments.
(b) [Reserved]
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49767, Oct. 24, 1978;
43 FR 51760, Nov. 7, 1978]
Sec. 1910.265 Sawmills.
(a) General requirements--Application. This section includes safety
requirements for sawmill operations including, but not limited to, log
and lumber handling, sawing, trimming, and planing; waste disposal;
operation of dry kilns; finishing; shipping; storage; yard and yard
equipment; and for power tools and affiliated equipment used in
connection with such operations, but excluding the manufacture of
plywood, cooperage, and veneer.
(b) Definitions applicable to this section--(1) A-frame. The term A-
frame means a structure made of two independent columns fastened
together at the top and separated at the bottom for stability.
(2) Annealing. The term annealing means heating then cooling to
soften and render less brittle.
(3) Binder. The term binder means a chain, cable, rope, or other
approved material used for binding loads.
(4) Boom. The term boom means logs or timbers fastened together end
to end and used to contain floating logs. The term includes enclosed
logs.
(5) Brow log. The term brow log means a log placed parallel to a
roadway at a
[[Page 728]]
landing or dump to protect vehicles while loading or unloading.
(6) Bunk. The term bunk means a cross support for a load.
(7) Cant. The term cant means a log slabbed on one or more sides.
(8) Carriage (log carriage). The term carriage means a framework
mounted on wheels which runs on tracks or in grooves in a direction
parallel to the face of the saw, and which contains apparatus to hold a
log securely and advance it towards the saw.
(9) Carrier. The term carrier means an industrial truck so designed
and constructed that it straddles the load to be transported with
mechanisms to pick up the load and support it during transportation.
(10) Chipper. The term chipper means a machine which cuts material
into chips.
(11) Chock (bunk block) (cheese block). The terms chock, bunk block,
and cheese block mean a wedge that prevents logs or loads from moving.
(12) Cold deck. The term cold deck means a pile of logs stored for
future removal.
(13) Crotch lines. The term crotch lines means two short lines
attached to a hoisting line by a ring or shackle, the lower ends being
attached to loading hooks.
(14) Dog (carriage dog). The term dog means a steel tooth, one or
more of which are attached to each carriage knee to hold log firmly in
place on carriage.
(15) Drag saw. The term drag saw means a power-driven, reciprocating
crosscut saw mounted on suitable frame and used for bucking logs.
(16) Head block. The term head block means that part of a carriage
which holds the log and upon which it rests. It generally consists of
base, knee, taper set, and mechanism.
(17) Head rig. The term head rig means a combination of head saw and
log carriage used for the initial breakdown of logs into timbers, cants,
and boards.
(18) Hog. The term hog means a machine for cutting or grinding slabs
and other coarse residue from the mill.
(19) Husk. The term husk means a head saw framework on a circular
mill.
(20) Industrial truck. The term industrial truck means a mobile
powerdriven truck or tractor.
(21) Kiln tender. The term kiln tender means the operator of a kiln.
(22) Lift truck. The term lift truck means an industrial truck used
for lateral transportation and equipped with a power-operated lifting
device, usually in the form of forks, for piling or unpiling lumber
units or packages.
(23) Live rolls. The term live rolls means cylinders of wood or
metal mounted on horizontal axes and rotated by power, which are used to
convey slabs, lumber, and other wood products.
(24) Loading boom. The term loading boom means any structure
projecting from a pivot point to guide a log when lifted.
(25) Log deck. The term Log deck means a platform in the sawmill on
which the logs remain until needed for sawing.
(26) Lumber hauling truck. The term lumber hauling truck means an
industrial truck, other than a lift truck or a carrier, used for the
transport of lumber.
(27) Log haul. The term log haul means a conveyor for transferring
logs to mill.
(28) Package. The term package means a unit of lumber.
(29) Peavy. The term peavy means a stout wooden handle fitted with a
spike and hook and used for rolling logs.
(30) Pike pole. The term pike pole means a long pole whose end is
shod with a sharp pointed spike.
(31) Pitman rod. The term pitman rod means connecting rod.
(32) Resaw. The term resaw means band, circular, or sash gang saws
used to break down slabs, cants, or flitches into lumber.
(33) Running line. The term running line means any moving rope as
distinguished from a stationary rope such as a guyline.
(34) Safety factor. The term safety factor means a calculated
reduction factor which may be applied to laboratory test values to
obtain safe working stresses for wooden beams and other mechanical
members; ratio of breaking load to safe load.
[[Page 729]]
(35) Saw guide. The term saw guide means a device for steadying a
circular or bandsaw.
(36) Setwork. The term setwork means a mechanism on a sawmill
carriage which enables an operator to move the log into position for
another cut.
(37) Sorting gaps. The term sorting gaps means the areas on a log
pond enclosed by boom sticks into which logs are sorted.
(38) Spreader wheel. The term spreader wheel means a metal wheel
that separates the board from the log in back of circular saws to
prevent binding.
(39) Splitter. The term splitter means a knife-type, nonrotating
spreader.
(40) Sticker. The term sticker means a strip of wood or other
material used to separate layers of lumber.
(41) Stiff boom. The term stiff boom means the anchored, stationary
boom sticks which are tied together and on which boom men work.
(42) Swifter. The term swifter is a means of tying boom sticks
together to prevent them from spreading while being towed.
(43) Telltale. The term telltale means a device used to serve as a
warning for overhead objects.
(44) Top saw. The term top saw means the upper of two circular saws
on a head rig, both being on the same husk.
(45) Tramway. The term tramway means a way for trams, usually
consisting of parallel tracks laid on wooden beams.
(46) Trestle. The term trestle means a braced framework of timbers,
piles or steelwork for carrying a road or railroad over a depression.
(c) Building facilities, and isolated equipment--(1) Safety factor.
All buildings, docks, tramways, walkways, log dumps, and other
structures shall be designed, constructed and maintained so as to
support the imposed load in accordance with a safety factor.
(2) Work areas. Work areas under mills shall be as evenly surfaced
as local conditions permit. They shall be free from unnecessary
obstructions and provided with lighting facilities in accordance with
American National Standard for Industrial Lighting A11.1--1965, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(3) Floors. Flooring in buildings and on ramps and walkways shall be
constructed and installed in accordance with established principles of
mechanics and sound engineering practices. They shall be of adequate
strength to support the estimated or actual dead and live loads acting
on them with the resultant stress not exceeding the allowable stress for
the material being used.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) Areas beneath floor openings. Areas under floor openings shall,
where practical, be fenced off. When this is not practical, they shall
be plainly marked and telltales shall be installed to hang over these
areas.
(iii) Floor maintenance. The flooring of buildings, docks, and
passageways shall be kept in good repair. When a hazardous condition
develops that cannot be immediately repaired, the area shall be guarded
until adequate repairs are made.
(iv) Nonslip floors. Floors, footwalks, and passageways in the work
area around machines or other places where a person is required to stand
or walk shall be provided with effective means to minimize slipping.
(4) Walkways, docks, and platforms--(i) Width. Walkways, docks, and
platforms shall be of sufficient width to provide adequate passage and
working areas.
(ii) Maintenance. Walkways shall be evenly floored and kept in good
repair.
(iii) Docks. Docks and runways used for the operation of lift trucks
and other vehicles shall have a substantial guard or shear timber except
where loading and unloading are being performed.
(iv) Elevated walks. All elevated walks, runways, or platforms, if 4
feet or more from the floor level, shall be provided with a standard
railing except on loading or unloading sides of platforms. If height
exceeds 6 feet, a standard toe board also shall be provided to prevent
material from rolling or falling off.
(v) Elevated platforms. Where elevated platforms are used routinely
on a daily basis they shall be equipped with stairways or fixed ladders
in accordance with Sec. 1910.27.
(vi) Hazardous locations. Where required, walkways and stairways
with
[[Page 730]]
standard handrails shall be provided in elevated and hazardous
locations. Where such passageways are over walkways or work areas,
standard toe boards shall be provided.
(5) Stairways--(i) Construction. Stairways shall be constructed in
accordance with Sec. 1910.24.
(ii) Handrails. Stairways shall be provided with a standard handrail
on at least one side or on any open side. Where stairs are more than
four feet wide there shall be a standard handrail at each side, and
where more than eight feet wide, a third standard handrail shall be
erected in the center of the stairway.
(iii) Lighting. All stairways shall be adequately lighted as
prescribed in paragraph (c)(9) of this section.
(6) Emergency exits including doors and fire escapes--(i) Opening.
Doors shall not open directly on or block a flight of stairs, and shall
swing in the direction of exit travel.
(ii) Identification. Exits shall be located and identified in a
manner that affords ready exit from all work areas.
(iii) Swinging doors. All swinging doors shall be provided with
windows; with one window for each section of double swinging doors. Such
windows shall be of shatterproof or safety glass unless otherwise
protected against breakage.
(iv) Sliding doors. Where sliding doors are used as exits, an inner
door shall be cut inside each of the main doors and arranged to open
outward.
(v) Barriers and warning signs. Where a doorway opens upon a
railroad track or upon a tramway or dock over which vehicles travel, a
barrier or other warning device shall be placed to prevent workmen from
stepping into moving traffic.
(7) Air requirements. Ventilation shall be provided to supply
adequate fresh healthful air to rooms, buildings, and work areas.
(8) Vats and tanks. All open vats and tanks into which workmen could
fall shall be guarded.
(9) Lighting--(i) Adequacy. Illumination shall be provided and
designed to supply adequate general and local lighting to rooms,
buildings, and work areas during the time of use.
(ii) Effectiveness. Factors upon which the adequacy and
effectiveness of illumination will be judged, include the following:
(a) The quantity of light in foot-candle intensity shall be
sufficient for the work being done.
(b) The quality of the light shall be such that it is free from
glare, and has correct direction, diffusion, and distribution.
(c) Shadows and extreme contrasts shall be avoided or kept to a
minimum.
(10) [Reserved]
(11) Hazard marking. Physical hazard marking shall be as specified
in Sec. 1910.144 of this part.
(12) [Reserved]
(13) Hydraulic systems. Means shall be provided to block, chain, or
otherwise secure equipment normally supported by hydraulic pressure so
as to provide for safe maintenance.
(14) [Reserved]
(15) Gas piping and appliances. All gas piping and appliances shall
be installed in accordance with the American National Standard
Requirements for the Installation of Gas Appliances and Gas Piping
Z21.30--1964, which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6.
(16)-(17) [Reserved]
(18) Conveyors--(i) Standards. Construction, operation, and
maintenance of conveyors shall be in accordance with American National
Standard B20.1--1957, which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6.
(ii) Guarding. Spiked live rolls shall be guarded.
(19) Stationary tramways and trestles--(i) Foundations and walkways.
Tramways and trestles shall have substantial mud sills or foundations
which shall be frequently inspected and kept in repair. When vehicles
are operated on tramways and trestles which are used for foot passage,
traffic shall be controlled or a walkway with standard handrails at the
outer edge and shear timber on the inner edge shall be provided. This
walkway shall be wide enough to allow adequate clearance to vehicles.
When walkways cross over other thoroughfares, they shall be solidly
fenced at the outer edge to a height of 42 inches over such
thoroughfares.
[[Page 731]]
(ii) Clearance. Stationary tramways and trestles shall have a
vertical clearance of 22 feet over railroad rails. When constructed over
carrier docks or roads, they shall have a clearance of 6 feet above the
driver's foot rest on the carrier, and in no event shall this clearance
be less than 12 feet from the roadway. In existing operations where it
is impractical to obtain such clearance, telltales, electric signals,
signs or other precautionary measures shall be installed.
(20) Blower, collecting, and exhaust systems--(i) Design,
construction, and maintenance. Blower collecting, and exhaust systems
should be designed, constructed, and maintained in accordance with
American National Standards Z33.1--1961 (For the Installation of Blower
and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying) and
Z12.2--1962 (R1969) (Code for the Prevention of Dust Explosion in
Woodworking and Wood Flour Manufacturing Plants), which are incorporated
by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(ii) Collecting systems. All mills containing one or more machines
that create dust, shavings, chips, or slivers during a period of time
equal to or greater than one-fourth of the working day, shall be
equipped with a collecting system. It may be either continuous or
automatic, and shall be of sufficient strength and capacity to enable it
to remove such refuse from points of operation and immediate vicinities
of machines and work areas.
(iii) Exhaust or conveyor systems. Each woodworking machine that
creates dust, shavings, chips, or slivers shall be equipped with an
exhaust or conveyor system located and adjusted to remove the maximum
amount of refuse from the point of operation and immediate vicinity.
(iv) [Reserved]
(v) Dust chambers. Exhaust pipes shall not discharge into an
unconfined outside pile if uncontrolled fire or explosion hazards are
created. They may empty into settling or dust chambers, designed to
prevent the dust or refuse from entering any work area. Such chambers
shall be constructed and operated to minimize the danger of fire or dust
explosion.
(vi) Hand removal of refuse. Provision for the daily removal of
refuse shall be made in all operations not required to have an exhaust
system or having refuse too heavy, bulky, or otherwise unsuitable to be
handled by the exhaust system.
(21) Chippers--(i) Whole-log chippers. The feed system to the
chipper shall be arranged so the operator does not stand in direct line
with the chipper spout (hopper). The chipper spout shall be enclosed to
a height of not less than 36 inches from the floor or the operator's
platform. A safety belt and lifeline shall be worn by workmen when
working at or near the spout unless the spout is guarded. The lifeline
shall be short enough to prevent workers from falling into the chipper.
(ii) Hogs. (a) Hog mills shall be so designed and arranged that from
no position on the rim of the chute shall the distance to the cutter
knives be less than 40 inches.
(b) Hog feed chutes shall be provided with suitable and approved
baffles, which shall minimize material from being thrown from the mill.
(c) Employees feeding hog mills shall be provided with safety belts
and lines unless guarded.
(22) [Reserved]
(23) Bins, bunkers, hoppers, and fuel houses--(i) Guarding. Open
bins, bunkers, and hoppers whose upper edges extend less than 3 feet
above working level shall be equipped with standard handrails and toe
boards, or have their tops covered by a substantial grill or grating
with openings small enough to prevent a man from falling through.
(ii) Use of wheeled equipment to load bins. Where automotive or
other wheeled equipment is used to move materials into bins, bunkers,
and hoppers, adequate guard rails shall be installed along each side of
the runway, and a substantial bumper stop provided when necessary.
(iii) Exits, lighting, and safety devices. Fuel houses and bins
shall have adequate exits and lighting, and all necessary safety devices
shall be provided and shall be used by persons entering these
structures.
(iv) Walkways. Where needed, fuel houses and bins shall have a
standard
[[Page 732]]
railed platform or walkway near the top.
(24) Ropes, cables, slings, and chains--(i) Safe usage. Ropes,
cables, slings, and chains shall be used in accordance with safe use
practices recommended by the manufacturer or within safe limits
recommended by the equipment manufacturer when used in conjunction with
it.
(ii) Hooks. No open hook shall be used in rigging to lift any load
where there is hazard from relieving the tension on the hook from the
load or hook catching or fouling.
(iii) Work by qualified persons. Installation, inspection,
maintenance, repair, and testing of ropes, cables, slings, and chains
shall be done only by persons qualified to do such work.
(iv) Slings. Proper storage shall be provided for slings while not
in use.
(v) Ropes or cables. (a) Wire rope or cable shall be inspected when
installed and once each week thereafter, when in use. It shall be
removed from hoisting or load-carrying service when kinked or when one
of the following conditions exists:
(1) When three broken wires are found in one lay of 6 by 6 wire
rope.
(2) When six broken wires are found in one lay of 6 by 19 wire rope.
(3) When nine broken wires are found in one lay of 6 by 37 wire
rope.
(4) When eight broken wires are found in one lay of 8 by 19 wire
rope.
(5) When marked corrosion appears.
(6) Wire rope of a type not described herein shall be removed from
service when 4 percent of the total number of wires composing such rope
are found to be broken in one lay.
(b) Wire rope removed from service due to defects shall be plainly
marked or identified as being unfit for further use on cranes, hoists,
and other load-carrying devices.
(c) The ratio between the rope diameter and the drum, block, sheave,
or pulley tread diameter shall be such that the rope will adjust itself
to the bend without excessive wear, deformation, or injury. In no case
shall the safe value of drums, blocks, sheaves, or pulleys be reduced
when replacing such items unless compensating changes are made for rope
used and for safe loading limits.
(vi) Drums, sheaves, and pulleys. Drums, sheaves, and pulleys shall
be smooth and free from surface defects liable to injure rope. Drums,
sheaves, or pulleys having eccentric bores or cracked hubs, spokes, or
flanges shall be removed from service.
(vii) Connections. Connections, fittings, fastenings, and other
parts used in connection with ropes and cables shall be of good quality
and of proper size and strength, and shall be installed in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
(viii) Socketing, splicing, and seizing. (a) Socketing, splicing,
and seizing of cables shall be performed only by qualified persons.
(b) All eye splices shall be made in an approved manner and wire
rope thimbles of proper size shall be fitted in the eye, except that in
slings the use of thimbles shall be optional.
(c) Wire rope clips attached with U-bolts shall have these bolts on
the dead or short end of the rope. The U-bolt nuts shall be retightened
immediately after initial load carrying use and at frequent intervals
thereafter.
(d) When a wedge socket-type fastening is used, the dead or short
end of the cable shall be clipped with a U-bolt or otherwise made secure
against loosening.
(e) Fittings. Hooks, shackles, rings, pad eyes, and other fittings
that show excessive wear or that have been bent, twisted, or otherwise
damaged shall be removed from service.
(f) Running lines. Running lines of hoisting equipment located
within 6 feet 6 inches of the ground or working level shall be boxed off
or otherwise guarded, or the operating area shall be restricted.
(g) Number of wraps on drum. There shall be not less than two full
wraps of hoisting cable on the drum of cranes and hoists at all times of
operation.
(h) Drum flanges. Drums shall have a flange at each end to prevent
the cable from slipping off.
(i) Sheave guards. Bottom sheaves shall be protected by close
fitting guards to prevent cable from jumping the sheave.
(j) Preventing abrasion. The reeving of a rope shall be so arranged
as to minimize chafing or abrading while in use.
[[Page 733]]
(ix) Chains. (a) Chains used in load carrying service shall be
inspected before initial use and weekly thereafter.
(b) Chain shall be normalized or annealed periodically as
recommended by the manufacturer.
(c) If at any time any 3-foot length of chain is found to have
stretched one-third the length of a link it shall be discarded.
(d) Bolts or nails shall not be placed between two links to shorten
or join chains.
(e) Broken chains shall not be spliced by inserting a bolt between
two links with the head of the bolt and nut sustaining the load, or by
passing one link through another and inserting a bolt or nail to hold
it.
(x) Fiber rope. (a) Frozen fiber rope shall not be used in load
carrying service.
(b) Fiber rope that has been subjected to acid or excessive heat
shall not be used for load carrying purposes.
(c) Fiber rope shall be protected from abrasion by padding where it
is fastened or drawn over square corners or sharp or rough surfaces.
(25) [Reserved]
(26) Mechanical stackers and unstackers.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) Lumber lifting devices. Lumber lifting devices on all stackers
shall be designed and arranged so as to minimize the possibility of
lumber falling from such devices.
(iii) Blocking hoisting platform. Means shall be provided to
positively block the hoisting platform when employees must go beneath
the stacker or unstacker hoist.
(iv) Identifying controls. Every manually operated control switch
shall be properly identified and so located as to be readily accessible
to the operator.
(v) Locking main control switches. Main control switches shall be so
designed that they can be locked in the open position.
(vi) Guarding side openings. The hoistway side openings at the top
level of the stacker and unstacker shall be protected by enclosures of
standard railings.
(vii) Guarding hoistway openings. When the hoist platform or top of
the load is below the working platform, the hoistway openings shall be
guarded.
(viii) Guarding lower landing area. The lower landing area of
stackers and unstackers shall be guarded by enclosures that prevent
entrance to the area or pit below the hoist platform. Entrances should
be protected by electrically interlocked gates which, when open, will
disconnect the power and set the hoist brakes. When the interlock is not
installed, other positive means of protecting the entrance shall be
provided.
(ix) Inspection. Every stacker and unstacker shall be inspected at
frequent intervals and all defective parts shall be immediately repaired
or replaced.
(x) Cleaning pits. Safe means of entrance and exit shall be provided
to permit cleaning of pits.
(xi) Preventing entry to hazardous area. Where the return of trucks
from unstacker to stacker is by mechanical power or gravity, adequate
signs, warning devices, or barriers shall be erected to prevent entry
into the hazardous area.
(27) Lumber piling and storage--(i) Pile foundations. In stacking
units of lumber, pile foundations shall be designed and arranged to
support maximum loads without sinking, sagging, or permitting the piles
to topple. In unit package piles, substantial bolsters or unit
separators shall be placed between each package directly over the
stickers.
(ii) Stacking dissimilar unit packages. Long units of lumber shall
not be stacked upon shorter packages except where a stable pile can be
made with the use of package separators.
(iii) Unstable piles. Piles of lumber which have become unstable
shall be immediately made safe, or the area into which they might fall
shall be fenced or barricaded and employees prohibited from entering it.
(iv) Stickers. Unit packages of lumber shall be provided with
stickers as necessary to insure stability under ordinary operating
conditions.
(v) Sticker alignment. Stickers shall extend the full width of the
package, shall be uniformly spaced, and shall be aligned one above the
other. Stickers
[[Page 734]]
may be lapped with a minimum overlapping of 12 inches. Stickers shall
not protrude more than 2 inches beyond the sides of the package.
(vi) Pile height. The height of unit package piles shall be
dependent on the dimensions of the packages and shall be such as to
provide stability under normal operating conditions. Adjacent lumber
piles may be tied together with separators to increase stability.
(28) Lumber loading. Loads shall be built and secured to insure
stability in transit.
(29) Burners--(i) Guying. If the burner stack is not self-
supporting, it shall be guyed or otherwise supported.
(ii) Runway. The conveyor runway to the burner shall be equipped
with a standard handrail. If the runway crosses a roadway or
thoroughfare, standard toe boards shall be provided in addition.
(30) Vehicles--(i) Scope. Vehicles shall include all mobile
equipment normally used in sawmill, planing mill, storage, shipping, and
yard operations.
(ii) Warning signals and spark arrestors. All vehicles shall be
equipped with audible warning signals and where practicable shall have
spark arrestors.
(iii) Lights. All vehicles operated in the dark or in poorly lighted
areas shall be equipped with head and tail lights.
(iv) Overhead guard. All vehicles operated in areas where overhead
hazards exist shall be equipped with an approved overhead guard. See
American National Standard Safety Code for Powered Industrial Trucks,
B56.1--1969, which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6.
(v) Platform guard. Where the operator is exposed to hazard from
backing the vehicle into objects, an approved platform guard shall be
provided and so arranged as to not impede exit of driver from vehicle.
(vi) [Reserved]
(vii) Operation in buildings. Vehicles powered by internal
combustion engines shall not operate in buildings unless the buildings
are adequately ventilated.
(viii) Load limits. No vehicle shall be operated with loads
exceeding its safe load capacity.
(ix) Brakes. All vehicles shall be equipped with brakes capable of
holding and controlling the vehicle and capacity load upon any incline
or grade over which they may be operated.
(x) [Reserved]
(xi) Carriers. (a) Carriers shall be so designed and constructed
that the operator's field of vision shall not be unnecessarily
restricted.
(b) Carriers shall be provided with an access ladder or equivalent.
(xii) Lumber hauling trucks. (a) On trucks where movement of load on
stopping would endanger the operator, a substantial bulkhead shall be
installed behind the operator's seat. This shall extend to the top of
the operator's compartment.
(b) Stakes, stake pockets, racks, tighteners, and binders shall
provide adequate means to secure the load against any movement during
transit.
(c) Where rollers are used, at least two shall be equipped with
locks which shall be locked when supporting loads during transit.
(31) Traffic control and flow--(i) Hazardous crossings. Railroad
tracks and other hazardous crossings shall be plainly posted and
appropriate traffic control devices (American National Standard D8.1--
1967 for Railroad-Highway Grade Crossing Protection, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6) should be
utilized.
(ii) Restricted overhead clearance. All areas of restricted side or
overhead clearance shall be plainly marked.
(iii) Pickup and unloading points. Pickup and unloading points and
paths for lumber packages on conveyors and transfers and other areas
where accurate spotting is required, shall be plainly marked and wheel
stops provided where necessary.
(iv) Aisles, passageways, and roadways. Aisles, passageways, and
roadways shall be sufficiently wide to provide safe side clearance. One-
way aisles may be used for two-way traffic if suitable turnouts are
provided.
(d) Log handling, sorting, and storage--(1) Log unloading methods,
equipment, and facilities--(i) Unloading methods. (a) Stakes and chocks
which trip shall be constructed in such manner that the tripping
mechanism that releases the
[[Page 735]]
stake or chocks is activated at the opposite side of the load being
tripped.
(b) Binders on logs shall not be released prior to securing with
unloading lines or other unloading device.
(c) Binders shall be released only from the side on which the
unloader operates, except when released by remote control devices or
except when person making release is protected by racks or stanchions or
other equivalent means.
(d) Loads on which a binder is fouled by the unloading machine shall
have an extra binder or metal band of equal strength placed around the
load, or the load shall be otherwise secured so the fouled binder can be
safely removed.
(ii) Unloading equipment and facilities. (a) Machines used for
hoisting, unloading, or lowering logs shall be equipped with brakes
capable of controlling or holding the maximum load in midair.
(b) The lifting cylinders of all hydraulically operated log handling
machines shall be equipped with a positive device for preventing the
uncontrolled lowering of the load or forks in case of a failure in the
hydraulic system.
(c) A limit switch shall be installed on powered log handling
machines to prevent the lift arms from traveling too far in the event
the control switch is not released in time.
(d) When forklift-type machines are used to load trailers, a means
of securing the loading attachment to the fork shall be installed and
used.
(e) A-frames and similar log unloading devices shall have adequate
height to provide safe clearance for swinging loads and to provide for
adequate crotch lines and spreader bar devices.
(f) Log handling machines used to stack logs or lift loads above
operator's head shall be equipped with adequate overhead protection.
(g) All mobile log handling machines shall be equipped with
headlights and backup lights.
(h) Unloading devices shall be equipped with a horn or other plainly
audible signaling device.
(i) Movement of unloading equipment shall be coordinated by audible
or hand signals when operator's vision is impaired or operating in the
vicinity of other employees.
(j) Wood pike poles shall be made of straight-grained, select
material. Metal or conductive pike poles shall not be used around
exposed energized electrical conductors. Defective, blunt, or dull pike
poles shall not be used.
(2) Log unloading and storage areas--(i) General. (a) Log dumps,
booms, ponds, or storage areas used at night shall be illuminated in
accordance with the requirements of American National Standard A11.1-
1965 (R-1970) Standard Practice for Industrial Lighting, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(b) Log unloading areas shall be arranged and maintained to provide
a safe working area.
(c) Where skids are used, space adequate to clear a man's body shall
be maintained between the top of the skids and the ground.
(d) Signs prohibiting unauthorized foot or vehicle traffic in log
unloading and storage areas shall be posted.
(ii) Water log dumps. (a) Ungrounded electrically powered hoists
using handheld remote control in grounded locations, such as log dumps
or mill log lifts, shall be actuated by circuits operating at less than
50 volts to ground.
(b) Roadbeds at log dumps shall be of sufficient width and evenness
to insure safe operation of equipment.
(c) An adequate brow log or skid timbers or the equivalent shall be
provided where necessary. Railroad-type dumps, when located where logs
are dumped directly into water or where entire loads are lifted from
vehicle, may be exempted providing such practice does not create a
hazardous exposure of personnel or equipment.
(d) Unloading lines shall be arranged so that it is not necessary
for the employees to attach them from the pond or dump side of the load
except when entire loads are lifted from the log-transporting vehicle.
(e) Unloading lines, crotch lines, or equally effective means shall
be arranged and used in a manner to minimize the possibility of any log
from swinging or rolling back.
(f) When logs are unloaded with peavys or similar manual methods,
means shall be provided and used that will minimize the danger from
rolling or swinging logs.
[[Page 736]]
(g) Guardrails, walkways, and standard handrails shall be installed
(h) Approved life rings (see: 46 CFR 160.099 and 46 CFR 160.050)
with line attached and maintained to retain buoyancy shall be provided.
(iii) Log booms and ponds. (a) Walkways and floats shall be
installed and securely anchored to provide adequate passageway for
employees.
(b) All regular boom sticks and foot logs shall be reasonably
straight, with no protruding knots and bark, and shall be capable of
supporting, above the water line at either end, the weight of an
employee and equipment.
(c) Permanent cable swifters shall be so arranged that it will not
be necessary to roll boom sticks in order to attach or detach them.
(d) Periodic inspection of cable or dogging lines shall be made to
determine when repair or removal from service is necessary.
(e) The banks of the log pond in the vicinity of the log haul shall
be reinforced to prevent caving in.
(f) Artificial log ponds shall be drained, cleaned, and refilled
when unhealthy stagnation or pollution occurs.
(g) Employees whose duties require them to work from boats, floating
logs, boom sticks, or walkways along or on water shall be provided with
and shall wear appropriate buoyant devices while performing such duties.
(h) Stiff booms shall be two float logs wide secured by boom chains
or other connecting devices, and of a width adequate for the working
needs. Walking surfaces shall be free of loose material and maintained
in good repair.
(i) Boom sticks shall be fastened together with adequate crossties
or couplings.
(j) Floating donkeys or other power-driven machinery used on booms
shall be placed on a raft or float with enough buoyancy to keep the deck
well above water.
(k) All sorting gaps shall have a substantial stiff boom on each
side.
(iv) Pond boats and rafts. The applicable provisions of the Standard
for Fire Protection for Motorcraft, NFPA No. 302--1968, which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, shall be complied
with.
(a) Decks of pond boats shall be covered with nonslip material.
(b) Powered pond boats or rafts shall be provided with at least one
approved fire extinguisher, and one lifering with line attached.
(c) Boat fuel shall be transported and stored in approved safety
containers. Refer to Sec. 1910.155(c)(3) for definition of approved.
(d) Inspection, maintenance, and ventilation of the bilge area shall
be provided to prevent accumulation of highly combustible materials.
(e) Adequate ventilation shall be provided for the cabin area on
enclosed cabin-type boats to prevent accumulation of harmful gases or
vapors.
(v) Dry deck storage. (a) Dry deck storage areas shall be kept
orderly and shall be maintained in a condition which is conducive to
safe operation of mobile equipment.
(b) Logs shall be stored in a safe and orderly manner, and roadways
and traffic lanes shall be maintained at a width adequate for safe
travel of log handling equipment.
(c) Logs shall be arranged to minimize the chance of accidentally
rolling from the deck.
(vi) Log hauls and slips. (a) Walkways along log hauls shall have a
standard handrail on the outer edge, and cleats or other means to assure
adequate footing and enable employees to walk clear of the log chute.
(b) Log haul bull chains or cable shall be designed, installed, and
maintained to provide adequate safety for the work need.
(c) Log haul gear and bull chain drive mechanism shall be guarded.
(d) Substantial troughs for the return strand of log haul chains
shall be provided over passageways.
(e) Log haul controls shall be located and identified to operate
from a position where the operator will, at all times, be in the clear
of logs, machinery, lines, and rigging. In operations where control is
by lever exposed to incoming logs, the lever shall be arranged to
operate the log haul only when moved toward the log slip or toward the
log pond.
(f) A positive stop shall be installed on all log hauls to prevent
logs from traveling too far ahead in the mill.
[[Page 737]]
(g) Overhead protection shall be provided for employees working
below logs being moved to the log deck.
(h) Log wells shall be provided with safeguards to minimize the
possibility of logs rolling back into well from log deck.
(3) Log decks--(i) Access. Safe access to the head rig shall be
provided.
(ii) Stops. Log decks shall be provided with adequate stops, chains,
or other safeguards to prevent logs from rolling down the deck onto the
carriage or its runway.
(iii) Barricade. A barricade or other positive stop of sufficient
strength to stop any log shall be erected between the sawyer's stand and
the log deck.
(iv) Loose chains. Loose chains from overhead canting devices or
other equipment shall not be allowed to hang over the log deck in such
manner as to strike employees.
(v) Swing saws. Swing saws on log decks shall be equipped with a
barricade and stops for protection of employees who may be on the
opposite side of the log haul chute.
(vi) Drag saws. Where reciprocating log cutoff saws (drag saws) are
provided, they shall not project into walkway or aisle.
(vii) Circular cutoff saws. Circular log bucking or cutoff saws
shall be so located and guarded as to allow safe entrance to and exit
from the building.
(viii) Entrance doorway. Where the cutoff saw partially blocks the
entrance from the log haul runway, the entrance shall be guarded.
(4) Mechanical barkers--(i) Rotary barkers. Rotary barking devices
shall be so guarded as to protect employees from flying chips, bark, or
other extraneous material.
(ii) Elevating ramp. If an elevating ramp or gate is used, it shall
be provided with a safety chain, hook, or other means of suspension
while employees are underneath.
(iii) Area around barkers. The hazardous area around ring barkers
and their conveyors shall be fenced off or posted as a prohibited area
for unauthorized persons.
(iv) Enclosing hydraulic barkers. Hydraulic barkers shall be
enclosed with strong baffles at the inlet and outlet. The operator shall
be protected by adequate safety glass or equivalent.
(v) Holddown rolls. Holddown rolls shall be installed at the infeed
and outfeed sections of mechanical ring barkers to control the movement
of logs.
(e) Log breakdown and related machinery and facilities--(1) Log
carriages and carriage runways--(i) Bumpers. A substantial stop or
bumper with adequate shock-absorptive qualities shall be installed at
each end of the carriage runway.
(ii) Footing. Rider-type carriages shall be floored to provide
secure footing and a firm working platform for the block setter.
(iii) Sheave housing. Sheaves on rope-driven carriages shall be
guarded at floor line with substantial housings.
(iv) Carriage control. A positive means shall be provided to prevent
unintended movement of the carriage. This may involve a control locking
device, a carriage tie-down, or both.
(v) Barriers and warning signs. A barrier shall be provided to
prevent employees from entering the space necessary for travel of the
carriage, with headblocks fully receded, for the full length and extreme
ends of carriage runways. Warning signs shall be posted at possible
entry points to this area.
(vi) Overhead clearance. For a rider-type carriage adequate overhead
clear space above the carriage deck shall be provided for the full
carriage runway length.
(vii) Sweeping devices. Carriage track sweeping devices shall be
used to keep track rails clear of debris.
(viii) Dogs. Dogging devices shall be adequate to secure logs,
cants, or boards, during sawing operations.
(2) Head saws--(i) Band head saws. (a) Band head saws shall not be
operated at speeds in excess of those recommended by the manufacturer
(b) Band head saws shall be thoroughly inspected for cracks, splits,
broken teeth, and other defects. A bandsaw with a crack greater than
one-tenth the width of the saw shall not be placed in service until
width of saw is reduced to eliminate crack, until cracked section is
removed, or crack development is stopped.
[[Page 738]]
(c) Provisions shall be made for alerting and warning employees
before starting band head saws, and measures shall be taken to insure
that all persons are in the clear.
(ii) Bandsaw wheels. (a) No bandsaw wheel shall be run at a
peripheral speed in excess of that recommended by the manufacturer. The
manufacturer's recommended maximum speed shall be stamped in plainly
legible figures on some portion of the wheel.
(b) Band head saw wheels shall be subjected to monthly inspections.
Hubs, spokes, rims, bolts, and rivets shall be thoroughly examined in
the course of such inspections. A loose or damaged hub, a rim crack, or
loose spokes shall make the wheel unfit for service.
(c) Band wheels shall be completely encased or guarded, except for a
portion of the upper wheel immediately around the point where the blade
leaves the wheel, to permit operator to observe movement of equipment.
Necessary ventilating and observation ports may be permitted.
Substantial doors or gates are allowed for repair, lubrication, and saw
changes; such doors or gates shall be closed securely during operation.
Band head rigs shall be equipped with a saw catcher or guard of
substantial construction.
(iii) Single circular head saws. (a) Circular head saws shall not be
operated at speeds in excess of those specified by the manufacturer.
Maximum speed shall be etched on the saw.
(b) Circular head saws shall be equipped with safety guides which
can be readily adjusted without use of hand tools.
(c) The upper saw of a double circular mill shall be provided with a
substantial hood or guard. A screen or other suitable device shall be
placed so as to protect the sawyer from flying particles.
(d) All circular sawmills where live rolls are not used behind the
head saw shall be equipped with a spreader wheel or splitter.
(iv) Twin circular head saws. Twin circular head saw rigs such as
scrag saws shall meet the specifications for single circular head saws
in paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section where applicable.
(v) Whole-log sash gang saws (Swedish gangs). (a) Cranks, pitman
rods, and other moving parts shall be adequately guarded.
(b) Feed rolls shall be enclosed by a cover over the top, front, and
open ends except where guarded by location. Drive mechanism to feed
rolls shall be enclosed.
(c) Carriage cradles of whole-log sash gang saws (Swedish gangs),
shall be of adequate height to prevent logs from kicking out while being
loaded.
(3) Resaws--(i) Band resaws. Band resaws shall meet the
specifications for band head saws as required by paragraph (e)(2)(i) of
this section.
(ii) Circular gang resaws. (a) Banks of circular gang resaws shall
be guarded by a hood.
(b) Circular gang resaws shall be provided with safety fingers or
other antikickback devices.
(c) Circular gang resaws shall not be operated at speeds exceeding
those recommended by the manufacturer.
(d) [Reserved]
(e) Feed rolls shall be guarded.
(f) Each circular gang resaw, except self-feed saws with a live roll
or wheel at back of saw, shall be provided with spreaders.
(iii) Sash gang resaws. Sash gang resaws shall meet the safety
specifications of whole-log sash gang saws in accordance with the
requirements of paragraph (e)(2)(v) of this section.
(4) Trimmer saws--(i) Maximum speed. Trimmer saws shall not be run
at peripheral speeds in excess of those recommended by the manufacturer.
(ii) Guards. (a) Trimmer saws shall be guarded in front by adequate
baffles to protect against flying debris and they shall be securely
bolted to a substantial frame. These guards for a series of saws shall
be set as close to the top of the trimmer table as is practical.
(b) The end saws on trimmer shall be guarded.
(c) The rear of trimmer saws shall have a guard the full width of
the saws and as much wider as practical.
(iii) Safety stops. Automatic trimmer saws shall be provided with
safety stops or hangers to prevent saws from dropping on table.
(5) Edgers--(i) Location. (a) Where vertical arbor edger saws are
located
[[Page 739]]
ahead of the main saw, they shall be so guarded that an employee cannot
contact any part of the edger saw from his normal position.
(b) Edgers shall not be located in the main roll case behind the
head saws.
(ii) Guards. (a) The top and the openings in end and side frames of
edgers shall be adequately guarded and gears and chains shall be fully
housed. Guards may be hinged or otherwise arranged to permit oiling and
the removal of saws.
(b) All edgers shall be equipped with pressure feed rolls.
(c) Pressure feed rolls on edgers shall be guarded against
accidental contact.
(iii) Antikickback devices. (a) Edgers shall be provided with safety
fingers or other approved methods of preventing kickbacks or guarding
against them. A barricade in line with the edger, if properly fenced
off, may be used if safety fingers are not feasible to install.
(b) A controlling device shall be installed and located so that the
operator can stop the feed mechanism without releasing the tension of
the pressure rolls.
(iv) Operating speed of live rolls. Live rolls and tailing devices
in back of edger shall operate at a speed not less than the speed of the
edger feed rolls.
(6) Planers--(i) Guards. (a) All cutting heads shall be guarded.
(b) Side head hoods shall be of sufficient height to safeguard the
head setscrew.
(c) Pressure feed rolls and ``pineapples'' shall be guarded.
(d) Levers or controls shall be so arranged or guarded as to reduce
the possibility of accidental operation.
(f) Dry kilns and facilities--(1) Kiln foundations. Dry kilns shall
be constructed upon solid foundations to prevent tracks from sagging
(2) Passageways. A passageway shall be provided to give adequate
clearance on at least one side or in the center of end-piled kilns and
on two sides of cross-piled kilns.
(3) Doors--(i) Main kiln doors. (a) Main kiln doors shall be
provided with a method of holding them open while kiln is being loaded.
(b) Counterweights on vertical lift doors shall be boxed or
otherwise guarded.
(c) Adequate means shall be provided to firmly secure main doors,
when they are disengaged from carriers and hangers, to prevent toppling.
(ii) Escape doors. (a) If operating procedures require access to
kilns, kilns shall be provided with escape doors that operate easily
from the inside, swing in the direction of exit, and are located in or
near the main door at the end of the passageway.
(b) Escape doors shall be of adequate height and width to
accommodate an average size man.
(4) Pits. Pits shall be well ventilated, drained, and lighted, and
shall be large enough to safely accommodate the kiln operator together
with operating devices such as valves, dampers, damper rods, and traps.
(5) Steam mains. All high-pressure steam mains located in or
adjacent to an operating pit shall be covered with heat-insulating
material.
(6) Ladders. A fixed ladder, in accordance with the requirements of
Sec. 1910.27 or other adequate means shall be provided to permit access
to the roof. Where controls and machinery are mounted on the roof, a
permanent stairway with standard handrail shall be installed in
accordance with the requirements of Sec. 1910.24.
(7) Chocks. A means shall be provided for chocking or blocking cars.
(8) Kiln tender room. A warm room shall be provided for kiln
employees to stay in during cold weather after leaving a hot kiln.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43
FR 49751, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51760, Nov. 7, 1978; 53 FR 12123, Apr.
12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR
33467, June 18, 1998]
Sec. 1910.266 Logging operations.
(a) Table of contents.
This paragraph contains the list of paragraphs and appendices
contained in this section.
a. Table of contents
b. Scope and application
c. Definitions
d. General requirements
1. Personal protective equipment
2. First-aid kits
3. Seat belts
4. Fire extinguishers
5. Environmental conditions
6. Work areas
[[Page 740]]
7. Signaling and signal equipment
8. Overhead electric lines
9. Flammable and combustible liquids
10. Explosives and blasting agents
e. Hand and portable powered tools
1. General requirements
2. Chain saws
f. Machines
1. General requirements
2. Machine operation
3. Protective structures
4. Overhead guards
5. Machine access
6. Exhaust systems
7. Brakes
8. Guarding
g. Vehicles
h. Tree harvesting
1. General requirements
2. Manual felling
3. Bucking and limbing
4. Chipping
5. Yarding
6. Loading and unloading
7. Transport
8. Storage
i. Training
j. Effective date
k. Appendices
Appendix A--Minimum First-aid Supplies
Appendix B--Minimum First-aid Training
Appendix C--Corresponding ISO Agreements
(b) Scope and application.
(1) This standard establishes safety practices, means, methods and
operations for all types of logging, regardless of the end use of the
wood. These types of logging include, but are not limited to, pulpwood
and timber harvesting and the logging of sawlogs, veneer bolts, poles,
pilings and other forest products. This standard does not cover the
construction or use of cable yarding systems.
(2) This standard applies to all logging operations as defined by
this section.
(3) Hazards and working conditions not specifically addressed by
this section are covered by other applicable sections of part 1910.
(c) Definitions applicable to this section.
Arch. An open-framed trailer or built-up framework used to suspend
the leading ends of trees or logs when they are skidded.
Backcut (felling cut). The final cut in a felling operation.
Ballistic nylon. A nylon fabric of high tensile properties designed
to provide protection from lacerations.
Buck. To cut a felled tree into logs.
Butt. The bottom of the felled part of a tree.
Cable yarding. The movement of felled trees or logs from the area
where they are felled to the landing on a system composed of a cable
suspended from spars and/or towers. The trees or logs may be either
dragged across the ground on the cable or carried while suspended from
the cable.
Chock. A block, often wedge shaped, which is used to prevent
movement; e.g., a log from rolling, a wheel from turning.
Choker. A sling used to encircle the end of a log for yarding. One
end is passed around the load, then through a loop eye, end fitting or
other device at the other end of the sling. The end that passed through
the end fitting or other device is then hooked to the lifting or pulling
machine.
Danger tree. A standing tree that presents a hazard to employees due
to conditions such as, but not limited to, deterioration or physical
damage to the root system, trunk, stem or limbs, and the direction and
lean of the tree.
Debark. To remove bark from trees or logs.
Deck. A stack of trees or logs.
Designated person. An employee who has the requisite knowledge,
training and experience to perform specific duties.
Domino felling. The partial cutting of multiple trees which are left
standing and then pushed over with a pusher tree.
Fell (fall). To cut down trees.
Feller (faller). An employee who fells trees.
Grounded. The placement of a component of a machine on the ground or
on a device where it is firmly supported.
Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected
by means of suitable enclosures, covers, casings, shields, troughs,
railings, screens, mats, or platforms, or by location, to prevent
injury.
Health care provider. A health care practitioner operating with the
scope of his/her license, certificate, registration or legally
authorized practice.
Landing. Any place where logs are laid after being yarded, and
before transport from the work site.
[[Page 741]]
Limbing. To cut branches off felled trees.
Lodged tree (hung tree). A tree leaning against another tree or
object which prevents it from falling to the ground.
Log. A segment sawed or split from a felled tree, such as, but not
limited to, a section, bolt, or tree length.
Logging operations. Operations associated with felling and moving
trees and logs from the stump to the point of delivery, such as, but not
limited to, marking danger trees and trees/logs to be cut to length,
felling, limbing, bucking, debarking, chipping, yarding, loading,
unloading, storing, and transporting machines, equipment and personnel
to, from and between logging sites.
Machine. A piece of stationary or mobile equipment having a self-
contained powerplant, that is operated off-road and used for the
movement of material. Machines include, but are not limited to,
tractors, skidders, front-end loaders, scrapers, graders, bulldozers,
swing yarders, log stackers, log loaders, and mechanical felling
devices, such as tree shears and feller-bunchers. Machines do not
include airplanes or aircraft (e.g., helicopters).
Rated capacity. The maximum load a system, vehicle, machine or piece
of equipment was designed by the manufacturer to handle.
Root wad. The ball of a tree root and dirt that is pulled from the
ground when a tree is uprooted.
Serviceable condition. A state or ability of a tool, machine,
vehicle or other device to operate as it was intended by the
manufacturer to operate.
Skidding. The yarding of trees or logs by pulling or towing them
across the ground.
Slope (grade). The increase or decrease in altitude over a
horizontal distance expressed as a percentage. For example, a change of
altitude of 20 feet (6 m) over a horizontal distance of 100 feet (30 m)
is expressed as a 20 percent slope.
Snag. Any standing dead tree or portion thereof.
Spring pole. A tree, segment of a tree, limb, or sapling which is
under stress or tension due to the pressure or weight of another object.
Tie down. Chain, cable, steel strips or fiber webbing and binders
attached to a truck, trailer or other conveyance as a means to secure
loads and to prevent them from shifting or moving when they are being
transported.
Undercut. A notch cut in a tree to guide the direction of the tree
fall and to prevent splitting or kickback.
Vehicle. A car, bus, truck, trailer or semi-trailer owned, leased or
rented by the employer that is used for transportation of employees or
movement of material.
Winching. The winding of cable or rope onto a spool or drum.
Yarding. The movement of logs from the place they are felled to a
landing.
(d) General requirements--(1) Personal protective equipment. (i) The
employer shall assure that personal protective equipment, including any
personal protective equipment provided by an employee, is maintained in
a serviceable condition.
(ii) The employer shall assure that personal protective equipment,
including any personal protective equipment provided by an employee, is
inspected before initial use during each workshift. Defects or damage
shall be repaired or the unserviceable personal protective equipment
shall be replaced before work is commenced.
(iii) The employer shall provide, at no cost to the employee, and
assure that each employee handling wire rope wears, hand protection
which provides adequate protection from puncture wounds, cuts and
lacerations.
(iv) The employer shall provide, at no cost to the employee, and
assure that each employee who operates a chain saw wears leg protection
constructed with cut-resistant material, such as ballistic nylon. The
leg protection shall cover the full length of the thigh to the top of
the boot on each leg to protect against contact with a moving chain saw.
Exception: This requirement does not apply when an employee is working
as a climber if the employer demonstrates that a greater hazard is posed
by wearing leg protection in the particular situation, or when an
employee is working from a vehicular mounted elevating and rotating work
platform meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.68.
[[Page 742]]
(v) The employer shall assure that each employee wears foot
protection, such as heavy-duty logging boots that are waterproof or
water repellant, cover and provide support to the ankle. The employer
shall assure that each employee who operates a chain saw wears foot
protection that is constructed with cut-resistant material which will
protect the employee against contact with a running chain saw. Sharp,
calk-soled boots or other slip-resistant type boots may be worn where
the employer demonstrates that they are necessary for the employee's
job, the terrain, the timber type, and the weather conditions, provided
that foot protection otherwise required by this paragraph is met.
(vi) The employer shall provide, at no cost to the employee, and
assure that each employee who works in an area where there is potential
for head injury from falling or flying objects wears head protection
meeting the requirements of subpart I of part 1910.
(vii) The employer shall provide, at no cost to the employee, and
assure that each employee wears the following:
(A) Eye protection meeting the requirements of subpart I of part
1910 where there is potential for eye injury due to falling or flying
objects; and
(B) Face protection meeting the requirements of subpart I of part
1910 where there is potential for facial injury such as, but not limited
to, operating a chipper. Logger-type mesh screens may be worn by
employees performing chain-saw operations and yarding.
Note to paragraph (d)(1)(vii): The employee does not have to wear a
separate eye protection device where face protection covering both the
eyes and face is worn.
(2) First-aid kits. (i) The employer shall provide first-aid kits at
each work site where trees are being cut (e.g., felling, bucking,
limbing), at each active landing, and on each employee transport
vehicle. The number of first-aid kits and the content of each kit shall
reflect the degree of isolation, the number of employees, and the
hazards reasonably anticipated at the work site.
(ii) At a minimum, each first-aid kit shall contain the items listed
in appendix A at all times.
(iii) The employer also may have the number and content of first-aid
kits reviewed and approved annually by a health care provider.
(iv) The employer shall maintain the contents of each first-aid kit
in a serviceable condition.
(3) Seat belts. For each vehicle or machine (equipped with ROPS/FOPS
or overhead guards), including any vehicle or machine provided by an
employee, the employer shall assure:
(i) That a seat belt is provided for each vehicle or machine
operator;
(ii) That each employee uses the available seat belt while the
vehicle or machine is being operated;
(iii) That each employee securely and tightly fastens the seat belt
to restrain the employee within the vehicle or machine cab;
(iv) That each machine seat belt meets the requirements of the
Society of Automotive Engineers Standard SAE J386, June 1985, ``Operator
Restraint Systems for Off-Road Work Machines'', which is incorporated by
reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(v) That seat belts are not removed from any vehicle or machine. The
employer shall replace each seat belt which has been removed from any
vehicle or machine that was equipped with seat belts at the time of
manufacture; and
(vi) That each seat belt is maintained in a serviceable condition.
(4) Fire extinguishers. The employer shall provide and maintain
portable fire extinguishers on each machine and vehicle in accordance
with the requirements of subpart L of part 1910.
(5) Environmental conditions. All work shall terminate and each
employee shall move to a place of safety when environmental conditions,
such as but not limited to, electrical storms, strong winds which may
affect the fall of a tree, heavy rain or snow, extreme cold, dense fog,
fires, mudslides, and darkness, create a hazard for the employee in the
performance of the job.
(6) Work areas. (i) Employees shall be spaced and the duties of each
employee shall be organized so the actions of one employee will not
create a hazard for any other employee.
(ii) Work areas shall be assigned so that trees cannot fall into an
adjacent
[[Page 743]]
occupied work area. The distance between adjacent occupied work areas
shall be at least two tree lengths of the trees being felled. The
distance between adjacent occupied work areas shall reflect the degree
of slope, the density of the growth, the height of the trees, the soil
structure and other hazards reasonably anticipated at that work site. A
distance of greater than two tree lengths shall be maintained between
adjacent occupied work areas on any slope where rolling or sliding of
trees or logs is reasonably foreseeable.
(iii) Each employee performing a logging operation at a logging work
site shall work in a position or location that is within visual or
audible contact with another employee.
(iv) The employer shall account for each employee at the end of each
workshift.
(7) Signaling and signal equipment. (i) Hand signals or audible
contact, such as but not limited to, whistles, horns, or radios, shall
be utilized whenever noise, distance, restricted visibility, or other
factors prevent clear understanding of normal voice communications
between employees.
(ii) Engine noise, such as from a chain saw, is not an acceptable
means of signaling. Other locally and regionally recognized signals may
be used.
(iii) Only a designated person shall give signals, except in an
emergency.
(8) Overhead electric lines. (i) Logging operations near overhead
electric lines shall be done in accordance with the requirements of 29
CFR 1910.333(c)(3).
(ii) The employer shall notify the power company immediately if a
felled tree makes contact with any power line. Each employee shall
remain clear of the area until the power company advises that there are
no electrical hazards.
(9) Flammable and combustible liquids. (i) Flammable and combustible
liquids shall be stored, handled, transported, and used in accordance
with the requirements of subpart H of part 1910.
(ii) Flammable and combustible liquids shall not be transported in
the driver compartment or in any passenger-occupied area of a machine or
vehicle.
(iii) Each machine, vehicle, and portable powered tool shall be shut
off during fueling. Diesel-powered machines and vehicles may be fueled
while they are at idle, provided that continued operation is intended
and that the employer follows safe fueling and operating procedures.
(iv) Flammable and combustible liquids, including chain-saw and
diesel fuel, may be used to start a fire, provided the employer assures
that in the particular situation its use does not create a hazard for an
employee.
(10) Explosives and blasting agents. (i) Explosives and blasting
agents shall be stored, handled, transported, and used in accordance
with the requirements of subpart H of part 1910.
(ii) Only a designated person shall handle or use explosives and
blasting agents.
(iii) Explosives and blasting agents shall not be transported in the
driver compartment or in any passenger-occupied area of a machine or
vehicle.
(e) Hand and portable powered tools--(1) General requirements. (i)
The employer shall assure that each hand and portable powered tool,
including any tool provided by an employee, is maintained in serviceable
condition.
(ii) The employer shall assure that each tool, including any tool
provided by an employee, is inspected before initial use during each
workshift. At a minimum, the inspection shall include the following:
(A) Handles and guards, to assure that they are sound, tight-
fitting, properly shaped, free of splinters and sharp edges, and in
place;
(B) Controls, to assure proper function;
(C) Chain-saw chains, to assure proper adjustment;
(D) Chain-saw mufflers, to assure that they are operational and in
place;
(E) Chain brakes and nose shielding devices, to assure that they are
in place and function properly;
(F) Heads of shock, impact-driven and driving tools, to assure that
there is no mushrooming;
(G) Cutting edges, to assure that they are sharp and properly
shaped; and
(H) All other safety devices, to assure that they are in place and
function properly.
[[Page 744]]
(iii) The employer shall assure that each tool is used only for
purposes for which it has been designed.
(iv) When the head of any shock, impact-driven or driving tool
begins to chip, it shall be repaired or removed from service.
(v) The cutting edge of each tool shall be sharpened in accordance
with manufacturer's specifications whenever it becomes dull during the
workshift.
(vi) Each tool shall be stored in the provided location when not
being used at a work site.
(vii) Racks, boxes, holsters or other means shall be provided,
arranged and used for the transportation of tools so that a hazard is
not created for any vehicle operator or passenger.
(2) Chain saws. (i) Each chain saw placed into initial service after
the effective date of this section shall be equipped with a chain brake
and shall otherwise meet the requirements of the ANSI B175.1-1991
``Safety Requirements for Gasoline-Powered Chain Saws'', which is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6. Each chain saw
placed into service before the effective date of this section shall be
equipped with a protective device that minimizes chain-saw kickback. No
chain-saw kickback device shall be removed or otherwise disabled.
(ii) Each gasoline-powered chain saw shall be equipped with a
continuous pressure throttle control system which will stop the chain
when pressure on the throttle is released.
(iii) The chain saw shall be operated and adjusted in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
(iv) The chain saw shall be fueled at least 10 feet (3 m) from any
open flame or other source of ignition.
(v) The chain saw shall be started at least 10 feet (3 m) from the
fueling area.
(vi) The chain saw shall be started on the ground or where otherwise
firmly supported. Drop starting a chain saw is prohibited.
(vii) The chain saw shall be started with the chain brake engaged.
(viii) The chain saw shall be held with the thumbs and fingers of
both hands encircling the handles during operation unless the employer
demonstrates that a greater hazard is posed by keeping both hands on the
chain saw in that particular situation.
(ix) The chain-saw operator shall be certain of footing before
starting to cut. The chain saw shall not be used in a position or at a
distance that could cause the operator to become off-balance, to have
insecure footing, or to relinquish a firm grip on the saw.
(x) Prior to felling any tree, the chain-saw operator shall clear
away brush or other potential obstacles which might interfere with
cutting the tree or using the retreat path.
(xi) The chain saw shall not be used to cut directly overhead.
(xii) The chain saw shall be carried in a manner that will prevent
operator contact with the cutting chain and muffler.
(xiii) The chain saw shall be shut off or the throttle released
before the feller starts his retreat.
(xiv) The chain saw shall be shut down or the chain brake shall be
engaged whenever a saw is carried further than 50 feet (15.2 m). The
chain saw shall be shut down or the chain brake shall be engaged when a
saw is carried less than 50 feet if conditions such as, but not limited
to, the terrain, underbrush and slippery surfaces, may create a hazard
for an employee.
(f) Machines--(1) General requirements. (i) The employer shall
assure that each machine, including any machine provided by an employee,
is maintained in serviceable condition.
(ii) The employer shall assure that each machine, including any
machine provided by an employee, is inspected before initial use during
each workshift. Defects or damage shall be repaired or the unserviceable
machine shall be replaced before work is commenced.
(iii) The employer shall assure that operating and maintenance
instructions are available on the machine or in the area where the
machine is being operated. Each machine operator and maintenance
employee shall comply with the operating and maintenance instructions.
(2) Machine operation. (i) The machine shall be started and operated
only by a designated person.
[[Page 745]]
(ii) Stationary logging machines and their components shall be
anchored or otherwise stabilized to prevent movement during operation.
(iii) The rated capacity of any machine shall not be exceeded.
(iv) To maintain stability, the machine must be operated within the
limitations imposed by the manufacturer as described in the operating
and maintenance instructions for that machine.
(v) Before starting or moving any machine, the operator shall
determine that no employee is in the path of the machine.
(vi) The machine shall be operated only from the operator's station
or as otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.
(vii) The machine shall be operated at such a distance from
employees and other machines such that operation will not create a
hazard for an employee.
(viii) No employee other than the operator shall ride on any mobile
machine unless seating, seat belts and other protection equivalent to
that provided for the operator are provided.
(ix) No employee shall ride on any load.
(x) Before the operator leaves the operator's station of a machine,
it shall be secured as follows:
(A) The parking brake or brake locks shall be applied;
(B) The transmission shall be placed in the manufacturer's specified
park position; and
(C) Each moving element such as, but not limited to blades, buckets,
saws and shears, shall be lowered to the ground or otherwise secured.
(xi) If a hydraulic or pneumatic storage device can move the moving
elements such as, but not limited to, blades, buckets, saws and shears,
after the machine is shut down, the pressure or stored energy from the
element shall be discharged as specified by the manufacturer.
(xii) The rated capacity of any vehicle transporting a machine shall
not be exceeded.
(xiii) The machine shall be loaded, secured and unloaded so that it
will not create a hazard for any employee.
(3) Protective structures. (i) Each tractor, skidder, swing yarder,
log stacker, log loader and mechanical felling device, such as tree
shears or feller-buncher, placed into initial service after February 9,
1995, shall be equipped with falling object protective structure (FOPS)
and/or rollover protective structure (ROPS). The employer shall replace
FOPS or ROPS which have been removed from any machine. Exception: This
requirement does not apply to machines which are capable of 360 degree
rotation.
(ii)(A) ROPS shall be tested, installed, and maintained in
serviceable condition.
(B) Each machine manufactured after August 1, 1996, shall have ROPS
tested, installed, and maintained in accordance with the Society of
Automotive Engineers SAE J1040, April 1988, ``Performance Criteria for
Rollover Protective Structures (ROPS) for Construction, Earthmoving,
Forestry, and Mining Machines'', which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(C) This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of
the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part
51. Copies may be obtained from the Society of Automotive Engineers, 400
Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096. Copies may be inspected at the
Docket Office, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S.
Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue NW., room N2625,
Washington, DC 20210, or at the Office of the Federal Register, 800
North Capitol Street NW., suite 700, Washington, DC.
(iii) FOPS shall be installed, tested and maintained in accordance
with the Society of Automotive Engineers SAE J231, January 1981,
``Minimum Performance Criteria for Falling Object Protective Structures
(FOPS)'', which is incorporated by reference as specified in
Sec. 1910.6.
(iv) ROPS and FOPS shall meet the requirements of the Society of
Automotive Engineers SAE J397, April 1988, ``Deflection Limiting Volume-
ROPS/FOPS Laboratory Evaluation'', which is incorporated by reference as
specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(v) Each protective structure shall be of a size that does not
impede the operator's normal movements.
[[Page 746]]
(vi) The overhead covering of each cab shall be of solid material
and shall extend over the entire canopy.
(vii) Each machine manufactured after August 1, 1996, shall have a
cab that is fully enclosed with mesh material with openings no greater
than 2 inches (5.08 cm) at its least dimension. The cab may be enclosed
with other material(s) where the employer demonstrates such material(s)
provides equivalent protection and visibility. Exception: Equivalent
visibility is not required for the lower portion of the cab where there
are control panels or similar obstructions in the cab, or where
visibility is not necessary for safe operation of the machine.
(viii) Each machine manufactured on or before August 1, 1996 shall
have a cab which meets the requirements specified in paragraph
(f)(3)(vii) or a protective canopy for the operator which meets the
following requirements:
(A) The protective canopy shall be constructed to protect the
operator from injury due to falling trees, limbs, saplings or branches
which might enter the compartment side areas and from snapping winch
lines or other objects;
(B) The lower portion of the cab shall be fully enclosed with solid
material, except at entrances, to prevent the operator from being
injured from obstacles entering the cab;
(C) The upper rear portion of the cab shall be fully enclosed with
open mesh material with openings of such size as to reject the entrance
of an object larger than 2 inches in diameter. It shall provide maximum
rearward visibility; and
(D) Open mesh shall be extended forward as far as possible from the
rear corners of the cab sides so as to give the maximum protection
against obstacles, branches, etc., entering the cab area.
(ix) The enclosure of the upper portion of each cab shall allow
maximum visibility.
(x) When transparent material is used to enclose the upper portion
of the cab, it shall be made of safety glass or other material that the
employer demonstrates provides equivalent protection and visibility.
(xi) Transparent material shall be kept clean to assure operator
visibility.
(xii) Transparent material that may create a hazard for the
operator, such as but not limited to, cracked, broken or scratched
safety glass, shall be replaced.
(xiii) Deflectors shall be installed in front of each cab to deflect
whipping saplings and branches. Deflectors shall be located so as not to
impede visibility and access to the cab.
(xiv) The height of each cab entrance shall be at least 52 inches
(1.3 meters) from the floor of the cab.
(xv) Each machine operated near cable yarding operations shall be
equipped with sheds or roofs of sufficient strength to provide
protection from breaking lines.
(4) Overhead guards. Each forklift shall be equipped with an
overhead guard meeting the requirements of the American Society of
Mechanical Engineers, ASME B56.6-1992 (with addenda), ``Safety Standard
for Rough Terrain Forklift Trucks'', which is incorporated by reference
as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(5) Machine access. (i) Machine access systems, meeting the
specifications of the Society of Automotive Engineers, SAE J185, June
1988, ``Recommended Practice for Access Systems for Off-Road Machines'',
which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6, shall be
provided for each machine where the operator or any other employee must
climb onto the machine to enter the cab or to perform maintenance.
(ii) Each machine cab shall have a second means of egress.
(iii) Walking and working surfaces of each machine and machine work
station shall have a slip resistant surface to assure safe footing.
(iv) The walking and working surface of each machine shall be kept
free of waste, debris and any other material which might result in fire,
slipping, or falling.
(6) Exhaust systems. (i) The exhaust pipes on each machine shall be
located so exhaust gases are directed away from the operator.
(ii) The exhaust pipes on each machine shall be mounted or guarded
to
[[Page 747]]
protect each employee from accidental contact.
(iii) The exhaust pipes shall be equipped with spark arresters.
Engines equipped with turbochargers do not require spark arresters.
(iv) Each machine muffler provided by the manufacturer, or their
equivalent, shall be in place at all times the machine is in operation.
(7) Brakes. (i) Service brakes shall be sufficient to stop and hold
each machine and its rated load capacity on the slopes over which it is
being operated.
(ii) Each machine placed into initial service on or after September
8, 1995 shall also be equipped with: back-up or secondary brakes that
are capable of stopping the machine regardless of the direction of
travel or whether the engine is running; and parking brakes that are
capable of continuously holding a stopped machine stationary.
(8) Guarding. (i) Each machine shall be equipped with guarding to
protect employees from exposed moving elements, such as but not limited
to, shafts, pulleys, belts on conveyors, and gears, in accordance with
the requirements of subpart O of part 1910.
(ii) Each machine used for debarking, limbing and chipping shall be
equipped with guarding to protect employees from flying wood chunks,
logs, chips, bark, limbs and other material in accordance with the
requirements of subpart O of part 1910.
(iii) The guarding on each machine shall be in place at all times
the machine is in operation.
(g) Vehicles. (1) The employer shall assure that each vehicle used
to perform any logging operation is maintained in serviceable condition.
(2) The employer shall assure that each vehicle used to perform any
logging operation is inspected before initial use during each workshift.
Defects or damage shall be repaired or the unserviceable vehicle shall
be replaced before work is commenced.
(3) The employer shall assure that operating and maintenance
instructions are available in each vehicle. Each vehicle operator and
maintenance employee shall comply with the operating and maintenance
instructions.
(4) The employer shall assure that each vehicle operator has a valid
operator's license for the class of vehicle being operated.
(5) Mounting steps and handholds shall be provided for each vehicle
wherever it is necessary to prevent an employee from being injured when
entering or leaving the vehicle.
(6) The seats of each vehicle shall be securely fastened.
(7) The requirements of paragraphs (f)(2)(iii), (f)(2)(v),
(f)(2)(vii), (f)(2)(x), (f)(2)(xiii), and (f)(7) of this section shall
also apply to each vehicle used to transport any employee off public
roads or to perform any logging operation, including any vehicle
provided by an employee.
(h) Tree harvesting--(1) General requirements. (i) Trees shall not
be felled in a manner that may create a hazard for an employee, such as
but not limited to, striking a rope, cable, power line, or machine.
(ii) The immediate supervisor shall be consulted when unfamiliar or
unusually hazardous conditions necessitate the supervisor's approval
before cutting is commenced.
(iii) While manual felling is in progress, no yarding machine shall
be operated within two tree lengths of trees being manually felled.
Exception: This provision does not apply to yarding machines performing
tree pulling operations.
(iv) No employee shall approach a feller closer than two tree
lengths of trees being felled until the feller has acknowledged that it
is safe to do so, unless the employer demonstrates that a team of
employees is necessary to manually fell a particular tree.
(v) No employee shall approach a mechanical felling operation closer
than two tree lengths of the trees being felled until the machine
operator has acknowledged that it is safe to do so.
(vi) Each danger tree shall be felled, removed or avoided. Each
danger tree, including lodged trees and snags, shall be felled or
removed using mechanical or other techniques that minimize employee
exposure before work is commenced in the area of the danger tree. If the
danger tree is not felled or removed, it shall be marked and no work
shall be conducted within two tree
[[Page 748]]
lengths of the danger tree unless the employer demonstrates that a
shorter distance will not create a hazard for an employee.
(vii) Each danger tree shall be carefully checked for signs of loose
bark, broken branches and limbs or other damage before they are felled
or removed. Accessible loose bark and other damage that may create a
hazard for an employee shall be removed or held in place before felling
or removing the tree.
(viii) Felling on any slope where rolling or sliding of trees or
logs is reasonably foreseeable shall be done uphill from, or on the same
level as, previously felled trees.
(ix) Domino felling of trees is prohibited.
Note to paragraph (h)(1)(ix): The definition of domino felling does
not include the felling of a single danger tree by felling another
single tree into it.
(2) Manual felling. (i) Before felling is started, the feller shall
plan and clear a retreat path. The retreat path shall extend diagonally
away from the expected felling line unless the employer demonstrates
that such a retreat path poses a greater hazard than an alternate path.
Once the backcut has been made the feller shall immediately move a safe
distance away from the tree on the retreat path.
(ii) Before each tree is felled, conditions such as, but not limited
to, snow and ice accumulation, the wind, the lean of tree, dead limbs,
and the location of other trees, shall be evaluated by the feller and
precautions taken so a hazard is not created for an employee.
(iii) Each tree shall be checked for accumulations of snow and ice.
Accumulations of snow and ice that may create a hazard for an employee
shall be removed before felling is commenced in the area or the area
shall be avoided.
(iv) When a spring pole or other tree under stress is cut, no
employee other than the feller shall be closer than two trees lengths
when the stress is released.
(v) An undercut shall be made in each tree being felled unless the
employer demonstrates that felling the particular tree without an
undercut will not create a hazard for an employee. The undercut shall be
of a size so the tree will not split and will fall in the intended
direction.
(vi) A backcut shall be made in each tree being felled. The backcut
shall leave sufficient hinge wood to hold the tree to the stump during
most of its fall so that the hinge is able to guide the tree's fall in
the intended direction.
(vii) The backcut shall be above the level of the horizontal facecut
in order to provide an adequate platform to prevent kickback. Exception:
The backcut may be at or below the horizontal facecut in tree pulling
operations.
Note to paragraph (h)(2)(vii): This requirement does not apply to
open face felling where two angled facecuts rather than a horizontal
facecut are used.
(3) Limbing and bucking. (i) Limbing and bucking on any slope where
rolling or sliding of trees or logs is reasonably foreseeable shall be
done on the uphill side of each tree or log.
(ii) Before bucking or limbing wind-thrown trees, precautions shall
be taken to prevent the root wad, butt or logs from striking an
employee. These precautions include, but are not limited to, chocking or
moving the tree to a stable position.
(4) Chipping (in-woods locations). (i) Chipper access covers or
doors shall not be opened until the drum or disc is at a complete stop.
(ii) Infeed and discharge ports shall be guarded to prevent contact
with the disc, knives, or blower blades.
(iii) The chipper shall be shut down and locked out in accordance
with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.147 when an employee performs any
servicing or maintenance.
(iv) Detached trailer chippers shall be chocked during usage on any
slope where rolling or sliding of the chipper is reasonably foreseeable.
(5) Yarding. (i) No log shall be moved until each employee is in the
clear.
(ii) Each choker shall be hooked and unhooked from the uphill side
or end of the log, unless the employer demonstrates that is it not
feasible in the particular situation to hook or unhook the choker from
the uphill side. Where the choker is hooked or unhooked from the
downhill side or end of the log, the log shall be securely chocked to
prevent rolling, sliding or swinging.
[[Page 749]]
(iii) Each choker shall be positioned near the end of the log or
tree length.
(iv) Each machine shall be positioned during winching so the machine
and winch are operated within their design limits.
(v) No yarding line shall be moved unless the yarding machine
operator has clearly received and understood the signal to do so. When
in doubt, the yarding machine operator shall repeat the signal and wait
for a confirming signal before moving any line.
(vi) No load shall exceed the rated capacity of the pallet, trailer,
or other carrier.
(vii) Towed equipment, such as but not limited to, skid pans,
pallets, arches, and trailers, shall be attached to each machine or
vehicle in such a manner as to allow a full 90 degree turn; to prevent
overrunning of the towing machine or vehicle; and to assure that the
operator is always in control of the towed equipment.
(viii) The yarding machine or vehicle, including its load, shall be
operated with safe clearance from all obstructions that may create a
hazard for an employee.
(ix) Each yarded tree shall be placed in a location that does not
create a hazard for an employee and an orderly manner so that the trees
are stable before bucking or limbing is commenced.
(6) Loading and unloading. (i) The transport vehicle shall be
positioned to provide working clearance between the vehicle and the
deck.
(ii) Only the loading or unloading machine operator and other
personnel the employer demonstrates are essential shall be in the
loading or unloading work area during this operation.
(iii) No transport vehicle operator shall remain in the cab during
loading and unloading if the logs are carried or moved over the truck
cab, unless the employer demonstrates that it is necessary for the
operator to do so. Where the transport vehicle operator remains in the
cab, the employer shall provide operator protection, such as but not
limited to, reinforcement of the cab.
(iv) Each log shall be placed on a transport vehicle in an orderly
manner and tightly secured.
(v) The load shall be positioned to prevent slippage or loss during
handling and transport.
(vi) Each stake and chock which is used to trip loads shall be so
constructed that the tripping mechanism is activated on the side
opposite the release of the load.
(vii) Each tie down shall be left in place over the peak log to
secure all logs until the unloading lines or other protection the
employer demonstrates is equivalent has been put in place. A stake of
sufficient strength to withstand the forces of shifting or moving logs,
shall be considered equivalent protection provided that the logs are not
loaded higher than the stake.
(viii) Each tie down shall be released only from the side on which
the unloading machine operates, except as follows:
(A) When the tie down is released by a remote control device; and
(B) When the employee making the release is protected by racks,
stanchions or other protection the employer demonstrates is capable of
withstanding the force of the logs.
(7) Transport. The transport vehicle operator shall assure that each
tie down is tight before transporting the load. While enroute, the
operator shall check and tighten the tie downs whenever there is reason
to believe that the tie downs have loosened or the load has shifted.
(8) Storage. Each deck shall be constructed and located so it is
stable and provides each employee with enough room to safely move and
work in the area.
(i) Training. (1) The employer shall provide training for each
employee, including supervisors, at no cost to the employee.
(2) Frequency. Training shall be provided as follows:
(i) As soon as possible but not later than the effective date of
this section for initial training for each current and new employee;
(ii) Prior to initial assignment for each new employee;
(iii) Whenever the employee is assigned new work tasks, tools,
equipment, machines or vehicles; and
(iv) Whenever an employee demonstrates unsafe job performance.
[[Page 750]]
(3) Content. At a minimum, training shall consist of the following
elements:
(i) Safe performance of assigned work tasks;
(ii) Safe use, operation and maintenance of tools, machines and
vehicles the employee uses or operates, including emphasis on
understanding and following the manufacturer's operating and maintenance
instructions, warnings and precautions;
(iii) Recognition of safety and health hazards associated with the
employee's specific work tasks, including the use of measures and work
practices to prevent or control those hazards;
(iv) Recognition, prevention and control of other safety and health
hazards in the logging industry;
(v) Procedures, practices and requirements of the employer's work
site; and
(vi) The requirements of this standard.
(4) Training of an employee due to unsafe job performance, or
assignment of new work tasks, tools, equipment, machines, or vehicles;
may be limited to those elements in paragraph (i)(3) of this section
which are relevant to the circumstances giving rise to the need for
training.
(5) Portability of training. (i) Each current employee who has
received training in the particular elements specified in paragraph
(i)(3) of this section shall not be required to be retrained in those
elements.
(ii) Each new employee who has received training in the particular
elements specified in paragraph (i)(3) of this section shall not be
required to be retrained in those elements prior to initial assignment.
(iii) The employer shall train each current and new employee in
those elements for which the employee has not received training.
(iv) The employer is responsible for ensuring that each current and
new employee can properly and safely perform the work tasks and operate
the tools, equipment, machines, and vehicles used in their job.
(6) Each new employee and each employee who is required to be
trained as specified in paragraph (i)(2) of this section, shall work
under the close supervision of a designated person until the employee
demonstrates to the employer the ability to safely perform their new
duties independently.
(7) First-aid training. (i) The employer shall assure that each
employee, including supervisors, receives or has received first-aid and
CPR training meeting at least the requirements specified in appendix B.
(ii) The employer shall assure that each employee's first-aid and
CPR training and/or certificate of training remain current.
(8) All training shall be conducted by a designated person.
(9) The employer shall assure that all training required by this
section is presented in a manner that the employee is able to
understand. The employer shall assure that all training materials used
are appropriate in content and vocabulary to the educational level,
literacy, and language skills of the employees being trained.
(10) Certification of training. (i) The employer shall verify
compliance with paragraph (i) of this section by preparing a written
certification record. The written certification record shall contain the
name or other identity of the employee trained, the date(s) of the
training, and the signature of the person who conducted the training or
the signature of the employer. If the employer relies on training
conducted prior to the employee's hiring or completed prior to the
effective date of this section, the certification record shall indicate
the date the employer determined the prior training was adequate.
(ii) The most recent training certification shall be maintained.
(11) Safety and health meetings. The employer shall hold safety and
health meetings as necessary and at least each month for each employee.
Safety and health meetings may be conducted individually, in crew
meetings, in larger groups, or as part of other staff meetings.
(j) Effective date. This section is effective February 9, 1995. All
requirements under this section commence on the effective date.
(k) Appendices. Appendices A and B of this section are mandatory.
The information contained in appendix C of this
[[Page 751]]
section is informational and is not intended to create any additional
obligations not otherwise imposed or to detract from existing
regulations.
Note: In the Federal Register of August 9, 1995, OSHA extended the
stay of the following paragraphs of Sec. 1910.266 until September 8,
1995. The remaining requirements of Sec. 1910.266, which became
effective on February 9, 1995, are unaffected by the extension of the
partial stay:
1. (d)(1)(v)--insofar as it requires foot protection to be chain-saw
resistant.
2. (d)(1)(vii)--insofar as it required face protection.
3. (d)(2)(iii).
4. (f)(2)(iv).
5. (f)(2)(xi).
6. (f)(3)(ii).
7. (f)(3)(vii).
8. (f)(3)(viii).
9. (f)(7)(ii)--insofar as it requires parking brakes to be able to
stop a moving machine.
10. (g)(1) and (g)(2) insofar as they require inspection and
maintenance of employee-owned vehicles.
11. (h)(2)(vii)--insofar as it precludes backcuts at the level of
the horizontal cut of the undercut when the Humboldt cutting method is
used.
Appendix A to Sec. 1910.266--First-Aid Kits (Mandatory)
The following list sets forth the minimally acceptable number and
type of first-aid supplies for first-aid kits required under paragraph
(d)(2) of the logging standard. The contents of the first-aid kit listed
should be adequate for small work sites, consisting of approximately two
to three employees. When larger operations or multiple operations are
being conducted at the same location, additional first-aid kits should
be provided at the work site or additional quantities of supplies should
be included in the first-aid kits:
1. Gauze pads (at least 4x4 inches).
2. Two large gauze pads (at least 8x10 inches).
3. Box adhesive bandages (band-aids).
4. One package gauze roller bandage at least 2 inches wide.
5. Two triangular bandages.
6. Wound cleaning agent such as sealed moistened towelettes.
7. Scissors.
8. At least one blanket.
9. Tweezers.
10. Adhesive tape.
11. Latex gloves.
12. Resuscitation equipment such as resuscitation bag, airway, or
pocket mask.
13. Two elastic wraps.
14. Splint.
15. Directions for requesting emergency assistance.
Appendix B to Sec. 1910.266--First-aid and CPR Training (Mandatory)
The following is deemed to be the minimal acceptable first-aid and
CPR training program for employees engaged in logging activities.
First-aid and CPR training shall be conducted using the conventional
methods of training such as lecture, demonstration, practical exercise
and examination (both written and practical). The length of training
must be sufficient to assure that trainees understand the concepts of
first aid and can demonstrate their ability to perform the various
procedures contained in the outline below.
At a minimum, first-aid and CPR training shall consist of the
following:
1. The definition of first aid.
2. Legal issues of applying first aid (Good Samaritan Laws).
3. Basic anatomy.
4. Patient assessment and first aid for the following:
a. Respiratory arrest.
b. Cardiac arrest.
c. Hemorrhage.
d. Lacerations/abrasions.
e. Amputations.
f. Musculoskeletal injuries.
g. Shock.
h. Eye injuries.
i. Burns.
j. Loss of consciousness.
k. Extreme temperature exposure (hypothermia/hyperthermia)
l. Paralysis
m. Poisoning.
n. Loss of mental functioning (psychosis/hallucinations, etc.).
Artificial ventilation.
o. Drug overdose.
5. CPR.
6. Application of dressings and slings.
7. Treatment of strains, sprains, and fractures.
8. Immobilization of injured persons.
9. Handling and transporting injured persons.
10. Treatment of bites, stings, or contact with poisonous plants or
animals.
Appendix C to Sec. 1910.266--Comparable ISO Standards (Non-mandatory)
The following International Labor Organization (ISO) standards are
comparable to the corresponding Society of Automotive Engineers
(Standards that are referenced in this standard.)
Utilization of the ISO standards in lieu of the corresponding SAE
standards should result in a machine that meets the OSHA standard.
[[Page 752]]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
SAE standard ISO standard Subject
------------------------------------------------------------------------
SAE J1040 ISO 3471-1 Performance Criteria for
Rollover Protective
Structures (ROPS) for
Construction,
Earthmoving, Forestry
and Mining Machines.
SAE J397 ISO 3164 Deflection Limiting
Volume--ROPS/FOPS
Laboratory Evaluation.
SAE J231 ISO 3449 Minimum Performance
Criteria for Falling
Object Protective
Structures (FOPS).
SAE J386 ISO 6683 Operator Restraint
Systems for Off-Road
Work Machines.
SAE J185 ISO 2897 Access Systems for Off-
Road Machines.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[59 FR 51741, Oct. 12, 1994, as amended at 60 FR 7449, Feb. 8, 1995; 60
FR 40458, Aug. 9, 1996; 60 FR 47035-47037, Sept. 8, 1995; 61 FR 9241,
9242, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1910.268 Telecommunications.
(a) Application. (1) This section sets forth safety and health
standards that apply to the work conditions, practices, means, methods,
operations, installations and processes performed at telecommunications
centers and at telecommunications field installations, which are located
outdoors or in building spaces used for such field installations. Center
work includes the installation, operation, maintenance, rearrangement,
and removal of communications equipment and other associated equipment
in telecommunications switching centers. Field work includes the
installation, operation, maintenance, rearrangement, and removal of
conductors and other equipment used for signal or communication service,
and of their supporting or containing structures, overhead or
underground, on public or private rights of way, including buildings or
other structures.
(2) These standards do not apply: (i) To construction work, as
defined in Sec. 1910.12, nor (ii) to installations under the exclusive
control of electric utilities used for the purpose of communications or
metering, or for generation, control, transformation, transmission, and
distribution of electric energy, which are located in buildings used
exclusively by the electric utilities for such purposes, or located
outdoors on property owned or leased by the electric utilities or on
public highways, streets, roads, etc., or outdoors by established rights
on private property.
(3) Operations or conditions not specifically covered by this
section are subject to all the applicable standards contained in this
part 1910. See Sec. 1910.5(c). Operations which involve construction
work, as defined in Sec. 1910.12 are subject to all the applicable
standards contained in part 1926 of this chapter.
(b) General--(1) Buildings containing telecommunications centers--
(i) Illumination. Lighting in telecommunication centers shall be
provided in an adequate amount such that continuing work operations,
routine observations, and the passage of employees can be carried out in
a safe and healthful manner. Certain specific tasks in centers, such as
splicing cable and the maintenance and repair of equipment frame
lineups, may require a higher level of illumination. In such cases, the
employer shall install permanent lighting or portable supplemental
lighting to attain a higher level of illumination shall be provided as
needed to permit safe performance of the required task.
(ii) Working surfaces. Guard rails and toe boards may be omitted on
distribution frame mezzanine platforms to permit access to equipment.
This exemption applies only on the side or sides of the platform facing
the frames and only on those portions of the platform adjacent to
equipped frames.
(iii) Working spaces. Maintenance aisles, or wiring aisles, between
equipment frame lineups are working spaces and are not a means of egress
for purposes of Sec. 1910.35(a).
(iv) Special doors. When blastproof or power actuated doors are
installed in specially designed hardsite security buildings and spaces,
they shall be designed and installed so that they can be used as a means
of egress in emergencies.
(v) Equipment, machinery and machine guarding. When power plant
machinery in telecommunications centers is operated with commutators and
couplings uncovered, the adjacent housing shall be clearly marked to
alert personnel to the rotating machinery.
(2) Battery handling. (i) Eye protection devices which provide side
as well
[[Page 753]]
as frontal eye protection for employees shall be provided when measuring
storage battery specific gravity or handling electrolyte, and the
employer shall ensure that such devices are used by the employees. The
employer shall also ensure that acid resistant gloves and aprons shall
be worn for protection against spattering. Facilities for quick
drenching or flushing of the eyes and body shall be provided unless the
storage batteries are of the enclosed type and equipped with explosion
proof vents, in which case sealed water rinse or neutralizing packs may
be substituted for the quick drenching or flushing facilities. Employees
assigned to work with storage batteries shall be instructed in emergency
procedures such as dealing with accidental acid spills.
(ii) Electrolyte (acid or base, and distilled water) for battery
cells shall be mixed in a well ventilated room. Acid or base shall be
poured gradually, while stirring, into the water. Water shall never be
poured into concentrated (greater than 75 percent) acid solutions.
Electrolyte shall never be placed in metal containers nor stirred with
metal objects.
(iii) When taking specific gravity readings, the open end of the
hydrometer shall be covered with an acid resistant material while moving
it from cell to cell to avoid splashing or throwing the electrolyte.
(3) Medical and first aid. First aid supplies recommended by a
consulting physician shall be placed in weatherproof containers (unless
stored indoors) and shall be easily accessible. Each first aid kit shall
be inspected at least once a month. Expended items shall be replaced.
(4) Hazardous materials. Highway mobile vehicles and trailers stored
in garages in accordance with Sec. 1910.110 may be equipped to carry
more than one LP-gas container, but the total capacity of LP-gas
containers per work vehicle stored in garages shall not exceed 100
pounds of LP-gas. All container valves shall be closed when not in use.
(5) Compressed gas. When using or transporting nitrogen cylinders in
a horizontal position, special compartments, racks, or adequate blocking
shall be provided to prevent cylinder movement. Regulators shall be
removed or guarded before a cylinder is transported.
(6) Support structures. No employee, or any material or equipment,
may be supported or permitted to be supported on any portion of a pole
structure, platform, ladder, walkway or other elevated structure or
aerial device unless the employer ensures that the support structure is
first inspected by a competent person and it is determined to be
adequately strong, in good working condition and properly secured in
place.
(7) Approach distances to exposed energized overhead power lines and
parts. The employer shall ensure that no employee approaches or takes
any conductive object closer to any electrically energized overhead
power lines and parts than prescribed in Table R-2, unless:
(i) The employee is insulated or guarded from the energized parts
(insulating gloves rated for the voltage involved shall be considered
adequate insulation), or
(ii) The energized parts are insulated or guarded from the employee
and any other conductive object at a different potential, or
(iii) The power conductors and equipment are deenergized and
grounded.
Table R-2--Approach Distances to Exposed Energized Overhead Power Lines
and Parts
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Approach
Voltage range (phase to phase, RMS) distance
(inches)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
300 V and less.............................................. (\1\)
Over 300V, not over 750V.................................... 12
Over 750V not over 2 kV..................................... 18
Over 2 kV, not over 15 kV................................... 24
Over 15 kV, not over 37 kV.................................. 36
Over 37 kV, not over 87.5 kV................................ 42
Over 87.5 kV, not over 121 kV............................... 48
Over 121 kV, not over 140 kV................................ 54
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Avoid contact.
(8) Illumination of field work. Whenever natural light is
insufficient to adequately illuminate the worksite, artificial
illumination shall be provided to enable the employee to perform the
work safely.
(c) Training. Employers shall provide training in the various
precautions and safe practices described in this section and shall
insure that employees do not
[[Page 754]]
engage in the activities to which this section applies until such
employees have received proper training in the various precautions and
safe practices required by this section. However, where the employer can
demonstrate that an employee is already trained in the precautions and
safe practices required by this section prior to his employment,
training need not be provided to that employee in accordance with this
section. Where training is required, it shall consist of on-the-job
training or classroom-type training or a combination of both. The
employer shall certify that employees have been trained by preparing a
certification record which includes the identity of the person trained,
the signature of the employer or the person who conducted the training,
and the date the training was completed. The certification record shall
be prepared at the completion of training and shall be maintained on
file for the duration of the employee's employment. The certification
record shall be made available upon request to the Assistant Secretary
for Occupational Safety and Health. Such training shall, where
appropriate, include the following subjects:
(1) Recognition and avoidance of dangers relating to encounters with
harmful substances and animal, insect, or plant life;
(2) Procedures to be followed in emergency situations; and,
(3) First aid training, including instruction in artificial
respiration.
(d) Employee protection in public work areas. (1) Before work is
begun in the vicinity of vehicular or pedestrian traffic which may
endanger employees, warning signs and/or flags or other traffic control
devices shall be placed conspicuously to alert and channel approaching
traffic. Where further protection is needed, barriers shall be utilized.
At night, warning lights shall be prominently displayed, and excavated
areas shall be enclosed with protective barricades.
(2) If work exposes energized or moving parts that are normally
protected, danger signs shall be displayed and barricades erected, as
necessary, to warn other personnel in the area.
(3) The employer shall insure that an employee finding any crossed
or fallen wires which create or may create a hazardous situation at the
work area: (i) Remains on guard or adopts other adequate means to warn
other employees of the danger and (ii) has the proper authority notified
at the earliest practical moment.
(e) Tools and personal protective equipment--Generally. Personal
protective equipment, protective devices and special tools needed for
the work of employees shall be provided and the employer shall ensure
that they are used by employees. Before each day's use the employer
shall ensure that these personal protective devices, tools, and
equipment are carefully inspected by a competent person to ascertain
that they are in good condition.
(f) Rubber insulating equipment. (1) Rubber insulating equipment
designed for the voltage levels to be encountered shall be provided and
the employer shall ensure that they are used by employees as required by
this section. The requirements of Sec. 1910.137, Electrical Protective
Equipment, shall be followed except for Table I-6.
(2) The employer is responsible for the periodic retesting of all
insulating gloves, blankets, and other rubber insulating equipment. This
retesting shall be electrical, visual and mechanical. The following
maximum retesting intervals shall apply:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Natural Synthetic
Gloves, blankets, and other insulating equipment rubber rubber
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Months
------------------------------------------------------------------------
New............................................. 12 18
Re-issued....................................... 9 15
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(3) Gloves and blankets shall be marked to indicate compliance with
the retest schedule, and shall be marked with the date the next test is
due. Gloves found to be defective in the field or by the tests set forth
in paragraph (f)(5) of this section shall be destroyed by cutting them
open from the finger to the gauntlet.
(g) Personal climbing equipment--(1) General. Safety belts and
straps shall be provided and the employer shall ensure their use when
work is performed at positions more than 4 feet above ground, on poles,
and on towers, except
[[Page 755]]
as provided in paragraphs (n)(7) and (n)(8) of this section. No safety
belts, safety straps or lanyards acquired after July 1, 1975 may be used
unless they meet the tests set forth in paragraph (g)(2) of this
section. The employer shall ensure that all safety belts and straps are
inspected by a competent person prior to each day's use to determine
that they are in safe working condition.
(2) Telecommunication lineman's body belts, safety straps, and
lanyards--(i) General requirements. (A) Hardware for lineman's body
belts, safety straps, and lanyards shall be drop forged or pressed steel
and shall have a corrosion resistant finish tested to meet the
requirements of the American Society for Testing and Materials B117-64,
which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6 (50-hour
test). Surfaces shall be smooth and free of sharp edges. Production
samples of lineman's safety straps, body belts and lanyards shall be
approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, as having been
tested in accordance with and as meeting the requirements of this
paragraph.
(B) All buckles shall withstand a 2,000-pound tensile test with a
maximum permanent deformation no greater than one sixty-forth inch.
(C) D rings shall withstand a 5,000-pound tensile test without
cracking or breaking.
(D) Snaphooks shall withstand a 5,000-pound tensile test, or shall
withstand a 3,000-pound tensile test and a 180 deg. bend test. Tensile
failure is indicated by distortion of the snaphook sufficient to release
the keeper; bend test failure is indicated by cracking of the snaphook.
(ii) Specific requirements. (A)(1) All fabric used for safety straps
shall be capable of withstanding an A.C. dielectric test of not less
than 25,000 volts per foot ``dry'' for 3 minutes, without visible
deterioration.
(2) All fabric and leather used shall be tested for leakage current.
Fabric or leather may not be used if the leakage current exceeds 1
milliampere when a potential of 3,000 volts is applied to the electrodes
positioned 12 inches apart.
(3) In lieu of alternating current tests, equivalent direct current
tests may be performed.
(B) The cushion part of the body belt shall:
(1) Contain no exposed rivets on the inside. This provision does not
apply to belts used by craftsmen not engaged in line work.
(2) Be at least three inches in width;
(3) Be at least five thirty-seconds (\5/32\) inch thick, if made of
leather; and
(C) [Reserved]
(D) Suitable copper, steel, or equivalent liners shall be used
around the bars of D rings to prevent wear between these members and the
leather or fabric enclosing them.
(E) All stitching shall be done with a minimum 42-pound weight nylon
or equivalent thread and shall be lock stitched. Stitching parallel to
an edge may not be less than three-sixteenths (\3/16\) inch from the
edge of the narrowest member caught by the thread. The use of cross
stitching on leather is prohibited.
(F) The keepers of snaphooks shall have a spring tension that will
not allow the keeper to begin to open when a weight of 2\1/2\ pounds or
less is applied, but the keepers shall begin to open when a weight of
four pounds is applied. In making this determination, the weight shall
be supported on the keeper against the end of the nose.
(G) Safety straps, lanyards, and body belts shall be tested in
accordance with the following procedure:
(1) Attach one end of the safety strap or lanyard to a rigid
support, and the other end to a 250-pound canvas bag of sand;
(2) Allow the 250-pound canvas bag of sand to free fall 4 feet when
testing safety straps and 6 feet when testing lanyards. In each case,
the strap or lanyard shall stop the fall of the 250-pound bag;
(3) Failure of the strap or lanyard shall be indicated by any
breakage or slippage sufficient to permit the bag to fall free from the
strap or lanyard.
(4) The entire ``body belt assembly'' shall be tested using on D
ring. A safety strap or lanyard shall be used that is capable of passing
the ``impact loading test'' described in paragraph (g)(2)(ii)(G)(2) of
this section and attached as required in paragraph (g)(2)(ii)(G)(1) of
this section. The body belt shall be secured to the 250-pound
[[Page 756]]
bag of sand at a point which simulates the waist of a man and shall be
dropped as stated in paragraph (g)(2)(ii)(G)(2) of this section. Failure
of the body belt shall be indicated by any breakage or slippage
sufficient to permit the bag to fall free from the body belt.
(3) Pole climbers. (i) Pole climbers may not be used if the gaffs
are less than 1\1/4\ inches in length as measured on the underside of
the gaff. The gaffs of pole climbers shall be covered with safety caps
when not being used for their intended use.
(ii) The employer shall ensure that pole climbers are inspected by a
competent person for the following conditions: Fractured or cracked
gaffs or leg irons, loose or dull gaffs, broken straps or buckles. If
any of these conditions exist, the defect shall be corrected before the
climbers are used.
(iii) Pole climbers shall be inspected as required in this paragraph
(g)(3) before each day's use and a gaff cut-out test performed at least
weekly when in use.
(iv) Pole climbers may not be worn when:
(A) Working in trees (specifically designed tree climbers shall be
used for tree climbing),
(B) Working on ladders,
(C) Working in an aerial lift,
(D) Driving a vehicle, nor
(E) Walking on rocky, hard, frozen, brushy or hilly terrain.
(h) Ladders. (1) The employer shall ensure that no employee nor any
material or equipment may be supported or permitted to be supported on
any portion of a ladder unless it is first determined, by inspections
and checks conducted by a competent person that such ladder is
adequately strong, in good condition, and properly secured in place, as
required in subpart D of this part and as required in this section.
(2) The spacing between steps or rungs permanently installed on
poles and towers shall be no more than 18 inches (36 inches on any one
side). This requirement also applies to fixed ladders on towers, when
towers are so equipped. Spacing between steps shall be uniform above the
initial unstepped section, except where working, standing, or access
steps are required. Fixed ladder rungs and step rungs for poles and
towers shall have a minimum diameter of \5/8\. Fixed ladder
rungs shall have a minimum clear width of 12 inches. Steps for poles and
towers shall have a minimum clear width of 4\1/2\ inches. The spacing
between detachable steps may not exceed 30 inches on any one side, and
these steps shall be properly secured when in use.
(3) Portable wood ladders intended for general use may not be
painted but may be coated with a transclucent nonconductive coating.
Portable wood ladders may not be longitudinally reinforced with metal.
(4) Portable wood ladders that are not being carried on vehicles and
are not in active use shall be stored where they will not be exposed to
the elements and where there is good ventilation.
(5) The provisions of Sec. 1910.25(c)(5) shall apply to rolling
ladders used in telecommunications centers, except that such ladders
shall have a minimum inside width, between the side rails, of at least
eight inches.
(6) Climbing ladders or stairways on scaffolds used for access and
egress shall be affixed or built into the scaffold by proper design and
engineering, and shall be so located that their use will not disturb the
stability of the scaffold. The rungs of the climbing device shall be
equally spaced, but may not be less than 12 inches nominal nor more than
16 inches nominal apart. Horizontal end rungs used for platform support
may also be utilized as a climbing device if such rungs meet the spacing
requirement of this paragraph (h)(6), and if there is sufficient
clearance between the rung and the edge of the platform to afford an
adequate handhold. If a portable ladder is affixed to the scaffold, it
shall be securely attached and shall have rungs meeting the spacing
requirements of this paragraph (h)(6). Clearance shall be provided in
the back of the ladder of not less than 6 inches from center of rung to
the nearest scaffold structural member.
(7) When a ladder is supported by an aerial strand, and ladder hooks
or other supports are not being used, the ladder shall be extended at
least 2 feet above the strand and shall be secured to it (e.g. lashed or
held by a safety
[[Page 757]]
strap around the strand and ladder side rail). When a ladder is
supported by a pole, it shall be securely lashed to the pole unless the
ladder is specifically designed to prevent movement when used in this
application.
(8) The following requirements apply to metal manhole ladders. (i)
Metal manhole ladders shall be free of structural defects and free of
accident hazards such as sharp edges and burrs. The metal shall be
protected against corrosion unless inherently corrosion-resistant.
(ii) These ladders may be designed with parallel side rails, or with
side rails varying uniformly in separation along the length (tapered),
or with side rails flaring at the base to increase stability.
(iii) The spacing of rungs or steps shall be on 12-inch centers.
(iv) Connections between rungs or steps and siderails shall be
constructed to insure rigidity as well as strength.
(v) Rungs and steps shall be corrugated, knurled, dimpled, coated
with skid-resistant material, or otherwise treated to minimize the
possibility of slipping.
(vi) Ladder hardware shall meet the strength requirements of the
ladder's component parts and shall be of a material that is protected
against corrosion unless inherently corrosion-resistant. Metals shall be
so selected as to avoid excessive galvanic action.
(i) Other tools and personal protective equipment--(1) Head
protection. Head protection meeting the requirements of ANSI Z89.2-1971,
``Safety Requirements for Industrial Protective Helmets for Electrical
Workers, Class B'' shall be provided whenever there is exposure to
possible high voltage electrical contact, and the employer shall ensure
that the head protection is used by employees. ANSI Z89.2-1971 is
incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(2) Eye protection. Eye protection meeting the requirements of
Sec. 1910.133 (a)(2) thru (a)(6) shall be provided and the employer
shall ensure its use by employees where foreign objects may enter the
eyes due to work operations such as but not limited to:
(i) Drilling or chipping stone, brick or masonry, breaking concrete
or pavement, etc. by hand tools (sledgehammer, etc.) or power tools such
as pneumatic drills or hammers;
(ii) Working on or around high speed emery or other grinding wheels
unprotected by guards;
(iii) Cutting or chipping terra cotta ducts, tile, etc.;
(iv) Working under motor vehicles requiring hammering;
(v) Cleaning operations using compressed air, steam, or sand blast;
(vi) Acetylene welding or similar operations where sparks are thrown
off;
(vii) Using powder actuated stud drivers;
(viii) Tree pruning or cutting underbrush;
(ix) Handling battery cells and solutions, such as taking battery
readings with a hydrometer and thermometer;
(x) Removing or rearranging strand or open wire; and
(xi) Performing lead sleeve wiping and while soldering.
(3) Tent heaters. Flame-type heaters may not be used within ground
tents or on platforms within aerial tents unless:
(i) The tent covers are constructed of fire resistant materials, and
(ii) Adequate ventilation is provided to maintain safe oxygen levels
and avoid harmful buildup of combustion products and combustible gases.
(4) Torches. Torches may be used on aerial splicing platforms or in
buckets enclosed by tents provided the tent material is constructed of
fire resistant material and the torch is turned off when not in actual
use. Aerial tents shall be adequately ventilated while the torch is in
operation.
(5) Portable power equipment. Nominal 120V, or less, portable
generators used for providing power at work locations do not require
grounding if the output circuit is completely isolated from the frame of
the unit.
(6) Vehicle-mounted utility generators. Vehicle-mounted utility
generators used for providing nominal 240V AC or less for powering
portable tools and equipment need not be grounded to earth if all of the
following conditions are met:
(i) One side of the voltage source is solidly strapped to the
metallic structure of the vehicle;
[[Page 758]]
(ii) Grounding-type outlets are used, with a ``grounding'' conductor
between the outlet grounding terminal and the side of the voltage source
that is strapped to the vehicle;
(iii) All metallic encased tools and equipment that are powered from
this system are equipped with three-wire cords and grounding-type
attachment plugs, except as designated in paragraph (i)(7) of this
section.
(7) Portable lights, tools, and appliances. Portable lights, tools,
and appliances having noncurrent-carrying external metal housing may be
used with power equipment described in paragraph (i)(5) of this section
without an equipment grounding conductor. When operated from commercial
power such metal parts of these devices shall be grounded, unless these
tools or appliances are protected by a system of double insulation, or
its equivalent. Where such a system is employed, the equipment shall be
distinctively marked to indicate double insulation.
(8) Soldering devices. Grounding shall be omitted when using
soldering irons, guns or wire-wrap tools on telecommunications circuits.
(9) Lead work. The wiping of lead joints using melted solder, gas
fueled torches, soldering irons or other appropriate heating devices,
and the soldering of wires or other electrical connections do not
constitute the welding, cutting and brazing described in subpart Q of
this part. When operated from commercial power the metal housing of
electric solder pots shall be grounded. Electric solder pots may be used
with the power equipment described in paragraph (i)(5) of this section
without a grounding conductor. The employer shall ensure that wiping
gloves or cloths and eye protection are used in lead wiping operations.
A drip pan to catch hot lead drippings shall also be provided and used.
(j) Vehicle-mounted material handling devices and other mechanical
equipment--(1) General. (i) The employer shall ensure that visual
inspections are made of the equipment by a competent person each day the
equipment is to be used to ascertain that it is in good condition.
(ii) The employer shall ensure that tests shall be made at the
beginning of each shift by a competent person to insure the vehicle
brakes and operating systems are in proper working condition.
(2) Scrapers, loaders, dozers, graders and tractors. (i) All rubber-
tired, self-propelled scrapers, rubber-tired front end loaders, rubber-
tired dozers, agricultural and industrial tractors, crawler tractors,
crawler-type loaders, and motor graders, with or without attachments,
that are used in telecommunications work shall have rollover protective
structures that meet the requirements of subpart W of part 1926 of this
Title.
(ii) Eye protection shall be provided and the employer shall ensure
that it is used by employees when working in areas where flying material
is generated.
(3) Vehicle-mounted elevating and rotating work platforms. These
devices shall not be operated with any conductive part of the equipment
closer to exposed energized power lines than the clearances set forth in
Table R-2 of this section.
(4) Derrick trucks and similar equipment. (i) This equipment shall
not be operated with any conductive part of the equipment closer to
exposed energized power lines than the clearances set forth in Table R-2
of this section.
(ii) When derricks are used to handle poles near energized power
conductors, these operations shall comply with the requirements
contained in paragraphs (b)(7) and (n)(11) of this section.
(iii) Moving parts of equipment and machinery carried on or mounted
on telecommunications line trucks shall be guarded. This may be done
with barricades as specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
(iv) Derricks and the operation of derricks shall comply with the
following requirements: (A) Manufacturer's specifications, load ratings
and instructions for derrick operation shall be strictly observed.
(B) Rated load capacities and instructions related to derrick
operation shall be conspicuously posted on a permanent weather-resistant
plate or decal in a location on the derrick that is plainly visible to
the derrick operator.
[[Page 759]]
(C) Prior to derrick operation the parking brake must be set and the
stabilizers extended if the vehicle is so equipped. When the vehicle is
situated on a grade, at least two wheels must be chocked on the
downgrade side.
(D) Only persons trained in the operation of the derrick shall be
permitted to operate the derrick.
(E) Hand signals to derrick operators shall be those prescribed by
ANSI B30.6-1969, ``Safety Code for Derricks'', which is incorporated by
reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6.
(F) The employer shall ensure that the derrick and its associated
equipment are inspected by a competent person at intervals set by the
manufacturer but in no case less than once per year. Records shall be
maintained including the dates of inspections, and necessary repairs
made, if corrective action was required.
(G) Modifications or additions to the derrick and its associated
equipment that alter its capacity or affect its safe operation shall be
made only with written certification from the manufacturer, or other
equivalent entity, such as a nationally recognized testing laboratory,
that the modification results in the equipment being safe for its
intended use. Such changes shall require the changing and posting of
revised capacity and instruction decals or plates. These new ratings or
limitations shall be as provided by the manufacturer or other equivalent
entity.
(H) Wire rope used with derricks shall be of improved plow steel or
equivalent. Wire rope safety factors shall be in accordance with
American National Standards Institute B30.6-1969.
(I) Wire rope shall be taken out of service, or the defective
portion removed, when any of the following conditions exist: (1) The
rope strength has been significantly reduced due to corrosion, pitting,
or excessive heat, or
(2) The thickness of the outer wires of the rope has been reduced to
two-thirds or less of the original thickness, or
(3) There are more than six broken wires in any one rope lay, or
(4) There is excessive permanent distortion caused by kinking,
crushing, or severe twisting of the rope.
(k) Materials handling and storage-- (1) Poles. When working with
poles in piles or stacks, work shall be performed from the ends of the
poles as much as possible, and precautions shall be taken for the safety
of employees at the other end of the pole. During pole hauling
operations, all loads shall be secured to prevent displacement. Lights,
reflectors and/or flags shall be displayed on the end and sides of the
load as necessary. The requirements for installation, removal, or other
handling of poles in pole lines are prescribed in paragraph (n) of this
section which pertains to overhead lines. In the case of hoisting
machinery equipped with a positive stop loadholding device, it shall be
permissible for the operator to leave his position at the controls
(while a load is suspended) for the sole purpose of assisting in
positioning the load prior to landing it. Prior to unloading steel,
poles, crossarms, and similar material, the load shall be thoroughly
examined to ascertain that the load has not shifted, that binders or
stakes have not broken, and that the load is not otherwise hazardous to
employees.
(2) Cable reels. Cable reels in storage shall be checked or
otherwise restrained when there is a possibility that they might
accidentally roll from position.
(l) Cable fault locating and testing. (1) Employees involved in
using high voltages to locate trouble or test cables shall be instructed
in the precautions necessary for their own safety and the safety of
other employees.
(2) Before the voltage is applied, cable conductors shall be
isolated to the extent practicable. Employees shall be warned, by such
techniques as briefing and tagging at all affected locations, to stay
clear while the voltage is applied.
(m) Grounding for employee protection--pole lines--(1) Power
conductors. Electric power conductors and equipment shall be considered
as energized unless the employee can visually determine that they are
bonded to one of the grounds listed in paragraph (m)(4) of this section.
(2) Nonworking open wire. Nonworking open wire communications lines
shall
[[Page 760]]
be bonded to one of the grounds listed in paragraph (m)(4) of this
section.
(3) Vertical power conduit, power ground wires and street light
fixtures. (i) Metal power conduit on joint use poles, exposed vertical
power ground wires, and street light fixtures which are below
communications attachments or less than 20 inches above these
attachments, shall be considered energized and shall be tested for
voltage unless the employee can visually determine that they are bonded
to the communications suspension strand or cable sheath.
(ii) If no hazardous voltage is shown by the voltage test, a
temporary bond shall be placed between such street light fixture,
exposed vertical power grounding conductor, or metallic power conduit
and the communications cable strand. Temporary bonds used for this
purpose shall have sufficient conductivity to carry at least 500 amperes
for a period of one second without fusing.
(4) Suitable protective grounding. Acceptable grounds for protective
grounding are as follows:
(i) A vertical ground wire which has been tested, found safe, and is
connected to a power system multigrounded neutral or the grounded
neutral of a power secondary system where there are at least three
services connected;
(ii) Communications cable sheath or shield and its supporting strand
where the sheath or shield is:
(A) Bonded to an underground or buried cable which is connected to a
central office ground, or
(B) Bonded to an underground metallic piping system, or
(C) Bonded to a power system multigrounded neutral or grounded
neutral of a power secondary system which has at least three services
connected;
(iii) Guys which are bonded to the grounds specified in paragraphs
(m)(4) (i) and (ii) of this section and which have continuity
uninterrupted by an insulator; and
(iv) If all of the preceding grounds are not available, arrays of
driven ground rods where the resultant resistance to ground will be low
enough to eliminate danger to personnel or permit prompt operation of
protective devices.
(5) Attaching and removing temporary bonds. When attaching grounds
(bonds), the first attachment shall be made to the protective ground.
When removing bonds, the connection to the line or equipment shall be
removed first. Insulating gloves shall be worn during these operations.
(6) Temporary grounding of suspension strand. (i) The suspension
strand shall be grounded to the existing grounds listed in paragraph
(m)(4) of this section when being placed on jointly used poles or during
thunderstorm activity.
(ii) Where power crossings are encountered on nonjoint lines, the
strand shall be bonded to an existing ground listed in paragraph (m)(4)
of this section as close as possible to the crossing. This bonding is
not required where crossings are made on a common crossing pole unless
there is an upward change in grade at the pole.
(iii) Where roller-type bonds are used, they shall be restrained so
as to avoid stressing the electrical connections.
(iv) Bonds between the suspension strand and the existing ground
shall be at least No. 6AWG copper.
(v) Temporary bonds shall be left in place until the strand has been
tensioned, dead-ended, and permanently grounded.
(vi) The requirements of paragraphs (m)(6)(i) through (m)(6)(v) of
this section do not apply to the installation of insulated strand.
(7) Antenna work-radio transmitting stations 3-30 MHZ. (i) Prior to
grounding a radio transmitting station antenna, the employer shall
insure that the rigger in charge:
(A) Prepares a danger tag signed with his signature,
(B) Requests the transmitting technician to shutdown the transmitter
and to ground the antenna with its grounding switch,
(C) Is notified by the transmitting technician that the transmitter
has been shutdown, and
(D) Tags the antenna ground switch personally in the presence of the
transmitting technician after the antenna has been grounded by the
transmitting technician.
(ii) Power shall not be applied to the antenna, nor shall the
grounding
[[Page 761]]
switch be opened under any circumstances while the tag is affixed.
(iii)(A) Where no grounding switches are provided, grounding sticks
shall be used, one on each side of line, and tags shall be placed on the
grounding sticks, antenna switch, or plate power switch in a conspicuous
place.
(B) When necessary to further reduce excessive radio frequency
pickup, ground sticks or short circuits shall be placed directly on the
transmission lines near the transmitter in addition to the regular
grounding switches.
(C) In other cases, the antenna lines may be disconnected from
ground and the transmitter to reduce pickup at the point in the field.
(iv) All radio frequency line wires shall be tested for pickup with
an insulated probe before they are handled either with bare hands or
with metal tools.
(v) The employer shall insure that the transmitting technician warn
the riggers about adjacent lines which are, or may become energized.
(vi) The employer shall insure that when antenna work has been
completed, the rigger in charge of the job returns to the transmitter,
notifies the transmitting technician in charge that work has been
completed, and personally removes the tag from the antenna ground
switch.
(n) Overhead lines--(1) Handling suspension strand. (i) The employer
shall insure that when handling cable suspension strand which is being
installed on poles carrying exposed energized power conductors,
employees shall wear insulating gloves and shall avoid body contact with
the strand until after it has been tensioned, dead-ended and permanently
grounded.
(ii) The strand shall be restrained against upward movement during
installation:
(A) On joint-use poles, where there is an upward change in grade at
the pole, and
(B) On non-joint-use poles, where the line croses under energized
power conductors.
(2) Need for testing wood poles. Unless temporary guys or braces are
attached, the following poles shall be tested in accordance with
paragraph (n)(3) of this section and determined to be safe before
employees are permitted to climb them:
(i) Dead-end poles, except properly braced or guyed ``Y'' or ``T''
cable junction poles,
(ii) Straight line poles which are not storm guyed and where
adjacent span lengths exceed 165 feet,
(iii) Poles at which there is a downward change in grade and which
are not guyed or braced corner poles or cable junction poles,
(iv) Poles which support only telephone drop wire, and
(v) Poles which carry less than ten communication line wires. On
joint use poles, one power line wire shall be considered as two
communication wires for purposes of this paragraph (n)(2)(v).
(3) Methods for testing wood poles. One of the following methods or
an equivalent method shall be used for testing wood poles:
(i) Rap the pole sharply with a hammer weighing about 3 pounds,
starting near the ground line and continuing upwards circumferentially
around the pole to a height of approximately 6 feet. The hammer will
produce a clear sound and rebound sharply when striking sound wood.
Decay pockets will be indicated by a dull sound and/or a less pronounced
hammer rebound. When decay pockets are indicated, the pole shall be
considered unsafe. Also, prod the pole as near the ground line as
possible using a pole prod or a screwdriver with a blade at least 5
inches long. If substantial decay is encountered, the pole shall be
considered unsafe.
(ii) Apply a horizontal force to the pole and attempt to rock it
back and forth in a direction perpendicular to the line. Caution shall
be exercised to avoid causing power wires to swing together. The force
may be applied either by pushing with a pike pole or pulling with a
rope. If the pole cracks during the test, it shall be considered unsafe.
(4) Unsafe poles or structures. Poles or structures determined to be
unsafe by test or observation may not be climbed until made safe by
guying, bracing or other adequate means. Poles determined to be unsafe
to climb shall, until they are made safe, be tagged in a conspicuous
place to alert and warn all employees of the unsafe condition.
[[Page 762]]
(5) Test requirements for cable suspension strand. (i) Before
attaching a splicing platform to a cable suspension strand, the strand
shall be tested and determined to have strength sufficient to support
the weight of the platform and the employee. Where the strand crosses
above power wires or railroad tracks it may not be tested but shall be
inspected in accordance with paragraph (n)(6) of this section.
(ii) The following method or an equivalent method shall be used for
testing the strength of the strand: A rope, at least three-eighths inch
in diameter, shall be thrown over the strand. On joint lines, the rope
shall be passed over the strand using tree pruner handles or a wire
raising tool. If two employees are present, both shall grip the double
rope and slowly transfer their entire weight to the rope and attempt to
raise themselves off the ground. If only one employee is present, one
end of the rope which has been passed over the strand shall be tied to
the bumper of the truck, or other equally secure anchorage. The employee
then shall grasp the other end of the rope and attempt to raise himself
off the ground.
(6) Inspection of strand. Where strand passes over electric power
wires or railroad tracks, it shall be inspected from an elevated working
position at each pole supporting the span in question. The strand may
not be used to support any splicing platform, scaffold or cable car, if
any of the following conditions exist:
(i) Corrosion so that no galvanizing can be detected,
(ii) One or more wires of the strand are broken,
(iii) Worn spots, or
(iv) Burn marks such as those caused by contact with electric power
wires.
(7) Outside work platforms. Unless adequate railings are provided,
safety straps and body belts shall be used while working on elevated
work platforms such as aerial splicing platforms, pole platforms, ladder
platforms and terminal balconies.
(8) Other elevated locations. Safety straps and body belts shall be
worn when working at elevated positions on poles, towers or similar
structures, which do not have adequately guarded work areas.
(9) Installing and removing wire and cable. Before installing or
removing wire or cable, the pole or structure shall be guyed, braced, or
otherwise supported, as necessary, to prevent failure of the pole or
structure.
(10) Avoiding contact with energized power conductors or equipment.
When cranes, derricks, or other mechanized equipment are used for
setting, moving, or removing poles, all necessary precautions shall be
taken to avoid contact with energized power conductors or equipment.
(11) Handling poles near energized power conductors. (i) Joint use
poles may not be set, moved, or removed where the nominal voltage of
open electrical power conductors exceeds 34.5kV phase to phase (20kV to
ground).
(ii) Poles that are to be placed, moved or removed during heavy
rains, sleet or wet snow in joint lines carrying more than 8.7kV phase
to phase voltage (5kV to ground) shall be guarded or otherwise prevented
from direct contact with overhead energized power conductors.
(iii)(A) In joint lines where the power voltage is greater than 750
volts but less than 34.5kV phase to phase (20 kV to ground), wet poles
being placed, moved or removed shall be insulated with either a rubber
insulating blanket, a fiberglass box guide, or equivalent protective
equipment.
(B) In joint lines where the power voltage is greater than 8.7 kV
phase to phase (5kV to ground) but less than 34.5kV phase to phase (20
kV to ground), dry poles being placed, moved, or removed shall be
insulated with either a rubber insulating blanket, a fiberglass box
guide, or equivalent protective equipment.
(C) Where wet or dry poles are being removed, insulation of the pole
is not required if the pole is cut off 2 feet or more below the lowest
power wire and also cut off near the ground line.
(iv) Insulating gloves shall be worn when handling the pole with
either hands or tools, when there exists a possibility that the pole may
contact a power conductor. Where the voltage to ground of the power
conductor exceeds
[[Page 763]]
15kV to ground, Class II gloves (as defined in ANSI J6.6-1971) shall be
used. For voltages not exceeding 15kV to ground, insulating gloves shall
have a breakdown voltage of at least 17kV.
(v) The guard or insulating material used to protect the pole shall
meet the appropriate 3 minute proof test voltage requirements contained
in the ANSI J6.4-1971.
(vi) When there exists a possibility of contact between the pole or
the vehicle-mounted equipment used to handle the pole, and an energized
power conductor, the following precautions shall be observed:
(A) When on the vehicle which carries the derrick, avoid all contact
with the ground, with persons standing on the ground, and with all
grounded objects such as guys, tree limbs, or metal sign posts. To the
extent feasible, remain on the vehicle as long as the possibility of
contact exists.
(B) When it is necessary to leave the vehicle, step onto an
insulating blanket and break all contact with the vehicle before
stepping off the blanket and onto the ground. As a last resort, if a
blanket is not available, the employee may jump cleanly from the
vehicle.
(C) When it is necessary to enter the vehicle, first step onto an
insulating blanket and break all contact with the ground, grounded
objects and other persons before touching the truck or derrick.
(12) Working position on poles. Climbing and working are prohibited
above the level of the lowest electric power conducter on the pole
(exclusive of vertical runs and street light wiring), except:
(i) Where communications facilities are attached above the electric
power conductors, and a rigid fixed barrier is installed between the
electric power facility and the communications facility, or
(ii) Where the electric power conductors are cabled secondary
service drops carrying less than 300 volts to ground and are attached 40
inches or more below the communications conductors or cables.
(13) Metal tapes and ropes. (i) Metal measuring tapes, metal
measuring ropes, or tapes containing conductive strands may not be used
when working near exposed energized parts.
(ii) Where it is necessary to measure clearances from energized
parts, only nonconductive devices shall be used.
(o) Underground lines. The provisions of this paragraph apply to the
guarding of manholes and street openings, and to the ventilation and
testing for gas in manholes and unvented vaults, where
telecommunications field work is performed on or with underground lines.
(1) Guarding manholes and street openings. (i) When covers of
manholes or vaults are removed, the opening shall be promptly guarded by
a railing, temporary cover, or other suitable temporary barrier which is
appropriate to prevent an accidental fall through the opening and to
protect employees working in the manhole from foreign objects entering
the manhole.
(ii) While work is being performed in the manhole, a person with
basic first aid training shall be immediately available to render
assistance if there is cause for believing that a safety hazard exists,
and if the requirements contained in paragraphs (d)(1) and (o)(1)(i) of
this section do not adequately protect the employee(s). Examples of
manhole worksite hazards which shall be considered to constitute a
safety hazard include, but are not limited to:
(A) Manhole worksites where safety hazards are created by traffic
patterns that cannot be corrected by provisions of paragraph (d)(1) of
this section.
(B) Manhole worksites that are subject to unusual water hazards that
cannot be abated by conventional means.
(C) Manhole worksites that are occupied jointly with power utilities
as described in paragraph (o)(3) of this section.
(2) Requirements prior to entering manholes and unvented vaults. (i)
Before an employee enters a manhole, the following steps shall be taken:
(A) The internal atmosphere shall be tested for combustible gas and,
except when continuous forced ventilation is provided, the atmosphere
shall also be tested for oxygen deficiency.
(B) When unsafe conditions are detected by testing or other means,
the work area shall be ventilated and otherwise made safe before entry.
[[Page 764]]
(ii) An adequate continuous supply of air shall be provided while
work is performed in manholes under any of the following conditions:
(A) Where combustible or explosive gas vapors have been initially
detected and subsequently reduced to a safe level by ventilation,
(B) Where organic solvents are used in the work procedure,
(C) Where open flame torches are used in the work procedure,
(D) Where the manhole is located in that portion of a public right
of way open to vehicular traffic and/or exposed to a seepage of gas or
gases, or
(E) Where a toxic gas or oxygen deficiency is found.
(iii)(A) The requirements of paragraphs (o)(2) (i) and (ii) of this
section do not apply to work in central office cable vaults that are
adequately ventilated.
(B) The requirements of paragraphs (o)(2) (i) and (ii) of this
section apply to work in unvented vaults.
(3) Joint power and telecommunication manholes. While work is being
performed in a manhole occupied jointly by an electric utility and a
telecommunication utility, an employee with basic first aid training
shall be available in the immediate vicinity to render emergency
assistance as may be required. The employee whose presence is required
in the immediate vicinity for the purposes of rendering emergency
assistance is not to be precluded from occasionally entering a manhole
to provide assistance other than in an emergency. The requirement of
this paragraph (o)(3) does not preclude a qualified employee, working
alone, from entering for brief periods of time, a manhole where
energized cables or equipment are in service, for the purpose of
inspection, housekeeping, taking readings, or similar work if such work
can be performed safely.
(4) Ladders. Ladders shall be used to enter and exit manholes
exceeding 4 feet in depth.
(5) Flames. When open flames are used in manholes, the following
precautions shall be taken to protect against the accumulation of
combustible gas:
(i) A test for combustible gas shall be made immediately before
using the open flame device, and at least once per hour while using the
device; and
(ii) a fuel tank (e.g., acetylene) may not be in the manhole unless
in actual use.
(p) Microwave transmission--(1) Eye protection. Employers shall
insure that employees do not look into an open waveguide which is
connected to an energized source of microwave radiation.
(2) Hazardous area. Accessible areas associated with microwave
communication systems where the electromagnetic radiation level exceeds
the radiation protection guide given in Sec. 1910.97 shall be posted as
described in that section. The lower half of the warning symbol shall
include the following:
Radiation in this area may exceed hazard limitations and special
precautions are required. Obtain specific instruction before entering.
(3) Protective measures. When an employee works in an area where the
electromagnetic radiation exceeds the radiation protection guide, the
employer shall institute measures that insure that the employee's
exposure is not greater than that permitted by the radiation guide. Such
measures shall include, but not be limited to those of an administrative
or engineering nature or those involving personal protective equipment.
(q) Tree trimming--electrical hazards--(1) General. (i) Employees
engaged in pruning, trimming, removing, or clearing trees from lines
shall be required to consider all overhead and underground electrical
power conductors to be energized with potentially fatal voltages, never
to be touched (contacted) either directly or indirectly.
(ii) Employees engaged in line-clearing operations shall be
instructed that:
(A) A direct contact is made when any part of the body touches or
contacts an energized conductor, or other energized electrical fixture
or apparatus.
(B) An indirect contact is made when any part of the body touches
any object in contact with an energized electrical conductor, or other
energized fixture or apparatus.
(C) An indirect contact can be made through conductive tools, tree
branches, trucks, equipment, or other
[[Page 765]]
objects, or as a result of communications wires, cables, fences, or guy
wires being accidentally energized.
(D) Electric shock will occur when an employee, by either direct or
indirect contact with an energized conductor, energized tree limb, tool,
equipment, or other object, provides a path for the flow of electricity
to a grounded object or to the ground itself. Simultaneous contact with
two energized conductors will also cause electric shock which may result
in serious or fatal injury.
(iii) Before any work is performed in proximity to energized
conductors, the system operator/owner of the energized conductors shall
be contacted to ascertain if he knows of any hazards associated with the
conductors which may not be readily apparent. This rule does not apply
when operations are performed by or on behalf of, the system operator/
owner.
(2) Working in proximity to electrical hazards. (i) Employers shall
ensure that a close inspection is made by the employee and by the
foremen or supervisor in charge before climbing, entering, or working
around any tree, to determine whether an electrical power conductor
passes through the tree, or passes within reaching distance of an
employee working in the tree. If any of these conditions exist either
directly or indirectly, an electrical hazard shall be considered to
exist unless the system operator/owner has caused the hazard to be
removed by deenergizing the lines, or installing protective equipment.
(ii) Only qualified employees or trainees, familiar with the special
techniques and hazards involved in line clearance, shall be permitted to
perform the work if it is found that an electrical hazard exists.
(iii) During all tree working operations aloft where an electrical
hazard of more than 750V exists, there shall be a second employee or
trainee qualified in line clearance tree trimming within normal voice
communication.
(iv) Where tree work is performed by employees qualified in line-
clearance tree trimming and trainees qualified in line-clearance tree
trimming, the clearances from energized conductors given in Table R-3
shall apply.
Table R-3--Minimum Working Distances From Energized Conductors for Line-
Clearance Tree Trimmers and Line-Clearance Tree-Trimmer Trainees
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage range (phase to phase) (kilovolts) Minimum working distance
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.1 to 15.0................................ 2 ft. 0 in.
15.1 to 35.0............................... 2 ft. 4 in.
35.1 to 46.0............................... 2 ft. 6 in.
46.1 to 72.5............................... 3 ft. 0 in.
72.6 to 121.0.............................. 3 ft. 4 in.
138.0 to 145.0............................. 3 ft. 6 in.
161.0 to 169.0............................. 3 ft. 8 in.
230.0 to 242.0............................. 5 ft. 0 in.
345.0 to 362.0............................. 7 ft. 0 in.
500.0 to 552.0............................. 11 ft. 0 in.
700.0 to 765.0............................. 15 ft. 0 in.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(v) Branches hanging on an energized conductor may only be removed
using appropriately insulated equipment.
(vi) Rubber footwear, including lineman's overshoes, shall not be
considered as providing any measure of safety from electrical hazards.
(vii) Ladders, platforms, and aerial devices, including insulated
aerial devices, may not be brought in contact with an electrical
conductor. Reliance shall not be placed on their dielectric
capabilities.
(viii) When an aerial lift device contacts an electrical conductor,
the truck supporting the aerial lift device shall be considered as
energized.
(3) Storm work and emergency conditions. (i) Since storm work and
emergency conditions create special hazards, only authorized
representatives of the electric utility system operator/owner and not
telecommunication workers may perform tree work in these situations
where energized electrical power conductors are involved.
(ii) When an emergency condition develops due to tree operations,
work shall be suspended and the system operator/owner shall be notified
immediately.
(r) Buried facilities--Communications lines and power lines in the
same trench. [Reserved]
(s) Definitions--(1) Aerial lifts. Aerial lifts include the
following types of vehicle-mounted aerial devices used to elevate
personnel to jobsites above ground:
(i) Extensible boom platforms,
(ii) Aerial ladders,
(iii) Articulating boom platforms,
[[Page 766]]
(iv) Vertical towers,
(v) A combination of any of the above defined in ANSI A92.2-1969,
which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6. These
devices are made of metal, wood, fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP), or
other material; are powered or manually operated; and are deemed to be
aerial lifts whether or not they are capable of rotating about a
substantially vertical axis.
(2) Aerial splicing platform. This consists of a platform,
approximately 3 ft. x 4 ft., used to perform aerial cable work. It is
furnished with fiber or synthetic ropes for supporting the platform from
aerial strand, detachable guy ropes for anchoring it, and a device for
raising and lowering it with a handline.
(3) Aerial tent. A small tent usually constructed of vinyl coated
canvas which is usually supported by light metal or plastic tubing. It
is designed to protect employees in inclement weather while working on
ladders, aerial splicing platforms, or aerial devices.
(4) Alive or live (energized). Electrically connected to a source of
potential difference, or electrically charged so as to have a potential
significantly different from that of the earth in the vicinity. The term
live is sometimes used in the place of the term current-carrying, where
the intent is clear, to avoid repetition of the longer term.
(5) Barricade. A physical obstruction such as tapes, cones, or ``A''
frame type wood and/or metal structure intended to warn and limit access
to a work area.
(6) Barrier. A physical obstruction which is intended to prevent
contact with energized lines or equipment, or to prevent unauthorized
access to work area.
(7) Bond. An electrical connection from one conductive element to
another for the purpose of minimizing potential differences or providing
suitable conductivity for fault current or for mitigation of leakage
current and electrolytic action.
(8) Cable. A conductor with insulation, or a stranded conductor with
or without insulation and other coverings (single-conductor cable), or a
combination of conductors insulated from one another (multiple-conductor
cable).
(9) Cable sheath. A protective covering applied to cables.
Note: A cable sheath may consist of multiple layers of which one or
more is conductive.
(10) Circuit. A conductor or system of conductors through which an
electric current is intended to flow.
(11) Communication lines. The conductors and their supporting or
containing structures for telephone, telegraph, railroad signal, data,
clock, fire, police-alarm, community television antenna and other
systems which are used for public or private signal or communication
service, and which operate at potentials not exceeding 400 volts to
ground or 750 volts between any two points of the circuit, and the
transmitted power of which does not exceed 150 watts. When
communications lines operate at less than 150 volts to ground, no limit
is placed on the capacity of the system. Specifically designed
communications cables may include communication circuits not complying
with the preceding limitations, where such circuits are also used
incidentally to supply power to communication equipment.
(12) Conductor. A material, usually in the form of a wire, cable, or
bus bar, suitable for carrying an electric current.
(13) Effectively grounded. Intentionally connected to earth through
a ground connection or connections of sufficiently low impedance and
having sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent the build-up of
voltages which may result in undue hazard to connected equipment or to
persons.
(14) Equipment. A general term which includes materials, fittings,
devices, appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and similar items used as part
of, or in connection with, a supply or communications installation.
(15) Ground (reference). That conductive body, usually earth, to
which an electric potential is referenced.
(16) Ground (as a noun). A conductive connection, whether
intentional or accidental, by which an electric circuit or equipment is
connected to reference ground.
[[Page 767]]
(17) Ground (as a verb). The connecting or establishment of a
connection, whether by intention or accident, of an electric circuit or
equipment to reference ground.
(18) Ground tent. A small tent usually constructed of vinyl coated
canvas supported by a metal or plastic frame. Its purpose is to protect
employees from inclement weather while working at buried cable pedestal
sites or similar locations.
(19) Grounded conductor. A system or circuit conductor which is
intentionally grounded.
(20) Grounded systems. A system of conductors in which at least one
conductor or point (usually the middle wire, or the neutral point of
transformer or generator windings) is intentionally grounded, either
solidly or through a current-limiting device (not a current-interrupting
device).
(21) Grounding electrode conductor. (Grounding conductor). A
conductor used to connect equipment or the grounded circuit of a wiring
system to a grounding electrode.
(22) Insulated. Separated from other conducting surfaces by a
dielectric substance (including air space) offering a high resistance to
the passage of current.
Note: When any object is said to be insulated, it is understood to
be insulated in suitable manner for the conditions to which it is
subjected. Otherwise, it is, within the purpose of these rules,
uninsulated. Insulating coverings of conductors in one means of making
the conductor insulated.
(23) Insulation (as applied to cable). That which is relied upon to
insulate the conductor from other conductors or conducting parts or from
ground.
(24) Joint use. The sharing of a common facility, such as a manhole,
trench or pole, by two or more different kinds of utilities (e.g., power
and telecommunications).
(25) Ladder platform. A device designed to facilitate working aloft
from an extension ladder. A typical device consists of a platform
(approximately 9 x 18) hinged to a welded pipe
frame. The rear edge of the platform and the bottom cross-member of the
frame are equipped with latches to lock the platform to ladder rungs.
(26) Ladder seat. A removable seat used to facilitate work at an
elevated position on rolling ladders in telecommunication centers.
(27) Manhole. A subsurface enclosure which personnel may enter and
which is used for the purpose of installing, operating, and maintaining
submersible equipment and/or cable.
(28) Manhole platform. A platform consisting of separate planks
which are laid across steel platform supports. The ends of the supports
are engaged in the manhole cable racks.
(29) Microwave transmission. The act of communicating or signaling
utilizing a frequency between 1 GHz (gigahertz) and 300
GHz inclusively.
(30) Nominal voltage. The nominal voltage of a system or circuit is
the value assigned to a system or circuit of a given voltage class for
the purpose of convenient designation. The actual voltage may vary above
or below this value.
(31) Pole balcony or seat. A balcony or seat used as a support for
workmen at pole-mounted equipment or terminal boxes. A typical device
consists of a bolted assembly of steel details and a wooden platform.
Steel braces run from the pole to the underside of the balcony. A guard
rail (approximately 30 high) may be provided.
(32) Pole platform. A platform intended for use by a workman in
splicing and maintenance operations in an elevated position adjacent to
a pole. It consists of a platform equipped at one end with a hinged
chain binder for securing the platform to a pole. A brace from the pole
to the underside of the platform is also provided.
(33) Qualified employee. Any worker who by reason of his training
and experience has demonstrated his ability to safely perform his
duties.
(34) Qualified line-clearance tree trimmer. A tree worker who
through related training and on-the-job experience is familar with the
special techniques and hazards involved in line clearance.
(35) Qualified line-clearance tree-trimmer trainee. Any worker
regularly assigned to a line-clearance tree-trimming crew and undergoing
on-the-job training who, in the course of such training, has
demonstrated his ability to perform his duties safely at his level of
training.
[[Page 768]]
(36) System operator/owner. The person or organization that operates
or controls the electrical conductors involved.
(37) Telecommunications center. An installation of communication
equipment under the exclusive control of an organization providing
telecommunications service, that is located outdoors or in a vault,
chamber, or a building space used primarily for such installations.
Note: Telecommunication centers are facilities established, equipped
and arranged in accordance with engineered plans for the purpose of
providing telecommunications service. They may be located on premises
owned or leased by the organization providing telecommunication service,
or on the premises owned or leased by others. This definition includes
switch rooms (whether electromechanical, electronic, or computer
controlled), terminal rooms, power rooms, repeater rooms, transmitter
and receiver rooms, switchboard operating rooms, cable vaults, and
miscellaneous communications equipment rooms. Simulation rooms of
telecommunication centers for training or developmental purposes are
also included.
(38) Telecommunications derricks. Rotating or nonrotating derrick
structures permanently mounted on vehicles for the purpose of lifting,
lowering, or positioning hardware and materials used in
telecommunications work.
(39) Telecommunication line truck. A truck used to transport men,
tools, and material, and to serve as a traveling workshop for
telecommunication installation and maintenance work. It is sometimes
equipped with a boom and auxiliary equipment for setting poles, digging
holes, and elevating material or men.
(40) Telecommunication service. The furnishing of a capability to
signal or communicate at a distance by means such as telephone,
telegraph, police and firealarm, community antenna television, or
similar system, using wire, conventional cable, coaxial cable, wave
guides, microwave transmission, or other similar means.
(41) Unvented vault. An enclosed vault in which the only openings
are access openings.
(42) Vault. An enclosure above or below ground which personnel may
enter, and which is used for the purpose of installing, operating, and/
or maintaining equipment and/or cable which need not be of submersible
design.
(43) Vented vault. An enclosure as described in paragraph(s) (42) of
this section, with provision for air changes using exhaust flue stack(s)
and low level air intake(s), operating on differentials of pressure and
temperature providing for air flow.
(44) Voltage of an effectively grounded circuit. The voltage between
any conductor and ground unless otherwise indicated.
(45) Voltage of a circuit not effectively grounded. The voltage
between any two conductors. If one circuit is directly connected to and
supplied from another circuit of higher voltage (as in the case of an
autotransformer), both are considered as of the higher voltage, unless
the circuit of lower voltage is effectively grounded, in which case its
voltage is not determined by the circuit of higher voltage. Direct
connection implies electric connection as distinguished from connection
merely through electromagnetic or electrostatic induction.
[40 FR 13441, Mar. 26, 1975, as amended at 43 FR 49751, Oct. 24, 1978;
47 FR 14706, Apr. 6, 1982; 52 FR 36387, Sept. 28, 1987; 54 FR 24334,
June 7, 1989; 61 FR 9242, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998]
Sec. 1910.269 Electric power generation, transmission, and distribution.
Note: OSHA is staying the enforcement of the following paragraphs of
Sec. 1910.269 until November 1, 1994: (b)(1)(ii), (d) except for
(d)(2)(i) and (d)(2)(iii), (e)(2), (e)(3), (j)(2)(iii), (l)(6)(iii),
(m), (n)(3), (n)(4)(ii), (n)(8), (o) except for (o)(2)(i), (r)(1)(vi),
(u)(1), (u)(4), (u)(5). OSHA is also staying the enforcement of
paragraphs (n)(6) and (n)(7) of Sec. 1910.269 until November 1, 1994,
but only insofar as they apply to lines and equipment operated at 600
volts or less. Further, OSHA is staying the enforcement of paragraph
(v)(11)(xii) of Sec. 1910.269 until Februrary 1, 1996.
(a) General--(1) Application. (i) This section covers the operation
and maintenance of electric power generation, control, transformation,
transmission, and distribution lines and equipment. These provisions
apply to:
(A) Power generation, transmission, and distribution installations,
including related equipment for the purpose of communication or
metering, which are accessible only to qualified employees;
[[Page 769]]
Note: The types of installations covered by this paragraph include
the generation, transmission, and distribution installations of electric
utilities, as well as equivalent installations of industrial
establishments. Supplementary electric generating equipment that is used
to supply a workplace for emergency, standby, or similar purposes only
is covered under subpart S of this part. (See paragraph (a)(1)(ii)(B) of
this section.)
(B) Other installations at an electric power generating station, as
follows:
(1) Fuel and ash handling and processing installations, such as coal
conveyors,
(2) Water and steam installations, such as penstocks, pipelines, and
tanks, providing a source of energy for electric generators, and
(3) Chlorine and hydrogen systems;
(C) Test sites where electrical testing involving temporary
measurements associated with electric power generation, transmission,
and distribution is performed in laboratories, in the field, in
substations, and on lines, as opposed to metering, relaying, and routine
line work;
(D) Work on or directly associated with the installations covered in
paragraphs (a)(1)(i)(A) through (a)(1)(i)(C) of this section; and
(E) Line-clearance tree-trimming operations, as follows:
(1) Entire Sec. 1910.269 of this part, except paragraph (r)(1) of
this section, applies to line-clearance tree-trimming operations
performed by qualified employees (those who are knowledgeable in the
construction and operation of electric power generation, transmission,
or distribution equipment involved, along with the associated hazards).
(2) Paragraphs (a)(2), (b), (c), (g), (k), (p), and (r) of this
section apply to line-clearance tree-trimming operations performed by
line-clearance tree trimmers who are not qualified employees.
(ii) Notwithstanding paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section,
Sec. 1910.269 of this part does not apply:
(A) To construction work, as defined in Sec. 1910.12 of this part;
or
(B) To electrical installations, electrical safety-related work
practices, or electrical maintenance considerations covered by subpart S
of this part.
Note 1: Work practices conforming to Secs. 1910.332 through 1910.335
of this part are considered as complying with the electrical safety-
related work practice requirements of this section identified in Table 1
of appendix A-2 to this section, provided the work is being performed on
a generation or distribution installation meeting Secs. 1910.303 through
1910.308 of this part. This table also identifies provisions in this
section that apply to work by qualified persons directly on or
associated with installations of electric power generation,
transmission, and distribution lines or equipment, regardless of
compliance with Secs. 1910.332 through 1910.335 of this part.
Note 2: Work practices performed by qualified persons and conforming
to Sec. 1910.269 of this part are considered as complying with
Secs. 1910.333(c) and 1910.335 of this part.
(iii) This section applies in addition to all other applicable
standards contained in this part 1910. Specific references in this
section to other sections of part 1910 are provided for emphasis only.
(2) Training. (i) Employees shall be trained in and familiar with
the safety-related work practices, safety procedures, and other safety
requirements in this section that pertain to their respective job
assignments. Employees shall also be trained in and familiar with any
other safety practices, including applicable emergency procedures (such
as pole top and manhole rescue), that are not specifically addressed by
this section but that are related to their work and are necessary for
their safety.
(ii) Qualified employees shall also be trained and competent in:
(A) The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live
parts from other parts of electric equipment,
(B) The skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal
voltage of exposed live parts,
(C) The minimum approach distances specified in this section
corresponding to the voltages to which the qualified employee will be
exposed, and
(D) The proper use of the special precautionary techniques, personal
protective equipment, insulating and shielding materials, and insulated
tools for working on or near exposed energized parts of electric
equipment.
Note: For the purposes of this section, a person must have this
training in order to be considered a qualified person.
(iii) The employer shall determine, through regular supervision and
through inspections conducted on at
[[Page 770]]
least an annual basis, that each employee is complying with the safety-
related work practices required by this section.
(iv) An employee shall receive additional training (or retraining)
under any of the following conditions:
(A) If the supervision and annual inspections required by paragraph
(a)(2)(iii) of this section indicate that the employee is not complying
with the safety-related work practices required by this section, or
(B) If new technology, new types of equipment, or changes in
procedures necessitate the use of safety-related work practices that are
different from those which the employee would normally use, or
(C) If he or she must employ safety-related work practices that are
not normally used during his or her regular job duties.
Note: OSHA would consider tasks that are performed less often than
once per year to necessitate retraining before the performance of the
work practices involved.
(v) The training required by paragraph (a)(2) of this section shall
be of the classroom or on-the-job type.
(vi) The training shall establish employee proficiency in the work
practices required by this section and shall introduce the procedures
necessary for compliance with this section.
(vii) The employer shall certify that each employee has received the
training required by paragraph (a)(2) of this section. This
certification shall be made when the employee demonstrates proficiency
in the work practices involved and shall be maintained for the duration
of the employee's employment.
Note: Employment records that indicate that an employee has received
the required training are an acceptable means of meeting this
requirement.
(3) Existing conditions. Existing conditions related to the safety
of the work to be performed shall be determined before work on or near
electric lines or equipment is started. Such conditions include, but are
not limited to, the nominal voltages of lines and equipment, the maximum
switching transient voltages, the presence of hazardous induced
voltages, the presence and condition of protective grounds and equipment
grounding conductors, the condition of poles, environmental conditions
relative to safety, and the locations of circuits and equipment,
including power and communication lines and fire protective signaling
circuits.
(b) Medical services and first aid. The employer shall provide
medical services and first aid as required in Sec. 1910.151 of this
part. In addition to the requirements of Sec. 1910.151 of this part, the
following requirements also apply:
(1) Cardiopulmonary resuscitation and first aid training. When
employees are performing work on or associated with exposed lines or
equipment energized at 50 volts or more, persons trained in first aid
including cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) shall be available as
follows:
(i) For field work involving two or more employees at a work
location, at least two trained persons shall be available. However, only
one trained person need be available if all new employees are trained in
first aid, including CPR, within 3 months of their hiring dates.
(ii) For fixed work locations such as generating stations, the
number of trained persons available shall be sufficient to ensure that
each employee exposed to electric shock can be reached within 4 minutes
by a trained person. However, where the existing number of employees is
insufficient to meet this requirement (at a remote substation, for
example), all employees at the work location shall be trained.
(2) First aid supplies. First aid supplies required by
Sec. 1910.151(b) of this part shall be placed in weatherproof containers
if the supplies could be exposed to the weather.
(3) First aid kits. Each first aid kit shall be maintained, shall be
readily available for use, and shall be inspected frequently enough to
ensure that expended items are replaced but at least once per year.
(c) Job briefing. The employer shall ensure that the employee in
charge conducts a job briefing with the employees involved before they
start each job. The briefing shall cover at least the following
subjects: hazards associated with the job, work procedures involved,
special precautions, energy
[[Page 771]]
source controls, and personal protective equipment requirements.
(1) Number of briefings. If the work or operations to be performed
during the work day or shift are repetitive and similar, at least one
job briefing shall be conducted before the start of the first job of
each day or shift. Additional job briefings shall be held if significant
changes, which might affect the safety of the employees, occur during
the course of the work.
(2) Extent of briefing. A brief discussion is satisfactory if the
work involved is routine and if the employee, by virtue of training and
experience, can reasonably be expected to recognize and avoid the
hazards involved in the job. A more extensive discussion shall be
conducted:
(i) If the work is complicated or particularly hazardous, or
(ii) If the employee cannot be expected to recognize and avoid the
hazards involved in the job.
Note: The briefing is always required to touch on all the subjects
listed in the introductory text to paragraph (c) of this section.
(3) Working alone. An employee working alone need not conduct a job
briefing. However, the employer shall ensure that the tasks to be
performed are planned as if a briefing were required.
(d) Hazardous energy control (lockout/tagout) procedures--(1)
Application. The provisions of paragraph (d) of this section apply to
the use of lockout/tagout procedures for the control of energy sources
in installations for the purpose of electric power generation, including
related equipment for communication or metering. Locking and tagging
procedures for the deenergizing of electric energy sources which are
used exclusively for purposes of transmission and distribution are
addressed by paragraph (m) of this section.
Note 1: Installations in electric power generation facilities that
are not an integral part of, or inextricably commingled with, power
generation processes or equipment are covered under Sec. 1910.147 and
subpart S of this part.
Note 2: Lockout and tagging procedures that comply with paragraphs
(c) through (f) of Sec. 1910.147 of this part will also be deemed to
comply with paragraph (d) of this section if the procedures address the
hazards covered by paragraph (d) of this section.
(2) General. (i) The employer shall establish a program consisting
of energy control procedures, employee training, and periodic
inspections to ensure that, before any employee performs any servicing
or maintenance on a machine or equipment where the unexpected
energizing, start up, or release of stored energy could occur and cause
injury, the machine or equipment is isolated from the energy source and
rendered inoperative.
(ii) The employer's energy control program under paragraph (d)(2) of
this section shall meet the following requirements:
(A) If an energy isolating device is not capable of being locked
out, the employer's program shall use a tagout system.
(B) If an energy isolating device is capable of being locked out,
the employer's program shall use lockout, unless the employer can
demonstrate that the use of a tagout system will provide full employee
protection as follows:
(1) When a tagout device is used on an energy isolating device which
is capable of being locked out, the tagout device shall be attached at
the same location that the lockout device would have been attached, and
the employer shall demonstrate that the tagout program will provide a
level of safety equivalent to that obtained by the use of a lockout
program.
(2) In demonstrating that a level of safety is achieved in the
tagout program equivalent to the level of safety obtained by the use of
a lockout program, the employer shall demonstrate full compliance with
all tagout-related provisions of this standard together with such
additional elements as are necessary to provide the equivalent safety
available from the use of a lockout device. Additional means to be
considered as part of the demonstration of full employee protection
shall include the implementation of additional safety measures such as
the removal of an isolating circuit element, blocking of a controlling
switch, opening of an extra disconnecting device, or the removal of a
valve handle to reduce the likelihood of inadvertent energizing.
[[Page 772]]
(C) After November 1, 1994, whenever replacement or major repair,
renovation, or modification of a machine or equipment is performed, and
whenever new machines or equipment are installed, energy isolating
devices for such machines or equipment shall be designed to accept a
lockout device.
(iii) Procedures shall be developed, documented, and used for the
control of potentially hazardous energy covered by paragraph (d) of this
section.
(iv) The procedure shall clearly and specifically outline the scope,
purpose, responsibility, authorization, rules, and techniques to be
applied to the control of hazardous energy, and the measures to enforce
compliance including, but not limited to, the following:
(A) A specific statement of the intended use of this procedure;
(B) Specific procedural steps for shutting down, isolating, blocking
and securing machines or equipment to control hazardous energy;
(C) Specific procedural steps for the placement, removal, and
transfer of lockout devices or tagout devices and the responsibility for
them; and
(D) Specific requirements for testing a machine or equipment to
determine and verify the effectiveness of lockout devices, tagout
devices, and other energy control measures.
(v) The employer shall conduct a periodic inspection of the energy
control procedure at least annually to ensure that the procedure and the
provisions of paragraph (d) of this section are being followed.
(A) The periodic inspection shall be performed by an authorized
employee who is not using the energy control procedure being inspected.
(B) The periodic inspection shall be designed to identify and
correct any deviations or inadequacies.
(C) If lockout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection
shall include a review, between the inspector and each authorized
employee, of that employee's responsibilities under the energy control
procedure being inspected.
(D) Where tagout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection
shall include a review, between the inspector and each authorized and
affected employee, of that employee's responsibilities under the energy
control procedure being inspected, and the elements set forth in
paragraph (d)(2)(vii) of this section.
(E) The employer shall certify that the inspections required by
paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section have been accomplished. The
certification shall identify the machine or equipment on which the
energy control procedure was being used, the date of the inspection, the
employees included in the inspection, and the person performing the
inspection.
Note: If normal work schedule and operation records demonstrate
adequate inspection activity and contain the required information, no
additional certification is required.
(vi) The employer shall provide training to ensure that the purpose
and function of the energy control program are understood by employees
and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application,
usage, and removal of energy controls are acquired by employees. The
training shall include the following:
(A) Each authorized employee shall receive training in the
recognition of applicable hazardous energy sources, the type and
magnitude of energy available in the workplace, and in the methods and
means necessary for energy isolation and control.
(B) Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose and
use of the energy control procedure.
(C) All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an
area where energy control procedures may be used shall be instructed
about the procedures and about the prohibition relating to attempts to
restart or reenergize machines or equipment that are locked out or
tagged out.
(vii) When tagout systems are used, employees shall also be trained
in the following limitations of tags:
(A) Tags are essentially warning devices affixed to energy isolating
devices and do not provide the physical restraint on those devices that
is provided by a lock.
(B) When a tag is attached to an energy isolating means, it is not
to be removed without authorization of the authorized person responsible
for it, and it is never to be bypassed, ignored, or otherwise defeated.
[[Page 773]]
(C) Tags must be legible and understandable by all authorized
employees, affected employees, and all other employees whose work
operations are or may be in the area, in order to be effective.
(D) Tags and their means of attachment must be made of materials
which will withstand the environmental conditions encountered in the
workplace.
(E) Tags may evoke a false sense of security, and their meaning
needs to be understood as part of the overall energy control program.
(F) Tags must be securely attached to energy isolating devices so
that they cannot be inadvertently or accidentally detached during use.
(viii) Retraining shall be provided by the employer as follows:
(A) Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected
employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a change
in machines, equipment, or processes that present a new hazard or
whenever there is a change in the energy control procedures.
(B) Retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic
inspection under paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section reveals, or
whenever the employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations
from or inadequacies in an employee's knowledge or use of the energy
control procedures.
(C) The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and shall
introduce new or revised control methods and procedures, as necessary.
(ix) The employer shall certify that employee training has been
accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall
contain each employee's name and dates of training.
(3) Protective materials and hardware. (i) Locks, tags, chains,
wedges, key blocks, adapter pins, self-locking fasteners, or other
hardware shall be provided by the employer for isolating, securing, or
blocking of machines or equipment from energy sources.
(ii) Lockout devices and tagout devices shall be singularly
identified; shall be the only devices used for controlling energy; may
not be used for other purposes; and shall meet the following
requirements:
(A) Lockout devices and tagout devices shall be capable of
withstanding the environment to which they are exposed for the maximum
period of time that exposure is expected.
(1) Tagout devices shall be constructed and printed so that exposure
to weather conditions or wet and damp locations will not cause the tag
to deteriorate or the message on the tag to become illegible.
(2) Tagout devices shall be so constructed as not to deteriorate
when used in corrosive environments.
(B) Lockout devices and tagout devices shall be standardized within
the facility in at least one of the following criteria: color, shape,
size. Additionally, in the case of tagout devices, print and format
shall be standardized.
(C) Lockout devices shall be substantial enough to prevent removal
without the use of excessive force or unusual techniques, such as with
the use of bolt cutters or metal cutting tools.
(D) Tagout devices, including their means of attachment, shall be
substantial enough to prevent inadvertent or accidental removal. Tagout
device attachment means shall be of a non-reusable type, attachable by
hand, self-locking, and non-releasable with a minimum unlocking strength
of no less than 50 pounds and shall have the general design and basic
characteristics of being at least equivalent to a one-piece, all-
environment-tolerant nylon cable tie.
(E) Each lockout device or tagout device shall include provisions
for the identification of the employee applying the device.
(F) Tagout devices shall warn against hazardous conditions if the
machine or equipment is energized and shall include a legend such as the
following: Do Not Start, Do Not Open, Do Not Close, Do Not Energize, Do
Not Operate.
Note: For specific provisions covering accident prevention tags, see
Sec. 1910.145 of this part.
(4) Energy isolation. Lockout and tagout device application and
removal may only be performed by the authorized employees who are
performing the servicing or maintenance.
[[Page 774]]
(5) Notification. Affected employees shall be notified by the
employer or authorized employee of the application and removal of
lockout or tagout devices. Notification shall be given before the
controls are applied and after they are removed from the machine or
equipment.
Note: See also paragraph (d)(7) of this section, which requires that
the second notification take place before the machine or equipment is
reenergized.
(6) Lockout/tagout application. The established procedures for the
application of energy control (the lockout or tagout procedures) shall
include the following elements and actions, and these procedures shall
be performed in the following sequence:
(i) Before an authorized or affected employee turns off a machine or
equipment, the authorized employee shall have knowledge of the type and
magnitude of the energy, the hazards of the energy to be controlled, and
the method or means to control the energy.
(ii) The machine or equipment shall be turned off or shut down using
the procedures established for the machine or equipment. An orderly
shutdown shall be used to avoid any additional or increased hazards to
employees as a result of the equipment stoppage.
(iii) All energy isolating devices that are needed to control the
energy to the machine or equipment shall be physically located and
operated in such a manner as to isolate the machine or equipment from
energy sources.
(iv) Lockout or tagout devices shall be affixed to each energy
isolating device by authorized employees.
(A) Lockout devices shall be attached in a manner that will hold the
energy isolating devices in a ``safe'' or ``off'' position.
(B) Tagout devices shall be affixed in such a manner as will clearly
indicate that the operation or movement of energy isolating devices from
the ``safe'' or ``off'' position is prohibited.
(1) Where tagout devices are used with energy isolating devices
designed with the capability of being locked out, the tag attachment
shall be fastened at the same point at which the lock would have been
attached.
(2) Where a tag cannot be affixed directly to the energy isolating
device, the tag shall be located as close as safely possible to the
device, in a position that will be immediately obvious to anyone
attempting to operate the device.
(v) Following the application of lockout or tagout devices to energy
isolating devices, all potentially hazardous stored or residual energy
shall be relieved, disconnected, restrained, or otherwise rendered safe.
(vi) If there is a possibility of reaccumulation of stored energy to
a hazardous level, verification of isolation shall be continued until
the servicing or maintenance is completed or until the possibility of
such accumulation no longer exists.
(vii) Before starting work on machines or equipment that have been
locked out or tagged out, the authorized employee shall verify that
isolation and deenergizing of the machine or equipment have been
accomplished. If normally energized parts will be exposed to contact by
an employee while the machine or equipment is deenergized, a test shall
be performed to ensure that these parts are deenergized.
(7) Release from lockout/tagout. Before lockout or tagout devices
are removed and energy is restored to the machine or equipment,
procedures shall be followed and actions taken by the authorized
employees to ensure the following:
(i) The work area shall be inspected to ensure that nonessential
items have been removed and that machine or equipment components are
operationally intact.
(ii) The work area shall be checked to ensure that all employees
have been safely positioned or removed.
(iii) After lockout or tagout devices have been removed and before a
machine or equipment is started, affected employees shall be notified
that the lockout or tagout devices have been removed.
(iv) Each lockout or tagout device shall be removed from each energy
isolating device by the authorized employee who applied the lockout or
tagout device. However, if that employee is not available to remove it,
the device may be removed under the direction of the employer, provided
that specific procedures and training for such removal have been
developed, documented, and incorporated into the
[[Page 775]]
employer's energy control program. The employer shall demonstrate that
the specific procedure provides a degree of safety equivalent to that
provided by the removal of the device by the authorized employee who
applied it. The specific procedure shall include at least the following
elements:
(A) Verification by the employer that the authorized employee who
applied the device is not at the facility;
(B) Making all reasonable efforts to contact the authorized employee
to inform him or her that his or her lockout or tagout device has been
removed; and
(C) Ensuring that the authorized employee has this knowledge before
he or she resumes work at that facility.
(8) Additional requirements. (i) If the lockout or tagout devices
must be temporarily removed from energy isolating devices and the
machine or equipment must be energized to test or position the machine,
equipment, or component thereof, the following sequence of actions shall
be followed:
(A) Clear the machine or equipment of tools and materials in
accordance with paragraph (d)(7)(i) of this section;
(B) Remove employees from the machine or equipment area in
accordance with paragraphs (d)(7)(ii) and (d)(7)(iii) of this section;
(C) Remove the lockout or tagout devices as specified in paragraph
(d)(7)(iv) of this section;
(D) Energize and proceed with the testing or positioning; and
(E) Deenergize all systems and reapply energy control measures in
accordance with paragraph (d)(6) of this section to continue the
servicing or maintenance.
(ii) When servicing or maintenance is performed by a crew, craft,
department, or other group, they shall use a procedure which affords the
employees a level of protection equivalent to that provided by the
implementation of a personal lockout or tagout device. Group lockout or
tagout devices shall be used in accordance with the procedures required
by paragraphs (d)(2)(iii) and (d)(2)(iv) of this section including, but
not limited to, the following specific requirements:
(A) Primary responsibility shall be vested in an authorized employee
for a set number of employees working under the protection of a group
lockout or tagout device (such as an operations lock);
(B) Provision shall be made for the authorized employee to ascertain
the exposure status of all individual group members with regard to the
lockout or tagout of the machine or equipment;
(C) When more than one crew, craft, department, or other group is
involved, assignment of overall job-associated lockout or tagout control
responsibility shall be given to an authorized employee designated to
coordinate affected work forces and ensure continuity of protection; and
(D) Each authorized employee shall affix a personal lockout or
tagout device to the group lockout device, group lockbox, or comparable
mechanism when he or she begins work and shall remove those devices when
he or she stops working on the machine or equipment being serviced or
maintained.
(iii) Procedures shall be used during shift or personnel changes to
ensure the continuity of lockout or tagout protection, including
provision for the orderly transfer of lockout or tagout device
protection between off-going and on-coming employees, to minimize their
exposure to hazards from the unexpected energizing or start-up of the
machine or equipment or from the release of stored energy.
(iv) Whenever outside servicing personnel are to be engaged in
activities covered by paragraph (d) of this section, the on-site
employer and the outside employer shall inform each other of their
respective lockout or tagout procedures, and each employer shall ensure
that his or her personnel understand and comply with restrictions and
prohibitions of the energy control procedures being used.
(v) If energy isolating devices are installed in a central location
and are under the exclusive control of a system operator, the following
requirements apply:
(A) The employer shall use a procedure that affords employees a
level of protection equivalent to that provided by the implementation of
a personal lockout or tagout device.
(B) The system operator shall place and remove lockout and tagout
devices in place of the authorized employee
[[Page 776]]
under paragraphs (d)(4), (d)(6)(iv), and (d)(7)(iv) of this section.
(C) Provisions shall be made to identify the authorized employee who
is responsible for (that is, being protected by) the lockout or tagout
device, to transfer responsibility for lockout and tagout devices, and
to ensure that an authorized employee requesting removal or transfer of
a lockout or tagout device is the one responsible for it before the
device is removed or transferred.
(e) Enclosed spaces. This paragraph covers enclosed spaces that may
be entered by employees. It does not apply to vented vaults if a
determination is made that the ventilation system is operating to
protect employees before they enter the space. This paragraph applies to
routine entry into enclosed spaces in lieu of the permit-space entry
requirements contained in paragraphs (d) through (k) of Sec. 1910.146 of
this part. If, after the precautions given in paragraphs (e) and (t) of
this section are taken, the hazards remaining in the enclosed space
endanger the life of an entrant or could interfere with escape from the
space, then entry into the enclosed space shall meet the permit-space
entry requirements of paragraphs (d) through (k) of Sec. 1910.146 of
this part.
Note: Entries into enclosed spaces conducted in accordance with the
permit-space entry requirements of paragraphs (d) through (k) of
Sec. 1910.146 of this part are considered as complying with paragraph
(e) of this section.
(1) Safe work practices. The employer shall ensure the use of safe
work practices for entry into and work in enclosed spaces and for rescue
of employees from such spaces.
(2) Training. Employees who enter enclosed spaces or who serve as
attendants shall be trained in the hazards of enclosed space entry, in
enclosed space entry procedures, and in enclosed space rescue
procedures.
(3) Rescue equipment. Employers shall provide equipment to ensure
the prompt and safe rescue of employees from the enclosed space.
(4) Evaluation of potential hazards. Before any entrance cover to an
enclosed space is removed, the employer shall determine whether it is
safe to do so by checking for the presence of any atmospheric pressure
or temperature differences and by evaluating whether there might be a
hazardous atmosphere in the space. Any conditions making it unsafe to
remove the cover shall be eliminated before the cover is removed.
Note: The evaluation called for in this paragraph may take the form
of a check of the conditions expected to be in the enclosed space. For
example, the cover could be checked to see if it is hot and, if it is
fastened in place, could be loosened gradually to release any residual
pressure. A determination must also be made of whether conditions at the
site could cause a hazardous atmosphere, such as an oxygen deficient or
flammable atmosphere, to develop within the space.
(5) Removal of covers. When covers are removed from enclosed spaces,
the opening shall be promptly guarded by a railing, temporary cover, or
other barrier intended to prevent an accidental fall through the opening
and to protect employees working in the space from objects entering the
space.
(6) Hazardous atmosphere. Employees may not enter any enclosed space
while it contains a hazardous atmosphere, unless the entry conforms to
the generic permit-required confined spaces standard in Sec. 1910.146 of
this part.
Note: The term ``entry'' is defined in Sec. 1910.146(b) of this
part.
(7) Attendants. While work is being performed in the enclosed space,
a person with first aid training meeting paragraph (b) of this section
shall be immediately available outside the enclosed space to render
emergency assistance if there is reason to believe that a hazard may
exist in the space or if a hazard exists because of traffic patterns in
the area of the opening used for entry. That person is not precluded
from performing other duties outside the enclosed space if these duties
do not distract the attendant from monitoring employees within the
space.
Note: See paragraph (t)(3) of this section for additional
requirements on attendants for work in manholes.
(8) Calibration of test instruments. Test instruments used to
monitor atmospheres in enclosed spaces shall be kept in calibration,
with a minimum accuracy of 10 percent.
(9) Testing for oxygen deficiency. Before an employee enters an
enclosed space, the internal atmosphere shall be
[[Page 777]]
tested for oxygen deficiency with a direct-reading meter or similar
instrument, capable of collection and immediate analysis of data samples
without the need for off-site evaluation. If continuous forced air
ventilation is provided, testing is not required provided that the
procedures used ensure that employees are not exposed to the hazards
posed by oxygen deficiency.
(10) Testing for flammable gases and vapors. Before an employee
enters an enclosed space, the internal atmosphere shall be tested for
flammable gases and vapors with a direct-reading meter or similar
instrument capable of collection and immediate analysis of data samples
without the need for off-site evaluation. This test shall be performed
after the oxygen testing and ventilation required by paragraph (e)(9) of
this section demonstrate that there is sufficient oxygen to ensure the
accuracy of the test for flammability.
(11) Ventilation and monitoring. If flammable gases or vapors are
detected or if an oxygen deficiency is found, forced air ventilation
shall be used to maintain oxygen at a safe level and to prevent a
hazardous concentration of flammable gases and vapors from accumulating.
A continuous monitoring program to ensure that no increase in flammable
gas or vapor concentration occurs may be followed in lieu of
ventilation, if flammable gases or vapors are detected at safe levels.
Note: See the definition of hazardous atmosphere for guidance in
determining whether or not a given concentration of a substance is
considered to be hazardous.
(12) Specific ventilation requirements. If continuous forced air
ventilation is used, it shall begin before entry is made and shall be
maintained long enough to ensure that a safe atmosphere exists before
employees are allowed to enter the work area. The forced air ventilation
shall be so directed as to ventilate the immediate area where employees
are present within the enclosed space and shall continue until all
employees leave the enclosed space.
(13) Air supply. The air supply for the continuous forced air
ventilation shall be from a clean source and may not increase the
hazards in the enclosed space.
(14) Open flames. If open flames are used in enclosed spaces, a test
for flammable gases and vapors shall be made immediately before the open
flame device is used and at least once per hour while the device is used
in the space. Testing shall be conducted more frequently if conditions
present in the enclosed space indicate that once per hour is
insufficient to detect hazardous accumulations of flammable gases or
vapors.
Note: See the definition of hazardous atmosphere for guidance in
determining whether or not a given concentration of a substance is
considered to be hazardous.
(f) Excavations. Excavation operations shall comply with subpart P
of part 1926 of this chapter.
(g) Personal protective equipment--(1) General. Personal protective
equipment shall meet the requirements of subpart I of this part.
(2) Fall protection. (i) Personal fall arrest equipment shall meet
the requirements of subpart M of part 1926 of this chapter.
(ii) Body belts and safety straps for work positioning shall meet
the requirements of Sec. 1926.959 of this chapter.
(iii) Body belts, safety straps, lanyards, lifelines, and body
harnesses shall be inspected before use each day to determine that the
equipment is in safe working condition. Defective equipment may not be
used.
(iv) Lifelines shall be protected against being cut or abraded.
(v) Fall arrest equipment, work positioning equipment, or travel
restricting equipment shall be used by employees working at elevated
locations more than 4 feet (1.2 m) above the ground on poles, towers, or
similar structures if other fall protection has not been provided. Fall
protection equipment is not required to be used by a qualified employee
climbing or changing location on poles, towers, or similar structures,
unless conditions, such as, but not limited to, ice, high winds, the
design of the structure (for example, no provision for holding on with
hands), or the presence of contaminants on the structure, could cause
the employee to lose his or her grip or footing.
Note 1: This paragraph applies to structures that support overhead
electric power generation, transmission, and distribution lines and
equipment. It does not apply to
[[Page 778]]
portions of buildings, such as loading docks, to electric equipment,
such as transformers and capacitors, nor to aerial lifts. Requirements
for fall protection associated with walking and working surfaces are
contained in subpart D of this part; requirements for fall protection
associated with aerial lifts are contained in Sec. 1910.67 of this part.
Note 2: Employees undergoing training are not considered ``qualified
employees'' for the purposes of this provision. Unqualified employees
(including trainees) are required to use fall protection any time they
are more than 4 feet (1.2 m) above the ground.
(vi) The following requirements apply to personal fall arrest
systems:
(A) When stopping or arresting a fall, personal fall arrest systems
shall limit the maximum arresting force on an employee to 900 pounds (4
kN) if used with a body belt.
(B) When stopping or arresting a fall, personal fall arrest systems
shall limit the maximum arresting force on an employee to 1800 pounds (8
kN) if used with a body harness.
(C) Personal fall arrest systems shall be rigged such that an
employee can neither free fall more than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor contact any
lower level.
(vii) If vertical lifelines or droplines are used, not more than one
employee may be attached to any one lifeline.
(viii) Snaphooks may not be connected to loops made in webbing-type
lanyards.
(ix) Snaphooks may not be connected to each other.
(h) Ladders, platforms, step bolts, and manhole steps--(1) General.
Requirements for ladders contained in subpart D of this part apply,
except as specifically noted in paragraph (h)(2) of this section.
(2) Special ladders and platforms. Portable ladders and platforms
used on structures or conductors in conjunction with overhead line work
need not meet paragraphs (d)(2)(i) and (d)(2)(iii) of Sec. 1910.25 of
this part or paragraph (c)(3)(iii) of Sec. 1910.26 of this part.
However, these ladders and platforms shall meet the following
requirements:
(i) Ladders and platforms shall be secured to prevent their becoming
accidentally dislodged.
(ii) Ladders and platforms may not be loaded in excess of the
working loads for which they are designed.
(iii) Ladders and platforms may be used only in applications for
which they were designed.
(iv) In the configurations in which they are used, ladders and
platforms shall be capable of supporting without failure at least 2.5
times the maximum intended load.
(3) Conductive ladders. Portable metal ladders and other portable
conductive ladders may not be used near exposed energized lines or
equipment. However, in specialized high-voltage work, conductive ladders
shall be used where the employer can demonstrate that nonconductive
ladders would present a greater hazard than conductive ladders.
(i) Hand and portable power tools--(1) General. Paragraph (i)(2) of
this section applies to electric equipment connected by cord and plug.
Paragraph (i)(3) of this section applies to portable and vehicle-mounted
generators used to supply cord-and plug-connected equipment. Paragraph
(i)(4) of this section applies to hydraulic and pneumatic tools.
(2) Cord- and plug-connected equipment. (i) Cord-and plug-connected
equipment supplied by premises wiring is covered by subpart S of this
part.
(ii) Any cord- and plug-connected equipment supplied by other than
premises wiring shall comply with one of the following in lieu of
Sec. 1910.243(a)(5) of this part:
(A) It shall be equipped with a cord containing an equipment
grounding conductor connected to the tool frame and to a means for
grounding the other end (however, this option may not be used where the
introduction of the ground into the work environment increases the
hazard to an employee); or
(B) It shall be of the double-insulated type conforming to subpart S
of this part; or
(C) It shall be connected to the power supply through an isolating
transformer with an ungrounded secondary.
(3) Portable and vehicle-mounted generators. Portable and vehicle-
mounted generators used to supply cord- and plug-connected equipment
shall meet the following requirements:
(i) The generator may only supply equipment located on the generator
or
[[Page 779]]
the vehicle and cord- and plug-connected equipment through receptacles
mounted on the generator or the vehicle.
(ii) The non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment and the
equipment grounding conductor terminals of the receptacles shall be
bonded to the generator frame.
(iii) In the case of vehicle-mounted generators, the frame of the
generator shall be bonded to the vehicle frame.
(iv) Any neutral conductor shall be bonded to the generator frame.
(4) Hydraulic and pneumatic tools. (i) Safe operating pressures for
hydraulic and pneumatic tools, hoses, valves, pipes, filters, and
fittings may not be exceeded.
Note: If any hazardous defects are present, no operating pressure
would be safe, and the hydraulic or pneumatic equipment involved may not
be used. In the absence of defects, the maximum rated operating pressure
is the maximum safe pressure.
(ii) A hydraulic or pneumatic tool used where it may contact exposed
live parts shall be designed and maintained for such use.
(iii) The hydraulic system supplying a hydraulic tool used where it
may contact exposed live parts shall provide protection against loss of
insulating value for the voltage involved due to the formation of a
partial vacuum in the hydraulic line.
Note: Hydraulic lines without check valves having a separation of
more than 35 feet (10.7 m) between the oil reservoir and the upper end
of the hydraulic system promote the formation of a partial vacuum.
(iv) A pneumatic tool used on energized electric lines or equipment
or used where it may contact exposed live parts shall provide protection
against the accumulation of moisture in the air supply.
(v) Pressure shall be released before connections are broken, unless
quick acting, self-closing connectors are used. Hoses may not be kinked.
(vi) Employees may not use any part of their bodies to locate or
attempt to stop a hydraulic leak.
(j) Live-line tools--(1) Design of tools. Live-line tool rods,
tubes, and poles shall be designed and constructed to withstand the
following minimum tests:
(i) 100,000 volts per foot (3281 volts per centimeter) of length for
5 minutes if the tool is made of fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP), or
(ii) 75,000 volts per foot (2461 volts per centimeter) of length for
3 minutes if the tool is made of wood, or
(iii) Other tests that the employer can demonstrate are equivalent.
Note: Live-line tools using rod and tube that meet ASTM F711-89,
Standard Specification for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Rod and
Tube Used in Live-Line Tools, conform to paragraph (j)(1)(i) of this
section.
(2) Condition of tools. (i) Each live-line tool shall be wiped clean
and visually inspected for defects before use each day.
(ii) If any defect or contamination that could adversely affect the
insulating qualities or mechanical integrity of the live-line tool is
present after wiping, the tool shall be removed from service and
examined and tested according to paragraph (j)(2)(iii) of this section
before being returned to service.
(iii) Live-line tools used for primary employee protection shall be
removed from service every 2 years and whenever required under paragraph
(j)(2)(ii) of this section for examination, cleaning, repair, and
testing as follows:
(A) Each tool shall be thoroughly examined for defects.
(B) If a defect or contamination that could adversely affect the
insulating qualities or mechanical integrity of the live-line tool is
found, the tool shall be repaired and refinished or shall be permanently
removed from service. If no such defect or contamination is found, the
tool shall be cleaned and waxed.
(C) The tool shall be tested in accordance with paragraphs
(j)(2)(iii)(D) and (j)(2)(iii)(E) of this section under the following
conditions:
(1) After the tool has been repaired or refinished; and
(2) After the examination if repair or refinishing is not performed,
unless the tool is made of FRP rod or foam-filled FRP tube and the
employer can demonstrate that the tool has no defects that could cause
it to fail in use.
(D) The test method used shall be designed to verify the tool's
integrity along its entire working length and, if
[[Page 780]]
the tool is made of fiberglass-reinforced plastic, its integrity under
wet conditions.
(E) The voltage applied during the tests shall be as follows:
(1) 75,000 volts per foot (2461 volts per centimeter) of length for
1 minute if the tool is made of fiberglass, or
(2) 50,000 volts per foot (1640 volts per centimeter) of length for
1 minute if the tool is made of wood, or
(3) Other tests that the employer can demonstrate are equivalent.
Note: Guidelines for the examination, cleaning, repairing, and in-
service testing of live-line tools are contained in the Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers Guide for In-Service Maintenance
and Electrical Testing of Live-Line Tools, IEEE Std. 978-1984.
(k) Materials handling and storage--(1) General. Material handling
and storage shall conform to the requirements of subpart N of this part.
(2) Materials storage near energized lines or equipment. (i) In
areas not restricted to qualified persons only, materials or equipment
may not be stored closer to energized lines or exposed energized parts
of equipment than the following distances plus an amount providing for
the maximum sag and side swing of all conductors and providing for the
height and movement of material handling equipment:
(A) For lines and equipment energized at 50 kV or less, the distance
is 10 feet (305 cm).
(B) For lines and equipment energized at more than 50 kV, the
distance is 10 feet (305 cm) plus 4 inches (10 cm) for every 10 kV over
50 kV.
(ii) In areas restricted to qualified employees, material may not be
stored within the working space about energized lines or equipment.
Note: Requirements for the size of the working space are contained
in paragraphs (u)(1) and (v)(3) of this section.
(l) Working on or near exposed energized parts. This paragraph
applies to work on exposed live parts, or near enough to them, to expose
the employee to any hazard they present.
(1) General. Only qualified employees may work on or with exposed
energized lines or parts of equipment. Only qualified employees may work
in areas containing unguarded, uninsulated energized lines or parts of
equipment operating at 50 volts or more. Electric lines and equipment
shall be considered and treated as energized unless the provisions of
paragraph (d) or paragraph (m) of this section have been followed.
(i) Except as provided in paragraph (l)(1)(ii) of this section, at
least two employees shall be present while the following types of work
are being performed:
(A) Installation, removal, or repair of lines that are energized at
more than 600 volts,
(B) Installation, removal, or repair of deenergized lines if an
employee is exposed to contact with other parts energized at more than
600 volts,
(C) Installation, removal, or repair of equipment, such as
transformers, capacitors, and regulators, if an employee is exposed to
contact with parts energized at more than 600 volts,
(D) Work involving the use of mechanical equipment, other than
insulated aerial lifts, near parts energized at more than 600 volts, and
(E) Other work that exposes an employee to electrical hazards
greater than or equal to those posed by operations that are specifically
listed in paragraphs (l)(1)(i)(A) through (l)(1)(i)(D) of this section.
(ii) Paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this section does not apply to the
following operations:
(A) Routine switching of circuits, if the employer can demonstrate
that conditions at the site allow this work to be performed safely,
(B) Work performed with live-line tools if the employee is
positioned so that he or she is neither within reach of nor otherwise
exposed to contact with energized parts, and
(C) Emergency repairs to the extent necessary to safeguard the
general public.
(2) Minimum approach distances. The employer shall ensure that no
employee approaches or takes any conductive object closer to exposed
energized parts than set forth in Table R-6 through Table R-10, unless:
(i) The employee is insulated from the energized part (insulating
gloves or insulating gloves and sleeves worn in accordance with
paragraph (l)(3) of this section are considered insulation of the
[[Page 781]]
employee only with regard to the energized part upon which work is being
performed), or
(ii) The energized part is insulated from the employee and from any
other conductive object at a different potential, or
(iii) The employee is insulated from any other exposed conductive
object, as during live-line bare-hand work.
Note: Paragraphs (u)(5)(i) and (v)(5)(i) of this section contain
requirements for the guarding and isolation of live parts. Parts of
electric circuits that meet these two provisions are not considered as
``exposed'' unless a guard is removed or an employee enters the space
intended to provide isolation from the live parts.
(3) Type of insulation. If the employee is to be insulated from
energized parts by the use of insulating gloves (under paragraph
(l)(2)(i) of this section), insulating sleeves shall also be used.
However, insulating sleeves need not be used under the following
conditions:
(i) If exposed energized parts on which work is not being performed
are insulated from the employee and
(ii) If such insulation is placed from a position not exposing the
employee's upper arm to contact with other energized parts.
(4) Working position. The employer shall ensure that each employee,
to the extent that other safety-related conditions at the worksite
permit, works in a position from which a slip or shock will not bring
the employee's body into contact with exposed, uninsulated parts
energized at a potential different from the employee.
(5) Making connections. The employer shall ensure that connections
are made as follows:
(i) In connecting deenergized equipment or lines to an energized
circuit by means of a conducting wire or device, an employee shall first
attach the wire to the deenergized part;
(ii) When disconnecting equipment or lines from an energized circuit
by means of a conducting wire or device, an employee shall remove the
source end first; and
(iii) When lines or equipment are connected to or disconnected from
energized circuits, loose conductors shall be kept away from exposed
energized parts.
(6) Apparel. (i) When work is performed within reaching distance of
exposed energized parts of equipment, the employer shall ensure that
each employee removes or renders nonconductive all exposed conductive
articles, such as key or watch chains, rings, or wrist watches or bands,
unless such articles do not increase the hazards associated with contact
with the energized parts.
(ii) The employer shall train each employee who is exposed to the
hazards of flames or electric arcs in the hazards involved.
(iii) The employer shall ensure that each employee who is exposed to
the hazards of flames or electric arcs does not wear clothing that, when
exposed to flames or electric arcs, could increase the extent of injury
that would be sustained by the employee.
Note: Clothing made from the following types of fabrics, either
alone or in blends, is prohibited by this paragraph, unless the employer
can demonstrate that the fabric has been treated to withstand the
conditions that may be encountered or that the clothing is worn in such
a manner as to eliminate the hazard involved: acetate, nylon, polyester,
rayon.
(7) Fuse handling. When fuses must be installed or removed with one
or both terminals energized at more than 300 volts or with exposed parts
energized at more than 50 volts, the employer shall ensure that tools or
gloves rated for the voltage are used. When expulsion-type fuses are
installed with one or both terminals energized at more than 300 volts,
the employer shall ensure that each employee wears eye protection
meeting the requirements of subpart I of this part, uses a tool rated
for the voltage, and is clear of the exhaust path of the fuse barrel.
(8) Covered (noninsulated) conductors. The requirements of this
section which pertain to the hazards of exposed live parts also apply
when work is performed in the proximity of covered (noninsulated) wires.
(9) Noncurrent-carrying metal parts. Noncurrent-carrying metal parts
of equipment or devices, such as transformer cases and circuit breaker
housings, shall be treated as energized at the highest voltage to which
they are exposed, unless the employer inspects the installation and
determines
[[Page 782]]
that these parts are grounded before work is performed.
(10) Opening circuits under load. Devices used to open circuits
under load conditions shall be designed to interrupt the current
involved.
Table R-6--AC Live-Line Work Minimum Approach Distance
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Distance
-------------------------------
Phase to Phase to phase
Nominal voltage in kilovolts phase to ground exposure
phase exposure ---------------
----------------
(ft- (ft- (m)
in) (m) in)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.05 to 1.0............................. (\4\) (\4\) (\4\) (\4\)
1.1 to 15.0............................. 2-1 0.64 2-2 0.66
15.1 to 36.0............................ 2-4 0.72 2-7 0.77
36.1 to 46.0............................ 2-7 0.77 2-10 0.85
46.1 to 72.5............................ 3-0 0.90 3-6 1.05
72.6 to 121............................. 3-2 0.95 4-3 1.29
138 to 145.............................. 3-7 1.09 4-11 1.50
161 to 169.............................. 4-0 1.22 5-8 1.71
230 to 242.............................. 5-3 1.59 7-6 2.27
345 to 362.............................. 8-6 2.59 12-6 3.80
500 to 550.............................. 11-3 3.42 18-1 5.50
765 to 800.............................. 14-11 4.53 26-0 7.91
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1: These distances take into consideration the highest switching
surge an employee will be exposed to on any system with air as the
insulating medium and the maximum voltages shown.
Note 2: The clear live-line tool distance shall equal or exceed the
values for the indicated voltage ranges.
Note 3: See appendix B to this section for information on how the
minimum approach distances listed in the tables were derived.
\4\ Avoid contact.
Table R-7--AC Live-Line Work Minimum Approach Distance With Overvoltage Factor Phase-to-Ground Exposure
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum Distance in feet-inches
anticipated --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
per-unit Maximum phase-to-phase voltage in kilovolts
transient --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
overvoltage 121 145 169 242 362 552 800
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.5 ............. ............ ............ ............ ............ 6-0 9-8
1.6 ............. ............ ............ ............ ............ 6-6 10-8
1.7 ............. ............ ............ ............ ............ 7-0 11-8
1.8 ............. ............ ............ ............ ............ 7-7 12-8
1.9 ............. ............ ............ ............ ............ 8-1 13-9
2.0 2-5 2-9 3-0 3-10 5-3 8-9 14-11
2.1 2-6 2-10 3-2 4-0 5-5 9-4 ............
2.2 2-7 2-11 3-3 4-1 5-9 9-11 ............
2.3 2-8 3-0 3-4 4-3 6-1 10-6 ............
2.4 2-9 3-1 3-5 4-5 6-4 11-3 ............
2.5 2-9 3-2 3-6 4-6 6-8 ............ ............
2.6 2-10 3-3 3-8 4-8 7-1 ............ ............
2.7 2-11 3-4 3-9 4-10 7-5 ............ ............
2.8 3-0 3-5 3-10 4-11 7-9 ............ ............
2.9 3-1 3-6 3-11 5-1 8-2 ............ ............
3.0 3-2 3-7 4-0 5-3 8-6 ............ ............
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1: The distance specified in this table may be applied only where the maximum anticipated per-unit
transient overvoltage has been determined by engineering analysis and has been supplied by the employer. Table
R-6 applies otherwise.
Note 2: The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances.
Note 3: See appendix B to this section for information on how the minimum approach distances listed in the
tables were derived and on how to calculate revised minimum approach distances based on the control of
transient overvoltages.
Table R-8--AC Live-Line Work Minimum Approach Distance With Overvoltage Factor Phase-to-Phase Exposure
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum Distance in feet-inches
anticipated --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
per-unit Maximum phase-to-phase voltage in kilovolts
transient --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
overvoltage 121 145 169 242 362 552 800
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.5 ............. ............ ............ ............ ............ 7-4 12-1
1.6 ............. ............ ............ ............ ............ 8-9 14-6
1.7 ............. ............ ............ ............ ............ 10-2 17-2
1.8 ............. ............ ............ ............ ............ 11-7 19-11
1.9 ............. ............ ............ ............ ............ 13-2 22-11
2.0 3-7 4-1 4-8 6-1 8-7 14-10 26-0
2.1 3-7 4-2 4-9 6-3 8-10 15-7 ............
2.2 3-8 4-3 4-10 6-4 9-2 16-4 ............
2.3 3-9 4-4 4-11 6-6 9-6 17-2 ............
2.4 3-10 4-5 5-0 6-7 9-11 18-1 ............
[[Page 783]]
2.5 3-11 4-6 5-2 6-9 10-4 ............ ............
2.6 4-0 4-7 5-3 6-11 10-9 ............ ............
2.7 4-1 4-8 5-4 7-0 11-2 ............ ............
2.8 4-1 4-9 5-5 7-2 11-7 ............ ............
2.9 4-2 4-10 5-6 7-4 12-1 ............ ............
3.0 4-3 4-11 5-8 7-6 12-6 ............ ............
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1: The distance specified in this table may be applied only where the maximum anticipated per-unit
transient overvoltage has been determined by engineering analysis and has been supplied by the employer. Table
R-6 applies otherwise.
Note 2: The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances.
Note 3: See appendix B to this section for information on how the minimum approach distances listed in the
tables were derived and on how to calculate revised minimum approach distances based on the control of
transient overvoltages.
Table R-9--DC Live-Line Work Minimum Approach Distance With Overvoltage Factor
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Distance in feet-inches
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum anticipated per-unit transient Maximum line-to-ground voltage in kilovolts
overvoltage ---------------------------------------------------------------------
250 400 500 600 750
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.5 or lower.............................. 3-8 5-3 6-9 8-7 11-10
1.6....................................... 3-10 5-7 7-4 9-5 13-1
1.7....................................... 4-1 6-0 7-11 10-3 14-4
1.8....................................... 4-3 6-5 8-7 11-2 15-9
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1: The distances specified in this table may be applied only where the maximum anticipated per-unit
transient overvoltage has been determined by engineering analysis and has been supplied by the employer.
However, if the transient overvoltage factor is not known, a factor of 1.8 shall be assumed.
Note 2: The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances.
Table R-10--Altitude Correction Factor
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Altitude
------------------------------------------------- Correction factor
ft m
------------------------------------------------------------------------
3000 900 1.00
4000 1200 1.02
5000 1500 1.05
6000 1800 1.08
7000 2100 1.11
8000 2400 1.14
9000 2700 1.17
10000 3000 1.20
12000 3600 1.25
14000 4200 1.30
16000 4800 1.35
18000 5400 1.39
20000 6000 1.44
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: If the work is performed at elevations greater than 3000 ft (900
m) above mean sea level, the minimum approach distance shall be
determined by multiplying the distances in Table R-6 through Table R-9
by the correction factor corresponding to the altitude at which work
is performed.
(m) Deenergizing lines and equipment for employee protection--(1)
Application. Paragraph (m) of this section applies to the deenergizing
of transmission and distribution lines and equipment for the purpose of
protecting employees. Control of hazardous energy sources used in the
generation of electric energy is covered in paragraph (d) of this
section. Conductors and parts of electric equipment that have been
deenergized under procedures other than those required by paragraph (d)
or (m) of this section, as applicable, shall be treated as energized.
(2) General. (i) If a system operator is in charge of the lines or
equipment and their means of disconnection, all of the requirements of
paragraph (m)(3) of this section shall be observed, in the order given.
(ii) If no system operator is in charge of the lines or equipment
and their means of disconnection, one employee in the crew shall be
designated as being in charge of the clearance. All of the requirements
of paragraph (m)(3) of this section apply, in the order given, except as
provided in paragraph (m)(2)(iii) of this section. The employee in
charge of the clearance shall take the place of the system operator, as
necessary.
(iii) If only one crew will be working on the lines or equipment and
if the means of disconnection is accessible and visible to and under the
sole control of the employee in charge of the clearance, paragraphs
(m)(3)(i), (m)(3)(iii), (m)(3)(iv), (m)(3)(viii), and (m)(3)(xii) of
this section do not apply.
[[Page 784]]
Additionally, tags required by the remaining provisions of paragraph
(m)(3) of this section need not be used.
(iv) Any disconnecting means that are accessible to persons outside
the employer's control (for example, the general public) shall be
rendered inoperable while they are open for the purpose of protecting
employees.
(3) Deenergizing lines and equipment. (i) A designated employee
shall make a request of the system operator to have the particular
section of line or equipment deenergized. The designated employee
becomes the employee in charge (as this term is used in paragraph (m)(3)
of this section) and is responsible for the clearance.
(ii) All switches, disconnectors, jumpers, taps, and other means
through which known sources of electric energy may be supplied to the
particular lines and equipment to be deenergized shall be opened. Such
means shall be rendered inoperable, unless its design does not so
permit, and tagged to indicate that employees are at work.
(iii) Automatically and remotely controlled switches that could
cause the opened disconnecting means to close shall also be tagged at
the point of control. The automatic or remote control feature shall be
rendered inoperable, unless its design does not so permit.
(iv) Tags shall prohibit operation of the disconnecting means and
shall indicate that employees are at work.
(v) After the applicable requirements in paragraphs (m)(3)(i)
through (m)(3)(iv) of this section have been followed and the employee
in charge of the work has been given a clearance by the system operator,
the lines and equipment to be worked shall be tested to ensure that they
are deenergized.
(vi) Protective grounds shall be installed as required by paragraph
(n) of this section.
(vii) After the applicable requirements of paragraphs (m)(3)(i)
through (m)(3)(vi) of this section have been followed, the lines and
equipment involved may be worked as deenergized.
(viii) If two or more independent crews will be working on the same
lines or equipment, each crew shall independently comply with the
requirements in paragraph (m)(3) of this section.
(ix) To transfer the clearance, the employee in charge (or, if the
employee in charge is forced to leave the worksite due to illness or
other emergency, the employee's supervisor) shall inform the system
operator; employees in the crew shall be informed of the transfer; and
the new employee in charge shall be responsible for the clearance.
(x) To release a clearance, the employee in charge shall:
(A) Notify employees under his or her direction that the clearance
is to be released;
(B) Determine that all employees in the crew are clear of the lines
and equipment;
(C) Determine that all protective grounds installed by the crew have
been removed; and
(D) Report this information to the system operator and release the
clearance.
(xi) The person releasing a clearance shall be the same person that
requested the clearance, unless responsibility has been transferred
under paragraph (m)(3)(ix) of this section.
(xii) Tags may not be removed unless the associated clearance has
been released under paragraph (m)(3)(x) of this section.
(xiii) Only after all protective grounds have been removed, after
all crews working on the lines or equipment have released their
clearances, after all employees are clear of the lines and equipment,
and after all protective tags have been removed from a given point of
disconnection, may action be initiated to reenergize the lines or
equipment at that point of disconnection.
(n) Grounding for the protection of employees--(1) Application.
Paragraph (n) of this section applies to the grounding of transmission
and distribution lines and equipment for the purpose of protecting
employees. Paragraph (n)(4) of this section also applies to the
protective grounding of other equipment as required elsewhere in this
section.
(2) General. For the employee to work lines or equipment as
deenergized, the lines or equipment shall be deenergized under the
provisions of paragraph (m) of this section and shall be grounded as
[[Page 785]]
specified in paragraphs (n)(3) through (n)(9) of this section. However,
if the employer can demonstrate that installation of a ground is
impracticable or that the conditions resulting from the installation of
a ground would present greater hazards than working without grounds, the
lines and equipment may be treated as deenergized provided all of the
following conditions are met:
(i) The lines and equipment have been deenergized under the
provisions of paragraph (m) of this section.
(ii) There is no possibility of contact with another energized
source.
(iii) The hazard of induced voltage is not present.
(3) Equipotential zone. Temporary protective grounds shall be placed
at such locations and arranged in such a manner as to prevent each
employee from being exposed to hazardous differences in electrical
potential.
(4) Protective grounding equipment. (i) Protective grounding
equipment shall be capable of conducting the maximum fault current that
could flow at the point of grounding for the time necessary to clear the
fault. This equipment shall have an ampacity greater than or equal to
that of No. 2 AWG copper.
Note: Guidelines for protective grounding equipment are contained in
American Society for Testing and Materials Standard Specifications for
Temporary Grounding Systems to be Used on De-Energized Electric Power
Lines and Equipment, ASTM F855-1990.
(ii) Protective grounds shall have an impedance low enough to cause
immediate operation of protective devices in case of accidental
energizing of the lines or equipment.
(5) Testing. Before any ground is installed, lines and equipment
shall be tested and found absent of nominal voltage, unless a previously
installed ground is present.
(6) Order of connection. When a ground is to be attached to a line
or to equipment, the ground-end connection shall be attached first, and
then the other end shall be attached by means of a live-line tool.
(7) Order of removal. When a ground is to be removed, the grounding
device shall be removed from the line or equipment using a live-line
tool before the ground-end connection is removed.
(8) Additional precautions. When work is performed on a cable at a
location remote from the cable terminal, the cable may not be grounded
at the cable terminal if there is a possibility of hazardous transfer of
potential should a fault occur.
(9) Removal of grounds for test. Grounds may be removed temporarily
during tests. During the test procedure, the employer shall ensure that
each employee uses insulating equipment and is isolated from any hazards
involved, and the employer shall institute any additional measures as
may be necessary to protect each exposed employee in case the previously
grounded lines and equipment become energized.
(o) Testing and test facilities--(1) Application. Paragraph (o) of
this section provides for safe work practices for high-voltage and high-
power testing performed in laboratories, shops, and substations, and in
the field and on electric transmission and distribution lines and
equipment. It applies only to testing involving interim measurements
utilizing high voltage, high power, or combinations of both, and not to
testing involving continuous measurements as in routine metering,
relaying, and normal line work.
Note: Routine inspection and maintenance measurements made by
qualified employees are considered to be routine line work and are not
included in the scope of paragraph (o) of this section, as long as the
hazards related to the use of intrinsic high-voltage or high-power
sources require only the normal precautions associated with routine
operation and maintenance work required in the other paragraphs of this
section. Two typical examples of such excluded test work procedures are
``phasing-out'' testing and testing for a ``no-voltage'' condition.
(2) General requirements. (i) The employer shall establish and
enforce work practices for the protection of each worker from the
hazards of high-voltage or high-power testing at all test areas,
temporary and permanent. Such work practices shall include, as a
minimum, test area guarding, grounding, and the safe use of measuring
and control circuits. A means providing for periodic safety checks of
field test areas shall also be included. (See paragraph (o)(6) of this
section.)
(ii) Employees shall be trained in safe work practices upon their
initial
[[Page 786]]
assignment to the test area, with periodic reviews and updates provided
as required by paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
(3) Guarding of test areas. (i) Permanent test areas shall be
guarded by walls, fences, or barriers designed to keep employees out of
the test areas.
(ii) In field testing, or at a temporary test site where permanent
fences and gates are not provided, one of the following means shall be
used to prevent unauthorized employees from entering:
(A) The test area shall be guarded by the use of distinctively
colored safety tape that is supported approximately waist high and to
which safety signs are attached,
(B) The test area shall be guarded by a barrier or barricade that
limits access to the test area to a degree equivalent, physically and
visually, to the barricade specified in paragraph (o)(3)(ii)(A) of this
section, or
(C) The test area shall be guarded by one or more test observers
stationed so that the entire area can be monitored.
(iii) The barriers required by paragraph (o)(3)(ii) of this section
shall be removed when the protection they provide is no longer needed.
(iv) Guarding shall be provided within test areas to control access
to test equipment or to apparatus under test that may become energized
as part of the testing by either direct or inductive coupling, in order
to prevent accidental employee contact with energized parts.
(4) Grounding practices. (i) The employer shall establish and
implement safe grounding practices for the test facility.
(A) All conductive parts accessible to the test operator during the
time the equipment is operating at high voltage shall be maintained at
ground potential except for portions of the equipment that are isolated
from the test operator by guarding.
(B) Wherever ungrounded terminals of test equipment or apparatus
under test may be present, they shall be treated as energized until
determined by tests to be deenergized.
(ii) Visible grounds shall be applied, either automatically or
manually with properly insulated tools, to the high-voltage circuits
after they are deenergized and before work is performed on the circuit
or item or apparatus under test. Common ground connections shall be
solidly connected to the test equipment and the apparatus under test.
(iii) In high-power testing, an isolated ground-return conductor
system shall be provided so that no intentional passage of current, with
its attendant voltage rise, can occur in the ground grid or in the
earth. However, an isolated ground-return conductor need not be provided
if the employer can demonstrate that both the following conditions are
met:
(A) An isolated ground-return conductor cannot be provided due to
the distance of the test site from the electric energy source, and
(B) Employees are protected from any hazardous step and touch
potentials that may develop during the test.
Note: See appendix C to this section for information on measures
that can be taken to protect employees from hazardous step and touch
potentials.
(iv) In tests in which grounding of test equipment by means of the
equipment grounding conductor located in the equipment power cord cannot
be used due to increased hazards to test personnel or the prevention of
satisfactory measurements, a ground that the employer can demonstrate
affords equivalent safety shall be provided, and the safety ground shall
be clearly indicated in the test set-up.
(v) When the test area is entered after equipment is deenergized, a
ground shall be placed on the high-voltage terminal and any other
exposed terminals.
(A) High capacitance equipment or apparatus shall be discharged
through a resistor rated for the available energy.
(B) A direct ground shall be applied to the exposed terminals when
the stored energy drops to a level at which it is safe to do so.
(vi) If a test trailer or test vehicle is used in field testing, its
chassis shall be grounded. Protection against hazardous touch potentials
with respect to the vehicle, instrument panels, and other conductive
parts accessible to employees shall be provided by bonding, insulation,
or isolation.
(5) Control and measuring circuits. (i) Control wiring, meter
connections, test
[[Page 787]]
leads and cables may not be run from a test area unless they are
contained in a grounded metallic sheath and terminated in a grounded
metallic enclosure or unless other precautions are taken that the
employer can demonstrate as ensuring equivalent safety.
(ii) Meters and other instruments with accessible terminals or parts
shall be isolated from test personnel to protect against hazards arising
from such terminals and parts becoming energized during testing. If this
isolation is provided by locating test equipment in metal compartments
with viewing windows, interlocks shall be provided to interrupt the
power supply if the compartment cover is opened.
(iii) The routing and connections of temporary wiring shall be made
secure against damage, accidental interruptions and other hazards. To
the maximum extent possible, signal, control, ground, and power cables
shall be kept separate.
(iv) If employees will be present in the test area during testing, a
test observer shall be present. The test observer shall be capable of
implementing the immediate deenergizing of test circuits for safety
purposes.
(6) Safety check. (i) Safety practices governing employee work at
temporary or field test areas shall provide for a routine check of such
test areas for safety at the beginning of each series of tests.
(ii) The test operator in charge shall conduct these routine safety
checks before each series of tests and shall verify at least the
following conditions:
(A) That barriers and guards are in workable condition and are
properly placed to isolate hazardous areas;
(B) That system test status signals, if used, are in operable
condition;
(C) That test power disconnects are clearly marked and readily
available in an emergency;
(D) That ground connections are clearly identifiable;
(E) That personal protective equipment is provided and used as
required by subpart I of this part and by this section; and
(F) That signal, ground, and power cables are properly separated.
(p) Mechanical equipment--(1) General requirements. (i) The critical
safety components of mechanical elevating and rotating equipment shall
receive a thorough visual inspection before use on each shift.
Note: Critical safety components of mechanical elevating and
rotating equipment are components whose failure would result in a free
fall or free rotation of the boom.
(ii) No vehicular equipment having an obstructed view to the rear
may be operated on off-highway jobsites where any employee is exposed to
the hazards created by the moving vehicle, unless:
(A) The vehicle has a reverse signal alarm audible above the
surrounding noise level, or
(B) The vehicle is backed up only when a designated employee signals
that it is safe to do so.
(iii) The operator of an electric line truck may not leave his or
her position at the controls while a load is suspended, unless the
employer can demonstrate that no employee (including the operator) might
be endangered.
(iv) Rubber-tired, self-propelled scrapers, rubber-tired front-end
loaders, rubber-tired dozers, wheel-type agricultural and industrial
tractors, crawler-type tractors, crawler-type loaders, and motor
graders, with or without attachments, shall have roll-over protective
structures that meet the requirements of subpart W of part 1926 of this
chapter.
(2) Outriggers. (i) Vehicular equipment, if provided with
outriggers, shall be operated with the outriggers extended and firmly
set as necessary for the stability of the specific configuration of the
equipment. Outriggers may not be extended or retracted outside of clear
view of the operator unless all employees are outside the range of
possible equipment motion.
(ii) If the work area or the terrain precludes the use of
outriggers, the equipment may be operated only within its maximum load
ratings for the particular configuration of the equipment without
outriggers.
(3) Applied loads. Mechanical equipment used to lift or move lines
or other material shall be used within its maximum load rating and other
design limitations for the conditions under which the work is being
performed.
(4) Operations near energized lines or equipment. (i) Mechanical
equipment shall be operated so that the minimum
[[Page 788]]
approach distances of Table R-6 through Table R-10 are maintained from
exposed energized lines and equipment. However, the insulated portion of
an aerial lift operated by a qualified employee in the lift is exempt
from this requirement.
(ii) A designated employee other than the equipment operator shall
observe the approach distance to exposed lines and equipment and give
timely warnings before the minimum approach distance required by
paragraph (p)(4)(i) is reached, unless the employer can demonstrate that
the operator can accurately determine that the minimum approach distance
is being maintained.
(iii) If, during operation of the mechanical equipment, the
equipment could become energized, the operation shall also comply with
at least one of paragraphs (p)(4)(iii)(A) through (p)(4)(iii)(C) of this
section.
(A) The energized lines exposed to contact shall be covered with
insulating protective material that will withstand the type of contact
that might be made during the operation.
(B) The equipment shall be insulated for the voltage involved. The
equipment shall be positioned so that its uninsulated portions cannot
approach the lines or equipment any closer than the minimum approach
distances specified in Table R-6 through Table R-10.
(C) Each employee shall be protected from hazards that might arise
from equipment contact with the energized lines. The measures used shall
ensure that employees will not be exposed to hazardous differences in
potential. Unless the employer can demonstrate that the methods in use
protect each employee from the hazards that might arise if the equipment
contacts the energized line, the measures used shall include all of the
following techniques:
(1) Using the best available ground to minimize the time the lines
remain energized,
(2) Bonding equipment together to minimize potential differences,
(3) Providing ground mats to extend areas of equipotential, and
(4) Employing insulating protective equipment or barricades to guard
against any remaining hazardous potential differences.
Note: Appendix C to this section contains information on hazardous
step and touch potentials and on methods of protecting employees from
hazards resulting from such potentials.
(q) Overhead lines. This paragraph provides additional requirements
for work performed on or near overhead lines and equipment.
(1) General. (i) Before elevated structures, such as poles or
towers, are subjected to such stresses as climbing or the installation
or removal of equipment may impose, the employer shall ascertain that
the structures are capable of sustaining the additional or unbalanced
stresses. If the pole or other structure cannot withstand the loads
which will be imposed, it shall be braced or otherwise supported so as
to prevent failure.
Note: Appendix D to this section contains test methods that can be
used in ascertaining whether a wood pole is capable of sustaining the
forces that would be imposed by an employee climbing the pole. This
paragraph also requires the employer to ascertain that the pole can
sustain all other forces that will be imposed by the work to be
performed.
(ii) When poles are set, moved, or removed near exposed energized
overhead conductors, the pole may not contact the conductors.
(iii) When a pole is set, moved, or removed near an exposed
energized overhead conductor, the employer shall ensure that each
employee wears electrical protective equipment or uses insulated devices
when handling the pole and that no employee contacts the pole with
uninsulated parts of his or her body.
(iv) To protect employees from falling into holes into which poles
are to be placed, the holes shall be attended by employees or physically
guarded whenever anyone is working nearby.
(2) Installing and removing overhead lines. The following provisions
apply to the installation and removal of overhead conductors or cable.
(i) The employer shall use the tension stringing method, barriers,
or other equivalent measures to minimize the possibility that conductors
and cables being installed or removed will contact energized power lines
or equipment.
(ii) The protective measures required by paragraph (p)(4)(iii) of
this section
[[Page 789]]
for mechanical equipment shall also be provided for conductors, cables,
and pulling and tensioning equipment when the conductor or cable is
being installed or removed close enough to energized conductors that any
of the following failures could energize the pulling or tensioning
equipment or the wire or cable being installed or removed:
(A) Failure of the pulling or tensioning equipment,
(B) Failure of the wire or cable being pulled, or
(C) Failure of the previously installed lines or equipment.
(iii) If the conductors being installed or removed cross over
energized conductors in excess of 600 volts and if the design of the
circuit-interrupting devices protecting the lines so permits, the
automatic-reclosing feature of these devices shall be made inoperative.
(iv) Before lines are installed parallel to existing energized
lines, the employer shall make a determination of the approximate
voltage to be induced in the new lines, or work shall proceed on the
assumption that the induced voltage is hazardous. Unless the employer
can demonstrate that the lines being installed are not subject to the
induction of a hazardous voltage or unless the lines are treated as
energized, the following requirements also apply:
(A) Each bare conductor shall be grounded in increments so that no
point along the conductor is more than 2 miles (3.22 km) from a ground.
(B) The grounds required in paragraph (q)(2)(iv)(A) of this section
shall be left in place until the conductor installation is completed
between dead ends.
(C) The grounds required in paragraph (q)(2)(iv)(A) of this section
shall be removed as the last phase of aerial cleanup.
(D) If employees are working on bare conductors, grounds shall also
be installed at each location where these employees are working, and
grounds shall be installed at all open dead-end or catch-off points or
the next adjacent structure.
(E) If two bare conductors are to be spliced, the conductors shall
be bonded and grounded before being spliced.
(v) Reel handling equipment, including pulling and tensioning
devices, shall be in safe operating condition and shall be leveled and
aligned.
(vi) Load ratings of stringing lines, pulling lines, conductor
grips, load-bearing hardware and accessories, rigging, and hoists may
not be exceeded.
(vii) Pulling lines and accessories shall be repaired or replaced
when defective.
(viii) Conductor grips may not be used on wire rope, unless the grip
is specifically designed for this application.
(ix) Reliable communications, through two-way radios or other
equivalent means, shall be maintained between the reel tender and the
pulling rig operator.
(x) The pulling rig may only be operated when it is safe to do so.
Note: Examples of unsafe conditions include employees in locations
prohibited by paragraph (q)(2)(xi) of this section, conductor and
pulling line hang-ups, and slipping of the conductor grip.
(xi) While the conductor or pulling line is being pulled (in motion)
with a power-driven device, employees are not permitted directly under
overhead operations or on the cross arm, except as necessary to guide
the stringing sock or board over or through the stringing sheave.
(3) Live-line bare-hand work. In addition to other applicable
provisions contained in this section, the following requirements apply
to live-line bare-hand work:
(i) Before using or supervising the use of the live-line bare-hand
technique on energized circuits, employees shall be trained in the
technique and in the safety requirements of paragraph (q)(3) of this
section. Employees shall receive refresher training as required by
paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
(ii) Before any employee uses the live-line bare-hand technique on
energized high-voltage conductors or parts, the following information
shall be ascertained:
(A) The nominal voltage rating of the circuit on which the work is
to be performed,
(B) The minimum approach distances to ground of lines and other
energized parts on which work is to be performed, and
[[Page 790]]
(C) The voltage limitations of equipment to be used.
(iii) The insulated equipment, insulated tools, and aerial devices
and platforms used shall be designed, tested, and intended for live-line
bare-hand work. Tools and equipment shall be kept clean and dry while
they are in use.
(iv) The automatic-reclosing feature of circuit-interrupting devices
protecting the lines shall be made inoperative, if the design of the
devices permits.
(v) Work may not be performed when adverse weather conditions would
make the work hazardous even after the work practices required by this
section are employed. Additionally, work may not be performed when winds
reduce the phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground minimum approach distances
at the work location below that specified in paragraph (q)(3)(xiii) of
this section, unless the grounded objects and other lines and equipment
are covered by insulating guards.
Note: Thunderstorms in the immediate vicinity, high winds, snow
storms, and ice storms are examples of adverse weather conditions that
are presumed to make live-line bare-hand work too hazardous to perform
safely.
(vi) A conductive bucket liner or other conductive device shall be
provided for bonding the insulated aerial device to the energized line
or equipment.
(A) The employee shall be connected to the bucket liner or other
conductive device by the use of conductive shoes, leg clips, or other
means.
(B) Where differences in potentials at the worksite pose a hazard to
employees, electrostatic shielding designed for the voltage being worked
shall be provided.
(vii) Before the employee contacts the energized part, the
conductive bucket liner or other conductive device shall be bonded to
the energized conductor by means of a positive connection. This
connection shall remain attached to the energized conductor until the
work on the energized circuit is completed.
(viii) Aerial lifts to be used for live-line bare-hand work shall
have dual controls (lower and upper) as follows:
(A) The upper controls shall be within easy reach of the employee in
the bucket. On a two-bucket-type lift, access to the controls shall be
within easy reach from either bucket.
(B) The lower set of controls shall be located near the base of the
boom, and they shall be so designed that they can override operation of
the equipment at any time.
(ix) Lower (ground-level) lift controls may not be operated with an
employee in the lift, except in case of emergency.
(x) Before employees are elevated into the work position, all
controls (ground level and bucket) shall be checked to determine that
they are in proper working condition.
(xi) Before the boom of an aerial lift is elevated, the body of the
truck shall be grounded, or the body of the truck shall be barricaded
and treated as energized.
(xii) A boom-current test shall be made before work is started each
day, each time during the day when higher voltage is encountered, and
when changed conditions indicate a need for an additional test. This
test shall consist of placing the bucket in contact with an energized
source equal to the voltage to be encountered for a minimum of 3
minutes. The leakage current may not exceed 1 microampere per kilovolt
of nominal phase-to-ground voltage. Work from the aerial lift shall be
immediately suspended upon indication of a malfunction in the equipment.
(xiii) The minimum approach distances specified in Table R-6 through
Table R-10 shall be maintained from all grounded objects and from lines
and equipment at a potential different from that to which the live-line
bare-hand equipment is bonded, unless such grounded objects and other
lines and equipment are covered by insulating guards.
(xiv) While an employee is approaching, leaving, or bonding to an
energized circuit, the minimum approach distances in Table R-6 through
Table R-10 shall be maintained between the employee and any grounded
parts, including the lower boom and portions of the truck.
[[Page 791]]
(xv) While the bucket is positioned alongside an energized bushing
or insulator string, the phase-to-ground minimum approach distances of
Table R-6 through Table R-10 shall be maintained between all parts of
the bucket and the grounded end of the bushing or insulator string or
any other grounded surface.
(xvi) Hand lines may not be used between the bucket and the boom or
between the bucket and the ground. However, non-conductive-type hand
lines may be used from conductor to ground if not supported from the
bucket. Ropes used for live-line bare-hand work may not be used for
other purposes.
(xvii) Uninsulated equipment or material may not be passed between a
pole or structure and an aerial lift while an employee working from the
bucket is bonded to an energized part.
(xviii) A minimum approach distance table reflecting the minimum
approach distances listed in Table R-6 through Table R-10 shall be
printed on a plate of durable non-conductive material. This table shall
be mounted so as to be visible to the operator of the boom.
(xix) A non-conductive measuring device shall be readily accessible
to assist employees in maintaining the required minimum approach
distance.
(4) Towers and structures. The following requirements apply to work
performed on towers or other structures which support overhead lines.
(i) The employer shall ensure that no employee is under a tower or
structure while work is in progress, except where the employer can
demonstrate that such a working position is necessary to assist
employees working above.
(ii) Tag lines or other similar devices shall be used to maintain
control of tower sections being raised or positioned, unless the
employer can demonstrate that the use of such devices would create a
greater hazard.
(iii) The loadline may not be detached from a member or section
until the load is safely secured.
(iv) Except during emergency restoration procedures, work shall be
discontinued when adverse weather conditions would make the work
hazardous in spite of the work practices required by this section.
Note: Thunderstorms in the immediate vicinity, high winds, snow
storms, and ice storms are examples of adverse weather conditions that
are presumed to make this work too hazardous to perform, except under
emergency conditions.
(r) Line-clearance tree trimming operations. This paragraph provides
additional requirements for line-clearance tree-trimming operations and
for equipment used in these operations.
(1) Electrical hazards. This paragraph does not apply to qualified
employees.
(i) Before an employee climbs, enters, or works around any tree, a
determination shall be made of the nominal voltage of electric power
lines posing a hazard to employees. However, a determination of the
maximum nominal voltage to which an employee will be exposed may be made
instead, if all lines are considered as energized at this maximum
voltage.
(ii) There shall be a second line-clearance tree trimmer within
normal (that is, unassisted) voice communication under any of the
following conditions:
(A) If a line-clearance tree trimmer is to approach more closely
than 10 feet (305 cm) any conductor or electric apparatus energized at
more than 750 volts or
(B) If branches or limbs being removed are closer to lines energized
at more than 750 volts than the distances listed in Table R-6, Table R-
9, and Table R-10 or
(C) If roping is necessary to remove branches or limbs from such
conductors or apparatus.
(iii) Line-clearance tree trimmers shall maintain the minimum
approach distances from energized conductors given in Table R-6, Table
R-9, and Table R-10.
(iv) Branches that are contacting exposed energized conductors or
equipment or that are within the distances specified in Table R-6, Table
R-9, and Table R-10 may be removed only through the use of insulating
equipment.
Note: A tool constructed of a material that the employer can
demonstrate has insulating qualities meeting paragraph (j)(1) of this
section is considered as insulated under this paragraph if the tool is
clean and dry.
(v) Ladders, platforms, and aerial devices may not be brought closer
to an energized part than the distances listed
[[Page 792]]
in Table R-6, Table R-9, and Table R-10.
(vi) Line-clearance tree-trimming work may not be performed when
adverse weather conditions make the work hazardous in spite of the work
practices required by this section. Each employee performing line-
clearance tree trimming work in the aftermath of a storm or under
similar emergency conditions shall be trained in the special hazards
related to this type of work.
Note: Thunderstorms in the immediate vicinity, high winds, snow
storms, and ice storms are examples of adverse weather conditions that
are presumed to make line-clearance tree trimming work too hazardous to
perform safely.
(2) Brush chippers. (i) Brush chippers shall be equipped with a
locking device in the ignition system.
(ii) Access panels for maintenance and adjustment of the chipper
blades and associated drive train shall be in place and secure during
operation of the equipment.
(iii) Brush chippers not equipped with a mechanical infeed system
shall be equipped with an infeed hopper of length sufficient to prevent
employees from contacting the blades or knives of the machine during
operation.
(iv) Trailer chippers detached from trucks shall be chocked or
otherwise secured.
(v) Each employee in the immediate area of an operating chipper feed
table shall wear personal protective equipment as required by subpart I
of this part.
(3) Sprayers and related equipment. (i) Walking and working surfaces
of sprayers and related equipment shall be covered with slip-resistant
material. If slipping hazards cannot be eliminated, slip-resistant
footwear or handrails and stair rails meeting the requirements of
subpart D may be used instead of slip-resistant material.
(ii) Equipment on which employees stand to spray while the vehicle
is in motion shall be equipped with guardrails around the working area.
The guardrail shall be constructed in accordance with subpart D of this
part.
(4) Stump cutters. (i) Stump cutters shall be equipped with
enclosures or guards to protect employees.
(ii) Each employee in the immediate area of stump grinding
operations (including the stump cutter operator) shall wear personal
protective equipment as required by subpart I of this part.
(5) Gasoline-engine power saws. Gasoline-engine power saw operations
shall meet the requirements of Sec. 1910.266(e) and the following:
(i) Each power saw weighing more than 15 pounds (6.8 kilograms,
service weight) that is used in trees shall be supported by a separate
line, except when work is performed from an aerial lift and except
during topping or removing operations where no supporting limb will be
available.
(ii) Each power saw shall be equipped with a control that will
return the saw to idling speed when released.
(iii) Each power saw shall be equipped with a clutch and shall be so
adjusted that the clutch will not engage the chain drive at idling
speed.
(iv) A power saw shall be started on the ground or where it is
otherwise firmly supported. Drop starting of saws over 15 pounds (6.8
kg) is permitted outside of the bucket of an aerial lift only if the
area below the lift is clear of personnel.
(v) A power saw engine may be started and operated only when all
employees other than the operator are clear of the saw.
(vi) A power saw may not be running when the saw is being carried up
into a tree by an employee.
(vii) Power saw engines shall be stopped for all cleaning,
refueling, adjustments, and repairs to the saw or motor, except as the
manufacturer's servicing procedures require otherwise.
(6) Backpack power units for use in pruning and clearing. (i) While
a backpack power unit is running, no one other than the operator may be
within 10 feet (305 cm) of the cutting head of a brush saw.
(ii) A backpack power unit shall be equipped with a quick shutoff
switch readily accessible to the operator.
(iii) Backpack power unit engines shall be stopped for all cleaning,
refueling, adjustments, and repairs to the saw or motor, except as the
manufacturer's servicing procedures require otherwise.
[[Page 793]]
(7) Rope. (i) Climbing ropes shall be used by employees working
aloft in trees. These ropes shall have a minimum diameter of 0.5 inch
(1.2 cm) with a minimum breaking strength of 2300 pounds (10.2 kN).
Synthetic rope shall have elasticity of not more than 7 percent.
(ii) Rope shall be inspected before each use and, if unsafe (for
example, because of damage or defect), may not be used.
(iii) Rope shall be stored away from cutting edges and sharp tools.
Rope contact with corrosive chemicals, gas, and oil shall be avoided.
(iv) When stored, rope shall be coiled and piled, or shall be
suspended, so that air can circulate through the coils.
(v) Rope ends shall be secured to prevent their unraveling.
(vi) Climbing rope may not be spliced to effect repair.
(vii) A rope that is wet, that is contaminated to the extent that
its insulating capacity is impaired, or that is otherwise not considered
to be insulated for the voltage involved may not be used near exposed
energized lines.
(8) Fall protection. Each employee shall be tied in with a climbing
rope and safety saddle when the employee is working above the ground in
a tree, unless he or she is ascending into the tree.
(s) Communication facilities--(1) Microwave transmission. (i) The
employer shall ensure that no employee looks into an open waveguide or
antenna that is connected to an energized microwave source.
(ii) If the electromagnetic radiation level within an accessible
area associated with microwave communications systems exceeds the
radiation protection guide given in Sec. 1910.97(a)(2) of this part, the
area shall be posted with the warning symbol described in
Sec. 1910.97(a)(3) of this part. The lower half of the warning symbol
shall include the following statements or ones that the employer can
demonstrate are equivalent:
Radiation in this area may exceed hazard limitations and special
precautions are required. Obtain specific instruction before entering.
(iii) When an employee works in an area where the electromagnetic
radiation could exceed the radiation protection guide, the employer
shall institute measures that ensure that the employee's exposure is not
greater than that permitted by that guide. Such measures may include
administrative and engineering controls and personal protective
equipment.
(2) Power line carrier. Power line carrier work, including work on
equipment used for coupling carrier current to power line conductors,
shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of this section
pertaining to work on energized lines.
(t) Underground electrical installations. This paragraph provides
additional requirements for work on underground electrical
installations.
(1) Access. A ladder or other climbing device shall be used to enter
and exit a manhole or subsurface vault exceeding 4 feet (122 cm) in
depth. No employee may climb into or out of a manhole or vault by
stepping on cables or hangers.
(2) Lowering equipment into manholes. Equipment used to lower
materials and tools into manholes or vaults shall be capable of
supporting the weight to be lowered and shall be checked for defects
before use. Before tools or material are lowered into the opening for a
manhole or vault, each employee working in the manhole or vault shall be
clear of the area directly under the opening.
(3) Attendants for manholes. (i) While work is being performed in a
manhole containing energized electric equipment, an employee with first
aid and CPR training meeting paragraph (b)(1) of this section shall be
available on the surface in the immediate vicinity to render emergency
assistance.
(ii) Occasionally, the employee on the surface may briefly enter a
manhole to provide assistance, other than emergency.
Note 1: An attendant may also be required under paragraph (e)(7) of
this section. One person may serve to fulfill both requirements.
However, attendants required under paragraph (e)(7) of this section are
not permitted to enter the manhole.
Note 2: Employees entering manholes containing unguarded,
uninsulated energized lines or parts of electric equipment operating at
50 volts or more are required to be
[[Page 794]]
qualified under paragraph (l)(1) of this section.
(iii) For the purpose of inspection, housekeeping, taking readings,
or similar work, an employee working alone may enter, for brief periods
of time, a manhole where energized cables or equipment are in service,
if the employer can demonstrate that the employee will be protected from
all electrical hazards.
(iv) Reliable communications, through two-way radios or other
equivalent means, shall be maintained among all employees involved in
the job.
(4) Duct rods. If duct rods are used, they shall be installed in the
direction presenting the least hazard to employees. An employee shall be
stationed at the far end of the duct line being rodded to ensure that
the required minimum approach distances are maintained.
(5) Multiple cables. When multiple cables are present in a work
area, the cable to be worked shall be identified by electrical means,
unless its identity is obvious by reason of distinctive appearance or
location or by other readily apparent means of identification. Cables
other than the one being worked shall be protected from damage.
(6) Moving cables. Energized cables that are to be moved shall be
inspected for defects.
(7) Defective cables. Where a cable in a manhole has one or more
abnormalities that could lead to or be an indication of an impending
fault, the defective cable shall be deenergized before any employee may
work in the manhole, except when service load conditions and a lack of
feasible alternatives require that the cable remain energized. In that
case, employees may enter the manhole provided they are protected from
the possible effects of a failure by shields or other devices that are
capable of containing the adverse effects of a fault in the joint.
Note: Abnormalities such as oil or compound leaking from cable or
joints, broken cable sheaths or joint sleeves, hot localized surface
temperatures of cables or joints, or joints that are swollen beyond
normal tolerance are presumed to lead to or be an indication of an
impending fault.
(8) Sheath continuity. When work is performed on buried cable or on
cable in manholes, metallic sheath continuity shall be maintained or the
cable sheath shall be treated as energized.
(u) Substations. This paragraph provides additional requirements for
substations and for work performed in them.
(1) Access and working space. Sufficient access and working space
shall be provided and maintained about electric equipment to permit
ready and safe operation and maintenance of such equipment.
Note: Guidelines for the dimensions of access and working space
about electric equipment in substations are contained in American
National Standard--National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI C2-1987.
Installations meeting the ANSI provisions comply with paragraph (u)(1)
of this section. An installation that does not conform to this ANSI
standard will, nonetheless, be considered as complying with paragraph
(u)(1) of this section if the employer can demonstrate that the
installation provides ready and safe access based on the following
evidence:
(1) That the installation conforms to the edition of ANSI C2 that
was in effect at the time the installation was made,
(2) That the configuration of the installation enables employees to
maintain the minimum approach distances required by paragraph (l)(2) of
this section while they are working on exposed, energized parts, and
(3) That the precautions taken when work is performed on the
installation provide protection equivalent to the protection that would
be provided by access and working space meeting ANSI C2-1987.
(2) Draw-out-type circuit breakers. When draw-out-type circuit
breakers are removed or inserted, the breaker shall be in the open
position. The control circuit shall also be rendered inoperative, if the
design of the equipment permits.
(3) Substation fences. Conductive fences around substations shall be
grounded. When a substation fence is expanded or a section is removed,
fence grounding continuity shall be maintained, and bonding shall be
used to prevent electrical discontinuity.
(4) Guarding of rooms containing electric supply equipment. (i)
Rooms and spaces in which electric supply lines or equipment are
installed shall meet the requirements of paragraphs (u)(4)(ii)
[[Page 795]]
through (u)(4)(v) of this section under the following conditions:
(A) If exposed live parts operating at 50 to 150 volts to ground are
located within 8 feet of the ground or other working surface inside the
room or space,
(B) If live parts operating at 151 to 600 volts and located within 8
feet of the ground or other working surface inside the room or space are
guarded only by location, as permitted under paragraph (u)(5)(i) of this
section, or
(C) If live parts operating at more than 600 volts are located
within the room or space, unless:
(1) The live parts are enclosed within grounded, metal-enclosed
equipment whose only openings are designed so that foreign objects
inserted in these openings will be deflected from energized parts, or
(2) The live parts are installed at a height above ground and any
other working surface that provides protection at the voltage to which
they are energized corresponding to the protection provided by an 8-foot
height at 50 volts.
(ii) The rooms and spaces shall be so enclosed within fences,
screens, partitions, or walls as to minimize the possibility that
unqualified persons will enter.
(iii) Signs warning unqualified persons to keep out shall be
displayed at entrances to the rooms and spaces.
(iv) Entrances to rooms and spaces that are not under the
observation of an attendant shall be kept locked.
(v) Unqualified persons may not enter the rooms or spaces while the
electric supply lines or equipment are energized.
(5) Guarding of energized parts. (i) Guards shall be provided around
all live parts operating at more than 150 volts to ground without an
insulating covering, unless the location of the live parts gives
sufficient horizontal or vertical or a combination of these clearances
to minimize the possibility of accidental employee contact.
Note: Guidelines for the dimensions of clearance distances about
electric equipment in substations are contained in American National
Standard--National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI C2-1987. Installations
meeting the ANSI provisions comply with paragraph (u)(5)(i) of this
section. An installation that does not conform to this ANSI standard
will, nonetheless, be considered as complying with paragraph (u)(5)(i)
of this section if the employer can demonstrate that the installation
provides sufficient clearance based on the following evidence:
(1) That the installation conforms to the edition of ANSI C2 that
was in effect at the time the installation was made,
(2) That each employee is isolated from energized parts at the point
of closest approach, and
(3) That the precautions taken when work is performed on the
installation provide protection equivalent to the protection that would
be provided by horizontal and vertical clearances meeting ANSI C2-1987.
(ii) Except for fuse replacement and other necessary access by
qualified persons, the guarding of energized parts within a compartment
shall be maintained during operation and maintenance functions to
prevent accidental contact with energized parts and to prevent tools or
other equipment from being dropped on energized parts.
(iii) When guards are removed from energized equipment, barriers
shall be installed around the work area to prevent employees who are not
working on the equipment, but who are in the area, from contacting the
exposed live parts.
(6) Substation entry. (i) Upon entering an attended substation, each
employee other than those regularly working in the station shall report
his or her presence to the employee in charge in order to receive
information on special system conditions affecting employee safety.
(ii) The job briefing required by paragraph (c) of this section
shall cover such additional subjects as the location of energized
equipment in or adjacent to the work area and the limits of any
deenergized work area.
(v) Power generation. This paragraph provides additional
requirements and related work practices for power generating plants.
(1) Interlocks and other safety devices. (i) Interlocks and other
safety devices shall be maintained in a safe, operable condition.
(ii) No interlock or other safety device may be modified to defeat
its function, except for test, repair, or adjustment of the device.
(2) Changing brushes. Before exciter or generator brushes are
changed while
[[Page 796]]
the generator is in service, the exciter or generator field shall be
checked to determine whether a ground condition exists. The brushes may
not be changed while the generator is energized if a ground condition
exists.
(3) Access and working space. Sufficient access and working space
shall be provided and maintained about electric equipment to permit
ready and safe operation and maintenance of such equipment.
Note: Guidelines for the dimensions of access and working space
about electric equipment in generating stations are contained in
American National Standard--National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI C2-
1987. Installations meeting the ANSI provisions comply with paragraph
(v)(3) of this section. An installation that does not conform to this
ANSI standard will, nonetheless, be considered as complying with
paragraph (v)(3) of this section if the employer can demonstrate that
the installation provides ready and safe access based on the following
evidence:
(1) That the installation conforms to the edition of ANSI C2 that
was in effect at the time the installation was made,
(2) That the configuration of the installation enables employees to
maintain the minimum approach distances required by paragraph (l)(2) of
this section while they are working on exposed, energized parts, and
(3) That the precautions taken when are working is performed on the
installation provide protection equivalent to the protection that would
be provided by access and working space meeting ANSI C2-1987.
(4) Guarding of rooms containing electric supply equipment. (i)
Rooms and spaces in which electric supply lines or equipment are
installed shall meet the requirements of paragraphs (v)(4)(ii) through
(v)(4)(v) of this section under the following conditions:
(A) If exposed live parts operating at 50 to 150 volts to ground are
located within 8 feet of the ground or other working surface inside the
room or space,
(B) If live parts operating at 151 to 600 volts and located within 8
feet of the ground or other working surface inside the room or space are
guarded only by location, as permitted under paragraph (v)(5)(i) of this
section, or
(C) If live parts operating at more than 600 volts are located
within the room or space, unless:
(1) The live parts are enclosed within grounded, metal-enclosed
equipment whose only openings are designed so that foreign objects
inserted in these openings will be deflected from energized parts, or
(2) The live parts are installed at a height above ground and any
other working surface that provides protection at the voltage to which
they are energized corresponding to the protection provided by an 8-foot
height at 50 volts.
(ii) The rooms and spaces shall be so enclosed within fences,
screens, partitions, or walls as to minimize the possibility that
unqualified persons will enter.
(iii) Signs warning unqualified persons to keep out shall be
displayed at entrances to the rooms and spaces.
(iv) Entrances to rooms and spaces that are not under the
observation of an attendant shall be kept locked.
(v) Unqualified persons may not enter the rooms or spaces while the
electric supply lines or equipment are energized.
(5) Guarding of energized parts. (i) Guards shall be provided around
all live parts operating at more than 150 volts to ground without an
insulating covering, unless the location of the live parts gives
sufficient horizontal or vertical or a combination of these clearances
to minimize the possibility of accidental employee contact.
Note: Guidelines for the dimensions of clearance distances about
electric equipment in generating stations are contained in American
National Standard--National Electrical Safety Code, ANSI C2-1987.
Installations meeting the ANSI provisions comply with paragraph
(v)(5)(i) of this section. An installation that does not conform to this
ANSI standard will, nonetheless, be considered as complying with
paragraph (v)(5)(i) of this section if the employer can demonstrate that
the installation provides sufficient clearance based on the following
evidence:
(1) That the installation conforms to the edition of ANSI C2 that
was in effect at the time the installation was made,
(2) That each employee is isolated from energized parts at the point
of closest approach, and
(3) That the precautions taken when work is performed on the
installation provide protection equivalent to the protection that would
be provided by horizontal and vertical clearances meeting ANSI C2-1987.
(ii) Except for fuse replacement or other necessary access by
qualified persons, the guarding of energized parts
[[Page 797]]
within a compartment shall be maintained during operation and
maintenance functions to prevent accidental contact with energized parts
and to prevent tools or other equipment from being dropped on energized
parts.
(iii) When guards are removed from energized equipment, barriers
shall be installed around the work area to prevent employees who are not
working on the equipment, but who are in the area, from contacting the
exposed live parts.
(6) Water or steam spaces. The following requirements apply to work
in water and steam spaces associated with boilers:
(i) A designated employee shall inspect conditions before work is
permitted and after its completion. Eye protection, or full face
protection if necessary, shall be worn at all times when condenser,
heater, or boiler tubes are being cleaned.
(ii) Where it is necessary for employees to work near tube ends
during cleaning, shielding shall be installed at the tube ends.
(7) Chemical cleaning of boilers and pressure vessels. The following
requirements apply to chemical cleaning of boilers and pressure vessels:
(i) Areas where chemical cleaning is in progress shall be cordoned
off to restrict access during cleaning. If flammable liquids, gases, or
vapors or combustible materials will be used or might be produced during
the cleaning process, the following requirements also apply:
(A) The area shall be posted with signs restricting entry and
warning of the hazards of fire and explosion; and
(B) Smoking, welding, and other possible ignition sources are
prohibited in these restricted areas.
(ii) The number of personnel in the restricted area shall be limited
to those necessary to accomplish the task safely.
(iii) There shall be ready access to water or showers for emergency
use.
Note: See Sec. 1910.141 of this part for requirements that apply to
the water supply and to washing facilities.
(iv) Employees in restricted areas shall wear protective equipment
meeting the requirements of subpart I of this part and including, but
not limited to, protective clothing, boots, goggles, and gloves.
(8) Chlorine systems. (i) Chlorine system enclosures shall be posted
with signs restricting entry and warning of the hazard to health and the
hazards of fire and explosion.
Note: See subpart Z of this part for requirements necessary to
protect the health of employees from the effects of chlorine.
(ii) Only designated employees may enter the restricted area.
Additionally, the number of personnel shall be limited to those
necessary to accomplish the task safely.
(iii) Emergency repair kits shall be available near the shelter or
enclosure to allow for the prompt repair of leaks in chlorine lines,
equipment, or containers.
(iv) Before repair procedures are started, chlorine tanks, pipes,
and equipment shall be purged with dry air and isolated from other
sources of chlorine.
(v) The employer shall ensure that chlorine is not mixed with
materials that would react with the chlorine in a dangerously exothermic
or other hazardous manner.
(9) Boilers. (i) Before internal furnace or ash hopper repair work
is started, overhead areas shall be inspected for possible falling
objects. If the hazard of falling objects exists, overhead protection
such as planking or nets shall be provided.
(ii) When opening an operating boiler door, employees shall stand
clear of the opening of the door to avoid the heat blast and gases which
may escape from the boiler.
(10) Turbine generators. (i) Smoking and other ignition sources are
prohibited near hydrogen or hydrogen sealing systems, and signs warning
of the danger of explosion and fire shall be posted.
(ii) Excessive hydrogen makeup or abnormal loss of pressure shall be
considered as an emergency and shall be corrected immediately.
(iii) A sufficient quantity of inert gas shall be available to purge
the hydrogen from the largest generator.
(11) Coal and ash handling. (i) Only designated persons may operate
railroad equipment.
[[Page 798]]
(ii) Before a locomotive or locomotive crane is moved, a warning
shall be given to employees in the area.
(iii) Employees engaged in switching or dumping cars may not use
their feet to line up drawheads.
(iv) Drawheads and knuckles may not be shifted while locomotives or
cars are in motion.
(v) When a railroad car is stopped for unloading, the car shall be
secured from displacement that could endanger employees.
(vi) An emergency means of stopping dump operations shall be
provided at railcar dumps.
(vii) The employer shall ensure that employees who work in coal- or
ash-handling conveyor areas are trained and knowledgeable in conveyor
operation and in the requirements of paragraphs (v)(11)(viii) through
(v)(11)(xii) of this section.
(viii) Employees may not ride a coal- or ash-handling conveyor belt
at any time. Employees may not cross over the conveyor belt, except at
walkways, unless the conveyor's energy source has been deenergized and
has been locked out or tagged in accordance with paragraph (d) of this
section.
(ix) What could cause injury when started may not be started until
personnel in the area are alerted by a signal or by a designated person
that the conveyor is about to start.
(x) If a conveyor that could cause injury when started is
automatically controlled or is controlled from a remote location, an
audible device shall be provided that sounds an alarm that will be
recognized by each employee as a warning that the conveyor will start
and that can be clearly heard at all points along the conveyor where
personnel may be present. The warning device shall be actuated by the
device starting the conveyor and shall continue for a period of time
before the conveyor starts that is long enough to allow employees to
move clear of the conveyor system. A visual warning may be used in place
of the audible device if the employer can demonstrate that it will
provide an equally effective warning in the particular circumstances
involved.
Exception: If the employer can demonstrate that the system's
function would be seriously hindered by the required time delay, warning
signs may be provided in place of the audible warning device. If the
system was installed before January 31, 1995, warning signs may be
provided in place of the audible warning device until such time as the
conveyor or its control system is rebuilt or rewired. These warning
signs shall be clear, concise, and legible and shall indicate that
conveyors and allied equipment may be started at any time, that danger
exists, and that personnel must keep clear. These warning signs shall be
provided along the conveyor at areas not guarded by position or
location.
(xi) Remotely and automatically controlled conveyors, and conveyors
that have operating stations which are not manned or which are beyond
voice and visual contact from drive areas, loading areas, transfer
points, and other locations on the conveyor path not guarded by
location, position, or guards shall be furnished with emergency stop
buttons, pull cords, limit switches, or similar emergency stop devices.
However, if the employer can demonstrate that the design, function, and
operation of the conveyor do not expose an employee to hazards, an
emergency stop device is not required.
(A) Emergency stop devices shall be easily identifiable in the
immediate vicinity of such locations.
(B) An emergency stop device shall act directly on the control of
the conveyor involved and may not depend on the stopping of any other
equipment.
(C) Emergency stop devices shall be installed so that they cannot be
overridden from other locations.
(xii) Where coal-handling operations may produce a combustible
atmosphere from fuel sources or from flammable gases or dust, sources of
ignition shall be eliminated or safely controlled to prevent ignition of
the combustible atmosphere.
Note: Locations that are hazardous because of the presence of
combustible dust are classified as Class II hazardous locations. See
Sec. 1910.307 of this part.
(xiii) An employee may not work on or beneath overhanging coal in
coal bunkers, coal silos, or coal storage areas, unless the employee is
protected from all hazards posed by shifting coal.
[[Page 799]]
(xiv) An employee entering a bunker or silo to dislodge the contents
shall wear a body harness with lifeline attached. The lifeline shall be
secured to a fixed support outside the bunker and shall be attended at
all times by an employee located outside the bunker or facility.
(12) Hydroplants and equipment. Employees working on or close to
water gates, valves, intakes, forebays, flumes, or other locations where
increased or decreased water flow or levels may pose a significant
hazard shall be warned and shall vacate such dangerous areas before
water flow changes are made.
(w) Special conditions--(1) Capacitors. The following additional
requirements apply to work on capacitors and on lines connected to
capacitors.
Note: See paragraphs (m) and (n) of this section for requirements
pertaining to the deenergizing and grounding of capacitor installations.
(i) Before employees work on capacitors, the capacitors shall be
disconnected from energized sources and, after a wait of at least 5
minutes from the time of disconnection, short-circuited.
(ii) Before the units are handled, each unit in series-parallel
capacitor banks shall be short-circuited between all terminals and the
capacitor case or its rack. If the cases of capacitors are on ungrounded
substation racks, the racks shall be bonded to ground.
(iii) Any line to which capacitors are connected shall be short-
circuited before it is considered deenergized.
(2) Current transformer secondaries. The secondary of a current
transformer may not be opened while the transformer is energized. If the
primary of the current transformer cannot be deenergized before work is
performed on an instrument, a relay, or other section of a current
transformer secondary circuit, the circuit shall be bridged so that the
current transformer secondary will not be opened.
(3) Series streetlighting. (i) If the open-circuit voltage exceeds
600 volts, the series streetlighting circuit shall be worked in
accordance with paragraph (q) or (t) of this section, as appropriate.
(ii) A series loop may only be opened after the streetlighting
transformer has been deenergized and isolated from the source of supply
or after the loop is bridged to avoid an open-circuit condition.
(4) Illumination. Sufficient illumination shall be provided to
enable the employee to perform the work safely.
(5) Protection against drowning. (i) Whenever an employee may be
pulled or pushed or may fall into water where the danger of drowning
exists, the employee shall be provided with and shall use U.S. Coast
Guard approved personal flotation devices.
(ii) Each personal flotation device shall be maintained in safe
condition and shall be inspected frequently enough to ensure that it
does not have rot, mildew, water saturation, or any other condition that
could render the device unsuitable for use.
(iii) An employee may cross streams or other bodies of water only if
a safe means of passage, such as a bridge, is provided.
(6) Employee protection in public work areas. (i) Traffic control
signs and traffic control devices used for the protection of employees
shall meet the requirements of Sec. 1926.200(g)(2) of this chapter.
(ii) Before work is begun in the vicinity of vehicular or pedestrian
traffic that may endanger employees, warning signs or flags and other
traffic control devices shall be placed in conspicuous locations to
alert and channel approaching traffic.
(iii) Where additional employee protection is necessary, barricades
shall be used.
(iv) Excavated areas shall be protected with barricades.
(v) At night, warning lights shall be prominently displayed.
(7) Backfeed. If there is a possibility of voltage backfeed from
sources of cogeneration or from the secondary system (for example,
backfeed from more than one energized phase feeding a common load), the
requirements of paragraph (l) of this section apply if the lines or
equipment are to be worked as energized, and the requirements of
paragraphs (m) and (n) of this section apply if the lines or equipment
are to be worked as deenergized.
(8) Lasers. Laser equipment shall be installed, adjusted, and
operated in accordance with Sec. 1926.54 of this chapter.
[[Page 800]]
(9) Hydraulic fluids. Hydraulic fluids used for the insulated
sections of equipment shall provide insulation for the voltage involved.
(x) Definitions.
Affected employee. An employee whose job requires him or her to
operate or use a machine or equipment on which servicing or maintenance
is being performed under lockout or tagout, or whose job requires him or
her to work in an area in which such servicing or maintenance is being
performed.
Attendant. An employee assigned to remain immediately outside the
entrance to an enclosed or other space to render assistance as needed to
employees inside the space.
Authorized employee. An employee who locks out or tags out machines
or equipment in order to perform servicing or maintenance on that
machine or equipment. An affected employee becomes an authorized
employee when that employee's duties include performing servicing or
maintenance covered under this section.
Automatic circuit recloser. A self-controlled device for
interrupting and reclosing an alternating current circuit with a
predetermined sequence of opening and reclosing followed by resetting,
hold-closed, or lockout operation.
Barricade. A physical obstruction such as tapes, cones, or A-frame
type wood or metal structures intended to provide a warning about and to
limit access to a hazardous area.
Barrier. A physical obstruction which is intended to prevent contact
with energized lines or equipment or to prevent unauthorized access to a
work area.
Bond. The electrical interconnection of conductive parts designed to
maintain a common electrical potential.
Bus. A conductor or a group of conductors that serve as a common
connection for two or more circuits.
Bushing. An insulating structure, including a through conductor or
providing a passageway for such a conductor, with provision for mounting
on a barrier, conducting or otherwise, for the purposes of insulating
the conductor from the barrier and conducting current from one side of
the barrier to the other.
Cable. A conductor with insulation, or a stranded conductor with or
without insulation and other coverings (single-conductor cable), or a
combination of conductors insulated from one another (multiple-conductor
cable).
Cable sheath. A conductive protective covering applied to cables.
Note: A cable sheath may consist of multiple layers of which one or
more is conductive.
Circuit. A conductor or system of conductors through which an
electric current is intended to flow.
Clearance (between objects). The clear distance between two objects
measured surface to surface.
Clearance (for work). Authorization to perform specified work or
permission to enter a restricted area.
Communication lines. (See Lines, communication.)
Conductor. A material, usually in the form of a wire, cable, or bus
bar, used for carrying an electric current.
Covered conductor. A conductor covered with a dielectric having no
rated insulating strength or having a rated insulating strength less
than the voltage of the circuit in which the conductor is used.
Current-carrying part. A conducting part intended to be connected in
an electric circuit to a source of voltage. Non-current-carrying parts
are those not intended to be so connected.
Deenergized. Free from any electrical connection to a source of
potential difference and from electric charge; not having a potential
different from that of the earth.
Note: The term is used only with reference to current-carrying
parts, which are sometimes energized (alive).
Designated employee (designated person). An employee (or person) who
is designated by the employer to perform specific duties under the terms
of this section and who is knowledgeable in the construction and
operation of the equipment and the hazards involved.
Electric line truck. A truck used to transport personnel, tools, and
material for electric supply line work.
Electric supply equipment. Equipment that produces, modifies,
regulates, controls, or safeguards a supply of electric energy.
Electric supply lines. (See Lines, electric supply.)
[[Page 801]]
Electric utility. An organization responsible for the installation,
operation, or maintenance of an electric supply system.
Enclosed space. A working space, such as a manhole, vault, tunnel,
or shaft, that has a limited means of egress or entry, that is designed
for periodic employee entry under normal operating conditions, and that
under normal conditions does not contain a hazardous atmosphere, but
that may contain a hazardous atmosphere under abnormal conditions.
Note: Spaces that are enclosed but not designed for employee entry
under normal operating conditions are not considered to be enclosed
spaces for the purposes of this section. Similarly, spaces that are
enclosed and that are expected to contain a hazardous atmosphere are not
considered to be enclosed spaces for the purposes of this section. Such
spaces meet the definition of permit spaces in Sec. 1910.146 of this
part, and entry into them must be performed in accordance with that
standard.
Energized (alive, live). Electrically connected to a source of
potential difference, or electrically charged so as to have a potential
significantly different from that of earth in the vicinity.
Energy isolating device. A physical device that prevents the
transmission or release of energy, including, but not limited to, the
following: a manually operated electric circuit breaker, a disconnect
switch, a manually operated switch, a slide gate, a slip blind, a line
valve, blocks, and any similar device with a visible indication of the
position of the device. (Push buttons, selector switches, and other
control-circuit-type devices are not energy isolating devices.)
Energy source. Any electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic,
chemical, nuclear, thermal, or other energy source that could cause
injury to personnel.
Equipment (electric). A general term including material, fittings,
devices, appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and the like used as part of
or in connection with an electrical installation.
Exposed. Not isolated or guarded.
Ground. A conducting connection, whether intentional or accidental,
between an electric circuit or equipment and the earth, or to some
conducting body that serves in place of the earth.
Grounded. Connected to earth or to some conducting body that serves
in place of the earth.
Guarded. Covered, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected, by means
of suitable covers or casings, barrier rails or screens, mats, or
platforms, designed to minimize the possibility, under normal
conditions, of dangerous approach or accidental contact by persons or
objects.
Note: Wires which are insulated, but not otherwise protected, are
not considered as guarded.
Hazardous atmosphere means an atmosphere that may expose employees
to the risk of death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-
rescue (that is, escape unaided from an enclosed space), injury, or
acute illness from one or more of the following causes:
(1) Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in excess of 10 percent of its
lower flammable limit (LFL);
(2) Airborne combustible dust at a concentration that meets or
exceeds its LFL;
Note: This concentration may be approximated as a condition in which
the dust obscures vision at a distance of 5 feet (1.52 m) or less.
(3) Atmospheric oxygen concentration below 19.5 percent or above
23.5 percent;
(4) Atmospheric concentration of any substance for which a dose or a
permissible exposure limit is published in Subpart G, Occupational
Health and Environmental Control, or in Subpart Z, Toxic and Hazardous
Substances, of this part and which could result in employee exposure in
excess of its dose or permissible exposure limit;
Note: An atmospheric concentration of any substance that is not
capable of causing death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-
rescue, injury, or acute illness due to its health effects is not
covered by this provision.
(5) Any other atmospheric condition that is immediately dangerous to
life or health.
Note: For air contaminants for which OSHA has not determined a dose
or permissible exposure limit, other sources of information, such as
Material Safety Data Sheets
[[Page 802]]
that comply with the Hazard Communication Standard, Sec. 1910.1200 of
this part, published information, and internal documents can provide
guidance in establishing acceptable atmospheric conditions.
High-power tests. Tests in which fault currents, load currents,
magnetizing currents, and line-dropping currents are used to test
equipment, either at the equipment's rated voltage or at lower voltages.
High-voltage tests. Tests in which voltages of approximately 1000
volts are used as a practical minimum and in which the voltage source
has sufficient energy to cause injury.
High wind. A wind of such velocity that the following hazards would
be present:
(1) An employee would be exposed to being blown from elevated
locations, or
(2) An employee or material handling equipment could lose control of
material being handled, or
(3) An employee would be exposed to other hazards not controlled by
the standard involved.
Note: Winds exceeding 40 miles per hour (64.4 kilometers per hour),
or 30 miles per hour (48.3 kilometers per hour) if material handling is
involved, are normally considered as meeting this criteria unless
precautions are taken to protect employees from the hazardous effects of
the wind.
Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) means any condition
that poses an immediate or delayed threat to life or that would cause
irreversible adverse health effects or that would interfere with an
individual's ability to escape unaided from a permit space.
Note: Some materials--hydrogen fluoride gas and cadmium vapor, for
example--may produce immediate transient effects that, even if severe,
may pass without medical attention, but are followed by sudden, possibly
fatal collapse 12-72 hours after exposure. The victim ``feels normal''
from recovery from transient effects until collapse. Such materials in
hazardous quantities are considered to be ``immediately'' dangerous to
life or health.
Insulated. Separated from other conducting surfaces by a dielectric
(including air space) offering a high resistance to the passage of
current.
Note: When any object is said to be insulated, it is understood to
be insulated for the conditions to which it is normally subjected.
Otherwise, it is, within the purpose of this section, uninsulated.
Insulation (cable). That which is relied upon to insulate the
conductor from other conductors or conducting parts or from ground.
Line-clearance tree trimmer. An employee who, through related
training or on-the-job experience or both, is familiar with the special
techniques and hazards involved in line-clearance tree trimming.
Note 1: An employee who is regularly assigned to a line-clearance
tree-trimming crew and who is undergoing on-the-job training and who, in
the course of such training, has demonstrated an ability to perform
duties safely at his or her level of training and who is under the
direct supervision of a line-clearance tree trimmer is considered to be
a line-clearance tree trimmer for the performance of those duties.
Note 2: A line-clearance tree trimmer is not considered to be a
``qualified employee'' under this section unless he or she has the
training required for a qualified employee under paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of
this section. However, under the electrical safety-related work
practices standard in subpart S of this part, a line-clearance tree
trimmer is considered to be a ``qualified employee''. Tree trimming
performed by such ``qualified employees'' is not subject to the
electrical safety-related work practice requirements contained in
Secs. 1910.331 through 1910.335 of this part. (See also the note
following Sec. 1910.332(b)(3) of this part for information regarding the
training an employee must have to be considered a qualified employee
under Secs. 1910.331 through 1910.335 of this part.)
Line-clearance tree trimming. The pruning, trimming, repairing,
maintaining, removing, or clearing of trees or the cutting of brush that
is within 10 feet (305 cm) of electric supply lines and equipment.
Lines--(1) Communication lines. The conductors and their supporting
or containing structures which are used for public or private signal or
communication service, and which operate at potentials not exceeding 400
volts to ground or 750 volts between any two points of the circuit, and
the transmitted power of which does not exceed 150 watts. If the lines
are operating at less than 150 volts, no limit is placed
[[Page 803]]
on the transmitted power of the system. Under certain conditions,
communication cables may include communication circuits exceeding these
limitations where such circuits are also used to supply power solely to
communication equipment.
Note: Telephone, telegraph, railroad signal, data, clock, fire,
police alarm, cable television, and other systems conforming to this
definition are included. Lines used for signaling purposes, but not
included under this definition, are considered as electric supply lines
of the same voltage.
(2) Electric supply lines. Conductors used to transmit electric
energy and their necessary supporting or containing structures. Signal
lines of more than 400 volts are always supply lines within this
section, and those of less than 400 volts are considered as supply
lines, if so run and operated throughout.
Manhole. A subsurface enclosure which personnel may enter and which
is used for the purpose of installing, operating, and maintaining
submersible equipment or cable.
Manhole steps. A series of steps individually attached to or set
into the walls of a manhole structure.
Minimum approach distance. The closest distance an employee is
permitted to approach an energized or a grounded object.
Qualified employee (qualified person). One knowledgeable in the
construction and operation of the electric power generation,
transmission, and distribution equipment involved, along with the
associated hazards.
Note 1: An employee must have the training required by paragraph
(a)(2)(ii) of this section in order to be considered a qualified
employee.
Note 2: Except under paragraph (g)(2)(v) of this section, an
employee who is undergoing on-the-job training and who, in the course of
such training, has demonstrated an ability to perform duties safely at
his or her level of training and who is under the direct supervision of
a qualified person is considered to be a qualified person for the
performance of those duties.
Step bolt. A bolt or rung attached at intervals along a structural
member and used for foot placement during climbing or standing.
Switch. A device for opening and closing or for changing the
connection of a circuit. In this section, a switch is understood to be
manually operable, unless otherwise stated.
System operator. A qualified person designated to operate the system
or its parts.
Vault. An enclosure, above or below ground, which personnel may
enter and which is used for the purpose of installing, operating, or
maintaining equipment or cable.
Vented vault. A vault that has provision for air changes using
exhaust flue stacks and low level air intakes operating on differentials
of pressure and temperature providing for airflow which precludes a
hazardous atmosphere from developing.
Voltage. The effective (rms) potential difference between any two
conductors or between a conductor and ground. Voltages are expressed in
nominal values unless otherwise indicated. The nominal voltage of a
system or circuit is the value assigned to a system or circuit of a
given voltage class for the purpose of convenient designation. The
operating voltage of the system may vary above or below this value.
Appendix A to Sec. 1910.269--Flow Charts
This appendix presents information, in the form of flow charts, that
illustrates the scope and application of Sec. 1910.269. This appendix
addresses the interface between Sec. 1910.269 and subpart S of this part
(Electrical), between Sec. 1910.269 and Sec. 1910.146 of this part
(Permit-required confined spaces), and between Sec. 1910.269 and
Sec. 1910.147 of this part (The control of hazardous energy (lockout/
tagout)). These flow charts provide guidance for employers trying to
implement the requirements of Sec. 1910.269 in combination with other
General Industry Standards contained in part 1910.
[[Page 804]]
Appendix A-1 to Sec. 1910.269--Application of Sec. 1910.269 and Subpart
S of This Part to Electrical Installations.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31JA94.002
[[Page 805]]
Appendix A-2 to Sec. 1910.269--Application of Sec. 1910.269 and Subpart
S of This Part to Electrical Safety-Related Work Practices.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31JA94.003
Table 1--Electrical Safety-Related Work Practices in Sec. 1910.269
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Compliance with subpart S is
considered as compliance with Sec. Paragraphs that apply regardless of
1910.269 \1\ compliance with subpart S
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(d), electric shock hazards only... (a)(2) \2\ and (a)(3) \2\.
(h)(3)............................. (b) \2\.
[[Page 806]]
(i)(2)............................. (c) \2\.
(k)................................ (d), other than electric shock
hazards.
(l)(1) through (l)(4), (l)(6)(i), (e).
and (l)(8) through (l)(10).
(m)................................ (f).
(p)(4)............................. (g).
(s)(2)............................. (h)(1) and (h)(2).
(u)(1) and (u)(3) through (u)(5)... (i)(3) \2\ and (i)(4) \2\.
(v)(3) through (v)(5).............. (j) \2\.
(w)(1) and (w)(7).................. (l)(5) \2\, (l)(6)(ii) \2\,
(l)(6)(iii) \2\, and (l)(7) \2\.
(n) \2\.
(o) \2\.
(p)(1) through (p)(3).
(q) \2\.
(r) \2\.
(s)(1).
(t) \2\.
(u)(2) \2\ and (u)(6) \2\.
(v)(1), (v)(2) \2\, and (v)(6)
through (v)(12).
(w)(2) through (w)(6) \2\, (w)(8),
and (w)(9) \2\.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ If the electrical installation meets the requirements of Secs.
1910.303 through 1910.308 of this part, then the electrical
installation and any associated electrical safety-related work
practices conforming to Secs. 1910.332 through 1910.335 of this part
are considered to comply with these provisions of Sec. 1910.269 of
this part.
\2\ These provisions include electrical safety requirements that must be
met regardless of co
[[Page 807]]
mpliance with subpart S of this part.Appendix A-3 to Sec. 1910.269--
Application of Sec. 1910.269 and Subpart S of This Part to Tree-Trimming
Operations
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31JA94.004
[[Page 808]]
Appendix A-4 to Sec. 1910.269--Application of Secs. 1910.147, 1910.269
and 1910.333 to Hazardous Energy Control Procedures (Lockout/Tagout)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31JA94.005
[[Page 809]]
Appendix A-5 to Sec. 1910.269--Application of Secs. 1910.146 and
1910.269 to Permit-Required Confined Spaces
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31JA94.006
[[Page 810]]
Appendix B to Sec. 1910.269--Working on Exposed Energized Parts
I. Introduction
Electric transmission and distribution line installations have been
designed to meet National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), ANSI C2,
requirements and to provide the level of line outage performance
required by system reliability criteria. Transmission and distribution
lines are also designed to withstand the maximum overvoltages expected
to be impressed on the system. Such overvoltages can be caused by such
conditions as switching surges, faults, or lightning. Insulator design
and lengths and the clearances to structural parts (which, for low
voltage through extra-high voltage, or EHV, facilities, are generally
based on the performance of the line as a result of contamination of the
insulation or during storms) have, over the years, come closer to the
minimum approach distances used by workers (which are generally based on
non-storm conditions). Thus, as minimum approach (working) distances and
structural distances (clearances) converge, it is increasingly important
that basic considerations for establishing safe approach distances for
performing work be understood by the designers and the operating and
maintenance personnel involved.
The information in this appendix will assist employers in complying
with the minimum approach distance requirements contained in paragraphs
(l)(2) and (q)(3) of this section. The technical criteria and
methodology presented herein is mandatory for employers using reduced
minimum approach distances as permitted in Table R-7 and Table R-8. This
appendix is intended to provide essential background information and
technical criteria for the development or modification, if possible, of
the safe minimum approach distances for electric transmission and
distribution live-line work. The development of these safe distances
must be undertaken by persons knowledgeable in the techniques discussed
in this appendix and competent in the field of electric transmission and
distribution system design.
II. General
A. Definitions
The following definitions from Sec. 1910.269(x) relate to work on or
near transmission and distribution lines and equipment and the
electrical hazards they present.
Exposed. Not isolated or guarded.
Guarded. Covered, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected, by means
of suitable covers or casings, barrier rails or screens, mats, or
platforms, designed to minimize the possibility, under normal
conditions, of dangerous approach or accidental contact by persons or
objects.
Note: Wires which are insulated, but not otherwise protected, are
not considered as guarded.
Insulated. Separated from other conducting surfaces by a dielectric
(including air space) offering a high resistance to the passage of
current.
Note: When any object is said to be insulated, it is understood to
be insulated for the conditions to which it is normally subjected.
Otherwise, it is, within the purpose of this section, uninsulated.
B. Installations Energized at 50 to 300 Volts
The hazards posed by installations energized at 50 to 300 volts are
the same as those found in many other workplaces. That is not to say
that there is no hazard, but the complexity of electrical protection
required does not compare to that required for high voltage systems. The
employee must avoid contact with the exposed parts, and the protective
equipment used (such as rubber insulating gloves) must provide
insulation for the voltages involved.
C. Exposed Energized Parts Over 300 Volts AC
Table R-6, Table R-7, and Table R-8 of Sec. 1910.269 provide safe
approach and working distances in the vicinity of energized electric
apparatus so that work can be done safely without risk of electrical
flashover.
The working distances must withstand the maximum transient
overvoltage that can reach the work site under the working conditions
and practices in use. Normal system design may provide or include a
means to control transient overvoltages, or temporary devices may be
employed to achieve the same result. The use of technically correct
practices or procedures to control overvoltages (for example, portable
gaps or preventing the automatic control from initiating breaker
reclosing) enables line design and operation to be based on reduced
transient overvoltage values. Technical information for U.S. electrical
systems indicates that current design provides for the following maximum
transient overvoltage values (usually produced by switching surges): 362
kV and less--3.0 per unit; 552 kV--2.4 per unit; 800 kV--2.0 per unit.
Additional discussion of maximum transient overvoltages can be found
in paragraph IV.A.2, later in this appendix.
III. Determination of the Electrical Component of Minimum Approach
Distances
A. Voltages of 1.1 kV to 72.5 kV
For voltages of 1.1 kV to 72.5 kV, the electrical component of
minimum approach distances is based on American National Standards
Institute (ANSI)/American Institute of Electrical Engineers (AIEE)
Standard No.4,
[[Page 811]]
March 1943, Tables III and IV. (AIEE is the predecessor technical
society to the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).)
These distances are calculated by the following formula:
Equation (1)--For voltages of 1.1 kV to 72.5 kV
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31JA94.010
Where:
D = Electrical component of the minimum approach distance in air in feet
Vmax = Maximum rated line-to-ground rms voltage in kV
pu = Maximum transient overvoltage factor in per unit
Source: AIEE Standard No. 4, 1943.
This formula has been used to generate Table 1.
Table 1--AC Energized Line-Work Phase-to-Ground Electrical Component of the Minimum Approach Distance--1.1 to
72.5 kV
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Phase to phase voltage
Maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage ---------------------------------------------------
15,000 36,000 46,000 72,500
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.0......................................................... 0.08 0.33 0.49 1.03
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: The distances given (in feet) are for air as the insulating medium and provide no additional clearance for
inadvertent movement.
B. Voltages of 72.6 kV to 800 kV
For voltages of 72.6 kV to 800 kV, the electrical component of
minimum approach distances is based on ANSI/IEEE Standard 516-1987,
``IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines.'' This
standard gives the electrical component of the minimum approach distance
based on power frequency rod-gap data, supplemented with transient
overvoltage information and a saturation factor for high voltages. The
distances listed in ANSI/IEEE Standard 516 have been calculated
according to the following formula:
Equation (2)--For voltages of 72.6 kV to 800 kV
D=(C+a)puVmax
Where:
D=Electrical component of the minimum approach distance in air in feet
C=0.01 to take care of correction factors associated with the variation
of gap sparkover with voltage
a=A factor relating to the saturation of air at voltages of 345 kV or
higher
pu=Maximum anticipated transient overvoltage, in per unit (p.u.)
Vmax=Maximum rms system line-to-ground voltage in kilovolts--
it should be the ``actual'' maximum, or the normal highest
voltage for the range (for example, 10 percent above the
nominal voltage)
Source: Formula developed from ANSI/IEEE Standard No. 516, 1987.
This formula is used to calculate the electrical component of the
minimum approach distances in air and is used in the development of
Table 2 and Table 3.
Table 2--AC Energized Line-Work Phase-to-Ground Electrical Component of the Minimum Approach Distance--121 to
242 kV
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Phase to phase voltage
Maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage ---------------------------------------------------
121,000 145,000 169,000 242,000
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.0......................................................... 1.40 1.70 2.00 2.80
2.1......................................................... 1.47 1.79 2.10 2.94
2.2......................................................... 1.54 1.87 2.20 3.08
2.3......................................................... 1.61 1.96 2.30 3.22
2.4......................................................... 1.68 2.04 2.40 3.35
2.5......................................................... 1.75 2.13 2.50 3.50
2.6......................................................... 1.82 2.21 2.60 3.64
2.7......................................................... 1.89 2.30 2.70 3.76
2.8......................................................... 1.96 2.38 2.80 3.92
2.9......................................................... 2.03 2.47 2.90 4.05
3.0......................................................... 2.10 2.55 3.00 4.29
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: The distances given (in feet) are for air as the insulating medium and provide no additional clearance for
inadvertent movement.
[[Page 812]]
Table 3--AC Energized Line-Work Phase-to-Ground Electrical Component of the Minimum Approach Distance--362 to
800 kv
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Phase to phase voltage
Maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage -----------------------------------------------
362,000 552,000 800,000
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.5............................................................. .............. 4.97 8.66
1.6............................................................. .............. 5.46 9.60
1.7............................................................. .............. 5.98 10.60
1.8............................................................. .............. 6.51 11.64
1.9............................................................. .............. 7.08 12.73
2.0............................................................. 4.20 7.68 13.86
2.1............................................................. 4.41 8.27 ..............
2.2............................................................. 4.70 8.87 ..............
2.3............................................................. 5.01 9.49 ..............
2.4............................................................. 5.34 10.21 ..............
2.5............................................................. 5.67 .............. ..............
2.6............................................................. 6.01 .............. ..............
2.7............................................................. 6.36 .............. ..............
2.8............................................................. 6.73 .............. ..............
2.9............................................................. 7.10 .............. ..............
3.0............................................................. 7.48 .............. ..............
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: The distances given (in feet) are for air as the insulating medium and provide no additional clearance for
inadvertent movement.
C. Provisions for Inadvertent Movement
The minimum approach distances (working distances) must include an
``adder'' to compensate for the inadvertent movement of the worker
relative to an energized part or the movement of the part relative to
the worker. A certain allowance must be made to account for this
possible inadvertent movement and to provide the worker with a
comfortable and safe zone in which to work. A distance for inadvertent
movement (called the ``ergonomic component of the minimum approach
distance'') must be added to the electrical component to determine the
total safe minimum approach distances used in live-line work.
One approach that can be used to estimate the ergonomic component of
the minimum approach distance is response time-distance analysis. When
this technique is used, the total response time to a hazardous incident
is estimated and converted to distance travelled. For example, the
driver of a car takes a given amount of time to respond to a
``stimulus'' and stop the vehicle. The elapsed time involved results in
a distance being travelled before the car comes to a complete stop. This
distance is dependent on the speed of the car at the time the stimulus
appears.
In the case of live-line work, the employee must first perceive that
he or she is approaching the danger zone. Then, the worker responds to
the danger and must decelerate and stop all motion toward the energized
part. During the time it takes to stop, a distance will have been
traversed. It is this distance that must be added to the electrical
component of the minimum approach distance to obtain the total safe
minimum approach distance.
At voltages below 72.5 kV, the electrical component of the minimum
approach distance is smaller than the ergonomic component. At 72.5 kV
the electrical component is only a little more than 1 foot. An ergonomic
component of the minimum approach distance is needed that will provide
for all the worker's unexpected movements. The usual live-line work
method for these voltages is the use of rubber insulating equipment,
frequently rubber gloves. The energized object needs to be far enough
away to provide the worker's face with a safe approach distance, as his
or her hands and arms are insulated. In this case, 2 feet has been
accepted as a sufficient and practical value.
For voltages between 72.6 and 800 kV, there is a change in the work
practices employed during energized line work. Generally, live-line
tools (hot sticks) are employed to perform work while equipment is
energized. These tools, by design, keep the energized part at a constant
distance from the employee and thus maintain the appropriate minimum
approach distance automatically.
The length of the ergonomic component of the minimum approach
distance is also influenced by the location of the worker and by the
nature of the work. In these higher voltage ranges, the employees use
work methods that more tightly control their movements than when the
workers perform rubber glove work. The worker is farther from energized
line or equipment and needs to be more precise in his or her movements
just to perform the work.
For these reasons, a smaller ergonomic component of the minimum
approach distance is needed, and a distance of 1 foot has been selected
for voltages between 72.6 and 800 kV.
[[Page 813]]
Table 4 summarizes the ergonomic component of the minimum approach
distance for the two voltage ranges.
Table 4--Ergonomic Component of Minimum Approach Distance
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Distance
Voltage range (kV) (feet)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1 to 72.5.................................................. 2.0
72.6 to 800.................................................. 1.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: This distance must be added to the electrical component of the
minimum approach distance to obtain the full minimum approach
distance.
D. Bare-Hand Live-Line Minimum Approach Distances
Calculating the strength of phase-to-phase transient overvoltages is
complicated by the varying time displacement between overvoltages on
parallel conductors (electrodes) and by the varying ratio between the
positive and negative voltages on the two electrodes. The time
displacement causes the maximum voltage between phases to be less than
the sum of the phase-to-ground voltages. The International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Technical Committee 28, Working Group
2, has developed the following formula for determining the phase-to-
phase maximum transient overvoltage, based on the per unit (p.u.) of the
system nominal voltage phase-to-ground crest:
pup=pug+1.6.
Where:
pug=p.u. phase-to-ground maximum transient overvoltage
pup=p.u. phase-to-phase maximum transient overvoltage
This value of maximum anticipated transient overvoltage must be used
in Equation (2) to calculate the phase-to-phase minimum approach
distances for live-line bare-hand work.
E. Compiling the Minimum Approach Distance Tables
For each voltage involved, the distance in Table 4 in this appendix
has been added to the distance in Table 1, Table 2 or Table 3 in this
appendix to determine the resulting minimum approach distances in Table
R-6, Table R-7, and Table R-8 in Sec. 1910.269.
F. Miscellaneous Correction Factors
The strength of an air gap is influenced by the changes in the air
medium that forms the insulation. A brief discussion of each factor
follows, with a summary at the end.
1. Dielectric strength of air. The dielectric strength of air in a
uniform electric field at standard atmospheric conditions is
approximately 31 kV (crest) per cm at 60 Hz. The disruptive gradient is
affected by the air pressure, temperature, and humidity, by the shape,
dimensions, and separation of the electrodes, and by the characteristics
of the applied voltage (wave shape).
2. Atmospheric effect. Flashover for a given air gap is inhibited by
an increase in the density (humidity) of the air. The empirically
determined electrical strength of a given gap is normally applicable at
standard atmospheric conditions (20 deg.C, 101.3 kPa, 11 g/cm3
humidity).
The combination of temperature and air pressure that gives the
lowest gap flashover voltage is high temperature and low pressure. These
are conditions not likely to occur simultaneously. Low air pressure is
generally associated with high humidity, and this causes increased
electrical strength. An average air pressure is more likely to be
associated with low humidity. Hot and dry working conditions are thus
normally associated with reduced electrical strength.
The electrical component of the minimum approach distances in Table
1, Table 2, and Table 3 has been calculated using the maximum transient
overvoltages to determine withstand voltages at standard atmospheric
conditions.
3. Altitude. The electrical strength of an air gap is reduced at
high altitude, due principally to the reduced air pressure. An increase
of about 3 percent per 300 meters in the minimum approach distance for
altitudes above 900 meters is required. Table R-10 of Sec. 1910.269
presents this information in tabular form.
Summary. After taking all these correction factors into account and
after considering their interrelationships relative to the air gap
insulation strength and the conditions under which live work is
performed, one finds that only a correction for altitude need be made.
An elevation of 900 meters is established as the base elevation, and the
values of the electrical component of the minimum approach distances has
been derived with this correction factor in mind. Thus, the values used
for elevations below 900 meters are conservative without any change;
corrections have to be made only above this base elevation.
IV. Determination of Reduced Minimum Approach Distances
A. Factors Affecting Voltage Stress at the Work Site
1. System voltage (nominal). The nominal system voltage range sets
the absolute lower limit for the minimum approach distance. The highest
value within the range, as given in the relevant table, is selected and
used as a reference for per unit calculations.
2. Transient overvoltages. Transient overvoltages may be generated
on an electrical system by the operation of switches or breakers, by the
occurrence of a fault on the
[[Page 814]]
line or circuit being worked or on an adjacent circuit, and by similar
activities. Most of the overvoltages are caused by switching, and the
term ``switching surge'' is often used to refer generically to all types
of overvoltages. However, each overvoltage has an associated transient
voltage wave shape. The wave shape arriving at the site and its
magnitude vary considerably.
The information used in the development of the minimum approach
distances takes into consideration the most common wave shapes; thus,
the required minimum approach distances are appropriate for any
transient overvoltage level usually found on electric power generation,
transmission, and distribution systems. The values of the per unit
(p.u.) voltage relative to the nominal maximum voltage are used in the
calculation of these distances.
3. Typical magnitude of overvoltages. The magnitude of typical
transient overvoltages is given in Table 5.
4. Standard deviation--air-gap withstand. For each air gap length,
and under the same atmospheric conditions, there is a statistical
variation in the breakdown voltage. The probability of the breakdown
voltage is assumed to have a normal (Gaussian) distribution. The
standard deviation of this distribution varies with the wave shape, gap
geometry, and atmospheric conditions. The withstand voltage of the air
gap used in calculating the electrical component of the minimum approach
distance has been set at three standard deviations (3[sigma] \1\) below
the critical flashover voltage. (The critical flashover voltage is the
crest value of the impulse wave that, under specified conditions, causes
flashover on 50 percent of the applications. An impulse wave of three
standard deviations below this value, that is, the withstand voltage,
has a probability of flashover of approximately 1 in 1000.)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Sigma, [sigma], is the symbol for standard deviation.
Table 5--Magnitude of Typical Transient Overvoltages
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Magnitude
Cause (per
unit)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Energized 200 mile line without closing resistors............ 3.5
Energized 200 mile line with one step closing resistor....... 2.1
Energized 200 mile line with multi-step resistor............. 2.5
Reclosed with trapped charge one step resistor............... 2.2
Opening surge with single restrike........................... 3.0
Fault initiation unfaulted phase............................. 2.1
Fault initiation adjacent circuit............................ 2.5
Fault clearing............................................... 1.7-1.9
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Source: ANSI/IEEE Standard No. 516, 1987.
5. Broken Insulators. Tests have shown that the insulation strength
of an insulator string with broken skirts is reduced. Broken units may
have lost up to 70% of their withstand capacity. Because the insulating
capability of a broken unit cannot be determined without testing it,
damaged units in an insulator are usually considered to have no
insulating value. Additionally, the overall insulating strength of a
string with broken units may be further reduced in the presence of a
live-line tool alongside it. The number of good units that must be
present in a string is based on the maximum overvoltage possible at the
worksite.
B. Minimum Approach Distances Based on Known Maximum Anticipated Per-
Unit Transient Overvoltages
1. Reduction of the minimum approach distance for AC systems. When
the transient overvoltage values are known and supplied by the employer,
Table R-7 and Table R-8 of Sec. 1910.269 allow the minimum approach
distances from energized parts to be reduced. In order to determine what
this maximum overvoltage is, the employer must undertake an engineering
analysis of the system. As a result of this engineering study, the
employer must provide new live work procedures, reflecting the new
minimum approach distances, the conditions and limitations of
application of the new minimum approach distances, and the specific
practices to be used when these procedures are implemented.
2. Calculation of reduced approach distance values. The following
method of calculating reduced minimum approach distances is based on
ANSI/IEEE Standard 516:
Step 1. Determine the maximum voltage (with respect to a given
nominal voltage range) for the energized part.
Step 2. Determine the maximum transient overvoltage (normally a
switching surge) that can be present at the work site during work
operation.
Step 3. Determine the technique to be used to control the maximum
transient overvoltage. (See paragraphs IV.C and IV.D of this appendix.)
Determine the maximum voltage that can exist at the work site with that
form of control in place and with a confidence level of 3[sigma]. This
voltage is considered to be the withstand voltage for the purpose of
calculating the appropriate minimum approach distance.
Step 4. Specify in detail the control technique to be used, and
direct its implementation during the course of the work.
Step 5. Using the new value of transient overvoltage in per unit
(p.u.), determine the required phase-to-ground minimum approach distance
from Table R-7 or Table R-8 of Sec. 1910.269.
[[Page 815]]
C. Methods of Controlling Possible Transient Overvoltage Stress Found on
a System
1. Introduction. There are several means of controlling overvoltages
that occur on transmission systems. First, the operation of circuit
breakers or other switching devices may be modified to reduce switching
transient overvoltages. Second, the overvoltage itself may be forcibly
held to an acceptable level by means of installation of surge arresters
at the specific location to be protected. Third, the transmission system
may be changed to minimize the effect of switching operations.
2. Operation of circuit breakers.\2\ The maximum transient
overvoltage that can reach the work site is often due to switching on
the line on which work is being performed. If the automatic-reclosing is
removed during energized line work so that the line will not be re-
energized after being opened for any reason, the maximum switching surge
overvoltage is then limited to the larger of the opening surge or the
greatest possible fault-generated surge, provided that the devices (for
example, insertion resistors) are operable and will function to limit
the transient overvoltage. It is essential that the operating ability of
such devices be assured when they are employed to limit the overvoltage
level. If it is prudent not to remove the reclosing feature (because of
system operating conditions), other methods of controlling the switching
surge level may be necessary.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\2\ The detailed design of a circuit interrupter, such as the design
of the contacts, of resistor insertion, and of breaker timing control,
are beyond the scope of this appendix. These features are routinely
provided as part of the design for the system. Only features that can
limit the maximum switching transient overvoltage on a system are
discussed in this appendix.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Transient surges on an adjacent line, particularly for double
circuit construction, may cause a significant overvoltage on the line on
which work is being performed. The coupling to adjacent lines must be
accounted for when minimum approach distances are calculated based on
the maximum transient overvoltage.
3. Surge arresters. The use of modern surge arresters has permitted
a reduction in the basic impulse-insulation levels of much transmission
system equipment. The primary function of early arresters was to protect
the system insulation from the effects of lightning. Modern arresters
not only dissipate lightning-caused transients, but may also control
many other system transients that may be caused by switching or faults.
It is possible to use properly designed arresters to control
transient overvoltages along a transmission line and thereby reduce the
requisite length of the insulator string. On the other hand, if the
installation of arresters has not been used to reduce the length of the
insulator string, it may be used to reduce the minimum approach distance
instead.\3\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\3\ Surge arrestor application is beyond the scope of this appendix.
However, if the arrester is installed near the work site, the
application would be similar to protective gaps as discussed in
paragraph IV.D. of this appendix.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Switching Restrictions. Another form of overvoltage control is
the establishment of switching restrictions, under which breakers are
not permitted to be operated until certain system conditions are
satisfied. Restriction of switching is achieved by the use of a tagging
system, similar to that used for a ``permit'', except that the common
term used for this activity is a ``hold-off'' or ``restriction''. These
terms are used to indicate that operation is not prevented, but only
modified during the live-work activity.
D. Minimum Approach Distance Based on Control of Voltage Stress
(Overvoltages) at the Work Site.
Reduced minimum approach distances can be calculated as follows:
1. First Method--Determining the reduced minimum approach distance
from a given withstand voltage.\4\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\4\ Since a given rod gap of a given configuration corresponds to a
certain withstand voltage, this method can also be used to determine the
minimum approach distance for a known gap.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 1. Select the appropriate withstand voltage for the protective
gap based on system requirements and an acceptable probability of actual
gap flashover.
Step 2. Determine a gap distance that provides a withstand voltage
\5\ greater than or equal to the one selected in the first step.\6\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\5\ The withstand voltage for the gap is equal to 85 percent of its
critical flashover voltage.
\6\ Switch steps 1 and 2 if the length of the protective gap is
known. The withstand voltage must then be checked to ensure that it
provides an acceptable probability of gap flashover. In general, it
should be at least 1.25 times the maximum crest operating voltage.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 3. Using 110 percent of the gap's critical flashover voltage,
determine the electrical component of the minimum approach distance from
Equation (2) or Table 6, which is a tabulation of distance vs. withstand
voltage based on Equation (2).
Step 4. Add the 1-foot ergonomic component to obtain the total
minimum approach distance to be maintained by the employee.
2. Second Method--Determining the necessary protective gap length
from a desired (reduced) minimum approach distance.
[[Page 816]]
Step 1. Determine the desired minimum approach distance for the
employee. Subtract the 1-foot ergonomic component of the minimum
approach distance.
Step 2. Using this distance, calculate the air gap withstand voltage
from Equation (2). Alternatively, find the voltage corresponding to the
distance in Table 6.\7\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\7\ Since the value of the saturation factor, a, in Equation (2) is
dependent on the maximum voltage, several iterative computations may be
necessary to determine the correct withstand voltage using the equation.
A graph of withstand voltage vs. distance is given in ANSI/IEEE Std.
516, 1987. This graph could also be used to determine the appropriate
withstand voltage for the minimum approach distance involved.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 3. Select a protective gap distance corresponding to a critical
flashover voltage that, when multiplied by 110 percent, is less than or
equal to the withstand voltage from Step 2.
Step 4. Calculate the withstand voltage of the protective gap (85
percent of the critical flashover voltage) to ensure that it provides an
acceptable risk of flashover during the time the gap is installed.
Table 6--Withstand Distances for Transient Overvoltages
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Withstand
distance
Crest voltage (kV) (in feet)
air gap
------------------------------------------------------------------------
100......................................................... 0.71
150......................................................... 1.06
200......................................................... 1.41
250......................................................... 1.77
300......................................................... 2.12
350......................................................... 2.47
400......................................................... 2.83
450......................................................... 3.18
500......................................................... 3.54
550......................................................... 3.89
600......................................................... 4.24
650......................................................... 4.60
700......................................................... 5.17
750......................................................... 5.73
800......................................................... 6.31
850......................................................... 6.91
900......................................................... 7.57
950......................................................... 8.23
1000........................................................ 8.94
1050........................................................ 9.65
1100........................................................ 10.42
1150........................................................ 11.18
1200........................................................ 12.05
1250........................................................ 12.90
1300........................................................ 13.79
1350........................................................ 14.70
1400........................................................ 15.64
1450........................................................ 16.61
1500........................................................ 17.61
1550........................................................ 18.63
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Source: Calculations are based on Equation (2).
Note: The air gap is based on the 60-Hz rod-gap withstand distance.
3. Sample protective gap calculations.
Problem 1: Work is to be performed on a 500-kV transmission line
that is subject to transient overvoltages of 2.4 p.u. The maximum
operating voltage of the line is 552 kV. Determine the length of the
protective gap that will provide the minimum practical safe approach
distance. Also, determine what that minimum approach distance is.
Step 1. Calculate the smallest practical maximum transient
overvoltage (1.25 times the crest line-to-ground voltage):\8\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\8\ To eliminate unwanted flashovers due to minor system
disturbances, it is desirable to have the crest withstand voltage no
lower than 1.25 p.u.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31JA94.012
This will be the withstand voltage of the protective gap.
Step 2. Using test data for a particular protective gap, select a
gap that has a critical flashover voltage greater than or equal to:
563 kV / 0.85 = 662 kV.
For example, if a protective gap with a 4.0-foot spacing tested to a
critical flashover voltage of 665 kV, crest, select this gap spacing.
Step 3. This protective gap corresponds to a 110 percent of critical
flashover voltage value of:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31JA94.014
This corresponds to the withstand voltage of the electrical
component of the minimum approach distance.
Step 4. Using this voltage in Equation (2) results in an electrical
component of the minimum approach distance of:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31JA94.015
Step 5. Add 1 foot to the distance calculated in step 4, resulting
in a total minimum approach distance of 6.5 feet.
Problem 2: For a line operating at a maximum voltage of 552 kV
subject to a maximum transient overvoltage of 2.4 p.u., find a
protective gap distance that will permit the use of a 9.0-foot minimum
approach distance. (A minimum approach distance of 11 feet, 3 inches is
normally required.)
Step 1. The electrical component of the minimum approach distance is
8.0 feet (9.0-1.0).
Step 2. From Table 6, select the withstand voltage corresponding to
a distance of 8.0 feet. By interpolation:
[[Page 817]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31JA94.016
Step 3. The voltage calculated in Step 2 corresponds to 110 percent
of the critical flashover voltage of the gap that should be employed.
Using test data for a particular protective gap, select a gap that has a
critical flashover voltage less than or equal to:
D = (0.01+0.0006)x732kV/2
For example, if a protective gap with a 5.8-foot spacing tested to a
critical flashover voltage of 820 kV, crest, select this gap spacing.
Step 4. The withstand voltage of this protective gap would be:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31JA94.018
The maximum operating crest voltage would be:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31JA94.019
The crest withstand voltage of the protective gap in per unit is thus:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31JA94.020
If this is acceptable, the protective gap could be installed with a
5.8-foot spacing, and the minimum approach distance could then be
reduced to 9.0 feet.
4. Comments and variations. The 1-foot ergonomic component of the
minimum approach distance must be added to the electrical component of
the minimum approach distance calculated under paragraph IV.D of this
appendix. The calculations may be varied by starting with the protective
gap distance or by starting with the minimum approach distance.
E. Location of Protective Gaps
1. Installation of the protective gap on a structure adjacent to the
work site is an acceptable practice, as this does not significantly
reduce the protection afforded by the gap.
2. Gaps installed at terminal stations of lines or circuits provide
a given level of protection. The level may not, however, extend
throughout the length of the line to the worksite. The use of gaps at
terminal stations must be studied in depth. The use of substation
terminal gaps raises the possibility that separate surges could enter
the line at opposite ends, each with low enough magnitude to pass the
terminal gaps without flashover. When voltage surges are initiated
simultaneously at each end of a line and travel toward each other, the
total voltage on the line at the point where they meet is the arithmetic
sum of the two surges. A gap that is installed within 0.5 mile of the
work site will protect against such intersecting waves. Engineering
studies of a particular line or system may indicate that adequate
protection can be provided by even more distant gaps.
3. If protective gaps are used at the work site, the work site
impulse insulation strength is established by the gap setting. Lightning
strikes as much as 6 miles away from the worksite may cause a voltage
surge greater than the insulation withstand voltage, and a gap flashover
may occur. The flashover will not occur between the employee and the
line, but across the protective gap instead.
4. There are two reasons to disable the automatic-reclosing feature
of circuit-interrupting devices while employees are performing live-line
maintenance:
To prevent the reenergizing of a circuit faulted by actions
of a worker, which could possibly create a hazard or compound injuries
or damage produced by the original fault;
To prevent any transient overvoltage caused by the
switching surge that would occur if the circuit were reenergized.
However, due to system stability considerations, it may not always
be feasible to disable the automatic-reclosing feature.
Appendix C to Sec. 1910.269--Protection from Step and Touch Potentials
I. Introduction
When a ground fault occurs on a power line, voltage is impressed on
the ``grounded'' object faulting the line. The voltage to which this
object rises depends largely on the voltage on the line, on the
impedance of the faulted conductor, and on the impedance to ``true,'' or
``absolute,'' ground represented by the object. If the object causing
the fault represents a relatively large impedance, the voltage impressed
on it is essentially the phase-to-ground system voltage. However, even
faults to well grounded transmission towers or substation structures can
result in hazardous voltages.\1\ The degree of the hazard depends upon
the magnitude of the fault current and the time of exposure.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ This appendix provides information primarily with respect to
employee protection from contact between equipment being used and an
energized power line. The information presented is also relevant to
ground faults to transmission towers and substation structures; however,
grounding systems for these structures should be designed to minimize
the step and touch potentials involved.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 818]]
II. Voltage-Gradient Distribution
A. Voltage-Gradient Distribution Curve
The dissipation of voltage from a grounding electrode (or from the
grounded end of an energized grounded object) is called the ground
potential gradient. Voltage drops associated with this dissipation of
voltage are called ground potentials. Figure 1 is a typical voltage-
gradient distribution curve (assuming a uniform soil texture). This
graph shows that voltage decreases rapidly with increasing distance from
the grounding electrode.
B. Step and Touch Potentials
``Step potential'' is the voltage between the feet of a person
standing near an energized grounded object. It is equal to the
difference in voltage, given by the voltage distribution curve, between
two points at different distances from the ``electrode''. A person could
be at risk of injury during a fault simply by standing near the
grounding point.
``Touch potential'' is the voltage between the energized object and
the feet of a person in contact with the object. It is equal to the
difference in voltage between the object (which is at a distance of 0
feet) and a point some distance away. It should be noted that the touch
potential could be nearly the full voltage across the grounded object if
that object is grounded at a point remote from the place where the
person is in contact with it. For example, a crane that was grounded to
the system neutral and that contacted an energized line would expose any
person in contact with the crane or its uninsulated load line to a touch
potential nearly equal to the full fault voltage.
Step and touch potentials are illustrated in Figure 2.
[[Page 819]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31JA94.007
[[Page 820]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31JA94.008
Figure 1--Typical Voltage-Gradient Distribution Curve
C. Protection From the Hazards of Ground-Potential Gradients.
An engineering analysis of the power system under fault conditions
can be used to determine whether or not hazardous step and touch
voltages will develop. The result of this analysis can ascertain the
need for protective measures and can guide the selection of appropriate
precautions.
[[Page 821]]
Several methods may be used to protect employees from hazardous
ground-potential gradients, including equipotential zones, insulating
equipment, and restricted work areas.
1. The creation of an equipotential zone will protect a worker
standing within it from hazardous step and touch potentials. (See Figure
3.) Such a zone can be produced through the use of a metal mat connected
to the grounded object. In some cases, a grounding grid can be used to
equalize the voltage within the grid. Equipotential zones will not,
however, protect employees who are either wholly or partially outside
the protected area. Bonding conductive objects in the immediate work
area can also be used to minimize the potential between the objects and
between each object and ground. (Bonding an object outside the work area
can increase the touch potential to that object in some cases, however.)
2. The use of insulating equipment, such as rubber gloves, can
protect employees handling grounded equipment and conductors from
hazardous touch potentials. The insulating equipment must be rated for
the highest voltage that can be impressed on the grounded objects under
fault conditions (rather than for the full system voltage).
3. Restricting employees from areas where hazardous step or touch
potentials could arise can protect employees not directly involved in
the operation being performed. Employees on the ground in the vicinity
of transmission structures should be kept at a distance where step
voltages would be insufficient to cause injury. Employees should not
handle grounded conductors or equipment likely to become energized to
hazardous voltages unless the employees are within an equipotential zone
or are protected by insulating equipment.
[[Page 822]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31JA94.009
[[Page 823]]
Appendix D to Sec. 1910.269--Methods of Inspecting and Testing Wood
Poles
I. Introduction
When work is to be performed on a wood pole, it is important to
determine the condition of the pole before it is climbed. The weight of
the employee, the weight of equipment being installed, and other working
stresses (such as the removal or retensioning of conductors) can lead to
the failure of a defective pole or one that is not designed to handle
the additional stresses.\1\ For these reasons, it is essential that an
inspection and test of the condition of a wood pole be performed before
it is climbed.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ A properly guyed pole in good condition should, at a minimum, be
able to handle the weight of an employee climbing it.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
If the pole is found to be unsafe to climb or to work from, it must
be secured so that it does not fail while an employee is on it. The pole
can be secured by a line truck boom, by ropes or guys, or by lashing a
new pole alongside it. If a new one is lashed alongside the defective
pole, work should be performed from the new one.
II. Inspection of Wood Poles
Wood poles should be inspected by a qualified employee for the
following conditions:\2\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\2\ The presence of any of these conditions is an indication that
the pole may not be safe to climb or to work from. The employee
performing the inspection must be qualified to make a determination as
to whether or not it is safe to perform the work without taking
additional precautions.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
A. General Condition
The pole should be inspected for buckling at the ground line and for
an unusual angle with respect to the ground. Buckling and odd angles may
indicate that the pole has rotted or is broken.
B. Cracks
The pole should be inspected for cracks. Horizontal cracks
perpendicular to the grain of the wood may weaken the pole. Vertical
ones, although not considered to be a sign of a defective pole, can pose
a hazard to the climber, and the employee should keep his or her gaffs
away from them while climbing.
C. Holes
Hollow spots and woodpecker holes can reduce the strength of a wood
pole.
D. Shell Rot and Decay
Rotting and decay are cutout hazards and are possible indications of
the age and internal condition of the pole.
E. Knots
One large knot or several smaller ones at the same height on the
pole may be evidence of a weak point on the pole.
F. Depth of Setting
Evidence of the existence of a former ground line substantially
above the existing ground level may be an indication that the pole is no
longer buried to a sufficient extent.
G. Soil Conditions
Soft, wet, or loose soil may not support any changes of stress on
the pole.
H. Burn Marks
Burning from transformer failures or conductor faults could damage
the pole so that it cannot withstand mechanical stress changes.
III. Testing of Wood Poles
The following tests, which have been taken from Sec. 1910.268(n)(3),
are recognized as acceptable methods of testing wood poles:
A. Hammer Test
Rap the pole sharply with a hammer weighing about 3 pounds, starting
near the ground line and continuing upwards circumferentially around the
pole to a height of approximately 6 feet. The hammer will produce a
clear sound and rebound sharply when striking sound wood. Decay pockets
will be indicated by a dull sound or a less pronounced hammer rebound.
Also, prod the pole as near the ground line as possible using a pole
prod or a screwdriver with a blade at least 5 inches long. If
substantial decay is encountered, the pole is considered unsafe.
B. Rocking Test
Apply a horizontal force to the pole and attempt to rock it back and
forth in a direction perpendicular to the line. Caution must be
exercised to avoid causing power lines to swing together. The force may
be applied either by pushing with a pike pole or pulling with a rope. If
the pole cracks during the test, it shall be considered unsafe.
Appendix E to Sec. 1910.269--Reference Documents
The references contained in this appendix provide information that
can be helpful in understanding and complying with the requirements
contained in Sec. 1910.269. The national consensus standards referenced
in this appendix contain detailed specifications that employers may
follow in complying with the more performance-oriented requirements of
OSHA's final rule. Except as specifically noted in Sec. 1910.269,
however, compliance with the national consensus standards is not a
[[Page 824]]
substitute for compliance with the provisions of the OSHA standard.
ANSI/SIA A92.2-1990, American National Standard for Vehicle-Mounted
Elevating and Rotating Aerial Devices.
ANSI C2-1993, National Electrical Safety Code.
ANSI Z133.1-1988, American National Standard Safety Requirements for
Pruning, Trimming, Repairing, Maintaining, and Removing Trees, and for
Cutting Brush.
ANSI/ASME B20.1-1990, Safety Standard for Conveyors and Related
Equipment.
ANSI/IEEE Std. 4-1978 (Fifth Printing), IEEE Standard Techniques for
High-Voltage Testing.
ANSI/IEEE Std. 100-1988, IEEE Standard Dictionary of Electrical and
Electronic Terms.
ANSI/IEEE Std. 516-1987, IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods on
Energized Power-Lines.
ANSI/IEEE Std. 935-1989, IEEE Guide on Terminology for Tools and
Equipment to Be Used in Live Line Working.
ANSI/IEEE Std. 957-1987, IEEE Guide for Cleaning Insulators.
ANSI/IEEE Std. 978-1984 (R1991), IEEE Guide for In-Service
Maintenance and Electrical Testing of Live-Line Tools.
ASTM D 120-87, Specification for Rubber Insulating Gloves.
ASTM D 149-92, Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and
Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at
Commercial Power Frequencies.
ASTM D 178-93, Specification for Rubber Insulating Matting.
ASTM D 1048-93, Specification for Rubber Insulating Blankets.
ASTM D 1049-93, Specification for Rubber Insulating Covers.
ASTM D 1050-90, Specification for Rubber Insulating Line Hose.
ASTM D 1051-87, Specification for Rubber Insulating Sleeves.
ASTM F 478-92, Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Line
Hose and Covers.
ASTM F 479-93, Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating
Blankets.
ASTM F 496-93b, Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating
Gloves and Sleeves.
ASTM F 711-89, Specification for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP)
Rod and Tube Used in Live Line Tools.
ASTM F 712-88, Test Methods for Electrically Insulating Plastic
Guard Equipment for Protection of Workers.
ASTM F 819-83a (1988), Definitions of Terms Relating to Electrical
Protective Equipment for Workers.
ASTM F 855-90, Specifications for Temporary Grounding Systems to Be
Used on De-Energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment.
ASTM F 887-91a, Specifications for Personal Climbing Equipment.
ASTM F 914-91, Test Method for Acoustic Emission for Insulated
Aerial Personnel Devices.
ASTM F 968-93, Specification for Electrically Insulating Plastic
Guard Equipment for Protection of Workers.
ASTM F 1116-88, Test Method for Determining Dielectric Strength of
Overshoe Footwear.
ASTM F 1117-87, Specification for Dielectric Overshoe Footwear.
ASTM F 1236-89, Guide for Visual Inspection of Electrical Protective
Rubber Products.
ASTM F 1505-94, Standard Specification for Insulated and Insulating
Hand Tools.
ASTM F 1506-94, Standard Performance Specification for Textile
Materials for Wearing Apparel for Use by Electrical Workers Exposed to
Momentary Electric Arc and Related Thermal Hazards.
IEEE Std. 62-1978, IEEE Guide for Field Testing Power Apparatus
Insulation.
IEEE Std. 524-1992, IEEE Guide to the Installation of Overhead
Transmission Line Conductors.
IEEE Std. 1048-1990, IEEE Guide for Protective Grounding of Power
Lines.
IEEE Std. 1067-1990, IEEE Guide for the In-Service Use, Care,
Maintenance, and Testing of Conductive Clothing for Use on Voltages up
to 765 kV AC.
[59 FR 4437, Jan. 31, 1994; 59 FR 33658, June 30, 1994, as amended at 59
FR 4458, Jan. 31, 1994; 59 FR 40729, Aug. 9, 1994; 59 FR 51748, Oct. 12,
1994]
Sec. 1910.272 Grain handling facilities.
(a) Scope. This section contains requirements for the control of
grain dust fires and explosions, and certain other safety hazards
associated with grain handling facilities. It applies in addition to all
other relevant provisions of part 1910 (or part 1917 at marine
terminals).
(b) Application. (1) Paragraphs (a) through (n) of this section
apply to grain elevators, feed mills, flour mills, rice mills, dust
pelletizing plants, dry corn mills, soybean flaking operations, and the
dry grinding operations of soycake.
(2) Paragraphs (o), (p), and (q) of this section apply only to grain
elevators.
(c) Definitions.
Choked leg means a condition of material buildup in the bucket
elevator that results in the stoppage of material flow and bucket
movement. A bucket elevator is not considered choked that has the up-leg
partially or fully loaded
[[Page 825]]
and has the boot and discharge cleared allowing bucket movement.
Flat storage structure means a grain storage building or structure
that will not empty completely by gravity, has an unrestricted ground
level opening for entry, and must be entered to reclaim the residual
grain using powered equipment or manual means.
Fugitive grain dust means combustible dust particles, emitted from
the stock handling system, of such size as will pass through a U.S.
Standard 40 mesh sieve (425 microns or less).
Grain elevator means a facility engaged in the receipt, handling,
storage, and shipment of bulk raw agricultural commodities such as corn,
wheat, oats, barley, sunflower seeds, and soybeans.
Hot work means work involving electric or gas welding, cutting,
brazing, or similar flame producing operations.
Inside bucket elevator means a bucket elevator that has the boot and
more than 20 percent of the total leg height (above grade or ground
level) inside the grain elevator structure. Bucket elevators with leg
casings that are inside (and pass through the roofs) of rail or truck
dump sheds with the remainder of the leg outside of the grain elevator
structure, are not considered inside bucket elevators.
Jogging means repeated starting and stopping of drive motors in an
attempt to clear choked legs.
Lagging means a covering on drive pulleys used to increase the
coefficient of friction between the pulley and the belt.
Permit means the written certification by the employer authorizing
employees to perform identified work operations subject to specified
precautions.
(d) Emergency action plan. The employer shall develop and implement
an emergency action plan meeting the requirements contained in
Sec. 1910.38(a).
(e)Training. (1) The employer shall provide training to employees at
least annually and when changes in job assignment will expose them to
new hazards. Current employees, and new employees prior to starting
work, shall be trained in at least the following:
(i) General safety precautions associated with the facility,
including recognition and preventive measures for the hazards related to
dust accumulations and common ignition sources such as smoking; and,
(ii) Specific procedures and safety practices applicable to their
job tasks including but not limited to, cleaning procedures for grinding
equipment, clearing procedures for choked legs, housekeeping procedures,
hot work procedures, preventive maintenance procedures and lock-out/tag-
out procedures.
(2) Employees assigned special tasks, such as bin entry and handling
of flammable or toxic substances, shall be provided training to perform
these tasks safely.
Note to paragraph (e)(2): Training for an employee who enters grain
storage structures includes training about engulfment and mechanical
hazards and how to avoid them.
(f) Hot work permit. (1) The employer shall issue a permit for all
hot work, with the following exceptions:
(i) Where the employer or the employer's representative (who would
otherwise authorize the permit) is present while the hot work is being
performed;
(ii) In welding shops authorized by the employer;
(iii) In hot work areas authorized by the employer which are located
outside of the grain handling structure.
(2) The permit shall certify that the requirements contained in
Sec. 1910.252(a) have been implemented prior to beginning the hot work
operations. The permit shall be kept on file until completion of the hot
work operations.
(g) Entry into grain storage structures. This paragraph applies to
employee entry into bins, silos , tanks, and other grain storage
structures. Exception: Entry through unrestricted ground level openings
into flat storage structures in which there are no toxicity,
flammability, oxygen-deficiency, or other atmospheric hazards is covered
by paragraph (h) of this section. For the purposes of this paragraph
(g), the term ``grain'' includes raw and processed grain and grain
products in facilities within the scope of paragraph (b)(1) of this
section.
(1) The following actions shall be taken before employees enter
bins, silos, or tanks:
(i) The employer shall issue a permit for entering bins, silos, or
tanks unless
[[Page 826]]
the employer or the employer's representative (who would otherwise
authorize the permit) is present during the entire operation. The permit
shall certify that the precautions contained in this paragraph
(Sec. 1910.272(g)) have been implemented prior to employees entering
bins, silos or tanks. The permit shall be kept on file until completion
of the entry operations.
(ii) All mechanical, electrical, hydraulic, and pneumatic equipment
which presents a danger to employees inside grain storage structures
shall be deenergized and shall be disconnected, locked-out and tagged,
blocked-off, or otherwise prevented from operating by other equally
effective means or methods.
(iii) The atmosphere within a bin, silo, or tank shall be tested for
the presence of combustible gases, vapors, and toxic agents when the
employer has reason to believe they may be present. Additionally, the
atmosphere within a bin, silo, or tank shall be tested for oxygen
content unless there is continuous natural air movement or continuous
forced-air ventilation before and during the period employees are
inside. If the oxygen level is less than 19.5%, or if combustible gas or
vapor is detected in excess of 10% of the lower flammable limit, or if
toxic agents are present in excess of the ceiling values listed in
subpart Z of 29 CFR part 1910, or if toxic agents are present in
concentrations that will cause health effects which prevent employees
from effecting self-rescue or communication to obtain assistance, the
following provisions apply.
(A) Ventilation shall be provided until the unsafe condition or
conditions are eliminated, and the ventilation shall be continued as
long as there is a possibility of recurrence of the unsafe condition
while the bin, silo, or tank is occupied by employees.
(B) If toxicity or oxygen deficiency cannot be eliminated by
ventilation, employees entering the bin, silo, or tank shall wear an
appropriate respirator. Respirator use shall be in accordance with the
requirements of Sec. 1910.134.
(iv) ``Walking down grain'' and similar practices where an employee
walks on grain to make it flow within or out from a grain storage
structure, or where an employee is on moving grain, are prohibited.
(2) Whenever an employee enters a grain storage structure from a
level at or above the level of the stored grain or grain products, or
whenever an employee walks or stands on or in stored grain of a depth
which poses an engulfment hazard, the employer shall equip the employee
with a body harness with lifeline, or a boatswain's chair that meets the
requirements of subpart D of this part. The lifeline shall be so
positioned, and of sufficient length, to prevent the employee from
sinking further than waist-deep in the grain. Exception: Where the
employer can demonstrate that the protection required by this paragraph
is not feasible or creates a greater hazard, the employer shall provide
an alternative means of protection which is demonstrated to prevent the
employee from sinking further than waist-deep in the grain.
Note to paragraph (g)(2): When the employee is standing or walking
on a surface which the employer demonstrates is free from engulfment
hazards, the lifeline or alternative means may be disconnected or
removed.
(3) An observer, equipped to provide assistance, shall be stationed
outside the bin, silo, or tank being entered by an employee.
Communications (visual, voice, or signal line) shall be maintained
between the observer and employee entering the bin, silo, or tank.
(4) The employer shall provide equipment for rescue operations which
is specifically suited for the bin, silo, or tank being entered.
(5) The employee acting as observer shall be trained in rescue
procedures, including notification methods for obtaining additional
assistance.
(6) Employees shall not enter bins, silos, or tanks underneath a
bridging condition, or where a buildup of grain products on the sides
could fall and bury them.
(h) Entry into flat storage structures. For the purposes of this
paragraph (h), the term ``grain'' means raw and processed grain and
grain products in facilities within the scope of paragraph (b)(1) of
this section.
(1) Each employee who walks or stands on or in stored grain, where
the depth of the grain poses an engulfment
[[Page 827]]
hazard, shall be equipped with a lifeline or alternative means which the
employer demonstrates will prevent the employee from sinking further
than waist-deep into the grain.
Note to paragraph (h)(1): When the employee is standing or walking
on a surface which the employer demonstrates is free from engulfment
hazards, the lifeline or alternative means may be disconnected or
removed.
(2)(i) Whenever an employee walks or stands on or in stored grain or
grain products of a depth which poses an engulfment hazard, all
equipment which presents a danger to that employee (such as an auger or
other grain transport equipment) shall be deenergized, and shall be
disconnected, locked-out and tagged, blocked-off, or otherwise prevented
from operating by other equally effective means or methods.
(ii) ``Walking down grain'' and similar practices where an employee
walks on grain to make it flow within or out from a grain storage
structure, or where an employee is on moving grain, are prohibited.
(3) No employee shall be permitted to be either underneath a
bridging condition, or in any other location where an accumulation of
grain on the sides or elsewhere could fall and engulf that employee.
(i) Contractors. (1) The employer shall inform contractors
performing work at the grain handling facility of known potential fire
and explosion hazards related to the contractor's work and work area.
The employer shall also inform contractors of the applicable safety
rules of the facility.
(2) The employer shall explain the applicable provisions of the
emergency action plan to contractors.
(j) Housekeeping. (1) The employer shall develop and implement a
written housekeeping program that establishes the frequency and
method(s) determined best to reduce accumulations of fugitive grain dust
on ledges, floors, equipment, and other exposed surfaces.
(2) In addition, the housekeeping program for grain elevators shall
address fugitive grain dust accumulations at priority housekeeping
areas.
(i) Priority housekeeping areas shall include at least the
following:
(A) Floor areas within 35 feet (10.7 m) of inside bucket elevators;
(B) Floors of enclosed areas containing grinding equipment;
(C) Floors of enclosed areas containing grain dryers located inside
the facility.
(ii) The employer shall immediately remove any fugitive grain dust
accumulations whenever they exceed \1/8\ inch (.32 cm) at priority
housekeeping areas, pursuant to the housekeeping program, or shall
demonstrate and assure, through the development and implementation of
the housekeeping program, that equivalent protection is provided.
(3) The use of compressed air to blow dust from ledges, walls, and
other areas shall only be permitted when all machinery that presents an
ignition source in the area is shut-down, and all other known potential
ignition sources in the area are removed or controlled.
(4) Grain and product spills shall not be considered fugitive grain
dust accumulations. However, the housekeeping program shall address the
procedures for removing such spills from the work area.
(k) Grate openinqs. Receiving-pit feed openings, such as truck or
railcar receiving-pits, shall be covered by grates. The width of
openings in the grates shall be a maximum of 2\1/2\ inches (6.35 cm).
(l) Filter collectors. (1) All fabric dust filter collectors which
are a part of a pneumatic dust collection system shall be equipped with
a monitoring device that will indicate a pressure drop across the
surface of the filter.
(2) Filter collectors installed after March 30, 1988 shall be:
(i) Located outside the facility; or
(ii) Located in an area inside the facility protected by an
explosion suppression system; or
(iii) Located in an area inside the facility that is separated from
other areas of the facility by construction having at least a one hour
fire-resistance rating, and which is adjacent to an exterior wall and
vented to the outside. The vent and ductwork shall be designed to resist
rupture due to deflagration.
(m) Preventive maintenance. (1) The employer shall implement
preventive maintenance procedures consisting of:
[[Page 828]]
(i) Regularly scheduled inspections of at least the mechanical and
safety control equipment associated with dryers, grain stream processing
equipment, dust collection equipment including filter collectors, and
bucket elevators;
(ii) Lubrication and other appropriate maintenance in accordance
with manufacturers' recommendations, or as determined necessary by prior
operating records.
(2) The employer shall promptly correct dust collection systems
which are malfunctioning or which are operating below designed
efficiency. Additionally, the employer shall promptly correct, or remove
from service, overheated bearings and slipping or misaligned belts
associated with inside bucket elevators.
(3) A certification record shall be maintained of each inspection,
performed in accordance with this paragraph (m), containing the date of
the inspection, the name of the person who performed the inspection and
the serial number, or other identifier, of the equipment specified in
paragraph (m)(1)(i) of this section that was inspected.
(4) The employer shall implement procedures for the use of tags and
locks which will prevent the inadvertent application of energy or motion
to equipment being repaired, serviced, or adjusted, which could result
in employee injury. Such locks and tags shall be removed in accordance
with established procedures only by the employee installing them or, if
unavailable, by his or her supervisor.
(n) Grain stream processing equipment. The employer shall equip
grain stream processing equipment (such as hammer mills, grinders, and
pulverizers) with an effective means of removing ferrous material from
the incoming grain stream.
(o) Emergency escape. (1) The employer shall provide at least two
means of emergency escape from galleries (bin decks).
(2) The employer shall provide at least one means of emergency
escape in tunnels of existing grain elevators. Tunnels in grain
elevators constructed after the effective date of this standard shall be
provided with at least two means of emergency escape.
(p) Continuous-flow bulk raw grain dryers. (1) All direct-heat grain
dryers shall be equipped with automatic controls that:
(i) Will shut-off the fuel supply in case of power or flame failure
or interruption of air movement through the exhaust fan; and,
(ii) Will stop the grain from being fed into the dryer if excessive
temperature occurs in the exhaust of the drying section.
(2) Direct-heat grain dryers installed after March 30, 1988 shall
be:
(i) Located outside the grain elevator; or
(ii) Located in an area inside the grain elevator protected by a
fire or explosion suppression system; or
(iii) Located in an area inside the grain elevator which is
separated from other areas of the facility by construction having at
least a one hour fire-resistance rating.
(q) Inside bucket elevators. (1) Bucket elevators shall not be
jogged to free a choked leg.
(2) All belts and lagging purchased after March 30, 1988 shall be
conductive. Such belts shall have a surface electrical resistance not to
exceed 300 megohms.
(3) All bucket elevators shall be equipped with a means of access to
the head pulley section to allow inspection of the head pulley, lagging,
belt, and discharge throat of the elevator head. The boot section shall
also be provided with a means of access for clean-out of the boot and
for inspection of the boot, pulley, and belt.
(4) All the employer shall:
(i) Mount bearings externally to the leg casing; or,
(ii) Provide vibration monitoring, temperature monitoring, or other
means to monitor the condition of those bearings mounted inside or
partially-inside the leg casing.
(5) All the employer shall equip bucket elevators with a motion
detection device which will shut-down the bucket elevator when the belt
speed is reduced by no more than 20% of the normal operating speed.
(6) All the employer shall:
(i) Equip bucket elevators with a belt alignment monitoring device
which will initiate an alarm to employees
[[Page 829]]
when the belt is not tracking properly; or,
(ii) Provide a means to keep the belt tracking properly, such as a
system that provides constant alignment adjustment of belts.
(7) Paragraphs (q)(5) and (q)(6) of this section do not apply to
grain elevators having a permanent storage capacity of less than one
million bushels, provided that daily visual inspection is made of bucket
movement and tracking of the belt.
(8) Paragraphs (q)(4), (q)(5), and (q)(6) of this section do not
apply to the following:
(i) Bucket elevators which are equipped with an operational fire and
explosion suppression system capable of protecting at least the head and
boot section of the bucket elevator; or,
(ii) Bucket elevators which are equipped with pneumatic or other
dust control systems or methods that keep the dust concentration inside
the bucket elevator at least 25% below the lower explosive limit at all
times during operations.
Note: The following appendices to Sec. 1910.272 serve as
nonmandatory guidelines to assist employers and employees in complying
with the requirements of this section, as well as to provide other
helpful information.
No additional burdens are imposed through these appendices.
Appendix A to Sec. 1910.272 Grain Handling Facilities
Examples presented in this appendix may not be the only means of
achieving the performance goals in the standard.
1. Scope and Application
The provisions of this standard apply in addition to any other
applicable requirements of this part 1910 (or part 1917 at marine
terminals). The standard contains requirements for new and existing
grain handling facilities. The standard does not apply to seed plants
which handle and prepare seeds for planting of future crops, nor to on-
farm storage or feed lots.
2. Emergency Action Plan
The standard requires the employer to develop and implement an
emergency action plan. The emergency action plan (Sec. 1910.38(a))
covers those designated actions employers and employees are to take to
ensure employee safety from fire and other emergencies. The plan
specifies certain minimum elements which are to be addressed. These
elements include the establishment of an employee alarm system, the
development of evacuation procedures, and training employees in those
actions they are to take during an emergency.
The standard does not specify a particular method for notifying
employees of an emergency. Public announcement systems, air horns, steam
whistles, a standard fire alarm system, or other types of employee alarm
may be used. However, employers should be aware that employees in a
grain facility may have difficulty hearing an emergency alarm, or
distinguishing an emergency alarm from other audible signals at the
facility, or both. Therefore, it is important that the type of employee
alarm used be distinguishable and distinct.
The use of floor plans or workplace maps which clearly show the
emergency escape routes should be included in the emergency action plan;
color coding will aid employees in determining their route assignments.
The employer should designate a safe area, outside the facility, where
employees can congregate after evacuation, and implement procedures to
account for all employees after emergency evacuation has been completed.
It is also recommended that employers seek the assistance of the
local fire department for the purpose of preplanning for emergencies.
Preplanning is encouraged to facilitate coordination and cooperation
between facility personnel and those who may be called upon for
assistance during an emergency. It is important for emergency service
units to be aware of the usual work locations of employees at the
facility.
3. Training
It is important that employees be trained in the recognition and
prevention of hazards associated with grain facilities, especially those
hazards associated with their own work tasks. Employees should
understand the factors which are necessary to produce a fire or
explosion, i.e., fuel (such as grain dust), oxygen, ignition source, and
(in the case of explosions) confinement. Employees should be made aware
that any efforts they make to keep these factors from occurring
simultaneously will be an important step in reducing the potential for
fires and explosions.
The standard provides flexibility for the employer to design a
training program which fulfills the needs of a facility. The type,
amount, and frequency of training will need to reflect the tasks that
employees are expected to perform. Although training is to be provided
to employees at least annually, it is recommended that safety meetings
or discussions and drills be conducted at more frequent intervals.
The training program should include those topics applicable to the
particular facility,
[[Page 830]]
as well as topics such as: Hot work procedures; lock-out/tag-out
procedures; bin entry procedures; bin cleaning procedures; grain dust
explosions; fire prevention; procedures for handling ``hot grain'';
housekeeping procedures, including methods and frequency of dust
removal; pesticide and fumigant usage; proper use and maintenance of
personal protective equipment; and, preventive maintenance. The types of
work clothing should also be considered in the program at least to
caution against using polyester clothing that easily melts and increases
the severity of burns, as compared to wool or fire retardant cotton.
In implementing the training program, it is recommended that the
employer utilize films, slide-tape presentations, pamphlets, and other
information which can be obtained from such sources as the Grain
Elevator and Processing Society, the Cooperative Extension Service of
the U.S. Department of Agriculture, Kansas State University's Extension
Grain Science and Industry, and other state agriculture schools,
industry associations, union organizations, and insurance groups.
4. Hot Work Permit
The implementation of a permit system for hot work is intended to
assure that employers maintain control over operations involving hot
work and to assure that employees are aware of and utilize appropriate
safeguards when conducting these activities.
Precautions for hot work operations are specified in 29 CFR
1910.252(a), and include such safeguards as relocating the hot work
operation to a safe location if possible, relocating or covering
combustible material in the vicinity, providing fire extinguishers, and
provisions for establishing a fire watch. Permits are not required for
hot work operations conducted in the presence of the employer or the
employer's authorized representative who would otherwise issue the
permit, or in an employer authorized welding shop or when work is
conducted outside and away from the facility.
It should be noted that the permit is not a record, but is an
authorization of the employer certifying that certain safety precautions
have been implemented prior to the beginning of work operations.
5. Entry Into Bins, Silos, And Tanks
In order to assure that employers maintain control over employee
entry into bins, silos, and tanks, OSHA is requiring that the employer
issue a permit for entry into bins, silos, and tanks unless the employer
(or the employer's representative who would otherwise authorize the
permit) is present at the entry and during the entire operation.
Employees should have a thorough understanding of the hazards
associated with entry into bins, silos, and tanks. Employees are not to
be permitted to enter these spaces from the bottom when grain or other
agricultural products are hung up or sticking to the sides which might
fall and injure or kill an employee. Employees should be made aware that
the atmosphere in bins, silos, and tanks can be oxygen deficient or
toxic. Employees should be trained in the proper methods of testing the
atmosphere, as well as in the appropriate procedures to be taken if the
atmosphere is found to be oxygen deficient or toxic. When a fumigant has
been recently applied in these areas and entry must be made, aeration
fans should be running continuously to assure a safe atmosphere for
those inside. Periodic monitoring of toxic levels shuld be done by
direct reading instruments to measure the levels, and, if there is an
increase in these readings, appropriate actions should be promptly
taken.
Employees have been buried and suffocated in grain or other
agricultural products because they sank into the material. Therefore, it
is suggested that employees not be permitted to walk or stand on the
grain or other grain product where the depth is greater than waist high.
In this regard, employees must use a full body harness or boatswain's
chair with a lifeline when entering from the top. A winch system with
mechanical advantage (either powered or manual) would allow better
control of the employee than just using a hand held hoist line, and such
a system would allow the observer to remove the employee easily without
having to enter the space.
It is important that employees be trained in the proper selection
and use of any personal protective equipment which is to be worn.
Equally important is the training of employees in the planned emergency
rescue procedures. Employers should carefully read Sec. 1910.134(e)(3)
and assure that their procedures follow these requirements. The employee
acting as observer is to be equipped to provide assistance and is to
know procedures for obtaining additional assistance. The observer should
not enter a space until adequate assistance is available. It is
recommended that an employee trained in CPR be readily available to
provide assistance to those employees entering bins, silos, or tanks.
6. Contractors
These provisions of the standard are intended to ensure that outside
contractors are cognizant of the hazards associated with grain handling
facilities, particularly in relation to the work they are to perform for
the employer. Also, in the event of an emergency, contractors should be
able to take appropriate action as a part of the overall facility
emergency action plan. Contractors should also be aware of the
employer's permit systems. Contractors should develop
[[Page 831]]
specified procedures for performing hot work and for entry into bins,
silos, and tanks and these activities should be coordinated with the
employer. Contractors are responsible for informing their own employees.
This coordination will help to ensure that employers know what work
is being performed at the facility by contractors; where it is being
performed; and, that it is being performed in a manner that will not
endanger employees.
7. Housekeeping.
The housekeeping program is to be designed to keep dust
accumulations and emissions under control inside grain facilities. The
housekeeping program, which is to be written, is to specify the
frequency and method(s) used to best reduce dust accumulations.
Ship, barge, and rail loadout and receiving areas which are located
outside the facility need not be addressed in the housekeeping program.
Additionally, truck dumps which are open on two or more sides need not
be addressed by the housekeeping program. Other truck dumps should be
addressed in the housekeeping program to provide for regular cleaning
during periods of receiving grain or agricultural products. The
housekeeping program should provide coverage for all workspaces in the
facility and include walls, beams, etc., especially in relation to the
extent that dust could accumulate.
Dust Accumulations
Almost all facilities will require some level of manual
housekeeping. Manual housekeeping methods, such as vacuuming or sweeping
with soft bristle brooms, should be used which will minimize the
possibility of layered dust being suspended in the air when it is being
removed.
The housekeeping program should include a contingency plan to
respond to situations where dust accumulates rapidly due to a failure of
a dust enclosure hood, an unexpected breakdown of the dust control
system, a dust-tight connection inadvertently knocked open, etc.
The housekeeping program should also specify the manner of handling
spills. Grain spills are not considered to be dust accumulations.
A fully enclosed horizontal belt conveying system where the return
belt is inside the enclosure should have inspection access such as
sliding panels or doors to permit checking of equipment, checking for
dust accumulations and facilitate cleaning if needed.
Dust Emissions
Employers should analyze the entire stock handling system to
determine the location of dust emissions and effective methods to
control or to eliminate them. The employer should make sure that holes
in spouting, casings of bucket elevators, pneumatic conveying pipes,
screw augers, or drag conveyor casings, are patched or otherwise
properly repaired to prevent leakage. Minimizing free falls of grain or
grain products by using choke feeding techniques, and utilization of
dust-tight enclosures at transfer points, can be effective in reducing
dust emissions.
Each housekeeping program should specify the schedules and control
measures which will be used to control dust emitted from the stock
handling system. The housekeeping program should address the schedules
to be used for cleaning dust accumulations from motors, critical
bearings and other potential ignition sources in the working areas.
Also, the areas around bucket elevator legs, milling machinery and
similar equipment should be given priority in the cleaning schedule. The
method of disposal of the dust which is swept or vacuumed should also be
planned.
Dust may accumulate in somewhat inaccessible areas, such as those
areas where ladders or scaffolds might be necessary to reach them. The
employer may want to consider the use of compressed air and long lances
to blow down these areas frequently. The employer may also want to
consider the periodic use of water and hoselines to wash down these
areas. If these methods are used, they are to be specified in the
housekeeping program along with the appropriate safety precautions,
including the use of personal protective equipment such as eyewear and
dust respirators.
Several methods have been effective in controlling dust emissions. A
frequently used method of controlling dust emissions is a pneumatic dust
collection system. However, the installation of a poorly designed
pneumatic dust collection system has fostered a false sense of security
and has often led to an inappropriate reduction in manual housekeeping.
Therefore, it is imperative that the system be designed properly and
installed by a competent contractor. Those employers who have a
pneumatic dust control system that is not working according to
expectations should request the engineering design firm, or the
manufacturer of the filter and related equipment, to conduct an
evaluation of the system to determine the corrections necessary for
proper operation of the system. If the design firm or manufacturer of
the equipment is not known, employers should contact their trade
association for recommendations of competent designers of pneumatic dust
control systems who could provide assistance.
When installing a new or upgraded pneumatic control system, the
employer should insist on an acceptance test period of 30 to 45 days of
operation to ensure that the system is operating as intended and
designed. The employer should also obtain maintenance, testing, and
inspection information from the
[[Page 832]]
manufacturer to ensure that the system will continue to operate as
designed.
Aspiration of the leg, as part of a pneumatic dust collection
system, is another effective method of controlling dust emissions.
Aspiration of the leg consists of a flow of air across the entire boot,
which entrains the liberated dust and carries it up the up-leg to take-
off points. With proper aspiration, dust concentrations in the leg can
be lowered below the lower explosive limit. Where a prototype leg
installation has been instrumented and shown to be effective in keeping
the dust level 25% below the lower explosive limit during normal
operations for the various products handled, then other legs of similar
size, capacity and products being handled which have the same design
criteria for the air aspiration would be acceptable to OSHA, provided
the prototype test report is available on site.
Another method of controlling dust emissions is enclosing the
conveying system, pressurizing the general work area, and providing a
lower pressure inside the enclosed conveying system. Although this
method is effective in controlling dust emissions from the conveying
system, adequate access to the inside of the enclosure is necessary to
facilitate frequent removal of dust accumulations. This is also
necessary for those systems called ``self-cleaning.''
The use of edible oil sprayed on or into a moving stream of grain is
another method which has been used to control dust emissions. Tests
performed using this method have shown that the oil treatment can reduce
dust emissions. Repeated handling of the grain may necessitate
additional oil treatment to prevent liberation of dust. However, before
using this method, operators of grain handling facilities should be
aware that the Food and Drug Administration must approve the specific
oil treatment used on products for food or feed.
As a part of the housekeeping program, grain elevators are required
to address accumulations of dust at priority areas using the action
level. The standard specifies a maximum accumulation of \1/8\ inch dust,
measurable by a ruler or other measuring device, anywhere within a
priority area as the upper limit at which time employers must initiate
action to remove the accumulations using designated means or methods.
Any accumulation in excess of this amount and where no action has been
initiated to implement cleaning would constitute a violation of the
standard, unless the employer can demonstrate equivalent protection.
Employers should make every effort to minimize dust accumulations on
exposed surfaces since dust is the fuel for a fire or explosion, and it
is recognized that a \1/8\ inch dust accumulation is more than enough to
fuel such occurrences.
8. Filter Collectors
Proper sizing of filter collectors for the pneumatic dust control
system they serve is very important for the overall effectiveness of the
system. The air to cloth ratio of the system should be in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations. If higher ratios are used, they
can result in more maintenance on the filter, shorter bag or sock life,
increased differential pressure resulting in higher energy costs, and an
increase in operational problems.
A photohelic gauge, magnehelic gauge, or manometer, may be used to
indicate the pressure rise across the inlet and outlet of the filter.
When the pressure exceeds the design value for the filter, the air
volume will start to drop, and maintenance will be required. Any of
these three monitoring devices is acceptable as meeting paragraph (l)(1)
of the standard.
The employer should establish a level or target reading on the
instrument which is consistent with the manufacturer's recommendations
that will indicate when the filter should be serviced. This target
reading on the instrument and the accompanying procedures should be in
the preventive maintenance program. These efforts would minimize the
blinding of the filter and the subsequent failure of the pneumatic dust
control system.
There are other instruments that the employer may want to consider
using to monitor the operation of the filter. One instrument is a zero
motion switch for detecting a failure of motion by the rotary discharge
valve on the hopper. If the rotary discharge valve stops turning, the
dust released by the bag or sock will accumulate in the filter hopper
until the filter becomes clogged. Another instrument is a level
indicator which is installed in the hopper of the filter to detect the
buildup of dust that would otherwise cause the filter hopper to be
plugged. The installation of these instruments should be in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.
All of these monitoring devices and instruments are to be capable of
being read at an accessible location and checked as frequently as
specified in the preventive maintenance program.
Filter collectors on portable vacuum cleaners, and those used where
fans are not part of the system, are not covered by requirements of
paragraph (l) of the standard.
9. Preventive Maintenance
The control of dust and the control of ignition sources are the most
effective means for reducing explosion hazards. Preventive maintenance
is related to ignition sources in the same manner as housekeeping is
related to dust control and should be treated as a major function in a
facility. Equipment such
[[Page 833]]
as critical bearings, belts, buckets, pulleys, and milling machinery are
potential ignition sources, and periodic inspection and lubrication of
such equipment through a scheduled preventive maintenance program is an
effective method for keeping equipment functioning properly and safely.
The use of vibration detection methods, heat sensitive tape or other
heat detection methods that can be seen by the inspector or maintenance
person will allow for a quick, accurate, and consistent evaluation of
bearings and will help in the implementation of the program.
The standard does not require a specific frequency for preventive
maintenance. The employer is permitted flexibility in determining the
appropriate interval for maintenance provided that the effectiveness of
the maintenance program can be demonstrated. Scheduling of preventive
maintenance should be based on manufacturer's recommendations for
effective operation, as well as from the employer's previous experience
with the equipment. However, the employer's schedule for preventive
maintenance should be frequent enough to allow for both prompt
identification and correction of any problems concerning the failure or
malfunction of the mechanical and safety control equipment associated
with bucket elevators, dryers, filter collectors and magnets. The
pressure-drop monitoring device for a filter collector, and the
condition of the lagging on the head pulley, are examples of items that
require regularly scheduled inspections. A system of identifying the
date, the equipment inspected and the maintenance performed, if any,
will assist employers in continually refining their preventive
maintenance schedules and identifying equipment problem areas. Open work
orders where repair work or replacement is to be done at a designated
future date as scheduled, would be an indication of an effective
preventive maintenance program.
It is imperative that the prearranged schedule of maintenance be
adhered to regardless of other facility constraints. The employer should
give priority to the maintenance or repair work associated with safety
control equipment, such as that on dryers, magnets, alarm and shut-down
systems on bucket elevators, bearings on bucket elevators, and the
filter collectors in the dust control system. Benefits of a strict
preventive maintenance program can be a reduction of unplanned downtime,
improved equipment performance, planned use of resources, more efficient
operations, and, most importantly, safer operations.
The standard also requires the employer to develop and implement
procedures consisting of locking out and tagging equipment to prevent
the inadvertent application of energy or motion to equipment being
repaired, serviced, or adjusted, which could result in employee injury.
All employees who have responsibility for repairing or servicing
equipment, as well as those who operate the equipment, are to be
familiar with the employer's lock and tag procedures. A lock is to be
used as the positive means to prevent operation of the disconnected
equipment. Tags are to be used to inform employees why equipment is
locked out. Tags are to meet requirements in Sec. 1910.145(f). Locks and
tags may only be removed by employees that placed them, or by their
supervisor, to ensure the safety of the operation.
10. Grain Stream Processing Equipment
The standard requires an effective means of removing ferrous
material from grain streams so that such material does not enter
equipment such as hammer mills, grinders and pulverizers. Large foreign
objects, such as stones, should have been removed at the receiving pit.
Introduction of foreign objects and ferrous material into such equipment
can produce sparks which can create an explosion hazard. Acceptable
means for removal of ferrous materials include the use of permanent or
electromagnets. Means used to separate foreign objects and ferrous
material should be cleaned regularly and kept in good repair as part of
the preventive maintenance program in order to maximize their
effectiveness.
11. Emergency Escape
The standard specifies that at least two means of escape must be
provided from galleries (bin decks). Means of emergency escape may
include any available means of egress (consisting of three components,
exit access, exit, and exit discharge as defined in Sec. 1910.35), the
use of controlled descent devices with landing velocities not to exceed
15 ft/sec., or emergency escape ladders from galleries. Importantly, the
means of emergency escape are to be addressed in the facility emergency
action plan. Employees are to know the location of the nearest means of
emergency escape and the action they must take during an emergency.
12. Dryers
Liquefied petroleum gas fired dryers should have the vaporizers
installed at least ten feet from the dryer. The gas piping system should
be protected from mechanical damage. The employer should establish
procedures for locating and repairing leaks when there is a strong odor
of gas or other signs of a leak.
13. Inside Bucket Elevators
Hazards associated with inside bucket elevator legs are the source
of many grain elevator fires and explosions. Therefore, to mitigate
these hazards, the standard requires the implementation of special
safety precautions and procedures, as well as the
[[Page 834]]
installation of safety control devices. The standard provides for a
phase-in period for many of the requirements to provide the employer
time for planning the implementation of the requirements. Additionally,
for elevators with a permanent storage capacity of less than one million
bushels, daily visual inspection of belt alignment and bucket movement
can be substituted for alignment monitoring devices and motion detection
devices.
The standard requires that belts (purchased after the effective date
of the standard) have surface electrical resistance not to exceed 300
megohms. Test methods available regarding electrical resistance of belts
are: The American Society for Testing and Materials D257-76, ``Standard
Test Methods for D-C Resistance or Conductance of Insulating
Materials''; and, the International Standards Organization's
284, ``Conveyor Belts-Electrical Conductivity-Specification and
Method of Test.'' When an employer has a written certification from the
manufacturer that a belt has been tested using one of the above test
methods, and meets the 300 megohm criteria, the belt is acceptable as
meeting this standard. When using conductive belts, the employer should
make certain that the head pulley and shaft are grounded through the
drive motor ground or by some other equally effective means. When V-type
belts are used to transmit power to the head pulley assembly from the
motor drive shaft, it will be necessary to provide electrical continuity
from the head pulley assembly to ground, e.g., motor grounds.
Employers should also consider purchasing new belts that are flame
retardant or fire resistive. A flame resistance test for belts is
contained in 30 CFR 18.65.
Appendix B to Sec. 1910.272 Grain Handling Facilities
National Consensus Standards
The following table contains a cross-reference listing of current
national consensus standards which provide information that may be of
assistance to grain handling operations. Employers who comply with
provisions in these national consensus standards that provide equal or
greater protection than those in Sec. 1910.272 will be considered in
compliance with the corresponding requirements in Sec. 1910.272.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Subject National consensus standards
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Grain elevators and facilities handling bulk raw ANSI/NFPA 61B
agricultural commodities.
Feed mills................................................. ANSI/NFPA 61C
Facilities handling agricultural commodities for human ANSI/NFPA 61D
consumption.
Pneumatic conveying systems for agricultural commodities... ANSI/NFPA 66
Guide for explosion venting................................ ANSI/NFPA 68
Explosion prevention systems............................... ANSI/NFPA 69
Dust removal and exhaust systems........................... ANSI/NFPA 91
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Appendix C to Sec. 1910.272 Grain handling facilities
References for Further Information
The following references provide information which can be helpful in
understanding the requirements contained in various provisions of the
standard, as well as provide other helpful information.
1. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations; National
Safety Council, 425 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, Illinois 60611.
2. Practical Guide to Elevator Design; National Grain and Feed
Association, P.O. Box 28328, Washington, DC 20005.
3. Dust Control for Grain Elevators; National Grain and Feed
Association, P.O. Box 28328, Washington, DC 20005.
4. Prevention of Grain Elevator and Mill Explosions; National
Academy of Sciences, Washington, DC. (Available from National Technical
Information Service, Springfield, Virginia 22151.)
5. Standard for the Prevention of Fires and Explosions in Grain
Elevators and Facilities Handling Bulk Raw Agricultural Commodities,
NFPA 61B; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.
6. Standard for the Prevention of Fire and Dust Explosions in Feed
Mills, NFPA 61C; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch
Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.
7. Standard for the Prevention of Fire and Dust Explosions in the
Milling of Agricultural Commodities for Human Consumption, NFPA 61D;
National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy,
Massachusetts 02269.
8. Standard for Pneumatic Conveying Systems for Handling Feed,
Flour, Grain and Other Agricultural Dusts, NFPA 66; National Fire
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.
9. Guide for Explosion Venting, NFPA 68; National Fire Protection
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.
10. Standard on Explosion Prevention Systems, NFPA 69; National Fire
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.
[[Page 835]]
11. Safety-Operations Plans; U.S. Department of Agriculture,
Washington, DC 20250.
12. Inplant Fire Prevention Control Programs; Mill Mutual Fire
Prevention Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260
West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.
13. Guidelines for Terminal Elevators; Mill Mutual Fire Prevention
Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.
14. Standards for Preventing the Horizontal and Vertical Spread of
Fires in Grain Handling Properties; Mill Mutual Fire Mutual Fire
Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois
60143-1269.
15. Belt Conveyors for Bulk Materials, Part I and Part II, Data
Sheet 570, Revision A; National Safety Council, 425 North Michigan
Avenue, Chicago, Illinois 60611.
16. Suggestions for Precautions and Safety Practices in Welding and
Cutting; Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260
West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.
17. Food Bins and Tanks, Data Sheet 524; National Safety Council,
425 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, Illinois 60611.
18. Pneumatic Dust Control in Grain Elevators; National Academy of
Sciences, Washington, DC. (Available from National Technical Information
Service, Springfield, Virginia 22151.)
19. Dust Control Analysis and Layout Procedures for Grain Storage
and Processing Plants; Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce
Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.
20. Standard for the Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for
Dust, Stock and Vapor Removal, NFPA 91; National Fire Protection
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.
21. Standards for the Installation of Direct Heat Grain Driers in
Grain and Milling Properties; Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1
Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.
22. Guidelines for Lubrication and Bearing Maintenance; Mill Mutual
Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca,
Illinois 60143-1269.
23. Organized Maintenance in Grain and Milling Properties; Mill
Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca,
Illinois 60143-1269.
24. Safe and Efficient Elevator Legs for Grain and Milling
Properties; Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite
1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-1269.
25. Explosion Venting and Supression of Bucket Elevators; National
Grain and Feed Association, P.O. Box 28328, Washington, DC 20005.
26. Lightning Protection Code, NFPA 78; National Fire Protection
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269.
27. Occupational Safety in Grain Elevators, DHHS (NIOSH) Publication
No. 83-126); National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
Morgantown, West Virginia 26505.
28. Retrofitting and Constructing Grain Elevators; National Grain
and Feed Association, P.O. Box 28328, Washington, DC 20005.
29. Grain Industry Safety and Health Center--Training Series
(Preventing grain dust explosions, operations maintenance safety,
transportation safety, occupational safety and health); Grain Elevator
and Processing Society, P.O. Box 15026, Commerce Station, Minneapolis,
Minnesota 55415-0026.
30. Suggestions for Organized Maintenance; The Mill Mutuals Loss
Control Department, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois
60143-1269.
31. Safety--The First Step to Success; The Mill Mutual Loss Control
Department, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143-
1269.
32. Emergency Plan Notebook; Schoeff, Robert W. and James L.
Balding, Kansas State University, Cooperative Extension Service,
Extension Grain Science and Industry, Shellenberger Hall, Manhattan,
Kansas 66506.
[52 FR 49625, Dec. 31, 1987, as amended at 53 FR 17696, May 18, 1988; 54
FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 55 FR 25094, June 20, 1990; 61 FR 9242, Mar. 7,
1996; 61 FR 9584, Mar. 8, 1996]
Subpart S--Electrical
Authority: Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of Labor's Order No. 8-76 (41 FR
25059) or 1-90 (55 FR 9033), as applicable; 29 CFR part 1911.
Source: 46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981, unless otherwise noted.
General
Sec. 1910.301 Introduction.
This subpart addresses electrical safety requirements that are
necessary for the practical safeguarding of employees in their
workplaces and is divided into four major divisions as follows:
(a) Design safety standards for electrical systems. These
regulations are contained in Secs. 1910.302 through 1910.330. Sections
1910.302 through 1910.308 contain design safety standards for electric
utilization systems. Included in this category are all electric
equipment and installations used to provide electric power and light for
employee workplaces. Sections 1910.309 through 1910.330 are reserved for
possible future
[[Page 836]]
design safety standards for other electrical systems.
(b) Safety-related work practices. These regulations will be
contained in Secs. 1910.331 through 1910.360.
(c) Safety-related maintenance requirements. These regulations will
be contained in Secs. 1910.361 through 1910.380.
(d) Safety requirements for special equipment. These regulations
will be contained in Secs. 1910.381 through 1910.398.
(e) Definitions. Definitions applicable to each division are
contained in Sec. 1910.399.
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1982; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981]
Design Safety Standards for Electrical Systems
Sec. 1910.302 Electric utilization systems.
Sections 1910.302 through 1910.308 contain design safety standards
for electric utilization systems.
(a) Scope--(1) Covered. The provisions of Secs. 1910.302 through
1910.308 of this subpart cover electrical installations and utilization
equipment installed or used within or on buildings, structures, and
other premises including:
(i) Yards,
(ii) Carnivals,
(iii) Parking and other lots,
(iv) Mobile homes,
(v) Recreational vehicles,
(vi) Industrial substations,
(vii) Conductors that connect the installations to a supply of
electricity, and
(viii) Other outside conductors on the premises.
(2) Not covered. The provisions of Secs. 1910.302 through 1910.308
of this subpart do not cover:
(i) Installations in ships, watercraft, railway rolling stock,
aircraft, or automotive vehicles other than mobile homes and
recreational vehicles.
(ii) Installations underground in mines.
(iii) Installations of railways for generation, transformation,
transmission, or distribution of power used exclusively for operation of
rolling stock or installations used exclusively for signaling and
communication purposes.
(iv) Installations of communication equipment under the exclusive
control of communication utilities, located outdoors or in building
spaces used exclusively for such installations.
(v) Installations under the exclusive control of electric utilities
for the purpose of communication or metering; or for the generation,
control, transformation, transmission, and distribution of electric
energy located in buildings used exclusively by utilities for such
purposes or located outdoors on property owned or leased by the utility
or on public highways, streets, roads, etc., or outdoors by established
rights on private property.
(b) Extent of application. (1) The requirements contained in the
sections listed below shall apply to all electrical installations and
utilization equipment, regardless of when they were designed or
installed.
Sections:
1910.303(b)............................. Examination, installation, and
use of equipment.
1910.303(c)............................. Splices.
1910.303(d)............................. Arcing parts.
1910.303(e)............................. Marking.
1910.303(f)............................. Identification of
disconnecting means.
1910.303(g)(2).......................... Guarding of live parts.
1910.304(e)(l)(i)....................... Protection of conductors and
equipment.
1910.304(e)(l)(iv)...................... Location in or on premises.
1910.304(e)(l)(v)....................... Arcing or suddenly moving
parts.
1910.304(f)(l)(ii)...................... 2-Wire DC systems to be
grounded:
1910.304(f)(l)(iii) and AC Systems to be grounded.
1910.304(f)(l)(iv).
1910.304(f)(l)(v)....................... AC Systems 50 to 1000 volts
not required to be grounded.
1910.304(f)(3).......................... Grounding connections.
1910.304(f)(4).......................... Grounding path.
1910.304(f)(5)(iv)(a) through Fixed equipment required to be
1910.304(f)(5)(iv)(d). grounded.
1910.304(f)(5)(v)....................... Grounding of equipment
connected by cord and plug.
1910.304(f)(5)(vi)...................... Grounding of nonelectrical
equipment.
1910.304(f)(6)(i)....................... Methods of grounding fixed
equipment.
1910.305(g)(l)(i) and 1910.305(g)(1)(ii) Flexible cords and cables,
uses.
1910.305(g)(l)(iii)..................... Flexible cords and cables
prohibited.
1910.305(g)(2)(ii)...................... Flexible cords and cables,
splices.
1910.305(g)(2)(iii)..................... Pull at joints and terminals
of flexible cords and cables.
1910.307................................ Hazardous (classified)
locations.
(2) Every electric utilization system and all utilization equipment
installed after March 15, 1972, and every major replacement,
modification, repair, or rehabilitation, after March 15, 1972, of any
part of any electric utilization system or utilization equipment
installed before March 15, 1972, shall comply
[[Page 837]]
with the provisions of Secs. 1910.302 through 1910.308.
Note: ``Major replacements, modifications, repairs, or
rehabilitations'' include work similar to that involved when a new
building or facility is built, a new wing is added, or an entire floor
is renovated.
(3) The following provisions apply to electric utilization systems
and utilization equipment installed after April 16, 1981:
Sec. 1910.303(h)(4) (i) and (ii)....... Entrance and access to
workspace (over 600 volts).
Sec. 1910.304(e)(1)(vi)(b)............. Circuit breakers operated
vertically.
Sec. 1910.304(e)(1)(vi)(c)............. Circuit breakers used as
switches.
Sec. 1910.304(f)(7)(ii)................ Grounding of systems of 1000
volts or more supplying
portable or mobile equipment.
Sec. 1910.305(j)(6)(ii)(b)............. Switching series capacitors
over 600 volts.
Sec. 1910.306(c)(2).................... Warning signs for elevators
and escalators.
Sec. 1910.306(i)....................... Electrically controlled
irrigation machines.
Sec. 1910.306(j)(5).................... Ground-fault circuit
interrupters for fountains.
Sec. 1910.308(a)(1)(ii)................ Physical protection of
conductors over 600 volts.
Sec. 1910.308(c)(2).................... Marking of Class 2 and Class 3
power supplies.
Sec. 1910.308(d)....................... Fire protective signaling
circuits.
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981]
Sec. 1910.303 General requirements.
(a) Approval. The conductors and equipment required or permitted by
this subpart shall be acceptable only if approved.
(b) Examination, installation, and use of equipment--(1)
Examination. Electrical equipment shall be free from recognized hazards
that are likely to cause death or serious physical harm to employees.
Safety of equipment shall be determined using the following
considerations:
(i) Suitability for installation and use in conformity with the
provisions of this subpart. Suitability of equipment for an identified
purpose may be evidenced by listing or labeling for that identified
purpose.
(ii) Mechanical strength and durability, including, for parts
designed to enclose and protect other equipment, the adequacy of the
protection thus provided.
(iii) Electrical insulation.
(iv) Heating effects under conditions of use.
(v) Arcing effects.
(vi) Classification by type, size, voltage, current capacity,
specific use.
(vii) Other factors which contribute to the practical safeguarding
of employees using or likely to come in contact with the equipment.
(2) Installation and use. Listed or labeled equipment shall be used
or installed in accordance with any instructions included in the listing
or labeling.
(c) Splices. Conductors shall be spliced or joined with splicing
devices suitable for the use or by brazing, welding, or soldering with a
fusible metal or alloy. Soldered splices shall first be so spliced or
joined as to be mechanically and electrically secure without solder and
then soldered. All splices and joints and the free ends of conductors
shall be covered with an insulation equivalent to that of the conductors
or with an insulating device suitable for the purpose.
(d) Arcing parts. Parts of electric equipment which in ordinary
operation produce arcs, sparks, flames, or molten metal shall be
enclosed or separated and isolated from all combustible material.
(e) Marking. Electrical equipment may not be used unless the
manufacturer's name, trademark, or other descriptive marking by which
the organization responsible for the product may be identified is placed
on the equipment. Other markings shall be provided giving voltage,
current, wattage, or other ratings as necessary. The marking shall be of
sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved.
(f) Identification of disconnecting means and circuits. Each
disconnecting means required by this subpart for motors and appliances
shall be legibly marked to indicate its purpose, unless located and
arranged so the purpose is evident. Each service, feeder, and branch
circuit, at its disconnecting means or overcurrent device, shall be
legibly marked to indicate its purpose, unless located and arranged so
the purpose is evident. These markings shall be of sufficient durability
to withstand the environment involved.
(g) 600 Volts, nominal, or less--(1) Working space about electric
equipment. Sufficient access and working space
[[Page 838]]
shall be provided and maintained about all electric equipment to permit
ready and safe operation and maintenance of such equipment.
(i) Working clearances. Except as required or permitted elsewhere in
this subpart, the dimension of the working space in the direction of
access to live parts operating at 600 volts or less and likely to
require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while alive
may not be less than indicated in Table S-1. In addition to the
dimensions shown in Table S-1, workspace may not be less than 30 inches
wide in front of the electric equipment. Distances shall be measured
from the live parts if they are exposed, or from the enclosure front or
opening if the live parts are enclosed. Concrete, brick, or tile walls
are considered to be grounded. Working space is not required in back of
assemblies such as dead-front switchboards or motor control centers
where there are no renewable or adjustable parts such as fuses or
switches on the back and where all connections are accessible from
locations other than the back.
Table S-1--Working Clearances
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum clear distance
for condition\2\ (ft)
Nominal voltage to ground --------------------------
(a) (b) (c)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0-150........................................ \1\ 3 \1\ 3 3
151-600...................................... \1\ 3 3\1/2\ 4
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Minimum clear distances may be 2 feet 6 inches for installations
built prior to April 16, 1981.
\2\ Conditions (a), (b), and (c), are as follows: (a) Exposed live parts
on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other side of the
working space, or exposed live parts on both sides effectively guarded
by suitable wood or other insulating material. Insulated wire or
insulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not considered
live parts. (b) Exposed live parts on one side and grounded parts on
the other side. (c) Exposed live parts on both sides of the workspace
[not guarded as provided in Condition (a)] with the operator between.
(ii) Clear spaces. Working space required by this subpart may not be
used for storage. When normally enclosed live parts are exposed for
inspection or servicing, the working space, if in a passageway or
general open space, shall be suitably guarded.
(iii) Access and entrance to working space. At least one entrance of
sufficient area shall be provided to give access to the working space
about electric equipment.
(iv) Front working space. Where there are live parts normally
exposed on the front of switchboards or motor control centers, the
working space in front of such equipment may not be less than 3 feet.
(v) Illumination. Illumination shall be provided for all working
spaces about service equipment, switchboards, panelboards, and motor
control centers installed indoors.
(vi) Headroom. The minimum headroom of working spaces about service
equipment, switchboards, panel-boards, or motor control centers shall be
6 feet 3 inches.
Note: As used in this section a motor control center is an assembly
of one or more enclosed sections having a common power bus and
principally containing motor control units.
(2) Guarding of live parts. (i) Except as required or permitted
elsewhere in this subpart, live parts of electric equipment operating at
50 volts or more shall be guarded against accidental contact by approved
cabinets or other forms of approved enclosures, or by any of the
following means:
(A) By location in a room, vault, or similar enclosure that is
accessible only to qualified persons.
(B) By suitable permanent, substantial partitions or screens so
arranged that only qualified persons will have access to the space
within reach of the live parts. Any openings in such partitions or
screens shall be so sized and located that persons are not likely to
come into accidental contact with the live parts or to bring conducting
objects into contact with them.
(C) By location on a suitable balcony, gallery, or platform so
elevated and arranged as to exclude unqualified persons.
(D) By elevation of 8 feet or more above the floor or other working
surface.
(ii) In locations where electric equipment would be exposed to
physical damage, enclosures or guards shall be so arranged and of such
strength as to prevent such damage.
(iii) Entrances to rooms and other guarded locations containing
exposed live parts shall be marked with conspicuous warning signs
forbidding unqualified persons to enter.
(h) Over 600 volts, nominal--(1) General. Conductors and equipment
used on circuits exceeding 600 volts, nominal,
[[Page 839]]
shall comply with all applicable provisions of paragraphs (a) through
(g) of this section and with the following provisions which supplement
or modify those requirements. The provisions of paragraphs (h)(2),
(h)(3), and (h)(4) of this section do not apply to equipment on the
supply side of the service conductors.
(2) Enclosure for electrical installations. Electrical installations
in a vault, room, closet or in an area surrounded by a wall, screen, or
fence, access to which is controlled by lock and key or other approved
means, are considered to be accessible to qualified persons only. A
wall, screen, or fence less than 8 feet in height is not considered to
prevent access unless it has other features that provide a degree of
isolation equivalent to an 8 foot fence. The entrances to all buildings,
rooms, or enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors
operating at over 600 volts, nominal, shall be kept locked or shall be
under the observation of a qualified person at all times.
(i) Installations accessible to qualified persons only. Electrical
installations having exposed live parts shall be accessible to qualified
persons only and shall comply with the applicable provisions of
paragraph (h)(3) of this section.
(ii) Installations accessible to unqualified persons. Electrical
installations that are open to unqualified persons shall be made with
metal-enclosed equipment or shall be enclosed in a vault or in an area,
access to which is controlled by a lock. If metal-enclosed equipment is
installed so that the bottom of the enclosure is less than 8 feet above
the floor, the door or cover shall be kept locked. Metal-enclosed
switchgear, unit substations, transformers, pull boxes, connection
boxes, and other similar associated equipment shall be marked with
appropriate caution signs. If equipment is exposed to physical damage
from vehicular traffic, suitable guards shall be provided to prevent
such damage. Ventilating or similar openings in metal-enclosed equipment
shall be designed so that foreign objects inserted through these
openings will be deflected from energized parts.
(3) Workspace about equipment. Sufficient space shall be provided
and maintained about electric equipment to permit ready and safe
operation and maintenance of such equipment. Where energized parts are
exposed, the minimum clear workspace may not be less than 6 feet 6
inches high (measured vertically from the floor or platform), or less
than 3 feet wide (measured parallel to the equipment). The depth shall
be as required in Table S-2. The workspace shall be adequate to permit
at least a 90-degree opening of doors or hinged panels.
(i) Working space. The minimum clear working space in front of
electric equipment such as switchboards, control panels, switches,
circuit breakers, motor controllers, relays, and similar equipment may
not be less than specified in Table S-2 unless otherwise specified in
this subpart. Distances shall be measured from the live parts if they
are exposed, or from the enclosure front or opening if the live parts
are enclosed. However, working space is not required in back of
equipment such as deadfront switchboards or control assemblies where
there are no renewable or adjustable parts (such as fuses or switches)
on the back and where all connections are accessible from locations
other than the back. Where rear access is required to work on de-
energized parts on the back of enclosed equipment, a minimum working
space of 30 inches horizontally shall be provided.
Table S-2--Minimum Depth of Clear Working Space in Front of Electric
Equipment
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Conditions \2\ (ft)
Nominal voltage to ground --------------------------
(a) (b) (c)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
601 to 2,500................................. 3 4 5
2,501 to 9,000............................... 4 5 6
9,001 to 25,000.............................. 5 6 9
25,001 to 75kV \1\........................... 6 8 10
Above 75kV \1\............................... 8 10 12
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Minimum depth of clear working space in front of electric equipment
with a nominal voltage to ground above 25,000 volts may be the same as
for 25,000 volts under Conditions (a), (b), and (c) for installations
built prior to April 16, 1981.
\2\ Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live parts
on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other side of the
working space, or exposed live parts on both sides effectively guarded
by suitable wood or other insulating materials. Insulated wire or
insulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not considered
live parts. (b) Exposed live parts on one side and grounded parts on
the other side. Concrete, brick, or tile walls will be considered as
grounded surfaces. (c) Exposed live parts on both sides of the
workspace not guarded as provided in Condition (a) with the operator
between.
[[Page 840]]
(ii) Illumination. Adequate illumination shall be provided for all
working spaces about electric equipment. The lighting outlets shall be
so arranged that persons changing lamps or making repairs on the
lighting system will not be endangered by live parts or other equipment.
The points of control shall be so located that persons are not likely to
come in contact with any live part or moving part of the equipment while
turning on the lights.
(iii) Elevation of unguarded live parts. Unguarded live parts above
working space shall be maintained at elevations not less than specified
in Table S-3.
Table S-3--Elevation of Unguarded Energized Parts Above Working Space
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nominal voltage between phases Minimum elevation
------------------------------------------------------------------------
601 to 7,500.............................. *8 feet 6 inches.
7,501 to 35,000........................... 9 feet.
Over 35kV................................. 9 feet + 0.37 inches per kV
above 35kV.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
*Note.--Minimum elevation may be 8 feet 0 inches for installations built
prior to April 16, 1981 if the nominal voltage between phases is in
the range of 601-6600 volts.
(4) Entrance and access to workspace. (See Sec. 1910.302(b)(3).)
(i) At least one entrance not less than 24 inches wide and 6 feet 6
inches high shall be provided to give access to the working space about
electric equipment. On switchboard and control panels exceeding 48
inches in width, there shall be one entrance at each end of such board
where practicable. Where bare energized parts at any voltage or
insulated energized parts above 600 volts are located adjacent to such
entrance, they shall be suitably guarded.
(ii) Permanent ladders or stairways shall be provided to give safe
access to the working space around electric equipment installed on
platforms, balconies, mezzanine floors, or in attic or roof rooms or
spaces.
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981]
Sec. 1910.304 Wiring design and protection.
(a) Use and identification of grounded and grounding conductors. (1)
Identification of conductors. A conductor used as a grounded conductor
shall be identifiable and distinguishable from all other conductors. A
conductor used as an equipment grounding conductor shall be identifiable
and distinguishable from all other conductors.
(2) Polarity of connections. No grounded conductor may be attached
to any terminal or lead so as to reverse designated polarity.
(3) Use of grounding terminals and devices. A grounding terminal or
grounding-type device on a receptacle, cord connector, or attachment
plug may not be used for purposes other than grounding.
(b) Branch circuits--(1) [Reserved]
(2) Outlet devices. Outlet devices shall have an ampere rating not
less than the load to be served.
(c) Outside conductors, 600 volts, nominal, or less. Paragraphs
(c)(1), (c)(2), (c)(3), and (c)(4) of this section apply to branch
circuit, feeder, and service conductors rated 600 volts, nominal, or
less and run outdoors as open conductors. Paragraph (c)(5) applies to
lamps installed under such conductors.
(1) Conductors on poles. Conductors supported on poles shall provide
a horizontal climbing space not less than the following:
(i) Power conductors below communication conductors--30 inches.
(ii) Power conductors alone or above communication conductors: 300
volts or less--24 inches; more than 300 volts--30 inches.
(iii) Communication conductors below power conductors with power
conductors 300 volts or less--24 inches; more than 300 volts--30 inches.
(2) Clearance from ground. Open conductors shall conform to the
following minimum clearances:
(i) 10 feet--above finished grade, sidewalks, or from any platform
or projection from which they might be reached.
(ii) 12 feet--over areas subject to vehicular traffic other than
truck traffic.
(iii) 15 feet--over areas other than those specified in paragraph
(c)(2)(iv) of this section that are subject to truck traffic.
(iv) 18 feet--over public streets, alleys, roads, and driveways.
(3) Clearance from building openings. Conductors shall have a
clearance of at least 3 feet from windows, doors, porches, fire escapes,
or similar locations. Conductors run above the top level of a window are
considered to be out of
[[Page 841]]
reach from that window and, therefore, do not have to be 3 feet away.
(4) Clearance over roofs. Conductors shall have a clearance of not
less than 8 feet from the highest point of roofs over which they pass,
except that:
(i) Where the voltage between conductors is 300 volts or less and
the roof has a slope of not less than 4 inches in 12, the clearance from
roofs shall be at least 3 feet, or
(ii) Where the voltage between conductors is 300 volts or less and
the conductors do not pass over more than 4 feet of the overhang portion
of the roof and they are terminated at a through-the-roof raceway or
approved support, the clearance from roofs shall be at least 18 inches.
(5) Location of outdoor lamps. Lamps for outdoor lighting shall be
located below all live conductors, transformers, or other electric
equipment, unless such equipment is controlled by a disconnecting means
that can be locked in the open position or unless adequate clearances or
other safeguards are provided for relamping operations.
(d) Services--(1) Disconnecting means--(i) General. Means shall be
provided to disconnect all conductors in a building or other structure
from the service-entrance conductors. The disconnecting means shall
plainly indicate whether it is in the open or closed position and shall
be installed at a readily accessible location nearest the point of
entrance of the service-entrance conductors.
(ii) Simultaneous opening of poles. Each service disconnecting means
shall simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors.
(2) Services over 600 volts, nominal. The following additional
requirements apply to services over 600 volts, nominal.
(i) Guarding. Service-entrance conductors installed as open wires
shall be guarded to make them accessible only to qualified persons.
(ii) Warning signs. Signs warning of high voltage shall be posted
where other than qualified employees might come in contact with live
parts.
(e) Overcurrent protection. (1) 600 volts, nominal, or less. The
following requirements apply to overcurrent protection of circuits rated
600 volts, nominal, or less.
(i) Protection of conductors and equipment. Conductors and equipment
shall be protected from overcurrent in accordance with their ability to
safely conduct current.
(ii) Grounded conductors. Except for motor running overload
protection, overcurrent devices may not interrupt the continuity of the
grounded conductor unless all conductors of the circuit are opened
simultaneously.
(iii) Disconnection of fuses and thermal cutouts. Except for service
fuses, all cartridge fuses which are accessible to other than qualified
persons and all fuses and thermal cutouts on circuits over 150 volts to
ground shall be provided with disconnecting means. This disconnecting
means shall be installed so that the fuse or thermal cutout can be
disconnected from its supply without disrupting service to equipment and
circuits unrelated to those protected by the overcurrent device.
(iv) Location in or on premises. Overcurrent devices shall be
readily accessible to each employee or authorized building management
personnel. These overcurrent devices may not be located where they will
be exposed to physical damage nor in the vicinity of easily ignitible
material.
(v) Arcing or suddenly moving parts. Fuses and circuit breakers
shall be so located or shielded that employees will not be burned or
otherwise injured by their operation.
(vi) Circuit breakers. (A) Circuit breakers shall clearly indicate
whether they are in the open (off) or closed (on) position.
(B) Where circuit breaker handles on switchboards are operated
vertically rather than horizontally or rotationally, the up position of
the handle shall be the closed (on) position. (See Sec. 1910.302(b)(3).)
(C) If used as switches in 120-volt, fluorescent lighting circuits,
circuit breakers shall be approved for the purpose and marked ``SWD.''
(See Sec. 1910.302(b)(3).)
(2) Over 600 volts, nominal. Feeders and branch circuits over 600
volts, nominal, shall have short-circuit protection.
[[Page 842]]
(f) Grounding. Paragraphs (f)(1) through (f)(7) of this section
contain grounding requirements for systems, circuits, and equipment.
(1) Systems to be grounded. The following systems which supply
premises wiring shall be grounded:
(i) All 3-wire DC systems shall have their neutral conductor
grounded.
(ii) Two-wire DC systems operating at over 50 volts through 300
volts between conductors shall be grounded unless:
(A) They supply only industrial equipment in limited areas and are
equipped with a ground detector; or
(B) They are rectifier-derived from an AC system complying with
paragraphs (f)(1)(iii), (f)(1)(iv), and (f)(1)(v) of this section; or
(C) They are fire-protective signaling circuits having a maximum
current of 0.030 amperes.
(iii) AC circuits of less than 50 volts shall be grounded if they
are installed as overhead conductors outside of buildings or if they are
supplied by transformers and the transformer primary supply system is
ungrounded or exceeds 150 volts to ground.
(iv) AC systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts shall be grounded under
any of the following conditions, unless exempted by paragraph (f)(1)(v)
of this section:
(A) If the system can be so grounded that the maximum voltage to
ground on the ungrounded conductors does not exceed 150 volts;
(B) If the system is nominally rated 480Y/277 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire
in which the neutral is used as a circuit conductor;
(C) If the system is nominally rated 240/120 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire
in which the midpoint of one phase is used as a circuit conductor; or
(D) If a service conductor is uninsulated.
(v) AC systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts are not required to be
grounded under any of the following conditions:
(A) If the system is used exclusively to supply industrial electric
furnaces for melting, refining, tempering, and the like.
(B) If the system is separately derived and is used exclusively for
rectifiers supplying only adjustable speed industrial drives.
(C) If the system is separately derived and is supplied by a
transformer that has a primary voltage rating less than 1000 volts,
provided all of the following conditions are met:
(1) The system is used exclusively for control circuits,
(2) The conditions of maintenance and supervision assure that only
qualified persons will service the installation,
(3) Continuity of control power is required, and
(4) Ground detectors are installed on the control system.
(D) If the system is an isolated power system that supplies circuits
in health care facilities.
(2) Conductors to be grounded. For AC premises wiring systems the
identified conductor shall be grounded.
(3) Grounding connections. (i) For a grounded system, a grounding
electrode conductor shall be used to connect both the equipment
grounding conductor and the grounded circuit conductor to the grounding
electrode. Both the equipment grounding conductor and the grounding
electrode conductor shall be connected to the grounded circuit conductor
on the supply side of the service disconnecting means, or on the supply
side of the system disconnecting means or overcurrent devices if the
system is separately derived.
(ii) For an ungrounded service-supplied system, the equipment
grounding conductor shall be connected to the grounding electrode
conductor at the service equipment. For an ungrounded separately derived
system, the equipment grounding conductor shall be connected to the
grounding electrode conductor at, or ahead of, the system disconnecting
means or overcurrent devices.
(iii) On extensions of existing branch circuits which do not have an
equipment grounding conductor, grounding-type receptacles may be
grounded to a grounded cold water pipe near the equipment.
(4) Grounding path. The path to ground from circuits, equipment, and
enclosures shall be permanent and continuous.
[[Page 843]]
(5) Supports, enclosures, and equipment to be grounded--(i) Supports
and enclosures for conductors. Metal cable trays, metal raceways, and
metal enclosures for conductors shall be grounded, except that:
(A) Metal enclosures such as sleeves that are used to protect cable
assemblies from physical damage need not be grounded; or
(B) Metal enclosures for conductors added to existing installations
of open wire, knob-and-tube wiring, and nonmetallic-sheathed cable need
not be grounded if all of the following conditions are met: (1) Runs are
less than 25 feet; (2) enclosures are free from probable contact with
ground, grounded metal, metal laths, or other conductive materials; and
(3) enclosures are guarded against employee contact.
(ii) Service equipment enclosures. Metal enclosures for service
equipment shall be grounded.
(iii) Frames of ranges and clothes dryers. Frames of electric
ranges, wall-mounted ovens, counter-mounted cooking units, clothes
dryers, and metal outlet or junction boxes which are part of the circuit
for these appliances shall be grounded.
(iv) Fixed equipment. Exposed non-current-carrying metal parts of
fixed equipment which may become energized shall be grounded under any
of the following conditions:
(A) If within 8 feet vertically or 5 feet horizontally of ground or
grounded metal objects and subject to employee contact.
(B) If located in a wet or damp location and not isolated.
(C) If in electrical contact with metal.
(D) If in a hazardous (classified) location.
(E) If supplied by a metal-clad, metal-sheathed, or grounded metal
raceway wiring method.
(F) If equipment operates with any terminal at over 150 volts to
ground; however, the following need not be grounded:
(1) Enclosures for switches or circuit breakers used for other than
service equipment and accessible to qualified persons only;
(2) Metal frames of electrically heated appliances which are
permanently and effectively insulated from ground; and
(3) The cases of distribution apparatus such as transformers and
capacitors mounted on wooden poles at a height exceeding 8 feet above
ground or grade level.
(v) Equipment connected by cord and plug. Under any of the
conditions described in paragraphs (f)(5)(v)(A) through (f)(5)(v)(C) of
this section, exposed non-current-carrying metal parts of cord- and
plug-connected equipment which may become energized shall be grounded.
(A) If in hazardous (classified) locations (see Sec. 1910.307).
(B) If operated at over 150 volts to ground, except for guarded
motors and metal frames of electrically heated appliances if the
appliance frames are permanently and effectively insulated from ground.
(C) If the equipment is of the following types:
(1) Refrigerators, freezers, and air conditioners;
(2) Clothes-washing, clothes-drying and dishwashing machines, sump
pumps, and electrical aquarium equipment;
(3) Hand-held motor-operated tools;
(4) Motor-operated appliances of the following types: hedge
clippers, lawn mowers, snow blowers, and wet scrubbers;
(5) Cord- and plug-connected appliances used in damp or wet
locations or by employees standing on the ground or on metal floors or
working inside of metal tanks or boilers;
(6) Portable and mobile X-ray and associated equipment;
(7) Tools likely to be used in wet and conductive locations; and
(8) Portable hand lamps.
Tools likely to be used in wet and conductive locations need not be
grounded if supplied through an isolating transformer with an ungrounded
secondary of not over 50 volts. Listed or labeled portable tools and
appliances protected by an approved system of double insulation, or its
equivalent, need not be grounded. If such a system is employed, the
equipment shall be distinctively marked to indicate that the tool or
appliance utilizes an approved system of double insulation.
[[Page 844]]
(vi) Nonelectrical equipment. The metal parts of the following
nonelectrical equipment shall be grounded: frames and tracks of
electrically operated cranes; frames of nonelectrically driven elevator
cars to which electric conductors are attached; hand operated metal
shifting ropes or cables of electric elevators, and metal partitions,
grill work, and similar metal enclosures around equipment of over 750
volts between conductors.
(6) Methods of grounding fixed equipment. (i) Non-current-carrying
metal parts of fixed equipment, if required to be grounded by this
subpart, shall be grounded by an equipment grounding conductor which is
contained within the same raceway, cable, or cord, or runs with or
encloses the circuit conductors. For DC circuits only, the equipment
grounding conductor may be run separately from the circuit conductors.
(ii) Electric equipment is considered to be effectively grounded if
it is secured to, and in electrical contact with, a metal rack or
structure that is provided for its support and the metal rack or
structure is grounded by the method specified for the non-current-
carrying metal parts of fixed equipment in paragraph (f)(6)(i) of this
section. For installations made before April 16, 1981, only, electric
equipment is also considered to be effectively grounded if it is secured
to, and in metallic contact with, the grounded structural metal frame of
a building. Metal car frames supported by metal hoisting cables attached
to or running over metal sheaves or drums of grounded elevator machines
are also considered to be effectively grounded.
(7) Grounding of systems and circuits of 1000 volts and over (high
voltage)--(i) General. If high voltage systems are grounded, they shall
comply with all applicable provisions of paragraphs (f)(1) through
(f)(6) of this section as supplemented and modified by this paragraph
(f)(7).
(ii) Grounding of systems supplying portable or mobile equipment.
(See Sec. 1910.302(b)(3).) Systems supplying portable or mobile high
voltage equipment, other than substations installed on a temporary
basis, shall comply with the following:
(A) Portable and mobile high voltage equipment shall be supplied
from a system having its neutral grounded through an impedance. If a
delta-connected high voltage system is used to supply the equipment, a
system neutral shall be derived.
(B) Exposed non-current-carrying metal parts of portable and mobile
equipment shall be connected by an equipment grounding conductor to the
point at which the system neutral impedance is grounded.
(C) Ground-fault detection and relaying shall be provided to
automatically de-energize any high voltage system component which has
developed a ground fault. The continuity of the equipment grounding
conductor shall be continuously monitored so as to de-energize
automatically the high voltage feeder to the portable equipment upon
loss of continuity of the equipment grounding conductor.
(D) The grounding electrode to which the portable or mobile
equipment system neutral impedance is connected shall be isolated from
and separated in the ground by at least 20 feet from any other system or
equipment grounding electrode, and there shall be no direct connection
between the grounding electrodes, such as buried pipe, fence, etc.
(iii) Grounding of equipment. All non-current-carrying metal parts
of portable equipment and fixed equipment including their associated
fences, housings, enclosures, and supporting structures shall be
grounded. However, equipment which is guarded by location and isolated
from ground need not be grounded. Additionally, pole-mounted
distribution apparatus at a height exceeding 8 feet above ground or
grade level need not be grounded.
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981, as amended at 55
FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990]
Sec. 1910.305 Wiring methods, components, and equipment for general use.
(a) Wiring methods. The provisions of this section do not apply to
the conductors that are an integral part of factory-assembled equipment.
(1) General requirements--(i) Electrical continuity of metal
raceways and enclosures. Metal raceways, cable armor, and
[[Page 845]]
other metal enclosures for conductors shall be metallically joined
together into a continuous electric conductor and shall be so connected
to all boxes, fittings, and cabinets as to provide effective electrical
continuity.
(ii) Wiring in ducts. No wiring systems of any type shall be
installed in ducts used to transport dust, loose stock or flammable
vapors. No wiring system of any type may be installed in any duct used
for vapor removal or for ventilation of commercial-type cooking
equipment, or in any shaft containing only such ducts.
(2) Temporary wiring. Temporary electrical power and lighting wiring
methods may be of a class less than would be required for a permanent
installation. Except as specifically modified in this paragraph, all
other requirements of this subpart for permanent wiring shall apply to
temporary wiring installations.
(i) Uses permitted, 600 volts, nominal, or less. Temporary
electrical power and lighting installations 600 volts, nominal, or less
may be used only:
(A) During and for remodeling, maintenance, repair, or demolition of
buildings, structures, or equipment, and similar activities;
(B) For experimental or development work, and
(C) For a period not to exceed 90 days for Christmas decorative
lighting, carnivals, and similar purposes.
(ii) Uses permitted, over 600 volts, nominal. Temporary wiring over
600 volts, nominal, may be used only during periods of tests,
experiments, or emergencies.
(iii) General requirements for temporary wiring. (A) Feeders shall
originate in an approved distribution center. The conductors shall be
run as multiconductor cord or cable assemblies, or, where not subject to
physical damage, they may be run as open conductors on insulators not
more than 10 feet apart.
(B) Branch circuits shall originate in an approved power outlet or
panelboard. Conductors shall be multiconductor cord or cable assemblies
or open conductors. If run as open conductors they shall be fastened at
ceiling height every 10 feet. No branch-circuit conductor may be laid on
the floor. Each branch circuit that supplies receptacles or fixed
equipment shall contain a separate equipment grounding conductor if run
as open conductors.
(C) Receptacles shall be of the grounding type. Unless installed in
a complete metallic raceway, each branch circuit shall contain a
separate equipment grounding conductor and all receptacles shall be
electrically connected to the grounding conductor.
(D) No bare conductors nor earth returns may be used for the wiring
of any temporary circuit.
(E) Suitable disconnecting switches or plug connectors shall be
installed to permit the disconnection of all ungrounded conductors of
each temporary circuit.
(F) Lamps for general illumination shall be protected from
accidental contact or breakage. Protection shall be provided by
elevation of at least 7 feet from normal working surface or by a
suitable fixture or lampholder with a guard.
(G) Flexible cords and cables shall be protected from accidental
damage. Sharp corners and projections shall be avoided. Where passing
through doorways or other pinch points, flexible cords and cables shall
be provided with protection to avoid damage.
(3) Cable trays--(i) Uses permitted. (a) Only the following may be
installed in cable tray systems:
(1) Mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable (Type MI);
(2) Armored cable (Type AC);
(3) Metal-clad cable (Type MC);
(4) Power-limited tray cable (Type PLTC);
(5) Nonmetallic-sheathed cable (Type NM or NMC);
(6) Shielded nonmetallic-sheathed cable (Type SNM);
(7) Multiconductor service-entrance cable (Type SE or USE);
(8) Multiconductor underground feeder and branch-circuit cable (Type
UF);
(9) Power and control tray cable (Type TC);
(10) Other factory-assembled, multiconductor control, signal, or
power cables which are specifically approved for installation in cable
trays; or
(11) Any approved conduit or raceway with its contained conductors.
(b) In industrial establishments only, where conditions of
maintenance and
[[Page 846]]
supervision assure that only qualified persons will service the
installed cable tray system, the following cables may also be installed
in ladder, ventilated trough, or 4 inch ventilated channel-type cable
trays:
(1) Single conductor cables which are 250 MCM or larger and are
Types RHH, RHW, MV, USE, or THW, and other 250 MCM or larger single
conductor cables if specifically approved for installation in cable
trays. Where exposed to direct rays of the sun, cables shall be
sunlight-resistant.
(2) Type MV cables, where exposed to direct rays of the sun, shall
be sunlight-resistant.
(c) Cable trays in hazardous (classified) locations shall contain
only the cable types permitted in such locations.
(ii) Uses not permitted. Cable tray systems may not be used in
hoistways or where subjected to severe physical damage.
(4) Open wiring on insulators--(i) Uses permitted. Open wiring on
insulators is only permitted on systems of 600 volts, nominal, or less
for industrial or agricultural establishments and for services.
(ii) Conductor supports. Conductors shall be rigidly supported on
noncombustible, nonabsorbent insulating materials and may not contact
any other objects.
(iii) Flexible nonmetallic tubing. In dry locations where not
exposed to severe physical damage, conductors may be separately enclosed
in flexible nonmetallic tubing. The tubing shall be in continuous
lengths not exceeding 15 feet and secured to the surface by straps at
intervals not exceeding 4 feet 6 inches.
(iv) Through walls, floors, wood cross members, etc. Open conductors
shall be separated from contact with walls, floors, wood cross members,
or partitions through which they pass by tubes or bushings of
noncombustible, nonabsorbent insulating material. If the bushing is
shorter than the hole, a waterproof sleeve of nonconductive material
shall be inserted in the hole and an insulating bushing slipped into the
sleeve at each end in such a manner as to keep the conductors absolutely
out of contact with the sleeve. Each conductor shall be carried through
a separate tube or sleeve.
(v) Protection from physical damage. Conductors within 7 feet from
the floor are considered exposed to physical damage. Where open
conductors cross ceiling joints and wall studs and are exposed to
physical damage, they shall be protected.
(b) Cabinets, boxes, and fittings--(1) Conductors entering boxes,
cabinets, or fittings. Conductors entering boxes, cabinets, or fittings
shall also be protected from abrasion, and openings through which
conductors enter shall be effectively closed. Unused openings in
cabinets, boxes, and fittings shall be effectively closed.
(2) Covers and canopies. All pull boxes, junction boxes, and
fittings shall be provided with covers approved for the purpose. If
metal covers are used they shall be grounded. In completed installations
each outlet box shall have a cover, faceplate, or fixture canopy. Covers
of outlet boxes having holes through which flexible cord pendants pass
shall be provided with bushings designed for the purpose or shall have
smooth, well-rounded surfaces on which the cords may bear.
(3) Pull and junction boxes for systems over 600 volts, nominal. In
addition to other requirements in this section for pull and junction
boxes, the following shall apply to these boxes for systems over 600
volts, nominal:
(i) Boxes shall provide a complete enclosure for the contained
conductors or cables.
(ii) Boxes shall be closed by suitable covers securely fastened in
place. Underground box covers that weigh over 100 pounds meet this
requirement. Covers for boxes shall be permanently marked ``HIGH
VOLTAGE.'' The marking shall be on the outside of the box cover and
shall be readily visible and legible.
(c) Switches--(1) Knife switches. Single-throw knife switches shall
be so connected that the blades are dead when the switch is in the open
position. Single-throw knife switches shall be so placed that gravity
will not tend to close them. Single-throw knife switches approved for
use in the inverted position shall be provided with a locking device
that will ensure that
[[Page 847]]
the blades remain in the open position when so set. Double-throw knife
switches may be mounted so that the throw will be either vertical or
horizontal. However, if the throw is vertical a locking device shall be
provided to ensure that the blades remain in the open position when so
set.
(2) Faceplates for flush-mounted snap switches. Flush snap switches
that are mounted in ungrounded metal boxes and located within reach of
conducting floors or other conducting surfaces shall be provided with
faceplates of nonconducting, noncombustible material.
(d) Switchboards and panelboards. Switchboards that have any exposed
live parts shall be located in permanently dry locations and accessible
only to qualified persons. Panelboards shall be mounted in cabinets,
cutout boxes, or enclosures approved for the purpose and shall be dead
front. However, panelboards other than the dead front externally-
operable type are permitted where accessible only to qualified persons.
Exposed blades of knife switches shall be dead when open.
(e) Enclosures for damp or wet locations. (1) Cabinets, cutout
boxes, fittings, boxes, and panelboard enclosures in damp or wet
locations shall be installed so as to prevent moisture or water from
entering and accumulating within the enclosures. In wet locations the
enclosures shall be weatherproof.
(2) Switches, circuit breakers, and switchboards installed in wet
locations shall be enclosed in weatherproof enclosures.
(f) Conductors for general wiring. All conductors used for general
wiring shall be insulated unless otherwise permitted in this Subpart.
The conductor insulation shall be of a type that is approved for the
voltage, operating temperature, and location of use. Insulated
conductors shall be distinguishable by appropriate color or other
suitable means as being grounded conductors, ungrounded conductors, or
equipment grounding conductors.
(g) Flexible cords and cables--(1) Use of flexible cords and cables.
(i) Flexible cords and cables shall be approved and suitable for
conditions of use and location. Flexible cords and cables shall be used
only for:
(A) Pendants;
(B) Wiring of fixtures;
(C) Connection of portable lamps or appliances;
(D) Elevator cables;
(E) Wiring of cranes and hoists;
(F) Connection of stationary equipment to facilitate their frequent
interchange;
(G) Prevention of the transmission of noise or vibration;
(H) Appliances where the fastening means and mechanical connections
are designed to permit removal for maintenance and repair; or
(I) Data processing cables approved as a part of the data processing
system.
(ii) If used as permitted in paragraphs (g)(1)(i)(c), (g)(1)(i)(f),
or (g)(1)(i)(h) of this section, the flexible cord shall be equipped
with an attachment plug and shall be energized from an approved
receptacle outlet.
(iii) Unless specifically permitted in paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this
section, flexible cords and cables may not be used:
(A) As a substitute for the fixed wiring of a structure;
(B) Where run through holes in walls, ceilings, or floors;
(C) Where run through doorways, windows, or similar openings;
(D) Where attached to building surfaces; or
(E) Where concealed behind building walls, ceilings, or floors.
(iv) Flexible cords used in show windows and showcases shall be Type
S, SO, SJ, SJO, ST, STO, SJT, SJTO, or AFS except for the wiring of
chain-supported lighting fixtures and supply cords for portable lamps
and other merchandise being displayed or exhibited.
(2) Identification, splices, and terminations. (i) A conductor of a
flexible cord or cable that is used as a grounded conductor or an
equipment grounding conductor shall be distinguishable from other
conductors. Types SJ, SJO, SJT, SJTO, S, SO, ST, and STO shall be
durably marked on the surface with the type designation, size, and
number of conductors.
(ii) Flexible cords shall be used only in continuous lengths without
splice or tap. Hard service flexible cords No. 12 or larger may be
repaired if spliced so that the splice retains the insulation,
[[Page 848]]
outer sheath properties, and usage characteristics of the cord being
spliced.
(iii) Flexible cords shall be connected to devices and fittings so
that strain relief is provided which will prevent pull from being
directly transmitted to joints or terminal screws.
(h) Portable cables over 600 volts, nominal. Multiconductor portable
cable for use in supplying power to portable or mobile equipment at over
600 volts, nominal, shall consist of No. 8 or larger conductors
employing flexible stranding. Cables operated at over 2,000 volts shall
be shielded for the purpose of confining the voltage stresses to the
insulation. Grounding conductors shall be provided. Connectors for these
cables shall be of a locking type with provisions to prevent their
opening or closing while energized. Strain relief shall be provided at
connections and terminations. Portable cables may not be operated with
splices unless the splices are of the permanent molded, vulcanized, or
other approved type. Termination enclosures shall be suitably marked
with a high voltage hazard warning, and terminations shall be accessible
only to authorized and qualified personnel.
(i) Fixture wires--(1) General. Fixture wires shall be approved for
the voltage, temperature, and location of use. A fixture wire which is
used as a grounded conductor shall be identified.
(2) Uses permitted. Fixture wires may be used:
(i) For installation in lighting fixtures and in similar equipment
where enclosed or protected and not subject to bending or twisting in
use; or
(ii) For connecting lighting fixtures to the branch-circuit
conductors supplying the fixtures.
(3) Uses not permitted. Fixture wires may not be used as branch-
circuit conductors except as permitted for Class 1 power limited
circuits.
(j) Equipment for general use--(1) Lighting fixtures, lampholders,
lamps, and receptacles. (i) Fixtures, lampholders, lamps, rosettes, and
receptacles may have no live parts normally exposed to employee contact.
However, rosettes and cleat-type lampholders and receptacles located at
least 8 feet above the floor may have exposed parts.
(ii) Handlamps of the portable type supplied through flexible cords
shall be equipped with a handle of molded composition or other material
approved for the purpose, and a substantial guard shall be attached to
the lampholder or the handle.
(iii) Lampholders of the screw-shell type shall be installed for use
as lampholders only. Lampholders installed in wet or damp locations
shall be of the weatherproof type.
(iv) Fixtures installed in wet or damp locations shall be approved
for the purpose and shall be so constructed or installed that water
cannot enter or accumulate in wireways, lampholders, or other electrical
parts.
(2) Receptacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs (caps). (i)
Receptacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs shall be constructed
so that no receptacle or cord connector will accept an attachment plug
with a different voltage or current rating than that for which the
device is intended. However, a 20-ampere T-slot receptacle or cord
connector may accept a 15-ampere attachment plug of the same voltage
rating.
(ii) A receptacle installed in a wet or damp location shall be
suitable for the location.
(3) Appliances. (i) Appliances, other than those in which the
current-carrying parts at high temperatures are necessarily exposed, may
have no live parts normally exposed to employee contact.
(ii) A means shall be provided to disconnect each appliance.
(iii) Each appliance shall be marked with its rating in volts and
amperes or volts and watts.
(4) Motors. This paragraph applies to motors, motor circuits, and
controllers.
(i) In sight from. If specified that one piece of equipment shall be
``in sight from'' another piece of equipment, one shall be visible and
not more than 50 feet from the other.
(ii) Disconnecting means. (A) A disconnecting means shall be located
in sight from the controller location. However, a single disconnecting
means may be located adjacent to a group of
[[Page 849]]
coordinated controllers mounted adjacent to each other on a multi-motor
continuous process machine. The controller disconnecting means for motor
branch circuits over 600 volts, nominal, may be out of sight of the
controller, if the controller is marked with a warning label giving the
location and identification of the disconnecting means which is to be
locked in the open position.
(B) The disconnecting means shall disconnect the motor and the
controller from all ungrounded supply conductors and shall be so
designed that no pole can be operated independently.
(C) If a motor and the driven machinery are not in sight from the
controller location, the installation shall comply with one of the
following conditions:
(1) The controller disconnecting means shall be capable of being
locked in the open position.
(2) A manually operable switch that will disconnect the motor from
its source of supply shall be placed in sight from the motor location.
(D) The disconnecting means shall plainly indicate whether it is in
the open (off) or closed (on) position.
(E) The disconnecting means shall be readily accessible. If more
than one disconnect is provided for the same equipment, only one need be
readily accessible.
(F) An individual disconnecting means shall be provided for each
motor, but a single disconnecting means may be used for a group of
motors under any one of the following conditions:
(1) If a number of motors drive special parts of a single machine or
piece of apparatus, such as a metal or woodworking machine, crane, or
hoist;
(2) If a group of motors is under the protection of one set of
branch-circuit protective devices; or
(3) If a group of motors is in a single room in sight from the
location of the disconnecting means.
(iii) Motor overload, short-circuit, and ground-fault protection.
Motors, motor-control apparatus, and motor branch-circuit conductors
shall be protected against overheating due to motor overloads or failure
to start, and against short-circuits or ground faults. These provisions
shall not require overload protection that will stop a motor where a
shutdown is likely to introduce additional or increased hazards, as in
the case of fire pumps, or where continued operation of a motor is
necessary for a safe shutdown of equipment or process and motor overload
sensing devices are connected to a supervised alarm.
(iv) Protection of live parts--all voltages. (A) Stationary motors
having commutators, collectors, and brush rigging located inside of
motor end brackets and not conductively connected to supply circuits
operating at more than 150 volts to ground need not have such parts
guarded. Exposed live parts of motors and controllers operating at 50
volts or more between terminals shall be guarded against accidental
contact by any of the following:
(1) By installation in a room or enclosure that is accessible only
to qualified persons;
(2) By installation on a suitable balcony, gallery, or platform, so
elevated and arranged as to exclude unqualified persons; or
(3) By elevation 8 feet or more above the floor.
(B) Where live parts of motors or controllers operating at over 150
volts to ground are guarded against accidental contact only by location,
and where adjustment or other attendance may be necessary during the
operation of the apparatus, suitable insulating mats or platforms shall
be provided so that the attendant cannot readily touch live parts unless
standing on the mats or platforms.
(5) Transformers. (i) The following paragraphs cover the
installation of all transformers except the following:
(A) Current transformers;
(B) Dry-type transformers installed as a component part of other
apparatus;
(C) Transformers which are an integral part of an X-ray, high
frequency, or electrostatic-coating apparatus;
(D) Transformers used with Class 2 and Class 3 circuits, sign and
outline lighting, electric discharge lighting, and power-limited fire-
protective signalling circuits; and
[[Page 850]]
(E) Liquid-filled or dry-type transformers used for research,
development, or testing, where effective safeguard arrangements are
provided.
(ii) The operating voltage of exposed live parts of transformer
installations shall be indicated by warning signs or visible markings on
the equipment or structure.
(iii) Dry-type, high fire point liquid-insulated, and askarel-
insulated transformers installed indoors and rated over 35kV shall be in
a vault.
(iv) If they present a fire hazard to employees, oil-insulated
transformers installed indoors shall be in a vault.
(v) Combustible material, combustible buildings and parts of
buildings, fire escapes, and door and window openings shall be
safeguarded from fires which may originate in oil-insulated transformers
attached to or adjacent to a building or combustible material.
(vi) Transformer vaults shall be constructed so as to contain fire
and combustible liquids within the vault and to prevent unauthorized
access. Locks and latches shall be so arranged that a vault door can be
readily opened from the inside.
(vii) Any pipe or duct system foreign to the vault installation may
not enter or pass through a transformer vault.
(viii) Materials may not be stored in transformer vaults.
(6) Capacitors. (i) All capacitors, except surge capacitors or
capacitors included as a component part of other apparatus, shall be
provided with an automatic means of draining the stored charge after the
capacitor is disconnected from its source of supply.
(ii) Capacitors rated over 600 volts, nominal, shall comply with the
following additional requirements:
(A) Isolating or disconnecting switches (with no interrupting
rating) shall be interlocked with the load interrupting device or shall
be provided with prominently displayed caution signs to prevent
switching load current.
(B) For series capacitors (see Sec. 1910.302(b)(3)), the proper
switching shall be assured by use of at least one of the following:
(1) Mechanically sequenced isolating and bypass switches,
(2) Interlocks, or
(3) Switching procedure prominently displayed at the switching
location.
(7) Storage batteries. Provisions shall be made for sufficient
diffusion and ventilation of gases from storage batteries to prevent the
accumulation of explosive mixtures.
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981]
Sec. 1910.306 Specific purpose equipment and installations.
(a) Electric signs and outline lighting--(1) Disconnecting means.
Signs operated by electronic or electromechanical controllers located
outside the sign shall have a disconnecting means located inside the
controller enclosure or within sight of the controller location, and it
shall be capable of being locked in the open position. Such
disconnecting means shall have no pole that can be operated
independently, and it shall open all ungrounded conductors that supply
the controller and sign. All other signs, except the portable type, and
all outline lighting installations shall have an externally operable
disconnecting means which can open all ungrounded conductors and is
within the sight of the sign or outline lighting it controls.
(2) Doors or covers giving access to uninsulated parts of indoor
signs or outline lighting exceeding 600 volts and accessible to other
than qualified persons shall either be provided with interlock switches
to disconnect the primary circuit or shall be so fastened that the use
of other than ordinary tools will be necessary to open them.
(b) Cranes and hoists. This paragraph applies to the installation of
electric equipment and wiring used in connection with cranes, monorail
hoists, hoists, and all runways.
(1) Disconnecting means. A readily accessible disconnecting means
(i) shall be provided between the runway contact conductors and the
power supply.
(ii) Another disconnecting means, capable of being locked in the
open position, shall be provided in the leads from the runway contact
conductors or other power supply on any crane or monorail hoist.
(A) If this additional disconnecting means is not readily accessible
from
[[Page 851]]
the crane or monorail hoist operating station, means shall be provided
at the operating station to open the power circuit to all motors of the
crane or monorail hoist.
(B) The additional disconnect may be omitted if a monorail hoist or
hand-propelled crane bridge installation meets all of the following:
(1) The unit is floor controlled;
(2) The unit is within view of the power supply disconnecting means;
and
(3) No fixed work platform has been provided for servicing the unit.
(2) Control. A limit switch or other device shall be provided to
prevent the load block from passing the safe upper limit of travel of
any hoisting mechanism.
(3) Clearance. The dimension of the working space in the direction
of access to live parts which may require examination, adjustment,
servicing, or maintenance while alive shall be a minimum of 2 feet 6
inches. Where controls are enclosed in cabinets, the door(s) shall
either open at least 90 degrees or be removable.
(c) Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, and moving walks--(1)
Disconnecting means. Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, and moving
walks shall have a single means for disconnecting all ungrounded main
power supply conductors for each unit.
(2) Warning signs. If interconnections between control panels are
necessary for operation of the system on a multicar installation that
remains energized from a source other than the disconnecting means, a
warning sign shall be mounted on or adjacent to the disconnecting means.
The sign shall be clearly legible and shall read ``Warning--Parts of the
control panel are not de-energized by this switch.'' (See
Sec. 1910.302(b)(3).)
(3) Control panels. If control panels are not located in the same
space as the drive machine, they shall be located in cabinets with doors
or panels capable of being locked closed.
(d) Electric welders--disconnecting means. (1) A disconnecting means
shall be provided in the supply circuit for each motor-generator arc
welder, and for each AC transformer and DC rectifier arc welder which is
not equipped with a disconnect mounted as an intergral part of the
welder.
(2) A switch or circuit breaker shall be provided by which each
resistance welder and its control equipment can be isolated from the
supply circuit. The ampere rating of this disconnecting means may not be
less than the supply conductor ampacity.
(e) Data processing systems--disconnecting means. A disconnecting
means shall be provided to disconnect the power to all electronic
equipment in data processing or computer rooms. This disconnecting means
shall be controlled from locations readily accessible to the operator at
the principal exit doors. There shall also be a similar disconnecting
means to disconnect the air conditioning system serving this area.
(f) X-Ray equipment. This paragraph applies to X-ray equipment for
other than medical or dental use.
(1) Disconnecting means. (i) A disconnecting means shall be provided
in the supply circuit. The disconnecting means shall be operable from a
location readily accessible from the X-ray control. For equipment
connected to a 120-volt branch circuit of 30 amperes or less, a
grounding-type attachment plug cap and receptacle of proper rating may
serve as a disconnecting means.
(ii) If more than one piece of equipment is operated from the same
high-voltage circuit, each piece or each group of equipment as a unit
shall be provided with a high-voltage switch or equivalent disconnecting
means. This disconnecting means shall be constructed, enclosed, or
located so as to avoid contact by employees with its live parts.
(2) Control--(i) Radiographic and fluoroscopic types. Radiographic
and fluoroscopic-type equipment shall be effectively enclosed or shall
have interlocks that de-energize the equipment automatically to prevent
ready access to live current-carrying parts.
(ii) Diffraction and irradiation types. Diffraction- and
irradiation-type equipment shall be provided with a means to indicate
when it is energized unless the equipment or installation is effectively
enclosed or is provided with interlocks to prevent access to live
current-carrying parts during operation.
[[Page 852]]
(g) Induction and dielectric heating equipment--(1) Scope.
Paragraphs (g)(2) and (g)(3) of this section cover induction and
dielectric heating equipment and accessories for industrial and
scientific applications, but not for medical or dental applications or
for appliances.
(2) Guarding and grounding. (i) Enclosures. The converting apparatus
(including the DC line) and high-frequency electric circuits (excluding
the output circuits and remote-control circuits) shall be completely
contained within enclosures of noncombustible material.
(ii) Panel controls. All panel controls shall be of dead-front
construction.
(iii) Access to internal equipment. Where doors are used for access
to voltages from 500 to 1000 volts AC or DC, either door locks or
interlocks shall be provided. Where doors are used for access to
voltages of over 1000 volts AC or DC, either mechanical lockouts with a
disconnecting means to prevent access until voltage is removed from the
cubicle, or both door interlocking and mechanical door locks, shall be
provided.
(iv) Warning labels. ``Danger'' labels shall be attached on the
equipment and shall be plainly visible even when doors are open or
panels are removed from compartments containing voltages of over 250
volts AC or DC.
(v) Work applicator shielding. Protective cages or adequate
shielding shall be used to guard work applicators other than induction
heating coils. Induction heating coils shall be protected by insulation
and/or refractory materials. Interlock switches shall be used on all
hinged access doors, sliding panels, or other such means of access to
the applicator. Interlock switches shall be connected in such a manner
as to remove all power from the applicator when any one of the access
doors or panels is open. Interlocks on access doors or panels are not
required if the applicator is an induction heating coil at DC ground
potential or operating at less than 150 volts AC.
(vi) Disconnecting means. A readily accessible disconnecting means
shall be provided by which each unit of heating equipment can be
isolated from its supply circuit.
(3) Remote control. If remote controls are used for applying power,
a selector switch shall be provided and interlocked to provide power
from only one control point at a time. Switches operated by foot
pressure shall be provided with a shield over the contact button to
avoid accidental closing of the switch.
(h) Electrolytic cells. (1) Scope. These provisions for electrolytic
cells apply to the installation of the electrical components and
accessory equipment of electrolytic cells, electrolytic cell lines, and
process power supply for the production of aluminum, cadmium, chlorine,
copper, fluorine, hydrogen peroxide, magnesium, sodium, sodium chlorate,
and zinc. Cells used as a source of electric energy and for
electroplating processes and cells used for production of hydrogen are
not covered by these provisions.
(2) Definitions applicable to this paragraph.
Cell line: An assembly of electrically interconnected electrolytic
cells supplied by a source of direct-current power.
Cell line attachments and auxiliary equipment: Cell line attachments
and auxiliary equipment include, but are not limited to: auxiliary
tanks; process piping; duct work; structural supports; exposed cell line
conductors; conduits and other raceways; pumps; positioning equipment
and cell cutout or by-pass electrical devices. Auxiliary equipment also
includes tools, welding machines, crucibles, and other portable
equipment used for operation and maintenance within the electrolytic
cell line working zone. In the cell line working zone, auxiliary
equipment includes the exposed conductive surfaces of ungrounded cranes
and crane-mounted cell-servicing equipment.
Cell line working zone: The cell line working zone is the space
envelope wherein operation or maintenance is normally performed on or in
the vicinity of exposed energized surfaces of cell lines or their
attachments.
Electrolytic Cells: A receptacle or vessel in which electrochemical
reactions are caused by applying energy for the purpose of refining or
producing usable materials.
[[Page 853]]
(3) Application. Installations covered by paragraph (h) of this
section shall comply with all applicable provisions of this subpart,
except as follows:
(i) Overcurrent protection of electrolytic cell DC process power
circuits need not comply with the requirements of Sec. 1910.304(e).
(ii) Equipment located or used within the cell line working zone or
associated with the cell line DC power circuits need not comply with the
provisions of Sec. 1910.304(f).
(iii) Electrolytic cells, cell line conductors, cell line
attachments, and the wiring of auxiliary equipment and devices within
the cell line working zone need not comply with the provisions of
Secs. 1910.303, and 1910.304 (b) and (c).
(4) Disconnecting means. (i) If more than one DC cell line process
power supply serves the same cell line, a disconnecting means shall be
provided on the cell line circuit side of each power supply to
disconnect it from the cell line circuit.
(ii) Removable links or removable conductors may be used as the
disconnecting means.
(5) Portable electric equipment. (i) The frames and enclosures of
portable electric equipment used within the cell line working zone may
not be grounded. However, these frames and enclosures may be grounded if
the cell line circuit voltage does not exceed 200 volts DC or if the
frames are guarded.
(ii) Ungrounded portable electric equipment shall be distinctively
marked and may not be interchangeable with grounded portable electric
equipment.
(6) Power supply circuits and receptacles for portable electric
equipment. (i) Circuits supplying power to ungrounded receptacles for
hand-held, cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be electrically
isolated from any distribution system supplying areas other than the
cell line working zone and shall be ungrounded. Power for these circuits
shall be supplied through isolating transformers.
(ii) Receptacles and their mating plugs for ungrounded equipment may
not have provision for a grounding conductor and shall be of a
configuration which prevents their use for equipment required to be
grounded.
(iii) Receptacles on circuits supplied by an isolating transformer
with an ungrounded secondary shall have a distinctive configuration,
shall be distinctively marked, and may not be used in any other location
in the plant.
(7) Fixed and portable electric equipment. (i) AC systems supplying
fixed and portable electric equipment within the cell line working zone
need not be grounded.
(ii) Exposed conductive surfaces, such as electric equipment
housings, cabinets, boxes, motors, raceways and the like that are within
the cell line working zone need not be grounded.
(iii) Auxiliary electrical devices, such as motors, transducers,
sensors, control devices, and alarms, mounted on an electrolytic cell or
other energized surface, shall be connected by any of the following
means:
(A) Multiconductor hard usage or extra hard usage flexible cord;
(B) Wire or cable in suitable raceways; or
(C) Exposed metal conduit, cable tray, armored cable, or similar
metallic systems installed with insulating breaks such that they will
not cause a potentially hazardous electrical condition.
(iv) Fixed electric equipment may be bonded to the energized
conductive surfaces of the cell line, its attachments, or auxiliaries.
If fixed electric equipment is mounted on an energized conductive
surface, it shall be bonded to that surface.
(8) Auxiliary nonelectric connections. Auxiliary nonelectric
connections, such as air hoses, water hoses, and the like, to an
electrolytic cell, its attachments, or auxiliary equipment may not have
continuous conductive reinforcing wire, armor, braids, and the like.
Hoses shall be of a nonconductive material.
(9) Cranes and hoists. (i) The conductive surfaces of cranes and
hoists that enter the cell line working zone need not be grounded. The
portion of an overhead crane or hoist which contacts an energized
electrolytic cell or energized attachments shall be insulated from
ground.
(ii) Remote crane or hoist controls which may introduce hazardous
electrical conditions into the cell line
[[Page 854]]
working zone shall employ one or more of the following systems:
(A) Insulated and ungrounded control circuit;
(B) Nonconductive rope operator;
(C) Pendant pushbutton with nonconductive supporting means and
having nonconductive surfaces or ungrounded exposed conductive surfaces;
or
(D) Radio.
(i) Electrically driven or controlled irrigation machines. (See
Sec. 1910.302(b)(3).)
(1) Lightning protection. If an electrically driven or controlled
irrigation machine has a stationary point, a driven ground rod shall be
connected to the machine at the stationary point for lightning
protection.
(2) Disconnecting means. The main disconnecting means for a center
pivot irrigation machine shall be located at the point of connection of
electrical power to the machine and shall be readily accessible and
capable of being locked in the open position. A disconnecting means
shall be provided for each motor and controller.
(j) Swimming pools, fountains, and similar installations--(1) Scope.
Paragraphs (j)(2) through (j)(5) of this section apply to electric
wiring for and equipment in or adjacent to all swimming, wading,
therapeutic, and decorative pools and fountains, whether permanently
installed or storable, and to metallic auxiliary equipment, such as
pumps, filters, and similar equipment. Therapeutic pools in health care
facilities are exempt from these provisions.
(2) Lighting and receptacles--(i) Receptacles. A single receptacle
of the locking and grounding type that provides power for a permanently
installed swimming pool recirculating pump motor may be located not less
than 5 feet from the inside walls of a pool. All other receptacles on
the property shall be located at least 10 feet from the inside walls of
a pool. Receptacles which are located within 15 feet of the inside walls
of the pool shall be protected by ground-fault circuit interrupters.
Note: In determining these dimensions, the distance to be measured
is the shortest path the supply cord of an appliance connected to the
receptacle would follow without piercing a floor, wall, or ceiling of a
building or other effective permanent barrier.
(ii) Lighting fixtures and lighting outlets. (A) Unless they are 12
feet above the maximum water level, lighting fixtures and lighting
outlets may not be installed over a pool or over the area extending 5
feet horizontally from the inside walls of a pool. However, a lighting
fixture or lighting outlet which has been installed before April 16,
1981, may be located less than 5 feet measured horizontally from the
inside walls of a pool if it is at least 5 feet above the surface of the
maximum water level and shall be rigidly attached to the existing
structure. It shall also be protected by a ground-fault circuit
interrupter installed in the branch circuit supplying the fixture.
(B) Unless installed 5 feet above the maximum water level and
rigidly attached to the structure adjacent to or enclosing the pool,
lighting fixtures and lighting outlets installed in the area extending
between 5 feet and 10 feet horizontally from the inside walls of a pool
shall be protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter.
(3) Cord- and plug-connected equipment. Flexible cords used with the
following equipment may not exceed 3 feet in length and shall have a
copper equipment grounding conductor with a grounding-type attachment
plug.
(i) Cord- and plug-connected lighting fixtures installed within 16
feet of the water surface of permanently installed pools.
(ii) Other cord- and plug-connected, fixed or stationary equipment
used with permanently installed pools.
(4) Underwater equipment. (i) A ground-fault circuit interrupter
shall be installed in the branch circuit supplying underwater fixtures
operating at more than 15 volts. Equipment installed underwater shall be
approved for the purpose.
(ii) No underwater lighting fixtures may be installed for operation
at over 150 volts between conductors.
(5) Fountains. All electric equipment operating at more than 15
volts, including power supply cords, used with fountains shall be
protected by ground-fault circuit interrupters. (See
Sec. 1910.302(b)(3).)
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981]
[[Page 855]]
Sec. 1910.307 Hazardous (classified) locations.
(a) Scope. This section covers the requirements for electric
equipment and wiring in locations which are classified depending on the
properties of the flammable vapors, liquids or gases, or combustible
dusts or fibers which may be present therein and the likelihood that a
flammable or combustible concentration or quantity is present. Hazardous
(classified) locations may be found in occupancies such as, but not
limited to, the following: aircraft hangars, gasoline dispensing and
service stations, bulk storage plants for gasoline or other volatile
flammable liquids, paint-finishing process plants, health care
facilities, agricultural or other facilities where excessive combustible
dusts may be present, marinas, boat yards, and petroleum and chemical
processing plants. Each room, section or area shall be considered
individually in determining its classification. These hazardous
(classified) locations are assigned six designations as follows:
Class I, Division 1
Class I, Division 2
Class II, Division 1
Class II, Division 2
Class III, Division 1
Class III, Division 2
For definitions of these locations see Sec. 1910.399(a). All applicable
requirements in this subpart shall apply to hazardous (classified)
locations, unless modified by provisions of this section.
(b) Electrical installations. Equipment, wiring methods, and
installations of equipment in hazardous (classified) locations shall be
intrinsically safe, approved for the hazardous (classified) location, or
safe or for the hazardous (classified) location. Requirements for each
of these options are as follows:
(1) Intrinsically safe. Equipment and associated wiring approved as
intrinsically safe shall be permitted in any hazardous (classified)
location for which it is approved.
(2) Approved for the hazardous (classified) location. (i) Equipment
shall be approved not only for the class of location but also for the
ignitible or combustible properties of the specific gas, vapor, dust, or
fiber that will be present.
Note: NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code, lists or defines
hazardous gases, vapors, and dusts by ``Groups'' characterized by their
ignitible or combustible properties.
(ii) Equipment shall be marked to show the class, group, and
operating temperature or temperature range, based on operation in a 40
degrees C ambient, for which it is approved. The temperature marking may
not exceed the ignition temperature of the specific gas or vapor to be
encountered. However, the following provisions modify this marking
requirement for specific equipment:
(A) Equipment of the non-heat-producing type, such as junction
boxes, conduit, and fittings, and equipment of the heat-producing type
having a maximum temperature not more than 100 degrees C (212 degrees F)
need not have a marked operating temperature or temperature range.
(B) Fixed lighting fixtures marked for use in Class I, Division 2
locations only, need not be marked to indicate the group.
(C) Fixed general-purpose equipment in Class I locations, other than
lighting fixtures, which is acceptable for use in Class I, Division 2
locations need not be marked with the class, group, division, or
operating temperature.
(D) Fixed dust-tight equipment, other than lighting fixtures, which
is acceptable for use in Class II, Division 2 and Class III locations
need not be marked with the class, group, division, or operating
temperature.
(3) Safe for the hazardous (classified) location. Equipment which is
safe for the location shall be of a type and design which the employer
demonstrates will provide protection from the hazards arising from the
combustibility and flammability of vapors, liquids, gases, dusts, or
fibers.
Note: The National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, contains guidelines for
determining the type and design of equipment and installations which
will meet this requirement. The guidelines of this document address
electric wiring, equipment, and systems installed in hazardous
(classified) locations and contain specific provisions for the
following: wiring methods, wiring connections; conductor insulation,
flexible cords, sealing and drainage, transformers, capacitors,
switches, circuit
[[Page 856]]
breakers, fuses, motor controllers, receptacles, attachment plugs,
meters, relays, instruments, resistors, generators, motors, lighting
fixtures, storage battery charging equipment, electric cranes, electric
hoists and similar equipment, utilization equipment, signaling systems,
alarm systems, remote control systems, local loud speaker and
communication systems, ventilation piping, live parts, lightning surge
protection, and grounding. Compliance with these guidelines will
constitute one means, but not the only means, of compliance with this
paragraph.
(c) Conduits. All conduits shall be threaded and shall be made
wrench-tight. Where it is impractical to make a threaded joint tight, a
bonding jumper shall be utilized.
(d) Equipment in Division 2 locations. Equipment that has been
approved for a Division 1 location may be installed in a Division 2
location of the same class and group. General-purpose equipment or
equipment in general-purpose enclosures may be installed in Division 2
locations if the equipment does not constitute a source of ignition
under normal operating conditions.
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981]
Sec. 1910.308 Special systems.
(a) Systems over 600 volts, nominal. Paragraphs (a) (1) through (4)
of this section cover the general requirements for all circuits and
equipment operated at over 600 volts.
(1) Wiring methods for fixed installations. (i) Above-ground
conductors shall be installed in rigid metal conduit, in intermediate
metal conduit, in cable trays, in cablebus, in other suitable raceways,
or as open runs of metal-clad cable suitable for the use and purpose.
However, open runs of non-metallic-sheathed cable or of bare conductors
or busbars may be installed in locations accessible only to qualified
persons. Metallic shielding components, such as tapes, wires, or braids
for conductors, shall be grounded. Open runs of insulated wires and
cables having a bare lead sheath or a braided outer covering shall be
supported in a manner designed to prevent physical damage to the braid
or sheath.
(ii) Conductors emerging from the ground shall be enclosed in
approved raceways. (See Sec. 1910.302(b)(3).)
(2) Interrupting and isolating devices. (i) Circuit breaker
installations located indoors shall consist of metal-enclosed units or
fire-resistant cell-mounted units. In locations accessible only to
qualified personnel, open mounting of circuit breakers is permitted. A
means of indicating the open and closed position of circuit breakers
shall be provided.
(ii) Fused cutouts installed in buildings or tranformer vaults shall
be of a type approved for the purpose. They shall be readily accessible
for fuse replacement.
(iii) A means shall be provided to completely isolate equipment for
inspection and repairs. Isolating means which are not designed to
interrupt the load curent of the circuit shall be either interlocked
with an approved circuit interrupter or provided with a sign warning
against opening them under load.
(3) Mobile and portable equipment. (i) Power cable connections to
mobile machines. A metallic enclosure shall be provided on the mobile
machine for enclosing the terminals of the power cable. The enclosure
shall include provisions for a solid connection for the ground wire(s)
terminal to effectively ground the machine frame. The method of cable
termination used shall prevent any strain or pull on the cable from
stressing the electrical connections. The enclosure shall have provision
for locking so only authorized qualified persons may open it and shall
be marked with a sign warning of the presence of energized parts.
(ii) Guarding live parts. All energized switching and control parts
shall be enclosed in effectively grounded metal cabinets or enclosures.
Circuit breakers and protective equipment shall have the operating means
projecting through the metal cabinet or enclosure so these units can be
reset without locked doors being opened. Enclosures and metal cabinets
shall be locked so that only authorized qualified persons have access
and shall be marked with a sign warning of the presence of energized
parts. Collector ring assemblies on revolving-type machines (shovels,
draglines, etc.) shall be guarded.
(4) Tunnel installation--(i) Application. The provisions of this
paragraph apply
[[Page 857]]
to installation and use of high-voltage power distribution and
utilization equipment which is portable and/or mobile, such as
substations, trailers, cars, mobile shovels, draglines, hoists, drills,
dredges, compressors, pumps, conveyors, and underground excavators.
(ii) Conductors. Conductors in tunnels shall be installed in one or
more of the following:
(A) Metal conduit or other metal raceway,
(B) Type MC cable, or
(C) Other approved multiconductor cable.
Conductors shall also be so located or guarded as to protect them from
physical damage. Multiconductor portable cable may supply mobile
equipment. An equipment grounding conductor shall be run with circuit
conductors inside the metal raceway or inside the multiconductor cable
jacket. The equipment grounding conductor may be insulated or bare.
(iii) Guarding live parts. Bare terminals of transformers, switches,
motor controllers, and other equipment shall be enclosed to prevent
accidental contact with energized parts. Enclosures for use in tunnels
shall be drip-proof, weatherproof, or submersible as required by the
environmental conditions.
(iv) Disconnecting means. A disconnecting means that simultaneously
opens all ungrounded conductors shall be installed at each transformer
or motor location.
(v) Grounding and bonding. All nonenergized metal parts of electric
equipment and metal raceways and cable sheaths shall be effectively
grounded and bonded to all metal pipes and rails at the portal and at
intervals not exceeding 1000 feet throughout the tunnel.
(b) Emergency power systems--(1) Scope. The provisions for emergency
systems apply to circuits, systems, and equipment intended to supply
power for illumination and special loads, in the event of failure of the
normal supply.
(2) Wiring methods. Emergency circuit wiring shall be kept entirely
independent of all other wiring and equipment and may not enter the same
raceway, cable, box, or cabinet or other wiring except either where
common circuit elements suitable for the purpose are required, or for
transferring power from the normal to the emergency source.
(3) Emergency illumination. Where emergency lighting is necessary,
the system shall be so arranged that the failure of any individual
lighting element, such as the burning out of a light bulb, cannot leave
any space in total darkness.
(c) Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote control, signaling, and
power-limited circuits--(1) Classification. Class 1, Class 2, or Class 3
remote control, signaling, or power-limited circuits are characterized
by their usage and electrical power limitation which differentiates them
from light and power circuits. These circuits are classified in
accordance with their respective voltage and power limitations as
summarized in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (c)(1)(iii) of this section.
(i) Class 1 circuits. (A) A Class 1 power-limited circuit is
supplied from a source having a rated output of not more than 30 volts
and 1000 volt-amperes.
(B) A Class 1 remote control circuit or a Class 1 signaling circuit
has a voltage which does not exceed 600 volts; however, the power output
of the source need not be limited.
(ii) Class 2 and Class 3 circuits. (A) Power for Class 2 and Class 3
circuits is limited either inherently (in which no overcurrent
protection is required) or by a combination of a power source and
overcurrent protection.
(B) The maximum circuit voltage is 150 volts AC or DC for a Class 2
inherently limited power source, and 100 volts AC or DC for a Class 3
inherently limited power source.
(C) The maximum circuit voltage is 30 volts AC and 60 volts DC for a
Class 2 power source limited by overcurrent protection, and 150 volts AC
or DC for a Class 3 power source limited by overcurrent protection.
(iii) The maximum circuit voltages in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) and
(c)(1)(ii) of this section apply to sinusoidal AC or continuous DC power
sources, and where wet contact occurence is not likely.
[[Page 858]]
(2) Marking. A Class 2 or Class 3 power supply unit shall be durably
marked where plainly visible to indicate the class of supply and its
electrical rating. (See Sec. 1910.302(b)(3).)
(d) Fire protective signaling systems. (See Sec. 1910.302(b)(3).)
(1) Classifications. Fire protective signaling circuits shall be
classified either as non-power limited or power limited.
(2) Power sources. The power sources for use with fire protective
signaling circuits shall be either power limited or nonlimited as
follows:
(i) The power supply of non-power-limited fire protective signaling
circuits shall have an output voltage not in excess of 600 volts.
(ii) The power for power-limited fire protective signaling circuits
shall be either inherently limited, in which no overcurrent protection
is required, or limited by a combination of a power source and
overcurrent protection.
(3) Non-power-limited conductor location. Non-power-limited fire
protective signaling circuits and Class 1 circuits may occupy the same
enclosure, cable, or raceway provided all conductors are insulated for
maximum voltage of any conductor within the enclosure, cable, or
raceway. Power supply and fire protective signaling circuit conductors
are permitted in the same enclosure, cable, or raceway only if connected
to the same equipment.
(4) Power-limited conductor location. Where open conductors are
installed, power-limited fire protective signaling circuits shall be
separated at least 2 inches from conductors of any light, power, Class
1, and non-power-limited fire protective signaling circuits unless a
special and equally protective method of conductor separation is
employed. Cables and conductors of two or more power-limited fire
protective signaling circuits or Class 3 circuits are permitted in the
same cable, enclosure, or raceway. Conductors of one or more Class 2
circuits are permitted within the same cable, enclosure, or raceway with
conductors of power-limited fire protective signaling circuits provided
that the insulation of Class 2 circuit conductors in the cable,
enclosure, or raceway is at least that needed for the power-limited fire
protective signaling circuits.
(5) Identification. Fire protective signaling circuits shall be
identified at terminal and junction locations in a manner which will
prevent unintentional interference with the signaling circuit during
testing and servicing. Power-limited fire protective signaling circuits
shall be durably marked as such where plainly visible at terminations.
(e) Communications systems--(1) Scope. These provisions for
communication systems apply to such systems as central-station-connected
and non-central-station-connected telephone circuits, radio and
television receiving and transmitting equipment, including community
antenna television and radio distribution systems, telegraph, district
messenger, and outside wiring for fire and burglar alarm, and similar
central station systems. These installations need not comply with the
provisions of Secs. 1910.303 through 1910.308(d), except
Sec. 1910.304(c)(1) and Sec. 1910.307(b).
(2) Protective devices. (i) Communication circuits so located as to
be exposed to accidental contact with light or power conductors
operating at over 300 volts shall have each circuit so exposed provided
with a protector approved for the purpose.
(ii) Each conductor of a lead-in from an outdoor antenna shall be
provided with an antenna discharge unit or other suitable means that
will drain static charges from the antenna system.
(3) Conductor location--(i) Outside of buildings. (a) Receiving
distribution lead-in or aerial-drop cables attached to buildings and
lead-in conductors to radio transmitters shall be so installed as to
avoid the possibility of accidental contact with electric light or power
conductors.
(b) The clearance between lead-in conductors and any lightning
protection conductors may not be less than 6 feet.
(ii) On poles. Where practicable, communication conductors on poles
shall be located below the light or power conductors. Communications
conductors may not be attached to a crossarm that carries light or power
conductors.
(iii) Inside of buildings. Indoor antennas, lead-ins, and other
communication
[[Page 859]]
conductors attached as open conductors to the inside of buildings shall
be located at least 2 inches from conductors of any light or power or
Class 1 circuits unless a special and equally protective method of
conductor separation, approved for the purpose, is employed.
(4) Equipment location. Outdoor metal structures supporting
antennas, as well as self-supporting antennas such as vertical rods or
dipole structures, shall be located as far away from overhead conductors
of electric light and power circuits of over 150 volts to ground as
necessary to avoid the possibility of the antenna or structure falling
into or making accidental contact with such circuits.
(5) Grounding--(i) Lead-in conductors. If exposed to contact with
electric light and power conductors, the metal sheath of aerial cables
entering buildings shall be grounded or shall be interrupted close to
the entrance to the building by an insulating joint or equivalent
device. Where protective devices are used, they shall be grounded in an
approved manner.
(ii) Antenna structures. Masts and metal structures supporting
antennas shall be permanently and effectively grounded without splice or
connection in the grounding conductor.
(iii) Equipment enclosures. Transmitters shall be enclosed in a
metal frame or grill or separated from the operating space by a barrier,
all metallic parts of which are effectively connected to ground. All
external metal handles and controls accessible to the operating
personnel shall be effectively grounded. Unpowered equipment and
enclosures shall be considered grounded where connected to an attached
coaxial cable with an effectively grounded metallic shield.
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981]
Secs. 1910.309-1910.330 [Reserved]
Safety-Related Work Practices
Sec. 1910.331 Scope.
(a) Covered work by both qualified and unqualified persons. The
provisions of Secs. 1910.331 through 1910.335 cover electrical safety-
related work practices for both qualified persons (those who have
training in avoiding the electrical hazards of working on or near
exposed energized parts) and unqualified persons (those with little or
no such training) working on, near, or with the following installations:
(1) Premises wiring. Installations of electric conductors and
equipment within or on buildings or other structures, and on other
premises such as yards, carnival, parking, and other lots, and
industrial substations;
(2) Wiring for connection to supply. Installations of conductors
that connect to the supply of electricity; and
(3) Other wiring. Installations of other outside conductors on the
premises.
(4) Optical fiber cable. Installations of optical fiber cable where
such installations are made along with electric conductors.
Note: See Sec. 1910.399 for the definition of ``qualified person.''
See Sec. 1910.332 for training requirements that apply to qualified and
unqualified persons.
(b) Other covered work by unqualified persons. The provisions of
Secs. 1910.331 through 1910.335 also cover work performed by unqualified
persons on, near, or with the installations listed in paragraphs (c)(1)
through (c)(4) of this section.
(c) Excluded work by qualified persons. The provisions of
Secs. 1910.331 through 1910.335 do not apply to work performed by
qualified persons on or directly associated with the following
installations:
(1) Generation, transmission, and distribution installations.
Installations for the generation, control, transformation, transmission,
and distribution of electric energy (including communication and
metering) located in buildings used for such purposes or located
outdoors.
Note 1: Work on or directly associated with installations of
utilization equipment used for purposes other than generating,
transmitting, or distributing electric energy (such as installations
which are in office buildings, warehouses, garages, machine shops, or
recreational buildings, or other utilization installations which are not
an integral part of a generating installation, substation, or control
center) is covered under paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
Note 2: For work on or directly associated with utilization
installations, an employer who complies with the work practices of
[[Page 860]]
Sec. 1910.269 (electric power generation, transmission, and
distribution) will be deemed to be in compliance with Sec. 1910.333(c)
and Sec. 1910.335. However, the requirements of Sec. 1910.332,
Sec. 1910.333(a), Sec. 1910.333(b), and Sec. 1910.334 apply to all work
on or directly associated with utilization installations, regardless of
whether the work is performed by qualified or unqualified persons.
Note 3: Work on or directly associated with generation,
transmission, or distribution installations includes:
(1) Work performed directly on such installations, such as repairing
overhead or underground distribution lines or repairing a feed-water
pump for the boiler in a generating plant.
(2) Work directly associated with such installations, such as line-
clearance tree trimming and replacing utility poles.
(3) Work on electric utilization circuits in a generating plant
provided that:
(A) Such circuits are commingled with installations of power
generation equipment or circuits, and
(B) The generation equipment or circuits present greater electrical
hazards than those posed by the utilization equipment or circuits (such
as exposure to higher voltages or lack of overcurrent protection).
This work is covered by Sec. 1910.269 of this Part.
(2) Communications installations. Installations of communication
equipment to the extent that the work is covered under Sec. 1910.268.
(3) Installations in vehicles. Installations in ships, watercraft,
railway rolling stock, aircraft, or automotive vehicles other than
mobile homes and recreational vehicles.
(4) Railway installations. Installations of railways for generation,
transformation, transmission, or distribution of power used exclusively
for operation of rolling stock or installations of railways used
exclusively for signaling and communication purposes.
[55 FR 32016, Aug. 6, 1990, as amended at 59 FR 4476, Jan. 31, 1994]
Sec. 1910.332 Training.
(a) Scope. The training requirements contained in this section apply
to employees who face a risk of electric shock that is not reduced to a
safe level by the electrical installation requirements of Secs. 1910.303
through 1910.308.
Note: Employees in occupations listed in Table S-4 face such a risk
and are required to be trained. Other employees who also may reasonably
be expected to face a comparable risk of injury due to electric shock or
other electrical hazards must also be trained.
(b) Content of training. (1) Practices addressed in this standard.
Employees shall be trained in and familiar with the safety-related work
practices required by Secs. 1910.331 through 1910.335 that pertain to
their respective job assignments.
(2) Additional requirements for unqualified persons. Employees who
are covered by paragraph (a) of this section but who are not qualified
persons shall also be trained in and familiar with any electrically
related safety practices not specifically addressed by Secs. 1910.331
through 1910.335 but which are necessary for their safety.
(3) Additional requirements for qualified persons. Qualified persons
(i.e., those permitted to work on or near exposed energized parts)
shall, at a minimum, be trained in and familiar with the following:
(i) The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live
parts from other parts of electric equipment,
(ii) The skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal
voltage of exposed live parts, and
(iii) The clearance distances specified in Sec. 1910.333(c) and the
corresponding voltages to which the qualified person will be exposed.
Note 1: For the purposes of Secs. 1910.331 through 1910.335, a
person must have the training required by paragraph (b)(3) of this
section in order to be considered a qualified person.
Note 2: Qualified persons whose work on energized equipment involves
either direct contact or contact by means of tools or materials must
also have the training needed to meet Sec. 1910.333(c)(2).
(c) Type of training. The training required by this section shall be
of the classroom or on-the-job type. The degree of training provided
shall be determined by the risk to the employee.
[[Page 861]]
Table S-4--Typical Occupational Categories of Employees Facing a Higher
Than Normal Risk of Electrical Accident
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Occupation
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Blue collar supervisors.\1\
Electrical and electronic engineers.\1\
Electrical and electronic equipment assemblers.\1\
Electrical and electronic technicians.\1\
Electricians.
Industrial machine operators.\1\
Material handling equipment operators.\1\
Mechanics and repairers.\1\
Painters.\1\
Riggers and roustabouts.\1\
Stationary engineers.\1\
Welders.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Workers in these groups do not need to be trained if their work or
the work of those they supervise does not bring them or the employees
they supervise close enough to exposed parts of electric circuits
operating at 50 volts or more to ground for a hazard to exist.
[55 FR 32016, Aug. 6, 1990]
Sec. 1910.333 Selection and use of work practices.
(a) General. Safety-related work practices shall be employed to
prevent electric shock or other injuries resulting from either direct or
indirect electrical contacts, when work is performed near or on
equipment or circuits which are or may be energized. The specific
safety-related work practices shall be consistent with the nature and
extent of the associated electrical hazards.
(1) Deenergized parts. Live parts to which an employee may be
exposed shall be deenergized before the employee works on or near them,
unless the employer can demonstrate that deenergizing introduces
additional or increased hazards or is infeasible due to equipment design
or operational limitations. Live parts that operate at less than 50
volts to ground need not be deenergized if there will be no increased
exposure to electrical burns or to explosion due to electric arcs.
Note 1: Examples of increased or additional hazards include
interruption of life support equipment, deactivation of emergency alarm
systems, shutdown of hazardous location ventilation equipment, or
removal of illumination for an area.
Note 2: Examples of work that may be performed on or near energized
circuit parts because of infeasibility due to equipment design or
operational limitations include testing of electric circuits that can
only be performed with the circuit energized and work on circuits that
form an integral part of a continuous industrial process in a chemical
plant that would otherwise need to be completely shut down in order to
permit work on one circuit or piece of equipment.
Note 3: Work on or near deenergized parts is covered by paragraph
(b) of this section.
(2) Energized parts. If the exposed live parts are not deenergized
(i.e., for reasons of increased or additional hazards or infeasibility),
other safety-related work practices shall be used to protect employees
who may be exposed to the electrical hazards involved. Such work
practices shall protect employees against contact with energized circuit
parts directly with any part of their body or indirectly through some
other conductive object. The work practices that are used shall be
suitable for the conditions under which the work is to be performed and
for the voltage level of the exposed electric conductors or circuit
parts. Specific work practice requirements are detailed in paragraph (c)
of this section.
(b) Working on or near exposed deenergized parts--(1) Application.
This paragraph applies to work on exposed deenergized parts or near
enough to them to expose the employee to any electrical hazard they
present. Conductors and parts of electric equipment that have been
deenergized but have not been locked out or tagged in accordance with
paragraph (b) of this section shall be treated as energized parts, and
paragraph (c) of this section applies to work on or near them.
(2) Lockout and tagging. While any employee is exposed to contact
with parts of fixed electric equipment or circuits which have been
deenergized, the circuits energizing the parts shall be locked out or
tagged or both in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph.
The requirements shall be followed in the order in which they are
presented (i.e., paragraph (b)(2)(i) first, then paragraph (b)(2)(ii),
etc.).
Note 1: As used in this section, fixed equipment refers to equipment
fastened in place or connected by permanent wiring methods.
Note 2: Lockout and tagging procedures that comply with paragraphs
(c) through (f) of Sec. 1910.147 will also be deemed to comply with
paragraph (b)(2) of this section provided that:
(1) The procedures address the electrical safety hazards covered by
this Subpart; and
[[Page 862]]
(2) The procedures also incorporate the requirements of paragraphs
(b)(2)(iii)(D) and (b)(2)(iv)(B) of this section.
(i) Procedures. The employer shall maintain a written copy of the
procedures outlined in paragraph (b)(2) and shall make it available for
inspection by employees and by the Assistant Secretary of Labor and his
or her authorized representatives.
Note: The written procedures may be in the form of a copy of
paragraph (b) of this section.
(ii) Deenergizing equipment. (A) Safe procedures for deenergizing
circuits and equipment shall be determined before circuits or equipment
are deenergized.
(B) The circuits and equipment to be worked on shall be disconnected
from all electric energy sources. Control circuit devices, such as push
buttons, selector switches, and interlocks, may not be used as the sole
means for deenergizing circuits or equipment. Interlocks for electric
equipment may not be used as a substitute for lockout and tagging
procedures.
(C) Stored electric energy which might endanger personnel shall be
released. Capacitors shall be discharged and high capacitance elements
shall be short-circuited and grounded, if the stored electric energy
might endanger personnel.
Note: If the capacitors or associated equipment are handled in
meeting this requirement, they shall be treated as energized.
(D) Stored non-electrical energy in devices that could reenergize
electric circuit parts shall be blocked or relieved to the extent that
the circuit parts could not be accidentally energized by the device.
(iii) Application of locks and tags. (A) A lock and a tag shall be
placed on each disconnecting means used to deenergize circuits and
equipment on which work is to be performed, except as provided in
paragraphs (b)(2)(iii)(C) and (b)(2)(iii)(E) of this section. The lock
shall be attached so as to prevent persons from operating the
disconnecting means unless they resort to undue force or the use of
tools.
(B) Each tag shall contain a statement prohibiting unauthorized
operation of the disconnecting means and removal of the tag.
(C) If a lock cannot be applied, or if the employer can demonstrate
that tagging procedures will provide a level of safety equivalent to
that obtained by the use of a lock, a tag may be used without a lock.
(D) A tag used without a lock, as permitted by paragraph
(b)(2)(iii)(C) of this section, shall be supplemented by at least one
additional safety measure that provides a level of safety equivalent to
that obtained by the use of a lock. Examples of additional safety
measures include the removal of an isolating circuit element, blocking
of a controlling switch, or opening of an extra disconnecting device.
(E) A lock may be placed without a tag only under the following
conditions:
(1) Only one circuit or piece of equipment is deenergized, and
(2) The lockout period does not extend beyond the work shift, and
(3) Employees exposed to the hazards associated with reenergizing
the circuit or equipment are familiar with this procedure.
(iv) Verification of deenergized condition. The requirements of this
paragraph shall be met before any circuits or equipment can be
considered and worked as deenergized.
(A) A qualified person shall operate the equipment operating
controls or otherwise verify that the equipment cannot be restarted.
(B) A qualified person shall use test equipment to test the circuit
elements and electrical parts of equipment to which employees will be
exposed and shall verify that the circuit elements and equipment parts
are deenergized. The test shall also determine if any energized
condition exists as a result of inadvertently induced voltage or
unrelated voltage backfeed even though specific parts of the circuit
have been deenergized and presumed to be safe. If the circuit to be
tested is over 600 volts, nominal, the test equipment shall be checked
for proper operation immediately before and immediately after this test.
(v) Reenergizing equipment. These requirements shall be met, in the
order
[[Page 863]]
given, before circuits or equipment are reenergized, even temporarily.
(A) A qualified person shall conduct tests and visual inspections,
as necessary, to verify that all tools, electrical jumpers, shorts,
grounds, and other such devices have been removed, so that the circuits
and equipment can be safely energized.
(B) Employees exposed to the hazards associated with reenergizing
the circuit or equipment shall be warned to stay clear of circuits and
equipment.
(C) Each lock and tag shall be removed by the employee who applied
it or under his or her direct supervision. However, if this employee is
absent from the workplace, then the lock or tag may be removed by a
qualified person designated to perform this task provided that:
(1) The employer ensures that the employee who applied the lock or
tag is not available at the workplace, and
(2) The employer ensures that the employee is aware that the lock or
tag has been removed before he or she resumes work at that workplace.
(D) There shall be a visual determination that all employees are
clear of the circuits and equipment.
(c) Working on or near exposed energized parts--(1) Application.
This paragraph applies to work performed on exposed live parts
(involving either direct contact or contact by means of tools or
materials) or near enough to them for employees to be exposed to any
hazard they present.
(2) Work on energized equipment. Only qualified persons may work on
electric circuit parts or equipment that have not been deenergized under
the procedures of paragraph (b) of this section. Such persons shall be
capable of working safely on energized circuits and shall be familiar
with the proper use of special precautionary techniques, personal
protective equipment, insulating and shielding materials, and insulated
tools.
(3) Overhead lines. If work is to be performed near overhead lines,
the lines shall be deenergized and grounded, or other protective
measures shall be provided before work is started. If the lines are to
be deenergized, arrangements shall be made with the person or
organization that operates or controls the electric circuits involved to
deenergize and ground them. If protective measures, such as guarding,
isolating, or insulating are provided, these precautions shall prevent
employees from contacting such lines directly with any part of their
body or indirectly through conductive materials, tools, or equipment.
Note: The work practices used by qualified persons installing
insulating devices on overhead power transmission or distribution lines
are covered by Sec. 1910.269 of this Part, not by Sec. Sec. 1910.332
through 1910.335 of this Part. Under paragraph (c)(2) of this section,
unqualified persons are prohibited from performing this type of work.
(i) Unqualified persons. (A) When an unqualified person is working
in an elevated position near overhead lines, the location shall be such
that the person and the longest conductive object he or she may contact
cannot come closer to any unguarded, energized overhead line than the
following distances:
(1) For voltages to ground 50kV or below--10 ft. (305 cm);
(2) For voltages to ground over 50kV--10 ft. (305 cm) plus 4 in. (10
cm) for every 10kV over 50kV.
(B) When an unqualified person is working on the ground in the
vicinity of overhead lines, the person may not bring any conductive
object closer to unguarded, energized overhead lines than the distances
given in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(A) of this section.
Note: For voltages normally encountered with overhead power lines,
objects which do not have an insulating rating for the voltage involved
are considered to be conductive.
(ii) Qualified persons. When a qualified person is working in the
vicinity of overhead lines, whether in an elevated position or on the
ground, the person may not approach or take any conductive object
without an approved insulating handle closer to exposed energized parts
than shown in Table S-5 unless:
(A) The person is insulated from the energized part (gloves, with
sleeves if necessary, rated for the voltage involved are considered to
be insulation of the person from the energized part on which work is
performed), or
(B) The energized part is insulated both from all other conductive
objects
[[Page 864]]
at a different potential and from the person, or
(C) The person is insulated from all conductive objects at a
potential different from that of the energized part.
Table S-5--Approach Distances for Qualified Employees--Alternating
Current
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage range (phase to phase) Minimum approach distance
------------------------------------------------------------------------
300V and less............................. Avoid contact.
Over 300V, not over 750V.................. 1 ft. 0 in. (30.5 cm).
Over 750V, not over 2kV................... l ft. 6 in. (46 cm).
Over 2kV, not over 15kV................... 2 ft. 0 in. (61 cm).
Over 15kV, not over 37kV.................. 3 ft. 0 in. (91 cm).
Over 37kV, not over 87.5kV................ 3 ft. 6 in. (107 cm).
Over 87.5kV, not over 121kV............... 4 ft. 0 in. (122 cm).
Over 121kV, not over 140kV................ 4 ft. 6 in. (137 cm).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(iii) Vehicular and mechanical equipment. (A) Any vehicle or
mechanical equipment capable of having parts of its structure elevated
near energized overhead lines shall be operated so that a clearance of
10 ft. (305 cm) is maintained. If the voltage is higher than 50kV, the
clearance shall be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10kV over that
voltage. However, under any of the following conditions, the clearance
may be reduced:
(1) If the vehicle is in transit with its structure lowered, the
clearance may be reduced to 4 ft. (122 cm). If the voltage is higher
than 50kV, the clearance shall be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10kV
over that voltage.
(2) If insulating barriers are installed to prevent contact with the
lines, and if the barriers are rated for the voltage of the line being
guarded and are not a part of or an attachment to the vehicle or its
raised structure, the clearance may be reduced to a distance within the
designed working dimensions of the insulating barrier.
(3) If the equipment is an aerial lift insulated for the voltage
involved, and if the work is performed by a qualified person, the
clearance (between the uninsulated portion of the aerial lift and the
power line) may be reduced to the distance given in Table S-5.
(B) Employees standing on the ground may not contact the vehicle or
mechanical equipment or any of its attachments, unless:
(1) The employee is using protective equipment rated for the
voltage; or
(2) The equipment is located so that no uninsulated part of its
structure (that portion of the structure that provides a conductive path
to employees on the ground) can come closer to the line than permitted
in paragraph (c)(3)(iii) of this section.
(C) If any vehicle or mechanical equipment capable of having parts
of its structure elevated near energized overhead lines is intentionally
grounded, employees working on the ground near the point of grounding
may not stand at the grounding location whenever there is a possibility
of overhead line contact. Additional precautions, such as the use of
barricades or insulation, shall be taken to protect employees from
hazardous ground potentials, depending on earth resistivity and fault
currents, which can develop within the first few feet or more outward
from the grounding point.
(4) Illumination. (i) Employees may not enter spaces containing
exposed energized parts, unless illumination is provided that enables
the employees to perform the work safely.
(ii) Where lack of illumination or an obstruction precludes
observation of the work to be performed, employees may not perform tasks
near exposed energized parts. Employees may not reach blindly into areas
which may contain energized parts.
(5) Confined or enclosed work spaces. When an employee works in a
confined or enclosed space (such as a manhole or vault) that contains
exposed energized parts, the employer shall provide, and the employee
shall use, protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating
materials as necessary to avoid inadvertent contact with these parts.
Doors, hinged panels, and the like shall be secured to prevent their
swinging into an employee and causing the employee to contact exposed
energized parts.
(6) Conductive materials and equipment. Conductive materials and
equipment that are in contact with any part of an employee's body shall
be handled in a manner that will prevent them from contacting exposed
energized conductors or circuit parts. If an employee must handle long
dimensional conductive objects (such as ducts and pipes) in
[[Page 865]]
areas with exposed live parts, the employer shall institute work
practices (such as the use of insulation, guarding, and material
handling techniques) which will minimize the hazard.
(7) Portable ladders. Portable ladders shall have nonconductive
siderails if they are used where the employee or the ladder could
contact exposed energized parts.
(8) Conductive apparel. Conductive articles of jewelry and clothing
(such as watch bands, bracelets, rings, key chains, necklaces, metalized
aprons, cloth with conductive thread, or metal headgear) may not be worn
if they might contact exposed energized parts. However, such articles
may be worn if they are rendered nonconductive by covering, wrapping, or
other insulating means.
(9) Housekeeping duties. Where live parts present an electrical
contact hazard, employees may not perform housekeeping duties at such
close distances to the parts that there is a possibility of contact,
unless adequate safeguards (such as insulating equipment or barriers)
are provided. Electrically conductive cleaning materials (including
conductive solids such as steel wool, metalized cloth, and silicon
carbide, as well as conductive liquid solutions) may not be used in
proximity to energized parts unless procedures are followed which will
prevent electrical contact.
(10) Interlocks. Only a qualified person following the requirements
of paragraph (c) of this section may defeat an electrical safety
interlock, and then only temporarily while he or she is working on the
equipment. The interlock system shall be returned to its operable
condition when this work is completed.
[55 FR 32016, Aug. 6, 1990; 55 FR 42053, Nov. 1, 1990, as amended at 59
FR 4476, Jan. 31, 1994]
Sec. 1910.334 Use of equipment.
(a) Portable electric equipment. This paragraph applies to the use
of cord- and plug-connected equipment, including flexible cord sets
(extension cords).
(1) Handling. Portable equipment shall be handled in a manner which
will not cause damage. Flexible electric cords connected to equipment
may not be used for raising or lowering the equipment. Flexible cords
may not be fastened with staples or otherwise hung in such a fashion as
could damage the outer jacket or insulation.
(2) Visual inspection. (i) Portable cord- and plug-connected
equipment and flexible cord sets (extension cords) shall be visually
inspected before use on any shift for external defects (such as loose
parts, deformed and missing pins, or damage to outer jacket or
insulation) and for evidence of possible internal damage (such as
pinched or crushed outer jacket). Cord- and plug-connected equipment and
flexible cord sets (extension cords) which remain connected once they
are put in place and are not exposed to damage need not be visually
inspected until they are relocated.
(ii) If there is a defect or evidence of damage that might expose an
employee to injury, the defective or damaged item shall be removed from
service, and no employee may use it until repairs and tests necessary to
render the equipment safe have been made.
(iii) When an attachment plug is to be connected to a receptacle
(including any on a cord set), the relationship of the plug and
receptacle contacts shall first be checked to ensure that they are of
proper mating configurations.
(3) Grounding-type equipment. (i) A flexible cord used with
grounding-type equipment shall contain an equipment grounding conductor.
(ii) Attachment plugs and receptacles may not be connected or
altered in a manner which would prevent proper continuity of the
equipment grounding conductor at the point where plugs are attached to
receptacles. Additionally, these devices may not be altered to allow the
grounding pole of a plug to be inserted into slots intended for
connection to the current-carrying conductors.
(iii) Adapters which interrupt the continuity of the equipment
grounding connection may not be used.
(4) Conductive work locations. Portable electric equipment and
flexible cords used in highly conductive work locations (such as those
inundated with water or other conductive liquids), or in job locations
where employees are likely to contact water or conductive
[[Page 866]]
liquids, shall be approved for those locations.
(5) Connecting attachment plugs. (i) Employees' hands may not be wet
when plugging and unplugging flexible cords and cord- and plug-connected
equipment, if energized equipment is involved.
(ii) Energized plug and receptacle connections may be handled only
with insulating protective equipment if the condition of the connection
could provide a conducting path to the employee's hand (if, for example,
a cord connector is wet from being immersed in water).
(iii) Locking-type connectors shall be properly secured after
connection.
(b) Electric power and lighting circuits. (1) Routine opening and
closing of circuits. Load rated switches, circuit breakers, or other
devices specifically designed as disconnecting means shall be used for
the opening, reversing, or closing of circuits under load conditions.
Cable connectors not of the load-break type, fuses, terminal lugs, and
cable splice connections may not be used for such purposes, except in an
emergency.
(2) Reclosing circuits after protective device operation. After a
circuit is deenergized by a circuit protective device, the circuit may
not be manually reenergized until it has been determined that the
equipment and circuit can be safely energized. The repetitive manual
reclosing of circuit breakers or reenergizing circuits through replaced
fuses is prohibited.
Note: When it can be determined from the design of the circuit and
the overcurrent devices involved that the automatic operation of a
device was caused by an overload rather than a fault condition, no
examination of the circuit or connected equipment is needed before the
circuit is reenergized.
(3) Overcurrent protection modification. Overcurrent protection of
circuits and conductors may not be modified, even on a temporary basis,
beyond that allowed by Sec. 1910.304(e), the installation safety
requirements for overcurrent protection.
(c) Test instruments and equipment. (1) Use. Only qualified persons
may perform testing work on electric circuits or equipment.
(2) Visual inspection. Test instruments and equipment and all
associated test leads, cables, power cords, probes, and connectors shall
be visually inspected for external defects and damage before the
equipment is used. If there is a defect or evidence of damage that might
expose an employee to injury, the defective or damaged item shall be
removed from service, and no employee may use it until repairs and tests
necessary to render the equipment safe have been made.
(3) Rating of equipment. Test instruments and equipment and their
accessories shall be rated for the circuits and equipment to which they
will be connected and shall be designed for the environment in which
they will be used.
(d) Occasional use of flammable or ignitible materials. Where
flammable materials are present only occasionally, electric equipment
capable of igniting them shall not be used, unless measures are taken to
prevent hazardous conditions from developing. Such materials include,
but are not limited to: flammable gases, vapors, or liquids; combustible
dust; and ignitible fibers or flyings.
Note: Electrical installation requirements for locations where
flammable materials are present on a regular basis are contained in
Sec. 1910.307.
[55 FR 32019, Aug. 6, 1990]
Sec. 1910.335 Safeguards for personnel protection.
(a) Use of protective equipment--(1) Personal protective equipment.
(i) Employees working in areas where there are potential electrical
hazards shall be provided with, and shall use, electrical protective
equipment that is appropriate for the specific parts of the body to be
protected and for the work to be performed.
Note: Personal protective equipment requirements are contained in
subpart I of this part.
(ii) Protective equipment shall be maintained in a safe, reliable
condition and shall be periodically inspected or tested, as required by
Sec. 1910.137.
(iii) If the insulating capability of protective equipment may be
subject to damage during use, the insulating
[[Page 867]]
material shall be protected. (For example, an outer covering of leather
is sometimes used for the protection of rubber insulating material.)
(iv) Employees shall wear nonconductive head protection wherever
there is a danger of head injury from electric shock or burns due to
contact with exposed energized parts.
(v) Employees shall wear protective equipment for the eyes or face
wherever there is danger of injury to the eyes or face from electric
arcs or flashes or from flying objects resulting from electrical
explosion.
(2) General protective equipment and tools. (i) When working near
exposed energized conductors or circuit parts, each employee shall use
insulated tools or handling equipment if the tools or handling equipment
might make contact with such conductors or parts. If the insulating
capability of insulated tools or handling equipment is subject to
damage, the insulating material shall be protected.
(A) Fuse handling equipment, insulated for the circuit voltage,
shall be used to remove or install fuses when the fuse terminals are
energized.
(B) Ropes and handlines used near exposed energized parts shall be
nonconductive.
(ii) Protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating
materials shall be used to protect each employee from shock, burns, or
other electrically related injuries while that employee is working near
exposed energized parts which might be accidentally contacted or where
dangerous electric heating or arcing might occur. When normally enclosed
live parts are exposed for maintenance or repair, they shall be guarded
to protect unqualified persons from contact with the live parts.
(b) Alerting techniques. The following alerting techniques shall be
used to warn and protect employees from hazards which could cause injury
due to electric shock, burns, or failure of electric equipment parts:
(1) Safety signs and tags. Safety signs, safety symbols, or accident
prevention tags shall be used where necessary to warn employees about
electrical hazards which may endanger them, as required by
Sec. 1910.145.
(2) Barricades. Barricades shall be used in conjunction with safety
signs where it is necessary to prevent or limit employee access to work
areas exposing employees to uninsulated energized conductors or circuit
parts. Conductive barricades may not be used where they might cause an
electrical contact hazard.
(3) Attendants. If signs and barricades do not provide sufficient
warning and protection from electrical hazards, an attendant shall be
stationed to warn and protect employees.
[55 FR 32020, Aug. 6, 1990]
Secs. 1910.336-1910.360 [Reserved]
Safety-Related Maintenance Requirements
Secs. 1910.361-1910.380 [Reserved]
Safety Requirements for Special Equipment
Secs. 1910.381-1910.398 [Reserved]
Definitions
Sec. 1910.399 Definitions applicable to this subpart.
Acceptable. An installation or equipment is acceptable to the
Assistant Secretary of Labor, and approved within the meaning of this
Subpart S:
(i) If it is accepted, or certified, or listed, or labeled, or
otherwise determined to be safe by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory; or
(ii) With respect to an installation or equipment of a kind which no
nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists,
labels, or determines to be safe, if it is inspected or tested by
another Federal agency, or by a State, municipal, or other local
authority responsible for enforcing occupational safety provisions of
the National Electrical Code and found in compliance with the provisions
of the National Electrical Code as applied in this subpart; or
(iii) With respect to custom-made equipment or related installations
which are designed, fabricated for, and intended for use by a particular
customer, if it is determined to be safe for its intended use by its
manufacturer on
[[Page 868]]
the basis of test data which the employer keeps and makes available for
inspection to the Assistant Secretary and his authorized
representatives. Refer to Sec. 1910.7 for definition of nationally
recognized testing laboratory.
Accepted. An installation is ``accepted'' if it has been inspected
and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to conform to
specified plans or to procedures of applicable codes.
Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.) Capable of being removed
or exposed without damaging the building structure or finish, or not
permanently closed in by the structure or finish of the building. (See
``concealed'' and ``exposed.'')
Accessible. (As applied to equipment.) Admitting close approach; not
guarded by locked doors, elevation, or other effective means. (See
``Readily accessible.'')
Ampacity. Current-carrying capacity of electric conductors expressed
in amperes.
Appliances. Utilization equipment, generally other than industrial,
normally built in standardized sizes or types, which is installed or
connected as a unit to perform one or more functions such as clothes
washing, air conditioning, food mixing, deep frying, etc.
Approved. Acceptable to the authority enforcing this subpart. The
authority enforcing this subpart is the Assistant Secretary of Labor for
Occupational Safety and Health. The definition of ``acceptable''
indicates what is acceptable to the Assistant Secretary of Labor, and
therefore approved within the meaning of this Subpart.
Approved for the purpose. Approved for a specific purpose,
environment, or application described in a particular standard
requirement.
Suitability of equipment or materials for a specific purpose,
environment or application may be determined by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory, inspection agency or other organization concerned
with product evaluation as part of its listing and labeling program.
(See ``Labeled'' or ``Listed.'')
Armored cable. Type AC armored cable is a fabricated assembly of
insulated conductors in a flexible metallic enclosure.
Askarel. A generic term for a group of nonflammable synthetic
chlorinated hydrocarbons used as electrical insulating media. Askarels
of various compositional types are used. Under arcing conditions the
gases produced, while consisting predominantly of noncombustible
hydrogen chloride, can include varying amounts of combustible gases
depending upon the askarel type.
Attachment plug (Plug cap) (Cap). A device which, by insertion in a
receptacle, establishes connection between the conductors of the
attached flexible cord and the conductors connected permanently to the
receptacle.
Automatic. Self-acting, operating by its own mechanism when actuated
by some impersonal influence, as, for example, a change in current
strength, pressure, temperature, or mechanical configuration.
Bare conductor. See ``Conductor.''
Bonding. The permanent joining of metallic parts to form an
electrically conductive path which will assure electrical continuity and
the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed.
Bonding jumper. A reliable conductor to assure the required
electrical conductivity between metal parts required to be electrically
connected.
Branch circuit. The circuit conductors between the final overcurrent
device protecting the circuit and the outlet(s).
Building. A structure which stands alone or which is cut off from
adjoining structures by fire walls with all openings therein protected
by approved fire doors.
Cabinet. An enclosure designed either for surface or flush mounting,
and provided with a frame, mat, or trim in which a swinging door or
doors are or may be hung.
Cable tray system. A cable tray system is a unit or assembly of
units or sections, and associated fittings, made of metal or other
noncombustible materials forming a rigid structural system used to
support cables. Cable tray systems include ladders, troughs, channels,
solid bottom trays, and other similar structures.
Cablebus. Cablebus is an approved assembly of insulated conductors
with
[[Page 869]]
fittings and conductor terminations in a completely enclosed,
ventilated, protective metal housing.
Center pivot irrigation machine. A center pivot irrigation machine
is a multi-motored irrigation machine which revolves around a central
pivot and employs alignment switches or similar devices to control
individual motors.
Certified. Equipment is ``certified'' if it (a) has been tested and
found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet nationally
recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner, or (b)
is of a kind whose production is periodically inspected by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory, and (c) it bears a label, tag, or other
record of certification.
Circuit breaker. (i) (600 volts nominal, or less). A device designed
to open and close a circuit by nonautomatic means and to open the
circuit automatically on a predetermined overcurrent without injury to
itself when properly applied within its rating.
(ii) (Over 600 volts, nominal). A switching device capable of
making, carrying, and breaking currents under normal circuit conditions,
and also making, carrying for a specified time, and breaking currents
under specified abnormal circuit conditions, such as those of short
circuit.
Class I locations. Class I locations are those in which flammable
gases or vapors are or may be present in the air in quantities
sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible mixtures. Class I locations
include the following:
(i) Class I, Division 1. A Class I, Division 1 location is a
location: (a) in which hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or
vapors may exist under normal operating conditions; or (b) in which
hazardous concentrations of such gases or vapors may exist frequently
because of repair or maintenance operations or because of leakage; or
(c) in which breakdown or faulty operation of equipment or processes
might release hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors, and
might also cause simultaneous failure of electric equipment.
Note: This classification usually includes locations where volatile
flammable liquids or liquefied flammable gases are transferred from one
container to another; interiors of spray booths and areas in the
vicinity of spraying and painting operations where volatile flammable
solvents are used; locations containing open tanks or vats of volatile
flammable liquids; drying rooms or compartments for the evaporation of
flammable solvents; locations containing fat and oil extraction
equipment using volatile flammable solvents; portions of cleaning and
dyeing plants where flammable liquids are used; gas generator rooms and
other portions of gas manufacturing plants where flammable gas may
escape; inadequately ventilated pump rooms for flammable gas or for
volatile flammable liquids; the interiors of refrigerators and freezers
in which volatile flammable materials are stored in open, lightly
stoppered, or easily ruptured containers; and all other locations where
ignitible concentrations of flammable vapors or gases are likely to
occur in the course of normal operations.
(ii) Class I, Division 2. A Class I, Division 2 location is a
location: (a) in which volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases are
handled, processed, or used, but in which the hazardous liquids, vapors,
or gases will normally be confined within closed containers or closed
systems from which they can escape only in case of accidental rupture or
breakdown of such containers or systems, or in case of abnormal
operation of equipment; or (b) in which hazardous concentrations of
gases or vapors are normally prevented by positive mechanical
ventilation, and which might become hazardous through failure or
abnormal operations of the ventilating equipment; or (c) that is
adjacent to a Class I, Division 1 location, and to which hazardous
concentrations of gases or vapors might occasionally be communicated
unless such communication is prevented by adequate positive-pressure
ventilation from a source of clean air, and effective safeguards against
ventilation failure are provided.
Note: This classification usually includes locations where volatile
flammable liquids or flammable gases or vapors are used, but which would
become hazardous only in case of an accident or of some unusual
operating condition. The quantity of flammable material that might
escape in case of accident, the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the
total area involved, and the record of the industry or business with
respect to explosions or fires are all factors that merit consideration
in determining the classification and extent of each location.
[[Page 870]]
Piping without valves, checks, meters, and similar devices would not
ordinarily introduce a hazardous condition even though used for
flammable liquids or gases. Locations used for the storage of flammable
liquids or a liquefied or compressed gases in sealed containers would
not normally be considered hazardous unless also subject to other
hazardous conditions.
Electrical conduits and their associated enclosures separated from
process fluids by a single seal or barrier are classed as a Division 2
location if the outside of the conduit and enclosures is a nonhazardous
location.
Class II locations. Class II locations are those that are hazardous
because of the presence of combustible dust. Class II locations include
the following:
(i) Class II, Division 1. A Class II, Division 1 location is a
location: (a) In which combustible dust is or may be in suspension in
the air under normal operating conditions, in quantities sufficient to
produce explosive or ignitible mixtures; or (b) where mechanical failure
or abnormal operation of machinery or equipment might cause such
explosive or ignitible mixtures to be produced, and might also provide a
source of ignition through simultaneous failure of electric equipment,
operation of protection devices, or from other causes, or (c) in which
combustible dusts of an electrically conductive nature may be present.
Note: This classification may include areas of grain handling and
processing plants, starch plants, sugar-pulverizing plants, malting
plants, hay-grinding plants, coal pulverizing plants, areas where metal
dusts and powders are produced or processed, and other similar locations
which contain dust producing machinery and equipment (except where the
equipment is dust-tight or vented to the outside). These areas would
have combustible dust in the air, under normal operating conditions, in
quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible mixtures.
Combustible dusts which are electrically nonconductive include dusts
produced in the handling and processing of grain and grain products,
pulverized sugar and cocoa, dried egg and milk powders, pulverized
spices, starch and pastes, potato and woodflour, oil meal from beans and
seed, dried hay, and other organic materials which may produce
combustible dusts when processed or handled. Dusts containing magnesium
or aluminum are particularly hazardous and the use of extreme caution is
necessary to avoid ignition and explosion.
(ii) Class II, Division 2. A Class II, Division 2 location is a
location in which: (a) combustible dust will not normally be in
suspension in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or
ignitible mixtures, and dust accumulations are normally insufficient to
interfere with the normal operation of electrical equipment or other
apparatus; or (b) dust may be in suspension in the air as a result of
infrequent malfunctioning of handling or processing equipment, and dust
accumulations resulting therefrom may be ignitible by abnormal operation
or failure of electrical equipment or other apparatus.
Note: This classification includes locations where dangerous
concentrations of suspended dust would not be likely but where dust
accumulations might form on or in the vicinity of electric equipment.
These areas may contain equipment from which appreciable quantities of
dust would escape under abnormal operating conditions or be adjacent to
a Class II Division 1 location, as described above, into which an
explosive or ignitible concentration of dust may be put into suspension
under abnormal operating conditions.
Class III locations. Class III locations are those that are
hazardous because of the presence of easily ignitible fibers or flyings
but in which such fibers or flyings are not likely to be in suspension
in the air in quantities sufficient to produce ignitible mixtures. Class
III locations include the following:
(i) Class III, Division 1. A Class III, Division 1 location is a
location in which easily ignitible fibers or materials producing
combustible flyings are handled, manufactured, or used.
Note: Such locations usually include some parts of rayon, cotton,
and other textile mills; combustible fiber manufacturing and processing
plants; cotton gins and cotton-seed mills; flax-processing plants;
clothing manufacturing plants; woodworking plants, and establishments;
and industries involving similar hazardous processes or conditions.
Easily ignitible fibers and flyings include rayon, cotton (including
cotton linters and cotton waste), sisal or henequen, istle, jute, hemp,
tow, cocoa fiber, oakum, baled waste kapok, Spanish moss, excelsior, and
other materials of similar nature.
(ii) Class III, Division 2. A Class III, Division 2 location is a
location in which easily ignitible fibers are stored or handled, except
in process of manufacture.
Collector ring. A collector ring is an assembly of slip rings for
transferring electrical energy from a stationary to a rotating member.
[[Page 871]]
Concealed. Rendered inaccessible by the structure or finish of the
building. Wires in concealed raceways are considered concealed, even
though they may become accessible by withdrawing them. [See Accessible.
(As applied to wiring methods.)]
Conductor. (i) Bare. A conductor having no covering or electrical
insulation whatsoever.
(ii) Covered. A conductor encased within material of composition or
thickness that is not recognized as electrical insulation.
(iii) Insulated. A conductor encased within material of composition
and thickness that is recognized as electrical insulation.
Conduit body. A separate portion of a conduit or tubing system that
provides access through a removable cover(s) to the interior of the
system at a junction of two or more sections of the system or at a
terminal point of the system. Boxes such as FS and FD or larger cast or
sheet metal boxes are not classified as conduit bodies.
Controller. A device or group of devices that serves to govern, in
some predetermined manner, the electric power delivered to the apparatus
to which it is connected.
Cooking unit, counter-mounted. A cooking appliance designed for
mounting in or on a counter and consisting of one or more heating
elements, internal wiring, and built-in or separately mountable
controls. (See Oven, wall-mounted.)
Covered conductor. See Conductor.
Cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An assembly of a fuse support
with either a fuseholder, fuse carrier, or disconnecting blade. The
fuseholder or fuse carrier may include a conducting element (fuse link),
or may act as the disconnecting blade by the inclusion of a nonfusible
member.
Cutout box. An enclosure designed for surface mounting and having
swinging doors or covers secured directly to and telescoping with the
walls of the box proper. (See Cabinet.)
Damp location. See Location.
Dead front. Without live parts exposed to a person on the operating
side of the equipment.
Device. A unit of an electrical system which is intended to carry
but not utilize electric energy.
Dielectric heating. Dielectric heating is the heating of a nominally
insulating material due to its own dielectric losses when the material
is placed in a varying electric field.
Disconnecting means. A device, or group of devices, or other means
by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from their
source of supply.
Disconnecting (or Isolating) switch. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A
mechanical switching device used for isolating a circuit or equipment
from a source of power.
Dry location. See Location.
Electric sign. A fixed, stationary, or portable self-contained,
electrically illuminated utilization equipment with words or symbols
designed to convey information or attract attention.
Enclosed. Surrounded by a case, housing, fence or walls which will
prevent persons from accidentally contacting energized parts.
Enclosure. The case or housing of apparatus, or the fence or walls
surrounding an installation to prevent personnel from accidentally
contacting energized parts, or to protect the equipment from physical
damage.
Equipment. A general term including material, fittings, devices,
appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and the like, used as a part of, or in
connection with, an electrical installation.
Equipment grounding conductor. See Grounding conductor, equipment.
Explosion-proof apparatus. Apparatus enclosed in a case that is
capable of withstanding an explosion of a specified gas or vapor which
may occur within it and of preventing the ignition of a specified gas or
vapor surrounding the enclosure by sparks, flashes, or explosion of the
gas or vapor within, and which operates at such an external temperature
that it will not ignite a surrounding flammable atmosphere.
Exposed. (As applied to live parts.) Capable of being inadvertently
touched or approached nearer than a safe distance by a person. It is
applied to parts not suitably guarded, isolated, or insulated. (See
Accessible. and Concealed.)
[[Page 872]]
Exposed. (As applied to wiring methods.) On or attached to the
surface or behind panels designed to allow access. [See Accessible. (As
applied to wiring methods.)]
Exposed. (For the purposes of Sec. 1910.308(e), Communications
systems.) Where the circuit is in such a position that in case of
failure of supports or insulation, contact with another circuit may
result.
Externally operable. Capable of being operated without exposing the
operator to contact with live parts.
Feeder. All circuit conductors between the service equipment, or the
generator switchboard of an isolated plant, and the final branch-circuit
overcurrent device.
Fitting. An accessory such as a locknut, bushing, or other part of a
wiring system that is intended primarily to perform a mechanical rather
than an electrical function.
Fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An overcurrent protective device
with a circuit opening fusible part that is heated and severed by the
passage of overcurrent through it. A fuse comprises all the parts that
form a unit capable of performing the prescribed functions. It may or
may not be the complete device necessary to connect it into an
electrical circuit.
Ground. A conducting connection, whether intentional or accidental,
between an electrical circuit or equipment and the earth, or to some
conducting body that serves in place of the earth.
Grounded. Connected to earth or to some conducting body that serves
in place of the earth.
Grounded, effectively. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) Permanently
connected to earth through a ground connection of sufficiently low
impedance and having sufficient ampacity that ground fault current which
may occur cannot build up to voltages dangerous to personnel.
Grounded conductor. A system or circuit conductor that is
intentionally grounded.
Grounding conductor. A conductor used to connect equipment or the
grounded circuit of a wiring system to a grounding electrode or
electrodes.
Grounding conductor, equipment. The conductor used to connect the
non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment, raceways, and other
enclosures to the system grounded conductor and/or the grounding
electrode conductor at the service equipment or at the source of a
separately derived system.
Grounding electrode conductor. The conductor used to connect the
grounding electrode to the equipment grounding conductor and/or to the
grounded conductor of the circuit at the service equipment or at the
source of a separately derived system.
Ground-fault circuit-interrupter. A device whose function is to
interrupt the electric circuit to the load when a fault current to
ground exceeds some predetermined value that is less than that required
to operate the overcurrent protective device of the supply circuit.
Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected
by means of suitable covers, casings, barriers, rails, screens, mats, or
platforms to remove the likelihood of approach to a point of danger or
contact by persons or objects.
Health care facilities. Buildings or portions of buildings and
mobile homes that contain, but are not limited to, hospitals, nursing
homes, extended care facilities, clinics, and medical and dental
offices, whether fixed or mobile.
Heating equipment. For the purposes of Sec. 1910.306(g), the term
heating equipment includes any equipment used for heating purposes if
heat is generated by induction or dielectric methods.
Hoistway. Any shaftway, hatchway, well hole, or other vertical
opening or space in which an elevator or dumbwaiter is designed to
operate.
Identified. Identified, as used in reference to a conductor or its
terminal, means that such conductor or terminal can be readily
recognized as grounded.
Induction heating. Induction heating is the heating of a nominally
conductive material due to its own I\2\R losses when the material is
placed in a varying electromagnetic field.
Insulated conductor. See Conductor.
Interrupter switch. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A switch capable of
making, carrying, and interrupting specified currents.
[[Page 873]]
Irrigation machine. An irrigation machine is an electrically driven
or controlled machine, with one or more motors, not hand portable, and
used primarily to transport and distribute water for agricultural
purposes.
Isolated. Not readily accessible to persons unless special means for
access are used.
Isolated power system. A system comprising an isolating transformer
or its equivalent, a line isolation monitor, and its ungrounded circuit
conductors.
Labeled. Equipment is labeled if there is attached to it a label,
symbol, or other identifying mark of a nationally recognized testing
laboratory which, (a) makes periodic inspections of the production of
such equipment, and (b) whose labeling indicates compliance with
nationally recognized standards or tests to determine safe use in a
specified manner.
Lighting outlet. An outlet intended for the direct connection of a
lampholder, a lighting fixture, or a pendant cord terminating in a
lampholder.
Line-clearance tree trimming. The pruning, trimming, repairing,
maintaining, removing, or clearing of trees or cutting of brush that is
within 10 feet (305 cm) of electric supply lines and equipment.
Listed. Equipment is listed if it is of a kind mentioned in a list
which, (a) is published by a nationally recognized laboratory which
makes periodic inspection of the production of such equipment, and (b)
states such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been
tested and found safe for use in a specified manner.
Location--(i) Damp location. Partially protected locations under
canopies, marquees, roofed open porches, and like locations, and
interior locations subject to moderate degrees of moisture, such as some
basements, some barns, and some cold-storage warehouses.
(ii) Dry location. A location not normally subject to dampness or
wetness. A location classified as dry may be temporarily subject to
dampness or wetness, as in the case of a building under construction.
(iii) Wet location. Installations underground or in concrete slabs
or masonry in direct contact with the earth, and locations subject to
saturation with water or other liquids, such as vehicle-washing areas,
and locations exposed to weather and unprotected.
May. If a discretionary right, privilege, or power is conferred, the
word ``may'' is used. If a right, privilege, or power is abridged or if
an obligation to abstain from acting is imposed, the word ``may'' is
used with a restrictive ``no,'' ``not,'' or ``only.'' (E.g., no employer
may . . . ; an employer may not . . . ; only qualified persons may. . .
.)
Medium voltage cable. Type MV medium voltage cable is a single or
multiconductor solid dielectric insulated cable rated 2000 volts or
higher.
Metal-clad cable. Type MC cable is a factory assembly of one or more
conductors, each individually insulated and enclosed in a metallic
sheath of interlocking tape, or a smooth or corrugated tube.
Mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable. Type MI mineral-insulated
metal-sheathed cable is a factory assembly of one or more conductors
insulated with a highly compressed refractory mineral insulation and
enclosed in a liquidtight and gastight continuous copper sheath.
Mobile X-ray. X-ray equipment mounted on a permanent base with
wheels and/or casters for moving while completely assembled.
Nonmetallic-sheathed cable. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is a factory
assembly of two or more insulated conductors having an outer sheath of
moisture resistant, flame-retardant, nonmetallic material. Nonmetallic
sheathed cable is manufactured in the following types:
(i) Type NM. The overall covering has a flame-retardant and
moisture-resistant finish.
(ii) Type NMC. The overall covering is flame-retardant, moisture-
resistant, fungus-resistant, and corrosion-resistant.
Oil (filled) cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A cutout in which
all or part of the fuse support and its fuse link or disconnecting blade
are mounted in oil with complete immersion of the contacts and the
fusible portion of the conducting element (fuse link), so that arc
interruption by severing of the fuse link or by opening of the contacts
will occur under oil.
[[Page 874]]
Open wiring on insulators. Open wiring on insulators is an exposed
wiring method using cleats, knobs, tubes, and flexible tubing for the
protection and support of single insulated conductors run in or on
buildings, and not concealed by the building structure.
Outlet. A point on the wiring system at which current is taken to
supply utilization equipment.
Outline lighting. An arrangement of incandescent lamps or electric
discharge tubing to outline or call attention to certain features such
as the shape of a building or the decoration of a window.
Oven, wall-mounted. An oven for cooking purposes designed for
mounting in or on a wall or other surface and consisting of one of more
heating elements, internal wiring, and built-in or separately mountable
controls. (See Cooking unit, counter-mounted.)
Overcurrent. Any current in excess of the rated current of equipment
or the ampacity of a conductor. It may result from overload (see
definition), short circuit, or ground fault. A current in excess of
rating may be accommodated by certain equipment and conductors for a
given set of conditions. Hence the rules for overcurrent protection are
specific for particular situations.
Overload. Operation of equipment in excess of normal, full load
rating, or of a conductor in excess of rated ampacity which, when it
persists for a sufficient length of time, would cause damage or
dangerous overheating. A fault, such as a short circuit or ground fault,
is not an overload. (See Overcurrent.)
Panelboard. A single panel or group of panel units designed for
assembly in the form of a single panel; including buses, automatic
overcurrent devices, and with or without switches for the control of
light, heat, or power circuits; designed to be placed in a cabinet or
cutout box placed in or against a wall or partition and accessible only
from the front. (See Switchboard.)
Permanently installed decorative fountains and reflection pools.
Those that are constructed in the ground, on the ground, or in a
building in such a manner that the pool cannot be readily disassembled
for storage and are served by electrical circuits of any nature. These
units are primarily constructed for their aesthetic value and not
intended for swimming or wading.
Permanently installed swimming pools, wading and therapeutic pools.
Those that are constructed in the ground, on the ground, or in a
building in such a manner that the pool cannot be readily disassembled
for storage whether or not served by electrical circuits of any nature.
Portable X-ray. X-ray equipment designed to be hand-carried.
Power and control tray cable. Type TC power and control tray cable
is a factory assembly of two or more insulated conductors, with or
without associated bare or covered grounding conductors under a
nonmetallic sheath, approved for installation in cable trays, in
raceways, or where supported by a messenger wire.
Power fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) See Fuse.
Power-limited tray cable. Type PLTC nonmetallic-sheathed power
limited tray cable is a factory assembly of two or more insulated
conductors under a nonmetallic jacket.
Power outlet. An enclosed assembly which may include receptacles,
circuit breakers, fuseholders, fused switches, buses and watt-hour meter
mounting means; intended to supply and control power to mobile homes,
recreational vehicles or boats, or to serve as a means for distributing
power required to operate mobile or temporarily installed equipment.
Premises wiring system. That interior and exterior wiring, including
power, lighting, control, and signal circuit wiring together with all of
its associated hardware, fittings, and wiring devices, both permanently
and temporarily installed, which extends from the load end of the
service drop, or load end of the service lateral conductors to the
outlet(s). Such wiring does not include wiring internal to appliances,
fixtures, motors, controllers, motor control centers, and similar
equipment.
Qualified person. One familiar with the construction and operation
of the equipment and the hazards involved.
Note 1: Whether an employee is considered to be a ``qualified
person'' will depend upon various circumstances in the workplace. It is
possible and, in fact, likely for an individual
[[Page 875]]
to be considered ``qualified'' with regard to certain equipment in the
workplace, but ``unqualified'' as to other equipment. (See
Sec. 1910.332(b)(3) for training requirements that specifically apply to
qualified persons.)
Note 2: An employee who is undergoing on-the-job training and who,
in the course of such training, has demonstrated an ability to perform
duties safely at his or her level of training and who is under the
direct supervision of a qualified person is considered to be a qualified
person for the performance of those duties.
Raceway. A channel designed expressly for holding wires, cables, or
busbars, with additional functions as permitted in this subpart.
Raceways may be of metal or insulating material, and the term includes
rigid metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, intermediate metal
conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, flexible metallic tubing,
flexible metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, underfloor raceways,
cellular concrete floor raceways, cellular metal floor raceways, surface
raceways, wireways, and busways.
Readily accessible. Capable of being reached quickly for operation,
renewal, or inspections, without requiring those to whom ready access is
requisite to climb over or remove obstacles or to resort to portable
ladders, chairs, etc. (See Accessible.)
Receptacle. A receptacle is a contact device installed at the outlet
for the connection of a single attachment plug. A single receptacle is a
single contact device with no other contact device on the same yoke. A
multiple receptacle is a single device containing two or more
receptacles.
Receptacle outlet. An outlet where one or more receptacles are
installed.
Remote-control circuit. Any electric circuit that controls any other
circuit through a relay or an equivalent device.
Sealable equipment. Equipment enclosed in a case or cabinet that is
provided with a means of sealing or locking so that live parts cannot be
made accessible without opening the enclosure. The equipment may or may
not be operable without opening the enclosure.
Separately derived system. A premises wiring system whose power is
derived from generator, transformer, or converter winding and has no
direct electrical connection, including a solidly connected grounded
circuit conductor, to supply conductors originating in another system.
Service. The conductors and equipment for delivering energy from the
electricity supply system to the wiring system of the premises served.
Service cable. Service conductors made up in the form of a cable.
Service conductors. The supply conductors that extend from the
street main or from transformers to the service equipment of the
premises supplied.
Service drop. The overhead service conductors from the last pole or
other aerial support to and including the splices, if any, connecting to
the service-entrance conductors at the building or other structure.
Service-entrance cable. Service-entrance cable is a single conductor
or multiconductor assembly provided with or without an overall covering,
primarily used for services and of the following types:
(i) Type SE, having a flame-retardant, moisture-resistant covering,
but not required to have inherent protection against mechanical abuse.
(ii) Type USE, recognized for underground use, having a moisture-
resistant covering, but not required to have a flame-retardant covering
or inherent protection against mechanical abuse. Single-conductor cables
having an insulation specifically approved for the purpose do not
require an outer covering.
Service-entrance conductors, overhead system. The service conductors
between the terminals of the service equipment and a point usually
outside the building, clear of building walls, where joined by tap or
splice to the service drop.
Service entrance conductors, underground system. The service
conductors between the terminals of the service equipment and the point
of connection to the service lateral. Where service equipment is located
outside the building walls, there may be no service-entrance conductors,
or they may be entirely outside the building.
Service equipment. The necessary equipment, usually consisting of a
circuit breaker or switch and fuses, and their accessories, located near
the
[[Page 876]]
point of entrance of supply conductors to a building or other structure,
or an otherwise defined area, and intended to consititute the main
control and means of cutoff of the supply.
Service raceway. The raceway that encloses the service-entrance
conductors.
Shielded nonmetallic-sheathed cable. Type SNM, shielded nonmetallic-
sheathed cable is a factory assembly of two or more insulated conductors
in an extruded core of moisture-resistant, flame-resistant nonmetallic
material, covered with an overlapping spiral metal tape and wire shield
and jacketed with an extruded moisture-, flame-, oil-, corrosion-,
fungus-, and sunlight-resistant nonmetallic material.
Show window. Any window used or designed to be used for the display
of goods or advertising material, whether it is fully or partly enclosed
or entirely open at the rear and whether or not it has a platform raised
higher than the street floor level.
Sign. See Electric sign.
Signaling circuit. Any electric circuit that energizes signaling
equipment.
Special permission. The written consent of the authority having
jurisdiction.
Storable swimming or wading pool. A pool with a maximum dimension of
15 feet and a maximum wall height of 3 feet and is so constructed that
it may be readily disassembled for storage and reassembled to its
original integrity.
Switchboard. A large single panel, frame, or assembly of panels
which have switches, buses, instruments, overcurrent and other
protective devices mounted on the face or back or both. Switchboards are
generally accessible from the rear as well as from the front and are not
intended to be installed in cabinets. (See Panelboard.)
Switches.
(i) General-use switch. A switch intended for use in general
distribution and branch circuits. It is rated in amperes, and it is
capable of interrupting its rated current at its rated voltage.
(ii) General-use snap switch. A form of general-use switch so
constructed that it can be installed in flush device boxes or on outlet
box covers, or otherwise used in conjunction with wiring systems
recognized by this subpart.
(iii) Isolating switch. A switch intended for isolating an electric
circuit from the source of power. It has no interrupting rating, and it
is intended to be operated only after the circuit has been opened by
some other means.
(iv) Motor-circuit switch. A switch, rated in horsepower, capable of
interrupting the maximum operating overload current of a motor of the
same horsepower rating as the switch at the rated voltage.
Switching devices. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) Devices designed to
close and/or open one or more electric circuits. Included in this
category are circuit breakers, cutouts, disconnecting (or isolating)
switches, disconnecting means, interrupter switches, and oil (filled)
cutouts.
Transportable X-ray. X-ray equipment installed in a vehicle or that
may readily be disassembled for transport in a vehicle.
Utilization equipment. Utilization equipment means equipment which
utilizes electric energy for mechanical, chemical, heating, lighting, or
similar useful purpose.
Utilization system. A utilization system is a system which provides
electric power and light for employee workplaces, and includes the
premises wiring system and utilization equipment.
Ventilated. Provided with a means to permit circulation of air
sufficient to remove an excess of heat, fumes, or vapors.
Volatile flammable liquid. A flammable liquid having a flash point
below 38 degrees C (100 degrees F) or whose temperature is above its
flash point.
Voltage (of a circuit). The greatest root-mean-square (effective)
difference of potential between any two conductors of the circuit
concerned.
Voltage, nominal. A nominal value assigned to a circuit or system
for the purpose of conveniently designating its voltage class (as 120/
240, 480Y/277, 600, etc.). The actual voltage at which a circuit
operates can vary from the nominal within a range that permits
satisfactory operation of equipment.
Voltage to ground. For grounded circuits, the voltage between the
given conductor and that point or conductor of the circuit that is
grounded; for
[[Page 877]]
ungrounded circuits, the greatest voltage between the given conductor
and any other conductor of the circuit.
Watertight. So constructed that moisture will not enter the
enclosure.
Weatherproof. So constructed or protected that exposure to the
weather will not interfere with successful operation. Rainproof,
raintight, or watertight equipment can fulfill the requirements for
weatherproof where varying weather conditions other than wetness, such
as snow, ice, dust, or temperature extremes, are not a factor.
Wet location. See Location.
Wireways. Wireways are sheet-metal troughs with hinged or removable
covers for housing and protecting electric wires and cable and in which
conductors are laid in place after the wireway has been installed as a
complete system.
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981, as amended at 53
FR 12123, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32020, Aug. 6, 1990; 55 FR 46054, Nov. 1,
1990]
Appendix A to Subpart S of Part 1910--Reference Documents
The following references provide information which can be helpful in
understanding and complying with the requirements contained in Subpart
S:
ANSI A17.1-71 Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators and
Moving Walks.
ANSI B9.1-71 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
ANSI B30.2-76 Safety Code for Overhead and Gantry Cranes.
ANSI B30.3-75 Hammerhead Tower Cranes.
ANSI B30.4-73 Safety Code for Portal, Tower, and Pillar Cranes.
ANSI B30.5-68 Safety Code for Crawler, Locomotive, and Truck Cranes.
ANSI B30.6-77 Derricks.
ANSI B30.7-77 Base Mounted Drum Hoists.
ANSI B30.8-71 Safety Code for Floating Cranes and Floating Derricks.
ANSI B30.11-73 Monorail Systems and Underhung Cranes.
ANSI B30.12-75 Handling Loads Suspended from Rotorcraft.
ANSI B30.13-77 Controlled Mechanical Storage Cranes.
ANSI B30.15-73 Safety Code for Mobile Hydraulic Cranes.
ANSI B30.16-73 Overhead Hoists.
ANSI C2-81 National Electrical Safety Code.
ANSI C33.27-74 Safety Standard for Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in
Hazardous Locations, Class I, Groups A, B, C, and D, and Class
II, Groups E, F, and G.
ANSI K61.1-72 Safety Requirements for the Storage and Handling of
Anhydrous Ammonia.
ASTM D2155-66 Test Method for Autoignition Temperature of Liquid
Petroleum Products.
ASTM D3176-74 Method for Ultimate Analysis of Coal and Coke.
ASTM D3180-74 Method for Calculating Coal and Coke Analyses from As
Determined to Different Bases.
IEEE 463-77 Standard for Electrical Safety Practices in Electrolytic
Cell Line Working Zones.
NFPA 20-76 Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps.
NFPA 30-78 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
NFPA 32-74 Standard for Drycleaning Plants.
NFPA 33-73 Standard for Spray Application Using Flammable and
Combustible Materials.
NFPA 34-74 Standard for Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or Combustible
Liquids.
NFPA 35-76 Standard for the Manufacture of Organic Coatings.
NFPA 36-74 Standard for Solvent Extraction Plants.
NFPA 40-74 Standard for the Storage and Handling of Cellulose Nitrate
Motion Picture Film.
NFPA 56A-73 Standard for the Use of Inhalation Anesthetics (Flammable
and Nonflammable).
NFPA 56F-74 Standard for Nonflammable Medical Gas Systems.
NFPA 58-76 Standard for the Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum
Gases.
NFPA 59-76 Standard for the Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum
Gases at Utility Gas Plants.
NFPA 70-78 National Electrical Code.
NFPA 70C-74 Hazardous Locations Classification.
NFPA 70E Standard for the Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee
Workplaces.
NFPA 71-77 Standard for the Installation, Maintenance, and Use of
Central Station Signaling Systems.
NFPA 72A-75 Standard for the Installation, Maintenance, and Use of
Local Protective Signaling Systems for Watchman, Fire Alarm,
and Supervisory Service.
NFPA 72B-75 Standard for the Installation, Maintenance, and Use of
Auxiliary Protective Signaling Systems for Fire Alarm Service.
NFPA 72C-75 Standard for the Installation, Maintenance, and Use of
Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems.
NFPA 72D-75 Standard for the Installation, Maintenance, and Use of
Proprietary
[[Page 878]]
Protective Signaling Systems for Watchman, Fire Alarm, and
Supervisory Service.
NFPA 72E-74 Standard for Automatic Fire Detectors.
NFPA 74-75 Standard for Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Household
Fire Warning Equipment.
NFPA 76A-73 Standard for Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care
Facilities.
NFPA 77-72 Recommended Practice on Static Electricity.
NFPA 80-77 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows.
NFPA 86A-73 Standard for Ovens and Furnaces; Design, Location and
Equipment.
NFPA 88A-73 Standard for Parking Structures.
NFPA 88B-73 Standard for Repair Garages.
NFPA 91-73 Standard for the Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems
for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal, or Conveying.
NFPA 101-78 Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and
Structures. (Life Safety Code.)
NFPA 325M-69 Fire-Hazard Properties of Flammable Liquids, Gases, and
Volatile Solids.
NFPA 493-75 Standard for Intrinsically Safe Apparatus for Use in Class
I Hazardous Locations and Its Associated Apparatus.
NFPA 496-74 Standard for Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for
Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Locations.
NFPA 497-75 Recommended Practice for Classification of Class I
Hazardous Locations for Electrical Installations in Chemical
Plants.
NFPA 505-75 Fire Safety Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks
Including Type Designations and Areas of Use.
NMAB 353-1-79 Matrix of Combustion-Relevant Properties and
Classification of Gases, Vapors, and Selected Solids.
NMAB 353-2-79 Test Equipment for Use in Determining Classifications of
Combustible Dusts.
NMAB 353-3-80 Classification of Combustible Dusts in Accordance with
the National Electrical Code.
[46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 40185, Aug. 7, 1981]
Appendix B to Subpart S to Part 1910--Explanatory Data [Reserved]
Appendix C to Subpart S to Part 1910--Tables, Notes, and Charts
[Reserved]
Subpart T--Commercial Diving Operations
Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); sec. 107, Contract
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (the Construction Safety Act) (40
U.S.C. 333); sec. 41, Longshore and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act (33
U.S.C. 941); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48
FR 35736), or 1-90 (55 FR 9033), as applicable; 29 CFR part 1911.
Source: 42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, unless otherwise noted.
General
Sec. 1910.401 Scope and application.
(a) Scope. (1) This subpart (standard) applies to every place of
employment within the waters of the United States, or within any State,
the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Virgin
Islands, American Samoa, Guam, the Trust Territory of the Pacific
Islands, Wake Island, Johnston Island, the Canal Zone, or within the
Outer Continental Shelf lands as defined in the Outer Continental Shelf
Lands Act (67 Stat. 462, 43 U.S.C. 1331), where diving and related
support operations are performed.
(2) This standard applies to diving and related support operations
conducted in connection with all types of work and employments,
including general industry, construction, ship repairing, shipbuilding,
shipbreaking and longshoring. However, this standard does not apply to
any diving operation:
(i) Performed solely for instructional purposes, using open-circuit,
compressed-air SCUBA and conducted within the no-decompression limits;
(ii) Performed solely for search, rescue, or related public safety
purposes by or under the control of a governmental agency; or
(iii) Governed by 45 CFR part 46 (Protection of Human Subjects, U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services) or equivalent rules or
regulations
[[Page 879]]
established by another federal agency, which regulate research,
development, or related purposes involving human subjects.
(iv) Defined as scientific diving and which is under the direction
and control of a diving program containing at least the following
elements:
(A) Diving safety manual which includes at a minimum: Procedures
covering all diving operations specific to the program; procedures for
emergency care, including recompression and evacuation; and criteria for
diver training and certification.
(B) Diving control (safety) board, with the majority of its members
being active divers, which shall at a minimum have the authority to:
Approve and monitor diving projects; review and revise the diving safety
manual; assure compliance with the manual; certify the depths to which a
diver has been trained; take disciplinary action for unsafe practices;
and, assure adherence to the buddy system (a diver is accompanied by and
is in continuous contact with another diver in the water) for SCUBA
diving.
(b) Application in emergencies. An employer may deviate from the
requirements of this standard to the extent necessary to prevent or
minimize a situation which is likely to cause death, serious physical
harm, or major environmental damage, provided that the employer:
(1) Notifies the Area Director, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration within 48 hours of the onset of the emergency situation
indicating the nature of the emergency and extent of the deviation from
the prescribed regulations; and
(2) Upon request from the Area Director, submits such information in
writing.
(c) Employer obligation. The employer shall be responsible for
compliance with:
(1) All provisions of this standard of general applicability; and
(2) All requirements pertaining to specific diving modes to the
extent diving operations in such modes are conducted.
[42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, as amended at 47 FR 53365, Nov. 26, 1982;
58 FR 35310, June 30, 1993]
Sec. 1910.402 Definitions.
As used in this standard, the listed terms are defined as follows:
Acfm: Actual cubic feet per minute.
ASME Code or equivalent: ASME (American Society of Mechanical
Engineers) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, or an
equivalent code which the employer can demonstrate to be equally
effective.
ATA: Atmosphere absolute.
Bell: An enclosed compartment, pressurized (closed bell) or
unpressurized (open bell), which allows the diver to be transported to
and from the underwater work area and which may be used as a temporary
refuge during diving operations.
Bottom time: The total elasped time measured in minutes from the
time when the diver leaves the surface in descent to the time that the
diver begins ascent.
Bursting pressure: The pressure at which a pressure containment
device would fail structurally.
Cylinder: A pressure vessel for the storage of gases.
Decompression chamber: A pressure vessel for human occupancy such as
a surface decompression chamber, closed bell, or deep diving system used
to decompress divers and to treat decompression sickness.
Decompression sickness: A condition with a variety of symptoms which
may result from gas or bubbles in the tissues of divers after pressure
reduction.
Decompression table: A profile or set of profiles of depth-time
relationships for ascent rates and breathing mixtures to be followed
after a specific depth-time exposure or exposures.
Dive location: A surface or vessel from which a diving operation is
conducted.
Dive-location reserve breathing gas: A supply system of air or
mixed-gas (as appropriate) at the dive location which is independent of
the primary supply system and sufficient to support divers during the
planned decompression.
Dive team: Divers and support employees involved in a diving
operation, including the designated person-in-charge.
Diver: An employee working in water using underwater apparatus which
supplies compressed breathing gas at the ambient pressure.
[[Page 880]]
Diver-carried reserve breathing gas: A diver-carried supply of air
or mixed gas (as appropriate) sufficient under standard operating
conditions to allow the diver to reach the surface, or another source of
breathing gas, or to be reached by a standby diver.
Diving mode: A type of diving requiring specific equipment,
procedures and techniques (SCUBA, surface-supplied air, or mixed gas).
Fsw: Feet of seawater (or equivalent static pressure head).
Heavy gear: Diver-worn deep-sea dress including helmet, breastplate,
dry suit, and weighted shoes.
Hyperbaric conditions: Pressure conditions in excess of surface
pressure.
Inwater stage: A suspended underwater platform which supports a
diver in the water.
Liveboating: The practice of supporting a surfaced-supplied air or
mixed gas diver from a vessel which is underway.
Mixed-gas diving: A diving mode in which the diver is supplied in
the water with a breathing gas other than air.
No-decompression limits: The depth-time limits of the ``no-
decompression limits and repetitive dive group designation table for no-
decompression air dives'', U.S. Navy Diving Manual or equivalent limits
which the employer can demonstrate to be equally effective.
Psi(g): Pounds per square inch (gauge).
Scientific diving means diving performed solely as a necessary part
of a scientific, research, or educational activity by employees whose
sole purpose for diving is to perform scientific research tasks.
Scientific diving does not include performing any tasks usually
associated with commercial diving such as: Placing or removing heavy
objects underwater; inspection of pipelines and similar objects;
construction; demolition; cutting or welding; or the use of explosives.
SCUBA diving: A diving mode independent of surface supply in which
the diver uses open circuit self-contained underwater breathing
apparatus.
Standby diver: A diver at the dive location available to assist a
diver in the water.
Surface-supplied air diving: A diving mode in which the diver in the
water is supplied from the dive location with compressed air for
breathing.
Treatment table: A depth-time and breathing gas profile designed to
treat decompression sickness.
Umbilical: The composite hose bundle between a dive location and a
diver or bell, or between a diver and a bell, which supplies the diver
or bell with breathing gas, communications, power, or heat as
appropriate to the diving mode or conditions, and includes a safety line
between the diver and the dive location.
Volume tank: A pressure vessel connected to the outlet of a
compressor and used as an air reservoir.
Working pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure
containment device may be exposed under standard operating conditions.
[42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, as amended at 47 FR 53365, Nov. 26, 1982]
Personnel Requirements
Sec. 1910.410 Qualifications of dive team.
(a) General. (1) Each dive team member shall have the experience or
training necessary to perform assigned tasks in a safe and healthful
manner.
(2) Each dive team member shall have experience or training in the
following:
(i) The use of tools, equipment and systems relevant to assigned
tasks;
(ii) Techniques of the assigned diving mode: and
(iii) Diving operations and emergency procedures.
(3) All dive team members shall be trained in cardiopulmonary
resuscitation and first aid (American Red Cross standard course or
equivalent).
(4) Dive team members who are exposed to or control the exposure of
others to hyperbaric conditions shall be trained in diving-related
physics and physiology.
(b) Assignments. (1) Each dive team member shall be assigned tasks
in accordance with the employee's experience or training, except that
limited additional tasks may be assigned to an employee undergoing
training provided that these tasks are performed under
[[Page 881]]
the direct supervision of an experienced dive team member.
(2) The employer shall not require a dive team member to be exposed
to hyperbaric conditions against the employee's will, except when
necessary to complete decompression or treatment procedures.
(3) The employer shall not permit a dive team member to dive or be
otherwise exposed to hyperbaric conditions for the duration of any
temporary physical impairment or condition which is known to the
employer and is likely to affect adversely the safety or health of a
dive team member.
(c) Designated person-in-charge. (1) The employer or an employee
designated by the employer shall be at the dive location in charge of
all aspects of the diving operation affecting the safety and health of
dive team members.
(2) The designated person-in-charge shall have experience and
training in the conduct of the assigned diving operation.
General Operations Procedures
Sec. 1910.420 Safe practices manual.
(a) General. The employer shall develop and maintain a safe
practices manual which shall be made available at the dive location to
each dive team member.
(b) Contents. (1) The safe practices manual shall contain a copy of
this standard and the employer's policies for implementing the
requirements of this standard.
(2) For each diving mode engaged in, the safe practices manual shall
include:
(i) Safety procedures and checklists for diving operations;
(ii) Assignments and responsibilities of the dive team members;
(iii) Equipment procedures and checklists; and
(iv) Emergency procedures for fire, equipment failure, adverse
environmental conditions, and medical illness and injury.
[42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984]
Sec. 1910.421 Pre-dive procedures.
(a) General. The employer shall comply with the following
requirements prior to each diving operation, unless otherwise specified.
(b) Emergency aid. A list shall be kept at the dive location of the
telephone or call numbers of the following:
(1) An operational decompression chamber (if not at the dive
location);
(2) Accessible hospitals;
(3) Available physicians;
(4) Available means of transportation; and
(5) The nearest U.S. Coast Guard Rescue Coordination Center.
(c) First aid supplies. (1) A first aid kit appropriate for the
diving operation and approved by a physician shall be available at the
dive location.
(2) When used in a decompression chamber or bell, the first aid kit
shall be suitable for use under hyperbaric conditions.
(3) In addition to any other first aid supplies, an American Red
Cross standard first aid handbook or equivalent, and a bag-type manual
resuscitator with transparent mask and tubing shall be available at the
dive location.
(d) Planning and assessment. Planning of a diving operation shall
include an assessment of the safety and health aspects of the following:
(1) Diving mode;
(2) Surface and underwater conditions and hazards;
(3) Breathing gas supply (including reserves);
(4) Thermal protection;
(5) Diving equipment and systems;
(6) Dive team assignments and physical fitness of dive team members
(including any impairment known to the employer);
(7) Repetitive dive designation or residual inert gas status of dive
team members;
(8) Decompression and treatment procedures (including altitude
corrections); and
(9) Emergency procedures.
(e) Hazardous activities. To minimize hazards to the dive team,
diving operations shall be coordinated with other activities in the
vicinity which are likely to interfere with the diving operation.
(f) Employee briefing. (1) Dive team members shall be briefed on:
(i) The tasks to be undertaken;
[[Page 882]]
(ii) Safety procedures for the diving mode;
(iii) Any unusual hazards or environmental conditions likely to
affect the safety of the diving operation; and
(iv) Any modifications to operating procedures necessitated by the
specific diving operation.
(2) Prior to making individual dive team member assignments, the
employer shall inquire into the dive team member's current state of
physical fitness, and indicate to the dive team member the procedure for
reporting physical problems or adverse physiological effects during and
after the dive.
(g) Equipment inspection. The breathing gas supply system including
reserve breathing gas supplies, masks, helmets, thermal protection, and
bell handling mechanism (when appropriate) shall be inspected prior to
each dive.
(h) Warning signal. When diving from surfaces other than vessels in
areas capable of supporting marine traffic, a rigid replica of the
international code flag ``A'' at least one meter in height shall be
displayed at the dive location in a manner which allows all-round
visibility, and shall be illuminated during night diving operations.
[42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, as amended at 47 FR 14706, Apr. 6, 1982; 54
FR 24334, June 7, 1989]
Sec. 1910.422 Procedures during dive.
(a) General. The employer shall comply with the following
requirements which are applicable to each diving operation unless
otherwise specified.
(b) Water entry and exit. (1) A means capable of supporting the
diver shall be provided for entering and exiting the water.
(2) The means provided for exiting the water shall extend below the
water surface.
(3) A means shall be provided to assist an injured diver from the
water or into a bell.
(c) Communications. (1) An operational two-way voice communication
system shall be used between:
(i) Each surface-supplied air or mixed-gas diver and a dive team
member at the dive location or bell (when provided or required); and
(ii) The bell and the dive location.
(2) An operational, two-way communication system shall be available
at the dive location to obtain emergency assistance.
(d) Decompression tables. Decompression, repetitive, and no-
decompression tables (as appropriate) shall be at the dive location.
(e) Dive profiles. A depth-time profile, including when appropriate
any breathing gas changes, shall be maintained for each diver during the
dive including decompression.
(f) Hand-held power tools and equipment. (1) Hand-held electrical
tools and equipment shall be de-energized before being placed into or
retrieved from the water.
(2) Hand-held power tools shall not be supplied with power from the
dive location until requested by the diver.
(g) Welding and burning. (1) A current supply switch to interrupt
the current flow to the welding or burning electrode shall be:
(i) Tended by a dive team member in voice communication with the
diver performing the welding or burning; and
(ii) Kept in the open position except when the diver is welding or
burning.
(2) The welding machine frame shall be grounded.
(3) Welding and burning cables, electrode holders, and connections
shall be capable of carrying the maximum current required by the work,
and shall be properly insulated.
(4) Insulated gloves shall be provided to divers performing welding
and burning operations.
(5) Prior to welding or burning on closed compartments, structures
or pipes, which contain a flammable vapor or in which a flammable vapor
may be generated by the work, they shall be vented, flooded, or purged
with a mixture of gases which will not support combustion.
(h) Explosives. (1) Employers shall transport, store, and use
explosives in accordance with this section and the applicable provisions
of Sec. 1910.109 and Sec. 1926.912 of Title 29 of the Code of Federal
Regulations.
(2) Electrical continuity of explosive circuits shall not be tested
until the diver is out of the water.
[[Page 883]]
(3) Explosives shall not be detonated while the diver is in the
water.
(i) Termination of dive. The working interval of a dive shall be
terminated when:
(1) A diver requests termination;
(2) A diver fails to respond correctly to communications or signals
from a dive team member;
(3) Communications are lost and can not be quickly re-established
between the diver and a dive team member at the dive location, and
between the designated person-in-charge and the person controlling the
vessel in liveboating operations; or
(4) A diver begins to use diver-carried reserve breathing gas or the
dive-location reserve breathing gas.
Sec. 1910.423 Post-dive procedures.
(a) General. The employer shall comply with the following
requirements which are applicable after each diving operation, unless
otherwise specified.
(b) Precautions. (1) After the completion of any dive, the employer
shall:
(i) Check the physical condition of the diver;
(ii) Instruct the diver to report any physical problems or adverse
physiological effects including symptoms of decompression sickness;
(iii) Advise the diver of the location of a decompression chamber
which is ready for use; and
(iv) Alert the diver to the potential hazards of flying after
diving.
(2) For any dive outside the no-decompression limits, deeper than
100 fsw or using mixed gas as a breathing mixture, the employer shall
instruct the diver to remain awake and in the vicinity of the
decompression chamber which is at the dive location for at least one
hour after the dive (including decompression or treatment as
appropriate).
(c) Recompression capability. (1) A decompression chamber capable of
recompressing the diver at the surface to a minimum of 165 fsw (6 ATA)
shall be available at the dive location for:
(i) Surface-supplied air diving to depths deeper than 100 fsw and
shallower than 220 fsw;
(ii) Mixed gas diving shallower than 300 fsw; or
(iii) Diving outside the no-decompression limits shallower than 300
fsw.
(2) A decompression chamber capable of recompressing the diver at
the surface to the maximum depth of the dive shall be available at the
dive location for dives deeper than 300 fsw.
(3) The decompression chamber shall be:
(i) Dual-lock;
(ii) Multiplace; and
(iii) Located within 5 minutes of the dive location.
(4) The decompression chamber shall be equipped with:
(i) A pressure gauge for each pressurized compartment designed for
human occupancy;
(ii) A built-in-breathing-system with a minimum of one mask per
occupant;
(iii) A two-way voice communication system between occupants and a
dive team member at the dive location;
(iv) A viewport; and
(v) Illumination capability to light the interior.
(5) Treatment tables, treatment gas appropriate to the diving mode,
and sufficient gas to conduct treatment shall be available at the dive
location.
(6) A dive team member shall be available at the dive location
during and for at least one hour after the dive to operate the
decompression chamber (when required or provided).
(d) Record of dive. (1) The following information shall be recorded
and maintained for each diving operation:
(i) Names of dive team members including designated person-in-
charge;
(ii) Date, time, and location;
(iii) Diving modes used;
(iv) General nature of work performed;
(v) Approximate underwater and surface conditions (visibility, water
temperature and current); and
(vi) Maximum depth and bottom time for each diver.
(2) For each dive outside the no-decompression limits, deeper than
100 fsw or using mixed gas, the following additional information shall
be recorded and maintained:
(i) Depth-time and breathing gas profiles;
(ii) Decompression table designation (including modification); and
[[Page 884]]
(iii) Elapsed time since last pressure exposure if less than 24
hours or repetitive dive designation for each diver.
(3) For each dive in which decompression sickness is suspected or
symptoms are evident, the following additional information shall be
recorded and maintained:
(i) Description of decompression sickness symptoms (including depth
and time of onset); and
(ii) Description and results of treatment.
(e) Decompression procedure assessment. The employer shall:
(1) Investigate and evaluate each incident of decompression sickness
based on the recorded information, consideration of the past performance
of decompression table used, and individual susceptibility;
(2) Take appropriate corrective action to reduce the probability of
recurrence of decompression sickness; and
(3) Prepare a written evaluation of the decompression procedure
assessment, including any corrective action taken, within 45 days of the
incident of decompression sickness.
[42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984]
Specific Operations Procedures
Sec. 1910.424 SCUBA diving.
(a) General. Employers engaged in SCUBA diving shall comply with the
following requirements, unless otherwise specified.
(b) Limits. SCUBA diving shall not be conducted:
(1) At depths deeper than 130 fsw;
(2) At depths deeper than 100 fsw or outside the no-decompression
limits unless a decompression chamber is ready for use;
(3) Against currents exceeding one (1) knot unless line-tended; or
(4) In enclosed or physically confining spaces unless line-tended.
(c) Procedures. (1) A standby diver shall be available while a diver
is in the water.
(2) A diver shall be line-tended from the surface, or accompanied by
another diver in the water in continuous visual contact during the
diving operations.
(3) A diver shall be stationed at the underwater point of entry when
diving is conducted in enclosed or physically confining spaces.
(4) A diver-carried reserve breathing gas supply shall be provided
for each diver consisting of:
(i) A manual reserve (J valve); or
(ii) An independent reserve cylinder with a separate regulator or
connected to the underwater breathing apparatus.
(5) The valve of the reserve breathing gas supply shall be in the
closed position prior to the dive.
Sec. 1910.425 Surface-supplied air diving.
(a) General. Employers engaged in surface-supplied air diving shall
comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise specified.
(b) Limits. (1) Surface-supplied air diving shall not be conducted
at depths deeper than 190 fsw, except that dives with bottom times of 30
minutes or less may be conducted to depths of 220 fsw.
(2) A decompression chamber shall be ready for use at the dive
location for any dive outside the no-decompression limits or deeper than
100 fsw.
(3) A bell shall be used for dives with an inwater decompression
time greater than 120 minutes, except when heavy gear is worn or diving
is conducted in physically confining spaces.
(c) Procedures. (1) Each diver shall be continuously tended while in
the water.
(2) A diver shall be stationed at the underwater point of entry when
diving is conducted in enclosed or physically confining spaces.
(3) Each diving operation shall have a primary breathing gas supply
sufficient to support divers for the duration of the planned dive
including decompression.
(4) For dives deeper than 100 fsw or outside the no-decompression
limits:
(i) A separate dive team member shall tend each diver in the water;
(ii) A standby diver shall be available while a diver is in the
water;
(iii) A diver-carried reserve breathing gas supply shall be provided
for each diver except when heavy gear is worn; and
(iv) A dive-location reserve breathing gas supply shall be provided.
(5) For heavy-gear diving deeper than 100 fsw or outside the no-
decompression limits:
[[Page 885]]
(i) An extra breathing gas hose capable of supplying breathing gas
to the diver in the water shall be available to the standby diver.
(ii) An inwater stage shall be provided to divers in the water.
(6) Except when heavy gear is worn or where physical space does not
permit, a diver-carried reserve breathing gas supply shall be provided
whenever the diver is prevented by the configuration of the dive area
from ascending directly to the surface.
Sec. 1910.426 Mixed-gas diving.
(a) General. Employers engaged in mixed-gas diving shall comply with
the following requirements, unless otherwise specified.
(b) Limits. Mixed-gas diving shall be conducted only when:
(1) A decompression chamber is ready for use at the dive location;
and
(i) A bell is used at depths greater than 220 fsw or when the dive
involves inwater decompression time of greater than 120 minutes, except
when heavy gear is worn or when diving in physically confining spaces;
or
(ii) A closed bell is used at depths greater than 300 fsw, except
when diving is conducted in physically confining spaces.
(c) Procedures. (1) A separate dive team member shall tend each
diver in the water.
(2) A standby diver shall be available while a diver is in the
water.
(3) A diver shall be stationed at the underwater point of entry when
diving is conducted in enclosed or physically confining spaces.
(4) Each diving operation shall have a primary breathing gas supply
sufficient to support divers for the duration of the planned dive
including decompression.
(5) Each diving operation shall have a dive-location reserve
breathing gas supply.
(6) When heavy gear is worn:
(i) An extra breathing gas hose capable of supplying breathing gas
to the diver in the water shall be available to the standby diver; and
(ii) An inwater stage shall be provided to divers in the water.
(7) An inwater stage shall be provided for divers without access to
a bell for dives deeper than 100 fsw or outside the no-decompression
limits.
(8) When a closed bell is used, one dive team member in the bell
shall be available and tend the diver in the water.
(9) Except when heavy gear is worn or where physical space does not
permit, a diver-carried reserve breathing gas supply shall be provided
for each diver:
(i) Diving deeper than 100 fsw or outside the no-decompression
limits; or
(ii) Prevented by the configuration of the dive area from directly
ascending to the surface.
Sec. 1910.427 Liveboating.
(a) General. Employers engaged in diving operations involving
liveboating shall comply with the following requirements.
(b) Limits. Diving operations involving liveboating shall not be
conducted:
(1) With an inwater decompression time of greater than 120 minutes;
(2) Using surface-supplied air at depths deeper than 190 fsw, except
that dives with bottom times of 30 minutes or less may be conducted to
depths of 220 fsw;
(3) Using mixed gas at depths greater than 220 fsw;
(4) In rough seas which significantly inpede diver mobility or work
function; or
(5) In other than daylight hours.
(c) Procedures. (1) The propeller of the vessel shall be stopped
before the diver enters or exits the water.
(2) A device shall be used which minimizes the possibility of
entanglement of the diver's hose in the propeller of the vessel.
(3) Two-way voice communication between the designated person-in-
charge and the person controlling the vessel shall be available while
the diver is in the water.
(4) A standby diver shall be available while a diver is in the
water.
(5) A diver-carried reserve breathing gas supply shall be carried by
each diver engaged in liveboating operations.
[[Page 886]]
Equipment Procedures and Requirements
Sec. 1910.430 Equipment.
(a) General. (1) All employers shall comply with the following
requirements, unless otherwise specified.
(2) Each equipment modification, repair, test, calibration or
maintenance service shall be recorded by means of a tagging or logging
system, and include the date and nature of work performed, and the name
or initials of the person performing the work.
(b) Air compressor system. (1) Compressors used to supply air to the
diver shall be equipped with a volume tank with a check valve on the
inlet side, a pressure gauge, a relief valve, and a drain valve.
(2) Air compressor intakes shall be located away from areas
containing exhaust or other contaminants.
(3) Respirable air supplied to a diver shall not contain:
(i) A level of carbon monoxide (CO) greater than 20 p/m;
(ii) A level of carbon dioxide (CO2) greater than 1,000
p/m;
(iii) A level of oil mist greater than 5 milligrams per cubic meter;
or
(iv) A noxious or pronounced odor.
(4) The output of air compressor systems shall be tested for air
purity every 6 months by means of samples taken at the connection to the
distribution system, except that non-oil lubricated compressors need not
be tested for oil mist.
(c) Breathing gas supply hoses. (1) Breathing gas supply hoses
shall:
(i) Have a working pressure at least equal to the working pressure
of the total breathing gas system;
(ii) Have a rated bursting pressure at least equal to 4 times the
working pressure;
(iii) Be tested at least annually to 1.5 times their working
pressure; and
(iv) Have their open ends taped, capped or plugged when not in use.
(2) Breathing gas supply hose connectors shall:
(i) Be made of corrosion-resistant materials;
(ii) Have a working pressure at least equal to the working pressure
of the hose to which they are attached; and
(iii) Be resistant to accidental disengagement.
(3) Umbilicals shall:
(i) Be marked in 10-ft. increments to 100 feet beginning at the
diver's end, and in 50 ft. increments thereafter;
(ii) Be made of kink-resistant materials; and
(iii) Have a working pressure greater than the pressure equivalent
to the maximum depth of the dive (relative to the supply source) plus
100 psi.
(d) Buoyancy control. (1) Helmets or masks connected directly to the
dry suit or other buoyancy-changing equipment shall be equipped with an
exhaust valve.
(2) A dry suit or other buoyancy-changing equipment not directly
connected to the helmet or mask shall be equipped with an exhaust valve.
(3) When used for SCUBA diving, a buoyancy compensator shall have an
inflation source separate from the breathing gas supply.
(4) An inflatable flotation device capable of maintaining the diver
at the surface in a face-up position, having a manually activated
inflation source independent of the breathing supply, an oral inflation
device, and an exhaust valve shall be used for SCUBA diving.
(e) Compressed gas cylinders. Compressed gas cylinders shall:
(1) Be designed, constructed and maintained in accordance with the
applicable provisions of 29 CFR 1910.101 and 1910.169 through 1910.171.
(2) Be stored in a ventilated area and protected from excessive
heat;
(3) Be secured from falling; and
(4) Have shut-off valves recessed into the cylinder or protected by
a cap, except when in use or manifolded, or when used for SCUBA diving.
(f) Decompression chambers. (1) Each decompression chamber
manufactured after the effective date of this standard, shall be built
and maintained in accordance with the ASME Code or equivalent.
(2) Each decompression chamber manufactured prior to the effective
date of this standard shall be maintained in conformity with the code
requirements to which it was built, or equivalent.
(3) Each decompression chamber shall be equipped with:
[[Page 887]]
(i) Means to maintain the atmosphere below a level of 25 percent
oxygen by volume;
(ii) Mufflers on intake and exhaust lines, which shall be regularly
inspected and maintained;
(iii) Suction guards on exhaust line openings; and
(iv) A means for extinguishing fire, and shall be maintained to
minimize sources of ignition and combustible material.
(g) Gauges and timekeeping devices. (1) Gauges indicating diver
depth which can be read at the dive location shall be used for all dives
except SCUBA.
(2) Each depth gauge shall be deadweight tested or calibrated
against a master reference gauge every 6 months, and when there is a
discrepancy greater than two percent (2 percent) of full scale between
any two equivalent gauges.
(3) A cylinder pressure gauge capable of being monitored by the
diver during the dive shall be worn by each SCUBA diver.
(4) A timekeeping device shall be available at each dive location.
(h) Masks and helmets. (1) Surface-supplied air and mixed-gas masks
and helmets shall have:
(i) A non-return valve at the attachment point between helmet or
mask and hose which shall close readily and positively; and
(ii) An exhaust valve.
(2) Surface-supplied air masks and helmets shall have a minimum
ventilation rate capability of 4.5 acfm at any depth at which they are
operated or the capability of maintaining the diver's inspired carbon
dioxide partial pressure below 0.02 ATA when the diver is producing
carbon dioxide at the rate of 1.6 standard liters per minute.
(i) Oxygen safety. (1) Equipment used with oxygen or mixtures
containing over forty percent (40%) by volume oxygen shall be designed
for oxygen service.
(2) Components (except umbilicals) exposed to oxygen or mixtures
containing over forty percent (40%) by volume oxygen shall be cleaned of
flammable materials before use.
(3) Oxygen systems over 125 psig and compressed air systems over 500
psig shall have slow-opening shut-off valves.
(j) Weights and harnesses. (1) Except when heavy gear is worn,
divers shall be equipped with a weight belt or assembly capable of quick
release.
(2) Except when heavy gear is worn or in SCUBA diving, each diver
shall wear a safety harness with:
(i) A positive buckling device;
(ii) An attachment point for the umbilical to prevent strain on the
mask or helmet; and
(iii) A lifting point to distribute the pull force of the line over
the diver's body.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984;
51 FR 33033, Sept. 18, 1986]
Recordkeeping
Sec. 1910.440 Recordkeeping requirements.
(a)(1) [Reserved]
(2) The employer shall record the occurrence of any diving-related
injury or illness which requires any dive team member to be hospitalized
for 24 hours or more, specifying the circumstances of the incident and
the extent of any injuries or illnesses.
(b) Availability of records. (1) Upon the request of the Assistant
Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health, or the Director,
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Department of
Health and Human Services of their designees, the employer shall make
available for inspection and copying any record or document required by
this standard.
(2) Records and documents required by this standard shall be
provided upon request to employees, designated representatives, and the
Assistant Secretary in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.20 (a)-(e) and (g)-
(i). Safe practices manuals (Sec. 1910.420), depth-time profiles
(Sec. 1910.422), recordings of dives (Sec. 1910.423), decompression
procedure assessment evaluations (Sec. 1910.423), and records of
hospitalizations (Sec. 1910.440) shall be provided in the same manner as
employee exposure records or analyses using exposure or medical records.
Equipment inspections and testing records which pertain to employees
(Sec. 1910.430) shall also be provided upon request to employees and
their designated representatives.
[[Page 888]]
(3) Records and documents required by this standard shall be
retained by the employer for the following period:
(i) Dive team member medical records (physician's reports)
(Sec. 1910.411)--5 years;
(ii) Safe practices manual (Sec. 1910.420)--current document only;
(iii) Depth-time profile (Sec. 1910.422)--until completion of the
recording of dive, or until completion of decompression procedure
assessment where there has been an incident of decompression sickness;
(iv) Recording of dive (Sec. 1910.423)--1 year, except 5 years where
there has been an incident of decompression sickness;
(v) Decompression procedure assessment evaluations (Sec. 1910.423)--
5 years;
(vi) Equipment inspections and testing records (Sec. 1910.430)--
current entry or tag, or until equipment is withdrawn from service;
(vii) Records of hospitalizations (Sec. 1910.440)--5 years.
(4) After the expiration of the retention period of any record
required to be kept for five (5) years, the employer shall forward such
records to the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health,
Department of Health and Human Services. The employer shall also comply
with any additional requirements set forth at 29 CFR 1910.20(h).
(5) In the event the employer ceases to do business:
(i) The successor employer shall receive and retain all dive and
employee medical records required by this standard; or
(ii) If there is no successor employer, dive and employee medical
records shall be forwarded to the National Institute for Occupational
Safety and Health, Department of Health and Human Services.
[42 FR 37668, July 22, 1977, as amended at 45 FR 35281, May 23, 1980; 47
FR 14706, Apr. 6, 1982; 51 FR 34562, Sept. 29, 1986; 61 FR 9242, Mar. 7,
1996]
Sec. 1910.441 Effective date.
This standard shall be effective on October 20, 1977, except that
for provisions where decompression chambers or bells are required and
such equipment is not yet available, employers shall comply as soon as
possible thereafter but in no case later than 6 months after the
effective date of the standard.
Appendix A to Subpart T of Part 1910--Examples of Conditions Which May
Restrict or Limit Exposure to Hyperbaric Conditions
The following disorders may restrict or limit occupational exposure
to hyperbaric conditions depending on severity, presence of residual
effects, response to therapy, number of occurrences, diving mode, or
degree and duration of isolation.
History of seizure disorder other than early febrile convulsions.
Malignancies (active) unless treated and without recurrence for 5
yrs.
Chronic inability to equalize sinus and/or middle ear pressure.
Cystic or cavitary disease of the lungs.
Impaired organ function caused by alcohol or drug use.
Conditions requiring continuous medication for control (e.g.,
antihistamines, steroids, barbiturates, moodaltering drugs, or insulin).
Meniere's disease.
Hemoglobinopathies.
Obstructive or restrictive lung disease.
Vestibular end organ destruction.
Pneumothorax.
Cardiac abnormalities (e.g., pathological heart block, valvular
disease, intraventricular conduction defects other than isolated right
bundle branch block, angina pectoris, arrhythmia, coronary artery
disease).
Juxta-articular osteonecrosis.
[[Page 889]]
Appendix B to Subpart T of Part 1910--Guidelines for Scientific Diving
This appendix contains guidelines that will be used in conjunction
with Sec. 1910.401(a)(2)(iv) to determine those scientific diving
programs which are exempt from the requirements for commercial diving.
The guidelines are as follows:
1. The Diving Control Board consists of a majority of active
scientific divers and has autonomous and absolute authority over the
scientific diving program's operations.
2. The purpose of the project using scientific diving is the
advancement of science; therefore, information and data resulting from
the project are non-proprietary.
3. The tasks of a scientific diver are those of an observer and data
gatherer. Construction and trouble-shooting tasks traditionally
associated with commercial diving are not included within scientific
diving.
4. Scientific divers, based on the nature of their activities, must
use scientific expertise in studying the underwater environment and,
therefore, are scientists or scientists in training.
[50 FR 1050, Jan. 9, 1985]
Subparts U-Y [Reserved]
Secs. 1910.901-1910.999 [Reserved]
[[Page 890]]
Editorial Note: This listing is provided for information purposes
only. It is compiled and kept up-to-date by the Department of Labor.
This index is updated as of July 1, 2002.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Subject term Section No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
A-Frame Derricks: (see also Derricks)... .181
AIDS (see Bloodborne pathogens)......... .1030
Aboveground storage tanks, flammable and .106(b)(2)
combustible liquid.
Spacing............................... .106(b)(2)(ii)
Venting............................... .106(b)(2) (iv), (v), (vi)
Spill control......................... .106(b)(2) (viii)
Abrasive Blasting: (see also .94
Ventilation).
Air Compressors, Breathing Air........ .94(a)(6)
Air Supply, Breathing................. .94(a)(6)
Blast Cleaning Enclosures............. .94(a)(3)
Cleaning Nozzles...................... .244(b)
Dust Hazards.......................... .94(a)(2)
Abrasive Wheel Machinery:
Blotters.............................. .215(c)(6)
Definitions........................... .211(b)
Effective Dates....................... .220
Excluded Machinery.................... .215(a)(5)
Flanges............................... .215(a)(3), (c)
Guard Design.......................... .215(a)(2)
Specifications...................... .215(b)(12)
Guard Exposure Angles................. .215(b)(2)
Band Type........................... .215(b)(11)
Bench and Floor Stands.............. .215(b)(3)
Cup Wheels.......................... .215(b)(1)
Cylindrical Grinders................ .215(b)(4)
Dimensions.......................... .215(b)(10)
Material Requirements............... .215(b)(10)
Snagging Machines................... .215(b)(7)
Surface Grinding.................... .215(b)(5)
Swing Frame......................... .215(b)(6)
Guarding.............................. .215(a)(1), (b)
Mounting.............................. .215(d)
Arbor Size.......................... .215(d)(2)
Blotters............................ .215(d)(5)
Bushings............................ .215(d)(4)
Inspections......................... .215(d)(1)
Multiple Wheel...................... .215(d)(6)
Ring Test........................... .215(d)(1)
Surface Conditions.................. .215(d)(3)
Standards Sources..................... .221
Work Rests............................ .215(a)(4)
Abrasive Wheel Machinery, Portable:
Definitions........................... .241(b)
Guarding.............................. .243(c)
Cup Wheels.......................... .243(c)(2)
General Requirements................ .243(c)(1)
Other Type Grinders................. .243(c)(4)
Vertical Grinders................... .243(c)(3)
Inspection............................ .243(c)(5)
Mounting.............................. .243(c)(5)
Abrasive Wheels: (see Abrasive Wheel
Machinery)
Access:
Bulk Oxygen Systems................... .104(b)(2)(ii)
Cranes................................ .179(c)(2)
Exposure and medical records.......... .1020
Industrial Plants..................... .106(e)(9)(ii)
Powered Platforms..................... .66
Processing Plants..................... .106(h)(8)(ii)
Spraying Operations, Vents............ .107(d)(10)
Sprinkler valve....................... .107(f)(2)
Accident Prevention Signs and Tags: (see .145
also Signs and Tags).
Effective Dates....................... .149(a)
Standards Sources..................... .150
2-Acetylaminofluorene................... .1003
Area requirements..................... .1003(c)
Closed system operation............. .1003(c)(2)
Isolated systems.................... .1003(c)(1)
Maintenance and decontamination .1003(c)(5)
activities.
Open-vessel system operations....... .1003(c)(3)
Transfer from a closed operation.... .1003(c)(4)
Medical surveillance.................. .1003(g)
Examinations........................ .1003(g)(1)
Records............................. .1003(g)(2)
Regulated area requirements........... .1003(d)
Contamination control............... .1003(d)(4)
Emergencies......................... .1003(d)(2)
Hygiene facilities and practices.... .1003(d)(3)
Reports............................... .1003(f)
Incidents........................... .1003(f)(2)
Operations.......................... .1003(f)(1)
Signs, information, and training...... .1003(e)
Container contents identification... .1003(e)(2)
Lettering........................... .1003(e)(3)
Prohibited statements............... .1003(e)(4)
Signs............................... .1003(e)(1)
Training and indoctrination......... .1003(e)(5)
Acetylene............................... .102
Cylinders............................. .102(a), (c)
Generators............................ .102(c)
Pipe Systems.......................... .102(b)
Acetylene Generators.................... .253(f)
Approval.............................. .253(f)(1)
Location.............................. .253(f)(3)
Maintenance........................... .253(f)(7)
Marking............................... .253(f)(1)
Operation............................. .253(f)(7)
Portable.............................. .253(f)(5)
Pressure Limits....................... .253(f)(2)
Rating................................ .253(f)(2)
Stationary............................ .253(f)(4)
Houses and Rooms.................... .253(f)(6)
Acid Carboys............................ .262(nn)
Acrylonitrile........................... .1045
Emergency situations.................. .1045(i)
Employee information and training..... .1045(o)
Exposure monitoring................... .1045(e)
Housekeeping.......................... .1045(k)
Hygiene facilities and practices...... .1045(m)
Medical surveillance.................. .1045(n)
Methods of compliance................. .1045(g)
Notification of regulated areas and .1045(d)
emergencies.
Observation and monitoring............ .1045(r)
Permissible exposure limit............ .1045(c)
Protective clothing and equipment..... .1045(j)
Recordkeeping......................... .1045(q)
Regulated areas....................... .1045(f)
Respiratory protection................ .1045(h)
Signs and labels...................... .1045(p)
Waste disposal........................ .1045(l)
Adjustments:
Cranes................................ .179(l)(3)
[[Page 891]]
Derricks.............................. .181(f)(2), (3)
AEC Licensees........................... .96(p)
Agricultural Operations................. .267
Air Compressors, Abrasive Blasting...... .94(a)(6), .134(d)(2)(ii)
Air Contaminants........................ .1000, .1001
Effective Dates....................... .98, .1000
Exposure Limits....................... .1000, .1001
Permissible exposure limits........... .1000
Standards Sources..................... .99
Air Controlling Equipment, Power Presses .217(b)(10)
Air Lift Hammers, Forging............... .218(e)(1)
Air Quality............................. .134(d)
Air Receivers:
Application........................... .169(a)(1)
Compressed Air........................ .169
Equipment:
Drains.............................. .169(b)(2)
Installation........................ .169(b)(1)
Pressure Gages...................... .169(b)(3)
Traps............................... .169(b)(2)
Valves.............................. .169(b)(3)
Standards Sources..................... .169(a)(2), .170
Air Supply.............................. .94(a)(6), .134(d)
Airborne Radioactive Materials Exposure .96(c)
Limits.
Airhoses................................ .243(b)(2)
Aisles:
Working Surfaces...................... .22(b)
Alarms: (see also Fire Alarms,
Sprinklers, Warning Devices)
Employee alarm systems................ .165
Mills and Calenders................... .216(g)
Rubber and Plastics................... .216(g)
4-Aminodiphenyl......................... .1003
Area requirements..................... .1003(c)
Closed system operation............. .1003(c)(2)
Isolated systems.................... .1003(c)(1)
Maintenance and decontamination .1003(c)(5)
activities.
Open-vessel system operations....... .1003(c)(3)
Transfer from a closed operation.... .1003(c)(4)
Medical surveillance.................. .1003(g)
Examinations........................ .1003(g)(1)
Records............................. .1003(g)(2)
Regulated area requirements........... .1003(d)
Contamination control............... .1003(d)(4)
Emergencies......................... .1003(d)(2)
Hygiene facilities and practices.... .1003(d)(3)
Reports............................... .1003(f)
Incidents........................... .1003(f)(2)
Operations.......................... .1003(f)(1)
Signs, information, and training...... .1003(e)
Container contents identification... .1003(e)(2)
Lettering........................... .1003(e)(3)
Prohibited statements............... .1003(e)(4)
Signs............................... .1003(e)(1)
Training and indoctrination......... .1003(e)(5)
Ammonia, Anhydrous: (see also Anhydrous .111
Ammonia).
Ammonium Nitrate........................ .109(i)
Bulk Storage.......................... .109(i)(4)
Containers............................ .109(i)(3)
Contaminants.......................... .109(i)(5)
Electrical Installations.............. .109(i)(6)
Fire Protection....................... .109(i)(7)
Separation Walls...................... .109(i)(5)
Warehouses............................ .109(i)(4)
Anchoring Fixed Machinery............... .212(a)(5), (b)
Anhydrous Ammonia:
Containers:
Appurtenances....................... .111(b)(6)
Charging............................ .111(b)(11)
DOT................................. .111(e)
Farm Vehicles....................... .111(g), (h)
Location............................ .111(b)(5)
Motor Vehicle....................... .111(f)
Markings............................ .111(b)(3)
Non-Refrigerated.................... .111(b)(2), (c)
Refrigerated........................ .111(d)
Markings.......................... .111(b)(4)
Safety Relief Devices............... .111(b)(9), (c)(3), (d)(4),
(f)(5)
Electrical Systems.................... .111(b)(16)
Fittings.............................. .111(b)(7)
Handling.............................. .111
Hoses................................. .111(b)(8)
Liquid Level Gaging Devices........... .111(b)(14)
Liquid Transfer....................... .111(b)(12), (f)(6)
Piping................................ .111(b)(7)
Standards Sources..................... .115
Storage............................... .111
Tank Car Unloading.................... .111(b)(13)
Tubing................................ .111(b)(7)
Appliances:
Electric.............................. .306(d)(1)
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .110(b)(20), (g)(11)
Arbor Grinding Wheels................... .215(d)(2)
Arc Welding............................. .254
Environmental Conditions.............. .254(b)(2)
Equipment:
Design.............................. .254(b)(4)
Disconnecting Means................. .305(j)(3)
Grounding........................... .254(c)(2)
Installation........................ .254(c)
Maintenance......................... .254(d)(9)
Operation........................... .254(d)
Personnel Protection................ .252(b)
Protection from Rays................ .252(b)(2)(iii)
Supply Connections.................. .254(c)(3), (d)(3)
Health Protection..................... .252(c)
Ventilation........................... .252(b)(4)(ii), (c)
Voltage............................... .254(b)(3)
Arsenic, Inorganic...................... .1018
Asbestos:
Airborne Concentration................ .1001(c)
Caution Signs and Labels.............. .1001(g)
Change Rooms.......................... .1001(d)(4)
Compliance............................ .1001(f)
Definitions........................... .1001(a)
Exposure, Permissible................. .1001(c)
Fibers Exposure, Permissible.......... .1001(b)
Hazard Communication.................. .1001(j)
Housekeeping.......................... .1001(k)
Hygiene Facilities and Practices...... .1001(i)
Medical Surveillance.................. .1001(l)
Measurements.......................... .1001(e)
Medical Examinations.................. .1001(j)
Monitoring............................ .1001(d)
Personal Protective Equipment......... .1001(h)
Recordkeeping......................... .1001(m)
Regulated Areas....................... .1001(e)
Respiratory protection................ .1001(g)
Special Clothing...................... .1001(d)(3)
Waste Disposal........................ .1001(h)(2)
Atmospheric Contaminants: (see Air
Contaminants)
Atmospheric Tanks....................... .106(b)(1)(iii)
Attendants:
Liquified Hydrogen Systems............ .103(c)(4)(ii)
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .110(b)(14)
Automatic Sprinkler Systems: (see also .159
Sprinkler Systems, Automatic).
[[Page 892]]
Automobile Undercoatings................ .107(k)
Baffle Plates:
Spray Booths.......................... .107(b)(4)
Bakery Equipment........................ .263(k)
Air Conditioning...................... .268(i)(14)
Bag Chutes and Lifts.................. .263(d)(2)
Biscuit Equipment..................... .263(k)
Blenders.............................. .263(d)(3)
Bolting Reels......................... .263(d)(5)
Conveyors............................. .263(d)(7), (i)(7)
Cracker Equipment..................... .263(k)
Dividers.............................. .263(f)
Dough Brakes.......................... .263(h)
Dumpbins.............................. .263(d)(3)
Flour Elevators....................... .263(d)(4)
Flour Handling Equipment.............. .263(d)
Machine Guarding...................... .263(c)
Miscellaneous Equipment............... .263(i)
Mixers................................ .263(e)
Moulders.............................. .263(g)
Ovens................................. .263(l)
Pulverizers........................... .263(k)(2)
Scales, Flour......................... .263(d)(9)
Sifters............................... .263(d)(8)
Slicers............................... .263(j)
Storage Bins.......................... .263(d)(6)
Wrappers.............................. .263(j)
Ballast, Cranes......................... .180(i)(2)
Band Saws and Resaws.................... .213(i)
Barking Devices:
Hydraulic............................. .261(e)(14)
Pulp Wood and Chips................... .261(c), (e)(8)
Sawmills.............................. .265(d)(4)
Barrels:
Guarding.............................. .212(a)(4)
Basket Derricks: (see Derricks)......... .181
Bathing Facilities:
Labor Camps........................... .142(f)
Battery Changing and Charging........... .178(g), .305(j)(7)
Bearings................................ .219(j), (p)(3)
Belts:
Definitions........................... .211(f)(1)-(3)
Manlifts.............................. .68(c)(1)
Power Transmission Apparatus.......... .219(e)(1), (o)(3), (p)(6)
Bench and Floor Stands Guarding......... .215(b)(3)
Benzene................................. .1028
Communication of benzene hazards to .1028(j)
employees.
Exposure monitoring and measurement... .1028(e)
Medical surveillance.................. .1028(i)
Methods of compliance................. .1028(f)
Observation of monitoring............. .1028(l)
Permissible exposure limit............ .1028(c)
Protective clothing and equipment..... .1028(h)
Recordkeeping......................... .1028(k)
Regulated areas....................... .1028(d)
Respiratory protection................ .1028(g)
Benzidine............................... .1003
Area requirements..................... .1003(c)
Closed system operation............. .1003(c)(2)
Isolated systems.................... .1003(c)(1)
Maintenance and decontamination .1003(c)(5)
activities.
Open-vessel system operations....... .1003(c)(3)
Transfer from a closed operation.... .1003(c)(4)
Medical surveillance.................. .1003(g)
Examinations........................ .1003(g)(1)
Records............................. .1003(g)(2)
Regulated area requirements........... .1003(d)
Contamination control............... .1003(d)(4)
Emergencies......................... .1003(d)(2)
Hygiene facilities and practices.... .1003(d)(3)
Reports............................... .1003(f)
Incidents........................... .1003(f)(2)
Operations.......................... .1003(f)(1)
Signs, information, and training...... .1003(e)
Container contents identification... .1003(e)(2)
Lettering........................... .1003(e)(3)
Prohibited statements............... .1003(e)(4)
Signs............................... .1003(e)(1)
Training and indoctrination......... .1003(e)(5)
Beryllium............................... .1000, Table Z-2
Bins, Bulk Storage of Explosives........ .109(g)(4)
Biological Hazards Signs and Tags....... .145(e)(4), (f)(8)
Blades Exposure......................... .212(a)(5)
Blankets, Rubber Insulating............. .137
Blasting Agents (see also Explosives and .109(g), (k) (1), (2), .119
Blasting Agents).
Bulk Delivery......................... .109(g)(3), (h)(4)
Bulk Storage Bins..................... .109(g)(4)
Effective Dates....................... .114
Mixing, Fixed Location................ .109(g)(2), (h)(3)
Mixing Vehicles....................... .109(g)(3), (h)(4)
Slurries.............................. .109(h)
Standards Sources..................... .115
Storage............................... .109(g)(5)
Transportation........................ .109(g)(6)
Use................................... .109(g)(7)
Water Gels............................ .109(h)
Bleaching:
Pulp and Paper Mills.................. .261(h)
Textiles.............................. .262(p)
Bloodborne pathogens.................... .1030
Effective dates....................... .1030(i)
Engineering and work-practice controls .1030(d)(2)
Housekeeping.......................... .1030(d)(4)
Laboratories and production .1030(e)
facilities, HIV and HBVresearch.
Personal protective equipment......... .1030(c)(2)(ii), (d)(2)(i),
(3)
Recordkeeping......................... .1030(f)(6), (h)
Training.............................. .1030(e)(5), (g)(2)
Vaccinations, HBV..................... .1030(f)
Warning labels an signs............... .1030(g)(1)
Blotters................................ .215(c)(1)(v), (c)(6), (d)(5)
Board Drop Hammers...................... .218(e)(2)
Boatswain's Chair Scaffolds............. .28(j)
Employee Protection................... .28(j)(4)
Fiber Ropes........................... .28(j)(2)
Life Belts............................ .28(j)(4)
Roof Irons, Hooks..................... .28(j)(6)
Seat Slings........................... .28(j)(3)
Size.................................. .28(j)(1)
Tackle................................ .28(j)(5)
Boom Guards:
Cranes................................ .180(j)(2)
Derricks.............................. .181(j)(5)(ii)
Booms, Derricks......................... .181(i)(6)
Boring Machines......................... .213(l)
Brakes:
Bandsaws.............................. .213(j)(1)
Bridges............................... .179(f)(4), (6)
Control............................... .179(f)(3)
Cranes................................ .179(f)
Friction, Power Presses............... .217(b)(2)
Hoists................................ .179(f)(1)
Holding............................... .179(f)(2)
Industrial Trucks..................... .178(g), (h), (m)(5)
Manlifts.............................. .68(c)(1)(i)
Power Control......................... .179(f)(3)
[[Page 893]]
Trolleys.............................. .179(f)(4), (5)
Brazing: (see also Welding)............. .252
Definitions........................... .251
Standards Sources..................... .256
Breast Derricks: (see also Derricks).... .181(a)(4)
Bricklayers' Square Scaffolds........... .28(l)
Bridge Bumpers, Cranes.................. .179(e)(2)
Bridge Plates: (see also Dockboards).... .30(a)
Buffing: (see Grinding, Polishing and
Buffing)
Building Maintenance Powered Platforms.. .66
Buildings, Sawmills..................... .265(c)
Bulk Delivery:
Blasting Agents....................... .109(g)(3), (h)(4)
Explosives............................ .109(h)(4)
Bulk Oxygen Systems..................... .104
Accessibility......................... .104(b)(2)(ii)
Cleaning.............................. .104(b)(8)(i)
Clear Zone............................ .104(b)(10)(ii)
Containers............................ .104(b)(4), (6)
Gaseous............................. .104(b)(4)(iii)
Liquid.............................. .104(b)(4)(ii)
Dikes................................. .104(b)(2)(v)
Distances from Hazards................ .104(b)(3)
Combustible Liquids................. .104(b)(3)(vii), (viii)
Combustible Materials............... .104(b)(3)(x)
Combustible Structures.............. .104(b)(3)(ii)
Congested Areas..................... .104(b)(3)(xiii)
Fire Resistant Structures........... .104(b)(3)(iii)
Flammable Gases..................... .104(b)(3)(ix)
Flammable Liquids................... .104(b)(3)(v), (vi)
Openings............................ .104(b)(3)(iv)
Slow-Burning Materials.............. .104(b)(3)(xi)
Electrical Wiring..................... .104(b)(8)(ix)
Firewalls............................. .104(b)(3)(viii)
Fittings.............................. .104(b)(5)
Inspection............................ .104(b)(10)(i)
Installation.......................... .104(b)(8)(iv)
Joints................................ .104(b)(8)(ii)
Leakage............................... .104(b)(2)(iii)
Liquid Oxygen Vaporizers.............. .104(b)(7)
Grounding........................... .104(b)(7)(iv)
Location.............................. .104(b)(2)
Maintenance........................... .104(b)(10)
Marking............................... .104(b)(8)(viii)
Operating Instructions................ .104(b)(9)
Piping................................ .104(b)(5)
Placarding............................ .104(b)(8)(viii)
Safety Relief Devices................. .104(b)(6), (7)(ii)
All Containers...................... .104(b)(6)(i)
ASME Containers..................... .104(b)(6)(iii)
DOT Containers...................... .104(b)(6)(ii)
Security.............................. .104(b)(8)(vi)
Storage Containers.................... .104(b)(4), (6)
Testing............................... .104(b)(8)(v)
Tubing................................ .104(b)(5)
Vaporizers............................ .104(b)(7)
Ventilation........................... .104(b)(3)(xii)
Venting............................... .104(b)(8)(vii)
Bulk Plants, Flammable and Combustible .106(f)
Liquids.
Buildings............................. .106(f)(2)
Drainage.............................. .106(f)(7)
Electrical Equipment.................. .106(f)(5)
Fire Protection....................... .106(f)(8)
Ignition Sources...................... .106(f)(6)
Liquid Storage........................ .106(f)(1)
Loading............................... .106(f)(3)
Waste Disposal........................ .106(f)(7)
Wharves............................... .106(f)(4)
Bumpers:
Bridge................................ .179(e)(2)
Trolley............................... .179(e)(3)
1,3 Butadiene:..........................
Permissible Exposure Limits........... .1051(c)
Exposure Monitoring................... .1051(d)
Regulated Areas....................... .1051(e)
Methods of Compliance................. .1051(f)
Exposure Goal Program................. .1051(g)
Respiratory Protection................ .1051(h)
Protective Clothing and Equipment..... .1051(i)
Emergency Situations.................. .1051(j)
Medical Screening and Surveillance.... .1051(k)
Communication of BD Hazards to .1051(l)
Employees.
Recordkeeping......................... .1051(m)
Cabinets, Flammable and Combustible .106(d)(3)
Liquid storage.
Size.................................. .106(d)(3)(i)
Fire resistance....................... .106(d)(3)(ii)
Cabs:
Cranes................................ .179(c), (o)(2); 180(i)(3)
Derricks.............................. .181(j)(6)
Cadmium................................. .252(c)(9)
Airborne Concentration................ .1027(c)
Compliance............................ .1027(f)
Confined Spaces....................... .252(c)(9)(ii)
Emergency Situations.................. .1027(h)
Exposure, Permissible................. .1027(c)
Hazard Communication.................. .1027(m)
Housekeeping.......................... .1027(k)
Hygiene Areas and Practices........... .1027(j)
Indoors............................... .252(c)(9)(i)
Medical Surveillance.................. .1027(l)
Monitoring............................ .1027(d)
Personal Protective Equipment......... .1027(i)
Clothing.......................... .1027(i)
Recordkeeping......................... .1027(n)
Regulated Areas....................... .1027(e)
Respiratory protection................ .1027(g)
Warning Labels........................ .252(c)(1)(v),
Calcium Carbide:
Indoors............................... .253(g)(2)
Packaging............................. .253(g)(1)
Storage............................... .253(g)(2), (3)
Calenders............................... .262(ee)
Rubber and Plastics Industry:
Alarms.............................. .216(g)
Location Protection................. .216(d)(2)
Safety Controls..................... .216(c)
Stopping Limits..................... .216(f)(1), (3)
Switches, Trip and Emergency........ .216(e)
Textiles.............................. .262(ee)
Canisters, Gas Mask: (see Gas Mask
Canisters, Respirators)
Cantilever Gantry Cranes: (see Gantry
Cranes)
Carpenters' Bracket Scaffolds........... .28(k)
Bracket Attachment.................... .28(k)(2)
Bracket Dimensions.................... .28(k)(1)
Employee Protection................... .28(k)(3)
Guardrails............................ .28(k)(5)
Platform Size......................... .28(k)(4)
Caustics................................ .262(oo)
Emergency Showers..................... .261(g)(18)(i)
Pipeline Identification............... .261(h)(3)(vi)
Caution Signs and Labels................ .145(c)(2), (d)(4)
Asbestos.............................. .1001(g)
Fluorides............................. .252(c)(1)(iv)
Ionizing Radiation.................... .96(e), (g), (h)
Welding............................... .252(c)(1)(iv)
Ceiling Workers' Scaffolds: (see also .28(o)
Plasterers'Scaffolds).
Chain Guarding.......................... .219(f)
[[Page 894]]
Change Rooms:
Asbestos.............................. .1001(d)(4)
Drying Facilities..................... .141(f)
Separate Facilities................... .141(e)
Charge Initiation....................... .109(e)(4)
Chemical Plants: (see also Refineries, .106(i)
Chemical Plants andDistilleries).
Chemicals, hazard communication......... .1200
Chemicals, hazardous; occupational
exposure in laboratories:
Chemical Hygiene Plan................. .1450(e)
Exposure determination, monitoring.... .1450(d)
Hazard identification................. .1450(h)
Hygiene recommendations............... .1450, App. A
Medical consultations and examinations .1450(g)
Permissible exposure limits........... .1450(c)
Recordkeeping......................... .1450(j)
Respirator use........................ .1450(i)
Training.............................. .1450(f)
Chemicals, highly hazardous; process .119
safety management.
Chemicals, toxic and reactive, .119, App. A
threshold list.
Compliance guidelines................. .119, App. A
Contractor, employer responsibilities. .119(h)
Emergency planning and response....... .119(h)
Hot work (welding) permits............ .119(n)
Trade secrets......................... .119(p)
Training.............................. .119(g)
Chicago Boom Derricks: (see also .181
Derricks).
Chicken Ladders: (see also Crawling .28(t)
Boards).
bis-Chloromethyl ether.................. .1003
Area requirements..................... .1003(c)
Closed system operation............. .1003(c)(2)
Isolated systems.................... .1003(c)(l)
Maintenance and decontamination .1003(c)(5)
activities.
Open-vessel system operations....... .1003(c)(3)
Transfer from a closed operation.... .1003(c)(4)
Medical surveillance.................. .1003(g)
Examinations........................ .1003(g)(1)
Records............................. .1003(g)(2)
Regulated area requirements........... .1003(d)
Contamination control............... .1003(d)(4)
Emergencies......................... .1003(d)(2)
Hygiene facilities and practices.... .1003(d)(3)
Reports............................... .1003(f)
Incidents........................... .1003(f)(2)
Operations.......................... .1003(f)(1)
Signs, information, and training...... .1003(e)
Container contents identification... .1003(e)(2)
Lettering........................... .1003(e)(3)
Prohibited statements............... .1003(e)(4)
Signs............................... .1003(e)(1)
Training and indoctrination......... .1003(e)(5)
Chute Openings.......................... .23(a)(2)
Circular Resaws......................... .213(e)
Circular Saws........................... .213(f)
Arbors................................ .213(s)(4)
Portable.............................. .243(a)(1)
Clean Air, Spray Finishing.............. .94(c)(7)
Cleaning:
Air Receivers......................... .169
Bulk Oxygen Systems................... .104(b)(8)(i)
Compressed Air........................ .242(b)
Powder Coatings....................... .107(l)(4)(i)
Powered Platforms..................... .66(e)(7)
Respirators........................... .134(f)(3)
Solvents.............................. .107(g)(5)
Spray Booths.......................... .107(b)(9)
Spraying Operations................... .107(g)(2)
Cleaning Compounds...................... .252(c)(11)
Degreasing............................ .252(c)(11)(ii)
Manufacturer's Instructions........... .252(c)(11)(i)
Cleaning Solvents:
Spraying.............................. .107(g)(5)
Clear Zones:
Bulk Oxygen Systems................... .104(b)(10)
Industrial Plants..................... .106(e)(9)(iv)
Liquefied Hydrogen Systems............ .103(c)(5)(ii)
Processing Plants..................... .106(h)(8)(iv)
Clearances:
Cranes................................ .179(b)(6), .180(j)(1)
Derricks.............................. .181(j)(5)
Fixed Ladders......................... .27(c)
Back................................ .27(c)(4)
Climbing Side....................... .27(c)(1)
Grab Bars........................... .27(c)(5)
Hatch Covers........................ .27(c)(7)
Step-Across Distance................ .27(c)(6)
With Cages or Baskets............... .27(c)(3)
Without Cages or Wells.............. .27(c)(2)
Manlifts.............................. .68(b)(11)
Spraying Discharges................... .107(d)(8)
Stairs................................ .24(i)
Clothing, Protective: (see also Personal .252(b)(3), .132
Protective Equipment).
Asbestos.............................. .1001(d)(3)
Body.................................. .156(e)(3)
Electrical............................ .137
Eye................................... .133, .156(e)(5)
Face.................................. .133,.156(e)(5)
Fire brigade.......................... .156
Footwear.............................. .136,.156(e)(2)
Goggles............................... .133
Hand.................................. .156(e)(4)
Head.................................. .135, .156(e)(5)
Helmets............................... .135
Leg................................... .156(e)(3)
Rubber................................ .137
Storage............................... .107(g)(4)
Welders............................... .252(b)(3)
Clutches................................ .217(b)(3), (7)
Definition............................ .180(a)(19)
Power Transmission Apparatus.......... .219(k)
Coatings, Spray:
Dual Component........................ .107(m)
Organic Peroxide...................... .107(m)
Powder................................ .107(l)
Undercoatings......................... .107(k)
Collars................................. .219(i)
Coke oven emissions..................... .1029
Employee information and training..... .1029(k)
Exposure monitoring and measurement... .1029(e)
Hygiene facilities and practices...... .1029(i)
Medical surveillance.................. .1029(j)
Methods of compliance................. .1029(f)
Observation of monitoring............. .1029(n)
Permissible exposure limit............ .1029(c)
Protective clothing and equipment..... .1029(h)
Precautionary signs and labels........ .1029(l)
Recordkeeping......................... .1029(m)
Regulated areas....................... .1029(d)
Respiratory protection................ .1029(g)
Color Codes:
Air Contaminants...................... .134(g)(6)
Danger................................ .144(a)(1)(ii), .145((d)(2)
[[Page 895]]
Effective Dates....................... .149
Gas Mask Canisters.................... .134(g)(6)
Physical Hazards, Colors.............. .144(a), .145(d)(2)
Respirators........................... .134(g)(6)
Standards Sources..................... .150
Stop.................................. .144(a)(1)(iii)
Combustible Dusts, Trucks Used.......... .178(c)(2)(vi)
Combustible Liquids: (see Flammable and .106
CombustibleLiquids).
Effective Dates....................... .114
Standards Sources..................... .115
Combustible Materials:
Welding............................... .252(a)(2)
Communicable Diseases Reporting:
Labor Camps........................... .142(l)
Communications, Powered Platforms....... .66(e)(11)(vi)
Compressed Air, Cleaning................ .242(b)
Compressed Air Equipment: (see also
Compressed Gas Equipment)
Air Receivers......................... .169
Compressed Gas Cylinders: (see also .253(a)(2)
Compressed Gases).
Approval.............................. .252(b)(1)
Inspection............................ .101(a)
Manifolding........................... .253(c)
Markings.............................. .253(b)(1)
Operating Procedures.................. .253(b)(5)
Oxygen Manifolds...................... .253(c)(2), (3)
Public Protection..................... .101(c), .252(a)(8)
Safety Relief Valves.................. .101(c)
Standards Sources..................... .170
Storage............................... .253(b)(2)-(4)
Compressed Gas Equipment: (see
Compressed Gas Cylinders)
Compressed Gases: (see also Compressed .101
Gas Cylinders).
Effective Dates....................... .114
Handling.............................. .101(b)
Safety Relief Devices................. .101(c)
Standards Sources..................... .115
Storage............................... .101(b)
Conductors: (see also Electric Wiring)
Cranes................................ .179(g)(1)(iv), (6)
General Wiring........................ .305(f)
Confined Spaces, Hazardous work......... .120(b)(4)(ii)(I), (c)(3)
Electrical safety-related work .333(c)(5)
practices.
Confined Spaces:
Atmospheric testing flow charts....... .146, App. B
Attendant duties...................... .146(i)
Authorized entrant duties............. .146(h)
Entry supervisor duties............... .146(j)
Flow chart, decisions................. .146, App. A
Instruction of employees relating to.. .21(b)(6)
Permit samples........................ .146, App. D
Program examples...................... .146, App. C
Rescue and emergency services......... .146(k)
Sewer system entry.................... .146, App. E
Training.............................. .146(g)
Welding and Cutting................... .353(b), .352(g)
Containers: (see also Tank Storage,
Portable)
Ammonium Nitrate...................... .109(i)(3)
Bulk Oxygen Systems................... .104(b)(4), (6)
Gaseous............................. .104(b)(4)(iii)
Liquid.............................. .104(b)(4)(ii)
Flammable and Combustible Liquids..... .106(d)
Design.............................. .106(d)(2)
Bulk plants, storage................ .106(f)
Industrial plants, storage.......... .106(e)(2)(ii)
Service stations, storage........... .106(g)(1)
Processing plants................... .106(h)(4)
Gaseous Hydrogen Systems.............. .103(b)(1)(i)
Guarding.............................. .212(a)(4)
Liquified Hydrogen Systems............ .103(c)(1)(i)
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .110
Spraying.............................. .107(e)(3), (5)
Welding, Gas.......................... .253(a), (b)
Containers, Liquefied Petroleum Gases... .110
Accessories........................... .110(b)(7); (c)(6); (d)(3),
(8); (e)(5)
Awaiting Use or Resale................ .110(f)
Capacity.............................. .110(d)(6), (h)(5)
Charging Plants....................... .110(d)(13)
Construction.......................... .110(b)(3)
Cylinder Systems...................... .110(c)
Accessories......................... .110(c)(6)
Indoor.............................. .110(c)(5)
Markings............................ .110(c)(2)
Outdoor............................. .110(c)(4)
Valves.............................. .110(c)(6)
Filling Densities..................... .110(b)(12)
Fire Protection....................... .110(d)(14)
Fittings.............................. .110(b)(8); (e)(6); (h)(7),
(9)
Hoses................................. .110(b)(9)
Industrial Plants..................... .110(d)(12)
Installation.......................... .110(e)(4), (h)(6)
Lighting.............................. .110(d)(16)
Location.............................. .110(b)(6), (f)(5)
Markings.............................. .110(b)(5), (c)(2)
Non-DOT Containers.................... .110(d)
Accessories......................... .110(d)(3)
Capacity............................ .110(d)(6)
Installation........................ .110(d)(7)
Pipes............................... .110(d)(3)
Pressure, Design.................... .110(d)(2)
Reinstallation...................... .110(d)(5)
Safety Relief Devices............... .110(d)(4)
Valves.............................. .110(d)(3)
Original Testing...................... .110(b)(4)
Piping................................ .110(b)(8), (d)(3), (e)(6),
(h)(10), (h)(9)
Pressure Design....................... .110(d)(2), (e)(3)
Safety Relief Devices................. .110(b)(10), (c)(7), (d)(4),
(e)(7), (h)(4)
Tubing................................ .110(b)(8), (e)(6)
Valves................................ .110(b)(7), (c)(6), (d)(3),
(e)(5), (h)(9)
Vaporizers............................ .110(b)(11), (d)(17), (e)(8)
Welding............................... .110(b)(4)
Controllers:
Cranes................................ .179(g)(3)
Conveyors:
Bakeries.............................. .263(d)(7), (i)(7)
Electrostatic Spraying................ .107(h)(7)
Forging Machines...................... .218(j)(3)
Sawmills.............................. .265(c)(18)
Spray Booths.......................... .107(b)(7)
Corrosion Protection:
Piping, Valves and Fittings........... .106(c)(5)
Storage Tanks......................... .106(b)(1)(vi)
Underground Tanks..................... .106(b)(3)(iii)
Cotton Dust............................. .1043
Counterbalances......................... .217(b)(9)
Counterweights:
Cranes................................ .180(i)(2)
Covers, Openings:
Working Surfaces...................... .22(e);23(a)(1), (3)(i), (5),
(6), (8)(ii), (9)
[[Page 896]]
Cranes:
Crawler............................... .180
Definitions........................... .179(a)
Effective Dates....................... .179(b)(2), .180(b)(2), .182
Electric.............................. .306(b)
Gantry................................ .179
Locomotive............................ .180
Overhead.............................. .179
Pulp and Paper Mills.................. .261(c)(8)
Standards Sources..................... .183
Truck................................. .180
Crawler Cranes: (see also Crawler, .180
Locomotive and Truck Cranes).
Crawler, Locomotive and Truck Cranes.... .180
Cabs.................................. .180(i)(3)
Electric Power Lines.................. .180(j)
Fire Extinguishers.................... .180(i)(5)
Inspections........................... .180(d)
Frequent............................ .180(d)(3)
Idle (Irregular).................... .180(d)(5)
Initial............................. .180(d)(1)
Periodic............................ .180(d)(4)
Records............................. .180(d)(6)
Ropes............................... .180(g)
Load Handling......................... .180(h)
Load Ratings.......................... .180(c)
Maintenance........................... .180(f)
Refueling............................. .180(i)(4)
Rope Inspection....................... .180(g)
Standards Sources..................... .183
Swinging Locomotives.................. .180(i)(6)
Testing............................... .180(e)
Crawling Boards......................... .28(t)
Crosscut Table Saws..................... .213(d)
Cup Wheels.............................. .243(c)(2)
Flaring-Cup, Type 11.................. .241(b)(8)
Straight-Cup, Type 6.................. .241(b)(9)
Straight, Type 1...................... .241(b)(10)
Curing Apparatus: (see Drying, Curing
and Fusion Apparatus)
Cutting: (see also Welding)............. .252
Containers............................ .252(a)(3)
Definitions........................... .251
Ventilation........................... .252(c)
Cutting-Off Machines.................... .215(b)(5)
Cutoff Couplings........................ .219(k)(1)
Cutoff Saws, Swing...................... .213(g)
Cylinders, Welding Gas.................. .253(b)
Manifolding........................... .253(c)
Operating Procedures.................. .253(b)(5)
Storage............................... .253(b)(2)-(4)
Cylindrical Grinders.................... .215(b)(4)
Danger:
Color Codes........................... .144(a)(1)(ii)
Signs................................. .145(c)(1), (d)(2)
Tag................................... .145(f)(5)
Dates, Effective: (see Effective Dates)
DBCP (1,2-Dibromo 3-Chloropropane)...... .1044
Emergency situations.................. .1044(i)
Employee information and training..... .1044(n)
Exposure monitoring................... .1044(f)
Housekeeping.......................... .1044(k)
Hygiene facilities and practices...... .1044(l)
Medical surveillance.................. .1044(m)
Methods of compliance................. .1044(g)
Notification of use................... .1044(d)
Observation of monitoring............. .1044(q)
Permissible exposure limit............ .1044(c)
Protective clothing and equipment..... .1044(j)
Recordkeeping......................... .1044(p)
Regulated areas....................... .1044(e)
Respirators........................... .1044(h)
Signs and labels...................... .1044(o)
Dead-Man Controls....................... .243(a)(2)
Decorations:
Egress................................ .37(l)
Explosives............................ .37(l)
Decorators' Scaffolds: (see also .28(o)
Plasterers' Scaffolds).
Degreasing:
Cleaning Compounds.................... .252(c)(11)(ii)
Derricks:
Adjustments........................... .181(f)(3)
Cabs.................................. .181(j)(6)
Electric Power Lines.................. .181(j)(5)
Fire Extinguishers.................... .181(j)(3)
Guards................................ .181(j)(1)
Hooks................................. .181(j)(2)
Inspections........................... .181(d) and (g)
Load Handling......................... .181(i)
Load Ratings.......................... .181(c)
Maintenance........................... .181(f)
Operations............................ .181(h)
Refueling............................. .181(j)(4)
Repairs............................... .181(f)(3)
Rope Inspections...................... .181(g)
Standards Sources..................... .183
Testing............................... .181(e)
3,3'-Dichlorobenzidine (and its salts).. .1003
Area requirements..................... .1003(c)
Closed system operation............. .1003(c)(2)
Isolated systems.................... .1003(c)(1)
Maintenance and decontamination .1003(c)(5)
activities.
Open-vessel system operations....... .1003(c)(3)
Transfer from a closed operation.... .1003(c)(4)
Medical surveillance.................. .1003(g)
Examinations........................ .1003(g)(1)
Records............................. .1003(g)(2)
Regulated area requirements........... .1003(d)
Contamination control............... .1003(d)(4)
Emergencies......................... .1003(d)(2)
Hygiene facilities and practices.... .1003(d)(3)
Reports............................... .1003(f)
Incidents........................... .1003(f)(2)
Operations.......................... .1003(f)(1)
Signs, information, and training...... .1003(e)
Container contents identification... .1003(e)(2)
Lettering........................... .1003(e)(3)
Prohibited statements............... .1003(e)(4)
Signs............................... .1003(e)(1)
Training and Indoctrination......... .1003(e)(5)
Dies.................................... .217(d)
Changing.............................. .218(h)(5)
Fastening............................. .217(d)(7)
Guide Post Hazards.................... .217(d)(4)
Handling.............................. .217(d)(3), (8)
Requirements.......................... .217(d)(1)
Scrap:
Ejecting............................ .217(d)(2)
Handling............................ .217(d)(3)
Selling............................... .217(d)(9)
Stroke................................ .217(d)(6)
Tonnage............................... .217(d)(6)
Unitized Tooling...................... .217(d)(5)
Weight................................ .217(d)(6)
Diesel Powered Trucks................... .178(b)(1)-(3)
Dikes:
Bulk Oxygen Systems................... .104(b)(2)(v)
Storage Tanks......................... .106(b)(2)(vii), (c)
4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene............... .1003
Area Requirements..................... .1003(c)
[[Page 897]]
Closed System Operation............. .1003(c)(2)
Isolated Systems.................... .1003(c)(1)
Maintenance and decontamination .1003(c)(5)
activities.
Open-vessel System Operations....... .1003(c)(3)
Transfer from a closed operation.... .1003(c)(4)
Medical surveillance.................. .1003(g)
Examinations........................ .1003(g)(1)
Records............................. .1003(g)(2)
Regulated Area Requirements........... .1003(d)
Contamination Control............... .1003(d)(4)
Emergencies......................... .1003(d)(2)
Hygiene facilities and practices.... .1003(d)(3)
Reports............................... .1003(f)
Incidents........................... .1003(f)(2)
Operations.......................... .1003(f)(1)
Signs, Information, and Training...... .1003(e)
Container Contents Identification... .1003(e)(2)
Lettering........................... .1003(e)(3)
Prohibited Statements............... .1003(e)(4)
Signs............................... .1003(e)(1)
Training and Indoctrination......... .1003(e)(5)
Dining Facilities: (see also Lunchrooms)
Labor Camps........................... .142(i)
Dip Tanks:.............................. .123-.126
Application........................... .123(a)
Bottom Drains......................... .125(c)
Construction.......................... .124(a), .125(a)
Conveyors............................. .125(d), .126(g)(2)
Covers................................ .125(f)(3)
Electrical Ignition Sources........... .125(e)(1)
Electrostatic Apparatus............... .126(g)
Fire Extinguishers.................... .125(f)(2)(i)
Fire Protection....................... .125(f)
Flow Coating.......................... .126(b)
Hardening............................. .126(a)(1)(i),(ii)
Heating............................... .125(g)
Ignition Sources...................... .125(e)
Inspections........................... .124(j)(1),(3)
Liquid Storage........................ .125(e)(2)
Maintenance........................... .125(e)(4)
Overflow Pipes........................ .125(b)
Sprinklers............................ .125(f)
Tempering............................. .126(a)
Ventilation........................... .124(b), .125(d)(2)
Warning Signs......................... .125(e)(2)
Waste Cans............................ .125(e)(4)(ii),(iii)
Disposal Systems: (see Waste Disposal
Systems)
Distances From Hazards:
Ammonium Nitrate...................... .109(i)(5)
Bulk Oxygen Systems................... .104(b)(3)
Electrostatic Spraying................ .107(h)(6)
Explosives Storage.................... .109(c)
Ignition Sources, Separation.......... .107(c)(2)
Spray Booths, Separations............. .107(b)(8)
Distilleries: (see also Refineries, .106(i)
Chemical Plants and Distilleries).
Distribution Plates:
Spray Booths.......................... .107(b)(4)
Dividers, Bakery Equipment.............. .263(f)
Diving, Commercial...................... .401, .410, .411, .420-.427,
.430, .440, .441
Scientific............................ .401(iv), 402, Appendix B
Dockboards.............................. .30(a)
Dough Brakes, Manually Fed.............. .263(h)
Drag Saws............................... .213(r)
Drainage:
Bulk Plants........................... .106(f)(7)
Industrial Plants..................... .106(e)(3)(iii)
Labor Camps........................... .142(a)
Materials Handling.................... .176(d)
Processing Plants..................... .106(h)(3)(ii)
Service Stations...................... .106(g)(7)
Sprinkler Systems..................... .159(c)(7)
Storage Tanks......................... .106(b)(2)(vii)(c)
Drains:
Air Receivers......................... .169(b)(2)
Dressing Rooms, Personnel............... .141(e)
Drips, Condensed Gas.................... .110(d)(11)
Drives--Belt, Rope and Chain............ .219(e), (g), (o)(3)
Belt Tighteners....................... .219(e)(6)
Cone-Pulley Belts..................... .219(e)(5)
Horizontal Belts and Ropes............ .219(e)(1)(i)
Inclined Belts........................ .219(e)(3)
Overhead Horizontal Belts............. .219(e)(2)
Vertical Belts........................ .219(e)(3), (4)
Drums................................... .212(a)(4)
Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems, .161
Fixed.
Scope and Application................. .161(a)
Specific Requirements................. .161(b)
Drying:
Spraying Operations................... .107(d)(12)
Drying, Curing, and Fusion Apparatus.... .107(j)
Adjacent System....................... .107(j)(3)
Alternate Use:
Permitted........................... .107(j)(4)
Prohibited.......................... .107(j)(2)
Conformance........................... .107(j)(1)
Powder Coatings....................... .107(l)(3)
Spraying Rooms........................ .107(j)(2)
Dual Component Coatings................. .107(m)
Dust Hazards:
Abrasive Blasting..................... .94(a)(2)
Asbestos.............................. .19, .93a
Employee Exposure..................... .1000(a)
Grain handling facilities............. .272
Effective Dates:
Abrasive Wheels....................... .220
Accident Prevention Signs and Tags.... .149
Acetylene............................. .114
Air Contaminants...................... .98
Anhydrous Ammonia..................... .114
Asbestos.............................. .1001(b)(1), (2); .98
Blasting Agents....................... .114
Clothing, Protective.................. .138
Color Codes........................... .149
Combustible Liquids................... .114
Compressed Gases...................... .114
Cooperage Machinery................... .220
Crawler, Locomotive, and Truck Cranes. .180(b)(2), .182
Derricks.............................. .181(b)(2), .182
Dies.................................. .217(d)(1)
Dip Tanks............................. .114
Environmental Controls................ .98, .149
Explosives............................ .114
Federal Standards..................... .17
Flammable Liquids..................... .114
Forging............................... .221
Guarding Machinery.................... .220
Hand-Held Equipment................... .245
Hazardous Materials................... .114
Hydrogen.............................. .114
Indoor Storage........................ .182
Ionizing Radiation.................... .98
Labor Camps........................... .142(d)(7), .149(b)
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .110(b)(19)(i), (i)(3); .11
[[Page 898]]
Machinery............................. .221
Machinery Guarding.................... .220
Materials Handling.................... .182
Mechanical Power Presses.............. .220
Mechanical Power Transmission .221
Apparatus.
Mills and Calenders................... .216(a)(1), (2); .220
National Electrical Code.............. .309
Nitrous Oxide......................... .114
Noise Exposure........................ .98
Nonionizing Radiation................. .98
Nonwater Disposal Systems............. .149
Occupational Health................... .98
Overhead and Gantry Cranes............ .179(b)(2), .182
Oxygen................................ .114
Physical Hazards Markings............. .149
Powered Industrial Trucks............. .182
Powered Tools, Hand and Portable...... .245
Pulp and Paper Mills.................. .261(n)
Pulpwood Logging...................... .266(f)
Safety Color Codes.................... .149
Sanitation............................ .149
Sawmills.............................. .265(j)
Signs and Tags........................ .149
Spray Finishing....................... .114
Standpipe and Hose Systems............ .165
Ventilation........................... .98
Woodworking........................... .220
Egress Means: (see also Exits)
Access to Exits....................... .37(f), (g), (j), (l)
Alarms, Fire.......................... .37(n)
Application........................... .36(a)
Automatic Sprinkler Systems........... .37(m)
Definitions........................... .35
Discharge From Exits.................. .37(h)
Elevation Changes..................... .37(j)
Employee Capacity..................... .36(c)
Exit Arrangements..................... .37(e)
Exit Capacity......................... .37(c), (d)
Exit Components....................... .37(a)
Exit Markings......................... .37(q)
Exit Width............................ .37(c)
Exterior Exit Access.................. .37(g)
Furnishings and Decorations........... .37(l)
General Requirements.................. .36
Headroom.............................. .37(i)
Lighting.............................. .36(b)(6)
Maintenance........................... .37(k)
Occupant Load......................... .37(d)
Paints................................ .37(o)
Protective Enclosures................. .37(b)
Sprinklers............................ .37(d)(2), (m)
Standards Sources..................... .39
Workmanship........................... .37(k)
Electric controls, Mechanical Power .217(b)(8)
Presses.
Electric energy, hazardous; control of
(see Lockout/tagout)
Electric Equipment: (see Electrical
Wiring)
Electric Ignition Sources: (see Ignition .107(c), (d)(5)
Sources).
Electric Motor Ignition Sources......... .107(d)(5)
Electric power generation, transmission, .269
and distribution.
Definitions........................... .269(x)
Enclosed spaces....................... .269(e)
Fall protection....................... .269(g)(1)
Hazardous energy control (Lockout/ .269(d)
tagout).
Ladders, platforms, steps, etc........ .269(h)
Live-line tools....................... .269(j)
Materials handling and storage........ .269(k)
Mechanical equipment.................. .269(p)
Medical services and first aid........ .269(b)
Overhead lines........................ .269(q)
Personal protective equipment......... .269(g), (n)(4), (r)(2)(v),
(r)(4)(ii)
Power tools, hand and portable........ .269(i)
Telecommunications facilities......... .269(s)
Testing and test facilities........... .269(o)
Training.............................. .269(a)(2), (b)(1), (d)(2),
(e)(2), (q)(3)(i), (r)(1)(vi)
Tree trimming, line-clearance......... .269(r), (a)(1)(E)
Water, work near...................... .269(w)(5)
Electric Power Lines:
Crane Operations...................... .180(j)
Boom Guards......................... .180(j)(2)
Clearances.......................... .180(j)(1)
Notifying Owners.................... .180(j)(3)
Overhead Wires...................... .180(j)(4)
Derrick Operations.................... .181(j)(5)
Boom Guards......................... .181(j)(5)(ii)
Clearances.......................... .181(j)(5)(i)
Notifying Owners.................... .181(j)(5)(iii)
Overhead Wires...................... .181(j)(5)(iv)
Safety-related work practices....... .333(c)(3)
Electric Powered Trucks................. .178(b)(4)-(7), .120(g)(3)
Electric wiring:
Ammonium Nitrate...................... .109(i)(6)
Appliances............................ .305(j)(3)
Approval.............................. .303(a)
Arcing Parts.......................... .303(d)
Attachment Plugs (Caps)............... .304(j)(2)
Boxes................................. .305(b)
Branch Circuits....................... .304(b)
Bulk Oxygen Systems................... .104(b)(8)(ix)
Bulk Plants........................... .106(f)(5)
Cabinets.............................. .305(b)
Capacitors............................ .305(i)(6)
Communications Systems................ .308(e)
Conductors............................ .305(f)
Cranes................................ .179(g), .306(b)
Data Processing Systems............... .306(e)
Electrolytic Cells.................... .306(h)
Elevators............................. .306(c)
Emergency Systems..................... .308(b)
Enclosures for Damp or Wet Locations.. .305(e)
Escalators............................ .306(c)
Examination of Equipment.............. .303(b)(1)
Fire Protective Signaling Circuits.... .308(d)
Fittings.............................. .305(b)
Fixture Wires......................... .305(i)
Flexible Cords and Cables............. .305(g)
General requirements.................. .303
Grounded and Grounding Conductors, .304(a)
Installation and Use.
Grounding............................. .304(f)
Guarding Live Parts................... .303(g)(2), (h)(2)
Hand Spraying......................... .107(i)(5)
Hazardous (Classified) Locations...... .307
Heating Equipment..................... .306(g)
High Voltage (Over 600 Volts):
General............................. .308(a)
Grounding........................... .304(f)(7)
Guarding............................ .303(h)(2)
Workspace........................... .303(h)(3), (h)(4)
Hoists................................ .306(b)
Identification of Disconnecting Means .303(f)
and Circuits.
Ignition Sources...................... .107(c)(4), (6)
Industrial Plants..................... .106(e)(7)
Installation and Use of Equipments.... .303(b)(2)
[[Page 899]]
Irrigation Machines................... .306(i)
Lamps................................. .305(j)(1)
Liquefied Hydrogen Systems............ .103(c)(1)(ix)
Liquefied Petroleum Systems........... .110(b)(17), (18), (h)(13)
Marking............................... .303(e)
Motors................................ .305(j)(4)
Moving Walks.......................... .306(c)
Outline Lighting...................... .306(a)
Outside Conductors.................... .304(c)
Overcurrent Protection................ .304(e)
Panelboards........................... .305(d)
Portable Cables....................... .305(h)
Powder Coatings....................... .107(l)(1)
Power-Limited Circuits................ .308(c)
Processing Plants..................... .106(h)(7)(iii)
Receptacles........................... .305(j)(2)
Remote Control Circuits............... .308(c)
Services.............................. .304(d)
Service Stations...................... .106(g)(5)
Signaling Circuits.................... .308(c)
Signs................................. .306(a)
Splices............................... .303(c)
Spraying Operations................... .107(c)(4), (6), (i)(1)-(5)
Storage Batteries..................... .305(j)(7)
Storage Rooms......................... .106(d)(4)(iii)
Swimming Pools........................ .306(j)
Switchboards.......................... .305(d)
Switches.............................. .305(c)
Transformers.......................... .305(j)(5)
Type F Powered Platforms.............. .66(c)(22)
Type T Powered Platforms.............. .66(d)(6)
Welders............................... .306(d)
Wiring Design and Protection.......... .304
Wiring Methods........................ .305(a)
Work practices, safety-related........ .331-.335
Working Space about Electric Equipment .303(g)(1), (h)(3), (h)(4)
X-Ray Equipment....................... .306(f)
Electrical Installations................ .301-.399
Electrical Protective Equipment......... .137, .268(f)
Design................................ .137(a)
Care and use, in-service.............. .137(b)
Electrical safety-related work practices .331-.335
Confined spaces....................... .333(c)(5)
Illumination.......................... .333(c)(4)
Ladders, portable..................... .333(c)(7)
Lockout and tags...................... .333(b), .335(b)(1)
Personal protective equipment......... .333(c)(2), .335(a)
Portable electric equipment........... .334(a)
Power lines, overhead................. .333(c)(3)
Training.............................. .332
Electromagnetic Radiation:
Definitions........................... .97(a)(1)
Nonionizing Radiation................. .97(a)
Protection Guide...................... .97(a)(2)
Warning Symbol........................ .97(a)(3)
Electrostatic Apparatus: (see also
Electrostatic Apparatus, Fixed;
Electrostatic Hand Spraying Equipment)
Powder Coatings....................... .107(l)(5)-(7)
Electrostatic Apparatus, Fixed.......... .107(h)
Powder Coatings....................... .107(l)(5)
Spraying:
Conformance......................... .107(h)(1)
Conveyors........................... .107(h)(7)
Fail-Safe Controls.................. .107(h)(9)
Fire Protection..................... .107(h)(12)
Grounding........................... .107(h)(5)
Guarding............................ .107(h)(10)
Insulators.......................... .107(h)(5)
Location............................ .107(h)(3)
Safe Distances...................... .107(h)(6)
Supports............................ .107(h)(4)
Ventilation......................... .107(h)(11)
Electrostatic Hand Spraying Equipment... .107(i)
Application........................... .107(i)(1)
Approval.............................. .107(i)(3)
Conformance........................... .107(i)(2)
Electrical Support Equipment.......... .107(i)(4)
Grounding............................. .107(i)(5)-(7)
Interlocks............................ .107(i)(8)
Powder Coatings....................... .107(l)(6)
Specifications........................ .107(i)(3), (4)
Spray Gun Grounding................... .107(i)(5)
Ventilation........................... .107(i)(9)
Elevating Work Platforms: (see Vehicle- .67
Mounted WorkPlatforms).
Emergency Action Plan................... .38(a)
Hazardous waste operations and .120(l)(1)(ii)
emergency response, exemption.
Highly hazardous chemicals, process .119(n)
safety management.
Emergency Lighting...................... .261(b)(2)
Employee Alarm Systems.................. .165
Installation and Restoration.......... .165(c)
Maintenance and Testing............... .165(d)
Manual Operation...................... .165(e)
Employee-Owned Protective Equipment..... .132(b)
Employee Protection: (see also Personal
Protective Equipment)
Egress................................ .36(c)
Engine Room Guardrails.................. .219(k)(2)
Environmental Controls:
Accident Prevention Signs and Tags.... .145
Air Contaminants...................... .93
Asbestos.............................. .93a
Effective Dates....................... .98, .149
Labor Camps........................... .142
Marking Physical Hazards.............. .144
Noise Exposure........................ .95
Physical Hazards Markings............. .144
Radiation:
Ionizing............................ .96
Nonionizing......................... .97
Safety Color Codes.................... .144
Sanitation............................ .141
Signs and Tags........................ .145
Standards Sources..................... .99, .150
Ventilation........................... .94
Emergency Response, Hazardous Waste..... .120
Equalizers, Crane Hoists................ .179(h)(3)
Ethylene Oxide.......................... .1047
Ethyleneimine........................... .1003
Area requirements..................... .1003(c)
Closed system operation............. .1003(c)(2)
Isolated systems.................... .1003(c)(1)
Maintenance and decontamination .1003(c)(5)
activities.
Open-vessel system operations....... .1003(c)(3)
Transfer from a closed operation.... .1003(c)(4)
Medical surveillance.................. .1003(g)
Examinations........................ .1003(g)(1)
Records............................. .1003(g)(2)
Regulated area requirements........... .1003(d)
Contamination control............... .1003(d)(4)
Emergencies......................... .1003(d)(2)
Hygiene facilities and practices.... .1003(d)(3)
Reports............................... .1003(f)
Incidents........................... .1003(f)(2)
Operations.......................... .1003(f)(1)
[[Page 900]]
Signs, information, and training...... .1003(e)
Container contents identification... .1003(e)(2)
Lettering........................... .1003(e)(3)
Prohibited statements............... .1003(e)(4)
Signs............................... .1003(e)(1)
Training and indoctrination......... .1003(e)(5)
Evacuation, Ionizing Radiation.......... .96(f)
Exhaust Air Filters, Spray Booths....... .107(b)(5)
Exhaust Systems: (see also Ventilation) .94(a)(4)
Abrasive Blasting.
Grinding, Polishing, Buffing.......... .94(b)(4)
Sawmills.............................. .265(c)(20)
Exhausts, Spraying Operations........... .107(d) (3), (7), (9)
Exits: (see also Access, Egress)
Access................................ .37(f)
Arrangement........................... .37(e)
Capacity.............................. .37(c), (d)
Components............................ .37(a)
Discharge From........................ .37(h)
Elevation Change...................... .37(j)
Headroom.............................. .37(i)
Illumination.......................... .37(q)
Maintenance........................... .37(k)
Manlifts.............................. .68(b)(8)
Markings.............................. .37(q)
Protective Enclosures................. .37(b)
Explosive-Actuated Fastening Tools...... .243(d)
Definitions........................... .241(a)
Fasteners............................. .243(d)(3)
High-Velocity Tools................... .243(d)(2)(i)
Inspection............................ .243(d)(2)
Loads................................. .243(d)(3)
Low-Velocity Tools.................... .243(d)(2)(ii)
Maintenance........................... .243(d)(2)
Explosive character of furnishings and .37(l)
decorations; occupancy use.
Explosives and Blasting Agents.......... .109
Blast Holes........................... .109(e)(3)
Bulk Delivery......................... .109(h)(4)
Charge Initiation..................... .109(e)(4)
Warning............................. .109(e)(5)
Chemicals, highly hazardous, process .119
safety management.
Effective Dates....................... .114
Hours of Transfer..................... .109(f)(5)
Loading............................... .109(e)(3)
Magazines............................. .109(c)(2)
Mixing Vehicles....................... .109(h)(4)
Piers................................. .109(f)
Pulpwood Logging...................... .266(c)(7)
Railroad Cars and Stations............ .109(f)
Slurries.............................. .109(h)
Small Arms Ammunition................. .109(j)
Smoking............................... .109(e)(1)
Standards Sources..................... .115
Storage............................... .109(c), (f)(4)
Transportation........................ .109(d)
Use................................... .109(e)
Vessels............................... .109(f)
Water Gels............................ .109(h)
Exposure:
Air Contaminants...................... .1000
Airborne Radioactive Material......... .96(c)
Asbestos.............................. .1001(b)
Asbestos Fibers....................... .1001(b)
Limits (Tables G-1 to G-3)............ .1000
Mineral Dusts......................... .1000
Minors................................ .96(b)(3), (c)(2), (d)(2)(ii)
Noise................................. .95
Radiation Exposure.................... .96(b)
Extension Ladders, Portable:
Metal................................. .26(a)(2)
Metal, Trestle........................ .26(a)(4)
Wood.................................. .25
Wood, Trestle......................... .25(c)(3)(v)
Extension Lamps, Cranes................. .179(g)(7)
Extractors.............................. .262(y)
Eye and Face Protection................. .133
Markings.............................. .133(a)(4)
Optical Corrections................... .133(a)(3)
Protectors............................ .133(a)(2)
Welding............................... .252(b)(2)
Face Protection: (see also Eye and Face .133
Protection; Personal Protective
Equipment).
Facilities, Labor Camps: (see Labor
Camps, Temporary)
Fail-Safe Controls, Spraying............ .107(h)(9)
Overhead and Gantry Cranes............ .179(a)(40), (g)(3)(viii)
Fan-Rotating Element.................... .107(d)(4)
Farm Vehicles, Anhydrous Ammonia........ .111(g), (h)
Fasteners............................... .243(d)(3)
Fastening Tools......................... .243(d)
Fibers, Asbestos........................ .1001(b)
Filling Densities, Liquefied Petroleum .110(b)(12)
Gases.
Filters, Spraying....................... .107(b)(5)
Fire Alarms: (see also Fire Protection)
Egress................................ .37(n)
Fire Brigades........................... .156
Fire Fighting Equipment............... .156(d)
Organization.......................... .156(b)
Protective Clothing................... .156(e)(1)
Body protection..................... .156(e)(3)
Foot and Leg Protection............. .156(e)(2)
Hand Protection..................... .156(e)(4)
Head, Eye, Face Protection.......... .156(e)(5)
Respiratory Protection................ .156(f)
General Requirements................ .156(f)(1)
Positive-Pressure Breathing .156(f)(2)
Apparatus.
Selection and Distribution............ .157(d)
Training and Education................ .156(c)
Fire Prevention Plan.................... .38(b)
Fire Detection Systems.................. .164
Installation and Restoration.......... .164(b)
Maintenance and Testing............... .164(c)
Number, Location, Spacing............. .164(f)
Protection of Detectors............... .164(d)
Response Time......................... .164(e)
Fire Extinguishers
Cranes................................ .179(c)(3), (i)(5), (o)(3)
Derricks.............................. .180(j)(5)
Dip Tanks............................. .125(f)(2)(i)
Explosives Transportation............. .109(d)(2)(ii)
Powered working platforms............. .66(f)(5)(ii)(I)
Welding............................... .252(a)(2)(ii)
Fire Extinguishers, Portable............ .157
Exemptions............................ .157(b)
General Requirements.................. .157(c)
Hydrostatic Testing................... .157(f)
Inspection, Maintenance Testing....... .157(e)
Selection and Distribution............ .157(d)
Training and Education................ .157(g)
Fire Prevention Plan.................... .38(b)
Fire Protection:
Ammonium Nitrate...................... .109(i)(7)
Blasting Agents....................... .109(i)(7)
Bulk Plants........................... .106(f)(4)(ix), (8)
Chemical Plants....................... .106(i)(5)
Definitions........................... .155
Distilleries.......................... .106(i)(5)
Electrostatic Apparatus............... .107(h)(12)
Explosives............................ .109(i)(7)
[[Page 901]]
Flammable Liquids..................... .106(d)(7), (e)(5), (f)(8),
(g)(9), (h)(6), (i)(5)
Industrial Plants..................... .106(e)(5)
Liquified Petroleum Gases............. .110(d)(14), (f)(7), (h)(14)
Local Fire Alarms..................... .163
Processing Plants..................... .106(h)(6)
Refineries............................ .106(i)(5)
Service Stations...................... .106(g)(9)
Spray Booths.......................... .107(f)
Cleaning............................ .107(f)(3)
Conformance......................... .107(f)(1)
Extinguishers, Portable............. .107(f)(4)
Valve Access........................ .107(f)(2)
Storage Tanks......................... .106(d)(7)
Trucks................................ .178
Fire Protection Equipment:
Color Identification.................. .144(a)(1)
Fire Brigades......................... .156(d)
Fire Resistance (Rating):
Inside Storage Rooms.................. .106(d)(4)(ii)
Storage Cabinets...................... .106(d)(3)(ii)
Tank Supports......................... .106(b)(5)(ii)
Fire Retardant Paints................... .37(o)
Fire Watch, Welding..................... .252(a)(2)(iii)
Fireworks: (see Pytrotechnics)
First Aid............................... .262(pp)
Eye Flushing.......................... .151(c)
Labor Camps........................... .142(k)
Pulpwood Logging...................... .266(c)(1)(vii)
Standards Sources..................... .153
Welding............................... .252(c)(13)
Fittings: (see Piping, Fittings and
Tubing; Piping, Valves and Fittings)
Fixed Extinguishing Systems............. .160, .161, .162, .163
Dry Chemical Agent Systems............ .161
Gaseous Agent Systems................. .162
General Requirements.................. .160(b)
Total Flooding Systems................ .160(c)
Water Spray and Foam Systems.......... .163
Fixed Industrial Stairs: (see Stairs, .24
Fixed Industrial).
Fixed Ladders: (see Ladders, Fixed)..... .27
Flammable and Combustible Liquids:
Bulk Plants........................... .106(f)
Chemical Plants....................... .106(i)
Container Marking, color codes........ .144(a)(1)(ii)
Containers............................ .106(d)
Dip Tanks............................. .123-.126
Distilleries.......................... .106(i)
Effective Dates....................... .114
Hazardous communication............... .1200
Ignition Sources...................... .106(b)(6), (e)(6), (f)(6),
(g)(8), (h)(7)
Industrial Plants..................... .106(e)
Piping, Valves and Fittings........... .106(c)
Pressure Vessels...................... .106(b)(1)(v)
Process safety management of highly .119
hazardous chemicals.
Processing Plants..................... .106(h)
Refineries............................ .106(i)
Service Stations...................... .106(g)
Spray Finishing....................... .107
Storage and Handling................ .107(e)
Conformance....................... .107(e)(1)
Containers........................ .107(e)(3), (5)
Hoses............................. .107(e)(6)
Grounding......................... .107(c)(9), (e)(9)
Liquid Heaters.................... .107(e)(7)
Liquid Transfer................... .107(e)(4)
Pipes............................. .107(e)(6)
Pump Relief....................... .107(e)(8)
Quantity.......................... .107(e)(2)
Safety Relief Devices............. .107(e)(8)
Spraying Containers............... .107(e)(5)
Standards Sources..................... .115
Storage Containers.................... .106(d)
Storage Tanks......................... .106(b), (d)
Tanks................................. .106(b), (d)
Flammable Materials, Trucks Used........ .178(c)(2)
Flanges, Abrasive Wheel Machinery....... .215(a)(3), (c)
Balance............................... .215(c)(3)
Blotters.............................. .215(c)(1)(v), (c)(6), (d)(5)
Diameter Uniformity................... .215(c)(4)
Dimensions............................ .215(c)(8)
Driving............................... .215(c)(7)
Finish................................ .215(c)(3)
General Requirements.................. .215(c)(1)
Maintenance........................... .215(c)(9)
Recess................................ .215(c)(5)
Repairs............................... .215(c)(9)
Types................................. .215(c)(1)(iv)
Undercut.............................. .215(c)(5)
Flash Welding Equipment................. .255(d)
Fire Curtains......................... .255(d)(2)
Ventilation........................... .255(d)(1)
Float Scaffolds......................... .28(u)
Flooding, Tank Areas.................... .106(b)(5)(vi)
Floor Loading........................... .22(d)
Floor Openings (Holes).................. .23(a)
Manlifts.............................. .68(b) (5), (7)
Flooring: (see also Floor Openings;
Floors)
Type F Powered Platforms.............. .66(c)(12)
Type T Powered Platforms.............. .66 (b)(5)(iii)(d)
Floors:
Covers, Hinged........................ .23(a)(3)(i)
Open-Sided............................ .23(c)
Spray Booths.......................... .107(b)(3)
Flow Coatings........................... .126(b)
Fluidized Beds.......................... .107(l)(7)
Fluorine Compounds, Welding: (see also .252(c)(5)
Air Contaminants).
Foam Extinguishing Systems, Fixed....... .163
Food Handling........................... .141(h), .120(m)(4)
Foot Pedals, Power Presses.............. .217(b)(4)
Foot Protection......................... .136
Footwalks:
Cranes................................ .179(d)
Forging Hammers......................... .218(a)(3)
Foot-Operated Devices................. .218(b)(2)
Gravity............................... .218(e)
Air Lifts........................... .218(e)(1)
Board Drop Hammers.................. .218(e)(2)
Keys.................................. .218(b)(1)
Power-Driven.......................... .218(d)
Cylinder Draining................... .218(d)(3)
Pressure Pipes...................... .218(d)(4)
Safety Cylinder Heads............... .218(d)(1)
Shutoff Valves...................... .218(d)(2)
Forging Machine Area.................... .30(b)
Forging Machines:
Billet Shears......................... .218(j)(1)
Boltheading........................... .218(i)(1)
Conveyors............................. .218(j)(3)
Definitions........................... .211(e)
Effective Dates....................... .220
Grinding.............................. .218(j)(5)
Hammers............................... .218(a)(3), (b), (d), (e)
Inspections........................... .218(a)(2)
Lead Use.............................. .218(a)(1)
Maintenance........................... .218(a)(2)
Presses............................... .218(a)(3), (c), (f), (g)
[[Page 902]]
Rivet Making.......................... .218(i)(2)
Saws.................................. .218(j)(2)
Shot Blast............................ .218(j)(4)
Standards Sources..................... .221
Upsetters............................. .218(h)
Forging Presses......................... .218(f)
Fork Trucks: (see also Powered .178
Industrial Trucks).
Formaldehyde............................ .1048
Airborne Concentration................ .1048(c)
Compliance............................ .1048(f)
Emergencies........................... .1048(k)
Exposure, Permissible................. .1048(c)
Hazard Communication.................. .1048(m)
Housekeeping.......................... .1048(j)
Hygiene Protection.................... .1048(i)
Medical Surveillance.................. .1048(l)
Monitoring............................ .1048(d)
Personal Protective Clothing.......... .1048(h)
Recordkeeping......................... .1048(o)
Regulated Areas....................... .1048(e)
Respiratory protection................ .1048(g)
Training, Employee.................... .1048(n)
Fuel-Gas Systems: (see also Oxygen-Fuel .253
Gas Systems).
Fuels: (see also Refueling)
Handling and Storage.................. .178(f)
Furnishings:
Egress................................ .37(l)
Fusion Apparatus: (see Drying, Curing
and Fusion Apparatus)
Gantry Cranes: (see also Overhead and .179
Gantry Cranes).
Garages, Undercoating Operations........ .107(k)
Garnett Machines........................ .262(f)
Gas Cylinder Inspection................. .101(a)
Gaging Devices.......................... .110(b)(19)
Gas Mask Canisters...................... .134(g)
Color Codes........................... .134(g)(6)
Labeling.............................. .134(g)
Gaseous agent extinguishing systems; .162
fixed.
Scope and Application................. .162(a)
Specific Requirements................. .162(b)
Gaseous Hydrogen Systems: (see Hydrogen)
Gasoline Powered Trucks................. .178(b)(8), (9)
Gears................................... .219(f)
Gill Boxes.............................. .262(k)
Gin Pole Derricks: (see also Derricks).. .181(a)(6)
Gloves, Rubber Insulating............... .137
Glue Spreaders.......................... .213(r)
Goggles: (see also Eye Protection; Eye .133
and Face Protection).
Grain Handling.......................... .272
Application........................... .272(b)
Continuous flow bulk raw grain dryers. .272(o)
Contractors........................... .272(h)
Emergency action plan................. .272(d)
Emergency escape...................... .272(n)
Entry into bins, silos, tanks......... .272(g)
Filter collectors..................... .272(k)
Grain stream processing equipment..... .272(m)
Grate openings........................ .272(j)
Hot work permit....................... .272(f)
Housekeeping.......................... .272(i)
Inside bucket elevators............... .272(p)
Preventive maintenance................ .272(l)
Training.............................. .272(e)
Gravity Hammers......................... .218(e)
Grinders: (see also Abrasive Wheel)
Machinery; Cutoff Wheels.............. .243(c)(3), (4)
Grinding, Forging Equipment............. .218(j)(5)
Grinding Machines:
Cylindrical........................... .215(b)(4)
Flanges............................... .215(a)(3)
Surface Grinders...................... .215(b)(5)
Swing Frame Grinders.................. .215(b)(6)
Top Grinding.......................... .215(b)(8)
Work Rest............................. .215(a)(4)
Grinding, Polishing, and Buffing:
Branch Pipes.......................... .94(b)(3)
Enclosure Design...................... .94(b)(5)
Exhaust Systems....................... .94(b)(4)
Hoods................................. .94(b)(3), (5)
Grinding, Top........................... .215(b)(8)
Grounding:
Bulk Oxygen Systems................... .104(b)(7)(iv)
Circuits.............................. .314
Electrostatic Spraying................ .107(h)(5), (i)(5)-(7)
Flammable and Combustible Liquids..... .106(e)(6)(ii), (f)(3)(iv)
General............................... .304(f)
Hand Spraying......................... .107(i)(5)-(7)
Ignition Sources...................... .107(c)(9)
Liquefied Hydrogen Systems............ .103(c)(4)(iv)
Liquid Transfer....................... .107(e)(9)
Methods............................... .314(e)
Spray Booths.......................... .107(h)(10)
Spraying Operations................... .107(c)(9), (e)(9), (i)(5)-(7)
Welding............................... .254(c)(2), (d)(3);
.255(b)(9), (c)(6)
Woodworking Tools..................... .243(a)(5)
Guarding: (see also Term To Which It .211-.222
Applies).
Abrasive Wheels, Portable............. .243(c)
Floor Openings (Holes)................ .23(a)
Hatchways............................. .23(a)(3)
Ladderways............................ .23(a)(2)
Live Parts............................ .303(g)(2), (h)(2)
Machinery............................. .211-.222
Mechanical Power Transmission .219(m)
Apparatus.
Clutches............................ .219(k)
Friction Drives..................... .219(g)
Prime Movers........................ .219(b)
Pulleys............................. .219(d)
Open-Sided Floors..................... .23(c)
Platforms............................. .23(c)
Powered Tools, Portable............... .243
Railings.............................. .23(e)
Runways............................... .23(c)
Skylight.............................. .23(a)(4)
Spraying Equipment.................... .107(h)(10)
Stairways............................. .23(a)(1), (d)
Wall Openings (Holes)................. .23(b)
Guardrails:
Definitions........................... .21(f)(10)
Manlifts.............................. .68(b)(8)(i), (10)(iv)
Power Transmission Apparatus.......... .219(o)(5)
Powered and Working Platforms......... .66(e)(3), (f)(3)(i)(K),
(f)(5)(i)(G), (f)(5)(ii)(K)
Removable............................. .23(a)(3)
Working Surfaces...................... .22(c)
Guardrails, Scaffolds: (see Listing
Under Specific Type Scaffold)
Guards: (see also Guardrails)
Derricks.............................. .181(j)(1)
Hoisting Ropes........................ .179(e)(5)
Manlifts.............................. .68(b)(7)-(9)
Moving Parts.......................... .179(e)(6)
Trucks................................ .178(e)
Guide Posts............................. .217(d)(4)
Gudgeon Pin............................. .181(a)(20)
[[Page 903]]
Guy Derricks............................ .181(a)(7)
Hammers, Forging: (see Forging Hammers)
Hand protection......................... .138
Hand Spraying Equipment: (see
Electrostatic Hand Spraying Equipment)
Hand Tools.............................. .242
Dead-Man Controls..................... .243(a)(2)
Pulp and Paper Mills.................. .261(c)(13)
Handholds, Manlifts..................... .68(c)(4)
Handling: (see also Materials Handling
and Storage)
Anhydrous Ammonia..................... .111
Compressed Gases...................... .101(b)
Liquefied Hydrogen Systems............ .103(c)(2)(iii)
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .110
Liquids............................... .106(h)(4)
Service Stations...................... .106(g)(1)
Handrails............................... .24(h)
Cranes................................ .179(d)(3), (4)(ii)
Mobile Ladder Stands.................. .29(f)(4)
Hangers................................. .219(p)(4)
Hardening Tanks......................... .126(a)(1)(i),(ii)
Hatchways Guarding...................... .23(a)(3)
Hazard Communication, chemical .1200
information, transmittal.
Hazard Communication Program.......... .1200(e)
Hazard Determination.................. .1200(d)
Information and Training.............. .1200(h)
Labels and Warnings................... .1200(f)
Material Safety Data Sheets........... .1200(g)
Trade Secrets......................... .1200(i)
Hazardous chemicals, occupational .1450
exposure to in laboratories (see
Chemicals, hazardous).
Hazardous chemicals, highly, process .119
safety management (see Chemicals, etc.).
Hazardous energy; control of (see
Lockout/tagout)
Hazardous Materials:
Acetylene............................. .102
Anhydrous Ammonia..................... .111
Blasting Agents....................... .109
Bulk Oxygen Systems................... .104
Chemicals (see entries under .119
Chemicals, etc.).
Combustible Liquids................... .106
Compressed Gases...................... .101
Dip Tanks............................. .108
Effective Dates....................... .114
Explosives............................ .109
Flammable Liquids..................... .106
Hazardous Wastes...................... .120
Hydrogen.............................. .103
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .110
Nitrous Oxide......................... .105
Oxygen................................ .104
Packages, transport vehicles, etc., .1201
retention of DOT markings.
Spray Finishing....................... .107
Standards Sources..................... .115
Storage and Handling:
Anhydrous Ammonia................... .111
DOT markings, retention............. .1201
Liquefied Petroleum Gases........... .110
Trucks Used........................... .178(c)(2)
Hazardous Waste Operations:
Contractors and Subcontractors........ .120(b)(1)(iv)
Decontamination....................... .120(k), (p)(4)
Drums and Containers.................. .120(j)
Emergency Response.................... .120(e)(7), (l), (p)(8), (q)
Engineering Controls and Personal .120(g)
Protective Equipment.
Illumination.......................... .120(m)
Information Program................... .120(b)(i)
Laboratory Waste Packs................ .120(j)(6)
Material Handling..................... .120(j)
Medical Surveillance.................. .120(f), (p)(3), (q)(9)
Monitoring............................ .120(c)(6), (h)
Post-emergency Response............... .120(l)(5)
Radioactive Wastes.................... .120(j)(4)
Recordkeeping......................... .120(f)(7)
RCRA Facilities....................... .120(p)
Safety and Health Program............. .120(b)
Sanitation............................ .120(n)
Site Characterization and Analysis.... .120(c)
Site Control.......................... .120(d)
Training.............................. .120(e), (p)(8)(iii), (q)(6)
Shock-sensitive Wastes................ .120(j)(5)
Site Safety and Health Plan........... .120(b)(4)
Tank and Vault Procedures............. .120(j)(9)
Totally-encapsulating Chemical .120(g)(4)
Protective Suits.
Uncontrolled sites, emergency .120(l)
responses.
Head Protection......................... .135
Headroom, Egress........................ .37(i)
Healthcare professions and related .1030
industries, exposures to bloodborne
pathogens.
Hearing Conservation Program............ .95(c)
Heating:
Dip Tanks............................. .125(g)
Bulk Plants........................... .106(f)(2)(ii)
Service Stations...................... .106(g)(6)
Helicopters............................. .183
Helmets................................. .135, .252(e)(2), .266(c)(iii)
Hepatitis B (see also Bloodborne .1030
pathogens).
Hinged Floor Covers..................... .23(a)(3)(i)
Hoist Limit Switches.................... .179(n)(4)
Hoisting Equipment:
Cranes................................ .179(e)(5), (h)
Powered Platforms..................... .66(f)(4), (g)(6)
Rope Guards........................... .179(e)(5)
Holding Brakes.......................... .179(f)(2)
Holes: (see also Floor Openings (Holes); .23
Wall Openings (Holes)).
Hooks:
Cranes................................ .179(h)(4)
Derricks.............................. .181(j)(2)
Horse Scaffolds......................... .28(m)
Hoses...................................
Flammable Liquids..................... .107(e)(6)
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .110(b)(9)
Semiconductors........................ .109(a)(12)
Sprinkler Systems..................... .159(c)(5)
Standpipe and hose systems............ .158(c)(3)
Welding and Cutting................... .253(e)
Hot Sources............................. .107(c)(3)
Hot-work permits, process safety .119(k)
management of highly hazardous
chemicals.
Hours of Transfer, Explosives........... .109(f)(5)
Household Stepladders, Type III......... .25(c)(2)(iv)
Housekeeping............................ .141(a)(3)
Asbestos.............................. .1001(d)
Flammable Liquids..................... .106(e)(9)
Walking-Working Surfaces.............. .22(a)
Hydraulic Barkers....................... .261(e)(14)
Hydraulic Equipment..................... .217(b)(11)
Hydraulically designed sprinkler systems .159(c)(11)
Hydrogen................................ .103
Effective Dates....................... .114
[[Page 904]]
Gaseous Hydrogen Systems.............. .103(a)(2)(i), (b)
Clear Zone.......................... .103(b)(5)(ii)
Containers.......................... .103(b)(1)(i)
Design.............................. .103(b)(1)
Equipment Assembly.................. .103(b)(1)(iv)
Fittings............................ .103(b)(1)(iii)
Inspection.......................... .103(b)(5)
Location............................ .103(b)(2)
Outdoor........................... .103(b)(3)(i)
Separate Buildings................ .103(b)(3)(ii)
Operating Instructions.............. .103(b)(4)
Piping.............................. .103(b)(1)(iii)
Safety Relief Devices............... .103(b)(1)(ii)
Testing............................. .103(b)(1)(vi)
Tubing.............................. .103(b)(1)(iii)
Liquefied Hydrogen Systems............ .103(a)(2)(ii), .103(c)
Clear Zone.......................... .103(c)(5)(ii)
Containers.......................... .103(c)(1)(i)
Design.............................. .103(c)(1)
Electrical Systems.................. .103(c)(1)(ix)
Equipment Assembly.................. .103(c)(1)(vi)
Fittings............................ .103(c)(1)(v)
Grounding........................... .103(c)(4)(iv)
Inspection.......................... .103(c)(5)(i)
Location............................ .103(c)(2)
Outdoor........................... .103(c)(3)(i)
Separate Buildings................ .103(c)(3)(ii)
Special Rooms..................... .103(c)(3)(iii)
Maintenance......................... .103(c)(5)
Markings............................ .103(c)(1)(iii)
Operating Instructions.............. .103(c)(4)
Attendants........................ .103(c)(4)(ii)
Security.......................... .103(c)(4)(iii)
Piping.............................. .103(c)(1)(v)
Safety Relief Devices............... .103(c)(1)(iv)
Supports............................ .103(c)(1)(ii)
Testing............................. .103(c)(1)(vii)
Tubing.............................. .103(c)(1)(v)
Vaporizers.......................... .103(c)(1)(viii)
Standards Sources..................... .115
Hydrostatic Tests: (see also Testing)
Fire Extinguishers.................... .157(f)
Piping................................ .106(c)(7)
Ignition Sources:
Bulk Plants........................... .106(f)(6)
Dip Tanks............................. .125(e)
Industrial Plants..................... .106(e)(6)
Powder Coatings....................... .107(l)(1)
Processing Plants..................... .106(h)(7)
Service Stations...................... .106(g)(8)
Spraying Operations................... .107(c)
Combustible Residues................ .107(c)(5)
Conformance......................... .107(c)(1)
Electrical Wiring................... .107(c)(4), (6)
Grounding........................... .107(c)(9)
Hot Sources......................... .107(c)(3)
Lamps............................... .107(c)(7), (8)
Separation Minimum.................. .107(c)(2)
Storage Tanks......................... .106(b)(6)
Illumination: (see Lighting)
Indoor Storage:
Effective Dates....................... .182
Flammable and Combustible Liquids..... .106(b)(4), (d)(4), (d)(5),
(e)(5), (g)(1)(iii),
(h)(4)(i)
Rooms................................. .106(d)(4)
Standards Sources..................... .183
Industrial Plants:
Flammable and Combustible Liquids..... .106(e)
Electrical Systems.................. .106(e)(7)
Fire Protection..................... .106(e)(5)
Housekeeping........................ .106(e)(9)
Incidental Storage.................. .106(e)(2)
Ignition Sources.................... .106(e)(6)
Maintenance......................... .106(e)(9)
Repairs, Equipment.................. .106(e)(8)
Tank Loading........................ .106(e)(4)
Unit Physical Operations............ .106(e)(3)
Liquefied Petroleum................... .110(d)(12), (f)(4)
Industrial Stepladders, Type I.......... .25(c)(2)(ii)
Insect Control.......................... .141(a)(5)
Labor Camps........................... .142(j)
Inspection: (see also Term To Which It
Applies)
Compressed Gas Cylinders.............. .101(a), .166
Cranes................................ .179(j), .180(d)
Crawler............................. .180(d)
Gantry.............................. .179(j)
Ropes............................. .179(m)
Locomotive.......................... .180(d)
Overhead............................ .179(j)
Ropes............................. .179(m)
Truck............................... .180(d)
Cylinders............................. .101(a)
Derricks.............................. .181(d)
Fire Extinguishers.................... .157(e)
Flooding, Tank Areas.................. .106(b)(5)(vi), (v)
Gas Cylinders......................... .101(a)
Gaseous Hydrogen...................... .103(b)(5)
Liquefied Hydrogen.................... .103(c)(5)(i)
Liquid Oxygen......................... .104(b)(10)(i)
Manlifts.............................. .68(e)
Open Surface Tanks.................... .94(d)(11)
Power Presses......................... .217(e)
Powered Platforms..................... .66(g)
Respirators........................... .134(f)
Ropes, Cranes......................... .179(m)
Woodworking Machines.................. .213(s)
Instruction Signs, Manlifts............. .68(c)(7)
Insulators.............................. .107(h)(5)
Interior Hung Scaffolds................. .28(p)
Ionizing Radiation...................... .1096
AEC Licensees......................... .1096(p)
Airborne Radioactive Materials........ .1096(c)
Caution Signs and Labels.............. .1096(e)
Employees:
Disclosure.......................... .1096(o)
Exposure Records.................... .1096(m), (n)
Incident Reporting.................. .1096(l)
Instruction Posting................. .1096(i)
Evacuation............................ .1096(f)
Exemptions............................ .1096(g), (h)
Exposure.............................. .1096(b)
Airborne Radioactive Materials...... .1096(c)
Minors.............................. .1096(b)(3), (c)(2),
(d)(2)(ii)
Exposure Records...................... .1096(m)-(o)
Incident Reporting.................... .1096(l)
Monitoring............................ .1096(d)
Overexposure Reports.................. .1096(m)
Personnel Instructions, Posting....... .1096(i)
Radioactive Materials:................
Packaged............................ .1096(h)
Storage............................. .1096(j)
Warning Signals....................... .1096(f)
Waste Disposal........................ .1096(k)
Jacks:
Definitions........................... .241(d)
Fixed Truck........................... .178(k)(3)
Loading............................... .244(a)(1)
Marking............................... .244(a)(1)
Maintenance........................... .244(a)(2)
Truck................................. .178(k)(3)
Jointers................................ .213(j)
Blades................................ .213(s)(12)
Keys, Projecting........................ .219(h)
[[Page 905]]
Kiers................................... .262(q)
Kilns................................... .265(f)
Kitchens, Labor Camps................... .142(i)
Labeling, Hazardous Chemicals........... .1200
Labor Camps, Temporary.................. .142
Bathing Facilities.................... .142(f)
Bedding............................... .142(b)(3)
Communicable Diseases Reportings...... .142(i)
Dining Facilities..................... .142(j)
Effective Dates....................... .149
Facilities............................ .142(b)
First Aid............................. .142(k)
Furnishings........................... .142(b)
Floors................................ .142(b)(4), (5)
Grounds............................... .142(a)(3)
Heating Equipment..................... .142(b)(11)
Insect Control........................ .142(j)
Kitchens.............................. .142(i)
Laundry Facilities.................... .142(f)
Lighting.............................. .142(g)
Refuse Disposal....................... .142(h)
Rodent Control........................ .142(j)
Screening............................. .142(b)(8)
Sewage Disposal....................... .142(e)
Shelters.............................. .142(b)
Site.................................. .142(a)
Size.................................. .142(a)(2)
Sleeping.............................. .142(b)(2), (3)
Space................................. .142(b)(2), (9)
Standards Sources..................... .150
Stoves................................ .142(b)(10)
Toilet Facilities..................... .142(d)
Washing............................... .142(f)
Waste Disposal........................ .142(h)
Water Supply.......................... .142(c)
Windows............................... .142(b)(7), (8)
Laboratories, occuptional exposures to .1450
hazardous chemicals in (see Chemicals,
hazardous).
Laboratories and production facilities, .1030(e)
HIV and HBVresearch.
Ladder-Jack Scaffolds................... .28(q)
Ladder Stands, Manual Mobile; (see Work .29(f)
Platforms, Mobile).
Ladders:
Cranes................................ .179(d)(4), (o)(1)
Fixed................................. .27
Manlifts.............................. .68(b)(12)
Portable Metal........................ .26
Portable Wood......................... .25
Sawmills.............................. .265(c)(10)
Ladders, Fixed.......................... .27
Cages................................. .27(c)(3), (d)(1)
Clearances............................ .27(c)
Cleats................................ .27(b)(1)
Design................................ .27(a)
Stresses............................ .27(a)(2)
Deterioration......................... .27(b)(7)
Electrolytic Action................... .27(b)(5)
Extensions............................ .27(d)(3)
Fastenings............................ .27(b)(3)
Grab Bars............................. .27(c)(5), (d)(4)
Ladder Extensions..................... .27(d)(3)
Landing Platforms..................... .27(d)(2)
Maintenance........................... .27(f)
Pitch................................. .27(e)
Rungs................................. .27(b)(1)
Safety Devices........................ .27(d)(5)
Side Rails............................ .27(b)(2)
Splices............................... .27(b)(4)
Standards Sources..................... .31
Welding............................... .27(b)(6)
Wells................................. .27(d)(1)
Ladders, Portable Metal................. .26
Care.................................. .26(c)(2)
Electrical safety-related work .333(c)(7)
practices.
Extension Ladders..................... .26(a)(2), (4)
General Requirements.................. .26(a)(1)
Platform Ladders...................... .26(a)(5)
Standards Sources..................... .31
Stepladders........................... .26(a)(3)
Straight Ladders...................... .26(a)(2), (4)
Use................................... .26(c)(3)
Ladders, Portable Wood.................. .25
Care.................................. .25(d)(1)
Rung Ladders........................ .25(c)(3)
Sectional......................... .25(c)(3)(iv)
Single............................ .25(c)(3)(ii)
Trestle........................... .25(c)(3)(v)
Two-Section....................... .25(c)(3)(iii)
Side-Rolling Ladders................ .25(c)(5)
Special Purpose Ladders............. .25(c)(4)
Masons'........................... .25(c)(4)(iii)
Painters'......................... .25(c)(4)(ii)
Standards Sources................... .31
Stepladders......................... .25(c)(2)
Trolley Ladders..................... .25(c)(5)
Materials............................. .25(b)
Use................................... .25(d)(2)
Ladderway Guarding...................... .23(a)(2)
Lamps: (see also Lighting).............. .107(c)(7)(8); .305(j)(1)
Landings, Manlifts...................... .68(b) (6), (10)
Lathers' Scaffolds: (see also .28(o)
Plasterers' Scaffolds).
Lathes.................................. .213(o)
Laundry Facilities, Labor Camps......... .142(f)
Laundry Operations...................... .264
Miscellaneous Equipment............... .264(c)(4)
Operating Rules....................... .264(d)
Markers............................. .264(d)(1)(iii)
Mechanical Safeguards............... .264(d)(2)
Point-of-Operation Guards............. .264(c)
Washroom Machines..................... .264(c)(1)
Lavatories.............................. .141(d)(2)
Lawn Mowers, Power...................... .243(e)
Definitions........................... .241(c)
Forging Machines...................... .218(a)(1)
General Requirements.................. .243(e)(1)
Riding Rotary......................... .243(e)(2), (4)
Walk-Behind........................... .243(e)(2), (3)
Lead.................................... .1025, .252(f)(7)
Compliance............................ .1025(e)
Confined Spaces....................... .252(f)(7)(i), (iii)
Housekeeping.......................... .1025(h)
Hygiene Facilities and Practices...... .1025(i)
Indoors............................... .252(c)(7)(ii), (iii)
Medical Removal....................... .1025(k)
Medical Surveillance.................. .1025(j)
Monitoring............................ .1025(d)
Monitoring, Observation of............ .1025(o)
Protective Equipment and.............. .1025(g)
Clothing.......................... .1025(g)
Recordkeeping......................... .1025(n)
Respiratory Protection................ .1025(f)
Signs................................. .1025(m)
Training, Employee.................... .1025(l)
Ventilation........................... .252(c)(7)(iii)
Leakage, Bulk Oxygen Systems............ .104(b)(2)(iii)
Levers, Hand-Operated................... .217(b)(5)
Lifelines: (see also Safety Belts)
Confined Spaces....................... .252(b)(4)(iv)
Crawling Boards....................... .28(t)(2)
Powered Platforms..................... .66(d)(9), App. C
Welding............................... .252(b)(4)(iv)
Chicken Ladders....................... .28(t)(2)
[[Page 906]]
Lighting: (see also Lamps)
Container Areas....................... .110(d)(16)
Cranes................................ .179(c)(4), (g)(7)
Electric Equipment, Workspace About... .303(g)(1)(v), (h)(3)(ii)
Electrical safety-related work .333(c)(4)
practices.
Exits and Exit Signs.................. .37(q)
Hazardous Waste Operations............ .120(m)
Labor Camps........................... .142(g)
Machinery, Basement Areas............. .219(c)(5)
Manlifts.............................. .68(b)(6)(iii), (14)
Operating Areas, Industrial Trucks.... .178(h)
Pulp and Paper Mills.................. .261(b)(2), (c)(10), (k)(21)
Pulpwood Harvesting................... .266(e)(15)
Sawmills.............................. .265(c)(5)(iii), (9),
(23)(iii)
Spray Booths.......................... .107(b)(10)
Storage Areas......................... .177(f)(1), .178(h)
Lighting Receptacles:
Cranes................................ .179(g)(7)
Liquefied Hydrogen Systems: (see
Hydrogen)
Liquefied, Petroleum Gases: (see also .110, .168(b)(3)(x)
Containers, Liquefied Petroleum Gases).
Appliances............................ .110(b)(20)
Attendant............................. .110(b)(14)
Buildings:
Engines Use......................... .110(e)(11), (12)
Industrial Trucks................... .110(e)(13)
Inside Storage...................... .110(f)
Piping Into......................... .110(b)(13)
Condensed Gas Drips................... .110(d)(9)
Definitions........................... .110(a)
Effective Dates....................... .110(b)(19)(i), .114
Electrical Equipment.................. .110(b)(17), (18); (h)(13)
Engines in Buildings.................. .110(e)(11), (12)
Equipment Approval.................... .110(b)(2)
Fire Protection....................... .110(d)(14), (f)(7), (h)(14)
Fuel Handling and Storage............. .178(f)
Gaging Devices........................ .110(b)(19)
Garaging Vehicles..................... .110(e)(14)
Handling.............................. .110
Liquid Level Gaging Device............ .110(b)(19)
Liquid Transfer....................... .110(b)(14)
Loading............................... .110(b)(15)
Motor Fuel............................ .110(e)
Odorizing Gases....................... .110(b)(1)
Pits and Drains....................... .110(d)(11)
Regulating Equipment.................. .110(b)(6); (c)(5); (d)(9);
(e)(9)
Indoor.............................. .110(c)(5)
Location............................ .110(b)(6)
Outdoor............................. .110(c)(4)
Service Stations...................... .110(h)
Standards Sources..................... .115
Storage............................... .110
Tank Car Loading...................... .110(b)(15)
Transport Trucks...................... .110(b)(15)
Trucks................................ .178(b)(10), (11)
Trucks Conversion..................... .178(d), (q)(12)
Liquid Fuels:
Handling and Storage.................. .178(f)
Service Stations...................... .106(g)
Liquid Heaters, Spray................... .107(e)(7)
Liquid Transfer:
Anhydrous Ammonia..................... .111(b)(12), (f)(6)
Flammable Liquids..................... .106(e)(2)(iv), (e)(3)(vi),
(f)(3)(vi), (g), (h)(4),
.107(e)(4), (9)
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .110(b)(14)
Load Handling:
Crawler, Locomotive and Truck Cranes.. .180(h)
Attaching........................... .180(h)(2)
Holding............................. .180(h)(4)
Moving.............................. .180(h)(3)
Size................................ .180(h)(1)
Derricks.............................. .181
Attaching........................... .181(i)(2)
Boom Securing....................... .181(i)(6)
Holding............................. .181(i)(4)
Moving.............................. .181(i)(3)
Size................................ .181(i)(1)
Winch Heads......................... .181(i)(5)
Overhead and Gantry Cranes............ .179(n)
Attaching........................... .179(n)(2)
Hoist Limit Switches................ .179(n)(4)
Moving.............................. .179(n)(3)
Size................................ .179(n)(1)
Load Ratings:
Cranes................................ .180(c)
Derricks.............................. .181(c)
Overhead and Gantry Cranes............ .179(b)(5)
Powered Platforms..................... .66(c)(7)
Loading:
Bulk Plants........................... .106(f)(3)
Explosives............................ .109(e)(3)
Industrial Plants..................... .106(e)(4)
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .110(b)(15)
Processing Plants..................... .106(h)(5)
Scaffolds............................. .29(a)(2)
Lockout/tagout of hazardous energy...... .147
Control sequence...................... .147(d)
Electrical safety-related work .333(b)
practices.
Inspection............................ .147(c)(6)
Powered platforms..................... .66(f)(3)()i)(J)
Release procedures.................... .147(e)
Testing............................... .147(f)(1)
Training.............................. .147(c)(7)
Locomotive Cranes: (see also Crawler, .180
Locomotive and TruckCranes).
Log Handling: (see also Sawmills)....... .265(d)
Longshoring............................. .16(a)
Looms................................... .262(n)
Low Pressure Tanks...................... .106(b)(1)(iv)
LP-Gases: (see Liquefied Petroleum
Gases)
Lumber Handling......................... .265(c)(27), (28)
Lunchrooms.............................. .141(g)
Location.............................. .141(g)(1), (2)
Waste Disposal Containers............. .141(g)(3)
Machine Guarding: (see Machine(ry)
Guarding)
Machine(ry) Guarding.................... .211-.222
Abrasive Wheel Machinery.............. .215
Anchoring Fixed Machinery............. .212(a), (b)
Bakeries.............................. .263(c)
Barrels............................... .212(a)(4)
Blades Exposure....................... .212(a)(5)
Calendars............................. .216
Containers............................ .212(a)(4)
Definitions........................... .211
Drums................................. .212(a)(4)
Effective Dates....................... .220
Forging Machines...................... .218
Mills................................. .216
Point of Operation.................... .212(a)(3)
[[Page 907]]
Power Presses......................... .217
Power Transmission Equipment.......... .219
Standards Sources..................... .221
Types................................. .212(a)(1)
Woodworking Machinery................. .213
Machines:
Abrasive Wheels....................... .215
Definitions........................... .211
Forging............................... .218
Laundry............................... .264
Mills and Calenders................... .216
Power Transmission, Mechanical........ .219
Presses, Mechanical................... .217
Textiles.............................. .262
Woodworking........................... .213
Magazines, Explosives................... .109(c)(2)
Class I............................... .109(c)(3)
Class II.............................. .109(c)(4)
Class III............................. .109(c)(5)
Maintenance: (see also Term To Which It
Applies)
Bulk Oxygen Systems................... .104(b)(10)
Cranes................................ .179(l), .180(f)
Derricks.............................. .181(f)
Egress................................ .36(d), .37(k)
Fire Alarm Systems.................... .163(c)
Fire Extinguishers: .157(e)
Gaseous Hydrogen Systems.............. .103(b)(5)
Industrial Plants..................... .106(e)(9)
Liquefied Hydrogen Systems............ .103(c)(5)
Powder Coatings....................... .107(l)(4)
Powered Industrial Trucks............. .178(q)
Powered Platforms..................... .66(e)(6)
Processing Plants..................... .106(h)(8)
Respirators........................... .134(f)
Standpipe and Hose System............. .158(e)
Sprinkler Systems..................... .159(c)(2)
Type F Powered Platforms.............. .66(c)(5)
Manifolding Gas Cylinders............... .253(c)
Fuel-Gas.............................. .253(c)(1)
Operating Procedures.................. .253(c)(5)
Oxygen................................ .253(c)(2), (3)
Portable Outlet Headers............... .253(c)(4)
Manholes................................ .23(a)(6), .268(o)
Manlifts................................ .68
Belts................................. .68(c)(1)(ii)
Brakes................................ .68(c)(1)(i)
Clearances............................ .68(b)(11)
Design................................ .68(b)(3)
Exit Protection....................... .68(b)(8)
Floor Openings........................ .68(b)(5), (7)
Guardrails............................ .68(b)(8)(i), (10)(iv)
Guards................................ .68(b)(7), (9)
Handholds............................. .68(c)(4)
Inspections........................... .68(e)
Instruction Signs..................... .68(c)(7)
Ladders............................... .68(b)(12)
Landings.............................. .68(b)(6)
Lighting.............................. .68(b)(6)(iii), (14)
Machinery............................. .68(c)
Mechanical Requirements............... .68(c)
Operating Rules....................... .68(d)
Platforms............................. .68(c)(3)
Speed................................. .68(c)(2)
Standards Sources..................... .68(b)(4), .69
Steps................................. .68(c)(3)
Stops................................. .68(c)(5), (6)
Warning Signs......................... .68(c)(7)
Weather Protection.................... .68(b)(15)
Marine Service Stations................. .106(g)(4)
Marine Terminals........................ .16(b)
Marking Physical Hazards................ .144
Sawmills.............................. .265(c)(11)
Markings: (see also Signs and Tags)
Bulk Oxygen Systems................... .104(b)(8)(viii)
Compressed Gas Cylinders.............. .253(b)(1)
Electric equipment:
General............................. .303(e)
Hazardous locations................. .307(b)(2)(ii)
Explosive Actuated Tools.............. .243(d)(3)
Explosives............................ .109(d)(2)(ii)
Eye and Face Protection............... .133(a)(4)
Gaseous Hydrogen Systems.............. .103(b)(1)(v)
Hazardous materials, retention of DOT .1201
markings.
Liquefied Hydrogen Systems............ .103(c)(1)(iii)
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .110(b)(5), (c)
Load Ratings:
Cranes.............................. .180(c)(2)
Derricks............................ .181(c)
Powered Industrial Trucks........... .178(a)(3)
Powered Platforms................... .66(f)(7)
Physical Hazards...................... .144
Respirators........................... .134(g)
Sawmills.............................. .265(c)(11)
Mason's Adjustable Multiple Point .28(f)
Suspension Scaffolds.
Masons' Ladders......................... .25(c)(4)(iii)
Matching Machines....................... .213(n)
Material Safety Data Sheets, chemical .1200
hazards information.
Materials Handling and Storage:
Aisles and Passageways................ .176(a)
Clearance Signs....................... .176(e)
Cranes--Crawler, Locomotive and Truck. .180
Cranes, Overhead and Gantry........... .179
Derricks.............................. .181
Effective Dates....................... .182
Guarding Openings..................... .176(g)
Hazardous materials, retention of DOT .1201
markings.
Hazardous Waste Operations............ .120(j), (p)(6)
Housekeeping.......................... .176(c)
Mechanical Equipment.................. .176(a)
Powered Industrial Trucks............. .178
Pulp and Paper Mills.................. .261(c), (d), (m)
Railroad Car Blocks................... .176(f)
Securing.............................. .176(b)
Standards Sources..................... .183
Maximum Allowable Concentration:
Fluorine.............................. .252(c)(5)(ii)
Welding Contamination................. .252(c)(1)(iii)
Means of Egress: (see Egress Means)
Mechanical Handling Equipment:
Clearances............................ .176(a)
Powered Industrial Trucks............. .177(e), .178
Mechanical Power Presses:
Air Controlling Equipment............. .217(b)(10)
Brakes, Friction...................... .217(b)(2)
Clearances, Work Area................. .217(f)(3)
Clutches:
Full Revolution..................... .217(b)(3)
Part Revolution..................... .217(b)(7)
Definitions........................... .211(d)
Dies.................................. .217(d)
Effective Dates....................... .220
Electrical Controls................... .217(b)(8)
Excluded Machines..................... .217(a)(5)
Foot Pedals........................... .217(b)(4)
Guarding.............................. .217(b)
Guide Posts........................... .217(d)(4)
Hand Feeding Tools.................... .217(c)(4)
Hazards:
Guide Posts......................... .217(d)(4)
Personnel........................... .217(b)(1)
Hydraulic Equipment................... .217(b)(11)
Inspection, Records................... .217(e)(1)
Instructions.......................... .217(f)(2)
[[Page 908]]
Lever, Hand-Operated.................. .217(b)(5)
Maintenance:
Records............................. .217(e)(1)
Training Personnel.................. .217(e)(3)
Modifications......................... .217(a)(4), (e)(2)
Operating Instructions................ .217(f)(2)
Overloading......................... .217(f)(4)
Point of Operation.................. .217(c)
Pressure Vessels...................... .217(b)(12)
Slide Counterbalances................. .217(b)(9)
Air................................. .217(b)(9)(iii)-(v)
Spring.............................. .217(b)(9)(i), (ii)
Standards Sources..................... .221
Training Maintenance Personnel........ .217(e)(3)
Treadles.............................. .217(b)(4)
Trips, Two-Hand....................... .217(b)(6)
Unitized Tooling...................... .217(d)(5)
Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus. .219
Bearings.............................. .219(j), (p)(3)
Belts:
Care................................ .219(p)(6)
Fasteners........................... .219(l)(4)
Perches............................. .219(l)(3)
Shifters............................ .219(l)(1)
Shippers............................ .219(l)(2)
Chains................................ .219(f)
Clutches.............................. .219(k), (l)
Collars............................... .219(i)
Couplings............................. .219(i), (k)(1)
Cutoff Couplings...................... .219(k)(1)
Definitions........................... .211(f)
Drives:
Belt, Rope, and Chain............... .219(e)
Friction............................ .219(g)
Effective Dates....................... .220
Engine Rooms.......................... .219(k)(2)
Equipment Care........................ .219(p)
Excluded Apparatus.................... .219(a)(1)
Gears................................. .219(f)
Guarding.............................. .219
Guards:
Disks............................... .219(m)(1)
Horizontal Overhead:
Belts............................. .219(o)(3)
Rope and Chain Drives............. .219(o)(4)
Materials........................... .219(m)(1), (o)
Prime Mover......................... .219(b)
Shields............................. .219(m)(2)
Standard............................ .219(m)
Manufacturing Methods........... .219(m)(2)
Materials....................... .219(m)(1)
Toeboards........................... .219(o)(5)
U-Guards............................ .219(m)(3)
Wooden.............................. .219(o)(2)
Hangers............................... .219(p)(4)
Keys.................................. .219(h)
Located in Basements, Towers, and .219(c)(5)
Rooms.
Personnel Protection.................. .219(p)(7)
Prime Mover Guards:
Connecting Rods..................... .219(b)(2)
Cranks.............................. .219(b)(2)
Extension Piston Rods............... .219(b)(3)
Flywheels........................... .219(b)(1)
Tail Rods........................... .219(b)(3)
Projections........................... .219(h)
Pulleys............................... .219(d), (k), (p)(5)
Setscrews............................. .219(h)
Shafting.............................. .219(c)
Care................................ .219(p)(2)
Guarding............................ .219(c)(2), (3)
Installation........................ .219(c)(1)
Projecting Shafts................... .219(c)(4)
Sprockets............................. .219(f)
Standards Sources..................... .221
Textile Industry...................... .219(a)(3)
Medical Services: (see also First Aid .151
Personnel Protective Equipment).
Asbestos.............................. .1001(j)
First Aid............................. .151
Labor Camps......................... .142(k)
Pulpwood Logging.................... .266(c)(1)
Textiles............................ .262(pp)
Welding............................. .252(c)(13)
Labor Camps........................... .142(k)
Radiation Exposure Records............ .96(n)
Standards Sources..................... .153
Medical Surveillance.................... .120(b)(5), (f)
Mercantile Occupancies.................. .106(d)(5)(iv)
Mercury................................. .252(f)(10)
Exposure Limit........................ .95(b)
Metal Cutting: (see Cutting and Welding)
Metal Ladders, Portable: (see also .26
Ladders, Portable Metal).
Methyl chloromethyl ether............... .1003
Area requirements..................... .1003(c)
Closed system operation............. .1003(c)(2)
Isolated systems.................... .1003(c)(1)
Maintenance and decontamination .1003(c)(5)
activities.
Open-vessel system operations....... .1003(c)(3)
Transfer from a closed operation.... .1003(c)(4)
Medical surveillance.................. .1003(g)
Examinations........................ .1003(g)(1)
Records............................. .1003(g)(2)
Regulated area requirements........... .1003(d)
Contamination control............... .1003(d)(4)
Emergencies......................... .1003(d)(2)
Hygiene facilities and practices.... .1003(d)(3)
Reports............................... .1003(f)
Incidents........................... .1003(f)(2)
Operations.......................... .1003(f)(1)
Signs, information, and training...... .1003(e)
Container contents identification... .1003(e)(2)
Lettering........................... .1003(e)(3)
Prohibited statements............... .1003(e)(4)
Signs............................... .1003(e)(1)
Training and indoctrination......... .1003(e)(5)
Methylene Chloride:.....................
Permissible Exposure Limits........... .1052(c)
Exposure Monitoring................... .1052(d)
Regulated Areas....................... .1052(e)
Methods of Compliance................. .1052(f)
Respiratory Protection................ .1052(g)
Protective Work Clothing and Equipment .1052(h)
Hygiene Facilities.................... .1052(i)
Medical Surveillance.................. .1052(j)
Hazard Communications................. .1052(k)
Employee Information and Training..... .1052(l)
Recordkeeping......................... .1052(m)
4,4-Methylenedianiline:
Airborne Concentration................ .1050(c)
Compliance............................ .1050(g)
Emergency Situations.................. .1050(d)
Hazard Communication.................. .1050(k)
Exposure, Permissible................. .1050(c)
Housekeeping.......................... .1050(l)
Hygiene Facilities and Practices...... .1050(j)
Medical Surveillance.................. .1050(m)
Monitoring............................ .1050(e)
[[Page 909]]
Personal Protective Equipment......... .1050(i)
Clothing.......................... .1050(i)
Recordkeeping......................... .1050(n)
Regulated Areas....................... .1050(f)
Respiratory protection................ .1050(h)
Mill Roll Heights....................... .216(a)(4)
Mills, Pulp, Paper and Paperboard (see .261
also Pulp, Paper and Paperboard Mills).
Mills, Rubber and Plastics Industry:
Definitions........................... .211(c)
Location Protection................... .216(d)(1)
Roll Heights.......................... .216(a)(4)
Safety Controls....................... .216(b)
Auxiliary Equipment................. .216(b)(3)
Safety Trip Control................. .216(b)(1)
Stopping Limits....................... .216(f)(1), (2)
Switches, Trip and Emergency.......... .216(e)
Minors:
Ionizing Radiation Exposure........... .96(b)(3), (c)(2), (d)(2)(ii)
Minors Employment....................... .217(f)(4)
Mixing:
Blasting Agents....................... .109(g)(2), (3); (h)(3), (4)
Explosives............................ .109(h)(3), (4)
Molding Machines........................ .213(n)
Monitoring:
Asbestos.............................. .1001(f)
Ionizing Radiation.................... .96(d)
Mortising Machines...................... .213(e)
Motor Fuels............................. .110(e)
Motor Vehicles:
Anhydrous Ammonia..................... .111(f)
Motorized Hand Trucks: (see also Powered .178
Industrial Trucks).
Multi-piece Rim Wheels.................. .177
alpha-Napthylamine...................... .1003
Area requirements..................... .1003(c)
Closed system operation............. .1003(c)(2)
Contamination control............... .1003(d)(4)
Emergencies......................... .1003(d)(2)
General regulated area requirements. .1003(d)
Hygiene facilities and practices.... .1003(d)(3)
Isolated systems.................... .1003(c)(1)
Maintenance and decontamination .1003(c)(5)
activities.
Open-vessel system operations....... .1003(c)(3)
Transfer from a closed operation.... .1003(c)(4)
Medical surveillance.................. .1003(g)
Examinations........................ .1003(g)(1)
Records............................. .1003(g)(2)
Regulated area requirements........... .1003(d)
Contamination control............... .1003(d)(4)
Emergencies......................... .1003(d)(2)
Hygiene facilities and practices.... .1003(d)(3)
Reports............................... .1003(f)
Incidents........................... .1003(f)(2)
Operations.......................... .1003(f)(1)
Signs, information, and training...... .1003(e)
Container contents identification... .1003(e)(2)
Lettering........................... .1003(e)(3)
Prohibited statements............... .1003(e)(4)
Signs............................... .1003(e)(1)
Training and indoctrination......... .1003(e)(5)
beta-Napthylamine....................... .1003
Area requirements..................... .1003(c)
Contamination control............... .1003(d)(4)
Closed system operation............. .1003(c)(2)
Emergencies......................... .1003(d)(2)
General regulated area requirements. .1003(d)
Hygiene facilities and practices.... .1003(d)(3)
Isolated systems.................... .1003(c)(1)
Maintenance and decontamination .1003(c)(5)
activities.
Open-vessel system operations....... .1003(c)(3)
Transfer from a closed operation.... .1003(c)(4)
Medical surveillance.................. .1003(g)
Examinations........................ .1003(g)(1)
Records............................. .1003(g)(2)
Regulated area requirements........... .1003(d)
Contamination control............... .1003(d)(4)
Emergencies......................... .1003(d)(2)
Hygiene facilities and practices.... .1003(d)(3)
Reports............................... .1003(f)
Incidents........................... .1003(f)(2)
Operations.......................... .1003(f)(1)
Signs, information, and training...... .1003(e)
Container contents identification... .1003(e)(2)
Lettering........................... .1003(e)(3)
Prohibited statements............... .1003(e)(4)
Signs............................... .1003(e)(1)
Training and indoctrination......... .1003(e)(5)
Needle Beam Scaffolds................... .28(n)
4-Nitrobiphenyl......................... .1003
Area requirements..................... .1003(c)
Closed system operation............. .1003(c)(2)
Isolated systems.................... .1003(c)(1)
Maintenance and decontamination .1003(c)(5)
activities.
Open-vessel system operations....... .1003(c)(3)
Transfer from a closed operation.... .1003(c)(4)
Medical surveillance.................. .1003(g)
Examinations........................ .1003(g)(1)
Records............................. .1003(g)(2)
Regulated area requirements........... .1003(d)
Contamination control............... .1003(d)(4)
Emergencies......................... .1003(d)(2)
Hygiene facilities and practices.... .1003(d)(3)
Reports............................... .1003(f)
Incidents........................... .1003(f)(2)
Operations.......................... .1003(f)(1)
Signs, information, and training...... .1003(e)
Container contents identification... .1003(e)(2)
Lettering........................... .1003(e)(3)
Prohibited statements............... .1003(e)(4)
Signs............................... .1003(e)(1)
Training and indoctrination......... .1003(e)(5)
N-Nitrosodimethylamine.................. .1003
Area requirements..................... .1003(c)
Closed system operation............. .1003(c)(2)
Isolated systems.................... .1003(c)(1)
Maintenance and decontamination .1003(c)(5)
activities.
Open-vessel system operations....... .1003(c)(3)
Transfer from a closed operation.... .1003(c)(4)
Medical surveillance.................. .1003(g)
Examinations........................ .1003(g)(1)
Records............................. .1003(g)(2)
Regulated area requirements........... .1003(d)
[[Page 910]]
Contamination control............... .1003(d)(4)
Emergencies......................... .1003(d)(2)
Hygiene facilities and practices.... .1003(d)(3)
Reports............................... .1003(f)
Incidents........................... .1003(f)(2)
Operations.......................... .1003(f)(1)
Signs, information, and training...... .1003(e)
Container contents identification... .1003(e)(2)
Lettering........................... .1003(e)(3)
Prohibited statements............... .1003(e)(4)
Signs............................... .1003(e)(1)
Training and indoctrination......... .1003(e)(5)
Nitrous Oxide........................... .105
Administrative Controls............... .95(b)(1)
Effective Dates....................... .114
Engineering Controls.................. .95(b)(1)
Standards Sources..................... .115
Noise Exposure.......................... .95
Effective Dates....................... .98
Personal Protective Equipment......... .95(b)(1), (c), (i), (j)
Pulpwood Logging...................... .266(c)(1)(vi)
Standards Sources..................... .99
Nonionizing Radiation................... .97
Effective Dates....................... .98
Electromagnetic Radiation............. .97(a)
Standards Sources..................... .99
Nonpotable Water........................ .120(n)(2)
Noxious Gases, Storage Areas............ .178(i)
Nozzles:
Abrasive Blasting..................... .94(a)(2)(iii), .244(b)
Gasoline.............................. .106(g)(3)(vi)
Standpipe............................. .158(c)(4)
Occupant Load........................... .37(d)
Occupational Noise Exposure: (see Noise
Exposure)
Odorizing Gases......................... .110(b)(1)
Open-Sided Floors....................... .23(c)
Open Surface Tanks: (see Tanks: Open
Surface)
Openings: (see also Floor Openings .23
(Holes), Wall Openings (Holes)).
Tanks:
Inside.............................. .106(b)(4)(iv)
Organic Peroxide Coatings: (see also .107(m)
Dual Component Coatings).
Outdoor Storage:
Flammable Liquids..................... .106(d)(6)
Outlet Headers, welding................. .253(c)(4)
Protective Equipment.................. .253(e)(4)
Outrigger Scaffolds..................... .28(e)
Outside Storage Trucks.................. .178(c)(2)(ix), (xi)
Ovens................................... .263(l)
Direct-Fire........................... .263(l)(10)
Direct Recirculating.................. .263(l)(11)
Electrical Heating Equipment.......... .263(l)(8)
General Requirements.................. .263(l)(9)
Indirect Recirculating................ .263(l)(15)
Location.............................. .263(l)(1)
Mechanical Parts...................... .263(l)(3)
Overflow Pipes, Dip Tanks............... .125(b)
Overhead Cranes: (see also Overhead and .179
Gantry Cranes).
Overhead and Gantry Cranes:
Access................................ .179(c)(2)
Adjustments........................... .179(l)(3)
Brakes................................ .179(f)
Bridge Bumpers........................ .179(e)(2)
Cabs.................................. .179(c)
Clearances............................ .179(b)(6)
Effective Dates....................... .179(b)(2), .182
Electric Equipment.................... .179(g)
Fire Extinguishers.................... .179(c)(3), (o)(3)
Footwalks............................. .179(d)
Guards................................ .179(e)(5), (6)
Handrails............................. .179(d)(3), (4)(ii)
Hoisting Equipment.................... .179(h)
Hoisting Rope Guards.................. .179(e)(5)
Inspections........................... .179(j), (m)
Ladders............................... .179(d)(4)
Lighting.............................. .179(c)(4)
Load Handling......................... .179(n)
Maintenance........................... .179(l)
Modifications......................... .179(b)(3)
Moving Part Guards.................... .179(e)(6)
Rail Clamps........................... .179(b)(4)
Rail Sweeps........................... .179(e)(4)
Rated Load:
Markings............................ .179(b)(5)
Tests............................... .179(k)(2)
Repairs............................... .179(l)(3)
Rope inspection....................... .179(m)
Stairways............................. .179(d)(4)
Standards Sources..................... .183
Testing............................... .179(k)
Toeboards............................. .179(d)(3)
Trolley Bumpers....................... .179(e)(3)
Trolley Stops......................... .179(e)(1)
Warning Devices....................... .179(i)
Wind Indicators....................... .179(b)(4)
Overhead Wires:
Cranes................................ .180(j)(4)
Derricks.............................. .181(j)(5)(iv)
Overspray Collectors.................... .107(b)(6)
Oxygen: (see also Bulk Oxygen Systems).. .104
Effective Dates....................... .114
Standards Sources..................... .115
Storage............................... .252(a)(2)(iv)
Oxygen-Fuel Gas Systems................. .253
Outlet Headers........................ .253(c)(4)
Piping Systems........................ .253(d)
Protective Equipment.................. .253(e)
Oxygen Manifolds:
High Pressure......................... .253(c)(2)
Low Pressure.......................... .253(c)(3)
Painters' Stepladders................... .25(c)(4)(ii)
Paints:
Color Code............................ .144
Fire Retardant........................ .37(o)
Paper and Paperboard Mills: (see also .261
Pulp, Paper and Paperboard Mills).
Passageways, Working Surfaces........... .22(b)
Permissible Exposure Limits............. .1000
Personal Protection: (see also Personal .219(p)(7)
Protective Equipment).
Personal Protective Equipment: (see also
Lifelines, and Other Terms Listed
Below)
Abrasive Blasting..................... .94(a)(5)
Asbestos Exposure..................... .1001(d)
Clothing............................ .1001(d)(3)
Bloodborne pathogens, exposure to, use .1030(c)(2)(ii), (d)(2)(i) and
of ppe. (3)
Electrical Protective Equipment....... .137, .268(f)
Electrical safety-related work .333(c)(2), .335(a)
practices, use of ppe.
Emergency Showers and Fountains:
Pulp, Paper and Paperboard Mills.... .261(g)(5), (18)
Eye Protection........................ .133
Face Protection....................... .133
Fire Brigades......................... .156
Foot Protection....................... .136
General Requirements.................. .132
Hand protection....................... .138
[[Page 911]]
Hazardous Waste Operations............ .120(g)
Head Protection....................... .135
Noise Exposure........................ .95(b)(1)
Pulp and Paper Mills.................. .261(g)(2), (i)(4), (k)(3)
Pulpwood Logging...................... .266(c)(1)(i)-(v)
Respiratory Protection................ .134
Textiles.............................. .262(qq)
Welding............................... .252-.257
Booths.............................. .252(b)(2)(iii)
Cable............................... .252(b)(1)(ii)
Clothing............................ .252(b)(3)
Eye Protection...................... .252(b)(2)
Helmets............................. .252(b)(2)
Railing............................. .252(b)(1)(i)
Shade Numbers, Lenses............... .252(b)(2)(ii)(H), (b)
Physical Hazards Markings: (see also .144
Color Codes, Physical Hazards:
Markings).
Effective Dates....................... .149
Standards Sources..................... .150
Piers and Wharves: (see also Wharves)
Trucks Used........................... .178(c)(2)(x)
Pipes:
Dip Tanks............................. .125(b)
Flammable Liquids..................... .107(e)(6)
Overflow.............................. .125(b)
Piping: (see Piping, Fittings and
Tubing; Piping, Valves and Tubing)
Piping, Fittings and Tubing:
Anhydrous Ammonia..................... .111(b)(7)
Bulk Oxygen Systems................... .104(b)(5)
Gaseous Hydrogen Systems.............. .103(b)(1)(ii), (iii)
Liquefied Hydrogen Systems............ .103(c)(1)(iv), (v)
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .110(b)(8)
Safety Relief Devices................. .103(b)(1)(ii), (c)(1)(iv)
Piping Systems, Oxygen-Fuel............. .253(d)
Fittings.............................. .253(d)(1)
Installation.......................... .253(d)(3)
Painting.............................. .253(d)(4)
Piping................................ .253(d)(1)
Piping Joints......................... .253(d)(2)
Pressure Relief Devices............... .253(e)(2)
Protective Equipment.................. .253(e)(3), (4)
Signs................................. .253(d)(4)
Station Outlets....................... .253(e)(4)
Testing............................... .253(d)(5)
X-ray Inspections..................... .252(d)(1)(vii)
Piping, Valves, and Fittings:
Flammable and Combustible Liquids..... .106(c)
Corrosion Protection................ .106(c)(5)
Design.............................. .106(c)(1)
Joints.............................. .106(c)(3)
Materials........................... .106(c)(2)
Supports............................ .106(c)(4)
Testing............................. .106(c)(7)
Valves.............................. .106(c)(6)
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .110(h)(7)
Processing Plants..................... .106(h)(4)(ii)
Pits.................................... .23(a)(5)
Drains................................ .110(d)(11)
Planing Machines........................ .213(n)
Plasterers' Scaffolds................... .28(o)
Plastics Industry: (see also Mills,
Rubber and Plastics Industry)
Auxiliary Equipment................... .216(a)(3)
Effective Dates....................... .216(a)(1), (2), .220
Installations:
Existing............................ .216(a)(2)
New................................. .216(a)(1)
Mills and Calenders................... .216
Standards Sources..................... .221
Platform Lift Trucks: (see also Powered .178
Industrial Trucks).
Platforms, Scaffolds: (see also Listings
Under Specific Type Scaffold)
Guarding.............................. .23(c)
Manlifts.............................. .68(c)(3)
Pneumatic Powered Tools................. .243(b)
Airhoses.............................. .243(b)(2)
Portable.............................. .243(b)(1)
Point of Operation Guarding............. .212(a)(3), .217(c)
Polishing: (see Grinding, Polishing and
Buffing)
Portable Fire Extinguishers: (see also .157
Fire Extinguishers, Portable).
Portable Metal Ladders: (see also .26
Ladders, Portable Metal).
Portable Stepladders: (see Stepladders,
Portable)
Portable Tank Storage: (see Tank
Storage, Portable)
Portable Tanks: (see Tanks, Portable)
Portable Tools: (see also Powered Tools, .244
Hand and Portable).
Portable Welding Machines: (see Welding
Machines, Portable)
Portable Wood Ladders: (see also .25
Ladders, Portable Wood).
Powder Coatings......................... .107(l)
Power Presses, Mechanical: (see
Mechanical Power Presses)
Powered Industrial Trucks:
Approval Labels....................... .178(a)(3), (7)
Batteries............................. .178(g)
Combustible Dusts..................... .178(c)(2)(vi)
Conversion............................ .178(d), (q)(12)
Design and Construction............... .178(a)(2)
Designated Locations.................. .178(c)(1)
Designations, Trucks:
D................................... .178(b)(1)
DS.................................. .178(b)(2)
DY.................................. .178(b)(3)
E................................... .178(b)(4)
ES.................................. .178(b)(5)
EE.................................. .178(b)(6)
EX.................................. .178(b)(7)
G................................... .178(b)(8)
GS.................................. .178(b)(9)
LP.................................. .178(b)(10)
LPS................................. .178(b)(11)
Effective Dates....................... .182
Fire Protection....................... .178(a)(1)
Front End Attachments................. .178(a)(5)
Fuel Handling......................... .178(f)
Gases and Fumes....................... .178(i)
Grain Handling........................ .178(c)(2)(vi), (b)
Hazardous Materials................... .178(c)(2)
Lighting.............................. .178(h)
Loading............................... .178(o)
Maintenance........................... .178(q)
Markings.............................. .178(a)(6)
Modifications......................... .178(a)(4)
Operations............................ .178(p)
Repairs............................... .178(q)
Safety Guards......................... .178(e)
Standards Sources..................... .183
Training Operators.................... .178(l)
Traveling............................. .178(n)
Truck Operations...................... .178(m)
Powered Platforms....................... .66-.70
Access................................ .66(f)(3) (i)(K), (ii)(D),
(iii)(C)(2), (f)(5)(ii)(J)
Application........................... .66(b)
[[Page 912]]
Buildings, affected parts............. .66(e)
Definitions........................... .66(d)
Electrical............................ .66(e)(11), (f)(8)
Equipment............................. .66(f)
Fall Arrest systems................... 66(f)(5)(ii)(L), (M),
(iii)(B), (j), App. C
Hoisting Equipment.................... .66(f)(4), (g)(6)
Inspections........................... .66(g)
Lockout............................... .66(f)(3)(i)(J)
Maintenance........................... .66(e)(5), (10), (g), (h)
Manlifts.............................. .68
Reshackling Hoists.................... .66(h)(4)
Ropes................................. .66(f)(7), (g)(5), (h)(3), (4)
Standards Sources..................... .69
Tests................................. .66(g)
Vehicle-Mounted....................... .67
Powered Tools, Hand and Portable:
Abrasive Wheels....................... .243(c)
Compressed Air Cleaning............... .242(b)
Definitions........................... .241
Effective Dates....................... .245
Employees............................. .242(a)
Explosive Actuated Fastening.......... .243(d)
Guarding.............................. .243
Lawn Mowers, Power.................... .243(e)
Pneumatic Powered..................... .243(b)
Standards Sources..................... .246
Woodworking........................... .243(a)
Presses: (see also Mechanical Power
Presses)
Cold Trimming......................... .218(g)(2)
Forging............................... .218(f)
Hot Trimming.......................... .218(g)(2)
Hydraulic Forging..................... .218(f)(2)
Trimming.............................. .218(g)
Pressure Gages, Air Receivers........... .169(b)(3)
Pressure Vessels........................ .106(b)(1)(v), .217(b)(12)
Chemical Plants....................... .106(i)(3)
Distilleries.......................... .106(i)(3)
Pulp and Paper Mills.................. .216(g)(16), (17)
Refineries............................ .106(i)(3)
Pressures: (see Safety Relief Devices)
Prime Mover Guards...................... .219(b)
Primers, Ammunition..................... .109(j)(4)
Process safety management of highly .119
hazardous chemicals (see Chemicals,
etc.).
Processing Plants, Flammable and .106(h)
Combustible Liquids.
Application........................... .106(h)(1)
Buildings............................. .106(h)(3)
Fire Protection....................... .106(h)(6)
Housekeeping.......................... .106(h)(8)
Ignition Sources...................... .106(h)(7)
Liquid Handling....................... .106(h)(4)
Loading............................... .106(h)(5)
Location.............................. .106(h)(2)
Maintenance........................... .106(h)(8)
Profile Lathes.......................... .213(o)
Projections............................. .219(h)
beta-Propiolactone...................... .1003
Area requirements..................... .1003(c)
Closed system operation............. .1003(c)(2)
Isolated systems.................... .1003(c)(1)
Maintenance and decontamination .1003(c)(5)
activities.
Open-vessel system operations....... .1003(c)(3)
Transfer from a closed operation.... .1003(c)(4)
Medical surveillance.................. .1003(g)
Examinations........................ .1003(g)(1)
Records............................. .1003(g)(2)
Regulated area requirements........... .1003(d)
Contamination control............... .1003(d)(4)
Emergencies......................... .1003(d)(2)
Hygiene facilities and practices.... .1003(d)(3)
Reports............................... .1003(f)
Incidents........................... .1003(f)(2)
Operations.......................... .1003(f)(1)
Signs, information, and training...... .1003(e)
Container contents identification... .1003(e)(2)
Lettering........................... .1003(e)(3)
Prohibited statements............... .1003(e)(4)
Signs............................... .1003(e)(1)
Training and indoctrination......... .1003(e)(5)
Protective Clothing: (see Clothing,
Protective and Personal Protective
Equipment)
Protective Equipment, Piping: (see also .253(e)
Personal Protective Equipment).
Hoses and Connections................. .253(5)
Pressure-Reducing Regulations......... .253(6)
Stations Outlet....................... .253(4)
Pulleys................................. .219(d), (k), (p)(5)
Pulp, Paper and Paperboard Mills:
Barking Devices....................... .261(c)(12)
Belt Conveyors........................ .261(c)(15)
Bleaching............................. .261(h)
Bridge or Dock Plates................. .261(c)(11)
Chemical Processes.................... .261(g)
Cranes................................ .261(c)(8)
Finishing Rooms....................... .261(1)
Hand Tools............................ .261(c)(13)
Handling.............................. .261(c), (d)
Lighting.............................. .261(b)(2), (c)(10), (k)(21)
Lockouts.............................. .261(b)(1)
Machine Rooms......................... .261(k)
Materials Handling.................... .261(m)
Mechanical Pulp Processes............. .261(i)
Personal Protective Equipment......... .261(d)(1)
Pulpwood:
Preparation......................... .261(e)
Removal............................. .261(c)(14)
Rags and Old Paper.................... .261(f)
Safe Practices........................ .261(b)
Signs:
Conveyors........................... .261(c)(16)
Traffic............................. .261(c)(9)
Standards Sources..................... .261(a)(3), (4); .268
Stock Preparation..................... .261(j)
Storage............................... .261(c), (d)
Chocking Rolls...................... .261(d)(4)
Clearances.......................... .261(d)(2)
Piling.............................. .261(d)(3)
Traffic Warning Signs................. .261(c)(9)
Pulpwood Logging........................ .266
Chain Saw Operations.................. .266(e)(2)
Chipping.............................. .266(h)(4)
Environmental Conditions.............. .266(d)(5)
Explosives............................ .266(d)(10)
First Aid............................. .266(d)(2), (i)(7), App. A,
App. B
Hand and Portable Powered Tools....... .266(e)
Harvesting............................ .266(h)
Bucking............................. .266(h)(3)
Felling............................. .266(h)(2)
Limbing............................. .266(h)(3)
Loading .266(h)(6)
Machines for Moving Materials......... .266(f)
designated operator................. .266(f)(2)
FOPS/ROPS........................... .266(f)(3)
[[Page 913]]
overhead guard...................... .266(f)(4)
machine access...................... .266(f)(5)
exhaust system...................... .266(f)(6)
brakes.............................. .266(f)(7)
guarding............................ .266(f)(8)
Personal Protective Equipment......... .266(d)(1)
Seat Belts............................ .266(d)(3)
Storage............................... .266(h)(8)
Training.............................. .266((i)
frequency........................... .266(i)(2)
content............................. .266(i)(3)
first-aid........................... .266(i)(7)
designated trainer.................. .266(i)(8)
certification....................... .266(i)(10)
meetings............................ .266(i)(11)
Vehicles.............................. .266(g)
maintenance......................... .266(g)(1)
inspection.......................... .266(g)(2)
instructions........................ .266(g)(3)
Work Areas............................ .266(d)(6)
Pumps, Gasoline: (see also Service .106(g)(3), (4)
Stations).
Pyrotechnics............................ .109(k), .119
Radial Saws............................. .213(h)
Radiation:
Ionizing.............................. .96
Nonionizing........................... .97
Radioactive Materials:
Packaged.............................. .96(h)
Storage............................... .96(j)
Rail Clamps............................. .179(b)(4), .180(i)(1)
Rail Sweeps............................. .179(e)(4)
Railroad Cars........................... .176, .178(k)(2)-(4)
Explosives............................ .109(f)
Ramps:
Egress................................ .37(j)
Rated Load Markings:
Cranes................................ .179(b)(5)
Derricks.............................. .181(c)(2)
Rated Load Test:
Crawler, Locomotive, and Truck Cranes. .180(e)(2)
Overhead and Gantry Cranes............ .179(k)(2)
Recordkeeping:
Asbestos.............................. .1001(i), (j)(6)
Bloodborne pathogens, exposure to..... .1030(f)(6), (h)
Building Inspection, assurance for .66(c)
powered platform use.
Communicable Diseases................. .142(l)(1) and (2)
Cranes:
Crawler, Locomotive and Truck....... .180(d)(2) and (6), (e)(2),
(g)(i) and (2)
Overhead and Gantry................. .179(k)(2), (m)(1) and (2)
Derricks.............................. .181(g)(1) and (3)
Forging Equipment Inspection.......... .218(a)(2)
Hazardous Waste Operations............ .120(f)(7)
Injury Reporting, Welding............. .252(c)(13)
Ionizing Radiation Exposure........... .96(m), (o)
Labor Camps........................... .142(l)(1) and (2)
Liquid Storage Tanks, Class I......... .106(g)(1)
Manlifts.............................. .68(e)(3)
Mechanical Power Presses.............. .217(e)(1)
Personal Monitoring:
Asbestos............................ .1001(i)(1)
Ionizing Radiation.................. .96(n)
Power Presses Inspection.............. .217(e)(1)
Powered Platforms Inspection.......... .66(g)
Radiation Exposure.................... .96(b)(2)(iii), (m)(1), (n),
(o)(1)
Records, Disclosure, Ionizing .96(o)(1)
Radiation.
Respirators........................... .134(e)(2), (f)(2)(iv)
Welding Operations.................... .252(c)(13), .255(e)
Records:
Asbestos.............................. .93a(i), (j)(6)
Ionizing Radiation.................... .96(m), (n)
Mechanical Power Presses.............. .217(e)(1)
Refineries, Chemical Plants and .106(i)
Distilleries.
Application........................... .106(j)
Fire Protection....................... .106(i)(5)
Pressure Vessels...................... .106(i)(3)
Process Unit Location................. .106(i)(4)
Storage Tanks......................... .106(i)(1)
Wharves............................... .106(i)(2)
Refrigerated Containers:
Anhydrous Ammonia..................... .111(d)
Refueling:
Cranes................................ .180(i)(4)
Derricks.............................. .181(j)(4)
Trucks................................ .178(p)(2)
Refuse:
Disposal.............................. .142(h)
Receptacles........................... .141(a)(4)
Relief Devices: (see Safety Relief
Devices)
Remote Gas Pumping Systems.............. .106(g)(3)(v)
Residue Disposal: (see Waste Disposal)
Resistance Welding Equipment............ .255(c)
Capacitor Discharge Welding........... .255(b)(2)
Disconnecting Means................... .306(d)(2)
Foot Switches......................... .255(b)(6)
Grounding............................. .255(b)(9)
Guarding.............................. .255(a)(4), (b)(4)
Installation.......................... .255(a)(1)
Interlocks............................ .255(b)(3)
Safety Pins........................... .255(b)(8)
Shields............................... .255(b)(5)
Spot and Seam Welding................. .255(b)
Stop Buttons.......................... .255(b)(7)
Thermal Protection.................... .255(a)(2)
Resistors:
Cranes................................ .179(g)(4)
Respirators: (see also Gas Mask .134
Canisters).
Abrasive Blasting..................... .94 (a)(1)(ii), (a)(5)
Air Supply............................ .94(a)(6), .134(d)
Asbestos.............................. .1001(d)(1), (2)
Cleaning.............................. .134(b)(5), (f)(3)
Color Codes........................... .134(g)(6)
Employer Provided..................... .134(a)(2)
Fire brigades......................... .156(f)
Identification........................ .134(g)
Inspection............................ .134(b)(7), (f)
Labeling.............................. .134(g)
Maintenance........................... .134(f)
Minimum Acceptable Program............ .134(b)
Positive-pressure..................... .156(f)(2)
Pulp, and Paper Mills................. .261(g)(2), (6), (10),
(15)(ii)
Repairs............................... .134(f)(4)
Selection............................. .134(c)
Storage............................... .134(b)(6), (f)(5)
Training.............................. .134(b)(3)
Use................................... .134(e)
Welding............................... .252(c)(4)(ii), (iii);
(5)(ii); (7)(ii); (8); (9);
(10)
Respiratory Protection: (see also .134
Respirators).
Air Quality........................... .94(a)(6), .134(d)
Air Supply............................ .94(a)(6), .134(d)
Fire brigades......................... .156(f)
[[Page 914]]
Fit testing........................... .1001(g)(4), App. C,
.1025(f)(3), App. D,
.1028(g)(5), App. E,
.1048(g)(3)(ii), App. E
Gas Mask Canister Identification...... .134(g)
Minimum Acceptable Program............ .134(b)
Permissible Practices................. .134(a)(1)
Respirators........................... .134(a)(2), (b), (c), (e)
Use................................... .134(e)(5)
Right to know........................... .1200
Rim wheels, multi-piece................. .177
Ring Test............................... .215(d)(1)
Ripsaws................................. .213(c), .214(d)
Risers, Open............................ .24(j)
Rodent Control.......................... .141(a)(5)
Labor Camps........................... .142(j)
Rolling Scaffolds: (see Work Platforms,
Mobile).
Roofing Brackets........................ .28(s)
Catch Platforms....................... .28(s)(3)
Construction.......................... .28(s)(1)
Supports.............................. .28(s)(2)
Rope Inspections:
Cranes................................ .179(m), .180(g)
Derricks.............................. .181(g)
Ropes:
Cranes................................ .179(m), .180(g)
Hoists.............................. .179(h)(2)
Inspections......................... .179(m), .180(g)
Running............................. .179(m)(1)
Derricks.............................. .181(g)
Idle Ropes.......................... .181(g)(3)
Limited Travel...................... .181(g)(2)
Nonrotating Ropes................... .181(g)(4)
Running............................. .181(g)(1)
Powered Platforms..................... .66(f)(7), (g)(5), (h)(3), (4)
Rotary Lawn Mowers...................... .243(e)(1), (4)
Rotating Work Platforms: (see also .67
Vehicle-Mounted WorkPlatforms).
Rubber Industry: (see also Mills, Rubber
and Plastics Industry)
Auxiliary Equipment................... .216(a)(3), (b)(3)
Effective Dates....................... .216(a)(1), (2); .220
Installations:
Existing............................ .216(a)(2)
New................................. .216(a)(1)
Mills and Calenders................... .216
Standards Sources..................... .221
Rubber Protective Equipment............. .221
Rung Ladders, Portable.................. .25(c)(3)
Running Ropes:
Cranes................................ .179(m)(1), .180(g)(1)
Derricks.............................. .181(g)(1)
Runway Conductors:
Cranes................................ .179(g)(6)
Runway Protection....................... .23(c)
Safety Belts: (see also Lifelines)
Powered Platforms..................... .66(f)(5(ii), (L), (M),
(iii)(B), (j), App. C
Pulp, Paper, and Paperboard Mills..... .261(g)(4), (15)
Scaffolding........................... .28(j)(4), (n)(8), (s)(3),
(t)(2),(u)(6)
Welding............................... .252(b)(4)(iv)
Safety Color Codes:
Effective Dates....................... .149
Standards Sources..................... .147
Safety Devices:
Ladders............................... .27(d)(5)
Safety Guard Design, Abrasive Wheel .215(a)(2), (b)(10)-(12)
Machinery.
Safety Instruction Signs................ .145(c)(3), (d)(6)
Safety Relief Devices:
Bulk Oxygen Systems................... .104(b)(6), (7)(ii)
Flammable Liquids..................... .107(e)(8)
Gaseous Hydrogen Systems.............. .103(b)(1)(ii)
Liquefied Hydrogen Systems............ .103(c)(1)(iv)
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .110(b)(10), (c)(7), (d)(4),
(e)(7), (g)(7), (h)(4)
Non-DOT Containers.................... .110(d)(4)
Spraying.............................. .107(e)(8)
Safety-Toe Footwear: (see Foot
Protection)
Sanding Machines........................ .213(p), .243(a)(3)
Sanitation.............................. .141
Application........................... .141(a)(1)
Change Rooms.......................... .141(e)
Effective Dates....................... .149
Food Handling......................... .141(h)
Hazardous Waste Operations............ .120(b)(13), (n)
Housekeeping.......................... .141(a)(3)
Insect Control........................ .141(a)(5)
Lunchrooms............................ .141(g)
Rodent Control........................ .141(a)(5)
Sawmills.............................. .265(h)
Standards Sources..................... .150
Toilet Facilities..................... .141(c)
Vermin Control........................ .141(a)(5)
Washing Facilities.................... .141(d)
Waste Disposal........................ .141(a)(4)
Water Supply.......................... .141(b)
Sawmills:
Bins, Bunkers, Hoppers, and Fuel .265(c)(23)
Houses.
Lighting............................ .265(c)(23)(iii)
Loading Bins........................ .265(c)(23)(ii)
Blower Systems........................ .265(c)(20)
Building Facilities................... .265(c)
Docks............................... .265(c)(4)
Emergency Exits..................... .265(c)(6)
Fire Escapes........................ .265(c)(6)
Floors.............................. .265(c)(3)
Lighting............................ .265(c)(9)
Platforms........................... .265(c)(4)
Stairways........................... .265(c)(5)
Handrails......................... .265(c)(5)(ii)
Lighting.......................... .265(c)(5)(iii)
Tanks............................... .265(c)(8)
Vats................................ .265(c)(8)
Walkways............................ .265(c)(4)
Work Areas.......................... .265(c)(2)
Burners............................... .265(c)(29)
Chippers.............................. .265(c)(21)
Conveyors............................. .265(c)(18)
Definitions........................... .265(b)
Effective Dates....................... .265(j)
Exhaust Systems....................... .265(c)(20)
Gas Piping and Appliances............. .265(c)(15)
General Requirements.................. .265(a)
Hydraulic Systems..................... .265(c)(13)
Kilns, Dry............................ .265(f)
Log Breakdown......................... .265(e)
Log Handling, Sorting, and Storage.... .265(d)
Barking Devices..................... .265(d)(4)
Log Decks........................... .265(d)(3)
Storage Areas....................... .265(d)(2)
Unloading........................... .265(d)(1)
Unloading Areas..................... .265(d)(2)
Lumber:
Loading............................. .265(c)(28)
Piling.............................. .265(c)(27)
Storage............................. .265(c)(27)
Marking Physical Hazards.............. .265(c)(11)
[[Page 915]]
Refuse Removal........................ .265(c)(20)(vi)
Ropes, Cables, Slings, and Chains..... .265(c)(24)
Stackers and Unstackers............... .265(c)(26)
Standards Sources..................... .265(a)(2), (j); .268
Traffic Control....................... .265(c)(31)
Tramways.............................. .265(c)(19)
Trestles.............................. .265(c)(19)
Vehicles.............................. .265(c)(30)
Saws:
Band.................................. .213(i)
Band Resaws........................... .213(i)
Circular.............................. .213(f); .243(a)(1)
Circular Resaws....................... .213(e)
Cracked............................... .243(a)(4)
Cylindrical Saws...................... .214(c)
Drag.................................. .213(r)
Forging Machines...................... .218(j)(2)
Heading Bolt.......................... .214(a), (c)
Inspection............................ .213(s)
Radial................................ .213(h)
Ripsaws............................... .213(c)
Swing Cutoff.......................... .213(g)
Table................................. .213(d)
Scaffolding: (see also Scaffolds)
Safety Requirements................... .28
Scaffolds: (see also Ladder Stands
Listings by Names of Scaffolds)
Boatswain's Chair..................... .28(j)
Bricklayers' Square................... .28(l)
Carpenters' Bracket................... .28(k)
Chicken Ladders....................... .28(t)
Coupler, Mobile....................... .29(d)
Crawling Boards....................... .28(t)
Decorators'........................... .28(o)
Float................................. .28(u)
Horse................................. .28(m)
Interior Hung......................... .28(p)
Ladder-Jack........................... .28(q)
Masons' Adjustable Multiple-Point .28(f)
Suspension.
Needle Beam........................... .28(n)
Outrigger............................. .28(e)
Plasterers'........................... .28(o)
Powered platforms..................... .66
Roofing Brackets...................... .28(s)
Ship.................................. .28(u)
Single-Point Adjustable Suspension.... .28(i)
Stone Setters' Adjustable Multiple .28(h)
Point Suspension.
Suspension............................ .28(f), (g), (h), (i)
Swinging.............................. .28(g)
Tube and Coupler...................... .28(c)
Tube and Coupler, Mobile.............. .29(d)
Tubular Welded Frame.................. .28(d), .29(b)
Tubular Welded Sectional Folding...... .29(c)
Two-Point Suspension.................. .28(g)
Window-Jack........................... .28(r)
Wood Pole............................. .28(b)
Scaffolds, Manual Mobile: (see also Work .29
Platforms, Mobile Scaffolds).
Scientific Diving (see Diving,
Scientific
Semigantry Cranes: (see Gantry Cranes)
Separation Walls: (see also Distances
From Hazards)
Ammonium Nitrate...................... .109(i)(5)
Service Stations:
Flammable and Combustible Liquids..... .106(g)
Dispensing Systems.................... .106(g)(3)
Drainage.............................. .106(g)(7)
Electrical Equipment.................. .106(g)(5)
Fire Protection....................... .106(g)(9)
Handling.............................. .106(g)(1)
Heating Equipment..................... .106(g)(6)
Ignition Sources...................... .106(g)(8)
Marine Stations....................... .106(g)(4)
Multi-piece rim wheels, servicing..... .177
Private Stations...................... .106(g)(2)
Storage............................... .106(g)(1)
Waste Disposal........................ .106(g)(7)
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .110(h)
Containers.......................... .110(h)(2)
Accessories....................... .110(h)(3)
Capacity.......................... .110(h)(5)
Installation...................... .110(h)(6)
Protecting Fittings............... .110(h)(7), (9)
Valves............................ .110(h)(3)
Dispensing Devices.................. .110(h)(11)
Electrical Systems.................. .110(h)(13)
Fire Protection..................... .110(h)(14)
Fittings............................ .110(h)(7)
Piping.............................. .110(h)(7)
Pumps............................... .110(h)(10)
Safety Relief Valves................ .110(h)(4)
Truck Unloading..................... .110(h)(8)
Valves.............................. .110(h)(7)
Setscrews............................... .219(h)
Sewage Disposal......................... .142(e)
Shafting Guarding:
Horizontal............................ .219(c)(2)
Inclined.............................. .219(c)(3)
Vertical.............................. .219(c)(3)
Sheaves:
Crane Hoists.......................... .179(h)(1)
Shelters, Labor Camps: (see also .142(b)
Facilities, Labor Camps).
Ship Scaffolds: (see also Float .28(u)
Scaffolds).
Side-Rolling Ladders.................... .25(c)(5)
Signs and Tags: (see also Markings)
Accident Prevention................... .145
Classification...................... .145(c)
Definitions......................... .145(b)
Use Classification.................. .145(c)
Biological Hazards.................... .145(e)(4), (f)(8)
Caution............................... .1001(g), .145(c)(2), (d)(4),
(f)(6)
Colors................................ .145(d)
Danger................................ .145(c)(1), (d)(2), (e)(3),
(f)(5)
Design................................ .145(d), (f)(4)
Effective Dates....................... .149
Egress Means.......................... .37(q)
Exits................................. .37(q)
Gas Mask Canisters.................... .134(g)
Hazardous materials, retention of DOT .1201
markings.
Powered Platforms..................... .66(f)(7)(vi)
Pulp and Paper Mills.................. .261(c)(9), (16)
Radiation Warning..................... .97(a)(3)
Respirators........................... .134(g)
Safety Instruction.................... .145(c)(3), (d)(6)
Slow-Moving Vehicles.................. .145(d)(10)
Specifications........................ .93a(g)(ii), .145
Standards Sources..................... .150
Wordings.............................. .145(e)
Single-Point Adjustable Suspension .28(i)
Scaffolds.
Single-Rung Ladders..................... .25(c)(3)(ii)
Mason's............................... .25(c)(4)(iii)
Skylight Floor Openings................. .23(a)(4)
Sleeping Facilities, temporary.......... .120(n)(5)
Sleeves, Rubber Insulating.............. .137
Slings.................................. .184
Slurries................................ .109(h)
[[Page 916]]
Small Arms Ammunition................... .109(j)
Primers............................... .109(j)(4)
Smokeless Propellants................. .109(j)(3)
Storage............................... .109(j)
Smokeless Propellants................... .109(j)(3)
Smoking:
Dual Component Coatings............... .107(m)(2)
Explosives............................ .109(e)(1)
Flammable Liquids..................... .106(d)(7)(iii)
Powder Coatings....................... .107(l)(4)(iii)
Spraying.............................. .107(g)(7), (l)(4)(iii),
(m)(2)
Snagging Machines....................... .215(b)(7)
Sources of Standards: (see Standards
Sources)
Special Industries:
Bakeries.............................. .263
Cooperage............................. .214
Forging............................... .218
Hazardous Waste Operations............ .120
Laundries............................. .264
Paper and Paperboard Mills............ .261
Plastics Industry..................... .216
Pulp Mills............................ .261
Pulpwood Logging...................... .266
Rubber Industry....................... .216
Sawmills.............................. .265
Standards Sources..................... .268
Textiles.............................. .219(a)(3), .262
Woodworking........................... .213
Spill Containment....................... .106(d)(6)(iii)
Spot and Seam Welding Machines.......... .255(b)
Spray Booths............................ .107(b)
Spray Finishing......................... .107
Air Flow.............................. .94(c)(6)
Application........................... .107(n)
Automobile Undercoatings.............. .107(k)
Clean Air............................. .94(c)(7)
Combustible Liquids Storage........... .107(e)
Curing Apparatus...................... .107(j)
Drying Apparatus...................... .107(j)
Dual Component Coatings............... .107(m)
Electrical Systems.................... .107(c)
Electrostatic Apparatus............... .107(h), (1)
Fire Protection....................... .107(f)
Flammable Liquids Storage............. .107(e)
Fusion Apparatus...................... .107(j)
Ignition Sources...................... .107(c)
Location.............................. .94(c)(2)
Maintenance........................... .106(g)
Make-Up Air........................... .94(c)(7)
Organic Peroxide Coatings............. .107(m)
Powder Coatings....................... .107(l)
Spray Booths.......................... .94(c)(3), .107(b)
Spray Rooms........................... .94(c)(4)
Undercoatings......................... .107(k)
Velocity.............................. .94(c)(6)
Ventilation........................... .94(c)(5), .107(d)
Spray Liquid Heaters.................... .107(e)(7)
Spraying Operations..................... .107(g)
Sprinkler Systems:
Egress................................ .37(m)
Sprinkler Systems, Automatic............ .159
Acceptance tests...................... .159(c)(3)
Design................................ .159(c)(1)
Drainage.............................. .159(c)(7)
Exemptions............................ .159(a)
Hose Connections...................... .159(c)(5)
Hydraulically Designed................ .159(c)(11)
Maintenance........................... .159(c)(2)
Protection of Piping.................. .159(c)(6)
Sprinkler Alarms...................... .159(c)(9)
Sprinkler Spacing..................... .159(c)(10)
Water supply.......................... .159(c)(4)
Sprinklers
Dip Tanks............................. .125(f)
Egress Means.......................... .37(m)
Sprockets............................... .219(f)
Stability Margin:
Crane Loads........................... .180(c)(1)(i)-(iv)
Stainless Steel Cutting................. .252(c)(12)
Stairs, Fixed Industrial................ .24
Handrails............................. .24(h)
Length of Stairways................... .24(g)
Railings.............................. .24(h)
Rise Angle............................ .24(e)
Strength.............................. .24(c)
Treads................................ .24(f)
Vertical Clearance.................... .24(i)
Width................................. .24(d)
Standards Sources:
Accident Prevention Signs and Tags.... .150
Acetylene............................. .115
Air Contaminants...................... .99
Air Receivers......................... .169(a)(2), .170
Anhydrous Ammonia..................... .115
Asbestos.............................. .99
Blasting Agents....................... .115
Color Codes........................... .150
Combustible Gases..................... .115
Combustible Liquids................... .115
Compressed Gas Equipment.............. .170
Compressed Gases...................... .115
Cranes................................ .189
Derricks.............................. .189
Dip Tanks............................. .115
Egress Means.......................... .39
Environmental Controls................ .99, .150
Explosives............................ .115
First Aid............................. .153
Flammable Liquids..................... .115
Guarding Machinery.................... .221
Hand-Held Equipment................... .246
Hazardous Materials................... .115
Hydrogen.............................. .115
Indoor Storage........................ .189
Ionizing Radiation.................... .99
Labor Camps........................... .150
Ladders............................... .31
Life Safety Code...................... .39
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .115
Machinery Guarding.................... .221
Manlifts.............................. .69
Materials Handling.................... .189
Medical............................... .153
Medical Services...................... .153
Nitrous Oxide......................... .115
Noise Exposure........................ .99
Nonionizing Radiation................. .99
Nonwater Disposal Systems............. .150
Occupational Health................... .99
Oxygen................................ .115
Physical Hazards Markings............. .150
Platforms, Powered.................... .69
Powered Industrial Trucks............. .189
Powered Platforms..................... .69
Powered Tools, Hand and Portable...... .246
Railings.............................. .31
Safety Color Codes.................... .150
Sanitation............................ .150
Signs and Tags........................ .150
Special Industries.................... .274
Spray Finishing....................... .115
Tanks, Cargo and Portable............. .170
Toeboards............................. .31
Toxic Substances...................... .1499
[[Page 917]]
Vehicle Mounted Work Platforms........ .69
Ventilation........................... .99
Walking-Working Surfaces.............. .31
Wall Openings......................... .31
Standpipe and Hose Systems.............. .158
Equipment............................. .158(c)
Hose................................ .158(c)(3)
Hose Outlets and Connections........ .158(c)(2)
Nozzles............................. .158(c)(4)
Reels and Equipment................. .158(c)(1)
Exceptions............................ .158(a)(2)
Protection............................ .158(b)
Scope and Application................. .158(a)(1)
Tests and Maintenance................. .158(e)
Acceptance Tests.................... .158(e)(1)
Maintenance......................... .158(e)(2)
Water Supply.......................... .158(d)
Stands, Ladder: (see also Scaffolds;
Work Platforms, Mobile)
Stationary Derricks: (see also Derricks) .181
Static Sparks........................... .219(p)(2)(ii)
Steps: (see Stairs)
Stepladders:
Portable Metal........................ .26(a)(3)
Stepladders, Portable................... .25(c)(2)
Sticking Machines....................... .213(n)
Stiffleg Derricks: (see also Derricks).. .181
Stone Setters' Adjustable Multiple-
Point:
Suspension Scaffolds.................. .28(h)
Stopping Limits, Mills and Calenders.... .216(f) (1)-(3)
Stops: (see also Safety Devices)
Manlifts.............................. .68(c)(5), (6)
Storage: (see also Materials Storage:
Storage Areas; Tank Storage: Tank
Storage, Portable)
Ammonium Nitrate...................... .109(i)
Anhydrous Ammonia..................... .111
Blasting Agents....................... .109(g)(5)
Buildings............................. .106(d)(5)
Mercantile Occupancies.............. .106(d)(5)(iv)
Office Occupancies.................. .106(d)(5)(iii)
Warehouses.......................... .106(d)(5)(v)
Clothing.............................. .107(g)(4)
Compressed Gases...................... .101(b), .167-.168
Containers, Bulk Oxygen............... .104(b)(4), (6)
Explosives............................ .109(c), (e)(2), (b)(1)
Flammable and Combustible Liquids..... .106(b), (d)
Inside Storage Rooms................ .106(d)(4)
Storage Inside Buildings............ .106(d)(5)
Storage Outside Buildings........... .106(d)(6)
Indoor Rooms.......................... .106(d)(5)
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .110
Logs.................................. .265(d)
Lumber................................ .265(c)(27)
Pulp and Paper Mills.................. .261(c), (d)
Pulpwood Logging...................... .266(e)(12)
Respirators........................... .134(f)(5)
Service Stations...................... .106(g)(1)
Storage Areas:
Aisles and Passageways................ .176(a)
Bridge Plates......................... .178(j), (k)(4)
Clearance Signs....................... .176(e)
Clearances............................ .176(a)
Dockboards............................ .178(j), (k)(4)
Drainage.............................. .176(d)
Housekeeping.......................... .176(c)
Lighting.............................. .178(h)
Noxious Gases......................... .178(i)
Railroad Cars......................... .178(k)(2)-(4)
Securing.............................. .176(b)
Trucks, Highway....................... .178(k)(1), (3); (m)
Storage Batteries: (see Battery Changing
and Charging)
Storage Bridge Cranes: (see Gantry
Cranes)
Storage, Tanks: (see Tank Storage; Tank
Storage, Portable)
Straight Ladders, Portable Metal........ .26(a)(2)
Surface Grinders........................ .215(b)(5)
Swing Frame Grinders.................... .215(b)(6)
Swing-Head Lathes....................... .213(o)
Swinging Locomotive Cranes.............. .180(i)(6)
Swinging Scaffolds: (see also Two-Point .28(g)
Suspension Scaffolds).
Switches:
Electric.............................. .305(c)
Cranes................................ .179(g)(5)
Trip and Emergency.................... .216(e)
Table Saws.............................. .213(d)
Tags: (see Signs and Tags)
Tanks: (see also Cargo Tanks--Portable
Tanks)
Hardening............................. .126(a)(1)(i),(ii)
Tempering............................. .126(a)
Tanks, Dip: (see also Dip Tanks)........ .123-.126
Tanks, Storage:
Flammable and Combustible Liquids..... .106(b)
Atmospheric Tanks................... .106(b)(1)(iii)
Construction........................ .106(b)(1)
Corrosion........................... .106(b)(1)(vi)
Diking.............................. .106(b)(2)(vii)
Ignition Sources.................... .106(b)(6)
Installation:
Above Ground, Outside............. .106(b)(2)
Inside Buildings.................. .106(b)(4)
Underground....................... .106(b)(3)
Low Pressure Tanks.................. .106(b)(1)(iv)
Materials........................... .106(b)(1)(i)
Pressure Vessels.................... .106(b)(1)(v)
Supports............................ .106(b)(5)
Testing............................. .106(b)(7)
Venting............................. .106(b)(2)(iv), (v), (vi),
(3)(iv), (4)(ii), (iii)
Tanks, Storage, Portable:
Flammable and Combustible Liquids..... .106(d)
Application......................... .106(d)(1)(i)
Capacity............................ .106(d)(2)
Design.............................. .106(d)(2)
Exceptions.......................... .106(d)(1), (2)
Fire Protection..................... .106(d)(7)
Indoor Storage...................... .106(d)(4), (5)
Outdoor Storage..................... .106(d)(6)
Storage Cabinets.................... .106(d)(3)
Temporary Floor Openings................ .23(a)(7)
Temporary Labor Camps: (see also Labor .142
Camps, Temporary).
Tempering Tanks......................... .126(a)
Tenoning Machines....................... .213(k)
Telecommunications...................... .268
Testing:
Bulk Oxygen........................... .104(b)(8)(v)
Cranes................................ .179(k), .180(e)
Derricks.............................. .18(e)
Fire Extinguishers: .157(e)
Gaseous Hydrogen Systems.............. .103(b)(1)(vi)
Liquefied Hydrogen Systems............ .103(c)(1)(vii)
Piping................................ .106(c)(7)
Powered Platforms..................... .66(g)
Radiation Alarm....................... .96(f)(3)
Sprinkler Systems..................... .159(c)(3)
Standpipe and hose systems............ .158(e)
Storage Tanks......................... .106(b)(7)
[[Page 918]]
Textiles:
Acid Carboys.......................... .262(nn)
Bleaching............................. .262(p)
Calenders............................. .262(ee)
Caustics.............................. .262(oo)
Color-Mixing Room..................... .262(kk)
Cotton Cards.......................... .262(e)
Cotton Combers........................ .262(j)
Drawing Frames........................ .262(j)
Drying Cans........................... .262(w)
Drying Tumblers....................... .262(cc)
Dyeing Jigs........................... .262(u)
Dye Vats.............................. .262(mm)
Extractors............................ .262(y)
First Aid............................. .262(pp)
Flat Work Ironers..................... .262(x)
Folders, Overhead..................... .262(jj)
Garnet Machines....................... .262(f)
Gill Boxes............................ .262(k)
Hand Boiling Machines................. .262(hh)
Kiers................................. .262(q)
Lappers............................... .262(m)
Looms................................. .262(n)
Mercerizing Ranges.................... .262(s)
Nip Guards............................ .262(dd)(1), (v), (z)
Openers............................... .262(d)
Padders............................... .262(v)
Personal Protective Equipment......... .262(qq)
Pickers............................... .262(d)
Power Transmission.................... .219(a)(3)
Printing Machines..................... .262(dd)
Rings Frames.......................... .262(j)
Roll Bench............................ .262(ii)
Rope Washers.......................... .262(bb)
Sanforizing and Palmer Machines....... .262(aa)
Shearing Machines..................... .262(o)
Slashers.............................. .262(h)
Slubbers.............................. .262(j)
Spinning Mules........................ .262(g)
Standards Sources..................... .262(a)(2), .265(j)
Staple Cullers........................ .262(ff)
Tanks, Open........................... .262(ll)
Tenter Frames......................... .262(t)
Tumblers.............................. .262(cc)
Warpers............................... .262(i)
Worsted Drawing....................... .262(l)
Toe Protection: (see Foot Protection)
Toeboards:
Cranes................................ .179(d)(3)
Definition............................ .21(a)(9)
Power Transmission Apparatus.......... .219(o)(5)
Powered Platforms..................... .66(f)(5)(i)(G)
Walking-Working Surfaces.............. .23(a)(2), (3)(ii), (e)
Toilet Facilities: (see also Toilets)... .141(c)
Construction.......................... .141(c)(2), (3)
Hazardous Waste....................... .120(n)(3)
Labor Camps........................... .142(d)
Lavatories............................ .141(d)(2)
Minimum Numbers....................... .141(c)(1), (d)(2)
Towels................................ .141(d)(3)(v)
Washing Facilities.................... .141(e)(1)(vii), (d)
Tongs, Upsetters........................ .218(h)(4)
Tooling................................. .217(d)(5)
Torch Valves, Welding................... .252(a)(4)(ii)
Towels.................................. .141(d)(3)(v)
Towers, Scaffolds: (see Ladder Stands .29
and Scaffolds; Scaffolds; Work
Platforms, Mobile).
Tractors: (see also Powered Industrial .178
Trucks).
Trailers................................ .111(d)(7)
Training Personnel...................... .96(i), .217(e)(3)
Bloodborne pathogens, exposure to..... .1030(e)(5), (g)(2)
Electrical safety-related work .332
practices.
Fire brigades......................... .156
Fire extinguishers.................... .157(g)
Hazardous chemicals................... .1200
Hazardous chemicals, highly, process .119(g)
safety management.
Hazardous waste operations............ .120(e), (p)(7), (q)(6)
Respirators........................... .134(b)(3), (e)(5)
Telecommunications.................... .268(c)
Truck Operators....................... .178(l)
Working platform operations........... .66(i)(1)
Transmission Pipeline Welding........... .252(d)(1)
Construction Standards................ .252(d)(1)(v)
Electric Shock........................ .252(d)(1)(iii)
Field Shop Operations................. .252(d)(1)(ii)
Flammable Substances.................. .252(d)(1)(vi)
Pressure Testing...................... .252(d)(1)(iv)
X-ray Inspection...................... .252(d)(1)(vii)
Transportation:
Blasting Agents....................... .109(g)(6)
Explosives............................ .109(d)
Fire Extinguishers.................. .109(d)(2)(iii)
Markings............................ .109(d)(2)(ii)
Vehicles............................ .109(d)(2), (3)
Trapdoors............................... .23(a)(5)
Traps, Air Receivers.................... .169(b)(2)
Treads, Stairs.......................... .24(f)(k)
Treadles................................ .217(b)(4)
Trestle Ladders, Portable:
Metal................................. .26(a)(4)
Wood.................................. .25(c)(3)(v)
Trimming Presses........................ .218(g)
Trips, Two-Hand......................... .217(b)(6)
Trolley Bumpers, Cranes................. .179(e)(3)
Trolley Ladders, Portable............... .25(c)(5)
Trolley Stops, Cranes................... .179(e)(1)
Truck Cranes: (see Crawler, Locomotive .180
and Truck Cranes).
Trucks.................................. .178(k), (m)
Forklift.............................. .261(c)(1)
Hand.................................. .261(m)(1)
Highway............................... .178(k), (m)
Powered Industrial.................... .178
Trucks, Powered Industrial: (see also .178
Powered IndustrialTrucks).
Tube and Coupler Scaffolds.............. .28(c)
Tube and Coupler Scaffolds, Mobile...... .29(d)
Tubing: (see Piping, Fittings, and
Tubing)
Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds.......... .28(d)
Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds, Mobile.. .29(b)
Tubular Welded Sectional Folding .29(c)
Scaffolds.
Turning Machines........................ .213(o)
Two-Point Suspension Scaffolds.......... .28(g)
Two-Section Rung Ladders................ .25(c)(3)(iii)
U-Guards................................ .219(m)(3)
Underground Storage Tanks, Flammable and .106(b)(3)
CombustibleLiquids.
Location.............................. .106(b)(3)(i)
Depth and Cover....................... .106(b)(3)(ii)
Corrosion Protection.................. .106(b)(3)(iii)
Vents................................. .106(b)(3)(iv)
Unit Physical Operations................ .106(e)(3)(v)
Upsetters............................... .218(h)
Dies Changing......................... .218(h)(5)
Lockouts.............................. .218(h)(2)
Manual Controls....................... .218(h)(3)
Supporting Foundations................ .218(h)(1)
Tongs................................. .218(h)(4)
[[Page 919]]
Valves: (see also Piping, Valves, and
Fittings)
Air Receivers......................... .169(b)(3)
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .110(b)(7)
Non-DOT Containers.................... .110(d)(3)
Vaporizers:
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .110(b)(11)
Liquid Hydrogen....................... .103(c)(1)(viii)
Liquid Oxygen......................... .104(b)(7)
Vehicles, slow-moving, signs............ .145(d)(10)
Veneer Machinery........................ .30(c)
Cutters............................... .213(q), (s)(13)
Ventilation............................. .94, .107(d)
Abrasive Blasting..................... .94(a)
Asbestos.............................. .1001(c)(1)(ii)
Bulk Oxygen Systems................... .104(b)(3)(xii)
Bulk Plants........................... .106(f)(2)(iii)
Confined Spaces....................... .255(e)(4)(ii), (f)
Dip Tanks............................. .124(b), .125(d)(2)
Effective Dates....................... .98
Electrostatic Spraying................ .107(i), .107(r)(9)
Grinding, Polishing, and Buffing...... .94(b)
Inside Storage Rooms.................. .106(d)(4)(iv)
Laundries............................. .262(c)(4)(ii), (d)(1)(ii)
Powder Coatings....................... .107(1)(2)
Processing Buildings.................. .106(h)(3)(iii)
Sawmills.............................. .265(c)(7)
Spray Finishing....................... .94(c)(5)
Spraying Operations................... .94(c), .107(d)
Exhaust Duct System................... .107(d)(3), (7)
Fan-Rotating Element................ .107(d)(4)
Independent Exhaust................. .107(d)(3)
Room Intakes........................ .107(d)(11)
Standards Sources..................... .99
Venting, Tanks:
Aboveground........................... .106(b)(2)(iv)-(vi)
Inside................................ .106(b)(4)(ii)
Portable.............................. .106(d)(2)(ii)
Underground........................... .106(b)(3)(iv)
Vents: (see Venting)
Vermin Control.......................... .141(a)(5)
Vinyl Chloride.......................... .1017
Emergency situations.................. .1017(i)
Hazardous operations.................. .1017(h)
Medical surveillance.................. .1017(k)
Methods of compliance................. .1017(f)
Monitoring............................ .1017(d)
Permissible exposure limit............ .1017(c)
Regulated area........................ .1017(e)
Respiratory protection................ .1017(g)
Signs and labels...................... .1017(l)
Training.............................. .1017(j)
Walking-Working Surfaces:
Aisles................................ .22(b)
Covers................................ .22(c)
Definitions........................... .21
Fixed Industrial Stairs............... .24
Floor Loading......................... .22(d)
Floor Openings Guard.................. .23
General Requirements.................. .22
Guardrails............................ .22(c)
Housekeeping.......................... .22(a)
Ladders:
Fixed............................... .27
Portable:
Metal............................. .26
Wood.............................. .25
Stands.............................. .29
Passageways........................... .22(b)
Scaffolding Safety.................... .28
Scaffolds (Towers).................... .29
Stairs, Fixed Industrial.............. .24
Standards Sources..................... .31
Wall Openings Guarding................ .23
Working Surfaces...................... .30
Wall Cranes: (see Gantry Cranes)
Wall Openings (Holes)................... .23(b)
Warehouses:
Ammonium Nitrate...................... .109(i)(4)
Flammable Liquids..................... .106(d)(5)(v)
Warning Devices and Signs: (see also
Signs and Tags)
Bloodborne pathogens.................. .1030(g)(1)
Cranes................................ .179(i)
Ionizing Radiation.................... .96(f)
Manlifts.............................. .68(c)(7)
Nonionizing Radiation................. .97(a)(3)
Washing Facilities...................... .141(d), .142(f), .120(n)(6)
Waste Disposal.......................... .141(a)(4)
Asbestos.............................. .1001(h)(2)
Bulk Plants........................... .106(f)(7)
Containers............................ .141(g)(3)
Dip Tanks............................. .125(e)(4)(ii),(iii)
Ionizing Radiation.................... .96(k)
Labor Camps........................... .142(e), (h)
Processing Plants..................... .106(h)(8)(iii)
Radiation............................. .96(k)
Service Stations...................... .106(g)(7)
Spraying.............................. .107(g)(3)
Water Gels.............................. .109(h)
Water Spray Extinguishing Systems, Fixed .163
Water Supply:
Hazardous waste operations............ .120(n)
Labor Camps........................... .142(c)
Nonpotable Water...................... .141(b)(2)
Potable Water......................... .141(b)(1)
Sprinkler Systems..................... .159(c)(4)
Standpipe and Hose Systems............ .158(d)
Weather Protection Manlifts............. .68(b)(15)
Welding: (see also Acetylene Generators; .251-.257
Arc Welding; Flash Welding Equipment;
Resistance Welding Equipment; Welding
Machines, Portable).
Beryllium............................. .252(c)(8)
Cadmium............................... .252(c)(1)(v), (9)
Chemicals, highly hazardous, process .119(k)
safety management; hot-work permits.
Cleaning Compounds.................... .252(c)(11)
Concentrations, Maximum Allowable..... .252(c)(1)(iii)
Containers............................ .252(a)(3)
Contamination......................... .252(c)(1)(i)
Definitions........................... .251
Exhaust Hoods......................... .252(c)(3)
Fire Protection....................... .252(a)(2)(i), (ii), (xv)
First Aid Equipment................... .252(c)(13)
Fluorine Compounds.................... .252(c)(1)(v), (5)
Labels................................ .252(c)(1)(iv)
Ladders, Fixed........................ .27(b)(6)
Lead.................................. .252(c)(7)
Liquefied Petroleum Gases............. .110(b)(4)
Mercury............................... .252(c)(10)
Piping Systems, Mechanical............ .252(d)(2)
Personnel Protection.................. .252(b)
Precautions........................... .252(a)(2), .255(e)
Prohibited Areas...................... .252(a)(2)(vi)
Screens............................... .252(c)(1)(ii)
Spot and Seam......................... .255(b)
Stainless Steels...................... .252(c)(12)
Supervisory Responsibility............ .252(a)(2)(xiv)
Transmission Pipelines................ .252(d)(1)
Ventilation........................... .252(c)(1)(ii), (c)(2)-(4)
[[Page 920]]
Zinc.................................. .252(c)(6)
Welding Machines, Portable.............. .255(c)
Clevis................................ .255(c)(3)
Counterbalance........................ .255(c)(1)
Grounding............................. .255(c)(6)
Holder, Movable....................... .255(c)(5)
Safety Chains......................... .255(c)(2)
Switch Guards......................... .255(c)(4)
Wharves:
Bulk Plants........................... .106(f)(4)
Chemical Plants....................... .106(i)(2)
Distilleries.......................... .106(i)(2)
Explosives............................ .109(f)
Marine Service Stations............... .106(g)(4)
Refineries............................ .106(i)(2)
Wheels, Multi-Piece Rim: Servicing...... .177
Winch Heads, Derricks................... .181(i)(5)
Wind Indicators......................... .179(b)(4)
Window-Jack Scaffolds................... .28(r)
Guardrails............................ .28(r)(3)
Use................................... .28(r)(1), (2)
Wood Heel Turning Machines.............. .213(o)
Wood Ladders, Portable: (see also .25
Ladders, Portable Wood).
Wood Pole Scaffolds..................... .28(b)
Wood Shapers............................ .213(m)
Wooden Guards........................... .219(o)(2)
Woodworking Machinery................... .213
Band Saws and Resaws.................. .213(i)
Boring Machines....................... .213(l)
Circular Resaws....................... .213(e)
Construction.......................... .213(a)
Controls.............................. .213(b)
Crosscut Table Saws................... .213(d)
Definitions........................... .211(a)
Drag Saws............................. .213(r)
Effective Dates....................... .220
Glue Spreaders, Roll-Type............. .213(r)
Hand-Fed Crosscut Table Saws.......... .213(d)
Hand-Fed Ripsaws...................... .213(c)
Inspection............................ .213(s)
Jointers.............................. .213(j)
Maintenance........................... .213(s)
Matching Machines..................... .213(n)
Molding Machines...................... .213(n)
Mortising Machines.................... .213(l)
Planing Machines...................... .213(n)
Profile Lathes........................ .213(o)
Radial Saws........................... .213(h)
Ripsaws............................... .213(c)
Sanding Machines...................... .213(p)
Self-Fed Circular Saws................ .213(f)
Standards Sources..................... .221
Sticking.............................. .213(n)
Swing Cutoff Saws..................... .213(g)
Swing Head Lathes..................... .213(o)
Table Saws............................ .213(d)
Tenoning Machines..................... .213(k)
Turning Machines...................... .213(o)
Veneer Cutters........................ .213(q)
Wood Heel Turning Machines............ .213(o)
Wood Shapers.......................... .213(m)
Woodworking Tools, Portable Powered..... .243(a)
Belt Sanding Machines................. .243(a)(3)
Circular Saws......................... .243(a)(1)
Cracked Saws.......................... .243(a)(4)
Dead-Man Controls..................... .243(a)(2)
Grounding............................. .243(a)(5)
Sanding Machines...................... .243(a)(3)
Work Platforms.......................... .66, .67
Elevating and Rotating................ .67
Powered Platforms..................... .66
Vehicle-Mounted....................... .67
Application......................... .67(b)(1)
Design.............................. .67(b)(2)
Work Platforms, Mobile: (see also .29(e)
Scaffolds).
Working Surfaces: (see also Walking- .30
Working Surfaces).
X-ray Inspections, Mechanical Piping .252(d)(2)(ii)
Systems.
Zinc.................................... .252(c)(6)
Confined Spaces....................... .252(c)(6)(i)
Indoors............................... .252(c)(6)(ii)
------------------------------------------------------------------------